' Wa
ex GEORGIUS AGRICOLA 2

DE RE METALLICA

TRANSLATED FROM THE FIRST LATIN EDITION OF 1556
with
Biographical Introduction, Annotations and Appendices upon
the Development of Mining Methods, Metallurgical

Processes, Geology, Mineralogy & Mining Law
from the earliest times to the 16th Century

BY

HERBERT CLARK HOOVER

A. B. Stanford University, Member American Institute of Mining Engineers,
Mining and Metallurgical Society of America, Société des Ingéniéurs
Civils de France, American Institute of Civil Engineers,

Fellow Royal Geographical Society, etc., etc.

AND

LOU HENRY HOOVER

A. B. Stanford University, Member American Association for the
Advancement of Science, The National Geographical Society,
Royal Scottish Geographical Society, etc., etc.

Published for the Translators by

| THE MINING MAGAZINE
SALISBURY HOUSE, LONDON, E.C.

1912

TRANSLATORS’ PREFACE.

HERE are three objectives in translation of works
of this character: to give a faithful, literal trans-
lation of the author’s statements ; to give these
in a manner which will interest the reader ; and to
preserve, so far as is possible, the style of the
original text. The task has been doubly difficult
in this work because, in using Latin, the author
availed himself of a medium which had ceased to

- } expand a thousand years before his subject had in
many , particulars come into being; in consequence he was in difficulties
with a large number of ideas for which there were no corresponding
words in the vocabulary at his command, and instead of adopting into.the
text his native German terms, he coined several hundred Latin expressions
to answer his needs. It is upon this rock that most former attempts at
translation have been wrecked. Except for a very small number, we
believe we have been able to discover the intended meaning of such
expressions from a study of the context, assisted by a very incomplete
glossary prepared by the author himself, and by an exhaustive investigation
into the literature of these subjects during the sixteenth and seventeenth
centuries. That discovery in this particular has been only gradual and
obtained after much labour, may be indicated by the fact that the entire
text has been re-typewritten three times ‘since the original, and some
parts more often ; and further, that the printer’s proof has been thrice revised.

We have found some English equivalent, more or less satisfactory, for
practically all such terms, except those of weights, the varieties of veins,
and a few minerals. In the matter of weights we have introduced the
original Latin, because it is impossible to give true equivalents and avoid the
fractions of reduction ; and further, as explained in the Appendix on Weights it
is impossible to say in many cases what scale the Author had in mind. The
English nomenclature to be adopted has given great difficulty, for various
reasons ; among them, that many methods and processes described have
never been practised in English-speaking mining communities, and so had no
representatives in our vocabulary, and we considered the introduction of
German terms undesirable; other methods and processes have become
obsolete and their descriptive terms with them, yet we wished to avoid
the introduction of obsolete or unusual English; but of the greatest
importance of all has been the necessity to avoid rigorously such modern
technical terms as would imply a greater scientific understanding than the
period possessed.

Agricola’s Latin, ae mostly free from medieval corruption, is some-
what tainted with German construction. Moreover some portions have not

ii. TRANSLATORS’ PREFACE.

the continuous flow of sustained thought which others display, but the fact
that the writing of the work extended over a period of twenty years, suffic-
iently explains the considerable variation in style. The technical descriptions
in the later books often take the form of House-that-Jack-built sentences
which have had to be at least partially broken up and the subject
occasionally re-introduced. Ambiguities were also sometimes found which it
was necessary to carry on into the translation. Despite these criticisms we
must, however, emphasize that Agricola was infinitely clearer in his style
than his contemporaries upon such subjects, or for that matter than his
successors in almost any language for a couple of centuries. All of the
illustrations and display letters of the original have been reproduced and
the type as closely approximates to the original as the printers have been
able to find in a modern font.

There are no footnotes in the original text, and Mr. Hoover is responsible
for them all. He has attempted in them to give not only such comment
as would tend to clarify the text, but also such information as we have
been able to discover with regard to the previous history of the subjects
mentioned. We have confined the historical notes to the time prior to
Agricola, because to have carried them down to date in the briefest manner
would have demanded very much more space than could be allowed. In the
examination of such technical and historical material one is appalled at the
flood of mis-information with regard to ancient arts and sciences which has
been let loose upon the world by the hands of non-technical translators and
commentators. At an early stage we considered that we must justify any
divergence of view from such authorities, but to limit the already alarming
volume of this work, we later felt compelled to eliminate most of such dis-
cussion. When the half-dozen most important of the ancient works bearing
upon science have been translated by those of some scientific experience,
such questions will, no doubt, be properly settled.

We need make no apologies for De Re Metallica. During 180 years
it was not superseded as the text-book and guide to miners and metallurgists,
for until Schliiter’s great work on metallurgy in 1738 it had no equal. That
it passed through some ten editions in three languages at a period when the
printing of such a volume was no ordinary undertaking, is in itself sufficient
evidence of the importance in which it was held, and is a record that no other
volume upon the same subjects has equalled since. A large proportion of the
technical data given by Agricola was either entirely new, or had not been
given previously with sufficient detail and explanation to have enabled a
worker in these arts himself to perform the operations without further guid-
ance. Practically the whole of it must have been given from personal ex-
perience and observation, for the scant library at his service can be appreci-
ated from his own Preface. Considering the part which the metallic arts
have played in human history, the paucity of their literature down to
Agricola’s time is amazing. No doubt the arts were jealously guarded by
their practitioners as a sort of stock-in-trade, and’it is also probable that
those who had knowledge were not usually of a literary turn of mind; and,

—

TRANSLATORS’ PREFACE. iii.

on the other hand, the small army of writers prior to his time were not much
interested in the description of industrial pursuits. Moreover, in those
thousands of years prior to printing, the tedious and expensive transcription of
manuscripts by hand was mostly applied to matters of more general interest,
and therefore many writings may have been lost in consequence. In fact,
such was the fate of the works of Theophrastus and Strato on these subjects.

We have prepared a short sketch of Agricola’s life and times, not only
to give some indication of his learning and character, but also of his
considerable position in the community in which he lived. As no appreciation
of Agricola’s stature among the founders of science can be gained without
consideration of the advance which his works display over those of his
predecessors, we therefore devote some attention to the state of knowledge
of these subjects at the time by giving in the Appendix a short review of the
literature then extant and a summary of Agricola’s other writings. To serve the
bibliophile we present such data as we have been able to collect it with regard
to the various editions of his works. The full titles of the works quoted in
the footnotes under simply authors’ names will be found in this Appendix.

We feel that it is scarcely doing Agricola justice to publish De Re
Metallica only. While it is of the most general interest of all of his works,
yet, from the point of view of pure science, De Natura Fosstlium and De
Ortu et Causis are works which deserve an equally important place. It is
unfortunate that Agricola’s own countrymen have not given to the world
competent translations into German, as his work has too often been judged
by the German translations, the infidelity of which appears in nearly every
paragraph.

We do not present De Re Metallica as a work of “ practical” value.
The methods and processes have long since been superseded ; yet surely such
a milestone on the road of development of one of the two most basic of human
industrial activities is more worthy of preservation than the thousands of
volumes devoted to records of human destruction. To those interested in
the history of their own profession we need make no apologies, except
for the long delay in publication. For this we put forward the necessity of
active endeavour in many directions ; as this book could be but a labour of
love, it has had to find the moments for its execution in night hours, week-
ends, and holidays, in all extending over a period of about five years. If the
work serves to strengthen the traditions of one of the most important and
least recognized of the world’s professions we shall be amply repaid.

It is our pleasure to acknowledge our obligations to Professor H. R.
Fairclough, of Stanford University, for perusal of and suggestions upon the first
chapter; and to those whom we have engaged from time to time for one service
or another, chiefly bibliographical work and collateral translation. We are
also sensibly obligated to the printers, Messrs. Frost & Sons, for their patience
and interest, and for their willingness to bend some of the canons of modern
printing, to meet the demands of the 16th Century.

Tue Rep Hovse, July 1, 1912.

HORNTON STREET, Lonpon.

ARS

OK Se
ORK
a OKO

INTRODUCTION.

BIOGRAPHY.

] EORGIUS AGRICOLA was born at Glauchau, in
} Saxony, on March 24th, 1494, and therefore entered
the world when it was still upon the threshold of the
Renaissance ; Gutenberg’s first book had been print-
ed but forty years before ; the Humanists had but
begun that stimulating criticism which awoke the
Reformation; Erasmus, of Rotterdam, who was sub-
sequently to become Agricola’s friend and patron,
was just completing his student days. The Refor-
mation itself was yet to come, but it was not long delayed, for Luther
was born the year before Agricola, and through him Agricola’s home-
land became the cradle of the great movement ; nor did Agricola escape being
drawn into the conflict. Italy, already awake with the new classical revival, was
still a busy workshop of antiquarian research, translation, study, and
publication, and through her the Greek and Latin Classics were only
now available for wide distribution. Students from the rest of Europe,
among them at a later time Agricola himself, flocked to the Italian
Universities, and on their return infected their native cities with the newly-
awakened learning. At Agricola’s birth Columbus had just returned from his
great discovery, and it was only three years later that Vasco Da Gama rounded
Cape Good Hope. Thus these two foremost explorers had only initiated
that greatest period of geographical expansion in the world’s history. A few
dates will recall how far this exploration extended during Agricola’s lifetime.
Balboa first saw the Pacific in 1513 ; Cortes entered the City of Mexico in
1520; Magellan entered the Pacific in the same year; Pizarro penetrated
into Peru in 1528; De Soto landed in Florida in 1539, and Potosi was dis-
covered in 1546. Omitting the sporadic settlement on the St. Lawrence by
Cartier in 1541, the settlement of North America did not begin for a quarter
of a century after Agricola’s death. Thus the revival of learning, with its
train of Humanism, the Reformation, its stimulation of exploration and the
re-awakening of the arts and sciences, was still in its infancy with Agricola.
We know practically nothing of Agricola’s antecedents or his youth. His
real name was Georg Bauer (“‘ peasant’), and it was probably Latinized by
his teachers, as was the custom of the time. His own brother, in receipts

a
‘.

*For the biographical information here set out we have relied principally upon the
following works :—Petrus Albinus, Meissnische Land Und Berg Chronica, Dresden, 1590 ;
Adam Daniel Richter, Umstdndliche. . . . Chronica der Stadt Chemnitz, Leipzig, 1754;
Johann Gottfried Weller, Altes Aus Allen Theilen Der Geschichte, Chemnitz, 1766;
Freidrich August Schmid, Georg Agrikola’s Bermannus, Freiberg, 1806; Georg Heinrich
Jacobi, Der Mineralog Georgius Agricola, Zwickau, 1881 ; Dr. Reinhold Hofmann, Dr. Georg
Agricola, Gotha, 1905. The last is an exhaustive biographical sketch, to which we refer
those who are interested.

vi. INTRODUCTION.

preserved in the archives of the Zwickau Town Council, calls himself “Bauer,”
and in them refers to his brother ‘‘ Agricola.” He entered the University of
Leipsic at the age of twenty, and after about three and one-half years’ attendance
there gained the degree of Baccalaureus Artium. In 1518 he became Vice-
Principal of the Municipal School at Zwickau, where he taught Greek and Latin.
In 1520 he became Principal, and among his assistants was Johannes Forster,
better known as Luther’s collaborator in the translation of the Bible. During
this time our author prepared and published a small Latin Grammar?. In
1522 he removed to Leipsic to become a lecturer in the University under his
friend, Petrus Mosellanus, at whose death in 1524 he went to Italy for the
further study of Philosophy, Medicine, and the Natural Sciences. Here he
remained for nearly three years, from 1524 to 1526. He visited the Universities
of Bologna, Venice, and probably Padua, and at these institutions received
his first inspiration to work in the sciences, for in a letter? from Leonardus
Casibrotius to Erasmus we learn that he was engaged upon a revision of Galen.
It was about this time that he made the acquaintance of Erasmus, who had
settled at Basel as Editor for Froben’s press.

In 1526 Agricola returned to Zwickau, and in 1527 he was chosen town
physician at Joachimsthal. This little city in Bohemia is located on the
eastern slope of the Erzgebirge, in the midst of the then most prolific metal-
mining district of Central Europe. Thence to Freiberg is but fifty miles,
and the same radius from that city would include most of the mining towns
so frequently mentioned in De Re Metallica—Schneeberg, Geyer, Annaberg
and Altenberg—and not far away were Marienberg, Gottesgab, and Platten.
Joachimsthal was a booming mining camp, founded but eleven years before
Agricola’s arrival, and already having several thousand inhabitants. Accord-
ing to Agricola’s own statement‘, he spent all the time not required for his
medical duties in visiting the mines and smelters, in reading up in the Greek and
Latin authors all references to mining, and in association with the most learned
among the mining folk. Among these was one Lorenz Berman, whom Agricola
afterward set up as the “learned miner ” in his dialogue Bermannus. This
book was first published by Froben at Basel in 1530, and was a sort of
catechism on mineralogy, mining terms, and mining lore. The book was
apparently first submitted to the great Erasmus, and the publication arranged
by him, a warm letter of approval by him appearing at the beginning of the
book®. In 1533 he published De Mensuris et Ponderibus, through Froben,
this being a discussion of Roman and Greek weights and measures. At
about this time he began De Re Metallica—not to be published for
twenty-five years.

*Georgit Agricolae Glaucit Libellus de Prima ac Simplict Institutione Grammatica,
printed by Melchior Lotther, Leipzig, 1520 Petrus Mosellanus refers to this work (without
giving title) in a letter to Agricola, June, 1520.

’Briefe an Desiderius Erasmus von Rotterdam. Published by Joseph Férstemann
and Otto Giinther. xxv. Betheft zum Zentralblatt fiir Bibliothekswesen, Leipzig, 1904.
— 4De Veteribus et Novis Metallis. Preface.

5A summary of this and of Agricola’s other works is given in the Appendix A.

INTRODUCTION. vii.

Agricola did not confine his interest entirely to medicine and mining,
for during this period he composed a pamphlet upon the Turks, urging their
extermination by the European powers. This work was no doubt inspired by
the Turkish siege of Vienna in 1529. It appeared first in German in 1531,
and in Latin—in which it was originally written—in 1538, and passed through
many subsequent editions.

At this time, too, he became interested in the God’s Gift mine at
Albertham, which was discovered in 1530. Writing in 1545, he says®:
“We, as a shareholder, through the goodness of God, have enjoyed the
“proceeds of this God’s Gift since the very time when the mine began first
“to bestow such riches.”

Agricola seems to have resigned his position at Joachimsthal in about
1530, and to have devoted the next two or three years to travel and study
among the mines. About 1533 he became city physician of Chemnitz, in
Saxony, and here he resided until his death in 1555. There is but little
record of his activities during the first eight or nine years of his residence in
this city. He must have been engaged upon the study of his subjects and
the preparation of his books, for they came on with great rapidity soon after.
He was frequently consulted on matters of mining engineering, as, for instance,
we learn, from a letter written by a certain Johannes Hordeborch’, that
Duke Henry of Brunswick applied to him with regard to the method for
working mines in the Upper Harz.

In 1543 he married Anna, widow of Matthias Meyner, a petty tithe
official ; there is some reason to believe from a letter published by Schmid,*
that Anna was his second wife, and that he was married the first time at
Joachimsthal. He seems to have had several children, for he commends his
young children to the care of the Town Council during his absence at the
war in 1547. In addition to these, we know that a son, Theodor, was born
in 1550; a daughter, Anna, in 1552; another daughter, Irene, was buried at
Chemnitz in 1555; and in 1580 his widow and three children—Anna,
Valerius, and Lucretia—were still living.

In 1544 began the publication of the series of books to which Agricola
owes his position. The first volume comprised five works and was finally
issued in 1546 ; it was subsequently considerably revised, and re-issued in 1558,
These works were: De Ortu et Causis Subterraneorum, in five “ books,” the
first work on physical geology ; De Natura Eorum quae Effluunt ex Terra, in
four ‘‘ books,’”’ on subterranean waters and gases; De Natura Fosstlium, in
ten “books,” the first systematic mineralogy ; De Veteribus et Novis Metallis,
in two “ books,’’ devoted largely to the history of metals and topographical
mineralogy ; a new edition of Bermannus was included; and finally Rerum
Metallicarum Interpretatio, a glossary of Latin and German mineralogical
and metallurgical terms. Another work, De Animantibus Subterraneis,
usually published with De Re Metallica, is dated 1548 in the preface. It

*De Veteribus et Novis Metallis, Book I.
“Op Git in vs A Schmid’s Georg Agrikola’s Bermannus, p 14, Freiberg, 1806.
it., p. 8.

viii. INTRODUCTION.

is devoted to animals which live underground, at least part of the time, but
is not a very effective basis of either geologic or zoologic classi-
fication. Despite many public activities, Agricola apparently completed
De Re Metallica in 1550, but did not send it to the press until 1553; nor
did it appear until a year after his death in 1555. But we give further details
on the preparation of this work on p. xv. During this period he found time
to prepare a small medical work, De Peste, and certain historical studies,
details of which appear in the Appendix. There are other works by Agricola re-
ferred to by sixteenth century writers, but so far we have not been able to find
them although they may exist. Such data as we have, is given in the appendix.

As a young man, Agricola seems to have had some tendencies toward
liberalism in religious matters, for while at Zwickau he composed some anti-
Popish Epigrams ; but after his return to Leipsic he apparently never wavered,
and steadily refused to accept the Lutheran Reformation. To many even
liberal scholars of the day, Luther’s doctrines appeared wild and demagogic.
Luther was not a scholarly man ; his addresses were to the masses ; his Latin
was execrable. Nor did the bitter dissensions over hair-splitting theology in
the Lutheran Church after Luther’s death tend to increase respect for the
movement among the learned. Agricola was a scholar of wide attainments,
a deep-thinking, religious man, and he remained to the end a staunch Catholic,
despite the general change of sentiment among his countrymen. His leanings
were toward such men as his friend the humanist, Erasmus. That he had
the courage of his convictions is shown in the dedication of De Natura Eorum,
where he addresses to his friend, Duke Maurice, the pious advice that the
dissensions of the Germans should be composed, and that the Dukeshould return
to the bosom of the Church those who had been torn from her, and adds: “‘ Yet
“T do not wish to become confused by these turbulent waters, and be led to
“offend anyone. It is more advisable to check my utterances.’’ As he
became older he may have become less tolerant in religious matters, for he
did not seem to show as much patience in the discussion of ecclesiastical topics
as he must have possessed earlier, yet he maintained to the end the respect
and friendship of such great Protestants as Melanchthon, Camerarius, Fabricius,
and many others.

In 1546, when he was at the age of 52, began Agricola’s activity in
public life, for in that year he was elected a Burgher of Chemnitz ; and in the .
same year Duke Maurice appointed him Burgomaster—an office which
he held for four terms. Before one can gain an insight into his political
services, and incidentally into the character of the man, it is necessary to
understand the politics of the time and his part therein, and to bear in mind
always that he was a staunch Catholic under a Protestant Sovereign in a
State seething with militant Protestantism.

Saxony had been divided in 1485 between the Princes Ernest and Albert,
the former taking the Electoral dignity and the major portion of the Princi-
pality. Albert the Brave, the younger brother and Duke of Saxony, obtained
the subordinate portion, embracing Meissen, but subject to the Elector.
The Elector Ernest was succeeded in 1486 by Frederick the Wise, and under

INTRODUCTION. ix.

his support Luther made Saxony the cradle of the Reformation. This
Elector was succeeded in 1525 by his brother John, who was in turn succeeded
by his son John Frederick in 1532. Of more immediate interest to this subject
is the Albertian line of Saxon Dukes who ruled Meissen, for in that Princi-
pality Agricola was born and lived, and his political fortunes were associated
with this branch of the Saxon House. Albert was succeeded in 1505 by his
son George, “ The Bearded,” and he in turn by his brother Henry, the last
of the Catholics, in 1539, who ruled until 1541. Henry was succeeded in 1541
by his Protestant son Maurice, who was the Patron of Agricola.

At about this time Saxony was drawn into the storms which rose from
the long-standing rivalry between Francis I., King of France, and Charles V.
of Spain. These two potentates came to the throne in the same year (1515),
and both were candidates for Emperor of that loose Confederation known
as the Holy Roman Empire. Charles was elected, and intermittent wars
between these two Princes arose—first in one part of Europe, and then in
another. Francis finally formed an alliance with the Schmalkalden League
of German Protestant Princes, and with the Sultan of Turkey, against Charles.
In 1546 Maurice of Meissen, although a Protestant, saw his best interest in
a secret league with Charles against the other Protestant Princes, and pro-
ceeded (the Schmalkalden War) to invade the domains of his superior and
cousin, the Elector Frederick. The Emperor Charles proved successful in
this war, and Maurice was rewarded, at the Capitulation of Wittenberg in 1547,
by being made Elector of Saxony in the place of his cousin. Later on, the
Elector Maurice found the association with Catholic Charles unpalatable, and
joined in leading the other Protestant princes in war upon him, and on the
defeat of the Catholic party and the peace of Passau, Maurice became
acknowledged as the champion of German national and religious freedom.
He was succeeded by his brother Augustus in 1553.

Agricola was much favoured by the Saxon Electors, Maurice and
Augustus. He dedicates most of his works to them, and shows much gratitude
for many favours conferred upon him. Duke Maurice presented to him a
house and plot in Chemnitz, and in a letter dated June 14th, 1543,° in con-
nection therewith, says: “ . . . . that he may enjoy his life-long a
“freehold house unburdened by all burgher rights and other municipal ser-
“vice, to be used by him and inhabited as a free dwelling, and that he may
“also, for the necessities of his household and of his wife and servants, brew
“his own beer free, and that he may likewise purvey for himself and his
“household foreign beer and also wine for use, and yet he shall not sell any
“such beer. . . . We have taken the said Doctor under our especial
“ protection and care for our life-long, and he shall not be summoned before
“any Court of Justice, but only before us and our Councillor. . . .”

Agricola was made Burgomaster of Chemnitz in 1546. A letter!® from
Fabricius to Meurer, dated May roth, 1546, says that Agricola had been

a ies 38, Chemnitz ee
umgarten-Crusius. Georgii Fabricit Chemnicensis Epistolae ad W. Meurerum
et Alios Aequales, Leipzig, 1845, p. 26.

x. INTRODUCTION.

made Burgomaster by the command of the Prince. This would be Maurice,
and it is all the more a tribute to the high respect with which Agricola was
held, for, as said before, he was a consistent Catholic, and Maurice a Protestant
Prince. In this same year the Schmalkalden War broke out, and Agricola
was called to personal attendance upon the Duke Maurice in a diplomatic
and advisory capacity. In 1546 also he was a member of the Diet of Freiberg,
and was summoned to Council in Dresden. The next year he continued, by
the Duke’s command, Burgomaster at Chemnitz, although he seems to have
been away upon Ducal matters most of the time. The Duke addresses!
the Chemnitz Council in March, 1547: ‘‘ We hereby make known to you
“that we are in urgent need of your Burgomaster, Dr. Georgius Agricola,
“with us. It is, therefore, our will that you should yield him up and forward
“him that he should with the utmost haste set forth to us here near Freiberg.”’
He was sent on various missions from the Duke to the Emperor Charles, to
King Ferdinand of Austria, and to other Princes in matters connected with the
war—the fact that he was a Catholic probably entering into his appointment
to such missions. Chemnitz was occupied by the troops of first one side, then
the other, despite the great efforts of Agricola to have his own town specially
defended. In April, 1547, the war came to an end in the Battle of Miihlberg,
but Agricola was apparently not relieved of his Burgomastership until the
succeeding year, for he wrote his friend Wolfgang Meurer, in April, 1548,
that he “‘ was now relieved.”” His public duties did not end, however, for he
attended the Diet of Leipzig in 1547 and in 1549, and was at the Diet
at Torgau in 1550. In 1551 he was again installed as Burgomaster ; and in
1553, for the fourth time, he became head of the Municipality, and during
this year had again to attend the Diets at Leipzig and Dresden, representing
his city. He apparently now had a short relief from public duties, for it is
not until 1555, shortly before his death, that we find him again attending a
Diet at Torgau.

Agricola died on November 2tst, 1555. A letter! from his life-long friend,
Fabricius, to Melanchthon, announcing this event, states: ‘‘ We lost, on
“November 21st, that distinguished ornament of our Fatherland, Georgius
“ Agricola, a man of eminent intellect, of culture and of judgment. He
“ attained the age of 62. He who since the days of childhood had enjoyed
“robust health was carried off by a four-days’ fever. He had previously
“ suffered from no disease except inflammation of the eyes, which he brought
“upon himself by untiring study and insatiable reading. . . I know that
* you loved the soul of this man, although in many of his opinions, more
“ especially in religious and spiritual welfare, he differed in many points from
“our own. For he despised our Churches, and would not be with us in the
“Communion of the Blood of Christ. Therefore, after his death, at the
“command of the Prince, which was given to the Church inspectors and
“ carried out by Tettelbach as a loyal servant, burial was refused him, and not

“Hofmann, Op. cit., p. 99.
Weber, Virorum Clarorum Saeculi xvt. et Xvtt. Epistolae Selectae, Leipzig, 1894, p. 8.

1%Baumgarten-Crusius. Op. cit., p. 139.

1
q
4

oe ee, a eee =

INTRODUCTION. xi.

‘‘ until the fourth day was he borne away to Zeitz and interred in the Cathedral.
« | |. . [have always admired the genius of this man, so distinguished
‘in our sciences and in the whole realm of Philosophy—yet I wonder at his
‘religious views, which were compatible with reason, it is true, and were
“dazzling, but were by no means compatible with truth. . . . He
“ would not tolerate with patience that anyone should discuss ecclesiastical
“ matters with him.” This action of the authorities in denying burial to one
of their most honored citizens, who had been ever assiduous in furthering
the welfare of the community, seems strangely out of joint. Further, the
Elector Augustus, although a Protestant Prince, was Agricola’s warm friend,
as evidenced by his letter of but a few months before (see p. xv). However,
Catholics were then few in number at Chemnitz, and the feeling ran high at the
time, so possibly the Prince was afraid of public disturbances. Hofmann"
explains this occurrence in the following words :—‘‘ The feelings of Chemnitz
“ citizens, who were almost exclusively Protestant, must certainly be taken
“into account. They may have raised objections to the solemn interment of
“a Catholic in the Protestant Cathedral Church of St. Jacob, which had,
“perhaps, been demanded by his relatives, and to which, according to the
“custom of the time, he would have been entitled as Burgomaster.. The

“refusal to sanction the interment aroused, more especially in the Catholic
“‘ world, a painful sensation.”

A brass memorial plate hung in the Cathedral at Zeitz had already
disappeared in 1686, nor have the cities of his birth or residence ever shown
any appreciation of this man, whose work more deserves their gratitude
than does that of the multitude of soldiers whose monuments decorate every
village and city square. It is true that in 1822 a marble tablet was
placed behind the altar in the Church of St. Jacob in Chemnitz, but even
this was removed to the Historical Museum later on.

He left a modest estate, which was the subject of considerable litigation by
his descendants, due to the mismanagement of the guardian. Hofmann has
succeeded in tracing the descendants for two generations, down to 1609, but
the line is finally lost among the multitude of other Agricolas.

To deduce Georgius Agricola’s character we need not search beyond the
discovery of his steadfast adherence to the religion of his fathers amid the
bitter storm of Protestantism around him, and need but to remember at the
same time that for twenty-five years he was entrusted with elective positions
of an increasingly important character in this same community. No man
could have thus held the respect of his countrymen unless he were devoid of
bigotry and possessed of the highest sense of integrity, justice, humanity,
and patriotism.

M4Hofmann, Op. cit., p. 123.

xii.
AGRICOLA’S INTELLECTUAL ATTAINMENTS AND

POSITION IN SCIENCE.

Agricola’s education was the most thorough that his times afforded in
the classics, philosophy, medicine, and sciences generally. Further, his writings
disclose a most exhaustive knowledge not only of an extraordinary range of
classical literature, but also of obscure manuscripts buried in the public libraries
of Europe. That his general learning was held to be of a high order is amply
evidenced from the correspondence of the other scholars of his time—Erasmus,
Melanchthon, Meurer, Fabricius, and others. ,

Our more immediate concern, however, is with theadvances which were due
to him in the sciences of Geology, Mineralogy, and Mining Engineering. No
appreciation of these attainments can be conveyed to the reader unless he
has some understanding of the dearth of knowledge in these sciences prior
to Agricola’s time. We have in Appendix B given a brief review of the
literature extant at this period on these subjects. Furthermore, no appreciation
of Agricola’s contribution to science can be gained without a study of De
Ortu et Causts and De Natura Fosstlium, for while De Re Metallica is of much
more general interest, it contains but incidental reference to Geology and
Mineralogy. Apart from the book of Genesis, the only attempts at funda-
mental explanation of natural phenomena were those of the Greek Philosophers
and the Alchemists. Orthodox beliefs Agricola scarcely mentions ; with the
Alchemists he had no patience. There can be no doubt, however, that his
views are greatly coloured by his deep classical learning. He was in fine toa
certain distance a follower of Aristotle, Theophrastus, Strato, and other leaders
of the Peripatetic school. For that matter, except for the muddy current
which the alchemists had introduced into this already troubled stream,
the whole thought of the learned world still flowed from the Greeks. Had he
not, however, radically departed from the teachings of the Peripatetic school,
his work would have been no contribution to the development of science.
Certain of their teachings he repudiated with great vigour, and his
laboured and detailed arguments in their refutation form the first battle in
science over the results of observation versus inductive speculation. To use
his own words: “ Those things which we see with our eyes and understand
“by means of our senses are more clearly to be demonstrated than if learned
“by means of reasoning.”!5 The bigoted scholasticism of his times necessi-
tated as much care and detail in refutation of such deep-rooted beliefs, as would
be demanded to-day by an attempt at a refutation of the theory of evolution,
and in consequence his works are often but dry reading to any but those
interested in the development of fundamental scientific theory.

In giving an appreciation of Agricola’s views here and throughout the
footnotes, we do not wish to convey to the reader that he was in all things
free from error and from the spirit of his times, or that his theories, constructed
long before the atomic theory, are of the clear-cut order which that
basic hypothesis has rendered possible to later scientific speculation in these
branches. His statements are sometimes much confused, but we reiterate that

15De Ortu et Causis, Book III.

INTRODUCTION, xiii.

their clarity is as crystal to mud in comparison with those of his predecessors—
and of most of his successors for over two hundred years. As an indication of .
his grasp of some of the wider aspects of geological phenomena we reproduce,
in Appendix A, a passage from De Ortu et Causis, which we believe to be the
first adequate declaration of the part played by erosion in mountain sculpture.
But of all of Agricola’s theoretical views those are of the greatest interest which
relate to the origin of ore deposits, for in these matters he had the greatest
opportunities of observation and the most experience. We have on page 108
reproduced and discussed his theory at considerable length, but we may repeat
here, that in his propositions as to the circulation of ground waters, that ore
channels are a subsequent creation to the contained rocks, and that they
were filled by deposition from circulating solutions, he enunciated the founda-
tions of our modern theory, and in so doing took a step in advance greater than
that of any single subsequent authority. In his contention that ore channels
were created by erosion of subterranean waters he was wrong, except for
special cases, and it was not until two centuries later that a further step in
advance was taken by the recognition by Van Oppel of the part played by
fissuring in these phenomena. Nor was it until about the same time that the
filling of ore channels in the main by deposition from solutions was generally
accepted. While Werner, two hundred and fifty years after Agricola, is
generally revered as the inspirer of the modern theory by those whose reading
has taken them no farther back, we have no hesitation in asserting that of the
propositions of each author, Agricola’s were very much more nearly in
accord with modern views. Moreover, the main result of the new ideas
brought forward by Werner was to stop the march of progress for half a
century, instead of speeding it forward as did those of Agricola.

In mineralogy Agricola made the first attempt at systematic treatment
of the subject. His system could not be otherwise than wrongly based,
as he could scarcely see forward two or three centuries to the atomic theory
and our vast fund of chemical knowledge. However, based as it is upon
such properties as solubility and homogeneity, and upon external character-
istics such as colour, hardness, &c., it makes a most creditable advance
upon Theophrastus, Dioscorides, and Albertus Magnus—his only predecessors.
He is the first to assert that bismuth and antimony are true primary metals ;
and to some sixty actual mineral species described previous to his time he
added some twenty more, and laments that there are scores unnamed.

As to Agricola’s contribution to the sciences of mining and metal-
lurgy, De Re Metallica speaks for itself. While he describes, for the first
time, scores of methods and processes, no one would contend that they
were discoveries or inventions of hisown. They represent the accumulation
of generations of experience and knowledge ; but by him they were, for the
first time, to receive detailed and intelligent exposition. Until Schliiter’s
work nearly two centuries later, it was not excelled. There is no measure by
which we may gauge the value of such a work to the men who followed in
this profession during centuries, nor the benefits enjoyed by humanity
through them.

2

xiv. INTRODUCTION.

That Agricola occupied a very considerable place in the great awakening of
learning will be disputed by none except by those who place the development
of science in rank far below religion, politics, literature, and art. Of wider
importance than the details of his achievements in the mere confines of the
particular science to which he applied himself, is the fact that he was the first
to found any of the natural sciences upon research and observation, as opposed
to previous fruitless speculation. The wider interest of the members of the
medical profession in the development of their science than that of geologists
in theirs, has led to the aggrandizement of Paracelsus, a contem-
porary of Agricola, as the first in deductive science. Yet no comparative
study of the unparalleled egotistical ravings of this half-genius, half-alchemist,
with the modest sober logic and real research and observation of Agricola,
can leave a moment’s doubt as to the incomparably greater position which
should be attributed to the latter as the pioneer in building the foundation
of science by deduction from observed phenomena. Science is the base upon
which is reared the civilization of to-day, and while we give daily credit to all
those who toil in the superstructure, let none forget those men who laid its
first foundation stones. One of the greatest of these was Georgius Agricola.

ie
MM
SRR
ee. ROT
son RRS a

DE RE METALLICA.

Agricola seems to have been engaged in the preparation of De Re
Metallica for a period of over twenty years, for we first hear of the book in a
letter from Petrus Plateanus, a schoolmaster at Joachimsthal, to the great
humanist, Erasmus,’* in September, 1529. He says: ‘ The scientific world
“ will be still more indebted to Agricola when he brings to light the books
“ De Re Metallica and other matters which he has on hand.”’ In the dedication
of De Mensuris et Ponderibus (in 1533) Agricola states that he means to
publish twelve books De Re Metallica, if he lives. That the appearance of this
work was eagerly anticipated is evidenced by a letter from George Fabricius
to Valentine Hertel: 17 ‘ With great excitement the books De Re Metallica
“are being, awaited. If he treats the material at hand with his usual zeal,
“he will win for himself glory such as no one in any of the fields of literature
“has attained for the last thousand years.” According to the dedication of
De Veteribus et Novis Metallis, Agricola in 1546 already looked forward to
its early publication. The work was apparently finished in 1550, for the
dedication to the Dukes Maurice and August of Saxony is dated in December of
that year. The eulogistic poem by his friend, George Fabricius, is dated in
1551.

ie The publication was apparently long delayed by the preparation of the

woodcuts ; and, according to Mathesius,® many sketches for them were
prepared by Basilius Wefring. In the preface of De Re Metallica, Agricola
does not mention who prepared the sketches, but does say: “I have hired
“illustrators to delineate their forms, lest descriptions which are conveyed
“by words should either not be understood by men of our own times, or
“should cause difficulty to posterity.” In 1553 the completed book was
sent to Froben for publication, for a letter 1* from Fabricius to Meurer in
March, 1553, announces its dispatch to the printer. An interesting letter®®
from the Elector Augustus to Agricola, dated January 18, 1555, reads:
“ Most learned, dear and faithful subject, whereas you have sent to the Press
“a Latin book of which the title is said to be De Rebus Metallicis, which has
“been praised to us and we should like to know the contents, it is our gracious
“command that you should get the book translated when you have the
“ opportunity into German, and not let it be copied more than once or be
“ printed, but keep it by you and send us a copy. If you should need a
“writer for this purpose, we will provide one. Thus you will fulfil our
““ gracious behest.’” The German translation was prepared by Philip Bechius,
a Basel University Professor of Medicine and Philosophy. It is a wretched
work, by one who knew nothing of the science, and who more especially had no
appreciation of the peculiar Latin terms coined by Agricola, most of which

‘Briefe an Desiderius Erasmus von Rotterdam. Published by J Férstemann
& Otto Giinther. xxvut. Betheft zum Zentralblatt fir Bibliothekswesen, Leipzig, 1904, p. 125.

1Petrus Albinus, Meissnische Land und Berg Chronica, Dresden, 1590, p. 353-

18This statement is contained under “1556” in a sort of chronicle bound up with
Mathesius’s Sarepia, Nuremberg, 1562.

‘*Baumgarten-Crusius, p. 85, letter No. 93.

*°Principal State Archives, Dresden, Cop. 259, folio roz.

xvi. INTRODUCTION.

he rendered literally. It is a sad commentary on his countrymen that no
correct German translation exists. The Italian translation is by Michelangelo
Florio, and is by him dedicated to Elizabeth, Queen of England. The title
page of the first edition is reproduced later on, and the full titles of other
editions are given in the Appendix, together with the author’s other works.
The following are the short titles of the various editions of De Re Metallica,
together with the name and place of the publisher :—

LaTIN EDITIONS.

De Re Metallica, Froben .. .. Basel Folio 1556.
jo filys i ‘is si a Re cao 1561.
berths s, Ludwig Kénig Ca Pad 1621.
Tar a Emanuel K6nig PEM 1657.

In addition to these, Leupold,*! Schmid,®* and others mention an octavo
edition, without illustrations, Schweinfurt, 1607. We have not been ableto
find a copy of this edition, and are not certain of its existence. The same
catalogues also mention an octavo edition of De Re Metallica, Wittenberg,
1612 or 1614, with notes by Joanne Sigfrido; but we believe this to be a
confusion with Agricola’s subsidiary works, which were published at this
time and place, with such notes.

GERMAN EDITIONS.

Vom Bergkwerck, Froben, Folio, 1557.
Bergwerck Buch, Sigmundi Feyrabendt, Frankfort-on-Main, folio, 1580.
i , Ludwig Kénig, Basel, folio, 162r.

There are other editions than these, mentioned by bibliographers, but we
have been unable to confirm them in any library. The most reliable
of such bibliographies, that of John Ferguson,” gives in addition to the
above ; Bergwerkbuch, Basel, 1657, folio, and Schweinfurt, 1687, octavo.

ITALIAN EDITION.
L’ Arte de Metalli, Froben, Basel, folio, 1563.
OTHER LANGUAGES.

So far as we know, De Re Metallica was never actually published in other
than Latin, German, and Italian. However, a portion of the accounts of
the firm of Froben were published in 18814, and therein is an entry under
March, 1560, of a sum to one Leodigaris Grymaldo for some other work, and
also for ‘correction of Agricola’s De Re Metallica in French.” This may ~
of course, be an error for the Italian edition, which appeared a little later.
There is also mention®® that a manuscript of De Re Metallica in Spanish was

*1Jacob Leupold, Prodromus Bibliothecae Metallicae, 1732, p. It.

#F. A. Schmid, Georg Agrikola’s Bermannus, Freiberg, 1806, p. 34.

* Bibliotheca Chemica, Glasgow, 1906, p. 10.

**Rechnungsbuch der Froben und Episcopius Buchdrucker und Buchhéndler zu Basel,
1557-1564, published by R. Wackernagle, Basel, 1881, p. 20.

*5Colecion del Sr Monoz t. 93, fol. 255 En la Acad. de la Hist, Madrid.

INTRODUCTION. xvii.

seen in the library of the town of Bejar. An interesting note appears in
the glossary given by Sir John Pettus in his translation of Lazarus Erckern’s
work on assaying. He says** ‘‘ but I cannot enlarge my observations upon
any more words, because the printer calls for what I did write of a metallick
dictionary, after I first proposed the printing of Erckern, but intending
within the compass of a year to publish Georgius Agricola, De Re Metallica
(being fully translated) in English, and also to add a dictionary to it, I
shall reserve my remaining essays (if what I have done hitherto be approved)
till then, and so I proceed in the dictionary.” The translation was never
published and extensive inquiry in various libraries and among the family
of Pettus has failed to yield any trace of the manuscript.

*Sir John Pettus, Fleta Minor, The Laws of Art and Nature, &c., London, 1636, p. 121.

XY
CRS
i OM ae
KKK

$69 ¢ Go —
IO
Vc

XO
S
9, XY

SOS

OY
( KS
SOR

GEORGI AGRICOLAE

ETALLICALIBRIXII> QVIzs
go po ifhgor Malate Machin ,ac omnia denis ad Metallis
cam fpectantia, non modo luculentiffime defcribuntur , fed & per
effigies, fuis locis infertas , adiunctis Latinis, dearer asi
lationibus ita ob oculds ponuntur, ut clarius tradi non poffint,
2.8.4.0: &

DE ANIMANTIBVS Sb oltehabees pectrigeet 00 Ge
cognitus:cum Indicibus diuerfis, quicquid in opere tractatum
igre pulchré demonftrantibus,

BASILEAE M> D> LVI>

Cum Priuilegio Imperatorisinannos v.
& Galliarum Regis ad Sexennium,

GEORGIVS FABRICIVS IN LI«

bros Metallicos GEORGIt AGRICOLABphie
lofophi preftantiflimi,

AD LECTORE MM,

S iuuat ignita cognofcere fronte Chimzram,
Semicanem nympham,femibouemg uirum:
Sicentum copltinch Tiessiera ttn ferentem
Sublimem manibus tela cruenta Gygen:
Siiuuat Ztneum penetrare Cyclopis in antrum,
Atque alios, Vates quos peperere,metus:
Nunc placeat mecum do¢tos euoluere libros,
Ingenium AGRICOLAE quos deditacre tibi.
Norhic uana tenet fufpenfam fabula mentem:
Sed precium,utilitas multa,legentis erit.
Quidquid terra finu,gremiog recondiditimo,
Omne tibi multis eruit ante libris:
Siue fluens fuperas ultro nitatur in oras,
Inueniat facilem feu magis arte uiam.
Perpetui proprys manant de fontibus amnes,
ft prauis Albunezx {ponte Mephitis odor.
Lethales funt fponte fcrobes Diczarchidis orx,
Et micat é media conditus ignis humo.
Plana Narifcorum cum tellus arfitin agro,
Ter curuanondum falce refecta Ceres,
Nec dedit hoc damnum paftor,riec luppiterigne:
Vulcani per feruperat ira folum.
Terrifico aura foras erumpens,incita motu,
Szpe facit montes,anteé ubi plana uia eft,
Hecabftrufa oe ed incognita fundo,
Cognita natura feepefuere duce,
Artehominum,inlucem ueniunt quog multa, manug
Terrz multiplices effodiuntur opes.
Lydia ficnitrum profert,Istandia fulfur,
* Acmods Tyrrhenus mittit alumen ager.
Succina,qué trifido fubit equor Viftula cornu,
Pifcantur Codano corpora feruafinu.
Quid memorem regum preciofa infignia gemmas,
Marmorat ssiottt ftructa fub aftra iugis ¢
Nil lapides,nil {axa moror:funt pulchra metalla,
Creefetuis opibus clara, Mydag tuis,
Quzy acer Macedo RauCrencike fodit,
Nominepermutans nomina prifca fuo.
Atnuncnonullis cedit GER MANIA terris,

a 4. Terra

Xxii.

Terra ferax hominum, terrag diues opum.
Hic auriin uenis locupletibus aurarefulget,
Nonalio meffis carior ullaloco,
Auricomum extulerit felix Campania ramum,
Nec fructu nobis deficiente cadit,
Eruit argenti folidas hoc tempore maflas
Foffor,de proprijsarmag miles agris,
Ignotum Graijs eftHefperijsqs metallum,
Quod Bifemutum lingua paterna uocat,
Candidius nigro,fed plumbo nigriusalbo,
Noftra quog hoc uena dinite fundit humus,
Funditur in tormenta,corus cum imitantia fulmen,
Zis,ing hoftiles ferrea mafla domos.
Scribuntur plumbo libri:quis credidit ante
Quam mirandam artem Teutonis ora dedit?
Nectamen hoc alijs,aut illa petuntur ab oris,
Eruta Germano cunéta metallafolo.
Sed quid. ego hecrepeto,monumentis tradita claris
AGRIC OLAE, que nunc docta per ora uolant?
Hic cauffis ortus,& formas uiribus addit,
Et querenda quibus fint melioralocis.
Quz fi mente prius legifti candidus equa:
Da reliquis qu oF nunctempora pauca libris,
Viilitas fequitur cultorem:crede,uoluptas
Noniucunda minor,rara legentis,erit.
ludiciog prius ne quis malé damnetiniquo,
Quz funtaudcoris munera mira Dei:
Eripit ipfe fuis primunrtela hoftibus,ings
Mirtentis torquet {picula rapta caput.
Fertur equo latro,uehitur pirata triremi:
Ergo necandus equus,nec fabricanda ratis¢
Vifceribus terre lateant abftrufa metalla,
Viti opibus nefcit qudd mala turba fuis?
Quifquis es,aut doctis pareto monentibus,aut te
Inter habere bonos ne fateare locum.
Senonin prerupta metallicus abijcit audax,
» Vequondam immiffo Curtius acer equo:
Sed prius edifcit,qua funtnofcenda perito,
Quod g facit,multa doctus ab arte facit.
Vc gubernator feruat cum fidere uentos:
’ Sicminime dubjjs utitur ille notis.
lafides nauim,currusregit arte Metifcus:
Foffor opus peragit nec minus arte fuum,
Indagat uenz {pacium,numerumcg,moduma,
Siue obliqua fuum,rectauie tendat iter.

Paftor

- ee ee

xxi.
Paftor ut explorat gquz terra fitapta colenti,
Quz bene lanigeras,quz male pafcat oues,
En terrz intentus, quid uincula linea tendit ¢
Fungitur officio iam Ptolemze tuo,
Vtg fen inuenit menfuram iuracp uene,
In uarios opetas diuidit ind euiros, od obftat,
Iam< us Opus,uiden’ utmouet omne quod o
Athéea atu tftrenuus arma manu ¢
Ne tibifurdefeant ferritinnitibus avres,
Ad grauiora ideo confpicienda ueni.
Inftruit ecce fuis nunc artibus ille minores:
Sedulitas nulli non operofa loco,
Metiri docet hic uenz {paciumé modumg,
Vt regat pofitis finibus arua lapis,
Ne quis transmiffo uiolentus limite pergens,
on fibi conceflas,in fua uertat,opes.
Hic docetinftrumenta,quibus Piutoniaregna
Tutus adit,faxi permeat atc uias.
Quanra(uides) folidas expugnet machina terras?
Machina non ullotempore uifa prius.
Cede nouis,nulla non inclytalaudeuetuftas,
Pofteritas meritis eft quocg grata tuis.
Tum quia Germano funt hxc inuenta fub axe,
Si quis es,inuidiz contrahe uela tux.
Aufonis ora tu.nct bellis,terra Attica cultu,
Germanum infractus tollitad aftra labor,
Nectamen ingenio folet infeliciter uti,
Mite gerat Phoebi,feu graue Martis opus.
Tempus adeft, ftructis uenarum montibus,igne
Explorare,ufum quem fibi tena ferat,
Non labor ingenio catet hi¢,non copia fru€u,
Eftadaperta bonz prima feneftra fpei.
3%, 2 inftat porrd grauiores ferre labores,
ntentas operi nec remouere manus,
Vrere fiue locus pofcat,feu tundere uemas,
Siue lauarelacu preter euntis aque,
Seu flammis iterum modicis torrere néceffe eft,
Excoquere aut faftis ignibus omnemalum,
Cum fluit xs riuis,auri argenticg metallum,
Spes animo foffor uix capit ipfe fuas,
—— cupidus fuluo fecernitab auro,
t plumbilentam demit utricg moram.
Separat argentum,lucri ftudiofus,ab ere,
Seruatis,linquens deteriora, bonis.

Quz

XXiv.

Que ficuncta uelim tenui percurrere uerfu,
Antealium reuchat Viemnonis oxta diem,’
Poftremus labor eft,concretos difcerefuccos,
Quos fertinnumeris Teutona terralocis,
Quo fal,quo nitrum,quo pacto fiat alumen,
V fibus artificis cum paratilla manus:
Necnon chalcantum,fulfur,fluidumeg bitumen,
Maflag quo uitrilenta dolanda modo,
Sufcipit hac hominum mirandos cura labores,
Pauperiem ufqgadeo ferre famem¢g graue eft,
Tantus amor uictum paruis extundere natis,
Et patria ciuem non dare uelle malum,
Nec manet in terrz fofforis merfalatebris
Mens, fed fert domino uota preces¢p Deo,
Munifice expedtat,{fpe plenus,munera dextre,
Extollens animum letus ad aftrafuum,
Diuitias c wR 15 T vs dat noticiamg fruendi,
Cui memori grates pectore femper vc
Hoc quoque laudati quondam fecere Philippi,
Quiuirtutis habent cum pietate decus,
Huc oculos,huc flecte animum, fuauiffime Lector,
Auctoremg pia nofcito mente Deum.
AG RICOLAE hinc optans operofo faufta labori,
Laudibus eximij candidus efto uiri.
Iilé fuum extollit patriz cum nomine nomen,
Et uir in ore frequens pofteritatis erit,
Cuncta caduntletho,ftudij monumenta uigebunt,
Purpurei doneclumina folis erunt.

Mifenz m, v. 11,
éludo illuftri.

For completeness’ sake we reproduce in the original Latin the laudation of Agricola
by his friend, Georgius Fabricius, a leading scholar of his time.
value for it is not poetry of a very high order, and to make it acceptable English would require
certain improvements, for which only poets have license. A “ free” translation of the last

few lines indicates its complimentary character :—

“He doth raise his country’s fame with his own
‘‘ And in the mouths of nations yet unborn
“His praises shall be sung; Death comes to all
“ But great achievements raise a monument
‘““ Which shall endure until the sun grows cold.”

It has but little intrinsic

TO THE: MOST ILLUSTRIOUS

AND MOST MIGHTY DUKES OF

Saxony, Landgraves of Thuringia, Margraves of Meissen,
Imperial Overlords of Saxony, Burgraves of Altenberg
and Magdeburg, Counts of Brena, Lords of
Pleissnerland, To maurice Grand Marshall
and Elector of the Holy Roman Empire
and to his brother aucusrus,

GEORGE AGRICOLA Ss. D,

JOST illustrious Princes, often have I considered
the metallic arts as a whole, as Moderatus Columella*
i considered the agricultural arts, just as if I
had been considering the whole of the human
4 body; and when I had perceived the various parts
| of the subject, like so many members of the body,
1 I became afraid that I might die before I should
| understand its full extent, much less before I
——— a ie could immortalise it in writing. This book
itself indicates the length and breadth of the subject, and the number
and importance of the sciences of which at least some little knowledge
is necessary to miners. Indeed, the subject of mining is a very exten-
sive one, and one very difficult to explain; no part of it is fully dealt
with by the Greek and Latin authors whose works survive; and since
the art is one of the most ancient, the most necessary and the most profitable
to mankind, I considered that I ought not to neglect it. Without doubt,
none of the arts is older than agriculture, but that of the metals is not
less ancient ; in fact they are at least equal and coeval, for no mortal man ever
tilled a field without implements. In truth, in all the works of agricul-
ture, as in the other arts, implements are used which are made from metals,
or which could not be made without the use of metals; for this reason
the metals are of the greatest necessity to man. When an art is so poor that
it lacks metals, it is not of much importance, for nothing is made without
tools. Besides, of all ways whereby great wealth is acquired by good and
honest means, none is more advantageous than mining; for although from
fields which are well tilled (not to mention other things) we derive rich yields,
yet we obtain richer products from mines ; in fact, one mine is often much
more beneficial to us than many fields. For this reason we learn from the
history of nearly all ages that very many men have been made rich by the

1For Agricola’s relations with these princes see p. ix.

*Lucius Junius Moderatus Columella was a Roman, a native of Cadiz, and lived

during the rst Century. He was the author of De Re Rustica in 12 books. It was first
printed in 1472, and some fifteen or sixteen editions had been printed before Agricola’s death.

XXVi. PREFACE

mines, and the fortunes of many kings have been much amplified there-
by. But I will. not now speak more of these matters, because I have
dealt with these subjects partly in the first book of this work, and partly in
the other work entitled De Veteribus et Novis Metallis, where I have refuted
the charges which have been made against metals and against miners.
Now, though the art of husbandry, which I willingly rank with the art of
mining, appears to be divided into many branches, yet it is not separated
into so many as this art of ours, nor can I teach the principles of this as
easily as Columella did of that. He had at hand many writers upon hus-
bandry whom he could follow,—in fact, there are more than fifty Greek
authors whom Marcus Varro enumerates, and more than ten Latin ones,
whom Columella himself mentions. I have only one whom I can follow;
that is C. Plinius Secundus,? and he expounds only a very few methods of
digging ores and of making metals. Far from the whole of the art having
been treated by any one writer, those who have written occasionally on any
one or another of its branches have not even dealt completely with a single
one of them. Moreover, there is a great scarcity even of these, since alone of
all the Greeks, Strato of Lampsacus,* the successor of Theophrastus,® wrote
a book on the subject, De Machinis Metallicis ; except, perhaps a work by the
poet Philo, a small part of which embraced to some degree the occupation
of mining.* Pherecrates seems to have introduced into his comedy, which
was similar in title, miners as slaves or as persons condemned to serve in the
mines. Of the Latin writers, Pliny, as I have already said, has described
a few methods of working. Also among the authors I must include the modern
writers, whosoever they are, for no one should escape just condemnation
who fails to award due recognition to persons whose writings he uses, even
very slightly. Two books have been written in our tongue ; the one on the
assaying of mineral substances and metals, somewhat confused, whose author
is unknown’; the other “On Veins,” of which Pandulfus Anglus ® is also
said to have written, although the German book was written by Calbus of
Freiberg, a well-known doctor]; but neither of them accomplished the task

%We give a short review of Pliny’s Naturalis Historia in the Appendix B.

‘This work is not extant, as Agricola duly notes later on. Strato succeeded Thee-
phrastus as president of the Lyceum, 288 B.c.

5For note on Theophrastus see Appendix B.

®It appears that the poet Philo did write a work on mining which is not extant. So
far as we know the only reference to this work is in Athenzus’ (200 A.D.) Deipnosophistae.
The passage as it appears in C. D. Yonge’s Translation (Bohn’s Library, London, 1854,
Vol. 1, Book vir, p. 506) is: ‘‘ And there is a similar fish produced in the Red Sea which
“is called Stromateus ; it has gold-coloured lines running along the whole of his body, as
“Philo tells us in his book on Mines.” There is a fragment of a poem of Pherecrates,
entitled ‘‘ Miners,” but it seems to have little to do with mining.

"The title given by Agricola De Materiae Metallicae et Metallorum Experimento is
difficult to identify. It seems likely to be the little Probier Buchlein, numbers of which were
published in German in the first half of the 16th Century. We discuss this work at some
length in the Appendix B on Ancient Authors.

*Pandulfus, “the Englishman,” is mentioned by various 15th and 16th Century
writers, and in the preface of Mathias Farinator’s Liber Moralitatum .. . Rerum Naturalium,
etc., printed in Augsburg, 1477, there is a list of books among which appears a reference to
a work by Pandulfus on veins and minerals. We have not been able to find the book.

PREFACE xxvii.

he had begun.® Recently Vannucci Biringuccio, of Sienna, a wise man
experienced in many matters, wrote in vernacular Italian on _ the
subject of the melting, separating, and alloying of metals.'° He
touched briefly.on the methods of smelting certain ores, and explained
more fully the methods of making certain juices; by reading his
directions, I have refreshed my memory of those things which I myself
saw in Italy ; as for many matters on which I write, he did not touch upon
them at all, or touched but lightly. This book was given me by Franciscus
Badoarius, a Patrician of Venice, and a man of wisdom and of repute ; this
he had promised that he would do, when in the previous year he was at
Marienberg, having been sent by the Venetians as an Ambassador to King
Ferdinand. Beyond these books I do not find any writings on the metallic
arts. For that reason, even if the book of Strato existed, from all these
sources not one-half of the whole body of the science of mining could be
pieced together.

Seeing that there have been so few who have written on the subject of the
metals, it appears to me all the more wonderful that so many alchemists have
arisen who would compound metals artificially, and who would change one
into another. Hermolaus Barbarus,“ a man of high rank and station, and
distinguished in all kinds of learning, has mentioned the names of many in
his writings; and I will proffer more, but only famous ones, for I will limit myself
to a few. Thus Osthanes has written on xvpevrwa ; and there are Hermes;
Chanes ; Zosimus, the Alexandrian, to his sister Theosebia ; Olympiodorus,
also an Alexandrian; Agathodemon; Democritus, not the one of Abdera,
but some other whom I know not ; Orus Chrysorichites, Pebichius, Comerius,
Joannes, Apulejus, Petasius, Pelagius, Africanus, Theophilus, Synesius,
Stephanus to Heracleus Cesar, Heliodorus to Theodosius, Geber, Callides
Rachaidibus, Veradianus, Rodianus, Canides, Merlin, Raymond Lully,
Arnold de Villa Nova, and Augustinus Pantheus of Venice ; and three women,
Cleopatra, the maiden Taphnutia, and Maria the Jewess.™ All these alchemists
employ obscure language, and Johanes Aurelius Augurellus of Rimini,
alone has used the language of poetry. There are many other books on

*Jacobi (Der Mineralog Georgius Agricola, Zwickau, 1881, p. 47) says: “‘ Calbus
“* Freibergius, so called by Agricola himself, is certainly no other than the Freiberg Doctor
“ Riihlein von Kalbe; he was, according to Méller, a doctor and burgomaster at Freiberg
“at the end of the 15th and the beginning of the 16th Centuries. . . . The chronicler
“describes him as a fine mathematician, who helped to survey and design the mining towns
“ of Annaberg in 1497 and Marienberg in 1521.” We would call attention to the statement
of Calbus’ views, quoted at the end of Book III, De Re Metallica (p. 75), which are astonishingly
similar to statements in the Niizlich Bergbiichlin, and leave little doubt that this “ Calbus ”
was the author of that anonymous book on veins. For further discussion see Appendix B.

1°For discussion of Biringuccio see Appendix B. The proper title is De La Pirotechnia
(Venice, 1540).

“Hermolaus Barbarus, according to Watt (Bibliotheca Britannica, London, 1824), was
a lecturer on Philosophy in Padua. He was born in 1454, died in 1493, and was the author of a
number of works on medicine, natural history, etc., with commentaries on the older authors.

The debt which humanity does owe to these self-styled philosophers must not be
overlooked, for the science of Chemistry comes from three sources—Alchemy, Medicine and
Metallurgy. However polluted the former of these may be, still the vast advance which it
made by the discovery of the principal acids, alkalis, and the more common of their salts,
should be constantly mccgemek. 1k is obviously impossible, within the space of a footnote, to

XXViii. PREFACE

this subject, but all are difficult to follow, because the writers upon these
things use strange names, which do not properly belong to the metals, and
because some of them employ now one name and now another, invented by
themselves, though the thing itself changes not. These masters teach their
disciples that the base metals, when smelted, are broken up ; also they teach
the methods by which they reduce them to the primary parts and
remove whatever is superfluous in them, and by supplying what is
wanted make out of them the precious metals—that is, gold and silver,—
all of which they carry out in a crucible. Whether they can do these things
or not I cannot decide; but, seeing that so many writers assure us with all
earnestness that they have reached that goal for which they aimed, it would
seem that faith might be placed in them; yet also seeing that we do not
read of any of them ever having become rich by this art, nor do we now see
them growing rich, although so many nations everywhere have produced, and
are producing, alchemists, and all of them are straining every nerve night and
day to the end that they may heap a great quantity of gold and silver, I should
say the matter is dubious. But although it may be due to the carelessness
of the writers that they have not transmitted to us the names of the masters
who acquired great wealth through this occupation, certainly it is clear that
their disciples either do not understand their precepts or, if they do under-
stand them, do not follow them ; for if they do comprehend them, seeing that
these disciples have been and are so numerous, they would have by to-day filled

give anything but the most casual notes as to the personages here mentioned and their
writings. Aside from the classics and religious works, the libraries of the Middle Ages teemed
with more material on Alchemy than on any other one subject, and since that date a never-
ending stream of historical, critical, and discursive volumes and tracts devoted to the old
Alchemists and their writings has been poured upon the world. A collection recently sold
in London, relating to Paracelsus alone, embraced over seven hundred volumes.

Of many of the Alchemists mentioned by Agricola little is really known, and no
two critics agree as to the commonest details regarding many of them; in fact, an endless
confusion springs from the negligent habit of the lesser Alchemists of ae author-
ship of their writings to more esteemed members of their ownilk, such as Hermes, Osthanes, etc.,
not to mention the palpable spuriousness of works under the names of the real philosophers,
such as Aristotle, Plato, or Moses, and even of Jesus Christ. Knowledge of many of the
authors mentioned by Agricola does not extend beyond the fact that the names mentioned
are appended to various writings, in some instances to MSS yet unpublished. The pos
have been actual persons, or they may not. Agricola undoubtedly had panasatt
manuscripts and books in some leading library, as the quotation from Boerhaave given later
shows. Shaw (A New Method of Chemistry, etc., London, 1753. Vol. I, p. 25) considers
that the large number of such manuscripts in the European libraries at this time were
composed or transcribed by monks and others living in Constantinople, Alexandria, and
Athens, who fled westward before the Turkish invasion, bringing their works with them.

For purposes of this summary we group the names mentioned by Agricola, the first
class being of those who are known only as names appended to MSS or not identifiable at
all. Possibly a more devoted student of the history of Alchemy would assign fewer names to
this department of oblivion. They are Maria the Jewess, Chrysorichites, Chanes,
Petasius, Pebichius, Theophilus, Callides, Veradianus, Rodianus, Canides, the maiden
thy yeskenst Johannes, Augustinus, and Africanus. The last three are names so common as not
to be possible of identification without more particulars, though Johannes may be the Johannes
Rupeseissa (1375), an alchemist of some note. Many of these names can be found pei
the Bishops and Prelates of the early Christian Church, but we doubt if their owners woul
ever be identified with such indiscretions as open, avowed alchemy. The Theophilus
mentioned might be the metal-working monk of the r2th Century, who is further discussed
in Appendix B on Ancient Authors. be

In the next group fall certain names such as Osthanes, Hermes, Zosimus, Agathodaemon, _
and Democritus, which have been the watchwords of authority to Alchemists of all ages. —
These certainly possessed the great secrets, either the philosopher’s stone or the elixir.

PREFACE xxix.

whole towns with gold and silver. Even their books proclaim their vanity, for
they inscribe in them the names of Plato and Aristotle and other philosophers,
in order that such high-sounding inscriptions may impose upon simple people
and pass for learning. There is another class of alchemists who do not
change the substance of base metals, but colour them to represent gold or silver,
so that they appear to be that which they are not, and when this appearance
is taken from them by the fire, as if it were a garment foreign to them, they
return to their own character. These alchemists, since they deceive people,
are not only held in the greatest odium, but their frauds are a capital offence.
No less a fraud, warranting capital punishment, is committed by a third sort
of alchemists ; these throw into a crucible a small piece of gold or silver
hidden in a coal, and after mixing therewith fluxes which have the power of
extracting it, pretend to be making gold from orpiment, or silver from tin and
like substances. But concerning the art of alchemy, if it be an art, I will
speak further elsewhere. I will now return to the art of mining.

Since no authors have written of this art in its entirety, and since
foreign nations and races do not understand our tongue, and, if they did
understand it, would be able to learn only a small part of the art through the
works of those authors whom we do possess, I have written these twelve books
De Re Metallica. Of these, the first book contains the arguments which may
be used against this art, and against metals and the mines, and what can be
said in their favour. The second book describes the miner, and branches into

Hermes Trismegistos was a legendary tian personage supposed to have flourished
before 1,500 B.c., and by some considered to be a corruption of the god Thoth. He is supposed
to have written a number of works, but those extant have been demonstrated to date not
ove to the second Century; he is referred to by the later Greek Alchemists, and was
ieved to have possessed the secret of transmutation. Osthanes was also a very shadowy
capper ty and was considered by some Alchemists to have been an Egyptian prior to Hermes,
y others to have been the teacher of Zoroaster. Pliny mentions a magician of this name
who accompanied Xerxes’ mney, Later there are psec: espe of this name, and the most
probable ation is that this was a favourite ym for ancient magicians ;_ there
is a very old work, of no great interest, in MSS in Latin and Greek, in the Munich, Gotha,
Vienna, and other libraries, by one of this name. Agathodaemon was still another shado
character referred to by the older Alchemists. There are MSS in the Florence, Paris, Escurial,
and Munich libraries bearing his name, but nothing tangible is known as to whether he was
an actual man or if these writings are not of a much later period than claimed.

To the next group belong the Greek Alchemists, who flourished during the rise and
decline of Alexandria, from 200 B.c. to 700 A.D., and we give them in order of their dates.
Comerius was considered by his later fellow professionals to have been the teacher of the art
to Cleopatra (1st Century B.c.), and a MSS with a title to that effect exists in the Bibliotheque
Nationale at Paris. The celebrated peo og seems to have stood very high in the estimation
of the Alchemists ; her doubtful character found a response among them ; there are
various works extant in attributed to her, but nothing can be known as to their
authenticity. Lucius Apulejus or Apuleius was born in Numidia about the 2nd Century ;
he was a Roman Platonic Philosopher, and was the author of aromance, ‘‘ The Metamorphosis,
or the Golden Ass.” Synesius was a Greek, but of unknown period ; there is a MSS treatise
on the Philosopher’s Stone in the library at Leyden under his name, and various printed works
are attributed to him; he mentions “ water of saltpetre,” and has, therefore, been hazarded
to be the earliest recorder of nitric acid. The work here referred to as ‘‘ Heliodorus to
Theodosius ’’ was probably the MSS in the Libraries at Paris, Vienna, Munich, etc., under
the title of ‘‘ Heli the Philosopher’s Poem to the Emperor Theodosius the Great on the
Mystic Art of the Philosophers, etc.”” His period would, therefore, be about the 4th Century.
The Alexandrian Zosimus is more generally known as Zosimus the Panopolite, from Panopolis,
an ancient town on the Nile; he flourished in the 5th Century, and belonged to the
Alexandrian School of Alchemists ; he should not be confused with the Roman historian
of the same name and period. The following statement is by Boerhaave (Elementa Chemiae,
Paris, 1724, Chap. I.) :—‘‘ The name Chemistry written in Greek, or Chemia, is so ancient

3

XXX. PREFACE

a discourse on the finding of veins. The third book deals with veins and
stringers, and seams in the rocks. The fourth book explains the method of
delimiting veins, and also describes the functions of the mining officials.
The fifth book describes the digging of ore and the surveyor’s art. The
sixth book describes the miners’ tools and machines. The seventh book is
on the assaying of ore. The eighth book lays down the rules for the work of
roasting, crushing, and washing the ore. The ninth book explains the
methods of smelting ores. The tenth book instructs those who are studious
of the metallic arts in the work of separating silver from gold, and lead from
gold and silver. The eleventh book shows the way of separating silver from
copper. The twelfth book gives us rules for manufacturing salt, soda, alum,
vitriol, sulphur, bitumen, and glass.

Although I have not fulfilled the task which I have undertaken, on account
of the great magnitude of the subject, I have, at all events, endeavoured to fulfil
it, for I have devoted much labour and care, and have even gone to some
expense upon it ; for with regard to the veins, tools, vessels, sluices, machines,
and furnaces, I have not only described them, but have also hired illustrators
to delineate their forms, lest descriptions which are conveyed by words
should either not be understood by men of our own times, or should cause
difficulty to posterity, in the same way as to us difficulty is often caused by
many names which the Ancients (because such words were familiar to all of
them) have handed down to us without any explanation.

I have omitted all those things which I have not myself seen, or have

“as perhaps to have been used in the antediluvian age. Of this opinion was Zosimus the
“‘ Panopolite, whose Greek writings, though known as long as before the Pie 1550 to George
“Agricola, and afterwards perused . . . . by Jas. Scaliger and Olaus Borrichius,
‘* still remain unpublished in the King of France’s library. In one of these, entitled, ‘ The
“Instruction of Zosimus the Panopolite and Philosopher, out of those written to Theosebeia,
“etc. ...’ Olympiodorus was an Alexandrian of the 5th Century, whose writings were largely
commentaries on Plato and Aristotle; he is sometimes accredited with res the first to
describe white arsenic (arsenical oxide). The full title of the work styled “Stephanus to
Heracleus Caesar,’”’ as published in Latin at Padua in 1573, was ‘‘ Stephan of Alexandria, the
‘‘ Universal Philosopher and Master, his nine processes on the great art of making gold and
ss —— addressed to the Emperor Heraclius.” He, therefore, if authentic, dates in the
7th Century.

To the next class belong those of the Middle Ages, which we give in order of date.
The works attributed to Geber play such an important part in the history of Chemistry and
Metallurgy that we discuss his book at length in j po B. Late criticism indicates that this
work was not the production of an 8th Century Arab, but a compilation of some Latin scholar
of the 12th or 13th Centuries. Arnold de Villa Nova, born about 1240, died in 1313
was celebrated as a physician, philosopher, and chemist; his first works were published
in Lyons in 1504; many of them have apparently never been printed, for references may be
found to some 18 different works. Raymond Lully, a Spaniard, born in 1235, who
was a disciple of Arnold de Villa Nova, was stoned to death in Africa in 1315. There are
extant over 100 works attributed to this author, although again the habit of disciples of writing
under the master’s name may be responsible for most of these. John Aurelio Augurello was
an Italian Classicist, born in Rimini about 1453. Thework referred to, Chrysopoeia et Gerontica
is a poem on the art of making gold, etc., published in Venice, 1515, and re-published
frequently thereafter ; it is much quoted by Alchemists. With regard to Merlin, as satis-—
factory an account as any of this truly English magician may be found in Mark Twain’s
‘Yankee at the Court of King Arthur.” It is of some interest to note that Agricola omits —
from his list Avicenna (980-1037 a.D.), Roger Bacon (1214-1294), Albertus Magnus (1193-
1280), Basil Valentine (end 15th century ?), and Paracelsus, a contqmporary of his own.
In De Ortu et Causis he expends much thought on refutation of theories advanced by Avicenna
and Albertus, but of the others we have found no mention, although their work is, froma
chemical point of view, of considerable importance. saga

PREFACE xxxi.

not read or heard of from persons upon whom I can rely. That which I have
neither seen, nor carefully considered after reading or hearing of, I have not
written about. The same rule must be understood with regard to all my in-
struction, whether I enjoin things which ought to be done, or describe things
which are usual, or condemn things which are done. Since the art of mining
does not lend itself to elegant language, these books of mine are correspond-
ingly lacking in refinement of style. The things dealt with in this art of
metals sometimes lack names, either because they are new, or because, even
if they are old, the record of the names by which they were formerly known
has been lost. For this reason I have been forced by a necessity, for which I
must be pardoned, to describe some of them by a number of words combined,
and to distinguish others by new names,—to which latter class belong Ingestor,
Discretor, Lotor, and Excoctor.* Other things, again, I have alluded to by old
names, such as the Cistwm; for when Nonius Marcellus wrote,* this was
the name of a two-wheeled vehicle, but I have adopted it for a small vehicle
which has only one wheel; and if anyone does not approve of these names,
‘let him either find more appropriate ones for these things, or discover the
words used in the writings of the Ancients.

These books, most illustrious Princes, are dedicated to you for many
reasons, and, above all others, because metals have proved of the greatest
value to you ; for though your ancestors drew rich profits from the revenues
of their vast and wealthy territories, and likewise from the taxes which were
paid by the foreigners by way of toll and by the natives by way of tithes, yet
they drew far richer profits from the mines. Because of the mines not a few
towns have risen into eminence, such as Freiberg, Annaberg, Marienberg,
Schneeberg, Geyer, and Altenberg, not to mention others. Nay, if I under-
stand anything, greater wealth now lies hidden beneath the ground in the
mountainous parts of your territory than is visible and apparent above
ground. Farewell.

Chemnitz, Saxony,

December First, 1550.
13] ngestor,—Carrier ; Discretor,—Sorter ; Lotor,—Washer ; Excoctor,—Smelter.

“4Nonius Marcellus was a Roman grammarian of the 4th Century B.c. His extant
treatise is entitled, De Compendiosa Doctrina per Litteras ad Filium.

QO
Mans:
So ota

qe...

BOOK I.

3) ANY persons hold the opinion that the metal indus-
tries are fortuitous and that the occupation is one
of sordid toil, and altogether a kind of business
| requiring not so much skill as labour. But as for
myself, when I reflect carefully upon its special
points one by one, it appears to be far otherwise.
For a miner must have the greatest skill in his
| work, that he may know first of all what mountain
— eS or hill, what valley or plain, can be prospected most
profitably, or what he should leave alone; moreover, he must understand the
veins, stringers! and seams in the rocks*. Then he must be thoroughly
familiar with the many and varied species of earths, juices*, gems,
stones, marbles, rocks, metals, and compounds‘. He must also have a

1Fibrae—" fibres.” See Note 6, p. 70.

*Commissurae saxorum—“ rock joints,” “ seams,” or “ cracks.’ Agricola and all of
the old authors laid a wholly unwarranted geologic value on these phenomena. See descrip-
tion and footnotes, Book III., pages 43 and 72.

*Succi—" juice,” or succs concreti—" solidified juice.’ Ger. Trans., safffe. The
old En translators and mineralogists often use the word juices in the same sense,
and we have adopted it. The words “ solutions ” and “ salts ” convey a chemical significance
not warranted by the state of knowledge in Agricola’s time. Instances of the former use of
this word may be seen in Barba’s ‘‘ First Book of the Art of Metals,”’ (Trans.’Earl Sandwich,
London, 1674, p. 2, etc.,) and in Pryce’s Mineralogia Cornubiensis (London, 1778, p. 25, 32).

*In order that the reader should be able to p the author’s point of view as to his
divisions of the Mineral Kingdom, we introduce i his own statement from De Natura
Fossilium, (p. 180). It is also desirable to read the footnote on his theory of ore-deposits on
pages 43 to 53, and the review of De Natura Fosstlium given in the Appendix.

“‘ The subterranean inanimate bodies are divided into two classes, one of which, because
“it is a fluid or an exhalation, is called by those names, and the other class is called the
“minerals. Mineral bodies are solidified from particles of the same substance, such as pure
“gold, each particle of which is gold, or they are of different substances such aslumps which
“consist of earth, stone, and metal; these latter may be separated into earth, stone and
‘metal, and therefore the first is not a mixture while the last is called a mixture. The first
“are again divided into simple and compound minerals. The simple minerals are of four
“classes, namely earths, solidified juices, stones and metals, while the mineral compounds
“‘ are of many sorts, as I shall explain later.”

“‘ Earth is a simple mineral body which may be kneaded in the hands when moistened,
“or from which lute is made when it has been wetted. Earth, properly so called, is found
“enclosed in veins or veinlets, or frequently on the surface in fields and meadows. This
“* definition is a general one. The harder earth, although moistened by water, does not at
“ once become lute, but does turn into lute if it remains in water for some time. There are
“ many fen of earths, some of which have names but others are unnamed.”

“* Solidified juices are dry and somewhat hard (swbdurus) mineral bodies which when
“‘ moistened with water do not soften but liquefy instead; or if they do soften, they differ
“‘ greatly from the earths by their unctuousness (pingue) or by the material of which they
“consist. Although occasionally they have the hardness of stone, yet because they preserve
“ the form and nature which they had when less hard, they can easily be distinguished from
“the stones. The juices are divided into ‘meagre’ and unctuous (macer et pingwis). The
““‘meagre’ juices, since they originate from three different substances, are of three species.
“They are formed from a liquid mixed with earth, or with metal, or with a
“mineral compound. To the first species belong salt and Nifrum (soda); to the second,
“ chrysocolla, verdigris, iron-rust, and azure ; to the third, vitriol, alum, and an acrid juice
“which is unnamed. The first two of these latter are obtained from pyrites, which is
“numbered amongst the compound minerals. The third of these comes Cadmia (in
“this case the cobalt-zinc-arsenic minerals ; the acrid juice is probably zinc sulphate). @To
“the unctuous juices belong these species : sulphur, bitumen, realgar and orpiment. Vitriol
“and alum, although they are somewhat unctuous yet do not burn, and they differ in
“ their origin from the unctuous juices, for the latter are forced out from the earth by heat,
‘‘ whereas the former are produced when pyrites is softened by moisture.”

2 BOOK I.

complete knowledge of the method of making all underground works.
Lastly, there are the various systems of assaying® substances and of
preparing them for smelting; and here again there are many altogether
diverse methods. For there is one method for gold and silver, another
for copper, another for quicksilver, another for iron, another for lead, and

“Stone is a dry and hard mineral body which may either be softened by remaining
“for a long time in water and be reduced to powder by a fierce fire; or else it does not
“soften with water but the heat of a great fire liquefies it. To the first species belong
“those stones which have been solidified by heat, to the second those solidified (literally
** congealed’) by cold. These two species of stones are constituted from their own material.
“« However, writers on natural subjects who take into consideration the quantity and quality
“« of stones and their value, divide them into four classes. The first of these has no name of
‘its own but is called in common parlance ‘stone’ : to this class belong loadstone, jasper (or
“‘ bloodstone) and Aefites (geodes ?). The second class comprises hard stones, either pellucid
‘or ornamental, with very beautiful and varied colours which sparkle marvellously ; they
“are called gems. The third comprises stones which are only brilliant after they have been
“polished, and are usually called marble. The fourth are called rocks ; they are found in
“‘ quarries, from which they are hewn out for use in building, and they are cut into various
‘shapes. None of the rocks show colour or take a polish. Few of the stones sparkle ; fewer
“still are transparent. Marble is sometimes only distinguishable from opaque gems by its
“ volume ; rock is always distinguishable from stones properly so-called by its volume. th
“the stones and the gems are usually to be found in veins and veinlets which traverse the
“rocks and marble. These four classes, as I have already stated, are divided into many
“ species, which I will explain in their proper place.”

“* Metal is a mineral body, by nature either liquid or somewhat hard. The latter may
“ be melted by the heat of the fire, but when it has cooled down again and lost all heat, it
“becomes hard again and resumes its proper form. In this respect it differs from the
“stone which melts in the fire, for although the latter regain its hardness, yet it loses

‘its pristine form and properties. Traditionally there are six different kinds of metals, —

“namely gold, silver, copper, iron, tin and lead. There are really others, for quicksilver is a
“ metal, although the Alchemists di with us on this subject, and bismuth is also. The
“ancient Greek writers seem to have been ignorant of bismuth, wherefore Ammonius rightly
‘“states that there are many species of ant animals, and plants which are unknown to us.
“« Stibium when smelted in the crucible and refined has as much right to be regarded as a
“ proper metal as is accorded to lead by writers. If when smelted, a certain portion be
“ added to tin, a bookseller’s alloy is produced from which the type is made that is used by
“those who print books on paper. Each metal has its own form which it preserves when
“separated from those metals which were mixed with it. Therefore neither electrum nor

‘« Stannum is of itself a real metal, but rather an alloy of two metals. Electrum is an alloy

“of gold and silver, Stannum of lead and silver (see note 33 p 473). And yet if silver be

“ parted from the electrum, then gold remains and not electrum ; if silver be taken away
“from Stannum, then lead remains and not Stannum. Whether brass, however, is found as"
“‘a native metal or not, cannot be ascertained with any surety. We only know of the
“ artificial brass, which consists of copper tinted with the colour of the mineral calamine. —

“ And yet if any should be dug up, it would be a proper metal. Black and white
‘seem to be different from the red kind. Metal, therefore, is by nature either solid, as I
“have stated, or fluid, as in the unique case of quicksilver. But enough now concerning the
“ simple kinds.”

“IT will now speak of the compounds which are composed of the simple minerals

“cemented together by nature, and under the word ‘compound’ I now discuss those ~
‘mineral bodies which consist of two or three simple minerals. They are likewise mineral

“substances, but so thoroughly mixed and alloyed that even in the smallest part there is
“not wanting any substance that is contained in the whole. Only by the force of the fire
“is it possible to separate one of the simple mineral substances from another ; either the
“third from the other two, or two from the third, if there were three in the same compound,
‘‘ These two, three or more bodies are so completely mixed into one new species that the
“pristine form/f none of these is recognisable.”

“The ‘mixed’ minerals, which are composed of those same simple minerals, differ
“from the ‘compounds,’ in that the simple minerals each preserves its own form so that
‘ they can be separated one from the other not only by fire but sometimes by water and
“sometimes by hand. As these two classes differ so greatly from one another I usually use
“two different words in order to distinguish one from the other. I am well aware that

‘Experiendae—" a trial.” That actual assaying in its technical sense is meant, is
sufficiently evident from Book VII.

Ee a a ey eT

al ial alae

a eT

Se ee ee ey ee ee ne

BOOK I. 3

even tin and bismuth® are treated differently from lead. Although the
evaporation of juices is an art apparently quite distinct from metallurgy,
yet they ought not to be considered separately, inasmuch as these juices
are also often dug out of the ground solidified, or they are produced from
certain kinds of earth and stones which the miners dig up, and some of the
juices are not themselves devoid of metals. Again, their treatment is not
simple, since there is one method for common salt, another for soda’,
another for alum, another for vitriol*, another for sulphur, and another
for bitumen.

Furthermore, there are many arts and sciences of which a miner should
not beignorant. First there is Philosophy, that he may discern the origin,
cause, and nature of subterranean things; for then he will be able to dig
out the veins easily and advantageously, and to obtain more abundant results
from his mining. Secondly, there is Medicine, that he may be able to look
after his diggers and other workmen, that they do not meet with those

‘Galen calls the metallic earth a compound which is really a mixture, but he who wishes to
“instruct others should bestow upon each separate thing a definite name.’
- For convenience of reference we may reduce the above to a diagram as follows :

1. Fluids and gases.
Earths

(a) Simple | Solidified juices
eee) ee
a ous
bodies

(b) Compound | Being homogenous mixtures
minerals | of (a)

B. Mixtures. Being heterogeneous mixtures of (a)

¢ plumbum ryck? candidum ac cinereum vel nigrum. “ Lead
. . . white, or ash-coloured, or black.” Agricola himself coined the term plumbum
cinereum for bismuth, no doubt following the Roman term for tin—plumbum candidum.
The following passage from Bermannus (p. 439) is of interest, for it t orbucklen
the first description of bismuth, although mention of it occurs in the Naelich
(see Appendix B). “ Bermannus : I will show you another kind of mineral which is pico
eee ars to me to have been unknown to the Ancients; we call it .
“ bisemutum. Naevius : in your opinion there are more kinds of metals than the
“seven commonly believed ? Bermannus : More, I consider; for this which just now I
“said we called uéum, cannot correctly be called plumbum candidum (tin), nor nigrum
(lead), but is different from both and is a third one. Plumbum candidum is whiter and
“ plumbum nigrum is darker, as you see. Naevius: We see that this is of the colour of
‘galena, Ancon: How then can bisemutum, as you call it, be distinguished from galena ?
“ Bermannus : Easily ; when you take it in your hands it stains them with black, unless
“it is quite hard. The hard kind is not friable like galena, but can be cut. It is
“blacker than the kind of rudis silver which we say is almost the colour of lead, and thus
“is different from both. Indeed, it not rarely contains some silver. It generally indicates
“that there is silver ver beneath the place where it is found, and because of this our miners
aa Mg aprons Na lgos Rhye i aha They are wont to roast this mineral, and
“ from better make me m the poorer they make a pigment of a
‘kind not reggae enous

Nitrum. The Ancients comprised many salts under this head, but Agricola in the
main uses it for soda, although sometimes he Sects potash. He usually, however, refers
to potash as Lixivium or salt therefrom, and by other pages os terms. For description
of method of manufacture and discussion, see Book XIL.,

®Atramentum sutorium—‘ Shoemaker’s blacking ce p- 572 for description of method
of manufacture and historical footnote. In + gen oy main Agricola means | vitriol, but he does
describe three main varieties, green, blue, and white (De Natura F. jum, p.219). The blue
GE UE calade copper enipheia, ai and it is fairly certain that the white was zinc vitriol.

4 BOOK I.

diseases to which they are more liable than workmen in other occupations,
or if they do meet with them, that he himself may be able to heal them or
may see that the doctors doso. Thirdly follows Astronomy, that he may
know the divisions of the heavens and from them judge the direction of
the veins. Fourthly, there is the science of Surveying that he may be able
to estimate how deep a shaft should be sunk to reach the tunnel which is
being driven to it, and to determine the limits and boundaries in these
workings, especially in depth. Fifthly, his knowledge of Arithmetical Science
should be such that he may calculate the cost to be incurred in the
machinery and the working of the mine. Sixthly, his learning must comprise
Architecture, that he himself may construct the various machines and timber
work required underground, or that he may be able to explain the method
of the construction to others. Next, he must have knowledge of Drawing,
that he can draw plans of his machinery. Lastly, there is the Law, especially
that dealing with metals, that he may claim his own rights, that he may
undertake the duty of giving others his opinion on legal matters, that he
may not take another man’s property and so make trouble for himself, and
that he may fulfil his obligations to others according to the law.

It is therefore necessary that those who take an interest in the methods
and precepts of mining and metallurgy should read these and others of our
books studiously and diligently ; or on every point they should consult
expert mining people, though they will discover few who are skilled in the
whole art. As a rule one man understands only the methods of mining,
another possesses the knowledge of washing®, another is experienced in the
art of smelting, another has a knowledge of measuring the hidden parts of
the earth, another is skilful in the art of making machines, and finally,
another is learned in mining law. But as for us, though we may not have
perfected the whole art of the discovery and preparation of metals, at least
we can be of great assistance to persons studious in its acquisition.

But let us now approach the subject we have undertaken. Since there
has always been the greatest disagreement amongst men concerning metals
and mining, some praising, others utterly condemning them, therefore I have
decided that before imparting my instruction, I should carefully weigh
the facts with a view to discovering the truth in this matter.

So I may begin with the question of utility, which is a two-fold one,
for either it may be asked whether the art of mining is really profitable or
not to those who are engaged in it, or whether it is useful or not to the rest
of mankind. Those who think mining of no advantage to the men who follow
the occupation assert, first, that scarcely one in a hundred who dig metals or
other such things derive profit therefrom; and again, that miners, because they
entrust their certain and well-established wealth to dubious and slippery
fortune, generally deceive themselves, and as a result, impoverished by

*Lavandi— Washing.” By this term the author includes all the operations of
sluicing, buddling, and wet concentration generally. There is no English equivalent of such
wide application, and there is some difficulty in interpretation without going further than
the author intends. Book VIII. is devoted to the subject.

BOOK I. 5

expenses and losses, in the end spend the most bitter and most miserable of
lives. But persons who hold these views do not perceive how much a learned
and experienced miner differs from one ignorant and unskilled in the art.
The latter digs out the ore without any careful discrimination, while the
former first assays and proves it, and when he finds the veins either too
narrow and hard, or too wide and soft, he infers therefrom that these cannot
be mined profitably, and so works only the approved ones. What wonder
then if we find the incompetent miner suffers:loss, while the competent one
is rewarded by an abundant return from his mining? The same thing
applies to husbandmen. For those who cultivate land which is alike arid,
heavy, and barren, and in which they sow seeds, do not make so great a
harvest as those who cultivate a fertile and mellow soil and sow their grain
in that. And since by far the greater number of miners are unskilled rather
than skilled in the art, it follows that mining is a profitable occupation to
very few men, and a source of loss to many more. Therefore the mass of
miners who are quite unskilled and ignorant in the knowledge of veins not
infrequently lose both time and trouble!®. Such men are accustomed for the
most part to take to mining, either when through being weighted with the
fetters of large and heavy debts, they have abandoned a business, or desiring to
change their occupation, have left the reaping-hook and plough; and so
if at any time such a man discovers rich veins or other abounding mining
produce, this occurs more by good luck than through any knowledge on his
part. We learn from history that mining has brought wealth to many, for
from old writings it is well known that prosperous Republics, not a few kings,
and many private persons, have made fortunes through mines and their
produce. This subject, by the use of many clear and illustrious examples, I
have dilated upon and explained in the first Book of my work entitled ‘“‘ De
Veteribus et Novis Metallis,” from which it is evident that mining is very
profitable to those who give it care and attention.

Again, those who condemn the mining industry say that it is not in the
least stable, and they glorify agriculture beyond measure. But I do not see
how they can say this with truth, for the silver-mines at Freiberg in Meissen
remain still unexhausted after 400 years, and the lead mines of Goslar after 600
years. The proof of this can be found in the monuments of history. The
gold and silver mines belonging to the communities of Schemnitz and
Cremnitz have been worked for 800 years, and these latter are said to be
the most ancient privileges of the inhabitants. Some then say the profit
from an individual mine is unstable, as if forsooth, the miner is, or ought to
be dependent on only one mine, and as if many men do not bear in common ©
their expenses in mining, or as if one experienced in his art does not dig
another vein, if fortune does not amply respond to his prayers in the first
case. The New Schonberg at Freiberg has remained stable beyond the
memory of man",

100 peram et oleum perdit—“ loss of labour and oil.”
“In Veteribus et Novis Metallis, and Bermannus, Agricola states that the mines of
Schemnitz were worked 800 years before that time (1530), or about 750 A.D., and, further,

6 BOOK I.

It is not my intention to detract anything from the dignity of agri-
culture, and that the profits of mining are less stable I will always and readily
admit, for the veins do in time cease to yield metals, whereas the fields bring
forth fruits every year. But though the business of mining may be less
reliable it is more productive, so that in reckoning up, what is wanting in
stability is found to be made up by productiveness. Indeed, the yearly
profit of a lead mine in comparison with the fruitfulness of the best fields,
is three times or at least twice as great. How much does the profit from
gold or silver mines exceed that earned from agriculture ? Wherefore truly
and shrewdly does Xenophon! write about the Athenian silver mines:
“There is land of such a nature that if you sow, it does not yield crops,
but if you dig, it nourishes many more than if it had borne fruit.’”’ So let
the farmers have for themselves the fruitful fields and cultivate the fertile
hills for the sake of their produce ; but let them leave to miners the gloomy
valleys and sterile mountains, that they may draw forth from these, gems

d metals which can buy, not only the crops, but all things that are sold.

The critics say further that mining is a perilous occupation to pursue,
because the miners are sometimes killed by the pestilential air which they
breathe ; sometimes their lungs rot away ; sometimes the men perish by being
crushed in masses of rock; sometimes, falling from the ladders into the
shafts, they break their arms, legs, or necks; and it is added there is no com-
pensation which should be thought great enough to equalize the extreme
dangers to safety and life. These occurrences, I confess, are of exceeding
gravity, and moreover, fraught with terror and peril, so that I should con-
sider that the metals should not be dug up at all, if such things were to happen
very frequently to the miners, or if they could not safely guard against such
risks by any means. Who would not prefer to live rather than to possess
all things, even the metals? For he who thus perishes possesses nothing,
but relinquishes all to his heirs. But since things like this rarely happen,
and only in so far.as workmen are careless, they do not deter miners from
carrying on their trade any more than it would deter a carpenter from his,
because one of his mates has acted incautiously and lost his life by falling
from a high building. I have thus answered each argument which critics are
wont to put before me when they assert that mining is an undesirable occupa-
tion, because it involves expense with uncertainty of return, because it is
changeable, and because it is dangerous to those engaged in it.

Now I come to those critics who say that mining is not useful to the
rest of mankind because forsooth, gems, metals, and other mineral products
are worthless in themselves. This admission they try to extort from us,
partly by arguments and examples, partly by misrepresentations and abuse of
us. First, they make use of this argument: “‘ The earth does not conceal
and remove from our eyes those things which are useful and necessary to
that the lead mines of Goslar in the Hartz were worked by Otho the Great (93' 3),
and that the silver mines at Freiberg were discovered during the rule of Prince Otho (a
1170). To continue the argument to-day we could add about 360 years more of life to the

mines of Goslar and Freiberg. See also Note 16, p. 36, and note 109, p. 37.
12Xenophon. Essay on the Revenues of Athens, I., 5.

BOOK I. 7

mankind, but on the contrary, like a beneficent and kindly mother she yields be i

in large abundance from her bounty and brings into the light of day the
herbs, vegetables, grains, and fruits, and the trees. The minerals on the
other hand she buries far beneath in the depth of the ground; therefore,
they should not be sought. But they are dug out by wicked men who, as
the poets say, are the products of the Iron Age.”’ Ovid censures their
audacity in the following lines :—

“ And not only was the rich soil required to furnish corn and due
sustenance, but men even descended into the entrails of the earth, and
they dug up riches, those incentives to vice, which the earth had hidden
and had removed to the Stygian shades. Then destructive iron came
forth, and gold, more destructive than iron ; then war came forth.” *
Another of their arguments is this: Metals offer to men no advantages,

therefore we ought not to search them out. For whereas man is composed

Fling
Bioleits.

c

_

ie” ae

of soul and body, neither is in want of minerals. The sweetest food of the /,. 2

soul is the contemplation of nature, a knowledge of the finest arts and sciences,
an understanding of virtue ; and if he interests his mind in excellent things,
if he exercise his body, he will be satisfied with this feast of noble thoughts and
knowledge, and have no desire for other things. Now although the human
body may be content with necessary food and clothing, yet the fruits of the
earth and the animals of different kinds supply him in wonderful abundance
with food and drink, from which the body may be suitably nourished and
strengthened and life prolonged to old age. Flax, wool, and the skins of
many animals provide plentiful clothing low in price ; while a luxurious kind,
not hard to procure—that is the so called seric material, is furnished by the
down of trees and the webs of the silk worm. So that the body has absolutely
no need of the metals, so hidden in the depths of the earth and for the greater
part very expensive. Wherefore it is said that this maxim of Euripides is
approved in assemblies of learned men, and with good reason was always on
the lips of Socrates :

“ Works of silver and purple are of use, not for human life, but
rather for Tragedians.’’!4

These critics praise also this saying from Timocreon of Rhodes :

“O Unseeing Plutus, would that thou hadst never appeared in the
earth or in the sea or on the land, but that thou didst have thy habita-
tion in Tartarus and Acheron, for out of thee arise all evil things which
overtake mankind ”’}5.

They greatly extol these lines from Phocylides :

“Gold and silver are injurious to mortals ; gold is the source of
crime, the plague of life, and the ruin of all things. Would that thou
were not such an attractive scourge! because of thee arise robberies,

B3Ovid, Metamorphoses, 1., 137 to 143.

14Piogenes Laertius, m., 5. The lines are assigned, however, to Philemon, not
Euripides. (Kock, Comicorum Atticorum Fragmenta ., 512).

15We have not considered it of sufficient interest to cite the references to all of the
minor poets and those whose preserved works are but fragmentary. The translations from
the Greek into Latin are not literal and suffer again by rendering into English ; we have how-
ever considered it our duty to translate Agricola’s view of the meaning.

8 BOOK I.

homicides, warfare, brothers are maddened against brothers, and

children against parents.”

This. from Naumachius also pleases them :

“Gold and silver are but dust, like the stones that lie scattered on
the pebbly beach, or on the margins of the rivers.”

On the other hand, they censure these verses of Euripides :

“‘ Plutus is the god for wise men ; all else is mere folly and at the
same time a deception in words.”

So in like manner these lines from Theognis :

“‘O Plutus, thou most beautiful and placid god! whilst I have thee,
however bad I am, I can be regarded as good.”

They also blame Aristodemus, the Spartan, for these words :

“Money makes the man; no one who is poor is either good or
honoured.”

And they rebuke these songs of Timocles :

“Money is the life and soul of mortal men. He who has not
heaped up riches for himself wanders like a dead man amongst the
living.”

Finally, they blame Menander when he wrote :

“Epicharmus asserts that the gods are water, wind, fire, earth, sun,
and stars. But I am of opinion that the gods of any use to us are silver
and gold ; for if thou wilt set these up in thy house thou mayest seek
whatever thou wilt. All things will fall to thy lot; land, houses, slaves,
silver-work ; moreover friends, judges, and witnesses. Only give freely,
for thus thou hast the gods to serve thee.”

But besides this, the strongest argument of the detractors is that the
fields are devastated by mining operations, for which reason formerly
Italians were warned by law that no one should dig the earth for metals and
so injure their very fertile fields, their vineyards, and their olive groves.
Also they argue that the woods and groves are cut down, for there is need of
an endless amount of wood for timbers, machines, and the smelting of metals.
And when the woods and groves are felled, then are exterminated the beasts
and birds, very many of which furnish a pleasant and agreeable food for man.
Further, when the ores are washed, the water which has been used poisons
the brooks and streams, and either destroys the fish or drives them away.
Therefore the inhabitants of these regions, on account of the devastation of
their fields, woods, groves, brooks and rivers, find great difficulty in procuring
the necessaries of life, and by reason of the destruction of the timber they
are forced to greater expense in erecting buildings. Thus it is said, it is
clear to all that there is greater detriment from mining than the value of
the metals which the mining produces.

So in fierce contention they clamour, showing by such examples as
follow that every great man has been content with virtue, and despised
metals. They praise Bias because he esteemed the metals merely
as fortune’s playthings, not as his real wealth. When his enemies had
captured his native Priene, and his fellow-citizens laden with precious things

BOOK I. 9

had betaken themselves to flight, he was asked by one, why he carried
away none of his goods with him, and he replied, “ I carry all my possessions
with me.” And it is said that Socrates, having received twenty minae sent
to him by Aristippus, a grateful disciple, refused them and sent them back to
him by the command of his conscience. Aristippus, following his example
in this matter, despised gold and regarded it as of no value. And once
when he was making a journey with his slaves, and they, laden with the
gold, went too slowly, he ordered them to keep only as much of it as they
could carry without distress and to throw away the remainder*®. Moreover,
Anacreon of Teos, an ancient and noble poet, because he had been troubled
about them for two nights, returned five talents which had been given him
by Polycrates, saying that they were not worth the anxiety which he had
gone through on their account. In like manner celebrated and exceedingly
powerful princes have imitated the philosophers in their scorn and contempt
for gold and silver. There was for example, Phocion, the Athenian, who was
appointed general of the army so many times, and who, when a large sum of gold
was sent to him as a gift by Alexander, King of Macedon, deemed it trifling and
scorned it. And Marcus Curius ordered the gold to be carried back to the
Samnites, as did also Fabricius Luscinus with regard to the silver and
copper. And certain Republics have forbidden their citizens the use and
employment of gold and silver by law and ordinance ; the Lacedaemonians,
by the decrees and ordinances of Lycurgus, used diligently to enquire among
their citizens whether they possessed any of these things or not, and the
possessor, when he was caught, was punished according to law and justice.
The inhabitants of a town on the Tigris, called Babytace, buried their gold
in the ground so that no one should use it. The Scythians condemned the
use of gold and silver so that they might not become avaricious.

Further are the metals reviled; in the first place people wantonly
abuse gold and silver and call them deadly and nefarious pests of the human
race, because those who possess them are in the greatest peril, for those who
have none lay snares for the possessors of wealth, and thus again and again
the metals have been the cause of destruction and ruin. For example,
Polymnestor, King of Thrace, to obtain possession of his gold, killed Polydorus,
his noble guest and the son of Priam, his father-in-law, and old friend.
Pygmalion, the King of Tyre, in order that he might seize treasures of gold
and silver, killed his sister’s husband, a priest, taking no account of either
kinship or religion. For love of gold Eriphyle betrayed her husband
Amphiaraus to his enemy. Likewise Lasthenes betrayed the city of
Olynthus to Philip of Macedon. The daughter of Spurius Tarpeius, having
been bribed with gold, admitted the Sabines into the citadel of Rome.
Claudius Curio sold his country for gold to Cesar, the Dictator. Gold, too,
was the cause of the downfall of Aesculapius, the great physician, who it was
believed was the son of Apollo. Similarly Marcus Crassus, through his
eager desire for the gold of the Parthians, was completely overcome together
with his son and eleven legions, and became the jest of his enemies ; for they

16Diogenes Laertius, 11.

Io BOOK I.

poured liquid gold into the gaping mouth of the slain Crassus, saying:
“Thou hast thirsted for gold, therefore drink gold.”’

But why need I cite here these many examples from history ??? It is
almost our daily experience to learn that, for the sake of obtaining gold and
silver, doors are burst open, walls are pierced, wretched travellers are struck
down by rapacious and cruel men born to theft, sacrilege, invasion, and
robbery. We see thieves seized and strung up before us, sacrilegious persons
burnt alive, the limbs of robbers broken on the wheel, wars waged for the
same reason, which are not only destructive to those against whom they are
waged, but to those also who carry them on. Nay, but they say that the
precious metals foster all manner of vice, such as the seduction of women,
adultery, and unchastity, in short, crimes of violence against the person.
Therefore the Poets, when they represent Jove transformed into a golden
shower and falling into the lap of Danae, merely mean that he had found
for himself a safe road by the use of gold, by which he might enter the tower
for the purpose of violating the maiden. Moreover, the fidelity of many
men is overthrown by the love of gold and silver, judicial sentences are
bought, and innumerable crimes are perpetrated. For truly, as Propertius
says :

“This is indeed the Golden Age. The greatest rewards come from
gold ; by gold love is won ; by gold is faith destroyed ; by gold is justice
bought ; the law follows the track of gold, while modesty will soon
follow it when law is gone.”

Diphilus says:

“I consider that nothing is more powerful than gold. By it all
things are torn asunder ; all things are accomplished.”’

Therefore, all the noblest and best despise these riches, deservedly and
with justice, and esteem them as nothing. And this is said by the old man
in Plautus :

“T hate gold. It has often impelled many people to many wrong
acts.””

In this country too, the poets inveigh with stinging reproaches against money
coined from gold and silver. And especially did Juvenal : ;

“Since the majesty of wealth is the most sacred thing among us;
although, O pernicious money, thou dost not yet inhabit a temple, nor
have we erected altars to money.”

And in another place :

“Demoralising money first introduced foreign customs, and

voluptuous wealth weakened our race with disgraceful luxury.’’!®
And very many vehemently praise the barter system which men used before
money was devised, and which even now obtains among certain simple
peoples.

And next they raise a great outcry against other metals, as iron, than

47An inspection of the historical incidents mentioned here and further on, indicates
that Agricola relied for such information on Diogenes Laertius, Plutarch, Livy, Valerius
Maximus, Pliny, and often enough on Homer, Horace, and Virgil.

18Juvenal. Satires 1., 1. 112, and v1., 1. 298.

BOOK I. II

which they say nothing more pernicious could have been brought into the
life of man. For it is employed in making swords, javelins, spears, pikes,
arrows—weapons by which men are wounded, and which cause slaughter,
robbery, and wars. These things so moved the wrath of Pliny that he wrote:
“Tron is used not only in hand to hand fighting, but also to form the winged
missiles of war, sometimes for hurling engines, sometimes for lances, some-
times even for arrows. I look upon it as the most deadly fruit of human
ingenuity. For to bring Death to men more quickly we have given wings to
iron and taught it to fly."?® The spear, the arrow from the bow, or the bolt
from the catapult and other engines can be driven into the body of only one
man, while the iron cannon-ball fired through the air, can go through the
bodies of many men, and there is no marble or stone object so hard that it
cannot be shattered by the force and shock. Therefore it levels the highest
towers to the ground, shatters and destroys the strongest walls. Certainly
the ballistas which throw stones, the battering rams and other ancient war
engines for making breaches in walls of fortresses and hurling down strong-
holds, seem to have little power in comparison with our present cannon.
These emit horrible sounds and noises, not less than thunder, flashes
of fire burst from them like the lightning, striking, crushing, and shatter-
ing buildings, belching forth flames and kindling fires even as lightning
flashes. So that with more justice could it be said of the impious men of
our age than of Salmoneus of ancient days, that they had snatched lightning
from Jupiter and wrested it from his hands. Nay, rather there has been
sent from the infernal regions to the earth this force for the destruction of
men, so that Death may snatch to himself as many as possible by one stroke.

But because muskets are nowadays rarely made of iron, and the large
ones never, but of a certain mixture of copper and tin, they confer more
maledictions on copper and tin than on iron. In this connection too, they
mention the brazen bull of Phalaris, the brazen ox of the people of Per-
gamus, racks in the shape of an iron dog or a horse, manacles, shackles,
wedges, hooks, and red-hot plates. Cruelly racked by such instruments,
people are driven to confess crimes and misdeeds which they have never
committed, and innocent men are miserably tortured to death by every
conceivable kind of torment.

It is claimed too, that lead is a pestilential and noxious metal, for men
are punished by means of molten lead, as Horace describes in the ode
addressed to the Goddess Fortune: “ Cruel Necessity ever goes before thee
bearing in her brazen hand the spikes and wedges, while the awful hook and
molten lead are also not lacking.”*° In their desire to excite greater odium
for this metal, they are not silent about the leaden balls of muskets, and they
find in it the cause of wounds and death.

They contend that, inasmuch as Nature has concealed metals far within
the depths of the earth, and because they are not necessary to human life,
they are therefore despised and repudiated by the noblest, and should not be

1°Pliny, XXXIV., 39.
2°Horace. Odes, 1., 35, ll., 17-20.

12 BOOK I.

mined, and seeing that when brought to light they have always proved the
cause of very great evils, it follows that mining is not useful to mankind,
but on the contrary harmfuland destructive. Several good men have
been so perturbed by these tragedies that they conceive an intensely bitter
hatred toward metals, and they wish absolutely that metals had never been
created, or being created, that no one had ever dug them out. The more I
commend the singular honesty, innocence, and goodness of such men, the
more anxious shall I be to remove utterly and eradicate all error from their
minds and to reveal the sound view, which is that the metals are most useful
to mankind.

In the first place then, those who speak ill of the metals and refuse to
make use of them, do not see that they accuse and condemn as wicked the
Creator Himself, when they assert that He fashioned some things vainly
and without good cause, and thus they regard Him as the Author of evils,
which opinion is certainly not worthy of pious and sensible men.

In the next place, the earth does not conceal metals in her depths
because she does not wish that men should dig them out, but because
provident and sagacious Nature has appointed for each thing its place. She
generates them in the veins, stringers, and seams in the rocks, as though
in special vessels and receptacles for such material. The metals cannot be
produced in the other elements because the materials for their formation
are wanting. For if they were generated in the air, a thing that rarely
happens, they could not find a firm resting-place, but by their own force and
weight would settle down on to the ground. Seeing then that metals have
their proper abiding place in the bowels of the earth, who does not see that
these men do not reach their conclusions by good logic ?

They say, ‘‘ Although metals are in the earth, each located in its own
proper place where it originated, yet because they lie thus enclosed and
hidden from sight, they should not be taken out.”’ But, in refutation of these
attacks, which are so annoying, I will on behalf of the metals instance the
fish, which we catch, hidden and concealed though they be in the water, even
in the sea. Indeed, it is far stranger that man, a terrestrial animal, should
search the interior of the sea than the bowels of the earth. For as birds are
born to fly freely through the air, so are fishes born to swim through the
waters, while to other creatures Nature has given the earth that they might
live in it, and particularly to man that he might cultivate it and draw out
of its caverns metals and other mineral products. On the other hand, they
say that we eat fish, but neither hunger nor thirst is dispelled by minerals,
_ nor are they useful in clothing the body, which is another argument by
which these people strive to prove that metals should not be taken out. But
man without metals cannot provide those things which he needs for food and
clothing. For, though the produce of the land furnishes the greatest
abundance of food for the nourishment of our bodies, no labour can be
carried on and completed without tools. The ground itself is turned up
with ploughshares and harrows, tough stalks and the tops of the roots are
broken off and dug up with a mattock, the sown seed is harrowed, the corn

BOOK I. 13

field is hoed and weeded ; the ripe grain with part of the stalk is cut down
by scythes and threshed on the floor, or its ears are cut off and stored in the
barn and later beaten with flails and winnowed with fans, until finally the
pure grain is stored in the granary, whence it is brought forth again when
occasion demands or necessity arises. Again, if we wish to procure better
and more productive fruits from trees and bushes, we must resort to
cultivating, pruning, and grafting, which cannot be done without tools.
Even as without vessels we cannot keep or hold liquids, such as milk, honey,
wine, or oil, neither could so many living things be cared for without
buildings to protect them from long-continued rain and intolerable cold.
Most of the rustic instruments are made of iron, as ploughshares, share-
beams, mattocks, the prongs of harrows, hoes, planes, hay-forks, straw
cutters, pruning shears, pruning hooks, spades, lances, forks, and weed
cutters. Vessels are also made of copper or lead. Neither wooden
instruments or vessels made without iron. Wine cellars, oil- , Stables,
or any other part of a farm building could not be built without iron tools.
Then if the bull, the wether, the goat, or any other domestic animal is led
away from the pasture to the butcher, or if the poulterer brings from the farm
a chicken, a hen, or a capon for the cook, could any of these animals be cut
up and divided without axes and knives? I need say nothing here about
bronze and copper pots for cooking, because for these purposes one could
make use of earthen vessels, but even these in turn could not be made and
fashioned by the potter without tools, for no instruments can be made out
of wood alone, without the use of iron. Furthermore, hunting, fowling, and
fishing supply man with food, but when the stag has been ensnared does not
the hunter transfix him with his spear? As he stands or runs, does he not
pierce him with an arrow? Or pierce him with a bullet? Does not the
fowler in the same way kill the moor-fowl or pheasant with an arrow? Or
does he not discharge into its body the ball from the musket? I will not
speak of the snares and other instruments with which the woodcock, wood-
pecker, and other wild birds are caught, lest I pursue unseasonably and too
minutely single instances. Lastly, with his fish-hook and net does not the
fisherman catch the fish in the sea, in the lakes, in fish-ponds, or in rivers ?
But the hook is of iron, and sometimes we see lead or iron weights attached
to the net. And most fish that are caught are afterward cut up and dis-
embowelled with knives and axes. But, more than enough has been said on
the matter of food.

Now I will speak of clothing, which is made out of wool, flax, feathers,
hair, fur, or leather. First the sheep are sheared, then the wool is combed.
Next the threads are drawn out, while later the warp is suspended in the
shuttle under which passes the wool. This being struck by the comb, at length
cloth is formed either from threads alone or from threads and hair. Flax,
when gathered, is first pulled by hooks. Then it is dipped in water and
afterward dried, beaten into tow with a heavy mallet, and carded, then
drawn out into threads, and finally woven into cloth. But has the artisan
or weaver of the cloth any instrument not made of iron? Can one be made

4 ‘

14 BOOK I.

of wood without the aid of iron? The cloth or web must be cut into lengths
for the tailor. Can this be done without knife or scissors? Can the tailor
sew together any garments without a needle ? Even peoples dwelling beyond
the seas cannot make a covering for their bodies, fashioned of feathers,
without these same implements. Neither can the furriers do without them
in sewing together the pelts of any kind of animals. The shoemaker needs
a knife to cut the leather, another to scrape it, and an awl to perforate it
before he can make shoes. These coverings for the body are either woven
or stitched. Buildings too, which protect the same body from rain, wind,
cold, and heat, are not constructed without axes, saws, and augers.

But what need of more words? If we remove metals from the service
of man, all methods of protecting and sustaining health and more care-
fully preserving the course of life are done away with. If there were no
metals, would pass a horrible and wretched existence in the midst of
wild beasts", they would return to the acorns and fruits and berries of the
forest. They would feed upon the herbs and roots which they plucked up
with their nails. They would dig out caves in which to lie down at night,
and by day they would rove in the woods and plains at random like beasts,
and inasmuch as this condition is utterly unworthy of humanity, with its
splendid and glorious natural endowment, will anyone be so foolish or
obstinate as not to allow that metals are necessary for food and clothing and
that they tend to preserve life ?

Moreover, as the miners dig almost exclusively in mountains otherwise
unproductive, and in valleys invested in gloom, they do either slight damage
to the fields or none at all. Lastly, where woods and glades are cut down,
they may be sown with grain after they have been cleared from the roots of
shrubs and trees. These new fields soon produce rich crops, so that they repair
the losses which the inhabitants suffer from increased cost of timber. More-
over, with the metals which are melted from the ore, birds without number,
edible beasts and fish can be purchased elsewhere and brought to these
mountainous regions.

I will pass to the illustrations I have mentioned. Bias of Priene, when his
country was taken, carried away out of the city none of his valuables. So
strong a man with such a reputation for wisdom had no need to fear personal
danger from the enemy, but this in truth cannot be said of him because he
hastily took to flight ; the throwing away of his goods does not seem to me
so great a matter, for he had lost his house, his estates, and even his country,
than which nothing is more precious. Nay, I should be convinced of Bias’s
contempt and scorn for possessions of this kind, if before his country was
captured he had bestowed them freely on relations and friends, or had
distributed them to the very poor, for this he could have done freely and
without question. Whereas his conduct, which the Greeks admire so
greatly, was due, it would seem, to his being driven out by the enemy and
stricken with fear. Socrates in truth did not despise gold, but would not
accept money for his teaching. As for Aristippus of Cyrene, if he had gath-
ered and saved the gold which he ordered his slaves to throw away, he might

|

ot ea ee ae

BOOK I. 15

have bought the things which he needed for the necessaries of life, and he
would not, by reason of his poverty, have then been obliged to flatter the
tyrant Dionysius, nor would he ever have been called by him a King’s dog.
For this reason Horace, speaking of Damasippus when reviling Staberus for
valuing riches very highly, says :
“‘ What resemblance has the Grecian Aristippus to this fellow ?
He who commanded his slaves to throw away the gold in the midst of
Libya because they went too slowly, impeded by the weight of their
burden—which of these two men is the more insane ? ’’*4
Insane indeed is he who makes more of riches than of virtue. Insane
also is he who rejects them and considers them as worth nothing, instead of
using them with reason. Yet as to the gold which Aristippus on another
occasion flung into the sea from a boat, this he did with a wise and prudent
mind. For learning that it was a pirate boat in which he was sailing, and
fearing for his life, he counted his gold and then throwing it of his own will
into the sea, he groaned as if he had done it unwillingly. But afterward,
when he escaped the peril, he said: ‘ It is better that this gold itself should
be lost than that I should have perished because of it.” Let it be granted
that some philosophers, as well as Anacreon of Teos, despised gold and
silver. Anaxagoras of Clazomenae also gave up his sheep-farms and
became a shepherd. Crates the Theban too, being annoyed that his
estate and other kinds of wealth caused him worry, and that in his con-
templations his mind was thereby distracted, resigned a property valued at
ten talents, and taking a cloak and wallet, in poverty devoted all his
thought and efforts to philosophy. Is it true that because these philo-
sophers despised money, all others declined wealth in cattle? Did they
refuse to cultivate lands or to dwell in houses? There were certainly many,
on the other hand, who, though affluent, became famous in the pursuit of
learning and in the knowledge of divine and human laws, such as Aristotle,
Cicero, and Seneca. As for Phocion, he did not deem it honest to accept the
gold sent to him by Alexander. For if he had consented to use it, the
king as much as himself would have incurred the hatred and aversion of
the Athenians, and these very people were afterward so ungrateful toward
this excellent man that they compelled him to drink hemlock. For what
would have been less becoming to Marcus Curius and Fabricius Luscinus
than to accept gold from their enemies, who hoped that by these means
those leaders could be corrupted or would become odious to their fellow
citizens, their purpose being to cause dissentions among the Romans and
destroy the Republic utterly. Lycurgus, however, ought to have given
instructions to the Spartans as to the use of gold and silver, instead of
abolishing things good in themselves. As to the Babytacenses, who does
not see that they were senseless and envious? For with their gold they might
have bought things of which"they were in need, or even given it to neigh-
bouring peoples to bind them more closely to themselves with gifts and
favours. Finally, the Scythians, by condemning the use of gold and silver
Horace. Satires, 11., 3, ll., 99-102.

16 BOOK I.

#

alone, did not free themselves utterly from avarice, because although he is not
enjoying them, one who can possess other forms of property may also
become avaricious.

Now let us reply to the attacks hurled against the products of mines.
In the first place, they call gold and silver the scourge of mankind because

they are the cause of destruction and ruin to their possessors. But in this °

manner, might not anything that we possess be called a scourge to
human kind,—whether it be a horse, or a garment, or anything else ?
For, whether one rides a splendid horse, or journeys well clad, he would
give occasion to a robber to kill him. Are we then not to ride on horses,
but to journey on foot, because a robber has once committed a murder in
order that he may steal a horse? Or are we not to possess clothing, because
a vagabond with a sword has taken a traveller’s life that he may rob him
of his garment? The possession of gold and silver is similar. Seeing
then that men cannot conveniently do all these things, we should be on our
guard against robbers, and because we cannot always protect ourselves
from their hands, it is the special duty of the magistrate to seize wicked and
villainous men for torture, and, if need be, for execution.

Again, the products of the mines are not themselves the cause of war.
Thus, for example, when a tyrant, inflamed with passion for a woman of
great beauty, makes war on the inhabitants of her city, the fault lies in the
unbridled lust of the tyrant and not in the beauty of the woman. Likewise,
when another man, blinded by a passion for gold and silver, makes war
upon a wealthy people, we ought not to blame the metals but transfer all
blame to avarice. For frenzied deeds and disgraceful actions, which are
wont to weaken and dishonour natural and civil laws, originate from our
own vices. Wherefore Tibullus is wrong in laying the blame for war on
gold, when he says: “‘ This is the fault of a rich man’s gold; there were
no wars when beech goblets were used at banquets.”” But Virgil, speaking of
Polymnestor, says that the crime of the murderer rests on avarice :

“He breaks all law; he murders Polydorus, and obtains gold by
violence. To what wilt thou not drive mortal hearts, thou accursed
hunger for gold ?”

And again, justly, he says, speaking of Pygmalion, who killed Sichaeus :

“ And blinded with the love of gold, he slew him unawares with
stealthy sword.’”’2?

For lust and eagerness after gold and other things make men blind, and
this wicked greed for money, all men in all times and places have considered
dishonourable and criminal. Moreover, those who have been so addicted to
avarice as to be its slaves have always been regarded as mean and sordid.
Similarly, too, if by means of gold and silver and gems men can overcome
the chastity of women, corrupt the honour of many people, bribe the course
of justice and commit innumerable wickednesses, it is not the metals which
are to be blamed, but the evil passions of men which become inflamed and
ignited ; or it is due to the blind and impious desires of their minds. But

"Virgil. neid, ut., 1. 55, and 1, 1. 349.

BOOK I. 17

although these attacks against gold and silver may be directed especially
against money, yet inasmuch as the Poets one after another condemn it,
their criticism must be met, and this can be done by one argument alone.
Money is good for those who use it well ; it brings loss and evil to those who
use it ill. Hence, very rightly, Horace says:

“Dost thou not know the value of money ; and what uses it serves ?

It buys bread, vegetables, and a pint of wine.”

And again in another place :
“Wealth hoarded up is the master or slave of each possessor; it
should follow rather than lead, the ‘ twisted rope.’ ’’*8

When ingenious and clever men considered carefully the system of barter,
which ignorant men of old employed and which even to-day is used by
certain uncivilised and barbarous races, it appeared to them so troublesome
and laborious that they invented money. Indeed, nothing more useful
could have been devised, because a small amount of gold and silver is of as
great value as things cumbrous and heavy ; and so peoples far distant from one
another can, by the use of money, trade very easily in those things which
civilised life can scarcely do without.

The curses which are uttered against iron, copper, and lead have no
weight with prudent and sensible men, because if these metals were done
away with, men, as their anger swelled and their fury became unbridled,
would assuredly fight like wild beasts with fists, heels, nails, and teeth.
They would strike each other with sticks, hit one another with stones, or
dash their foes to the ground. Moreover, a man does not kill another with
iron alone, but slays by means of poison, starvation, or thirst. He may
seize him by the throat and strangle him; he may bury him alive in the
ground; he may immerse him in water and suffocate him; he may burn
or hang him ; so that he can make every element a participant in the death
of men. Or, finally, a man may be thrown to the wild beasts. Another
may be sewn up wholly except his head in a sack, and thus be left to be
devoured by worms; or he may be immersed in water until he is torn to
pieces by sea-serpents. A man may be boiled in oil; he may be greased,
tied with ropes, and left exposed to be stung by flies and hornets; he may
be put to death by scourging with rods or beating with cudgels, or struck
down by stoning, or flung from a high place. Furthermore, a man
may be tortured in more ways than one without the use of metals ; as when
the executioner burns the groins and armpits of his victim with hot wax ;
or places a cloth in his mouth gradually, so that when in breathing he
draws it slowly into his gullet, the executioner draws it back suddenly and
violently ; or the victim’s hands are fastened behind his back, and he is
drawn up little by little with a rope and then let down suddenly. Or
similarly, he may be tied to a beam and a heavy stone fastened by a
cord to his feet, or finally his limbs may be torn asunder. From these
examples we see that it is not metals that are to be condemned, but our
vices, such as anger, cruelty, discord, passion for power, avarice, and lust.

*Horace. Satires, 1., 1. 73 ; and Epistle, 1., 10, 1. 47.

18 BOOK I.

The question next arises, whether we ought to count metals amongst
the number of good things or class them amongst the bad. The Peripatetics
regarded all wealth as a good thing, and merely spoke of externals as having
to do with neither the mind nor the body. Well, let riches be an external
thing. And, as they said, many other things may be classed as good if it is
in one’s power to use them either well or ill. For good men employ them for
good, and to them they are useful. The wicked use them badly, and to
them they are harmful. There is a saying of Socrates, that just as wine
is influenced by the cask, so the character of riches is like their possessors.
The Stoics, whose custom it is to argue subtly and acutely, though they did
not put wealth in the category of good things, they did not count it amongst
the evil ones, but placed it in that class which they term neutral. For to
them virtue alone is good, and vice alone evil. The whole of what remains
is indifferent. Thus, in their conviction, it matters not whether one be in
good health or seriously ill; whether one be handsome or deformed. In
short :

“Whether, sprung from Inachus of old, and thus hast lived
beneath the sun in wealth, or hast been poor and despised among men,
it matters not.”

For my part, I see no reason why anything that is in itself of use should
not be placed in the class of good things. At all events, metals are a
creation of Nature, and they supply many varied and necessary needs of the
human race, to say nothing about their uses in adornment, which are so
wonderfully blended with utility. Therefore, it is not right to degrade them
from the place they hold among the good things. In truth, if there is a
bad use made of them, should they on that account be rightly called evils ?
For of what good things can we not make an equally bad or good use? Let
me give examples from both classes of what we term good. Wine, by far
the best drink, if drunk in moderation, aids the digestion of food, helps to
produce blood, and promotes the juices in all parts of the body. It is of use
in nourishing not only the body but the mind as well, for it disperses our
dark and gloomy thoughts, frees us from cares and anxiety, and restores
our confidence. If drunk in excess, however, it injures and prostrates the
body with serious disease. An intoxicated man keeps nothing to himself ;
he raves and rants, and commits many wicked and infamous acts. On
this subject Theognis wrote some very clever lines, which we may render
thus :

“Wine is harmful if taken with greedy lips, but if drunk in
moderation it is wholesome.’’*®
But I linger too long over extraneous matters. I must pass on to the

gifts of body and mind, amongst which strength, beauty, and genius

occur to me. If then a man, relying on his strength, toils hard to maintain

himself and his family in an honest and respectable manner, he uses the

gift aright, but if he makes a living out of murder and robbery, he uses it

wrongly. Likewise, too, if a lovely woman is anxious to please her husband
**Theognis. Maxims, t., l. 210. -

BOOK I, 19

alone she uses her beauty aright, but if she lives wantonly and is a victim
of passion, she misuses her beauty. In like manner, a youth who devotes
himself to learning and cultivates the liberal arts, uses his genius rightly.
But he who dissembles, lies, cheats, and deceives by fraud and dishonesty,
misuses his abilities. Now, the man who, because they are abused, denies that
wine, strength, beauty, or genius are good things, is unjust and blasphemous
towards the Most High God, Creator of the World ; so he who would remove
metals from the class of blessings also acts unjustly and blasphemously
against Him. Very true, therefore, are the words which certain Greek
poets have written, as Pindar:

“Money glistens, adorned with virtue; it supplies the means by
which thou mayest act well in whatever circumstances fate may
have in store for thee.’’*¢

And Sappho:

“Without the love of virtue gold is a dangerous and harmful guest,
but when it is associated with virtue, it becomes the source and height
of good.”

And Callimachus :

“Riches do not make men great without virtue ; neither do virtues

themselves make men great without some weal
And Antiphanes : ’

“ Now, by the gods, why is it necessary for a man to grow rich?
Why does he desire to possess much money unless that he may, as
much as possible, help his friends, and sow the seeds of a harvest of
gratitude, sweetest of the goddesses.’’?? .
Having thus refuted the arguments and contentions of adversaries,

let us sum up the advantages of the metals. In the)first place, they are
useful to the physician, for they furnish liberally the ingredients for medi-
cines, by which wounds and ulcers are cured, and even plagues; so that
certainly if there were no other reasons why we should explore the depths of
the earth, we should for the sake of medicine alone dig in the mines. Again,
the metals are of use to painters, because they yield certain pigments which,
when united with the painter’s slip, are injured less than others by the moisture
from without. Further, mining is useful to the architects, for thus is found
marble, which is suitable not only for strengthening large buildings, but
also for decoration. It is, moreover, helpful to those whose ambition urges
them toward immortal glory, because it yields metals from which are made
coins, statues, and other monuments, which, next to literary records, give men
inasense immortality. The metals are useful to merchants with very great cause,
for, as I have stated elsewhere, the use of money which is made from metals is
much more convenient to mankind than the old system of exchange of commodi-
ties. In short, towhom are the metals not ofuse ? In very truth, even the works
of art, elegant, embellished, elaborate, useful, are fashioned in various shapes by
the artist from the metals gold, silver, brass, lead, and iron. How few artists

Olymp. u1., 58-60.
her 4.

20 BOOK I.

could make anything that is beautiful and perfect without using metals ? Even
if tools of iron or brass were not used, we could not make tools of wood and
stone without the help of metal. From all these examples are evident the
benefits and advantages derived from metals. We should not have had
these at all unless the science of mining and metallurgy had been discovered
and handed down to us. Who then does not understand how highly useful
they are, nay rather, how necessary to the human race? In a word, man
could not do without the mining industry, nor did Divine Providence will
that he should.

Further, it has been asked whether to work in metals is honourable
employment for respectable people or whether it is not degrading and
dishonourable. We ourselves count it amongst the honourable arts. For
that art, the pursuit of which is unquestionably not impious, nor offensive,
nor mean, we may esteem honourable. That this is the nature of the
mining profession, inasmuch as it promotes wealth by good and honest
methods, we shall show presently. With justice, therefore, we may class
it amongst honourable employments. In the first place, the occupation
of the miner, which I must be allowed to compare with other methods of
acquiring great wealth, is just as noble as that of agriculture; for, as the
farmer, sowing his seed in his fields injures no one, however profitable they
may prove to him, so the miner digging for his metals, albeit he draws forth
great heaps of gold or silver, hurts thereby no mortal man. Certainly these
two modes of increasing wealth are in the highest degree both noble and
honourable. The booty of the soldier, however, is frequently impious,
because in the fury of the fighting he seizes all goods, sacred as well as
profane. The most just king may have to declare war on cruel tyrants,
but in the course of it wicked men cannot lose their wealth and possessions
without dragging into the same calamity innocent and poor people, old
men, matrons, maidens, and orphans. But the miner is able to accumu-
late great riches in a short time, without using any violence, fraud, or
malice. That old saying is, therefore, not always true that ‘‘ Every rich
man is either wicked himself, or is the heir to wickedness.’’

Some, however, who contend against us, censure and attack miners by
saying that they and their children must needs fall into penury after a short
time, because they have heaped up riches by improper means. According
to them nothing is truer than the saying of the poet Naevius :

‘‘ Til gotten gains in ill fashion slip away.”

The following are some of the wicked and sinful methods by which
they say men obtain riches from mining. When a prospect of obtaining
metals shows itself in a mine, either the ruler or magistrate drives out the
rightful owners of the mines from possession, or a shrewd and cunning
neighbour perhaps brings a law-suit against the old possessors in order to
rob them of some part of their property. Or the mine superintendent imposes
on the owners such a heavy contribution on shares, that if they cannot pay,
or will not, they lose their rights of possession ; while the superintendent,
contrary to all that is right, seizes upon all that they have lost. Or,

eS i Os

eS ee

BOOK I. 21

finally, the mine foreman may conceal the vein by plastering over with
clay that part where the metal abounds, or by covering it with earth,
stones, stakes, or poles, in the hope that after several years the pro-
prietors, thinking the mine exhausted, will abandon it, and the foreman
can then excavate that remainder of the ore and keep it for himself.
They even state that the scum of the miners exist wholly by fraud,
deceit, and lying. For to speak of nothing else, but only of those
deceits which are practised in buying and selling, it is said they either
advertise the veins with false and imaginary praises, so that they can
sell the shares in the mines at one-half more than they are worth, or
on the contrary, they sometimes detract from the estimate of them so
that they can buy shares for a small price. By exposing such frauds our
critics suppose all good opinion of miners is lost. Now, all wealth,
whether it has been gained by good or evil means, is liable by some adverse
chance to vanish away. It decays and is dissipated by the fault and care-
lessness of the owner, since he loses it through laziness and neglect, or
wastes and squanders it in luxuries, or he consumes and exhausts it in gifts,
or he dissipates and throws it away in gambling :

*« Just as though money sprouted up again, renewed from an exhausted
coffer, and was always to be obtained from a full heap.”’

It is therefore not to be wondered at if miners do not keep in mind the
counsel given by King Agathocles: ‘‘ Unexpected fortune should be held
in reverence,” for by not doing so they fall into penury; and particularly
when the miners are not content with moderate riches, they not rarely spend
on new mines what they have accumulated from others. But no just ruler
or magistrate deprives owners of their possessions ; that, however, may be
done by a tyrant, who may cruelly rob his subjects not only of their goods
honestly obtained, but even of life itself. And yet whenever I have inquired
into the complaints which are in common vogue, I always find that the
owners who are abused have the best of reasons for driving the men from
the mines ; while those who abuse the owners have no reason to complain
about them. Take the case of those who, not having paid their contributions,
have lost the right of possession, or those who have been expelled by the magis-
trate out of another man’s mine: for some wicked men, mining the small
veins branching from the veins rich in metal, are wont to invade the property
of another person. So the magistrate expels these men accused of wrong,
and drives them from the mine. They then very frequently spread
unpleasant rumours concerning this amongst the populace. Or, to take
another case: when, as often happens, a dispute arises between neighbours,
arbitrators appointed by the magistrate settle it, or the regular judges
investigate and give judgment. Consequently, when the judgment is given,
inasmuch as each party has consented to submit to it, neither side should
complain of injustice ; and when the controversy is adjudged, inasmuch as
the decision is in accordance with the laws concerning mining, one of the
parties cannot be injured by the law. I do not vigorously contest the point,
that at times a mine superintendent may exact a larger contribution

22 BOOK I.

from the owners than necessity demands. Nay, I will admit that a fore-
man may plaster over, or hide with a structure, a vein where it is rich in
metals. Is the wickedness of one or two to brand the many honest with
fraud and trickery ? What body is supposed to be more pious and virtuous
in the Republic than the Senate? Yet some Senators have been detected
in peculations, and have been punished. Is this any reason that so honour-
able a house should lose its good name and fame? The superintendent
cannot exact contributions from the owners without the knowledge and
permission of the Bergmeister or the deputies; for this reason decep-
tion of this kind is impossible. Should the foremen be convicted of
fraud, they are beaten with rods; or of theft, they are hanged. It
is complained that some sellers and buyers of the shares in mines are
fraudulent. I concede it. But can they deceive anyone except a stupid,
careless man, unskilled in mining matters? Indeed, a wise and prudent
man, skilled in this art, if he doubts the trustworthiness of a seller or
buyer, goes at once to the mine that he may for himself examine the vein
which has been so greatly praised or disparaged, and may consider whether
he will buy or sell the shares or not. But people say, though such an one
can be on his guard against fraud, yet a simple man and one who is easily
credulous, is deceived. But we frequently see a man who is trying to mislead
another in this way deceive himself, and deservedly become a laughing-
stock for everyone; or very often the defrauder as well as the dupe is
entirely ignorant of mining. If, for instance, a vein has been found to be
abundant in ore, contrary to the idea of the would-be deceiver, then he who
was to have been cheated gets a profit, and he who has been the deceiver
loses. Nevertheless, the miners themselves rarely buy or sell shares, but
generally they have jurati venditores*® who buy and sell at such prices as they
have been instructed to give or accept. Seeing therefore, that magistrates
decide disputes on fair and just principles, that honest men deceive nobody,
while a dishonest one cannot deceive easily, or if he does he cannot do so
with impunity, the criticism of those who. wish to disparage the honesty of
miners has therefore no force or weight.

In the next place, the occupation of the miner is objectionable to
nobody. For who, unless he be naturally malevolent and envious, will
hate the man who gains wealth as it were from heaven? Or who will hate
a man who to amplify his fortune, adopts a method which is free from
reproach ? A moneylender, if he demands an excessive interest, incurs the
hatred of men. If he demands a moderate and lawful rate, so that he is not
injurious to the public generally and does not impoverish them, he fails to
become very rich from his business. Further, the gain derived from mining
is not sordid, for how can it be such, seeing that it is so great, so plentiful,
and of so innocent a nature. A merchant’s profits are mean and base when
he sells counterfeit and spurious merchandise, or puts far too high a price
on goods that he has purchased for little; for this reason the merchant

28Jurati Vendttores—‘‘ Sworn brokers.” (?)

BOOK I. 23

would be held in no less odium amongst good men than is the usurer, did
they not take account of the risk he runs to secure his merchandise. In
truth, those who on this point speak abusively of mining for the sake of
detracting from its merits, say that in former days men convicted of crimes
and misdeeds were sentenced to the mines and were worked as slaves. But
to-day the miners receive pay, and are engaged like other workmen in the
common trades.

Certainly, if mining is a shameful and discreditable employment for a
gentleman because slaves once worked mines, then agriculture also will not be
a very creditable employment, because slaves once cultivated the fields, and
even to-day do so among the Turks; nor will architecture be considered
honest, because some slaves have been found skilful in that profession ;
nor medicine, because not a few doctors have been slaves; nor will any other
worthy craft, because men captured by force of arms have practised it.
Yet agriculture, architecture, and medicine are none the less counted
amongst the number of honourable professions; therefore, mining
ought not for this reason to be excluded from them. But suppose we
grant that the hired miners have a sordid employment. We do not mean
by miners only the diggers and other workmen, but also those skilled in the
mining arts, and those who invest money in mines. Amongst them can be
counted kings, princes, republics, and from these last the most esteemed
citizens. And finally, we include amongst the overseers of mines the noble
Thucydides, the historian, whom the Athenians placed in charge of the
mines of Thasos.*® And it would not be unseemly for the owners themselves
to work with their own hands on the works or ore, especially if they them-
selves have contributed to the cost of the mines. Just as it is not undignified
for great men to cultivate their own land. Otherwise the Roman Senate
would not have created Dictator L. Quintius Cincinnatus, as he was at
work in the fields, nor would it have summoned to the Senate House the
chief men of the State from their country villas. Similarly, in our day,
Maximilian Cesar would not have enrolled Conrad in the ranks of the nobles
known as Counts ; Conrad was really very poor when he served in the mines
of Schneeberg, and for that reason he was nicknamed the “‘ poor man”’ ; but

**There is no doubt that Thucydides had some connection with gold mines ; he himself
is the authority for the statement that he worked mines in Thrace. Agricola seems to have
obtained his idea that Thucydides held an appointment from the Athenians in charge of
mines in Thasos, from Marcellinus (Vita, Thucydides, 30), who also says that Thucydides
obtained possession of mines in Thrace through his marriage with a Thracian woman, and
that it was while residing on the mines at Scapte-Hyle that he wrote his history. Later

scholars, however, find little warrant for these assertions. The gold mines of an
island off the mainland of Thrace—are uently mentioned by the ancient authors.
Herodotus, vi., 46-47, says :—‘‘ Their (the ians’) revenue was derived partly from

“their possessions upon the mainland, partly from the mines which they owned. They
“were masters of the gold mines of Scapte-Hyle, the yearly produce of which amounted to
“eighty talents. Their mines in Thasos yi less, but still were so prolific that besides
“being entirely free from land-tax they had a surplus of income derived from the two
“sources of their territory on the mainland and their mines, in common years two hundred
“and in best years three hundred talents. I myself have seen the mines in question. By
“far the most curious of them are those which the Phoenicians discovered at the time
“when they went with Thasos and colonized the island, which took its name from him.

24 BOOK I.

not many years after, he attained wealth from the mines of Fiirst, which
is a city in Lorraine, and took his name from ‘“ Luck.’°® Nor would
King Vladislaus have restored to the Assembly of Barons, Tursius, a
citizen of Cracow, who became rich through the mines in that part of the
kingdom of Hungary which was formerly called Dacia.*! Nay, not even the
common worker in the mines is vile and abject. For, trained to vigilance
and work by night and day, he has great powers of endurance when occasion
demands, and easily sustains the fatigues and duties of a soldier, for he is
accustomed to keep long vigils at night, to wield iron tools, to dig trenches,
to drive tunnels, to make machines, and to carry burdens. Therefore, experts
in military affairs prefer the miner, not only to a commoner from the town,
but even to the rustic.

But to bring this discussion to an end, inasmuch as the chief callings
are those of the moneylender, the soldier, the merchant, the farmer, and the
miner, I say, inasmuch as usury is odious, while the spoil cruelly captured
from the possessions of the people innocent of wrong is wicked in the sight
of God and man, and inasmuch as the calling of the miner excels in honour
and dignity that of the merchant trading for lucre, while it is not less noble
though far more profitable than agriculture, who can fail to realize that
mining is a calling of peculiar dignity ? Certainly, though it is but one of
ten important and excellent methods of acquiring wealth in an honourable
way, a careful and diligent man can attain this result in no easier way

than by mining.

“These Phoenician workings are in Thasos itself, between Coenyra and a place called
“Aenyra over against Samothrace; a high mountain has been turned upside down in
“the search for ores.’’ (Rawlinson’s Trans.). The occasion of this statement of Herodotus
was the relations of the Thasians with Darius (521-486 B.c.). The date of the Phoenician
colonization of Thasos is highly nebular—anywhere from 1200 to 900 B.c.

S°Agricola, De Veteribus et Novis Metallis, Book 1., p. 392, says :—‘‘ Conrad, whose
“nickname in former years was ‘ pauper,’ suddenly became rich from the silver mines of
‘‘Mount Jura, known as the Firstwm.’’ He was ennobled with the title of Graf Cuntz
von Gliick by the Emperor Maximilian (who was Emperor of the Holy Roman Empire,
1493-1519). Conrad was originally a working miner at Schneeberg where he was known
as Armer Cuntz (poor Cuntz or Conrad) and grew wealthy from the mines of Fiirst in
Leberthal. This district is located in the Vosges Mountains on the borders of Lorraine
and Upper Alsace. The story of Cuntz or Conrad von Gliick is mentioned by Albinus
(Metssmische Land und Berg Chronica, Dresden, 1589, p. 116), Mathesius (Sarepia, Nurem-
berg, 1578, fol. xvi.), and by others.

*1Vladislaus III. was King of Poland, 1434-44, and also became King of Hungary in
1440. Tursius seems to be a Latinized name and cannot be identified.

END OF BOOK I.

1
'

ee a a

ae ea ee a ee

BOOK. II.

PRE ~~ JUALITIES which the perfect miner should possess

and the arguments which are urged for and against
the arts of mining and metallurgy, as well
jas the people occupied in the industry, I
| have sufficiently discussed in the first Book. Now
I have determined to give more ample information
| concerning the miners.

In the first place, it is indispensable that they
. SS) should worship God with reverence, and that they
understand the matters of which I am going to speak, and that they
take good care that each individual performs his duties efficiently and
diligently. It is decreed by Divine Providence that those who know
what they ought to do and then take care to do it properly, for the
most part meet with good fortune in all they undertake; on the other
hand, misfortune overtakes the indolent and those who are careless in
their work. No person indeed can, without great and sustained effort and
labour, store in his mind the knowledge of every portion of the metallic
arts which are involved in operating mines. If a man has the means
of paying the necessary expense, he hires as many men as he needs, and
sends them to the various works. Thus formerly Sosias, the Thracian, sent
into the silver mines a thousand slaves whom he had hired from the Athenian
Nicias, the son of Niceratus’. But if a man cannot afford the expenditure
he chooses of the various kinds of mining that work which he himself can
most easily and efficiently do. Of these kinds, the two most important
are the making prospect trenches and the washing of the sands of rivers, for
out of these sands are often collected gold dust, or certain black stones
from which tin is smelted, or even gems are sometimes found in them ; the
trenching occasionally lays bare at the grass-roots veins which are found rich
in metals. If therefore by skill or by luck, such sands or veins shall fall
into his hands, he will be able to establish his fortune without expenditure,
and from poverty rise to wealth. If on the contrary, his hopes are not realised,
then he can desist from washing or digging.

When anyone, in an endeavour to increase his fortune, meets the
expenditure of a mine alone, it is of great importance that he should attend
to his works and personally superintend everything that he has ordered to
be done. For this reason, he should either have his dwelling at the mine,

1Xenophon. Essay on the Revenues of Athens, Iv., 14.

“ But we cannot but feel surprised that the State, when it sees many private individuals
“enriching themselves from its resources, does not imitate their proceedings ; for we heard
‘long ago, indeed, at least such of us as attended to these matters, that Nicias the son of
“Niceratus kept a thousand men employed in the silver mines, whom he let on hire to
* Sosias of Thrace on condition that he should give him for each an obolus a day, free of all
“charges; and this number he always supplied undiminished.” (See also Note 6).
An obolus a day each, would be about 23 oz. Troy of silver per day for the whole number.
In modern value this would, of course, be but about 50s. per day, but in purchasing power
the value would probably be 100 to 1 (see Note on p 28). Nicias was estimated to have a

fortune of 100 talents—about 83,700 Troy ounces of silver, and was one of the wealthiest of
the Athenians. (Plutarch, Life of Nicias).

26 BOOK II.

where he may always be in sight of the workmen and always take care that
none neglect their duties, or else he should live in the neighbourhood, so
that he may frequently inspect his mining works. Then he may send word
by a messenger to the workmen that he is coming more frequently than
he really intends to come, and so either by his arrival or by the intimation
of it, he so frightens the workmen that none of them perform their duties
otherwise than diligently. When he inspects the mines he should praise the
diligent workmen and occasionally give them rewards, that they and the
others may become more zealous in their duties; on the other hand, he
should rebuke the idle and discharge some of them from the mines and
substitute industrious men in their places. Indeed, the owner should
frequently remain for days and nights in the mine, which, in truth, is no
habitation for the idle and luxurious; it is important that the owner who
is diligent in increasing his wealth, should frequently himself descend into
the mine, and devote some time to the study of the nature of the veins and
stringers, and should observe and consider all the methods of working, both
inside and outside the mine. Nor is this all he ought to do, for sometimes
he should undertake actual labour, not thereby demeaning himself, but in
order to encourage his workmen by his own diligence, and to teach
them their art; for that mine is well conducted in which not only the
foreman, but also the owner himself, gives instruction as to what ought to
be done. A certain barbarian, according to Xenophon, rightly remarked
to the King of Persia that ‘‘ the eye of the master feeds the horse,’’* for the
master’s watchfulness in all things is of the utmost importance.

When several share together the expenditure on a mine, it is convenient
and useful to elect from amongst their own number a mine captain, and
also a foreman. For, since men often look after their own interests but
neglect those of others, they cannot in this case take care of their own without
at the same time looking after the interests of the others, neither can they
neglect the interests of the others without neglecting their own. But if
no man amongst them be willing or able to undertake and sustain the bur-
dens of these offices, it will be to the common interest to place them in the
hands of most diligent men. Formerly indeed, these things were looked
after by the mining prefect®, because the owners were kings, as Priam, who
owned the gold mines round Abydos, or as Midas, who was the owner of
those situated in®?Mount Bermius, or as Gyges, or as Alyattes, or as Croesus,
who was the owner of those mines near a deserted town between Atarnea
and Pergamum‘; sometimes the mines belonged to a Republic, as, for

Xenophon. Occonomicus xu., 20. ‘‘‘I approve,’ said Ischomachus, ‘of the bar-
“barian’s answer to the King who found a good horse, and, wishing to fatten it as soun as
‘possible, asked a man with a good reputation for horsemanship what would do it?’ The
“‘man’s reply was: ‘Its master’s eye.’ ”’

8Praefecius Metallorum. In Saxony this official was styled the Berghaupimann. For
further information see page 94 and note on page 78.

‘This statement is either based upon Apollodorus, whom Agricola does not mention
among his authorities, or on Strabo, whom he does so include. The former in his work on
Mythology makes such a statement, for which Strabo (xIv., 5, 28) takes him to task as
follows : ‘‘ With this vain intention they collected the stories related by the Scepsian

a

Ee ee ee ee

BOOK II. 27

instance, the prosperous silver mines in Spain which belonged to Carthage? ;
sometimes they were the property of great and illustrious families, as were
the Athenian mines in Mount Laurion®.

When a man owns mines but is ignorant of the art of mining, then
it is advisable that he should share in common with others the expenses,
not of one only, but of several mines. When one man alone meets the
expense for a long time of a whole mine, if good fortune bestows on him a
vein abundant in metals, or in other products, he becomes very wealthy ; if,
on the contrary, the mine is poor and barren, in time he will lose everything
which he has expended on it. But the man who, in common with others,
has laid out his money on several mines in a region renowned for its wealth
of metals, rarely spends it in vain, for fortune usually responds to his
hopes in part. For when out of twelve veins in which he has a joint interest

‘‘ (Demetrius), and taken from Callisthenes and other writers, who did not clear them from
“false notions respecting the Halizones; for example, that the wealth of Tantalus and of the
“ Pelopidae was derived, it is said, from the mines about Phrygia and Sipylus; that of Cadmus
“from the mines of Thrace and Mount Pangaeum ; that of Priam from the gold mines of
“ Astyra, near Abydos (of which at present there are small remains, yet there is a large
“quantity of matter ejected, and the excavations are proofs of former workings); that of
“Midas from the mines about Mount Bermium ; that of Gyges, Alyattes, and Croesus, from
“the mines in Lydia and the small deserted city between Atarneus and Pergamum, where
“are the sites of exhausted mines.” (Hamilton’s Trans., Vol. 11., p. 66).

In adopting this view, icola apparently applied a wonderful realism to some Greek
mythology—for instance, in the legend of Midas, which tells of that king being rewarded by
the god Dionysus, who ted his request that all he touched might turn to gold; but the
inconvenience of the gift drove him to pray for relief, which he obtained by bathing in the
Pactolus, the sands of which thereupon became highly auriferous. Priam was, of course, King
of Troy, but Homer does not exhibit him as a mine-owner. Gyges, Alyattes, and Croesus
were successively Kings of Lydia, from to 546 B.c., and were no doubt possessed of great
treasure in gold. Some few years ago we had occasion to inquire into extensive old workings
locally reputed to be Croesus’ mines, at a place some distance north of Smyrna, which would
correspond very closely to the locality here mentioned.

'There can be no doubt that the Carthaginians worked the mines of Spain on an
extensive scale for a very long > asia anterior to their conquest by the Romans, but whether
the mines were worked by the Government or not we are unable to find any evidence.

*The silver mines of Mt. Laurion formed the economic mainstay of Athens for the
three centuries during which the State had the ascendency in Greece, and there can be no
doubt that the dominance of Athens and its position as a sea-power were directly due to the
revenues from the mines. The first working of the mines is shrouded in mystery. The
scarcity of silver in the time of Solon (638-598 B.c.) would not indicate any very considerable
output at that time. According to Xenophon (Essay on Revenue of Athens, Iv., 2), written
about 355 B.c., ‘‘ they were wrought in very ancient times.” The first definite discussion of
the mines in Greek record begins about 500 B.c., for about that time the royalties began to
figure in the Athenian Budget (Aristotle, Constitution of Athens, 47). There can be no doubt
that the mines reached great prosperity prior to the Persian invasion. In the year 484 B.c.
the mines returned roo Talents (about sips oz. Troy) to the Treasury, and this, on the
advice of Themistocles, was devoted to the construction of the fleet which conquered the
Persians at Salamis (480 B.c.). The mines were much interfered with by the Spartan
invasions from 431 to 425 B.c., and again by their occupation in 413 B.c.; and by 355 B.c.,
when Xenophon wrote the “ Revenues,” exploitation had fallen to a low ebb, for which he
proposes the remedies noted by Agricola on p. 28. By the end of the 4th Century,
B.c., the mines had again reached considerable prosperity, as is evidenced by Demosthenes’
orations against Pantaenetus and inst Phaenippus, and by L ’ prosecution of

ilos for ing the supporting pillars. The domination of ians under Philip
and Alexander at end of the 4th and beginning of the 3rd Centuries B.c., however, so
flooded Greece with money from the mines of Thrace, that this probably interfered with
Laurion, at this time, in any event, began the ‘decadence of these mines. Synchronous
also was the decadence of iy Bh and, but for fitful displays, the State was not able to main-
tain even its own independence, not to mention its position as a dominant State. Finally,
Strabo, writing about 30 B.c. gives the epitaph of every mining district—reworking the
dumps. He says (1x., I, 23): “ The silver mines in Attica were at first of importance, but

28 BOOK. II.

one yields an abundance of metals, it not only gives back to the owner the
money he has spent, but also gives a profit besides ; certainly there will
be for him rich and profitable mining, if of the whole number, three, or four,
or more veins should yield metal. Very similar to this is the advice which
Xenophon gave to the Athenians when they wished to prospect for new
veins of silver without suffering loss. ‘‘ There are,” he said, “‘ ten tribes
of Athenians; if, therefore, the State assigned an equal number of
slaves to each tribe, and the tribes participated equally in all the new veins,
undoubtedly by this method, if a rich vein of silver were found by one tribe,
whatever profit were made from it would assuredly be shared by the whole
number. And if two, three, or four tribes, or even half the whole number
find veins, their works would then become more profitable ; and it is not
“probable that the work of all the tribes will be disappointing ’’’. Although
this advice of Xenophon is full of prudence, there is no opportunity for it
except in free and wealthy States; for those people who are under the
authority of kings and princes, or are kept in subjection by tyranny, do not
dare, without permission, to incur such expenditure ; those who are endowed
with little wealth and resources cannot do so on account of insufficient funds.
Moreover, amongst our race it is not customary for Republics to have slaves
whom they can hire out for the benefit of the people®; but, instead, now-
adays those who are in authority administer the funds for mining in the name
of the State, not unlike private individuals.

“are now exhausted. The workmen, when the mines yielded a bad return to their labour,
“committed to the furnace the old refuse and scoria, and hence obtained very pure silver,
‘for the former workmen had carried on the process in the furnace unskilfully.”

Since 1860, the mines have been worked with some success by a French Company,
thus carrying the mining history of this district over a period of twenty-seven centuries.
The most excellent of many memoirs upon the mines at Laurion, not only for its critical,
historical, and archeological value, but also because of its author’s great insight into mining
and metallurgy, is that of Edouard Ardaillon (Les Mines du Laurion dans l Antiquité. Paris,
1897). We have relied considerably upon this careful study for the following notes, and
would refer others to it for a short bibliography on the subject. We would mention in passing
that Augustus Boeckh’s “ Silver Mines of Laurion,”’ which is incorporated with his ‘‘ Public
Economy of Athens” (English Translation by Lewis, London, 1842) has been too much

relied upon by English students. It is no doubt the product of one acquainted with written —

history, but without any special knowledge of the industry and it is b on no antiquarian re-
search. The Mt. Laurion mining district is located near the southern end of the Attic Peninsula.
The deposits are silver-lead, and they occur along the contact between approximately hori-
zontal limestones and slates. There are two principal beds of each, thus forming three
principal contacts. The most metalliferous of these contacts are those at the base of the
slates, the lowest contact of the series being the richest. The ore-bodies were most irregular,
varying greatly in size, from a thin seam between schist planes, to very large bodies containing
as much as 200,000 cubic metres. The ores are argentiferous galena, accompanied by con-
siderable amounts of blende and pyrites, all oxidized near the surface. The ores worked by
the Ancients appear to have been fairly rich in lead, for the discards worked in recent years by
the French Company, and the pillars left behind, ran 8% to 10% lead. The ratio of silver was
from 40 to go ounces per ton of lead. The upper contacts were exposed by erosion and could
be entered by tunnels, but the lowest and most prolific contact line was only to be reached by
shafts. The shafts were ordinarily from four to six feet square, and were undoubtedly cut by
hammer and chisel; they were as much as 380 feet deep. In some cases long inclines for
travelling roads join the vertical shafts in depth. The drives, whether tunnels or from
shafts, were not level, but followed every caprice of the sinuous contact. They were from
two to two and a half feet wide, often driven in parallels with cross-cuts between, in order to
exploit every corner of the contact. The stoping of ore-bodies discovered was undertaken
quite systematically, the methods depending in the main on the shape of the ore-body. If
the body was large, its dimensions were first determined by drives, crosscuts, rises, and

y

ea ee ee ee eS ee ee ee,

BOOK. II. 29

Some owners prefer to buy shares? in mines abounding in metals,
rather than to be troubled themselves to search for the veins; these men
employ an easier and less uncertain method of increasing their property.
Although their hopes in the shares of one or another mine may be frustrated,
the buyers of shares should not abandon the rest of the mines, for all the
money expended will be recovered with interest from some other mine.
They should not buy only high priced shares in those mines producing metals,
nor should they buy too many in neighbouring mines where metal has not
yet been found, lest, should fortune not respond, they may be exhausted by
their losses and have nothing with which they may meet their expenses
or buy other shares which may replace their losses. This calamity over-
takes those who wish to grow suddenly rich from mines, and instead, they
become very much poorer than before. So then, in the buying of shares,
as in other matters, there should be a certain limit of expenditure which
miners should set themselves, lest blinded by the desire for excessive wealth,
they throw all their money away. Moreover, a prudent owner, before he
buys shares, ought to go to the mine and carefully examine the nature of the
vein, for it is very important that he should be on his guard lest fraudulent
sellers of shares should deceive him. Investors in shares may perhaps
become less wealthy, but they are more certain of some gain than those who
mine for metals at their own expense, as they are more cautious in trusting
to fortune. Neither ought miners to be altogether distrustful of fortune, as
we see some are, who as soon as the shares of any mine begin to go up in

winzes, as the case might require. If the ore was mainly overhead it was overhand-stoped,
and the stopes filled as work progressed, inclined winzes being occasionally driven from the
stopes to the original entry drives. If the ore was mainl ow, it was underhand-stoped,

being left if n —such pillars in some cases Lett bere feet high. They also
employed timber and artificial pillars. The mines were practically dry. There is little
sevice of breaking by fire. The ore was hand-sorted underground and carried out by the
slaves, and in some cases apparently the windlass was used. It was treated by grinding in
mills and concentrating upon a sort of buddle. These concentrates—mostly galena—were
smelted in low furnaces and the lead was subsequently cupelled. Further details of
metallurgical methods will be found in Notes on p. 391 and p. 465, on metallurgical subjects.

The mines were worked by slaves. Even the overseers were at times apparently
slaves, for we find (Xenophon, Memorabilia, u.,5) that Nicias paid a whole talent for a good
overseer. A talent would be about 837 Troy ounces of silver. As wages of skilled labour
were about two and one half pennyweights of silver 7 diem, and a family income of 100
ounces of silver per annum was affluence, the ratio of purchasing power of Attic coinage to
modern would be about roo tor. Therefore this mine manager was worth in modern value
roughly le The mines were the ne ing of the State. The areas were defined by
vertical boundaries, and were let on lease for definite periods for a fixed annual rent.
More or discussion of the law will be found on p. 83.

enophon. (Essay on The Revenues, tv., 30). “I think, however, that I am

‘able to give some advice with regard to this difficulty also (the risk of opening new mines),
“and to show how new igcorg may be conducted with the greatest safety. ere are ten
“tribes at Athens, and if to each of these the State should assign an equal number of slaves,
“and the tribes should all make new cuttings, sharing their fortunes in common, then if but
“one tribe should make any useful discovery it would point out something profitable to the
“ whole ; but if two, three, or four, or half the number should make some discovery, it is
“plain that the works would be more profitable in proportion, and that they should all fail
“is contrary to all experience in past times.” (Watson’s Trans. p. 258). :

2 *Agricola here refers to the proposal of Xenophon for the State to collect slaves and
hire them to work the mines of Laurion. There is’no evidence that this recommendation was
ever carried out. a,

'Partes. Agricola, p. 89-91, describes in detail the ization and management of
these share companies. See Note 8, p. go. re zd

5 ~

30 BOOK Ii.

value, sell them, on which account they seldom obtain even moderate wealth.
There are some people who wash over the dumps from exhausted and
abandoned mines, and those dumps which are derived from the drains of
tunnels ; and others who smelt the old slags ; from all of which they make an
ample return.

Now a miner, before he begins to mine the veins, must consider seven
things, namely :—the situation, the conditions, the water, the roads, the
climate, the right of ownership, and the neighbours. There are four kinds
of situations—mountain, hill, valley, and plain. Of these four, the
first two are the most easily mined, because in them tunnels can be
driven to drain off the water, which often makes mining operations very
laborious, if it does not stop them altogether. The last two kinds of
ground are more troublesome, especially because tunnels cannot be driven
in such places. Nevertheless, a prudent miner considers all these four
sorts of localities in the region in which he happens to be, and he searches for
veins in those places where some torrent or other agency has removed and
swept the soil away ; yet he need not prospect everywhere, but since there
is a great variety, both in mountains and in the three other kinds of
localities, he always selects from them those which will give him the best
chance of obtaining wealth.

In the first place, mountains differ greatly in position, some being
situated in even and level plains, while others are found in broken and.
elevated regions, and others again seem to be piled up, one mountain upon’
another. The wise miner does not mine in mountains which are situated on
open plains, neither does he dig in those which are placed on the summits of
mountainous regions, unless by some chance the veins in those mountains
have been denuded of their surface covering, and abounding in metals and
other products, are exposed plainly to his notice,—for with regard to what
I have already said more than once, and though I never repeat it again,
I wish to emphasize this exception as to the localities which should
not be selected. All districts do not possess a great number of mountains ~
crowded together ; some have but one, others two, others three, or perhaps
a few more. In some places there are plains lying between them ; in others
the mountains are joined together or separated only by narrow valleys.
The miner should not dig in those solitary mountains, dispersed through
the plains and open regions, but only in those which are connected and
joined with others. Then again, since mountains differ in size, some being
very large, others of medium height, and others more like hills than
mountains, the miner rarely digs in the largest or the smallest of them,
but generally only in those of medium size. Moreover, mountains have a
great variety of shapes; for with some the slopes rise gradually, while
others, on the contrary, are all precipitous ; in some others the slopes are
gradual on one side, and on the other sides precipitous ; some are drawn
out in length; some are gently curved; others assume different
shapes. But the miner may dig in all parts of them, except where there
are precipices, and he should not neglect even these latter if metallic veins

BOOK. II. 31

are exposed before his eyes. There are just as great differences in hills as
there are in mountains, yet the miner does not dig except in those situated
in mountainous districts, and even very rarely in those. It is however very
little to be wondered at that the hill in the Island of Lemnos was excavated,
for the whole is of a reddish-yellow colour, which furnishes for the inhabit-
ants that valuable clay so especially beneficial to mankind!®. In like
manner, other hills are excavated if chalk or other varieties of earth are
exposed, but these are not prospected for.

There are likewise many varieties of valleys and plains. One kind is
enclosed on the sides with its outlet and entrance open; another has either
its entrance or its outlet open and the rest of it is closed in; both of these are
properly called valleys. There is a third variety which is surrounded on all
sides by mountains, and these are called convalles. Some valleys again,
have recesses, and others have none; one is wide, another narrow; one
is long, another short ; yet another kind is not higher than the neighbouring
plain, and others are lower than the surrounding flat country. But the
miner does not dig in those surrounded on all sides by mountains, nor in those
that are open, unless there be a low plain close at hand, or unless a vein
of metal descending from the mountains should extend into the valley.
Plains differ from one another, one being situated at low elevation,
and others higher, one being level and another with a slight incline. The
miner should never excavate the low-lying plain, nor one which is perfectly
level, unless it be in some mountain, and rarely should he mine in the other
kinds of plains.

With regard to the conditions of the locality the miner should
not contemplate mining without considering whether the place be
covered with trees or is bare. If it be a wooded place, he who digs there
has this advantage, besides others, that there will be an abundant supply of
wood for his underground timbering, his machinery, buildings, smelting,
and other necessities. If there is no forest he should not mine there unless
there is a river near, by which he can carry down the timber. Yet wherever
there is a hope that pure gold or gems may be found, the ground can
be turned up, even though there is no forest, because the gems need only
to be polished and the gold to be purified. Therefore the inhabitants of
hot regions obtain these substances from rough and sandy places, where
sometimes there are not even shrubs, much less woods.

The miner should next consider the locality, as to whether it has a
perpetual supply of running water, or whether it is always devoid of water
except when a torrent supplied by rains flows down from the summits of the
mountains. The place that Nature has provided with a river or stream can

1°This island in the northern A2gean Sea has produced this “earth” from before
Theophrastus’ time (372-287 B.c.) down to the present day. According to Dana (System of
poeeci of 689), it is cimolite, a hydrous silicate of aluminium. The Ancients distinguished
two kinds,—one sort used as a pigment, and the other for medicinal purposes. This latter
was dug with great ceremony at a certain time of the year, moulded into cubes, and stamped
with a goat,—the symbol of Diana. It thus became known as éerra sigillata, and was an
article of apothecary commerce down to the last century. _It is described by Galen (xu1., 12),
Dioscorides (v., 63), and Pliny (xxxv., 14), as a remedy for ulcers and snake bites.

42 BOOK II.

be made serviceable for many things; for water will never be wanting and
can be carried through wooden pipes to baths in dwelling-houses; it may
be carried to the works, where the metals are smelted; and finally, if the
conditions of the place will allow it, the water can be diverted into the
tunnels, so that it may turn the underground machinery. Yet on the other
hand, to convey a constant supply of water by artificial means to mines
where Nature has denied it access, or to convey the ore to the stream,
increases the expense greatly, in proportion to the distance the mines are
away from the river.

The miner also should consider whether the roads from the neighbouring
regions to the mines are good or bad, short or long. For since a region
which is abundant in mining products very often yields no agricultural
produce, and the necessaries of life for the workmen and others must all be
imported, a bad and long road occasions much loss and trouble with
porters and carriers, and this increases the cost of goods brought in, which,
therefore, must be sold at high prices. This injures not so much the work-
men as the masters ; since on account of the high price of goods, the work-
men are not content with the wages customary for their labour, nor can
they be, and they ask higher pay from the owners. And if the owners
refuse, the men will not work any longer in the mines but will go elsewhere.
Although districts which yield metals and other mineral products are
generally healthy, because, being often situated on high and lofty ground, —
they are fanned by every wind, yet sometimes they are unhealthy, as has
been related in my other book, which is called “ De Natura Eorum Quae
Effiuunt ex Terra.” Therefore, a wise miner does not mine in such places,
even if they are very productive, when he perceives unmistakable signs
of pestilence. For if a man mines in an unhealthy region he may be alive
one hour and dead the next.

Then, the miner should make careful and thorough investigation con-
cerning the lord of the locality, whether he be a just and good man or a
tyrant, for the latter oppresses men by force of his authority, and seizes
their possessions for himself; but the former governs justly and lawfully
and serves the common good. The miner should not start mining opera-
tions in a district which is oppressed by a tyrant, but should carefully
consider if in the vicinity there is any other locality suitable for mining and
make up his mind if the overlord there be friendly or inimical. If he be
inimical the mine will be rendered unsafe through hostile attacks, in one of
which all of the gold or silver, or other mineral products, laboriously col-
lected with much cost, will be taken away from the owner and his workmen
will be struck with terror ; overcome by fear, they will hastily fly, to free
themselves from the danger to which they are exposed. In this case, not
only are the fortunes of the miner in the greatest peril but his very life is
in jeopardy, for which reason he should not mine in such places.

Since several miners usually come to mine the veins in one locality, a
settlement generally springs up, for the miner who began first cannot keep
it exclusively for himself. The Bergmetster gives permits to some to mine ©

ee

BOOK II. 33

the superior and some the inferior parts of the veins; to some he gives
the cross veins, to others the inclined veins. If the man who first starts
work finds the yein to be metal-bearing or yielding other mining products,
it will not be to his advantage to cease work because the neighbourhood may
be evil, but he will guard and defend his rights both by arms and by the law.
When the sia ies delimits the boundaries of each owner, it is the duty
of a good miner to keep within his bounds, and of a prudent one to repel
encroachments of his neighbours by the help of the law. But this is enough
about the neighbourhood.

The miner should try to obtain a mine, to which access is not difficult,

in a mountainous region, gently sloping, wooded, healthy, safe, and notyfar

distant from a river or stream by means of which he may convey
mining products to be washed and smelted. This indeed, is the best
position. As for the others, the nearer they approximate to this position the
better they are; the further removed, the worse.

Now I will discuss that kind of minerals for which it is not necessary
to dig, because the force of water carries them out of the veins. Of these
there are two kinds, minerals—and their fragments'*—and juices. When
there are springs at the outcrop of the veins from which, as I have already said,
the above-mentioned products are emitted, the miner should consider these
first, to see whether there are metals or gems mixed with the sand, or whether
the waters discharged are filled with juices. In case metals or gems have
settled in the pool of the spring, not only should the sand from it be
washed, but also that from the streams which flow from these springs, and
even from the river itself into which they again discharge. If the springs dis-
charge water containing some juice, this also should be collected ; the further
such a stream has flowed from the source, the more it receives plain water and
the more diluted does it become, and so much the more deficient in strength.
If the stream receives no water of another kind, or scarcely any, not only
the rivers, but likewise the lakes which receive these waters, are of the same
nature as the springs, and serve the same uses ; of this kind is the lake
which the Hebrews call the Dead Sea, and which is quite full of bituminous
fluids'*. But I must return to the subject of the sands.

Springs may discharge their waters into a sea, a lake, a marsh, a river,
or astream ; but the sand of the sea-shore is rarely washed, for although the
water flowing down from the springs into the sea carries some metals or
gems with it, yet these substances can scarcely ever be reclaimed, because
they are dispersed through the immense body of waters and mixed up with

UMagister Metallorum. See Note 1, p. 78, for the reasons of the adoption of
the term Bergmeister and page 95 for details of his duties.

-12Ramenia. ‘‘ Particles.’ The author uses this term indifferently for fragments,
particles of mineral, concentrates, gold dust, black tin, etc., in all cases the result of either
natural or artificial concentration. As in technical English we have no general term for both
natural and artificial ‘‘ concentrates,’’ we have rendered it as the context seemed to demand.

478A certain amount of bitumen does float ashore in the Dead Sea ; the origin of it is,
however, uncertain. Strabo (xvi., 2, 42), Pliny (v., 15 and 16), and Josephus (rv., 8), all
mention this fact. The lake for this reason is often referred to by the ancient writers by the
name Asphaltites.

¥
ve

34 BOOK. Ii.

other sand, and scattered far and wide in different directions, or they
sink down into the depths of the sea. For the same reasons, the sands of
lakes can very rarely be washed successfully, even though the streams rising
from the mountains pour their whole volume of water into them. The
particles of metals and gems from the springs are very rarely carried into the
marshes, which are generally in level and open places. Therefore, the
miner, in the first place, washes the sand of the spring, then of the stream
which flows from it, then finally, that of the river into which the stream
discharges. It is not worth the trouble to wash the sands of a large
river which is on a level plain at a distance from the mountains. Where
several springs carrying metals discharge their waters into one river, there
is more hope of productive results from washing. The miner does not
neglect even the sands of the streams in which excavated ores have been
washed.

The waters of springs taste according to the juice they contain, and
they differ greatly in this respect. There are six kinds of these tastes which
the worker! especially observes and examines; there is the salty kind,
which shows that salt may be obtained by evaporation ; the nitrous, which
indicates soda; the aluminous kind, which indicates alum; the vitrioline,
which indicates vitriol; the sulphurous kind, which indicates sulphur ;
and as for the bituminous juice, out of which bitumen is melted down, the
colour itself proclaims it to the worker who is evaporating it. The sea-
water however, is similar to that of salt springs, and may be drawn into
low-lying pits, and, evaporated by the heat of the sun, changes of
itself into salt ; similarly the water of some salt-lakes turns to salt when dried
by the heat of summer. Therefore an industrious and diligent man observes
and makes use of these things and thus contributes something to the
common welfare.

The strength of the sea condenses the liquid bitumen which flows into
it from hidden springs, into amber and jet, as I have described already in
my books “ De Subterraneorum Ortu et Causis’®. The sea, with certain

14E-xcoctor,—literally, ‘‘ Smelter” or ‘‘ Metallurgist.” ;

16This reference should be to the De Natura Fossilium (p. 230), although there is a short
reference to the matter in De Ortu et Causis (p. 59). Agricola maintained that not only were
jet and amber varieties of bitumen, but also coal and camphor and obsidian. As jet
(gagates) is but a compact variety of coal, the ancient knowledge of this substance has more
interest than would otherwise attach to the gem, especially as some materials described in this
connection were no doubt coal. The Greeks often refer to a series of substances which burned,
contained earth, and which no doubt comprised coal. Such substances are mentioned by
Aristotle (De Mirabilibus. 33, 41, 125), Nicander (Theriaca. 37), and others, previous to
the 2nd Century B.c., but the most ample description is that of Theophrastus (23-28) : “Some
“‘ of the more brittle stones there also are, which become as it were burning coals when put into
“a fire, and continue so a long time ; of this kind are those about Bena, found in mines and
‘washed down by the torrents, for they will take fire on burning coals being thrown on them,
‘and will continue burning as long as anyone blows them ; afterward they will deaden, and
“may after that be made to burn again. They are therefore of long continuance, but their
“smell is troublesome and disagreeable. That also which is called the spinus, is found in
“mines. This stone, cut in pieces and thrown together in a heap, exposed to the sun, burns ;
“and that the more, if it be moistened or sprinkled with water (a bites <i shale ?). But
“the Lipara stone empties itself, as it were, in burning, and becomes like the pumice,
‘changing at once both its colour and density; for before burning it is black, smooth, and
“compact. This stone is found in the Pumices, separately in different places, as it were, in

BOOK. II. 35

directions of the wind, throws both these substances on shore, and for this
reason the search for amber demands as much care as does that for coral.

Moreover, it is necessary that those who wash the sand or evaporate
the water from the springs, should be careful to learn the nature of the
locality, its roads, its salubrity, its overlord, and the neighbours, lest on
account of difficulties in the conduct of their business they become either
impoverished by exhaustive expenditure, or their goods and lives are
imperilled. But enough about this.

The miner, after he has selected out of many places one particular spot
adapted by Nature for mining, bestows much labour and attention on the
veins. These have either been stripped bare of their covering by chance
and thus lie exposed to our view, or lying deeply hidden and concealed they
are found after close search; the latter is more usual, the former more
rarely happens, and both of these occurrences must be explained. There
is more than one force which can lay bare the veins unaided by the industry
or toil of man; since either a torrent might strip off the surface, which hap-
pened in the case of the silver mines of Freiberg (concerning which I have

“cells, nowhere continuous to the matter of them. It is said that in Melos the pumice
“is produced in this manner in some other stone, as this is on the contrary in it; but the
“stone which the pumice is found in is not at all like the Lipara stone which is found in it.
“Certain stones are about Tetras, in Sicily, which is over against Lipara, which
“‘empty themselves in the same manner in the fire. And in the promontory called Erineas,
“there is a great quantity of stone like that found about Bena, which, when
“burnt, emits a bituminous smell, and leaves a matter resembling calcined earth. Those
‘fossil substances that are called coals, and are broken for use, are earthy; they kindle,
** however, and burn like wood coals. These are found in Liguria, where there also is amber,
“and in Elis, on the way to Olympia over the mountains. These are used by smiths.”
(Based on Hill’s Trans.). Dioscorides and Pliny add nothing of value to this description.

Agricola (De Nat. Fos., p. 229-230) not only gives various localities of jet, but also
records its relation to coal. As to the latter, he describes several occurrences, and describes
the deposits as vena dilatata. Coal had come into considerable use all over Europe, particu-
larly in England, long before Agricola’s time ; the oft-mentioned charter to mine sea-coal
given to the Monks of Newbottle Abbey, near Preston, was dated 1210.

Amber was known to the Greeks by the name electrum, but whether the alloy of the
same name took its name from the colour of amber or vice versa is uncertain. The is
supposed to be referred to by Homer (Od. xv. 460), and Thales of Miletus (640-546 B.c.)
is vis peut to have first described its power of attraction. It is mentioned by many other
Greek authors, Aéschylus, Euripides, Aristotle, and others. The latter (De Mirabilibus,
8) records of the amber islands in the Adriatic, that the inhabitants tell the story that
on these islands amber falls from poplar trees. “‘ This, they say, resembles gum and hardens
“ like stone, the story of the poets being that after Phaeton was struck by lightning his sisters
“turned to poplar trees shed tears of amber.” Theophrastus (53) says: ‘‘ Amber is
“also a stone ; it is dug out of the earth in Liguria and has, like the before-mentioned (lode-
“‘stone), a power of attraction.” Pliny (xxxvil., 11) gives a long account of both the
substance, literature, and m on the subject. His view of its origin was:
“ Certainly amber is obtained the islands of the Northern Ocean, and is called by the
“Germans glaesum. For this reason the Romans, when Germanicus Cesar commanded in
ee eee ee ee ees, Woe, wee, known 1. the. herberians as
“ Austeravia. originates from gum discharged by a kind of pine tree, like gum from
“cherry and resin from the ordinary pine. It is liquid at first, and issues abundantly and
“hardens in time by cold, or by the sea when the rising tides carry off the fragments from
“the shores of those islands. Certainly it is thrown on the coasts, and is so light that it
“‘ appears to roll in the water. Our forefathers believed that it was the juice of a tree, for
“they called it succinum. And that it belongs to a kind of pine tree is proved by the odour
“of the pine tree which it gives when rubbed, and that it burns when ignited like a pitch
ee torch.” The term amber is of Arabic origin—from Ambar—and this term was
adopted by the Greeks after the Christian era. Agricola uses the Latin term
succinum and (De Nat. Fos., p. 231-5) disputes the origin from tree gum, and contends for
submarine bitumen springs.

36 BOOK. Ii.

written in Book I. of my work “‘ De Veteribus et Novis Metallis’’)**; or they
may be exposed through the force of the wind, when it uproots and destroys
the trees which have grown over the veins; or by the breaking away of the
rocks ; or by long-continued heavy rains tearing away the mountain ; or by
an earthquake; or by a lightning flash; or by a snowslide; or by the
violence of the winds: ‘‘ Of such a nature are the rocks hurled down from
the mountains by the force of the winds aided by the ravages of time.’”’ Or
the plough may uncover the veins, for Justin relates in his history that
nuggets of gold had been turned up in Galicia by the plough; or this may
occur through a fire in the forest, as Diodorus Siculus tells us happened in the
silver mines in Spain ; and that saying of Posidonius is appropriate enough :
“‘ The earth violently moved by the fires consuming the forest sends forth new
products, namely, gold and silver.’”17. And indeed, Lucretius has ex-
plained the same thing more fully in the following lines: “‘ Copper and gold
and iron were discovered, and at the same time weighty silver and the sub-
stance of lead, when fire had burned up vast forests on the great hills, either
by a discharge of heaven’s lightning, or else because, when men were waging
war with one another, forest fires had carried fire among the enemy in order to
strike terror to them, or because, attracted by the goodness of the soil, they
wished to clear rich fields and bring the country into pasture, or else to destroy
wild beasts and enrich themselves with the game; for hunting with pitfalls —
and with fire came into use before the practice of enclosing the wood with
toils and rousing the game with dogs. Whatever the fact is, from —

16The statement in De Veteribus et Novis Metallis (p. 394) is as follows :—

“Tt came about by chance and accident that the silver mines were discovered at
“Freiberg in Meissen. By the river Sala, which is not unknown to Strabo, is Hala, which
“was once country, but is now a large town ; the site, at any rate, even from Roman times
‘‘ was famous and renowned for its salt springs, for the possession of which the Hermunduri
“ fought with the Chatti. When people carried the salt thence in wagons, as they now do
“straight through Meissen (Saxony) into Bohemia—which is lacking in that seasoning to-day
“no less than formerly—they saw galena in the wheel tracks, which had been uncovered by
“the torrents. This lead ore, since it was similar to that of Goslar, they put into their carts
“and carried to Goslar, for the same carriers were accustomed to carry lead from that i
“ And since much more silver was smelted from this galena than from that of Goslar,
‘miners betook themselves to that part of Meissen in which is now situated Freiberg, a
“great and wealthy town; and we are told by consistent stories and general report that
“they grew rich out of the mines.” Agricola places the discovery of the mines at Freiberg
at about 1170. See Note II, p. 5.

17Diodorus Siculus (v., 35). ‘‘ These places being covered with woods, it is said that
“in ancient times these mountains were set on fire by shepherds, and continued burning for
‘many days, and parched the earth, so that an abundance of silver ore was melted, and
“the metal flowed in streams of pure silver like a river.” Aristotle, nearly three centuries
betore Diodorus, mentions this same story (De Mirabilibus, 87): ‘‘ They say that in Ibernia
“the woods were set on fire by certain shepherds, and the earth thus heated, the bebe
“visibly flowed silver ; and when some time later there were earthquakes, and the
“ burst asunder at different places, a large amount of silver was collected.” As the works
of Posidonius are lost, it is probable that Agricola was quoting from Strabo (UI., 2, 9),
who says, in describing Spain: “ Posidonius, in praising the amount and excellence of
‘metals, cannot refrain from his accustomed rhetoric, and becomes quite enthusiastic in
“exaggeration. He tells us we are not to disbelieve the fable that formerly the forests
“having been set on fire, the earth, which was loaded with silver and gold, melted and
“threw up these metals to the surface, for inasmuch as every mountain and wooded hill
*‘ seemed to be heaped up with money by a lavish fortune.” (Hamilton’s Trans. I., p. 220).
Or he may have been quoting from the Deipnosophistae of Athenaeus (vI.), where Posidonius
is quoted: ‘‘ And the mountains . . . when once the woods upon them had caught fire,
spontaneously ran with liquid silver.”

BOOK Il. 37

whatever cause the heat of flame had swallowed up the forests with a frightful
crackling from their very roots, and had thoroughly baked the earth with
fire, there would run from the boiling veins and collect into the hollows of the
grounds a stream of silver and gold, as well as of copper and lead.”!* But
yet the poet considers that the veins are not laid bare in the first instance
so much by this kind of fire, but rather that all mining had its
origin in this. And lastly, some other force may by chance disclose the
veins, for a horse, if this tale can be believed, disclosed the lead veins at
Goslar by a blow from his hoof'®. By such methods as these does fortune
disclose the veins to us. .

But by skill we can also investigate hidden and concealed veins, by
observing in the first place the bubbling waters of springs, which cannot be
very far distant from the veins because the source of the water is from
them ; secondly, by examining the fragments of the veins which the torrents
break off from the earth, for after a long time some of these fragments are
again buried in the ground. Fragments of this kind lying about on the
ground, if they are rubbed smooth, are a long distance from the veins,
because the torrent, which broke them from the vein, polished them while
it rolled them a long distance; but if they are fixed in the ground, or if
they are rough, they are nearer to the veins. The soil also should be con-
sidered, for this is often the cause of veins being buried more or less deeply
under the earth; in this case the fragments protrude more or less widely
apart, and miners are wont to call the veins discovered in this manner
“ tragmenta,”’2°

Further, we search for the veins by observing the hoar-frosts,
which whiten all herbage except that growing over the veins, because the
veins emit a warm and dry exhalation which hinders the freezing of the
moisture, for which reason such plants appear rather wet than whitened by
the frost. This may be observed in all cold places before the grass has grown
to its full size, as in the months of April and May ; or when the late crop of

18Lucretius De Rerum Natura v. 1241.

19Agricola’s account of this event in De Veteribus et Novis Metallis is as follows (p.
393): “ Now veins are not always first disclosed by the hand and labour of man, nor has art
“always demonstrated them; sometimes they have been disclosed rather by chance or by
‘good fortune. I will explain briefly what has been written upon this matter in history,
“what miners tell us, and what has occurred in our times. Thus the mines at Goslar are
“‘ said to have been found in the following way. A certain noble, whose name is not recorded,
“tied his horse, which was named Ramelus, to the branch of a tree which grew on the
“mountain. This horse, pawing the earth with its hoofs, which were iron shod, and thus
“turning it over, uncovered a hidden vein of lead, not unlike the winged Pegasus, who in the
“legend of the poets opened a spring when he beat the rock with his hoof. So just as that
ry = hn named Hipprocrene after that horse, so our ancestors named the mountain
Cy berg. Whereas the perennial water spring of the poets would long ago have dried
“up, the vein even to-day exists, and supplies an abundant amount of excellent lead. That
“a horse can have opened a vein will seem credible to anyone who reflects in how many ways
“the signs of veins are shown by chance, all of which are explained in my work De Re
“* Metallica. Therefore, here we will believe the story, both because it may happen that a
“horse may disclose a vein, and because the name of the mountain agrees with the story.”
Agricola places the discovery of Goslar in the Hartz at prior to 936. See Note 11, p. 5.
_ *°Fragmenta. The glossary gives “Geschube.” This term is defined in the Bergwerks’
Lexicon (Chemnitz, 1743, p 250) as the pieces of stone, especially tin-stone, broken from
the vein and washed out by the water—the croppings.

38 BOOK. Ii.

hay, which is called the cordum, is cut with scythes in the month of
September. Therefore in places where the grass has a dampness that is not con-
gealed into frost, there is a vein beneath ; also if the exhalation be excessively
hot, the soil will produce only small and pale-coloured plants. Lastly, there
are trees whose foliage in spring-time has a bluish or leaden tint, the upper
branches more especially being tinged with black or with any other unnatural
colour, the trunks cleft in two, and the branches black or discoloured.
These phenomena are caused by the intensely hot and dry exhalations
which do not spare even the roots, but scorching them, render the trees
sickly ; wherefore the wind will more frequently uproot trees of this kind
than any others. Verily the veins do emit this exhalation. Therefore, in a
place where there is a multitude of trees, if a long row of them at an unusual
time lose their verdure and become black or discoloured, and frequently fall
by the violence of the wind, beneath this spot there is a vein. Likewise
along a course where a vein extends, there grows a certain herb or fungus
which is absent from the adjacent space, or sometimes even from the neigh-
bourhood of the veins. By these signs of Nature a vein can be discovered.

There are many great contentions between miners concerning the forked
twig?!, for some say that it is of the greatest use in discovering veins, and
others deny it. Some of those who manipulate and use the twig, first cut
a fork from a hazel bush with a knife, for this bush they consider more
efficacious than any other for revealing the veins, especially if the hazel

21So far as we are able to discover, this is the first published description of the divining
rod as applied to minerals or water. Like Agricola, many authors have sought to find its
origin among the Ancients. The magic rods of Moses and Homer, especially the rod with
which the former struck the rock at Horeb, the rod described by Ctesias (died 398 B.c.) which
attracted gold and silver, and the virgula divina of the Romans have all been called up for
proof. It is true that the Romans are responsible for the name virgula divina, “ divini
rod,” but this rod was used for taking auguries by casting bits of wood (Cicero, De
Divinatione). Despite all this, while the ancient naturalists all give detailed directions for
finding water, none mention anything akin to the divining rod of the Middle Ages. It is
also worth noting that the Monk Theophilus in the rz2th Century also gives a detailed
description of how to find water, but makes no mention of the rod. There are two authori-
ties sometimes cited as prior to icola, the first being Basil Valentine in his ‘‘ Last Will
and Testament” (xxrIv—vitt.), and while there may be some reason (see Appendix) for accepting
the authenticity of the ‘‘ Triumphal Chariot of Antimony”’ by this author, as dating about
1500, there can be little doubt that the ‘‘ Last Will and Testament ”’ was spurious and dated
about 50 years after Agricola. Paracelsus (De Natura Rerum 1x.), says: ‘ These (divina-
tions) are vain and misleading, and among the first of them are divining rods, which have
‘deceived many miners. If they once point rightly they deceive ten or twenty times.”
In his De Origine Morborum Invisibilium (Book I.) he adds that the “ faith turns the rod.”
These works were no doubt written prior to De Re Metallica—Paracelsus died in 1541—
but they were not published until some time afterward. Those interested in the strange
persistence of this superstition down to the present day—and the files of the patent offices
of the world are full of it—will find the subject exhaustively discussed in M. E. Chevreul’s
“ De la Baguette Divinatoire,” Paris, 1845; L. Figuier, ‘‘ Histoire du Merveilleux dans les
temps moderne II.”, Paris, 1860; W. F. Barrett, Proceedings of the Society of Psychical
Research, part 32, 1897, and 38, 1900; R. W. Raymond, American Inst. of Mining Engin-
eers, 1883, p. 411. Of the descriptions by those who believed in it there is none better
than that of William Pryce (Mineralogia Cornubiensis, London, 1778, pp. 113-123), who
devotes much pains to a refutation of Agricola. When we consider that a century later than
Agricola such an advanced mind as Robert Boyle ee ee the founder of the Royal
Society, was convinced of the genuineness of the divining rod, one is more impressed with
the clarity of Agricola’s vision. In fact, there were few indeed, down to the 19th Century,
who did not believe implicitly in the effectiveness of this instrument, and while science has
long since abandoned it, not a year passes but some new manifestation of its hold on the
popular mind breaks out.

BOOK II. 39

bush grows above a vein. Others use a different kind of twig for each metal,
when they are seeking to discover the veins, for they employ hazel twigs
for veins of silver; ash twigs for copper; pitch pine for lead and especially
tin, and rods made of iron and steel for gold. All alike grasp the forks of
the twig with their hands, clenching their fists, it being necessary that the
clenched fingers should be held toward the sky in order that the twig should
be raised at that end where the two branches meet. Then they wander
hither and thither at random through mountainous regions. It is said
that the moment they place their feet on a vein the twig immediately turns
and twists, and so by its action discloses the vein; when they move
their feet again and go away from that spot the twig becomes once more
immobile.

The truth is, they assert, the movement of the twig is caused by the
power of the veins, and sometimes this is so great that the branches of trees
growing near a vein are deflected toward it. On the other hand, those
who say that the twig is of no use to good and serious men, also deny that
the motion is due to the power of the veins, because the twigs will not move
for everybody, but only for those who employ incantations and craft. More-
over, they deny the power of a vein to draw to itself the branches of trees,
but they say that the warm and dry exhalations cause these contortions.
Those who advocate the use of the twig make this reply to these objections :
when one of the miners or some other person holds the twig in his hands,
and it is not turned by the force of a vein, this is due to some peculiarity
of the individual, which hinders and impedes the power of the vein, for since
the power of the vein in turning and twisting the twig may be not unlike
that of a magnet attracting and drawing iron toward itself, this hidden
quality of a man weakens and breaks the force, just the same as garlic
weakens and overcomes the strength of a magnet. For a magnet smeared
with garlic juice cannot attract iron; nor does it attract the latter when
rusty. Further, concerning the handling of the twig, they warn us that
we should not press the fingers together too lightly, nor clench them too
firmly, for if the twig is held lightly they say that it will fall before the force
of the vein can turn it; if however, it is grasped too firmly the force of the
hands resists the force of the veins and counteracts it. Therefore, they
consider that five things are necessary to insure that the twig shall serve
its purpose: of these the first is the size of the twig, for the force of the
veins cannot turn too large a stick ; secondly, there is the shape of the twig,
which must be forked or the vein cannot turn it; thirdly, the power of the
vein which has the nature to turn it ; fourthly, the manipulation of the twig ;
fifthly, the absence of impeding peculiarities. These advocates of the twig
sum up their conclusions as follows: if the rod does not move for every-
body, it is due to unskilled manipulation or to the impeding peculiarities
of the man which oppose and resist the force of the veins, as we said above,
and those who search for veins by means of the twig need not necessarily make

-incantations, but it is sufficient that they handle it suitably and are devoid
of impeding power; therefore, the twig may be of use to good and serious

40 BOOK II.

A—Twic. B—TRENCH.

men in discovering veins. With regard to deflection of branches of trees
they say nothing and adhere to their opinion.

Since this matter remains in dispute and causes much dissention
amongst miners, I consider it ought to be examined on its own merits. The
wizards, who also make use of rings, mirrors and crystals, seek for veins
with a divining rod shaped like a fork ; but its shape makes no difference
in the matter,—it might be straight or of some other form—for it is not
the form of the twig that matters, but the wizard’s incantations ~
which it would not become me to repeat, neither do I wish to do so. The
Ancients, by means of the divining rod, not only procured those things neces-
sary for a livelihood or for luxury, but they were also able to alter the forms
of things by it; as when the magicians changed the rods of the Egyptians
into serpents, as the writings of the Hebrews relate®®; and as in Homer,
Minerva with a divining rod turned the aged Ulysses suddenly into a youth,
and then restored him back again to old age; Circe also changed Ulysses’
companions into beasts, but afterward gave them back again their human
form?’ ; moreover by his rod, which was called ‘‘ Caduceus,’’ Mercury gave

22Exodus VII., I0, II, 12.
Odyssey XVI., 172, and x., 238.

BOOK II. 41

sleep to watchmen and awoke slumberers**. Therefore it seems that the
divining rod passed to the mines from its impure origin with the magicians.
Then when good men shrank with horror from the incantations and rejected
them, the twig was retained by the unsophisticated common miners, and
in searching for new veins some traces of these ancient usages remain.

But since truly the twigs of the miners do move, albeit they do not
generally use incantations, some say this movement is caused by the
power of the veins, others say that it depends on the manipulation, and
still others think that the movement is due to both these causes. But, in
truth, all those objects which are endowed with the power of attraction
do not twist things in circles, but attract them directly to themselves; for
instance, the magnet does not turn the iron, but draws it directly to itself,
and amber rubbed until it is warm does not bend straws about, but simply
draws them to itself. If the power of the veins were of a similar nature to
that of the magnet and the amber, the twig would not so much twist as
move once only, in a semi-circle, and be drawn directly to the vein, and unless
the strength of the man who holds the twig were to resist and oppose the
force of the vein, the twig would be brought to the ground; wherefore,
since this is not the case, it must necessarily follow that the manipulation
is the cause of the twig’s twisting motion. It is a conspicuous fact that
these cunning manipulators do not use a straight twig, but a forked one
cut from a hazel bush, or from some other wood equally flexible, so that if it
be held in the hands, as they are accustomed to hold it, it turns in a circle
for any man wherever he stands. Nor is it strange that the twig does not
turn when held by the inexperienced, because they either grasp the forks of
the twig too tightly or hold them too loosely. Nevertheless, these things
give rise to the faith among common miners that veins are discovered by
the use of twigs, because whilst using these they do accidentally discover
some; but it more often happens that they lose their labour, and although
they might discover a vein, they become none the less exhausted in
digging useless trenches than do the miners who prospect in an unfortunate
locality. Therefore a miner, since we think he ought to be a good and
serious man, should not make use of an enchanted twig, because if he is
prudent and skilled in the natural signs, he understands that a forked stick
is of no use to him, for as I have said before, there are the natural indica-
tions of the veins which he can see for himself without the help of twigs.
So if Nature or chance should indicate a locality suitable for mining, the
miner should dig his trenches there; if no vein appears he must dig
numerous trenches until he discovers an outcrop of a vein.

A vena dilatata is rarely discovered by men’s labour, but usually some
force or other reveals it, or sometimes it is discovered by a shaft or a tunnel
on a vena profunda*.

Odyssey XXIV., I, etc. The Caduceus of Hermes had also the power of turning
things to gold, and it is interesting to note that in its oldest form, as the insignia of heralds
and of ambassadors, it had two prongs.

*8In a general way venae profundae were fissure veins and venae dilatatae were sheeted
deposits. For description see Book III.

42 BOOK II.

The veins after they have been discovered, and likewise the shafts and
tunnels, have names given them, either from their discoverers, as in the
case at Annaberg of the vein called “ Kélergang,’’ because a charcoal
burner discovered it; or from their owners, as the Geyer, in Joachimstal,
because part of the same belonged to Geyer; or from their products,
as the ‘‘ Pleygang”’ from lead, or the ‘‘ Bissmutisch”’ at Schneeberg from
bismuth? ; or from some other circumstances, such as the rich alluvials from
the torrent by which they were laid bare in the valley of Joachim. More
often the first discoverers give the names either of persons, as those of
German Kaiser, Apollo, Janus; or the name of an animal, as that of lion,
bear, ram, or cow ; or of things inanimate, as “silver chest’ or “‘ ox stalls’;
or of something ridiculous, as “‘ glutton’s nightshade” ; or finally, for the sake
of a good omen, they call it after the Deity. In ancient times they
followed the same custom and gave names to the veins, shafts and tunnels,
as we read in Pliny: “It is wonderful that the shafts begun by Hannibal in
Spain are still worked, their names being derived from their discoverers.
One of these at the present day, called Baebelo, furnished Hannibal with
three hundred pounds weight (of silver) per day.” 2?

26These mines are in the Erzgebirge. We have adopted the names given in the German
translation.

27 The quotation from Pliny (xxxm1., 31) as a whole reads as follows :—

“Silver is found in nearly all the provinces, but the finest of all in Spain; where it
‘is found in the barren lands, and in the mountains. Wherever one vein of silver has been
*‘ found, another is sure to be found not far away. This is the case of nearly all the metals,
“whence it appears that the Greeks derived metalla. It is wonderful that the shafts begun
“by Hannibal in Spain still remain, their names being derived from their makers. One of
“these at the present day called Baebelo, Seraleked Macnihel with three hundred pounds’
“‘ weight (of silver) per day. This mountain is excavated for a distance of fifteen hundred
“paces; and for this distance there are waterbearers lighted by torches standing night and
“‘ day baling out the water in turns, thus making quite a river.” Hannibal dates 247-183 B.c.
and was therefore dead 206 years when Pliny was born. According to a footnote in Bostock
and Riley’s translation of Pliny, these workings were supposed to be-in the neighbourhoéd
of Castulo, now Cazlona, near Linares. It was at Castulo that Hannibal married his rich wife
Himilce ; and in the hills north of Linares there are ancient silver mines still known as Los —
Pozos de Anibal.

END OF BOOK II.

CK _)
SKK)
0%
LOLS
seg SOROS
SONNE

—e

;
.
:
4

BOOK III.

REVIOUSLY I have given much information
concerning the miners, also I have discussed the
choice of localities for mining, for washing sands,
and for evaporating waters; further, I described
the method of searching for veins. With such
matters I was occupied in the second book; now I
come to the third book, which is about veins and
stringers, and the seams in the rocks'. The
term “vein” is sometimes used to indicate canales

in the earth, but very often elsewhere by this name I have described that

which may be put in vessels?; I now attach a second significance to
these words, for by them I mean to designate any mineral substances which
the earth keeps hidden within her own deep receptacles.

*Modern nomenclature in the description of ore-deposits is so impregnated with modern
views of their origin, that we have considered it desirable in many instances to adopt the
Latin terms used by the author, for we believe this method will allow the reader greater
freedom of judgment as to the author’s views. The Latin names retained are usually
expressive even to the non-Latin student. In ageneral way, a vena profunda is a fissure vein,
a vena dilatata is a bedded deposit, and a vena cumulata an impregnation, or a replacement
or a stockwerk. The canales, as will appear from the following footnote, were ore channels.
“The seams of the rocks” (commissurae saxorum) are very puzzling. The author states, as
re in the following note, that they are of two kinds,—contemporaneous with the formation
of the rocks, and also of the nature of veinlets. However, as to their sup relation to
the strike of veins, we can offer no explanation. There are passages in this chapter where
if the word “ore-shoot” were introduced for “‘ seams in the rocks” the text would be in-
telligible. That is, it is possible to conceive the view that the determination of whether an
east-west vein ran east or ran west was dependent on the dip of the ore-shoot along the
strike. This view, however, is utterly impossible to reconcile with the description and
illustration of commissurae saxorum given on page 54, where they are defined as the finest
stringers. The following passage from the WNiéézliche Bergbiichlin (see Appendix),
reads very much as though the dip of ore-shoots was understood at this time in relation to
the direction of veins. ‘‘ Every vein (gang) has two (outcrops) ausgehen, one of the
“ ausgehen is toward 2g ey along the whole length of the vein, which is called the ausgehen
“of the whole vein. other ausgehen is contrary to or toward the strike (streichen) of
“the vein, according to its rock (gestein), that is called the gesteins ausgehen; for instance,
“every vein that has its strike from east to west has its gesteins ausgehen to the east, and
“* vice-versa.”

“ Agricola’s classification of ore-deposits, after the general distinction between alluvial
and in situ deposits, is based entirely upon form, as will be seen in the quotation below relating
to the origin of canales. The German equivalents in the Glossary are as follows :—

Fissure vein (vena profunda) =e ee - Gang.

Bedded deposit (vena dilatata) =. aaaee Schwebender gang oder fleize.
Stockwerk or impregnation (vena cumulata) ...... Geschute oder stock.

SE ee i eee Klufft.

Seams or joints (commissurae saxorum) ...... Absetzen des gesteins.

It is interesting to note that in De Natura Fossilium he describes coal and salt, and
later in De Re Metallica he describes the Mannsfeld copper schists, as all being venae dilatatae.
This nomenclature and classification is not original with Agricola. Pliny (xxxttl, 21) uses
the term vena with no explanations, and while Agricola coined the Latin terms for various
kinds of veins, they are his transliteration of German terms already in use. The Nitzliche
Bergbiichlin gives this same classification.

HIsTORICAL NOTE ON THE THEORY OF ORE Deposits. Prior to Agricola there were
three schools of explanation of the phenomena of ore deposits, the orthodox followers of the
Genesis, the Greek Philosophers, and the Alchemists. The geology of the Genesis—the
contemporaneous formation of everything—needs no comment other than that for anyone to
have proposed an alternative to the dogma of the orthodox during the Middle Ages, required

_ "The Latin vena, “ vein,” is also used by the author for ore; hence this descriptive
warning as to its intended double use.

44 BOOK. III.

First I will speak of the veins, which, in depth, width, and length, differ
very much one from another. Those of one variety descend from the surface
of the earth to its lowest depths, which on account of this characteristic,
I am accustomed to call “‘ venae profundae.”’

much independence of mind. Of the Greek views—which are meagre enough—that of the
Peripatetics greatly dominated thought on natural phenomena down to the 17th century.
Aristotle’s views may be summarized: The elements are earth, water, air, and
fire; they are transmutable and never found pure, and are endowed with certain funda-
mental properties which acted as an “efficient” force upon the material cause—the elements.
These properties were dryness and dampness and heat and cold, the latter being active,
the former passive. Further, the elements were possessed of weight and lightness, for
instance earth was absolutely heavy, fire absolutely light. The active and passive proper-
ties existed in binary combinations, one of which is characteristic, t.e., ‘‘earth” is cold
and dry, water damp and cold, fire hot and dry, air hot and wet ; transmutation took place,
for instance, by removing the cold from water, when air resulted (really steam), and by
removing the dampness from water, when ‘‘earth” resulted (really any dissolved —
substance). The transmutation of the elements in the earth (meaning the globe) produces two
“‘exhalations,” the one fiery (probably meaning gases), the other damp (probably meaning
steam). The former produces stones, the latter the metals. Theophrastus (On Stones, 1
to vil.) elaborates the views of Aristotle on the origin of stones, metals, etc.: ‘‘ Of things
‘formed in the earth some have their origin from water, others from earth. Water is the
“basis of metals, silver, gold, and the rest; ‘earth’ of stones, as well the more precious
“as the common. . . . All these are formed by solidification of matter pure and
“equal in its constituent parts, which has been brought together in that state by mere
“afflux or by means of some kind of percolation, or separated. . . . The solidification
“is in some of these substances due to heat and in others to cold’’ (Based on Hill’s Trans.,
pp. 3-11). That is, the metals inasmuch as they become liquid when heated must be in a
large part water, and, like water, they solidify with cold. erefore, the “‘ metals are cold
and damp.” Stones, on the other hand, solidify with heat and do not liquefy, therefore,
they are ‘dry and hot” and partake largely of ‘‘earth.” This ‘earth’ was somethi
indefinite, but purer and more pristine than common clay. In discussing the ancien
beliefs with regard to the origin of deposits, we must not overlook the import of the use
of the word “vein” (vena) by various ancient authors including Pliny (xxx11, 21), although
he offers no explanation of the term.

During the Middle Ages there arose the horde of Alchemists and Astrologers, a review —
of the development of whose muddled views is but barren reading. In the main they held
more or less to the Peripatetic view, with additions of their own. ber (13th (?) century, see
Appendix B) propounded the conception that all metals were composed of varying pro
of ‘‘spiritual”” sulphur and quicksilver, and to these Albertus Magnus added salt. The
Astrologers contributed the idea that the immediate cause of the metals were the various
planets. The only work devoted to description of ore-deposits prior to Agricola was the
Bergbiichlin (about 1,520, see Appendix B), and this little book exhibits the absolute apogee of
muddled thought derived from the Peripatetics, the Alchemists, and the Astrologers. We
believe it is of interest to reproduce the following statement, if for no other reason than to
indicate the great advance in thought shown by Agricola.

“The first chapter or first part; on the common origin of ore, whether silver, gold,
“* tin, copper, iron, or lead ore, in which they all appear together, and are called by the common
“name of metallic ore. It must be noticed that for the washing or smelting of metallic ore,
“there must be the one who works and the thing that is worked upon, or the material upon
‘ “which the work is expended. The general worker (efficient force) on the ore and on all
“things that are born, is the heavens, its movement, its light and influences, as the
“ philosophers say. The influence of the heavens is multiplied by the movement of the
“firmaments and the movements of the seven planets. Therefore, every metallic ore
“receives a special influence from its own particular planet, due to the properties of the
“planet and of the ore, also due to properties of heat, cold, dampness, ne dryness. Thus
“ gold is of the Sun or its influence, silver of the Moon, tin of Jupiter, copper of Venus, iron
“of Mars, lead of Saturn, and quicksilver of Mercury. Therefore, metals are often called
“these names by hermits and other philosophers. Thus gold is called the Sun, in Latin S
“ silver is called the Moon, in Latin Luna, as is clearly stated in the special chapters on each
“metal. Thus briefly have we spoken of the ‘common worker’ of metal and ore. But the
“thing worked upon, or the common material of all metals, according to the opinion of
“the learned, is sulphur and quicksilver, which through the movement and influence of the
“heavens must have become united and hardened into one metallic body or one ore.
“Certain others hold that through the movement and the influence of the heavens, vapours
“or braden, called mineral exhalations, are drawn up from the depths of the earth, from
“sulphur and quicksilver, and the rising fumes pass into the veins and stringers and are

BOOK III. 45

ee - Pe 5.

A. C.—THE MOUNTAIN. B—Vena profunda.

Another kind, unlike the venae profundae, neither ascend to the surface
of the earth nor descend, but lying under the ground, expand over a large
area; and on that account I call them “ venae dilatatae.”’

Ye ee Ts eS

;
;
{

5M iM |

A. D.—THE mountain. B. C—Vena dilatata.

46 BOOK. III.

Another occupies a large extent of space in length and width ; there-
fore I usually call it “‘ vena cumulata,” for it is nothing else than an accumu-
lation of some certain kind of mineral, as I have described in the book

“united through the effect of the planets and made into ore. Certain others hold that
“metal is not formed from quicksilver, because in many places metallic ore is found and
“no quicksilver. But instead of quicksilver they maintain a damp and cold and slimy
“ material is set up on all sulphur which is drawn out from the earth, like your perspiration,
“and from that mixed with sulphur all metals are formed. Now each of these opinions is
“ correct according to a good understanding and right interpretation; the ore or metal is
“‘ formed from the fattiness of the earth as the material of the first degree (primary element),
‘also the vapours or braden on the one part and the materials on the other part, both of which
“are called quicksilver. Likewise in the mingling or union of the quicksilver and the
“sulphur in the ore, the sulphur is counted the male and quicksilver the female, as in the
“ bearing or conception of a child. Also the sulphur is a special worker in ore or metal.

“The second chapter or part deals with the general capacity of the mountain.
‘*‘ Although the influence of the heavens and the fitness of the material are necessary to the
“formation of ore or metal, yet these are not enough thereto. But there must be adapt-
“ability of the natural vessel in which the ore is formed, such are the veins, namely
“ steinendegange, flachgange, schargange, creutzgange, or as these may be termed in provincial
“names. Also the mineral force must have easy access to the natural vessel such as
“through the Aluffte (stringers), namely hengkluft, querklufte, flachekluffte, creutzklufft, and
“other occasional flotzwerk, according to their various local names. Also there must be a
“suitable place in the mountain which the veins and stringers can traverse.”

AGRICOLA’s VIEWS ON THE ORIGIN OF ORE Deposits. Agricola rejected absolutely
the Biblical view which, he says, was the opinion of the vulgar; further, he repudiates
the alchemistic and astrological view with great vigour. There can be no doubt, however,
that he was greatly influenced by the Peripatetic philosophy. He accepted absolutely the four
elements—earth, fire, water, and air, and their ‘“‘ binary” properties, and the theory that eve
substance had a material cause if pre upon by an efficient force. Beyond this he did
not go, and a large portion of De Ortu et Causis is devoted to disproof of the origin of
metals and stones from the Peripatetic ‘‘ exhalations.”’

No one should conclude that Agricola’s theories are set out with the clarity of Darwin
or Lyell. However, the matter is of such importance in the history of the theory of ore-
deposits, and has been either so ignored or so coloured by the preconceptions of narrators,
that we consider it justifiable to devote the space necessary to a reproduction of his own
statements in De Ortu et Causis and other works. Before doing so we believe it will be of
service to readers to summarize these views, and in giving quotations from the Author’s
other works, to group them under special headings, following the outline of his theory
given below. His theory was :—

(1) Openings in the earth (canales) were formed by the erosion of subterranean
waters.

(2) These ground waters were due (a) to the infiltration of the surface waters, rain,
river, and sea water ; (b) to the condensation of steam (halitus) arising from the etration
of the surface waters to greater depths,—the production of this halitus being due to sub-
terranean heat, which in his view was in turn due in the main to burning bitumen (a com-
prehensive genera which embraced coal).

(3) The filling of these canales is composed of “ earth,” “ solidified juices,” “ stone,’
metals, and ‘‘ compounds,” all deposited from water and “‘ juices” circulating in the canales.
(See also note 4, page 1).

“Earth” comprises clay, mud, ochre, marl, and “ peculiar earths” generally. The
origin of these ‘‘earths”’ was from rocks, due to erosion, transportation, and deposition
by water. ‘“‘ Solidified juices”’ (succi concreti) comprised salt, soda, vitriol, bitumen, etc.,
being generally those substances which he conceived were soluble in and deposited from
water. ‘‘Stones’’ comprised precious, semi-precious, and unusual stones, such as quartz,
fluor-spar, etc., as distinguished from country rock; the origin of these he attributed in
minor proportion to transportation of fragments of rock, but in the main to deposits from
ordinary mineral juice and from “ stone juice” (succus lapidescens). Metals comprised the
seven traditional metals; the ‘‘ compounds’’ comprised the metallic minerals; and both
were due to deposition from juices, the compounds being due to a mixture of juices. The
“juices” play the most important part in Agricola’s theory. Each substance had its own
particular juice, and in his theory every substance had a material and an efficient cause, the
first being the juice, the second being heat or cold. Owing to the latter the juices fell into
two categories—those solidified by heat (#.e., by evaporation, such as salt), and those solidi-
fied by cold, (i.e, because metals melt and flow by heat, therefore their solidification
was due to cold, and the juice underwent similar treatment). As to the origin of these
juices, some were generated by the solution of their own particular substance, but in the

BOOK III. 47

entitled De Swubterraneorum Ortu et Causts. It occasionally happens,
though it is unusual and rare, that several accumulations of this kind are
found in one place, each one or more fathoms in depth and four or five in

main their origin was due to the combination of ‘‘dry things,” such as “earth,” with
water, the mixture being heated, and the resultant metals depended upon the propor-
tions of “earth” and water. In some cases we have been inclined to translate succus
(juice) as “ solution,”’ but in other cases it embraced substances to which this would not
apply, and we feared implying in the text a chemical understanding not warranted prior to

e atomic theory. In order to distinguish between earths, (clays, etc.,) the Peripatetic
“earth” (a pure element) and the earth (the globe) we have given the two former in

uotation marks. There is no doubt some confusion between earth (clays, etc.) and the

eripatetic ‘‘earth,” as the latter was a pure substance not found in its pristine form in
nature ; it is, however, difficult to distinguish between the two.

OrictIn oF CANALES (De Ortu, p. 35). “I now come to the canales in the earth.
“These are veins, veinlets, and what are called ‘seams in the rocks.’ These serve as
“vessels or receptacles for the material from which minerals (res fossiles) are formed.
“The term vena is most frequently given to what is contained in the canales, but likewise
“the same name is applied to the canales themselves. The term vein is borrowed from
“that used for animals, for just as their veins are distributed through all parts of the
“body, and just as by means of the veins blood is diffused from the liver throughout the
“whole body, so also the veins traverse the whole globe, and more particularly the
“ mountainous districts; and water runs and flows through them. With regard to veinlets
“or stringers and ‘seams in the rocks,’ which are the thinnest stringers, the following is the
“ mode of their arrangement. Veins in the earth, just like the veins of an animal, have certain
* veinlets of their own, but in a contrary way. For the larger veins of animals pour blood
“into the veinlets, while in the earth the humours are usually poured from the veinlets into
“ the veins, and rarely flow from the larger into the smaller ones. As for the seams in
“ the r (commissurae saxorum) we consider that they are produced by two methods: by
“the first, which is peculiar to themselves, they are formed at the same time as the rocks,
“for the heat bakes the refractory material into stone and the non-refractory material
“similarly heated exhales its humours and is made into ‘earth,’ generally friable. The
“other method is common also to veins and veinlets, when water is collected into one
“place it softens the rock by its liquid nature, and by its weight and pressure breaks and
“divides it. Now, if the rock is hard, it makes seams in the rocks and veinlets, and if it is
“not too hard it makes veins. However, if the rocks are not hard, seams and veinlets are
“created as well as veins. If these do not carry a very large quantity of water, or if they
“are pressed by a great volume of it, they soon discharge themselves into the nearest veins.
“The following appears to be the reason why some veinlets or stringers and veins are
~ and others dilatatae. The force of the water crushes and splits the brittle rocks ;
“and when they are broken and split, it forces its way through them and passes on, at one
“time in a downward direction, making small and large venae profundae, at another time
“in a lateral direction, in which way venae dilatatae are formed. Now since in each
“class there are found some which are straight, some inclined, and some crooked, it should
“be explained that the water makes the vena profunda straight when it runs straight
** downward, inclined when it runs in an inclined direction; and that it makes a vena
“‘ dilatata straight when it runs horizontally to the right or left, and in a similar way inclined
“when it runs in a sloping direction. Stringers and large veins of the profunda sort, extending
“for considerable lengths, become crooked from two causes. In one case when narrow
“veins are intersected by wide ones, then the latter bend or drag the former a little. In
“the other case, when the water runs against very hard rock, being unable to break through,
“it goes around the nearest way, and the stringers and veins are formed bent and crooked.
“ This last is also the reason we sometimes see crooked small and large venae dilatatae, not
“unlike the gentle rise and fall of flowing water. Next, venae profundae are wide, either
“because of abundant water or because the rock is fragile. On the other hand, they are
“narrow, either because but little water flows and trickles through them, or because the
“rock is very hard. The venae dilatatae, too, for the same reasons, are either thin or thick.
“ There are other differences, too, in stringers and veins, which I will explain in my work

“De Re Metallica. . . . There is also a third kind of vein which, as it cannot be
“ described as a wide vena profunda, nor as a thick vena dilatata, we will call a vena cumulata.
“These are nothing else than places where some species of mineral is accumulated ;
“sometimes exceeding in depth and also in length and breadth 600 feet ; sometimes, or
“rather generally, not so deep nor so long, nor so wide. These are created when water
“has broken away the rock for such a length, breadth, and thickness, and has flung aside
“and ejected the stones and sand from the great cavern which is thus made ; and afterward
“when the mouth is obstructed and closed up, the whole cavern is filled with material
“from which there is in time produced some one or more minerals. Now I have stated

48 BOOK III.

width, and one is distant from another two, three, or more fathoms. When
the excavation of these accumulations begins, they at first appear in the
shape of a disc; then they open out wider; finally from each of such

“when discoursing on the origin of subterranean humours, that water erodes away
‘substances inside the earth, just as it does those on the surface, and least of all does it
“‘shun minerals ; for which reason we may daily see veinlets and veins sometimes filled with
“‘air and water, but void and empty of mining products, and sometimes full of these same
“materials. Even those which are empty of minerals become finally obstructed, and when
“the rock is broken through at some other point the water gushes out. It is certain that
“old springs are closed up in some way and new ones opened in others. In the same
“‘manner, but much more easily and pean Cos than in the solid rock, water produces stringers
“and veins in surface material, whether it be in plains, hills, or mountains. Of this kind are
“the stringers in the banks of rivers which produce gold, and the veins which produce
“ peculiar earth. So in this manner in the earth are made canales which bear minerals.”

ORIGIN OF GROUND Waters. (De Oriup.5). “ . . . . Besides rain there is
“ another kind of water by which the interior of the earth is soaked, so that being heated
“it can continually give off halitus, from which arises a great and abundant force of waters.”
In description of the modus operandi of halitum, he says (p. 6): “. . . . Halitus
“rises to the upper parts of the canales, where the congealing cold turns it into water, which
“by its gravity and weight again runs down to the lowest parts and increases the flow of
“water if there is any. If any finds its way through a canales dilatata the same thing
‘happens, but it is carried a long way from its place of origin. The first phase of distillation
“ teaches us how this water is produced, for when that which is put into the ampulla is
“warmed it evaporates (expirare), and this halitus rising into the operculum is converted
“by cold into water, which drips through the spout. In this way water is being continually
“created underground.” (De Ortu, p. 7): ‘‘ And so we know from all this that of the waters
“which are under the earth, some are collected from rain, some arise from halitus (steam), some
““ from river-water, some from sea-water ; and we know that the halitum is produced within
“the earth partly from rain-water, partly from river-water, and partly from sea-water.”
It would require too much space to set out Agricola’s views upon the origin of the subter-
ranean heat which produced this steam. It is an involved theory embracing clashing winds,
burning bitumen, coal, etc., and is fully set out in the latter part of Book II, De Ortu et Causis.

ORIGIN OF GANGUE MINERALS. It is necessary to bear in mind that Agricola
divided minerals (res fossiles—‘‘ Things dug up,” see note 4, p. 1) into “ earths,”
“‘ solidified juices,’ ‘‘ stones,” ‘‘ metals,” and “‘ compounds ;”’ and, further, to bear in mind
that in his conception of the origin of things generally, he was a disciple of the Peripatetic
logic of a ‘‘ material substance” and an “ efficient force,” as mentioned above.

As to the origin of “earths,” he says (De Ortu, p. 38): ‘“ Pure and simple ‘ earth’
“‘ originates in the canales in the following way : rain water, which is absorbed by the surface
“of the earth, first of all penetrates and passes into the inner parts of the earth and
“‘mixes with it; next, it is collected from all sides into stringers and veins, where it,
“and sometimes water of other origin, erodes the ‘ earth’ away,—a great quantity of it if the
“stringers and veins are in ‘earth,’ a small quantity if they are in rock. The softer the
“rock is, the more the water wears away particles by its continual movement. To this
“class of rock belongs limestone, from which we see chalk, clay, and marl, and other unctuous
“* earths’ made; also sandstone, from which are made those barren ‘ earths’ which we may
“see in ravines and on bare rocks. For the rain softens limestone or sandstone and carries
“ particles away with it, and the sediment collects together and forms mud, which afterward
“ solidifies into some kind of ‘ earth.’ In a similar way under the ground the power of water
“softens the rock and dissolves the coarser fragments of stone. This is clearly shown by
“the following circumstance, that frequently the powder of rock or marble is found in a
“soft state and as if partly dissolved. Now, the water carries this mixture into the course
“ of some underground canalis, or dragging it into narrow places, filters away. And in each
“case the water flows away and a pure and uniform material is left from which ‘ earth’
“is made. . . . Particles of rock, however, are only by force of long time so softened
“by water as to become similar to particles of ‘earth.’ It is ible to see ‘earth’ being
“‘ made in this way in underground canales in the earth, when drifts or tunnels are driven into
“the mountains, or when shafts are sunk, for then the canales are laid bare; also it can be
“seen above ground in ravines, as I have said, or otherwise disclosed. For in both cases
“ it is clear to the eye that they are made out of the ‘ earth’ or rocks, which are often of the
“same colour. And in just the same way they are made in the springs which the veins
“discharge. Since all those things which we see with our eyes and which are perceived
“ with our senses, are more clearly understood than if they were learnt by means of reasoning,
“we deem it sufficient to explain by this argument our view of the origin of ‘earth.’ In
“the manner which I have described, ‘ earths’ originate in veins and veinlets, seams in the
‘rocks, springs, ravines, and other openings, therefore all ‘earths’ are made in this way.

ae
£5 ae
; nest

BOOK. III. 49

A, B, C, D—Tue mountain. E, F, G, H, I, K—Vena cumulata.
accumulations is usually formed a “‘ vena cumulata.”

* As to those that are found in underground canales which do not appear to have been derived
“from the earth or rock adjoining, these have undoubtedly been carried by the water for a
“‘ greater distance from their place of origin; which may be made clear to anyone who seeks
“their source.”’
On the origin of solidified juices he states (De Ortu, p. 43): ‘I will now speak of
“ solidified juices (succi concreti). I give this name to those minerals which are without
“ difficulty resolved into liquids (kumore). Some stones and metals, even though they are
“‘ themselves composed of juices, have been compressed so solidly by the cold that they can only
“be dissolved with difficulty or not at all. . . . For juices, as I said above, are either
“‘made when dry substances immersed in moisture are cooked by heat, or else they are
“‘ made when water flows over ‘earth,’ or when the surrounding moisture corrodes metallic
“material; or else they are forced out of the ground by the power of heat alone. There-
9 “fore, solidified juices originate from liquid juices, which either heat or cold have condensed.
q “ But that which heat has dried, fire reduces to dust, and moisture dissolves. Not only
Y “does warm or cold water dissolve certain solidified juices, but also humid air; and a juice
a . “which the cold has condensed is liquefied by fire and warm water. A salty juice is con-
“ densed into salt; a bitter one into soda; an astringent and sharp one into alum or into
“vitriol. Skilled workmen in a similar way to nature, evaporate water which contains
“juices of this kind until it is condensed; from salty ones they make salt, from
“aluminous ones alum, from one which contains vitriol they make vitriol. These workmen
“imitate nature in condensing liquid juices with heat, but they cannot imitate nature in
“condensing them by cold. From an astringent juice not only is alum made and vitriol, but
“also sory, chalcitis, and misy, which appears to be the ‘ flower’ of vitriol, just as melanteria
“is of sory. (See note on p. 573 for these minerals.) When humour corrodes pyrites so that
“it is friable, an astringent juice of this kind is obtained.”

ON THE ORIGIN OF Crome (De Ortu, p. 50), he states: ‘It is now necessary to
‘review in a few words what I have said as to all of the material from which stones are
“made ; there is first of all mud; next juice which is solidified by severe cold; then frag-
“ments of rock; afterward stone juice (succuslapidescens), which also turns to stone when
“it comes out into the air; and lastly, eve ing which has pores capable of receiving a
“stony juice.” As to an “efficient force,” he states (p. 54): ‘‘ But it is now necessary
“that I should explain my own view, omitting the first and antecedent causes. Thus the

a a Pe eee

50 BOOK III.

A—Vena profunda. B—Intervenium. C—ANOTHER vena profunda.

ZT

A & B—Venae dilatatae. C—Intervenium. D & E—OTHER venae dilatatae.

BOOK III. 51

The space between two veins is called an intervenium ; this interval
between the veins, if it is between venae dilatatae is entirely hidden under-
ground. If, however, it lies between venae profundae then the top is plainly
in sight, and the remainder is hidden.

Venae profundae differ greatly one from another in width, for some of
them are one fathom wide, some are two cubits, others one cubit ; others again
are a foot wide, and some only half a foot ; all of which our miners call wide
veins. Others on the contrary, are only a palm wide, others three digits,

“immediate causes are heat and cold; next in some way a stony juice. For we know that
‘stones which water has dissolved, are solidified when dried by heat; and on the contrary,
“we know that stones which melt by fire, such as quartz, solidify by cold. For solidification
“and the conditions which are opposite thereto, namely, dissolving and np, en spring
“ from causes which are the opposite to each other. Heat, driving the water (Awmorem) out of
“a substance, makes it hard; and cold, by withdrawing the air, solidifies the same stone
“firmly. But if a stony juice, either alone or mixed with water, finds its way into the pores
“either of plants or animals .. . . it creates stones. . . . If stony juice is
“ obtained in certain stony places and flows through the veins, for this reason certain springs,
“ brooks, streams, and lakes, have the power of turning things to stone.”

ON THE ORIGIN oF METALS, he says (De Ortu, p. 71): “ Having now refuted the

ie sagen of others, I must explain what it really is from which metals are produced.
best proof that there is water in their materials is the fact that they flow when
“melted, whereas they are again solidified by the cold of air or water. This, however,
“must be understood in the sense that there is more water in them and less ‘earth’; for it
“is not simply water that is their substance but water mixed with ‘earth.’ And such a
*“ proportion of ‘ earth’ is in the mixture as may obscure the transparency of the water, but
“not remove the brilliance which is frequently in unpolished things. Again, the purer the
“mixture, the more precious the metal which is made from it, and the greater its resistance
“to fire. But what proportion of ‘earth’ is in each liquid from which a metal is made
“no mortal can ever ascertain, or still less explain, but the one God has known it, Who has
“ given certain sure and fixed laws to nature for mixing and blending things cos oye It
‘is a juice (succus) then, from which metals are formed; and this juice is created by various
“operations. Of these operations the first is a flow of water which softens the ‘earth’ or
“ carries the ‘earth’ along with it, thus there is a mixture of ‘earth’ and water, then the
“ power of heat works upon the mixtures so as to produce that kind of a juice. We have
“spoken of the substance of metals; we must now speak of their efficient cause. . . .
““(p. 75): We do not deny the statement of Albertus Magnus that the mixture of ‘earth’
“and water is baked by subterranean heat to a certain denseness, but it is our opinion that
“the juice so obtained is afterward solidified by cold so as to become a metal. . . .
“ We grant, indeed, that heat is the efficient cause of a good mixture of elements, and also
“cooks this same mixture into a juice, but until this juice is solidified by cold it is not a
“metal.” . . . (p. 76): This view of Aristotle is the true one. For metals melt
“through the heat and somehow become softened; but those which have become softened
“through heat are again solidified by the influence of cold, and, on the contrary, those
“‘which become softened by moisture are solidified by heat.”

ON THE ORIGIN oF ComPpouNDs, he states (De Ortu, p. 80): ‘‘ There now remain
“‘for our consideration the compound minerals (misfae), that is to say, minerals which
“contain either solidified juice (succus concretus) and ‘stone,’ or else metal or metals and
“* stone,’ or else metal-coloured ‘earth,’ of which two or more have so grown together
“by the action of cold that one body has been created. By this sign they are distin-
“guished from mixed minerals (composita), for the latter have not one body. For
“example, pyrites, galena, and cha silver are reckoned in the category of aon ators
Seanaacala, hereah we nay that moe ic ‘ earths’ or stony ‘earths’ or ‘ earths’ mingled with
“juices, are mixed minerals ; or similarly, stones in which metal or solidified juices adhere,
“or which contain ‘earth.’ But of both these classes I will treat more fully in my book De
“ Natura Fossilium. 1 will now discuss their origin in a few words. A compound mineral
bak uced when either a juice from which some metal is obtained, or a humour and some
i juice from which stone is obtained, are solidified by cold, or when two or more juices
“ of different metals mixed with the juice from which stone is made, are condensed by the same
“cold, or when a metallic juice is mixed with ‘earth ‘ whose whole mass is stained with its
“colour, and in this way they form one body. To the first class belongs galena, composed
“of lead juice and of that material which forms the substance of opaque stone. Similarly,
‘ tansparegh Tuby silver is made out of silver juice and the juice which forms the

52 BOOK. IIl.

or even two; these they call narrow. But in other places where there are
very wide veins, the widths of a cubit, or a foot, or half a foot, are said to be
narrow ; at Cremnitz, for instance, there is a certain vein which measures
in one place fifteen fathoms in width, in another eighteen, and in another
twenty ; the truth of this statement is vouched for by the inhabitants.

“substance of transparent stone; when it is smelted into pure silver, since from it is
“separated the transparent juice, it is no longer transparent. Then too, there is pyrites,
“or lapis fissilis, from which sulphur is melted. To the second kind belongs that kind of
“ pyrites which contains not only copper and stone, but sometimes copper, silver, and stone;
“sometimes copper, silver, gold, and stone; sometimes silver, lead, tin, copper and silver
“glance. That compound minerals consist of stone and metal is sufficiently proved by
“their hardness ; that some are made of ‘earth’ and metal is proved from brass, which is
“composed of copper and calamine; and also proved from white brass, which is coloured
“by artificial white arsenic. Sometimes the heat bakes some of them to such an extent that
“they appear to have flowed out of blazing furnaces, which we may see in the case of
“‘cadmia and pyrites. A metallic substance is produced out of ‘earth’ when a metallic
“juice impregnating the ‘earth’ solidifies with cold, the ‘earth’ not being changed. A
“stony substance is produced when viscous and non-viscous ‘earth’ are accumulated in
‘one place and baked by heat; for then the viscous part turns into stone and the non-
‘viscous is only dried up.”

THE ORIGIN oF Juices. The portion of Agricola’s theory surrounding this subject
is by no means easy to follow in detail, especially as it is difficult to adjust one’s point of
view to the Peripatetic elements, fire, water, earth, and air, instead of to those of the
atomic theory which so dominates our every modern conception. That Agricola’s ‘juice’
was in most cases a solution is indicated by the statement (De Ortu, p. 48): ‘‘ Nor is juice
“anything but water, which on the other hand has absorbed ‘earth’ or has corroded or
“touched metal and somehow become heated.” That he realized the difference between
mechanical suspension and solution is evident from (De Ortu, p. 50): ‘A stony juice differs
“from water which has abraded something from rock, either because it has more of that which
“‘ deposits, or because heat, by cooking water of that kind, has thickened it, or because there
“is something in it which has powerful astringent properties.” Much of the author’s notion
of juices has already been given in the quotations regarding various minerals, but his most
general statement on the subject is as follows :—(De Ortu, p. 9): ‘‘ Juices, however, are
“ distinguished from water by their density (crassitudo), and are generated in various ways—
“either when dry things are soaked with moisture and the mixture is heated, in which way
“ by far the greatest part of juices arise, not only inside the earth, but outside it : or when
“water running over the earth is made rather dense, in which way, for the most
“part the juice becomes salty and bitter; or when the moisture stands upon metal,
“especially copper, and corrodes it, and in this way is produced the juice from which
“chrysocolla originates. Similarly, when the moisture corrodes friable cupriferous pe
“an acrid juice is made from which is produced vitriol and sometimes alum ; or, finally,
“juices are aoe out by the bing! force of the heat from the earth. If the force is great
“the juice flows like pitch from burning pine . . . . in this way we know a kind of
“bitumen is made in the earth. In the same way different kinds of moisture are generated
“in living bodies, so also the earth produces waters differing in quality, and in the same
“way juices.”

. ConcLusion. If we strip his theory of the necessary influence of the state of
knowledge of his time, and of his own deep classical learning, we find two propositions
original with Agricola, which still to-day are fundamentals :

(x) That ore channels were of origin subsequent to their containing rocks; (2) That
ores were deposited from solutions circulating in these openings. A scientist’s work must
be judged by the advancement he gave to his science, and with this gauge one can say
-sscongea ging © that the theory which we have set out above represents a much greater step
from what had gone before than that of almost any single observer since. Moreover, apart
from any tangible proposition laid down, the deduction of these views from actual observation in-
stead of from fruitless speculation was a contribution to the very foundation of natural science.
Agricola was wrong in attributing the creation of ore channels to erosion alone, and it was not
until Von Oppel (Anleitung zur Markscheidekunst, Dresden, 1749 and other essays), two centuries
after Agricola, that the positive proposition that ore channels were due to fissuring was
brought forward. Von Oppel, however, in neglecting channels due to erosion (and in this term
we include solution) was not altogether sound. Nor was it until late in the 18th century that
the filling of ore channels by deposition from solutions was generally accepted. In the
meantime, Agricola’s successors in the study of ore deposits exhibited positive retrogression
from the true fundamentals advocated by him. Gesner, Utman, Meier, Lohneys, Barba,

4

ee ee ee ee ee ae Ne ee, ee eo, ee ee a

aa

BOOK IIL. 53

A—WIDE vena profunda. B—Narrow vena profunda.

Venae dilatatae, in truth, differ also in thickness, for some are one fathom
thick, others two, or even more; some are a cubit thick, some a foot, some
only half a foot ; and all these are usually called thick veins. Some on the
other hand, are but a palm thick, some three digits, some two, some one ;
these are called thin veins.

Réssler, Becher, Stahl, Henckel, and Zimmerman, all fail to grasp the double essentials.
Other writers of this period often enough merely quote Agricola, some not even acknowledging
the source, as, for instance, Pryce (Mineralogia Cornubiensis, London, 1778) and Williams
(Natural History of the Mineral Kingdom, London, 1789). After Von Oppel, the two
fundamental principles mentioned were generally accepted, but then arose the complicated
and acrimonious discussion of the origin of solutions, and nothing in Agricola’s view was so
absurd as Werner’s contention (Newe Theorie von der Entstehung der Gange, Freiberg, 1791)
of the universal chemical deluge which penetrated fissuresopen at the surface. While it is
not the purpose of these notes to pursue the history of these subjects subsequent to the
author’s time, it is due to him and to the current beliefs as to the history of the theory of ore
deposits, to call the attention of students to the perverse representation of Agricola’s views
by Werner (op. cit.) upon which most writers have apparently relied. Why this author
should be (as, for instance, by Posepny, Amer. Inst. Mining Engineers, 1g01) so generally con-
sidered the father of our modern theory, can only be explained by a general lack of knowledge of
the work of previous writers on ore deposition. Not one of the propositions original with
Werner still holds good, while his rejection of the origin of solutions within the earth itself
halted the march of advance in thought on these subjects for half a century. It is our
hope to discuss exhaustively at some future time the development of the history of this,
one of the most far-reaching of geologic hypotheses.

34

Isvqy

BOOK. III.

A—THIN vena dilatata. B—Tuicx vena dilatata.
Venae profundae vary in direction ; for some run from east to west.
SouTH

NortTH
D, E, F—SEAms IN THE Rock (Commissurae Saxorum).

A, B, C—VEIN.

BOOK. III. 55

Others, on the other hand, run from west to east.
SOUTH.

WY

NORTH.
A, B, C—Vern. D, E, F—Seams in the Rocks.

Others run from south to north.

——
—
=

i)

NortTuH.
A, B, C—Vein. D, E, F—Seams in the Rocks.

56 BOOK III.

Others, on the contrary, run from north to south.

\\\ oA)

Hil

A, B, C—Verin. D, E, F—Seams in the Rocks.

The seams in the rocks indicate to us whether a vein runs from the
east or from the west. For instance, if the rock seams incline toward the
westward as they descend into the earth, the vein is said to run from east
to west; if they incline toward the east, the vein is said to run from west
to east; in a similar manner, we determine from the rock seams whether
the veins run north or south.

Now miners divide each quarter of the earth into six divisions ; and by
this method they apportion the earth into twenty-four directions, which they
divide into two parts of twelve each. The instrument which indicates these
directions is thus constructed. First a circle is made; then at equal
intervals on one half portion of it right through to the other, twelve
straight lines called by the Greeks Siauerpor, and in the Latin dimetientes,
are drawn through a central point which the Greeks call «xévrpov, so that
the circle is thus divided into twenty-four divisions, all being of an equal
size. Then, within the circle are inscribed three other circles, the outer-
most of which has cross-lines dividing it into twenty-four equal parts ; the
space between it and the next circle contains two sets of twelve numbers,
inscribed on the lines called “‘ diameters ’’; while within the innermost circle
it is hollowed out to contain a magnetic needle*. The needle lies directly

8The endeavour to discover the origin of the compass with the Chinese, Arabs, or other

Orientals having now generally ceased, together with the idea that the knowledge of the
lodestone involved any acquaintance with the compass, it is permissible to take a rational

BOOK III. 57

over that one of the twelve lines called “‘ diameters ’”’ on which the number
XII is inscribed at both ends.

Nort.

When the needle which is governed by the magnet points directly
from the north to the south, the number XII at its tail, which is
forked, signifies the north, that number XII which is at its point indicates
the south. The sign VI superior indicates the east, and VI inferior the
west. Further, between each two cardinal points there are always
five others which are not so important. The first two of these directions
are called the prior directions; the last two are called the posterior, and —
the fifth direction lies immediately between the former and the latter; it
is halved, and one half is attributed to one cardinal point and one half to the
other. For example, between the northern number XII and the eastern
number VI, are points numbered I, II, III, IV, V, of which I and

view of the subject. The lodestone was well known even before Plato and Aristotle, and is
described by Theophrastus (see Note ro, p. 115.) The first authentic and specific mention
of the compass appears to be by pian} at Neckam (an Englishman who died in 1217),
in his works De Utensilibus and De Naturis Rerum. The first tangible description of the
instrument was in a letter to Petrus Peregrinus de Maricourt, written in 1269, a translation
of which was published by Sir Sylvanus Thompson (London, 1902). His circle was divided into
four quadrants and these quarters divided into 90 degrees each. The first mention of a
compass in connection with mines so far as we know is in the Niitzlich Bergbiichlin, a review
of which will be found in Appendix B. This]book, which dates from 1500, gives a compass much
like the one described above by Agricola. It is divided in like manner into two halves of 12
divisions each. The four cardinal points being marked Mitternacht, Morgen, Mittag, and
Abend. Thus the directions read were referred to as m1. after midnight, etc. According to
Joseph Carne (Trans. Roy. Geol. Socy. of Cornwall, Vol. 1m, 1814), the Cornish miners
formerly referred to North-South veins as 12 o’clock veins ; South-East North-West veins as
9 o'clock veins, etc.

58 BOOK IIL.

II are northern directions lying toward the east, IV and V are eastern
directions lying toward the north, and III is assigned, half to the north and
half to the east.

One who wishes to know the direction of the veins underground, places
over the vein the instrument just described ; and the needle, as soon as it
becomes quiet, will indicate the course of the vein. That is, if the vein
proceeds from VI to VI, it either runs from east to west, or from west to
east ; but whether it be the former or the latter, is clearly shown by the
seams in the rocks. If the vein proceeds along the line which is between V
and VI toward the opposite direction, it runs from between the fifth and
sixth divisions of east to the west, or from between the fifth and sixth
divisions of west to the east ; and again, whether it is the one or the other
is clearly shown by the seams in the rocks. In a similar manner we
determine the other directions.

Now miners reckon as many points as the sailors do in reckoning up
the number of the winds. Not only is this done to-day in this country, but
it was also done by the Romans who in olden times gave the winds partly
Latin names and partly names borrowed from the Greeks. Any miner who
pleases may therefore call the directions of the veins by the names of the
winds. There are four principal winds, as there are four cardinal points:
the Subsolanus, which blows from the east ; and its opposite the Favontus,
which blows from the west ; the latter is called by the Greeks Zéipupoc, and
the former 'Arn\wrnc. There is the Auster, which blows from the south ;
and opposed to it is the Septentrio, from the north; the former the Greeks
called Néroc, and the latter ‘Arapxriac. There are also subordinate winds,
to the number of twenty, as there are directions, for between each two
principal winds there are always five subordinate ones. Between the
Subsolanus (east wind) and the Auster (south wind) there is the Ornithiae
or the Bird wind, which has the first place next to the Subsolanus; then
comes Caecias; then Eurus, which lies in the midway of these five; next
comes Vulturnus ; and lastly, Euronotus, nearest the Auster (south wind).
The Greeks have given these names to all of these, with the exception of
Vulturnus, but those who do not distinguish the winds in so precise a manner
say this is the same as the Greeks called Eipoc. Between the Auster (south
wind) and the Favonius (west wind) is first Altanus, to the right of the
Auster (south wind); then Libonotus; then Africus, which is the middle
one of these five; after that comes Subvesperus ; next Argestes, to the left
of Favonius (west wind). All these, with the exception of Libonotus and
Argestes, have Latin names; but A/ricus also is called by the Greeks Ail.
In a similar manner, between Favonius (west wind) and Septentrio (north
wind), first to the right of Favonius (west wind), is the Etesiae; then
Circius ; then Caurus, which is in the middle of these five; then Corus ;
and lastly Thrascias to the left of Septentrio (north wind). To all of
these, except that of Caurus, the Greeks gave the names, and those
who do not distinguish the winds by so exact a plan, assert that the wind
which the Greeks called Képoc and the Latins Caurus is one and the same.

BOOK III. 59

Again, between Septentrio (north wind) and the Subsolanus (east wind), the
first to the right of Septentrio (north wind) is Gallicus ; then Supernas ; then
Aquilo, which is the middie one of these five; next comes Boreas; and
lastly Carbas, to the left of Subsolanus (east wind). Here again, those who
do notfconsider the winds to be in so great a multitude, but say there are
but twelve winds in all, or at the most fourteen, assert that the wind called

SouTH.

NortTu.

by the Greeks Bopéac and the Latins Aguilo is one and the same. For our
purpose it is not only useful to adopt this large number of winds, but even
to double it, as the German sailors do. They always reckon that between
each two there is one in the centre taken from both. By this method we

WEsT.

60 BOOK. III.

also are able to signify the intermediate directions by means of the names of
the winds. For instance, if a vein runs from VI east to VI west, it is said
to proceed from Subsolanus (east wind) to Favontus (west wind); but one
which proceeds from between V and VI of the east to between V and VI
west is said to proceed out of the middle of Carbas and Subsolanus to between
Argestes and Favontus; the remaining directions, and their intermediates
are similarly designated. The miner, on account of the natural properties
of a magnet, by which the needle points to the south, must fix the instru-
ment already described so that east is to the left and west to the right.

In a similar way to venae profundae, the venae dtlatatae vary in their
lateral directions, and we are able to understand from the seams in the
rocks in which direction they extend into the ground. For if these incline
toward the west in depth, the vein is said to extend from east to west ;
if on the contrary, they incline toward the east, the vein is said to go from
west to east. In the same way, from the rock seams we can determine
veins running south and north, or the reverse, and likewise to the
subordinate directions and their intermediates.

hy

SEWN

=)

A, B—Venae dilatatae. C—Seams in the Rocks.

Further, as regards the question of direction of a vena profunda, one
runs straight from one quarter of the earth to that quarter which is opposite,
while another one runs in a curve, in which case it may happen that a vein
proceeding from the east does not turn to the quarter opposite, which is the
west, but twists itself and turns to the south or the north.

4

BOOK III. 61

Similarly some venae dilatatae are horizontal, some are inclined, and
some are curved.

a s
SS

Sa

A—HORIZONTAL vena dilatata. B—INCLINED vena dilaiata. C—CuRvED vena dilatata.
7

62 BOOK. III.

Also the veins which we call profundae differ in the manner in which
they descend into the depths of the earth ; for some are vertical (A), some are
inclined and sloping (B), others crooked (C).

Moreover, venae profundae (B) differ much among themselves regarding
the kind of locality through which they pass, for some extend along the
slopes of mountains or hills (A-C) and do not descend down the sides.

BOOK. III. 63

Other Venae Profundae (D, E, F) from the very summit of the mountain
or hill descend the slope (A) to the hollow or valley (B), and they again ascend
the slope or the side of the mountain or hill opposite (C).

Other Venae Profundae (C, D) descend the mountain or hill (A) and
extend out into the plain (B).

I ae.

64 BOOK III.

Some veins run straight along on the plateaux, the hills, or plains.

A—Mountainous Prain. B—Vena profunda.

A—PRINCIPAL VEIN. B—TRANSVERSE VEIN. C—VEIN CUTTING PRINCIPAL ONE
OBLIQUELY.

BOOK. III. 65

In the next place, venae profundae differ not a little in the manner in
which they intersect, since one may cross through a second transversely, or
one may cross another one obliquely as if cutting it in two.

If a vein which cuts through another principal one obliquely be the
harder of the two, it penetrates right through it, just as a wedge of beech or
iron can be driven through soft wood by means of a tool. If it be softer, the
principal vein either drags the soft one with it for a distance of three feet, or
perhaps one, two, three, or several fathoms, or else throws it forward along
the principal vein ; but this latter happens very rarely. But that the vein
which cuts the principal one is the same vein on both sides, is shown by its
having the same character in its foot walls and hanging walls.

A—PRINCIPAL VEIN. B—VEIN WHICH CUTS A OBLIQUELY. C—PART CARRIED AWAY.
D—THAT PART WHICH HAS BEEN CARRIED FORWARD.

Sometimes venae profundae join one with another, and from two or
more outcropping veins‘, one is formed ; or from two which do not outcrop
one is made, if they are not far distant from each other, and the one dips
into the other, or if each dips toward the other, and they thus join when they
have descended in depth. In exactly the same way, out of three or more
veins, one may be formed in depth.

*Crudarits. Pliny (XXXII., 31), says :—‘Argenti vena in summo reperta crudaria
appellatur,” “Silver veins discovered at the surface are called crudaria.”’ The German

translator of Agricola uses the term sylber gang—silver vein, obviously misunderstanding the
author’s meaning.

66 BOOK. III.

A, B—Two VEINS DESCEND INCLINED AND DIP TOWARD EACH OTHER.
C—Junction. LIKEWISE Two VEINS. D—INDICATES ONE DESCENDING VERTICALLY.
E—MARKS THE OTHER DESCENDING INCLINED, WHICH DIPS TOWARD D. F—THEIR JUNCTION.

x

Ss}

me

WM
pill

——-

BOOK III. 67

However, such a junction of veins sometimes disunites and in this
way it happens that the vein which was the right-hand vein becomes
the left ; and again, the one which was on the left becomes the right.

Furthermore, one vein may be split and divided into parts by some hard
rock resembling a beak, or stringers in soft rock may sunder the vein and
make two or more. These sometimes join together again and sometimes
remain divided.

A, B—VEINs DivipInc. C—THE SAME JOINING.

Whether a vein is separating from or uniting with another can be deter-
mined only from the seams in the rocks. For example, if a principal
vein runs from the east to the west, the rock seams descend in depth
likewise from the east toward the west, and the associated vein which
joins with the principal vein, whether it runs from the south or the north,
has its rock seams extending in the same way as its own, and they do not
conform with the seams in the rock of the principal vein—which remain
the same after the junction—unless the associated vein proceeds in the same
direction as the principal vein. In that case we name the broader vein the
principal one, and the narrower the associated vein. But if the principal
vein splits, the rock seams which belong respectively to the parts, keep
the same course when descending in depth as those of the principal vein.

But enough of venae profundae, their junctions and divisions. Now
we come to venae dilatatae. A vena dilatata may either cross a vena profunda,
or join with it, or it may be cut by a vena profunda, and be divided into parts.

68 BOOK _ Iii.

tds 44, gs

A, C—Vena dilatata crossiInc A vena profunda. B—Vena profunda. D, E—Vena
dilatata WHICH JUNCTIONS WITH A vena profunda. F—Vena profunda. G—Vena dilatata.
H, I—Its DIVIDED PARTS. K—Vena profunda WHICH DIVIDES THE vena dilatata.

Finally, a vena profunda has a “‘ beginning ”’ (origo), an ‘‘end”’ (finis), a
“head” (caput), and a “tail” (cauda). That part whence it takes its rise
is said to be its “ beginning,’”’ that in which it terminates the “end.” Its
“head’’® is that part which emerges into daylight; its “tail” that part
which is hidden in the earth. But miners have no need to seek the
“beginning ”’ of veins, as formerly the kings of Egypt sought for the source
of the Nile, but it is enough for them to discover some other part of the vein
and to recognise its direction, for seldom can either the “‘ beginning ”’ or the
“end” be found. The direction in which the head of the vein comes into
the light, or the direction toward which the tail extends, is indicated by its
footwall and hangingwall. The latter is said to hang, and the former to lie.
The vein rests on the footwall, and the hangingwall overhangs it; thus,
when we descend a shaft, the part to which we turn the face is the foot-
wall and seat of the vein, that to which we turn the back is the hanging-
wall. Also in another way, the head accords with the footwall and the tail
with the hangingwall, for if the footwall is toward the south, the vein
extends its head into the light toward the south; and the hangingwall,
because it is always opposite to the footwall, is then toward the north.
Consequently the vein extends its tail toward the north if it is an inclined
vena profunda. Similarly, we can determine with regard to east and west
and the subordinate and their intermediate directions. A vena profunda
which descends into the earth may be either vertical, inclined, or crooked ;
the footwall of an inclined vein is easily distinguished from the hangingwall,
but it is not so with a vertical vein; and again, the footwall of a crooked
vein is inverted and changed into the hangingwall, and contrariwise the
hangingwall is twisted into the footwall, but very many of these crooked
veins may be turned back to vertical or inclined ones.

‘It might be considered that the term “ outcrop” could be used for “ head,” but it
will be noticed that a vena dilatata would thus be stated to have no outcrop,

é
teh

ee

ee ee a

Se ae ee ee

OT ee

tf e™t i ie
—_— 2

BOOK III.

=

Raacw
ae
wes

‘Ny
}

A—THE “ BEGINNING” (origo). B—Tue “END” (finis), C—THe “HEAD” (caput).
D—Tue “Tait” (canda).

A vena dilatata has only a “ beginning ” and an “end,” and in the place
of the ‘‘head”’ and “‘tail”’ it has two sides.

o> AWN ZI = Ny S \\

—__~=
A—THE “ BEGINNING.” B—THE “END.” C, D—THE “‘sIDEs.”

70 BOOK III.

A—THE ‘“ BEGINNING.” B—THE “END.” C—THE “HEAD.” D—THE “TAIL.”
: E—TRANSVERSE VEIN.

A vena cumulata has a ‘“ beginning,’ an “end,’’ a “head,” and a
“tail,” just as a vena profunda. Moreover, a vena cumulata, and likewise
a vena dilatata, are often cut through by a transverse vena profunda.

Stringers (fibrae)®, which are little veins, are classified into fibrae trans-
versae, fibrae obliquae which cut the vein obliquely, /fibrae sociae,
fibrae dilatatae, and fibrae incumbentes. The fibra transversa crosses
the vein; the fibra obliqua crosses the vein obliquely ; the fibra socta joins
with the vein itself; the fibra dilatata, like the vena dilatata, penetrates
through it; but the fibra dilatata, as well as the fibra profunda, is usually
found associated with a vein.

The fibra incumbens does not descend as deeply into the earth as the
other stringers, but lies on the vein, as it were, from the surface to the
hangingwall or footwall, from which it is named Subdialis.?

In truth, as to direction, junctions, and divisions, the stringers are not
different from the veins.

®It is possible that ‘ veinlets ”’ would be preferred by purists, but the word “‘ stringer ”
has become fixed in the nomenclature of miners and we have adopted it. The old English
term was “stringe,”’ and appears in Edward Manlove’s “‘ Rhymed Chronicle,” London,
1653; Pryce’s, Mineralogia Cornubiensis, London, 1778, pp. 103 and 329; Mawe’s “‘ Mineralogy
of Devonshire,’ London, 1802, p. 210, etc., etc.

7Subdialis. ‘‘In the open air.’’ The Glossary gives the meaning as Ein tag klufft
oder tag gehenge—a surface stringer.

BOOK III. 71

A, B—Veins. C—TRANSVERSE STRINGER. D—OBLIQUE STRINGER.
E—ASSOCIATED STRINGER. F—Fibra dilatata,

OO ee

A—Vetn. B—Fibra incumbens FROM THE SURFACE OF THE HANGINGWALL. C—SAME
FROM THE FOOTWALL.

72 BOOK. III.

Lastly, the seams, which are the very finest stringers (fibrae), divide
the rock, and occur sometimes frequently, sometimes rarely. From
whatever direction the vein comes, its seams always turn their heads
toward the light in the same direction. But, while the seams usually run
from one point of the compass to another immediately opposite it, as
for instance, from east to west, if hard stringers divert them, it may
happen that these very seams, which before were running from east to
west, then contrariwise proceed from west to east, and the direction of
the rocks is thus inverted. In such a case, the direction of the veins is
judged, not by the direction of the seams which occur rarely, but by those
which constantly recur.

A—SEAMS WHICH PROCEED FROM THE EAST. B—THE INVERSE.

Both veins or stringers may be solid or drusy, or barren of minerals,
or pervious to water. Solid veins contain no water and very little air. The
drusy veins rarely contain water; they often contain air. Those which
are barren of minerals often carry water. Solid veins and stringers con-
sist sometimes of hard materials, sometimes of soft, and sometimes of a
kind of medium between the two.

bs
Ef
a,
fi

ee Vg se

a an

ee Sn ee a ee

BOOK. III. 73

HAN
| jh
= MK):

A—SoLip VEIN. B—SOoLID STRINGER. C—CAVERNOUS VEIN. D—CAvVERNOUS
STRINGER. E—BARREN VEIN. F—BARREN STRINGER.

But to return to veins. A great number of miners consider® that the
best veins in depth are those which run from the VI or VII direction of the
east to the VI or VII direction of the west, through a mountain slope which
inclines to the north ; and whose hangingwalls are in the south, and whose
footwalls are in the north, and which have their heads rising to the north,
as explained before, always like the footwall, and finally, whose rock
seams turn their heads to the east. And the veins which are the next

8The following from Chapter rv of the Nidézlich Bergbiichlin (see Appendix B) ma
indicate the source of the theory which Agricola here discards :—‘‘ As to those veins whi
“are most profitable to work, it must be remarked that the most suitable location for the vein
“is on the slope of the mountain facing south, so its strike is from vi or vi east to vi or
“vir west. According to the above-mentioned directions, the outcrop of the whole vein
“should face north, its gesteins ausgang toward the east, its hangingwall toward the south,
“and its footwall toward the north, for in such mountains and veins the influence of the
‘« planets is siya ame Mant he to prepare the matter out of which the silver is to be made
“orformed. . . . e other strikes of veins from between east and south to the region
“between west and north are esteemed more or less valuable, according to whether ‘they are
“nearer or further away from the above-mentioned strikes, but with the same hanging-
“wall, footwall, and outcrops. But the veins having their strike from north to south,
“ their hangingwall toward the west, their footwall and their outcrops toward the east,
“are better to work than veins which extend from south to north, whose hangingwalls
“are toward the east, and footwalls and outcrops toward the west. Although the latter
“veins sometimes yield solid and good silver ore, still it is not sure and certain, because
“the whole mineral force is completely scattered and dispersed through the outcrop, etc.”

74 BOOK. III.

best are those which, on the contrary, extend from the VI or VII direction
of the west to the VI or VII direction of the east, through the slope of a
mountain which similarly inclines to the north, whose hangingwalls
are also in the south, whose footwalls are in the north, and whose
heads rise toward the north; and lastly, whose rock seams raise
their heads toward the west. In the third place, they recommend those
veins which extend from XII north to XII south, through the slope
of a mountain which faces east; whose hangingwalls are in the
west, whose footwalls are in the east; whose heads rise toward
the east; and whose rock seams raise their heads toward the north.
Therefore they devote all their energies to those veins, and give very little
or nothing to those whose heads, or the heads of whose rock seams rise
toward the south or west. For although they say these veins some-
times show bright specks of pure metal adhering to the stones, or they come
upon lumps of metal, yet these are so few and far between that despite them
it is not worth the trouble to excavate such veins ; and miners who persevere
in digging in the hope of coming upon a quantity of metal, always lose their
time and trouble. And they say that from veins of this kind, since the sun’s
rays draw out the metallic material, very little metal is gained. But in
this matter the actual experience of the miners who thus judge of the veins
does not always agree with their opinions, nor is their reasoning sound ;
since indeed the veins which run from east to west through the slope of a
mountain which inclines to the south, whose heads rise likewise to the
south, are not less charged with metals, than those to which miners are
wont to accord the first place in productiveness ; as in recent years has been

proved by the St. Lorentz vein at Abertham, which our countrymen call

Gottsgaab, for they have dug out of it a large quantity of pure silver; and
lately a vein in Annaberg, called by the name of Himmelsch hoz®, has made it

~ ‘The names in the Latin are given as Donum Divinum—‘ God’s Gift,” and
Coelestis Exercitus—‘‘ Heavenly Host.’ names given in the text are from the German
Translation. The former of these mines was located in the valley of Joachim, where Agricola
spent many years as the town physician at Joachimsthal. It is of further interest, as Agricola
obtained an income from it as a shareholder. He gives the history of the mine (De Veteribus
et Novis Metallis, Book I.), as follows :—‘‘ The mines at Abertham were discovered, Fro
“by chance, partly by science. In the eleventh year of Charles V. (1530), on the 18th of
“February, a poor miner, but one skilled in the art of mining, dwelt in the middle of the
“forest in a solitary hut, and there tended the cattle of his employer. While digging a little
“ trench in which to store milk, he opened a vein. At once he washed some in a bowl and saw
** particles of the purest silver settled at the bottom. Overcome with joy he informed his
‘*employer, and went to the Bergmeister and petitioned that official to give him a head
“mining lease, which in the language of our people he called Gottsgaab. Then he pr
“to dig the vein, and found more fragments of silver, and the miners were inspired with
“great hopes as to the richness of the vein. Although such hopes were not frustrated,
“still a whole year was spent before they received any profits from the mine ; whereby
“many became discouraged and did not persevere in paying expenses, but sold their shares
“in the mine ; and for this reason, when at last an abundance of silver was being drawn
“out, a great change had taken place in the ownership of the mine; nay, even the first

“ finder of the vein was not in possession of any share in it, and had spent nearly all the

“money which he had obtained from the selling of his shares. Then this mine yielded such
“a quantity of pure silver as no other mine that has existed within our own or our
“‘ fathers’ memories, with the exception of the St. George at Schneeberg. We, as a share-
“holder, through the goodness of God, have enjoyed the proceeds of this ‘God’s Gift’
“since the very time when the mine began first to bestow such riches.” Later on in the

2 A rin i re i aS aaa i FA aay Por CITT

Sg pac gm mG a I es i na I ign et ten

ee ere

iin

La i at at nin

ee ee ee ee ee

eee

ee ee a eS ee

BOOK III. 75

plain by the production of much silver that veins which extend from the
north to the south, with their heads rising toward the west, are no less rich
in metals than those whose heads rise toward the east.

It may be denied that the heat of the sun draws the metallic material
out of these veins; for though it draws up vapours from the surface of the
ground, the rays of the sun do not penetrate right down to the depths ; because
the air of a tunnel which is covered and enveloped by solid earth to the depth of
only two fathoms is cold in summer, for the intermediate earth holds in check
the force of the sun. Having observed this fact, the inhabitants and dwellers
of very hot regions lie down by day in caves which protect them from the
excessive ardour of the sun. Therefore it is unlikely that the sun draws
out from within the earth the metallic bodies. Indeed, it cannot even dry
the moisture of many places abounding in veins, because they are pro-
tected and shaded by the trees. Furthermore, certain miners, out of all
the different kinds of metallic veins, choose those which I have described,
and others, on the contrary, reject copper mines which are of this sort, so
that there seems to be no reason in this. For what can be the reason if the
sun draws no copper from copper veins, that it draws silver from silver veins,
and gold from gold veins ?

Moreover, some miners, of whose number was Calbus!®, distinguish
between the gold-bearing rivers and streams. A river, they say, or a stream,
is most productive of fine and coarse grains of gold when it comes from the
east and flows to the west, and when it washes against the foot of mountains
which are situated in the north, and when it has a level plain toward the
south or west. In the second place, they esteem a river or a stream which
flows in the opposite course from the west toward the east, and which has
the mountains to the north and the level plain to the south. In the third
place, they esteem the river or the stream which flows from the north to the
south and washes the base of the mountains which are situated in the east.
But they say that the river or stream is least productive of gold which flows
in a contrary direction from the south to the north, and washes the base of

same book he gives the following further information with regard to these mines :—“‘ Now
“if all the individual mines which have proved fruitful in our own times are weighed in
“the balance, the one at Annaberg, which is known as the Himmelsch hoz, surpasses all
“others. For the value of the silver which has been dug out has been estimated at 420,000
“Rhenish gulden. Next to this comes the lead mine in Joachimsthal, whose name is the
“* Sternen, from which as much silver has been dug as would be equivalent to 350,000 Rhenish
ee sean ; from the Gottsgaab at Abertham, explained before, the equivalent of 300,000.
*‘ But far before all others within our fathers’ memory stands the St. rge of Schneeberg,
*‘ whose silver has been estimated as being equal to two million Rhenish quien.” A Rhenish
gulden was about 6.9 shillings, or, say, $1.66. However, the ratio value of silver to gold at
this period was about 11.5 to one, or in other words an ounce of silver was worth about a
gulden, so that, for purposes of rough calculation, one might say that silver product
mentioned in gulden is practically of the same number of ounces of silver. Moreover, it must
be remembered that the purchasing power of money was vastly ter then.

1°The following passage occurs in the Niétzlich Bergbiichlin (Chap. V.), which is interesting
on account of the great similarity to Agricola’s quotation :—‘‘ The best position of the stream is
“when it has a cliff beside it on the north and level ground on the south, but its current should
“be from east to west—that is the most suitable. The next best after this is from west to
“east, with the same position of the rocks as already stated. The third in order is when the
“‘stream flows from north to south with rocks toward the east, but the worst flow of water
“for the preparation of gold is from south to north if a rock or hill rises toward the west.”
Calbus was probably the author of this booklet.

76 BOOK III

mountains which are situated in the west. Lastly, of the streams or rivers
which flow from the rising sun toward the setting sun, or which flow from
the northern parts to the southern parts, they favour those which approach
the nearest to the lauded ones, and say they are more productive of gold,
and the further they depart from them the less productive they are. Such
are the opinions held about rivers and streams. Now, since gold is not
generated in the rivers and streams, as we have maintained against
Albertus! in the book entitled ‘‘ De Subterraneorum Oriu et Causis,’’ Book
V, but is torn away from the veins and stringers and settled in the sands of
torrents and water-courses, in whatever direction the rivers or streams flow,
therefore it is reasonable to expect to find gold therein; which is not
opposed by experience. Nevertheless, we do not deny that gold is generated
in veins and stringers which lie under the beds of rivers or streams, as in
other places.

MAlbertus Magnus.

END OF BOOK III.

$
AYN
=.
(SRN)
()

Be

i 6 as

;
|

a

aud

BOOK IV.

HE third book has explained the various and
| manifold varieties of veins and stringers. This
fourth book will deal with mining areas and the
method of delimiting them, and will then pass on to
the officials who are connected with mining affairs".

Now the miner, if the vein he has uncovered
@| is to his liking, first of all goes to the Bergmeister
a| to request to be granted a right to mine, this
) official’s special function and office being to adjudi-
cate in respect of the mines. And so to the first man who has discovered
the vein the Bergmetster awards the head meer, and to others the remaining
meers, in the order in which each makes his application. The size of
a meer is measured by fathoms, which for miners are reckoned at six feet
each. The length, in fact, is that of a man’s extended arms and hands
measured across his chest; but different peoples assign to it different lengths,

1The nomenclature in this chapter has given unusual difficulty, because the organisa-

tion of mines, either t or present, in English- a countries gg pe no exact
equivalents for many of these offices and for many of the legal terms. Latin terms in
the text were, of course, coined by the author, and have no historical basis to warrant their
adoption, while the introduction of the original German terms is open to much objection, as
they are not only largely obsolete, but also in the main would convey no meaning to the
majority of readers. e have, therefore, reached a series of compromises, and in the main
give the nearest English equivalent. Of much interest in this.connection is a curious exotic
survival in mining law to be found in the High Peak of Derbyshire. We believe (see note
on p. 85) that the law of this district was of Saxon importation, for in it are not only
many terms of German origin, but the character of the law is foreign to the older
English districts and shows its near kinship to that of Saxony. It is therefore of interest
in connection with the nomenclature to be adopted in this book, as it furnishes about the
only English precedents in many cases. The head of the administration in the Peak was the
Steward, who was the chief judicial officer, with functions somewhat similar to the
os rt aaa However, the term Steward has come to have so much less significance
that we have adopted a literal rendering of the Latin. Under the Steward was the Barmaster,
Barghmaster, or Barmar, as he was variously called, and his duties were similar to those of
the Bergmeister. The English term would seem to be a corruption of the German, and as
the latter has come to be so well understood by the English-speaking mining class, we have
in this case adopted the German. The Barmaster acted always by the consent and with the
approval of a jury of from 12 to 24 members. In this instance the English had functions
much like a modern jury, while the Geschwornen of Saxony had much more widely extended
powers. The German wornen were in the main Inspectors ; despite this, however, we
have not felt justified in adopting any other than the literal English for the Latin
and German terms. We have vacillated a great deal over the term Praefectus Fodinae, the
German Steiger having, like the Cornish “‘ Captain,” in these days degenerated into a foreman,
whereas the duties as described were not only those of the modern Superintendent or
Manager, but also those of Treasurer of the Company, for he made the calls on shares
and paid the dividends. The term Purser has been used for centuries in English mining for
the Accountant or Cashier, but his functions were limited to paying dividends, wages, etc.,
therefore we have considered it better not to adopt the latter term, and have compromised
upon the term Superintendent or Manager, although it has a distinctly modern flavor. The
word for area has also caused much hesitation, and the ‘meer’ has finally been adopted
with some doubt. The title described by Agricola has a very close equivalent in the meer
of old Derbyshire. As will be seen later, the mines of Saxony were Regal property, and
were held subject to two essential conditions, #.e., payment of a tithe, and continuous
operation. This form of title thus approximates more closely to the “lease” of Australia
an to the old Cornish se¢#, or the American claim. The fundgrube of Saxony and Agricola’s
equivalent, the area capitis—head lease—we have rendered literally as ‘‘ head meer,”
although in some ways “ founders’ meer ” might be better, for, in Derbyshire, this was called
the “ finder’s ”’ or founder’s meer, and was awarded under similar circumstances. It has
also an analogy in Australian law in the “‘ reward” leases. The term “ measure ’’ has the
merit of being a literal rendering of the Latin, and also of being the identical term in the same

78 BOOK IV.

for among the Greeks, who called it an épyu4, it was six feet, among the
Romans five feet. So this measure which is used by miners seems to
have come down to the Germans in accordance with*the Greek mode: of
reckoning. A miner’s foot approaches very nearly to the length of a Greek
foot, for it exceeds it by only three-quarters of a Greek digit, but like that
of the Romans it is divided into twelve unctae’*.

Now square fathoms are reckoned in units of one, two, three, or more
“measures”, and a “measure” is seven fathoms each way. Mining
meers are for the most part either square or elongated ; in square meers all the
sides are of equal length, therefore the numbers of fathoms on-tfetwo sides
multiplied together produce the total in square fathoms. Thus, if the
shape of a “ measure”’ is seven fathoms on every side, this number multi-
plied by itself makes forty-nine square fathoms.

The sides of a long meer are of equal length, and similarly its ends are
equal ; therefore, if the number of fathoms in one of the long sides be multi-
plied by the number of fathoms in one of the ends, the total produced by the
use in the High Peak. The following table of the principal terms gives the originals of the
Latin text, their German equivalents according in the Glossary and other sources, and those
adopted in the translation :—

AGRICOLA. GERMAN GLOSSARY. TERM ADOPTED.
Praefectus Metallorum .. Bergamptmann .. Mining Prefect.

Magister Metallicorum .. Bergmeister .. Bergmeister
Scriba Magister Metallicorum Bergmeister’s schreiber.. Bergmeister’s clerk.

Jurati.. 4 .. Geschwornen . Jurates or Jurors.
Publicus Signator .. Gemeiner sigler .- Notary.

Decumanus a «. “ehendey =... .. Tithe gatherer.
Distributor 2% .. Aussteiler .. -. Cashier.

Scriba partium a .. Gegenschretber .. Share clerk.

Scriba fodinarum .. .. Bergschreiber .. Mining clerk.

Praefectus fodinae + ‘Sundae Manager of the Mine.
Praefectus cuniculi ot é ** | Manager of the Tunnel.
Praeses fodinae as . : Foreman of the Mine.
Praeses cuniculi nf Schichtmetster ip Foreman of the Tunnel.
Fossores .. x .. Berghauer .. .. Miners or diggers.
Ingestores . . “s .. Berganschlagen .. Shovellers.

Vectarit .. és -. Hespelery —.. .. Lever workers (windlass men).
Discretores Sg .. Eptzpucher .. .. Sorters.

Lotores .. ss .. Wescher und seiffner .. Washers, buddlers, sifters, etc.
Excoctores ““ .. Schmeltzer .. .. Smelters.

Purgator Argenti .. .. Silber brenner .. Silver refiner.

Magister Monetariorum .- Miintzmeister .. Master of the Mint.
Monetarius zs «- Mintzer Ss «. Coiner.

Area fodinarum .. .. Masse ‘ie -» Meer.

Area Capitis Fodinarum .. Fundgrube .. .. Head meer.

Demensum ; Lehen a Measure.

2The following are the equivalents of the measures mentioned in this book. It is

not always certain which “ foot” or “fathom” Agricola actually had in mind although
they were probably the German. :

GREEK—

Dactylos = .76 inches 16 = Pous = 12.13 inches 6 = Orguia = 72.81 inches.
ROMAN

Uncia = «7 , 12 = Pes = 11.6 » 5 = Passus = 58.1 ee
GERMAN—

Zoll = .93 » 2 = Werckschuh = 11.24 ,, 6 = Lachter = 67.5 %
ENGLISH—

Inch = 1.0 » 12 = Foot = 12.00 , 6 = Fathom = 72.0 iG

The discrepancies are due to variations in authorities and to decimals dropped. The
werckschuh taken is the Chemnitz foot deduced from Agricola’s statement in his De Mensurts
et Ponderibus, Basel, 1533, p. 29. For further notes see Appendix C.

See ee oe ee

re. ee Te

a eee, yee

ee re

HA

BOOK IV. 79

Vil

XLIX

ILA

Vil

Vil

SHAPE OF A SQUARE MEER.

multiplication is the total number of square fathoms in the long meer. For
example, the double measure is fourteen fathoms long and seven broad,
which two numbers multiplied together make ninety-eight square fathoms.

XIIL1

XCVIIL

ILA
Vil

XIII
SHAPE oF A LonG MEER OR DouBLE MEASURE.

Since meers vary in shape according to the different varieties of veins
it is necessary for me to go more into detail concerning them and
their measurements. If the vein is a vena profunda, the head meer is
composed of three double measures, therefore it is forty-two fathoms in
length and seven in width, which numbers multiplied together give two
hundred and ninety-four square fathoms, and by these limits the Bergmeister
bounds the owner’s rights in a head-meer.

XLII

CCXCIIII

XLII

SHAPE OF A HEAD MEER.

The area of every other meer consists of two double measures, on which-
ever side of the head meer it lies, or whatever its number in order may be,
that is to say, whether next to the head meer, or second, third, or any later
number. Therefore, it is twenty-eight fathoms long and seven wide, so
multiplying the length by the width we get one hundred and ninety-six
square fathoms, which is the extent of the meer, and by these boundaries
the Bergmeister defines the right of the owner or company over each mine.

Vil

IIA

80 BOOK IV.
XXVIII

cXcVvl

HA
VII

XXVIII
SHAPE OF A MEER.

Now we call that part of the vein which is first discovered and mined,
the head-meer, because all the other meers run from it, just as the nerves
from the head. The Bergmeister begins his measurements from it, and the
reason why he apportions a larger area to the head-meer than to the others, is
that he may give a suitable reward to the one who first found the vein
and may encourage others to search for veins. Since meers often reach
to a torrent, or river, or stream, if the last meer cannot be completed
it is called a fraction’. If it is the size of a double measure, the Bergmetster
grants the right of mining it to him who makes the first application, but if
it is the size of a single measure or a little over, he divides it between the
nearest meers on either side of it. It is the custom among miners that
the first meer beyond a stream on that part of the vein on the opposite
side is a new head-meer, and they call it the “ opposite,’’* while the
other meers beyond are only ordinary meers. Formerly every head-meer
was composed of three double measures and one single one, that is, it was
forty-nine fathoms long and seven wide, and so if we multiply these two
together we have three hundred and forty-three square fathoms, which
total gives us the area of an ancient head-meer.

XLIX

CCCXLIIIL

XLIX

SHAPE OF AN ANCIENT HEAD-MEER.

Every ancient meer was formed of a single measure, that is to say, it
was seven fathoms in length and width, and was therefore square. In
memory of which miners even now call the width of every meer which is
located on a vena profunda a “‘ square’’®. The following was formerly the

®Subcisivum—“ Remainder.” German Glossary, Ueberschar. The term used in Mendip
and Derbyshire was primgap or primegap. It did not, however, in this case belong to adjacent
mines, but to the landlord. ; ;

*Adversum. Glossary, |g sani The Bergwerk Lexicon, Chemnitz, 1743, gives
gegendrom or gegentramm, and defines it as the masse or lease next beyond a stream. }

5Quadratum. Glossary, vierung. The vierung in old Saxon title meant a definite
zone on either side of the vein, 34 lachter (lachter = 5ft. 7.5 inches) into the hanging-wall
and the same into the footwall, the length of one vierung being 7 lachter along the strike. It

Se ee ee ee

a Oe ee a

. 2 See

|
]
;
|
4

BOOK IV. 81

usual method of delimiting a vein: as soon as the miner found metal, he
gave information to the Bergmeister and the tithe-gatherer, who either
proceeded personally from the town to the mountains, or sent thither men
of good repute, at least two in number, to inspect the metal-bearing vein.
Thereupon, if they thought it of sufficient importance to survey, the Bergmeister
again having gone forth on an appointed day, thus questioned him who first
found the vein, concerning the vein and the diggings: ‘‘ Which is your
vein?”’ ‘“ Which digging carried metal? ’’ Then the discoverer, pointing
his finger to his vein and diggings, indicated them, and next the Bergmeister
ordered him to approach the windlass and place two fingers of his right hand
upon his head, and swear this oath in a clear voice: ‘‘ I swear by God and
all the Saints, and I call them all to witness, that this is my vein; and more-
over if it is not mine, may neither this my head nor these my hands henceforth
perform their functions.” Then the Bergmeister, having started from the
centre of the windlass, proceeded to measure the vein with a cord, and to
give the measured portion to the discoverer,—in the first instance a half and
then three full measures ; afterward one to the King or Prince, another to
his Consort, a third to the Master of the Horse, a fourth to the Cup-bearer,
a fifth to the Groom of the Chamber, a sixth to himself. Then, starting
from the other side of the windlass, he proceeded to measure the vein in a
similar manner. Thus the discoverer of the vein obtained the head-meer,
that is, seven single measures ; but the King or Ruler, his Consort, the leading
dignitaries, and lastly, the Bergmeister, obtained two measures each, or two
ancient meers. This is the reason there are to be found at Freiberg in Meissen
so many shafts with so many intercommunications on a single vein—which are
to a great extent destroyed by age. If, however, the Bergmeister had already
fixed the boundaries of the meers on one side of the shaft for the benefit of
some other discoverer, then for those dignitaries I have just mentioned,
as many meers as he was unable to award on that side he duplicated
on the other. But if on both sides of the shaft he ‘had already defined the
boundaries of meers, he proceeded to measure out only that part of the
vein which remained free, and thus it sometimes happened that some of
those persons I have mentioned obtained no meer at all. To-day, though
that old-established custom is observed, the method of allotting the vein
and granting title has been changed. As I have explained above, the head-
meer consists of three double measures, and each other meer of two
measures, and the Bergmeister grants one each of the meers to him who
makes the first application. The King or Prince, since all metal is taxed, is
himself content with that, which is usually one-tenth.

Of the width of every meer, whether old or new, one-half lies on the
footwall side of a vena profunda and one half on the hangingwall side. If
the vein descends vertically into the earth, the boundaries similarly descend
must be borne in mind that the form of rights here referred to entitled the miner to follow
his vein, carrying the side line with him in depth the same distance from the vein, in much
the same way as with the Apex Law of the United States. From this definition as given in the

Bergwerk Lexicon, p. 585, it would appear that the vein itself was not included in the measure-
ments, but that they started from the walls.

82 BOOK IV.

vertically ; but if the vein inclines, the boundaries likewise will be inclined.
The owner always holds the mining right for the width of the meer, however
far the vein descends into the depth of the earth.* Further, the Bergmeister,
on application being made to him, grants to one owner or company a right

®HisTORICAL NOTE ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF Mininc Law.—There is no branch of the
law of property, of which the development is more interesting and illuminating from a social
point of view than that relating to minerals. Unlike the land, the minerals have ever been
regarded as a sort of fortuitous property, for the title of which there have been four principal
claimants—that is, the Overlord, as represented by the King, Prince, Bishop, or what not ;
the Community or the State, as distinguished from the Ruler; the Landowner; and the
Mine Operator, to which class belongs the Discoverer. The one of these that possessed the
dominant right reflects vividly the social state and sentiment of the period. The Divine
Right of Kings; the measure of freedom of their subjects; the tyranny of the land-owning
class ; the rights of the Community as opposed to its individual members ; the rise of indivi-
dualism ; and finally, the modern return to more communal view, have all been reflected
promptly in the mineral title. Of these parties the claims of the Overlord have been limited
only by the resistance of his subjects ; those of the State limited by the landlord ; those of
the landlord by the Sovereign or by the State; while the miner, ever in a minority in in-
fluence as well as in numbers, has been buffeted from pillar to post, his only protection
being the fact that all other parties depended upon his exertion and skill.

The conception as to which of these classes had a right in the title have been by no
means the same in different places at the same time, and in all it varies with different periods ;
but the whole range of legislation indicates the encroachment of one factor in the community
over another, so that their relative rights have been the cause of never-ending contention,
ever since a record of civil and economic contentions began. In modern times, practically
over the whole world, the State has in effect taken the rights from the Overlord, but his claims
did not cease until his claims over the bodies of his subjects also ceased. However, he still
remains in many places with his picture on the coinage. The Landlord has passed through
many vicissitudes ; his complete right to minerals was practically never admitted until
doctrine of laissez-faire had become a matter of faith, and this just in time to vest him with
most of the coal and iron deposits in the world ; this, no doubt, being also partially due to the
little regard in which such st ipa were generally held at that time, and therefore to the
little opposition to his ever-ready pretentions. Their numbers, however, and their prominence
in the support of the political powers de jure have usually obtained them some recognition.
In the rise of individualism, the apogee of the laissez-faire fetish came about the time of the
foundation of the United States, and hence the relaxation in the claims of the State in that
country and the corresponding position attained by the landlord and miner. The discoverer
and the operator—that is, the miner himself—has, however, had to be reckoned with by all
three of the other claimants, because they have almost universally sought to escape the risks of
mining, to obtain the most skilful operation, and to stimulate the productivity of the mines ;
thereupon the miner has secured at least partial consideration. This stands out in all times
and all places, and while the miner has had to take the risks of his fortuitous calling, the Over-
lord, State, or Landlord have all made for complacent safety by demanding some kind of a
tithe on his exertions. Moreover, there has often been a low cunning displayed by these powers
in giving something extra to the first discoverer. In these relations of the powers to the mine
operator, from the very first we find definite records of the imposition of certain conditions with
extraordinary persistence—so fixed a notion that even the United States did not quite escape it.
This condition was, no doubt, designed as a stimulus to productive activity, and was the
requirement that the miner should continuously employ himself digging in the piece of ground
allotted to him. The Greeks, Romans, Medizval Germans, old and modern Englishmen,
modern Australians, all require the miner to keep continuously labouring at his mines, or lose
his title. The American, as his inauguration of government happened when things were easier
for individuals, allows him a vacation of 11 months in the year for a few years, and finally a
holiday altogether. There are other points where the Overlord, the State, or the Landlord
have always considered that they had a right to interfere, principally as to the way the miner
does his work, lest he should miss, or cause to be missed, some of the mineral ; so he has usually
been under pains and penalties as to his methods—these quite apart from the very proper

rotection to human life, which is purely a modern invention, largely of the miner himself.
mebody has had to keep peace and settle disputes among the usually turbulent miners
(for what other sort of operators would undertake the hazards and handicaps ?), and therefore
special officials and codes, or Courts, for his benefit are of the oldest and most persistent of
institutions.

Between the Overlord and the Landowner the fundamental conflict of view as to their
respective rights has found its interpretation in the form of the mineral title. The Overlord
claimed the metals as distinguished from the land, while the landowner claimed all beneath his

Sa ie Na a Nl hi

Soe ee eS ae

@
fh
q
;
;

ellen ee Te ge ne ee ee oe

BOOK IV. 83

over not only the head meer, or another meer, but also the head meer and
the next meer or two adjoining meers. So much for the shape of meers
and their dimensions in the case of a vena profunda.

I now come to the case of venae dilatatae. The boundaries of the areas

soil. Therefore, we find two forms of title—that in which the miner could follow the ore
regardless of the surface (the “apex” conception), and that in which the boundaries were
vertical from the land surface. Lest the Americans think that the Apex Law was a
sin original to themselves, we may mention that it was made use of in Europe a few centuries
before Agricola, who will be found to set it out with great precision.

From these points of view, more philosophical than legal, we present a few notes on
various ancient laws of mines, though space ids a discussion of a tithe of the amount it
deserves at some experienced hand.

Of the Ancient Egyptian, Lydian, Assyrian, Persian, Indian, and Chinese laws as to
mines we have no record, but they were of great simplicity, for the bodies as well as the property
of subjects were at the abject disposition of the Overlord. We are informed on countless occasions
of Emperors, Kings, and Princes of various degree among these races, owning and operating
mines with convicts, soldiers, or other slaves, so we may take it for certain that continuous
labour was enforced, and that the boundaries, inspection, and landlords did not cause much
anxiety. However, herein lies the root of regalian right.

Our first glimpse of a serious right of the subject to mines is among some of the Greek
States, as could be expected from their form of government. With republican ideals, a rich
mining district at Mount Laurion, an enterprising and contentious people, it would be sur-
prising indeed if Athenian Literature was void on the subject. While we know that the
active ~ saiens of these mines extended over some poo years, from 700 to 200 B.C., the period
of most literary reference was from 400 to 300 B.c. information on the subject is from two
of Demosthenes’ orations—one against Pantaenetus, the other against Phaenippis—the first
mining lawsuit in which the address of counsel is extant. There is also available some infor-
mation in Xenophon’s Essay foe the Revenues, Aristotle’s Constitution of Athens,
Lycurgus’ prosecution of Diphilos, Tablets of the Poletae, and many incidental references
and inscriptions of minor order. The minerals were the property of the State, a conception
os apse inherited from the older civilizations. Leases for exploitation were granted to indi-

uals for terms of three to ten years, depending upon whether the mines had been previously
worked, thus a special advantage was conferred upon the pioneer. The leases did not carry
surface rights, but the boundaries at Mt. Laurion were vertical, as necessarily must be the case
everywhere in horizontal deposits. What they were elsewhere we do not know. The land-
lord a tly got nothing. The miner must continuously operate his mine, and was
required to pay a large tribute to the State, either in the initial purchase of his lease or in
annual rent. were elaborate tions as to interference and encroachment, and
support of the workings. Diphilos was condemned to death and his fortune con-

ted for robbing pillars. mines were worked with slaves.

The Romans were most intensive miners and searchers after metallic wealth already
mined. The latter was obviously the objective of most Roman conquest, and those nations
rich in these commodities, at that time necessarily possessed their own mines. Thus a map
showing the extensions of Empire coincides in an extraordinary manner with the metal dis-
tribution of Europe, Asia, and North Africa. Further, the great indentations into the
pgpaady of the Imperial map, though many were rich from an agricultural point of view,

no lure to Roman because they had no mineral wealth. On the Roman law
of mines the student is faced with many perplexities. With the conquest of the older States,
the plunderers took over the mines and worked them, either by leases from the State to
sy companies or to individuals ; or even in some cases worked them directly by the State.
ere was thus maintained the concept of State ownership of the minerals which, although
apparently never very specifically defined, yet formed a basis of support to the contention
regalian rights in Europe later on. Parallel with this system, mines were discovered
and worked by individuals under tithe to the State, and in Pliny (xxxrv, 49) there is refer-
ence to the miners in Britain limiting their own output. Individual mining appears
to have increased with any relaxation of central authority, as for instance under
"a eh It a as a rule, that the mines were held on terminable leases,
and that the State did at times resume them; the labour was mostly slaves.
As to the detailed conditions under which the mine operator held his title, we know
less than of the Greeks—in fact, practically nothing other than that he paida tithe. The
Romans maintained in each mining district an official—the Procurator Metallorum—who
not only had general charge of the leasing of the mines on behalf of the State, but was usuall
the magistrate of the district. A bronze tablet found near Aljustrel, in Portugal, in 1876,
generally known as the Aljustrel Tablet, appears to be the third of a series setting out the
regulations of the mining district. It refers mostly to the regulation of public auctions,
the baths, barbers, and tradesmen ; but one clause (vi1.) is devoted to the regulation of those

84 BOOK IV.

on such veins are not all measured by one method. For in some places the
Bergmeister gives them shapes similar to the shapes of the meers on venae
projundae, in which case the head-meer is composed of three double
measures, and the area of every other mine of two measures, as I have

who work dumps of scoria, etc., and provides for payment to the administrator of the mines
of a capitation on the slaves employed. It does not, however, so far as we can determine,
throw any light upon the actual regulations for working the mines. (Those interested will
find ample detail in Jacques Flach, “‘ La Table de Bronze d’Aljustrel : Nouvelle Revue Histori-
que de Droit Francais et Etranger, 1878, p. 655; Estacio da Veiga, Memorias da Acad. Real
das Ciencias de Lisbon, Nova Serie, Tome V, Part II, Lisbon, 1882.) | Despite the systematic
law of property evolved by the Romans, the codes contain but small reference to mines, and this
in itself is indirect evidence of the concept that they were the property of the State. Any
general freedom of the metals would have given rise to a more extensive body of law. There
are, of course, the well-known sections in the Justinian and Theodosian Codes, but the former
in the main bears on the collection of the tithe and the stimulation of mining by ordering
migrant miners to return to their own hearths. There is also some intangible prohibition
of mining near edifices. There is in the Theodosian code evident extension of individual
right to mine or quarry, and this “ freeing ’”’ of the mines was later considerably extended.
The Empire was, however, then on the decline ; and no doubt it was hoped to stimulate the
taxable commodities. There is nothing very tangible as to the position of the landlord with
regard to minerals found on his property ; the metals were probably of insufficient frequency
on the land of Italian landlords to matter much, and the attitude toward subject races was
not usually such as to require an extensive body of law.

In the chaos of the Middle Ages, Europe was governed by hundreds of potentates,
great and small, who were unanimous on one point, and this that the minerals were their
property. In the bickerings among themselves, the stronger did not hesitate to interpret
the Roman law in affirming regalian rights as an excuse to dispossess the weaker. The rights
to the mines form no small part of the differences between these Potentates and the more
pe of their subjects ; and with the gradual accretion of power into a few hands, we find
only the most powerful of vassals able to resist such encroachment. However, as to what
position the landlord or miner held in these rights, we have little indication until about the
beginning of the 13th century, after which there appear several well-known charters, which
as time went on were elaborated into practical codes of mining law. The earliest of these
charters are those of the Bishop of Trent, 1185 ; that of the Harz Miners, 1219 ; of the town
of Iglau in 1249. Many such in connection with other districts appear throughout the 13th,
14th, and 15th centuries. (References to the most important of such charters may be found
in Sternberg, Umrisse der Geschichte des Bergbaues, acon 1838; Eisenhart, De Regali
Metalli Fodinarium, Helmestadt, 1681; Gmelin, Beytrdge zur Geschichte des Teutschen
Berghaus, Halle, 1783; Inama-Strenegg, Deutsche Wirthschaftsgeschichte, Leipzig, phe
1901; Transactions, Royal Geol. Soc. Cornwall vi, 155; Lewis, The Stannaries, New
York 1908.) By this time a number of mining communities had grown up, and the charters
in the main are a confirmation to them of certain privileges ; they contain, nevertheless, rigor-
ous reservation of the regalian right. The landlord, where present, was usually granted some
interest in the mine, but had to yield to the miner free entry. The miner was simply a
sort of tributer to the Crown, loaded with an obligation when upon pee lands to pay a
further portion of his profits to the landlord. He held tenure only during strenuous opera-
tion. However, it being necessary to attract skilled men, they were granted many civil
privileges not general to the people; and from many of the principal mining towns “ free
cities ’ were created, possessing a measure of self-government. There appear in the Iglau
charter of 1249 the first symptoms of the “apex” form of title, this being the logical
development of the conception that the minerals were of quite distinct ownership from
the land. The law, as outlined by Agricola, is much the same as set out in the Iglavian
Charter of three centuries before, and we must believe that such fully developed conceptions
as that charter conveys were but the confirmation of customs developed over generations.

In France the landlord managed to maintain a stronger position vis-d-vis with the
Crown, despite much assertion of its rights ; and as a result, while the landlord admitted the
right to a tithe for the Crown, he maintained the actual possession, and the boundaries were
defined with the land.

In England the law varied with special mining communities, such as Cornwall, Devon,
the Forest of Dean, the Forest of Mendip, Alston Moor, and the High Peak, and they exhibit
a curious complex of individual growth, of profound interest to the student of the growth
of institutions. These communities were of very ancient origin, some of them at least pre-
Roman ; but we are, except for the reference in Pliny, practically without any idea of their
legal doings until after the Norman occupation (1066 a.p.). The genius of these conquerors
for systematic government soon led them to inquire into the doings of these communities,
and while gradually systematising their customs into law, they lost no occasion to assert the

a =

BOOK IV. 85

explained more fully above. In this case, however, he measures the meers
with a cord, not only forward and backward from the ends of the head-
meer, as he is wont to do in the case where the owner of a vena profunda has
a meer granted him, but also from the sides. In this way meers are marked

regalian right to the minerals. In the two centuries subsequent to their advent there are
on record numerous inquisitions, with the recognition and confirmation of “ the customs
and liberties which had existed from time immemorial,” always with the reservation to the
Crown of some sort of royalty. Except for the High Peak in Derbyshire, the period and
origin of these “‘ customs and liberties’ are beyond finding out, as there is practically no
record of English History between the Roman withdrawal and the Norman occupation.
There may have been “liberties” under the Romans, but there is not a shred of evidence
on the subject, and our own belief is that the forms of self-government which sprang up were
the result of the Roman evacuation. The miner had little to complain of in the Norman
treatment in these matters; but between the Crown and the landlord as represented by the
Barons, Lords of the Manor, etc., there were wide differences of opinion on the regalian rights,
for in the extreme interpretation of the Crown it tended greatly to curtail the landlord’s

ition in the matter, and the success of the Crown on this subject was by no means universal.
n fact, a considerable portion of English legal history of mines is but the outcropping of
this conflict, and one of the concessions wrung from King John at Runnymede in 1215 was
his abandonment of a portion of such claims.

The mining communities of Cornwall and Devon were early in the 13th century
definitely chartered into corporations—‘ The Stannaries ”"—possessing definite legislative
and executive functions, judicial powers, and practical self-government; but they were
required to make payment of the tithe in the shape of “coinage” on the tin. Such recog-
nition, while but a ratification of prior custom, was not obtained without struggle, for the
Norman Kings early asserted wide rights over the mines. Tangible record of mining in
these parts, from a legal point of view, practically begins with a report by William de Wrotham
in 1198 is ea his arrangements regarding the coinage. A charter of King John in r2o1, while
granting free right of entry to the miners, thus usurped the rights of the landlords—a claim
which he was compelled by the Barons to moderate ; the Crown, as above mentioned did
maintain its right to a royalty, but the landlord held the minerals. It is not, however, until
the time of Richard Carew’s ‘“ Survey of Cornwall” (London, 1602) that we obtain much
insight into details of miners’ title, and the customs there set out were maintained in broad
principle down to the 19th century. At Carew’s time the miner was allowed to prospect freely
upon “Common” or wastrel Jands (since mostly usurped by landlords), and upon mineral
discovery marked his boundaries, within which he was entitled to the vertical contents.
Even upon such lands, however, he must og fala the right of the lord of the manor to a
participation in the mine. Upon “enclosed” lands he had no right of entry without the
consent of the landlord ; in fact, the minerals belonged to the land as they do to-day except
where voluntarily relinquished. In either case he was compelled to ‘‘ renew his bounds ”
once a year, and to operate more or less continuously to maintain the right once obtained.
There thus existed a “ labour condition ”’ of variable acter, usually imposed more or less
vigorously in the ains with landlords. The regulations in Devonshire differed in the
important particular that the miner had right of entry to private lands, although he was not
relieved of the necessity to give a participation of some sort to the landlord. The Forests of
Dean, Mendip, and other old mining communities possessed a measure of self-government,
which do not displa srt ay in their law fundamentally different from those of Cornwall
and Devon. The Hi eak lead mines of Derbyshire, however, exhibit one of the most pro-
foundly interesting of these mining communities. As well as having distinctively Saxon names
for some of the mines, the customs there are of undoubted Saxon origin, and as such their
ratification by the Normans caused the survival of one of the few on institutions in
England—a fact which, we believe, has been hitherto overlooked by historians. Beginning
with inquisitions by Edward I. in 1288, there is in the Record Office a wealth of information,
the bare titles of which form too extensive a list to set out here. (Of published works, the
most important are Edward Manlove’s ‘‘ The Liberties and Customs of the Lead Mines within
the Wapentake of Wirksworth,” London, 1653, erally referred to as the ‘“ Rhymed
Chronicle” ; Thomas Houghton, “ Rara Avis in Terra,” don, 1687; William Hardy,
“The Miner’s Guide,” Sheffield, 1748; Thomas Tapping, ‘“‘ High Peak Mineral Customs,”
London, 1851.) The miners in this district were presided over by a “‘ Barmaster,” ‘‘ Bargh-
master,” or “‘ Barmar,”’ as he was variously spelled, all being a corruption of the German
Bergmeister, with precisely the same functions as to the allotment of title, settlement of
disputes, etc., as his Saxon progenitor had, and, like him, he was advised by a jury. The
miners had entry to all lands except churchyards (this regulation waived upon death), anda
few similar exceptions, and was subject to royalty to the Crown and the landlord. The dis-
coverer was enti to a finder’s ‘“‘ meer’’ of extra size, and his title was to the vein within
the end lines, i.e, the “apex” law. This title was held subject to rigorous labour con-

86 BOOK IV.

out when a torrent or some other force of Nature has laid open a vena
dilatata in a valley, so that it appears either on the slope of a mountain
or hill or on a plain. Elsewhere the Bergmetster doubles the width of the
head-meer and it is made fourteen fathoms wide, while the width of each of
the other meers remains single, that is seven fathoms, but the length is not
defined by boundaries. In some places the head-meer consists of three
double measures, but has a width of fourteen fathoms and a length of
twenty-one.
XXl1

ITIX
XIIII

XX]

SHAPE OF A HEAD-MEER.

In the same way, every other meer is composed of two measures,
doubled in the same fashion, so that it is fourteen fathoms in width and
of the same length.

XIII

ITITX
XIIII

XIII

SHAPE OF EVERY OTHER MEER.

ditions, amounting to forfeiture for failure to operate the mine for a period of nine weeks.
Space does not permit of the elaboration of the details of this subject, which we hope to
pursue elsewhere in its many historical bearings. Among these we may mention that if the
American ‘Apex law” is of English descent, it must be laid to the door of Derbyshire, and
not of Cornwall, as is generally done. Our own belief, however, is that the American
“apex ”’ conception came straight from Germany.

It is not our purpose to follow these inquiries into mining law beyond the 15th century,
but we may point out that with the growth of the sentiment of individualism the miners and
landlords obtained steadily wider and wider rights at the cost of the State, until well within
the 19th century. The growth of stronger communal sentiment since the middle of the last
century has already found its manifestation in the legislation with regard to mines, for the
laws of South Africa, Australia, and England, and the agitation in the United States are all
toward greater restrictions on the mineral ownership in favour of the State.

BOOK IV. 87

Elsewhere every meer, whether a head-meer or other meer, comprises
forty-two fathoms in width and as many in length.

In other places the Bergmeister gives the owner or company all of some
locality defined by rivers or little valleys as boundaries. But the boundaries
of every such area of whatsoever shape it be, descend vertically into the
earth; so the owner of that area has a right over that part of any vena
dilatata which lies beneath the first one, just as the owner of the meer on
a vena profunda has a right over so great a part of all other venae profundae
as lies within the boundaries of his meer; for just as wherever one vena
profunda is found, another is found not far away, so wherever one vena
dilatata is found, others are found beneath it.

Finally, the Bergmetster divides vena cumulata areas in different ways,
for in some localities the head-meer is composed of three measures, doubled
in such a way that it is fourteen fathoms wide and twenty-one long; and
every other meer consists of two measures doubled, and is square, that is,
fourteen fathoms wide and as many long. In some places the head-meer
is composed of three single measures, and its width is seven fathoms and
its length twenty-one, which two numbers multiplied together make one
hundred and forty-seven square fathoms.

XXI
< CXLVII
XX1

SHAPE OF A HEAD-MEER.

Each other meer consists of one double measure. In some places the
head-meer is given the shape of a double measure, and every other meer that
of a single measure. Lastly, in other places the owner or a company is given
a right over some complete specified locality bounded by little streams,
valleys, or other limits. Furthermore, all meers on venae cumulatae, as in
the case of dilatatae, descend vertically into the depths of the earth, and
each meer has the boundaries so determined as to prevent disputes arising
between the owners of neighbouring mines.

The boundary marks in use among miners formerly consisted only of
stones, and from this their name was derived, for now the marks of a
boundary are called ‘‘ boundary stones.” To-day a row of posts, made either
of oak or pine, and strengthened at the top with iron rings to prevent them
from being damaged, is fixed beside the boundary stones to make them
more conspicuous. By this method in former times the boundaries of the
fields were marked by stones or posts, not only as written of in the book “ De
Limitibus Agrorum,’’’ but also as testified to by the songs of the poets. Such

" 2De Limitibus et de Re Agraria of Sextus Julius Frontinus (about 50-90 A.D.)

88 BOOK IV.

then is the shape of the meers, varying in accordance with the different
kinds of veins.

Now tunnels are of two sorts, one kind having no right of property, the
other kind having some limited right. For when a miner in some particular
locality is unable to open a vein on account of a great quantity of water, he
runs a wide ditch, open at the top and three feet deep, starting on the slope
and running up to the place where the vein is found. Through it the water
flows off, so that the place is made dry and fit for digging. But if it is not
sufficiently dried by this open ditch, or if a shaft which he has now for
the first time begun to sink is suffering from overmuch water, he goes to
the Bergmeister and asks that official to give him the right for a tunnel.
Having obtained leave, he drives the tunnel, and into its drains all the
water is diverted, so that the place or shaft is made fit for digging. If
it is not seven fathoms from the surface of the earth to the bottom of this
kind of tunnel, the owner possesses no rights except this one: namely, that
the owners of the mines, from whose leases the owner of the tunnel extracts
gold or silver, themselves pay him the sum he expends within their meer in
driving the tunnel through it.

To a depth or height of three and a half fathoms above and below the
mouth of the tunnel, no one is allowed to begin another tunnel. The reason
for this is that this kind of a tunnel is liable to be changed into the other
kind which has a complete right of property, when it drains the meers to a
depth of seven fathoms, or to ten, according as the old custom in each place
acquires the force of law. In such case this second kind of tunnel has the
following right; in the first place, whatever metal the owner, or company
owning it, finds in any meer through which it is driven, all belongs to the
tunnel owner within a height or depth of one and a quarter fathoms. In
the years which are not long passed, the owner of a tunnel possessed all the
metal which a miner standing at the bottom of the tunnel touched with
a bar, whose handle did not exceed the customary length; but nowadays
a certain prescribed height and width is allowed to the owner of the tunnel,
lest the owners of the mines be damaged, if the length of the bar be
longer than usual. Further, every metal-yielding mine which is drained
and supplied with ventilation by a tunnel, is taxed in the proportion of one-
ninth for the benefit of the owner of the tunnel. But if several tunnels of
this kind are driven through one mining area which is yielding metals, and
all drain it and supply it with ventilation, then of the metal which is dug
out from above the bottom of each tunnel, one-ninth is given to the owner of
that tunnel; of that which is dug out below the bottom of each tunnel,
one-ninth is in each case given to the owner of the tunnel which follows
next in order below. But if the lower tunnel does not yet drain the shaft of
that meer nor supply it with ventilation, then of the metal which is dug out
below the bottom of the higher tunnel, one-ninth part is given to the owner
of such upper tunnel. Moreover, no one tunnel deprives another of its
right to one-ninth part, unless it be a lower one, from the bottom of which
to the bottom of the one above must not be less than seven or ten fathoms,

a ee ee ee

4

BOOK IV. 89

according as the king or prince has decreed. Further, of all the money
which the owner of the tunnel has spent on his tunnel while driving it
through a meer, the owner of that meer pays one-fourth part. If he does
not do so he is not allowed to make use of the drains.

Finally, with regard to whatever veins are discovered by the owner
at whose expense the tunnel is driven, the right of which has not been
already awarded to anyone, on the application of such owner the Bergmetster
grants him a right of a head-meer, or of a head-meer together with the next
meer. Ancient custom gives the right for a tunnel to be driven in any
direction for an unlimited length. Further, to-day he who commences a
tunnel is given, on his application, not only the right over the tunnel, but
even the head and sometimes the next meer also. In former days the owner
of the tunnel obtained only so much ground as an arrow shot from the bow
might cover, and he was allowed to pasture cattle therein. In a case where
the shafts of several meers on some vein could not be worked on account of
the great quantity of water, ancient custom also allowed the Bergmeister to
grant the right of a large meer to anyone who would drive a tunnel. When,
however, he had driven a tunnel as far as the old shafts and had found
metal, he used to return to the Bergmeister and request him to bound and
mark off the extent of his right to a meer. Thereupon, the Bergmeister,
together with a certain number of citizens of the town—in whose place
Jurors have now succeeded—used to proceed to the mountain and mark off
with boundary stones a large meer, which consisted of seven double
measures, that is to say, it was ninety-eight fathoms long and seven wide,
which two numbers multiplied together make six hundred and eighty-six
square fathoms.

XC VIIL

DCLXXXVI

XC VIII

LARGE AREA.

But each of these early customs has been changed, and we now employ
the new method.

I have spoken of tunnels ; I will now speak about the division of owner-
ship in mines and tunnels. One owner is allowed to possess and to work
one, two, three, or more whole meers, or similarly one or more separate
tunnels, provided he conforms to the decrees of the laws relating to
metals, and to the orders of the Bergmeister. And because he alone pro-
vides the expenditure of money on the mines, if they yield metal he alone
obtains the product from them. But when large and frequent expenditures
are necessary in mining, he to whom the Bergmeister first gave the right

Vil

go BOOK. IV.

often admits others to share with him, and they join with him in forming a |

company, and they each lay out a part of the expense and share with him
the profit or loss of the mine. But the title of the mines or tunnels remains
undivided, although for the purpose of dividing the expense and profit it
may be said each mine or tunnel is divided into parts®.

This division is made in various ways. A mine, and the same thing
must be understood with regard to a tunnel, may be divided into two halves,
that is into two similar portions, by which method two owners spend
an equal amount on it and draw an equal profit from it, for each possesses
one half. Sometimes it is divided into four shares, by which compact
four persons can be owners, so that each possesses one-fourth, or also two
persons, so that one possesses three-fourths, and the other only one-fourth ;
or three owners, so that the first has two-fourths, and the second and third
one-fourth each. Sometimes it is divided into eight shares, by which plan
there may be eight owners, so that each is possessor of one-eighth ; some-
times there are two owners, so that one has five-sixths® together with one
twenty-fourth, and the other one-eighth ; or there may be three owners, in
which one has three-quarters and the second and third each one-eighth ;
or it may be divided so that one owner has seven-twelfths, together with
one twenty-fourth, a second owner has one-quarter, and a third owner has
one-eighth ; or so that the first has one-half, the second one-third and one
twenty-fourth, and the third one-eighth ; or so that the first has one-half,
as before, and the second and third each one-quarter; or so that the first
and second each have one-third and one twenty-fourth, and the third one-
quarter ; and in the same way the divisions may be adjusted in all the other
proportions. The different ways of dividing the shares originate from the
different proportions of ownership. Sometimes a mine is divided into
sixteen parts, each of which is a twenty-fourth and a forty-eighth ; or it may
be divided into thirty-two parts, each of which is a forty-eighth and half a
seventy-second and a two hundred and eighty-eighth ; or into sixty-four
parts of which each share is one seventy-second and one five hundred and
seventy-sixth ; or finally, into one hundred and twenty-eight parts, any one
of which is half a seventy-second and half of one five hundred and seventy-
sixth.

Now an iron mine either remains undivided or is divided into two,
four, or occasionally more shares, which depends on the excellence of the
veins. But a lead, bismuth, or tin mine, and likewise one of copper or even
quicksilver, is also divided into eight shares, or into sixteen or thirty-two,
and less commonly into sixty-four. The number of the divisions of the silver
mines at Freiberg in Meissen did not formerly progress beyond this; but

8Such a form of ownership is very old. Apparently upon the instigation of Xenophon
(see Note 7, p. 29) the Greeks formed companies to work the mines of Laurion, further
information as to which is given in note 6, p. 27. Pliny (Note 7, p. 232) mentions the
Company working the quicksilver mines in Spain. In fact, company organization was
very common among the Romans, who speculated largely in the shares, especially in those
companies which farmed the taxes of the provinces, or leased public lands, or took military
and civil contracts.

*The Latin text gives one-sixth, obviously an error.

LO ee oe, ee

ee ke eee ee ee

BOOK IV. gI

within the memory of our fathers, miners have divided a silver mine, and
similarly the tunnel at Schneeberg, first of all into one hundred and twenty-
eight shares, of which one hundred and twenty-six are the property of
private owners in the mines or tunnels, one belongs to the State and one
to the Church; while in Joachimsthal only one hundred and twenty-two
shares of the mines or tunnels are the property of private owners, four
are proprietary shares, and the State and Church each have one in the
same way. To these there has lately been added in some places one share
for the most needy of the population, which makes one hundred and twenty-
nine shares. It is only the private owners of mines who pay contributions.
A proprietary holder, though he holds as many as four shares such as I have
described, does not pay contributions, but gratuitiously supplies the owners
of the mines with sufficient wood from his forests for timbering, machinery,
buildings, and smelting ; nor do those belonging to the State, Church, and
the poor pay contributions, but the proceeds are used to build or repair
public works and sacred buildings, and to support the most needy with the
profits which they draw from the mines. Furthermore, in our State, the
one hundred and twenty-eighth share has begun to be divided into two,
four, or eight parts, or even into three, six, twelve, or smaller parts. This
is done when one mine is created out of two, for then the owner who formerly
possessed one-half becomes owner of one-fourth; he who possessed one-
fourth, of one-eighth ; he who possessed one-third, of one-sixth; he who
possessed one-sixth, of one-twelfth. Since our countrymen call a mine a
symposium, that is, a drinking bout, we are accustomed to call the money which
the owners subscribe a symbolum, or a contribution’®. For, just as those who
go to a banquet (symposium) give contributions (symbola), so those who purpose
making large profits from mining are accustomed to contribute toward the
expenditure. However, the manager of the mine assesses the contributions
of the owners annually, or for the most part quarterly, and as often he
renders an account of receipts and expenses. At Freiberg in Meissen the
old practice was for the manager to exact a contribution from the owners
every week, and every week to distribute among them the profits of the
mines, but this practice during almost the last fifteen years has been so far
changed that contribution and distribution are made four! times each
year. Large or small contributions are imposed according to the number
of workmen which the mine or tunnel requires; as a result, those who
possess many shares provide many contributions. Four times a year the
owners contribute to the cost, and four times during the year the profits of
the mines are distributed among them; these are sometimes large, some-
times small, according as there is more or less gold or silver or other metal
dug out. Indeed, from the St. George mine in Schneeberg the miners extracted
so much silver in a quarter of a year that silver cakes, which were worth

_ _7°A symposium is a banquet, and a symbola is a contribution of money to a banquet.
This sentence is probably a play on the old German Zeche, mine, this being also a term for
a drinking bout.

"In the Latin text this is “ three ”—obviously an error.

92 BOOK IV.

1,100 Rhenish guldens, were distributed to each one hundred and twenty-eighth
share. From the Annaberg mine which is known as the Himmelich Héz,
they had a dole of eight hundred thaler; from a mine in Joachimsthal
which is named the Sternen, three hundred thaler; from the head mine at
Abertham, which is called St. Lorentz, two hundred and twenty-five thaler™.
The more shares of which any individual is owner the more profits he takes.

I will now explain how the owners may lose or obtain the right over a
mine, or a tunnel, or a share. Formerly, if anyone was able to prove by
witnesses that the owners had failed to send miners for three continuous
shifts!*, the Bergmetster deprived them of their right over the mine, and
gave the right over it to the informer, if he desired it. But although miners
preserve this custom to-day, still mining share owners who have paid
their contributions do not lose their right over their mines against their will.
Formerly, if water which had not been drawn off from the higher shaft of
some mine percolated through a vein or stringer into the shaft of another
mine and impeded their work, then the owners of the mine which suffered
‘the damage went to the Bergmeister and complained of the loss, and he sent
to the shafts two Jurors. If they found that matters were as claimed,
the right over the mine which caused the injury was given to the owners
who suffered the injury. But this custom in certain places has been changed,
for the Bergmeister, if he finds this condition of things proved in the case
of two shafts, orders the owners of the shaft which causes the injury to
contribute part of the expense to the owners of the shaft which receives the
injury ; if they fail to do so, he then deprives them of their right over their
mine ; on the other hand, if the owners send men to the workings to dig
and draw off the water from the shafts, they keep their right over their
mine. Formerly owners used to obtain a right over any tunnel, firstly, if
in its bottom they made drains and cleansed them of mud and sand so that
the water might flow out without any hindrance, and restored those drains
which had been damaged ; secondly, if they provided shafts or openings to
supply the miners with air, and restored those which had fallen in; and
finally, if three miners were employed continuously in driving the tunnel.
But the principal reason for losing the title to a tunnel was that for a period
of eight days no miner was employed upon it; therefore, when anyone
was able to prove by witnesses that the owners of a tunnel had not done
these things, he brought his accusation before the Bergmeister, who, after
going out from the town to the tunnel and inspecting the drains and the
ventilating machines and everything else, and finding the charge to be true,
placed the witness under oath, and asked him: ‘‘ Whose tunnel is this at the
present time?” The witness would reply: ‘‘ The King’s” or “The

12See Note 9, p. 74, for further information with regard to these mines. The Rhenish
‘gulden was about 6.9 shillings, or $1.66. Silver was worth about this amount per Troy
ounce at this period, so that roughly, silver of a value of 1,100 gulden would be about 1,100
Troy ounces. The Saxon thaler was worth about 4.64 shillings or about $1.11. The thaler,
therefore, represented about .65 Troy ounces of silver, so that 300 thalers were about
195 Troy ounces, and 225 thalers about 146 Troy ounces.

130pera continens. The Glossary gives schicht,—the origin of the English “ shift.”

a

BOOK IV. 93

Prince’s.”” Thereupon the Bergmetster gave the right over the tunnel to
the first applicant. This was the severe rule under which the owners at one
time lost their rights over a tunnel; but its severity is now considerably
mitigated, for the owners do not now forthwith lose their right over a tunnel
through not having cleaned out the drains and restored the shafts or
ventilation holes which have suffered damage; but the Bergmeister orders
the tunnel manager to do it, and if he does not obey, the authorities fine
the tunnel. Also it is sufficient for one miner to be engaged in driving the
tunnel. Moreover, if the owner of a tunnel sets boundaries at a fixed spot
in the rocks and stops driving the tunnel, he may obtain a right over it so
far as he has gone, provided the drains are cleaned out and ventilation
holes are kept in repair. But any other owner is allowed to start from the
established mark and drive the tunnel further, if he pays the former owners
of the tunnel as much money every three months as the Bergmetster decides
ought to be paid.

There remain for discussion, the shares in the mines and tunnels.
Formerly if anybody conveyed these shares to anyone else, and the latter
had once paid his contribution, the seller’ was bound to stand by his bargain,
and this custom to-day has the force of law. But if the seller denied that the
contribution had been paid, while the buyer of the shares declared that he could
prove by witnesses that he had paid his contribution to the other proprietors,
and a case arose for trial, then the evidence of the other proprietors carried
more weight than the oath of the seller. To-day the buyer of the shares proves
that he has paid his contribution by a document which the mine or tunnel
manager always gives each one; if the buyer has contributed no money
there is no obligation on the seller to keep his bargain. Formerly, as I have
said above, the proprietors used to contribute money weekly, but now con-
tributions are paid four times each year. To-day, if for the space of a month
anyone does not take proceedings against the seller of the shares for the con-
tribution, the right of taking proceedings is lost. But when the Clerk has
already entered on the register the shares which had been conveyed or
bought, none of the owners loses his right over the share unless the money
is not contributed which the manager of the mine or tunnel has demanded
from the owner or his agent. Formerly, if on the application of the manager
the owner or his agent did not pay, the matter was referred to the Berg-
meister, who ordered the owner or his agent to make his contribution; then
if he failed to contribute for three successive weeks, the Bergmeister gave
the right to his shares to the first applicant. To-day this custom is un-
changed, for if owners fail for the space of a month to pay the contribu-
tions which the manager of the mine has imposed on them, on a stated day
their names are proclaimed aloud and struck off the list of owners, in
the presence of the Bergmeister, the Jurors, the Mining Clerk, and the Share
Clerk, and each of such shares is entered on the proscribed list. If, how-

'4The terms in the Latin text are donator, a giver of a gift, and donatus, a receiver. It
ps ert us, however, that some consideration passed, and we have, therefore, used “ seller ”
an yer.”

9

94 BOOK IV.

ever, on the third, or at latest the fourth day, they pay their contributions
to the manager of the mine or tunnel, and pay the money which is due from
them to the Share Clerk, he removes their shares from the proscribed
list. They are not thereupon restored to their former position unless the
other owners consent ; in which respect the custom now in use differs from
the old practice, for to-day if the owners of shares constituting anything
over half the mine consent to the restoration of those who have been
proscribed, the others are obliged to consent whether they wish to or not.
Formerly, unless such restoration had been sanctioned by the approval of
the owners of one hundred shares, those who had been proscribed were not
restored to their former position.

The procedure in suits relating to shares was formerly as follows: he
who instituted a suit and took legal proceedings against another in respect
of the shares, used to make a formal charge against the accused possessor
before the Bergmetster. This was done either at his house or in some public
place or at the mines, once each day for three days if the shares belonged to
an old mine, and three times in eight days if they belonged to a head-
meer. But if he could not find the possessor of the shares in these places, it
was valid and effectual to make the accusation against him at the house of
the Bergmetster. When, however, he made the charge for the third time, he
used to bring with him a notary, whom the Bergmeister would interrogate :
“Have I earned the fee?’ and who would respond: “ You have earned
it’; thereupon the Bergmetster would give the right over the shares to him
who made the accusation, and the accuser in turn would pay down the
customary fee to the Bergmetster. After these proceedings, if the man whom
the Bergmetster had deprived of his shares dwelt in the city, one of the
proprietors of the mine or of the head-mine was sent to him to acquaint him
with the facts, but if he dwelt elsewhere proclamation was made in some
public place, or at the mine, openly and in a loud voice in the hearing of
numbers of miners. Nowadays a date is defined for the one who is answer-
able for the debt of shares or money, and information is given the accused
by an official if he is near at hand, or if he is absent, a letter is sent him;
nor is the right over his shares taken from anyone for the space of one and
a half months. So much for these matters.

Now, before I deal with the methods which must be employed in

working, I will speak of the duties of the Mining Prefect, the Bergmeister, —

the Jurors, the Mining Clerk, the Share Clerk, the manager of the mine
or tunnel, the foreman of the mine or tunnel, and the workmen.

To the Mining Prefect, whom the King or Prince appoints as his deputy,
all men of all races, ages, and rank, give obedience and submission. He
governs and regulates everything at his discretion, ordering those things
which are useful and advantageous in mining operations, and prohibiting
those which are to the contrary. He levies penalties and punishes offenders ;
he arranges disputes which the Bergmetster has been unable to settle, and if
even he cannot arrange them, he allows the owners who are*at variance over
some point to proceed to litigation ; he even lays down the law, gives orders

oe ee ne

SS

MER) ek Sanh nn An de

an Se se

Sowa is

BOOK IV. 95

as a magistrate, or bids them leave their rights in abeyance, and he deter-
mines the pay of persons who hold any post or office. He is present in
person when the mine managers present their quarterly accounts of profits
and expenses, and generally represents the King or Prince and upholds his
dignity. The Athenians in this way set Thucydides, the famous historian,
over the mines of Thasos*®.

Next in power to the Mining Prefect comes the Bergmeister, since he
has jurisdiction over all who are connected with mines, with a few exceptions,
which are the Tithe Gatherer, the Cashier, the Silver Refiner, the Master
of the Mint, and the Coiners themselves. Fraudulent, negligent, or dissolute
men he either throws into prison, or deprives of promotion, or fines ;
of these fines, part is given as a tribute to those in power. When the mine
owners have a dispute over boundaries he arbitrates it; or if he cannot
settle the dispute, he pronounces judgment jointly with the Jurors;
from them, however, an appeal lies to the Mining Prefect. He transcribes
his decrees in a book and sets up the records in public. It is also his duty
to grant the right over the mines to those who apply, and to confirm their
rights ; he also must measure the mines, and fix their boundaries, and see
that the mine workings are not allowed to become dangerous. Some of
these duties he observes on fixed days; for on Wednesday in the presence
of the Jurors he confirms the rights over the mines which he has granted,
settles disputes about boundaries, and pronounces judgments. On Mondays,
Tuesdays, Thursdays, and Fridays, he rides up to the mines, and dismounting
at some of them explains what is required to be done, or considers the
boundaries which are under controversy. On Saturday all the mine managers
and mine foremen render an account of the money which they have spent
on the mines during the preceding week, and the Mining Clerk transcribes
this account into the register of expenses. Formerly, for one Principality
there was one Bergmeister, who used to create all the judges and exercise
jurisdiction and control over them; for every mine had its own judge,
just as to-day each locality has a Bergmedtster in his place, the name alone
being changed. To this ancient Bergmeister, who used to dwell at Freiberg in
Meissen, disputes were referred ; hence right up to the present time the one
at Freiberg still has the power of pronouncing judgment when mine owners
who are engaged in disputes among themselves appeal to him. The old
Bergmetster could try everything which was presented to him in any mine
whatsoever ; whereas the judge could only try the things which were done
in his own district, in the same way that every modern Bergmeister can.

To each Bergmeister is attached a clerk, who writes out a schedule
signifying to the applicant for a right over a mine, the day and hour on which
the right is granted, the name of the applicant, and the location of the mine.
He also affixes at the entrance to the mine, quarterly, at the appointed time,
a sheet of paper on which is shown how much contribution must be paid to
the manager of the mine. These notices are prepared jointly with the

18See Note 29, p. 23.

96 BOOK IV.

Mining Clerk, and in common they receive the fee rendered by the foremen
of the separate mines.

I now come to the Jurors, who are men experienced in mining
matters and of good repute. Their number is greater or less as there
are few or more mines; thus if there are ten mines there will be five
pairs of Jurors, like a decemviral college*. Into however many
divisions the total number of mines has been divided, so many divisions
has the body of Jurors; each pair of Jurors usually visits some of
the mines whose administration is under their supervision on every
day that workmen are employed; it is usually so arranged that they
visit all the mines in the space of fourteen days. They inspect and con-
sider all details, and deliberate and consult with the mine foreman on
matters relating to the underground workings, machinery, timbering, and
everything else. They also jointly with the mine foreman from time to-
time make the price per fathom to the workmen for mining the ore, fixing
it at a high or low price, according to whether the rock is hard or soft ; if,
however, the contractors find that an unforeseen and unexpected hardness
occurs, and for that reason have difficulty and delay in carrying out their
work, the Jurors allow them something in excess of the price fixed;
while if there is a softness by reason of water, and the work is done more
easily and quickly, they deduct something from the price. Further, if the
Jurors discover manifest negligence or fraud on the part of any foreman
or workman, they first admonish or reprimand him as to his duties and
obligations, and if he does not become more diligent and improve, the matter
is reported to the Bergmeister, who by right of his authority deprives such
persons of their functions and office, or, if they have committed a crime,
throws them into prison. Lastly, because the Jurors have been given
to the Bergmeister as councillors and advisors, in their absence he does not
confirm the right over any mine, nor measure the mines, nor fix their
boundaries, nor settle disputes about boundaries, nor pronounce judgment,
nor, finally, does he without them listen to any account of profits and
expenditure.

Now the Mining Clerk enters each mine in his books, the new mines
in one book, the old mines which have been re-opened in another. This
is done in the following way: first is written the name of the man who has
applied for the right over the mine, then the day and hour on which he
made his application, then the vein and the locality in which it is situated,
next the conditions on which the right has been given, and lastly, the day on
which the Bergmeister confirmed it. A document containing all these

particulars is also given to the person whose right over a mine has been __
confirmed. The Mining Clerk also sets down in another book the names
of the owners of each mine over which the right has been confirmed; _
in another any intermission of work permitted to any person for cer-

16Decemviri—‘‘ The Ten Men.” The original Decemviri were a body appointed
the Romans in 452 B.c., principally to codify the law. Such commissions were afterwar
instituted for other purposes, but the analogy of the above paragraph is a little remote.

BOOK IV. 97

tain reasons by the Bergmeister ; in another the money which one mine
supplies to another for drawing off water or making machinery; and in
another the decisions of the Bergmeister and the Jurors, and the disputes
settled by them as honorary arbitrators. All these matters he enters in the
books on Wednesday of every week ; if holidays fall on that day he does it
on the following Thursday. Every Saturday he enters in another book the
total expenses of the preceding week, the account of which the mine manager
has rendered ; but the total quarterly expenses of each mine manager, he
enters in a special book at his own convenience. He enters similarly in
another book a list of owners who have been proscribed. Lastly, that no one
may be able to bring a charge of falsification against him, all these books
are enclosed in a chest with two locks, the key of one of which is kept by the
Mining Clerk, and of the other by the Bergmedster.

The Share Clerk enters in a book the owners of each mine whom
the first finder of the vein names to him, and from time to time replaces the
names of the sellers with those of the buyers of the shares. It sometimes
happens that twenty or more owners come into the possession of some
particular share. Unless, however, the seller is present, or has sent a letter
to the Mining Clerk with his seal, or better still with the seal of the Mayor
of the town where he dwells, his name is not replaced by that of anyone else ;
for if the Share Clerk is not sufficiently cautious, the law requires him
to restore the late owner wholly to his former position. He writes out a
fresh document, and in this way gives proof of possession. Four times a
year, when the accounts of the quarterly expenditure are rendered, he
names the new proprietors to the manager of each mine, that the manager
may know from whom he should demand contributions and among whom
to distribute the profits of the mines. For this work the mine manager pays
the Clerk a fixed fee.

I will now speak of the duties of the mine manager. In the case of the
owners of every mine which is not yielding metal, the manager announces
to the proprietors their contributions in a document which is affixed to the
doors of the town hall, such contributions being large or small, according as
the Bergmetster and two Jurors determine. If anyone fails to pay these
contributions for the space of a month, the manager removes their names
from the list of owners, and makes their shares the common property of the
other proprietors. And so, whomsoever the mine manager names as not
having paid his contribution, that same man the Mining Clerk designates
in writing, and so also does the Share Clerk. Of the contribution, the
mine manager applies part to the payment of the foreman and workmen,
and lays by a part to purchase at the lowest price the necessary things for
the mine, such as iron tools, nails, firewood, planks, buckets, drawing-ropes,
or grease. But in the case of a mine which is yielding metal, the Tithe-
gatherer pays the mine manager week by week as much money as suffices
to discharge the workmen’s wages and to provide the necessary implements
for mining. The mine manager of each mine also, in the presence of its
foreman, on Saturday in each week renders an account of his expenses to

98 BOOK IV.

the Bergmeister and the Jurors, he renders an account of his receipts,
whether the money has been contributed by the owners or taken from the
Tithe-gatherer ; and of his quarterly expenditure in the same way
to them and to the Mining Prefect and to the Mining Clerk, four
times a year at the appointed time; for just as there are four seasons
of the year, namely, Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter, so there are
fourfold accounts of profits and expenses. In the beginning of the first
month of each quarter an account is rendered of the money which the
manager has spent on the mine during the previous quarter, then of the
profit which he has taken from it during the same period; for example,
the account which is rendered at the beginning of spring is an account of all
the profits and expenses of each separate week of winter, which have been
entered by the Mining Clerk in the book of accounts. If the manager
has spent the money of the proprietors advantageously in the mine and
has faithfully looked after it, everyone praises him as a diligent and honest
man ; if through ignorance in these matters he has caused loss, he is generally
deprived of his office ; if by his carelessness and negligence the owners have
suffered loss, the Bergmeister compels him to make good the loss ; and finally,
if he has been guilty of fraud or theft, he is punished with fine, prison, or
death. Further, it is the business of the manager to see that the foreman
of the mine is present at the beginning and end of the shifts, that he digs
the ore in an advantageous manner, and makes the required timbering,
machines, and drains. The manager also makes the deductions from the
pay of the workmen whom the foreman has noted as negligent. Next,
if the mine is rich in metal, the manager must see that its ore-house is closed
on those days on which no work is performed ; and if it is a rich vein of gold
or silver, he sees that the miners promptly transfer the output from the shaft
or tunnel into a chest or into the strong room next to the house where the
foreman dwells, that no opportunity for theft may be given to dishonest
persons. This duty he shares in common with the foreman, but the one
which follows is peculiarly his own. When ore is smelted he is present in
person, and watches that the smelting is performed carefully and advan-
tageously. If from it gold or silver is melted out, when it is melted in the
cupellation furnace he enters the ‘weight of it in his books and carries it
to the Tithe-gatherer, who similarly writes a note of its weight in his books ;
it is then conveyed to the refiner. When it has been brought back, both
the Tithe-gatherer and manager again enter its weight in their books. Why
again? Because he looks after the goods of the owners just as if they were
his own. Now the laws which relate to mining permit a manager to have
charge of more than one mine, but in the case of mines yielding gold or
silver, to have charge of only two. If, however, several mines following the
head-mine begin to produce metal, he remains in charge of these others until
he is freed from the duty of looking after them by the Bergmeister. Last of
all, the manager, the Bergmeister, and the two Jurors, in agreement
with the owners, settle the remuneration for the labourers. Enough of the
duties and occupation of the manager.

BOOK IV. 99

I will now leave the manager, and discuss him who controls the workmen
of the mine, who is therefore called the foreman, although some call him
the watchman. It is he who distributes the work among the labourers, and
sees diligently that each faithfully and usefully performs his duties. He
also discharges workmen on account of incompetence, or negligence, and
supplies others in their places if the two Jurors and manager give their
consent. He must be skilful in working wood, that he may timber shafts,
place posts, and make underground structures capable of supporting an under-
mined mountain, lest the rocks from the hangingwall of the veins, not being
supported, become detached from the mass of the mountain and over-
whelm the workmen with destruction. He must be able to make and lay
out the drains in the tunnels, into which the water from the veins, stringers,
and seams in the rocks may collect, that it may be properly guided and
can flow away. Further, he must be able to recognize veins and stringers,
so as to sink shafts to the best advantage, and must be able to discern one
kind of material which is mined from another, or to train his subordinates
that they may separate the materials correctly. He must also be well
acquainted with all methods of washing, so as to teach the washers how
the metalliferous earth or sand is washed. He supplies the miners with iron
tools when they are about to start to work in the mines, and apportions a
certain weight of oil for their lamps, and trains them to dig to the best
advantage, and sees that they work faithfully. When their shift is finished,
he takes back the oil which has been left. On account of his numerous and
important duties and labours, only one mine is entrusted to one foreman,
nay, rather sometimes two or three foremen are set over one mine.

Since I have mentioned the shifts, I will briefly explain how these are
carried on. The twenty-four hours of a day and night are divided into three
shifts, and each shift consists of seven hours. The three remaining hours are
intermediate between the shifts, and form an interval during which the
workmen enter and leave the mines. The first shift begins at the fourth hour
in the morning and lasts till the eleventh hour; the second begins at the
twelfth and is finished at the seventh; these two are day shifts in the
morning and afternoon. The third is the night shift, and commences at the
eighth hour in the evening and finishes at the third in the morning. The
Bergmeister does not allow this third shift to be imposed upon the workmen
unless necessity demands it. In that case, whether they draw water from
the shafts or mine the ore, they keep their vigil by the night lamps, and to
prevent themselves falling asleep from the late hours or from fatigue, they
lighten their long and arduous labours by singing, which is neither wholly
untrained nor unpleasing. In some places one miner is not allowed to
undertake two shifts in succession, because it often happens that he either
falls asleep in the mine, overcome by exhaustion from too much labour, or
arrives too late for his shift, or leaves sooner than he ought. Elsewhere he
is allowed to do so, because he cannot subsist on the pay of one shift,
especially if provisions grow dearer. The Bergmeister does not, however,
forbid an extraordinary shift when he concedes only one ordinary shift.

100 BOOK. IV.

When it is time to go to work the sound of a great bell, which the foreigners
call a ‘‘ campana,” gives the workmen warning, and when this is heard they
run hither and thither through the streets toward the mines. Similarly,
the same sound of the bell warns the foreman that a shift has just been
finished ; therefore as soon as he hears it, he stamps on the woodwork of the
shaft and signals the workmen to come out. Thereupon, the nearest as soon
as they hear the signal, strike the rocks with their hammers, and the sound
reaches those who are furthest away. Moreover, the lamps show that the
shift has come to an end when the oil becomes almost consumed and fails
them. The labourers do not work on Saturdays, but buy those things which
are necessary to life, nor do they usually work on Sundays or annual
festivals, but on these occasions devote the shift to holy things. However,
the workmen do not rest and do nothing if necessity demands their labour ;
for sometimes a rush of water compels them to work, sometimes an impending
fall, sometimes something else, and at such times it is not considered
irreligious to work on holidays. Moreover, all workmen of this class are
strong and used to toil from birth.

The chief kinds of workmen are miners, shovelers, windlass men, carriers,
sorters, washers, and smelters, as to whose duties I will speak in the fol-
lowing books, in their proper place. At present it is enough to add this one
fact, that if the workmen have been reported by the foreman for negligence,
the Bergmeister, or even the foreman himself, jointly with the manager,
dismisses them from their work on Saturday, or deprives them of part of
their pay; or if for fraud, throws them into prison. However, the owners
of works in which the metals are smelted, and the master of the smelter, look
after their own men. As to the government and duties of miners, I have
now said enough ; I will explain them more fully in another work entitled
De Jure et Legibus Metallicis'’.

‘7This work was apparently never published; see Appendix A. —
END OF BOOK IV.

a a

Y =
WY

BOOK V.

W3)N the last book I have explained the methods of
delimiting the meers along each kind of vein, and
the duties of mine officials. In this book? I will
in like manner explain the principles of, under-
ground mining and the art of surveying. First
then, I will proceed to deal with those matters
which pertain to the former heading, since both the
subject and methodical arrangement require it.
And so I will describe first of all the digging of
shafts, tunnels, and drifts on venae profundae ; next I will discuss the good
indications shown by canales*, by the materials which are dug out, and by
the rocks; then I will speak of the tools by which veins and rocks are broken
down and excavated ; the method by which fire shatters the hard veins;
and further, of the machines with which water is drawn from the shafts
and air is forced into deep shafts and long tunnels, for digging is impeded
by the inrush of the former or the failure of the latter; next I will deal
with the two kinds of shafts, and with the making of them and of tunnels ;
and finally, I will describe the method of mining venae dilatatae, venae cumu-
latae, and stringers.

1It has been suggested that we should adopt throughout this volume the mechanical
and mining terms used in English mines at Agricola’s time. We believe, however, that but
a little inquiry would illustrate the undesirability of this course as a whole. Where there
is choice in modern miner’s nomenclature between an old and a modern term, we have leaned
toward age, if it be a term generally understood. But except where the subject described
has itself become obsolete, we have revived no obsolete terms. In substantiation of this
view, we append a few examples of terms which served the English miner well for centuries,
some of which are still extant in some local communities, yet we believe they would carry
as little meaning to the average reader as would the reproduction of the Latin terms coined

by Agricola.
Rake = A perpendicular vein. Slough = Drainage tunnel.
Woughs = Walls of the vein. Sole = Lowest drift.
Shakes = Cracks in the walls. Stool = Face of a drift or stope.
Flookan = Gouge. Winds
Bryle = Outcrop. Turn = Winze.
Hade = Incline or underlay of the Dippas
vein. Grove = Shaft.
Dawling = Impoverishment of the vein. Dutins = Set of timber.
Rither = A “horse” in a vein. Stemple = Post or stull.
Twitches = “ Pinching” of a vein. Laths = Lagging.
As examples of the authof’s coinage and adaptations of terms in this book we may
cite :-—
Fossa latens = Drift.
» Fossa latens transversa = Crosscut.
Tectum = Hangingwall.
Fundamentum = Footwall.

Tigna per intervalla posita = Wall plate.

Arbores dissectae
Formae

= Lagging.
= Hitches.

We have adopted the term ‘tunnel’ for openings by way of outlet to the mine.
The word in this narrow sense is as old as “‘ adit,” a term less expressive and not so generally
used in the English-speaking mining world. We have for the same reason adopted the word
““ drift ” instead of the term “level” so generally used in America, because that term always
leads to confusion in discussion of mine surveys. We may mention, however, that the term
“level” is a heritage from the Derbyshire mines, and is of an equally respectable age as ‘‘drift.”

*See note on p. 46-47. The canales, as here used, were the openings in the earth, in
which minerals were deposited.

102 BOOK V.

Now when a miner discovers a vena profunda he begins sinking a shaft
and above it sets up a windlass, and builds a shed over the shaft to prevent
the rain from falling in, lest the men who turn the windlass be numbed
by the cold or troubled by the rain. The windlass men also place their
barrows in it, and the miners store their iron tools and other implements therein.
Next to the shaft-house another house is built, where the mine foreman and the
other workmen dwell, and in which are stored the ore and other things which
are dug out. Although some persons build only one house, yet because
sometimes boys and other living things fall into the shafts, most miners
deliberately place one house apart from the other, or at least separate them
by a wall.

Now a shaft is dug, usually two fathoms long, two-thirds of a fathom
wide, and thirteen fathoms deep; but for the purpose of connecting with a
tunnel which has already been driven in a hill, a shaft may be sunk to a
depth of only eight fathoms, at other times to fourteen, more or less*. A
shaft may be made vertical or inclined, according as the vein which the
miners follow in the course of digging is vertical or inclined. A tunnel is a
subterranean ditch driven lengthwise, and is nearly twice as high as it is
broad, and wide enough that workmen and others may be able to pass and
carry their loads. It is usually one and a quarter fathoms high, while —
its width is about three and three-quarters feet. Usually two workmen are
required to drive it, one of whom digs out the upper and the other the lower
part, and the one goes forward, while the other follows closely after. Each
sits upon small boards fixed securely from the footwall to the hangingwall,
or if the vein is a soft one, sometimes on a wedge-shaped plank fixed on to the
vein itself. Miners sink more inclined shafts than vertical, and some of each
kind do not reach to tunnels, while some connect with them. But as for
some shafts, though they have already been sunk to the required depth,
the tunnel which is to pierce the mountain may not yet have been driven
far enough to connect with them.

It is advantageous if a shaft connects with a tunnel, for then the r miners
and other workmen carry on more easily the work they have undertaken ; —
but if the shaft is not so deep, it is usual to drift from one or both sides of it.
From these openings the owner or foreman becomes acquainted with the
veins and stringers that unite with the principal vein, or cut across it, or

*This statement, as will appear by the description later on, refers to the depth of
winzes or to the distance between drifts, that is ‘“‘ the lift.” We have not,
however, been justified in using the term ‘ winze,’’ because some of these were openings
to the surface. As showing the considerable depth of shafts in Agricola’s time,
we may quote the following from Bermannus (p. 442): “The depths of our shafts
“forced us to invent hauling machines suitable for them. There are some of them
“ larger and more ingenious than this one, for use in deep shafts, as, for instance,

“those in my native town of Geyer, but more especially at Schneeberg, where the
“shaft of the mine from which so much treasure was taken in our memory has reached the
“depth of about 200 fathoms (feet ?), wherefore the necessity of this kind of machinery.
“ Naevius : What an enormous depth! Have you reached the Inferno? Bermannus: Oh,
“at Kuttenberg there are shafts more than 500 fathoms (feet ?) deep. Naevius : And
“not yet reached the Kingdom of Pluto?” It is impossible to accept these as fathoms,

as this would in the last case represent 3,000 feet vertically. The expression used, however,
for fathoms is passus, presumably the Roman measure equal to 58°1 inches.

ee

|

BOOK V. 103

divide it obliquely ; however, my discourse is now concerned mainly with
vena profunda, but most of all with the metallic material which it contains.

=

f
i
il
)
|
u!
aS
fs
SAUL AAAS HAAN
yy
\ : ‘
any
ere eT eT er Ll Sok!
| }
i

a

Se

7

h|

y)

yy)
ity:

UI

Jy

v

u
SOA ERAS SEN AQAA ARI
ys \W

=
h
i
EAA aston FHA EL at PARC | ROPER xe

Qo LARA ANANAANA as SAK FE
SS
Z

Aeab Sh

A)

THREE VERTICAL SHAFTS, OF WHICH THE FIRST, A, DOES NOT REACH THE TUNNEL ; THE
SECOND, B, REACHES THE TUNNEL; TO THE THIRD, C, THE TUNNEL HAS NOT YET BEEN
DRIVEN. D—TUuNNEL.

BOOK V.

104

ct
=
o
yy
va
o
we
°
SH
3
&
k
&
<
wn
a4
o
o
nl
O
o
cq
~
ma)
Q
ao]
”
(3)
oO
be
oO
=
uw
=
ol
as
a
G
~
re
o}
n
=|
s
~
3
>
3
1S)
*
i

o
e
&
a
5
S
o
ue)
se
el
Go
cal
onl
oO
al
p
=
vo
i
>
o
GS
~
a
vo
=|
S
5
~
o
to
°
_
vu
=|
a
is]
&
o
cq
~
al
vo
~
‘a
io) 8)
=|
o
oa

RWS

"4

We

Si Oe ee ee

| . 7 Lif} ee i i
At ( Y f ll f, «
Sop a WSS SS Z
j Fall me Ti
: Hh i =
re Mittin +=
1 SSS ~ I} h, a
; es SN, eS eT |
| i ewe AVES
a a ONS Games
Ti \.\\ SIG A \S es
“Uy : a e iN > A \ ‘S
A Za AR ae QR
aye ‘ 4, 4, ‘ } : \ . , ? .y ee
- hig - \ Zo i ini Rar n0e
ou a eu TTA
WE Ta, (NY . = Wao. uu

SS

\ 4

\S

THREE INCLINED SHAFTS, OF WHICH A DOES NOT YET REACH THE TUNNEL; B REACHES THE

TO THE THIRD, C, THE TUNNEL HAS NOT YET BEEN DRIVEN. D—TUNNEL.

TUNNEL ;

105

F—MOovurTH OF TUNNEL.

a ——e » SS
pe in ATA i * ’ On ae
ree Ny (pa f /,

Ky, 7

BOOK V.

NE ¥ My au |
2 ie! \ ‘a i (
eae \\y { |
, Se De oe "ha Ol

iA

1 & ; Millay \ Ne oe €’

Ter itfl,

This kind of an opening, however, differs from a tunnel in that it

is dark throughout its length, whereas a tunnel has a mouth open to daylight.

4
re}
Zz
Z
5
a
a
Ee
<
re
n
os
ea)
i
&
9
%
i
QA
Ee
a
i
1S)
is
#
By
4
i
a
/
<

>

ground,

Ee ee ee ee ae ” r ee oe A

106 BOOK V.

I have spoken of shafts, tunnels, and drifts. I will now speak of the
indications given by the canales, by the materials which are dug out, and by
the rocks. These indications, as also many others which I will explain, are
to a great extent identical in venae dilatatae and venae cumulatae with venae
profundae.

When a stringer junctions with a main vein and causes a swelling, a
shaft should be sunk at the junction. But when we find the stringer inter-
secting the main vein crosswise or obliquely, if it descends vertically down
to the depths of the earth, a second shaft should be sunk to the point where
the stringer cuts the main vein; but if the stringer cuts it obliquely the
shaft should be two or three fathoms back, in order that the junction may
be pierced lower down. At such junctions lies the best hope of finding the
ore for the sake of which we explore the ground, and if ore has already been
found, it is usually found in much greater abundance at that spot. Again,
if several stringers descend into the earth, the miner, in order to pierce
through the point of contact, should sink the shaft in the midst of these
stringers, or else calculate on the most prominent one.

Since an inclined vein often lies near a vertical vein, it is advisable
to sink a shaft at the spot where a stringer or cross-vein cuts them both ;
or where a vena dilatata or a stringer dilatata passes through, for minerals
are usually found there. In the same way we have a good prospect of finding
metal at the point where an inclined vein joins a vertical one; this is why
miners cross-cut the hangingwall or footwall of a main vein, and in these
openings seek for a vein which may junction with the principal vein a few
fathoms below. Nay, further, these same miners, if no stringer or cross-
vein intersects the main vein so that they can follow it in their workings,
even cross-cut through the solid rock of the hangingwall or footwall. These
cross-cuts are likewise called “ xpuwraé,’’ whether the beginning of the
opening which has to be undertaken is made from a tunnel or from a drift.
Miners have some hope when only a cross vein cuts a main vein. Further,
if a vein which cuts the main vein obliquely does not appear anywhere
beyond it, it is advisable to dig into that side of the main vein toward which
the oblique vein inclines, whether the right or left side, that we may ascer-
tain if the main vein has absorbed it; if after cross-cutting six fathoms it
is not found, it is advisable to dig on the other side of the main vein, that
we may know for certain whether it has carried it forward. The owners
of a main vein can often dig no less profitably on that side where the vein
which cuts the main vein again appears, than where it first cuts it; the
owners of the intersecting vein, when that is found again, recover their title,
which had in a measure been lost.

The common miners look favourably upon the stringers which come
from the north and join the main vein; on the other hand, they look
unfavourably upon those which come from the south, and say that these do
much harm to the main vein, while the former improve it. But I think
that miners should not neglect either of them: as I showed in Book III,
experience does not confirm those who hold this opinion about veins, so now

BOOK V. 107

again I could furnish examples of each kind of stringers rejected by the
common miners which have proved good, but I know this could be of little
or no benefit to posterity.

If the miners find no stringers or veins in the hangingwall or footwall of
the main vein, and if they do not find much ore, it is not worth while to
undertake the labour of sinking another shaft. Nor ought a shaft to be sunk
where a vein is divided into two or three parts, unless the indications are
satisfactory that those parts may be united and joined together a little later.
Further, it is a bad indication for a vein rich in mineral to bend and turn
hither and thither, for unless it goes down again into the ground vertically or
inclined, as it first began, it produces no more metal; and even though it
does go down again, it often continues barren. Stringers which in their
outcrops bear metals, often disappoint miners, no metal being found in depth.
Further, inverted seams in the rocks are counted among the bad indications.

The miners hew out the whole of solid veins when they show clear evidence
of being of good quality; similarly they hew out the drusy* veins,
especially if the cavities are plainly seen to have formerly borne metal, or
if the cavities are few and small. They do not dig barren veins through
which water flows, if there are no metallic particles showing ; occasionally,
however, they dig even barren veins which are free from water, because
of the pyrites which is devoid of all metal, or because of a fine black soft
substance which is like wool. They dig stringers which are rich in metal,
or sometimes, for the purpose of searching for the vein, those that are devoid
of ore which lie near the hangingwall or footwall of the main vein. This
then, generally speaking, is the mode of dealing with stringers and veins.

Let us now consider the metallic material which is found in the canales
of venae profundae, venae dilatatae, and venae cumulatae, being in all these
either cohesive and continuous, or scattered and dispersed among them,
or swelling out in bellying shapes, or found in veins or stringers which
originate from the main vein and ramify like branches ; but these latter veins
and stringers are very short, for after a little space they do not appear again.
If we come across a small quantity of metallic material it is an indication ;
but if a large quantity, it is not an “indication,’’ but the very thing for
which we explore the earth. As soon as a miner who searches for veins
discovers pure metal or minerals, or rich metallic material, or a great
abundance of material which is poor in metal, let him sink a shaft on the
spot without any delay. If the material appears more abundant or of better
quality on the one side, he will incline his digging in that direction.

Gold, silver, copper, and quicksilver are often found native'; less
often iron and bismuth ; almost never tin and lead. Nevertheless tin-stone
is not far removed from the pure white tin which is melted out of them, and
galena, from which lead is obtained, differs little from that metal itself.

Now we may classify gold ores. Next after native gold, we come to the

*Cavernos. The Glossary gives drusen, our word drusy having had this origin.
5Purum,—‘ pure.” Interpretatio gives the German as gedigen,—“ native.”

108 BOOK V.

rudis®, of yellowish green, yellow, purple, black, or outside red and inside
gold colour. These must be reckoned as the richest ores, because the gold
exceeds the stone or earth in weight. Next come all gold ores of which each
one hundred /ibvae contains more than three unciae of gold? ; for although but
a small proportion of gold is found in the earth or stone, yet it equals in value
other metals of greater weight.® All other gold ores are considered poor, because

®Rudis,—“ Crude.” By this expression the author really means ores very rich in
any designated metal. In many cases it serves to indicate the minerals of a given metal, as
distinguished from the metal itself. Our system of mineralogy obviously does not afford an
acceptable equivalent. Agricola (De Nat. Foss., p. 360) says: “I find it necessary to call
“each genus (of the metallic minerals) by the name of its own metal, and to this I add a
“word which differentiates it from the pure (puro) metal, whether the latter has been mined
“‘ or.smelted ; so I speak of rudis gold, silver, quicksilver, copper, tin, bismuth, lead, or iron.
“This is not because I am unaware that Varro called silver rudis which had not yet been
“refined and stamped, but because a word which will distinguish the one from the other is
“not to be found.”

7The reasons for retaining the Latin weights are given in the Appendix on Weights
and Measures. <A centumpondium weighs 70.6 lbs. avoirdupois, an uncia 412.2 Troy
grains, therefore, this value is equal to 72 ounces 18 pennyweights per short ton.

8Agricola mentions many minerals in De Re Metallica, but without such description
as would make possible a hazard at their identity. From his De Natura Fossilium, however,
and from other mineralogies of the 16th Century, some can be fully identified and others ©
surmised. While we consider it desirable to set out the probable composition of these
minerals, on account of the space required, the reasons upon which our opinion has been based
cannot be given in detail, as that would require extensive quotations. In a general way, we
have throughout the text studiously evaded the use of modern mineralogical terms—unless
the term used to-day is of Agricola’s age—and have adopted either old English terms of
pre-chemistry times or more loose terms used by common miners. Obviously modern
mineralogic terms imply a precision of knowledge not existing at that period. It must not ~
be assumed that the following is by any means a complete list of the minerals described by —
Agricola, but they include most of those referred to in this chapter. His system of min-
eralogy we have set out in note 4, p. I, and it requires no further comment here. The
grouping given below is simply for convenience and does not follow Agricola’s method. Where
possible, we tabulate in columns the Latin term used in De Re Metallica; the German equiv-
alent given by the Author in either the Interpretatio or the Glossary ; our view of the probable
modern equivalent based on investigation of his other works and other ancient mineralogies,
and lastly the terms we have adopted in the text. The German spelling is that given in the
original. As an indication of Agricola’s position as a mineralogist, we mark with an asterisk
the minerals which were first specifically described by him. We also give some notes on
matters of importance bearing on the nomenclature used in De Re Metallica. Historical notes
on the chief metals will be found elsewhere, generally with the discussion of smelting methods.
We should not omit to express our indebtedness to Dana’s Ke “ System of Mineralogy,” —
in the matter of correlation of many old and modern minerals.

Go_p MINERALS. Agricola apparently believed that there were various gol
minerals, green, yellow, purple, black, etc. There is nothing, however, in his works tha
permits of any attempt to identify them, and his classification seems to rest on gangue
colours.

SILVER MINERALS.

Argentum purum in vents

reperitur ‘4 ay Gedigen silber fa ie he *Native silver
Argentum rude .. is Gedigen silber ertz .. He a6 Rudis silver, or
pure silver —
minerals
Argentum rude plumbei
coloris .. eo mi Glas ertz 3s ae a oa *Silver glance
(AgzS)
Argentum rude rubrum .. Rot gold ertz ‘e i one Ser *Red silver
(Ag3 Sb S3)
Argentum rude rubrum Durchsichtig rod Proustite *Ruby silver
translucidum .. Der gulden ertz .. i (Ag3As S3)
Argentum rude album .. Weis rod gulden ertz:

Dan es ist frisch wie
offtmals rod gulden
ertz pfleget zusein .. oy e White silver

BOOK V. 109

the earth or stone too far outweighs the gold. A vein which contains a
larger proportion of silver than of gold is rarely found to be a rich one.
Earth, whether it be dry or wet, rarely abounds in gold; but in dry earth
there is more often found a greater quantity of gold, especially if it has the

Argentum rude jecoris = leberfarbig Part Bromyrite Liver-coloured
colore .. ve ‘i - (Ag Br) silver
Argentum rude luteum .. Gadigen geclertz as vs ee Yellow silver
Argentum rude cineraceum Gedigengrawertz .. \ Part Cerargurite *Grey silver
(Ag Cl) (Horn
Argentum rude nigrum .. Gedigen schwartz ertz -rikted Part *Black silver
tephanite
Argentum rude purpureum Gedigen braun ertz .. (Ags Sb Ss) \ *Purple silver

The last six may be in part also alteration products from all silver minerals.

The reasons for indefiniteness in determination usually lie in the failure of ancient
authors to give sufficient or characteristic descriptions. In many cases Agricola is sufficiently
definite as to assure certainty, as the following description of what we consider to be silver

ance, from De Natura Fossilium (p. 360), will indicate: ‘‘ Lead-coloured rudis silver is
‘called by the Germans from the word glass (glasertz), not from lead. Indeed, it has
“the colour of the latter or of galena (plumbago), but not of glass, nor is it transparent
“like glass, which one might indeed expect had the name been correctly derived. This
“ mineral is occasionally so like A agony” in colour, although it is darker, that one who is not
“ experienced in minerals is unable to distinguish between the two at sight, but in substance
“they differ greatly from one another. Nature has made this kind o silver out of a little
“earth and much silver. Whereas galena consists of stone and lead containing some silver.
“But the distinction between them can be easily determined, for galena may be ground
“ to powder in a mortar with a pestle, but this treatment flattens out this kind of rudis silver.
“ Also galena, when struck by a mallet or bitten or hacked with a knife, splits and breaks to
“ pieces ; whereas this silver is malleable under the hammer, may be dented by the teeth,
“and cut with a knife.”
CoprpER MINERALS.

Aes purum fossile Ged, Se Native pS Native co
ee igen kup: copper pper
coloris ts ferglas ertz .. Chalcocite (Cu2S) .. *Co glance
Chalcitis a atrament BY A decomposed copper Chalcitis (see notes
; or sulphide cs on p. 573)
Pyrites auret : art chalcopyrite (Cu
Geelkis oder pyr
colore os ; Fe S) t — Co rites
Pyrites aerosus.. : hupferkis afer Fee.) -. pet
Caeruleum ea Berglasur aS Azure
Chrysocolla .. Berggriin und ee Part chrysocila we Chrysocolla (see
s ae Part M ‘% note 7, p. 560)
Molochites M } ee Malachite fe of Malachite
Lapis aerarius .. Kupfer ertz sie ea a a Copper ore
Aes caldarium
rubrum fuscum Lebeterkupfer ... When used for an ore, is
or probably cuprite .. *Ruby copper ore
Aes sui coloris .. Rotkupfer vs
Aes nigrum... Schwartz kupfer .. Probably CuO from

oxidation of other
minerals 3 *Black copper
In addition to the above the Author uses the following, which were in the main
artificial products :

Aerugo .. - t Sheed oder Verdigris ' ud
ns: ue a3 a
Aes luteum... Gel, a .
an caldarium .. Elven Repore blister copper ee ee 0. 511)
Gam tease | Retivtamnoraning | Crree oxide oinie .. (RE Moe
note 9, p. 233)

Atramentum

prc

or
chalcanthum .. Blaw kupfer wasser | Chalcanthite .. is Native blue vitriol

(see note on p. 572)

IIo BOOK V.

appearance of having been melted in a furnace, and if it is not lacking in
scales resembling mica. The solidified juices, azure, chrysocolla, orpiment,
and realgar, also frequently contain gold. Likewise native or rudis gold is
found sometimes in large, and sometimes in small quantities in quartz,

Blue and green copper minerals were distinguished by all the ancient mineralogists.
Theophrastus, Dioscorides, Pliny, etc., all give sufficient detail to identify their cyanus and
caeruleum partly with modern azurite, and their chrysocolla partly with the modern mineral
of the same name. However, these terms were also used for vegetable pigments, as well
as for the pigments made from the minerals. The Greek origin of chrysocolla (chrusos, gold
and olla, solder) may be blamed with another and distinct line of confusion, in that this
term has been applied to soldering materials, from Greek down to modern times, some of the
ancient mineralogists even asserting that the copper mineral chrysocolla was used for this
purpose. Agricola uses chrysocolla for borax, but is careful to state in every case (see note
XX., p. X): “‘ Chrysocolla made from nitrum,” or ‘‘ Chrysocolla which the Moors call Borax.”
Dioscorides and Pliny mention substances which were evidently copper sulphides, but no
description occurs prior to Agricola that permits a hazard as to different species.

LEAD MINERALS.

Plumbarius lapis Glantz os ras Galena a ap Galena
Galena .. > Glantz und pletertz Galena Be ss Galena
Plumbum nigrum
lutei coloris .. Pleiertz oder pleischweis Cerussite (Pb CO3) .. Yellow lead ore
Plumbago metallica
Cerussa Pleiweis.. S Artificial White-lead.. White-lead (see
Ochra facticia note 4, p. 440)
or ochra plumbaria Pleigeel .. As Massicot (Pb O) Sy *Lead-ochre (see
mA woe 8, p. 232)
Molybdaena | . ‘ earth-lead (see
Pluobagofornacis | Herdplei .. .. Part litharge :. os pee
Spuma argenti .. | : 4 Litharge (see note
Lithereyrum Glett i i Litharge my a an 465) .
Minium secundarium Menning .. aN Minium (Pb3;0,) ... Red-lea (see note
7 P. 232)

So far as we can determine, all of these except the first three were believed by Agricola
to be artificial products. Of the first three, galena is certain enough, but while he obviousl:
was familiar with the alteration lead products, his descriptions are inadequate and m
confused with the artificial oxides. Great confusion arises in the ancient mineralogies over
the terms molybdaena, plumbago, plumbum, galena, and spuma argenti, all of which, from
Roman mineralogists down to a century after Agricola, were used for lead insome form, Further
discussion of such confusion will be found in note 37, p. 476. Agricola in Bermannus and

De Natura Fossilium, devotes pages to endeavouring to reconcile the ancient usages of these

terms, and all the confusion existing in Agricola’s time was thrice confounded when the
names molybdaena and plumbago were assigned to non-lead minerals.

Tin. Agricola knew only one tin mineral: Lapilli nigri ex quibus conflatur plumbum
candidum, t.e., ‘‘ Little black stones from which tin is smelted,” and he gives the German
equivalent as zwitter, “‘ tinstone.” He describes them as being of different colours, but
probably due to external causes.

ANTIMONY. (Interpretatio,—spiesglas.) The stibi or stibium of Agricola was no
doubt the sulphide, and he follows Dioscorides in dividing it into male and female species.
This distinction, however, is impossible to apply from the inadequate descriptions given.
The mineral and metal known to Agricola and his predecessors was almost always the sulphide,
and we have not felt justified in using the term antimony alone, as that implies the refined
product, therefore, we have adopted either the Latin term or the old English term “ grey
antimony.” The smelted antimony of commerce sold under the latter term was the
sulphide. For further notes see p. 428.

BismutH*. Plumbum cinereum (Interpretatio,—bismut). Agricola states that this
mineral occasionally occurs native, ‘‘ but more often as a mineral of another colour” (De
Nat. Fos., p. 337), and he also describes its commonest form as black or grey. This,
considering his localities, would indicate the sulphide, although he assigns no special name to
it. Although bismuth is mentioned before Agricola in the Nidzliche Bergbiichlin, he was the
first to describe it (see p. 433).

QuIicKsILvER. Apart from native quicksilver, Agricola adequately describes cinna-
bar only. The term used by him for the mineral is minium nativum (Interpretatio,—
bergzinober or cinnabaris). He makes the curious statement (De Nat. Fos. p. 335) that rudis
quicksilver also occurs liver-coloured and blackish,—probably gangue colours. (See p. 432).

BOOK V. III

schist, marble, and also in stone which easily melts in fire of the second
degree, and which is sometimes so porous that it seems completely decom-
posed. Lastly, gold is found in pyrites, though rarely in large quantities.

When considering silver ores other than native silver, those ores are

ARSENICAL MINERALS. Metallic arsenic was unknown, although it has been main-
tained that a substance mentioned by Albertus Magnus (De Rebus Metallicis) was the
metallic form. Agricola, who was familiar with all Albertus’s writings, makes no mention
of it, and it appears to us that the statement of Albertus referred only to the oxide from
sublimation. Our word “arsenic” obviously takes root in the Greek for orpiment, which
was also used by Pliny (xxxiv, 56) as arrhenicum, and later was modified to arsenicum
by the Alchemists, who applied it to the oxide. Agricola gives the following in Bermannus (p.
448), who has been viously discussing realgar orpiment :—‘‘ Ancon:; Avicenna
“also has a white variety. Bermannus: I cannot at all believe in a mineral of a white
“ colour ; perhaps he was thinking of an artificial product ; there are two which the Alchemists
“make, one yellow and the other white, and they are accounted the most powerful poisons
“ to-day, and are called only by the name arsenicum.” In De Natura Fossilium (p. 219) is
described the making of “ the white variety”’ by sublimating orpiment, and also it is noted
that realgar can be made from orpiment by heating the latter for five hours in a sealed
crucible. In De Re Metallica (Book X.), he refers to auripigmentum facticum, and no doubt
means the realgar made from orpiment. The four minerals of arsenic base mentioned by
Agricola were :—

Auripigmentum Operment.. Orpiment (As2S3) .. Orpiment
Sandaraca .. a Rosgeel iia Realgar (As S) Ks Realgar
Arsenicum .. na Arsenik ie Artificial arsenical oxide White arsenic

“i Mistpuckel .. Arsenopyrite (Fe As S) *Mispickel
We are somewhat uncertain as to the identification of the last. The yellow and red sul-

hides, however, were well known to the Ancients, and are described by Aristotle, Theophrastus
71 and 89), Dioscorides (v, 81), Pliny (xxx, 22, etc.); and Strabo (x11, 3, 40) mentions
a mine of them near Pompeiopolis, where, because of its poisonous character none but slaves
were employed. The Ancients believed that the yellow sulphide contained gold—hence
the name auripigmentum, and Pliny describes the attempt of the Emperor Caligula to extract
the gold from it, and states that he did obtain a saath, amount, but unprofitably. So late
a mineralogist as Hill (1750) held this view, which seemed to be general. Both realgar and
orpiment were important for pigments, medicinal , and poisons among the Ancients.
In addition to the above, some arsenic-cobalt siaerale are included under cadmia.

IRON MINERALS.

Ferrum purum ae Gedigen eisen, . Native iron .. $s *Native iron

Terra ferria .. he Eisen
Ferri vena .. oe Eisen ertz
Galenae genus tertium
omnis metalli Various soft and hard
inanissimi Eisen glantz .. iron ores, probably Ironstone
Schistos Glaskipfe oder mostly hematite
bliitstein
Ferri vena jecoris
colore te v2 Lebererta ..!
Ferrugo hx eft Rast... ey Part limonite ea Iron rust
Magnes : Siegelstein oder a
magnet... agnetite .. oF Lodestone
Ochra nativa.. ae Berg geel Limonite ee és Yellow ochre or
Part hema Bioodotoae
: F art tite ve tone or
Haematites .. <s Bliit stein... Part jasper .. i state ra
Schistos , ie Glas kipfe .. Part limonite.. ta Ironstone
i i ay Kis ve Pyrites a as Pyrites
wetsser kis .. Marcasite his se *White iron pyrites
Misy .. as a Gel atrament .. Part copiapite my Misy (see note on
Pp. 573)
Sory.. eh af Graw und Partly a decomposed Sory (see note on
: schwartz atrament ironpyrite .. xia P- 573)
Melanteria .. ale Schwartz und Melanterite (native Melanteria (see

: ; : grau atrament vitriol) se es note on p. 573)
The classification of iron ores on the basis of exterior characteristics, chiefly hardness and

112 BOOK V.

classified as rich, of which each one hundred Jibrae contains more than three
librae of silver. This quality comprises rudis silver, whether silver glance or
ruby silver, or whether white, or black, or grey, or purple, or yellow, or liver-

brilliancy, does not justify a more narrow rendering than “ironstone.” Agricola (De Nat.
' Fos., Book V.) gives elaborate descriptions of various iron ores, but the descriptions under
any special name would cover many actual minerals. The subject of pyrites is a most con-
fused one; the term originates from the Greek word for fire, and referred in Greek and
Roman times to almost any stone that would strike sparks. By Agricola it was a generic
term in somewhat the same sense that it is still used in mineralogy, as, for instance, iron
pyrite, copper pyrite, etc. So much was this the case later on, that Henckel, the leading

mineralogist of the 18th Century, entitled his large volume Pyritologia, and in it embraces.

practically all the sulphide minerals then known. The term marcasite, of medieval Arabic
origin, seems to have had some vogue prior and subsequent to Agricola. He, however, puts
it on one side as merely a synonym for pyrite, nor can it be satisfactorily defined in much
better terms. Agricola apparently did not recognise the iron base of pyrites, for he says
(De Nat. Fos., p. 366): “ Scanian however, pyrites do not contain any gold, silver, copper,
“ or lead, and yet it is not a pure stone, but a compound, and consists of stone and a substance
“‘which is somewhat metallic, which is a species of its own.” Many varieties were known
to him and described, partly by their other metal association, but chiefly by their colour.

CapmiA. The minerals embraced under this term by the old mineralogists form
one of the most difficult chapters in the history of mineralogy. These complexities reached
their height with Agricola, for at this time various new minerals classed under this heading
had come under debate. All these minerals were later found to be forms of zinc, cobalt, or
arsenic, and some of these minerals were in use long prior to Agricola. From Greek and
Roman times down to long after Agricola, brass was made by cementing zinc ore with
copper. Aristotle and Strabo mention an earth used to colour copper, but give no details.
It is difficult to say what zinc mineral the cadmium of Dioscorides (v, 46) and Pliny
(XXXIV, 2), really was. It was possibly only furnace calamine, or perhaps blende, for it was
associated with copper. They amply describe cadmia produced in copper furnaces, and
pompholyx (zinc oxide). It was apparently not until Theophilus (1150) that the term
calamina appears for that mineral. Precisely when the term “ zinc,” and a knowledge of
the metal, first appeared in Europe is a matter of some doubt; it has been attributed to
Paracelsus, a contemporary of Agricola (see note on p. 409), but we do not believe that author’s
work in question was printed until long after. The quotations from Agricola given below, in
which zincum is mentioned in an obscure way, do not appear in the first editions of these
works, but only in the revised edition of 1559. In other words, Agricola himself only learned
of a substance under this name a short period before his death in 1555. The metal was
imported into Europe from China prior to this time. He however does describe actual
metallic zinc under the term conterfei, and mentions its occurrence in the cracks of furnace
walls. (See also notes on p. 409).

The word cobalt eGermien kobelt) is from the Greek word cobalos, ‘‘ mime,” and its
German form was the term for gnomes and goblins. It appears that the German miners,
finding a material (Agricola’s ‘‘ corrosive material’’) which injured their hands and feet, con-
nected it with the goblins, or used the term as an epithet, and finally it became established
for certain minerals (see note 21, p. 214, on this subject). The first written appearance of the
term in connection with minerals, appears in Agricola’s Bermannus (1530). The first
practical use of cobalt was in the form of sade or cobalt blue. There seems to be no mention
of the substance by the Greek or Roman writers, although analyses of old colourings show
some traces of cobalt, but whether accidental or not is undetermined. The first mention
we know of, was by Biringuccio in 1540 (De La Pirotechnica, Book 11, Chap. 1x.), who did
not connect it with the minerals then called cobalt or cadmia. ‘‘ Zaffera is another mineral
“substance, like a metal of middle weight, which will not melt alone, but accompanied
“ by vitreous substances it melts into an azure colour so that those who colour glass, or
“ paint vases or glazed earthenware, make use of it. Not only does it serve for the above-
“ mentioned operations, but if one uses too great a quantity of it, it will be black and all other
“ colours, according to the quantity used.’ Agricola, although he does not use the word
zaffre, does refer to a substance of this kind, and in any event also missed the relation
between zaffre and cobalt, as he seems to think (De Nat. Fos., p. 347) that zaffre came from
bismuth, a belief that existed until long after his time. The cobalt of the Erzgebirge was
of course, intimately associated with this mineral. He says, “the slag of bismuth, mixed
“ together with metalliferous substances, which when melted make a kind of glass, will tint
“ glass and earthenware vessels blue.” Zaffre is the roasted mineral ground with sand, while
smalt, a term used more frequently, is the fused mixture with sand.

The following are the substances mentioned by Agricola, which, we believe, relate
to cobalt and zinc minerals, some of them arsenical compounds. Other arsenical minerals
we give above.

re rE

BOOK V. 113

coloured, or any other. Sometimes quartz, schist, or marble is of this quality
also, if much native or rudis silver adheres toit. But that ore is considered
of poor quality if three librae of silver at the utmost are found in each
one hundred Hibrae of it®. Silver ore usually contains a greater quantity

peer rs viper ted Calamin Calamin
minaris .. e ae a e
Cadmia metallica.. Kobelt .. 4a Part cobalt .. PA. *Cadmia metallica
Cadmia fornacis .. Mitlere und obere Furnace accretions ..
offenbriiche .. or furnace calamine Furnace accretions
Bituminosa cadmia § Kobelt des bergwacht (Mansfeld copper Bituminosa cadmia
schists) a4 +a see note 4, p. 273)
Galenainanis .. Blende .. fe Sphalerite* (Zu S) .. lende
Cobalium cineraceum re aa ae Smallite* (CoAsz2)
pha nna pha oe ee ee Abolite* ee es Cadmia metallica
obaltum ferré
colore .. re ie ry i Cobaltite (CoAsA) ..
Sona od Zinck .. “: zine’. a es
iguor us
ex fornace. .. etc — Conterfei Zinc See note 48, p. 408
Atramentum sutorium,
candidum, potis-
simum reperitur
Goselariae ue eae a Goslarite (Zn SO,4) .. *Native white vitriol
ors = ur gleam Geeler zechen rauch | Grey spodos
Spodos sublerr ope h ane Either al
S anea rauch, au mM, i natural or arti-
nigra... es Altenberge nennet . ficial zinc oxides, no Black spodos
‘ man in kis J doubt containing
south, gphpe } Grauer zechen rauch arsenicaloxides .. Green spodos
Pompholyx - Hiittenrauch... Pompholyx (see
] . note 26, p. 394)

As seen from the following quotations from Agricola, on cadmia and cobalt, there was infinite
confusion as to the zinc, cobalt, and arsenic minerals ; nor do we think pay aoe purpose is
served by adding to the sreaty lengthy discussion of these passages, the obscurity of which
is natural to the state of knowledge ; but we reproduce them as giving a fairly clear idea of
the amount of confusion then existing. It is, however, desirable to bear in mind that the
mines familiar to Agricola abounded in complex mixtures of cobalt, nickel, arsenic, bismuth,

_ zinc, and antimony. Agricola frequently mentions the garlic odour from cadmia metallica,

which, together with the corrosive qualities mentioned below, would obviously be due to
arsenic. Bermannus (p. 459). ‘“‘ This kind of pyrites miners call cobaltum, if it be allowed
“to me to use our German name. The Greeks call it cadmia. The juices, however, out
‘of which pyrites and silver are formed, appear to solidify into one body, and thus is produced
‘*what they call cobaltum. There are some who consider this the same as pyrites, because
“it is almost the same. There are some who distinguish it as a species, which pleases me,
“for it has the distinctive property of being extremely corrosive, so that it consumes the
hands and feet of the workmen, unless they are well protected, which I do not believe that
* pyrites can do. Three kinds are found, and distinguished more by the colour than by other
“ properties ; they are black (abolite ?), grey (smallite ?), and iron colour (cobalt glance ?).

“Moreover, it contains more silver than does pyrites. . .’- Bermannus (p. 431). “It (a
“sort of pyrites) is so like the colour of galena that not without cause might anybody have
“ doubt in deciding whether it be pyrites or galena. . . Perhaps this kind is neither

“« pyrites nor galena, but has a genus of its own. For it has not the colour of pyrites, nor the
in} Lovonaes t is almost the colour of galena, but of entirely different components. From
“it there is made gold and silver, and a great © egal is dug out from Reichenstein which
“is in Silesia, as was lately reported to me. Much more is found at Raurici, which they call
“ zincum ; which species differs from Eysites. for the latter contains more silver than gold,
“the former only gold, or hardly any silver.”

(De Natura Fossilium, p. 170). “‘ Cadmia fossilis has an odour like garlic”. . (p. 367).
“We now proceed with cadmia, not the cadmia fornacis (furnace accretions) of
“which I spoke in the last book, nor the cadmia fossilis (calamine) devoid of metal, which
“is used to colour copper, whose nature I explained in k V, but the metallic mineral
“* (fossilis metallica), which Pliny states to be an ore from which copper is made. The
“ Ancients have left no record that another metal could be smelted from it. Yet it is a fact

*Three librae of silver per centumpondium would be equal to 875 ounces per short ton.

II4 BOOK V.

than this, because Nature bestows quantity in place of quality; such ore
is mixed with all kinds of earth and stone compounds, except the various
kinds of rudis silver ; especially with pyrites, cadmia metallica fosstlis, galena,
stibium, and others.

“ that not only copper but also silver may be smelted from it, and indeed occasionally both
“ copper and silver together. Sometimes, as is the case with pyrites, it is entirely devoid
“ of metal. It is frequently found in copper mines, but more frequently still in silver mines.
“And there are likewise veins of cadmia itself. . . . There are several species of the
“ cadmia fossilis just as there were of cadmia fornacum. For one kind has the form of grapes
“and another of broken tiles, a third seems to consist of layers. But the cadmia fosstlis
“ has much stronger properties than that which is produced in the furnaces. Indeed, it often
““ possesses such highly corrosive power that it corrodes the hands and feet of the miners.
“ agpantin differs from pyrites in colour and properties. For pyrites, if it does not
“ contain vitriol, is generally either of a gold or silver colour, rarely of any other. Cadmia
‘is either black or brown or grey, or else reddish like copper when melted in the furnace.
Pies For this cadmia is put in a suitable vessel, in the same way as quicksilver, so
“ that the heat of the fire will cause it to sublimate, and from it is made a black or brown or
“grey body which the Alchemists call ‘‘sublimated cadmia” (cadmiam sublimatam). This
‘‘ possesses corrosive properties of the highest degree. Cognate with cadmia and P ites
“is a compound which the Noricians and Rhetians call zincum. This contains gold and
“silver, and is either red or white. It is likewise found in the Sudetian mountains, and is
“devoid of those metals. . . . With this cadmia is naturally related mineral spodos,
“ known to the Moor Serapion, but unknown to the Greeks ; and also pompholyx—tfor both
“are produced by fire where the miners, breaking the hard rocks in drifts, tunnels, and
“shafts, burn the cadmia or pyrites or galena or other similar minerals. From cadmia is
“ made black, brown, and grey spodos; from pyrites, white pompholyx and spodos ; from
‘‘ galena is made yellow or grey spodos. But pompholyx produced from copper stone (agen
“ geroso) after some time becomes green. The black spodos, similar to soot, is found at
“ Altenberg in Meissen. The white pompholyx, like wool which floats in the air in summer,
‘is found in Hildesheim in the seams in the rocks of almost all quarries except in the sand-
“stone. But the grey and the brown and the yellow pompholyx are found in those silver
“ mines where the miners break up the rocks by fire. All consist of very fine particles which
“ are very light, but the lightest of all is white pompholyx.”
QUARTZ MINERALS.

Quarzum (‘ which Quertz oder Quartz “e We Quartz (see note 15,
Latins call silex ’’) kiselstein ga p- 380)
Silex ee Hornstein oder Flinty or jaspery
feurstein ae quartz Ae bis Hornstone
Crystallum 3 Crystal .. Be Clear crystals. . ry Crystal 2
Achates .. “3 Achat .. es Agate .. re vie Agate
Sarda se ee Carneol .. a Carnelian AP i Carnelian
Jaspis.. fs Jaspis .. a Part coloured quartz,
part jade .. a Jaspis
Murrhina .. ‘iy Chalcedonius .. Chalcedony .. eS Chalcedony
Coticula .. cP Goldstein cs A black silicious ston Touchstone (see
note 37, p. 252)
Amethystus “ Amethyst wi Amethyst .. “af Amethyst
LimE MINERALS. i
ros tolls staring ie Gips.. “s Gypsum es .e Gypsum i
Marmor .. jie Marmelstein .. Marble be My Marble
Marmor alabastrites Alabaster is Alabaster oe ae Alabaster
Marmor glarea .. rs $6 se Calcite (?) .. o Cale spar(?)
Saxum calcis Pe Kalchstein a Limestone... ae Limestone
Marga... Ys Mergel .. aie Marl .. 43 is Marl
Tophus .. zs Toffstein oder Sintry limestones, Tophus (see note
topstein nt stalagmites, etc. .. 13, p- 233)
MISCELLANEOUS.
Amiantus .. es Federwis, pliant
salamanderhar .. Usually asbestos Asbestos
Magnetis .. om Silberweis oder
hatzensilber
Bracteolae magnetidi Mica *Mica
simile .. ee “ es Be Fis BE
Mica ee 7 Katzensilber oder

glimmer

BOOK V. II5

As regards other kinds of metal, although some rich ores are found,
still, unless the veins contain a large quantity of ore, it is very rarely worth
while to dig them. The Indians and some other races do search for gems in
veins hidden deep in the earth, but more often they are noticed from their
clearness, or rather their brilliancy, when metals are mined. When they
outcrop, we follow veins of marble by mining in the same way as is
done with rock or building-stones when we come upon them. But
gems, properly so called, though they sometimes have veins of their own,
are still for the most part found in mines and rock quarries, as the
lodestone in iron mines, the emery in silver mines, the lapis judaicus,
trochites, and the like in stone quarries where the diggers, at the bidding
of the owners, usually collect them from the seams inthe rocks.’° Nor does the
miner neglect the digging of ‘‘ extraordinary earths,’ whether they are found

Silex ex eo ictu ferri
facile ignis elicttur.

excubus
figuris ’ a es af Feldspar .. Bt *Felds
Medulla saxorum .. Steinmarck. . ve Kaolinite. . oe Porcelain clay
Fluores (lapides gem-
marum simili) .. Flusse ay os Fluorspar a's *Fluorspar (see note
Marmor in metallis 15, p. 380)
vepertum .. Spat ai Barite ws *Heavy spar

Apart from the above, many other ‘minesals are mentioned in other chapters, and
some information is given with regard to them in the footnotes.

10As stated in note on p. 2, Agricola divided “stones so called” into four kinds ;
the first, common stones in which he included lodestone and jasper or bloodstone ; the
second embraced gems; the third were decorative stones, such as marble, porphyry, etc. ;
the fourth were rocks, such as sandstone and limestone.

LopEsToNE. (Magnes; Interpretatio gives Siegelstein oder magnet). The lode-
stone was well-known to the Ancients under various ae we magnetis, heraclion,
ee gehen A review of the ancient opinions as to its miraculous rties would require

pace than can be afforded. It is mentioned by many oe, writers, including

Hipp se (460-372 B.c.) and Aristotle ; while Theophrastus (53), Dioscorides (v, 105),

Pliny (XXXIV, 42, XXXVI 25) describe it at length. The Ancients also maintained

the existence of a stone, theamedes, having repellant properties, and the two were supposed
to exist at times in the same stone.

EMERY. (Smiris; Interpretatio gives smirgel). ns. gp (De Natura Fossilium., p.
265) says: “ The ring-makers polish and clean their har with smiris. The glaziers
“use it to cut their glass into sheets. It is found in the silver mines of Annaberg in Meissen
“and elsewhere.”’ Stones used for polishing gems are noted by the ancient authors, and
Dana (Syst. of Mineralogy, p. 211) considers the stone of Armenia, of Theophrastus (77), to be
emery, although it co "quite well be any hard stone, such as Novaculite—which is found
in Armenia. ioscorides (v, 166) describes a stone with which the engravers polish gems.

Lapis Jupaicus. (Interpretatio gives Jiiden stein). This was undoubtedly a fossil,
possibly a pentremites. Agricola (De Natura Fosilium, p. 256) says: ‘It is shaped like an

acorn, from the obtuse end to the point proceed raised lines, all equidistant, etc.” Many
fossils were included among the semi-precious stones by the Ancients. Pliny (xxxvul, 55,
66, 73) describes many such stones, among them the balanites, phoenicitis and the pyren,
which resemble the above.

TRocuitis. (Interpretatio gives spangen oder rederstein). This was also a fossil,
probably crinoid stems. Agricola (De Natura on p 256) describes it : ‘‘ Trochites is so
‘called from a wheel, andis related to lapis judaic ature has indeed given it the shape
“of a drum (tympanum). The round part is bebsdth, but on both ends as it were there is a

“module from which on all sides there extend radii to the outer edge, which corresponds with
“the radii. These radii are so much raised that it is fluted. e size of these /rochites

“ varies greatly, for the smallest is so little that the largest is ten times as big, and the largest
“are a digit in aoe by a third of a digit in thickness . . . when immersed in vinegar
“they make b

The extraordinary earths” of Agricola were such substances as ochres, tripoli,
fullers earth, potters’ clay, clay used for medicinal purposes, etc., etc.

116 BOOK V.

in gold mines, silver mines, or other mines ; nor do other miners neglect them
if they are found in stone quarries, or in their own veins ; their value is usually
indicated by their taste. Nor, lastly, does the miner fail to give attention to
the solidified juices which are found in metallic veins, as well as in their own
veins, from which he collects and gathers them. But I will say no more
on these matters, because I have explained more fully all the metals and
mineral substances in the books “ De Natura Fossilium.”

But I will return to the indications. If we come upon earth which is
like lute, in which there are particles of any sort of metal, native or rudis,
the best possible indication of a vein is given to miners, for the metallic
material from which the particles have become detached is necessarily close
by. But if this kind of earth is found absolutely devoid of all metallic
material, but fatty, and of white, green, blue, and similar colours, they must
not abandon the work that has been started. Miners have other indications in
the veins and stringers, which I have described already, and in the rocks, about
which I will speak a little later. If the miner comes across other dry earths
which contain native or rudis metal, that is a good indication; if he comes —
across yellow, red, black, or some other “‘ extraordinary”’ earth, though it is
devoid of mineral, it is not a bad indication. Chrysocolla, or azure, or verdigris,
or orpiment, or realgar, when they are found, are counted among the good
indications. Further, where underground springs throw up metal we ought
to continue the digging we have begun, for this points to the particles having
been detached from the main mass like a fragment from a body. In the
same way the thin scales of any metal adhering to stone or rock are counted
among the good indications. Next, if the veins which are composed partly
of quartz, partly of clayey or dry earth, descend one and all into the depths
of the earth together, with their stringers, there is good hope of metal being
found; but if the stringers afterward do not appear, or little metallic
material is met with, the digging should not be given up until there is nothing
remaining. Dark or black or horn or liver-coloured quartz is usually a good
sign; white is sometimes good, sometimes no sign at all. But calc-spar,
showing itself in a vena profunda, if it disappears a little lower down is nota
good indication ; for it did not belong to the vein proper, but to some stringer.
Those kinds of stone which easily melt in fire, especially if they are translucent
(fluorspar ?), must be counted among the medium indications, for if other
good indications are present they are good, but if no good indications are
present, they give no useful significance. In the same way we ought to form
our judgment with regard to gems. Veins which at the hangingwall and
footwall have horn-coloured quartz or marble, ‘but in the middle clayey
earth, give some hope; likewise those give hope in which the hangingwall
or footwall shows iron-rust coloured earth, and in the middle greasy and
sticky earth ; also there is hope for those which have at the hanging or footwall
that kind of earth which we call ‘ soldiers’ earth,” and in the middle black
earth or earth which looks as if burnt. The special indication of gold is
orpiment ; of silver is bismuth and stibiwm ; of copper is verdigris, melanterta,
sory, chalcitis, misy, and vitriol; of tin is the large pure black stones of

BOOK V. 117

which the tin itself is made, and a material they dig up resembling litharge ;
of iron, iron rust. Gold and copper are equally indicated by chrysocolla and
azure; silver and lead, by the lead. But, though miners rightly
call bismuth “ the roof of silver,’ and though copper pyrites is the common
parent of vitriol and melanteria, still these sometimes have their own
peculiar minerals, just as have orpiment and stibium.

Now, just as certain vein materials give miners a favourable indication,
so also do the rocks through which the canales of the veins wind their
way, for sand discovered in a mine is reckoned among the good indications,
especially if it is very fine. In the same way schist, when it is of a
bluish or blackish colour, and also limestone, of whatever colour it may be, is
a good sign for a silver vein. There is a rock of another kind that is a good sign ;
in it are scattered tiny black stones from which tin is smelted ; especially when
the whole space between the veins is composed of this kind of rock.
Very often indeed, this good kind of rock in conjunction with valuable
stringers contains within its folds the canales of mineral bearing veins: if
it descends vertically into the earth, the benefit belongs to that mine in
which it is seen first of all; if inclined, it benefits the other neighbouring
mines”, As a result the miner who is not ignorant of geometry can calculate
from the other mines the depth at which the canales of a vein bearing rich
metal will wind its way through the rock into his mine. So much for these
matters.

I now come to the mode of working, which is varied and complex, for in
some places they dig crumbling ore, in others hard ore, in others a harder
ore, and in others the hardest kind of ore. In the same way, in some places
the hangingwall rock is soft and fragile, in others hard, in others harder, and
in still others of the hardest sort. I call that ore “crumbling” which is com-
posed of earth, and of soft solidified juices ; that ore ‘‘ hard’’ which is composed
of metallic minerals and moderately hard stones, such as for the most part
are those which easily melt in a fire of the first and second orders, like lead
and similar materials. I call that ore ‘‘ harder’’ when with those I have already
mentioned are combined various sorts of quartz, or stones which easily melt
in fire of the third degree, or pyrites, or cadmia, or very hard marble. I call
that ore hardest, which is composed throughout the whole vein of these hard
stones and compounds. The hanging or footwalls of a vein are hard, when
composed of rock in which there are few stringers or seams; harder, in
which they are fewer; hardest, in which they are fewest or none at all.
When these are absent, the rock is quite devoid of water which softens
it. But the hardest rock of the hanging or footwall, however, is seldom as

- hard as the harder class of ore.

Miners dig out crumbling ore with the pick alone. When the metal
has not yet shown itself, they do not discriminate between the hangingwall
and the veins ; when it has once been found, they work with the utmost care.
For first of all they tear away the hangingwall rock separately from the vein,
afterward with a pick they dislodge the crumbling vein from the footwall

12Presumably the ore-body dips into a neighbouring property.

118 BOOK V.

into a dish placed underneath to prevent any of the metal from falling to
the ground. They break a hard vein loose from the footwall by blows with
a hammer upon the first kind of iron tool%, all of which are designated by
appropriate names, and with the same tools they hew away the hard hanging-
wall rock. They hew out the hangingwall rock in advance more frequently, the
rock of the footwall more rarely ; and indeed, when the rock of the footwall
resists iron tools, the rock of the hangingwall certainly cannot be broken unless
it is allowable to shatter it by fire. With regard to the harder veins which are
tractable to iron tools, and likewise with regard to the harder and hardest
kind of hangingwall rock, they generally attack them with more powerful
iron tools, in fact, with the fourth kind of iron tool, which are called by their
appropriate names; but if these are not ready to hand, they use two or
three iron tools of the first kind together. As for the hardest kind of metal-
bearing vein, which in a measure resists iron tools, if the owners of the
neighbouring mines give them permission, they break it with fires. But if
these owners refuse them permission, then first of all they hew out the rock of
the hangingwall, or of the footwall if it be less hard; then they place timbers
set in hitches in the hanging or footwall, a little above the vein, and from
the front and upper part, where the vein is seen to be seamed with small
cracks, they drive into one of the little cracks one of the iron tools which
I have mentioned; then in each fracture they place four thin iron
blocks, and in order to hold them more firmly, if necessary, they place
as many thin iron plates back to back; next they place thinner iron
plates between each two iron’ blocks, and strike and drive them by
turns with hammers, whereby the vein rings with a shrill sound; and the
moment when it begins to be detached from the hangingwall or footwall
rock, a tearing sound is heard. As soon as this grows distinct the miners
hastily flee away ; then a great crash is heard as the vein is broken and torn,
and falls down. By this method they throw down a portion of a vein weigh-
ing a hundred pounds more or less. But if the miners by any other method ©
hew the hardest kind of vein which is rich in metal, there remain certain
cone-shaped portions which can be cut out afterward only with difficulty. As
for this knob of hard ore, if it is devoid of metal, or if they are not allowed to
apply fire to it, they proceed round it by digging to the right or left, because
it cannot be broken into by iron wedges without great expense. Meantime,
while the workmen are carrying out the task they have undertaken, the
depths of the earth often resound with sweet singing, whereby they lighten a
toil which is of the severest kind and full of the greatest dangers.
As I have just said, fire shatters the hardest rocks, but the method of its
application is not simple. For if a vein held in the rocks cannot be hewn
18The various kinds of iron tools are described in great detail in Book VI.
14Fire-setting as an aid to breaking rock is of very ancient origin, and moreover it
persisted in certain German and Norwegian mines down to the end of the 19th century—
270 years after the first application of explosives to mining. The first specific reference to
fire-setting in mining is by Agatharchides (2nd century B.c.) whose works are not extant,
but who is quoted by both Diodorus Siculus and Photius, for which statement see note 8, p-

279. Pliny (XXXIII, 21) says: ‘‘ Occasionally a kind of silex is met with, which must
“broken with fire and vinegar, or as the tunnels are filled with suffocating fumes and smoke,

BOOK V. 11g

out because of the hardness or other difficulty, and the drift or tunnel is
low, a heap of dried logs is placed against the rock and fired; if the drift or
tunnel is high, two heaps are necessary, of which one is placed above the
other, and both burn until the fire has consumed them. This force does not
generally soften a large portion of the vein, but only some of the surface.
When the rock in the hanging or footwall can be worked by the iron tools
and the vein is so hard that it is not tractable to the same tools, then the
walls are hollowed out; if this be in the end of the drift or tunnel or above
or below, the vein is then broken by fire, but not by the same method ; for
if the hollow is wide, as many logs are piled into it as possible, but if narrow,
only a few. By the one method the greater fire separates the vein more
completely from the footwall or sometimes from the hangingwall, and by the
other, the smaller fire breaks away less of the vein from the rock, because in
that case the fire is confined and kept in check by portions of the rock which
surround the wood held in such a narrow excavation. Further, if the
excavation is low, only one pile of logs is placed in it, if high, there are
two, one placed above the other, by which plan the lower bundle being
kindled sets alight the upper one; and the fire being driven by the draught
into the vein, separates it from the rock which, however hard it may be, often
becomes so softened as to be the most easily breakable of all. Applying this
principle, Hannibal, the Carthaginian General, imitating the Spanish miners,

“they frequently use neyo machines, carrying 150 librae of iron.”” This combination
of fire and vinegar he again refers to (xxl, 27), where he dilates in the same sentence on the
usefulness of pees aed for breaking rock and for salad dressing. This myth about breaking
rocks with fire and vinegar is of more than usual interest, wnt its origin seems to be in the
legend that Hannibal thus broke through the Alps. Livy (59 B.c., 17 A.D.) seems to be the first
to produce this myth in writing ; and, in any event, by Pliny’s time (23-79 A.D.) it had become
an established method—in literature. Livy (XxI, 37) says, in connection with Hannibal’s
crossing of the Alps: “ They set fire to it (the timber) when a wind had arisen suitable to
“ excite the fire, then when the rock was hot it was crumbled by pouring on vinegar (infuso
“ aceto). In this manner the cliff heated by the fire was broken by iron tools, and the
“ declivities eased by turnings, so that not only the beasts of burden but also the elephants
“could be led down.” Hannibal crossed the Alps in 218 B.c. and Livy’s account was
written 200 years later, by which time Hannibal’s memory among the Romans was generally
surrounded by Herculean fables. Be this as it may, by Pliny’s time the vinegar was
generally accepted, and has been ceaselessly debated ever since. Nor has the myth ceased
to grow, despite the remarks of Gibbon, Lavalette, and others. A recent historian (Hen-
nebert, Histotre d’ Annibal 11, p. 253) of that famous engineer and soldier, soberly sets out to
prove that inasmuch as literal acceptance of ordinary vinegar is impossible, the Phoenecians
must have possessed some mysterious high explosive. A still more recent biographer swallows
this argument im fofo. (Morris, ‘‘ Hannibal,’’ London, 1903, p. 103). A study of the com-
mentators of this passage, although it would fill a volume with sterile words, would disclose
one generalization: That the real scholars have passed over the passage with the comment
that it is either a corruption or an old woman’s tale, but that hosts of soldiers who set about
the biography of famous generals and campaigns, almost to a man take the passage seriously,
and seriously explain it by way of the rock being limestone, or snow, or by the use of explosives,
or other foolishness. It has been proposed, although there are grammatical objections, that the
text is slightly corrupt and read infosso acuto, instead of infuso aceto, in which case all becomes
easy from a mining point of view. If so, however, it must be assumed that the corruption
occurred during the 20 years between Livy and Pliny.

_ By the use of fire-setting in recent times at Kénigsberg (Arthur L. Collins,
** Fire-setting,”’ Federated Inst. of Mining Engineers, Vol. V, p. 82) an advance of from 5 to
20 feet per month in headings was accomplished, and on the score of economy survived the
use of gunpowder, but has now been abandoned in favour of dynamite. We may mention
that the use of gunpowder for blasting was first introduced at Schemnitz by Caspar Weindle,
in 1627, but apparently was not introduced into English mines for nearly 75 years afterward,
as the late 17th century English writers continue to describe fire-setting.

120 BOOK V.

overcame the hardness of the Alps by the use of vinegar and fire. Even
if a vein is a very wide one, as tin veins usually are, miners excavate into the
small streaks, and into those hollows they put dry wood and place amongst
them at frequent intervals sticks, all sides of which are shaved down fan-
shaped, which easily take light, and when once they have taken fire com-
municate it to the other bundles of wood, which easily ignite.

A—KINDLED Locs. B—STICKS SHAVED DOWN FAN-SHAPED. C—TUNNEL.

While the heated veins and rock are giving forth a foetid vapour and the
shafts or tunnels are emitting fumes, the miners and other workmen do not
go down in the mines lest the stench affect their health or actually kill them,
as I will explain in greater detail when I come to speak of the evils which
affect miners. The Bergmeister, in order to prevent workmen from being
suffocated, gives no one permission to break veins or rock by fire in shafts or
tunnels where it is possible for the poisonous vapour and smoke to permeate
the veins or stringers and pass through into the neighbouring mines, which
have no hard veins or rock. As for that part of a vein or the surface of the
rock which the fire has separated from the remaining mass, if it is overhead,
the miners dislodge it with a crowbar, or if it still has some degree of hardness,
they thrust a smaller crowbar into the cracks and so break it down, but if

BOOK V. 121

it is on the sides they break it with hammers. Thus broken off, the rock
tumbles down; or if it still remains, they break it off with picks. Rock
and earth on the one hand, and metal and ore on the other, are filled into
buckets separately and drawn up to the open air or to the nearest tunnel.
If the shaft is not deep, the buckets are drawn up by a machine turned by
men ; if it is deep, they are drawn by machines turned by horses.

It often happens that a rush of water or sometimes stagnant air hinders
the mining; for this reason miners pay the greatest attention to these
matters, just as much as to digging, or they should do so. The water of the
veins and stringers and especially of vacant workings, must be drained out
through the shafts and tunnels. Air, indeed, becomes stagnant both in
tunnels and in shafts ; in a deep shaft, if it be by itself, this occurs if it is
neither reached by a tunnel nor connected by a drift with another shaft ;
this occurs in a tunnel if it has been driven too far into a mountain and no
shaft has yet been sunk deep enough to meet it; in neither case can the
air move or circulate. For this reason the vapours become heavy and
resemble mist, and they smell of mouldiness, like a vault or some under-
ground chamber which has been completely closed for many years. This
suffices to prevent miners from continuing their work for long in these places,
even if the mine is full of silver or gold, or if they do continue, they cannot
breathe freely and they have headaches; this more often happens if they
work in these places in great numbers, and bring many lamps, which then
supply them with a feeble light, because the foul air from both lamps and
men make the vapours still more heavy.

A small quantity of water is drawn from the shafts by machines of
different kinds which men turn or work. If so great a quantity has flowed
into one shaft as greatly to impede mining, another shaft is sunk some
fathoms distant from the first, and thus in one of them work and labour are
carried on without hindrance, and the water is drained into the other, which
is sunk lower than the level of the water in the first one; then by these
machines or by those worked by horses, the water is drawn up into the drain
and flows out of the shaft-house or the mouth of the nearest tunnel. But
when into the shaft of one mine, which is sunk more deeply, there flows all
the water of all the neighbouring mines, not only from that vein in which
the shaft is sunk, but also from other veins, then it becomes necessary for a
large sump to be made to collect the water; from this sump the water is
drained by machines which draw it through pipes, or by ox-hides, about
which I will say more in the next book. The water which pours into the
tunnels from the veins and stringers and seams in the rocks is carried
away in the drains.

Air is driven into the extremities of deep shafts and long tunnels by
powerful blowing machines, as I will explain in the following book, which
will deal with these machines also. The outer air flows spontaneously into
the caverns of the earth, and when it can pass through them comes out again.
This, however, comes about in different ways, for in spring and summer it
flows into the deeper shafts, traverses the tunnels or drifts, and finds its way

122 BOOK V.

out of the shallower shafts ; similarly at the same season it pours into the
lowest tunnel and, meeting a shaft in its course, turns aside to a higher tunnel
and passes out therefrom ; but in autumn and winter, on the other hand, it
enters the upper tunnel or shaft and comes out at the deeper ones. This
change in the flow of air currents occurs in temperate regions at the beginning
of spring and the end of autumn, but in cold regions at the end of spring
and the beginning of autumn. But at each period, before the air regularly
assumes its own accustomed course, generally for a space of fourteen days
it undergoes frequent variations, now blowing into an upper shaft or
tunnel, now into a lower one. But enough of this, let us now proceed to
what remains.

There are two kinds of shafts, one of the depth already described, of
which kind there are usually several in one mine; especially if the mine is
entered by a tunnel and is metal-bearing. For when the first tunnel is
connected with the first shaft, two new shafts are sunk; or if the inrush of
water hinders sinking, sometimes three are sunk; so that one may take
the place of a sump and the work of sinking which has been begun may be
continued by means of the remaining two shafts; the same is done in the
case of the second tunnel and the third, or even the fourth, if so many are
driven into a mountain. The second kind of shaft is very deep, sometimes
as much as sixty, eighty, or one hundred fathoms. These shafts continue
vertically toward the depths of the earth, and by means of a hauling-rope
the broken rock and metalliferous ores are drawn out of the mine; for which
reason miners call them vertical shafts. Over these shafts are erected
machines by which water is extracted; when they are above ground the
machines are usually worked by horses, but when they are in tunnels, other
kinds are used which are turned by water-power. Such are the shafts which
are sunk when a vein is rich in metal.

Now shafts, of whatever kind they may be, are supported in various
ways. If the vein is hard, and also the hanging and footwall rock, the shaft
does not require much timbering, but timbers are placed at intervals, one end
of each of which is fixed in a hitch cut into the rock of the hangingwall and
the other fixed into a hitch cut in the footwall. To these timbers are fixed
small timbers along the footwall, to which are fastened the lagging and
ladders. The lagging is also fixed to the timbers, both to those which screen
off the shaft on the ends from the vein, and to those which screen off the
rest of the shaft from that part in which the ladders are placed. The lagging
on the sides of the shaft confine the vein, so as to prevent fragments of it
which have become loosened by water from dropping into the shaft and
terrifying, or injuring, or knocking off the miners and other workmen who
are going up or down the ladders from one part of the mine to another. For
the same reason, the lagging between the ladders and the haulage-way on
the other hand, confine and shut off from the ladders the fragments of rock
which fall from the buckets or baskets while they are being drawn up;
moreover, they make the arduous and difficult descent and ascent to appear
less terrible, and in fact to be less dangerous.

S 4S
~ so °f
= to!
AQ.
| .
uss i
e c n
So cy
3 A
Sas Zz
ee “
z 4 oJ Latins At Op OLEATE OEP 4
ats We ON
oA 8 saath
a B
‘the Zs }
S a
g 2 2
. aad Z
= gos :
7 2 x,
mS woe 3
© CS ow 2
© “5 & Al
Q Be
ae :
s) ie
Zs im
a =] oO a)
a3 8
S
Zu 8
o-= A,
o » 3 d
ne ge ~
moe ; <
eos Y 4
ses LOG
if, =
> 3 & iy a
A
oe a Y =
— ed 4%,
=m FO } |
So =<
oO
a 6

124 BOOK V.

are arranged on two different systems; for either the square ends of the
timbers, which reach from the hangingwall to the footwall, are fixed into corres-
ponding square holes in the timbers which lie along the hanging or footwall,
or the upper part of the end of one and the lower part of the end of the other
are cut out and one laid on the other. The great weight of these joined
timbers is sustained by stout beams placed at intervals, which are deeply set
into hitches in the footwall and hangingwall, but are inclined. In order that
these joined timbers may remain stationary, wooden wedges or poles cut
from trees are driven in between the timbers and the vein and the hanging
wall and the footwall ; and the space which remains empty is filled with loose
dirt. If the hanging and footwall rock is sometimes hard and sometimes soft,
and the vein likewise, solid joined timbers are not used, but timbers are
placed at intervals; and where the rock is soft and the vein crumbling,
carpenters put in lagging between them and the wall rocks, and behind these
they fill with loose dirt ; by this means they fill up the void.

When a very deep shaft, whether vertical or inclined, is supported by
joined timbers, then, since they are sometimes of bad material and a fall is
threatened, for the sake of greater firmness three or four pairs of strong end
posts are placed between these, one pair on the hangingwall side, the other

on the footwall side. To prevent them from falling out of position and to

make them firm and substantial, they are supported by frequent end plates,
and in order that these may be more securely fixed they are mortised into
the posts. Further, in whatever way the shaft may be timbered, dividers
are placed upon the wall plates, and to these is fixed lagging, and this
marks off and separates the ladder-way from the remaining part of the shaft.
If a vertical shaft is a very deep one, planks are laid upon the timbers by the
side of the ladders and fixed on to the timbers, in order that the men who are
going up or down may St or stand updn them and rest when they are tired.
To prevent danger to the shovellers from rocks which, after being drawn up
from so deep a shaft fall down again, a little above the bottom of the shaft
small rough sticks are placed close together on the timbers, in such a way as
to cover the whole space of the shaft except the ladder-way. A hole,
however, is left in this structure near the footwall, which is kept open so that
there may be one opening to the shaft from the bottom, that the buckets
full of the materials which have been dug out may be drawn from the
shaft through it by machines, and may be returned to the same place again
empty ; and so the shovellers and other workmen, as it were hiding beneath
this structure, remain perfectly safe in the shaft.

In mines on one vein there are driven one, two, or sometimes three
or more tunnels, always one above the other. If the vein is solid and
hard, and likewise the hanging and footwall rock, no part of the tunnel
needs support, beyond that which is required at the mouth, because at that
spot there is not yet solid rock; if the vein is soft, and the hanging and
footwall rock are likewise soft, the tunnel requires frequent strong timbering,
which is provided in the following way. First, two dressed posts are erected
and set into the tunnel floor, which is dug out a little ; these are of medium

en P

——_— pa ~

5 shalom ap teat elaend

BOOK V. 125

thickness, and high enough that their ends, which are cut square, almost
touch the top of the tunnel ; then upon them is placed a smaller dressed cap,
which is mortised into the heads of the posts; at the bottom, other small
timbers, whose ends are similarly squared, are mortised into the posts. At
each interval of one and a half fathoms, one of these sets is erected ; each one
of these the miners call a “little doorway,” because it opens a certain amount
of passage way ; and indeed, when necessity requires it, doors are fixed to the
timbers of each little doorway so that it can be closed. Then lagging of
planks or of poles is placed upon the caps lengthwise, so as to reach from one
set of timbers to another, and is laid along the sides, in case some portion of
the body of the mountain may fall, and by its bulk impede passage or crush
persons coming in or out. Moreover, to make the timbers remain stationary,
wooden pegs are driven between them and the sides of the tunnel. Lastly,
if rock or earth are carried out in wheelbarrows, planks joined together are
laid upon the sills; if the rock is hauled out in trucks, then two timbers
three-quarters of a foot thick and wide are laid on the sills, and, where they
join, these are usually hollowed out so that in the hollow, as in a road, the iron
pin of the truck may be pushed along; indeed, because of this pin in the
groove, the truck does not leave the worn track to the left or right. Beneath
the sills are the drains through which the water flows away.

A—Posts. B—Caps. C—Sitts. D—Doors. E—Laccinc. F—Drarns.

Miners timber drifts in the same way as tunnels. These do not, however,
require sill-pieces, or drains ; for the broken rock is not hauled very far, nor does
the water have far to flow. If the vein above is metal-bearing, as it sometimes is

i |

126 BOOK V.

for a distance of several fathoms, then from the upper part of tunnels or even
drifts that have already been driven, other drifts are driven again
and again until that part of the vein is reached which does not yield metal.
The timbering of these openings is done as follows: stulls are set at
intervals into hitches in the hanging and footwall, and upon them
smooth poles are laid continuously ; and that they may be able to
bear the weight, the stulls are generally a foot and a half thick. After the
ore has been taken out and the mining of the vein is being done elsewhere,
the rock then broken, especially if it cannot be taken away without great
difficulty, is thrown into these openings among the timber, and the carriers
of the ore are saved toil, and the owners save half the expense. This then,
generally speaking, is the method by which everything relating to the
timbering of shafts, tunnels, and drifts is carried out.

All that I have hitherto written is in part peculiar to venae profundae,
and in part common to all kinds of veins; of what follows, part is specially
applicable to venae dilatatae, part to venae cumulatae. But first I will
describe how venae dilatatae should be mined. Where torrents, rivers, or
streams have by inundations washed away part of the slope of a mountain or
a hill, and have disclosed a vena dilatata, a tunnel should be driven first straight
and narrow, and then wider, for nearly all the vein should be hewn away ; and
when this tunnel has been driven further, a shaft which supplies air should be
sunk in the mountain or hill, and through it from time to time the ore, earth,
and rock can be drawn up at less expense than if they be drawn out through the
very great length of the tunnel ; and even in those places to which the tunnel
does not yet reach, miners dig shafts in order to open a vena dilatata which
they conjecture must lie beneath the soil. In this way, when the upper
layers are removed, they dig through rock sometimes of one kind and colour,
sometimes of one kind but different colours, sometimes of different kinds but —
of one colour, and, lastly, of different kinds and different colours. The thickness
of rock, both of each single stratum and of all combined, is uncertain, for
the whole of the strata are in some places twenty fathoms deep, in others
more than fifty ; individual strata are in some places half a foot thick ; in others,
one, two, or more feet; in others, one, two, three, or more fathoms. For
example, in those districts which lie at the foot of the Harz mountains,
there are many different coloured strata, covering a copper vena dilatata.
When the soil has been stripped, first of all is disclosed a stratum which
is red, but of a dull shade and of a thickness of twenty, thirty, or five and
thirty fathoms. Then there is another stratum, also red, but of a light
shade, which has usually a thickness of about two fathoms. Beneath this is a
stratum of ash-coloured clay nearly a fathom thick, which, although it is
not metalliferous, is reckoned a vein. Then follows a third stratum,
which is ashy, and about three fathoms thick. Beneath this lies a vein
of ashes to the thickness of five fathoms, and these ashes are mixed with
rock of the same colour. Joined to the last, and underneath, comes a
stratum, the fourth in number, dark in colour and a foot thick. Under this
comes the fifth stratum, of a pale or yellowish colour, two feet thick ; under-

BOOK V. 127

neath which is the sixth stratum, likewise dark, but rough and three feet
thick. Afterward occurs the seventh stratum, likewise of dark colour, but
still darker than the last, and two feet thick. This is followed by an eighth
stratum, ashy, rough, and a foot thick. This kind, as also the others,
is sometimes distinguished by stringers of the stone which easily melts in
fire of the second order. Beneath this is another ashy rock, light in
weight, and five feet thick. Next to this comes a lighter ash-coloured
one, a foot thick ; beneath this lies the eleventh stratum, which is dark and
very much like the seventh, and two feet thick. Below the last is
a twelfth stratum of a whitish colour and soft, also two feet thick; the
weight of this rests on a thirteenth stratum, ashy and one foot thick, whose
weight is in turn supported by a fourteenth stratum, which is blackish and
half a foot thick. There follows this, another stratum of black colour,
likewise half a foot thick, which is again followed by a sixteenth stratum
still blacker in colour, whose thickness is also the same. Beneath this, and
last of all, lies the cupriferous stratum, black coloured and schistose, in which
there sometimes glitter scales of gold-coloured pyrites in the very thin sheets,
which, as I said elsewhere, often take the forms of various living things.®
The miners mine out a vena dilatata laterally and longitudinally by
driving a low tunnel in it, and if the nature of the work and place permit, they
sink also a shaft in order to discover whether there is a second vein beneath
the first one ; for sometimes beneath it there are two, three, or more similar
metal-bearing veins, and these are excavated in the same way laterally and
longitudinally. They generally mine vene dilatate lying down; and to

18The strata here enumerated are given in the Glossary of De Re Metallica as follows :—
Corium terrae F ia vi Die erd oder leim.

Saxum rubrum sf a “a Rot gebirge.
Alterum item rubrum ae we Roterkle.
Argilla cinerea ag ie -» »Thone.
Tertium saxum : ai aa Gerhulle.
Cineris vena .. oh ee aes Asche.

uintum saxum ee & mt Schwehlen.

extum saxum i pa a Oberrauchstein.
Septimum saxum .. ee Fi Zechstein
Octavum saxum ck Underrauchstein
Nonum saxum “fr Blitterstein
Decimum saxum of Oberschuelen
Undecimum saxum .. Mittelstein
Duodecimum saxum .. Underschuelen
Decimumtertium saxum Dach

i saxum Norweg.

Decimumquintum saxum Lotwerg
Decimumsextum saxum Kamme
Lapis aerosus fissilis Schifer

The description is no doubt that of the Mannsfeld cupriferous slates. It is of some
additional interest as the first attempt at ay ae distinctions, although this must not
be taken too literally, for we have ren the different numbered “ saxum”’ in this connection
as “stratum.” The German terms given by Agricola above, can many of them be identified
in the miners’ terms to-day for the various strata at Mannsfeld. Over the kupferschiefer the
names to-day are kammschale, dach, faule, zechstein, rauchwacke, rauchstein, asche. The
relative thickness of these beds is much the same as given by Agricola. The stringers in
the 8th stratum of stone, which fuse in the fire of the second order, were possibly calcite.
The rauchstein of the modern section is distinguished by stringers of calcite, which give it at
times a brecciated appearance.

128 BOOK V.

avoid wearing away their clothes and injuring their left shoulders they
usually bind on themselves small wooden cradles. For this reason, this
particular class of miners, in order to use their iron tools, are obliged to bend
their necks to the left, not infrequently having them twisted. Now these
veins also sometimes divide, and where these parts re-unite, ore of aricher and
a better quality is generally found; the same thing occurs where the stringers,
of which they are not altogether devoid, join with them, or cut them cross-
wise, or divide them obliquely. To prevent a mountain or hill, which has in
this way been undermined, from subsiding by its weight, either some natural
pillars and arches are left, on which the pressure rests as on a foundation, or
timbering is done for support. Moreover, the materials which are dug out
and which are devoid of metal are removed in bowls, and are thrown back,
thus once more filling the caverns.

Next, as to vene@ cumulate. These are dug by a somewhat different
method, for when one of these shows some metal at the top of the ground,
first of all one shaft is sunk ; then, if it is worth while, around this one many
shafts are sunk and tunnels are driven into the mountain. If a torrent or
spring has torn fragments of metal from such a vein, a tunnel is first driven
into the mountain or hill for the purpose of searching for the ore; then
when it is found, a vertical shaft is sunk in it. Since the whole mountain, or
more especially the whole hill, is undermined, seeing that the whole of it is -
composed of ore, it is necessary to leave the natural pillars and arches, or the
place is timbered. But sometimes when a vein is very hard it is broken by -
fire, whereby it happens that the soft pillars break up, or the timbers are
burnt away, and the mountain by its great weight sinks into itself, and then
the shaft buildings are swallowed up in the great subsidence. Therefore,
about a vena cumulata it is advisable to sink some shafts which are not sub-
ject to this kind of ruin, through which the materials that are excavated may
be carried out, not only while the pillars and underpinnings still remain whole
and solid, but also after the supports have been destroyed by fire and have
fallen. Since ore which has thus fallen must necessarily be broken by fire,
new shafts through which the smoke can escape must be sunk in the abyss.
At those places where stringers intersect, richer ore is generally obtained
from the mine ; these stringers, in the case of tin mines, sometimes have in
them black stones the size of a walnut. If such a vein is found in a plain,
as not infrequently happens in the case of iron, many shafts are sunk, because —
they cannot be sunk very deep. The work is carried on by this method
because the miners cannot drive a tunnel into a level plain of this kind.

There remain the stringers in which gold alone is sometimes found,
in the vicinity of rivers and streams, or in swamps. If upon the soil being
removed, many of these are found, composed of earth somewhat baked and
burnt, as may sometimes be seen in clay pits, there is some hope that gold
may be obtained from them, especially if several join together. But the
very point of junction must be pierced, and the length and width searched
for ore, and in these places very deep shafts cannot be sunk.

I have completed one part of this book, and now come to the other, in
which I will deal with the art of surveying. Miners measure the solid

BOOK V. 129

mass of the mountains in order that the owners may lay out their plans, and
that their workmen may not encroach on other people’s possessions. The
surveyor either measures the interval not yet wholly dug through, which
lies between the mouth of a tunnel and a shaft to be sunk to that depth, or
between the mouth of a shaft and the tunnel to be driven to that spot which
lies under the shaft, or between both, if the tunnel is neither so long as to
reach to the shaft, nor the shaft so deep as to reach to the tunnel ; and thus
on both sides work is still to be done. Or in some cases, within the tunnels
and drifts, are to be fixed the boundaries of the meers, just as the Bergmetster
has determined the boundaries of the same meers above ground.?®

Each method of surveying depends on the measuring of triangles. A
small triangle should be laid out, and from it calculations must be made
regarding a larger one. Most particular care must be taken that we do not
deviate at all from a correct measuring ; for if, at the beginning, we are drawn

16The history of surveying and surveying instruments, and in a subsidiary way their
application to mine work, is a subject upon which there exists a most extensive literature.
owever, that portion of such history which relates to the period prior to Agricola represents
a much less proportion of the whole than do the citations to this chapter in De Re Metallica,
which is the first comprehensive discussion of the mining ag Samy ha The history of such
instruments is too extensive to be entered upon in a footnote, but there are some fundamental
considerations which, if they had been present in the minds of historical students of this subject,
_ would have considerably abridged the literature on it. First, there can be no doubt that
measuring cords or rods and boundary stones existed almost from the first division of land. There
is, therefore, no need to try to discover their origins. Second, the history of surveying and
surveying instruments really begins with the invention of instruments for taking levels, or
for the determination of angles with a view to geometrical calculation. The meagre facts
bearing upon this subject do not warrant the endless expansion they have received by
argument as to what was probable, in order to accomplish assumed ethics of construction
among the Ancients. For instance, the argument that in carrying the Grand Canal over
watersheds with necessary reservoir supply, the Chinese must have had accurate levelling
and surveying instruments before the Christian Era, and must have conceived in advance a
completed work, does not hold water when any investigation will demonstrate that the canal
ae! by slow accretion from the lateral river systems, until it joined almost by accident.
uch the same may be said about the preconception of engineering results in several
other ancient works. There can be no certainty as to who first invented instruments of
the order mentioned above; for instance, the invention of the dioptra has been ascribed to
Hero, vide his work on the Diopira. He has been assumed to have lived in the 1st or 2nd
Century B.c. Recent investigations, however, have shown that he lived about roo a.p. (Sir
Thomas Heath, Encyc. Brit. 11th Ed., xi, 378). As this instrument is mentioned
by Vitruvius (50 - 0 B.C.) the myth that Hero was the inventor must also disappear. In-
cidentally Vitruvius (vit, 5) describes a levelling instrument called a chorobates, pr was a
frame levelled either by a groove of water or by plumb strings. Be the inventor of the
diopira who he may, Hero’s work on that subject contains the first suggestion of mine
surveys in the problems (XIII, XIV, Xv, Xvi), where geometrical methods are elucidated
for determining the depths required for the connection of shafts and tunnels. On the com-
pass we give further notes on p. 56. It was probably an evolution of the 13th Century. As
to the application of angle- and level-determining instruments to underground surveys,
so far as we know there is no reference prior to Agricola, ge that of Hero. Mr.
Bennett Brough (Cantor Lecture, London, aoa points outthat the Niitzliche Bergbiichlin (see
Appendix) describes a mine compass, but there is not the slightest reference to its use
for anything but surface direction of veins.

Although map-making of a primitive sort requires no instruments, except legs, the oldest
map in the world possesses unusual interest because it happens to be a map of a mining
region. This well-known Turin papyrus dates from Seti I. (about 1300 B.c.), and it
represents certain gold mines between the Nile and the Red Sea. The best discussion is
by Chabas (Inscriptions des Mines d@Or, Chalons-sur-Saone, Paris, 1862, p. 30-36).
Fragments of another papyrus, in the Turin Museum, are considered by Lieblein (Deux
Papyras Hiératiques, Christiania, 1868) also to represent a mine of the time of Rameses I. If
so, this one dates from about 1400B.c. As to an actual map of underground workings (disre-
garding illustrations) we know of none until after Agricola’s time. At his time maps were
not made, as will be gathered from the text.

130 BOOK V.

by carelessness into a slight error, this at the end will produce great errors.
Now these triangles are of many shapes, since shafts differ among themselves
and are not all sunk by one and the same method into the depths of the
earth, nor do the slopes of all mountains come down to the valley or plain in
the same manner. For if a shaft is vertical, there is a triangle with a right
angle, which the Greeks call oploywoy and this, according to the
inequalities of the mountain slope, has either two equal sides or three unequal
sides. The Greeks call the former Tplywvov isooxeAée the latter oxaAnvov for
a right angle triangle cannot have three equal sides. If a shaft is inclined
and sunk in the same vein in which the tunnel is driven, a triangle is likewise
made with a right angle, and this again, according to the various inequalities
of the mountain slope, has either two equal or three unequal sides. But if
a shaft is inclined and is sunk in one vein, and a tunnel is driven in
another vein, then a triangle comes into existence which has either an obtuse
angle or all acute angles. The former the Greeks call auGAvyonov, the latter
ofvyovov. That triangle which has an obtuse angle cannot have three -
equal sides, but in accordance with the different mountain slopes has either
two equal sides or three unequal sides. That triangle which has all acute ~
angles in accordance with the different mountain slopes has either three equal
sides, which the Greeks call rpiywvov isézAepov or two equal sides or three
unequal sides.

The surveyor, as I said, employs his art when the owners of the mines
desire to know how many fathoms of the intervening ground require to be
dug ; when a tunnel is being driven toward a shaft and does not yet reach
it ; or when the shaft has not yet been sunk to the depth of the bottom of the
tunnel which is under it; or when neither the tunnel reaches to that point,
nor has the shaft been sunk to it. It is of importance that miners should
know how many fathoms remain from the tunnel to the shaft, or from the
shaft to the tunnel, in order to calculate the expenditure ; and in order that
the owners of a metal-bearing mine may hasten the sinking of a shaft and
the excavation of the metal, before the tunnel reaches that point and the
tunnel owners excavate part of the metal by any right of their own; and on
the other hand, it is important that the owners of a tunnel may similarly
hasten their driving before a shaft can be sunk to the depth of a tunnel, so
that they may excavate the metal to which they will have a right.

The surveyor, first of all, if the beams of the shaft-house do not give him
the opportunity, sets a pair of forked posts by the sides of the shaft in such
a manner that a pole may be laid across them. Next, from the pole he lets
down into the shaft a cord with a weight attached to it. Then he stretches a
second cord, attached to the upper end of the first cord, right down along the
slope of the mountain to the bottom of the mouth of the tunnel, and fixes it to
the ground. Next, from the same pole not far from the first cord, he lets
down a third cord, similarly weighted, so that it may intersect the second
cord, which descends obliquely. Then, starting from that point where the
third cord cuts the second cord which descends obliquely to the mouth of the
tunnel, he measures the second cord upward to where it reaches the end of

A—UPRIGHT FORKED Posts. B—POLE OVER THE Posts. C—SuHartr. D—FirstT corpD.

E—WEIGHT OF FIRST CORD. F—SECOND corD. G—SAME FIXED GROUND. H—HEApD

OF FIRST CORD. I—MouTH OF TUNNEL. K—THIRD CoRD. L—WEIGHT OF THIRD CORD.

M—FIRST SIDE MINOR TRIANGLE. N—SECOND SIDE MINOR TRIANGLE. O—THIRD SIDE
MINOR TRIANGLE. P-—-THE MINOR TRIANGLE.

132 BOOK V.

the first cord, and makes a note of this first side of the minor triangle}’.
Afterward, starting again from that point where the third cord intersects the
second cord, he measures the straight space which lies between that point
and the opposite point on the first cord, and in that way forms the minor
- triangle, and he notes this second side of the minor triangle in the same way as
before. Then, if it is necessary, from the angle formed by the first cord and
the second side of the minor triangle, he measures upward to the end of the
first cord and also makes a note of this third side of the minor triangle. The
third side of the minor triangle, if the shaft is vertical or inclined and is sunk
on the same vein in which the tunnel is driven, will necessarily be the same
length as the third cord above the point where it intersects the second cord ;
and so, as often as the first side of the minor triangle is contained in the
length of the whole cord which descends obliquely, so many times the length
of the second side of the minor triangle indicates the distance between the.
mouth of the tunnel and the point to which the shaft must be sunk; and
similarly, so many times the length of the third side of the minor triangle
gives the distance between the mouth of the shaft and the bottom of the
tunnel.

When there is a level bench on the mountain slope, the surveyor first
measures across this with a measuring-rod ; then at the edges of this bench
he sets up forked posts, and applies the principle of the triangle to the two
sloping parts of the mountain ; and to the fathoms which are the length of
that part of the tunnel determined by the triangles, he adds the number
of fathoms which are the width of the bench. But if sometimes the
mountain side stands up, so that a cord cannot run down from the shaft to
the mouth of the tunnel, or, on the other hand, cannot run up from the
mouth of the tunnel to the shaft, and, therefore, one cannot connect them in
a straight line, the surveyor, in order to fix an accurate triangle, measures the
mountain ; and going downward he substitutes for the first part of the cord
a pole one fathom long, and for the second part a pole half a fathom
long. Going upward, on the contrary, for the first part of the cord he sub-
stitutes a pole half a fathom long, and for the next part, one a whole fathom
long; then where he requires to fix his triangle he adds a straight line to
these angles.

To make this system of measuring clear and more explicit, I will proceed
by describing each separate kind of triangle. When a shaft is vertical or
inclined, and is sunk in the same vein on which the tunnel is driven, there
is created, as I said, a triangle containing a right angle. Now if the minor
triangle has the two sides equal, which, in accordance with the numbering
used by surveyors, are the second and third sides, then the second and third
sides of the major triangle will be equal; and so also the intervening
distances will be equal which lie between the mouth of the tunnel and the
bottom of the shaft, and which lie between the mouth of the shaft and the
bottom of the tunnel. For example, if the first side of the minor triangle is
seven feet long and the second and likewise the third sides are five feet, and

17For greater clarity we have in a few places interpolated the terms “ major’ and
“minor ’’ triangles.

BOOK V. 133

the length shown by the cord for the side of the major triangle is ror times
seven feet, that is 117 fathoms and five feet, then the intervening space, of
course, whether the whole of it has been already driven through or has yet
to be driven, will be one hundred times five feet, which makes eighty-three
fathoms and two feet. Anyone with this example of proportions will be
able to construct the major and minor triangles in the same way as I have
done, if there be the necessary upright posts and cross-beams. When a shaft is
vertical the triangle is absolutely upright ; when it is inclined and is sunk on
the same vein in which the tunnel is driven, it is inclined toward one side.

A
A TRIANGLE HAVING A RIGHT ANGLE AND TWO EQUAL SIDES.

Therefore, if a tunnel has been driven into the mountain for sixty fathoms,
there remains a space of ground to be penetrated twenty-three fathoms and
two feet long ; for five feet of the second side of the major triangle, which
lies above the mouth of the shaft and corresponds with the first side of the
minor triangle, must not be added. Therefore, if the shaft has been sunk
in the middle of the head meer, a tunnel sixty fathoms long will reach
to the boundary of the meer only when the tunnel has been extended a
further two fathoms and two feet ; but if the shaft is located in the middle of
an ordinary meer, then the boundary will be reached when the tunnel has been
driven a further length of nine fathoms and two feet. Since a tunnel, for
every one hundred fathoms of length, rises in grade one fathom, or at all
events, ought to rise as it proceeds toward the shaft, one more fathom must
always be taken from the depth allowed to the shaft, and one added to the
length allowed to the tunnel. Proportionately, because a tunnel fifty
fathoms long is raised half a fathom, this amount must be taken from the
depth of the shaft and added to the length of the tunnel. In the same way
if a tunnel is one hundred or fifty fathoms shorter or longer, the same propor-
tion also must be taken from the depth of the one and added to the length
of the other. For this reason, in the case mentioned above, half a fathom
and a little more must be added to the distance to be driven through, so
that there remain twenty-three fathoms, five feet, two palms, one and a‘half
digits and a fifth of a digit ; that is, if even the minutest proportions are
carried out; and surveyors do not neglect these without good cause.
Similarly, if the shaft is seventy fathoms deep, in order that it may reach to
the bottom of the tunnel, it still must be sunk a further depth of thirteen
fathoms and two feet, or rather twelve fathoms and a half, one foot, two
digits, and four-fifths of half a digit. And in this instance five feet must be
deducted from the reckoning, because these five feet complete the third side
of the minor triangle, which is above the mouth of the shaft, and from its

134 BOOK V.

depth there must be deducted half a fathom, two palms, one and a half digits
and the fifth part of half a digit. But if the tunnel has been driven to a
point where it is under the shaft, then to reach the roof of the tunnel the
shaft must still be sunk a depth of eleven fathoms, two and a half feet, one
palm, two digits, and four-fifths of half a digit.

If a minor triangle is produced of the kind having three unequal sides,
then the sides of the greater triangle cannot be equal; that is, if the first
side of the minor triangle is eight feet long, the second six feet long, and the
third five feet long, and the cord along the side of the greater triangle, not
to go too far from the example just given, is one hundred and one times
eight feet, that is, one hundred and thirty-four fathoms and four feet, the
distance which lies between the mouth of the tunnel and the bottom of the
shaft will occupy one hundred times six feet in length, that is, one hundred
fathoms. The distance between the mouth of the shaft and the bottom of the
tunnel is one hundred times five feet, that is, eighty-three fathoms and two feet.
And so, if the tunnel is eighty-five fathoms long, the remainder to be driven
into the mountain is fifteen fathoms long, and here, too, a correction in
measurement must be taken from the depth of the shaft and added to the
length of the tunnel; what this is precisely, I will pursue no further, since
everyone having a small knowledge of arithmetic can work it out. If the
shaft is sixty-seven fathoms deep, in order that it may reach the bottom of
the tunnel, the further distance required to be sunk amounts to sixteen
fathoms and two feet.

A TRIANGLE HAVING A RIGHT ANGLE AND THREE UNEQUAL SIDES.

The surveyor employs this same method in measuring the mountain,
whether the shaft and tunnel are on one and the same vein, whether the vein
is vertical or inclined, or whether the shaft is on the principal vein and the tunnel
on a transverse vein descending vertically to the depths of the earth; in the
latter case the excavation is to be made where the transverse vein cuts the
vertical vein. If the principal vein descends on an incline and the cross-vein
descends vertically, then a minor triangle is created having one obtuse angle or
all three angles acute. If the minor triangle has one angle obtuse and the two
sides which are the second and third are equal, then the second and third
sides of the major triangle will be equal, so that if the first side of the minor
triangle is nine feet, the second, and likewise the third, will be five feet. Then
the first side of the major triangle will be one hundred and one times nine
feet, or one hundred and fifty-one and one-half fathoms, and each of the
other sides of the major triangle will be one hundred times five feet, that is,
eighty-three fathoms and two feet. But when the first shaft is inclined,

BOOK V. 135

generally speaking, it is not deep; but there are usually several, all
inclined, and one always following the other. Therefore, if a tunnel is seventy-
seven fathoms long, it will reach to the middle of the bottom of a shaft when
six fathoms and two feet further have been sunk. But if all such inclined
shafts are seventy-six fathoms deep, in order that the last one may reach
the bottom of the tunnel, a depth of seven fathoms and two feet remains to
be sunk.

A
TRIANGLE HAVING AN OBTUSE ANGLE AND TWO EQUAL SIDES.

If a minor triangle is made which has an obtuse angle and three unequal
sides, then again the sides of the large triangle cannot be equal. For
example, if the first side of the minor triangle is six feet long, the second
three feet, and the third four feet, and the cord along the side of the greater
triangle one hundred and one times six feet, that is, one hundred and one
fathoms, the distance between the mouth of the tunnel and the bottom of
the last shaft will be a length one hundred times three feet, or fifty fathoms ;
but the depth that lies between the mouth of the first shaft and the bottom of
the tunnel is one hundred times four feet, or sixty-six fathoms and four feet.
Therefore, if a tunnel is forty-four fathoms long, the remaining distance to
be driven is six fathoms. If the shafts are fifty-eight fathoms deep, the
newest will touch the bottom of the tunnel when eight fathoms and four
feet have been sunk.

os

TRIANGLE HAVING AN OBTUSE ANGLE AND THREE UNEQUAL SIDES.

If a minor triangle is produced which has all its angles acute and its
three sides equal, then necessarily the second and third sides of the minor
triangle will be equal, and likewise the sides of the major triangle frequently
referred to will be equal. Thus if each side of the minor triangle is six feet
long, and the cord measurement for the side of the major triangle is one
hundred and one times six feet, that is, one hundred and one fathoms, then
both the distances to be dug will be one hundred fathoms. And thus if the
tunnel is ninety fathoms long, it will reach the middle of the bottom of the
last shaft when ten fathoms further have been driven. If the shafts are

136 BOOK V.

ninety-five fathoms deep, the last will reach the bottom of the tunnel when
it is sunk a further depth of five fathoms.

l

A TRIANGLE HAVING ALL ITS ANGLES ACUTE AND ITS THREE SIDES EQUAL.

If a triangle is made which has all its angles acute, but only two sides
equal, namely, the first and third, then the second and third sides are not
equal ; therefore the distances to be dug cannot be equal. For example, if
the first side of the minor triangle is six feet long, and the second is four feet,
and the third is six feet, and the cord measurement for the side of the major _
triangle is one hundred and one times six feet, that is, one hundred and one
fathoms, then the distance between the mouth of the tunnel and the bottom of ©
the last shaft will be sixty-six fathoms and four feet. But the distance from the
mouth of the first shaft to the bottom of the tunnel is one hundred fathoms.
So if the tunnel is sixty fathoms long, the remaining distance to be driven
into the mountain is six fathoms and four feet. If the shaft is ninety-seven
fathoms deep, the last one will reach the bottom of the tunnel when a further —
depth of three fathoms has been sunk.

Cc

TRIANGLE HAVING ALL ITS ANGLES ACUTE AND TWO SIDES EQUAL, A, B, UNEQUAL SIDE C. ©

If a minor triangle is produced which has all its angles acute, but its
three sides unequal, then again the distances to be dug cannot be equal.
For example, if the first side of the minor triangle is seven feet long, the
second side is four feet, and the third side is six feet, and the cord measure-
ment for the side of the major triangle is one hundred and one times seven

feet or one hundred and seventeen fathoms and four feet, the distance a

between the mouth of the tunnel and the bottom of the last shaft will be
four hundred feet or sixty-six fathoms, and the depth between the mouth of
the first shaft and the bottom of the tunnel will be one hundred fathoms.
Therefore, if a tunnel is fifty fathoms long, it will reach the middle of the
bottom of the newest shaft when it has been driven sixteen fathoms and four
feet further. But if the shafts are then ninety-two fathoms deep, the last

BOOK V. 137

shaft will reach the bottom of the tunnel when it has been sunk a further
eight fathoms.

A TRIANGLE HAVING ALL ITS ANGLES ACUTE AND ITS THREE SIDES UNEQUAL.

This is the method of the surveyor in measuring the mountain, if the
principal vein descends inclined into the depths of the earth or the transverse
vein is vertical. But if they are both inclined, the surveyor uses the same
method, or he measures the slope of the mountain separately from the slope
of the shaft. Next, if a transverse vein in which a tunnel is driven does not
cut the principal vein in that spot where the shaft is sunk, then it is necessary
for the starting point of the survey to be in the other shaft in which the
transverse vein cuts the principal vein. But if there be no shaft on that spot
where the outcrop of the transverse vein cuts the outcrop of the principal
vein, then the surface of the ground which lies between the shafts must
be measured, or that between the shaft and the place where the outcrop of
the one vein intersects the outcrop of the other.

Some surveyors, although they use three cords, nevertheless ascertain
only the length of a tunnel by that method of measuring, and determine
the depth of a shaft by another method ; that is, by the method by
which cords are re-stretched on a level part of the mountain or in
a valley, or in flat fields, and are measured again. Some, however, do
not employ this method in surveying the depth of a shaft and the
length of a tunnel, but use only two cords, a graduated hemicycle® and a
rod half a fathom long. They suspend in the shaft one cord, fastened
from the upper pole and weighted, just as the others do. Fastened to the
upper end of this cord, they stretch another right down the slope of the mountain
to the bottom of the mouth of the tunnel and fix it to the ground. Then to
the upper part of this second cord they apply on its lower side the broad part
of a hemicycle. This consists of half a circle, the outer margin of which is
covered with wax, and within this are six semi-circular lines. From the

18The names of the instruments here described in the original text, their German
equivalents in the Glossary, and the terms adopted in translation are given below :—

Latin Text. GLOSSARY. TERMS ADOPTED.
Funiculus ee oa 25 alle ~s .. Cord
Pertica eh ap nk UO ine .. Rod
Hemicyclium .. fone .. Donlege bretlein .. Hemicycle
Tri 44 i acca te .. Tripod
Instrumentum cui index .. -. Compass... .. Compass
Orbis ~ ie .- Scheube bs .. Orbis
Libra stativa ve .. Auuffsatz % .. Standing plummet level
Libra pensilis .. .. Wage Z Suspended plummet level

Instrumentum cut index Alpinum .. Der schiner compass _. Swiss compass

138 BOOK V.

~ waxed margin through the first semi-circular line, and reaching to the second,
there proceed straight lines converging toward the centre of the hemicycle ;
these mark the middles of intervening spaces lying between other straight lines
which extend to the fourth semi-circular line. But all lines whatsoever, from
the waxed margin up to the fourth line, whether they go beyond it or not,
correspond with the graduated lines which mark the minor spaces of a rod.
Those which go beyond the fourth line correspond with the lines marking

A—WAXED SEMICIRCLE OF THE HEMICYCLE. B—SEMICIRCULAR LINES. C—STRAIGHT
LINES. D—LINE MEASURING THE HALF. E-—LINE MEASURING THE WHOLE. F—TOoONGUE.

BOOK V. | 139

the major spaces on the rod, and those which proceed further, mark the
middle of the intervening space which lies between the others. The
straight lines, which run from the fifth to the sixth semi-circular line, show
nothing further. Nor does the line which measures the half, show anything
when it has already passed from the sixth straight line to the base of the
hemicycle. When the hemicycle is applied to the cord, if its tongue indicates
the sixth straight line which lies between the second and third semi-circular
lines, the surveyor counts on the rod six lines which separate the minor
spaces, and if the length of this portion of the rod be taken from the second
cord, as many times as the cord itself is half-fathoms long, the remaining
length of cord shows the distance the tunnel must be driven to reach under
the shaft. But if he sees that the tongue has gone so far that it marks the
sixth line between the fourth and fifth semi-circular lines, he counts six lines
which separate the major spaces on the rod ; and this entire space is deducted
from the length of the second cord, as many times as the number of whole
fathoms which the cord contains ; and then, in like manner, the remaining
length of cord shows us the distance the tunnel must be driven to reach
under the shaft.!®

STRETCHED CorDs: A—FirsT corD. B—SECOND coRD. C—THIRD CORD.
D—TRIANGLE.

It is interesting to note that the ratio of any length so obtained, to the whole length
of the staff, is practically equal to the cosine of the angle represented by the corresponding
gradation on the hemicycle; the gradations on the rod forming a fairly accurate table of
cosines.

140 BOOK V.

Both these surveyors, as well as the others, in the first place make use
of the haulage rope. These they measure by means of others made of linden
bark, because the latter do not stretch at all, while the former become very
slack. These cords they stretch on the surveyor’s field, the first one to
represent the parts of mountain slopes which descend obliquely. Then the
second cord, which represents the length of the tunnel to be driven to reach
the shaft, they place straight, in such a direction that one end of it can touch
the lower end of the first cord ; then they similarly lay the third cord straight,
and in such a direction that its upper end may touch the upper end of
the first cord, and its lower end the other extremity of the second cord, and
thus a triangle is formed. This third cord is measured by the instrument
with the index, to determine its relation to the perpendicular ; and the length
of this cord shows the depth of the shaft. *

Some surveyors, to make their system of measuring the depth of a shaft —
more certain, use five stretched cords: the first one descending obliquely ;
two, that is to say the second and third, for ascertaining the length of the
tunnel ; two for the depth of the shaft ; in which way they form a quadrangle
divided into two equal triangles, and this tends to greater accuracy. :

Cc

Cc

STRETCHED corps: A—First. B—Srconp. B—Tuirp. C—Fourtu. C—FIFTa.
D—QUADRANGLE.

These systems of measuring the depth of a shaft and the length of a
tunnel, are accurate when the vein and also the shaft or shafts go down to the

BOOK V. 141

tunnel vertically or inclined, in an uninterrupted course. The same is true
when a tunnel runs straight on to a shaft. But when each of them bends
now in this, now in that direction, if they have not been completely driven
and sunk, no living man is clever enough to judge how far they are deflected
from a straight course. But if the whole of either one of the two has been ex-
cavated its full distance, then we can estimate more easily the length of one,
or the depth of the other ; and so the location of the tunnel, which is below
a newly-started shaft, is determined by a method of surveying which I will
describe. First of all a tripod is fixed at the mouth of the tunnel, and likewise at
the mouth of the shaft which has been started, or at the place where the shaft will
be started. The tripod is made of three stakes fixed to the ground, a small
rectangular board being placed upon the stakes and fixed to them, and on
this is set a compass. Then from the lower tripod a weighted cord is let
down perpendicularly to the earth, close to which cord a stake is fixed in the
ground. To this stake another cord is tied and drawn straight into the tunnel
to a point as far as it can go without being bent by the hangingwall or the
footwall of the vein. Next, from the cord which hangs from the lower tripod,
a third cord likewise fixed is brought straight up the sloping side of the
mountain to the stake of the upper tripod, and fastened to it. In order that
the measuring of the depth of the shaft may be more certain, the third cord
should touch one and the same side of the cord hanging from the lower tripod
which is touched by the second cord—the one which is drawn into the tunnel.
All this having been correctly carried out, the surveyor, when at length
the cord which has been drawn straight into the tunnel is about to be bent
by the hangingwall or footwall, places a plank in the bottom of the tunnel
and on it sets the orbis, an instrument which has an indicator peculiar
’ to itself. This instrument, although it also has waxed circles, differs from the
other, which I have described in the third book. But by both these
instruments, as well as by a rule and a square, he determines whether the
stretched cords reach straight to the extreme end of the tunnel, or whether
they sometimes reach straight, and are sometimes bent by the footwall or
hangingwall. Each instrument is divided into parts, but the compass into
twenty-four parts, the orbis into sixteen parts ; for first of all it is divided
into four principal parts, and then each of these is again divided into four.
Both have waxed circles, but the compass has seven circles, and the orbis
only five circles. These waxed circles the surveyor marks, whichever instru-
ment he uses, and by the succession of these same marks he notes any
change in the direction in which the cord extends. The orbis has an open-
ing running from its outer edge as far as the centre, into which opening he
puts an iron screw, to which he binds the second cord, and by screwing it into
the plank, fixes it so that the orbis may be immovable. He takes care
to prevent the second cord, and afterward the others which are put up,
from being pulled off the screw, by employing a heavy iron, into an opening
of which he fixes the head of the screw. In the case of the compass, since
it has no opening, he merely places it by the side of the screw. That the
instrument does not incline forward or backward, and in that way the
12

142 BOOK V.

measurement become a greater length than it should be, he sets upon the
instrument a standing plummet level, the tongue of which, if the instrument
is level, indicates no numbers, but the point from which the numbers start.

Compass. A, B, C, D, E, F, G ARE THE SEVEN WAXED CIRCLES.

When the surveyor has carefully observed each separate angle of the
tunnel and has measured such parts as he ought to measure, then he lays
them out in the same way on the surveyor’s field? in the open air, and again
no less carefully observes each separate angle and measures them. First of
all, to each angle, according as the calculation of his triangle and his art

require it, he lays out a straight cord as a line. Then he stretches a cord at

2°lt must be understood that instead of “ plotting ’’ a survey on a reduced scale on
paper, as modern surveyors do, the whole survey was reproduced in full scale on the
“ surveyor’s field.’’

i

}
|

it

A, B, C, D, E—FIve WAXED CIRCLES OF THE orbis. F—OPENING OF SAME. G—ScREW. H-—PERFORATED IRON.

*saoVdS UOlVW ALVUVdaS HOIHM GOU AHL JO SANI'J—qQ ‘SdOVdS YONIN ALVAVdaS HOIHM COU AHI AO SANI[—VY

Vv
SS

2 IS >>> \ ~ ‘ . *

SSS SSS SSSA SSS SSS SS >>> .

MOQAAMM TM ii Ody 'w MD Ih Wa NB wsF.sFB[JndddCd inde id AWD ADI WW0wwwwF6t Td Aaa’ UN FT itll"

\

UA MMs ha ‘ x NANNASANAAS: N we sAAAKt Ww : . SSS SSE

SSAA IIE nnn: hn hn nnn MM IMAM MA ASSAM AAAS SS “SAA XS

BOOK V. 143

such an angle as represents the slope of the mountain, so that its lower end
may reach the end of the straight cord; then he stretches a third cord

Ss So : N

\e ) rar ws

we
= \
'
- 3: ———
os ) : 2 7
; A | it

A—STANDING PLUMMET LEVEL. B—Toncur. C—LEVEL AND TONGUE.

144 BOOK V.

similarly straight and at such an angle, that with its upper end it may reach
the upper end of the second cord, and with its lower end the last end of the
first cord. The length of the third cord shows the depth of the shaft, as I
said before, and at the same time that point on the tunnel to which the shaft
will reach when it has been sunk.

If one or more shafts reach the tunnel through intermediate drifts and
shafts, the surveyor, starting from the nearest which is open to the air,
measures in a shorter time the depth of the shaft which requires to be sunk,
than if he starts from the mouth of the tunnel. First of all he measures
that space on the surface which lies between the shaft which has been sunk
and the one which requires to be sunk. Then he measures the incline of all
the shafts which it is necessary to measure, and the length of all the drifts
with which they are in any way connected to the tunnel. Lastly, he
measures part of the tunnel; and when all this is properly done, he demon-
strates the depth of the shaft and the point in the tunnel to which the shaft
will reach. But sometimes a very deep straight shaft requires to be sunk
at the same place where there is a previous inclined shaft, and to the same
depth, in order that loads may be raised and drawn straight up by machines.
Those machines on the surface are turned by horses ; those inside the earth,
by the same means, and also by water-power. And so, if it becomes
necessary to sink such a shaft, the surveyor first of all fixes an iron screw
in the upper part of the old shaft, and from the screw he lets down a cord
as far as the first angle, where again he fixes a screw, and again lets down the
cord as far as the second angle; this he repeats again and again until the
cord reaches to the bottom of the shaft. Then to each angle of the cord he
applies a hemicycle, and marks the waxed semi-circle according to the lines
which the tongue indicates, and designates it by a number, in case it should be
moved ; then he measures the separate parts of the cord with another cord
made of linden bark. Afterward, when he has come back out of the shaft,
he goes away and transfers the markings from the waxed semi-circle of the
hemicycle to an orbis similarly waxed. Lastly, the cords are stretched on the
surveyor’s field, and he measures the angles, as the system of measuring by
triangles requires, and ascertains which part of the footwall and which
part of the hangingwall rock must be cut away in order that the shaft may
descend straight. But if the surveyor is required to show the owners of the
mine, the spot in a drift or a tunnel in which a shaft needs to be raised
from the bottom upward, that it should cut through more quickly, he
begins measuring from the bottom of the drift or tunnel, at a point
beyond the spot at which the bottom of the shaft will arrive, when it has been
sunk. When he has measured the part of the drift or tunnel up to the first
shaft which connects with an upper drift, he measures the incline of this
shaft by applying a hemicycle or orbis to the cord. Then in a like manner
he measures the upper drift and the incline shaft which is sunk therein
toward which a raise is being dug, then again all the cords are stretched in
the surveyor’s field, the last cord in such a way that it reaches the first, and
then he measures them. From this measurement is known in what part

BOOK V. 145

of the drift or tunnel the raise should be made, and how many fathoms of
vein remain to be broken through in order that the shaft may be connected.

I have described the first reason for surveying; I will now describe
another. When one vein comes near another, and their owners are different
persons who have late come into possession, whether they drive a tunnel
or a drift, or sink a shaft, they may encroach, or seem to encroach, without
any lawful right, upon the boundaries of the older owners, for which reason
the latter very often seek redress, or take legal proceedings. The surveyor
either himself settles the dispute between the owners, or by his art gives
evidence to the judges for making their decision, that one shall not encroach
on the mine of the other. Thus, first of all he measures the mines of each
party with a basket rope and cords of linden bark ; and having applied to the
cords an orbis or a compass, he notes the directions in which they extend.
Then he stretches the cords on the surveyor’s field; and starting from that
point whose owners are in possession of the old meer toward the other,
whether it is in the hanging or footwall of the vein, he stretches a cross-
cord in a straight line, according to the sixth division of the compass,
that is, at a right angle to the vein, for a distance of three and a
half fathoms, and assigns to the older owners that which belongs to
them. But if both ends of one vein are being dug out in two tunnels, or
drifts from opposite directions, the surveyor first of all considers the lower
tunnel or drift and afterward the upper one, and judges how much each of
them has risen little by little. On each side strong men take in their hands
a stretched cord and hold it so that there is no point where it is not strained
tight ; on each side the surveyor supports the cord with a rod half a fathom
long, and stays the rod at the end with a short stick as often as he thinks
it necessary. But some fasten cords to the rods to make them steadier.
The surveyor attaches a suspended plummet level to the middle of the cord to
enable him to calculate more accurately on both sides, and from this he ascer-
tains whether one tunnel has risen more than another, or in like manner one
drift more than another. Afterward he measures the incline of the shafts
on both sides, so that he can estimate their position on each side. Then he
easily sees how many fathoms remain in the space which must be broken
through. But the grade of each tunnel, as I said, should rise one fathom in
the distance of one hundred fathoms.

The Swiss surveyors, when they wish to measure tunnels driven into
the highest mountains, also use a rod half a fathom long, but composed of
three parts, which screw together, so that they may be shortened. They
use a cord made of linden bark to which are fastened slips of paper showing
the number of fathoms. They also employ an instrument peculiar to them,
which has a needle; but in place of the waxed circles they carry in their
hands a chart on which they inscribe the readings of the instrument. The
instrument is placed on the back part of the rod so that the tongue, and the
extended cord which runs through the three holes in the tongue, demonstrates
the direction, and they note the number of fathoms. The tongue shows
whether the cord inclines forward or backward. The tongue does not hang,

146 BOOK V.

as in the case of the suspended plummet level, but is fixed to the instrument in
a half-lying position. They measure the tunnels for the purpose of knowing
how many fathoms they have been increased in elevation ; how many fathoms
the lower is distant from the upper one; how many fathoms of interval is

INDICATOR OF A SUSPENDED PLUMMET LEVEL

i?
:
:
:

a ae

:
€
7M
0
=.
¥
ie

BOOK V. 147

not yet pierced between the miners who on opposite sides are digging on
the same vein, or cross-stringers, or two veins which are approaching one
another.

But I return to our mines. If the surveyor desires to fix the boundaries
of the meer within the tunnels or drifts, and mark to them with a sign cut in the
rock, in the same way that the Bergmeister has marked these boundaries
above ground, he first of all ascertains, by measuring in the manner
which I have explained above, which part of the tunnel or drift lies
beneath the surface boundary mark, stretching the cords along the drifts to
a point beyond that spot in the rock where he judges the mark should be
cut. Then, after the same cords have been laid out on the surveyor’s field,
he starts from that upper cord at a point which shows the boundary mark,
and stretches another cross-cord straight downward according to the sixth

A—NEEDLE OF THE INSTRUMENT. B—ItTs TONGUE. C, D, E—HOLEs IN THE TONGUE.

148 BOOK V.

division of the compass—that is at a right angle. Then that part
of the lowest cord which lies beyond the part to which the cross-cord
runs being removed, it shows at what point the boundary mark should
be cut into the rock of the tunnel or drift. The cutting is made in the
presence of the two Jurors and the manager and the foreman of each
mine. For as the Bergmeister in the presence of these same persons sets
the boundary stones on the surface, so the surveyor cuts in the rock a sign
which for this reason is called the boundary rock. If he fixes the boundary
mark of a meer in which a shaft has recently begun to be sunk on a vein,
first of all he measures and notes the incline of that shaft by the com-
pass or by another way with the applied cords; then he measures all
the drifts up to that one in whose rock the boundary mark has to
be cut. Of these drifts he measures each angle; then the cords, being
laid out on the surveyor’s field, in a similar way he stretches a cross-
cord, as I said, and cuts the sign on the rock. But if the underground
boundary rock has to be cut in a drift which lies beneath the first drift, the
surveyor starts from the mark in the first drift, notes the different angles,
one by one, takes his measurements, and in the lower drift stretches a cord
beyond that place where he judges the mark ought to be cut; and then,
as I said before, lays out the cords on the surveyor’s field. Even if a vein
runs differently in the lower drift from the upper one, in which the first
boundary mark has been cut in the rock, still, in the lower drift the mark
must be cut in the rock vertically beneath. For if he cuts the lower mark
obliquely from the upper one some part of the possession of one mine is
taken away to its detriment, and given to the other. Moreover, if it
happens that the underground boundary mark requires to be cut in an
angle, the surveyor, starting from that angle, measures one fathom toward
the front of the mine and another fathom toward the back, and from these
measurements forms a triangle, and dividing its middle by a re
makes his cutting for the boundary mark.

Lastly, the surveyor sometimes, in order to make more certain, finds the
boundary of the meers in those places where many old boundary marks
are cut in the rock. Then, starting from a stake fixed on the surface,
he first of all measures to the nearest mine; then he measures one shaft
after another; then he fixes a stake on the surveyors’ field, and making
a beginning from it stretches the same cords in the same way and measures
them, and again fixes in the ground a stake which for him will signify the end
of his measuring. Afterward he again measures underground from that
spot at which he left off, as many shafts and drifts as he can remember. Then
he returns to the surveyor’s field, and starting again from the second stake,
makes his measurements; and he does this as far as the drift in which the
boundary mark must be cut in the rock. Finally, commencing from the
stake first fixed in the ground, he stretches a cross-cord in a straight line to
the last stake, and this shows the length of the lowest drift. The point
where they touch, he judges to be the place where the underground boundary

mark should be cut.
END OF BOOK V.

;

i
Ps
G

?

4
;
i
"
4
5
|

io

a eS

BOOK VI.

} IGGING of veins I have written of, and the timbering
/ of shafts, tunnels, drifts, and other excavations,
m and the art of surveying. I will now speak first of
| all, of the iron tools with which veins and rocks are
fi broken, then of the buckets into which the lumps
fae of earth, rock, metal, and other excavated materials
i) are thrown, in order that they may be drawn, con-
wi veyed, or carried out. Also, I will speak of the
pt Ga AP } water vessels and drains, then of the machines of
different kinds,! and lastly of the maladies of miners. And while all these
matters are being described accurately, many methods of work will be
explained.

There are certain iron tools which the miners designate by names of their
own, and besides these, there are wedges, iron blocks, iron plates, hammers,
crowbars, pikes, picks, hoes, and shovels. Of those which are especially
referred to as “iron tools” there are four varieties, which are different
from one another in length or thickness, but not in shape, for the
upper end of all of them is broad and square, so that it can be struck by the

1This Book is devoted in the main to winding, ventilating, and pumping machinery.
Their mechanical principles are very old. The block and pulley, the windlass, the use of
water-wheels, the transmission of power through shafts and gear-wheels, chain-pumps,

iston-pumps with valves, were all known to the Greeks and Romans, and possibly earlier. °

achines involving these principles were described by Ctesibius, an Alexandrian of 250 B.c.,
by Archimedes (287-212 B.c.), and by Vitruvius (1st Century B.c.) As to how far these machines
were applied to mining by the Ancients we have but little evidence, and this largely in con-
nection with handling water. Diodorus Siculus (1st Century B.c.) referring to the Spanish
mines, says (Book V.): “Sometimes at great depths they meet great rivers underground,
“but by art give check to the violence of the streams, for by cutting trenches they divert the
“current, and being sure to gain what they aim at when they have begun, they never leave
“ off till they have finished it. And they admirably pump out the water with those instru-
“ments called Egyptian pumps, invented by Archimedes, the Syracusan, when he was in
“Egypt. By these, with constant pumping by turns they throw up the water to the mouth of
“the pit and thus drain the mine; for this engine is so ingeniously contrived that a vast
“ quantity of water is strangely and with little labour cast out.”

Strabo (63 B.C.—24 A.D., III., 2, 9), also referring to Spanish mines, quoting from
Posidonius (about roo B.c.), says: “He compares with these (the Athenians) the activity
“and diligence of the Turdetani, who are in the habit of cutting tortuous and deep tunnels,
“and draining the streams which they frequently encounter by means of Egyptian screws.”
(Hamilton’s Tran., Vol. I., p. 221). The “‘ Egyptian screw” was Archimedes’ screw, and
was thus called because much used by the Egyptians for irrigation. Pliny (xxx, 31) also
says, in speaking of the Spanish silver-lead mines: ‘‘ The mountain has been excavated for a
distance of 1,500 paces, and along this distance there are water-carriers standing by torch-
light night and day steadily baling the water (thus) making quite a river.” The re-opening
of the mines at Rio Tinto in the middle of the 18th Century disclosed old Roman stopes, in
which were found several water-wheels. These were about 15 feet in diameter, lifting the
water by the reverse arrangement to an overshot water-wheel. A wooden Archimedian
screw was also found in the neighbourhood. (Nash, The Rio Tinto Mine, its History and
Romance, London, 1904).

Until early in the 18th Century, water formed the limiting factor in the depth of mines.
To the great devotion to this water problem we owe the invention of the steam engine.
In 1705 Newcomen—no doubt inspired by Savery’s unsuccessful attempt—invented his
engine, and installed the first one on a colliery at Wolverhampton, in Staffordshire. With its
success, a new era was opened to the miner, to be yet further extended by Watts’s improve-
ments sixty years later. It should be a matter of satisfaction to mining engineers that
not only was the steam engine the handiwork of their profession, but that another mining
Spe Stephenson, in his effort to further the advance of his calling, invented the
ocomotive.

150 BOOK VI.

hammer. The lower end is pointed so as to split the hard rocks and veins
with its point. All of these have eyes except the fourth. The first,
which is in daily use among miners, is three-quarters of a foot long, a digit
and a half wide, and a digit thick. The second is of the same width as the
first, and the same thickness, but one and one half feet long, and is used to
shatter the hardest veins in such a way that they crack open. The third
is the same length as the second, but is a little wider and thicker; with
this one they dig the bottoms of those shafts which slowly accumulate water.
The fourth is nearly three palms and one digit long, two digits thick, and in
the upper end it is three digits wide, in the middle it is one palm wide, and
at the lower end it is pointed like the others; with this they cut out the
harder veins. The eye in the first tool is one palm distant from the upper
end, in the second and third it is seven digits distant ; each swells out
around the eye on both sides, and into it they fit a wooden handle, which
they hold with one hand, while they strike the iron tool with a hammer, after
placing it against the rock. These tools are made larger or smaller as
necessary. The smiths, as far as possible, sharpen again all that become dull.

A—First “ 1RoNn TOOL.”” B—SgEconp. C—Tuirp. D—Fourtu.2 E—Wepcre. F—IRron
BLOCK. G—IRON PLATE. H-—-WooDEN HANDLE. I—HANDLE INSERTED IN FIRST TOOL,

A wedge is usually three palms and two digits long and six digits wide ;
at the upper end, for a distance of a palm, it is three digits thick, and
beyond that point it becomes thinner by degrees, until finally it is quite
sharp.

*While these particular tools serve the same pur as the ‘“gad”’ and the ‘moil,”
the latter are not fitted with handles, and we have, therefore, not felt justified in adopting
these terms, but have given a literal rendering of the Latin.

Rn

a

BOOK VI. 151

The iron block is six digits in length and width; at the upper end it is
two digits thick, and at the bottom a digit and a half. The iron plate is
the same length and width as the iron block, but it is very thin. All of these,
as I explained in the last book, are used when the hardest kind of veins are
hewn out. Wedges, locks, and plates, are likewise made larger or smaller.

Os ==

A—SMALLEST OF THE SMALLER HAMMERS. B—INTERMEDIATE. C—Larcest. D—SMALL
KIND OF THE LARGER HAMMER. E—LARGE KIND. F—WooDEN HANDLE. G—HANDLE
FIXED IN THE SMALLEST HAMMER.

Hammers are of two kinds, the smaller ones the miners hold in
one hand, and the larger ones they hold with both hands. The former,
because of their size and use, are of three sorts. With the smallest,
that is to say, the lightest, they strike the second “iron tool;’’ with the
intermediate one the first “ iron tool ;’’ and with the largest the third “ iron
tool”; this one is two digits wide and thick. Of the larger sort of hammers
there are two kinds ; with the smaller they strike the fourth “ iron tool ;”
with the larger they drive the wedges into the cracks ; the former are three,
and the latter five digits wide and thick, and a foot long. All swell out in
their middle, in which there is an eye for a handle, but in most cases the
handles are somewhat light, in order that the workmen may be able to strike

more powerful blows by the hammer’s full weight being thus concentrated.
*(Continued)—The Latin and old German terms for these tools were :—

First Iron tool = Ferramentum primum = Bergeisen.
Second ,, = “3 secundum = Rutzeisen.
Third sf zs iy tertium = Sumpffeisen.
Fourth _,, = m quartum = Fimmel.
Wedge = Cuneus = Keil.

Iron block = Lamina = Plétz.

Iron plate = Bractea = Feder.
The German words obviously had local value and do not bear translation literally.

152 BOOK VI.

The iron crowbars are likewise of two kinds, and each kind is pointed at
one end. One is rounded, and with this they pierce to a shaft full of water
when a tunnel reaches to it; the other is flat, and with this they knock out
of the stopes on to the floor, the rocks which have been softened by the fire,
and which cannot be dislodged by the pike. A miner’s pike, like a sailor’s,
is a long rod having an iron head.

BESSK SSS SSS

CBA LES”

ej

— SSG Q AAU SS

A—RouUND CROWBAR. B—FLAT CROWBAR. C-—PIKE.

)
(unin ve |
Dyers a

A—Picx. B—Hor. C—SuHovet.

BOOK VI. 153

The miner’s pick differs from a peasant’s pick in that the latter is wide
at the bottom and sharp, but the former is pointed. _It is used to dig out
ore which is not hard, such as earth. Likewise a hoe and shovel are in no
way different from the common articles, with the one they scrape up earth
and sand, with the other they throw it into vessels.
Now earth, rock, mineral substances and other things dug out with
the pick or hewn out with the “iron tools” are hauled out of the shaft
in buckets, or baskets, or hide buckets ; they are drawn out of tunnels in
wheelbarrows or open trucks, and from both they are sometimes carried in
E trays.
Buckets are of two kinds, which differ in size, but not in material or
shape. The smaller for the most part hold only about one metreta ; the
larger are generally capable of carrying one-sixth of a congius; neither is
of unchangeable capacity, but they often vary. Each is made of staves circled
with hoops, one of which binds the top and the other the bottom.
The hoops are sometimes made of hazel and oak, but these are easily
broken by dashing against the shaft, while those made of iron are more
durable. In the larger buckets the staves are thicker and wider, as also are
both hoops, and in order that the buckets may be more firm and strong,
they have eight iron straps, somewhat broad, four of which run from the
upper hoop downwards, and four from the lower hoop upwards, as if to meet
each other. The bottom of each bucket, both inside and outside, is furnished
with two or three straps of iron, which run from one side of the lower hoop
to the other, but the straps which are on the outside are fixed crosswise.
Each bucket has two iron hafts which project above the edge, and it has an
‘ iron semi-circular bail whose lower ends are fixed directly into the hafts,
F that the bucket may be handled more easily. Each kind of bucket is much
iL deeper than it is wide, and each is wider at the top, in order that the material
which is dug out may be the more easily poured in and poured out again.
Into the smaller buckets strong boys, and into larger ones men, fill earth
from the bottom of the shaft with hoes; or the other material dug up is
shovelled into them or filled in with their hands, for which reason these men
are called “ shovellers.¢”” Afterward they fix the hook of the drawing-rope
into the bale ; then the buckets are drawn up by machines—the smaller ones,
because of their lighter weight, by machines turned by men, and the larger

_-ones, being heavier, by the machines turned by horses. Some, in place

of these buckets, substitute baskets which hold just as much, or even more,
since they are lighter than the buckets ; some use sacks made of ox-hide
instead of buckets, and the drawing-rope hook is fastened to their iron bale,
usually three of these filled with excavated material are drawn up at the
same time as three are being lowered and three are being filled by boys. The
latter are generally used at Schneeberg and the former at Freiberg.

*One metreta, a Greek measure, equalled about nine English gallons, and a congius
contained about six pints.

‘Ingestores. This is a case of Agricola coining a name for workmen from the work,
the term being derived from éngero, to pour or to throw in, used in the previous clause—hence
the “reason.” See p. xxxi.

——-

Se a eee ea ee

154 BOOK VI.

é
4
‘
s
‘
‘
‘
é
é
s
é
7
UA
4

A—SMALL BUCKET. B—LArGE BUCKET. C—SrTAves. D—Iron Hoops. E—IRoN
STRAPS. F—IRON STRAPS ON THE BOTTOM. G—Hartrs. H—Iron BALE. I—Hook oF
DRAWING-ROPE. K—BASKET. L—HIDE BUCKET OR SACK.

That which we call a cistum® is a vehicle with one wheel, not with
two, such as horses draw. When filled with excavated material it is pushed

5Cistum. A two-wheeled cart. In the preface Agricola gives this as an example of
his intended adaptations. See p. xxxi.

ee ee ee ee ee

BOOK VI. 155

by a workman out of tunnels or sheds. It is made as follows: two planks
are chosen about five feet long, one foot wide, and two digits thick ; of
each of these the lower side is cut away at the front for a length of one
foot, and at the back for a length of two feet, while the middle is left whole.
Then in the front parts are bored circular holes, in order that the ends of an
axle may revolve in them. The intermediate parts of the planks are
perforated twice near the bottom, so as to receive the heads of two little
cleats on which the planks are fixed; and they are also perforated in the
middle, so as to receive the heads of two end-boards, while keys fixed in
these projecting heads strengthen the whole structure. The handles are
made out of the extreme ends of the long planks, and they turn downward
at the ends that they may be grasped more firmly in the hands. The small
wheel, of which there is only one, neither has a nave nor does it revolve
around the axle, but turns around with it. From the felloe, which the
Greeks called ayidec, two transverse spokes fixed into it pass through the
middle of the axle toward the opposite felloe ; the axle is square, with
the exception of the ends, each of which is rounded so as to turn in the
opening. A workman draws out this barrow full of earth and rock and draws
it back empty. Miners also have another wheelbarrow, larger than this
one, which they use when they wash earth mixed with tin-stone on to which
a stream has been turned. The front end-board of this one is deeper, in
order that the earth which has been thrown into it may not fall out.

A—SMALL WHEELBARROW. B—LoNG PLANKS THEREOF. C—END-BoARDS. D—SMALL
WHEEL. E—LARGER BARROW. F—FRONT END-BOARD THEREOF.

156 BOOK VI.

\
i

ss tem
ATUATETETENT. ere
A—RECTANGULAR IRON BANDS ON TRUCK. B—ItTs IRON STRAPS. C—IRON AXLE.
D—WOoODEN ROLLERS. E—SMALL IRON KEYS. F—LARGE BLUNT IRON PIN,

G—SAME TRUCK UPSIDE DOWN.

The open truck has a capacity half as large again as a wheelbarrow; it is
about four feet long and about two and a half feet wide and deep ; and since
its shape is rectangular, it is bound together with three rectangular iron
bands, and besides these there are iron straps on all sides. Two small iron
axles are fixed to the bottom, around the ends of which wooden rollers revolve
on either side ; in order that the rollers shall not fall off the immovable
axles, there are small iron keys. A large blunt pin fixed to the bottom of the
truck runs in a groove of a plank in such a way that the truck does not
leave the beaten track. Holding the back part with his hands, the carrier
pushes out the truck laden with excavated material, and pushes it back
again empty. Some people call it a “dog ’”*®, because when it moves it
makes a noise which seems to them not unlike the bark of a dog. This truck
is used when they draw loads out of the longest tunnels, both because it is
moved more easily and because a heavier load can be placed in it.

Bateas’ are hollowed out of a single block of wood ; the smaller kind
are generally two feet long and one foot wide. When they have been
filled with ore, especially when but little is dug from the shafts and tunnels,
men either carry them out on their shoulders, or bear them away hung from

®Canis. The Germans in Agricola’s time called a truck a hundt—a hound,
7Alveus,—“ Tray.” The Spanish term batea has been so generally adopted into the
mining vocabulary for a wooden bowl for these purposes, that we introduce it here.

BOOK VI. 157

A—SMALL BATEA. B—Ropre. C—LARGE BATEA.

their necks. Pliny® is our authority that among the ancients everything
which was mined was carried out on men’s shoulders, but in truth this
method of carrying forth burdens is onerous, since it causes great fatigue
to a great number of men, and involves a large expenditure for labour ; for
this reason it has been rejected and abandoned in our day. The length of
the larger batea is as much as three feet, the width up to a foot and a palm.
In these bateas the metallic earth is washed for the purpose of testing it.
Water-vessels differ both in the use to which they are put and in the
material of which they are made; some draw the water from the shafts and
pour it into other things, as dippers ; while some of the vessels filled with
water are drawn out by machines, as buckets and bags ; some are made of
wood, as the dippers and buckets, and others of hides, as the bags. The
water-buckets, just like the buckets which are filled with dry material, are of
two kinds, the smaller and the larger , but these are unlike the other buckets at
the top, as in this case they are narrower, in order that the water may not be
spilled by being bumped against the timbers when they are being drawn out
of the shafts, especially those considerably inclined. The water is poured
into these buckets by dippers, which are small wooden buckets, but unlike the
water-buckets, they are neither narrow at the top nor bound with iron hoops,
but with hazel,—because there is no necessity for either. The smaller buckets
are drawn up by machines turned by men, the larger ones by those turned by
horses.
’Pliny (xxxul., 21). ‘‘ The fragments are carried on workmen’s shoulders; night
“and day each passes the material to his neighbour, only the last of them seeing the daylight.”

13

158 BOOK VI.

0 0 ‘
y
: c A
Coney
— —>
x B = :
\
C— \)
-— i)
a E K ts)
[SSS
= ——————————

A—SMALLER WATER-BUCKET. B—LARGER WATER-BUCKET. C—DIPPER

A—WATER-BAG WHICH TAKES IN WATER BY ITSELF. B—WATER-BAG INTO WHICH WATER
POURS WHEN IT IS PUSHED WITH A SHOVEL.

BOOK VI. 159

Our people give the name of water-bags to those very large skins for
carrying water which are made of two, or two and a half, ox-hides. When
these water-bags have undergone much wear and use, first the hair comes
off them and they become bald and shining ; after this they become
torn. If the tear is but a small one, a piece of smooth notched stick is put
into the broken part, and the broken bag is bound into its notches on either
side and sewn together ; but if it is a large one, they mend it with a piece of
ox-hide. The water-bags are fixed to the hook of a drawing-chain and let
down and dipped into the water, and as soon as they are filled they are drawn
up by the largest machine. They are of two kinds ; the one kind take in the
water by themselves ; the water pours into the other kind when it is pushed
in a certain way by a wooden shovel.

When the water has been drawn out from the shafts, it is run off in
troughs, or into a hopper, through which it runs into the trough. Likewise
the water which flows along the sides of the tunnels is carried off in drains.
These are composed of two hollowed beams joined firmly together, so as to
hold the water which flows through them, and they are covered by planks
all along their course, from the mouth of the tunnel right up to the extreme
end of it, to prevent earth or rock falling into them and obstructing the flow
of the water. If much mud gradually settles in them the planks are raised
and the drains are cleaned out, for they would otherwise become stopped up
and obstructed by this accident. With regard to the trough lying above

A—TrovcH. B—Hopper.

160 BOOK VI.

ground, which miners place under the hoppers which are close by the shaft
houses, these are usually hollowed out of single trees. Hoppers are generally
made of four planks, so cut on the lower side and joined together that the
top part of the hopper is broader and the bottom part narrower.

I have sufficiently indicated the nature of the miners’ iron tools and
their vessels. I will now explain their machines, which are of three kinds,
that is, hauling machines, ventilating machines, and ladders. By means of
the hauling machines loads are drawn out of the shafts; the ventilating
machines receive the air through their mouths and blow it into shafts or
tunnels, for if this is not done, diggers cannot carry on their labour without
great difficulty in breathing; by the steps of the ladders the miners go
down into the shafts and come up again.

Hauling machines are of varied and diverse forms, some of them being
made with great skill, and if I am not mistaken, they were unknown to the
Ancients. They have been invented in order that water may be drawn from
the depths of the earth to which no tunnels reach, and also the excavated
material from shafts which are likewise not connected with a tunnel, or if
so, only with very long ones. Since shafts are not all of the same depth, there
is a great variety among these hauling machines. Of those by which dry loads
are drawn out of the shafts, five sorts are in the most common use, of which
I will now describe the first. Two timbers a little longer than the shaft are
placed beside it, the one in the front of the shaft, the other at the back.
Their extreme ends have holes through which stakés, pointed at the bottom
like wedges, are driven deeply into the ground, so that the timbers may remain
stationary. Into these timbers are mortised the ends of two cross-timbers,
one laid on the right end of the shaft, while the other is: far enough
from the left end that between it and that end there remains suitable
space for placing the ladders. In the middle of the cross-timbers, posts are
fixed and secured with iron keys. In hollows at the top of these posts
thick iron sockets hold the ends of the barrel, of which each end projects
beyond the hollow of the post, and is mortised into the end of another
piece of wood a foot and a half long, a palm wide and three digits thick ;
the other end of these pieces of wood is seven digits wide, and into each
of them is fixed a round handle, likewise a foot and a half long. A
winding-rope is wound around the barrel and fastened to it at the
middle part. The loop at each end of the rope has an iron hook which
is engaged in the bale of a bucket, and so when the windlass revolves by
being turned by the cranks, a loaded bucket is always being drawn out of the
shaft and an empty one is being sent down into it. Two robust men turn
the windlass, each having a wheelbarrow near him, into which he unloads
the bucket which is drawn up nearest ‘to him ; two buckets generally fill a
wheelbarrow ; therefore when four buckets have been drawn up, each man
runs his own wheelbarrow out of the shed and empties it. Thus it happens
that if shafts are dug deep, a hillock rises around the shed of the windlass.
If a vein is not metal-bearing, they pour out the earth and rock without
discriminating ; whereas if it is metal-bearing, they preserve these materials,

el se i —“

BOOK VI. 161

which they unload separately and crush and wash. When they draw up
buckets of water they empty the water through the hopper into a trough,
through which it flows away.

y
i
:
Z
5 ,

\ TNS SSssss = F

~

4 A—TIMBER PLACED IN FRONT OF THE SHAFT. B—TIMBER PLACED AT THE BACK OF THE
SHAFT. C—POoOINTED STAKES. D—CRross-TIMBERS. E—PostTs OR THICK PLANKS.

F—Iron sockets. G—BARREL. H—ENDS OF BARREL. I—PIECES OF WOOD.
K—HANDLE. L—DRAwWING-ROPE. M—lIts HooK. N—Bucket. O—BALE OF THE
BUCKET.

The next kind of machine, which miners employ when the shaft is
deeper, differs from the first in that it possesses a wheel as well as cranks.
This windlass, if the load is not being drawn up from a great depth, is turned
by one windlass man, the wheel taking the place of the other man. But if the
depth is greater, then the windlass is turned by three men, the wheel being
substituted for a fourth, because the barrel having been once set in motion,
the rapid revolutions of the wheel help, and it can be turned more easily.
Sometimes masses of lead are hung on to this wheel, or are fastened to the
spokes, in order that when it is turned they depress the spokes by their weight
and increase the motion ; some persons for the same reason fasten into the
barrel two, three, or four iron rods, and weight their ends with lumps of lead.
The windlass wheel differs from the wheel of a carriage and from the one

Ee ap ee Ore ee SO a ae oe ee

a ale col a

162 BOOK VI.

an Say)

yf fa” a .
Wh = 7 a

A—BARREL. B—STRAIGHT LEVERS. C—USsvuAL CRANK. D—SpPoKES OF WHEEL.
E—RIM OF THE SAME WHEEL.

which is turned by water power, for it lacks the buckets of a water-wheel
and it lacks the nave of acarriage wheel. In the place of the nave it has a thick
barrel, in which are mortised the lower ends of the spokes, just as their upper
ends are mortised into the rim. When three windlass men turn this machine,
four straight levers are fixed to the one end of the barrel, and to the
other the crank which is usual in mines, and which is composed of two limbs,
of which the rounded horizontal one is grasped by the hands; the rect-
angular limb, which is at right angles to the horizontal one, has mortised in its
lower end the round handle, and in the upper end the end of the barrel. This
crank is worked by one man, the levers by two men, of whom one pulls while
the other pushes ; all windlass workers, whatsoever kind of a machine they
may turn, are necessarily robust that they can sustain such great toil.

The third kind of machine is less fatiguing for the workman, while it
raises larger loads; even though it is slower, like all other machines which
have drums, yet it reaches greater depths, even to a depth of 180 feet. It
consists of an upright axle with iron journals at its extremities, which
turn in two iron sockets, the lower of which is fixed in a block set in the
ground and the upper one in the roof beam. This axle has at its lower end a

BOOK VI. 163

nh

Uuthealaadtinntiauhaw

Z 7 . Yi VWs,
Oypy ip
YW jb Uy
UY Mth aS

Bi Linney
UNL IN y, v<

x xX

A—UPRIGHT AXLE. B—Btocx. C—Roor BEAM. D—WHEEL. E—TOOTHED-DRUM.
F—Hor!IzonTAL AXLE. G—DRUM COMPOSED OF RUNDLES. H—DRAWING ROPE.
I—Pore. K—Upricut posts. L—CLEATS ON THE WHEEL.

wheel made of thick planks joined firmly together, and at its upper end a
toothed drum ; this toothed drum turns another drum made of rundles, which
is on a horizontal axle. A winding-rope is wound around this latter axle,
which turns in iron bearings set in the beams. So that they may not fall, the
two workmen grasp with their hands a pole fixed to two upright posts, and
then pushing the cleats of the lower wheel backward with their feet, they
revolve the machine ; as often as they have drawn up and emptied one
bucket full of excavated material, they turn the machine in the opposite
direction and draw out another.

The fourth machine raises burdens once and a half as large again as the
two machines first explained. When it is made, sixteen beams are erected
each forty feet long, one foot thick and one foot wide, joined at the top with
clamps and widely separated at the bottom. The lower ends of all of
them are mortised into separate sills laid flat upon the ground ; these sills
are five feet long, a foot and a half wide, and a foot thick. Each beam is also
connected with its sill by a post, whose upper end is mortised into the beam

164 BOOK VI.

and its lower end mortised into the sill; these posts are four feet long, one
foot thick, and one foot wide. Thus a circular area is made, the diameter of
which is fifty feet ; in the middle of this area a hole is sunk to a depth of ten
feet, and rammed down tight, and in order to give it sufficient firmness, it is
strengthened with contiguous small timbers, through which pins are driven,
for by them the earth around the hole is held so that it cannot fall in. In
the bottom of the hole is planted a sill, three or four feet long and a foot anda
half thick and wide ; in order that it may remain fixed, it is set into the small
timbers ; in the middle of it is a steel socket in which the pivot of the axle turns.
In like manner a timber is mortised into two of the large beams, at the top
beneath the clamps; this hasan iron bearing in which the other iron journal of
the axle revolves. Every axle used in mining, to speak of them once for all,
has two iron journals, rounded off on all sides, one fixed with keys in the centre
of each end. That part of this journal which is fixed to the end
of the axle is as broad as the end itself and a digit thick ; that which
projects beyond the axle is round and a palm thick, or thicker if necessity
requires ; the ends of each miner’s axle are encircled and bound by an
iron band to hold the journal more securely. The axle of this machine,
except at the ends, is square, and is forty feet long, a foot and a half thick
and wide. Mortised and clamped into the axle above the lower end are the
ends of four inclined beams ; their outer ends support two double cross-
beams similarly mortised into them; the inclined beams are eighteen feet
long, three palms thick, and five wide. The two cross-beams are fixed to
the axle and held together by wooden keys so that they will not separate,
and they are twenty-four feet long. Next, there is a drum which is made of
three wheels, of which the middle one is seven feet distant from the upper
one and from the lower one; the wheels have four spokes which are
supported by the same number of inclined braces, the lower ends of which
are joined together round the axle by a clamp ; one end of each spoke is
mortised into the axle and the other into the rim. There are rundles all
round the wheels, reaching from the rim of the lowest one to the rim of the
middle one, and likewise from the rim of the middle wheel to the rim of the top
one ; around these rundles are wound the drawing-ropes, one between the lowest
wheel and the middle one, the other between the middle and top wheels.
The whole of this construction is shaped like a cone, and is covered with a ~
shingle roof, with the exception of that square part which faces the shaft.
Then cross-beams, mortised at both ends, connect a double row of upright
posts; all of these are eighteen feet long, but the posts are one foot thick
and one foot wide, and the cross-beams are three palms thick and wide.
There are sixteen posts and eight cross-beams, and upon these cross-beams
are laid two timbers a foot wide and three palms thick, hollowed out to a
width of half a foot and to a depth of five digits ; the one is laid upon the
upper cross-beams and the other upon the lower ; each is long enough to
reach nearly from the drum of the whim to the shaft. Near the same drum
each timber has a small round wooden roller six digits thick, whose ends are

(ee eee

BOOK VI. 165

WIV
eZ Uff
Oe t -
\

A—UPRIGHT BEAMS. B—SILLS LAID FLAT UPON THE GROUND. C—Posts. D—AREA.
E—SILL SET AT THE BOTTOM OF THE HOLE. F—AXLE. G—DOUBLE CROSS-BEAMS.
H—Drum. I—Wtnp1ncG-ropes. K—Bucket. L—SMALL PIECES OF WOOD HANGING
FROM DOUBLE CROSS-BEAMS. M—SHORT WOODEN BLOCK. N—CHAIN. O—POLE BAR.
P—GRAPPLING HOOK. (Some members mentioned in the text are not shown).

166 BOOK VI.

covered with iron bands and revolve in iron rings. Each timber also has a
wooden pulley, which together with its iron axle revolves in holes in the
timber. These pulleys are hollowed out all round, in order that the drawing-
rope may not slip out of them, and thus each rope is drawn tight and turns
over its own roller and its own pulley. The iron hook of each rope is engaged
with the bale of the bucket. Further, with regard to the double cross-
beams which are mortised to the lower part of the main axle, to each end
of them there is mortised a small piece of wood four feet long. These appear
to hang from the double cross-beams, and a short wooden block is fixed to the
lower part of them, on which a driver sits. Each of these blocks has an iron
clavis which holds a chain, and that in turn a pole-bar. In this way it is
possible for two horses to draw this whim, now this way and now that ; turn
by turn one bucket is drawn out of the shaft full and another is let down
into it empty; if, indeed, the shaft is very deep four horses turn the whim.
When a bucket has been drawn up, whether filled with dry or wet materials, .
it must be emptied, and a workman inserts a grappling hook and overturns
it ; this hook hangs on a chain made of three or four links, fixed to a timber.

The fifth machine is partly like the whim, and partly like the third rag
and chain pump, which draws water by balls when turned by horse power,
as I will explain a little later. Like this pump, it is turned by horse
power and has two axles, namely, an upright one—about whose lower end,
which decends into an underground chamber, there is a toothed drum—and a
horizontal one, around which there is a drum made of rundles. It has indeed
two drums around its horizontal axle, similar to those of the big machine, but
smaller, because it draws buckets from a shaft almost two hundred and forty
feet deep. One drum is made of hubs to which cleats are fixed, and
the other is made of rundles; and near the latter is a wheel two
feet deep, measured on all sides around the axle, and one foot wide; and
against this impinges a brake,1° which holds the whim when occasion demands
that it be stopped. This is necessary when the hide buckets are emptied
after being drawn up full of rock fragments or earth, or as often as water
is poured out of buckets similarly drawn up; for this machine not only
raises dry loads, but also wet ones, just like the other four machines which
I have already described. By this also, timbers fastened on to its winding-
chain are let down into a shaft. The brake is made of a piece of wood one
foot thick and half a foot long, projecting from a timber that is suspended
by a chain from one end of a beam which oscillates on an iron pin, this in
turn being supported in the claws of an upright post; and from the other end
of this oscillating beam a long timber is suspended by a chain, and from this
long timber again a short beam is suspended. A workman sits on the short
beam when the machine needs to be stopped, and lowers it; he then inserts
a plank or small stick so that the two timbers are held down and cannot be
raised. In this way the brake is raised, and seizing the drum, presses it
so tightly that sparks often fly from it; the suspended timber to which

the short beam is attached, has several holes in which the chain is
10Harpago,—A “‘ grapple” or “ hook.”

BOOK VI.

oe ee a ae a

MMMM MMMM AMAA

WOM

GGG G|OQPE

' SSS

>

SSA

YY YYTOMT
Yin SF

C—DruM
E—DRUM MADE OF HUBS.

TAL AXLE.

B—Hori1zon

A—TOOTHED DRUM WHICH IS ON THE UPRIGHT AXLE.

I—Hookx.

—WHEEL NEAR IT.

D
F—Brake. G—OSCILLATING BEAM. H—SHORT BEAM.

WHICH IS MADE OF RUNDLES.

168 BOOK VI.

fixed, so that it may be raised as much as is convenient. Above this wheel
there are boards to prevent the water from dripping down and wetting it, for
if it becomes wet the brake will not grip the machine so well. Near the
other drum is a pin from which hangs a chain, in the last link of which there
is an iron hook three feet long ; a ring is fixed to the bottom of the bucket,
and this hook, being inserted into it, holds the bucket back so that the water
may be poured out or the fragments of rock emptied.

The miners either carry, draw, or roll down the mountains the ore which
is hauled out of the shafts by these five machines or taken out of the
tunnels. In the winter time our people place a box on a sledge and draw
it down the low mountains with a horse; and in this season they
also fill sacks made of hide and load them on dogs, or place two or
three of them on a small sledge which is higher in the fore part and lower at
the back. Sitting on these sacks, not without risk of his life, the bold
driver guides the sledge as it rushes down the mountain into the valleys with
a stick, which he carries in his hand; when it is rushing down too
quickly he arrests it with the stick, or with the same stick brings it back to
the track when it is turning aside from its proper course. Some of the

GWELD Cp)

VAY
Wy sr P cS SS
YZ ( a j

A—SLEDGE WITH BOX PLACED ON IT. B—SLEDGE WITH SACKS PLACED ON IT. C—STICK.
D—Docs WITH PACK-SADDLES. E—PIG-SKIN SACKS TIED TO A ROPE.

———— ee

--

a aa

BOOK VI. 169

Noricians" collect ore during the winter into sacks made of bristly pigskins,
and drag them down from the highest mountains, which neither horses,
mules nor asses can climb. Strong dogs, that are trained to bear pack
saddles, carry these sacks when empty into the mountains. When they
are filled with ore, bound with thongs, and fastened to a rope, a man,
winding the rope round his arm or breast, drags them down through the
snow to a place where horses, mules, or asses bearing pack-saddles can
climb. There the ore is removed from the pigskin sacks and put into other
sacks made of double or triple twilled linen thread, and these placed on the
pack-saddles of the beasts are borne down to the works where the ores
are washed or smelted. If, indeed, the horses, mules, or asses are able
to climb the mountains, linen sacks filled with ore are placed on their saddles,
and they carry these down the narrow mountain paths, which are passable
neither by wagons nor sledges, into the valleys lying below the steeper
portions of the mountains. But on the declivity of cliffs which beasts cannot
climb, are placed long open boxes made of planks, with transverse cleats to
hold them together ; into these boxes is thrown the ore which has been
brought in wheelbarrows, and when it has run down to the level it is gathered

into sacks, and the beasts either carry it away on their backs or drag it away

after it has been thrown into sledges or wagons. When the drivers bring
ore down steep mountain slopes they use two-wheeled carts, and they drag
behind them on the ground the trunks of two trees, for these by their weight
hold back the heavily-laden carts, which contain ore in their boxes, and check
their descent, and but for these the driver would often be obliged to
bind chains to the wheels. When these men bring down ore frcm mountains
which do not have such declivities, they use wagons whose beds are twice
as long as those of the carts. The planks of these are so put together that,
when the ore is unloaded by the drivers, they can be raised and taken apart,
for they are only held together by bars. The drivers employed by the owners
of the ore bring down thirty or sixty wagon-loads, and the master of the
works marks on a stick the number of loads for each driver. But some
ore, especially tin, after being taken from the mines, is divided into eight
parts, or into nine, if the owners of the mine give “ninth parts” to the
owners of the tunnel. This is occasionally done by measuring with a bucket,
but more frequently planks are put together on a spot where, with the
addition of the level ground as a base, it forms a hollow box. Each owner
provides for removing, washing, and smelting that portion which has fallen
to him. (Illustration p. 170).

Into the buckets, drawn by these five machines, the boys or men throw
the earth and broken rock with shovels, or they fill them with their hands ;
hence they get their name of shovellers. As I have said, the same
machines raise not only dry loads, but also wet ones, or water ; but before
I explain the varied and diverse kinds of machines by which miners are wont

“Ancient Noricum covered the region of modern Tyrol, with parts of Bavaria,
Salzburg, etc.

BOOK VI.

Mp

Y

MY

ath

B—LOoNG BOX PLACED ON THE SLOPE OF THE CLIFF.

D—WHEELBARROW. E—Two

SADDLES.

HORSES WITH PACK

CLEATS THE

A

UY

—BaArs
BoxEs

F—TrRuNKsS OF
I
1 Ga

H—ORE BEING UNLOADED FROM THE WAGON.

WHEELED CART.
MASTER OF THE WORKS MARKING THE NUMBER OF CARTS ON A STICK.

REOF.
G—WAGON.

TREES.

Cis
K

INTO WHICH ARE THROWN THE ORE WHICH HAS TO BE DIVIDED.

:
.
F
J
g

ee
= ~ i

BOOK VI. 171

to draw water alone, I will explain how heavy bodies, such as axles, iron
chains, pipes, and heavy timbers, should be lowered into deep vertical shafts.
A windlass is erected whose barrel has on each end four straight levers ; it
is fixed into upright beams and around it is wound a rope, one end of which
is fastened to the barrel and the other to those heavy bodies which are slowly
lowered down by workmen ; and if these halt at any part of the shaft they
are drawn up a little way. When these bodies are very heavy, then behind
this windlass another is erected just like it, that their combined strength
may be equal to the load, and that it may be lowered slowly. Sometimes for
the same reason, a pulley is fastened with cords to the roof-beam, and the rope
descends and ascends over it.

— st
= AG se
= -~
- = S : \
%n = ve
—_— —
—=-—s ~
SN ZB
{ : a
—
I. o
=
4 2
\ 35 a So
i oS, © °
S o
h s
q AANA
= é eS

AY Af :
\\ wD).

EA " \Y Pa * y
Ba crreve > SS - Z
—— e ‘tte =e bi QQ oc <

o Gs fo

A—WInpiLAss. B—STRAIGHT LEVERS. C—UPRIGHT BEAMS. D—Ropr. E—PULLEY.
F—TIMBERS TO BE LOWERED.

Water is either hoisted or pumped out of shafts. It is hoisted up after
being poured into buckets or water-bags ; the water-bags are generally
brought up by a machine whose water-wheels have double paddles, while the
buckets are brought up by the five machines already described, although in
certain localities the fourth machine also hauls up water-bags of moderate
size. Water is drawn up also by chains of dippers, or by suction pumps, or

172 BOOK VI.

by ‘“‘rag and chain’’ pumps.’* When there is but a small quantity, it is
either brought up in buckets or drawn up by chains of dippers or suction
pumps, and when there is much water it is either drawn up in hide bags or
by rag and chain pumps.

First of all, I will describe the machines which draw water by chains
of dippers, of which there are three kinds. For the first, a frame is
made entirely of iron bars; it is two and a half feet high, likewise two and
a half feet long, and in addition one-sixth and one-quarter of a digit
long, one-fourth and one-twenty-fourth of a foot wide. In it there are three
little horizontal iron axles, which revolve in bearings or wide pillows of steel,
and also four iron wheels, of which two are made with rundles and the same
number are toothed. Outside the frame, around the lowest axle, is a
wooden fly-wheel, so that it can be more readily turned, and inside the frame
is a smaller drum which is made of eight rundles, one-sixth and one twenty-
fourth of a foot long. Around the second axle, which does not project
beyond the frame, and is therefore only two and a half feet and one-twelfth
and one-third part of a digit long, there is on the one side, a smaller toothed
wheel, which has forty-eight teeth, and on the other side a larger drum,
which is surrounded by twelve rundles one-quarter of a foot long. Around the
third axle, which is one inch and one-third thick, is a larger toothed wheel
projecting one foot from the axle in all directions, which has seventy-two
teeth. The teeth of each wheel are fixed in with screws, whose threads are
screwed into threads in the wheel, so that those teeth which are broken can be
replaced by others; both the teeth and rundles are steel. The upper axle
projects beyond the frame, and is so skilfully mortised into the body of
another axle that it has the appearance of being one; this axle proceeds
through a frame made of beams which stands around the shaft, into an iron
fork set in a stout oak timber, and turns on a roller made of pure steel.
Around this axle is a drum of the kind possessed by those machines which
draw water by rag and chain; this drum has triple curved iron clamps,
to which the links of an iron chain hook themselves, so that a great weight
cannot tear them away. These links are not whole like the links of other
chains, but each one being curved in the upper part on each side catches the
one which comes next, whereby it presents the appearance of a double chain.
At the point where one catches the other, dippers made of iron or brass plates
and holding half a congius* are bound to them with thongs ; thus, if there are
one hundred links there will be the same number of dippers pouring out water.
When the shafts are inclined, the mouths of the dippers project and are covered
on the top that they may not spill out the water, but when the shafts are
vertical the dippers do not require a cover. By fitting the end of the lowest
small axle into the crank, the man who works the crank turns the axle, and at
the same time the drum whose rundles turn the toothed wheel of the second
axle; by this wheel is driven the one that is made of rundles, which

12Machina quae pilis aquas haurit. ‘‘ Machine which draws water with balls.” This
apparatus is identical with the Cornish “rag and chain pump” of the same period, and we
have therefore adopted that term.

183A congius contained about six pints.

BOOK VI. 173

.

SSN
a,

AANA

OSS

ng
(A

a a

Ri ee ee” he pit

;
\

au

Aetna

A—IRON FRAME. B—LOowest AXLE. C—FLY-wWHEEL. D—SMALLER DRUM MADE OF

RUNDLES. E—SECOND AXLE. F—SMALLER TOOTHED WHEEL. G—LARGER DRUM MADE

: OF RUNDLES, H—UPPER AXLE. I—LARGER TOOTHED WHEEL. K—BEARINGS.

* L—Pittow. M—FraAmMEworK. N—Oak TIMBER. O—SUPPORT OF IRON BEARING.

at P—RoLLtER. Q—Upper prum. R—Cramps. S—CuHain. T—Linxs. V—Drppers.
X—CrANK. Y—LOWER DRUM OR BALANCE WEIGHT.

14

174 BOOK VI,

again turns the toothed wheel of the upper small axle and thus the drum to
which the clamps are fixed. In this way the chain, together with the empty
dippers, is slowly let down, close to the footwall side of the vein, into the sump
to the bottom of the balance drum, which turns on a little iron axle, both ends
of which are set in a thick iron bearing. The chain is rolled round the drum
and the dippers fill with water ; the chain being drawn up close to the hanging-
wall side, carries the dippers filled with water above the drum of the upper
axle. Thus there are always three of the dippers inverted and pouring
water into a lip, from which it flows away into the drain of the tunnel. This
machine is less useful, because it cannot be constructed without great expense,
and it carries off but little water and is somewhat slow, as also are other
machines which possess a great number of drums.

EN RASS SS psy S 7

Li

\

Ss

A—WHEEL WHICH IS TURNED BY TREADING. B—AXxLE. C—DouBLE CHAIN. D—LINK
OF DOUBLE CHAIN. E—Dripprers. F—SrimpLE clamps. G—CLAMP WITH TRIPLE CURVES.

The next machine of this kind, described in a few words by Vitruvius,"
more rapidly brings up dippers, holding a congius; for this reason, it is

14Vitruvius (x., 9). “‘ But if the water is to be supplied to still higher places, a double
“ chain of iron is made to revolve on the axis of the wheel, long enough to reach to the lower
“level. This is furnished with brazen buckets, each holding about a congius. Then by turning
“ the wheel, the chain also turns upon the axis and brings the buckets to the top thereof, on
“ passing which they are inverted and pour into the conduits the water they have raised.”’

BOOK VI. 175

more useful than the first one for drawing water out of shafts, into which
much water is continually flowing. This machine has no iron frame nor
drums, but has around its axle a wooden wheel which is turned by treading ;
the axle, since it has no drum, does not last very long. In other respects
this pump resembles the first kind, except that it differs from it by having
a double chain. Clamps should be fixed to the axle of this machine, just as
to the drum of the other one ; some of these are made simple and others
with triple curves, but each kind has four barbs.

The third machine, which far excels the two just described, is made
when a running stream can be diverted to a mine; the impetus of the
stream striking the paddles revolves a water-wheel in place of the wheel
turned by treading. With regard to the axle, it is like the second machine,

Z

Mi
—_ aor

Y
Lf
Py)

af.

Noy 7A Wn
\ Tay “Y),

Y fi

4 = ¥ —

—

em

NWO — ae
SONIA NASA 4

Sym BN Wats oN |S

A—WHEEL WHOSE PADDLES ARE TURNED BY THE FORCE OF THE STREAM. B—AXLE.
C—DRvUM OF AXLE, TO WHICH CLAMPS ARE FIXED. D—Cuatn. E—Linx. F—DIppers.
G—BALANCE DRUM.

but the drum which is round the axle, the chain, and the balance drum, are
like the first machine. It has much more capacious dippers than even the
second machine, but since the dippers are frequently broken, miners rarely
use these machines ; for they prefer to lift out small quantities of water by
the first five machines or to draw it up by suction pumps, or, if there is

176 BOOK VI.

much water, to drain it by the rag and chain pump or to bring it up in
water-bags.

Enough, then, of the first sort of pumps. I will now explain the other,
that is the pump which draws, by means of pistons, water which has been
raised by suction. Of these there are seven varieties, which though they
differ from one another in structure, nevertheless confer the same benefits
upon miners, though some to a greater degree than others. The first pump
is made as follows. Over the sump is placed a flooring, through which a
pipe—or two lengths of pipe, one of which is joined into the other—are let
down to the bottom of the sump; they are fastened with pointed iron clamps
driven in straight on both sides, so that the pipes may remain fixed. The
lower end of the lower pipe is enclosed in a trunk two feet deep ; this trunk,
hollow like the pipe, stands at the bottom of the sump, but the lower opening
of it is blocked with a round piece of wood ; the trunk has perforations
round about, through which water flows into it. If there is one length of
pipe, then in the upper part of the trunk which has been hollowed out there is
enclosed a box of iron, copper, or brass, one palm deep, but without a bottom,
and a rounded valve so tightly closes it that the water, which has been drawn
up by suction, cannot run back ; but if there are two lengths of pipe, the
box is enclosed in the lower pipe at the point of junction. An opening or a
spout in the upper pipe reaches to the drain of the tunnel. Thus the work-
man, eager at his labour, standing on the flooring boards, pushes the piston
down into the pipe and draws it out again. At the top of the piston-rod is a
hand-bar and the bottom is fixed in a shoe; this is the name given to the
leather covering, which is almost cone-shaped, for it is so stitched that it is
tight at the lower end, where it is fixed to the piston-rod which it surrounds,
but in the upper end where it draws the water it is wide open. Or else an
iron disc one digit thick is used, or one of wood six digits thick, each of which
is far superior to the shoe. The disc is fixed by an iron key which pene-
trates through the bottom of the piston-rod, or it is screwed on to the
rod ; it is round, with its upper part protected by a cover, and has five,or
six openings, either round or oval, which taken together present a star-like
appearance; the disc has the same diameter as the inside of the pipe,
so that it can be just drawn up and down in it. When the workman draws
the piston up, the water which has passed in at the openings of the disc,
whose cover is then closed, is raised to the hole or little spout, through which
it flows away ; then the velve of the box opens, and the water which has
passed into the trunk is drawn up by the suction and rises into the pipe ;
but when the workman pushes down the piston, the valve closes and allows
the disc again to draw in the water.

The piston of the second pump is more easily moved up and down. When
this pump is made, two beams are placed over the sump, one near the right side
of it, and the other near the left. To one beam a pipe is fixed with iron clamps ;
to the other is fixed either the forked branch of a tree or a timber cut out at
the top in the shape of a fork, and through the prongs of the fork a round
hole is bored. Through a wide round hole in the middle of a sweep passes

PO Ee Ee at eee ee

a

BOOK VI. 177

A—Sump. B—Prees. C—Ftoortinc. D—TrunxK. E—PERFORATIONS OF TRUNK.
F—Vatve. G—Sprout. H—Piston-rop. I—HAND-BAR OF PISTON. K—Snor. L—DiIsc
WITH ROUND OPENINGS. M—Disc WITH OVAL OPENINGS. N—Cover. O—THIS MAN IS
BORING LOGS AND MAKING THEM INTO PIPES. P—BoRER WITH AUGER. Q—WIDER BORER.

BOOK VI.

UE

QW A

UG
HAINES

ee EY
NASAL
AY AN

x ~
Wk < > ANN
AN A
EX SS,

= J

==
CUT

SEE a a ral

#

TE— ===
LL _——————— SS i=

Md phsys

Ty

NA

im

Vl

S ATT.

A—ERECT TIMBER. B—AXxLE. C—SWEEP WHICH TURNS ABOUT THE AXLE. D—PIsToNn
ROD. E—Cross-BAR. F—RING WITH WHICH TWO PIPES ARE GENERALLY JOINED.

an iron axle, so fastened in the holes in the fork that it remains fixed, and
the sweep turns on this axle. In one end of the sweep the upper end of a
piston-rod is fastened with an iron key ; at the other end a cross-bar is also
fixed, to the extreme ends of which are handles to enable it to be held more
firmly in the hands. And so when the workman pulls the cross-bar upward,
he forces the piston into the pipe; when he pushes it down again he draws
the piston out of the pipe; and thus the piston carries up the water which
has been drawn in at the openings of the disc, and the water flows away through
the spout into the drains. This pump, like the next one, is identical with
the first in all that relates to the piston, disc, trunk, box, and valve.

The third pump is not unlike the one just described, but in place of
one upright, posts are erected with holes at the top, and in these holes the
ends of an axle revolve. To the middle of this axle are fixed two wooden —
bars, to the end of one of which is fixed the piston, and to the end of the
other a heavy piece of wood, but short, so that it can pass between the two
posts and may move backward and forward. When the workman pushes
this piece of wood, the piston is drawn out of the pipe ; when it returns by its

a ae

a pt ee el) a tae

BOOK VI. 179

YZ,
y

-

—\\

N
NN
N
X
SSS
Ny
N
\7

NK
\
\
\Z
\;
N
\
\
N
NY
N
\
\

Zz
'

VELA

A—Posts. B—Axte. C—WoopeEN BARs. D—Piston rop. E—SHoRT PIECE OF WOOD.
F—Drain. G—THIs MAN IS DIVERTING THE WATER WHICH IS FLOWING OUT OF THE DRAIN,
TO PREVENT IT FROM FLOWING INTO THE TRENCHES WHICH ARE BEING DUG.

own weight, the piston is pushed in. In this way, the water which the pipe
contains is drawn through the openings in the disc and emptied by the piston
through the spout into the drain. There are some who place a hand-bar
underneath in place of the’ short piece of wood. This pump, as also the last
before described, is less generally used among miners than the others.

' The fourth kind is not a simple pump but a duplex one. It is made as
follows. A rectangular block of beechwood, five feet long, two and a half
feet wide, and one and a half feet thick, is cut in two and hollowed out wide
and deep enough so that an iron axle with cranks can revolve init. The axle
is placed between the two halves of this box, and the first part of the axle,
which is in contact with the wood, is round and the straight end forms a
journal. Then the axle is bent down the depth of a foot and again bent so
as to continue straight, and at this point a round piston-rod hangs from it;
next it is bent up as far as it was bent down ; then it continues a little way
straight again, and then it is bent up a foot and again continues straight,
at which point a second round piston-rod is hung from it ; afterward it

BOOK VI.

RON
V@r WENN
NUMA

Lena
SS

Wn) hanna

Sars;

CLAMPS.

COLUMN PIPE FIXED ABOVE THE BOX. G—IRON AXLE. H—PIsTon-

=

AWA AKIU nha

AY NERA

)

oa

( eA 1 \y rs i aS Y

y . vw .\5 , iN yy ;

\ Yy fy » \ tp sf
\ 4 ‘Wy g J f y \ , t 4 y/ .
as GZ ( . | Z } | ; , We Sy
) ‘ , . Ay ES H
’ : . , 5 AW; eS i
mM Hy . SSO 7 N Z ,
J - ty =~ ’ Y Z

MMM U“MM bpp
2 Y

4

Y
y
q
y
f
Yi)
Y
VA
y
j

“S

aN ain

U. ie
Im Came se “a, Lain

VIN
AK dill e4/// dk

—PIPES

E
)

N—CRANK.

D
K—LEATHERS. L—EYEs IN THE AXLE.

C—UPPER PART OF SAME.
eved tn the first edition but corrected in those later.

ENDS ARE WEIGHTED WITH LUMPS OF LEAD.

; aes
WASHERS TO PROTECT THE BEARINGS.

—Rop

B—LOWER PART OF BOX.
S WHOSE

(This plate is unlett

I

Box
BELOW THE BOX.
M

A—
RODS.

BOOK VI. 181

is bent down the same distance as it was bent up the last time; the other
end of it, which also acts as a journal, is straight. This part which protrudes
through the wood is protected by two iron washers in the shape of discs, to
which are fastened two leather washers of the same shape and size, in order
to prevent the water which is drawn into the box from gushing out. These
discs are around the axle; one.of them is inside the box and the other
outside. Beyond this, the end of the axle is square and has two eyes, in
which are fixed two iron rods, and to their ends are. weighted lumps of lead,
so that the axle may have a greater propensity to revolve ; this axle can
easily be turned when its end has been mortised in a crank. The upper part
of the box is the shallower one, and the lower part the deeper; the upper
part is bored out once straight down through the middle, the diameter of the
opening being the same as the outside diameter of the column pipe; the
lower box has, side by side, two apertures also bored straight down ;
these are for two pipes, the space of whose openings therefore is twice as
great as that of the upper part; this lower part of the box is placed
upon the two pipes, which are fitted into it at their upper ends, and the
lower ends of these pipes penetrate into trunks which stand in the
sump. These trunks have perforations through which the water flows into
them. The iron axle is placed in the inside of the box, then the two iron
piston-rods which hang from it are let down through the two pipes to the depth
of a foot. Each piston has a screw at its lower end which holds a thick iron
plate, shaped like a disc and full of openings, covered with a leather, and
similarly to the other pump it has a round valve in a little box. Then the
upper part of the box is placed upon the lower one and properly fitted to it on
every side, and where they join they are bound by wide thick iron plates, and
held with small wide iron wedges, which are driven in and are fastened with
clamps. The first length of column pipe is fixed into the upper part of the
box, and another length of pipe extends it, and a third again extends this one,
and so on, another extending on another, until the uppermost one reaches the
drain of the tunnel. When the crank worker turns the axle, the pistons in
turn draw the water through their discs ; since this is done quickly, and
since the area of openings of the two pipes over which the box is set, is twice
as large as the opening of the column pipe which rises from the box, and since
the pistons do not lift the water far up, the impetus of the water from the
lower pipes forces it to rise and flow’out of the column pipe into the drain of
the tunnel. Since a wooden box frequently cracks open, it is better to
make it of lead or copper or brass.

The fifth kind of pump is still less simple, for it is composed of two or
three pumps whose pistons are raised by a machine turned by men, for each
piston-rod has a tappet which is raised, each in succession, by two cams on
a barrel; two or four strong men turn it. When the pistons descend into
the pipes their discs draw the water ; when they are raised these force the
water out through the pipes. The upper part of each of these piston-rods,
which is half a foot square, is held in a slot in a cross-beam ; the lower part,
which drops down into the pipes, is made of another piece of wood and is
round. Each of these three pumps is composed of two lengths of pipe fixed

182 BOOK VI.

i
y

‘ | Ex£nnEnncccvcccc |

yiiitittidididédddddsddddeG

i}

A |i
i
ei

SS

SS 28 SS
SSS Ree
2 Ny
ce =

yy WDD,
Wl

Sa SS .
4 vf “ff

nen”

A—TAPPETS OF PISTON-RODS. B—CAMS OF THE BARREL. C—SQUARE UPPER PARTS
OF PISTON-RODS. D—LOWER ROUNDED PARTS OF PISTON-RODS, E—CROSS-BEAMS.
F—Pirzs. G—APERTURES OF PIPES. H—TroucH. (Fifth kind of pump—see p. 181).

BOOK VI. 183

Awa
WWE \\ \\ >}

A—WATER-WHEEL. B—AxLE. C—TRUNK ON WHICH THE LOWEST PIPE STANDS.
D—BaSKET SURROUNDING TRUNK. (Sixth kind of pump—see p. 184.)

184 BOOK VI.

to the shaft timbers. This machine draws the water higher, as much as
twenty-four feet. If the diameter of the pipes is large, only two pumps are
made ; if smaller, three, so that by either method the volume of water is the
same. This also must be understood regarding the other machines and
their pipes. Since these pumps are composed of two lengths of pipe, the
little iron box having the iron valve which I described before, is not enclosed
in a trunk, but is in the lower length of pipe, at that point where it joins
the upper one; thus the rounded part of the piston-rod is only as long as
the upper length of pipe; but I will presently explain this more clearly.

The sixth kind of pump would be just the same as the fifth were it not
that it has an axle instead of a barrel, turned not by men but by a water-
wheel, which is revolved by the force of water striking its buckets.
Since water-power far exceeds human strength, this machine draws water
through its pipes by discs out of a shaft more than one hundred feet deep.
The bottom of the lowest pipe, set in the sump, not only of this pump but
also of the others, is generally enclosed in a basket made of wicker-work, to
prevent wood shavings and other things being sucked in. (See p. 183.)

The seventh kind of pump, invented ten years ago, which is the most
ingenious, durable, and useful of all, can be made without much expense. It
is composed of several pumps, which do not, like those last described, go down
into the shaft together, but of which one is below the other, for if there are
three, as is generally the case, the lower one lifts the water of the sump and
pours it out into the first tank ; the second pump lifts again from that tank
into a second tank, and the third pump lifts it into the drain of the tunnel.
A wheel fifteen feet high raises the piston-rods of all these pumps at the same
time and causes them to drop together. The wheel is made to revolve by
paddles, turned by the force of a stream which has been diverted to the
mountain. The spokes of the water-wheel are mortised in an axle six feet
long and one foot thick, each end of which is surrounded by an iron band,
but in one end there is fixed an iron journal ; to the other end is attached an
iron like this journal in its posterior part, which is a digit thick and as wide
as the end of the axle itself. Then the iron extends horizontally, being
rounded and about three digits in diameter, for the length of a foot, and
serves aS a journal; thence, it bends to a height of a foot in a curve,
like the horn of the moon, after which it again extends straight out for
one foot; thus it comes about that this last straight portion, as it
revolves in an orbit becomes alternately a foot higher and a foot lower than
the first straight part. From this round iron crank there hangs the first flat
pump-rod, for the crank is fixed in a perforation in the upper end of this flat
pump-rod just as the iron key of the first set of ‘claws ’’ is fixed into the
lower end. In order to prevent the pump-rod from slipping off it, as it
could easily do, and that it may be taken off when necessary, its opening
is wider than the corresponding part of the crank, and it is fastened on
both sides by iron keys. To prevent friction, the ends of the pump-rods are
protected by iron plates or intervening leathers. This first pump-rod is
about twelve feet long, the other two are twenty-six feet, and each is a palm

BOOK VI.

ae ve ull , ; vy a AELZZAZA
a
‘

APE Mahe 457 eh LA tA she be
ree 7

S

Py XW
i mv
i Hi

y

—SECOND TANK.

E
I—FIRST PUMP ROD.

H—THE IRON SET IN THE AXLE.
L—THIRD PUMP ROD.
O—THIRD PISTON ROD.

G—Troucu.

A—SuaFt. B—Bottom pump. C—First TANK. D—SECOND PUMP.
K—SECOND PUMP ROD.

F—THIRD PUMP.

—SECOND

N
“Claws.”

M—FIRST PISTON ROD.

iy

QO—

P—LITTLE AXLES.

PISTON ROD.

186 BOOK VI.

wide and three digits thick. The sides of each pump-rod are covered and
protected by iron plates, which dre held on by iron screws, so that a part
which has received damage can be repaired. In the “claws” is set a
small round axle, a foot and a half long and two palms thick. The ends are
encircled by iron bands to prevent the iron journals which revolve in the
iron bearings of the wood from slipping out of it.15 From this little axle
the wooden “claws” extend two feet, with a width and thickness of six
digits ; they are three palms distant from each other, and both the inner and
outer sides are covered with iron plates. Two rounded iron keys two digits
thick are immovably fixed into the claws. The one of these keys per-
forates the lower end of the first pump-rod, and the upper end of the second
pump-rod which is held fast. The other key, which is likewise immovable,
perforates the iron end of the first piston-rod, which is bent in a curve and
is immovable. Each such piston-rod is thirteen feet long and three digits
thick, and descends into the first pipe of each pump to such depth that its
disc nearly reaches the valve-box. When it descends into the pipe, the
water, penetrating through the openings of the disc, raises the leather, and
when the piston-rod is raised the water presses down the leather, and this
supports its weight ; then the valve closes the box as a door closes an
entrance. The pipes are joined by two iron bands, one palm wide, one
outside the other, but the inner one is sharp all round that it may
fit into each pipe and hold them together. Although at the present time
pipes lack the inner band, still they have nipples by which they are joined
together, for the lower end of the upper one holds the upper end of the lower
one, each being hewn away for a length of seven digits, the former inside, the
latter outside, so that the one can fit into the other. When the piston-rod
descends into the first pipe, that valve which I have described is closed;
when the piston-rod is raised, the valve is opened so that the water can run
in through the perforations. Each one of such pumps is composed of two
lengths of pipe, each of which is twelve feet long, and the inside diameter is
seven digits. The lower one is placed in the sump of the shaft, or in a tank,
and its lower end is blocked by a round piece of wood, above which there are
six perforations around the pipe through which the water flows into it. The
upper part of the upper pipe has a notch one foot deep and a palm wide,
through which the water flows away into a tank or trough. Each tank is
two feet long and one foot wide and deep. There is the same number of
axles, ‘‘ claws,” and rods of each kind as there are pumps ; if there are three
pumps, there are only two tanks, because the sump of the shaft and the drain
of the tunnel take the place of two. The following is the way this machine
draws water from a shaft. The wheel being turned raises the first pump-
rod, and the pump-rod raises the first ‘‘ claw,” and thus also the second
pump-rod, and the first piston-rod ; then the second pump-rod raises the
second “claw,” and thus the third pump-rod and the second piston-rod ;
then the third pump-rod raises the third “claw” and the third piston-rod,

15This description certainly does not correspond in every particular with the
illustration.

BOOK VI. 187

for there hangs no pump-rod from the iron key of these claws, for it can be of
no use in the last pump. In turn, when the first pump-rod descends, each
set of ‘‘ claws”’ is lowered, each pump-rod and each piston-rod. And by this
system, at the same time the water is lifted into the tanks and drained out of
them ; from the sump at the bottom of the shaft it is drained out, and it
is poured into the trough of the tunnel. Further, around the main axle there
may be placed two water wheels, if the river supplies enough water to turn
them, and from the back part of each round iron crank, one or two pump-rods
can be hung, each of which can move the piston-rods of three pumps.
Lastly, it is necessary that the shafts from which the water is pumped out in
pipes should be vertical, for as in the case of the hauling machines, all pumps
which*have pipes do not draw the water so high if the pipes are inclined in
inclined shafts, as if they are placed vertically in vertical shafts.

If the river does not supply enough water-power to turn the last-
described pump, which happens because of the nature of the locality
or occurs during the summer season when there are daily droughts, a
machine is built with a wheel so low and light that the water of ever so little a

IK
WN S >
Si

A—WATER WHEEL OF UPPER MACHINE. B—Its pump. C—Its TROUGH. D-—-WHEEL OF
LOWER MACHINE. E—Its pump. F—RACcE.

188 BOOK VI.

stream can turn it. This water, falling into a race, runs therefrom on to a
second high and heavy wheel of a lower machine, whose pump lifts the water
out of a deep shaft. Since, however, the water of so small a stream cannot
alone revolve the lower water-wheel, the axle of the latter is turned at the start
with a crank worked by two men, but as soon as it has poured out into a pool
the water which has been drawn up by the pumps, the upper wheel draws
up this water by its own pump, and pours it into the race, from which it
flows on to the lower water-wheel and strikes its buckets. So both this
water from the mine, as well as the water of the stream, being turned down
the races.on to that subterranean wheel of the lower machine, turns it, and
water is pumped out of the deeper part of the shaft by means of two or
three pumps.!®

If the stream supplies enough water straightway to turn a higher and
heavier water-wheel, then a toothed drum is fixed to the other end of the
axle, and this turns the drum made of rundles on another axle set below it.
To each end of this lower axle there is fitted a crank of round iron curved
like the horns of the moon, of the kind employed in machines of this
description. This machine, since it has rows of pumps on each side,
draws great quantities of water.

Of the rag and chain pumps there are six kinds known to us, of which
the first is made as follows: A cave is dug under the surface of earth or in a
tunnel, and timbered on all sides by stout posts and planks, to prevent either
the men from being crushed or the machine from being broken by its collapse.
In this cave, thus timbered, is placed a water-wheel fitted to an angular axle.
The iron journals of the axle revolve in iron pillows, which are held in timbers
of sufficient strength. The wheel is generally twenty-four feet high,
occasionally thirty, and in no way different from those which are made for
grinding corn, except that it is a little narrower. The axle has on one side
a drum with a groove in the middle of its circumference, to which are fixed
many four-curved iron clamps. In these clamps catch the links of the chain,
which is drawn through the pipes out of the sump, and which again falls,
through a timbered opening, right down to the bottom into the sump to a
balancing drum. There is an iron band around the small axle of the —
balancing drum, each journal of which revolves in an iron bearing fixed to a
timber. The chain turning about this drum brings up the water by the
balls through the pipes. Each length of pipe is encircled and protected by
five iron bands, a palm wide and a digit thick, placed at equal distances from
each other; the first band on the pipe is shared in common with the
preceding length of pipe into which it is fitted, the last band with the succeed-
ing length of pipe which is fitted into it. Each length of pipe, except the
first, is bevelled on the outer circumference of the upper end to a distance
of seven digits and for a depth of three digits, in order that it may be inserted
into the length of pipe which goes before it ; each, except the last, is reamed
out on the inside of the lower end to a like distance, but to the depth

16There is a certain deficiency in the hydraulics of this machine.

\ \) ;

SHS ~
iv

t itt Y he y yy ) S
: RiRARINNenNNAEe = | # Uy ’ Sool

a

ba

F—CuRVED

I

}

my,

Wy

l|\\\

E—DRvUM COMPOSED OF RUNDLES.

—WHEEL WHOSE BUCKETS THE FORCE OF THE STREAM STRIKES.

VA ao
Dy
}) é
“ =)
y Ou
[=7)
°
w
5
°
i
wn
<3
QM
Bg
Oo
Zz
28
%
=)
<= ~
6 ;
HE
Wifi <9
i) =
i.
Se
3 ae,
qo

190 BOOK VI.

of a palm, that it may be able to take the end of the pipe which
follows. And each length of pipe is fixed with iron clamps to the timbers of

the shaft, that it may remain stationary. Through this continuous series —

of pipes, the water is drawn by the balls of the chain up out of the sump as
far as the tunnel, where it flows out into the drains through an aperture in
the highest pipe. The balls which lift the water are connected by the iron
links of the chain, and are six feet distant from one another ; they are made
of the hair of a horse’s tail sewn into a covering to prevent it from being
pulled out by the iron clamps on the drum ; the balls are of such size that
one can be held in each hand. If this machine is set up on the surface of
the earth, the stream which turns the water-wheel is led away through open-
air ditches ; if in a tunnel, the water is led away through the subterranean
drains. The buckets of the water-wheel, when struck by the impact of the
stream, move forward and turn the wheel, together with the drum, whereby
the chain is wound up and the balls expel the water through the pipes. If
the wheel of this machine is twenty-four feet in diameter, it draws water from a
shaft two hundred and ten feet deep ;_ if thirty feet in diameter, it will draw
water from a shaft two hundred and forty feet deep. But such work requires
a stream with greater water-power.

The next pump has two drums, two rows of pipes and two drawing-
chains whose balls lift out the water ; otherwise they are like the last pump.
This pump is usually built when an excessive amount of water flows into the
sump. These two pumps are turned by water-power ; indeed, water draws
water.

The following is the way of indicating the increase or decrease of the
water in an underground sump, whether it is pumped by this rag and chain
pump or by the first pump, or the third, or some other. From a beam which
is as high above the shaft as the sump is deep, is hung a cord, to one
end of which there is fastened a stone, the other end being attached to a
plank. The plank is lowered down by an iron wire fastened to the
other end ; when the stone is at the mouth of the shaft the plank
is right down the shaft in the sump, in which water it floats. This
plank is so heavy that it can drag down the wire and its iron clasp and
hook, together with the cord, and thus pull the stone upwards. Thus, as
the water decreases, the plank decends and the stone is raised; on the
contrary, when the water increases the plank rises and the stone is lowered.
When the stone nearly touches the beam, since this indicates that the water
has been exhausted from the sump by the pump, the overseer in charge of the
machine closes the water-race and stops the water-wheel : when the stone
nearly touches the ground at the side of the shaft, this indicates that the
sump is full of water which has again collected in it, because the water raises
the plank and thus the stone drags back both the rope and the iron wire;
then the overseer opens the water-race, whereupon the water of the stream
again strikes the buckets of the water-wheel and turns the pump. As
workmen generally cease from their labours on the yearly holidays, and

SS a ee —_—

Sig 5S Te ital cme eee Pass

Hl sll yall

SSS NANA TH

E—Drvum. F—CLAMPs.
L—RACE OF STREAM.

K—PIPE.

ANNAN AANA RAN URS RRB NNEN SEU NRANRB SE CO

D—PILLows.

I—Batts.

BOOK VI.

C—JouRNALS.

H—TIMBERs.

AUN W
NMI ‘DW
AW AIIRnrrar»rnwrAw A

B—AXLE.

ae bi
ay fi

A—WHEEL.
G—DRAWING-CHAIN.

ss cyeeparempsetii Nar iat pt

ei a, a a ee a a ee eee SS ee ee,

1g2 BOOK VI.

sometimes on working days, and are thus not always near the pump, and as
the pump, if necessary, must continue to draw water all the time, a bell rings
aloud continuously, indicating that this pump, or any other kind, is uninjured
and nothing is preventing its turning. The bell is hung by a cord from
a small wooden axle held in the timbers which stand over the shaft, and
a second long cord whose upper end is fastened to the small axle is lowered
into the shaft ; to the lower end of this cord is fastened a piece of wood ;
and as often as a cam on the main axle strikes it, so often does the bell ring
and give forth a sound. 5

The third pump of this kind is employed by miners when no river capable
of turning a water-wheel can be diverted, and it is made-as follows. They
first dig a chamber and erect strong timbers and planks to prevent the sides
from falling in, which would overwhelm the pump and kill the men. The
roof of the chamber is protected with contiguous timbers, so arranged that
the horses which pull the machine can travel over it. Next they again set up
sixteen beams forty feet long and one foot wide and thick, joined by clamps
at the top and spreading apart at the bottom, and they fit the lower end
of each beam into a separate sill laid flat on the ground, and join these by a
post ; thus there is created a circular area of which the diameter is fifty
feet. Through an opening in the centre of this’ area there descends an
upright square axle, forty-five feet long and a foot and a half wide and thick ;
its lower pivot revolves in a socket in a block laid flat on the ground in the
chamber, and the upper pivot revolves in a bearing in a beam which is mor-
tised into two beams at the summit beneath the clamps ; the lower pivot is
seventeen feet distant from either side of the chamber, #.e., from its front and
rear. At the height of a foot above its lower end, the axle has a toothed wheel,
the diameter of which is twenty-two feet. This wheel is composed of four
spokes and eight rim pieces ; the spokes are fifteen feet long and three-
quarters of a foot wide and thick!”?; one end of them is mortised in the axle,
the other in the two rims where they are joined together. These rims are three-
quarters of a foot thick and one foot wide, and from them there rise and
project upright teeth three-quarters of a foot high, half a foot wide, and six
digits thick. These teeth turn a second horizontal axle by means of a drum
composed of twelve rundles, each three feet long and six digits wide and
thick. This drum, being turned, causes the axle to revolve, and around this
axle there is a drum having iron clamps with four-fold curves in which catch
the links of a chain, which draws water through pipes by means of balls.
The iron journals of this horizontal axle revolve on pillows which are set in
the centre of timbers. Above the roof of the chamber there are mortised
into the upright axle the ends of two beams which rise obliquely ; the upper
ends of these beams support double cross-beams, likewise mortised to the
axle. In the outer end of each cross-beam there is mortised a small wooden
piece which appears to hang down ; in this wooden piece there is similarly

17The dimensions given in this description for the various members do not tally.

rT ae om i

°c eaten st

BOOK VI.

A—UPRIGHT AXLE. B—TooTHED WHEEL. C—TEETH.
E—DrvUM WHICH IS MADE OF RUNDLES. F—SECOND DRUM.
H—THE BALLs.

D—HorIZONTAL AXLE.
G—DRAWING-CHAIN.

194 BOOK VI.

mortised at the lower end a short board ; this has an iron key which engages
a chain, and this chain again a pole-bar. This machine, which draws water
from a shaft two hundred and forty feet deep, is worked by thirty-two horses ;
eight of them work for four hours, and then these rest for twelve hours, and
the same number take their place. This kind of machine is employed at the
foot of the Harz'* mountains and in the neighbourhood. Further, if
necessity arises, several pumps of this kind are often built for the purpose of
mining one vein, but arranged differently in different localities varying
according to the depth. At Schemnitz, in the Carpathian mountains, there
are three pumps, of which the lowest lifts water from the lowest sump to
the first drains, through which it flows into the second sump ; the intermediate
one lifts from the second sump to the second drain, from which it flows into
the third sump ; and the upper one lifts it to the drains of the tunnel, through
which it flows away. This system of three machines of this kind is turned

by ninety-six horses ; these horses go down to the machines by an inclined —

Hiliian

iii

Wrgceeeny
=

ed —
= on

——— Fs oe 7 Hf
} eeu sll =
ae mh ges Cuff
ise i uuu 5 a Lf=,
ee MS >
— y = = _—

us ass mms
Came =e =e Bp
A—AxLeE. B—Drum. C—Drawinc-cuain. D—Batts. E—C ramps.

18M elibocian,—the Harz.

a et

BOOK VI. aes

shaft, which slopes and twists like a screw and gradually descends. The
lowest of these machines is set in a deep place, which is distant from the
surface of the ground 660 feet.

The fourth species of pump belongs to the same genera, and is made
as follows. Two timbers are erected, and in openings in them, the ends of a
barrel revolve. Two or four strong men turn the barrel, that is to say, one
or two pull the cranks, and one or two push them, and in this way help the
others ; alternately another two or four men take their place. The barrel
of this machine, just like the horizontal axle of the other machines, has a
drum whose iron clamps catch the links of a drawing-chain. Thus water
is drawn through the pipes by the balls from a depth of forty-eight feet.
Human strength cannot draw water higher than this, because such very
heavy labour exhausts not only men, but even horses ; only water-power
can drive continuously a drum of this kind. Several pumps of this kind, as
of the last, are often built for the purpose of mining on a single vein,
but they are arranged differently for different positions and depths.

A =

7} it _ —— > = Le : SS yy SS

{ (@iy — -— SS ~ SS SS S S89 SSSQ .
STi » 9 3 & \s E

aS \ SSN Ka — i é)

SSS 2 = =.

M&S £25 ai t=

a . y SSN

A—AXLEs. B—LEVERs. C—TooTHED DRUM. D—DRUM MADE OF RUNDLES,
E—DRrvuM IN WHICH IRON CLAMPS ARE FIXED.

SANS

196 BOOK VI.

The fifth pump of this kind is partly like the third and partly like the
fourth, because it is turned by strong men like the last, and like the third
it has two axles and three drums, though each axle is horizontal. The
journals of each axle are so fitted in the pillows of the beams that they cannot
fly out ; the lower axle has a crank at one end and a toothed drum at the
other end ; the upper axle has at one end a drum made of rundles, and at
the other end, a drum to which are fixed iron clamps, in which the links of a
chain catch in the same way as before, and from the same depth, draw water
through pipes by means of balls. This revolving machine is turned by two
pairs of men alternately, for one pair stands working while the other sits
taking a rest ; while they are engaged upon the task of turning, one pulls
the crank and the other pushes, and the drums help to make the pump turn
more easily.

The sixth pump of this kind likewise has two axles. At one end of the
lower axle is a wheel which is turned by two men treading, this is twenty-
three feet high and four feet wide, so that one man may stand alongside
the other. At the other end of this axle is a toothed wheel. The upper!®
axle has two drums and one wheel ; the first drum is made of rundles, and to
the other there are fixed the iron clamps. The wheel is like the one on the
second machine which is chiefly used for drawing earth and broken rock
out of shafts. The treaders, to prevent themselves from falling, grasp in
their hands poles which are fixed to the inner sides of the wheel. When
they turn this wheel, the toothed drum being made to revolve, sets in motion
the other drum which is made of rundles, by which means again the links
of the chain catch to the cleats of the third drum and draw water through
pipes by means of balls,—from a depth of sixty-six feet.

But the largest machine of all those which draw water is the one which
follows. First of all a reservoir is made in a timbered chamber ; this reser-
voir is eighteen feet long and twelve feet wide and high. Into this reservoir
a stream is diverted through a water-race or through the tunnel; it has two
entrances and the same number of gates. Levers are fixed to the upper part
of these gates, by which they can be raised and let down again, so that by one
way the gates are opened and in the other way closed. Beneath the openings
are two plank troughs which carry the water flowing from the reservoir, and
pour it on to the buckets of the water-wheel, the impact of which turns the
wheel. The shorter trough carries the water, which strikes the buckets
that turn the wheel toward the reservoir, and the longer trough carries
the water which strikes those buckets that turn the wheel in the opposite
direction. The casing or covering of the wheel is made of joined boards to
which strips are affixed on the inner side. The wheel itself is thirty-six feet
in diameter, and is mortised to an axle, and it has, as I have already said,
two rows of buckets, of which one is set the opposite way to the other, so
that the wheel may be turned toward the reservoir or in the opposite

18TIn the original text this is given as ‘‘ lower,” and appears to be an error.

Sa

Pe ce A tN EEN Sg

BOOK VI. 197

WHS LA vo
VY
:

. i cS
Yf/ =| BZ ; =
INGE N kN i NOUN
Yi NX +f | |
a 1 it
\ eee
|
)

i

me

RO VPGanwR IS

Z

iwi
Wy

yi

A—AXLES, B—WHEEL WHICH IS TURNED BY TREADING. C—TooTHED WHEEL,
D—DRUM MADE OF RUNDLES. E—DruM TO WHICH ARE FIXED IRON CLAMPS.
F—SECOND WHEEL. G—BALILs,

198 BOOK VI.

direction. The axle is square and is thirty-five feet long and two feet thick
and wide. Beyond the wheel, at a distance of six feet, the axle has four hubs,
one foot wide and thick, each one of which is four feet distant from the next ;
to these hubs are fixed by iron nails as many pieces of wood as are necessary
to cover the hubs, and, in order that the wood pieces may fit tight, they are
broader on the outside and narrower on the inside; in this way a drum is
made, around which is wound a chain to whose ends are hooked leather bags.
The reason why a drum of this kind is made, is that the axle may be kept in
good condition, because this drum when it becomes worn away by use can
be repaired easily. Further along the axle, not far from the end, is another
drum one foot broad, projecting two feet on all sides around the axle. And
to this, when occasion demands, a brake is applied forcibly and holds back
the machine; this kind of brake I have explained before. Near the axle,
in place of a hopper, there is a floor with a considerable slope, having in
front of the shaft a width of fifteen feet and the same at the back; at each

side of it there is a stout post carrying an iron chain which has a large hook.

Five men operate this machine; one lets down the doors which close the
reservoir gates, or by drawing down the levers, opens the water-races; this
man, who is the director of this machine, stands in a hanging cage beside the
reservoir. When one bag has been drawn out nearly as far as the sloping

floor, he closes the water gate in order that the wheel may be stopped ; when ~

the bag has been emptied he opens the other water gate, in order that the
other set of buckets may receive the water and drive the wheel in the opposite
direction. If he cannot close the water-gate quickly enough, and the water
continues to flow, he calls out to his comrade and bids him raise the brake
upon the drum and stop the wheel. Two men alternately empty the bags,
one standing on that part of the floor which is in front of the shaft,
and the other on that part which is at the back. When the bag has been
nearly drawn up—of which fact a certain link of the chain gives warning—the
man who stands on the one part of the floor, catches a large iron hook in one
link of the chain, and pulls out all the subsequent part of the chain toward
the floor, where the bag is emptied by the other man. The object of this
hook is to prevent the chain, by its own weight, from pulling down the
other empty bag, and thus pulling the whole chain from its axle and
,dropping it down the shaft. His comrade in the work, seeing that the bag
filled with water has been nearly drawn out, calls to the director of the
‘machine and bids him close the water of the tower so that there will be time
to empty the bag ; this being emptied, the director of the machine first of
all slightly opens the other water-gate of the tower to allow the end of the
chain, together with the empty bag, to be started into the shaft again, and
then opens entirely the water-gates. When that part of the chain which

has been pulled on to the-floor has been wound up again, and has been let —

down over the shaft from the drum, he takes out the large hook which was
fastened into a link of the chain. The fifth man stands in a sort of cross-cut
beside the sump, that he may not be hurt, if it should happen that a link

eet 5

ay

BOOK VI. 199

BS DMO SACO
SOA An
RS RS

ESRRA

i
7

Fabel

{ SHAMAN ERNNANT

LLM ee,

y

)

Z

YS

Y

Z

YZ

Z

: Z

- Z
; Zs
x Zs

b Z

: Z

t Z

a. Z
\ Z i}
a Zr

Z

d A

f Y
4 Z=
f Ze

i Z

Z

| Z
WM

—— SO —"s AN
a SSS AN

AANA SARS
OOS GG.

NOAA y SNA

SSH MMMM Wyss DOI

A—REsERVoIR. B—Race. C, D-cL sven. E, e Tioteas t UNDER THE WATER GATES.

~. G, H—DouBLE ROWS OF BUCKETS. I—AxLE. K—LarGER DRUM. L—DRAWING-CHAIN.

M—Bac. N—HANGING cAaGE. O—MAN WHO DIRECTS THE MACHINE. P, Q—MEN
EMPTYING BAGS.

200 BOOK VI.

is broken and part of the chain or anything else should fall down ;_ he guides
the bag with a wooden shovel, and fills it with water if it fails to take
in the water spontaneously. In these days, they sew an iron band into the
top of each bag that it may constantly remain open, and when lowered into
the sump may fill itself with water, and there is no need for a man to act as
governor of the bags. Further, in these days, of those men who stand on
the floor the one empties the bags, and the other closes the gates of the
reservoir and opens them again, and the same man usually fixes the large
hook in the link of the chain. In this way, three men only are employed in
working this machine; or even—since sometimes the one who empties the
bag presses the brake which is raised against the other drum and thus stops
the wheel—two men take upon themselves the whole labour.

But enough of haulage machines; I will now speak of ventilating
machines. If a shaft is very deep and no tunnel reaches to it, or no drift
from another shaft connects with it, or when a tunnel is of great length and
no shaft reaches to it, then the air does not replenish itself. In such a case it
weighs heavily on the miners, causing them to breathe with difficulty, and
sometimes they are even suffocated, and burning lamps are also extinguished.
There is, therefore, a necessity for machines which the Greeks call
mvevnartxae and the Latins spéritales—though they do not give forth any
sound—which enable the miners to breathe easily and carry on their work.

These devices are of three genera. The first receives and diverts into
the shaft the blowing of the wind, and this genus is divided into three species,
of which the first is as follows. Over the shaft—to which no tunnel connects—
are placed three sills a little longer than the shaft, the first over the front,
the second over the middle, and the third over the back of the shaft. Their
ends have openings, through which pegs, sharpened at the bottom, are driven
deeply into the ground so as to hold them immovable, in the same way that
the sills of the windlass are fixed. Each of these sills is mortised into each
of three cross-beams, of which one is at the right side of the shaft, the second
at the left, and the third in the middle. To the second sill and the second
cross-beam—each of which is placed over the middle of the shaft—planks
are fixed which are joined in such a manner that the one which precedes
always fits into the groove of the one which follows. In this way four angles
and the same number of intervening hollows are created, which collect the
winds that blow from all directions. The planks are roofed above with a
cover made in a circular shape, and are open below, in order that the wind may
not be diverted upward and escape, but may be carried downward ; and there-
by the winds of necessity blow into the shafts through these four openings.
However, there is no need to roof this kind of machine in those localities in
which it can be so placed that the wind can blow down through its topmost

part.

j

NRE ee Oe Lee a Pe a ee ee

BOOK VI. 7 201

A—SiLts. B—PoINTED sTAKES. C—Cross-BEAMS. D—UprIGHT PLANKS.
E—Ho.titows. F—Winps. G—Coverinc pisc:. H—Snarts. I—MAcHINE
WITHOUT A COVERING.

The second machine of this genus turns the blowing wind into a shaft
through a long box-shaped conduit, which is made of as many lengths of
planks, joined together, as the depth of the shaft requires ; the joints are
smeared with fat, glutinous clay moistened with water. The mouth of this con-
duit either projects out of the shaft to a height of three or four feet, or it does
not project ; if it projects, it is shaped like a rectangular funnel, broader and
wider at the top than the conduit itself, that it may the more easily gather
the wind; if it does not project, it is not broader than the conduit, but
planks are fixed to it away from the direction in which the wind is blowing,
which catch the wind and force it into the conduit.

The third of this genus of machine is made of a pipe or pipes and
a barrel. Above the uppermost pipe there is erected a wooden barrel, four

202 BOOK VI.

A—PROJECTING MOUTH OF CONDUIT. B—PLANKS FIXED TO THE MOUTH OF THE CONDUIT
WHICH DOES NOT PROJECT.

feet high and three feet in diameter, bound with wooden hoops; it has a
square blow-hole always open, which catches the breezes and guides them
down either by a pipe into a conduit or by many pipes into the shaft. To
the top of the upper pipe is attached a circular table as thick as
the bottom of the barrel, but of a little less diameter, so that the barrel may be
turned around on it ; the pipe projects out of the table and is fixed in a
round opening in the centre of the bottom of the barrel. To the end of the
pipe a perpendicular axle is fixed which runs through the centre of the barrel
into a hole in the cover, in which it is fastened, in the same way as at the
bottom. Around this fixed axle and the table on the pipe, the movable
barrel is easily turned by a zephyr, or much more by a wind, which govern
the wing on it. This wing is made of thin boards and fixed to the upper
part of the barrel on the side furthest away from the blow-hole ; this, as I
have said, is square and always open. The wind, from whatever quarter of

BOOK VI. 203

the world it blows, drives the wing straight toward the opposite direction, in
which way the barrel turns the blow-hole towards the wind itself; the
blow-hole receives the wind, and it is guided down into the shaft by means
of the conduit or pipes.

*
NAMA

Sa FES
1, SN

<<

A—WOoOoODEN BARRELS. B—Hoops. C—BLOwW-HOLEs. D—PIPE.
E—TABLE. F—AXLE. G—OPENING IN THE BOTTOM OF THE BARREL.
H—WInG.

The second genus of blowing machine is made with fans, and is likewise
varied and of many forms, for the fans are either fitted to a windlass barrel
or to an axle. If to an axle, they are either contained in a hollow drum,
which is made of two wheels and a number of boards joining them together,
or else in a box-shaped casing. The drum is stationary and closed on the
sides, except for round holes of such size that the axle may turn in them ;
it has two square blow-holes, of which the upper one receives the air, while
the lower one empties into the conduit through which the air is led down the
shaft. The ends of the axle, which project on each side of the drum, are
supported by forked posts or hollowed beams plated with thick iron ; one
end of the axle has a crank, while in the other end are fixed four rods with
thick heavy ends, so that they weight the axle, and when turned, make it

204

MH A

WX

—
| | Yj
nthe ZA | ie
4 Sy Uj iy)
= ee y =
| ®% os Z W// 2 y
4 qi ~ %
Rai ee
2
ro e =~
—— ~ ‘ en Wit W F.
—_ ZZ
A—Droum. B—Box-SHAPED CASING.

E —Conpbvwulirt. F—AXLE.

VI.
t Cina
=
H
nt
vii
Sis
Z Wy,
4
Ke
MCs
yy 7
4 Ly
, Y
i ‘dy Ly
pitt YY
Ss) { y? ‘
Y, NS
ZY 4
gs
)
DW)
C—BLOW-HOLE. D—SECOND HOLE.

G—LEVER OF AXLE. H—Robs.

71 ee

BOOK VI. 205

prone to motion as it revolves. And so, when the workman turns the axle
by the crank, the fans, the description of which I will give a little later, draw
in the air by the blow-hole, and force it through the other blow-hole which
leads to the conduit, and through this conduit the air penetrates into the
shaft.

The one with the box-shaped casing is furnished with just the same
things as the drum, but the drum is far superior to the box ;_ for the fans so
fill the drum that they almost touch it on every side, and drive into the
conduit all the air that has been accumulated ; but they cannot thus fill
the box-shaped casing, on account of its angles, into which the air partly
retreats ; therefore it cannot be as useful as the drum. The kind with a
box-shaped casing is not only placed on the ground, but is also set up on timbers
like a windmill, and its axle, in place of a crank, has four sails outside,
like the sails of a windmill. When these are struck by the wind they turn
the axle, and in this way its fans—which are placed within the casing—drive

~
~

df a4 19: E
‘ . la ®. >

a
Bs PN

= ’ ans y 3 hed 3
> YS Ws \ “A ,
W » ‘ 4 ' "
ve? G % Win itil}
g Fé \ = 4 =
Zp DALE =

A— Box-SHAPED CASING PLACED ON THE GROUND. B—ItTs BLOW-HOLE. C—ITS AXLE
WITH FANS. D—CRANK OF THE AXLE. E—Rops oF SAME. F—CASING SET ON TIMBERS.
G—SAILS WHICH THE AXLE HAS OUTSIDE THE CASING.

16

206 BOOK VI.

the air through the blow-hole and the conduit into the shaft. Although
this machine has no need of men whom it is necessary to pay to work the
crank, still when the sky is devoid of wind, as it often is, the machine does
not turn, and it is therefore less suitable than the others for ventilating a shaft.
In the kind where the fans are fixed to an axle, there is generally a
hollow stationary drum at one end of the axle, and on the other end is fixed
a drum made of rundles. This rundle drum is turned by the toothed wheel
of a lower axle, which is itself turned by a wheel whose buckets receive the
impetus of water. If the locality supplies an abundance of water this
machine is most useful, because to turn the crank does not need men
who require pay, and because it forces air without cessation through the

conduit into the shaft.

=

ja His J WANA\| | :
2 _————. t % = .
¢ ih 2 a = Hil ' \) 7)
SS
Zand 31 : SY Ee
7 —_ ’
\

Set :

4 44 thy.
(ld tis > i Le
Peel TT eel
UOT

il

WME,

AN N

FA seal Pam
Hk

A—Ho.titow prum. B—lITs BLOW-HOLE. C—AXLE wiITH FANS. D—DrRvuM
WHICH IS MADE OF RUNDLES. E—LoweErR AXLE. F—ITS TOOTHED WHEEL.
G—WATER WHEEL.

Of the fans which are fixed on to an axle contained in a drum or box,
there are three sorts. The first sort is made of thin boards of such length
and width as the height and width of the drum or box require ; the second

BOOK VI. 207

sort is made of boards of the same width, but shorter, to which are bound
long thin blades of poplar or some other flexible wood ;_ the third sort has
boards like the last, to which are bound double and triple rows of goose
feathers. This last is less used than the second, which in turn is less used
than the first. The boards of the fan are mortised into the quadrangular
parts of the barrel axle.

A—FIRST KIND OF FAN. B—SECOND KIND OF FAN. C—THIRD KIND OF
FAN. D—QUADRANGULAR PART OF AXLE. E—ROUND PART OF SAME.
F—CRANK.

Blowing machines of the third genus, which are no less varied and of no
fewer forms than those of the second genus, are made with bellows, for by its
blasts the shafts and tunnels are not only furnished with air through conduits
or pipes, but they can also be cleared by suction of their heavy and pestilential
vapours. In the latter case, when the bellows is opened it draws the
vapours from the conduits through its blow-hole and sucks these vapours
into itself ; in the former case, when it is compressed, it drives the air through
its nozzle into the conduits or pipes. They are compressed either by a man,

208 BOOK VI.

or bya horse or by water-power ; if by a man, the lower board of a large bellows is
fixed to the timbers above the conduit which projects out of the shaft, and so
placed that when the blast is blown through the conduit, its nozzle is
set in the conduit. When it is desired to suck out heavy or pestilential
vapours, the blow-hole of the bellows is fitted all round the mouth of the
conduit. Fixed to the upper bellows board is a lever which couples
with another running downward from a little axle, into which it is
mortised so that it may remain immovable ; the iron journals of this little
axle revolve in openings of upright posts ; and so when the workman pulls
down the lever the upper board of the bellows is raised, and at the same time
the flap of the blow-hole is dragged open by the force of the wind. If the
nozzle of the bellows is enclosed in the conduit it draws pure air into itself,
but if its blow-hole is fitted all round the mouth of the conduit it exhausts
the heavy and pestilential vapours out of the conduit and thus from the
shaft, even if it is one hundred and twenty feet deep. A stone placed on the
upper board of the bellows depresses it and then the flap of the blow-hole is

A—SMALLER PART OF SHAFT. B—SQUARE CONDUIT. C—BELLOws. D—LARGER PART
OF SHAFT.

_

Fa AO LW ah oo ll

| RS ET OR Pe ee ee ROL

Peer ee

da Me SIS

BOOK VI. 209

closed. The bellows, by the first method, blows fresh air into the conduit
through its nozzle, and by the second method blows out through the nozzle
the heavy and pestilential vapours which have been collected. In this
latter case fresh air enters through the larger part of the shaft, and the miners
getting the benefit of it can sustain their toil. A certain smaller part of the
shaft which forms a kind of estuary, requires to be partitioned off from the
other larger part by uninterrupted lagging, which reaches from the top of the
shaft to the bottom ; through this part the long but narrow conduit reaches
down nearly to the bottom of the shaft.

When no shaft has been sunk to such depth as to meet a tunnel driven
far into a mountain, these machines should be built in such a manner that
the workman can move them about. Close by the drains of the tunnel
through which the water flows away, wooden pipes should be placed and
joined tightly together in such a manner that they can hold the air ;_ these
should reach from the mouth of the tunnel to its furthest end. At the mouth
of the tunnel the bellows should be so placed that through its nozzle it can
blow its accumulated blasts into the pipes or the conduit ; since one blast

A—TunnEL. B—Pirz. C—No0ZZLE OF DOUBLE BELLOWS.

210 BOOK VI.

always drives forward another, they penetrate into the tunnel and change
the air, whereby the miners are enabled to continue their work.

If heavy vapours need to be drawn off from the tunnels, generally three
double or triple bellows, without nozzles and closed in the forepart, are placed
upon benches. A workman compresses them by treading with his feet, just
as persons compress those bellows of the organs which give out varied and
sweet sounds in churches. These heavy vapours are thus drawn along the
air-pipes and through the blow-hole of the lower bellows board, and are
expelled through the blow-hole of the upper bellows board into the open
air, or into some shaft or drift. This blow-hole has a flap-valve, which the
noxious blast opens, as often as it passes out. Since one volume of air con-
stantly rushes in to take the place of another which has been drawn out by
the bellows, not only is the heavy air drawn out of a tunnel as great as 1,200
feet long, or even longer, but also the wholesome air is naturally drawn in
through that part of the tunnel which is open outside the conduits. In this way
the air is changed, and the miners are enabled to carry on the work they have
begun. If machines of this kind had not been invented, it would be necessary
for miners to drive two tunnels into a mountain, and continually, at every
two hundred feet at most, to sink a shaft from the upper tunnel to the
lower one, that the air passing into the one, and descending by the shafts
into the other, would be kept fresh for the miners ;_ this could not be done
without great expense.

There are two different machines for operating, by means of horses, the
above described bellows. The first of these machines has on its axle a
wooden wheel, the rim of which is covered all the way round by steps; a
horse is kept continually within bars, like those within which horses are held
to be shod with iron, and by treading these steps with its feet it turns the wheel,
together with the axle ; the cams on the axle press down the sweeps which
compress the bellows. The way the instrument is made which raises the
bellows again, and also the benches on which the bellows rest, I will explain
more clearly in Book IX. Each bellows, if it draws heavy vapours
out of a tunnel, blows them out of the hole in the upper board ; if they are
drawn out of a shaft, it blows them out through its nozzle. The wheel has
a round hole, which is transfixed with a pole when the machine needs to be
stopped.

The second machine has two axles; the upright one is turned by a horse,
and its toothed drum turns a drum made of rundles on a horizontal axle ;
in other respects this machine is like the last. Here, also, the nozzles of
the bellows placed in the conduits blow a blast into the shaft or tunnel.

In the same way that this last machine can refresh the heavy air of a
shaft or tunnel, so also could the old system of ventilating by the constant
shaking of linen cloths, which Pliny #° has explained ;_ the air not only grows

20Pliny (xxx1, 28). ‘In deep wells, the occurrence of stdphurata or aluminosa
‘vapor is fatal to the diggers. The presence of this peril is shown ifa lighted lamp let down
‘‘into the well is extinguished. If so, other wells are sunk to the right and left, which carry
“off these noxious gases. Apart from these evils, the air itself becomes noxious with depth,
‘“‘ which can be remedied by constantly shaking linen cloths, thus setting the air in motion.”

BOOK VI. 2iI
x : * j ===> &s - es
= ° — N = Z
bs = ? pelea wu 4 . i - ao
= r4
i = -Z
| igs £7 2

—_
{SN |
¥ ir. \ -
. ye ef
~~ af
= } << = = =
= ner tt =e =
x - ‘i ed ‘4 Pa me :
) t EN CS : 1
z BES : 5S =
RS oO oC ue =
™\ie ‘Ss 3:Y PN cS
: \ HY) | Roe =
4 ag | |= = Z
(“= 2 . = y
oe, mee) =“ LZi
y ° = : Ze Z
D> “ 7
: is H I =
7 ° ° AB
“a =
= » B=
tz ° ° ‘ = ZN
g hi A=
|" Tee © :
Ly e
— © 2
p = ° ° ica
aS SS : herr nccol
—y 55 A ° eo ° M B&B
~
~~ A]
s BN 2
a 8 | — —_~
‘ Aw Fe ; '
; q
BS Z wy —
bn d F =
we WAC Z Wy
® 2 D Se .
BG 7 ; : a
= Z Z ;
Z f i , .
p : y —\% aS
Z \\ oa
= Z A \ A>. TeX :
4 - : : YES
— >] : SS 4
S z cS. ‘ tie
= = Z ZB ———s SX ~ Vy "4 le . ;
—_— ——e 4A gy Y
Se Rage

A

A—MACHINE FIRST DESCRIBED. B—THIS WORKMAN, TREADING WITH HIS FEET, IS COM-

PRESSING THE BELLOWS. C—BELLOWS WITHOUT NOZZLES.
E—Conpwulirts.

VAPOURS OR BLASTS ARE BLOWN OUT.

MACHINE DESCRIBED. H—WoopEN WHEEL. I—ITs sTEPS. K—Bars.
N—THIRD MACHINE DESCRIBED.

SAME WHEEL. M—PoLte.

D—HOoLE BY WHICH HEAVY
F—TuNNEL.

G—SECOND
L—HOLteE IN

O—UPRIGHT AXLE.
P—ITs TOOTHED DRUM. Q—HoRIZONTAL AXLE. R—ITS DRUM WHICH IS MADE OF RUNDLES.

212 BOOK VI.

A—TuNNEL. B—LINEN CLOTH,

heavier with the depth of a shaft, of which fact he has made mention, but
also with the length of a tunnel.

The climbing machines of miners are ladders, fixed to one side of the shaft,
and these reach either to the tunnel or to the bottom of the shaft. I need not
describe how they are made, because they are used everywhere, and need
not so much skill in their construction as care in fixing them. However,
miners go down into mines not only by the steps of ladders, but they are
also lowered into them while sitting on a stick or a wicker basket, fastened to
the rope of one of the three drawing machines which I described at first.
Further, when the shafts are much inclined, miners and other workmen
sit in the dirt which surrounds their loins and slide down in the same way
that boys do in winter-time when the water on some hillside has congealed
with the cold, and to prevent themselves from falling, one arm is wound about
a rope, the upper end of which is fastened to a beam at the mouth of the shaft,
and the lower end to a stake fixed in the bottom of the shaft. In these three
ways miners descend into the shafts. A fourth way may be mentioned
which is employed when men and horses go down to the underground

Sa ee,

as a

BOOK VI.

aS
my E/ iy),
fo

\

rr SS = \ wl {

Rea >>\

NB

RU

a

Us iil H} Y a Wy

wR

RR

‘

B—By SITTING ON A STICK. C—By

D—DESCENDING BY STEPS CUT IN THE ROCK.

A—DESCENDING INTO THE SHAFT BY LADDERS.
SITTING ON THE DIRT.

214 BOOK VI.

machines and come up again, that is by inclined shafts which are twisted like
a screw and have steps cut in the rock, as I have already described.

It remains for me to speak of the ailments and accidents of miners, and of
the methods by which they can guard against these, for we should always
devote more care to maintaining our health, that we may freely perform our
bodily functions, than to making profits. Of the illnesses, some affect the
joints, others attack the lungs, some the eyes, and finally some are fatal to
men.

Where water in shafts is abundant and very cold, it frequently injures
the limbs, for cold is harmful to the sinews. To meet this, miners should
make themselves sufficiently high boots of rawhide, which protect their
legs from the cold water; the man who does not follow this advice will
suffer much ill-health, especially when he reaches old age. On the other
hand, some mines are so dry that they are entirely devoid of water, and this
dryness causes the workmen even greater harm, for the dust which is stirred
and beaten up by digging penetrates into the windpipe and lungs, and
produces difficulty in breathing, and the disease which the Greeks call
acJua. If the dust has corrosive qualities, it eats away the lungs, and
implants consumption in the body; hence in the mines of the Carpathian
Mountains women are found who have married seven husbands, all of whom
this terrible consumption has carried off toa premature death. At Altenberg
in Meissen there is found in the mines black pompholyx, which eats wounds
and ulcers to the bone ; this also corrodes iron, for which reason the keys
of their sheds are made of wood. Further, there is a certain kind of cadmia *
which eats away the feet of the workmen when they have become wet, and
similarly their hands, and injures their lungs and eyes. Therefore, for their

21This is given in the German translation as kobelt. The kobelt (or cobaltum of Agricola)
was probably arsenical-cobalt, a mineral common in the Saxon mines. The origin of the
application of the word cobalt to a mineral appears to lie in the German word for the gnomes
and goblins (kobelts) so universal to Saxon miners’ imaginations,—this word in turn probably
being derived from the Greek cobali (mimes). The suffering described above seems to have
been associated with the malevolence of demons, and later the word for these demons was
attached to this disagreeable ore. A quaint series of mining “‘ sermons,” by Johann Mathesius,
entitled Sarepta oder Bergpostill, Niirnberg, 1562, contains the following passage (p. 154)
which bears out this view. We retain the original and varied spelling of cobalt and also add
another view of Mathesius, involving an experience of Solomon and Hiram of Tyre with some
mines containing cobalt.

“Sometimes, however, from dry hard veins a certain black, greenish, grey or ash-
*‘ coloured earth is dug out, often containing good ore, and this mineral being burnt gives strong
“fumes and is extracted like ‘tutty.’ It is called cadmia fossilis. You miners call it cobelt.
“Germans call the Black Devil and the old Devil’s furies, old and black cobel, who injure people
‘cand their cattle with their witchcrafts. Now the Devil is a wicked, malicious spirit, who
‘shoots his poisoned darts into the hearts of men, as sorcerers and witches shoot at the limbs
“of cattle and men, and work much evil and mischief with cobalt or hipomane or horses’
“poison. After quicksilver and rotgiiltigen ore, are cobalt and wismuth fumes; these are the
‘most poisonous of the metals, and with them one can kill flies, mice, cattle, birds, and men.
‘So, fresh cobalt and kisswasser (vitriol ?) devour the hands and feet of miners, and the dust
“and fumes of cobalt kill many mining people and workpeople who do much work among the
“fumes of the smelters. Whether or not the Devil and his hellish crew gave their name to
“ cobelt, or kobelt, nevertheless, cobelt is a poisonous and injurious metal even if it contains
“silver. I find in I. Kings 9, the word Cabul. When Solomon presented twenty towns in
“‘ Galilee to the King of Tyre, Hiram visited them first, and would not have them, and said the
“land was well named Cabul as Joshua had christenedit. It is certain from Joshua that these

tg eae Bree

BOOK VI. 215

digging they should make for themselves not only boots of rawhide, but gloves
long enough to reach to the elbow, and they should fasten loose veils over their
faces; the dust will then neither be drawn through these into their wind-
pipes and lungs, nor will it fly into their eyes. Not dissimilarly, among the
Romans the makers of vermilion took precautions against breathing its fatal
dust.

Stagnant air, both that which remains in a shaft and that which remains
in a tunnel, produces a difficulty in breathing ; the remedies for this evil
are the ventilating machines which I have explained above. There is another
illness even more destructive, which soon brings death to men who work
in those shafts or levels or tunnels in which the hard rock is broken by fire.
Here the air is infected with poison, since large and small veins and seams
in the rocks exhale some subtle poison from the minerals, which is driven
out by the fire, and this poison itself is raised with the smoke not unlike
pompholyx,* which clings to the upper part of the walls in the works in which
ore is smelted. If this poison cannot escape from the ground, but falls down
into the pools and floats on their surface, it often causes danger, for if at any
time the water is disturbed through a stone or anything else, these fumes rise
again from the pools and thus overcome the men, by being drawn in with their
breath ; this is even much worse if the fumes of the fire have not yet all
escaped. The bodies of living creatures who are infected with this poison
generally swell immediately and lose all movement and feeling, and they die
without pain ; men even in the act of climbing from the shafts by the
steps of ladders fall back into the shafts when the poison overtakes them,
because their hands do not perform their office, and seem to them to be round
and spherical, and likewise their feet. If by good fortune the injured
ones escape these evils, for a little while they are pale and look like
dead men. At such times, no one should descend into the mine or into the
neighbouring mines, or if he is in them he should come out quickly. Prudent
and skilled miners burn the piles of wood on Friday, towards evening, and

“twenty towns lay in the Kingdom of Aser, not far from our Sarepta, and that there had been
“iron and copper mines there, as Moses says in another place. Inasmuch, then, as these twenty
‘* places were mining towns, and cobelé is a metal, it appears quite likely that the mineral took
“its name from the land of Cabul. History and circumstances bear out the theory that Hiram
“was an excellent and experienced miner, who obtained much gold from Ophir, with which he
“honoured Solomon. Therefore, the Great King wished to show his gratitude to his good
“neighbour by honouring a miner with mining towns. But because the King of Tyre was
“ skilled in mines, he first inspected the new mines, and saw that they only produced poor
“metal and much wild cobelt ore, therefore he preferred to find his gold by digging the gold
‘and silver in India rather than by getting it by the cobelf veins and ore. For truly, cobelt
“ores are injurious, and are usually so embedded in other ore that they rob them in the
“ fire and consume (madtet und frist) much lead before the silver is extracted, and when this
pea" it is especially speysig. Therefore Hiram made a good reckoning as to the mines
se would not undertake all the expense of working and smelting, and so returned Solomon
“the twenty towns.”

Pliny (XXXII, 4°). “Those employed in the works preparing vermilion, cover
“ their faces with a bladder-skin, that they may not inhale the pernicious powder, yet they
‘‘can see through the skin.”

*3Pompholyx was a furnace deposit, usually ey zinc oxide, but often containing
arsenical oxide, and to this latter quality this reference probably applies. The symptoms men-
tioned later in the text amply indicate arsenical poisoning, of which a sort of spherical effect
on the hands is characteristic. See also note on p. 112 for discussion of ‘‘ corrosive” cadmia ;
further information on pompholyx is given in Note 26, p. 394.

216 BOOK VI.

they do not descend into the shafts nor enter the tunnels again before Monday,
and in the meantime the poisonous fumes pass away.

There are also times when a reckoning has to be made with Orcus, *4
for some metalliferous localities, though such are rare, spontaneously
produce poison and exhale pestilential vapour, as is also the case with some
openings in the ore, though these more often contain the noxious fumes.
In the towns of the plains of Bohemia there are some caverns which,
at certain seasons of the year, emit pungent vapours which put out lights
and kill the miners if they linger too long in them. Pliny, too, has left
a record that when wells are sunk, the sulphurous or aluminous vapours
which arise kill the well-diggers, and it is a test of this danger if a burning
lamp which has been let down is extinguished. In such cases a second well
is dug to the right or left, as an air-shaft, which draws off these noxious
vapours. On the plains they construct bellows which draw up these noxious
vapours and remedy this evil ; these I have described before.

Further, sometimes workmen slipping from the ladders into the shafts
break their arms, legs, or necks, or fall into the sumps and are drowned ;
often, indeed, the negligence of the foreman is to blame, for it is his special
work both to fix the ladders so firmly to the timbers that they cannot break
away, and to cover so securely with planks the sumps at the bottom of the
shafts, that the planks cannot be moved nor the men fall into the water;
wherefore the foreman must carefully execute his own work. Moreover,
he must not set the entrance of the shaft-house toward the north wind,
lest in winter the ladders freeze with cold, for when this happens the men’s
hands become stiff and slippery with cold, and cannot perform their office
of holding. The men, too, must be careful that, even if none of these things
happen, they do not fall through their own carelessness.

Mountains, too, slide down and men are crushed in their fall and perish.
In fact, when in olden days Rammelsberg, in Goslar, sank down, so many
men were crushed in the ruins that in one day, the records tell us, about
400 women were robbed of their husbands. And eleven years ago, part
of the mountain of Altenberg, which had been excavated, became loose and
sank, and suddenly crushed six miners ; it also swallowed up a hut and one
mother and her little boy. But this generally occurs in those mountains
which contain venae cumulatae. Therefore, miners should leave numerous
arches under the mountains which need support, or provide underpinning.
Falling pieces of rock also injure their limbs, and to prevent this from hap-
pening, miners should protect the shafts, tunnels, and drifts.

The venomous ant which exists in Sardinia is not found in our mines.
This animal is, as Solinus 25 writes, very small and like a spider in shape ; it
is called solifuga, because it shuns (fugit) the light (solem). It is very common

24Orcus, the god of the infernal regions,—otherwise Pluto.

25Caius Julius Solinus was an unreliable Roman Grammarian of the 3rd Century. There
is much difference of opinion as to the precise animal meant by solifuga. The word is variously
spelled solipugus, solpugus, solipuga, solipunga, etc., and is mentioned by Pliny (viit., 43),
and other ancient authors all apparently meaning a venomous insect, either an ant or a
spider. The term in later times indicated a scorpion.

BOOK VI. 217

in silver mines; it creeps unobserved and brings destruction upon those
who imprudently sit on it. But, as the same writer tells us, springs of warm
and salubrious waters gush out in certain places, which neutralise the venom
inserted by the ants.

In some of our mines, however, though in very few, there are other
pernicious pests. These are demons of ferocious aspect, about which I have
spoken in my book De Animantibus Subterraneis. Demons of this kind
are expelled and put to flight by prayer and fasting.*®

Some of these evils, as well as certain other things, are the reason why
pits are occasionally abandoned. But the first and principal cause is that
they do not yield metal, or if, for some fathoms, they do bear metal they
become barren in depth. The second cause is the quantity of water which
flows in; sometimes the miners can neither divert this water into the
tunnels, since tunnels cannot be driven so far into the mountains, or they
cannot draw it out with machines because the shafts are too deep ; or if they
could draw it out with machines, they do not use them, the reason
undoubtedly being that the expenditure is greater than the profits of a
moderately poor vein. The third cause is the noxious air, which the owners
sometimes cannot overcome either by skill or expenditure, for which reason
the digging is sometimes abandoned, not only of shafts, but also of tunnels. The
fourth cause is the poison produced in particular places, if it is not in our
power either completely to remove it or to moderate its effects. This is the
reason why the caverns in the Plain known as Laurentius*’ used not to be

*6The presence of demons or gnomes in the mines was so general a belief that Agricola
fully accepted it. This is more remarkable, in view of our author’s very general scepticism
regarding the supernatural. He, however, does not classify them all as bad—some being
distinctly helpful. The description of gnomes of kindly intent, which is contained in the
last paragraph in De Animantibus is of interest :-—

“Then there are the gentle kind which the Germans as well as the Greeks call cobalos,
“because they mimic men. They appear to laugh with glee and pretend to do much, but
“really do nothing. They are called little miners, because of their dwarfish stature, which
“is about two feet. They are venerable looking and are clothed like miners in a filleted
$f ange with a leather apron about their loins. This kind does not often trouble the miners,
“but they idle about in the shafts and tunnels and really do nothing, although they pretend to
“be busy in all kinds of labour, sometimes digging ore, and sometimes putting into buckets
“that which has been dug. Sometimes they throw pebbles at the workmen, but they rarely
‘injure them unless the workmen first ridicule or curse them. They are not very dissimilar
“to Goblins, which occasionally appear to men when they go to or from their day’s work, or
“when they attend their cattle. use they generally appear benign to men, the Germans
“call them guéeli. Those called ¢vudli, which take the form of women as well as men, actually
‘enter the service of some people, especially the Suions. The mining gnomes are especially
‘active in the workings where metal has already been found, or where there are hopes of
“‘ discovering it, because of which they do not discourage the miners, but on the contrary
“stimulate them and cause them to labour more vigorously.”

The German miners were not alone in such beliefs, for miners generally accepted
them—even to-day the faith in ‘‘ knockers” has not entirely disappeared from Cornwall.
Neither the sea nor the forest so lends itself to the substantiation of the supernatural as does
the mine. The dead darkness, in which the miners’ lamps serve only to distort every shape,
the uncanny noises of restless rocks whose support has been undermined, the approach of
danger and death without warning, the sudden vanishing or discovery of good fortune, all
yield a thousand corroborations to minds long steeped in ignorance and prepared for the
miraculous through religious teaching.

2?The Plains of Laurentius extend from the mouth of the Tiber southward—say
twenty miles south of Rome. What Agricola’s authority was for silver mines in this region we
cannot discover. This may, however, refer to the lead-silver district of the Attic Peninsula,
Laurion being sometimes Latinized as Laurium or Laurius.

218 BOOK VI.

worked, though they were not deficient in silver. The fifth cause are the
fierce and murderous demons, for if they cannot be expelled, no one escapes
from them. The sixth cause is that the underpinnings become loosened
and collapse, and a fall of the mountain usually follows ; the underpinnings
are then only restored when the vein is very rich in metal. The seventh
cause is military operations. Shafts and tunnels should not be re-opened
unless we are quite certain of the reasons why the miners have deserted them,
because we ought not to believe that our ancestors were so indolent and
spiritless as to desert mines which could have been carried on with profit.
Indeed, in our own days, not a few miners, persuaded by old women’s tales,
have re-opened deserted shafts and lost their time and trouble. Therefore,
to prevent future generations from being led to act in such a way, it is
advisable to set down in writing the reason why the digging of each shaft or
tunnel has been abandoned, just as it is agreed was once done at Freiberg,
when the shafts were deserted on account of the great inrush of water.

END OF BOOK VI.

OXKKK?
SOROS)
SHREK)

ee ee ee

PS. a Te

_- + wee
el wm

a

ie ee

BOOK VII.

S| INCE the Sixth Book has described the iron tools,
soy the vessels and the machines used in mines, this
Book will describe the methods of assaying’ ores ;
because it is desirable to first test them in order
that the material mined may be advantageously
smelted, or that the dross may be purged away and
the metal made pure. Although writers have men-
tioned such tests, yet none of them have set down the
directions for performing them, wherefore it is no
wonder that those who come later have written nothing on the subject.
By tests of this kind miners can determine with certainty whether
ores contain any metal in them or not; or if it has already been
indicated that the ore contains one or more metals, the tests show whether
it is much or little ; the miners also ascertain by such tests the method by
which the metal can be separated from that part of the ore devoid of it;
and further, by these tests, they determine that part in which there is much
metal from that part in which there is little. Unless these tests have been
carefully applied before the metals are melted out, the ore cannot be smelted
without great loss to the owners, for the parts which do not easily melt in the
fire carry the metals off with them or consume them. In the last case, they pass
off with the fumes ; in the other case they are mixed with the slag and furnace
accretions, and in such event the owners lose the labour which they have spent
in preparing the furnaces and the crucibles, and further, it is necessary for them
to incur fresh expenditure for fluxes and other things. Metals, when they have
been melted out, are usually assayed in order that we may ascertain what pro-
portion of silver is in a centumpondium of copper or lead, or what quantity of
gold is in one /ibra of silver ; and, on the other hand, what proportion of copper
or lead is contained in a centumpondium of silver, or what quantity of silver is
contained in one ibra of gold. And from this we can calculate whether it
will be worth while to separate the precious metals from the base metals, or
not. Further, a test of this kind shows whether coins are good or are
debased ; and readily detects silver, if the coiners have mixed more than is
lawful with the gold; or copper, if the coiners have alloyed with the gold or
silver more of it than is allowable. I will explain all these methods with the
utmost care that I can.

1We have but little record of anything which could be called “ assaying’ among the
Greeks and Romans. The fact, however, that they made constant use of the touchstone
(see note 37, p. 252) is sufficient proof that they were able to test the purity of gold and silver.
The description of the touchstone by Theophrastus contains several references to “trial”
by fire (see note 37, p. 252). They were adepts at metal working, and were therefore familiar
with melting metals on a small scale, with the smelting of silver, lead, copper, and tin
ores (see note I, p. 353) and with the parting of silver and lead by cupellation. Consequently,
it would not require much of an imaginative flight to conclude that there existed some system
of tests of ore and metal values by fire. Apart from the statement of Theophrastus referred
to, the first references made to anything which might fill the ré/e of assaying are from the
Alchemists, particularly Geber (prior to 1300), for they describe methods of solution,
precipitation, distillation, fusing in crucibles, cupellation, and of the parting of gold and silver
by acid and by sulphur, antimony, or cementation. However, they were not bent on

220 BOOK VII.

The method of assaying ore used by mining people, differs from
smelting only by the small amount of material used. Inasmuch as, by
smelting a small quantity, they learn whether the smelting of a large

determining quantitative values, which is the fundamental object of the assayer’s art, and
all their discussion is shrouded in an obscure cloak of gibberish and attempted mysticism.
Nevertheless, therein lies the foundation of many cardinal assay methods, and even of
chemistry itself.

The first explicit records of assaying are the anonymous booklets published in German early
in the 16th Century under the title Probierbiichlein. Therein the art is disclosed well advanced
toward maturity, so far as concerns gold and silver, with some notes on lead and copper. We
refer the reader to Appendix B for fuller discussion of these books, but we may repeat here
that they are a collection of disconnected recipes lacking in arrangement, the items often
repeated, and all apparently the inheritance of wisdom passed from father to son over many
generations. It is obviously intended as a sort of reminder to those already skilled in the
art, and would be hopeless to a novice. Apart from some notes in Biringuccio (Book 1n,
Chaps. r and 2) on assaying gold and silver, there is nothing else prior to De Re
Metallica. Agricola was familiar with these works and includes their material in this chapter.
The very great advance which his account represents can only be appreciated by comparison,
but the exhaustive publication of other works is foreign to the purpose of these notes.

Agricola introduces system into the arrangement of his materials, describes implements, and —

gives a hundred details which are wholly omitted from the previous works, all in a manner
which would enable a beginner to learn the art. Furthermore, the assaying of lead, copper,
tin, quicksilver, iron, and bismuth, is almost wholly new, together with the whole of the
argument and explanations. We would call the attention of students of the history of
chemistry to the general oversight of these early 16th Century attempts at analytical
chemistry, for in them lie the foundations of that science. The statement sometimes made
that Agricola was the first assayer, is false if for no other reason than that science does not
develop with such strides at any one human hand. He can, however, fairly be accounted as the
author of the first proper text-book upon assaying. Those familiar with the art will be astonished
at the small progress made since his time, for in his pages appear most of the reagents and most
of the critical operations in the dry analyses of gold, silver, lead, copper, tin, bismuth, quick-
silver, and iron of to-day. Further, there will be recognised many of the ‘‘ kinks” of the art
used even yet, such as the method of granulation, duplicate assays, the ‘‘ assay ton’’ method of
weights, the use of test lead, the introduction of charges in leaf lead, and even the use of beer
instead of water to damp bone-ash.

The following table is given of the substances mentioned requiring some comment,
and the terms adopted in this book, with notes for convenience in reference. The German

terms are either from Agricola’s Glossary of De Re Metallica, his Interpretatio, or the —

German Translation. We have retained the original German spelling. The fifth column
refers to the page where more ample notes are given :—

Terms adopted. Latin. German. Remarks. poke
Alum Alumen Alaun Either potassium or | p. 564
ammonia alum
Ampulla Ampulla Kolb A distillation jar
Antimony Stibium Shiesglas Practically always p. 428
antimony sulphide
Aqua valens or aqua | Aqua valens Scheidewasser Mostly nitric acid Pp. 439
Argol Feces vini siccae Die weinheffen Crude tartar Pp. 234
Ash of lead Nigrum plumbum Artificial lead sul- | p. 237
cinereum hide
Ash of musk ivy | Sal ex anthyllidis | Salalkali ostly potash p. 560
(Salt made from) cinere factus
Ashes which wool- | Cineres quo infec- Mostly potash Pp. 559
dyers use tores lanarum
utuntur
Assay Venas experiri Probiren
Assay furnace Fornacula Probir ofen “ Little ”’ furnace
Azure Caeruleum Lasur Partly copper car- | p. IIo
bonate (azurite)
partly silicate

:

BOOK VII.

221

quantity will compensate them for their expenditure; hence, if they are not
particular to employ assays, they may, as I have already said, sometimes smelt
the metal from the ore with a loss or sometimes without any profit ; for they

Terms adopted. Latin. German. Remarks. A pn :
Bismuth Plumlum Cinereum | Wismut Bismuth P- 433
Bitumen Bitumen Bergwachs p. 581
Blast furnace Prima fornax Schmeltzofen
Borax Chrysocolla ex nitro | Borras ; Tincar p- 560
confecta ; chryso-
colla quam boracem
nominant
Burned alum Alumen coctum Gesottener alaun ofits de hydrated} p. 565
um
Cadmia (1) Furnace accre- 112
(see note 8, p. 112) tions
(2) Calamine
(3) Zine blende
(4) Cobalt arsenical
ER ‘ Casi sulphides 38
or amphora amp ffer p. 2
Chrysocolla called
borax (see borax)
Chrysocolla(copper | Chrysocolla ar. vrs und gi chrysocolla, | p. IIo
mineral) ifergriin partly malachite
Copper filings Aeris scobs elimata Kupferfedich Apparently finely P- 233
an copper
Copper flowers Aeris flos pen lighone sean oxide p- 538
Copper scales Aeris squamae fer hammer- | Probably cupric oxide)
oder kessel
rei
Copper minerals
(see note 8, p. 109)
aay (trian- Catillus triangularis | Dreieckichtschirbe | See illustration p- 229
ar)
Cupel Catillus cinereus Capelle
Cupellation furnace) Secunda fornax Tretbherd
Flux Additamentum Zusetze p- 232
Furnace accretions | Cadmia fornacum Mitlere und ober
Gal — Lead sulphide
ena Lapis plumbarius Glantz sulphi p- Ir0
Glass-gall Recrementum vitri | Glassgallen Skimmings from p- 235
glass melting
Grey antimony or | Stibi or stibium Spiesglas Antimony sulphide, | p. 428
stibium stibnite
Hearth-lead Molybdaena Herdplet The saturated fur- | p. 476
nace bottoms from
cupellation
Hoop (iron) Circulus sibs Ring A forge for crucibles | p. 226
Iron filings Ferri scobs elimata | Eisen feilich Metallic iron
Iron scales Squamae ferri ales hammer- Partly iron oxide
SC
Iron slag Recrementum ferri | Sinder
Lead ash Cinis plumbi nigri | Pletasche — lead sul- | p. 237
phide
Lead granules Globuli a. Gekornt Granulated lead
Lead ochre Ochra plumbaria Pleigeel prone massicot p. 232
(PbO)
Lees of agua which | Feces aguarum quae | Scheidewasser Uncertain Pp. 234
separates gold aurum ab argento | heffe
from silver secernunt
Dried lees of vinegar) Siccae feces aceti Heffe des essigs Argol p- 234
Dried lees of wine | Feces vini siccae Wein heffen Argol p- 234

17

222

BOOK VII.

can assay the ore at a very small expense, and smelt it only at a great

expense.

as we assay ore in a little furnace, so do we smelt it in the large furnace.

Both processes, however, are carried out in the same way, for just

Also

in both cases charcoal and not wood is burned. Moreover, in the crucible
when metals are tested, be they gold, silver, copper, or lead, they are mixed in
precisely the same way as they are mixed in the blast furnace when they
are smelted. Further, those who assay ores with fire, either pour out the
metal in a liquid state, or, when it has cooled, break the crucible and clean

|

Terms adopted. Latin. German. Remarks. ieee
Limestone Saxum calcis Kalchstein
Litharge Spuma argent Glette
Lye Lixivium Lauge durch Mostly potash Pp. 233
asschen gemacht
Muffle Tegula Muffel Latin, literally
‘*Roof-tile ”’
Operculum Operculum Helm oder alem- | Helmet or cover for
bick a distillation jar
Orpiment Auripigmentum Operment Yellow sulphide of III
arsenic (As2$3) ;
Pyrites Pyrites Kis Rather a genus of 112
sulphides, than iron
pyrite in particular
Pyrites (Cakes Panes ex pyrite Stein Iron or copper matte | p. 350
from) conflats
Realgar Sandaraca Rosgeel Red sulphide of psdes
arsenic (AsS)
Red lead Minium Menning Pb304 p. 232
Roasted copper Aes ustum Gebrandt kupffer | Artificial copper Pp. 233
sulphide (?) :
Salt Sal Saltz NaCl Pp. 233
Salt (Rock) Sal fosstlis Berg saltz NaCl p- 233
Sal artificiosus Sal artificiosus A stock flux ? p. 236
Sal ammoniac Sal ammoniacus Salarmoniac NH4Cl Pp. 5
Saltpetre Halinitrum Salpeter KNO3 p. 561
Salt (refined) Sal facticius purgatus NaCl
Sal tostus Sal tostus Gerdst saltz Apparently simply | p. 233
heated or melted
common salt
Sal torrefactus Sal torrefactus Gerést saltz pP- 233
Salt (melted) Sal liquefactus Geflossen salta go salt or salt | p. 233
glass
Scorifier Catillus fictilis .Scherbe
Schist Saxum fissile Schifer
Silver minerals (see
note 8, p. 108)
Slag Recrementum Schlacken
Soda Nitrum Mostly soda from | p. 558
Egypt, Na2zCo3
Stones which easily| Lapides qui facile igni| Flis Quartz and fluorspar | p. 380
melt liquescunt
Sulphur Sulfur Schwefel Pp. 579
Tophus Tophus Topstein Mar] (?) Pp. 233
Touchstone Coticula Goldstein
Venetian glass Venetianum vitrum
Verdigris Aerugo Griinspan oder Copper sub-acetate | p. 440
Spanschgriin
Vitriol Atramentum Kupferwasser Mostly FeSO4 572
sutorium
White schist Saxum fissile album | Weisser schifer Pp. 234

Weights (see Appen-
dix).

9 ee a Mn. ee 5 ite ia

BOOK VII. 3 223

the metal from slag; and in the same way the smelter, as soon as the metal
flows from the furnace into the forehearth, pours in cold water and takes the
slag from the metal with a hooked bar. Finally, in the same way that gold
and silver are separated from lead in a cupel, so also are they separated in
the cupellation furnace.

It is necessary that the assayer who is testing ore or metals should be
prepared and instructed in all things necessary in assaying, and that he
should close the doors of the room in which the assay furnace stands, lest

We

ROUND ASSAY FURNACE.

an is

RECTANGULAR ASSAY FURNACE.

224 BOOK VIzI.

anyone coming at an inopportune moment might disturb his thoughts when
they are intent on the work. It is also necessary for him to place his balances
in a case, so that when he weighs the little buttons of metal the scales may
not be agitated by a draught of air, for that is a hindrance to his work.
Now I will describe the different things which are necessary in assaying,
beginning with the assay furnace, of which one differs from another in
shape, material, and the place in which it is set. In shape, they may be
round or rectangular, the latter shape being more suited to assaying ores.
The materials of the assay furnaces differ, in that one is made of bricks,
another of iron, and certain ones of clay. The one of bricks is built on a
chimney-hearth which is three and a half feet high; the iron one is placed
in the same position, and also the one of clay. The brick one is a cubit high,
a foot wide on the inside, and one foot two digits long ; at a point five digits
above the hearth—which is usually the thickness of an unbaked? brick—
an iron plate is laid, and smeared over with lute on the upper side to prevent
it from being injured by the fire ; in front of the furnace above the plate is a
mouth a palm high, five digits wide, and rounded at the top. The iron plate

has three openings which are one digit wide and three digits long, one is at
each side and the third at the back ; through them sometimes the ash falls
from the burning charcoal, and sometimes the draught blows through the
chamber which is below the iron plate, and stimulates the fire. For this
reason this furnace when used by metallurgists is named from assaying, but
when used by the alchemists it is named from the wind’. The part of the
iron plate which projects from the furnace is generally three-quarters of a

*Crudorum,—unbaked ?
*This reference is not very clear. Apparently the names refer to the German terms
probier ofen and windt ofen.

BOOK VII. 225

palm long and a palm wide ; small pieces of charcoal, after being laid thereon,
can be placed quickly in the furnace through its mouth with a pair of tongs,
or again, if necessary, can be taken out of the furnace and laid there.

The iron assay furnace is made of four iron bars a foot and a half high,
which at the bottom are bent outward and broadened a short distance to enable
them to stand more firmly ; the front part of the furnace is made from two
of these bars, and the back part from two of them; to these bars on both
sides are joined and welded three iron cross-bars, the first at a height of a palm
from the bottom, the second at a height of a foot, and the third at the top.
The upright bars are perforated at that point where the side cross-bars are
joined to them, in order that three similar iron bars on the remaining sides
can be engaged in them; thus there are twelve cross-bars, which make
three stages at unequal intervals. At the lower stage, the upright bars are
distant from each other one foot and five digits ; and at the middle stage the
front is distant from the back three palms and one digit, and the sides are
distant from each other three palms and as many digits; at the highest stage
from the front to the back there is a distance of two palms, and between the
sides three palms, so that in this way the furnace becomes narrower at the
top. Furthermore, an iron rod, bent to the shape of the mouth, is set into
the lowest bar of the front ; this mouth, just like that of the brick furnace,
is a palm high and five digits wide. Then the front cross-bar of the lower
stage is perforated on each side of the mouth, and likewise the back one ;
through these perforations there pass two iron rods, thus making altogether
four bars in the lower stage, and these support an iron plate smeared with
lute; part of this plate also projects outside the furnace. The outside of
the furnace from the lower stage to the upper, is covered with iron plates,
which are bound to the bars by iron wires, and smeared with lute to enable
them to bear the heat of the fire as long as possible.

As for the clay furnace, it must be made of fat, thick clay, medium so
far as relates to its softness or hardness. This furnace has exactly the same
height as the iron one, and its base is made of two earthenware tiles, one
foot and three palms long and one foot and one palm wide. Each side of the
fore part of both tiles is gradually cut away for the length of a palm, so
that they are half a foot and a digit wide, which part projects from the
furt.ace ; the tiles are about a digit and a half thick. The walls are similarly
of clay, and are set on the lower tiles at a distance of a digit from the edge,
and support the upper tiles ; the walls are three digits high and have four
openings, each of which is about three digits high ; those of the back part and
of each side are five digits wide, and of the front, a palm and a half wide, to
enable the freshly made cupels to be conveniently placed on the hearth, when
it has been thoroughly warmed, that they may be dried there. Both tiles
are bound on the outer edge with iron wire, pressed into them, so that they
will be less easily broken; and the tiles, not unlike the iron bed-plate, have
three openings three digits long and a digit wide, in order that when the upper
one on account of the heat of the fire or for some other reason has become
damaged, the lower one may be exchanged and take its place. Through these

226 BOOK VII.

holes, the ashes from the burning charcoal, as I have stated, fall down, and
air blows into the furnace after passing through the openings in the walls of
the chamber. The furnace is rectangular, and inside at the lower part it is
three palms and one digit wide and three palms and as many digits long. At
the upper part it is two palms and three digits wide, so that it also grows
narrower ; it is one foot high ; in the middle of the back it is cut out at
the bottom in the shape of a semicircle, of half a digit radius. Not
unlike the furnace before described, it has in its forepart a mouth which is
rounded at the top, one palm high and a palm and a digit wide. Its door
is also made of clay, and this has a window and a handle; even the lid
of the furnace which is made of clay has its own handle, fastened on with iron
wire. The outer parts and sides of this furnace are bound with iron wires,
which are usually pressed in, in the shape of triangles. The brick furnaces
must remain stationary ; the clay and iron ones can be carried from one
place to another. Those of brick can be prepared more quickly, while those
of iron are more lasting, and those of clay are more suitable. Assayers
also make temporary furnaces in another way; they stand three bricks
on a hearth, one on each side and a third one at the back, the fore-part lies
open to the draught, and on these bricks is placed an iron plate, upon which
they again stand three bricks, which hold and retain the charcoal.

The setting of one furnace differs from another, in that some are placed
higher and others lower ; that one is placed higher, in which the man who is
assaying the ore or metals introduces the scorifier through the mouth with the
tongs; that one is placed lower, into which he introduces the crucible
through its open top.

In some cases the assayer uses an iron hoop‘ in place of a furnace;
this is placed upon the hearth of a chimney, the lower edge being daubed
with lute to prevent the blast of the bellows from escaping under it.
If the blast is given slowly, the ore will be smelted and the copper will melt in
the triangular crucible, which is placed in it and taken away again with the
tongs. The hoop is two palms high and half a digit thick ; its diameter is
generally one foot and one palm, and where the blast from the bellows enters
into it, it is notched out. The bellows is a double one, such as goldworkers
use, and sometimes smiths. In the middle of the bellows there is a board in
which there is an air-hole, five digits wide and seven long, covered by a
little flap which is fastened over the air-hole on the lower side of the board ;
this flap is of equal length and width. The bellows, without its head, is
three feet long, and at the back is one foot and one palm wide and
somewhat rounded, and it is three palms wide at the head ; the head itself
is three palms long and two palms and a digit wide at the part where it joins
the boards, then it gradually becomes narrower. The nozzle, of which there
is only one, is one foot and two digits long ; this nozzle, and one-half of the
head in which the nozzle is fixed, are placed in an opening of the wall, this
being one foot and one palm thick ; it reaches only to the iron hoop on the

4Ciyculus. This term does not offer a very satisfactory equivalent, as such a furnace
has no distinctive name in English. It is obviously a sort of forge for fusing in crucibles.

ee ee ee

%
a

Fu

FE a ye AE OR ES RE EE NL a ee EE

BOOK VII. 227

hearth, for it does not project beyond the wall. The hide of the bellows is
fixed to the bellows-boards with its own peculiar kind of iron nails. It joins
both bellows-boards to the head, and over it there are cross strips of
hide fixed to the bellows-boards with broad-headed nails, and similarly
fixed to the head. The middle board of the bellows rests on an iron bar,
to which it is fastened with iron nails clinched on both ends, so that it cannot
move ; the iron bar is fixed between two upright posts, through which it
penetrates. Higher up on these upright posts there is a wooden axle, with
iron journals which revolve in the holes in the posts. In the, middle of
this axle there is mortised a lever, fixed with iron nails to prevent it from
flying out; the lever is five and a half feet long, and its posterior end is
engaged in the iron ring of an iron rod which reaches to the “ tail” of the
lowest bellows-board, and there engages another similar ring. And so when
the workman pulls down the lever, the lower part of the bellows is raised and
drives the wind into the nozzle ; then the wind, penetrating through the hole
in the middle bellows-board, which is called the air-hole, lifts up the upper
part of the bellows, upon whose upper board is a piece of lead, heavy enough
to press down that part of the bellows again, and this being pressed down
blows a blast through the nozzle. This is the principle of the double bellows,
which is peculiar to the iron hoop where are placed the triangular crucibles in
which copper ore is smelted and copper is melted.

—— ee > ane
—~

——— —_
.

*\* ot

: SE a

SE :
B : :
A ~
a} .
oa
=| ss
=
: :
ee =
= :

A—IRon Hoop. B—DovuBLE BELLOWs. C—ITs NozzLE. D—LEVER.

I have spoken of the furnaces and the iron hoop; I will now speak of
the muffles and the crucibles. The muffle is made of clay, in the shape
of an inverted gutter tile ; it covers the scorifiers, lest coal dust fall into
them and interfere with the assay. It is a palm and a half broad, and the
height, which corresponds with the mouth of the furnace, is generally a palm,

228 BOOK VII.

and it is nearly as long as the furnace ; only at the front end does it touch
the mouth of the furnace, everywhere else on the sides and at the back
there is a space of three digits, to allow the charcoal to lie in the open space
between it and the furnace. The muffle is as thick as a fairly thick earthen
jar ; its upper part is entire; the back has two little windows, and each side
has two or three or even four, through which the heat passes into the scorifiers
and melts the ore. In place of little windows, some muffles have small holes,
ten in the back and more on each side. Moreover, in the back below the
little windows, or small holes, there are cut away three semi-circular notches
half a digit high, and on each side there are four. The back of the muffle
is generally a little lower than the front.

A—BROAD LITTLE WINDOWS OF MUFFLE. B—NARROW ONES. C—OPENINGS IN THE
BACK THEREOF.

The crucibles differ in the materials from which they are made, because
they are made of either clay or ashes; and those of clay, which we also call
“earthen,” differ in shape and size. Some are made in the shape of a mod-
erately thick salver (scorifiers), three digits wide, and of a capacity of an
uncta measure ; in these the ore mixed with fluxes is melted, and they are used
by those who assay gold or silver ore. Some are triangular and much
thicker and more capacious, holding five, or six, or even more unciae; in
these copper is melted, so that it can be poured out, expanded, and tested
with fire, and in these copper ore is usually melted.

The cupels are made of ashes; like the preceding scorifiers they are
tray-shaped, and their lower part is very thick but their capacity is less.
In these lead is separated from silver, and by them assays are concluded.
Inasmuch as the assayers themselves make the cupels, something must
be said about the material from which they are made, and the method
of making them. Some make them out of all kinds of ordinary ashes ; these
are not good, because ashes of this kind contain a certain amount of fat,
whereby such cupels are easily broken when they are hot. Others make
them likewise out of any kind of ashes which have been previously
leached ; of this kind are the ashes into which warm water has been infused
for the purpose of making lye. These ashes, after being dried in the sun or
a furnace, are sifted in a hair sieve; and although warm water washes away the

oe ee ee

BOOK VII. 229

A—ScorRIFIER. B—TRIANGULAR CRUCIBLE. C—CUPEL.

fat from the ashes, still the cupels which are made from such ashes are not
very good because they often contain charcoal dust, sand, and pebbles.
Some make them in the same way out of any kind of ashes, but first of all
pour water into the ashes and remove the scum which floats thereon ; then,
after it has become clear, they pour away the water, and dry the ashes ; they
then sift them and make the cupels from them. These, indeed, are good,
but not of the best quality, because ashes of this kind are also not devoid of
small pebbles and sand. To enable cupels of the best quality to be made, all
the impurities must be removed from the ashes. These impurities are of
two kinds; the one sort light, to which class belong charcoal dust and fatty
material and other things which float in water, the other sort heavy, such
as small stones, fine sand, and any other materials which settle in the
, bottom of a vessel. Therefore, first of all, water should be poured into the
ashes and the light impurities removed; then the ashes should be
kneaded with the hands, so that they will become properly mixed with
the water. When the water has become muddy and turbid, it should be
poured into a second vessel. In this way the small stones and fine sand, or
any other heavy substance which may be there, remain in the first vessel,
and should be thrown away. When all the ashes have settled in this second
vessel, which will be shown if the water has become clear and does not taste
of the flavour of lye, the water should be thrown away, and the ashes
which have settled in the vessel should be dried in the sun or in a furnace.
This material is suitable for the cupels, especially if it is the ash of beech
wood or other wood which has a small annual growth; those ashes made
from twigs and limbs of vines, which have rapid annual growth, are not so

_ a ae ee ee ee ee
RE ent ee é

RR, a a eee ee eee

230 BOOK VII,

good, for the cupels made from them, since they are not sufficiently dry,
frequently crack and break in the fire and absorb the metals. If ashes of
beech or similar wood are not to be had, the assayer makes little balls of such
ashes as he can get, after they have been cleared of impurities in the manner
before described, and puts them in a baker’s or potter’s oven to burn, and from
these the cupels are made, because the fire consumes whatever fat or damp
there may be. As to all kinds of ashes, the older they are the better, for it is
necessary that they should have the greatest possible dryness. For this
reason ashes obtained from burned bones, especially from the bones of the
heads of animals, are the most suitable for cupels, as are also those ashes
obtained from the horns of deer and the spines of fishes. Lastly, some take the
ashes which are obtained from burnt scrapings of leather, when the tanners
scrape the hides to clear them from hair. Some prefer to use compounds,
that one being recommended which has one and a half parts of ashes from the
bones of animals or the spines of fishes, and one part of beech ashes, and half a
part of ashes of burnt hide scrapings. From this mixture good cupels are
made, though far better ones are obtained from equal portions of ashes of
burnt hide scrapings, ashes of the bones of heads of sheep and calves, and
ashes of deer horns. But the best of all are produced from deer horns alone,
burnt to powder ; this kind, by reason of its extreme dryness, absorbs metals
least of all. Assayers of our own day, however, generally make the
cupels from beech ashes. These ashes, after being prepared in the
manner just described, are first of all sprinkled with beer or water, to make
them stick together, and are then ground ina small mortar. They are ground
again after being mixed with the ashes obtained from the skulls of beasts or from
the spines of fishes ; the more the ashes are ground the better they are.
Some rub bricks and sprinkle the dust so obtained, after sifting it, into the
beech ashes, for dust of this kind does not allow the hearth-lead to absorb
the gold or silver by eating away the cupels. Others, to guard against the
same thing, moisten the cupels with white of egg after they have been made,
and when they have been dried in the sun, again crush them ; especially if they
want to assay in it an ore or copper which contains iron. Some moisten the
ashes again and again with cow’s milk, and dry them, and grind them in a
small mortar, and then mould the cupels. In the works in which silver
is separated from copper, they make cupels from two parts of the ashes of
the crucible of the cupellation furnace, for these ashes are very dry, and from
one part of bone-ash. Cupels which have been made in these ways also
need to be placed in the sun or in a furnace; afterward, in whatever way
they have been made, they must be kept a long time in dry places, for the
older they are, the dryer and better they are.

Not only potters, but also the assayers themselves, make scorifiers
and triangular crucibles. They make them out of fatty clay, which is
dry®, and neither hard nor soft. With this clay they mix the dust of old
broken crucibles, or of burnt and worn bricks; then they knead with a
pestle the clay thus mixed with dust, and then dry it. As to these crucibles,

5Spissa,—‘‘Dry.” This term is used in contra-distinction to pingue, unctuous or “fatty.”

aI Te ee nL a an °

BOOK VII. 231

the older they are, the dryer and better they are. The moulds in which the
cupels are moulded are of two kinds, that is, a smaller size and a larger size.
In the smaller ones are made the cupels in which silver or gold is purged
from the lead which has absorbed it ; in the larger ones are made cupels in
which silver is separated from copper and lead. Both moulds are made out
of brass and have no bottom, in order that the cupels can be taken out of
them whole. The pestles also are of two kinds, smaller and larger, each
likewise of brass, and from the lower end of them there projects a round
knob, and this alone is pressed into the mould and makes the hollow part of
the cupel. The part which is next to the knob corresponds to the upper
part of the mould.

A—LITTLE MOULD. B—INVERTED MOULD. C—PrstLeE. D—Its KNoB. E—SEcoND
PESTLE.

So much for these matters. I will now speak of the preparation of the
ore for assaying. It is prepared by roasting, burning, crushing, and wash-
ing. It is necessary to take a fixed weight of ore in order that one may
determine how great a portion of it these preparations consume. The
hard stone containing the metal is burned in order that, when its hardness
has been overcome, it can be crushed and washed ; indeed, the very hardest
kind, before it is burned, is sprinkled with vinegar, in order that it may more
rapidly soften in the fire. The soft stone should be broken with a hammer,
crushed in a mortar and reduced to powder; then it should be washed
and then dried again. If earth is mixed with the mineral, it is washed in a
basin, and that which settles is assayed in the fire after it is dried. All mining
products which are washed must again be dried. But ore which is rich in
metal is neither burned nor crushed nor washed, but is roasted, lest that
method of preparation should lose some of the metal. When the fires have

232 BOOK VII.

been kindled, this kind of ore is roasted in an enclosed pot, which is stopped
up with lute. A less valuable ore is even burned on a hearth, being placed
upon the charcoal; for we do not make a great expenditure upon metals, if
they are not worth it. However, I will go into fuller details as to all these
methods of preparing ore, both a little later, and in the following Book.
For the present, I have decided to explain those things which mining
people usually call fluxes* because they are added to ores, not only for
assaying, but also for smelting. Great power is discovered in all these fluxes,
but we do not see the same effects produced in every case ; and some are of a
very complicated nature. For when they have been mixed with the ore
and are melted in either the assay or the smelting furnace, some of them,
because they melt easily, to some extent melt the ore; others, because they
either make the ore very hot or penetrate into it, greatly assist the fire in
separating the impurities from the metals, and they also mix the fused part
with the lead, or they partly protect from the fire the ore whose metal contents
would be either consumed in the fire, or carried up with the fumes and fly out
of the furnace; some fluxes absorb the metals. To the first order be-
longs lead, whether it be reduced to little granules or resolved into ash by
fire, or red-lead’, or ochre made from lead§, or litharge, or hearth-lead, or

®Additamenta,—“ Additions.” Hence the play on words.

We have adopted “ flux” because the old English equivalent for all these materials
was “flux,” although in modern nomenclature the term is generally restricted to those
substances which, by chemical combination in the furnace, lower the melting point of some
of the charge. The “additions” of Agricola, therefore, include reducing, oxidizing,
sulphurizing, desulphurizing, and collecting agents as well as fluxes. A critical examina-
tion of the fluxes mentioned in the next four pages gives point to the Author’s assertion that
“some are of a very complicated nature.’ However, anyone of experience with home-
taught assayers has come in contact with equally extraordinary combinations. The four
orders of ‘‘ additions ’’ enumerated are quite impossible to reconcile from a modern metal-
lurgical point of view.

7Minium secundarium. (Interpretatio,—menning. Pb304). Agricola derived his Latin
term from Pliny. There is great confusion in the ancient writers on the use of the word
minium, for prior to the Middle Ages it was usually applied to vermilion derived from
cinnabar. Vermilion was much adulterated with red-lead, even in Roman times, and finally
in later centuries the name came to be appropriated to the lead product. Theophrastus
(103) mentions a substitute for vermilion, but, in spite of commentators, there is no
evidence that it was red-lead. The first to describe the manufacture of real red-lead was
apparently Vitruvius (vi, 12), who calls it sandaraca (this name was usually applied to red
arsenical sulphide), and says: ‘‘ White-lead is heated in a furnace and by the force of the
“ fire becomes red lead. This invention was the result of observation in the case of an
“ accidental fire, and by the process a much better material is obtained than from the mines.”
He describes minium as the product from cinnabar. Dioscorides (v, 63), after re
white-lead, says it may be burned until it becomes the colour of sandaracha, and is c
sandyx. He also states (v, 69) that those are deceived who consider cinnabar to be the
same as minium, for minium is made in Spain out of stone mixed with silver sands. There-
fore he is not in agreement with Vitruvius and Pliny on the use of the term. Pliny
(XxxlI, 40) says: ‘‘ These barren stones (apparently lead ores barren of silver) may be
“recognised by their colour; it is only in the furnace that they turn red. After being
“roasted it is pulverized and is minium secundarium. It is known to few and is very
“inferior to the natural kind made from those sands we have mentioned (cinnabar). Itis
“with this that the genuine minium is adulterated in the works of the Company.” This
proprietary company who held a monopoly of the Spanish quicksilver mines, “ had many
“methods of adulterating it (miniwm)—a source of great plunder to the Company.”
Pliny also describes the making of red lead from white.

8Ochra plumbaria, (Interpretatio,—pleigeel ; modern German,—Bleigelb). The German
term indicates that this ‘‘ Lead Ochre,” a form of PbO, is what in the English trade is
known as massicot, or masticot. This material can be a partial product from almost any
cupellation where oxidation takes place below the melting point of the oxide. It may
have been known to the Ancients among the various species into which they divided

Ba wel a a

Le a ee Meee PN a

a et ts

—

a eS eS ee Se

ae ee oe ee

ee ee a ee

BOOK VII. 233

galena ; also copper, the same either roasted or in leaves or filings® ; also the
slags of gold, silver, copper, and lead ; also soda!®, its slags, saltpetre, burned
alum, vitriol, sal tostus, and melted salt4; stones which easily melt
in hot furnaces, the sand which is made from them™; soft tophus',

litharge, but there is no valid reason for assigning to it any special one of their terms, so far
as we can see.
*There are four forms of copper named as re-agents by Agricola :

Copper filings — Aeris scobs elimata.
Copper scales — Aeris squamae.
Copper flowers — Aeris =

Roasted copper — Aes ustum.

The first of these was no doubt finely divided copper metal; the second, third, and
fourth were probably all cupric oxide. According to Agricola (De Nat. Fos., p. 352), the
scales were the result of hammering the metal ; the flowers came off the metal when hot bars
were quenched in water, and a third kind were obtained from calcining the metal. ‘ Both
flowers (flos) and hammer-scales (sguama) have the same properties as crematum copper.
“. . . The particles of flower copper are finer than scales or crematum copper.” If we
assume that the verb uro used in De Re Metallica is of the same import as cremo in the De
Natura Fossilium, we can accept this material as being merely cupric oxide, but the aes
ustum of Pliny—Agricola’s usual source of technical nomenclature—is probably an artificial
sulphide. Dioscorides (v, 47), who is apparently the source of Pliny’s information, says :—
ad Of chalcos cecaumenos, the best is red, and pulverized resembles the colour of cinnabar ;
“if it turns black, it is over-burnt. It is made from broken ship nails put into a rough
“earthen pot, with alternate layers of equal parts of sulphur and salt. The opening should
“ be smeared with potter’s clay and the pot put in the furnace until it is thoroughly heated,”
etc. Pliny (xxxiv, 23) states: ‘‘ Moreover Cyprian copper is roasted in crude earthen
“pots with an equal amount of sulphur ; the apertures of the pots are well luted, and they
“are kept in the furnace until the pot is thoroughly heated. Some add salt, others use
“ alumen instead of sulphur, others add nothing, but only sprinkle it with vinegar.”

1°The reader is referred to note 6, p. 558, for more ample discussion of the alkalis.

Agricola gives in this chapter four substances of that character :
’ Soda (nitrum). Lye. “Ashes which wool-dyers use.”
“Salt made from the ashes of musk ivy.”

The last three are certainly potash, probably impure. While the first might be either
potash or soda, the fact that the last three are mentioned separately, together with other
evidence, convinces us that by the first is intended the #i#rum so generally imported into
Europe from Egypt during the Middle Ages. This imported salt was certainly the natural
bicarbonate, and we have, therefore, used the term “soda.”

“In this chapter are mentioned seven kinds of common salt :

Salt — Sal.

Rock salt — Sal fossilis.
“Made” salt — Sal factictius.
Refined salt — Sal purgatius.
Melted salt — Sal liquefactus.

And in addition sal tostus and sal torrefactus. Sal facticius is used in distinction from rock-
salt. The melted salt would apparently be salt-glass. What form the sal tostus and sal
torrefactus could have we cannot say, however, but they were possibly some form of heated
salt ; they may have been combinations after the order of sal artificiosus (see p. 236).

12 ‘Stones which easily melt in hot furnaces and sand which is made from them”
(lapides qui in ardentibus fornacibus facile liquescunt arenae ab eis resolutae). These were
ae quartz in this instance, although fluorspar is also included in this same genus, For

er discussion see note on p. 380.

“Tophus. (Interpretatio; Toffstein oder topstein). According to Dana (Syst. of
Min., p. 678), the German topfstein was English potstone or soapstone, a magnesian silicate.
It is scarcely possible, however, that this is what Agricola meant by this term, for such a
substance would be highly infusible. Agricola has a good deal to say about this mineral in
De Natura Fossilium (p. 189 and 313), and from these descriptions it would seem to be a
tufaceous limestone of various sorts, embracing some marls, stalagmites, calcareous sinter,
etc. He states: ‘‘ Generally fire does not melt it, but makes it harder and breaks it into
“powder. Tophus is said to be a stone found in caverns, made from the dripping of stone
“ Juice solidified by cold . . . . sometimes it is found containing many shells, and
“likewise the impressions of alder leaves; our people make lime by burning it.” Pliny,
upon whom Agricola depends largely for his nomenclature, mentions such a substance
(xxxvi, 48): “Among the multitude of stones there is fophus. It is unsuitable for

234 BOOK VII.

and a certain white schist?*. But lead, its ashes, red-lead, ochre, and
litharge, are more efficacious for ores which melt easily; hearth-lead for
those which melt with difficulty; and galena for those which melt with
greater difficulty. To the second order belong iron filings, their slag, sal
artificiosus, argol, dried lees of vinegar?®, and the lees of the agua which separates
gold from silver’® ; these lees and sal artificiosus have the power of penetrating
into ore, the argol to a considerable degree, the lees of vinegar to a greater
degree, but most of all those of the agua which separates gold from silver ;
filings and slags of iron, since they melt more slowly, have the power of heat-
ing the ore. To the third order belong pyrites, the cakes which are melted
from them, soda, its slags, salt, iron, iron scales, iron filings, iron slags, vitriol,
the sand which is resolved from stones which easily melt in the fire, and
tophus ; but first of all are pyrites and the cakes which are melted from it, for
they absorb the metals of the ore and guard them from the fire which con-
sumes them. To the fourth order belong lead and copper, and their relations.
And so with regard to fluxes, it is manifest that some are natural, others
fall in the category of slags, and the rest are purged from slag. When we

“ buildings, because it is perishable and soft. Still, however, there are some places which
“have no other, as Carthage, in Africa. It is eaten away by the emanations from the
“sea, crumbled to dust by the wind, and washed away by the rain.” In fact, tophus was
a wide genus among the older mineralogists, Wallerius (Medttationes Physico—Chemicae De
Origine Mundi, Stockholm, 1776, p. 186), for instance, gives 22 varieties. For the purposes
for which it is used we believe it was always limestone of some form.

M4Saxum fissile album. (The Sos shiny gives the German as schifer) Agricola
mentions it in Bermannus (459), in De Natura Fossilium (p. 319), but nothing definite
can be derived from these references. It appears to us from its use to have been either a
quartzite or a fissile limestone.

18Argol (Feces vini siccae,—‘ Dried lees of wine.” Germ. trans. gives die wein heffen,
although the usual German term of the period was weinstein). The lees of wine were the
crude tartar or argols of commerce and modern assayers. The argols of white wine are white,
while they are red from red wine. The white argol which Agricola so often specifies would
have no special excellence, unless it may be that it is less easily adulterated. Agricola (De Nat.
Fos., p. 344) uses the expression “ Fex vini sicca called tartarum’’—one of the earliest
appearances of the latter term in this connection. The use of argol is very old, for
Dioscorides (Ist Century A.D.) not only describes argol, but also its reduction to impure
potash. He says (v, 90): “ The lees (éryx) are to be selected from old Italian wine ; if not,
“from other similar wine. Lees of vinegar are much stronger. They are carefully dried and
“then burnt. There are some who burn them in a new earthen pot on a large fire until they
“are thoroughly incinerated. Others place a quantity of the lees on live coals and pursue
“the same method. The test as to whether it is completely burned, is that it becomes white
“or blue, and seems to burn the tongue when touched. The method of burning lees of
“vinegar is the same. . . . It should be used fresh, as it quickly grows stale ; it should
“be placed in a vessel in a secluded place.” Pliny (xx, 31) says: “ Following these, come
“the lees of these various liquids. The lees of wine (vint faectbus) are so powerful as to be
“fatal to persons on descending into the vats. The test for this is to let down a lamp, which,
“if extinguished, indicates the peril. . . . Their virtues are greatly increased by the
“action of fire.’’ Matthioli, commenting on this passage from Dioscorides in 1565, makes
the following remark (p. 1375): ‘‘ The precipitate of the wine which settles in the casks of
the winery forms stone-like crusts, and is called by the works-people by the name tartarum.”
It will be seen above that these lees were rendered stronger by the action of fire, in which case
the tartar was reduced to potassium carbonate. The weinstein of the old German metal-
lurgists was often the material lixiviated from the incinerated tartar.

Dried lees of vinegar (siccae feces aceti ; Interpretaltio, die heffe des essigs). This would
also be crude tartar. Pliny (xxuII, 32) says: ‘‘ The lees of vinegar (faex acett) ; owing to the
“more acrid material are more aggravating in their effects. . . . When combined with
“ melanthium it heals the bites of dogs and crocodiles.”

16Dried lees of agua which separates gold and silver. (Siccae feces aqguarum quae aurum
ab argento secernunt. German translation, Der scheidwasser heffe). There is no pointed
description in Agricola’s works, or in any other that we can find, as to what this material
was. The “separating agua’? was undoubtedly nitric acid (see p. 439, Book X), There

a gee

BOOK VII. 235

assay ores, we can without great expense add to them a small portion of any
sort of flux, but when we smelt them we cannot add a large portion without
great expense. We must, therefore, consider how great the cost is, to avoid
incurring a greater expense on smelting an ore than the profit we make out of
the metals which it yields.

The colour of the fumes which the ore emits after being placed on a hot
shovel or an iron plate, indicates what flux is needed in addition to the lead,
for the purpose of either assaying or smelting. If the fumes have a purple
tint, it is best of all, and the ore does not generally require any flux whatever.
If the fumes are blue, there should be added cakes melted out of pyrites or
other cupriferous rock ; if yellow, litharge and sulphur should be added ; if
red, glass-galls!’ and salt ; if green, then cakes melted from cupriferous stones,
litharge, and glass-galls ; if the fumes are black, melted salt or iron slag,
litharge and white lime rock. If they are white, sulphur and iron which is
eaten with rust; if they are white with green patches, iron slag and
sand obtained from stones which easily melt; if the middle part of the
fumes are yellow and thick, but the outer parts green, the same sand and
iron slag. The colour of the fumes not only gives us information as to the
proper remedies which should be applied to each ore, but also more or less
indication as to the solidified juices which are mixed with it, and which give
forth such fumes. Generally, blue fumes signify that the ore contains azure ;
yellow, orpiment ; red, realgar; green, chrysocolla; black, black bitumen ;
white, tin'® ; white with green patches, the same mixed with chrysocolla ;
the middle part yellow and other parts green show that it contains sulphur.
Earth, however, and other things dug up which contain metals, some-
times emit similarly coloured fumes.

If the ore contains any s#ibtum, then iron slag is added to it ; if pyrites,
then are added cakes melted from a cupriferous stone and sand made from
stones which easily melt. If the ore contains iron, then pyrites and sulphur
are added ; for just as iron slag is the flux for an ore mixed with sulphur, so
on the contrary, to a gold or silver ore containing iron, from which they are

are two precipitates possible, both referred to as feces,—the first, a precipitate of silver chloride
from clarifying the aqua valens, and the second, the residues left in making the acid by
distillation. It is difficult to believe that silver chloride was the feces referred to in the text,
because such a precipitate would be obviously misleading when used as a flux through the
addition of silver to the assays, too expensive, and of no merit for this purpose. Therefore
one is driven to the conclusion that the feces must have been the residues left in the retorts
when nitric acid was prepared. It would have been more in keeping with his usual mode
of expression, however, to have referred to this material as a residuus. The materials used
for making acid varied greatly, so there is no telling what such a feces contained. A list
of possibilities is given in note 8, p. 443. In the main, the residue would be undigested
vitriol, alum, saltpetre, salt, etc., together with potassium, iron, and alum sulphates. The
Probierbiichlin (p. 27) also gives this re-agent under the term Toden kopff das ist schlam
oder feces auss scheydwasser.

17 Recrementum vitri. (Interpretatio Glassgallen). Formerly, when more impure
materials were employed than nowadays, the surface of the mass in the first melting
of glass materials was covered with salts, mostly potassium and sodium sulphates and
chlorides which escaped perfect vitrification. This ‘‘slag” or “ glassgallen’’ of Agricola
was also termed sandiver.

18The whole of this expression is ‘‘ candidus, candido.”” It is by no means certain
that this is tin, for usually tin is given as plumbum candidum.

236 BOOK VII.

not easily separated, is added sulphur and sand made from stones which
easily melt.

Sal artifictosus'® suitable for use in assaying ore is made in many ways.
By the first method, equal portions of argol, lees of vinegar, and urine,
are all boiled down together till turned into salt. The second method is from
equal portions of the ashes which wool-dyers use, of lime, of argol purified,
and of melted salt; one lébra of each of these ingredients is thrown into
twenty librae of urine ; then all are boiled down to one-third and strained,
and afterward there is added to what remains one bra and four unctae
of unmelted salt, eight pounds of lye being at the same time poured into
the pots, with litharge smeared around on the inside, and the whole is boiled
till the salt becomes thoroughly dry. The third method follows. Unmelted
salt, and iron which is eaten with rust, are put into a vessel, and after
urine has been poured in, it is covered with a lid and put in a warm place
for thirty days ; then the iron is washed in the urine and taken out, and
the residue is boiled until it is turned into salt. In the fourth method by
which sal artificiosus is prepared, the lye made from equal portions of
lime and the ashes which wool-dyers use, together with equal portions of
salt, soap, white argol, and saltpetre, are boiled until in the end the mix-
ture evaporates and becomes salt. This salt is mixed with the concentrates
from washing, to melt them.

Saltpetre is prepared in the following manner, in order that it may be
suitable for use in assaying ore. It is placed in a pot which is smeared on
the inside with litharge, and lye made of quicklime is repeatedly poured over
it, and it is heated until the fire consumes it. Wherefore the saltpetre
does not kindle with the fire, since it has absorbed the lime which preserves
it, and thus it is prepared?®.

The following compositions*! are recommended to smelt all ores which
the heat of fire breaks up or melts only with difficulty. Of these, one is made
from stones of the third order, which easily melt when thrown into hot
furnaces. They are crushed into pure white powder, and with half an uncta

19Sal artificiosus. These are a sort of stock fluxes. Such mixtures are common in all
old assay books, from the Probierbichlin to later than John Cramer in 1737 (whose Latin
lectures on Assaying were published in English under the title of “‘ Elements of the Art of
Assaying Metals,” London, 1741). Cramer observes (p. 51) that: “ Artificers compose a
“great many fluxes with the above-mentioned salts and with the reductive ones; nay,
“some use as many different fluxes as there are different ores and metals ; all which, however,
“we think needless to describe. It is better to have explained a few of the simpler ones,
‘“‘ which serve for all the others, and are very easily prepared, than to tire the reader with
“ confused compositions: and this chiefly because unskilled artificers sometimes attempt
“to obtain with many ingredients of the same nature heaped up beyond measure, and with
“much labour, though not more properly and more securely, what might have been easil
“ effected, with one only and the same ingredient, thus increasing the number, not at
“the virtue of the things employed. Nevertheless, if anyone loves variety, he may, according
‘to the proportions and cautions above prescribed, at his will chuse among the simpler kinds
“ such as will best suit his purpose, and compose a variety of fluxes with them.”

20This operation apparently results in a coating to prevent the deflagration of the
saltpetre—in fact, it might be permitted to translate inflammatur ‘‘ deflagrate,” instead of
kindle.

%1The results which would follow from the use of these “ fluxes ’’ would obviously
depend upon the ore treated. They can all conceivably be successful. Of these, the first
is the lead-glass of the German assayers—a flux much emphasized by all old authorities,

ee ge

BOOK VII. 237

of this powder there are mixed two wnciae of yellow litharge, likewise crushed.
This mixture is put into a scorifier large enough to hold it, and placed under
the muffle of a hot furnace ; when the charge flows like water, which occurs
after half an hour, it is taken out of the furnace and poured on to a stone,
and when it has hardened it has the appearance of glass, and this is likewise
crushed. This powder is sprinkled over any metalliferous ore which does
not easily melt when we are assaying it, and it causes the slag to exude.

Others, in place of litharge, substitute lead ash,”* which is made in the
following way: sulphur is thrown into lead which has been melted in a
crucible, and it soon becomes covered with a sort of scum; when this is
removed, sulphur is again thrown in, and the skin which forms is again taken
off; this is frequently repeated, in fact until all the lead is turned into
powder. There is a powerful flux compound which is made from one wncia
each of prepared saltpetre, melted salt, glass-gall, and argol, and one-third
of an uncia of litharge and a bes of glass ground to powder ; this flux, being
added to an equal weight of ore, liquefies it. A more powerful flux is made by
placing together in a pot, smeared on the inside with litharge, equal portions
of white argol, common salt, and prepared saltpetre, and these are heated
until a white powder is obtained from them, and this is mixed with as much
litharge ; one part of this compound is mixed with two parts of the ore which
is to be assayed. A still more powerful flux than this is made out of ashes
of black lead, saltpetre, orpiment, stibiwm, and dried lees of the aqua with
which gold workers separate gold from silver. The ashes of lead?* are made from
one pound of lead and one pound of sulphur ; the lead is flattened out into
sheets by pounding with a hammer, and placed alternately with sulphur in a
crucible or pot, and they are heated together until the fire consumes the
sulphur and the lead turns to ashes. One /ébra of crushed saltpetre is mixed
with one libra of orpiment similarly ground to powder, and the two are cooked
in an iron pan until they liquefy ; they are then poured out, and after cool-
ing are again ground to powder. A libra of stibium and a bes of the
dried lees (of what ?) are placed alternately in a crucible and heated to the
point at which they form a button, which is similarly reduced to powder.
A bes of this powder and one bra of the ashes of lead, as well as a libra of
powder made out of the saltpetre and orpiment, are mixed together and a

including Loehneys, Ercker and Cramner, and used even yet. The “ powerful flux” would be a
reducing, desulphurizing, and an acid flux. The ‘‘ more powerful ’’ would be a basic flux
in which the reducing action of the argols would be largely neutralized by the nitre. The
“still more powerful ’’ would be a strongly sulphurizing basic flux, while the “ most powerful ”
would be a still more sulphurizing flux, but it is badly mixed as to its oxidation and basic
properties. (See also note 19 on sal artificiosus).

Tead ash (Cinis Plumbi. Glossary, Pleyasch).—This was obviously, from
the method of making, an artificial lead sulphide.

Ashes of lead aye plumbi cinis). This, as well as lead ash, was also
an artificial lead sulphide. Such substances were highly valued by the Ancients for medicinal
purposes. Dioscorides (v, 56) says: ‘‘ Burned lead (Molybdos cecaumenos) is made in this
“way: Sprinkle ovo over some very thinnest lead plates and put them into a new
“earthen pot, add other layers, putting sulphur between each layer until the pot is full; set
“it alight and stir the melted lead with an iron rod until it is entirely reduced to ashes and
“until none of the lead remains unburned. Then take it off, first stopping up your nose,
“ because the fumes of burnt lead are very injurious. Or burn the lead filings in a pot with
‘* sulphur as aforesaid.” Pliny (xxxIv., 50) gives much the same directions.

238 BOOK VII.

powder is made from them, one part of which added to two parts of ore
liquefies it and cleanses it of dross. But the most powerful flux is one which
has two drachmae of sulphur and as much glass-galls, and half an uncia of each of
the following,—stibtum, salt obtained from boiled urine, melted common salt,
prepared saltpetre, litharge, vitriol, argol, salt obtained from ashes of musk ivy,
dried lees of the aqua by which gold-workers separate gold from silver,
alum reduced by fire to powder, and one uncia of camphor®* combined with
sulphur and ground into powder. A half or whole portion of this mixture,
as the necessity of the case requires, is mixed with one portion of the ore
and two portions of lead, and put in a scorifier ; it is sprinkled with powder
of crushed Venetian glass, and when the mixture has been heated for an hour
and a half or two hours, a button will settle in the bottom of the scorifier, and
from it the lead is soon separated.

There is also a flux which separates sulphur, orpiment and realgar from
metalliferous ore. This flux is composed of equal portions of iron slag,
white tophus, and salt. After these juices have been secreted, the ores
themselves are melted, with argol added to them. There is one flux which
preserves stibtum from the fire, that the fire may not consume it, and
which preserves the metals from the stibéum ; and this is composed of equal
portions of sulphur, prepared saltpetre, melted salt, and vitriol, heated
together in lye until no odour emanates from the sulphur, which occurs after
a space of three or four hours.?5

It is also worth while to substitute certain other mixtures. Take two
portions of ore properly prepared, one portion of iron filings, and likewise
one portion of salt, and mix ; then put them into a scorifier and place them
in a muffle furnace; when they are reduced by the fire and run together, a
button will settle in the bottom of the scorifier. Or else take equal portions
of ore and of lead ochre, and mix with them a small quantity of iron filings,
and put them into a scorifier, then scatter iron filings over the mixture. Or
else take ore which has been ground to powder and sprinkle it in a crucible,
and then sprinkle over it an equal quantity of salt that has been three or
four times moistened with urine and dried ; then, again and again alternately,
powdered ore and salt; next, after the crucible has been covered with a
lid and sealed, it is placed upon burning charcoal. Or else take one portion of
ore, one portion of minute lead granules, half a portion of Venetian glass,
and the same quantity of glass-galls. Or else take one portion of ore, one
portion of lead granules, half a portion of salt, one-fourth of a portion of argol,
and the same quantity of lees of the agua which separates gold from silver.
Or else take equal portions of prepared ore and a powder in which there

24Camphor (camphora). This was no doubt the well-known gum. Agricola, how-
ever, believed that camphor (De Nat. Fossilium, p. 224) was a species of bitumen, and he
devotes considerable trouble to the refutation of the statements by the Arabic authors that
it was a gum. In any event, it would be a useful reducing agent.

25Inasmuch as orpiment and realgar are both arsenical sulphides, the use of iron “ slag,”
if it contains enough iron, would certainly matte the sulphur and arsenic. Sulphur and
arsenic are the “juices” referred to (see note 4, p. I). It is difficult to see the object
of preserving the antimony with such a sulphurizing “addition,” unless it was desired to
secure a regulus of antimony alone from a given antimonial ore.

BOOK VII. 239
’

are equal portions of very minute lead granules, melted salt, stibium and
iron slag. Or else take equal portions of gold ore, vitriol, argol, and of salt.
So much for the fluxes. ee

In the assay furnace, when it has been prepared in the way in which I
have described, is first placed a muffle. Then selected pieces of live charcoals
are laid on it, for, from pieces of inferior quality, a great quantity of ash collects
around the muffle and hinders the action of the fire. Then the scorifiers are
placed under the muffle with tongs, and glowing coals are placed under the
fore part of the muffle to warm the scorifiers more quickly ; and when the lead
or ore is to be placed in the scorifiers, they are taken out again with the
tongs. When the scorifiers glow in the heat, first of all the ash or small
charcoals, if any have fallen into them, should be blown away with an iron
pipe two feet long and a digit in diameter; this same thing must be done
if ash or small coal has fallen into the cupels. Next, put in a small ball of lead
with the tongs, and when this lead has begun to be turned into fumes and
consumed, add to it the prepared ore wrapped in paper. It is preferable that
the assayer should wrap it in paper, and in this way put it in the scorifier,
than that he should drop it in with a copper ladle; for when the
scorifiers are small, if he uses a ladle he frequently spills some part of the
ore. When the paper is burnt, he stirs the ore with a small charcoal held in
the tongs, so that the lead may absorb the metal which is mixed in the ore ;
when this mixture has taken place, the slag partly adheres by its cir-
cumference to the scorifier and makes a kind of black ring, and partly
floats on the lead in which is mixed the gold or silver ; then the slag must
be removed from it.

The lead used must be entirely free from every trace of silver, as is that
which is known as Villacense.2® But if this kind is not obtainable, the lead
must be assayed separately, to determine with certainty that proportion of
silver it contains, so that it may be deducted from the calculation of the
ore, and the result be exact ; for unless such lead be used, the assay will be
false and misleading. The lead balls are made with a pair of iron tongs,
about one foot long; its iron claws are so formed that when pressed
together they are egg-shaped; each claw contains a hollow cup, and when

‘the claws are closed there extends upward from the cup a passage, so there

are two openings, one of which leads to each hollow cup. And so when the
molten lead is poured in through the openings, it flows down into the hollow
cup, and two balls are formed by one pouring.

In this place I ought not to omit mention of another method of assaying
employed by some assayers. They first of all place prepared ore in the
scorifiers and heat it, and afterward they add the lead. Of this method I
cannot approve, for in this way the ore frequently becomes cemented, and
for this reason it does not stir easily afterward, and is very slow in mixing
with the lead.

*6The lead free from silver, called villacense, was probably from Bleyberg, not far from
Villach in Upper Austria, this locality having been for centuries celebrated for its pure lead.
These mines were worked prior to, and long after, Agricola’s time.

240 BOOK VII.

If the whole space of the furnace covered by the muffle is not filled with
scorifiers, cupels are put in the empty space, in order that they may become
warmed in the meantime. Sometimes, however, it is filled with scorifiers,
when we are assaying many different ores, or many portions of one ore at the
same time. Although the cupels are usually dried in one hour, yet smaller
ones are done more quickly, and the larger ones more slowly. Unless the
cupels are heated before the metal mixed with lead is placed in them, they

A—CLAWS OF THE TONGS. B—IRON, GIVING FORM OF AN EGG. C—OPENING.

frequently break, and the lead always sputters and sometimes leaps out of them ;
if the cupel is broken or the lead leaps out of it, it is mecessary to assay
another portion of ore; but if the lead only sputters, then the cupels should
be covered with broad thin pieces of glowing charcoal, and when the lead
strikes these, it falls back again, and thus the mixture is slowly exhaled.
Further, if in the cupellation the lead which is in the mixture is not con-
sumed, but remains fixed and set, and is covered by a kind of skin, this is a
sign that it has not been heated by a sufficiently hot fire ; put into the
mixture, therefore, a dry pine stick, or a twig of a similar tree, and hold it
in the hand in order that it can be drawn away when it has been heated.
Then take care that the heat is sufficient and equal ; if the heat has not
passed all round the charge, as it should when everything is done rightly,
but causes it to have a lengthened shape, so that it appears to have a tail,
this is a sign that the heat is deficient where the tail lies. Then in order
that the cupel may be equally heated by the fire, turn it around with a small
iron hook, whose handle is likewise made of iron and is a foot and a half long.

SMALL IRON HOOK.

Next, if the mixture has not enough lead, add as much of it as is required
with the iron tongs, or with the brass ladle to which is fastened a very long
handle. In order that the charge may not be cooled, warm the lead beforehand.

cere ll eli

BOOK VII, 241

But it is better at first to add as much lead as is required to the ore which
needs melting, rather than afterward when the melting has been half finished,
that the whole quantity may not vanish in fumes, but part of it remain
fast. When the heat of the fire has nearly consumed the lead, then is the
time when the gold and silver gleam in their varied colours, and when all the
lead has been consumed the gold or silver settles in the cupel. Then as
soon as possible remove the cupel out of the furnace, and take the button out
of it while it is still warm, in order that it does not adhere to the ashes. This
generally happens if the button is already cold when it is taken out. If the
ashes do adhere to it, do not scrape it with a knife, lest some of it be lost and
the assay be erroneous, but squeeze it with the iron tongs, so that the ashes
drop off through the pressure. Finally, it is of advantage to make two or
three assays of the same ore at the same time, in order that if by chance
one is not successful, the second, or in any event the third, may be certain.

While the assayer is assaying the ore, in order to prevent the great heat
of the fire from injuring his eyes, it will be useful for him always to have,
ready a thin wooden tablet, two palms wide, with a handle by which it may
be held, and with a slit down the middle in order that he may look through
it as through a crack, since it is necessary for him to look frequently within
and carefully to consider everything.

A—HANDLE OF TABLET. B—lITsS CRACK.

Now the lead which has absorbed the silver from a metallic ore is con-
sumed in the cupel by the heat in the space of three quarters of an hour. When
the assays are completed the muffle is taken out of the furnace, and the
ashes removed with an iron shovel, not only from the brick and iron furnaces,
but also from the earthen one, so that the furnace need not be removed from
its foundation.

From ore placed in the triangular crucible a button is melted out, from
which metal is afterward made. First of all, glowing charcoal is put into
the iron hoop, then is put in the triangular crucible, which contains the ore
together with those things which can liquefy it and purge it of its dross ;
then the fire is blown with the double bellows, and the ore is heated until
the button settles in the bottom of the crucible. We have explained that
there are two methods of assaying ore,—one, by which the lead is mixed

242 BOOK VII.

with ore in the scorifier and afterward again separated from it in the cupel ;
the other, by which it is first melted in the triangular earthen crucible and
afterward mixed with lead in the scorifier, and later separated from it in the
cupel. Now let us consider which is more suitable for each ore, or, if neither
is suitable, by what other method in one way or another we can assay it.

We justly begin with a gold ore, which we assay by both methods, for
if it is rich and seems not to be strongly resistant to fire, but to liquefy easily,
one centumpondium of it (known to us as the lesser weights),?? together with
one and a half, or two wnciae of lead of the larger weights, are mixed together
and placed in the scorifier, and the two are heated in the fire until they are
well mixed. But since such an ore sometimes resists melting, add a little
salt to it, either sal torrefactus or sal artificiosus, for this will subdue it, and
prevent the alloy from collecting much dross ; stir it frequently with an iron
rod, in order that the lead may flow around the gold on every side, and absorb
it and cast out the waste. When this has been done, take out the alloy and
cleanse it of slag; then place it in the cupel and heat it until it exhales all
the lead, and a bead of gold settles in the bottom.

If the gold ore is seen not to be easily melted in the fire, roast it and
extinguish it with brine. Do this again and again, for the more often you
roast it and extinguish it, the more easily the ore can be crushed fine, and the
more quickly does it melt in the fire and give up whatever dross it possesses.

27This method of proportionate weights for assay charges is simpler than the
modern English ‘‘ assay ton,’ both because of the use of roo units in the standard of
weight (the centumpondium), and because of the lack of complication between the
Avoirdupois and Troy scales. For instance, an ore containing a libra of silver to the
centumpondium would contain 1/rooth part, and the same ratio would obtain, no matter
what the actual weight of a centumpondium of the “lesser weight’”’ might be. To follow
the matter still further, an uncia being 1/1,200 of a centumpondium, if the ore ran one
“‘ uncia of the lesser weight ’’ to the ‘‘ centumpondium of the lesser weight,” it would also run
one actual uncia to the actual ceniumpondium; it being a matter of indifference what
might be the actual weight of the centumpondium upon which the scale of lesser weights
is based. In fact Agricola’s statement (p. 261) indicates that it weighed an actual drachma.
We have, in some places, interpolated the expressions “lesser” and “‘ greater’’ weights
for clarity.

This is not the first mention of this scheme of lesser weights, as it appears in the
Probierbiichlein (1500 ? see Appendix B) and Biringuccio (1540). For a more complete dis-
cussion of weights and measures see Appendix C. For convenience, we repeat here the Roman
scale, although, as will be seen in the Appendix, Pip sei used the Latin terms in many

places merely as nomenclature equivalents of the ol rman scale.
Troy Ozs. dwts. gr.
Grains. per short ton.
1 Siliqua j ‘ie 2.87 Per Centumpondium .. 0 3 2
6 Stliquae = I Scripulum .. 17.2 i Hf iat Re
4 Scripula = I Sextula as 68.7 ‘3 Pee rah sys
6 Sextulae = 1 Uncia Se 412.2 Pe a 1s 24. oe
12 Unciae = 1 Libra ite 4946.4 i “a aba 1) dae
100 Librae = I Centumpondium 494640.0
However Agricola may occasionally use
16 Unciae = 1 Libra “4 6592.0 (?)
100 Librae = I Centumpondium 659200.0 (?)
Also Oz. dwts. gr.
per short ton.
1 Scripulum .. sie i 17.2 Per Centumpondium.. I 0 6
3 Scripula = 1 Drachma <S 51.5 ue ie ea 3) 7 Oe ae
2 Drachmae = I Sicilicus pee 103.0 hi 4 sich RE ala
4 Sicilici = 1 Uncia bik 412.2 % 5 Ape Y Breet eal
8 Unciae = I Bes .. e 3297.6 i i i QS OES SES

BOOK VII. 243

Mix one part of this ore, when it has been roasted, crushed, and washed, with
three parts of some powder compound which melts ore, and six parts of lead.
Put the charge into the triangular crucible, place it in the iron hoop to which
the double bellows reaches, and heat first in a slow fire, and afterward
gradually in a fiercer fire, till it melts and flows like water. If the ore does
not melt, add to it a little more of these fluxes, mixed with an equal portion
of yellow litharge, and stir it with a hot iron rod until it all melts. Then
take the crucible out of the hoop, shake off the button when it has cooled,
and when it has been cleansed, melt first in the scorifier and afterward in
thé cupel. Finally, rub the gold which has settled in the bottom of the cupel,
after it has been taken out and cooled, on the touchstone, in order to find out
what proportion of silver it contains. Another method is to put a centwm-
pondium (of the lesser weights) of gold ore into the triangular crucible, and
add to it a drachma (of the larger weights) of glass-galls. If it resists melting,
add half a drvachma of roasted argol, and if even then it resists, add the
same quantity of roasted lees of vinegar, or lees of the agua which separates
gold from silver, and the button will settle in the bottom of the crucible.
Melt this button again in the scorifier and a third time in the cupel.

We determine in the following way, before it is melted in the muffle
furnace, whether pyrites contains gold in it or not: if, after being three times
roasted and three times quenched in sharp vinegar, it has not broken nor
changed its colour, there is gold in it. The vinegar by which it is quenched
should be mixed with salt that is put in it, and frequently stirred and dissolved
for three days. Nor is pyrites devoid of gold, when, after being roasted and
then rubbed on the touchstone, it colours the touchstone in the same way that
it coloured it when rubbed in its crude state. Nor is gold lacking in that,
whose concentrates from washing, when heated in the fire, easily melt, giving
forth little smell and remaining bright ; such concentrates are heated in the
fire in a hollowed piece of charcoal covered over with another charcoal.

We also assay gold ore without fire, but more often its sand or the con-
centrates which have been made by washing, or the dust gathered up by
some other means. A little of it is slightly moistened with water and heated
until it begins to exhale an odour, and then to one portion of ore are placed
two portions of quicksilver** in a wooden dish as deep as a basin. They are
mixed together with a little brine, and are then ground with a wooden pestle
for the space of two hours, until the mixture becomes of the thickness of dough,
and the quicksilver can no longer be distinguished from the concentrates
made by the washing, nor the concentrates from the quicksilver. Warm, or
at least tepid, water is poured into the dish and the material is washed until
the water runs out clear. Afterward cold water is poured into the same dish,
and soon the quicksilver, which has absorbed all the gold, runs together
into a separate place away from the rest of the concentrates made by
washing. The quicksilver is afterward separated from the gold by means
of a pot covered with soft leather, or with canvas made of woven
threads of cotton ; the amalgam is poured into the middle of the cloth or

*8The amalgamation of gold ores is fully discussed in note 12, p. 297.

244° BOOK VII.

leather, which sags about one hand’s breadth ; next, the leather is folded
over and tied with a waxed string, and the dish catches the quicksilver
which is squeezed through it. As for the gold which remains in the leather,
it is placed in a scorifier and purified by being placed near glowing coals. Others
do not wash away the dirt with warm water, but with strong lye and vinegar,
for they pour these liquids into the pot, and also throw into it the quicksilver
mixed with the concentrates made by washing. Then they set the pot in a
warm place, and after twenty-four hours pour out the liquids with the dirt, and
separate the quicksilver from the gold in the manner which I have described.
Then they pour urine into a jar set in the ground, and in the jar place a
pot with holes in the bottom, and in the pot they place the gold ; then the
lid is put on and cemented, and it is joined with the jar ; they afterward heat
it till the pot glows red. After it has cooled, if there is copper in the gold
they melt it with lead in a cupel, that the copper may be separated from it ;
but if there is silver in the gold they separate them by means of the aqua
which has the power of parting these two metals. There are some who,
when they separate gold from quicksilver, do not pour the amalgam into
a leather, but put it into a gourd-shaped earthen vessel, which they place
in the furnace and heat gradually over burning charcoal ; next, with an iron
plate, they cover the opening of the operculum, which exudes vapour, and as
soon as it has ceased to exude, they smear it with lute and heat it for a short
time ; then they remove the operculum from the pot, and wipe off the
quicksilver which adheres to it with a hare’s foot, and preserve it for future
use. By the latter method, a greater quantity of quicksilver is lost, and by
the former method, a smaller quantity.

If an ore is rich in silver, as is rudis silver®®, frequently silver glance,
or rarely ruby silver, gray silver, black silver, brown silver, or yellow silver,
as soon as it is cleansed and heated, a centumpondium (of the lesser weights) of
it is placed in an uwncia of molten lead in a cupel, and is heated until the lead
exhales. But if the ore is of poor or moderate quality, it must first be dried,
then crushed, and then to a centumpondium (of the lesser weights) an wncia
of lead is added, and it is heated in the scorifier until it melts. If it is not
soon melted by the fire, it should be sprinkled with a little powder of the
first order of fluxes, and if then it does not melt, more is added little by little
until it melts and exudes its slag; that this result may be reached sooner,
the powder which has been sprinkled over it should be stirred in with an iron
rod. When the scorifier has been taken out of the assay furnace, the alloy
should be poured into a hole in a baked brick ; and when it has cooled and been
cleansed of the slag, it should be placed in a cupel and heated until it exhales
all its lead; the weight of silver which remains in the cupel indicates what
proportion of silver is contained in the ore.

We assay copper ore without lead, for if it is melted with it, the copper
usually exhales and is lost. Therefore, a certain weight of such an ore

2For discussion of the silver ores, see note 8, p. 108. MRudis silver was a fairly
pure silver mineral, the various coloured silvers were y horn-silver and partly alteration
products.

a ee ee

yee

BOOK VII. 245

is first roasted in a hot fire for about six or eight hours ; next, when it has
cooled, it is crushed and washed ; then the concentrates made by washing
are again roasted, crushed, washed, dried, and weighed. The portion which
it has lost whilst it is being roasted and washed is taken into account, and
these concentrates by washing represent the cake which will be melted out
of the copper ore. Place three centwmpondia (lesser weights) of this, mixed
with three centumpondia (lesser weights) each of copper scales*®, saltpetre,
and Venetian glass, mixed, into the triangular crucible, and place it in the iron
hoop which is set on the hearth in front of the double bellows. Cover the crucible
with charcoal in such a way that nothing may fall into the ore which is to be
melted, and so that it may melt more quickly. At first blow a gentle blast with
the bellows in order that the ore may be heated gradually in the fire; then
blow strongly till it melts, and the fire consumes that which has been added to
it, and the ore itself exudes whatever slag it possesses. Next, cool
the crucible which has been taken out, and when this is broken you will find
the copper ; weigh this, in order to ascertain how great a portion of the ore
the fire has consumed. Some ore is only once roasted, crushed, and washed ;
and of this kind of concentrates, three centumpondia (lesser weights) are
taken with one centumpondium each of common salt, argol and glass-
galls. Heat them in the triangular crucible, and when the mixture has
cooled a button of pure copper will be found, if the ore is rich in this metal.
If, however, it is less rich, a stony lump results, with which the copper is
intermixed ; this lump is again roasted, crushed, and, after adding stones
which easily melt and saltpetre, it is again melted in another crucible, and
there settles in the bottom of the crucible a button of pure copper. If you
wish to know what proportion of silver is in this copper button, melt it in a
cupel after adding lead. With regard to this test I will speak later.

Those who wish to know quickly what portion of silver the copper ore
contains, roast the ore, crush and wash it, then mix a little yellow litharge
with one centumpondium (lesser weights) of the concentrates, and put the
mixture into a scorifier, which they place under the muffle in a hot furnace for
the space of half an hour. When the slag exudes, by reason of the melting force
which is in the litharge, they take the scorifier out ; when it has cooled, they
cleanse it of slag and again crush it, and with one centumpondium of it they
mix one and a half wmciae of lead granules. They then put it into another
scorifier, which they place under the muffle in a hot furnace, adding to the
mixture a little of the powder of some one of the fluxes which cause ore to
melt ; when it has melted they take it out, and after it has cooled, cleanse
it of slag ; lastly, they heat it in the cupel till it has exhaled all of the lead,
and only silver remains.

Lead ore may be assayed by this method: crush half an uncia of
pure lead-stone and the same quantity of the chrysocolla which they call
borax, mix them together, place them in a crucible, and put a glowing coal

*Tt is difficult to see why copper scales (sguamae aeris—copper oxide ?) are added,
unless it be to collect a small ratio of copper in the ore. This additional copper is not
mentioned again, however. The whole of this statement is very confused.

246 BOOK VII.

in the middle of it. As soon as the borax crackles and the lead-stone melts,
which soon occurs, remove the coal from the crucible, and the lead will settle
to the bottom of it ; weigh it out, and take account of that portion of it
which the fire has consumed. If you also wish to know what portion of silver
is contained in the lead, melt the lead in the cupel until all of it exhales.
Another way is to roast the lead ore, of whatsoever quality it be, wash
it, and put into the crucible one centumpondium of the concentrates, together
with three centumpondia of the powdered compound which melts ore, mixed
together, and place it in the iron hoop that it may melt ; when it has cooled,
cleanse it ofitsslag, and complete the test as I have already said. Another way is
to take two wnciae of prepared ore, five drachmae of roasted copper, one wncia of
glass, or glass-galls reduced to powder, a semt-uncta of salt, and mix them. Put

the mixture into the triangular crucible, and heat it over a gentle fire to |

prevent it from breaking; when the mixture has melted, blow the fire
vigorously with the bellows ; then take the crucible off the live coals and
let it cool in the open air ; do not pour water on it, lest the lead button being
acted upon by the excessive cold should become mixed with the slag, and the
assay in this way be erroneous. When the crucible has cooled, you will find
in the bottom of it the lead button. Another way is to take two wnciae of
ore, a semt-uncia of litharge, two drachmae of Venetian glass and a semi-uncia
of saltpetre. If there is difficulty in melting the ore, add to it iron filings,
which, since they increase the heat, easily separate the waste from lead and
other metals. By the last way, lead ore properly prepared is placed in the
crucible, and there is added to it only the sand made from stones which easily
melt, or iron filings, and then the assay is completed as formerly.

You can assay tin ore by the following method. First roast it, then
crush, and afterward wash it ; the concentrates are again roasted, crushed,
and washed. Mix one and a half centwmpondia of this with one centum-
pondium of the chrysocolla which they call borax; from the mixture,
when it has been moistened with water, make a lump. Afterwards,
perforate a large round piece of charcoal, making this opening a palm deep,
three digits wide on the upper side and narrower on the lower side ; when
the charcoal is put in its place the latter should be on the bottom and the
former uppermost. Let it be placed in a crucible, and let glowing coal be
put round it on all sides ; when the perforated piece of coal begins to burn,
the lump is placed in the upper part of the opening, and it is covered with a
wide piece of glowing coal, and after many pieces of coal have been put round
it, a hot fire is blown up with the bellows, until all the tin has run out
of the lower opening of the charcoal into the crucible. Another way is to
take a large piece of charcoal, hollow it out, and smear it with lute, that the
ore may not leap out when white hot. Next, make a small hole through the
middle of it, then fill up the large opening with small charcoal, and put the
ore upon this ; put fire in the small hole and blow the fire with the nozzle of
a hand bellows ; place the piece of charcoal in a small crucible, smeared
with lute, in which, when the melting is finished, you will find a button
of tin.

ee) a eS ee ee ee

BOOK VII. 247

In assaying bismuth ore, place pieces of ore in the scorifier, and put
it under the muffle in a hot furnace ; as soon as they are heated, they
drip with bismuth, which runs together into a button.

Quicksilver ore is usually tested by mixing one part of broken ore
with three-parts of charcoal dust and a handful of salt. Put the mixture into
a crucible or a pot or a jar, cover it with a lid, seal it with lute, place it on
glowing charcoal, and as soon as a burnt cinnabar colour shows in it, take
out the vessel ; for if you continue the heat too long the mixture exhales the
quicksilver with the fumes. The quicksilver itself, when it has become cool, is
found in the bottom of the crucible or other vessel. Another way is to place
broken ore in a gourd-shaped earthen vessel, put it in the assay furnace,
and cover with an operculum which has a long spout ; under the spout, put
an ampulla to receive the quicksilver which distills. Cold water should be
poured into the ampulla, so that the quicksilver which has been heated by the
fire may be continuously cooled and gathered together, for the quicksilver
is borne over by the force of the fire, and flows down through the spout of
the operculum into the ampulla. We also assay quicksilver ore in the very
same way in which we smelt it. This I will explain in its proper place.

Lastly, we assay iron ore in the forge of a blacksmith. Such ore is burned,
crushed, washed, and dried; a magnet is laid over the concentrates, and
the particles of iron are attracted to it; these are wiped off with a brush,
and are caught in a crucible, the magnet being continually passed over the
concentrates and the particles wiped off, so long as there remain any particles
which the magnet can attract to it. These particles are heated in the crucible
with saltpetre until they melt, and an iron button is melted out of them.
If the magnet easily and quickly attracts the particles to it, we infer that the
ore is rich in iron; if slowly, that it is poor; if it appears actually to repel
the ore, then it contains little or no iron. This is enough for the assaying of
ores.
I will now speak of the assaying of the metal alloys. This is done both
by coiners and merchants who buy and sell metal, and by miners, but most
of all by the owners and mine masters, and by the owners and masters of
the works in which the metals are smelted, or in which one metal is parted
from another.

First I will describe the way assays are usually made to ascertain what
portion of precious metal is contained in base metal. Gold and silver are
now reckoned as precious metals and all the others as base metals. Once
upon a time the base metals were burned up, in order that the precious metals
should be left pure ; the Ancients even discovered by such burning what
portion of gold was contained in silver, and in this way all the silver was
consumed, which was no small loss. However, the famous mathematician,
Archimedes*, to gratify King Hiero, invented a method of testing the silver,

%1This old story runs that Hiero, King of Syracuse, asked Archimedes to tell him
whether a crown made for him was pure gold or whether it contained some proportion of
silver. Archimedes is said to have puzzled over it until he noticed the increase in water-
level upon entering his bath. Whereupon he determined the matter by immersing bars of
pure gold and pure silver, and thus determining the relative specific weights. The best

248 BOOK VII.

which was not very rapid, and was more accurate for testing a large mass
than a small one. This I will explain in my commentaries. The
alchemists have shown us a way of separating silver from gold by which
neither of them is lost®?.

Gold which contains silver,** or silver which contains gold, is first rubbed
on the touchstone. Then a needle in which there is a similar amount of
gold or silver is rubbed on the same touchstone, and from the lines which are
produced in this way, is perceived what portion of silver there is in the gold,
or what portion of gold there is in the silver. Next there is added to the
silver which is in the gold, enough silver to make it three times as much as the
gold. Then lead is placed in a cupel and melted; a little later, a small
amount of copper is put in it, in fact, half an wncia of it, or half an uncia and
a sictlicus (of the smaller weights) if the gold or silver does not contain any
copper. Thecupel, when the lead and copper are wanting, attracts the particles
of gold and silver, and absorbs them. Finally, one-third of a Hibra of the gold,
and one /ibra** of the silver must be placed together in the same cupel and
melted ; for if the gold and silver were first placed in the cupel and melted, as I
have already said, it absorbs particles of them, and the gold, when separated
from the silver, will not be found pure. These metals are heated until the
lead and the copper are consumed, and again, the same weight of each is melted
in the same manner in another cupel. The buttons are pounded with a
hammer and flattened out, and each little leaf is shaped in the form of a
tube, and each is put into a small glass ampulla. Over these there is poured
one uncia and one drachma (of the large weight) of the third quality aqua
valens, which I will describe in the Tenth Book. This is heated over a slow
fire, and small bubbles, resembling pearls in shape, will be seen to adhere
to the tubes. The redder the aqua appears, the better it is judged to be;
when the redness has vanished, small white bubbles are seen to be resting
on the tubes, resembling pearls not only in shape, but also in colour. After
a short time the agua is poured off and other is poured on ; when this has
again raised six or eight small white bubbles, it is poured off and the tubes are
taken out and washed four or five times with spring water; or if they are
heated with the same water, when it is boiling, they will shine more brilliantly.
Then they are placed in a saucer, which is held in the hand and gradually
dried by the gentle heat of the fire ; afterward the saucer is placed over glowing
charcoal and covered with a charcoal, and a moderate blast is blown upon it

ancient account of this affair is to be found in Vitruvius, rx, Preface. The story does not seem
very probable, seeing that Theophrastus, who died the year Archimedes was born, described
the touchstone in detail, and that it was of common knowledge among the Greeks before
(see note 37). In any event, there is not sufficient evidence in this story on which to build
the conclusion of Meyer (Hist. of Chemistry, p. 14) and others, that, inasmuch as Archimedes
was unable to solve the problem until his discovery of specific weights, therefore the
Ancients could not part gold and silver. The probability that he did not want to injure the
King’s jewellery would show sufficient reason for his not parting these metals. It seems probable
that the Ancients did part gold and silver by cementation. (See note on p. 458).

82The Alchemists (with whose works Agricola was familiar—vide preface) were the
inventors of nitric acid separation. (See note on p. 460).

%3Parting gold and silver by nitric acid is more exhaustively discussed in Book X.
and notes Io, p. 443.

34The lesser weights, probably.

a a aaa

a

BOOK VII. 249

with the mouth and then a blue flame will be emitted. In the end the tubes
are weighed, and if their weights prove equal, he who has undertaken this work
has not laboured in vain. Lastly, both are placed in another balance-pan and
weighed ; of each tube four grains must not be counted, on account of the
silver which remains in the gold and cannot be separated from it. From the
weight of the tubes we learn the weight both of the gold and of the silver
which is in the button. If some assayer has omitted to add so much silver to
the gold as to make it three times the quantity, but only double, or two and a
half times as much, he will require the stronger quality of agua which
separates gold from silver, such as the fourth quality. Whether the agua
which he employs for gold and silver is suitable for the purpose, or whether
it is more or less strong than is right, is recognised by its effect. That of
medium strength raises the little bubbles on the tubes and is found to colour
the ampulla and the operculum a strong red ; the weaker one is found to
colour them a light red, and the stronger one to break the tubes. To pure
silver in which there is some portion of gold, nothing should be added when
they are being heated in the cupel prior to their being parted, except a bes
of lead and one-fourth or’one-third its amount of copper of the lesser weights.
If the silver contains in itself a certain amount of copper, let it be weighed,
both after it has been melted with the lead, and after the gold has been parted
from it ; by the former we learn how much copper is in it, by the latter how
much gold. Base metals are burnt up even to-day for the purpose of assay,
because to lose so little of the metal is small loss, but from a large mass of
base metal, the precious metal is always extracted, as I will explain in
Books X. and XI.

We assay an alloy of copper and silver in the following way. From a
few cakes of copper the assayer cuts out portions, small samples from small
cakes, medium samples from medium cakes, and large samples from large
cakes; the small ones are equal in size to half a hazel nut, the large
ones do not exceed the size of half a chestnut, and those of medium size come
between the two. He cuts out the samples from the middle of the
bottom of each cake. He places the samples in a new, clean, triangular
crucible and fixes to them pieces of paper upon which are written the weight
of the cakes of copper, of whatever size they may be; for example, he writes,
“These samples have been cut from copper which weighs twenty centum-
pondia.” When he wishes to know how much silver one centumpondium of
copper of this kind has in it, first of all he throws glowing coals into the
iron hoop, then adds charcoal to it. When the fire has become hot, the paper
is taken out of the crucible and put aside, he then sets that crucible on the
fire and gradually heats it for a quarter of an hour until it becomes red hot.
Then he stimulates the fire by blowing with a blast from the double bellows
for half an hour, because copper which is devoid of lead requires this time to
become hot and to melt ; copper not devoid of lead melts quicker. When
he has blown the bellows for about the space of time stated, he removes the
glowing charcoal with the tongs, and stirs the copper with a splinter of wood,
which he grasps with the tongs. If it does not stir easily, it is a sign that the

250 BOOK VII.

copper is not wholly liquefied ; if he finds this is the case, he again places a
large piece of charcoal in the crucible, and replaces the glowing charcoal which
had been removed, and again blows the bellows for a short time. When all
the copper has melted he stops using the bellows, for if he were to continue
to use them, the fire would consume part of the copper, and then that which
remained would be richer than the cake from which it had been cut ; this is
no small mistake. Therefore, as soon as the copper has become sufficiently
liquified, he pours it out into a little iron mould, which may be large or small,
according as more or less copper is melted in the crucible for the purpose of the
assay. The mould has a handle, likewise made of iron, by which it is held
when the copper is poured in, after which, he plunges it into a tub of water
placed near at hand, that the copper may be cooled. Then he again dries the
copper by the fire, and cuts off its point with an iron wedge; the portion
nearest the point he hammers on an anvil and makes into a leaf, which he
cuts into pieces.

A—IRON MOULD. B—lITS HANDLE.

Others stir the molten copper with a stick of linden tree charcoal, and
then pour it over a bundle of new clean birch twigs, beneath which is placed
a wooden tub of sufficient size and full of water, and in this manner the copper
is broken up into little granules as small as hemp seeds. Others employ straw
in place of twigs. Others place a broad stone in a tub and pour in enough
water to cover the stone, then they run out the molten copper from the
crucible on to the stone, from which the minute granules roll off; others
pour the molten copper into water and stir it until it is resolved into granules.
The fire does not easily melt the copper in the cupel unless it has been poured
and a thin leaf made of it, or unless it has been resolved into granules or
made into filings ; and if it does not melt, all the labour has been undertaken
in vain. In order that they may be accurately weighed out, silver and lead
are resolved into granules in the same manner as copper. But to return
to the assay of copper. When the copper has been prepared by these
methods, if it is free of lead and iron, and rich in silver, to each centumpon-
dium (lesser weights) add one and a half unciae of lead (larger weights). If,
however, the copper contains some lead, add one wncia of lead ; if it contains
iron, add two unciae. First put the lead into a cupel, and after it begins
to smoke, add the copper ; the fire generally consumes the copper, together
with the lead, in about one hour and a quarter. When this is done, the silver

siren _

BOOK VII, 251
will be found in the bottom of the cupel. The fire consumes both of those

~. metals more quickly if they are heated in that furnace which draws in air. It

is better to cover the upper half of it with a lid, and not only to put on the
muffle door, but also to close the window of the muffle door with a piece of
charcoal, or with a piece of brick. If the copper be such that the silver can
only be separated from it with difficulty, then before it is tested with fire in
the cupel, lead should first be put into the scorifier, and then the copper should
be added with a moderate quantity of melted salt, both that the lead may
absorb the copper and that the copper may be cleansed of the dross which
abounds in it.

Tin which contains silver should not at the beginning of the assay be
placed in a cupel, lest the silver, as often happens, be consumed and converted
into fumes, together with the tin. As soon as the lead®5 has begun to fume
in the scorifier, then add that*® to it. In this way the lead will take the
silver and the tin will boil and turn into ashes, which may be removed with a
wooden splinter. The same thing occurs if any alloy is melted in which there
is tin. When the lead has absorbed the silver which was in the tin, then,
and not till then, it is heated in the cupel. First place the lead with which
the silver is mixed, in an iron pan, and stand it on a hot furnace and let it
melt ; afterward pour this lead into a small iron mould, and then beat it
out with a hammer on an anvil and make it into leaves in the same way as
the copper. Lastly, place it in the cupel, which assay can be carried out in
the space of half an hour. A great heat is harmful to it, for which reason
there is no necessity either to cover the half of the furnace with a lid or to
close up its mouth.

The minted metal alloys, which are known as money, are assayed in the
following way. The smaller silver coins which have been picked out from
the bottom and top and sides of a heap are first carefully cleansed ; then, after
they have been melted in the triangular crucible, they are either resolved
into granules, or made into thin leaves. As for the large coins which weigh
a drachma, a stcilicus, half an wncia, or an uncia, beat them into leaves.
Then take a bes of the granules, or an equal weight of the leaves, and likewise
take another bes in the same way. Wrap each sample separately in paper,
and afterwards place two small pieces of lead in two cupels which have first
been heated. The more precious the money is, the smaller portion of lead
do we require for the assay, the more base, the larger is the portion required ;
for if a bes of silver is said to contain only half an wncia or one uncia of copper,
we add to the bes of granules half an wncia of lead. If it is composed of equal
parts of silver and copper, we add an uncia of lead, but if in a bes of copper
there is only half an uncia or one uncia of silver, we add an uncia and a half
of lead. As soon as the lead has begun to fume, put into each cupel one of
the papers in which is wrapped the sample of silver alloyed with copper, and
close the mouth of the muffle with charcoal. Heat them with a gentle fire
until all the lead and copper are consumed, for a hot fire by its heat forces the

%5Lead and Tin seem badly mixed in this paragraph.
8*Tt is not clear what is added.

252 BOOK VII.

silver, combined with a certain portion of lead, into the cupel, in which way
the assay is rendered erroneous. Then take the beads out of the cupel and
clean them of dross. If neither depresses the pan of the balance in which it
is placed, but their weight is equal, the assay has been free from error; but
if one bead depresses its pan, then there is an error, for which reason the
assay must be repeated. If the bes of coin contains but seven unciae of
pure silver it is because the King, or Prince, or the State who coins the money,
has taken one uncia, which he keeps partly for profit and partly for the
expense of coining, he having added copper to the silver. Of all these
matters I have written extensively in my book De Precio Metallorum et
Monetts.

We assay gold coins in various ways. If there is copper mixed with
the gold, we melt them by fire in the same way as silver coins; if there is
silver mixed with the gold, they are separated by the strongest aqua valens ;
if there is copper and silver mixed with the gold, then in the first place, after
the addition of lead, they are heated in the cupel until the fire consumes the
copper and the lead, and afterward the gold is parted from the silver.

« It remains to speak of the touchstone®’? with which gold and silver are
tested, and which was also used by the Ancients. For although the assay made
by fire is more certain, still, since we often have no furnace, nor muffle, nor
crucibles, or some delay must be occasioned in using them, we can always
rub gold or silver on the touchstone, which we can have in readiness.
Further, when gold coins are assayed in the fire, of what use are they after-
ward? A touchstone must be selected which is thoroughly black and free
of sulphur, for the blacker it is and the more devoid of sulphur, the better it

87HISTORICAL NOTE ON TOUCHSTONE (Coticula. Interpretatio,—Goldstein). Theophrastus
is, we believe, the first to describe the touchstone, although it was generally known to the
Greeks, as is evidenced by the metaphors of many of the poets,—Pindar, Theognis, Euripides, etc.
The general knowledge of the constituents of alloys which is implied, raises the question as
to whether the Greeks did not know a great deal more about parting metals, than has been
attributed to them. Theophrastus says (78-80): ‘‘The nature of the stone which tries
‘‘ gold is also very wonderful, as it seems to have the same power with fire; which is also
“a test of that metal. Some people have for this reason questioned the truth of this power
‘in the stone, but their doubts are ill-founded, for this trial is not of the same nature or
‘“‘made in the same manner as the other. The trial by fire is by the colour and by the
‘quantity lost by it; but that by the stone is made only by rubbing the metal on it; the
‘stone seeming to have the power to receive separately the distinct particles of different
“metals. It is said also that there is a much better kind of this stone now found out, than
“that which was formerly used ; insomuch that it now serves not only for the trial of refined
“gold, but also of copper or silver coloured with gold; and shows how much of the
“adulterating matter by weight is mixed with gold; this has signs which it yields from
“the smallest weight of the adulterating matter, which is a grain, from thence a colybus,
“and thence a quadrans or semi-obolus, by which it is easy to distinguish if, and in what
“ degree, that metal is adulterated. All these stones are found in the River Tmolus; their
‘texture is smooth and like that of pebbles; their figure broad, not round; and their
“ bigness twice that of the common larger sort of pebbles. In their use in the trial of metals
“there is a difference in power between their upper surface, which has lain toward the sun,
“‘and their under, which has been to the earth; the upper performing its office the more
‘nicely; and this is consonant to reason, as the upper part is dryer; for the humidity of
“the other surface hinders its receiving so well the particles of metals ; for the same reason
‘also it does not perform its office as well in hot weather as in colder, for in the hot it emits
‘a kind of humidity out of its substance, which runs all over it. This hinders the metalline
“particles from adhering perfectly, and makes mistakes in the trials. This exudation of a
“humid matter is also common to many other stones, among others, to those of which
“statues are made; and this has been looked on as peculiar to the statue.” (Based on

BOOK VII. 253

generally is; I have written elsewhere of its nature®*. First the gold is
rubbed on the touchstone, whether it contains silver or whether it is obtained
from the mines or from the smelting; silver also is rubbed in the same
way. Then one of the needles, that we judge by its colour to be of similar
composition, is rubbed on the touchstone ; if this proves too pale, another
needle which has a stronger colour is rubbed on the touchstone ; and if this
proves too deep in colour, a third which has a little paler colour is used. For
this will show us how great a proportion of silver or copper, or silver and
copper together, is in the gold, or else how great a proportion of copper is in
silver.

These needles are of four kinds.*® The first kind are made of gold and
silver, the second of gold and copper, the third of gold, silver, and copper,
and the fourth of silver and copper. The first three kinds of needles are
used principally for testing gold, and the fourth for silver. Needles of this
kind are prepared in the following ways. The lesser weights correspond
proportionately to the larger weights, and both of them are used, not
only by mining people, but by coiners also. The needles are made in
accordance with the lesser weights, and each set corresponds to a bes,
which, in our own vocabulary, is called a mark. The bes, which is employed
by those who coin gold, is divided into twenty-four double sextulae, which

Hill’s trans.) This humid “ exudation of fine-grained stones in summer ” would not sound
abnormal if it were called condensation. Pliny (xxxm, 43) says: “ The mention of
“gold and silver should be accompanied by that of the stone called coficula. Formerly,
“according to Theophrastus, it was only to be found in the river Tmolus but now found in
‘many parts, it was found in small pieces never over four inches long by two broad. That
“side which lay toward the sun is better than that toward the ground. Those experienced
“with the coticula when they rub ore (vena) with it, can at once say how much gold it contains,
“how much silver or copper. This method is so accurate that they do not mistake it to a
“scruple.” This purported use for determining values of ore is of about Pliny’s average
accuracy. The first detailed account of touchneedles and their manner of making, which we
have been able to find, is that of the Probierbiichlein (1527? see Appendix) where many of the
tables given by Agricola may be found.

8De Natura Fossilium (p. 267) and De Ortu et Causis Subterraneorum (p. 59). The
author does not add any material mineralogical information to the quotations from
Theophrastus and Pliny given above.

In these tables Agricola has simply adopted Roman names as equivalents of the
old German weights, but as they did not always approximate in proportions, he coined terms
such as “units of 4 siliguae,” etc. It might seem more desirable to have introduced
the German terms into this text, but while it would apply in this instance, as we have
discussed on p. 259, the actual values of the Roman weights are very different from the
German, and as elsewhere in the book actual Roman weights are applied, we have con-
sidered it better to use the Latin terms consistently throughout. Parther, the obsolete
German would be to most readers but little improvement upon the Latin. For convenience
of readers we set out the various scales as used by Agricola, together with the German :—

RoMAN SCALE. Op GERMAN SCALE.
6 Siliquae = 1 Scripulum .. 3 Grenlin = I Gran
4 Scripula = I Sextula Ye 4 Gran = I Krat
2 Sextulae = I Duella .. 24 Kratt = I Mark
24 Duellae = I Bes or
24 Grenlin = 1 “Nummus”

12 “Nummi” > = 1 Mark.
Also the following scales are applied to fineness by Agricola :—

3 Scripula = I Drachma .. 4 Pfennige = I eg
2 Drachmae = 1 Sictlicus .. 4 Quinilein = 1 Loth
2 Sicilics = 1 Semuncia .. 16 Loth = I Mark

16 Semunciae = 1 Bes
The term ‘“ nummus,” a coin, given above and in the text, appears in the German
translation as pfennig as applied to both German scales, but as they are of different values,

19

254 BOOK VII.

are now called after the Greek name ceratia; and each double sextula is
divided into four semi-sextulae, which are called granas ; and each semt-sextula
is divided into three units of four stliguae each, of which each unit is called
a grenlin. If we made the needles to be each four siliguae, there would be
two hundred and eighty-eight in a bes, but if each were made to be a sem#-sextula
or a double scripula, then there would be ninety-six in a bes. By these two
methods too many needles would be made, and the majority of them, by reason
of the small difference in the proportion of the gold, would indicate nothing,
therefore it is advisable to make them each of a double sextula ; in this way
twenty-four needles are made, of which the first is made of twenty-three
duellae of silver and one of gold. Fannius is our authority that the Ancients
called the double sextula a duella. When a bar of silver is rubbed on the
touchstone and colours it just as this needle does, it contains one duella of gold.
In this manner we determine by the other needles what proportion of gold
there is, Or when the gold exceeds the silver in weight, what proportion of
silver.
The needles are made*® :—
The 1st needle of 23 duellae of silver and 1 duella of gold.

i 2 eee is 22 on pp 2 duellae of gold.
» 3rd ‘3 21 #8 a 3 a fe
+ ee 2 20 + 0 4 vs i
” 5th ” 19 ” ” 5 ” ”
” 6th ”? 18 ” ” 6 ”? a”
” 7th ” 17 ” ” 7 ” ”
” 8th ” 16 ” ” 8 ” ”

we have left Agricola’s adaptation in one scale to avoid confusion. The Latin terms adopted
by Agricola are given below, together with the German :—

Number in one Value in
Roman Term. German Term. Mark or Bes. Siliquae.
Siliqua is 2 “i II52 = I
“Unit of 4 Siliquae” Grenlin £6 288 ON 4
Pfennig me 256 wp _
Scripulum Scruple (?) eg 192 Ks 6
Semi-sextula Gran ae 96 Fi 12
Drachma Quintlein rw 64 fe 18
Sextula Halb Krat ‘i 48 iis 2
Sicilicus Halb Loth ‘a 32 a 3
Duella Krat be 24 ai) 48
Semuncia Loth Pe 16 ha 72
“ Unit of 5 Drachmae & 1
Scripulum ” “ Nummus” 12 «s 96
Uncia Unizen a 8 vy 144
Bes Mark I me II52

While the proportions in a bes or mark are the same in both scales, the actual weight
values are vastly different—for instance, the mark contained about 3609.6, and the bes
3297 Troy Grains. Agricola also uses :

Selibra Halb-pfundt

Libra Pfundt

Centumpondium Centner.
As the Roman libra contains 12 unciae and the German pfundt 16 unizen, the actual weights of
these latter quantities are still further apart—the former 4946 and the latter 7219 Troy

ains.

2 40There are no tables in the Latin text, the whole having been written out in extenso,
but they have now been arranged as above, as being in a much more convenient and expressive
form.

eS ee ee ee ee

BOOK VII. 255
The 9th needle of 15 dwellae of silver and 9g duellae of gold.

» roth iy. 14 oe 10 a es
st geth J 13 ms mh, II a os
» 2th yi 12 - me 12 th a
» 3th ss II Ph 13 mM AA
» 14th v3 10 oa a 14 af a
” 15th ” 9 ” ” 15 ” ”
» 6th 3 8 a e 16 a os
i, ate rf 7 b 17 ie a
» 8th 6 ie os 18 i ES
a. roth NS 5 is if 19 a ss
» 20th 5 4 is Bs 20 ies a
bee eeee 3 re s 21 Fe pe
» 22nd BR 2 - 7 22 ef ys
» 23rd “ I us LS 23 é pe
» 24th - pure gold

wee

MNOS

SS

S WE SS
SSS

i By the first eleven needles, when they are rubbed on the touchstone, we
‘ test what proportion of gold a bar of silver contains, and with the remaining
thirteen we test what proportion of silver is in a bar of gold; and also what
proportion of either may be in money.

Since some gold coins are composed of gold and copper, thirteen needles
of another kind are made as follows :—

256 BOOK VII.

The ist of 12 duellae of gold and 12 duellae of copper.

aus Ona. ,, 13 2 a II mt BS
peta": Sea & Y of x Bae) nl ;
” 4th ” 15 ” ” 9 ” ,
ie eee 4) TO 3 MA 8 ec a
es EE as ee Ke a 7 i :
Be ME 2 He Ne 6 A ae
on, Oe ge we i 5 PY, -
sa ee ae ae x 8 4 oF ‘
3 ROth 5 ae a oe 3 Fs rs
si SRE eee ks a 2 rh és
i TOROS ‘ = r b* se

» 13th ,, pure gold.
These needles are not much used, because gold coins of that kind are
somewhat rare; the ones chiefly used are those in which there is much
copper. Needles of the third kind, which are composed of gold, silver, and
copper, are more largely used, because such gold coins arecommon. But since
with the gold there are mixed equal or unequal portions of silver and copper,
two sorts of needles are made. If the proportion of silver and copper is
equal, the needles are as follows :—

Gold. Silver. Copper.

The ist of 12 duellae 6 duellae 0 sextula 6 duellae o sextula
a Ge eae Ag Lee ieee ea I Z,
ye SOO eG , aoe’ as
yp 4a IBS WS ine OBR ie A ioe ie Rea
1 GEE gs TR 4 0 aan
rept Menone “+ Nea SS ide She ee I ie
” 7th ” 18 ” 3 ” 3 ”
en jy a , ae Sat ee I i
se Has eS ae r aguae e + Bali

roth’, 22. Sea i Yer Tes I e
» 2Ith., aoa, ee aS !
» sath as Sa Ee

,» 13th ,, pure gold.

Some make twenty-five needles, in order to be able to detect the two
scripula of silver or copper which are in a bes of gold. Of these needles, the
first is composed of twelve duellae of gold and six of silver, and the same
number of copper. The second, of twelve duellae and one sextula of gold, and
five duellae and one and a half sextulae of silver, and the same number of
duellae and one and a half sextulae of copper. The remaining needles are
made in the same proportion.

Pliny is our authority that the Romans could tell to within one scripulum
how much gold was in any given alloy, and how much silver or copper.

Needles may be made in either of two ways, namely, in the ways of which
I have spoken, and in the ways of which I am now about to speak. If

BOOK VII. 257

unequal portions of silver and copper have been mixed with the gold, thirty-
seven needles are made in the following way :— :

Gold. Silver. Copper.
Duellae Duellae 5&*- Sitiquae. Duellae °° Sitiquae
ulae ulae :
The 1st of 12 9 ) o 3 ) ()
ph: a's, 12 8 ry a) 4 t) oO
are, 12 7 5
» 4th,, 13 8 $ 2 ;
” 5th ” 13 7 4 4 3 I 8
Tied «i ae 13 6 ; 8 4 I 4
SA RGHL, 4 art 14 7 I 2 I
wie Sth 5; 14 6 I 8 3 4 4
we oth, 14 5 1% 4 4 8
at TOC .,, 15 6 1} 2 }
a TEC 15 6 3
or Bet i, 15 5 ; 3 14
” 13th ” 16 6 2
oo ath 16 5 ; 4 2 I 8
(15th, 16 4 I 8 3 4+ 4
ee Sth 17 5 4 ) I 14
” 17th ” 17 4 I 8 2 4 4
» 28th ,, 17 4 4 2 re Aes
et tOUN :,, 18 4 I I I
” 20th ” 18 4 ° 2 £
a GE 18 3 I 2
» end ,, 19 2 14 I ;
agra ,, 19 3 ee I I 8
» 24th ,, 19 2 nm: 68 2 4
a SSth: ; 20 3 I
5 Ot 20 2 I 8 I hier
a age, 20 2 eet I I 8
inc OC ai 2 4 1}
” 29th ” 21 2 I
net BOUN 5, 21 I 1 I $
he 2 1 tae 22 I I I
» 32nd ,, 22 I $+ 4 0 I 8
» 33rd, 22 I 8 1% 4
» 34th, 23 14 4
»”» 35th ” 23 I 8 t 4
ab (ORR 23 I 4 4 8

258 ‘ BOOK VII.

Since it is rarely found that gold, which has been coined, does not amount to
at least fifteen duellae of gold in a bes, some make only twenty-eight needles, and
some make them different from those already described, inasmuch as the
alloy of gold with silver and copper is sometimes differently proportioned.

These needles are made :—

Gold. Silver. Copper.
Duellae Duellae °° Sitiquae. Duellae °° Sitiquae
: ulae : ulae ;
The 1st of 15 6 I 8 2 $ 4
ah ne 15 6 4 2 14 8
Pe pes 3: Ge 15 5 3 3 I}
”? 4th ” 16 6 $ I 1}
». ) Stes 16 5 I 8 2 $ 4
” 6th ” 16 4 14 8 3 4
ins, Tene 17 5 I 4 I 4 8
1 17 5 4 I 14 8
» gth,, 17 4 I 4 } 8
5 TOR: 18 4 I I I
i Ree 18 4 2
ca, ok 18 3 I 2 I
) 1S 19 3 14 4 I 8
So Sath 3 19 3 4 4 I I 8
» er S 19 2 14 4 2 8
» 20th |; 20 3 I
a POR ag 20 2 I I
Fay 2 2s Mages 20 2 2
9, SO 21 2 4 4 I 8
- 20th ,, 2I I 14 4 I 8
Ree st. ae 2I I I 8 I $ 4
yo. 2and',, 22 I I 8 eee
” 23rd ” 22 I I I
” 24th ” 22 I 4 4 I 8
” 25th ” 23 14 _4 8
sk ae 23 1} 4
” 27th ” 23 I 8 b 4

» 28th ,, pure gold

Next follows the fourth kind of needles, by which we test silver coins
which contain copper, or copper coins which contain silver. The bes by
which we weigh the silver is divided in two different ways. It is either
divided twelve times, into units of five drachmae and one scripulum each,

BOOK VII. + 259

which the ordinary people call nummi* ; each of these units we again divide
into twenty-four units of four stliguae each, which the same ordinary people
call a grenlin; or else the bes is divided into sixteen semunctae which
are called Joths, each of which is again divided into eighteen units of four
stliquae each, which they call grenlin. Or else the bes is divided into
sixteen semunciae, of which each is divided into four drachmae, and
each drachma into four pfennige. Needles are made in accordance with
each method of dividing the bes. According to the first method, to the
number of twenty-four half mwmmi ; according to the second method, to the
number of thirty-one half semunctae, that is to say a stctlicus ; for if the
needles were made to the number of the smaller weights, the number of
needles would again be too large, and not a few of them, by reason of the
small difference in proportion of silver or copper, would have no significance.
We test both bars and coined money composed of silver and copper by both
scales. The one is as follows: the first needle is made of twenty-three
parts of copper and one part silver; whereby, whatsoever bar or coin, when
rubbed on the touchstone, colours it just as this needle does, in that bar or
money there is one twenty-fourth part of silver, and so also, in accordance
with the proportion of silver, is known the remaining proportion of the copper.

The 1st needle is made of 23 parts of copper and 1 of silver.

» and an 5 22 sa “a 2 Bs
a are - sd ai a a 3 a
» 4th ¥ » 20 v 00 Oi ve
” 5th ” ” 19 ” ” 5 ”
FS Oth a is 18 re - 6 =
yy 7th ” ” 17 ” ” 7 ”
ei m4 2 16 fs v 8 a
» gth ” ” 15 ” ” 9 ”
» roth ‘ md 14 * a Io ‘
i AT = : 13 a i II be
»» xath me £ 12 i =e 12 ”
eo eeth es a Ir i an 13 a
” 14th ” ” Io ” ” 14 ”
” 15th ” ” 9 ” ” I5 ”
» 6th # a 8 jp es 16 ie
” 17th ” ” vd ” ” 17 ”
» 8th a - 6 ss i 18 a
” rgth ” ” 5 ” ” Ig ”
» 20th ie = 4 eae ae 20 aa
ie eae sea me 3 a om 2I a
i aan. Fe ye 2 Ni © 22 c.
‘a: eee if : I a nn 23 ds

», 24th of pure silver.

“1See note 39 above.

260 BOOK VII.
The other method of making needles is as follows :—

Copper. Silver.
Semunciae Stctlict. Semunctae Sictlict
aoe Ist of 15 I
- 2nd ,, & 14 I I Fr
. 3rd ” a? 14 2
” 4th » ) 13 I 2 I
2? 5th 2? ” I3 3
ee Gt e i 12 I 3 I
‘ 7th, i 12 4
3 Sth II z I
pe guts i II 5
ga ft OS ite ¥ Io I 5 I
Sythe: Ae Io 6
rath; ; 9 I 6 I
55 5 it Ree * 9 7
Pili © 12: hearse fs 8 I 7 I
- rst 5; ie 8 8
” 16th ” ” 7 I 8 I
” 17th ” ” 7 9
= Piola “0 6 I 9 I
” Igth ” ” 6 Io
fe. 20th ,, FS 5 T Io I
Ss 21st ir a 5 II
” 22nd. ,, Ff 4 I II I
S 43rd A 4 12
R40 ‘ 3 I 12 I
” 25th ” ” i 13
ya = a I 13 I
oS as + 2 14
” 28th ”” ” I I I4 bg
6 RSE < I 15
” 30th ” ” I 15 I

# 31st of pure silver.

So much for this. Perhaps I have used more words than those most
highly skilled in the art may require, but it is necessary for the understanding |
of these matters.

I will now speak of the weights, of which I have frequently made mention.
Among mining people these are of two kinds, that is, the greater weights and
the lesser weights. The centumpondium is the first and largest weight, and of

Nee. ee

a ee

~~

eR ee ee ee ee ee ae

ee A eR es ee a ye we ee

BOOK VII. 261

course consists of one hundred /ibrae, and for that reason is called a

hundred weight.

The various weights are :—

ist) =
2nd =

7th =
8th =

2
I libra.

100 librae = centumpondium.
50

”

This libra consists of sixteen unciae, and the half part of the bra is
the selibra, which our people call a mark, and consists of eight wnciae, or, as
they divide it, of sixteen semunciae :—

8 wnciae.
8 semunctae,

15th

» 2nd

» 14th

”

”

I semuncia.
I sicilicus.
I drachma.
16th = 1 dimidi-drachma.

The above is how the “greater” weights are divided. The “lesser”
weights are made of silver or brass or copper. Of these, the first and largest
generally weighs one drachma, for it is necessary for us to weigh, not only
ore, but also metals to be assayed, and smaller quantities of lead. The first
of these weights is called a centumpondium and the number of Hibrae in it
corresponds to the larger scale, being likewise one hundred®.

The Ist is called 1 centumpondium.

”

50 ltbrae.
ak
Tor

8 ”

4 ”

2 ”
pe

1 selibra.
8 semunciae.
4 »

2 »

I ”

I stctlicus.

The fourteenth is the last, for the proportionate weights which correspond
with a drachma and half a drachma are not used. On all these weights of
the lesser scale, are written the numbers of librae and of semunciae. Some

42See note 27, p. 242, for discussion of this ‘‘ Assay ton” arrangement.

262 BOOK VII.

copper assayers divide both the lesser and greater scale weights into divisions
of a different scale. Their largest weight of the greater scale weighs one |
hundred and twelve lébvae, which is the first unit of measurement.

Ist = 112 Hbrae.
and = 64 ,,

a Bailes TS

4th = 16 ,,

Re Bis
Gt os

7th Bae

Sth wee ge

oth = 1 selibra or sixteen semunctae.
roth = 8 semunciae.
11th 4 tf
1izth = 2
F5th es a

As for the seltbra of the lesser weights, which our people, as I have often
said, call a mark, and the Romans call a bes, coiners who coin gold, divide it
just like the greater weights scale, into twenty-four units of two sextulae
each, and each unit of two sextulae is divided into four semt-sextulae and
each sem4-sextula into three units of four séliguae each. Some also divide
the separate units of four stliquae into four individual stl/quae, but most,
omitting the semd-sextulae, then divide the double sextula into twelve units of
four stliquae each, and do not divide these into four individual siliqguae. Thus
the first and greatest unit of measurement, which is the bes, weighs twenty-
four double sextulae.

BOOK VII. 263

The 2nd = 12 double sextulae.
5 gre ae, |
» 4th= 3 » i
pe) NS ea Bt +
pol RRR Bt Bois ‘e
» 7th = 2 semt-sextulae or four semt-sextulae.

,» 8th = 1 semi-sextula or 3 units of 4 siliquae each.
» 9th = 2 units of four siliquae each.
? roth = I ”? ” ”?

Coiners who mint silver also divide the bes of the lesser weights in the same
way as the greater weights; our people, indeed, divide it into sixteen sem-
unciae, and the semuncia into eighteen units of four stliguae each. ;
There are ten weights which are placed in the other pan of the balance,
when they weigh the silver which remains from the copper that has been
consumed, when they assay the alloy with fire.
The tst 16 semunctae = I bes.

end 8 ‘is

ne gKe is

w “4th

Fr or 18 units of 4 séliguae each.
units of 4 stliquae each.

” ”

” ”

E
Hod endnond

HNW DO HH DN

» oth

”» ”

The coiners of Nuremberg who mint silver, divide the bes into sixteen sem-
unctae, but divide the semuncia into four drachmae, and the drachma into
_ four pfenntge. They employ nine weights.

The 1st = 16 semunctae.

,) ane SS AK
» 3rd= 4 sy
» 4th=> 2 5
» Sth = 1 t

For they divide the bes in the same way as our own people, but since they
divide the semuncia into four drachmae,
the 6th weight = 2 drachmae.

Pay ay. * pia = 1 drachma or 4 pfennige.
af CU ys = 2 pfennige.
” oth ” = TI pfennig

The men of Cologne and Antwerp® divide the bes into twelve units of
five drachmae and one scripulum, which weights they call nwmmi. Each
of these they again divide into twenty-four units of four séliquae each,
which they call grenlins. They have ten weights, of which

434 grippinenses and Antuerpiant.

264 BOOK VII.

the 1st = 12 nummt = I bes.
” and ae 6 ”
” 3rd = 33 ”

ER | 3° Wa ele’ Tine ser

Sth ee Fo = 24 units of 4 siliquae each.
» Oth = 12 units of 4 stliquae each.

PPS 8 Gat ahae,: Meet “a

oy Oth SS ls is

ge QUER RER ee 5k

<p 10th. se Se ‘i

And so with them, just as with our own people, the mark is divided into
two hundred and eighty-eight grenlins, and by the people of Nuremberg it is
divided into two hundred and fifty-six pfennige. Lastly, the Venetians divide
the bes into eight wnciae. The uncia into four sicilici, the sicilicus into
thirty-six stliguae. They make twelve weights, which they use whenever they
wish to assay alloys of silver and copper. Of these

the 1st = 8 unctae — I bes.
” and = 4 ”

yo Se: ea,

», 4th = I .,,...0r @ secelcs.
» 5th = 2 stcilics.

» Oth = 1 stcelcus.

» 7th = 18 siliquae.
OUR SS Oss

a Oth at O53,

> 10th = 2

co SEU ARO 2

Us SE tea Er ey
Since the Venetians divide the bes into eleven hundred and fifty-two s#liquae,
or two hundred and eighty-eight units of 4 stliquae each, into which number
our people also divide the bes, they thus make the same number of szliquae,
and both agree, even though the Venetians divide the bes into smaller
divisions.

This, then, is the system of weights, both of the greater and the lesser kinds,
which metallurgists employ, and likewise the system of the lesser weights
which coiners and merchants employ, when they are assaying metals and
coined money. The bes of the larger weight with which they provide them-
selves when they weigh large masses of these things, I have explained in my
work De Mensuris et Pondertbus, and in another book, De Precio Metallorum
et Monetis.

There are three small balances by which we weigh ore, metals, and
fluxes. The first, by which we weigh lead and fluxes, is the largest among these
smaller balances, and when eight unciae (of the greater weights) are placed in
one of its pans, and the same number in the other, it sustains no damage.
The second is more delicate, and by this we weigh the ore or the metal, which
is to be assayed ; this is well able to carry one centumpondtwm of the lesser

_ Nit } il male ’ LIM } hibit MITTELALLLTE ul
PS peng iby a no feecai
——— = SSS AQ UNS SSS il

e2g6g2 §3
oe ee md SGA ie GOA)
i: a ek N = a —~ es LSS SSS —— Tae Dc gn
B® ° oe si TA NOW
OS. To - $coa INS Fk
3 Or gs See — Snare \
Soe Sh Oe \
eos eee aoblorele}
o \ }
4 5° ge 6
o+ ee IPS \
“asd Eo
8 Qo » i
—
= & § cs = 220
a © o o
o Os O =
BEFD =| Oo oO w
— wp Qaw os 8
a OO = a s
= - ~ OU ° Ss 2 Ss ihe it eS Ul}
2 be Bae ob KG EL BS oy A
wv .©86 $42
O 8BufES EGS
eee ee a La
geg2r x E iS WW SSS
S8asg 858 ack 7
Sa 58 2 §
goU*$aa°R
S¢eaugq 08
« gi g5a 02
Fageakas
Se Geo, Wa
oS F , 882g
ge oe
CuGSESss
—_
HEvaedgs
o s+
a¥ proses
oe e- ~
Phagae x

is sm

A CASE.

PLACED IN

?

B—SeEconp. C—TuIrRpD
END OF BOOK VII.

A—FIRST SMALL BALANCE.

eee ee

BOOK VIII.

™| UESTIONS of assaying were explained in the last
Book, and I have now come to a greater task, that
is, to the description of how we extract the metals.
First of all I will explain the method of preparing
the ore!; for since Nature usually creates metals
in an impure state, mixed with earth, stones, and
solidified juices, it is necessary to separate most of

“wey these impurities from the ores as far as can be,
622 a before they are smelted, and therefore I will now
describe the methods by which the ores are sorted, broken with hammers,
burnt, crushed with stamps, ground into powder, sifted, washed, roasted,
and calcined?.

1As would be expected, practically all the technical terms used by Agricola in this
chapter are adaptations. The Latin terms, canalis, area, lacus, vasa, cribrum, and fossa,
have had to be pressed into service for many different devices, largely by extemporised
combinations. ere the devices described have become obsolete, we have adopted the
nomenclature of the old works on Cornish methods. The following examples may be of
interest :-—

Simple buddle = Canalis simplex Short strake = Area curta
Divided buddle = Canalis tabellis distinctus Canvasstrake = Arealintets extensis contecta
Ordinary strake = Canalis devexus Limp = Radius.

The strake (or streke) when applied to alluvial tin, would have been termed a “ tye”’
in some parts of Cornwall, and the ‘‘ short strake’’ a “ gounce.”” In the case of the stamp
mill, inasmuch as almost every mechanical part has its counterpart in a modern mill, we
have considered the reader will have less difficulty if the modern designations are used
neu pe of the old Cornish. The following are the essential terms in modern, old Cornish,
and Latin :—

Stamp . Stamper ..Pilum Cams . Caps . .Dentes

Stamp-stem. . Lifter .-Pilum _Tappets --Tongues .. Pili dentes

Shoes ..Stamp-heads..Capita . Screens ..Crate ..Laminae foraminum plenae
Mortar-box . . Box ..Capsa Settling pit ..Catchers ..Lacus

Cam-shaft .. Barrell . Axis Jigging sieve ..Dilleugher ..Cribrum angustum

2Agricola uses four Latin verbs in connection with heat operations at temperatures
under the melting point: Calefacio, uro, torreo, and cremo. The first he always uses in the
sense of ‘“‘to warm” or “to heat,” but the last three he uses indiscriminately in much the
same way as the English verbs burn, roast, and calcine are used ; but in general he uses the
Latin verbs in the order given to indicate degrees of heat. We have used the English
verbs in their technical sense as indicated by the context.

It is very difficult to say when roasting began as a distinct and separate metal-
lurgical step in sulphide ore treatment. The Greeks and Romans worked both lead and
copper sulphides (see note on p. 391, and note on p. 403), but neither in the remains of old
works nor in their literature is there anything from which satisfactory details of such a step
can be obtained. The Ancients, of course, understood lime-burning, and calcined several
salts to purify them or to render them more caustic. Practically the only specific mention is
by Pliny regarding lead ores (see p. 391). Even the statement of Theophilus (1050-1100, A.D.),
may refer simply to rendering ore more fragile, for he says (p. 305) in regard to copper ore :
“This stone dug up in abundance is placed upon a pile and burned (comburitur) after the
“manner of lime. Nor does it change colour, but loses its hardness and can be broken up,
“and afterward it is smelted.” The Probierbiichlein casually mentions roasting prior to
assaying, and Biringuccio (111, 2) mentions incidentally that “dry and ill-disposed ores
“before everything must be roasted in an open oven so that the air can get in.” He gives
no further information; and therefore this account of Agricola’s becomes practically the
first. Apparently roasting, as a preliminary to the treatment of copper sulphides, did not come
into use in England until some time later than Agricola, for in Col. Grant Francis’ ‘‘ Smelting
of Copper in the Swansea District ” (London, 1881, p. 29), a report is set of the “‘ Doeinges of
“Jochim Ganse’’—an imported German—at the ‘“‘Mynes by Keswicke in Cumberland,
““A.D., 1581,” wherein the delinquencies of the then current practice are described: ‘‘ Thei
“never coulde, nether yet can make (copper) under xx. tymes passinge thro the fire, and
“ xxl. weekes doeing thereof ane sometyme more. But now the nature of these 1x. hurtfull
“humors abovesaid being discovered and opened by Jochim’s way of doeing, we can, by his
“order of workeinge, so correct theim, that parte of theim beinge by nature hurtfull to the

268 a BOOK VIII.

LIL SS ILLIA KAS
Or.

MMMM

Eanes

= Fh ==
LN

INOUE ATU IT AE
It - tt Hau :
teat ik i>

I Ltt
ae iti SunTergquine Ha ‘
TAN EUHANAIRUTESERAED ERISA ts” EHVLAUUUALU SEL \
Yi Lilie Lue A i Hl

TAS
Hh BPR

if
1

i | yy al HN wat
aS Scr K ; b
Severe: S\ awd

A—LOoONG TABLE. B—Tray. C—Tuvs.

I will start at the beginning with the first sort of work. Experienced
miners, when they dig the ore, sort the metalliferous material from earth,
stones, and solidified juices before it is taken from the shafts and tunnels,
and they put the valuable metal in trays and the waste into buckets. But
if some miner who is inexperienced in mining matters has omitted to do this,
or even if some experienced miner, compelled by some unavoidable necessity,
has been unable to do so, as soon as the material which has been dug out
has been removed from the mine, all of it should be examined, and that part of
the ore which is rich in metal sorted from that part of it which is devoid of
metal, whether such part be earth, or solidified juices, or stones. To smelt
waste together with an ore involves a loss, for some expenditure is thrown
away, seeing that out of earth and stones only empty and useless slags are

“ copper in wasteinge of it, ar by arte maide freindes, and be not onely an encrease to the
“ copper, but further it in smeltinge; and the rest of the other evill humors shalbe so
“corrected, and their humors so taken from them, that by once rosteinge and once smeltinge
“the ure (which shalbe done in the space of three dayes), the same copper ure shall yeeld us
‘black copper.” Jochim proposed by ‘rostynge’ to be rid of “sulphur, arsineque, and
“antimony.”

BOOK VIII. 269

melted out, and further, the solidified juices also impede the smelting of the
metals and cause loss. The rock which lies contiguous to rich ore should also be
broken into small pieces, crushed, and washed, lest any of the mineral should
be lost. When, either through ignorance or carelessness, the miners while
excavating have mixed the ore with earth or broken rock, the work of sorting
the crude metal or the best ore is done not only by men, but also by boys and
women. They throw the mixed material upon a long table, beside which they
sit for almost the whole,day, and they sort out the ore; when it has been
sorted out, they collect it in trays, and when collected they throw it into
tubs, which are carried to the works in which the ores are smelted.

The metal which is dug out in a pure or crude state, to which class belong
native silver, silver glance, and gray silver, is placed on a stone by the
mine foreman and flattened out by pounding with heavy square hammers.
These masses, when they have been thus flattened out like plates, are placed
either on the stump of a tree, and cut into pieces by pounding an iron chisel
into them with a hammer, or else they are cut with an iron tool similar to a
pair of shears. One blade of these shears is three feet long, and is firmly
fixed in a stump, and the other blade which cuts the metal is six feet long.

ae

LL Y VEE

A—MASSES OF METAL. B—HAmMER. C—CuIsEL. D—TreEE stumps, E—IRoN TOOL
SIMILAR TO A PAIR OF SHEARS,

20

270 BOOK VIII.

These pieces of metal are afterward heated in iron basins and smelted in the
cupellation furnace by the smelters.

Although the miners, in the shafts or tunnels, have sorted over the
material which they mine, still the ore which has been broken down and carried
out must be broken into pieces by a hammer or minutely crushed, so that
the more valuable and better parts can be distinguished from the inferior and
worthless portions. This is of the greatest importance in smelting ore, for
if the ore is smelted without this separation, the valuable part frequently
receives great damage before the worthless part melts in the fire, or else the
one consumes the other; this latter difficulty can, however, be partly
avoided by the exercise of care and partly by the use of fluxes. Now, if a
vein is of poor quality, the better portions which have been broken down and
carried out should be thrown together in one place, and the inferior portion
and the rock thrown away. The sorters place a hard broad stone on a table;
the tables are generally four feet square and made of joined planks, and to
the edge of the sides and back are fixed upright planks, which rise about a
foot from the table; the front, where the sorter sits, is left open. The

- \ , TS eee
—— —_—=> &
~ \\ \ Abus titi }
|
een)
; nr mene Te ecray oe e
F34 ooo eee eos
Z 1 ERE Sa
FY sae
oe —
——3 >> : F
S ‘ 3
i SS ge are
~<)' — ee. SX p =
BS " -
SS
“,
= al x
° o o}|° o
4 ele .) co
of -
t 5
=
t —
2 F 2

A—TasBLes. B—UPRIGHT PLANKS. C—HAMMER. D—QUADRANGULAR HAMMER.
E—DEEPER VESSEL. F—SHALLOWER VESSEL. G—TIRON ROD.

- — es

I a

BOOK VIII. 271

lumps of ore, rich in gold or silver, are put by the sorters on the stone and
broken up with a broad, but not thick, hammer; they either break them into
pieces and throw them into one vessel, or they break and sort—whence they
get their name—the more precious from the worthless, throwing and collecting
them separately into different vessels. Other men crush the lumps of ore
less rich in gold or silver, which have likewise been put on the stone, with a
broad thick hammer, and when it has been well crushed, they collect it and
throw it into one vessel. There are two kinds of vessels ; one is deeper, and a
little wider in the centre than at the top or bottom ; the other is not so deep
though it is broader at the bottom, and becomes gradually a little narrower

_ toward the top. The latter vessel is covered with a lid, while the former is not

covered; an iron rod through the handles, bent over on either end, is
grasped in the hand when the vessel is carried. But, above all, it behooves
the sorters to be assiduous in their labours.

By another method of breaking ore with hammers, large hard frag-
ments of ore are broken before they are burned. The legs of the workmen
—at all events of those who crush pyrites in this manner with large hammers
in Goslar—are protected with coverings resembling leggings, and their hands

A—Pyrites. B—Lrccincs. C—GLoves. D—HaAmMMER.

272 BOOK VIII.

are protected with long gloves, to prevent them from being injured by the
chips which fly away from the fragments.

In that district of Greater Germany which is called Westphalia and in
that district of Lower Germany which is named Eifel, the broken ore which
has been burned, is thrown by the workmen into a round area paved with the
hardest stones, and the fragments are pounded up with iron tools, which are
very much like hammers in shape and are used like threshing sledges. This
tool is a foot long, a palm wide, and a digit thick, and has an opening in the
middle just as hammers have, in which is fixed a wooden handle of no great
thickness, but up to three and a half feet long, in order that the workmen
can pound the ore with greater force by reason of its weight falling from a
greater height. They strike and pound with the broad side of the tool, in the
same way as corn is pounded out on a threshing floor with the threshing
sledges, although the latter are made of wood and are smooth and fixed to
poles. When the ore has been broken into small pieces, they sweep it
together with brooms and remove it to the works, where it is washed

a
nee Vo 48
"5 mm in >—S
<@

ZEN) Joo

—= = i
i —<— LS =

=—

A—AREA PAVED WITH STONES. B—BROKEN ORE. C-—-AREA COVERED WITH BROKEN ORE,
D—Iron Toor, E—Its HANDLE. F—Broom. G—-SHORT STRAKE. H—WOODEN HOE.

BOOK VIII. 273

in a short strake, at the head of which stands the washer, who draws the water
upward with a wooden hoe. The water running down again, carries all
the light particles into a trough placed underneath. I shall deal more fully
with this method of washing a little later.

Ore is burned for two reasons ; either that from being hard, it may become
soft and more easily broken and more readily crushed with a hammer or
stamps, and then can be smelted; or that the fatty things, that is to say,
sulphur, bitumen, orpiment, or realgar? may be consumed. Sulphur is
frequently found in metallic ores, and, generally speaking, is more harmful
to the metals, except gold, than are the other things. It is most harmful of
all to iron, and less to tin than to bismuth, lead, silver, or copper.
Since very rarely gold is found in which there is not some silver, even gold
ores containing sulphur ought to be roasted before they are smelted, because,
in a very vigorous furnace fire, sulphur resolves metal into ashes and makes
slag of it. Bitumen acts in the same way, in fact sometimes it consumes
silver, which we may see in bituminous cadmta‘.

I now come to the methods of roasting, and first of all to that one which
is common to all ores. The earth is dug out to the required extent, and
thus is made a quadrangular area of fair size, open at the front, and above
this, firewood is laid close together, and on it other wood is laid trans-
versely, likewise close together, for which reason our countrymen call this
pile of wood a crate ; this is repeated until the pile attains a height of one
or two cubits. Then there is placed upon it a quantity of ore that has been
broken into small pieces with a hammer; first the largest of these pieces,
next those of medium size, and lastly the smallest, and thus is built up a
gently sloping cone. To prevent it from becoming scattered, fine sand of the

*Orpiment and realgar are the red and yellow arsenical sulphides. (See note on p. rrt).

‘Cadmia bituminosa. The description of this substance by Agricola, given below,
indicates that it was his term for the complex copper-zinc-arsenic-cobalt minerals found in
the well-known, highly bituminous, copper schists at Mannsfeld. The later Mineralogists,
Wallerius (Mineralogia, Stockholm, 1747), Valmont De Bomare (Mineralogie, Paris, 1762),
and others assume Agricola’s cadmia bituminosa to be “‘ black arsenic” or “ arsenic noir,”
but we see no reason for this assumption. Agricola’s statement (De Nat. Foss., p. 369) is
“ . . . the schistose stone dug up at the foot of the Melibocus Mountains, or as they are
“ now called the Harz (Hercynium), near Eisleben, Mannsfeld, and near Hettstedt, is similar
“to spinos (a bituminous substance described by Theophrastus), if not identical with it.
“This is black, bituminous, and cupriferous, and when first extracted from the mine it is thrown
“ out into an open space and heaped up in a mound. Then the lower part of the mound is
“ surrounded by faggots, on to which are likewise thrown stones of the same kind. Then
“the faggots are kindled and the fire soon spreads to the stones placed upon them; by
“these the fire is communicated to the next, which thus spreads to the whole heap. This
“easy reception of fire is a characteristic which bitumen possesses in common with sulphur.
“ Yet the small, pure and black bituminous ore is distinguished from the stones as follows :
“when they burn they emit the kind of odour which is usually given off by burning
“bituminous coal, and besides, if while they are burning a small shower of rain should fall, they
“burn more brightly and soften more quickly. Indeed, when the wind carries the fumes
“so that they descend into nearby standing waters, there can be seen floating in it
“something like a bituminous liquid, either black, or brown, or purple, which is sufficient to
“indicate that those stones were bituminous. And that genus of stones has been recently
“found in the Harz in layers, having occasionally gold-coloured specks of pyrites adhering
“to them, representing various flat sea-fish or pike or perch or birds, and poultry cocks,
“and sometimes salamanders.”

274 BOOK VIII.

A—AREA. B—Woop. C—Orr. D—CONE-SHAPED PILES, E—CANAL.

same ore is soaked with water and smeared over it and beaten on with shovels ;
some workers, if they cannot obtain such fine sand, cover the pile with char-
coal-dust, just as do charcoal-burners. But at Goslar, the pile, when it has
been built up in the form of a cone, is smeared with atramentum sutorium
vubrum*, which is made by the leaching of roasted pyrites soaked with water.
In some districts the ore is roasted once, in others twice, in others three times,
as its hardness may require. At Goslar, when pyrites is roasted for the third
time, that which is placed on the top of the pyre exudes a certain greenish,
dry, rough, thin substance, as I have elsewhere written®; this is no more
easily burned by the fire than is asbestos. Very often also, water is put on

5Atramentum sutorium rubrum. Literally, this would be red vitriol. The German
translation gives rot kupferwasser, also red vitriol. We must confess that we cannot make
this substance out, nor can we find it mentioned in the other works of Agricola. It may be
the residue from leaching roasted pyrites for vitriol, which would be reddish oxide of iron.

6The statement ‘‘ elsewhere’? does not convey very much more information. It
is (De Nat. Fos., p. 253): ‘‘ When Goslar pyrites and Eisleben (copper) schists are placed on
“the pyre and roasted for the third time, they both exude a certain substance which is of a
‘greenish colour, dry, rough, and fibrous (tenwe). This substance, like asbestos, is not
“consumed by the fire. The schists exude it more plentifully than the pyrites.’’ The
Interpretatio gives federwis, as the German equivalent of amiantus (asbestos). This term was
used for the feathery alum efflorescence on aluminous slates.

—-

BOOK VIII. 275

to the ore which has been roasted, while it is still hot, in order to make
it softer and more easily broken; for after fire has dried up the moisture
in the ore, it breaks up more easily while it is still hot, of which fact burnt
limestone affords the best example.

By digging out the earth they make the areas much larger, and square ;
walls should be built along the sides and back to hold the heat of the
fire more effectively, and the front should be left open. In these compart-
ments tin ore is roasted in the following manner. First of all wood about
twelve feet long should be laid in the area in four layers, alternately straight
and transverse. Then the larger pieces of ore should be laid upon them, and
on these again the smaller ones, which should also be placed around the sides ;
the fine sand of the same ore should also be spread over the pile and pounded
with shovels, to prevent the pile from falling before it has been roasted; the
wood should then be fired.

»\

ue

I) WoL |S

~~

YY

OWMUASO

A—LIGHTED PYRE. B—PyYRE WHICH IS BEING CONSTRUCTED. C—OrrE. D—Woop.
E—PILE OF THE SAME WOOD.

Lead ore, if roasting is necessary, should be piled in an area just like the
last, but sloping, and the wood should be placed over it. A tree trunk should
be laid right across the front of the ore to prevent it from falling out. The
ore, being roasted in this way, becomes partly melted and resembles slag.

276 BOOK VIII.

Thuringian pyrites, in which there is gold, sulphur, and vitriol, after the last
particle of vitriol has been obtained by heating it in water, is thrown into a
furnace, in which logs are placed. This furnace is very similar to an oven
in shape, in order that when the ore is roasted the valuable contents may not
fly away with the smoke, but may adhere to the roof of the furnace. In this
way sulphur very often hangs like icicles from the two openings of the roof
through which the smoke escapes.

A—BURNING PYRE WHICH IS COMPOSED OF LEAD ORE WITH WOOD PLACED ABOVE IT.
B—WoRKMAN THROWING ORE INTO ANOTHER AREA. C—OVEN-SHAPED FURNACE.
D—OPENINGS THROUGH WHICH THE SMOKE ESCAPES.

If pyrites or cadmia, or any other ore containing metal, possesses a good
deal of sulphur or bitumen, it should be so roasted that neither is lost. For
this purpose it is thrown on an iron plate full of holes, and roasted with char-
coal placed on top; three walls support this plate, two on the sides and the
third at the back. Beneath the plate are placed pots containing water, into
which the sulphurous or bituminous vapour descends, and in the water the
fat accumulates and floats on the top. If it is sulphur, it is generally of a
yellow colour; if bitumen, it is black like pitch. If these were not drawn
out they would do much harm to the metal, when the ore is being smelted.
When they have thus been separated they prove of some service to man,
especially the sulphurous kind. From the vapour which is carried down, not

ee

pe belie et a

oe ee. oe ee

id

— ore

SE Se ae ee a

ea a

——_

Sh ae. oe ee

a

ee ee eee

BOOK VIII.

re

A—IRON PLATES FULL OF HOLES. B—WALLS. C—PLATE ON WHICH ORE IS PLACED.

D—BURNING CHARCOAL PLACED ON THE ORE. E—Pots. F—Furnace. G—MIDDLE

PART OF UPPER CHAMBER. H—THE OTHER TWO COMPARTMENTS. I—DIVISIONS OF THE

LOWER CHAMBER. K-—MIDDLE WALL. L—POTS WHICH ARE FILLED WITH ORE. M—Linps
OF SAME POTS. N—GRATING.

278 BOOK VIII.

into the water, but into the ground, there is created a sulphurous or a
bituminous substance resembling pompholyx?, and so light that it can be
blown away with a breath. Some employ a vaulted furnace, open at the
front and divided into two chambers. A wall built in the middle of the
furnace divides the lower chamber into two equal parts, in which are set pots
containing water, as above described. The upper chamber is again divided
into three parts, the middle one of which is always open, for in it the wood
_ is placed, and it is not broader than the middle wall, of which it forms the
topmost portion. The other two compartments have iron doors which are
closed, and which, together with the roof, keep in the heat when the wood
is lighted. In these upper compartments are iron bars which take the place
of a floor, and on these are arranged pots without bottoms, having in
place of a bottom, a grating made of iron wire, fixed to each, through
the openings of which the sulphurous or bituminous vapours roasted from
the ore run into the lower pots. Each of the upper pots holds a hundred

\AS

AN

SSS Y ENR 5 |
= Se it

‘
VLE
ISN
A—HEAP OF CUPRIFEROUS STONES. B—KINDLED HEAP. C-——STONES BEING TAKEN TO
THE BEDS OF FAGGOTS.

?Bearing in mind that bituminous cadmia contained arsenical-cobalt minerals, this
substance ‘‘resembling pompholyx’’ would probably be arsenic oxide. In De Natura
Fossilium (p. 368), Agricola discusses the pompholyx from cadmia at length and pronounces
it to be of remarkably “‘ corrosive” quality. (See also note on p. 112.)

BOOK VIII. 279

pounds of ore; when they are filled they are covered with lids and smeared
with lute.

In Eisleben and the neighbourhood, when they roast the schistose
stone from which copper is smelted, and which is not free from bitumen,
they do not use piles of logs, but bundles of faggots. At one time, they used
to pile this kind of stone, when extracted from the pit, on bundles of
faggots and roast it by firing the faggots; nowadays, they first of all
carry these same stones to a heap, where they are left to lie for some time in
such a way as to allow the air and rain to soften them. Then they make a
bed of faggot bundles near the heap, and carry the nearest stones to this
bed; afterward they again place bundles of faggots in the empty place
from which the first stones have been removed, and pile over this extended
bed, the stones which lay nearest to the first lot ; and they do this right up to
the end, until all the stones have been piled mound-shape on a bed of faggots.
Finally they fire the faggots, not, however, on the side where the wind is
blowing, but on the opposite side, lest the fire blown up by the force of the
wind should consume the faggots before the stones are roasted and made soft ;
by this method the stones which are adjacent to the faggots take fire and
communicate it to the next ones, and these again to the adjoining ones, and
in this way the heap very often burns continuously for thirty days or more.
This schist rock when rich in copper, as I have said elsewhere, exudes a
substance of a nature similar to asbestos.

Ore is crushed with iron-shod stamps, in order that the metal may be
separated from the stone and the hanging-wall rock. The machines which
miners use for this purpose are of four kinds, and are made by the following
method. A block of oak timber six feet long, two feet and a palm square, is
laid on the ground. In the middle of this is fixed a mortar-box, two feet and six
digits long, one foot and six digits deep ; the front, which might be called a

SHISTORICAL NOTE ON CRUSHING AND CONCENTRATION OF ORES. There can be no
question that the first step in the metallurgy of ores was direct smelting, and that this
antedates human records. The obvious advantages of reducing the bulk of the material to
be smelted by the elimination of barren portions of the ore, must have appealed to metal-
lurgists at a very early date. Logically, therefore, we should find the second step in
metallurgy to be concentration in some form. The question of crushing is so much involved
with concentration that we have not endeavoured to keep them separate. The earliest
indication of these processes appears to be certain inscriptions on monuments of the Iv
Dynasty (4,000 B.c. ?) depicting gold washing (Wilkinson, The Ancient Egyptians, London,
1874, Ul, p. 137). Certain stele of the x11 Dynasty (2,400 B.c.) in the British Museum
(144 Bay 1 and 145 Bay 6) refer to gold washing in the Sudan, and one of them appears to
indicate the working of gold ore as distinguished from alluvial. The first written descrip-
tion of the tian methods—and probably that reflecting the most ancient technology
of crushing and concentration—is that of Agatharchides, a Greek geographer of the second
Century B.c. This work is lost, but the passage in question is quoted by Diodorus Siculus
(1st Century B.c.) and by Photius (died 891 a.pD.). We give Booth’s translation of
Diodorus (London, 1700, p. 89), slightly amended: ‘‘In the confines of Egypt and the
“neighbouring countries of Arabia and Ethiopia there is a place full of rich gold mines,
“out of which with much cost and pains of many labourers gold is dug. The soil here
“is naturally black, but in the body of the earth run many white veins, shining like
“white marble, surpassing in lustre all other bright things. Out of these laborious
“mines, those appointed overseers cause the gold to be dug up by the labour of a vast
“multitude of people. For the Kings of t condemn tq these mines notorious
“criminals, captives taken in war, persons sometimes falsely accused, or against
“whom the King is incens’d; and not only they themselves, but sometimes all their

280 BOOK VIII.

mouth, lies open; the bottom is covered with a plate of iron, a palm thick
and two palms and as many digits wide, each end of which is wedged into the
timber with broad wedges, and the front and back part of it are fixed to the
timber with iron nails. To the sides of the mortar above the block are fixed
two upright posts, whose upper ends are somewhat cut back and are mor-
tised to the timbers of the building. Two and a half feet above the mortar

“kindred and relations together with them, are sent to work here, both to punish
“them, and by their labour to advance the profit and gain of the Kings. There are
‘infinite numbers upon these accounts thrust down into these mines, all bound in fetters,
“where they work continually, without being admitted any rest night or day, and so
“strictly guarded that there is no possibility or way left to make an escape. For they
“set over them barbarians, soldiers of various and strange languages, so that it is not
“possible to corrupt any of the guard by discoursing one with another, or by the gaining
‘insinuations of familiar converse. The earth which is hardest and full of gold they
“soften by putting fire under it, and then work it out with their hands. The rocks thus
“‘soften’d and made more pliant and yielding, several thousands of profligate wretches
“ break in pieces with hammers and pickaxes. There is one artist that is the overseer of the
“‘whole work, who marks out the stone, and shows the labourers the way and manner
“how he would have it done. Those that are the strongest amongst them that are
“‘ appointed to this slavery, provided with sharp iron pickaxes, cleave the marble-shining rock
“by mere force and strength, and not by arts or sleight-of-hand. They undermine not the
“rock in a direct line, but follow the bright shining vein of the mine. They carry lam
“fastened to their foreheads to give them light, being otherwise in perfect darkness in the
“various windings and turnings wrought in the mine; and having their bodies appearing
“sometimes of one colour and sometimes of another (according to the nature of the mine
‘where they work) they throw the lumps and pieces of the stone cut out of the rock upon the
“floor. And thus they are employed continually without intermission, at the very nod of
“the overseer, who lashes them severely besides. And there are little boys who penetrate
“through the galleries into the cavities and with great labour and toil gather up the lumps
“and pieces hewed out of the rock as they are cast upon the ground, and carry them forth
“and lay them upon the bank. Those that are over thirty years of age take a piece of the
“rock of such a certain quantity, and pound it in a stone mortar with iron pestles till it be
“as small as a vetch; then those little stones so pounded are taken from them by women
“‘and older men, who cast them into mills that stand together there near at hand in a long
“‘ row, and two or three of them being employed at one mill they grind a certain measure given
“to them at a time, until it is as small as fine meal. No care at all is taken of the bodies of
“these poor creatures, so that they have not a rag so much as to cover their nakedness, and
“no man that sees them can choose but commiserate their sad and deplorable condition.
“ For though they are sick, maimed, or lame, no rest nor intermission in the least is allowed
“them ; neither the weakness of old age, nor women’s infirmities are any plea to excuse them ;
“but all are driven to their work with blows and cudgelling, till at length, overborne with
“ the intolerable weight of their misery, they drop down dead in the midst of their insufferable
“labours ; so that these miserable creatures always expect the future to be more terrible
“than even the present, and therefore long for death as far more desirable than life.

“‘ At length the masters of the work take the stone thus ground to powder, and carry
“it away in order to perfect it. They spread the mineral so ground upon a broad board, some-

“‘ what sloping, and pouring water upon it, rub it and cleanse it; and so all the earthy and —

“ drossy part being separated from the rest by the water, it runs off the board, and the gold
“ by reason of its weight remains behind. Then washing it several times again, they first rub
“it lightly with their hands; afterward they draw off any earthy and drossy matter with
‘slender sponges gently applied to the powdered dust, till it be clean, pure gold. At last
“ other workmen take it away by weight and measure, and these put it into earthen pots, and
“according to the quantity of the gold in every pot they mix with it some lead, grains of
“salt, a little tin and barley bran. Then, covering every pot close, and carefully
“ daubing them over with clay, they put them in a furnace, where they abide five days and
“nights together; then after a convenient time that they have stood to cool, nothing of the
“other matter is to be found in the pots but only pure, refined gold, some little
“thing diminished in the weight. And thus gold is prepared in the borders of Egypt, and
“‘ perfected and completed with so many and so great toils and vexations. And, therefore,
“‘T cannot but conclude that nature itself teaches us, that as gold is got with labour and toil,
“so it is kept with difficulty ; it creates everywhere the greatest cares ; and the use of it is
“mixed both with pleasure and sorrow.”

The remains at Mt. Laurion show many of the ancient mills and concentration works
of the Greeks, but we cannot be absolutely certain at what period in the history of these
mines crushing and concentration were introduced. While the mines were worked with

Se

BOOK VIII. 281

are placed two cross-beams joined together, one in front and one in the back,
the ends of which are mortised into the upright posts already mentioned.
Through each mortise is bored a hole, into which is driven an iron clavis ;
one end of the clavis has two horns, and the other end is perforated in order
that a wedge driven through, binds the beams more firmly ; one horn of the
clavis turns up and the other down. Three and a half feet above the cross-

great activity prior to 500 B.C. (see note 6, p. 27), it was quite feasible for the ancient miner
to have smelted these argentiferous lead ores direct. However, at some period prior to the
decadence of the mines in the 3rd Century B.c., there was in use an extensive system of milling
and concentration. For the following details we are indebted mostly to Edouard Ardaillon
(Les Mines Du Laurion dans l’Antiquité, Chap. 1v.). The ore was first hand-picked (in
1869 one portion of these rejects was estimated at 7,000,000 tons) and afterward it was
apparently crushed in stone mortars some 16 to 24 inches in diameter, and thence passed to
mills. These mills, which crushed dry, were of the upper and lower millstone order, like

the old-fashioned flour mills, and were turned by hand. The stones were capable of
adjustment in such a way as to yield different sizes. The sand was sifted and the oversize
returned to the mills. From the mills it was taken to washing plants, which consisted
essentially of an inclined area, below which a canal, sometimes with riffles, lead through a
series of basins, ultimately returning the water again to near the head of the area. These
washing areas, constructed with great care, were made of stone cemented over smoothly,
and were so efficiently done as to remain still intact. In washing, a workman brushed
upward the pulp placed on the inclined upper portion of the area, thus concentrating there a
considerable proportion of the galena; what escaped had an opportunity to settle in the
sequence of basins, somewhat on the order of the buddle. A quotation by Strabo (11, 2, ro)
from the lost work of Polybius (200-125 B.c.) also indicates concentration of lead-silver ores in
Spain previous to the Christian era : ‘‘ Polybius speaking of the silver mines of New Carthage,
‘tells us that they are extremely large, distant from the city about 20 stadia, and occupy a
“ circuit of 400 stadia, that there are 40,000 men regularly engaged in them, and that they
“‘ yield daily to the Roman people (a revenue of) 25,000 drachmae. The rest of the process
“I pass over, as it is too long, but as for the silver ore collected, he tells us that it is broken
“up, and sifted through sieves over water ; that what remains is to be again broken, and the
“water having been strained off, it is to be sifted and broken a third time. The dregs which
‘remain after the fifth time are to be melted, and the lead being poured off, the silver is
‘obtained pure. These silver mines still exist; however, they are no longer the property
“ of the state, neither these nor those elsewhere, but are swat § by private individuals. The
‘gold mines, on the contrary, nearly all nepae. Ad the state. th at Castlon and other
“ places there are singular lead mines worked. ey contain a small proportion of silver, but
“ not sufficient to pay for the expense of refining.”” (Hamilton’s Translation, Vol. I., p. 222).
While Pliny gives considerable information on vein mining and on alluvial washing, the
following ohecste passage (XXXIII, 21) appears to be the only reference to concentration of
ores: ‘‘ That which is dug out is crushed, washed, roasted, and ground to powder. This
“powder is called apitascudes, while the silver (lead ?) which becomes disengaged in the
Me Farance is called sudor (sweat). That which is ejected from the chimney is called scoria
“as with other metals. In the case of gold this scoria is crushed and melted again.”’ It is
evident enough from these quotations that the Ancients by “washing” and “sifting,”
grasped the practical effect of differences in specific gravity of the various components of
an ore. Such processes are barely mentioned by other medieval authors, such as Theo-
hilus, Biringuccio, etc., and thus the account in this chapter is the first tangible technical
seaeripieti. Lead mining has been in active progress in Derbyshire since the 13th century,
and concentration was done on an inclined board until the 16th century, when William
Humpfrey (see below) introduced the jigging sieve. Some further notes on this industry will
be found in note 1, p. 77. However, the buddle and strake which appear at that time, are
but modest improvements over the board described by Agatharchides in the quotation above.
The ancient crushing appliances, as indicated by the ancient authors and by the Greek

and Roman remains scattered over Europe, were hand-mortars and mill-stones of the same
order as those with which they ground flour. The stamp-mill, the next advance over
grinding in mill-stones, seems to have been invented some time late in the 15th or early
in the 16th centuries, but who invented it is unknown. Beckmann (Hist. of Inventions,
Il, p. 335) says: “In the year 1519 the process of sifting and wet-stamping was established
“at Joachimsthal by Paul Grommestetter, a native of Schwarz, named on that account
“the Schwarzer, whom Melzer praises as an ingenious and active washer; and we are
“told that he had before introduced the same improvements at Schneeberg. Soon after,
“that is in 1521, a large stamping-work was erected at Joachimsthal, and the process
“of washing was begun. A considerable saving was thus made, as a great many metallic
“particles were before left in the washed sand, which was either thrown away or used as
“mortar for building. In the year 1525, Hans Pértner employed at Schlackenwalde the

282 BOOK VIII.

beams, two other cross-beams of the same kind are again joined in a similar
manner; these cross-beams have square openings, in which the iron-shod
stamps are inserted. The stamps are not far distant from each other, and
fit closely in the cross-beams. Each stamp has a tappet at the back, which
requires to be daubed with grease on the lower side that it can be raised
more easily. For each stamp there are on a cam-shaft, two cams, rounded on

“‘wet method of stamping, whereas before that period the ore there was ground. In the
“Harz this invention was introduced at Wildenmann by Peter Philip, who was assay-
‘master there soon after the works at the Upper Harz were resumed by Duke Henry the
“ Younger, about the year 1524. This we learn from the papers of Herdan Hacke or
‘‘ Haecke, who was preacher at Wildenmann in 1572.”

In view of the great amount of direct and indirect reference to tin mining in Cornwall,
covering four centuries prior to Agricola, it would be natural to expect some statement
bearing upon the treatment of ore. Curiously enough, while alluvial washing and smelting of
the black-tin are often referred to, there is nothing that we have been able to find, prior to
Richard Carew’s ‘‘ Survey of Cornwall” (London, 1602, p. 12) which gives any tangible
evidence on the technical phases of ore-dressing. In any event, an inspection of charters,
tax-rolls, Stannary Court proceedings, etc., prior to that date gives the impression that vein
mining was a very minor portion of the source of production. Although Carew’s work
dates 45 years after Agricola, his description is of interest: ‘‘ As much almost dooth it
““exceede credite, that the Tynne, for and in so small quantitie digged up with so great toyle,
“and passing afterwards thorow the managing of so many hands, ere it comes to sale, should
“be any way able to acquite the cost: for being once brought above ground in the stone,
“it is first broken in peeces with hammers ; and then carryed, either in waynes, or on horses’
“backs, to a stamping mill, where three, and in some places sixe great logges of timber,
“‘bounde at the ends with yron, and lifted up and downe by a wheele, driven with the water,
“doe break it smaller. If the stones be over-moyst, they are dried by the fire in an yron
“cradle or grate. From the stamping mill, it passeth to the crazing mill, which betweene
“two grinding stones, turned also with a water-wheel, bruseth the same to a find sand;
“howbeit, of late times they mostly use wet stampers, and so have no need of the crazing
“‘ mills for their best stuffe, but only for the crust of their tayles. The streame, after it hath
“‘ forsaken the mill, is made to fall by certayne degrees, one somewhat distant from another ;
“upon each of which, at every discent, lyeth a greene turfe, three or foure foote square, and
“one foote thick. On this the Tinner layeth a certayne portion of the sandie Tinne, and
“with his shovel softly tosseth the same to and fro, that, through this stirring, the water
“which runneth over it may wash away the light earth from the Tinne, which of a heavier
“substance lyeth fast on the turfe. Having so clensed one portion, he setteth the same
“aside, and beginneth with another, until his labour take end with his taske. The best of
“those turfes (for all sorts serve not) are fetched about two miles to the eastwards of S.
‘* Michael’s Mount, where at low water they cast aside the sand, and dig them up: the
“are full of rootes of trees, and on some of them nuts have been found, which confirmet
“my former assertion of the sea’s intrusion. After it is thus washed, they put the remnant
“into a wooden dish, broad, flat, and round, being about two foote over, and having two
“handles fastened at the sides, by which they softly shogge the same to and fro in the water
“ betweene their legges, as they sit over it, untill whatsoever of the earthie substance that
“ was yet left be flitted away. Some of later time, with a sleighter invention, and lighter
“labour, doe cause certayne boyes to stir it up and down with their feete, which worketh
“the same effect ; the residue, after this often clensing, they call Blacke Tynne.”

It will be noticed that the “wet stampers”’ and the buddle—worked with ‘‘ boyes
“feete’’—are “innovations of late times.’’ And the interesting question arises as to
whether Cornwall did not derive the stamp-mill, buddle, and strake, from the Germans.
The first adequate detailed description of Cornish appliances is that of Pryce (Mineralogia
Cornubiensis, London, 1778) where the apparatus is identical with that described by Agricola
130 years before. The word ‘‘stamper” of Cornwall is of German origin, from stampfer,
or, as it is often written in old German works, stamper. However, the pursuit of the subject
through etymology ends here, for no derivatives in German can be found for buddle, tye,
strake, or other collateral terms. The first tangible evidence of German influence is to be
found in Carew who, continuing after the above quotation, states: ‘‘ But sithence I gathered
“ stickes to the building of this poore nest, Sir Francis Godolphin (whose kind helpe hath much
“‘ advanced this my playing labour) entertained a Dutch Mynerall man, and taking light from
“his experience, but building thereon farre more profitable conclusions of his owne invention,
“hath practised a more saving way in these matters, and besides, made Tynne with good
“profit of that refuse which Tynners rejected as nothing worth.” Beyond this quotation
we can find no direct evidence of the influence of ‘‘ Dutch Mynerall men” in Cornish tin
mining at this time. There can be no doubt, however, that in copper mining in Cornwall
and elsewhere in England, the ‘ Dutch Mynerall men” did play a large part in the latter

eT

BOOK VIII. 283

the outer end, which alternately raise the stamp, in order that, by its dropping
into the mortar, it may with its iron head pound and crush the rock which
has been thrown under it. To the cam-shaft is fixed a water-wheel whose
buckets are turned by water-power. Instead of doors, the mouth of the
mortar has a board, which is fitted into notches cut out of the front of the block.
This board can be raised, in order that when the mouth is open, the workmen

part of the 16th Century. Pettus (Fodine Regales, London, 1670, p. 20) states that “ about
‘the third year of Queen Elizabeth (1561) she by the advice of her Council sent over for
“‘ some Germans experienced in mines, and being supplied, she, on the tenth of October, in the
“sixth of her reign, granted the mines of eight counties . . . . to Houghsetter, a
“German whose name and family still continue in Cardiganshire.” Elizabeth granted
large mining rights to various Germans, and the opening paragraphs of two out of several
Charters may be quoted in point. This grant isdated 1565,andinpartreads: ‘ ELIZABETH,
“by the Grace of God, Queen of England, France, and Ireland, Defender of the Faith, &c.
““To all Men to whom these Letters Patents shall come, Greeting. Where heretofore we
“have granted Privileges to Cornelius de Voz, for the Mining and Digging in our Realm
“of England, for Allom and Copperas, and for divers Ewers of Metals that were to be found
“in digging for the said Allom and Copperas, incidently and consequently without fraud
“or guile, as by the same our Privilege may appear. And where we moved, by credible
“ Report to us made, of one Daniel Houghsetter, a German born, and of-his Skill and Know-
“ledge of and in all manner of Mines, of Metals and Minerals, have given and granted
“ Privilege to Thomas Thurland, Clerk, one of our Chaplains, and Master of the Hospital of
“Savoy, and to the same Daniel, for digging and mining for all manner of Ewers of Gold,
“Silver, Copper, and 8 7g hi within our Counties of York, Lancaster, Cumberland,
“Westmorland, Cornwall, Devon, Gloucester, and Worcester, and within our Principality
“of Wales; and with the same further to deal, as by our said Privilege thereof granted and
“‘made to the said Thomas Thurland and Daniel Houghsetter may appear. And we now
“ being minded that the said Commodities, and all other Treasures of the Earth, in all other
“Places of our Realm of England . . . .” On the same date another grant reads:
“ ELIZABETH, by the Grace of God, Queen of England, France, and Ireland, Defender of the
“ Faith, &c. To all Men to whom these our Letters Patents shall come, Greeting. Where
“we have received credible Information that our faithful and well-beloved Subject William
“Humfrey, Saymaster of our Mint within our Tower of London, by his great Endeavour,
“ Labour, and Charge, hath brought into this our Realm of England one Christopher Shutz,
“an Almain, born at St. Annen Berg, under the Obedience of the Electer of Saxony; a
“ Workman as it is reported, of great Cunning, Knowledge, and Experience, as well in the
“finding of the Calamin Stone, call’d in Latin, /apis calaminaris, and in the right and proper
“use and commodity thereof, for the Composition of the mix’d Metal commonly call’d
“ latten, etc.” Col. Grant-Francis, in his most valuable collection (Smelting of Copper in
the Swansea District, London, 1881) has published a collection of correspondence relating
to early mining and smelting operations in Great Britain. And among them (p. 1., etc.) are
letters in the years 1583-6 from William Carnsewe and others to Thomas Smyth, with regard
to the first smelter erected at Neath, which was based upon copper mines in Cornwall. He
mentions ‘‘ Mr. Weston’s (a partner) provydence in bringynge hys Dutch myners hether
“to aplye such businys in this countrye ys more to be commendyd than his ignorance of
“our countrymen’s actyvytyes in suche matters.” The principal ‘‘ Dutche Mineral Master ”
referred to was one Ulrick Frosse, who had charge of the mine at Perin Sands in Cornwall, and
subsequently of the smelter at Neath. Further on is given (p. 25) a Report by Jochim
Gaunse upon the Smelting of copper ores at Keswick in Cumberland in 1581, referred to in
note 2, p. 267. The Daniel Hochstetter mentioned in the Charter above, together with
other German and English gentlemen, formed the ‘‘ Company of Mines Royal” and among
the properties worked were those with which Gaunse’s report is concerned. There is in
the Record Office, London (Exchequer K.R. Com. Derby 611. Eliz.) the record of an
interesting inquisition into Derbyshire methods in which a then recent great improvement
was the jigging sieve, the introduction of which was due to William Humphrey (mentioned
above). It is possible that he learned of it from the German with whom he was associated.
haa pore evidence of the activity of the Germans in English mining at this period can
adduced.

_— On the other hand, Cornwall has laid claims to having taught the art of tin mining
arid metallurgy*to the Germans. Matthew Paris, a Benedictine monk, by birth an English-
man, who died in 1259, relates (Historia Major Angliae, London, 1571) that a Cornishman
who fled to Germany on account of a murder, first discovered tin there in 1241, and that in
consequence the price of tin fell greatly. This statement is recalled with great persistence
by many writers on Cornwall. (Camden, Britannia, London, 1586; Borlase, Natural
josgel: of Naactiens Oxford, 1758; Pryce, Mineralogia Cornubiensis, London, 1778, p. 70,
and others).

284 BOOK VIII.

Ai
AML
We

CRI Lda hdd dddibdaddida

—_

b

A—Mortar. B-—Upricut posts. C—Cross-BEAMS. D—StTamps. E—THEIR HEADS.
F—AXLE (CAM-SHAFT). G—TOOTH OF THE STAMP (TAPPET). H—TEETH OF AXLE (CAMS).

can remove with a shovel the fine sand, and likewise the coarse sand and
broken rock, into which the rocks have been crushed; this board can be
lowered, so that the mouth thus being closed, the fresh rock thrown in may
be crushed with the iron-shod stamps. If an oak block is not available,
two timbers are placed on the ground and joined together with iron clamps,
each of the timbers being six feet long, a foot wide, and a foot and a half thick.
Such depth as should be allowed to the mortar, is obtained by cutting out the
first beam to a width of three-quarters of a foot and to a length of two and a
third and one twenty-fourth of a foot. In the bottom of the part thus dug
out, there should be laid a very hard rock, a foot thick and three-quarters of a
foot wide; about it, if any space remains, earth or sand should be filled in
and pounded. On the front, this bed rock is covered with a plank ; this
rock when it has been broken, should be taken away and replaced by
another. A smaller mortar having room for only three stamps may also be
made in the same manner.

The stamp-stems are made of small square timbers nine feet long and
half a foot wide each way. The iron head of each is made in the following

7
Bi
,

ae SS ee

eS ee ee eee

Te a

“s>

eae ie

ee

BOOK VIII. 285

way; the lower part of the head is three palms long and the upper part the
same length. The lower part is a palm square in the middle for two palms,
then below this, for a length of two digits it gradually spreads until it
becomes five digits square; above the middle part, for a length of two ~
digits, it again gradually swells out until it becomes a palm and a half square.
Higher up, where the head of the shoe is enclosed in the stem, it is bored
through and similarly the stem itself is pierced, and through the opening of
each, there passes a broad iron wedge, which prevents the head falling off the
stem. To prevent the stamp head from becoming broken by the constant
striking of fragments of ore or rocks, there is placed around it a quadrangular
iron band a digit thick, seven digits wide, and six digits deep. Those who
use three stamps, as is common, make them much larger, and they are
made square and three palms broad each way; then the iron shoe
of each has a total length of two feet and a palm; at the lower end, it is
hexagonal, and at that point it is seven digits wide and thick. The lower
part of it which projects beyond the stem is one foot and two palms long ;
the upper part, which is enclosed in the stem, is three palms long; the

TT i 2
Bo Wy

wee i,

+)

Avi
i\\ WO

| AAG

Y
LWA ANNYAANAAT SSS WA if

CT MM a it ETT

—— ts

S
SS . ¥ PAT a AAA ann!
\ ~ #3 eSo

S SS.
pL jy

A—StTamp. B—STEM CUT OUT IN LOWER PART. C—SHOE. D—THE OTHER SHOE,
BARBED AND GROOVED. E—QUADRANGULAR IRON BAND. F—WEDGE. G—TAPPET.
H—ANGULAR CAM-SHAFT. I—Cams. K—PAIR OF COMPASSES.

21

286 BOOK VIII.

lower part is a palm wide and thick ; then gradually the upper part becomes
narrower and thinner, so that at the top it is three digits and a half wide and
two thick. It is bored through at the place where the angles have been
somewhat cut away; the hole is three digits long and one wide, and is one
digit’s distance from the top. There are some who make that part of the
head which is enclosed in the stem, barbed and grooved, in order that when
the hooks have been fixed into the stem and wedges fitted to the grooves,
it may remain tightly fixed, especially when it is also held with two quad-
rangular iron bands. Some divide the cam-shaft with a compass into six
sides, others into nine; it is better for it to be divided into twelve sides, in
order that successively one side may contain a cam and the next be without one.

The water-wheel is entirely enclosed under a quadrangular box, in case
either the deep snows or ice in winter, or storms, may impede its running and
its turning around. The joints in the planks are stopped all around with
moss. The cover, however, has one opening, through which there passes
a race bringing down water which, dropping on the buckets of the wheel,
turns it round, and flows out again in the lower race under the box. The
spokes of the water-wheel are not infrequently mortised into the middle of

Tien: ) 2
on TTT LI

A— Box. ALTHOUGH THE UPPER PART IS NOT OPEN, IT IS SHOWN OPEN HERE, THAT THE
WHEEL MAY BE SEEN. B—WHuHEEL. C—CAM-SHAFT. D—STAmps.

ve ae

BOOK VIII. 287

the cam-shaft ; in this case the cams on both sides raise the stamps, which
either both crush dry or wet ore, or else the one set crushes dry ore and the
other set wet ore, just as circumstances require the one or the other;
further, when the one set is raised and the iron clavises in them are fixed
into openings in the first cross-beam, the other set alone crushes the ore.
Broken rock or stones, or the coarse or fine sand, are removed from
the mortar of this machine and heaped up, as is also done with the same
materials when raked out of the dump near the mine. They are thrown
by a workman into a box, which is open on the top and the front, and is three
feet long and nearly a foot and a half wide. Its sides are sloping and made
of planks, but its bottom is made of iron wire netting, and fastened with
wire to two iron rods, which are fixed to the two side planks. This bottom
has openings, through which broken rock of the size of a hazel nut cannot
pass; the pieces which are too large to pass through are removed by the
workman, who again places them under stamps, while those which have
passed through, together with the coarse and fine sand, he collects in a large
vessel and keeps for the washing. When he is performing his laborious

A—Box LAID FLAT ON THE GROUND. B—lITs BOTTOM WHICH IS MADE OF IRON WIRE.
C—Box INVERTED. D—IRon robs. E—Box SUSPENDED FROM A BEAM, THE INSIDE
BEING VISIBLE. F—Box SUSPENDED FROM A BEAM, THE OUTSIDE BEING VISIBLE.

288 BOOK VIII.

task he suspends the box from a beam by two ropes. This box may rightly
be called a quadrangular sieve, as may also that kind which follows.

Some employ a sieve shaped like a wooden bucket, bound with two iron
hoops; its bottom, like that of the box, is made of iron wire netting.
They place this on two small cross-planks fixed upon a post set in the ground.
Some do not fix the post in the ground, but stand it on the ground until
there arises a heap of the material which has passed through the sieve, and

in this the post is fixed. With an iron shovel the workman throws into this —

sieve broken rock, small stones, coarse and fine sand raked out of the dump;
holding the handles of the sieve in his hands, he agitates it up and down in

A—SIEVE. B—SMALL PLANKS. C—Post. D—Bottrom oF sIEVE. E—OPEN BOX.
F—SMALL CROSS-BEAM. G—UPRIGHT POSTS.
order that by this movement the dust, fine and coarse sand, small stones, and
fine broken rock may fall through the bottom. Others do not use a sieve, but
an open box, whose bottom is likewise covered with wire netting; this they
fix on a small cross-beam fastened to two upright beams and tilt it backward
and forward.

Some use a sieve made of copper, having square copper handles on both
sides, and through these handles runs a pole, of which one end projects three-
quarters of a foot beyond one handle ; the workman then places that end in

a rope which is suspended from a beam, and rapidly shakes the pole alter-

ee ee ee

BOOK VIII, 289

nately backward and forward. By this movement the small particles
fall through the bottom of the sieve. In order that the end of the pole
may be easily placed in the rope, a stick, two palms long, holds open the
lower part of the rope as it hangs double, each end of the rope being tied to
the beam ; part of the rope, however, hangs beyond the stick to a length of
half a foot. A large box is also used for this purpose, of which the bottom
is either made of a plank full of holes or of iron netting, as are the other
boxes. An iron bale is fastened from the middle of the planks which form
its sides ; to this bale is fastened a rope which is suspended from a wooden
beam, in order that the box may be moved or tilted in any direction.

\ =

pny NS SS
5 S Z aA Hit SS
= — ; A, i S = SQ Mus \\
<—me : ASU I} = SA fat '
= = owl SSS) AQIS
—— — = FS) ——— > — SS N NIN A

A—Box. B—BALtE. C—Ropr. D—Bram. E—HANpLES. F—FIVE-TOOTHED RAKE.
G—Steve. H—Its HAanpites. I—Pore. K—Rope. L—Timser.

There are two handles on each end, not unlike the handles of a wheel-
barrow; these are held by two. workmen, who shake the box to and fro.
This box is the one principally used by the Germans who dwell in the
Carpathian mountains. The smaller particles are separated from the larger
ones by means of three boxes and two sieves, in order that those which
pass through each, being of equal size, may be washed together ; for the
bottoms of both the boxes and sieves have openings which do not let
through broken rock of the size of a hazel nut. As for the dry remnants

290 BOOK VIII.

in the bottoms of the sieves, if they contain any metal the miners put them
under the stamps. The larger pieces of broken rock are not separated from
the smaller by this method until the men and boys, with five-toothed rakes,
have separated them from the rock fragments, the little stones, the
coarse and the fine sand and earth, which have been thrown on to the dumps.
At Neusohl, in the Carpathians, there are mines where the veins of copper

lie in the ridges and peaks of the mountains, and in order to save expense
being incurred by a long and difficult transport, along a rough and sometimes
very precipitous road, one workman sorts over the dumps which have been
thrown out from the mines, and another carries in a wheelbarrow the earth,
fine and coarse sand, little stones, broken rock, and even the poorer ore, and
overturns the barrow into a long open chute fixed to a steep rock. This
chute is held apart by small cleats, and the material slides down a distance of
about one hundred and fifty feet into a short-box, whose bottom is made of a
thick copper plate, full of holes. This box has two handles by which it is
shaken to and fro, and at the top there are two bales made of hazel sticks,
in which is fixed the iron hook of a rope hung from the branch of a tree or
from a wooden beam which projects from an upright post. From time to
time a sifter pulls this box and thrusts it violently against the tree or post,
by which means the small particles passing through its holes descend down
another chute into another short box, in whose bottom there are smaller
holes. A second sifter, in like manner, thrusts this box violently against a
tree or post, and a second time the smaller particles are received into a third
chute, and slide down into a third box, whose bottom has still smaller holes.
A third sifter, in like manner, thrusts this box violently against a tree or post,
and for the third time the tiny particles fall through the holes upon a table.
While the workman is bringing in the barrow, another load which has been
sorted from the dump, each sifter withdraws the hooks from his bale
and carries away his own box and overturns it, heaping up the broken rock
or sand which remains in the bottom of it. As for the tiny particles which
have slid down upon the table, the first washer—for there are as many
washers as sifters—sweeps them off and in a tub nearly full of water, washes
them through a sieve whose holes are smaller than the holes of the third box.
When this tub has been filled with the material which has passed through
the sieve, he draws out the plug to let the water run away; then he removes
-with a shovel that which has settled in the tub and throws it upon the table
of a second washer, who washes it in a sieve with smaller holes. The sedi-
ment which has this time settled in his tub, he takes out and throws on the
table of a third washer, who washes it in a sieve with the smallest holes.
The copper concentrates which have settled in the last tub are taken out and
smelted ; the sediment which each washer has removed with a limp is
washed on a canvas strake. The sifters at Altenberg, in the tin mines of
the mountains bordering on Bohemia, use such boxes as I have described,
hung from wooden beams. These, however, are a little larger and open in
the front, through which opening the broken rock which has not gone through
the sieve can be shaken out immediately by thrusting the sieve against its post.

oo

BOOK VIII. 2gi

q
4
-

: q
i
;
.

ha

A—WORKMAN CARRYING BROKEN ROCK IN A BARROW. KB—FIRST CHUTE. C—FIRST BOX.
D—ItTs HANDLES. E—Its BALES. F—Ropr. G—Bram. H—Post. I—SEconpD
CHUTE. K—SEconD Box. L—TuHIRD cHUTE. M—TxHIRD BOX. N—FIRST TABLE.
O—FirsT sIEVE. P—First Tus. Q—SECOND TABLE. R—SECOND sIEVE. S—SECOND

TUB. T—THIRD TABLE. V—THIRD sIEVE. X—THIRD TUB. Y—PLUGs.

292 BOOK VIII.

If the ore is rich in metal, the earth, the fine and coarse sand, and the
pieces of rock which have been broken from the hanging-wall, are dug out of
the dump with a spade or rake and, with a shovel, are thrown into a large sieve
or basket, and washed in a tub nearly full of water. The sieve is generally
a cubit broad and half a foot deep; its bottom has holes of such size that the
larger pieces of broken rock cannot pass through them, for this material rests
upon the straight and cross iron wires, which at their points of contact are
bound by small iron clips. The sieve is held together by an iron band and by
two cross-rods likewise of iron; the rest of the sieve is made of staves in the
shape of a little tub, and is bound with two iron hoops; some, however,
bind it with hoops of hazel or oak, but in that case they use three of them.
On each side it has handles, which are held in the hands by whoever washes
the metalliferous material. Into this sieve a boy throws the material to be
washed, and a woman shakes it up and down, turning it alternately to the

A—SIEVE. B—ItTs HANDLES, C—Tus. D—BoTTomM OF SIEVE MADE OF IRON WIRES.

E—Hoor. F—Rops. G—Hoops. H—WoMAN SHAKING THE SIEVE. I—Boy suPPLYING

IT WITH MATERIAL WHICH REQUIRES WASHING. K—MAN WITH SHOVEL REMOVING FROM
THE TUB THE MATERIAL WHICH HAS PASSED THROUGH THE SIEVE.

a a

[oo

|
|

SS nO. Oe ee ee ee eS ee

BOOK VIII. 293

right and to the left, and in this way passes through it the smaller pieces of
earth, sand, and broken rock. The larger pieces remain in the sieve, and
these are taken out, placed in a heap and put under the stamps. The
mud, together with fine sand, coarse sand, and broken rock, which remain
after the water has been drawn out of the tub, is removed by an iron shovel
and washed in the sluice, about which I will speak a little later.

The Bohemians use a basket a foot and a half broad and half a foot deep,
bound together by osiers. It has two handles by which it is grasped, when
they move it about and shake it in the tub or in a small pool nearly full
of water. All that passes through it into the tub or pool they take out and
wash in a bowl, which is higher in the back part and lower and flat in the
front ; it is grasped by the two handles and shaken in the water, the lighter
particles flowing away, and the heavier and mineral portion sinking to the
bottom.

ee Mt
To

TLL

WU

ia

UT

ul

Sm»

A—BaskeT, B—Its HANDLES. C—DisH. D—Its Back PART. E—ITS FRONT PART.
F—HANDLES OF SAME,

Gold ore, after being broken with hammers or crushed by the stamps,
and even tin ore, is further milled to powder. The upper millstone, which

294 BOOK VIII.

is turned by water-power, is made in the following way. An axle is rounded

to compass measure, or is made angular, and its iron pinions turn in iron
sockets which are held in beams. The axle is turned by a water-wheel, the
buckets of which are fixed to the rim and are struck by the force of a stream.

N
N —
N 3
Ny UN
si SSS |
N Q
ei °
Z S |
iS F N |
i | 5 ;
PE | Ale \
a = © Q \
oS 0
SS = c ;
Tos YY eK a:
°
“as
fa SY
= o ¢°9o0
+ @ © 9 =
rey Sig a:%
a
A—AXLE. B—WATER-WHEEL. C—ToOTHED DRUM. D—DRUM MADE OF RUNDLES.
E—IRON AXLE. F—MILLSTONE. G—HoppeErR. H—ROUND WOODEN PLATE.

I—TrRovuGu.

Into the axle is mortised a toothed drum, whose teeth are fixed in the side

of the rim. These teeth turn a second drum of rundles, which are made of
very hard material. This drum surrounds an iron axle which has a pinion

at the bottom and revolves in an iron cup in a timber. At the top of the
iron axle is an iron tongue, dove-tailed into the millstone, and so when the

teeth of the one drum turn the rundles of the other, the millstone is made to
turn round. An overhanging machine supplies it with ore through a hopper,
and the ore, being ground to powder, is discharged from a round wooden plate

into a trough and flowing away through it accumulates on the floor;

from there the ore is carried away and reserved for washing. Since this .

BOOK VIII. 295

method of grinding requires the millstone to be now raised and now
lowered, the timber in whose socket the iron of the pinion axle revolves, rests
upon two beams, which can be raised and lowered.

There are three mills in use in milling gold ores, especially for quartz™
which is not lacking in metal. They are not all turned by water-power,
but some by the strength of men, and two of them even by the power
of beasts of burden. The first revolving one differs from the next only
in its driving wheel, which is closed in and turned by men treading it, or by
horses, which are placed inside, or by asses, or even by strong goats; the
eyes of these beasts are covered by linen bands. The second mill, both
when pushed and turned round, differs from the two above by having an
upright axle in the place of the horizontal one ;_ this axle has at its lower end
a disc, which two workmen turn by treading back its cleats with their feet,
though frequently one man sustains all the labour; or sometimes there
projects from the axle a pole which is turned by a horse or an ass, for which
reason it is called an asinaria. The toothed drum which is at the upper end
of the axle turns the drum which is made of rundles, and together with it the
millstone.

The third mill is turned round and round, and not pushed by hand; but
between this and the others there is a great distinction, for the lower
millstone is so shaped at the top that it can hold within it the upper mill-
stone, which revolves around an iron axle; this axle is fastened in the
centre of the lower stone and passes through the upper stone. A workman,
by grasping in his hand an upright iron bar placed in the upper millstone,
moves it round. The middle of the upper millstone is bored through, and
the ore, being thrown into this opening, falls down upon the lower millstone
and is there ground to powder, which gradually runs out through its opening ;
it is washed by various methods before it is mixed with quicksilver,
which I will explain presently.

Some people build a machine which at one and the same time can crush,
grind, cleanse, and wash the gold ore, and mix the gold with quicksilver.
This machine has one water-wheel, which is turned by a stream striking its
buckets ; the main axle on one side of the water-wheel has long cams, which
raise the stamps that crush the dry ore. Then the crushed ore is thrown
into the hopper of the upper millstone, and gradually falling through the
opening, is ground to powder. The lower millstone is square, but has a round
depression in which the round, upper millstone turns, and it has an outlet
from which the powder falls into the first tub. A vertical iron axle is dove-
tailed into a cross-piece, which is in turn fixed into the upper millstone ;
the upper pinion of this axle is held in a bearing fixed in a beam ; the drum
of the vertical axle is made of rundles, and is turned by the toothed drum
on the main axle, and thus turns the millstone. The powder falls continually
into the first tub, together with water, and from there runs into a second tub
which is set lower down, and out of the second into a third, which is the
lowest ; from the third, it generally flows into a small trough hewn out of a

ULapidibus liquescentibus. (See note 15, p. 380).

296

A—FIRST MILL.
UPRIGHT AXLE.
MILLSTONE.

BOOK VIII.

"Ah
Lptorongbrs

B—WHEEL TURNED BY GOATS.
E—ITs TOOTHED DRUM.
H—SMALL UPRIGHT AXLE OF THE SAME,
OF THE UPPER MILLSTONE.

D—Disc oF
G—SHAPE OF LOWER
I—Its OPENING. K—LEVER
L—ITs OPENING.

C—SECOND MILL.

F—THIRD MILL.

BOOK VIII. 297

tree trunk. Quicksilver! is placed in each tub, across which is fixed a small
plank, and through a hole in the middle of each plank there passes a small
upright axle, which is enlarged above the plank to prevent it from dropping
into the tub lower than it should. At the lower end of the axle three sets
of paddles intersect, each made from two little boards fixed to the axle
opposite each other. The upper end of this axle has a pinion held by a
bearing set in a beam, and around each of these axles is a small drum made
of rundles, each of which is turned by a small toothed drum on a horizontal

12HIsTORICAL NOTE ON AMALGAMATION. The recovery of gold by the use of mercury
possibly dates from Roman times, but the application of the process to silver does not
seem to go back prior to the 16th Century. Quicksilver was well-known to the Greeks,
and is described by Theophrastus (105) and others (see note 58, p. 432, on quicksilver).
However, the Greeks made no mention of its use for amalgamation, and, in fact,
Dioscorides (v, 70) says “‘it is kept in vessels of glass, lead, tin or silver; if kept in
‘vessels of any other kind it consumes them and flows away.” It was used by them
for medicinal purposes. The Romans amalgamated gold with mercury, but whether they
took advantage of the principle to recover gold from ores we do not know. Vitruvius
(vi1, 8) makes the following statement :—“ If quicksilver be placed in a vessel and a
“stone of a hundred pounds’ weight be placed on it, it will swim at the top, and will,
“ notwithstanding its weight, be incapable of pressing the liquid so as to break or separate
“it. If this be taken out, and only a single scruple of gold be put in, that will not swim, but
“immediately descend to the bottom. This is a proof that the gravity of a body does not
“depend on its weight, but on its nature. Quicksilver is used for many p Ss; without
“it, neither silver nor brass can be properly gilt. When gold is embroidered on a garment
“‘ which is worn out and no longer fit for use, the cloth is burnt over the fire in earthen pots ;
“the ashes are thrown into water and quicksilver added to them; this collects the
“ particles of gold and unites with them. The water is then poured off and the residuum
“placed in a cloth, which, when squeezed with the hands, suffers the liquid quicksilver to
“pass through the pores of the cloth, but retains the gold in a mass within it.” (Gwilt’s
Trans., p. 217). iny is rather more explicit (xxx, 32): “ All floats on it (quicksilver)
“except gold. This it draws into itself, and on that account is the best means of purifying ;
“for, on being repeatedly agitated in earthen pots it casts out the other things and the
“impurities. ese things being rejected, in order that it may give up the gold, it is squeezed
“in prepared skins, through which, exuding like perspiration, it leaves the gold pure.” It
may be noted particularly that both these authors state that gold is the only substance that
does not float, and, moreover, nowhere do we find any reference to silver combining with
mercury, although Beckmann (Hist. of Inventions, Vol. 1, p. 14) not only states that the
above passage from Pliny refers to silver, but in further error, attributes the origin of silver
amalgamation of ores to the Spaniards in the Indies.

The Alchemists of the Middle Ages were well aware that silver would amalgamate with
mercury. There is, however, difficulty in any conclusion that it was applied by them to
separating silver or gold from ore. The involved gibberish in which most of their utterances
was couched, obscures most of their reactions inanyevent. The School of Geber (Appendix B)
held that all metals were a compound of “ spiritual ’’ mercury and sulphur, and they clearly
amalgamated silver with mercury, and separated them by distillation. The Probdierbiichlein
(1520 ?) describes a method of recovering silver from the cement used in parting gold and
silver, by mixing the cement (silver chlorides) with quicksilver. Agricola nowhere in
this work mentions the treatment of silver ores by amalgamation, although he was familiar
with Biringuccio (De La Pirotechnia), as he himself mentions in the Preface. This work,
published at least ten years before De Re Metallica, contains the first comprehensive
account of silver amalgamation. There is more than usual interest in the description,
because, not only did it precede De Re Metallica, but it is also a specific explanation
of the fundamental essentials of the Patio Process long before the date when the Spaniards
could seam have invented that process in Mexico. We quote Mr. A. Dick’s translation
from Percy (Metallurgy of Silver and Gold, p. 560) :

““He was certainly endowed with much useful and ingenious thought who invented
“ the short method of extracting metal from the sweepings produced by those arts which have
“to do with gold and silver, every substance left in the refuse by smelters, and also the
“substance from certain ores themselves, without the labour of fusing, but by the sole
“means and virtue of mercury. To effect this, a large basin is first constructed of stone or
“‘ timber and walled, into which is fitted a millstone made to turn like that ofa mill. Into the
“hollow of this basin is placed matter containing gold (della materia vra che tiene oro), well
“ground in a mortar and afterward washed and dried; and, with the above-mentioned

298 BOOK VIII.

axle, one end of which is mortised into the large horizontal axle, and the
other end is held in a hollow covered with thick iron plates in a beam. Thus
the paddles, of which there are three sets in each tub, turn round, and
agitating the powder, thoroughly mix it with water and separate the minute
particles of gold from it, and these are attracted by the quicksilver and
purified. The water carries away the waste. The quicksilver is poured
into a bag made of leather or cloth woven from cotton, and when this bag is
squeezed, as I have described elsewhere, the quicksilver drips through it into
a jar placed underneath. The pure gold* remains in the bag. Some people
substitute three broad sluices for the tubs, each of which has an angular axle
on which are set six narrow spokes, and to them are fixed the same number of
broad paddles ; the water that is poured in strikes these paddles and turns
them round, and they agitate the powder which is mixed with the water and
separate the metal from it. If the powder which is being treated contains
gold particles, the first method of washing is far superior, because the quick-
silver in the tubs immediately attracts the gold; if it is powder in which
are the small black stones from which tin is smelted, this latter method is
not to be despised. It is very advantageous to place interlaced fir boughs
in the sluices in which such tin-stuff is washed, after it has run through the
launders from the mills, because the fine tin-stone is either held back by the
twigs, or if the current carries them along they fall away from the water
and settle down.

“‘ millstone, it is ground while being moistened with vinegar, or water, in which has been
‘‘ dissolved corrosive sublimate (solimato), verdigris (verde rame), and common salt. Over
“these materials is then put as much mercury as will cover them; they are then stirred for
“an hour or two, by ‘turning the millstone, either by hand, or horse-power, according
“to the plan adopted, bearing in mind that the more the mercury and the materials are
“bruised together by the millstone, the more the mercury may be trusted to have taken up
“the substance which the materials contain. The mercury, in this condition, can then be
‘separated from the earthy matter by a sieve, or by washing, and thus you will recover
“the auriferous mercury (el vro mercurio). After this, by driving off the mercury by
“ means of a flask (i.e., by heating in a retort or an alembic), or by passing it through a bag,
“ there will remain, at the bottom, the gold, silver, or copper, or whatever metal was placed
“in the basin under the millstone to be ground. Having been desirous of knowing this
“‘ secret, I gave to him who taught it to me a ring with a diamond worth 25 ducats; he also
“required me to give him the eighth part of any profit I might make by using it. This I
“‘ wished to tell you, not that you should return the ducats to me for teaching you the secret,
“but in order that you should esteem it all the more and hold it dear.”

In another part of the treatise Biringuccio states that washed (concentrated) ores may
be ultimately reduced either by lead or mercury. Concerning these silver concentrates
he writes: ‘“‘ Afterward drenching them with vinegar in which has been put green
“ copper (i.e., verdigris) ; or drenching them with water in which has been dissolved vitriol
“and green copper. . . .” He next describes how this material should be ground with
mercury. The question as to who was the inventor of silver amalgamation will probably
never be cleared up. According to Ulloa (Relacion Historica Del Viage a la America
Meridional, Madrid, 1748) Dom Pedro Fernandes De Velasco discovered the process in Mexico
in 1566. The earliest technical account is that of Father Joseph De Acosta (Historia Natural
y Moral de las Indias, Seville, 1590, English trans. Edward Grimston, London, 1604, re-
published by the Hakluyt Society, 1880). Acosta was born in 1540, and spent the years
1570 to 1585 in Peru, and 1586 in Mexico. It may be noted that Potosi was discovered
in 1545. He states that refining silver with mercury was introduced at Potosi by Pedro
Fernandes de Velasco from Mexico in 1571, and states (Grimston’s Trans., Vol. I, p. 219) :
“, . They put the powder of the metall into the vessels upon furnaces, whereas they
“anoint it and mortifie it with brine, putting to every fiftie quintalles of powder five
“ quintalles of salt. And this they do for that the salt separates the earth and filth, to the
“end the quicksilver may the more easily draw the silver unto it. After, they put quick-

13Aurum in ea remanet purum. This same error of assuming squeezed amalgam to
be pure gold occurs in Pliny: see previous footnote.

eee

(a eS a oe ree

7,

Se ee

BOOK VIII. 299

<5

=
ets
a

SS > /
OS
| 7 A —=
o é : = = = F
A ; ba JI” lll. Tal)
A g Z
| < Z } AA iF)
oe ee = a
Z = ss W
AYE = SiS \ SX \
|e a ee INNA ANNE AR RAN
= VG =Z —~ iB =Hib: ) VA
“ Gp 4 Seve °

< SS
:
\Wy
——
ZZ a
H
—?
bi
u
YZ
wo

Yj J= 2 \ \S \ \ \
=e = \ = >
S AS EI WANE }
j ZR= SAA WES
a Ale \\3 ANE TEN
ga : ——
= = \ :
r . yen
in q —- Y Wy af S.|| P a.
Veg = Gy, —— tag
| g A
A “SS > = z ’
ae ~ . ~ S $ ~
4
ee 0m. -
A
= —
$ SS
ze.
_—_
Z “ka
3 ‘ -
%
.
=
°
°
iS
f {
7

A—WATER-WHEEL. B—AxLEe. C—Stamp. D—HopprEer IN THE UPPER MILLSTONE.
E—OPENING PASSING THROUGH THE CENTRE. F—LOowWER MILLSTONE. G—Its
ROUND DEPRESSION. H—Its ouTLet. I—IRoN aAx_tE. K—lItTs crRossPIECE. L—BEAm.
M—DRvUM OF RUNDLES ON THE IRON AXLE. N—TOOTHED DRUM OF MAIN AXLE. O—Tuss.
P—THE SMALL PLANKS. Q—SMALL UPRIGHT AXLES. R—ENLARGED PART OF ONE.
S—THEIR PADDLES. T—THEIR DRUMS WHICH ARE MADE OF RUNDLES. V—SMALL
HORIZONTAL AXLE SET INTO THE END OF THE MAIN AXLE. X—ITS TOOTHED DRUMS.
Y—THREE SLUICES. Z—THEIR SMALL AXLES. AA—SpokEs. BB—PApDDLEs.

300 BOOK VIII.

Seven methods of washing are in common use for the ores of many
metals ; for they are washed either in a simple buddle, or in a divided buddle,
or in an ordinary strake, or in a large tank, or in a short strake, or in a canvas
strake, or in a jigging sieve. Other methods of washing are either peculiar
to some particular metal, or are combined with the method of crushing wet
ore by stamps.

A simple buddle is made in the following way. In the first place, the head
is higher than the rest of the buddle, and is three feet long and a foot and a half
broad; this head is made of planks laid upon a timber and fastened, and

on both sides, side-boards are set up so as to hold the water, which flows in —

through a pipe or trough, so that it shall fall straight down. The middle of
the head is somewhat depressed in order that the broken rock and the larger
metallic particles may settle into it. The buddle is sunk into the earth to a
depth of three-quarters of a foot below the head, and is twelve feet long and
a foot and a half wide and deep; the bottom and each side are lined with
planks to prevent the earth, when it is softened by the water, from falling

in or from absorbing the metallic particles. The lower end of the buddle is
obstructed by a board, which is not as high as the sides. To this straight
buddle there is joined a second transverse buddle, six feet long and a foot
and a half wide and deep, similarly lined with planks; at the lower

_ “silver into a piece of holland and presse it out upon the metall, which goes forth like a dewe,
“alwaies turning and stirring the metall, to the end it may be well incorporate. Before the
“invention of these furnaces of fire, they did often mingle their metall with quicksilver in
“ ereat troughes, letting it settle some daies, and did then mix it and stirre it againe, until
“they thought all the quicksilver were well incorporate with the silver, the which continued
“twentie daies and more, and at least nine daies.” Frequent mention of the different
methods of silver amalgamation is made by the Spanish writers subsequent to this time, the
best account being that of Alonso Barba, a priest. Barba was a native of Lepe, in Andalusia,
and followed his calling at various places in Peru from about 1600 to about 1630, and at one
time held the Curacy of St. Bernard at Potosi. In 1640 he published at Madrid his Arte de
los Metales, etc., in five books. The first two books of this work were translated into English
by the Earl of Sandwich, and published in London in 1674, under the title ‘‘ The First Book of
the Art of Metals.” This translation is equally wretched with those in French and German,
as might be expected from the translators’ total lack of technical understanding. Among
the methods of silver amalgamation described by Barba is one which, upon later “discovery”’
at Virginia City, is now known as the ‘“‘ Washoe Process.’’ None of the Spanish writers,
so far as we know, make reference to Biringuccio’s account, and the question arises
whether the Patio Process was an importation from Europe or whether it was re-invented
in Mexico. While there is no direct evidence on the point, the presumption is in favour of
the former.

The general introduction of the amalgamation of silver ores into Central Europe
seems to have been very slow, and over 200 years elapsed after its adoption in Peru and Mexico
before it received serious attention by the German Metallurgists. Ignaz Elder v. Born
was the first to establish the process effectually in Europe, he having in 1784 erected a
“ quick-mill” at Glasshutte, near Shemnitz. He published an elaborate account of a
process which he claimed as his own, under the title Ueber das Anquicken der Gold und Silber-
halt igen Erze, Vienna, 1786. The only thing new in his process seems to have been mechanical
agitation. According to Born, a Spaniard named Don Juan de Corduba, in the year 1588,
applied to the Court at Vienna offering to extract silver from ores with mercury. Various
tests were carried out under the celebrated Lazarus Erckern, and although it appears that
some vitriol and salt were used, the trials apparently failed, for Erckern concluded his report
with the advice: ‘‘ That their Lordships should not suffer any more expense to be thrown
“away upon this experiment.” Born’s work was translated into English by R. E. Raspe,
under the titlke—‘‘ Baron Inigo Born’s New Process of Amalgamation, etc.,’’ London, 1791.
Some interest attaches to Raspe, in that he was not only the author of ‘‘ Baron Munchausen,”
but was also the villain in Scott’s ‘“‘ Antiquary.” Raspe wasa German Professor at Cassel, who
fled to England to avoid arrest for theft. He worked at various mines in Cornwall, and in
1791 involved Sir John Sinclair in a fruitless mine, but disappeared before that was known.
The incident was finally used by Sir Walter Scott in this novel.

Pe ae et

BOOK VIII. 301

end it is closed up with a board, also lower than the sides of the buddle so
_ that the water can flow away ; this water falls into a launder and is carried

outside the building. In this simple buddle is washed the metallic material
which has passed on to the floor of the works through the five large sieves.
When this has been gathered into a heap, the washer throws it into the head
of the buddle, and water is poured upon it through the pipe or small trough,
and the portion which sinks and settles in the middle of the head compart-
ment he stirs with a wooden scrubber,—this is what we will henceforth call
the implement made of a stick to which is fixed a piece of wood a foot long
and a palm broad. The water is made turbid by this stirring, and carries
the mud and sand and small particles of metal into the buddle below.
Together with the broken rock, the larger metallic particles remain in the
head compartment, and when these have been removed, boys throw them upon
the platform of a washing tank or the short strake, and separate them from
the broken rock. When the buddle is full of mud and sand, the washer closes
the pipe through which the water flows into the head; very soon the
water which remains in the buddle flows away, and when this has taken

q ¢ \, , ——
{ le < CS
| | 4 ==
V4 <= t —S M ‘
THIS a 14 8
QA —a :
ni? : = = 2°
cage cS ss
== 3 =O
x S NS So OQ —F
xD ¥ eens Tad
=)
SS) Y J
eS fo}
20 =
Git ; =

Pa T=
— L=)
ors
A—HEAD OF BUDDLE. B—PipE. C—Buppre. D—Boarp. E—TRANSVERSE BUDDLE.
F—SnHovEL. G—ScRUBBER.

22

302 BOOK VIII.

place, he removes with a shovel the mud and sand which are mixed with
minute particles of metal, and washes them on a canvas strake. Sometimes
before the buddles have been filled full, the boys throw the material into a
bowl and carry it to the strakes and wash it.

Pulverized ore is washed in the head of this kind of a buddle ; but usually
when tin-stone is washed in it, interlacing fir boughs are put into the buddle, in
the same manner as in the sluice when wet ore is crushed with stamps. The
larger tin-stone particles, which sink in the upper part of the buddle,
are washed separately in a strake; those particles which are of medium
size, and settle in the middle part, are washed separately in the same way ;
and the mud mixed with minute particles of tin-stone, which has settled in
the lowest part of the buddle below the fir boughs, is washed separately on
the canvas strakes.

The divided buddle differs from the last one by having several cross-
boards, which, being placed inside it, divide it off like steps; if the buddle
is twelve feet long, four of them are placed within; if nine feet long, three.

The nearer each one is to the head, the greater is its height ;_ the further from >

the head, the lower it is ; and so when the highest is a foot and a palm high,

— ~

~

=
SNS
————
=a ee
—
= SS
=
a | =
So owey

£. Sle hy A
J 6) Wm

EN SS |
: \
QR,
—— s
BOTY betes
= > A oe, Q. ra
=, SSS. fa ag Se
“A = ’
== img C= =
Ss a eGIES:
Uy SO NZ li BO S25
Se. O*~ U ae >
z | HN Aa ik
> QR <
Oy = iy
= Ss . Z
ex
ete pate Y & oSSSO 6

A—Pirpzr. B—Cross LAUNDER. C—SMALL TROUGHS. D—HEAD OF THE BUDDLE.
E—WooDEN SCRUBBER. F—DIVIDING BOARDS. G—SHORT STRAKE.

poe

i

BOOK _ VIII. 303

the second is usually a foot and three digits high, the third a foot and two
digits, and the lowest a foot and one digit. In this buddle is generally washed
that metalliferous material which has been sifted through the large sieve
into the tub containing water. This material is continuously thrown with
an iron shovel into the head of the buddle, and the water which has been
let in is stirred up by a wooden scrubber, until the buddle is full, then the
cross-boards are taken out by the washer, and the water is drained off; next
the metalliferous material which has settled in the compartments is again
washed, either on a short strake or on the canvas strakes or in the jigging
sieves. Since a short strake is often united with the upper part of this buddle,
a pipe in the first place carries the water into a cross launder, from which it
flows down through one little launder into the buddle, and through another
into the short strake.

An ordinary strake, so far as the planks are concerned, is not unlike the
last two. The head of this, as of the others, is first made of earth stamped
down, then covered with planks; and where it is necessary, earth is
thrown in and beaten down a second time, so that no crevice may remain
through which water carrying the particles of metal can escape. The water
ought to fall straight down into the strake, which has a length of eight feet

N N a \

MSY

A—Herap B—StrakeE. C—Trowert. D—Scrupper. E—Canvas. F—Rop By
WHICH THE CANVAS IS MADE SMOOTH,

304 BOOK VIII.

and a breadth of a foot and a half; it is connected with a transverse launder,
which then extends to a settling pit outside the building. A boy with
a shovel or a ladle takes the impure concentrates or impure tin-stone from a
heap, and throws them into the head of the strake or spreads them over it.
A washer with a wooden scrubber then agitates them in the strake, whereby
the mud mixed with water flows away into the transverse launder, and the
concentrates or the tin-stone settle on the strake. Since sometimes the
concentrates or fine tin-stone flow down together with the mud into the
transverse launder, a second washer closes it, after a distance of about six feet,
with a cross-board and frequently stirs the mud with a shovel, in order that
when mixed with water it may flow out into the settling-pit ; and there
remains in the’ launder only the concentrates or tin-stone. The tin-stuff
of Schlackenwald and Erbisdroff is washed in this kind of a strake once
or twice; those of Altenberg three or four times; those of Geyer often
seven times ; for in the ore at Schlackenwald and Erbisdorff the tin-stone
particles are of a fair size, and are crushed with stamps; at Altenberg they
are of much smaller size, and in the broken ore at Geyer only a few particles
of tin-stone can be seen occasionally.

This method of washing was first devised by the miners who treated
tin ore, whence it passed on from the works of the tin workers to those of the
silver workers and others; this system is even more reliable than
washing in jigging-sieves. Near this ordinary strake there is generally a
canvas strake.

_ In modern times two ordinary strakes, similarly made, are generally
joined together ; the head of one is three feet distant from that of the other,
while the bodies are four feet distant from each other, and there is only one
cross launder under the two strakes. One boy shovels, from the heap into the
head of each, the concentrates or tin-stone mixed with mud. There are
two washers, one of whom sits at the right side of one strake, and the
other at the left of the other strake, and each pursues his task, using the
following sort of implement. Under each strake is a sill, from a socket in
which a round pole rises, and is held by half an iron ring in a beam of the
building, so that it may revolve; this pole is nine feet long and a palm
thick. Penetrating the pole is a small round piece of wood, three palms
long and as many digits thick, to which is affixed a small board two feet
long and five digits wide, in an opening of which one end of a small axle
revolves, and to this axle is fixed the handle of a little scrubber. The other
end of this axle turns in an opening of a second board, which is likewise fixed
to a small round piece of wood; this round piece, like the first one, is three
palms long and as many digits thick, and is used by the washer as a handle.
The little scrubber is made of a stick three feet long, to the end of which is
fixed a small tablet of wood a foot long, six digits broad, and a digit and a
half thick. The washer constantly moves the handle of this implement
with one hand; in this way the little scrubber stirs the concentrates or
the fine tin-stone mixed with mud in the head of the strake, and the mud, on
being stirred, flows on to the strake. In the other hand he holds a second

————

BOOK VIII 305

LLL. By) Saal MW) == ff
<a eS -
ma)

! 8 |=
. = =

4 72

a Ree a a eT

.
;
rar — rn a — : {tal .
SS SSCS SSS SEERA MAMAS AN SSRIS MA ek
—__=— | & >... -— —_-f
ALM 1 lll ill ves
A—UPPER CROSS LAUNDER. B—SMALL LAUNDERS. C—HEADS OF STRAKES.
# D—STRAKES. E—LowWER TRANSVERSE LAUNDER. F—SETTILING PIT. G—SOCKET
5 IN THE SILL, H—HALVED IRON RINGS FIXED TO BEAM. I—PoLE. MK--ITS LITTLE

SCRUBBER. L—SECOND SMALL SCRUBBER.

506 BOOK VIII.

little scrubber, which has a handle of half the length, and with this he cease-
lessly stirs the concentrates or tin-stone which have settled in the upper *
part of the strake; in this way the mud and water flow down into the
transverse launder, and from it into the settling-pit which is outside the
building.

Before the short strake and the jigging-sieve had been invented, metallifer-
ous ores, especially tin, were crushed dry with stamps and washed in a large
trough hollowed out of one or two tree trunks ; and at the head of this trough
was a platform, on which the ore was thrown after being completely crushed.
The washer pulled it down into the trough with a wooden scrubber which
had a long handle, and when the water had been let into the trough, he stirred
the ore with the same scrubber.

A—TrovucH. B—P.Latrorm. C—WoOoDEN SCRUBBER.

The short strake is narrow in the upper part where the water flows down
into it through the little launder ; in fact it is only two feet wide ; at the lower
end it is wider, being three feet and as many palms. At the sides, which are
six feet long, are fixed boards two palms high. In other respects the head
resembles the head of the simple buddle, except that it is not depressed in the
middle. Beneath is a cross launder closed by a low board. In this short
strake not only is ore agitated and washed with a wooden scrubber, but boys

Se ee er ee ee =

Sar at

BOOK VIII. 307

also separate the concentrates from the broken rock in them and collect them
in tubs. The short strake is now rarely employed by miners, owing to the
carelessness of the boys, which has been frequently detected; for this
reason, the jigging-sieve has taken its place. The mud which settles in the
launder, if the ore is rich, is taken up and washed in a jigging-sieve or on a
canvas strake.

OY}
ES MMO

TER
hoe *
QS

E RRMA} HL Dba AATATVNUVTUSTTD GSU LAESLESS ttt

NSE

W

= :
ava

——— — —
SSS: —

A—SHORT STRAKE. B—SMALL LAUNDER. C—TRANSVERSE LAUNDER. D—WooDEN
SCRUBBER.

A canvas strake is made in the following way. Two beams, eighteen feet
long and half a foot broad and three palms thick, are placed on a slope; one
half of each of these beams is partially cut away lengthwise, to allow the ends
of planks to be fastened in them, for the bottom is covered by planks three
feet long, set crosswise and laid close together. One half of each supporting
beam is left intact and rises a palm above the planks, in order that the water
that is running down may not escape at the sides, but shall flow straight
down. The head of the strake is higher than the rest of the body, and slopes
so as to enable the water to flow away. The whole strake is covered by six
stretched pieces of canvas, smoothed with a stick. The first of them occupies
the lowest division, and the second is so laid as to slightly overlap it; on

308 BOOK. VIII.

=]
PO
———

il a x
‘2 ( mI
iy eas a A
ac ty =
A ¢ | r) a
SS x B/ : j
= (WS |
WS | y
teh, S
a>
YY, :
SS : rs sk = — ani
—_ =
SSSV..
Wy — of
c= Mf si sof
. *%. ce ”) “Z Aff | a
‘a1 No ) mt
—~ bien Ig 6477 240 ~— <—
ye . >? i=s—
te — WY eee SES
— ae alge SY i \ ea
< os 9 ) iS
= ¢ —~
i] : ee rn rey 3S
= —a °
= — hen -t ENS
3 = - = SRN = ~
=< = = tn = 2RY SS
sr at - SSS 9 - |Y S 8
ee " —— of} =~
—- s cre 2 ASS

A—Berams. B—Canvas. C—HEAD OF STRAKE. D—SMALL LAUNDER. E—SETTLING
PIT OR TANK. F—WOoOODEN SCRUBBER. G—TUuBSs.

the second division, the third is similarly laid, and so on, one on the other.
If they are laid in the opposite way, the water flowing down carries the
concentrates or particles of tin-stone under the canvas, and a useless task
is attempted. Boys or men throw the concentrates or tin-stuff mixed with
mud into the head of the strake, after the canvas has been thus stretched,
and having opened the small launder they let the water flow in; then
they stir the concentrates or tin-stone with a wooden scrubber till the water
carries them all on to the canvas; next they gently sweep the linen with
the wooden scrubber until the mud flows into the settling-pit or into the
transverse launder. As soon as there is little or no mud on the canvas, but
only concentrates or tin-stone, they carry the canvas away and wash it in a
tub placed close by. The tin-stone settles in the tub, and the men return
immediately to the same task. Finally, they pour the water out of the tub,
and collect the concentrates or tin-stone. However, if either concentrates
or tin-stone have washed down from the canvas and settled in the settling-
pit or in the transverse launder, they wash the mud again.

Some neither remove the canvas nor wash it in the tubs, but place over

a ET Se NS A ae ee a

Pe eS ees

FE NRE er ae

BOOK VIII. 309

it on each edge narrow strips, of no great thickness, and fix them to the beams
with nails. They agitate the metalliferous material with wooden scrubbers
and wash it in a similar way. As soon as little or no mud remains on the
canvas, but only concentrates or fine tin-stone, they lift one beam so that
the whole strake rests on the other, and dash it with water, which has been
drawn with buckets out of the small tank, and in this way all the sediment
which clings to the canvas falls into the trough placed underneath. This
trough is hewn out of a tree and placed in a ditch dug in the ground; the
interior of the trough is a foot wide at the top, but narrower in the bottom,
because it is rounded out. In the middle of this trough they put a cross-
board, in order that the fairly large particles of concentrates or fairly large-
sized tin-stone may remain in the forepart into which they have fallen, and
the fine concentrates or fine tin-stone in the lower part, for the water flows
from one into the other, and at last flows down through an opening into the
pit. As for the fairly large-sized concentrates or tin-stone which have been
removed from the trough, they are washed again on the ordinary strake.

Fp
' ’
rt
a
S
te
‘
>
= °
vs
~ o
BG
>
“ND °
E es
= 2 2. ae
Zi S 2 yy feet!
A et, : 2 , 2a *
Z 4
Z
ZZ © Y
oz ) : 4
Z, . : o /,
A e\ 2 Ss ¢
o\s ©
e lo «=o o m ry\=c ees
‘oe @ Ls 5 °
=
=
=~ =
= =: .)
s
=.
>
=.
=>
—>
< —

A—CANVAS STRAKE. B—MAN DASHING WATER ON THE CANVAS. C—BUCKET.
D—BvucKET OF ANOTHER KIND, E—MAN REMOVING CONCENTRATES OR TIN-STONE .
FROM THE TROUGH.

310 BOOK VIII.

The fine concentrates and fine tin-stone are washed again on this canvas
strake. By this method, the canvas lasts longer. because it remains fixed,
and nearly double the work is done by one washer as quickly as can be done
by two washers by the other method. ©

The jigging sieve has recently come into use by miners. The
metalliferous material is thrown into it and sifted in a tub nearly full of water.
The sieve is shaken up and down, and by this movement all the material
below the size of a pea passes through into the tub, and the rest remains on the
bottom of the sieve. This residue is of two kinds, the metallic particles,
which occupy the lower place, and the particles of rock and earth, which
take the higher place, because the heavy substance always settles, and the
light is borne upward by the force of the water. This light material is taken
away with a limp, which is a thin tablet of wood almost semicircular in
shape, three-quarters of a foot long, and half a foot wide. Before the
lighter portion is taken away the contents of the sieve are generally divided
crosswise with a limp, to enable the water to penetrate into it more quickly.
Afterward fresh material is again thrown ‘into the sieve and shaken up and
down, and when a great quantity of metallic particles have settled in the sieve,
they are taken out and put into a tray close by. But since there fall into
the tub with the mud, not only particles of gold or silver, but also of sand,
pyrites, cadmia, galena, quartz, and other substances, and since the
water cannot separate these from the metallic particles because they are all
heavy, this muddy mixture is washed a second time, and the part which is
useless is thrown away. To prevent the sieve passing this sand again too
quickly, the washer lays small stones or gravel in the bottom of the sieve.
However, if the sieve is not shaken straight up and down, but is tilted to one
side, the small stones or broken ore move from one part to another, and the
metallic material again falls into the tub, and the operation is frustrated.
The miners of our country have made an even finer sieve, which does not
fail even with unskilled washers; in washing with this sieve they have no
need for the bottom to be strewn with small stones. By this method the mud
settles in the tub with the very fine metallic particles, and the larger sizes of
metal remain in the sieve and are covered with the valueless sand, and this
is taken away with a limp. The concentrates which have been collected
are smelted together with other things. The mud mixed with the very fine
metallic particles is washed for a third time and in the finest sieve, whose
bottom is woven of hair. If the ore is rich in metal, all the material which
has been removed by the limp is washed on the canvas strakes, or if the ore
is poor it is thrown away.

I have explained the methods of washing which are used in common for
the ores of many metals. I now come to another method of crushing ore,
for I ought to speak of this before describing those methods of washing which
are peculiar to ores of particular metals.

In the year 1512, George, the illustrious Duke of Saxony", gave the over-

14George, Duke of Saxony, surnamed “‘ The Bearded,” was born 1471, and died 1539.
He was chiefly known for his bitter opposition to the Reformation.

BOOK VIII.

nhac Behe en te

Ys >
H LSS
x Li 1 .
PY * Qu;

Yorr y . titiiZ ty “4 = os
YW y Ze
S i y yh E/ GZ ZZ

7
Y,
Z Ya
Yr TY

Ui

D—FINEST SIEVE

B—Limp. C—FINER SIEVE.

A—FINE SIEVES.

312 BOOK VIII.

lordship of all the dumps ejected from the mines in Meissen to the noble
and wise Sigismund Maltitz, father of John, Bishop of Meissen. Reject-
ing the dry stamps, the large sieve, and the stone mills of Dippolds-
walde and Altenberg, in which places are dug the small black stones
from which tin is smelted, he invented a machine which could crush the ore
wet under iron-shod stamps. That is called ‘“‘ wet ore’’ which is softened by
water which flows into the mortar box, and they are sometimes called ‘‘wet
stamps’’ because they are drenched by the same water; and on the other hand, the
other kinds are called ‘“‘dry stamps” or ‘‘dry ore,’ because no water is used
to soften the ore when the stamps are crushing. But to return to our subject.
This machine is not dissimilar to the one which crushes the ore with dry
iron-shod stamps, but the heads of the wet stamps are larger by half than the
heads of the others. The mortar-box, which is made of oak or beech timber, is
set up in the space between the upright posts ; it does not open in front, but
at one end, and it is three feet long, three-quarters of a foot wide, and one foot
and six digits deep. If it has no bottom, it is set up in the same way over a
slab of hard, smooth rock placed in the ground, which has been dug down a
little. The joints are stopped up all round with moss or cloth rags. If
the mortar has a bottom, then an iron sole-plate, three feet long, three-
quarters of a foot wide, and a palm thick, is placed in it. In the opening
in the end of the mortar there is fixed an iron plate full of holes, in such a
way that there is a space of two digits between it and the shoe of the nearest
stamp, and the same distance between this screen and the upright post, in
an opening through which runs a small but fairly long launder. The crushed
particles of silver ore flow through this launder with the water into a settling-
pit, while the material which settles in the launder is removed with an iron
shovel to the nearest planked floor; that material which has settled in the
pit is removed with an iron shovel on to another floor. Most people make
two launders, in order that while the workman empties one of them of the
accumulation which has settled in it, a fresh deposit may be settling in the
other. The water flows in through a small launder at the other end of the
mortar that is near the water-wheel which turns the machine. The workman
throws the ore to be crushed into the mortar in such a way that the pieces,
when they are thrown in among the stamps, do not impede the work. By
this method a silver or gold ore is crushed very fine by the stamps.

When tin ore is crushed by this kind of iron-shod stamps, as soon as
crushing begins, the launder which extends from the screen discharges the
water carrying the fine tin-stone and fine sand into a transverse trough,
from which the water flows down through the spouts, which pierce the side of
the trough, into the one or other of the large buddles set underneath. The
reason why there are two is that, while the washer empties the one which is
filled with fine tin-stone and sand, the material may flow into the other.
Each buddle is twelve feet long, one cubit deep, and a foot and a half broad.
The tin-stone which settles in the upper part of the buddles is called the
large size; these are frequently stirred with a shovel, in order that the
medium sized particles of tin-stone, and the mud mixed with the very fine

313

BOOK VIII.

=
= 04.1)
marr |
oh
- y
a

Nl

wi i
LA eat iY fit eZ eed
WAI ETtlshy
pe} Ww
y y

\GEEZ p Shu:
ttt GN YUYIEEZZ Gy
Z Zs Gif Yl i 1 32 Lf i Hi :
w ss i] Z
Saat 6 PS | RS

LLL,

YUE?

Lip,

Yy YY

Villa

IRON

L—ORE WHICH REQUIRES

M—SMALL LAUNDER.

I

C—SLAB OF ROCK. D—IRON SOLE PLATES.
H—SETTLING PIT.

—OPEN END OF MORTAR.
F—LAUNDER. G—WOoOODEN SHOVEL.
CRUSHING.

B
K—HEAP OF MATERIAL WHICH HAS SETTLED.

A—MOorTAR.
E—SCcREEN.
SHOVEL,

314 BOOK VIII.

particles of the stones may flow away. The particles of medium size generally
settle in the middle part of the buddle, where they are arrested by interwoven
fir twigs. The mud which flows down with the water settles between the
twigs and the board which closes the lower end of the buddle. The tin-stone
of large size is removed separately from the buddle with a shovel; those
of medium size are also removed separately, and likewise the mud is removed
separately, for they are separately washed on the canvas strakes and on
the ordinary strake, and separately roasted and smelted. The tin-stone
which has settled in the middle part of the buddle, is also always washed
separately on the canvas strakes ; but if the particles are nearly equal in size
to those which have settled in the upper part of the buddle, they are washed
with them in the ordinary strake and are roasted and smelted with them.
However, the mud is never washed with the others, either on the canvas
strakes or on the ordinary strake, but separately, and the fine tin-stone which
is obtained from it is roasted and smelted separately. The two large buddles
discharge into a cross trough, and it again empties through a launder into
a settling-pit which is outside the building.

NAN Tf ENN MNT ANA

Lie \ \ WS = \ VA
\\ ) \ ‘

Z

.

tH3y

2
\

A—LAUNDER REACHING TO THE SCREEN.

D—LARGE BUDDLES.

E—SHOVEL.

B—TRANSVERSE TROUGH.

C—Spovts.

F—INTERWOVEN TWIGS. G—BOARDS CLOSING
THE BUDDLES. H—Cross TROUGH.

OLD LN NS EE etal hE a ly ge I ee ee ae Mee oe my enn

i ee om) th ee a ae aes

BOOK VIII. 315

This method of washing has lately undergone a considerable change ; for
the launder which carries the water, mixed with the crushed tin-stone and
fine sand which flow from the openings of the screen, does not reach to a
transverse trough which is inside the same room, but runs straight through
a partition into a small settling-pit. A boy draws a three-toothed rake
through the material which has settled in the portion of the launder outside
the room, by which means the larger sized particles of tin-stone settle at the
bottom, and these the washer takes out with the wooden shovel and carries
into the room; this material is thrown into an ordinary strake and swept
with a wooden scrubber and washed. As for those tin-stone particles which
the water carries off from the strake, after they have been brought back on to
the strake, he washes them again until they are clean.

The remaining tin-stone, mixed with sand, flows into the small settling-pit
which is within the building, and this discharges into two large buddles. The
tin-stone of moderate size, mixed with those of fairly large size, settle in the
upper part, and the small size in the lower part ; but both are impure, and
for this reason they are taken out separately and the former is washed twice,

SS
SST Ss

Ld

Z

yb

NW
i AN \

A—FIRST LAUNDER. B—THREE-TOOTHED RAKE. C—SMALL SETTLING PIT. D—LARGE

BUDDLE. E—BUDDLE RESEMBLING THE SIMPLE BUDDLE. F—SMALL ROLLER. G—

Boarps. H—TuHEIR Hotes. I—Suover. K—Burtpinc. L—Srove. (THIS PICTURE
DOES NOT ENTIRELY AGREE WITH THE TEXT).

316 BOOK VIII.

first in a buddle like the simple buddle, and afterward on an ordinary
strake. Likewise the latter is washed twice, first on a canvas strake and
afterward on an ordinary strake. This buddle, which is like the simple
buddle, differs from it in the head, the whole of which in this case is sloping,
while in the case of the other it is depressed in the centre. In order that the
boy may be able to rest the shovel with which he cleanses the tin-stone,
this sluice has a small wooden roller which turns in holes in two thick
boards fixed to the sides of the buddle ; if he did not do this, he would become
over-exhausted by his task, for he spends whole days standing over these
labours. The large buddle, the one like the simple buddle, the ordinary
strake, and the canvas strakes, are erected within a special building. In
this building there is a stove that gives out heat through the earthen tiles
or iron plates of which it is composed, in order that the washers can pursue
their labours even in winter, if the rivers are not completely frozen over.

On the canvas strakes are washed the very fine tin-stone mixed with
mud which has settled in the lower end of the large buddle, as well as
in the lower end of the simple buddle and of the ordinary strake. The canvas
is cleaned in a trough hewn out of one tree trunk and partitioned off with
two boards, so that three compartments are made. The first and second pieces
of canvas are washed in the first compartment, the third and fourth in the
second compartment, the fifth and sixth in the third compartment. Since
among the very fine tin-stone there are usually some grains of stone, rock,
or marble, the master cleanses them on the ordinary strake, lightly brushing
the top of the material with a broom, the twigs of which do not all run the
same way, but some straight and some crosswise. In this way the water
carries off these impurities from the strake into the settling-pit because they
are lighter, and leaves the tin-stone on the table because it is heavier.

Below all buddles or strakes, both inside and outside the building, there
are placed either settling-pits or cross-troughs into which they discharge,
in order that the water may carry on down into the stream but very few
of the most minute particles of tin-stone. The large settling-pit which is
outside the building is generally made of joined flooring, and is eight feet in
length, breadth and depth. When a large quantity of mud, mixed with
very fine tin-stone, has settled in it, first of all the water is let out by with-
drawing a plug, then the mud which is taken out is washed outside the house
on the canvas strakes, and afterward the concentrates are washed on the
strake which is inside the building. By these methods the very finest tin-
stone is made clean.

The mud mixed with the very fine tin-stone, which has neither settled
in the large settling-pit nor in the transverse launder which is outside the
room and below the canvas strakes, flows away and settles in the bed of the
stream or river. In order to recover even a portion of the fine tin-stone,
many miners erect weirs in the bed of the stream or river, very much like
those that are made above the mills, to deflect the current into the races
through which it flows to the water-wheels. At one side of each weir there
is an area dug out to a depth of five or six or seven feet, and if the nature of

BOOK VIII. 317

ee
te cect
oe

ANN ANSI
ZANT

We ON ANNU

IZ : NANNY
ARN —&A kh Sy WS

\ WY ‘ - - \ AN ‘ ; 7, : «SS

AW) \ mat \\ » ZW : a

A ANNAN ORAAIN SY 4 WU

he WYN ~ LENS UY
RRR

>

—_
Werrev
ity

Cy (AMIMLPEPEVEL A\
yy jill
Se

Y

Vp

A—LAUNDER FROM THE SCREEN OF THE MORTAR-BOX. B—THREE-TOOTHED RAKE,
C—SMALL SETTLING-PIT. D—Canvas. E-—STRAKES. F—Brooms.

S

318 BOOK VIII.

the place will permit, extending in every direction more than sixty feet.
Thus, when the water of the river or stream in autumn and winter inundates
the land, the gates of the weir are closed, by which means the current carries
the mud mixed with fine tin-stone into the area. In spring and summer
this mud is washed on the canvas strakes or on the ordinary strake, and
even the finest black-tin is collected. Within a distance of four thousand
fathoms along the bed of the stream or river below the buildings in which
the tin-stuff is washed, the miners do not make such weirs, but put inclined
fences in the meadows, and in front of each fence they dig a ditch of the
same length, so that the mud mixed with the fine tin-stone, carried along by the
stream or river when in flood, may settle in the ditch and cling to the fence.
When this mud is collected, it is likewise washed on canvas strakes and on
the ordinary strake, in order that the fine tin-stone may be separated from
it. Indeed we may see many such areas and fences collecting mud of this
kind in Meissen below Altenberg in the river Moglitz,—which is always of a
reddish colour when the rock containing the black tin is being crushed under
the stamps.

Ss

re
<
1
~
FY
SS
ARS
ONE

ql
a

Y 2005 |

Wd Mi Te i
mgs
S32

A—RIvER. B—WeErR. C—GaTE. D—AREA. E—MEApDow. F—FeEnNcE. G—DITCH.

OE I ee

Oe Ne ee,

eS ee ae D

pra eae

BOOK VIII. 319

But to return to the stamping machines. Some usually set up four
machines of this kind in one place, that is to say, two above and the same
number below. By this plan it is necessary that the current which has been
diverted should fall down from a greater height upon the upper water-
wheels, because these turn axles whose cams raise heavier stamps. The
stamp-stems of the upper machines should be nearly twice as long as the stems
of the lower ones, because all the mortar-boxes are placed on the same level.
These stamps have their tappets near their upper ends, not as in the case of
the lower stamps, which are placed just above the bottom. The water flowing
down from the two upper water-wheels is caught in two broad races, from
which it falls on to the two lower water-wheels. Since all these machines
have the stamps very close together, the stems should be somewhat cut away,
to prevent the iron shoes from rubbing each other at the point where they are
set into the stems. Where so many machines cannot be constructed, by
reason of the narrowness of the valley, the mountain is excavated and
levelled in two places, one of which is higher than the other, and in this case
two machines are constructed and generally placed in one building. A
broad race receives in the same way the water which flows down from the
upper water-wheel, and similarly lets it fall on the lower water-wheel. The
mortar-boxes are not then placed on one level, but each on the level which
is appropriate to its own machine, and for this reason, two workmen are then
required to throw ore into the mortar-boxes. When no stream can be
diverted which will fall from a higher place upon the top of the water-wheel,
one is diverted which will turn the foot of the wheel; a great quantity of
water from the stream is collected in one pool capable of holding it, and
from this place, when the gates are raised, the water is discharged against
the wheel which turns in the race. The buckets of a water-wheel of this
kind are deeper and bent back, projecting upward; those of the former
are shallower and bent forward, inclining downward.

Further, in the Julian and Rhaetian Alps!® and in the Carpathian
Mountains, gold or even silver ore is now put under stamps, which are
sometimes placed more than twenty in a row, and crushed wet in a long mortar-
box. The mortar has two plates full of holes through which the ore, after _
being crushed, flows out with the water into the transverse launder placed
underneath, and from there it is carried down by two spouts into the heads of
the canvas strakes. Each head is made of a thick broad plank, which can be
raised and set upright, and to which on each side are fixed pieces projecting
upward. In this plank there are many cup-like depressions equal in size and
similar in shape, in each of which an egg could be placed. Right down in
these depressions are small crevices which can retain the concentrates of gold
or silver, and when the hollows are nearly filled with these materials, the
plank is raised on one side so that the concentrates will fall into a large bowl.
The cup-like depressions are washed out by dashing them with water. These

18The Julian Alps are a section east of the Carnic Alps and lie north of Trieste. The
term Rhaetian Alps is applied to that section along the Swiss Italian Boundary, about
north of Lake Como.

BOOK VIII.

Wilt MOY ll,

ali
—

enema

SSSA SSSA

A—FIRST MACHINE.

B—ITs sTAMPs.
E—Its stamps. F—ItTs MORTAR-BOX.
MORTAR-BOX. K—FOURTH MACHINE.

ik
iA NVeN

Sosy

C—ITS MORTAR-BOX.
G—THIRD MACHINE.
L—lItTs STAMPS.

D—SECOND MACHINE.
H—Its sTAMPs.
M—ITS MORTAR-BOX.

I—Its

2PM OS ee

BOOK VIII. 321

concentrates are washed separately in different bowls from those which have
settled on the canvas. This bowl is smooth and two digits wide and deep,
being in shape very similar to a small boat; it is broad in the fore part,
narrow in the back, and in the middle of it there is a cross groove, in which
the particles of pure gold or silver settle, while the grains of sand, since they
are lighter, flow out of it.

In some parts of Moravia, gold ore, which consists of quartz mixed with
gold, is placed under the stamps and crushed wet. When crushed fine it
flows out through a launder into a trough, is there stirred by a wooden
scrubber, and the minute particles of gold which settle in the upper end of
the trough are washed in a black bowl.

a

SWARM

\

rel
SOB

— == LZ = en

A—Stamps. B—Mortar. C—PLATES FULL OF HOLES. D—TRANSVERSE LAUNDER.

E—PLANKS FULL OF CUP-LIKE DEPRESSIONS. F—Spout. G—BowL INTO WHICH THE

CONCENTRATES FALL. H-—CANVAS STRAKE. I—BOWLS SHAPED LIKE A SMALL BOAT.
K—SETTLING-PIT UNDER THE CANVAS STRAKE.

So far I have spoken of machines which crush wet ore with iron-shod
stamps. I will now explain the methods of washing which are in a measure
peculiar to the ore of certain metals, beginning with gold. The ore which
contains particles of this metal, and the sand of streams and rivers which

322 BOOK VIII.

contains grains of it, are washed in frames or bowls; the sands especially
are also washed in troughs. More than one method is employed for washing
on frames, for these frames either pass or retain the particles or concentrates
of gold; they pass them if they have holes, and retain them if they have
no holes. But either the frame itself has holes, or a box is substituted for
it; if the frame itself is perforated it passes the particles or concentrates
of gold into a trough ; if the box has them, it passes the gold material into
the long sluice. I will first speak of these two methods of washing. The
frame is made of two planks joined together, and is twelve feet long and
three feet wide, and is full of holes large enough for a pea to pass. To prevent
the ore or sand with which the gold is mixed from falling out at the sides,
small projecting edge-boards are fixed to it. This frame is set upon two
stools, the first of which is higher than the second, in order that the gravel
and small stones can roll down it. The washer throws the ore or sand into
the head of the frame, which is higher, and opening the small launder, lets
the water into it, and then agitates it with a wooden scrubber. In this way,
the gravel and small stones roll down the frame on to the ground, while the

A—HEAD OF FRAME. B—FRAME. C—Hores. D—EpGE-Boarps. E—Srtoots
F—ScruBBER. G—TrovucH. H—LaAunper. I—Bowt.

BOOK VIII. 323

particles or concentrates of gold, together with the sand, pass through the
holes into the trough which is placed under the frame, and after being
collected are washed in the bowl.

A box which has a bottom made of a plate full of holes, is placed over
the upper end of a sluice, which is fairly long but of moderate width. The
gold material to be washed is thrown into this box, and a great quantity of
water is let in. The lumps, if ore is being washed, are mashed with an iron
shovel. The fine portions fall through the bottom of the box into the sluice,
but the coarse pieces remain in the box, and these are removed with a scraper
through an opening which is nearly in the middle of one side. Since a large
amount of water is necessarily let into the box, in order to prevent it from
sweeping away any particles of gold which have fallen into the sluice, the
sluice is divided off by ten, or if it is as long again, by fifteen riffles. These
riffles are placed equidistant from one another, and each is higher than the one
next toward the lower end of the sluice. The little compartments which are
thus made are filled with the material and the water which flows through

\)) =

2)

——;
=C i

ui =a, UR
as ~ De iN

4 EN
8 SA
1 oe

>: <
7 -

>

ay iA GP q
der = ae Gn aon WMI =

A—StuicE. B—Box. C—BoTToM OF INVERTED BOX. D—OPEN PART OF IT. E—IRON
HOE. F—RIFFLEs. G—SMALL LAUNDER. H—BOWL WITH WHICH SETTLINGS ARE TAKEN
AWAY. I—BLACK BOWL IN WHICH THEY ARE WASHED.

324 BOOK VIII.

the box ; as soon as these compartments are full and the water has begun
to flow over clear, the little launder through which this water enters into the
box is closed, and the water is turned in another direction. Then the
lowest riffle is removed from the sluice, and the sediment which has
accumulated flows out with the water and is caught in a bowl. The
riffles are removed one by one and the sediment from each is taken into a
separate bowl, and each is separately washed and cleansed in a bowl. The
larger particles of gold concentrates settle in the higher compartments, the
smaller size, in the lower compartments. This bowl is shallow and smooth,
and smeared with oil or some other slippery substance, so that the tiny particles
of gold may not cling to it, and it is painted black, that the gold may be more
easily discernible ; on the exterior, on both sides and in the middle, it is
slightly hollowed out in order that it may be grasped and held firmly in the
hands when shaken. By this method the particles or concentrates of gold
settle in the back part of the bowl; for if the back part of the bowl is
‘tapped or shaken with one hand, as is usual, the contents move toward the
fore part. In this way the Moravians, especially, wash gold ore.

The gold particles are also caught on frames which are either bare or
covered. If bare, the particles are caught in pockets; if covered, they

LAOS toe =
ee SPIO “ae

+ oN
<*>
WWW ~ D>
WAKE d

SOSA %

A—PLANK. B-—-SIDE-BOARDS. C—IRON WIRE. D—HANDLEs,

BOOK VIII. 325

cling to the coverings. Pockets are made in various ways, either with iron
wire or small cross-boards fixed to the frame, or by holes which are sunk
into the sluice itself or into its head, but which do not quite go through.
These holes are round or square, or are grooves running crosswise. The
frames are either covered with skins, pieces of cloth, or turf, which I will
deal with one by one in turn.

In order to prevent the sand which contains the particles of gold from
spilling out, the washer fixes side-boards to the edges of a plank which is six
feet long and one and a quarter wide. He then lays crosswise many iron
wires a digit apart, and where they join he fixes them to the bottom plank
with iron nails. Then he makes the head of the frame higher, and into this
he throws the sand which needs washing, and taking in his hands the handles
which are at the head of the frame, he draws it backward and forward
several times in the river or stream. In this way the small stones and gravel
flow down along the frame, and the sand mixed with particles of gold remains
in the pockets between the strips. When the contents of the pockets have
been shaken out and collected in one place, he washes them in a bowl and
thus cleans the gold dust.

Other people, among whom are the Lusitanians’*, fix to the sides of a
sluice, which is about six feet long and a foot and a half broad, many cross-
strips or riffles, which project backward and are a digit apart. The washer
or his wife lets the water into the head of the sluice, where he throws the sand
which contains the particles of gold. As it flows down he agitates it with a
wooden scrubber, which he moves transversely to the riffles. He constantly
removes with a pointed wooden stick the sediment which settles in the pockets
between the riffles, and in this way the particles of gold settle in them,
while the sand and other valueless materials are carried by the water into a
tub placed below the sluice. He removes the particles of metal with a small
wooden shovel into a wooden bowl. This bowl does not exceed a foot and a
quarter in breadth, and by moving it up and down in the stream he cleanses
the gold dust, for the remaining sand flows out of the dish, and the gold dust
settles in the middle of it, where there is a cup-like depression. Some make
use of a bowl which is grooved inside like a shell, but with a smooth lip where
the water flows out. This smooth place, however, is narrower where the
grooves run into it, and broader where the water flows out.

46Ancient Lusitania comprised Portugal and some neighbouring portions of Spain.

326 BOOK VIII

i el

TAS

I

\ \

\\ t —
i Za

fe

SYN MSTA

A—HEAD OF THE SLUICE. B—RIFFLES. C—-WOODEN SCRUBBER. D—POINTED STICK.
E—Disu. F—ItTs CUP-LIKE DEPRESSION. G—GROOVED DISH.

The cup-like pockets and grooves are cut or burned at the same time into
the bottom of the sluice; the bottom is composed of three planks ten feet
long, and is about four feet wide ; but the lower end, through which the water
is discharged, is narrower. This sluice, which likewise has side-boards fixed
to its edges, is full of rounded pockets and of grooves which lead to them,
there being two grooves to one pocket, in order that the water mixed with
sand may flow into each pocket through the upper groove, and that after the
sand has partly settled, the water may again flow out through the lower
groove. The sluice is set in the river or stream or on the bank, and placed
on two stools, of which the first is higher than the second in order that the
gravel and small stones may roll down the sluice. The washer throws sand
into the head with a shovel, and opening the launder, lets in the water, which
carries the particles of metal with a little sand down into the pockets, while
the gravel and small stones with the rest of the sand falls into a tub placed
below the sluice. As soon as the pockets are filled, he brushes out the
concentrates and washes them in a bowl. He washes again and again

through this sluice.

BOOK VIII. 327

A—HEAD OF THE SLUICE. B—SIDE-BOARDS. C—LOWER END OF THE SLUICE.
D—PockETts. E—Grooves. F—Srtroors. G—SuHover. H—Tus set BELOw.
I—LAUNDER.

Some people cut a number of cross-grooves, one palm distant from each
other, in a sluice similarly composed of three planks eight feet long. The
upper edge of these grooves is sloping, that the particles of gold may slip into
them when the washer stirs the sand with a wooden shovel ; but their lower
edge is vertical so that the gold particles may thus be unable to slide
out of them. As soon as these grooves are full of gold particles mixed
with fine sand, the sluice is removed from the stools and raised up on its
head. The head in this case is nothing but the upper end of the planks
of which the sluice is composed. In this way the metallic particles, being
turned over backward, fall into another tub, for the small stones and gravel
have rolled down the sluice. Some people place large bowls under the
sluice instead of tubs, and as in the other cases, the unclean concentrates are
washed in the small bowl.

The Thuringians cut rounded pockets, a digit in diameter and depth, in
the head of the sluice, and at the same time they cut grooves reaching from
one to another. The sluice itself they cover with canvas. The sand which

328 BOOK VIII.

PANN:

HW te a —
a

stn
thy
~

A—Cross GROOVES. B—TvUB SET UNDER THE SLUICE. C—ANOTHER TUB.

is to be washed, is thrown into the head and stirred with a wooden scrubber ;
in this way the water carries the light particles of gold on to the canvas,
and the heavy ones sink in the pockets, and when these hollows are full, the
head is removed and turned over a tub, and the concentrates are collected
and washed in a bowl. Some people make use of a sluice which has square
pockets with short vertical recesses which hold the particles of gold. Other
workers use a sluice made of planks, which are rough by reason of the very
small shavings which still cling to them; these sluices are used instead of
those with coverings, of which this sluice is bare, and when the sand is washed,
the particles of gold cling no less to these shavings than to canvas, or skins, or
cloths, or turf. The washer sweeps the sluice upward with a broom, and
when he has washed as much of the sand as he wishes, he lets a more abundant
supply of water into the sluice again to wash out the concentrates, which he
collects in a tub set below the sluice, and then washes again in a bowl. Just
as Thuringians cover the sluice with canvas, so some people cover it with
the skins of oxen or horses. They push the auriferous sand upward with a
wooden scrubber, and by this system the light material flows away with the
water, while the particles of gold settle among the hairs; the skins are
afterward washed in a tub; and the concentrates are colleced in a bowl.

—_

ee ee ee ee

ee re ee

BOOK VIII.

{

Utd ill iN

(ik

S|
SS

— W
=

D—SLUICE WHICH HAS SQUARE POCKETS.
CLING. F—Broom. G—SKINS OF OXEN.

B—ITs HEAD FULL OF POCKETS AND GROOVES.

C—HEAD REMOVED AND WASHED IN A TUB.
E—SLUICE TO WHOSE PLANKS SMALL SHAVINGS

A—SLUICE COVERED WITH CANVAS.

H—WOoDEN SCRUBBER.

330 BOOK VIII.

The Colchians!? placed the skins of animals in the pools of springs ; and
since many particles of gold had clung to them when they were removed,

A—Sprinc. B—Sxkin. C—ARGONAUTS.

the poets invented the “ golden fleece’”’ of the Colchians. In like manner,
it can be contrived by the methods of miners that skins should take up, not
only particles of gold, but also of silver and gems.

17Colchis, the traditional land of the Golden Fleece, lay between the Caucasus on the
north, Armenia on the south, and the Black Sea on the west. If Agricola’s account of the
metallurgical purpose of the fleece is correct, then Jason must have had real cause for com-
plaint as to the tangible results of his expedition. The fact that we hear nothing of the
fleece after the day it was taken from the dragon would thus support Agricola’s theory. Tons
of ink have been expended during the past thirty centuries in explanations of what the fleece
really was. These explanations range through the supernatural and metallurgical, but more
recent writers have endeavoured to construct the journey of the Argonauts into an epic of the
development of the Greek trade in gold with the Euxine. We will not attempt to traverse
them from a metallurgical point of view further than to maintain that Agricola’s explanation
is as probable and equally as ingenious as any other, although Strabo (xi, 2, 19.) gives much
the same view long before.

Alluvial mining—gold washing—being as old as the first glimmer of civilisation,
it is referred to, directly or indirectly, by a great majority of ancient writers, poets, historians,
geographers, and naturalists. Early Egyptian inscriptions often reier to this industry,
but from the point of view of technical methods the description by Pliny is practically
the only one of interest, and in Pliny’s chapter on the subject, alluvial is badly con-

BOOK VIII. 331

Many people cover the frame with a green cloth as long and wide as the
frame itself, and fasten it with iron nails in such a way that they can easily

; A—HEAD OF FRAME. B—FRAME. C—CLotH. D—SMALL LAUNDER. E—TuvuB SET
BELOW THE FRAME. F—TvuB IN WHICH CLOTH IS WASHED.

draw them out and remove the cloth. When the cloth appears to be golden
because of the particles which adhere to it, it is washed in a special tub and
the particles are collected in a bowl. The remainder which has run down into
the tub is again washed on the frame.

fused with vein mining. This passage (xxxIII, 21) is as follows: ‘Gold is found in
“the world in three ways, to say nothing of that found in India by the ants, and in
“Scythia by the Griffins. The first is as gold dust found in streams, as, for instance, in the
fi ote in Spain, in the Padus in Italy, in the Hebrus in Thracia, in the Pactolus in Asia,
“and in the Ganges in India; indeed, there is no gold found more perfect than this, as the
“current polishes it thoroughly by attrition. . . . Others by equal labour and greater
“expense bring rivers from the mountain heights, often a hundred miles, for the purpose of
“washing this debris. The ditches thus made are called corrugi, from our word corrivatio, I
“suppose ; and these entail a thousand fresh labours. The fall must be steep, that the
“water may rush down from very high places, rather than flow gently. The ditches
“across the valleys are joined by aqueducts, and in other places, impassable rocks have to be
“cut away and forced to make room for troughs of hollowed-out logs. Those who cut the
“rocks are suspended by ropes, so that to those who watch them from a distance, the
“workmen seem not so much beasts as birds. Hanging thus, they take the levels and trace
‘the lines which the ditch is to take ; and thus, where there is no place for man’s footstep,
“streams are dragged by men. The water is vitiated for washing if the current of the

SS a a li a a ae

i cates

332 BOOK VIII.

Some people, in place of a green cloth, use a cloth of tightly woven
horsehair, which has a rough knotty surface. Since these knots stand out

A—CLOTH FULL OF SMALL KNOTS, SPREAD OUT. B-—-SMALL KNOTS MORE CONSPICUOUSLY
SHOWN. C—TUB IN WHICH CLOTH IS WASHED.

and the cloth is rough, even the very small particles of gold adhere to it;
these cloths are likewise washed in a tub with water.

‘stream carries mud with it. This kind of earth is called urium, hence these ditches are
“laid out to carry the water over beds of pebbles to avoid this urium. When they have
“reached the head of the fall, at the top of the mountain, reservoirs are excavated a couple
“of hundred feet long and wide, and about ten feet deep. In these reservoirs there are
“ generally five gates left, about three feet square, so that when the reservoir is full, the gates
“are opened, and the torrent bursts forth with such violence that the rocks are hurled along.
‘When they have reached the plain there is yet more labour. Trenches called agogae are
“ dug for the flow of the water. The bottoms of these are spread at regular intervals with ulex
“to catch the gold. This ulex is similar to rosemary, rough and prickly. The sides, too,
“are closed in with planks and are suspended when crossing precipitous spots. The earth
“‘is carried to the sea and thus the shattered mountain is washed away and scattered; and
“this deposition of the earth in the sea has extended the shore of Spain. . . . The gold
“ procured from arrugiae does not require to be melted, but is already pure gold. It is found
“in lumps, in shafts as well, sometimes even exceeding ten /ibrae in weight. These lumps
“are called palagae and palacurnae, while the small grains are called baluce. The Ulex is
“dried and burnt and the ashes are washed on a bed of grassy turf in order that the gold
“may settle thereon.”

ee eS oe Ce ee ee

a se

BOOK VIII. 333

Some people construct a frame not unlike the one covered with canvas,
but shorter. In place of the canvas they set pieces of turf in rows. They

A—HEAD OF FRAME. B—SMALL LAUNDER THROUGH WHICH WATER FLOWS INTO HEAD OF
FRAME, C—PIECES OF TURF. D—TROUGH PLACED UNDER FRAME. E—TUvuB IN WHICH
PIECES OF TURF ARE WASHED,

wash the sand, which has been thrown into the head of the frame, by letting
in water. In this way the particles of gold settle in the turf, the mud and
sand, together with the water, are carried down into the settling-pit or trough
below, which is opened when the work is finished. After all the water has
passed out of the settling-pit, the sand and mud are carried away and washed
over again in the same manner. The particles which have clung to the turf
are afterward washed down into the settling-pit or trough by a stronger
current of the water, which is let into the frame through a small launder.
The concentrates are finally collected and washed in a bowl. Pliny was not
ignorant of this method of washing gold. ‘“‘ The ulex,” he says, “ after being

dried, is burnt, and its ashes are washed over a grassy turf, that the gold
may settle on it.”

24

334 BOOK VIII.

A—Tray. B—BOWL-LIKE DEPRESSION. C—HANDLES.

Sand mixed with particles of gold is also washed in a tray, or in a trough
or bowl. The tray is open at the further end, is either hewn out of a
squared trunk of a tree or made out of a thick plank to which side-boards
are fixed, and is three feet long, a foot and a half wide, and three digits
deep. The bottom is hollowed out into the shape of an elongated bowl whose
narrow end is turned toward the head, and it has two long handles, by which
it is drawn backward and forward in the river. In this way the fine sand
is washed, whether it contains particles of gold or the little black stones from
which tin is made.

The Italians who come to the German mountains seeking gold, in order
to wash the river sand which contains gold-dust and garnets,1® use a fairly
long shallow trough hewn out of a tree, rounded within and without, open
at one end and closed at the other, which they turn in the bed of the stream
in such a way that the water does not dash into it, but flows in gently.
They stir the sand, which they throw into it, with a wooden hoe, also
rounded. To prevent the particles of gold or garnets from running out with
the light sand, they close the end with a board similarly rounded, but lower
than the sides of the trough. The concentrates of gold or garnets which,

19Carbunculus Carchedonius — Carthaginian carbuncle. The German is given by
Agricola in the Interpretatio as granat, i.e., garnet.

BOOK VIII. 335

A—TroucH. B—Its OPEN END. C—END THAT MAY BE CLOSED. D—STREAM.
E—Hor. F—Enp-spoarp. G—Bac.

with a small quantity of heavy sand, have settled in the trough, they wash
in a bowl and collect in bags and carry away with them.

Some people wash this kind of sand in a large bowl which can easily be
shaken, the bowl being suspended by two ropes from a beam in a building.
The sand is thrown into it, water is poured in, then the bow] is shaken, and
the muddy water is poured out and clear water is again poured in, this being
done again and again. In this way, the gold particles settle in the back part
of the bowl because they are heavy, and the sand in the front part because it
is light ; the latter is thrown away, the former kept for smelting. The one
who does the washing then returns immediately to his task. This method
of washing is rarely used by miners, but frequently by coiners and goldsmiths
when they wash gold, silver, or copper. The bowl they employ has only
three handles, one of which they grasp in their hands when they shake the
bowl, and in the other two is fastened a rope by which the bowl is hung from
a beam, or from a cross-piece which is upheld by the forks of two upright
posts fixed in the ground. Miners frequently wash ore in a small bowl to test

336 BOOK VIII.

MWS EI WHI SARE QE SSE
AS Y \ ro’ We Sy
Se _f \ DIN

4 ys

TT LS

ATE

SSS

“ih

T];

mama) 1;
MOET

A=
=<—

ON :
NH Aa TTS ( mee!

<n So, Sa

Set, J

Or
LTT, ‘td
LOTTI A
Y SaSsSSSEEEl i
Zee NS
25S
VW = SS =
<G* N
~ aR, 3 N
we

Yili
yl

Lo 2I

i

Lh
\¢

C7 rZ
iif

S SS
SM

A—LARGE BOWLr B—Roprs. C—BrAM. D—OTHER LARGE BOWL WHICH COINERS
USE. E—SMALL BOWL.

it. This bowl, when shaken, is held in one hand and thumped with the other
hand. In other respects this method of washing does not differ from the
last.

I have spoken of the various methods of washing sand which contains
grains of gold; I will now speak of the methods of washing the material in
which are mixed the small black stones from which tin is made®®, Eight
such methods are in use, and of these two have been invented lately. Such
metalliferous material is usually found torn away from veins and stringers
and scattered far and wide by the impetus of water, although sometimes
venae dilatatae are composed of it. The miners dig out the latter material
with a broad mattock, while they dig the former with a pick. But they dig
out the little stones, which are not rare in this kind of ore, with an instrument
like the bill of a duck. In districts which contain this material, if there is
an abundant supply of water, and if there are valleys or gentle slopes and
hollows, so that rivers can be diverted into them, the washers in summer-

SSS

20As the concentration of crushed tin ore has been exhaustively treated of already,
the descriptions from here on probably refer entirely to alluvial tin.

Re ee ee, a

BOOK VIII. 337

fat 26
2

a>

A—StTrREAM. B—Ditca. C—Matrocx. D—Pr&ces or turF. E—SEVEN-PRONGED FORK.
F—IRON SHOVEL. G—TroucH. H—ANOTHER TROUGH BELOW IT. I—SMALL WOODEN TROWEL.

338 BOOK VIII.

time first of all dig a long ditch sloping so that the water will run through
it rapidly. Into the ditch is thrown the metallic material, together with the
surface material, which is six feet thick, more or less, and often contains moss,
roots of plants, shrubs, trees, and earth ;_ they are all thrown in with a broad
mattock, and the water flows through the ditch. The sand and tin-stone, as
they are heavy, sink to the bottom of the ditch, while the moss and roots, as
they are light, are carried away by the water which flows through the ditch.
The bottom of the ditch is obstructed with turf and stones in order to prevent
the water from carrying away the tin-stone at the same time. The washers,
whose feet are covered with high boots made of hide, though not of rawhide,
themselves stand in the ditch and throw out of it the roots of the trees,
shrubs, and grass with seven-pronged wooden forks, and push back the tin-
stone toward the head of the ditch. After four weeks, in which they have
devoted much work and labour, they raise the tin-stone in the following
way; the sand with which it is mixed is repeatedly lifted from the ditch

ren
=~ =

3
4
2
5
Z

at! st
/ 4

i! !

nu ge?

A—TroucH. B—WoopEN sHOVEL. C—Tus. D—LAUNDER. E—WooDEN TROWEL.
F—TRANSVERSE TROUGH. G—PLuG. H—FALLING waTER. I—DitcH. K—BARROW
CONVEYING MATERIAL TO BE WASHED. L—PICK LIKE THE BEAK OF A DUCK WITH WHICH
THE MINER DIGS OUT THE MATERIAL FROM WHICH THE SMALL STONES ARE OBTAINED,

gee eee hy ST

Poca ae eae

ee

BOOK VIII. 339

with an iron shovel and agitated hither and thither in the water, until the
sand flows away and only the tin-stone remains on the shovel. The tin-
stone is all collected together and washed again in a trough by pushing it
up and turning it over with a wooden trowel, in order that the remaining
sand may separate from it. Afterward they return to their task, which they
continue until the metalliferous material is exhausted, or until the water can
no longer be diverted into the ditches.

The trough which I mentioned is hewn out of the trunk of a tree and the
interior is five feet long, three-quarters of a foot deep, and six digits wide.
It is placed on an incline and under it is put a tub which contains interwoven
fir twigs, or else another trough is put under it, the interior of which is three
feet long and one foot wide and deep; the fine tin-stone, which has run out
with the water, settles in the bottom. Some people, in place of a trough,
put a square launder underneath, and in like manner they wash the tin-
stone in this by agitating it up and down and turning it over with a small
wooden trowel. A transverse trough is put under the launder, which is
either open on one end and drains off into a tub or settling-pit, or else is
closed and perforated through the bottom; in this case, it drains into a
ditch beneath, where the water falls when the plug has been partly removed.
The nature of this ditch I will now describe.

If the locality does not supply an abundance of water, the washers dig a
ditch thirty or thirty-six feet long, and cover the bottom, the full length, with
logs joined together and hewn on the side which lies flat on the ground. On
each side of the ditch, and at its head also, they place four logs, one above
the other, all hewn smooth on the inside. But since the logs are laid
obliquely along the sides, the upper end of the ditch is made four feet wide
and the tail end, two feet. The water has a high drop from a launder and
first of all it falls into interlaced fir twigs, in order that it shall fall straight
down for the most part in an unbroken stream and thus break up the lumps
by its weight. Some do not place these twigs under the end of the launder,
but put a plug in its mouth, which, since it does not entirely close the launder,
nor altogether prevent the discharge from it, nor yet allow the water to
spout far afield, makes it drop straight down. The workman brings in a
wheelbarrow the material to be washed, and throws it into the ditch. The
washer standing in the upper end of the ditch breaks the lumps with a seven-
pronged fork, and throws out the roots of trees, shrubs, and grass with the
same instrument, and thereby the small black stones settle down. When a
large quantity of the tin-stone has accumulated, which generally happens
when the washer has spent a day at this work, to prevent it from being
washed away he places it upon the bank, and other material having been
again thrown into the upper end of the ditch, he continues the task of washing.
A boy stands at the lower end of the ditch, and with a thin pointed hoe
stirs up the sediment which has settled at the lower end, to prevent the
washed tin-stone from being carried further, which occurs when the sediment
has accumulated to such an extent that the fir branches at the outlet of the
ditch are covered.

340 BOOK VIII.

A—LAUNDER. B—INTERLACING FIR TwIGs. C—LoGS; THREE ON ONE SIDE, FOR THE

FOURTH CANNOT BE SEEN BECAUSE THE DITCH IS SO FULL WITH MATERIAL NOW BEING

WASHED. D—LoGs AT THE HEAD OF THE DITCH. E—Barrow. F—SEVEN-PRONGED
FORK. G—Hokr.

The third method of washing materials of this kind follows. Two
strakes are made, each of which is twelve feet long and a foot and a
half wide and deep. A tank is set at their head, into which the water flows
through a little launder. A boy throws the ore into one strake ; if it is of
poor quality he puts in a large amount of it, if it is rich he puts in less. The
water is let in by removing the plug, the ore is stirred with a wooden shovel,
and in this way the tin-stone, mixed with the heavier material, settles

in the bottom of the strake, and the water carries the light material into the.

launder, through which it flows on to a canvas strake. The very fine tin-
stone, carried by the water, settles on to the canvas and is cleansed. A low
cross-board is placed in the strake near the head, in order that the largest
sized tin-stone may settle there. As soon as the strake is filled with the
material which has been washed, he closes the mouth of the tank and continues
washing in the other strake, and then the plug is withdrawn and the
water and tin-stone flow down into a tank below. Then he pounds the sides

BOOK VIII. 341
Ru aii :

as

SAAS 5

SSS

>

Ay TA —_ ARNO —=y nes

~ \ ey SONS
RRS
fae

A—STRAKES. B—Tanx. C—LAunpER. D—Ptiuc. E—WooDEN SHOVEL.
F—WOoDEN MALLET. G—WOODEN SHOVEL WITH SHORT HANDLE. H—THE PLUG
IN THE STRAKE. I—TANK PLACED UNDER THE PLUG.

of the loaded strake with a wooden mallet, in order that the tin-stone clinging
to the sides may fall off; all that has settled in it, he throws out with a
wooden shovel which has a short handle. Silver slags which have been
crushed under the stamps, also fragments of silver-lead alloy and of cakes
melted from pyrites, are washed in a strake of this kind.

Material of this kind is also washed while wet, in a sieve whose bottom
is made of woven iron wire, and this is the fourth method of washing. The
sieve is immersed in the water which is contained in a tub, and is violently
shaken. The bottom of this tub has an opening of such size that as much
water, together with tailings from the sieve, can flow continuously out of it as
water flows into it. The material which settles in the strake, a boy either
digs over with a three-toothed iron rake or sweeps with a wooden scrubber ;
in this way the water carries off a great part of both sand and mud. The
tin-stone or metalliferous concentrates settle in the strake and are afterward
washed in another strake.

These are ancient methods of washing material which contains tin-
stone; there follow two modern methods. If the tin-stone mixed with

342 BOOK VIII.

Su
: is

0

aN
a
=

A—SreveE. B—Tus. C—WATER FLOWING OUT OF THE BOTTOM OF IT. D—STRAKE.
E—THREE-TOOTHED RAKE. F—WO0OODEN SCRUBBER.

earth or sand is found on the slopes of mountains or hills, or in the level fields
which are either devoid of streams or into which a stream cannot be diverted,
miners have lately begun to employ the following method of washing, even
in the winter months. An open box is constructed of planks, about six
feet long, three feet wide, and two feet and one palm deep. At the upper
end on the inside, an iron plate three feet long and wide is fixed, at a depth
of one foot and a half from the top ; this plate is very full of holes, through
which tin-stone about the size of a pea can fall. A trough hewn from a tree
is placed under the box, and this trough is about twenty-four feet long and
three-quarters of a foot wide and deep; very often three cross-boards are
placed in it, dividing it off into compartments, each one of which is lower
than the next. The turbid waters discharge into a settling-pit.

The metalliferous material is sometimes found not very deep beneath
the surface of the earth, but sometimes so deep that it is necessary to drive
tunnels and sink shafts. It is transported to the washing-box in wheel-
barrows, and when the washers are about to begin they lay a small launder,

es Fee

a ag Un

BOOK VIII.

ore HERERO SY

A—Box. B—PERFORATED PLATE. C—TrovcH. D—Cross-BOARDs.

F—LAuNDER. G—SHOVEL.

H—RAKE,

E—Poot,.

344 BOOK VIII.

through which there flows on to the iron plate so much water as is necessary
for this washing. Next, a boy throws the metalliferous material on to the
iron plate with an iron shovel and breaks the small lumps, stirring them this
way and that with the same implement. Then the water and sand penetra-
ting the holes of the plate, fall into the box, while all the coarse gravel remains
on the plate, and this he throws into a wheelbarrow with the same shovel.
Meantime, a younger boy continually stirs the sand under the plate with a
wooden scrubber nearly as wide as the box, and drives it to the upper end of
the box; the lighter material, as well as a small amount of tin-stone, is
carried by the water down into the underlying trough. The boys carry on
this labour without intermission until they have filled four wheelbarrows
with the coarse and worthless residues, which they carry off and throw away, or
three wheelbarrows if the material is rich in black tin. Then the foreman
has the plank removed which was in front of the iron plate, and on which the
boy stood. The sand, mixed with the tin-stone, is frequently pushed backward
and forward with a scrubber, and the same sand, because it is lighter, takes
the upper place, and is removed as soon as it appears ; that which takes the
lower place is turned over with a spade, in order that any that is light
can flow away; when all the tin-stone is heaped together, he shovels it out
of the box and carries it away. While the foreman does this, one boy with
an iron hoe stirs the sand mixed with fine tin-stone, which has run out of the
box and has settled in the trough and pushes it back to the uppermost part
of the trough, and this material, since it contains a very great amount of tin-
stone, is thrown on to the plate and washed again. The material which has
settled in the lowest part of the trough is taken out separately and piled in a
heap, and is washed on the ordinary strake; that which has settled in the
pool is washed on the canvas strake. In the summer-time this fruitful
labour is repeated more often, in fact ten or eleven times. The tin-stone
which the foreman removes from the box, is afterward washed in a jigging
sieve, and lastly in a tub, where at length all the sand is separated out.
Finally, any material in which are mixed particles of other metals, can be
washed by all these methods, whether it has been disintegrated from veins or
stringers, or whether it originated from venae dilatatae, or from streams and
rivers.

The sixth method of washing material of this kind is even more modern
and more useful than the last. Two boxes are constructed, into each of
which water flows through spouts from a cross trough into which it has been
discharged through a pipe or launder. When the material has been agitated
and broken up with iron shovels by two boys, part of it runs down and falls
through the iron plates full of holes, or through the iron grating, and flows
out of the box over a sloping surface into another cross trough, and from
this into a strake seven feet long and two and a half feet wide. Then
the foreman again stirs it with a wooden scrubber that it may become
clean. As for the material which has flowed down with the water and settled
in the third cross trough, or in the launder which leads from it, a third boy
rakes it with a two-toothed rake ; in this way the fine tin-stone settles down

ee

‘
F
‘
.
‘]
a
a
-
4
‘
Vy

Fos aS eS

BOOK VIII. 345

a)

A—LaunpER. B—Cross troucH. C—Two spouts. D—Boxrs. E—Ptiatre. F—
GraTING. G—SHOVELs. H—SECOND cROsS TROUGH. I—STRAKE. K—WoopEN
SCRUBBER. L—THIRD CROSS TROUGH. M—LAUNDER. N—THREE-TOOTHED RAKE.

and the water carries off the valueless sand into the creek. This method
of washing is most advantageous, for four men can do the work of washing
in two boxes, while the last method, if doubled, requires six men, for it requires
two boys to throw the material to be washed on to the plate and to stir it
with iron shovels; two more are required with wooden scrubbers to keep
stirring the sand, mixed with the tin-stone, under the plate, and to push it
toward the upper end of the box; further, two foremen are required
to clean the tin-stone in the way I have described. In the place of a plate
full of holes, they now fix in the boxes a grating made of iron wire as
thick as the stalks of rye; that these may not be depressed by the weight
and become bent, three iron bars support them, being laid crosswise under-
neath. To prevent the grating from being broken by the iron shovels with
which the material is stirred in washing, five or six iron rods are placed on
top in cross lines, and are fixed to the box so that the shovels may rub them
instead of the grating; for this reason the grating lasts longer than the

346 BOOK VIII.

plates, because it remains intact, while the rods, when worn by rubbing, can
easily be replaced by others.

Miners use the seventh method of washing when there is no stream of
water in the part of the mountain which contains the black tin, or particles of
gold, or of other metals. In this case they frequently dig more than fifty
ditches on the slope below, or make the same number of pits, six feet long,
three feet wide, and three-quarters of a foot deep, not any great distance
from each other. At the season when a torrent rises from storms of
great violence or long duration, and rushes down the mountain, some of
the miners dig the metalliferous material in the woods with broad hoes and

ee
(CA
=

= é pase pe ; AX

A—Pits. B—TorRRENT. C—SEVEN-PRONGED FORK. D—SHOVEL.

drag it to the torrent. Other miners divert the torrent into the ditches or
pits, and others throw the roots of trees, shrubs, and grass out of the ditches
or pits with seven-pronged wooden forks. When the torrent has run down,
they remove with shovels the uncleansed tin-stone or particles of metal which
have settled in the ditches or pits, and cleanse it.

The eighth method is also employed in the regions which the Lusitanians
hold in their power and sway, and is not dissimilar to the last. They drive

BOOK VIII. 347

a great number of deep ditches in rows in the gullies, slopes, and hollows of
the mountains. Into these ditches the water, whether flowing down from
snow melted by the heat of the sun or from rain, collects and carries together
with earth and sand, sometimes tin-stone, or, in the case of the Lusitanians,
the particles of gold loosened from veins and stringers. As soon as the
waters of the torrent have all run away, the miners throw the material out
of the ditches with iron shovels, and wash it in a common sluice box.

Ne
y
14 >a) "
a ay:

ain:

A—Gutity. B—Ditcu. C—Torrent. D—SLUICE BOX EMPLOYED BY THE
LUSITANIANS.

The Poles wash the impure lead from venae dilatatae in a trough ten
feet long, three feet wide, and one and one-quarter feet deep. It is mixed
with moist earth and is covered by a wet and sandy clay, and so
first of all the clay, and afterward the ore, is dug out. The ore is carried
to a stream or river, and thrown into a trough into which water is admitted
by a little launder, and the washer standing at the lower end of the trough
drags the ore out with a narrow and nearly pointed hoe, whose wooden handle
is nearly ten feet long. It is washed over again once or twice in the same
way and thus made pure. Afterward when it has been dried in the sun

348 BOOK VIII.

they throw it into a copper sieve, and separate the very small pieces which
pass through the sieve from the larger ones; of these the former are smelted
in a faggot pile and the latter in the furnace. Of such a number then are
the methods of washing.

aS
a
b ITT Wit Mi wid

| <Zz = Z : AG

we \y

6c
jee

ial
SS

<

A—TroucH. B—LaunpErR. C—Hor. D—SIEVE.

One method of burning is principally employed, and two of roasting.
The black tin is burned by a hot fire in a furnace similar to an oven*!; it
is burned if it is a dark-blue colour, or if pyrites and the stone from which
iron is made are mixed with it, for the dark blue colour if not burnt, consumes
the tin. If pyrites and the other stone are not volatilised into fumes in a
furnace of this kind, the tin which is made from the tin-stone is impure.
The tin-stone is thrown either into the back part of the furnace, or into one
side of it; but in the former case the wood is placed in front, in the latter
case alongside, in such a manner, however, that neither firebrands nor
coals may fall upon the tin-stone itself or touch it. The fuel is manipulated
by a poker made of wood. The tin-stone is now stirred with a rake with two

21From a metallurgical point of view all of these operations are roasting. Even ~

to-day, however, the expression “ burning” tin is in use in some parts of Cornwall, and in
former times it was general.

BOOK VIII. 349

teeth, and now again levelled down with a hoe, both of which are made of iron.
The very fine tin-stone requires to be burned less than that of moderate size,
and this again less than that of the largest size. While the tin-stone is being
thus burned, it frequently happens that some of the material runs together.

lé.
~ —
=_—___
{
¢| j
2 = i Wy) SS .
z Ef 7 = SS
=i? 37 — :
3} FS SSS >
=
>
\ Ss
4 s SS or
SS —
—
Sy es
~ = SSS
E SN
; ; es e 8 sd —
es ~o
——
~ | SO
° iJ = % —————=>~
= ’ ~ — -— —_
| ad | a ba REE
: ee AT =

A—FurnaceE. B—Its moutH. C—PokrerR. D—RAKE WITH TWO TEETH. E—HOE.

The burned tin-stone should then be washed again on the strake, for in this
way the material which has been run together is carried away by the water
into the cross-trough, where it is gathered up and worked over, and again
washed on the strake. By this method the metal is separated from that
which is devoid of metal.

Cakes from pyrites, or cadmia, or cupriferous stones, are roasted in quad-
rangular pits, of which the front and top are open, and these pits are generally
twelve feet long, eight feet wide, and three feet deep. The cakes of melted
pyrites are usually roasted twice over, and those of cadmta once. These latter
are first rolled in mud moistened with vinegar, to prevent the fire from con-
suming too much of the copper with the bitumen, or sulphur, or orpiment, or
realgar. The cakes of pyrites are first roasted in a slow fire and afterward in
a fierce one, and in both cases, during the whole following night, water is let in,

a§

350 BOOK VIII.

in order that, if there is in the cakes any alum or vitriol or saltpetre capable
of injuring the metals, although it rarely does injure them, the water may
remove it and make the cakes soft. The solidified juices are nearly all
harmful to the metal, when cakes or ore of this kind are smelted. The cakes
which are to be roasted are placed on wood piled up in the form of a crate,
and this pile is fired”.

X
N
S
N
S
S
N
N
S

SE IITIIEXGQ.] G wo» Pd

A—Pits. B—Woop. C—CaAKkEs. D—LAUNDER.

The cakes which are made of copper smelted from schist are first thrown
upon the ground and broken, and then placed in the furnace on bundles of
faggots, and these are lighted. These cakes are generally roasted seven
times and occasionally nine times. While this is being done, if they are

2There can be no doubt that these are mattes, as will develop in Chapter 1x. The
German term in the Glossary for panes ex pyrite is stein, the same as the modern German
for matte. Orpiment and realgar are the yellow and red arsenical sulphides. The cadmia
was no doubt the cobalt-arsenic minerals (see note on p. 112). The ‘‘solidified juices’” were
generally anything that could be expelled short of smelting, 7.e., roasted off or leached out,
as shown in note 4, p. 1; they embrace the sulphates, salts, sulphur, bitumen, and
arsenical sulphides, etc. For further information on leaching out the sulphates, alum, etc.,
see note 10, p. 564.

eee

a ae Se

BOOK VIII. 351

bituminous, then the bitumen burns and can be smelled. These furnaces have
a structure like the structure of the furnaces in which ore is smelted, except
that they are open in front; they are six feet high and four feet wide. As
for this kind of furnace, three of them are required for one of those in which
the cakes are melted. First of all they are roasted in the first furnace, then
when they are cooled, they are transferred into the second furnace and again
roasted ; later they are carried to the third, and afterward back to the first,
and this order is preserved until they have been roasted seven or nine times.

AM)

rts . 14 ~ a : < << Dy eae
HS Sy aS —— #2 4 CE saan aap

A--CAKEs. B-—-BUNDLES OF FAGGOTs. C—FURNACES.

END OF BOOK VIII.

eee

SEAR oo
SKA XD |
SO Se |
)

i

|

a

4

4
t

5
‘

BOOK IX.

arma] INCE I have written of the varied work of pre-

f.

paring the ores, I will now write of the various
methods of smelting them. Although those who
burn, roast and calcine? the ore, take from it some-
thing which is mixed or combined with the metals ;
and those who crush it with stamps take away much ;
and those who wash, screen and sort it, take away
still more; yet they cannot remove all which con-
ceals the metal from the eye and renders it crude
and unformed. Wherefore smelting is necessary, for by this means earths,
solidified juices, and stones are separated from the metals so that they
obtain their proper colour and become pure, and may be of great use to
mankind in many ways. When the ore is smelted, those things which
were mixed with the metal before it was melted are driven forth, because
the metal is perfected by fire in this manner. Since metalliferous ores
differ greatly amongst themselves, first as to the metals which they con-
tain, then as to the quantity of the metal which is in them, and then by
the fact that some are rapidly melted by fire and others slowly, there are,
therefore, many methods of smelting. Constant practice has taught the

1The history of the fusion of ores and of metals is the history of individual processes,
and such information as we have been able to discover upon the individual methods previous
to Agricola we give on the pages where such processes are discussed. In general the records
of the beginnings of metallurgy are so nebular that, if one wishes to shirk the task, he can
adopt the explanation of William Pryce one hundred and fifty years ago: “It is very
“probable that the nature and use of Metals were not revealed to Adam in his state of
“innocence : the toil and labour necessary to procure and use those implements of the iron
“age could not be known, till they made part of the curse incurred by his fall : ‘In the sweat
“ “of thy face shalt thou eat bread, till thou return unto the ground; in sorrow shalt thou
“eat of it all the days of thy life’ (Genesis). That they were very early discovered,
“ however, is manifest from the Mosaick account of Tubal Cain, who was the first instructor
“ of every artificer in Brass [sic] and Iron” (Mineralogia Cornubiensis, p. 2).

It is conceivable that gold could be found in large enough pieces to have had general
use in pre-historic times, without fusion ; but copper, which was also in use, must have been
smelted, and therefore we must assume a considerable development of human knowledge on
the subject prior to any human record. Such incidental mention as exists after record
begins does not, of course, extend to the beginning of any particular branch of the art—in
fact, special arts obviously existed long before such mention, and down to the complete
survey of the state of the art by Agricola our dates are necessarily ‘“ prior to’”’ some first
mention in literature, or “ prior to” the known period of existing remains of metallur-
gical operations. The scant Egyptian records, the Scriptures, and the Shoo King give a little
insight prior to 1000 B.c. The more extensive Greek literature of about the 5th to the 3rd
centuries B.c., together with the remains of Greek mines, furnish another datum point of view,
and the Roman and Greek writers at the beginning of the Christian era give a still larger view.
After them our next step is to the Monk Theophilus and the Alchemists, from the 12th to the
14th centuries. Finally, the awakening of learning at the end of the 15th and the beginning
of the 16th centuries, enables us for the first time to see practically all that was known. The
wealth of literature which exists subsequent to this latter time makes history thereafter a
matter of some precision, but it is not included in this undertaking. Considering the great
part that the metals have played in civilization, it is astonishing what a minute amount of
information is available on metallurgy. Either the ancient metallurgists were secretive
as to their art, or the ancient authors despised such common things, or, as is equally probable,
the very partial preservation of ancient literature, by painful transcription over a score of
centuries, served only for those works of more general interest. In any event, if all the direct
or indirect material on metallurgy prior to the 15th century were compiled, it would not fill
40 pages such as these.

*See footnote 2, p. 267, on verbs used for roasting.

354 BOOK IX.

smelters by which of these methods they can obtain the most metal from
any one ore. Moreover, while sometimes there are many methods of
smelting the same ore, by which an equal weight of metal is melted out, yet
one is done at a greater cost and labour than the others. Ore is either melted
with a furnace or without one ; if smelted with a furnace the tap-hole is either
temporarily closed or always open, and if smelted without a furnace, it is done
either in pots or in trenches. But in order to make this matter clearer, I will
describe each in detail, beginning with the buildings and the furnaces.

It may be of service to give a tabular summary indicating approximately the time
when evidence of particular operations appear on the historical horizon :

Gold washed from alluvial : Prior to recorded civilization

Copper reduced from ores by smelting . Prior to recorded civilization

Bitumen mined and used.. Prior to recorded civilization

Tin reduced from ores by smelting Prior to 3500 B.C.

Bronze made é Prior to 3500 B.C.

Iron reduced from ores by smelting Prior to 3500 B.C.

Soda mined and used 2 Prior to 3500 B.C.

Gold reduced from ores by concentration Prior to 2500 B.C.

Silver reduced from ores by smelting Prior to 2000 B.C.
(

Lead reduced from ores by smelting Prior to 2000 B.C. (perhaps prior
to 3500 B.C.)

Silver parted from lead nish gional “£ Prior to 2000 B.C.

Bellows used in furnaces . aa Prior to 1500 B.C.

Steel produced Prior to 1000 B.C.

Base metals separated from ores by water concentration Prior to 500 B.C.

Gold refined by cupellation Prior to 500 B.C.

Sulphide ores smelted for lead Prior to 500 B.C.

Mercury reduced from ores by. .(?) Prior to 400 B.C.

White-lead made with vinegar ..

Touchstone known for rasan gold and silver
fineness as :

Quicksilver reduced from ore by distillation

Prior to 300 B.C.

Prior to 300 B.C.
Prior to Christian Era

Silver parted from gold by cementation with salt Prior to ci
Brass made by cementation of copper and calamine .._ Prior to iY
Zinc oxides obtained from furnace fumes by construc-

tion of dust chambers Prior to zi
Antimony reduced from ores by smelting (accidental) Prior to is
Gold recovered by amalgamation 4 Prior to 4
Refining of copper by repeated fusion .. Prior to EN
Sulphide ores smelted for copper Prior to ‘
Vitriol (blue and green) made Prior to Ke
oe made Prior to

r refined by oxidation and poling

id parted from copper by cupelling with lead
Cold parted from silver by fusion with sulphur
Manufacture of nitric acid and aqua regia
Gold parted from silver by nitric acid .
Gold parted from silver with antimony sulphide
Gold parted from copper with sulphur. .
Silver parted from iron with antimony sulphide
First text book on assaying 4 nd
Silver recovered from ores by amalgamation ee

aration of silver from copper by liquation. .
Cobalt and manganese used for pigments
Roasting copper ores are to smelting. .
Stamp-mill used ee
Bismuth reduced from ore
Zinc reduced from ore (accidental)

Prior to 1200 A.D.
Prior to 1200 A.D.
Prior to 1200 A.D.
Prior to 1400 A.D.
Prior to 1400 A.D.
Prior to 1500 A.D.
Prior to 1500 A.D.
Prior to 1500 A.D.
Prior to 1500 A.D.
Prior to 1500 A.D.
Prior to 1540 A.D.
Prior to 1540 A.D.
Prior to 1550 A.D.
Prior to 1550 A.D.
Prior to 1550 A.D.
Prior to 1550 A.D.

Further, we believe it desirable to sketch ‘at the outset the development of metallurgical
appliances as a whole, leaving the details to special footnotes; otherwise a comprehensive
view of the development of such devices is difficult to grasp.

We can outline the character of metallurgical appliances at various periods in a
few words. It is possible to set up a description of the imaginary beginning of the

BOOK IX. 355

A wall which will be called the ‘second wall’’ is constructed of brick
_ or stone, two feet and as many palms thick, in order that it may be strong
_ enough to bear the weight. It is built fifteen feet high, and its length depends
_ on the number of furnaces which are put in the works; there are usually
_ six furnaces, rarely more, and often less. There are three furnace walls, a

back one which is against the “second” wall, and two side ones, of which I

_ will speak later. These should be made of natural stone, as this is more
' serviceable than burnt bricks, because bricks soon become defective and
crumble away, when the smelter or his deputy chips off the accretions which
adhere to the walls when the ore is smelted. Natural stone resists injury
by the fire and lasts a long time, especially that which is soft and devoid
of cracks; but, on the contrary, that which is hard and has many cracks
is burst asunder by the fire and destroyed. For this reason, furnaces which
are made of the latter are easily weakened by the fire, and when the accretions
are chipped off they crumble to pieces. The front furnace wall should be
made of brick, and there should be in the lower part a mouth three palms
wide and one and a half feet high, when the hearth is completed. A hole
slanting upward, three palms long, is made through the back furnace wall, at
the height of a cubit, before the hearth has been prepared ; through this
hole and a hole one foot long in the ‘‘ second ”’ wall—as the back of this wall
has an arch—is inserted a pipe of iron or bronze, in which are fixed the nozzles

“bronze age” prior to recorded civilization, starting with the savage who accidentally
built a fire on top of some easily reducible ore, and discovered metal in the ashes, etc. ; but
as this method has been pursued times out of number to no ramet purpose, we will
confine ourselves to a summary of such facts as we can assemble. ‘‘ Founders’ hoards”
of the bronze age are scattered over Western Europe, and indicate that smelting was done
in shallow pits with charcoal. With the Egyptians we find occasional inscriptions showing
small furnaces with forced draught, in early cases with a blow-pipe, but later—about 1500
B.c.—with bellows also. The crucible was apparently used by the Egyptians in secondary
melting, such remains at Mt. Sinai probably dating before 2000 B.c. With the advent of the
Prophets, and the first Greek literature—gth to 7th century B.c.—we find frequent references
to bellows. The remains of smelting appliances at Mt. Laurion (500-300 B.c.) do not indicate
much advance over the primitive hearth ; however, at this locality we do find evidence of
the ability to separate minerals by specific gravity, by washing crushed ore over inclined
surfaces with a sort of buddle attachment. Stone grinding-mills were used to crush ore from
the earliest times of Mt. Laurion down té the Middle Ages. About the beginning of the
Christian era the writings of Diodorus, Strabo, Dioscorides, and Pliny indicate considerable
advance in appliances. Strabo describes high stacks to carry off lead fumes; Dioscorides
explains a furnace with a dust-chamber to catch pompholyx (zinc oxide); Pliny refers to the
ad and lower crucibles (a forehearth) and to the pillars and arches of the furnaces. From

of their descriptions we may conclude that the furnaces had then reached some size, and
were, of course, equipped with bellows. At this time sulphide copper and lead ores were
smelted; but as to fluxes, except lead for silver, and lead a8 g soda for gold, we have practically
no mention. Charcoal was the universal fuel for smelting down to the 18th century. Both
Dioscorides and Pliny describe a distillation apparatus used to recover quicksilver. A formid-
able list of mineral products and metal alloys in use, indicate in themselves considerable
apparatus, of the details of which we have no indication; in the main these products were
lead sulphide, sulphate, and oxide (red-lead and litharge) ; zinc oxide ; iron sulphide, oxide
and sulphate ; arsenic and antimony sulphides ; mercury sulphide, sulphur, bitumen, soda,
alum and potash, ; and of the alloys, bronze, brass, pewter, electrum and steel.

_ From this period to the period of the awakening of learning our only light is an
occasional gleam from Theophilus and the Alchemists. The former gave a more detailed
description of metallurgical appliances than had been done before, but there is little vital
change apparent from the apparatus of Roman times. The Alchemists gave a great stimulus
to industrial chemistry in the discovery of the mineral acids, and described distillation apparatus
of approximately modern form.

; The next period—the Renaissance—is one in which our descriptions are for the first
time satisfactory, and a discussion would be but a review of De Re Metallica.

356 BOOK IX.

of the bellows. The whole of the front furnace wall is not more than five feet
high, so that the ore may be conveniently put into the furnace, together with
those things which the master needs for his work of smelting. Both the side
walls of the furnace are six feet high, and the back one seven feet, and they
are three palms thick. The interior of the furnace is five palms wide, six
palms and a digit long, the width being measured by the space which lies
between the two side walls, and the length by the space between the front and
the back walls ; however, the upper part of the furnace widens out somewhat.

There are two doors in the second wall if there are six furnaces, one
of the doors being between the second and third furnaces and the other
between the fourth and fifth furnaces. They are a cubit wide and six feet
high, in order that the smelters may not have mishaps in coming and going.
It is necessary to have a door to the right of the first furnace, and similarly
one to the left of the last, whether the wall is longer or not. The second

wall is carried further when the rooms for the cupellation furnaces, or any

other building, adjoin the roms for the blast furnaces, these buildings being
only divided by a partition. The smelter, and the ones who attend to the
first and the last furnaces, if they wish to look at the bellows or to do anything
else, go out through the doors at the end of the wall, and the other people go
through the other doors, which are the common ones. The furnaces are placed
at a distance of six feet from one another, in order that the smelters and their
assistants may more easily sustain the fierceness of the heat. Inasmuch as
the interior of each furnace is five palms wide and each is six feet distant
from the other, and inasmuch as there is a space of four feet three palms at
the right side of the first furnace and as much at the left side of the last
furnace, and there are to be six furnaces in one building, then it is necessary
to make the second wall fifty-two feet long ; because the total of the widths
of all of the furnaces is seven and a half feet, the total of the spaces between
the furnaces is thirty feet, the space on the outer sides of the first and last
furnaces is nine feet and two palms, and the thickness of the two transverse
walls is five feet, which make a total measurement of fifty-two feet.*
Outside each furnace hearth there is a small pit full of powder which is
compressed by ramming, and in this manner is made the forehearth which
receives the metal flowing from the furnaces. Of this I will speak later.
Buried about a cubit under the forehearth and the hearth of the furnace
is a transverse water-tank, three feet long, three palms wide and a cubit deep.
It is made of stone or brick, with a stone cover, for if it were not covered, the
heat would draw the moisture from below and the vapour might be blown
into the hearth of the furnace as well as into the forehearth, and would
dampen the blast. The moisture would vitiate the blast, and part of the
metal would be absorbed and part would be mixed with the slags, and in
this manner the melting would be greatly damaged. From each water-tank
is built a walled vent, to the same depth as the tank, but six digits wide ;

%Agricola has here either forgotten to take into account his three-palm-thick furnace
walls, which will make the length of this long wall sixty-one feet, or else he has included this
foot and a half in each case in the six-foot distance between the furnaces, so that the actual
clear space is only four and a half feet between the furnace with four feet on the ends.

Se eee

BOOK IX.

>>

4%

shea be be be evo
. w\sk= he) = b* &* be kc hb
she Vel sheleb=b: ke) it)" \a =
s whe he Leho bebe he heh bene i
ee
——— nen
ay Tiere aca ————— ——4
———— ———————<——— ——
—— ———— \ a
—- ——— ——————
——— ———————— =e
—————— ————
—- 4 ————————=SS 1 ——
————__ —————_———=
————————]
————— ——— —
——— —-
———=S —
————— —"
Oo ; =—
—— —
— - == er
ne = L———~ =
=——> i — =
— —_
— =
———
—— <<
—_—_—— =
——ae
———
—a
< —-
=
Fi a
>
>
E
|
2 Ss ©
>

id

—

tote!
mS

——_ —— SS
ee — 3 ==
——S ay
7

— Ry si t

@
oe
‘

(i

ad
cos)

bd

A—FuRNACES. B—FOREHEARTRHS.

388 BOOK IX.

this vent slopes upward, and sooner or later penetrates through to the other
side of the wall, against which the furnace is built. At the end of this vent
there is an opening where the steam, into which the water has been converted,
is exhausted through a copper or iron tube or pipe. This method of making
the tank and the vent is much the best. Another kind has a similar vent
but a different tank, for it does not lie transversely under the forehearth,
but lengthwise ; it is two feet and a palm long, and a foot and three palms
wide, and a foot and a palm deep. This method of making tanks is not
condemned by us, as is the construction of those tanks without a vent;
the latter, which have no opening into the air through which the vapour may
discharge freely, are indeed to be condemned.

= ph
© =
te. —
D =
E
.. iG
85
Fy
1 3
é :
= >
3 a —— “ty
z —S es > Pt =
= ~2 2 ohe : :

A—FurnNAcES. B—FoREHEARTH. C—Door. D—WaTER TANK. E—STONE WHICH
COVERS IT. F—MATERIAL OF THE VENT WALLS. G—STONE WHICH COVERS IT. H—PIPE
EXHALING THE VAPOUR.

Fifteen feet behind the second wall is constructed the first wall, thirteen
feet high. In both of these are fixed roof beams‘, which are a foot wide and

‘The paucity of terms in Latin for describing structural members, and the consequent
repetition of “beam” (tabs), “timber” (tignum), ‘‘ billet” (tigillum), “ pole” (asser),
with such modifications as small, large, and transverse, and with long explanatory clauses
showing their location, renders the original very difficult to follow. We have, therefore,
introduced such terms as “ posts,” “ tie-beams,” “‘ sweeps,” “levers,” ‘‘ rafters,’’ “ sills,’’
“‘ moulding,” “‘ braces,” “ cleats,” ‘‘ supports,” etc., as the context demands.

BOOK IX. 359

J ANNU SN :

M\\ AQ

2 ‘in oo

ANAND ARK

TU
NANNY

ANU

360 BOOK IX.

thick, and nineteen feet and a palm long; these are placed three feet distant
from one another. As the second wall is two feet higher than the first wall,
recesses are cut in the back of it two feet high, one foot wide, and a palm deep,
and in these recesses, as it were in mortises, are placed one end of each of
the beams. Into these ends are mortised the bottoms of just as many posts ;
these posts are twenty-four feet high, three palms wide and thick, and from
the tops of the posts the same number of rafters stretch downward to the
ends of the beams superimposed on the first wall; the upper ends of the
rafters are mortised into the posts and the lower ends are mortised into the
ends of the beams laid on the first wall; the rafters support the roof,
which consists of burnt tiles. Each separate rafter is propped up by a
separate timber, which is a cross-beam, and is joined to its post. Planks
close together are affixed to the posts above the furnaces ; these planks are
about two digits thick and a palm wide, and they, together with the wicker
work interposed between the timbers, are covered with lute so that there may
be no risk of fire to the timbers and wicker-work. In this practical manner
is constructed the back part of the works, which contains the bellows, their
frames, the mechanism for compressing the bellows, and the instrument for
distending them, of all of which I will speak hereafter.

In front of the furnaces is constructed the third long wall and likewise
the fourth. Both are nine feet high, but of the same length and thickness as
the other two, the fourth being nine feet distant from the third; the
third is twenty-one and a half feet from the second. At a distance of
twelve feet from the second wall, four posts seven and a half feet high, a cubit
wide and thick, are set upon rock laid underneath. Into the tops of the
posts the roof beam is mortised; this roof beam is two feet and as many

palms longer than the distance between the second and the fifth transverse

walls, in order that its ends may rest on the transverse walls. If there should
not be so long a beam at hand, two are substituted for it. As the length of
the long beam is as above, and as the posts are equidistant, it is necessary
that the posts should be a distance of nine feet, one palm, two and two-fifths
digits from each other, and the end ones this distance from the transverse
walls. On this longitudinal beam and to the third and fourth walls are fixed
twelve secondary beams twenty-four feet long, one foot wide, three palms
thick, and distant from each other three feet, one palm, and two digits. In
these secondary beams, where they rest on the longitudinal beams, are mortised
the ends of the same number of rafters as there are posts which stand on the
second wall. The ends of the rafters do not reach to the tops of the posts,
but are two feet away from them, that through this opening, which is like
the open part of a forge, the furnaces can emit their fumes. In order that
the rafters should not fall down, they are supported partly by iron rods,
which extend from each rafter to the opposite post, and partly supported
by a few tie-beams, which in the same manner extend from some rafters to
the posts opposite, and give them stability. To these tie-beams, as well as
to the rafters which face the posts, a number of boards, about two digits thick
and a palm wide, are fixed at a distance of a palm from each other, and are

See ne re aes i

tain hl ba

a arate

BOOK IX, 361

covered with lute so that they do not catch fire. In the secondary beams,
where they are laid on the fourth wall, are mortised the lower ends of the
same number of rafters as those in a set of rafters> opposite them. From
the third long wall these rafters are joined and tied to the ends of the opposite
rafters, so that they may not slip, and besides they are strengthened with
substructures which are made of cross and oblique timbers. The rafters
support the roof.

C 2 8 24 >» 36 4. 48 $458 3

s2- ~
ae ae F G :
a mn |
i -¢
42 - :
-R
a =| =
a -2
7 - Cc Dj}:
E ~ 24
: B L ;
4-\A
: -3
18 - ;
: —36
12- ,
: ~ 42
6 - :
, -48
: H = I K >
- — $2

2D dee i Jie an, Cedi in Fos Se eee gee ee ea ee Yolen eee
a ee Be eh Me

THE FOUR LONG WALLS: A—First. B—Srconp. C—Tuirp. D—Fourtu. THE
SEVEN TRANSVERSE WALLS: E—First. F—SrEconp. G—THIRD. H—Fourtu.
I—FirtH. K—SrxtoH. L—SEvENTH, OR MIDDLE.

In this manner the front part of the building is made, and is divided into
three parts; the first part is twelve feet wide and is under the hood, which
consists of two walls, one vertical and one inclined. The second part is the
same number of feet wide and is for the reception of the ore to be smelted,
the fluxes, the charcoal, and other things which are needed by the smelter.
The third part is nine feet wide and contains two separate rooms of equal
size, in one of which is the assay furnace, while the other contains the metal
to be melted in the cupellation furnaces. It is thus necessary that in the

‘This set of rafters appears to start from the longitudinal beam.

362 BOOK IX,

building there should be, besides the four long walls, seven transverse walls,
of which the first is constructed from the upper end of the first long wall to
the upper end of the second long wall; the second proceeds from the end
of this to the end of the third long wall; the third likewise from this end of
the last extends to the end of the fourth long wall; the fourth leads from
the lower end of the first long wall to the lower end of the second long wall ;
the fifth extends from the end of this to the end of the third long wall; the
sixth extends from this last end to the end of the fourth long wall; the
seventh divides into two parts the space between the third and fourth long
walls.

To return to the back part of the building, in which, as I said, are the
bellows®, their frames, the machinery for compressing them, and the instru-
ment for distending them. Each bellows consists of a body and a head.
The body is composed of two “ boards,” two bows, and two hides. The
upper board is a palm thick, five feet and three palms long, and two and a half
feet wide at the back part, where each of the sides is a little curved, and it is
a cubit wide at the front part near the head. The whole of the body of the
bellows tapers toward the head. That which we now call the “ board”
consists of two pieces of pine, joined and glued together, and of two strips of
linden wood which bind the edges of the board, these being seven digits
wide at the back, and in front near the head of the bellows one and a half
digits wide. These strips are glued to the boards, so that there shall be less
damage from the iron nails driven through the hide. There are some people
who do not surround the boards with strips, but use boards only, which
are very thick. The upper board has an aperture and a handle; the
aperture is in the middle of the board and is one foot three palms distant
from where the board joins the head of the bellows, and is six digits long and
four wide. The lid for this aperture is two palms and a digit long and wide,
and three digits thick ; toward the back of the lid is a little notch cut
into the surface so that it may be caught by the hand ; a groove is cut out
of the top of the front and sides, so that it may engage in mouldings a palm
wide and three digits thick, which are also cut out in a similar manner under
the edges. Now, when the lid is drawn forward the hole is closed, and
when drawn back it is opened ; the smelter opens the aperture a little so that
the air may escape from the bellows through it, if he fears the hides might be
burst when the bellows are too vigorously and quickly inflated ; he, however,
closes the aperture if the hides are ruptured and the air escapes. Others
perforate the upper board with two or three round holes in the same place as
the rectangular one, and they insert plugs in them which they draw out

®Devices for creating an air current must be of very old invention, for it is impossible
to conceive of anything but the crudest melting of a few simple ores without some forced
draft. Wilkinson (The Ancient Egyptians, 11, p. 316) gives a copy of an illustration of
a foot-bellows from a tomb of the time of Thothmes 111. (1500 B.c.). The rest of the world
therefore, probably obtained them from the Egyptians. They are mentioned frequently in
the Bible, the most pointed reference to metallurgical purposes being Jeremiah (vi, 29):
“The bellows are burned, the lead is consumed in the fire ; the founder melteth in vain; for
“the wicked are not plucked away.” Strabo (vu, 3) states that Ephorus ascribed the
invention of bellows to Anacharsis—a Thracian prince of about 600 B.c.

BOOK IX. 363

when it is necessary. The wooden handle is seven palms long, or even longer,
in order that it may extend outside; one-half of this handle, two palms
wide and one thick, is glued to the end of the board and fastened with pegs
covered with glue ; the other half projects beyond the board, and is rounded
and seven digits thick. Besides this, to the handle and to the board is fixed
a cleat two feet long, as many palms wide and one palm thick, and to the under
side of the same board, at a distance of three palms from the end, is fixed
another cleat two feet long, in order that the board may sustain the force
of distension and compression ; these two cleats are glued to the board, and
are fastened to it with pegs covered with glue.

The lower bellows-board, like the upper, is made of two pieces of pine
and of two strips of linden wood, all glued together ; it is of the same width
and thickness as the upper board, but is a cubit longer, this extension being
part of the head of which I have more to say a little later. This lower bellows-
board has an air-hole and an iron ring. The air-hole is about a cubit distant
from the posterior end, and it is midway between the sides of the bellows-
board, and is a foot long and three palms wide; it is divided into equal
parts by a small rib which forms part of the board, and is not cut from it ;
this rib is a palm long and one-third of a digit wide. The flap of the air-
hole is a foot and three digits long, three palms and as many digits wide ;
it is a thin board covered with goat skin, the hairy part of which is turned
toward the ground. There is fixed to one end of the flap, with small iron
nails, one-half of a doubled piece of leather a palm wide and as long as the
flap is wide ; the other half of the leather, which is behind the flap, is twice
perforated, as is also the bellows-board, and these perforations are seven
digits apart. Passing through these a string is tied on the under side of the
board ; and thus the flap when tied to the board does not fall away. In this
manner are made the flap and the air-hole, so when the bellows are distended
the flap opens, when compressed it closes. At a distance of about a foot
beyond the air-hole a slightly elliptical iron ring, two palms long and one
wide, is fastened by means of an iron staple to the under part of the bellows-
board ; it is at a distance of three palms from the back of the bellows. In
order that the lower bellows-board may remain stationary, a wooden bolt is
driven into the ring, after it penetrates through the hole in the transverse
supporting plank which forms part of the frame for the bellows. There are
some who dispense with the ring and fasten the bellows-board to the frame
with two iron screws something like nails.

The bows are placed between the two boards and are of the same length
as the upper board. They are both made of four pieces of linden wood three
digits thick, of which the two long ones are seven digits wide at the back and
two and a half at the front; the third piece, which is at the back, is two
palms wide. The ends of the bows are a little more than a digit thick, and are
mortised to the long pieces, and both having been bored through, wooden
pegs covered with glue are fixed in the holes ; they are thus joined and glued
to the long pieces. Each of the ends is bowed (arcuatur) to meet the end of
the long part of the bow, whence its name “bow” originated. The fourth

364 BOOK IX,

piece keeps the ends of the bow distended, and is placed a cubit distant from
the head of the bellows; the ends of this piece are mortised into the ends
of the bow and are joined and glued to them ; its length without the tenons
is a foot, and its width a palm and two digits. There are, besides, two other
very small pieces glued to the head of the bellows and to the lower board,
and fastened to them by wooden pegs covered with glue, and they are three
palms and two digits long, one palm high, and a digit thick, one half being
slightly cut away. These pieces keep the ends of the bow away from the
hole in the bellows-head, for if they were not there, the ends, forced inward
by the great and frequent movement, would be broken.

The leather is of ox-hide or horse-hide, but that of the ox is far preferable
to that of the horse. Each of these hides, for there are two, is three and a
half feet wide where they are joined at the back part of the bellows. A
long leathern thong is laid along each of the bellows-boards and each of the
bows, and fastened by T-shaped iron nails five digits long; each of the
horns of the nails is two and a half digits long and half a digit wide. The
hide is attached to the bellows-boards by means of these nails, so that a horn
of one nail almost touches the horn of the next ; but it is different with the
bows, for the hide is fastened to the back piece of the bow by only two nails,
and to the two long pieces by four nails. In this practical manner they put
ten nails in one bow and the same number in the other. Sometimes when the
smelter is afraid that the vigorous motion of the bellows may pull or tear
the hide from the bows, he also fastens it with little strips of pine by means of
another kind of nail, but these strips cannot be fastened to the back pieces of
the bow, because these are somewhat bent. Some people do not fix the
hide to the bellows-boards and bows by iron nails, but by iron screws,
screwed at the same time through strips laid over the hide. This method
of fastening the hide is less used than the other, although there is no doubt
that it surpasses it in excellence.

Lastly, the head of the bellows, like the rest of the body, consists of two
boards, and of a nozzle besides.’ The upper board is one cubit long, one and a
half palms thick. The lower board is part of the whole of the lower bellows-
board ; it is of the same length as the upper piece, but a palm and a digit
thick. From these two glued together is made the head, into which, when it
has been perforated, the nozzle is fixed. The back part of the head, where
it is attached to the rest of the bellows-body, is a cubit wide, but three palms
forward it becomes two digits narrower. Afterward it is somewhat cut
away so that the front end may be rounded, until it is two palms and as
many digits in diameter, at which point it is bound with an iron ring three
digits wide.

The nozzle is a pipe made of a thin plate of iron ; the diameter in front is
three digits, while at the back, where it is encased in the head of the bellows,
it is a palm high and two palms wide. It thus gradually widens out, especially
at the back, in order that a copious wind can penetrate into it; the whole
nozzle is three feet long.

BOOK IX, 365

a

SENT TENCE A, == VA WatretAtaaastibid

my A AK TAUnOMUr Tt
MHL \\ = a
ge \ ‘eee ===
Ae NN
\= ; AANA '

ST a TL

-- SD Sa ON SS
RR —

ee 3

cyan sven
Ti) MTL sani se Z
Wy wWwwIWZZz CLEA Ls
Yr AZZ
'y i Y=
it ————

VUODUADUDLAANES LUA AB UR EUERUDUO EO RUE EPA Giubasnuateaes DL EO er Tn Wo) wu SS

— Ce Z APT EEE.

A—UPPER BELLOWS-BOARD. B—LOWERBELLOWS-BOARD. C—THE TWO PIECES OF WOOD
OF WHICH EACH CONSISTS. D—POSTERIOR ARCHED PART OF EACH. E—TAPERED FRONT
PART OF EACH. F—PIECES OF LINDEN Woop. G—APERTURE IN THE UPPER BOARD.
H—Lip. I—LItTTLE MOULDINGS. oF woop. K—HANDLE. L—CLEAT ON THE OUTSIDE.
THE CLEAT INSIDE I AM NOT ABLE TO DEPICT. M—INTERIOR OF THE LOWER BELLOWS-
BOARD. N—PART OF THE HEAD. O—AIR-HOLE. P—SUPPORTING BAR. Q—FLApP.
R—Hipve. S—Tuonc. T—ExXTERIOR OF THE LOWER BOARD. V—STAPLE. X—RING.
Y—Bow. Z—Its tone pieces. AA—BACK PIECE OF THE BOW. BB—THE BOWED

ENDS. CC—CROSSBAR DISTENDING THE BOW. DD—THE TWO LITTLE PIECES.
EE—Hipe. FF—Narm. GG—Horn oF THE nat. HH--A screw. II—LOoNG THONG.
KK—HEap. LL—ItTs LOWER BOARD. MM—ITs UPPER BOARD. NN—N0o22ZLE.

OO—THE WHOLE OF THE LOWER BELLOWS-BOARD. PP—THE TWO EXTERIOR PLATES OF

THE HEAD HINGES. QO—THEIR CURVED PIECE. RR-—MIDDLE PLATE OF THE HEAD.

SS—THE TWO OUTER PLATES OF THE UPPER BELLOWS-BOARD. TI—ITS MIDDLE PLATE.
VV—LITTLE AXLE. XX—WHOLE BELLOWS.

26

366 BOOK IX.

The upper bellows-board is joined to the head of the bellows in the
following way. An iron plate’, a palm wide and one and a half palms long,
is first fastened to the head at a distance of three digits from the end; from
this plate there projects a piece three digits long and two wide, curved
in a small circle. The other side has a similar plate. Then in the same
part of the upper board are fixed two other iron plates, distant two digits
from the edge, each of which are six digits wide and seven long; in each
of these plates the middle part is cut away for a little more than three
digits in length and for two in depth, so that the curved part of the plates
on the head corresponding to them may fit into this cut out part. From
both sides of each plate there project pieces, three digits long and two
digits wide, similarly curved into small circles. A little iron pin is passed
through these curved pieces of the plates, like a little axle, so that the upper
board of the bellows may turn upon it. The little axle is six digits long and a
little more than a digit thick, and a small groove is cut out of the upper
board, where the plates are fastened to it, in such a manner that the little axle
when fixed to the plates may not fall out. Both plates fastened to the
bellows-board are affixed by four iron nails, of which the heads are on the
inner part of the board, whereas the points, clinched at the top, are
transformed into heads, so to speak. Each of the other plates is fastened
to the head of the bellows by means of a nail with a wide head, and by two
other nails of which the heads are on the edge of the bellows-head. Midway
between the two plates on the bellows-board there remains a space two
palms wide, which is covered by an iron plate fastened to the board by
little nails ; and another plate corresponding to this is fastened to the head
between the other two plates; they are two palms and the same number
of digits wide.

The hide is common to the head as to all the other parts of the body ;
the plates are covered with it, as well as the front part of the upper bellows-
board, and both the bows and the back of the head of the bellows, so that the
wind may not escape from that part of the bellows. It is three palms and as
many digits wide, and long enough to extend from one of the sides of the
lower board over the back of the upper ; it is fastened by many T-headed
nails on one side to the upper board, and on the other side to the head of
the bellows, and both ends are fastened to the lower bellows-board.

In the above manner the bellows is made. As two are required for each
furnace, it is necessary to have twelve bellows, if there are to be six furnaces
in one works.

Now it is time to describe their framework. First, two sills a little
shorter than the furnace wall are placed on the ground. The front one of
these is three palms wide and thick, and the back one three palms and two
digits. The front one is two feet distant from the back wall of the furnace, and
the back one is six feet three palms distant from the front one. They are set into
the earth, that they may remain firm ; there are some who accomplish this by
means of pegs which, through several holes, penetrate deeply into the ground.

"This whole arrangement could be summarized by the word “ hinge.”

BOOK IX. 367

Then twelve short posts are erected, whose lower ends are mortised into
the sill that is near the back of the furnace wall; these posts are two feet
high, exclusive of the tenons, and are three palms and the same number of
digits wide, and two palms thick. A slot one and a half palms wide is cut
through them, beginning two palms from the bottom and extending for a
height of three palms. All the posts are not placed at the same intervals, the
first being at a distance of three feet five digits from the second, and likewise
the third from the fourth, but the second is two feet one palm and three
digits from the third ; the intervals between the other posts are arranged in
the same manner, equal and unequal, of which each four pertain to two
furnaces. The upper ends of these posts are mortised into a transverse
beam which is twelve feet, two palms, and three digits long, and projects
five digits beyond the first post and to the same distance beyond the fourth ;
it is two palms and the same number of digits wide, and two palms thick.
Since each separate transverse beam supports four bellows, it is necessary to
have three of them.

Behind the twelve short posts the same number of higher posts are
erected, of which each has the middle part of the lower end cut out, so that
its two resulting lower ends are mortised into the back sill; these posts,
exclusive of the tenons, are twelve feet and two palms high, and are five palms
wide and two palms thick. They are cut out from the bottom upward, the
slot being four feet and five digits high and six digits wide. The upper ends of
these posts are mortised into a long beam imposed upon them ; this long
beam is placed close under the timbers which extend from the wall at the
back of the furnace to the first long wall; the beam is three palms wide
and two palms thick, and forty-three feet long. If such a long one is
not at hand, two or three may be substituted for it, which when joined together
make up that length. These higher posts are not placed at equal distances,
but the first is at a distance of two feet three palms one digit from the second,
and the third is at the same distance from the fourth ; while the second is at a
distance of one foot three palms and the same number of digits from the
third, and in the same manner the rest of the posts are arranged at equal
and unequal intervals. Moreover, there is in every post, where it faces the
shorter post, a mortise at a foot and a digit above the slot ; in these mortises
of the four posts is tenoned a timber which itself has four mortises. Tenons
are enclosed in mortises in order that they may be better joined, and they
are transfixed with wooden pins. This timber is thirteen feet three palms
one digit long, and it projects beyond the first post a distance of two palms
and two digits, and to the same number of palms and digits beyond the
fourth post. It is two palms and as many digits wide, and also two palms
thick. As there are twelve posts it is necessary to have three timbers of this
kind.

On each of these timbers, and on each of the cross-beams which are laid
upon the shorter posts, are placed four planks, each nine feet long, two palms
three digits wide, and two palms one digit thick. The first plank is five feet
one palm one digit distant from the second, at the front as well as at the back,

368 BOOK IX.

for each separate plank is placed outside of the posts. The third is at the
same distance from the fourth, but the second is one foot and three digits
distant from the third. In the same manner the rest of the eight planks are
arranged at intervals, the fifth from the sixth and the seventh from the eighth
are at the same distances as the first from the second and the third from the
fourth ; the sixth is at the same distance from the seventh as the second
from the third.

Two planks support one transverse plank six feet long, one foot wide, one
palm thick, placed at a distance of three feet and two palms from the back
posts. When there are six of these supporting planks, on each separate one
are placed two bellows; the lower bellows-boards project a palm beyond
them. From each of the bellows-boards an iron ring descends through a hole
in its supporting plank, and a wooden peg is driven into the ring, so that the
bellows-board may remain:stationary, as I stated above.

The two bellows communicate, each by its own plank, to the back of a
copper pipe in which are set both of the nozzles, and their ends are tightly

Mp

a.

A—FRONT SILL. B—Back sitt. C—Front posts. D—THEIR SLOTs. E—BEAM

IMPOSED UPON THEM. F-—HIGHER posts. G—THEIR SLOTS. H—BEAM IMPOSED UPON

THEM, I—TIMBER JOINEDIN THE MORTISES OF THE PosTS. K—-PLANKs. L—TRANSVERSE

SUPPORTING PLANKS. M-—THE HOLES IN THEM. N-—PipzE. O-—ITS FRONTEND. P—ITs
REAR END.

.
i
7

BOOK IX. 369

fastened in it. The pipe is made of a rolled copper or iron plate, a foot and
two palms and the same number of digits long; the plate is half a digit
thick, but a digit thick at the back. The interior of the pipe is three digits
wide, and two and a half digits high in the front, for it is not absolutely round ;
and at the back it is a foot and two palms and three digits in diameter. The
plate from which the pipe is made is not entirely joined up, but at the front
there is left a crack half a digit wide, increasing at the back to three digits.
This pipe is placed in the hole in the furnace, which, as I said, was in the
middle of the wall and the arch. The nozzles of the bellows, placed in this
pipe, are a distance of five digits from its front end.

The levers are of the same number as the bellows, and when depressed
by the cams of the long axle they compress the bellows. These levers
are eight feet three palms long, one palm wide and thick, and the ends are
inserted in the slots of the posts; they project beyond the front posts to a
distance of two palms, and the same distance beyond the back posts in order
that each may have its end depressed by its two cams on the axle. The
cams not only penetrate into the slots of the back posts, but project three
digits beyond them. An iron pin is set in round holes made through both
sides of the slot of each front post, at three palms and as many digits from the
bottom ; the pin penetrates the lever, which turns about it when depressed
or raised. The back of the lever for the length of a cubit is a palm and a
digit wider than the rest, and is perforated ; in this hole is engaged a bar
six feet and two palms long, three digits wide, and about one and one-half
digits thick ; it is somewhat hooked at the upper end, and approaches the
handle of the bellows. Under the lever there is a nail, which penetrates
through a hole in the bar, so that the lever and bar may move together. The
bar is perforated in the upper end at a distance of six digits from the top ;
this hole is two palms long and a digit wide, and in it is engaged the hook of
an iron implement which is a digit thick. At the upper part this implement
has either a round or square opening, like a link, and at the lower end is
hooked ; the link is two digits high and wide and the hook is three digits long ;
the middle part between the link and the hook is three palms and two
digits long. The link of this implement engages either the handle of the
bellows, or else a large ring which does engage it. This iron ring is a digit thick,
two palms wide on the inside of the upper part, and two digits in the
lower part, and this iron ring, not unlike the first one, engages the
handle of the bellows. The iron ring either has its narrower part turned
upward, and in it is engaged the ring of another iron implement, similar
to the first, whose hook, extending upward, grips the rope fastened to the
iron ring holding the end of the second lever, of which I will speak
presently ; or else the iron ring grips this lever, and then in its hook is
engaged the ring of the other implement whose ring engages the handle of the
bellows, and in this case the rope is dispensed with.

Resting on beams fixed in the two walls is a longitudinal beam, at a
distance of four and a half feet from the back posts; it is two palms wide,

370 BOOK IX.

)

/

%
Y

GY
eli

AN
S

SS
SAAS

rE ia

SSS

m
=

SS ; “Un Qh ; ree SN SONI
NAY " ~ : =

AIA Ww

y
PISS: My SS

A—LEVER WHICH WHEN DEPRESSED BY MEANS OF A CAM COMPRESSES THE BELLOWS.
B—SLOTs THROUGH THE POSTS. C—BaArR. D—IRON IMPLEMENT WITH A RECTANGULAR
LINK. E—IRON INSTRUMENT WITH ROUND RING. F—HANDLE OF BELLOWS. G—UPPER
post. H—UppER LEVER. I—BoX WITH EQUAL SIDES. K—BOoX NARROW AT THE
BOTTOM. L—PEGS DRIVEN INTO THE UPPER LEVER.
one and a half palms thick. There are mortised into this longitudinal beam
the lower ends of upper posts three palms wide and two thick, which are six
feet two palms high, exclusive of their tenons. The upper ends of these
posts are mortised into an upper longitudinal beam, which lies close under
the rafters of the building; this upper longitudinal beam is two palms
wide and one thick. The upper posts have a slot cut out upward from a
point two feet from the bottom, and the slot is two feet high and six digits
wide. Through these upper posts a round hole is bored from one side to
the other at a point three feet one palm from the bottom, and a small iron axle
penetrates through the hole and is fastened there. Around this small iron
axle turns the second lever when it is depressed and raised. This lever is
eight feet long, and its other end is three digits wider than the rest of the
lever ; at this widest point is a hole two digits wide and three high, in which
is fixed an iron ring, to which is tied the rope I have mentioned ; it is five
palms long, its upper loop is two palms and as many digits wide, and the

BOOK IX. 371

lower one is one palm one digit wide. This half of the second lever, the end
of which I have just mentioned, is three palms high and one wide ; it projects
three feet beyond the slot of the post on which it turns ; the other end, which
faces the back wall of the furnaces, is one foot and a palm high and a foot wide.

On this part of the lever stands and is fixed a box three and a half feet
long, one foot and one palm wide, and half a foot deep ; but these measure-
ments vary; sometimes the bottom of this box is narrower, sometimes
equal in width to the top. In either case, it is filled with stones and earth
to make it heavy, but the smelters have to be on their guard and
make provision against the stones falling out, owing to the constant
motion ; this is prevented by means of an iron band which is placed over
the top, both ends being wedge-shaped and driven into the lever so that the
stones can be held in. Some people, in place of the box, drive four or more
pegs into the lever and put mud between them, the required amount being
added to the weight or taken away from it.

There remains to be considered the method of using this machine. The
lower lever, being depressed by the cams, compresses the bellows, and the
compression drives the air through the nozzle. Then the weight of the box
on the other end of the upper lever raises the upper bellows-board, and the
air is drawn in, entering through the air-hole.

The machine whose cams depress the lower lever is made as follows.
First there is an axle, on whose end outside the building is a water-wheel ;
at the other end, which is inside the building, is a drum made of rundles.
This drum is composed of two double hubs, a foot apart, which are five digits
thick, the radius all round being a foot and two digits ; but they are double,
because each hub is composed of two discs, equally thick, fastened together
with wooden pegs glued in. These hubs are sometimes covered above and
around by iron plates. The rundles are thirty in number, a foot and two
palms and the same number of digits long, with each end fastened into a hub ;
they are rounded, three digits in diameter, and the same number of digits
apart. In this practical manner is made the drum composed of rundles.

There is a toothed wheel, two palms and a digit thick, on the end
of another axle; this wheel is composed of a double disc®. The inner disc
is composed of four segments a palm thick, everywhere two palms and a
digit wide. The outer disc, like the inner, is made of four segments, and is
a palm and a digit thick ; it is not equally wide, but where the head of the
spokes are inserted it is a foot and a palm and digit wide, while on each side
of the spokes it becomes a little narrower, until the narrowest part is only
two palms and the same number of digits wide. The outer segments are joined
to the inner ones in such a manner that, on the one hand, an outer segment
ends in the middle of an inner one, and, on the other hand, the ends of the
inner segments are joined in the middle of the outer ones ; there is no doubt
that by this kind of joining the wheel is made stronger. The outer segments
are fastened to the inner by means of a large number of wooden pegs. Each

_ *The rim of this wheel is obviously made of segments fixed in two layers ; the “‘ disc”
meaning the aggregate of segments on either side of the wheel.

EN
D RXOOMMOOOY
IANS

A—AXLE. B—WATER-WHEEL. C—-DRUM COMPOSED OF RUNDLES. D—OTHER AXLE.
E—TooTtHED WHEEL. F—Its spokes. G—ITS SEGMENTS. H—ITs TEETH. I—CAMS
OF THE AXLE,

segment, measured over its round back, is four feet and three palms long.
There are four spokes, each two palms wide and a palm and a digit thick; their
length, excluding the tenons, being two feet and three digits. One end of the
spoke is mortised into the axle, where it is firmly fastened with pegs; the
wide part of the other end, in the shape of a triangle, is mortised into the
outer segment opposite it, keeping the shape of the same as far as the segment
ascends. They also are joined together with wooden pegs glued in, and these
pegs are driven into the spokes under the inner disc. The parts of the spokes
in the shape of the triangle are on the inside ; the outer part issimple. This
triangle has two sides equal, the erect ones as is evident, which are a palm
long ; the lower side is not of the same length, but is five digits long, and a
mortise of the same shape is cut out of the segments. The wheel has sixty
teeth, since it is necessary that the rundle drum should revolve twice while
the toothed wheel revolves once. The teeth are a foot long, and project one
palm from the inner disc of the wheel, and three digits from the outer disc;

-_

Re eA Sede ee eet a,

BOOK IX, 373

they are a palm wide and two and a half digits thick, and it is necessary
that they should be three digits apart, as were the rundles.

The axle should have a thickness in proportion to the spokes and the
segments. As it has two cams to depress each of the levers, it is necessary that
it should have twenty-four cams, which project beyond it a foot and a palm and
a digit. The cams are of almost semicircular shape, of which the widest part is
three palms and a digit wide, and they are a palm thick; they are
distributed according to the four sides of the axle, on the upper, the lower
and the two lateral sides. The axle has twelve holes, of which the first
penetrates through from the upper side to the lower, the second from one
lateral side to the other ; the first hole is four feet two palms distant from
the second ; each alternate one of these holes is made in the same direc-
tion, and they are arranged at equal intervals. Each single cam must
be opposite another; the first is inserted into the upper part of the first
hole, the second into the lower part of the same hole, and so fixed by
pegs that they do not fall out; the third cam is inserted into that part
of the second hole which is on the right side, and the fourth into that
part on the left. In like manner all the cams are inserted into the consecutive
holes, for which reason it happens that the cams depress the levers of the

TILE LRA Bg ph AEA
MITTLALAAAAAAA A bedded
LAt¢AAdAAdhiAhibAdiAuAAA/ FS

~4

A—CwarcoaL. B—MortTArR-Box. C—STAMPS.

374 BOOK IX.

bellows in rotation. Finally we must not omit to state that this is only one
of many such axles having cams and a water-wheel.

I have arrived thus far with many words, and yet it is not unseasonable
that I have in this place pursued the subject minutely, since the smelting of all
the metals, to which I am about to proceed, could not be undertaken without
it.

The ores of gold, silver, copper, and lead, are smelted in a furnace by
four different methods. The first method is for the rich ores of gold or silver,
the second for the mediocre ores, the third for the poor ores, and the fourth
method is for those ores which contain copper or lead, whether they contain
precious metals or are wanting in them. The smelting of the first ores is
performed in the furnace of which the tap-hole is intermittently closed ; the
other three ores are melted in furnaces of which the tap-holes are always
open.

First, I will speak of the manner in which the furnaces are prepared for
the smelting of the ores, and of the first method of smelting. The powder
from which the hearth and forehearth should be made is composed of char-
coal and earth (clay ?). The charcoal is crushed by the stamps in a mortar-
box, the front of which is closed by a board at the top, while the charcoal,

NN en
\\\wovZ

Vx

Sa
i A ES ANS 5

Ii perosscun nee = ~ Sar.
WT SITE S

A—Tus. B—Sieve. C—Rops. D—BENCH-FRAME.

.
4

we a a

BOOK IX. 375

crushed to powder, is removed through the open part below ; the stamps are
not shod with iron, but are made entirely of wood, although at the lower
part they are bound round at the wide part by an iron band.

The powder into which the charcoal is crushed is thrown on to a sieve
whose bottom consists of interwoven withes of wood. The sieve is drawn
backward and forward over two wooden or iron rods placed in a triangular
position on a tub, or over a bench-frame set on the floor of the building ;
the powder which falls into the tub or on to the floor is of suitable size,
but the pieces of small charcoal which remain in the sieve are emptied out
and thrown back under the stamps.

When the earth is dug up it is first exposed to the sun that it may dry.
Later on it is thrown with a shovel on to a screen—set up obliquely and
supported by poles,—made of thick, loosely woven hazel withes, and in this
way the fine earth and its small lumps pass through the holes of the screen, but
the clods and stones do not pass through, but run down to the ground. The
earth which passes through the screen is conveyed in a two-wheeled cart to
the works and there sifted. This sieve, which is not dissimilar to the one

A—ScREEN. B—Pores. C—SuHover. D—Two-wHEELED CART. E—HAND-SIEVE.
F—NARROW BOARDS. G—Box. H—CovVERED PIT.

376 BOOK IX

described above, is drawn backward and forward upon narrow boards of
equal length placed over a long box; the powder which falls through the
sieve into the box is suitable for the mixture; the lumps that remain in the
sieve are thrown away by some people, but by others they are placed under
the stamps. This powdered earth is mixed with powdered charcoal, moist-
ened, and thrown into a pit, and in order that it may remain good for a long
time, the pit is covered up with boards so that the mixture may not
become contaminated.

They take two parts of pulverised charcoal and one part of powdered
earth, and mix them well together with a rake ; the mixture is moistened by
pouring water over it so that it may easily be made into shapes resembling
snowballs ; if the powder be light it is moistened with more water, if heavy
with less. The interior of the new furnace is lined with lute, so that the
cracks in the walls, if there are any, may be filled up, but especially in order
to preserve the rock from injury by fire. In old furnaces in which ore has
been melted, as soon as the rocks have cooled the assistant chips away, with
a spatula, the accretions which adhere to the walls, and then breaks them
up with an iron hoe or a rake with five teeth. The cracks of the furnace are
first filled in with fragments of rock or brick, which he does by passing his
hand into the furnace through its mouth, or else, having placed a ladder against
it, he mounts by the rungs to the upper open part of the furnace. To the
upper part of the ladder a board is fastened that he may lean and recline
against it. Then standing on the same ladder, with a wooden spatula, he
smears the furnace walls over with lute ; this spatula is four feet long, a digit
thick, and for a foot upward from the bottom it is a palm wide, or even
wider, generally two and a half digits. He spreads the lute equally over the
inner walls of the furnace. The mouth of the copper pipe® should not pro-
trude from the lute, lest sows!® form round about it and thus impede the
melting, for the furnace bellows could not force a blast through them. Then
the same assistant throws a little powdered charcoal into the pit of the fore-
hearth and sprinkles it with pulverised earth. Afterward, with a bucket
he pours water into it and sweeps this all over the forehearth pit, and with the
broom drives the turbid water into the furnace hearth and likewise sweeps
it out. Next he throws the mixed and moistened powder into the furnace,
and then a second time mounting the steps of the ladder, he introduces the
rammer into the furnace and pounds the powder so that the hearth is made
solid. The rammer is rounded and three palms long ; at the bottom it is five
digits in diameter, at the top three and a half, therefore it is made in the form
of a truncated cone ; the handle of the rammer is round and five feet long and

*It has not been considered necessary to introduce the modern term éwyer in these des-
criptions, as the literal rendering is sufficiently clear.

10Ferruminata. These accretions are practically always near the hearth, and would
correspond to English ‘‘ sows,” and therefore that term has been adopted. It will be noted
that, like most modern metallurgists, Agricola offers no method for treating them. Pliny
(xxxIv, 37) describes a ‘‘ sow,” and uses the verb ferruminare (to weld or solder): “ Some
“say that in the furnace there are certain masses of stone which become soldered together,
“and that the copper fuses around it, the mass not becoming liquid unless it is transferred
‘to another furnace ; it thus forms a sort of knot, as it were, of the metal.”

BOOK IX 377

Cc 6

a ES

A—FURNACE. B—LADDER. C—BoaRD FIXED TO IT. D—Hok. E—FIVE-
TOOTHED RAKE. F—WOooDEN SPATULA. G—Broom. H—RAmMER. I—RAMMER, SAME
DIAMETER. K—Tw0O WOODEN SPATULAS. L—CURVED BLADE. M—BRONZE RAMMER,

+ N—ANOTHER BRONZE RAMMER. O—WIDE SPATULA. P—Rop. Q—WICKER BASKET.

R—Two BUCKETS OF LEATHER IN WHICH WATER IS CARRIED FOR PUTTING OUT A CON-

FLAGRATION, SHOULD THE officina CATCH FIRE. S—BRASS PUMP WITH WHICH THE WATER

IS SQUIRTED OUT. T—Two HooKS. V—RAKE. X—WORKMAN BEATING THE CLAY WITH
AN IRON IMPLEMENT.

two and a half digits thick ; the upper part of the rammer, where the handle
is inserted, is bound with an iron band two digits wide. There are some who,
instead, use two rounded rammers three and a half digits in diameter, the
same at the bottom as at the top. Some people prefer two wooden
spatulas, or a rammer spatula.

In a similar manner, mixed and moistened powder is thrown and pounded
with a rammer in the forehearth pit, which is outside the furnace. When
this is nearly completed, powder is again put in, and pushed with the rammer
up toward the protruding copper pipe, so that from a point a digit under the
mouth of the copper pipe the hearth slopes down into the crucible of the fore-
hearth, and the metal can run down. The same is repeated until the

What are known in English as “ crucible,” “‘ furnace well,” “ forehearth,” “ dipping-
pot,” Me tapping-pot,” “receiving-pot,” etc., are in the text all catinus, t.e., crucible. For
easier reading, however, we have assigned the names indicated in the context.

378 BOOK IX.

forehearth pit is full, then afterward this is hollowed out with a curved
blade ; this blade is of iron, two palms and as many digits long, three digits
wide, blunt at the top and sharp at the bottom. The crucible of the fore-
hearth must be round, a foot in diameter and two palms deep if it has to
contain a centumpondtum of lead, or if only seventy brae, then three palms
in diameter and two palms deep like the other. When the forehearth has
been hollowed out it is pounded with a round bronze rammer. This is
five digits high and the same in diameter, having a curved round handle
one and a half digits thick ; or else another bronze rammer is used, which
is fashioned in the shape of a cone, truncated at the top, on which is
imposed another cut away at the bottom, so that the middle part of the
rammer may be grasped by the hand ; this is six digits high, and five digits
in diameter at the lower end and four at the top. Some use in its place a
wooden spatula two and a half palms wide at the lower end and one palm
thick.

The assistant, having prepared the forehearth, returns to the furnace and
besmears both sides as well as the top of the mouth with simple lute. In the
lower part of the mouth he places lute that has been dipped in charcoal
dust, to guard against the risk of the lute attracting to itself the powder
of the hearth and vitiating it. Next he lays in the mouth of the furnace a
straight round rod three quarters of a foot long and three digits in diameter.
Afterward he places a piece of charcoal on the lute, of the same length and
width as the mouth, so that it is entirely closed up ; if there be not at hand
one piece of charcoal so large, he takes two instead. When the mouth is thus
closed up, he throws into the furnace a wicker basket full of charcoal, and in
order that the piece of charcoal with which the mouth of the furnace is closed
should not then fall out, the master holds it in with his hand. The pieces
of charcoal which are thrown into the furnace should be of medium size, for
if they are large they impede the blast of the bellows and prevent it from
blowing through the tap-hole of the furnace into the forehearth to heat it.
Then the master covers over the charcoal, placed at the mouth of the furnace,
with lute and extracts the wooden rod, and thus the furnace is prepared.
Afterward the assistant throws four or five larger baskets full of charcoal
into the furnace, filling it right up; he also throws a little charcoal
into the forehearth, and places glowing coals upon it in order that it may
be kindled, but in order that the flames of this fire should not enter through
the tap-hole of the furnace and fire the charcoal inside, he covers the tap-hole
with lute or closes it with fragments of pottery. Some do not warm the
forehearth the same evening, but place large charcoals round the edge of it, one
leaning on the other; those who follow the first method sweep out the
forehearth in the morning, and clean out the little pieces of charcoal and
cinders, while those who follow the latter method take, early in the morning,
burning firebrands, which have been prepared by the watchman of the works,
and place them on the charcoal.

At the fourth hour the master begins his work. He first inserts a
small piece of glowing coal into the furnace, through the bronze nozzle-pipe

BOOK IX. 379

of the bellows, and blows up the fire with the bellows ; thus within the space
of half an hour the forehearth, as well as the hearth, becomes warmed, and
of course more quickly if on the preceding day ores have been smelted in the
same furnace, but if not then it warms more slowly. If the hearth and
forehearth are not warmed before the ore to be smelted is thrown in, the furnace
is injured and the metals lost ; or if the powder from which both are made
is damp in summer or frozen in winter, they will be cracked, and, giving
out a sound like thunder, they will blow out the metals and other substances
with great peril to the workmen. After the furnace has been warmed, the
master throws in slags, and these, when melted, flow out through the tap-
hole into the forehearth. Then he closes up the tap-hole at once with
mixed lute and charcoal dust; this plug he fastens with his hand to a
round wooden rammer that is five digits thick, two palms high, with a handle
three feet long. The smelter extracts the slags from the forehearth with a
hooked bar ; if the ore to be smelted is rich in gold or silver he puts into the
forehearth a centumpondium of lead, or half as much if the ore is poor,
because the former requires much lead, the latter little; he immediately
throws burning firebrands on to the lead so that it melts. Afterward he
performs everything according to the usual manner and order, whereby he
first throws into the furnace as many cakes melted from pyrites!?, as he
requires to smelt the ore; then he puts in two wicker baskets full of ore
with litharge and hearth-lead!*, and stones which fuse easily by fire of the
second order, all mixed together ; then one wicker basket full of charcoal,
and lastly the slags. The furnace now being filled with all the things I
have mentioned, the ore is slowly smelted ; he does not put too much of it
against the back wall of the furnace, lest sows should form around the nozzles
of the bellows and the blast be impeded and the fire burn less fiercely.

This, indeed, is the custom of many most excellent smelters, who know
how to govern the four elements!*#. They combine in right proportion the
ores, which are part earth, placing no more than is suitable in the furnaces ;
they pour in the needful quantity of water ; they moderate with skill the air
from the bellows ; they throw the ore into that part of the fire which burns
fiercely. The master sprinkles water into each part of the furnace to dampen
the charcoal slightly, so that the minute parts of ore may adhere to it,
which otherwise the blast of the bellows and the force of the fire would agitate
and blow away with the fumes. But as the nature of the ores to be smelted
varies, the smelters have to arrange the hearth now high, now low, and to
place the pipe in which the nozzles of the bellows are inserted sometimes on a
great and sometimes at a slight angle, so that the blast of the bellows may

12Panes ex pyrite conflati. While the term matte would cover most cases where this
expression appears, and in many cases would be more expressive to the modern reader, yet
there are instances where the expression as it stands indicates its particular origin, and it
has been, therefore, considered advisable to adhere to the literal rendering.

%Molybdaena. See note 37, p. 476. It was the saturated furnace bottoms from
cupellation.

14The four elements were earth, air, fire, and water.

380 BOOK IX.

blow into the furnace in either a mild or a vigorous manner. For those ores
which heat and fuse easily, a low hearth is necessary for the work of the
smelters, and the pipe must be placed at a gentle angle to produce a mild
blast from the bellows. On the contrary, those ores that heat and fuse
slowly must have a high hearth, and the pipe must be placed at a steep incline
in order to blow a strong blast of the bellows, and it is necessary, for this
kind of ore, to have a very hot furnace in which slags, or cakes melted from
pyrites, or stones which melt easily in the fire!5, are first melted, so that the
ore should not settle in the hearth of the furnace and obstruct and choke up
the tap-hole, as the minute metallic particles that have been washed from
the ores are wont to do. Large bellows have wide nozzles, for if they were
narrow the copious and strong blast would be too much compressed and too
acutely blown into the furnace, and then the melted material would be
chilled, and would form sows around the nozzle, and thus obstruct the opening
into the furnace, which would cause great damage to the proprietors’
property. If the ores agglomerate and do not fuse, the smelter, mounting
on the ladder placed against the side of the furnace, divides the charge with
a pointed or hooked bar, which he also pushes down into the pipe in

15‘ Stones which easily melt in the fire.” Nowhere in De Re Metallica does the author
explain these substances. However in the Interpretatio (p. 465) he gives three genera or orders
with their German equivalents, as follows :—“ Lapides qui igni liquescunt primi generis,—
Schine fliisse ; secundt,—fliisse zum schmeltzen flock quertze ; tertit,—quertze oder kiselstein.”
We confess our inability to make certain of most of the substances comprised in the first and
second orders. We consider they were in part fluor-spar, and in any event the third order
embraced varieties of quartz, flint, and silicious material generally. As the matter is of
importance from a metallurgical point of view, we reproduce at some length Agricola’s own
statements on the subject from Bermannus and De Natura Fossilium. In the latter (p. 268)
he states: “ Finally there now remain those stones which I call ‘stones which easily melt in
“the fire,’ because when thrown into hot furnaces they flow (fluunt). There are three orders
“ (genera) of these. The first resembles the transparent gems; the second is not similar,
“and is generally not translucent; it is translucent in some part, and in rare instances
“altogether translucent. The first is sparingly found in silver and other mines; the second
“abounds in veins of its own. The third genus is the material from which glass is made,
“although it can also be made out of the other two. The stones of the first order are not
“only transparent, but are also resplendent, and have the colours of gems, for some resemble
“crystal, others emerald, heliotrope, lapis lazuli, amethyst, sapphire, ruby, chrysolithus, morion
“(cairngorm ?), and other gems, but they differ from them in hardness. . . . To the
“first genus belongs the lapis alabandicus (modern albandite ?), if indeed it was different
“from the alabandic carbuncle. It can be melted, according to Pliny, in the fire, and fused
“for the preparation of glass. It is black, but verging upon purple. It comes from
“Caria, near Alabanda, and from Miletus in the same province. The second order of stones
“ does not show a great variety of colours, and seldom beautiful ones, for it is generally white,
“whitish, greyish, or yellowish. Because these (stones) very readily melt in the fire, they are
‘added to the ores from which the metals are smelted. The small stones found in veins,
“veinlets, and the spaces between the veins, of the highest peaks of the Sudetic range (Sudi-
““torum montium), belong partly to this genus and partly to the first. They differ in size,
“being large and small ; and in shape, some being round or angular or pointed ; in colour they
“are black or ash-grey, or yellow, or purple, or violet, or iron colour. All of these are lacking
“in metals. Neither do the little stones contain any metals which are usually found in the
“streams where gold dust is collected by washing. . . . In the rivers where are collected
“the small stones from which tin is smelted, there are three genera of small stones to be found,
“all somewhat rounded and of very light weight, and devoid of all metals. The largest are
“black, both on the outside and inside, smooth and brilliant like a mirror; the medium-sized
“are either bluish black or ash-grey ; the smallest are of a yellowish colour, somewhat like a
“silkworm. But because both the former and the latter stones are devoid of metals, and fly
“to pieces under the blows of the hammer, we classify them as sand or gravel. Glass is made
“from the stones of the third order, and particularly from sand. For when this is thrown
“into the heated furnace it is melted by the fire. . . . This kind of stone is either found

BOOK IX. 381

which the nozzle of the bellows is placed, and by a downward movement
dislodges the ore and the sows from around it.

After a quarter of an hour, when the lead which the assistant has placed
in the forehearth is melted, the master opens the tap-hole of the furnace
with a tapping-bar. This bar is made of iron, is three and a half feet long,
the forward end pointed and a little curved, and the back end hollow so that
into it may be inserted a wooden handle, which is three feet long and thick
enough to be well grasped by the hand. The slag first flows from the furnace
into the forehearth, and in it are stones mixed with metal or with the metal
adhering to them partly altered, the slag also containing earth and solidified
juices. After this the material from the melted pyrites flows out, and then the
molten lead contained in the forehearth absorbs the gold and silver. When
that which has run out has stood for some time in the forehearth, in order
to be able to separate one from the other, the master first either skims off
the slags with the hooked bar or else lifts them off with an iron fork; the
slags, as they are very light, float on the top. He next draws off the cakes of
melted pyrites, which as they are of medium weight hold the middle place ;
he leaves in the forehearth the alloy of gold or silver with the lead, for these
being the heaviest, sink to the bottom. As, however, there is a difference

‘in its own veins, which are occasionally very wide, or else scattered through the mines. It
‘is less hard than flint, on account of which no fire can be struck from it. It is not trans-
“parent, but it is of many colours—that is to say, white, yellowish, ash-grey, brown, black,
‘“‘ereen, blue, reddish or red. This genus of stones occurs here and there in mountainous
‘regions, on banks of rivers, and in the fields. Those which are black right through to the

‘interior, and not merely on the surface, are more rare; and very frequently one coloured

“vein is intersected by another of a different colour—for instance, a white one by a red one ;
“the green is often spotted with white, the ash-grey with black, the white with crimson.
“Fragments of these stones are frequently found on the surface of the earth, and in the
“running water they become polished by rubbing against stones of their own or of another
“genus. In this way, likewise, fragments of rocks are not infrequently shaped into spherical
“forms. . . . Thisstone is put to many uses; the streets are paved with it, whatever its
“colour ; the blue variety is added to the ash of pines for making those other ashes which are
“used by wool-dyers. The white variety is burned, ground, and sifted, and from this they
“make the sand out of which glass is made. The whiter the sand is, the more useful it is.’

Perusal of the following from Bermannus (p. 458) can leave little doubt as to the first or
second order being in part fluor-spar. Agricola derived the name fluores from fluo “‘to flow,” and
we in turn obtain ‘“‘fluorite,”’ or ‘‘fluorspar,’”’ from Agricola. ‘‘ Bermannus. These stones are
“similar to gems, but less hard. Allow me to explain word for word. Our miners call them
“ fluores, not inappropriately to my mind, for by the heat of fire, like ice in the sun, they
“liquefy and flow away. They are of varied and bright colours. Naevius.—Theophrastus
“says of them that they are made by a conflux in the earth. These red fluores, to employ
“the words just used by you, are the ruby silver which you showed us before. Bermannus.—At
“the first glance it appears so, although it is not infrequently translucent. Naevius.—Then
“they are rubies ? Bermannus.—Not that either. Naevius.—In what way, then, can they be
“distinguished from rubies? Bermannus.—Chiefly by this sign, that they glitter more
““feebly when translucent. Those which are not translucent may be distinguished from
“rubies. Moreover, fluores of all kinds melt when they are subject to the first fire; rubies
“do not melt in fire. Naevius.—You distinguish well. Bermannus.—You see the other
“kind, of a paler purple colour ? Naevius.—They appear to be an inferior kind of amethyst,
“such as are found in many places in Bohemia. Bermannus.—Indeed, they are not very dis-
“similar, therefore the common people who do not know amethysts well, set them in rings
“for gems, and they are easily sold. The third kind, as you see here, is white. Naevius.—I
“should have thought it a crystal. Bermannus.—A fourth is a yellow colour, a fifth ash colour,
“a sixth blackish. Some are violet, some green, others gold-coloured. Anton.—What is the
“use of fluores? Bermannus.—They are wont to be made use of when metals are smelted,
“as they cause the material in the fire to be much more fluid, exactly like a kind of stone
“which we said is made from pyrites (matte) ; it is, indeed, made not far from here, at Breiten-
2 bei which is near Schwarzenberg. Moreover, from flwores they can make colours which

ar use.

27

382 BOOK IX.

in slags, the uppermost containing little metal, the middle more, and the
lowest much, he puts these away separately, each in its own place, in
order that to each heap, when it is re-smelted, he may add the proper
fluxes, and can put in as much lead as is demanded for the metal in the
slag ; when the slag is re-melted, if it emits much odour, there is some
metal in it ; if it emits no odour, then it contains none. He puts the cakes
of melted pyrites away separately, as they were nearest in the forehearth to
the metal, and contain a little more of it than the slags; from all these
cakes a conical mound is built up, by always placing the widest of them
at the bottom. The hooked bar has a hook on the end, hence its name ;
otherwise it is similar to other bars.

Afterward the master closes up the tap-hole and fills the furnace with
the same materials I described above, and again, the ores having been melted,
he opens the tap-hole, and with a hooked bar extracts the slags and the cakes
melted from pyrites, which have run down into the forehearth. He repeats
the same operation until a certain and definite part of the ore has been
smelted, and the day’s work is at an end; if the ore was rich the work is
finished in eight hours ; if poor, it takes a longer time. But if the ore was
so rich as to be smelted in less than eight hours, another operation is in the
meanwhile combined with the first, and both are performed in the space of ten
hours. When all the ore has been smelted, he throws into the furnace a
basket full of litharge or hearth-lead, so that the metal which has remained
in the accretions may run out with these when melted. When he has finally |
drawn out of the forehearth the slags and the cakes melted from pyrites,
he takes out, with a ladle, the lead alloyed with gold or silver and pours it into
little iron or copper pans, three palms wide and as many digits deep, but
first lined on the inside with lute and dried by warming, lest the glowing molten
substances should break through. The iron ladle is two palms wide, and in
other respects it is similar to the others, all of which have a sufficiently long
iron shaft, so that the fire should not burn the wooden part of the handle.
When the alloy has been poured out of the forehearth, the smelter foreman
and the mine captain weigh the cakes.

Then the master breaks out the whole of the mouth of the furnace with a
crowbar, and with that other hooked bar, the rabble and the five-toothed rake,
he extracts the accretions and the charcoal. This crowbar is not unlike
the other hooked one, but larger and wider ; the handle of the rabble is six feet
long and is half of iron and half of wood. The furnace having cooled, the
master chips off the accretions clinging to the walls with a rectangular
spatula six digits long, a palm broad, and sharp on the front edge; it has
a round handle four feet long, half of it being of iron and half of wood. This
is the first method of smelting ores.

Because they generally consist of unequal constituents, some of which melt
rapidly and others slowly, the ores rich in gold and silver cannot be smelted as
rapidly or as easily by the other methods as they can by the first method, for
three important reasons. The first reason is that, as often as the closed
tap-hole of the furnace is opened with a tapping-bar, so often can the

BOOK IX. 383

= Cetty nN
P “Z. \V . 3
=}
s y C) Y
s
— ——_—STS >
sieoe ——— —_s
—— —S————— ==
eg dt Gago ———— —.
_— ——_ ——
o — __— —_———— _—_—_—
ee el ns
— ——S ———

wa 4!
y ” 7
a *
= ee “w) 3 :
S =a” §
S
t y A
om —e y
f. = — a ee —
= y) — iD mney ¥ stings
: a) _
7 “2
BN :
i ); » q
wa 4 S
Lm FZ
Z .
Z, wy
SSS Nip y
E = fea f E ye, 2 B
Hi i S
— % M AW Het f 5
i} >
‘ i ) , ‘
( 4 4), \ i
SE, 1 ESS > ik R
2, te y UF 2 a
— RY /¢ £ ¢ r
c—< G my \ =>
L gh =_\ ; Q
Z \ :
.& : F
Be SOS ‘ a
Ss \, avs Q X
; : R D ‘ Qy Qa
Gy \ s, Se x) 4
Y fF = A y
o\ Sy a =F
= R& mo ; FA ZW
5 a
Y —— Ch pms
Sy =
ZF =
ZG, ~=7 X tS =\\ =
4 Zi, = ees Be
° pe nies aie © (iy 4g ———
YN SS Dep BEN ==
; D) << “Zi a | oe
ai 2) [J We como id
y : = S\? sibs
S _— ae = s
isptoasy = a alate <= \ = / XS 2 g
e a = gz
o| “i * ———— ° ZA
_ ee *\- JF i fo. : Peas
aero 1 é — 6

A, B, C—THREE FURNACES. AT THE FIRST STANDS THE SMELTER, WHO WITH A LADLE
POURS THE ALLOY OUT OF THE FOREHEARTH INTO THE MOULDS. D—FoOREHEARTH.
E—LapLe. F—Movurtps. G—RouND WOODEN RAMMER. H—TAPPING-BAR. AT THE
SECOND FURNACE STANDS THE SMELTER, WHO OPENS THE TAP-HOLE WITH HIS TAPPING-BAR.
THE ASSISTANT, STANDING ON STEPS PLACED AGAINST THE THIRD FURNACE WHICH HAS BEEN
BROKEN OPEN, CHIPS OFF THE ACCRETIONS. I—StTEps. K—Spatuta. L—THE OTHER
HOOKED BAR. M-—MINE CAPTAIN CARRYING A CAKE, IN WHICH HE HAS STUCK THE PICK, TO
THE SCALES TO BE WEIGHED. N—ANOTHER MINE CAPTAIN OPENS A CHEST IN WHICH HIS
THINGS ARE KEPT.

384 BOOK IX.

smelter observe whether the ore is melting too quickly or too slowly, or
whether it is flaming in scattered bits, and not uniting in one mass; in the
first case the ore is smelting too slowly and not without great expense; in
the second case the metal mixes with the slag which flows out of the
furnace into the forehearth, wherefore there is the expense of melting it again ;
in the third case, the metal is consumed by the violence of the fire. Each of
these evils has its remedy ; if the ore melts slowly or does not come together,
it is necessary to add some amount of fluxes which melt the ore; or if they
melt too readily, to decrease the amount.

The second reason is that each time that the furnace is opened with a
tapping-bar, it flows out into the forehearth, and the smelter is able to test
the alloy of gold and lead or of silver with lead, which is called stannum'*®.
When the tap-hole is opened the second or third time, this test shows us
whether the alloy of gold or silver has become richer, or whether the lead is
too debilitated and wanting in strength to absorb any more gold or silver. If
it has become richer, some portion of lead added to it should renew its
strength ; if it has not become richer, it is poured out of the forehearth that
it may be replaced with fresh lead.

The third reason is that if the tap-hole of the furnace is always open
when the ore and other things are being smelted, the fluxes, which are easily
melted, run out of the furnace before the rich gold and silver ores, for these
are sometimes of a kind that oppose and resist melting by the fire for a longer
period. It follows in this case, that some part of the ore is either con-
sumed or is mixed with the accretions, and as a result little lumps of ore
not yet melted are now and then found in the accretions. Therefore when
these ores are being smelted, the tap-hole of the furnace should be closed
for a time, as it is necessary to heat and mix the ore and the fluxes at the
same time; since the fluxes fuse more rapidly than the ore, when the
molten fluxes are held in the furnace, they thus melt the ore which does not
readily fuse or mix with the lead. The lead absorbs the gold or silver, just
as tin or lead when melted in the forehearth absorbs the other unmelted
metal which has been thrown into it. But if the molten matter is poured
upon that which is not molten, it runs off on all sides and consequently does
not melt it. It follows from all this that ores rich in gold or silver, when put
into a furnace with its tap-hole always open, cannot for that reason be smelted
so successfully as in one where the tap-hole is closed for a time, so that during
this time the ore may be melted by the molten fluxes. Afterward, when the
tap-hole has been opened, they flow into the forehearth and mix there with
the molten lead. This method of smelting the ores is used by us and by the
Bohemians.

The three remaining methods of smelting ores are similar to each other
in that the tap-holes of the furnaces always remain open, so that the molten
metals may continually run out. They differ greatly from each other,

16Stannum (Interpretatio,—werck, modern werk). This term has been rendered through-
out as “ silver-lead ” or “ silver-lead alloy.” It was the argentiferous lead suitable for cupel-
lation. Agricola, in using it in this sense, was no doubt following his interpretation of its use
by Pliny. Further remarks upon this subject will be found in note 33, p. 473-

BOOK IX. 385

\ ————SS= —=S====. D

’
¥

|
y
|
. |

x
Y
|
|
1
4)
ul
Ul
|
|
i
i
i
il
if
i

uM
=
—o

WZ
AN

6
LZ

MN

OP,

i)
oe
ult
Ala
n
thy
)
y
Nw
va
ny Ay

=
<3 h=
we
Z
A) /' wre 4
SZ
a == GZ
Zz Ag
2 é Z
2a —
a — r > ¥
BZ io Sey, — 3 Sal Sa
ZZ <= I ‘ 2S
Zz oy ai 4 pe Bre! ert
ee of ; _ alll
FA - << ~ ‘
4A S> fH "mS
aA — 9 g SS
= ez C NS Y + WS
aA ‘oe ———__—_—_ ss E— . => SZ
IZ © a =
Zz 5; ZS .

A, B—Two Furnaces. C—FOREHEARTHS. D—Duppinc-PoT. THE SMELTER STANDING
BY THE FIRST FURNACE DRAWS OFF THE SLAGS WITH A HOOKED BAR. E—HOOKED BAR.
F—Sracs. G—THE ASSISTANT DRAWING A BUCKET OF WATER WHICH HE POURS OVER THE
GLOWING SLAGS TO QUENCH THEM. H—BASKET MADE OF TWIGS OF WOOD INTERTWINED.
I—RasBLE. K—ORE TO BE SMELTED. THE MASTER STANDS AT THE OTHER FURNACE
AND PREPARES THE FOREHEARTH BY RAMMING IT WITH TWO RAMMERS. M—CROWBAR.

386 BOOK IX.

however, for the tap-hole of the first of this kind is deeper in the furnace and
narrower than that of the third, and besides it is invisible and concealed.
It easily discharges into the forehearth, which is one and a half feet higher
than the floor of the building, in order that below it to the left a dipping-pot
can be made. When the forehearth is nearly full of the slags, which well up
from the invisible tap-hole of the furnace, they are skimmed off from the top
with a hooked bar ; then the alloy of gold or silver with lead and the melted
pyrites, being uncovered, flow into the dipping-pot, and the latter are made into
cakes ; these cakes are broken and thrown back into the furnace so that all
their metal may be smelted out. The alloy is poured into little iron moulds.

The smelter, besides lead and cognate things, uses fluxes which combine
with the ore, of which I gave a sufficient account in Book VII. The metals
which are melted from ores that fuse readily in the fire, are profitable because
they are smelted in a short time, while those which are difficult to fuse are
not as profitable, because they take a long time. When fluxes remain in the
furnace and do not melt, they are not suitable ; for this reason, accretions and
slags are the most convenient for smelting, because they melt quickly. It is
necessary to have an industrious and experienced smelter, who in the first
place takes care not to put into the furnace more ores mixed with fluxes than
it can accommodate.

The powder out of which this furnace hearth and the adjoining fore-
hearth and the dipping-pot are usually made, consists mostly of equal pro-
portions of charcoal dust and of earth, or of equal parts of the same and of
ashes. When the hearth of the furnace is prepared, a rod that will reach to the
forehearth is put into it, higher up if the ore to be smelted readily fuses, and
lower down if it fuses with difficulty. When the dipping-pot and forehearth
are finished, the rod is drawn out of the furnace so that the tap-hole is open,
and through it the molten material flows continuously into the forehearth,
which should be very near the furnace in order that it may keep very hot and
the alloy thus be made purer. If the ore to be smelted does not melt easily, the
hearth of the furnace must not be made too sloping, lest the molten fluxes
should run down into the forehearth before the ore is smelted, and the metal
thus remain in the accretions on the sides of the furnace. The smelter must
not ram the hearth so much that it becomes too hard, nor make the mistake
of ramming the lower part of the mouth to make it hard, for it could not
breathe!’?, nor could the molten matter flow freely out of the furnace.
The ore which does not readily melt is thrown as much as possible to the
back of the furnace, and toward that part where the fire burns very
fiercely, so that it may be smelted longer. In this way the smelter may direct
it whither he wills. Only when it glows at the part near the bellows’ nozzle
does it signify that all the ore is smelted which has been thrown to the side of
the furnace in which the nozzles are placed. If the ore is easily melted, one
or two wicker baskets full are thrown into the front part of the furnace so that
the fire, being driven back by it, may also smelt the ore and the sows that

WExpirare,—to exhale or blow out.

— ae

BOOK IX. 387

ths

PUL

, qf 2 —————
Lara =
3 SOE AP OLLIE

D—Drppinc-pots. THE MASTER STANDS AT

THE ONE FURNACE AND DRAWS AWAY THE SLAGS WITH AN IRON FORK. E—IRON FORK.

F—WOODEN HOE WITH WHICH THE CAKES OF MELTED PYRITES ARE DRAWN OUT. G—THE

FOREHEARTH CRUCIBLE: ONE-HALF INSIDE IS TO BE SEEN OPEN IN THE OTHER FURNACE.

H—THE HALF OUTSIDE THE FURNACE. I—THE ASSISTANT PREPARES THE FOREHEARTH,

WHICH IS SEPARATED FROM THE FURNACE THAT IT MAY BE SEEN. K—Bar. L—WOoOoDEN
RAMMER. M—LADDER. N—LADLE.

A, B—Two Furnaces. C—FoREHEARTH.

388 BOOK IX.

form round about the nozzles of the bellows. This process of smelting is very
ancient among the Tyrolese?§, but not so old among the Bohemians.

The second method of smelting ores stands in a measure midway between
that one performed in a furnace of which the tap-hole is closed intermittently,
and the first of the methods performed in a furnace where the tap-hole is
always open. In this manner are smelted the ores of gold and silver that are
neither very rich nor very poor, but mediocre, which fuse easily and are
readily absorbed by the lead. It was found that in this way a large quantity
of ore could be smelted at one operation without much labour or great expense,
and could thus be alloyed with lead. This furnace has two crucibles, one of
which is half inside the furnace and half outside, so that the lead being put
into this crucible, the part of the lead which is in the furnace absorbs
the metals of the ores which easily fuse; the other crucible is lower, and
the alloy and the molten pyrites run into it. Those who make use of this
method of smelting, tap the alloy of gold or silver with lead from the upper
crucible once or twice if need be, and throw in other lead or litharge, and
each absorbs that flux which is nearest. This method of smelting is in use
in Styria},

The furnace in the third method of smelting ores has the tap-hole like-
wise open, but the furnace is higher and wider than the others, and its bellows
are larger; for these reasons a larger charge of the ore can be thrown into
it. When the mines yield a great abundance of ore for the smelter, they
smelt in the same furnace continuously for three days and three nights,
providing there be no defect either in the hearth or in the forehearth. In this
kind of a furnace almost every kind of accretion will be found. The fore-
hearth of the furnace is not unlike the forehearth of the first furnace of all,
except that it has a tap-hole. However, because large charges of ore
are smelted uninterruptedly, and the melted material runs out and the slags
are skimmed off, there is need for a second forehearth crucible, into which the
molten material runs through an opened tap-hole when the first is full. When
a smelter has spent twelve hours’ labour on this work, another always takes his
place. The ores of copper and lead and the poorest ores of gold and silver
are smelted by this method, because they cannot be smelted by the other
three methods on account of the greater expense occasioned. Yet by this
method a centumpondium of ore containing only one or two drachmae of
gold, or only a half to one uncta of silver,?® can be smelted; because there
is a large amount of ore in each charge, smelting is continuous, and without
expensive fluxes such as lead, litharge, and hearth-lead. In this method
of smelting we must use only cupriferous pyrites which easily melt in the
fire, in truth the cakes melted out from this, if they no longer absorb

18Rhetos. The ancient Rhaetia comprised not only the greater part of Tyrol,
but also parts of Switzerland and Lombardy. The mining section was, however, in
Tyrol.

ie 19Noricum was a region south of the Danube, embracing not only modern Styria, but

also parts of Austria, Salzberg, and Carinthia.

20One drachma of gold to a centumpondium would be (if we assume these were Roman
weights) 3 ozs. 1 dwt. Troy per short ton. One-half uncia of silver would be 12 ozs. 3 dwts.
per short ton.

:

BOOK IX. 389

Ss = ie =
= sr - —
ak Ne P : : At & 4 \ \
GEA Y Viantiges Sa) x .
fl — ¥
« * up) (Ne YE = A
. A ; i
a) >?
= = j = a
§ Y R | \ >
= 9
= \ a CZ
P a .
= , Be
= Y /
i 4 \ Cc %
\ —
i, RS \
Al
. {
SS z =
4, » Z
We
B&B
\ 4 (
WiMe 7 bs
Y/
—— —— ce
~“S N re, — Ss
SS et = =
ig —, rete hig pees
Sh. SN ~ aw
xt SSS =i S . te
S SS SS — SN ~ —
as “ S| SS
~~ ; ai
SS : SS
SS —
=~ SS S SSS'SSs
1. 4 ~
tu, \ == sss , SS .
SIRSNS=S \ = :
ra Sy See e, RA 4 ~ 5 y
sa = pA %) z “i
tLe < Ne
—— SJ ny
“Nor s SS > ar aa
——o 4 = ss a
Ser = ——
= =—— ane Id L

PPO RL BES DD MAAR

eyayy

———

se ~

A, B—Two FuRNAcES. C—Tap-HOLES OF FURNACES. D—FOREHEARTHS, E—THEIR

TAP-HOLES. F—DippinG-pots. G—AT THE ONE FURNACE STANDS THE SMELTER CARRYING

A WICKER BASKET FULL OF CHARCOAL. AT THE OTHER FURNACE STANDS A SMELTER WHO

WITH THE THIRD HOOKED BAR BREAKS AWAY THE MATERIAL WHICH HAS FROZEN THE TAP-

HOLE OF THE FURNACE. H—HooKED BAR. I—HEAP OF CHARCOAL. K—BARROW ON

WHICH IS A BOX MADE OF WICKER WORK IN WHICH THE COALS ARE MEASURED. L—IRON
SPADE.

390 BOOK IX.

much gold or silver, are replenished again from crude pyrites alone. If
from this poor ore, with melted pyrites alone, material for cakes cannot
be made, there are added other fluxes which have not previously been
melted. These fluxes are, namely, lead ore, stones easily fused by fire
of the second order and sand made from them, limestone, tophus, white
schist, and iron stone*!.

Although this method of smelting ores is rough and might not seem to
be of great use, yet it is clever and useful; for a great weight of ores, in
which the gold, silver, or copper are in small quantities, may be reduced into
a few cakes containing all the metal. If on being first melted they are too
crude to be suitable for the second melting, in which the lead absorbs the
precious metals that are in the cakes, or in which the copper is melted out of
them, yet they can be made suitable if they are repeatedly roasted, some-
times as often as seven or eight times, as I have explained in the last book.
Smelters of this kind are so clever and expert, that in smelting they take out
all the gold and silver which the assayer in assaying the ores has stated to be
contained in them, because if during the first operation, when he makes the
cakes, there is a dvachma of gold or half an uncia of silver lost from the ores,
the smelter obtains it from the slags by the second smelting. This method of
smelting ores is old and very common to most of those who use other methods.

Although lead ores are usually smelted in the third furnace—whose tap-
hole is always open,—yet not a few people melt them in special furnaces by a
method which I will briefly explain. The Carni* first burn such lead ores,
and afterward break and crush them with large round mallets. Between
the two low walls of a hearth, which is inside a furnace made of and vaulted
with a rock that resists injury by the fire and does not burn into chalk, they
place green wood with a layer of dry wood on the top of it ; then they throw
the ore ‘on to this, and when the wood is. kindled the lead drips down and
runs on to the underlying sloping hearth®*. This hearth is made of pulverised

21For discussion of these fluxes see note page 232.

22Carni. Probably the people of modern Austrian Carniola, which lies south of Styria
and west of Croatia.

*3HISTORICAL NOTE ON SMELTING LEAD AND SILVER.—The history of lead and silver
smelting is by no means a sequent array of exact facts. With one possible exception, lead does
not appear upon the historical horizon until long after silver, and yet their metallurgy is so
inextricably mixed that neither can be considered wholly by itself. As silver does not occur
native in any such quantities as would have supplied the amounts possessed by the Ancients,
we must, therefore, assume its reduction by either (1) intricate chemical processes, (2) amalga-
mation, (3) reduction with copper, (4) reduction with lead. It is impossible to conceive of the
first with the ancient knowledge of chemistry ; the second (see note 12, p. 297) does not appear
to have been known until after Roman times ; in any event, quicksilver appears only at about
400 B.c. The third was impossible, as the parting of silver from copper without lead involves
metallurgy only possible during the last century. Therefore, one is driven to the conclusion
that the fourth case obtained, and that the lead must have been known practically contem-
poraneously with silver. There is a leaden figure exhibited in the British Museum among the
articles recovered from the Temple of Osiris at Abydos, and considered to be of the Archaic
period—prior to 3800 B.c. The earliest known Egyptian silver appears to be a necklace
of beads, supposed to be of the XII. Dynasty (2400 B.c.), which is described in the 17th
Memoir, Egyptian Exploration Fund (London, 1898, p. 22). With this exception of the
above-mentioned lead specimen, silver articles antedate positive evidence of lead by nearly a
millennium, and if we assume lead as a necessary factor in silver production, we must conclude
it was known long prior to any direct (except the above solitary possibility) evidence of lead
itself. Further, if we are to conclude its necessary association with silver, we must assume a
knowledge of cupellation for the parting of the two metals. Lead is mentioned in 1500 B.C.

BOOK IX. 391

charcoal and earth, as is also a large crucible, one-half of which lies under the
furnace and the other half outside it, into which runs the lead. The
smelter, having first skimmed off the slags and other things with a hoe, pours
the lead with a ladle into moulds, taking out the cakes after they have
cooled. At the back of the furnace is a rectangular hole, so that the fire
may be allowed more draught, and so that the smelter can crawl through it
into the furnace if necessity demands,

The Saxons who inhabit Gittelde, when smelting lead ore in a furnace
not unlike a baking oven, put the wood in through a hole at the back of the
furnace, and when it begins to burn vigorously the lead trickles out of the
ore into a forehearth. When this is full, the smelting being accomplished,
the tap-hole is opened with a bar, and in this way the lead, together with the
slags, runs into the dipping-pots below. Afterward the cakes of lead, when
they are cold, are taken from the moulds.

In Westphalia they heap up ten wagon-loads of charcoal on some hill-
side which adjoins a level place, and the top of the heap being made flat,
straw is thrown upon it to the thickness of three or four digits. On the top of

among the spoil captured by Thotmes III. Leaden objects have frequently been found in

yptian tombs as early as Rameses III. (1200 B.c.). The statement is made by Pulsifer
(Notes for a History of Lead, New York 1888, p. 146) that Egyptian pottery was glazed with
lead. We have been unable to find any confirmation of this. It may be noted, incidentally,
that lead is not included in the metals of the “ Tribute of Yii”’ in the Shoo King (The Chinese
Classics, 2500 B.C. ?), although silver is so included.

After 1200 or 1300 B.C. evidences of the use of lead become frequent. Moses (Numbers
Xxxi, 22-23) directs the Israelites with regard to their plunder from the Midianites (1300 B.c.) :
“Only the gold and the silver, the brass [sic], the iron, the tin, and the lead. Everything
“ that may abide the fire, ye shall make it go through the fire, and it shall be clean ; neverthe-
“less, it shall be purified with the water of separation, and all that abideth not the fire ye shall
“make go through the water.” Numerous other references occur in the Scriptures (Psalms
xii, 6; Proverbs xvii, 3; xxv. 4, etc.), one of the most pointed from a metallur-
' gical point of view being that of Jeremiah (600 B.c.), who says (vi, 29-30): “ The bellows
“are burned, the lead is consumed of the fire; the founder melteth in vain; for the wicked
“are not plucked away. Reprobate silver shall men call them because the Lord hath rejected
“them.” From the number of his metaphors in metallurgical terms we may well conclude that
Jeremiah was of considerable metallurgical experience, which may account for his critical
tenor of mind. These Biblical references all point to a knowledge of separating silver and lead.
Homer mentions lead (Iliad xxrv, 109), and it has been found in the remains of ancient Troy
and Mycenae (H. Schliemann, ‘‘ Troy and its Remains,’ London, 1875, and ‘‘ Mycenae,”
New York, 1877). Both Herodotus (1, 186) and Diodorus (mu, 1) speak of the lead used
to fix iron clamps in the stone bridge of Nitocris (600 B.c.) at Babylon.

Our best evidence of ancient lead-silver metallurgy is the result of the studies at Mt.
Laurion by Edouard Ardaillon (Mines du Laurion dans I’ Antiquité, Paris, 1897). Here the very
extensive old workings and the slag heaps testify to the greatest activity. The re-opening of
the mines in recent years by a French Company has well demonstrated their technical char-
acter, and the frequent mention in Greek History easily determines their date. These deposits
of argentiferous galena were extensively worked before 500 B.c., and while the evidence of
concentration methods is ample, there is but little remaining of the ancient smelters. Enough,
however, remains to demonstrate that the galena was smelted in small furnaces at low heat,
with forced draught, and that it was subsequently cupelled. In order to reduce the sulphides
the ancient smelters apparently depended upon partial roasting in the furnace at a pre-
liminary period in reduction, or else upon the ferruginous character of the ore, or upon
both. See notes p. 27 and p. 265. Theognis (6th century B.c.) and Hippocrates (5th century
B.C.) are frequently referred to as mentioning the refining of gold with lead; an inspec-
tion of the passages fails to corroborate the importance which has been laid upon them.
Among literary evidences upon lead metallurgy of later date, Theophrastus (300 B.C.)
describes the making of white-lead with lead plates and vinegar. Diodorus Siculus (1st
century B.C.), in his well-known quotation from Agatharchides (2nd century B.c.) with
regard to gold mining and treatment in Egypt, describes the refining of gold with lead.
(See note 8 p. 279.) Strabo (63 B.c.—24 A.D.) says (mI, 2, 8): “The furnaces for

392 BOOK IX.

this is laid as much pure lead ore as the heap can bear ; then the charcoal is
kindled, and when the wind blows, it fans the fire so that the ore is smelted.
In this wise the lead, trickling down from the heap, flows on to the level and
forms broad thin slabs. A few hundred pounds of lead ore are kept at hand,
which, if things go well, are scattered over the heap. These broad slabs are
impure and are laid upon dry wood which in turn is placed on green wood
laid over a large crucible, and the former having been kindled, the lead is
re-melted.

The Poles use a hearth of bricks four feet high, sloping on both sides and
plastered with lute. On the upper level part of the hearth large pieces of
wood are piled, and on these is placed small wood with lute put in between ;
over the top are laid wood shavings, and upon these again pure lead ore
covered with large pieces of wood. When these are kindled, the ore melts and

“silver are constructed lofty in order that the vapour, which is dense and _ pestilent,
“may be raised and carried off.” And again (111, 2, 10), in quoting from Polybius (204-
125 B.c.): “‘ Polybius, speaking of the silver mines of New Carthage, tells us that they
“are extremely large, distant from the city about 20 stadia, and occupy a circuit of 400
“stadia; that there are 40,000 men regularly engaged in them, and that they yield daily
“to the Roman people (a revenue of) 25,000 drachmae. The rest of the process I pass over,
“as it is too long; but as for the silver ore collected, he tells us that it is broken up and
“sifted through sieves over water; that what remains is to be again broken, and the water
“having been strained off- it is to be sifted and broken a third time. The dregs which remain
“after the fifth time are to be melted, and the lead being poured off, the silver is obtained
“pure. These silver mines still exist ; however, they are no longer the property of the State,
“neither these nor those elsewhere, but are possessed by private individuals. The gold
“‘ mines, on the contrary, nearly all belong to the State. Both at Castlon and other places there
“are singular lead mines worked. They contain a small proportion of silver, but not sufficient
“to pay for the expense of refining’’ (Hamilton’s Trans.). Dioscorides (Ist century A.D.),
among his medicines, describes several varieties of litharge, their origin, and the manner of
making white-lead (see on pp. 465, 440), but he gives no very tangible information on lead
smelting. Pliny, at the same period in speaking of silver, (XXXII, 31), says: ‘‘ After this
“we speak of silver, the next folly. Silver is only found in shafts, there being no indications
“like shining particles as in the case of gold. This earth is sometimes red, sometimes of an
“ashy colour. It is impossible to melt it except with lead ore (vena plumbi), called galena,
“which is generally found next to silver veins. And this the same agency of fire separates
“ part into lead, which floats on the silver like oil on water.’’ (We have transferred lead and
silver in this last sentence, otherwise it means nothing.) Also (xxxIv, 47) he says: ‘‘ There
“are two different sources of lead, it being smelted from its own ore, whence it comes without
“the admixture of any other substance, or else from an ore which contains it in common
“with silver. The metal, which flows liquid at the first melting in the furnace, is called
““stannum that at the second melting is silver ; that which remains in the furnace is galena,
“which is added to a third part of the ore. This being again melted, produces lead with
“a deduction of two-ninths.’”” We have, despite some grammatical objections, rendered
this passage quite differently from other translators, none of whom have apparently had any
knowledge of metallurgy ; and we will not, therefore, take the several pages of space necessary
to refute their extraordinary and unnecessary hypotheses. From a metallurgical point of
view, two facts must be kept in mind,—first, that galena in this instance was the same sub-
stance as molybdaena, and they were both either a variety of litharge or of lead carbonates ;
second, that the stannum of the Ancients was silver-lead alloy. Therefore, the metallurgy of
this paragraph becomes a simple melting of an argentiferous lead ore, its subsequent cupellation,
with a return of the litharge to the furnace. Pliny goes into considerable detail as to varieties
of litharge, for further notes upon which see p. 466. The Romans were most active lead-silver
miners, not only in Spain, but also in Britain. There are scores of lead pigs of the Roman era
in various English museums, many marked ‘“‘ ex argent.’’ Bruce (The Roman Wall, London,
1852, p. 432) describes some Roman lead furnaces in Cumberland where the draught was
secured by driving a tapering tunnel into the hills. The Roman lead slag ran high in metal,
and formed a basis for quite an industry in England in the early 18th century (Hunt, British
Mining, London, 1887, p. 26, etc.) There is nothing in medieval literature which carries us
further with lead metallurgy than the knowledge displayed by Pliny, until we arrive at Agri-
cola’s period. The history of cupellation is specially dealt with in note on p. 465.

Se I ee ae Oe ee

ee ee

Sa ee en

BOOK IX, 393

ZzZz-AZAS aS

\WY

at mn

\\ ; %
Ws Win ie

=

:

:

l

TT)

ANN’

A—FURNACE OF THE CARNI. B—Low WALL. C—Woop. D—OrE DRIPPING LEAD.

E—LaRGE CRUCIBLE. F—Movutps. G—Lapie. H—SLaps oF LEAD. I—RECTANGULAR

HOLE AT THE BACK OF THE FURNACE. K—SAXON FURNACE. L—OPENING IN THE BACK

OF THE FURNACE. M—Woop. N—UPppeEr crucIBLE. O—Drppinc-pot. P—WESTPHALIAN

METHOD OF MELTING. Q—HEAPS OF CHARCOAL. R—STRAW. S—WIDE SLABS.
T—CruciBL_es. V—POoLIsH HEARTH.

R0a BOOK IX.

runs down on to the lower layer of wood; and when this is consumed by
the fire, the metal is collected. If necessity demand, it is melted over and
over again in the same manner, but it is finally melted by means of wood
laid over the large crucible, the slabs of lead being placed upon it.

The concentrates from washing are smelted together with slags (fluxes ?)
in a third furnace, of which the tap-hole is always open.

It is worth while to build vaulted dust-chambers over the furnaces,
especially over those in which the precious ores are to be smelted, in order
that the thicker part of the fumes, in which metals are not wanting, may be
caught and saved. In this way two or more furnaces are combined under the
same vaulted ceiling, which is supported by the wall, against which the
furnaces are built, and by four columns. Under this the smelters of the
ore perform their work. There are two openings through which the fumes
rise from the furnaces into the wide vaulted chamber, and the wider this is the
more fumes it collects ; in the middle of this chamber over the arch is an opening
three palms high and two wide. This catches the fumes of both furnaces,
which have risen up from both sides of the vaulted chamber to its arch, and
have fallen again because they could not force their way out ; and they thus
pass out through the opening mentioned, into the chimney which the Greeks
call xarvoddyn, the name being taken from the object. The chimney has
thin iron plates fastened into the walls, to which the thinner metallic sub-
stances adhere when ascending with the fumes. The thicker metallic
substances, or cadmia,25. adhere to the vaulted chamber, and often
harden into stalactites. On one side of the chamber is a window in which
are set panes of glass, so that the light may be transmitted, but the fumes
kept in; on the other side is a door, which is kept entirely closed while the
ores are being smelted in the furnaces, so that none of the fumes may escape.
It is opened in order that the workman, passing through it, may be enabled
to enter the chamber and remove the soot and pompholyx*® and chip off

25Cadmia. In the German Translation this is given as kobelt. It would be of uncertain
character, but no doubt partially furnace calamine. (See note on p. I12.)

26 Pompholyx (Interpretatio gives the German as Wetsser hiitten rauch als ober dem garherde
und ober dem kupfer ofen). This was the impure protoxide of zinc deposited in the furnace
outlets, and is modern “‘tutty.” The ancient products, no doubt, contained arsenical
oxides as well. It was well known to the Ancients, and used extensively for medicinal pur-
poses, they dividing it into two species—pompholyx and spodos. The first adequate des-
cription is by Dioscorides (v, 46): “‘ Pompholyx differs from spodos in species, not in genus.
“For spodos is blacker, and is often heavier, full of straws and hairs, like the refuse that is
“swept from the floors of copper smelters. But pompholyx is fatty, unctuous, white and light
“enough to fly in the air. Of this there are two kinds—the one inclines to sky blue and is
“unctuous ; the other is exceedingly white, and is extremely light. White pompholyx is
“made every time that the artificer, in the preparation and perfecting of copper (brass ?)
“sprinkles powdered cadmia upon it to make it more perfect, for the soot which rises being
“very fine becomes pompholyx. Other pompholyx is made, not only in working copper
“(brass ?), but is also made from cadmia by continually blowing with bellows. The manner
“of doing it is as follows :—The furnace is constructed in a two-storied building, and there
“is a medium-sized aperture opening to the upper chamber; the building wall nearest the
“ furnace is pierced with a small opening to admit the nozzle of the bellows. The building must
“have a fair-sized door for the artificer to pass in and out. Another small building must
“adjoin this, in which are the bellows and the man who works them. Then the charcoal
“in the furnace is lighted, and the artificer continually throws broken bits of cadmia from
“the place above the furnace, whilst his assistant, who is below, throws in charcoals, until
“all of the cadmia inside is consumed. By this means the finest and lightest part of the

a Sg oo oa

BOOK IX. 39

— \ i = ————
= 7 +) =
“4 => yy y= =
Z%
SN
'
. :
; ae =
Seen aaa pee B=
i =. —=
é
i Nh = .
a :
mq
i —
g
i 3 ———.
~
~
SS
———_ eS Re ee =
jill <1 eos i Goan
pao sige, =a
—, cay 4 i
~ ;
ay ,
S ogame
> ae
3 Aes
4p <' = =o Vs
: > rena )
4 y Witsoe
pera
= ee ~
BS clas
; E a
a =
S ;
—
—_—_—_ 3 ee pe acemas| —
— peeled eo on aa SS or
— eee pig ee ne
— — omsitene a eff TRIE a
»y ‘ene: aids eee —,__ an perme
= —- pl ees 4 —
aoe ee —_ —
— , : ge bape as
\ gE eS i Se ;
aieoe “
. =,
E/ Rag - P
rae Z = =
=f
= . q @
==
: = Z
=e 5 —— Sneey
silica

SI >

A—FuRNACES. B—VavuLTED RooF. C—CoLUMNs. D—DustT-cCHAMBER. E—OPENING.
F—CuHIMNEY. G—Winpow. H—Door. I—CuuTE.

396 BOOK IX.

the cadmia; this sweeping is done twice a year. The soot mixed with
pompholyx and the cadmia, being chipped off, is thrown down through
a long chute made of four boards joined in the shape of a rectangle,
that they should not fly away. They fall on to the floor, and are sprinkled
with salt water, and are again smelted with ore and litharge, and become
an emolument to the proprietors. Such chambers, which catch the metallic
substances that rise with the fumes, are profitable for all metalliferous
ores; but especially for the minute metallic particles collected by washing
crushed ores and rock, because these usually fly out with the fire of the
furnaces.

I have explained the four general methods of smelting ores; now I
will state how the ores of each metal are smelted, or how the metal is obtained
from the ore. I will begin with gold. Its sand, the concentrates from
washing, or the gold dust collected in any other manner, should very often
not be smelted, but should be mixed with quicksilver and washed with tepid
water, so that all the impurities may be eliminated. This method I ex-
plained in Book VII. Or they are placed in the aqua which separates
gold from silver, for this also separates its impurities. In this method we
see the gold sink in the glass ampulla, and after all the aqua has been drained
from the particles, it frequently remains as a gold-coloured residue at the
bottom ; this powder, when it has been moistened with oil made from
argol*’, is then dried and placed in a crucible, where it is melted with borax
or with saltpetre and salt ; or the same very fine dust is thrown into molten
silver, which absorbs it, and from this it is again parted by aqua valens*®.

It is necessary to smelt gold ore either outside the blast furnace in a
crucible, or inside the blast furnace ; in the former case a small charge of ore
is used, in the latter a large charge of it. Rudis gold, of whatever colour
it is, is crushed with a libra each of sulphur and salt, a third of a libra of copper,

“stuff flies up with the smoke to the upper chamber, and adheres to the walls of the roof.
“The substance which is thus formed has at first the appearance of bubbles on water, after-
“ward increasing in size, it looks like skeins of wool. The heaviest parts settle in the bottom,
“while some fall over and around the furnaces, and some lie on the floor of the building.
“ This latter part is considered inferior, as it contains a lot of earth and becomes full of dirt.”

Pliny (XXXIV, 33) appears somewhat confused as to the difference between the
two species: “ That which is called pompholyx and spodos is found in the copper-smelting
“ furnaces, the difference between them being that pompholyx is separated by washing, while
“ sbodos is not washed. Some have called that which is white and very light pompholyx, and
“it is the soot of copper and cadmia; whereas spodos is darker and heavier. It is scraped
“from the walls of the furnace, and is mixed with particles of metal, and sometimes with
“charcoal.” (xxxiv, 34.) ‘The Cyprian spodos is the best. It is formed by fusing
“cadmia with copper ore. This being the lightest part of the metal, it flies up in the fumes
“from the furnace, and adheres to the roof, being distinguished from the soot by its whiteness.
“That which is less white is immature from the furnace, and it is this which some call ‘ pom-
“ pholyx.” Agricola (De Natura Fossilium, p. 350) traverses much the same ground as the
authors previously quoted, and especially recommends the pompholyx produced when making
brass by melting alternate layers of copper and calamine (cadmia fossilis).

27Oleo, ex fece vint sicca confecto. This oil, made from argol, is probably the
same substance mentioned a few lines further on as ‘ wine,” distilled by heating argol in a
retort. Still further on, salt made from argol is mentioned. It must be borne in mind that this
argol was crude tartrates from wine vats, and probably contained a good deal of organic
matter. Heating argol sufficiently would form potash, but that the distillation product could
be anything effective it is difficult to see.

28Aqua valens. No doubt mainly nitric acid, the preparation of which is explained
at length in Book X, p. 4309).

eae at PO Gr

\ a

a a in te a oe

BOOK IX. 397

and a quarter of a libra of argol ; they should be melted in a crucible on a
slow fire for three hours, then the alloy is put into molten silver that it
may melt more rapidly. Or a libra of the same crude gold, crushed up, is
mixed together with half a Hbra of stibiwm likewise crushed, and put
into a crucible with half an wncta of copper filings, and heated until they
melt, then a sixth part of granulated lead is thrown into the same crucible.
As soon as the mixture emits an odour, iron-filings are added to it, or if these
are not at hand, iron hammer-scales, for both of these break the strength of
the stibium. When the fire consumes it, not alone with it is some strength
of the stibiwm consumed, but some particles of gold and also of silver, if it
be mixed with the gold?®*. When the button has been taken out of the
crucible and cooled, it is melted in a cupel, first until the antimony is exhaled,
and thereafter until the lead is separated from it.

Crushed pyrites which contains gold is smelted in the same way; it
and the stibtum should be of equal weight, and in truth the gold may be
made from them in a number of different ways®®. One part of crushed
material is mixed with six parts of copper, one part of sulphur, half a part of
salt, and they are all placed in a pot and over them is poured wine distilled
by heating liquid argol in an ampulla. The pot is covered and smeared
over with lute and is put in a hot place, so that the mixture moistened with
wine may dry for the space of six days, then it is heated for three hours over
a gentle fire that it may combine more rapidly with the lead. Finally it is put
into a cupel and the gold is separated from the lead*!.

Or else one libra of the concentrates from washing pyrites, or other stones
to which gold adheres, is mixed with half a libra of salt, half a bra of argol,
a third of a bra of glass-galls, a sixth of a libra of gold or silver slags, and a
stctlicus of copper. The crucible into which these are put, after it has been
covered with a lid, is sealed with lute and placed in a small furnace that is
provided with small holes through which the air is drawn in, and then it is
heated until it turns red and the substances put in have alloyed; this should
take place within four or five hours. The alloy having cooled, it is again
crushed to powder and a pound of litharge is added to it ; then it is heated
again in another crucible until it melts. The button is taken out, purged of
slag, and placed in a cupel, where the gold is separated from the lead.

*°Ouod cum ignis consumit non modo una cum eo, quae ipsius stibti vis est, aliqua aurt
particula, sed etiam argenti, st cum auro fuerit permistum, consumitur. The meaning is by no
means clear. On p. 451 isset out the old method of parting silver from gold with antimony
sulphide, of which this may be a variation. The silver combines with sulphur, and the reduced
antimony forms an alloy with the gold. The added iron and copper would also combine with
the sulphur from the antimony sulphide, and no doubt assist by increasing the amount of free
collecting agent and by increasing the volume of the matte. (See note 17, p. 451.)

’°There follow eight different methods of treating crude bullion or rich concentrates.
In a general way three methods are involved,—tst, reduction with lead or antimony, and
cupellation ; 2nd, reduction with silver, and separation with nitric acid; 3rd, reduction
with lead and silver, followed by cupellation and parting with nitric acid. The use of sulphur
or antimony sulphide would tend to part out a certain amount of silver, and thus obtain
fairly pure bullion upon cupellation, But the introduction of copper could only result
deleteriously, except that it is usually accompanied by sulphur in some form, and would thus
probably pass off harmlessly as a matte carrying silver. (See note 33 below.)

%1It is not very clear where this lead comes from. Should it be antimony? The
German translation gives this as “ silver.”

28

398 BOOK IX.

Or to a lKbra of the powder prepared from such metalliferous
concentrates, is added a libra each of salt, of saltpetre, of argol, and of
glass-galls, and it is heated untilit melts. When cooled and crushed, it is washed,
then to it is added a /ibra of silver, a third of copper filings, a sixth of litharge,
and it is likewise heated again until it melts. After the button has been
purged of slag, it is put into the cupel, and the gold and silver are separated
from the lead; the gold is parted from the silver with agua valens. Or else
a libra of the powder prepared from such metalliferous concentrates,
a quarter of a libra of copper filings, and two librae of that second powder*
which fuses ores, are heated until they melt. The mixture when cooled is again
reduced to powder, roasted and washed, and in this manner a blue powder is
obtained. Of this, and silver, and that second powder which fuses ores, a
libra each are taken, together with three lébrae of lead, and a quarter of a
libra of copper, and they are heated together until they melt; then the
button is treated as before. Or else a Libra of the powder prepared from
such metalliferous concentrates, half a bra of saltpetre, and a quarter of a
libra of salt are heated until they melt. The alloy when cooled is again
crushed to powder, one libra of which is absorbed by four pounds of molten
silver. Or else a libra of the powder made from that kind of concentrates,
together with a libra of sulphur, a /ibra and a half of salt, a third of a Libra of
salt made from argol, and a third of a libra of copper resolved into powder
with sulphur, are heated until they melt. Afterward the lead is re-melted,
and the gold is separated from the other metals. Or else a bra of the
powder of this kind of concentrates, together with two librae of salt, half a
libra of sulphur, and one Uibra of litharge, are heated, and from these the
gold is melted out. By these and similar methods concentrates containing
gold, if there be a small quantity of them or if they are very rich, can be
smelted outside the blast furnace.

If there be much of them and they are poor, then they are smelted in the
blast furnace, especially the ore which is not crushed to powder, and particularly
when the gold mines yield an abundance of it®*. The gold concentrates mixed
with litharge and hearth-lead, to which are added iron-scales, are smelted in the
blast furnace whose tap-hole is intermittently closed, or else in the first or the
second furnaces in which the tap-hole is always open. In this manner an

82These powders are described in Book VII., p. 236. It is difficult to say which the
second really is. There are numbers of such recipes in the Probierbiichlein (see Appendix B),
with which a portion of these are identical.

883A variety of methods are involved in this paragraph: Ist, crude gold ore is smelted
direct ; 2nd, gold concentrates are smelted in a lead bath with some addition of iron—which
would simply matte off—the lead bullion being cupelled ; 3rd, roasted and unroasted pyrites
and cadmia (probably blende, cobalt, arsenic, etc.) are melted into a matte; this matte is
repeatedly roasted, and then re-melted in a lead bath; 4th, if the material “ flies out of the
furnace” it is briquetted with iron ore and lime, and the briquettes smelted with copper
matte. Three products result: (a) slag; (6) matte; (c) copper-gold-silver alloy. The
matte is roasted, re-smelted with lead, and no doubt a button obtained, and further matte.
The process from this point is not clear. It appears that the copper bullion is melted with
lead, and normally this product would be taken to the liquation furnace, but from the text it
would appear that the lead-copper bullion was melted again with iron ore and pyrites, in
which case some of the copper would be turned into the matte, and the lead alloy would be
ticher in gold and silver.

LE Sag ET a pas Oa Re

"
‘
*
i
.
if
ay

BOOK IX. 399

alloy of gold and lead is obtained which is put into the cupellation furnace.
Two parts of roasted pyrites or cadmia which contain gold, are put with
one part of unroasted, and are smelted together in the third furnace whose
tap-hole is always open, and are made into cakes. When these cakes have
been repeatedly roasted, they are re-smelted in the furnace whose tap-
hole is temporarily closed, or in one of the two others whose tap-holes are
always open. In this manner the lead absorbs the gold, whether pure or
argentiferous or cupriferous, and the alloy is taken to the cupellation
furnace. Pyrites, or other gold ore which is mixed with much material that
is consumed by fire and flies out of the furnace, is melted with stone from
which iron is melted, if this is at hand. Six parts of such pyrites, or of gold
ore reduced to powder and sifted, four of stone from which iron is made, like-
wise crushed, and three of slaked lime, are mixed together and moistened
with water; to these are added two and a half parts of the cakes which
contain some copper, together with one and a half parts of slag. A basket-
ful of fragments of the cakes is thrown into the furnace, then the mixture
of other things, and then the slag. Now when the middle part of the
forehearth is filled with the molten material which runs down from the
furnace, the slags are first skimmed off, and then the cakes made of pyrites ;
afterward the alloy of copper, gold and silver, which settles at the bottom,
is taken out. The cakes are gently roasted and re-smelted with lead, and
made into cakes, which are carried to other works. The alloy of copper,
gold, and silver is not roasted, but is re-melted again in a crucible with an
equal portion of lead. Cakes are also made much richer in copper and gold
than those I spoke of. In order that the alloy of gold and silver may be

Historica Note on Goitp.—There is ample evidence of gold being used for ornamental
urposes prior to any human record. The occurrence of large quantities of gold in native
Fak and the possibility of working it cold, did not necessitate any particular metallurgical
ingenuity. The earliest indications of metallurgical work are, of course, among the
Egyptians, the method of washing being figured as early as the monuments of the IV
Dynasty (prior to 3800 B.c.). There are in the British Museum two stelae of the XII Dynasty
(2400 B.c.) (144 Bay 1 and 145 Bay 6) relating to officers who had to do with gold mining in
Nubia, and upon one there are references to working what appears to be ore. If this be true,
it is the earliest reference to this subject. The Papyrus map (1500 B.c.) of a gold mine, in
the Turin Museum (see note 16, p. 129), probably refers to a quartz mine. Of literary evidences
there is frequent mention of refining gold and passing it through the fire in the Books of Moses,
arts no doubt learned from the Egyptians. As to working gold ore as distinguished from
alluvial, we have nothing very tangible, unless it be the stelae above, until the description of
Egyptian gold mining by Agatharcides (see note 8, p. 279). This geographer, of about the
2nd century B.c., describes very clearly indeed the mining, crushing, and concentration of ore
and the refining of the concentrates in crucibles with lead, salt, and barley bran. We may
mention in passing that Theognis (6th Century B.c.) is often quoted as mentioning the
refining of gold with lead, but we do not believe that the passage in question (IIorz) :
“‘ But having been put to the test and being rubbed beside (or against) lead as being refined
“gold, you will be fair,” etc.; or much the same statement again (418) will stand much
metallurgical interpretation. In any event, the myriads of metaphorical references to fining
and purity of gold in the earliest shreds of literature do not carry us much further than do those
of Shakespeare or Milton. Vitruvius and Pliny mention the recovery or refining of gold with
mercury (see note 12, p. 297 on Amalgamation) ; andit appears to us that gold was parted
from silver by cementation with salt prior to the Christianera. We first find mention of parting
with sulphur in the 12th century, with nitric acid prior to the 14th century, by antimony
sulphide prior to the 15th century, and by cementation with nitre by Agricola. (See historical
note on parting gold and silver, p. 458.) The first mention of parting gold from copper occurs
in the early 16th century (see note 24, p. 462). The first comprehensive description of gold
metallurgy in all its branches isin De Re Metallica.

400 BOOK IX.

made richer, to eighteen Hbrae of it are added forty-eight librae of crude
ore, three Hbrae of the stone from which iron is made, and three-quarters
of a libra of the cakes made from pyrites, and mixed with lead, all are
heated together in the crucible until they melt. When the slag and the
cakes melted from pyrites have been skimmed off, the alloy is carried to
other furnaces.

There now follows silver, of which the native silver or the lumps of rudés
silver?4 obtained from the mines are not smelted in the blast furnaces, but in
small iron pans, of which I will speak at the proper place; these lumps
are heated and thrown into molten silver-lead alloy in the cupellation furnace
when the silver is being separated from the lead, and refined. The tiny flakes
or tiny lumps of silver adhering to stones or marble or rocks, or again the
same little lumps mixed with earth, or silver not pure enough, should be
smelted in the furnace of which the tap-hole is only closed for a short time,
together with cakes melted from pyrites, with silver slags, and with stones
which easily fuse in fire of the second order.

In order that particles of silver should not fly away*® from the lumps
of ore consisting of minute’ threads of pure silver and twigs of native silver,
they are enclosed in a pot, and are placed in the same furnace where the rest of
the silver ores are being smelted. Some people smelt lumps of native silver
not sufficiently pure, in pots or triangular crucibles, whose lids are sealed with
lute. They do not place these pots in the blast furnace, but arrange them in
the assay furnace into which the draught of the air blows through small holes.
To one part of the native silver they add three parts of powdered litharge, as
many parts of hearth-lead, half a part of galena®*, and a small quantity of
salt and iron-scales. The alloy which settles at the bottom of the other
substances in the pot is carried to the cupellation furnace, and the slags are
re-melted with the other silver slags. They crush under the stamps and
wash the pots or crucibles to which silver-lead alloy or slags adhere, and
having collected the concentrates they smelt them together with the slags.
This method of smelting rudés silver, if there is a small quantity of it, is the
best, because the smallest portion of silver does not fly out of the pot or the
crucible, and get lost.

If bismuth ore or antimony ore or lead ore®’ contains silver, it is
smelted with the other ores of silver ; likewise galena or pyrites, if there is
a small amount of it. If there be much galena, whether it contain a large
or a small amount of silver, it is smelted separately from the others ;
which process I will explain a little further on.

*4Rudis silver comprised all fairly pure silver ores, such as silver sulphides, chlorides,
arsenides, etc. This is more fully discussed in note 6, p. 108.

35 Fvolent,—volatilize ?

87 apidis plumbarit facile liquescentis. The German Translation gives glaniz, t.e., Galena,
and the Interpretatio also gives glantz for lapis plumbarius. We are, however, uncertain
whether this “easily melting” material is galena or some other lead ore.

87Molybdaena is usually hearth-lead in De Re Metallica, but the German translation
in this instance uses pleyertz, lead ore. From the contextit would not appear to mean hearth-
lead—saturated bottoms of cupellation furnaces—for such material would not contain
appreciable silver. Agricola does confuse what are obviously lead carbonates with his other
molybdaena (see note 37, p. 476).

Sa ee Oe ee ey at ere

dee eee ee Ue ee ae ey

r
2

*

er
:
Pr
aii
a3
4
a
yi.
i

i

rat

BOOK IX. 401

Because lead and copper ores and their metals have much in common
with silver ores, it is fitting that I should say a great deal concerning them,
both now and later on. Also in the same manner, pyrites are smelted separ-
ately if there be much of them. To three parts of roasted lead or copper
ore and one part of crude ore, are added concentrates if they were made by
washing the same ore, together with slags, and all are put in the third furnace
whose tap-hole is always open. Cakes are made from this charge, which,
when they have been quenched with water, are roasted. Of these roasted
cakes generally four parts are again mixed with one part of crude pyrites
and re-melted in the same furnace. Cakes are again made from this charge,
and if there is a large amount of copper in these cakes, copper is made
immediately after they have been roasted and re-melted ; if there is little
copper in the cakes they are also roasted, but they are re-smelted with a little
soft slag. In this method the molten lead in the forehearth absorbs the
silver. From the pyritic material which floats on the top of the forehearth
are made cakes for the third time, and from them when they have been
roasted and re-smelted is made copper. Similarly, three parts of roasted
cadmia*®® in which there is silver, are mixed with one part of crude pyrites,
together with slag, and this charge is smelted and cakes are made from it ;
these cakes having been roasted are re-smelted in the same furnace. By this
method the lead contained in the forehearth absorbs the silver, and the silver-
lead is taken to the cupellation furnace. Crude quartz and stones which
easily fuse in fire of the third order, together with other ores in which there
is a small amount of silver, ought to be mixed with crude roasted pyrites or
cadmia, because the roasted cakes of pyrites or cadmia cannot be
profitably smelted separately. In a similar manner earths which contain
little silver are mixed with the same; but if pyrites and cadmia are not
available to the smelter, he smelts such silver ores and earths with litharge,
hearth-lead, slags, and stones which easily melt in the fire. The concentrates*®
originating from the washing of rudis silver, after first being roasted*® until
they melt, are smelted with mixed litharge and hearth-lead, or else, after
being moistened with water, they are smelted with cakes made from pyrites
and cadmia. By neither of these methods do (the concentrates) fall
back in the furnace, or fly out of it, driven by the blast of the bellows and the
agitation of the fire. If the concentrates originated from galena they are
smelted with it after having been roasted; and if from pyrites, then with
pyrites.

Pure copper ore, whether it is its own colour or is tinged with chrysocolla
or azure, and copper glance, or grey or black rudis copper, is smelted in a
furnace of which the tap-hole is closed for a very short time, or else is always

38The term cadmia is used in this paragraph without the usual definition. Whether
it was cadmia fornacis (furnace accretions) or cadmia metallica (cobalt-arsenic-blende mixture)
is uncertain. We believe it to be the former.

3°Ramentum si lotura ex argento rudi. This expression is generally used by the author
to indicate concentrates, but it is possible that in this sentence it means the tailings after
washing rich silver minerals, because the treatment of the rudis silver has been already
discussed above.

*°Ustum. This might be rendered “‘ burnt.’”’ In any event, it seems that the material
is sintered.

402 BOOK IX.

open*!. If there is a large amount of silver in the ore it is run into the fore-
hearth, and the greater part of the silver is absorbed by the molten lead, and
the remainder is sold with the copper to the proprietor of the works in which
silver is parted from copper**. If there is a small amount of silver in the ore,
no lead is put into the forehearth to absorb the silver, and the above-

{Aes purum sive proprius et color insederit, sive chrysocolla vel caeruleo fuerit tinctum,
et rude plumbei coloris, aut fusct, aut nigri. There are six copper minerals mentioned in this
sentence, and from our study of Agricola’s De Natura Fossilium we hazard the following :—
Proprius ei color insederit,—‘‘its own colour,’—probably cuprite or ‘‘ruby copper.”
Tinctum chrysocolla—partly the modern mineral of that name and partly malachite. Tinc-
tum caeruleo, partly azurite and partly other blue copper minerals. Rude plumbei coloris,—
“lead coloured,’’—was certainly chalcocite (copper glance). We are uncertain of fusci aut
nigri, but they were probably alteration products. For further discussion see note on p. 109.

“*HISTORICAL NOTE ON COPPER SMELTING.—The discoverer of the reduction of copper
by fusion, and his method, like the discoverer of tin and iron, will never be known, because
he lived long before humanity began to make records of its discoveries and doings. Moreover,
as different races passed independently and at different times through the so-called ‘“‘ Bronze
Age,” there may have been several independent discoverers. Upon the metallurgy of
pre-historic man we have some evidence in the many “ founders’ hoards”’ or ‘ smelters’
hoards ” of the Bronze Age which have been found, and they indicate a simple shallow pit in the
ground into which the ore was placed, underlaid with charcoal. Rude round copper cakes eight
to ten inches in diameter resulted from the cooling of the metal in the bottom of the pit.
Analyses of such Bronze Age copper by Professor Gowland and others show a small percentage
of sulphur, and this is possible only by smelting oxidized ores. Copper objects appear in the
pre-historic remains in Egypt, are common throughout the first three dynasties, and bronze
articles have been found as early as the IV Dynasty (from 3800 to 4700 B.c., according to the
authority adopted). The question of the origin of this bronze, whether from ores containing
copper and tin or by alloying the two metals, is one of wide difference of opinion, and we
further discuss the question in note 53, p. 411, under Tin. It is also interesting to note that
the crucible is the emblem of copper in the hieroglyphics. The earliest source of Egyptian
copper was probably the Sinai Peninsula, where there are reliefs as early as Seneferu (about 3700
B.C.), indicating that he worked the copper mines. Various other evidences exist of active
copper mining prior to 2500 B.C. (Petrie, Researches in Sinai, London, 1906, p. 51, etc.). The
finding of crucibles here would indicate some form of refining. Our knowledge of Egyptian
copper metallurgy is limited to deductions from their products, to a few pictures of crude
furnaces and bellows, and to the minor remains on the Sinai Peninsula ; none of the pictures
were, so far as we are aware, prior to 2300 B.C., but they indicate a considerable advance over
the crude hearth, for they depict small furnaces with forced draught—first a blow-pipe, and in
the XVIII Dynasty (about 1500 B.c.) the bellows appear. Many copper articles have been
found scattered over the Eastern Mediterranean and Asia Minor of pre-Mycenaean Age, some
probably as early as 3000 B.c. This metal is mentioned in the ‘‘ Tribute of Yii” in the Shoo
King (2500 B.c. ?) ; but even less is known of early Chinese metallurgy than of the Egyptian.
The remains of Mycenaean, Phoenician, Babylonian, and Assyrian civilizations, stretching
over the period from 1800 to 500 B.c., have yielded endless copper and bronze objects, the
former of considerable purity, and the latter a fairly constant proportion of from 10% to 14%
tin. The copper supply of the pre-Roman world seems to have come largely, first from
Sinai, and later from Cyprus, and from the latter comes our word copper, by way of the Romans
shortening aes cyprium (Cyprian copper) to cuprum. Research in this island shows that it
produced copper from 3000 B.c., and largely because of its copper it passed successively
under the domination of the Egyptians, Assyrians, Phoenicians, Greeks, Persians, and
Romans. The bronze objects found in Cyprus show 2% to 10% of tin, although tin does not,
so far as modern research goes, occur on that island. There can be no doubt that the Greeks
obtained their metallurgy from the Egyptians, either direct or second-hand—possibly through
Mycenae or Phoenicia. Their metallurgical gods and the tradition of Cadmus indicate
this much.

By way of literary evidences, the following lines from Homer (Iliad, xvi.) have
interest as being the first preserved description in any language of a metallurgical work.
Hephaestus was much interrupted by Thetis, who came to secure a shield for Achilles, and
whose general conversation we therefore largely omit. We adopt Pope’s translation :—

There the lame architect the goddess found
Obscure in smoke, his forges flaming round,
While bathed in sweat from fire to fire he flew ;

——

ene
sa

BOOK IX. 403

mentioned proprietors buy it in with the copper ; if there be no silver, copper
is made direct. If such copper ore contains some minerals which do not
easily melt, as pyrites or cadmia metallica fossilis’, or stone from which iron
is melted, then crude pyrites which easily fuse are added to it, together
with slag. From this charge, when smelted, they make cakes; and from

And puffing loud the roaring bellows blew.
* * * * * *

In moulds prepared, the glowing ore (metal ?) he pours.
* * * * * *

*‘ Vouchsafe, oh Thetis ! at our board to share

The genial rites and hospitable fare ;
While I the labours of the forge forego,
And bid the roaring bellows cease to blow.”
Then from his anvil the lame artist rose ;
Wide with distorted legs oblique he goes,
And stills the bellows, and (in order laid)
Locks in their chests his instruments of trade ;
Then with a sponge, the sooty workman dress’d
His brawny arms embrown’d and hairy breast.

* * * * * *
Thus having said, the father of the fires
To the black labours of his forge retires.
Soon as he bade them blow the bellows turn’d
Their iron mouths ; and where the furnace burn’d
Resounding breathed: at once the blast expires,
And twenty forges catch at once the fires ;
Just as the God directs, now loud, now low,
They raise a tempest, or they gently blow ;
In hissing flames huge silver bars are roll’d,
And stubborn brass (copper ?) and tin, and solid gold ;
Before, deep fixed, the eternal anvils stand.
The ponderous hammer loads his better hand ;
His left with tongs turns the vex’d metal round.
And thick, strong strokes, the doubling vaults rebound
Then first he formed the immense and solid shield ;

Even if we place the siege of Troy at any of the various dates from 1350 to II00 B.c.,

it does not follow that the epic received its final form for many centuries later, probably
00 B.c.; and the experience of the race in metallurgy at a much later period than

roy may have been drawn upon to fill in details. It is possible to fill a volume with indirect
allusion to metallurgical facts and to the origins of the art, from Greek mythology, from Greek
poetry, from the works of the grammarians, and from the Bible. But they are of no more
technical value than the metaphors from our own tongue. Greek literature in general is
singularly lacking in metallurgical description of technical value, and it is not until Dios-
corides (1st Century A.D.) that anything of much importance can be adduced. Aristotle, how-
ever, does make an interesting reference to what may be brass (see note on p. 410), and there
can be no doubt that if we had the lost work of Aristotle’s successor, Theophrastus (372-288
B.C.), on metals we should be in possession of the first adequate work on metallurgy. As it
is, we find the green and blue copper minerals from Cyprus mentioned in his “ Stones.”
And this is the first mention of any particular copper ore. He also mentions (XIX.)
pyrites ‘“‘ which melt,” but whether it was a copper variety cannot be determined. Theo-
phrastus further describes the making of verdigris (see note 4, p. 440). From Dioscorides
we get a good deal of light on copper treatment, but as his objective was to describe medicinal
reparations, the information is very indirect. He states (Vv, 100) that “‘ pyrites is a stone
m which copper is made.’’ He mentions chalcitis (copper sulphide, see note on, p. 573) ;
while his misy, sory, melanteria, caeruleum, and chrysocolla were all oxidation copper or iron
minerals. (See notes on p. 573.) In giving a method of securing pompholyx (zinc oxide),
“ the soot flies up when the copper refiners sprinkle powdered cadmia over the molten metal”
(see note 26, p. 394) ; he indirectly gives us the first definite indication of making brass, and
further gives some details as to the furnaces there employed, which embraced bellows and dust
chambers. In describing the making of flowers of copper (see note 26, p. 538) he states that
in refining copper, when the ‘‘ molten metal flows through its tube into a receptacle, the work-

“8Cadmia metallica fossilis (see note on p. 112). This was undoubtedly the complex
cobalt-arsenic-zinc minerals found in Saxony. In the German translation, however, this is
given as Kalmey, calamine, which is unlikely from the association with pyrites.

404 BOOK IX.

these, when they have been roasted as much as is necessary and re-smelted,
the copper is made. But if there be some silver in the cakes, for which an
outlay of lead has to be made, then it is first run into the forehearth, and
the molten lead absorbs the silver.

Indeed, rudis copper ore of inferior quality, whether ash-coloured or
purple, blackish and. occasionally in parts blue, is smelted in the first
furnace whose tap-hole is always open. This is the method of the Tyrolese.
To as much rvudis copper ore as will fill eighteen vessels, each of which holds

“‘men pour cold water on it, the copper spits and throws off the flowers.” He gives the first
description of vitriol (see note 11, p. 572), and describes the pieces as “ shaped like dice which
stick together in bunches like grapes.’’ Altogether, from Dioscorides we learn for the first
time of copper made from sulphide ores, and of the recovery of zinc oxides from furnace
fumes ; and he gives us the first certain description of making brass, and finally the first
notice of blue vitriol.

The next author we have who gives any technical detail of copper work is Pliny (23-79
A.D.), and while his statements carry us a little further than Dioscorides, they are not as
complete as the same number of words could have afforded had he ever had practical contact
with the subject, and one is driven to the conclusion that he was not himself much of a metal-
lurgist. Pliny indicates that copper ores were obtained from veins by underground mining.
He gives the same minerals as Dioscorides, but is a good deal confused over chrysocolla and
chalcitis. He gives no description of the shapes of furnaces, but frequently mentions the
bellows, and speaks of the cadmia and pompholyx which adhered to the walls and arches of
the furnaces. He has nothing to say as to whether fluxes are used or not. As to fuel, he says
(XXXII, 30) that “ for smelting copper and iron pine wood is the best.” The following (xxxIv,
20) is of the greatest interest on the subject :—‘‘ Cyprian copper is known as coronarium and
“yvegulare; both are ductile. . . . In other mines are made that known as regulare and
“caldarium. These differ, because the caldarium is only melted, and is brittle to the hammer ;
“whereas the regulare is malleable or ductile. All Cyprian copper is this latter kind. But
‘in other mines with care the difference can be eliminated from ca/darium, the impurities being
‘‘ carefully purged away by smelting with fire, it is made into regulare. Among the remaining
“ kinds of copper the best is that of Campania, which is most esteemed for vessels and utensils.
“This kind is made in several ways. At Capua it is melted with wood, not with charcoal,
“after which it is sprinkled with water and washed through an oak sieve. After it is melted
‘““a number of times Spanish plumbum argentum (probably pewter) is added to it in pro-
“portion of ten pounds of the lead to one hundred pounds of copper, and thereby it is
‘made pliable and assumes that pleasing colour which in other kinds of copper is effected
“by oil and the sun. In many parts of the Italian provinces they make a similar kind
“of metal; but there they add eight pounds of lead, and it is re-melted over charcoal
“because of the scarcity of wood. Very different is the method carried on in Gaul, par-
“ ticularly where the ore is smelted between red hot stones, for this burns the metal and renders
“it black and brittle. Moreover, it is re-melted only a single time, whereas the oftener this
‘“ operation is repeated the better the quality becomes. It is well to remark that all copper
“fuses best when the weather is intensely cold.” The red hot stones in Gaul were prob-
ably as much figments of imagination as was the assumption of one commentator that
they were a reverberatory furnace. Apart from the above, Pliny says nothing very direct on
refining copper. It is obvious that more than one melting was practised, but that anything
was known of the nature of oxidation by a blast and reduction by poling is uncertain. We
produce the three following statements in connection with some bye-products used for medicinal
purposes, which at least indicate operations subsequent to the original melting. As to whether
they represent this species of refining or not, we leave it to the metallurgical profession (XXXIV,
24) :—“‘ The flowers of copper are used in medicine ; they are made by fusing copper and moving
“it to another furnace, where the rapid blast separates it into a thousand particles, which
“are called flowers. These scales are also made when the copper cakes are cooled in water
““ (XXXIV, 35). Smega is prepared in the copper works; when the metal is melted and
“thoroughly smelted charcoal is added to it and gradually kindled ; after this, being blown
“upon by a powerful bellows, it spits out, as it were, copper chaff (xxxIV, 37). There is
“another product of these works easily distinguished from smega, which the Greeks call
“ diphrygum. This substance has three different origins. . . A third way of making it
“is from the residues which fall to the bottom in copper furnaces. The difference between
“the different substances (in the furnace) is that the copper itself flows into a receiver ; the
“slag makes its escape from the furnace ; the flowers float on the top (of the copper ?), and
“the diphrygum remains behind. Some say that in the furnace there are certain masses of
‘“stone which, being smelted, become soldered together, and that the copper fuses around it,
“the mass not becoming liquid unless it is transferred to another furnace. It thus forms a
‘sort of knot, as it were, in the metal.”

BOOK IX. 405

almost as much as seven Roman moduli**, the first smelter—for there are
three—adds three cartloads of lead slags, one cartload of schist, one fifth of
a centumpondiwm of stones which easily fuse in the fire, besides a small
quantity of concentrates collected from copper slag and accretions, all of
which he smelts for the space of twelve hours, and from which he makes six
centumpondia of primary cakes and one-half of a centumpondium of alloy.
One half of the latter consists of copper and silver, and it settles to the bottom
of the forehearth. In every centumpondium of the cakes there is half a libra
of silver and sometimes half an wncia besides ; in the half of a centumpondium

Pliny is a good deal confused over the copper alloys, failing to recognise aurichalcum
as the same product as that made by mixing cadmia and molten copper. Further, there is
always the difficulty in translation arising from the fact that the Latin aes was indiscriminately
copper, brass, and bronze. He does not, except in one instance (XXxIV., 2), directly describe
the mixture of cadmia and copper. ‘‘ Next to Livian (copper) this kind (corduban, from
Spain) most readily absorbs cadmia, and becomes almost as excellent as aurichalcum for
“ making sesterces.”” As to bronze, there is no very definite statement ; but the argentatium
given in the quotation above from xxxIV, 20, is stated in xxxIv, 48, to be a mixture of
tin and lead. The Romans carried on most extensive copper mining in various parts of their
empire ; these activities extended from Egypt through Cyprus, Central Europe, the Spanish
Peninsula, and Britain. The activity of such works is abundantly evidenced in the mines, but
very little remains upon the surface to indicate the equipment ; thus, while mining methods
are clear enough, the metallurgy receives little help from these sources. At Rio Tinto there
still remain enormous slag heaps from the Romans, and the Phoenician miners before them.
Professor W. A. Carlyle informs us that the ore worked must have been almost exclusively
sulphides, as only negligible quantities of carbonates exist in the deposits; they probably
mixed basic and siliceous ores. There is some evidence of roasting, and the slags run from
.2 to .6%. They must have run down mattes, but as to how they ultimately arrived at
metallic copper there is no evidence to show.

The special processes for separating other metals from copper by liquation and matting,
or of refining by poling, etc., are none of them clearly indicated in records or remains until
we reach the 12th century. Here we find very adequate descriptions of copper smelting and
refining by the Monk Theophilus (see Appendix B). Wereproduce two paragraphs of interest
from Hendrie’s excellent translation (p. 305 and 313): “‘ Copper is engendered in the earth.
““ When a vein of which is found, it is acquired with the greatest labour by digging and break-
“ing. It is a stone of a green colour and most hard, and naturally mixed with lead. This
“stone, dug up in abundance, is placed upon a pile and burned after the manner of chalk,
“nor does it change colour, but yet loses its hardness, so that it can be broken up. Then,
“being bruised small, it is placed in the furnace ; coals and the bellows being applied, it is
“incessantly forged by day and night. This should be done carefully and with caution ;
“that is, at first coals are placed in, then small pieces of stone are distributed over them,
“and a coals, and then stone anew, and it is thus arranged until it is sufficient for the

size of the furnace. And when the stone has commenced to liquefy, the lead flows out
“ through some small cavities, and the copper remains within. (313) Of the purification of cop-
i ed Take an iron dish of the size you wish, and line it inside and out with clay strongly
“beaten and mixed, and it is carefully dried. Then place it before a forge upon the coals,
“so that when the bellows act upon it the wind may issue partly within and partly above it,
“and not below it. And very small coals being placed round it, place copper in it equally,
“and add over it a heap of coals. When, by blowing a long time, this has become melted,
“uncover it and cast immediately fine ashes of coals over it, and stir it with a thin and dry
“piece of wood as if mixing it, and you will directly see the burnt lead adhere to these ashes
“ike a glue. Which being cast out again superpose coals, and blowing for a long time, as
“at first, again uncover it, and then do as you did before. You do this until at length, by
“ cooking it, you can withdraw the lead entirely. Then pour it over the mould which you have
“prepared for this, and you will thus prove if it be pure. Hold it with pincers, glowing as it
“is, before it has become cold, and strike it with a large hammer strongly over the anvil, and
“if it be broken or split you must liquefy it anew as before.”

The next writer of importance was Biringuccio, who was contemporaneous with
Agricola, but whose book precedes De Re Metallica by 15 years. That author (111, 2) is
the first to describe particularly the furnace used in Saxony and the roasting prior to smelting,
and the first to mention fluxes in detail. He, however, describes nothing of matte smelting ;
in copper refining he gives the whole process of poling, but omits the pole. It is not until
we reach De Re Metallica that we find adequate descriptions of the copper minerals,
roasting, matte smelting, liquation, and refining, with a wealth of detail which eliminates
the necessity for a large amount of conjecture regarding technical methods of the time.

“4The Roman modius (modulus ?)\held about 550 cubic inches, the English peck holding
535 cubic inches. Then, perhaps, his seven moduli would be roughly, 1 bushel 3 pecks, and 18
vessels full would be about 31x bushels—say, roughly, 5,400 lbs. of ore.

406 BOOK IX.

of the alloy there is a bes or three-quarters of silver. In this way every week,
if the work is for six days, thirty-six centumpondia of cakes are made and
three centumpondia of alloy, in all of which there is often almost twenty-four
librae of silver. The second smelter separates from the primary cakes the
greater part of the silver by absorbing itin lead. To eighteen centumpondia
of cakes made from crude copper ore, he adds twelve centumpondia of hearth-
lead and litharge, three centumpondia of stones from which lead is smelted,
five centumpondia of hard cakes rich in silver, and two centumpondia of
exhausted liquation cakes*® ; he adds besides, some of the slags resulting
from smelting crude copper, together with a small quantity of concentrates
made from accretions, all of which he melts for the space of twelve hours,
and makes eighteen centumpondia of secondary cakes, and twelve centum-
pondsa of copper-lead-silver alloy; in each centumpondium of the latter
there is half a libra of silver. After he has taken off the cakes with a
hooked bar, he pours the alloy out into copper or iron moulds; by this
method they make four cakes of alloy, which are carried to the works in
which silver is parted from copper. On the following day, the same smelter,
taking eighteen centumpondia of the secondary cakes, again adds twelve
centumpondia of hearth-lead and litharge, three centumpondia of stones
from which lead is smelted, five centumpondia of hard cakes rich in silver,
together with slags from the smelting of the primary cakes, and with concen-
trates washed from the accretions which are usually made at that time.
This charge is likewise smelted for the space of twelve hours, and he makes as
many as thirteen centumpondia of tertiary cakes and eleven centumpondia
of copper-lead-silver alloy, each centumpondium of which contains one-
third of a libra and half an wncia of silver. When he has skimmed off the
tertiary cakes with a hooked bar, the alloy is poured into copper moulds, and
by this method four cakes of alloy are made, which, like the preceding four
cakes of alloy, are carried to the works in which silver is parted from copper.
By this method the second smelter makes primary cakes on alternate days
and secondary cakes on the intermediate days. The third smelter takes
eleven cartloads of the tertiary cakes and adds to them three cartloads of
hard cakes poor in silver, together with the slag from smelting the secondary
cakes, and the concentrates from the accretions which are usually made
at that time. From this charge when smelted, he makes twenty centwm-
pondia of quaternary cakes, which are called “hard cakes,” and also
fifteen centumpondia of those “hard cakes rich in silver,’’ each centum-
pondium of which contains a third of a libra of silver. These latter cakes the
second smelter, as I said before, adds to the primary and secondary cakes
when he re-melts them. In the same way, from eleven cartloads of qua-
ternary cakes thrice roasted, he makes the “final’’ cakes, of which one
centumpondinm contains only half an uncia of silver. In this operation he
also makes fifteen centumpondia of ‘“‘hard cakes poor in silver,’ in each
centumpondium of which is a sixth of a Libra of silver. These hard cakes the

45Exhausted liquation cakes (panes aerei fathiscentes). This is the copper sponge resulting
from the first liquation of lead, and still contains a considerable amount of lead. . The liquation
process is discussed in great detail in Book XI.

BOOK IX. 407

third smelter, as I have said, adds to the tertiary cakes when he re-smelts
them, while from the “ final’’ cakes, thrice roasted and re-smelted, is made
black copper*®.

The rudis copper from which pure copper is made, if it contains little
silver or if it does not easily melt, is first smelted in the third furnace of which
the tap-hole is always open; and from this are made cakes, which after
being seven times roasted are re-smelted, and from these copper is melted
out ; the cakes of copper are carried to a furnace of another kind, in which
they are melted for the third time, in order that in the copper ‘ bottoms ”
there may be more silver, while in the “tops” there may be less, which
process is explained in Book XI.

“The method of this paragraph involves two main objectives—first, the gradual
enrichment of matte to blister copper; and, second, the creation of large cakes of copper-
lead-silver alloy of suitable size and ratio of metals for liquation. This latter process is
described in detail in Book XI. The following groupings show the circuit of the various
products, the “lbs.” being Roman /ibrae :—

CHARGE. _PRopucts.
Crude ore 5,400 lbs. Primary matte (t) .. 600 lbs.
ate slags 3 al ar ‘
ist I cartloa ilver-copper alloy (A) Ors
at \Flux pt <a 20 IDS, nt if ’
Concentrates from Slags (B)
slags & accretions Small quantity
Primary matte (I) 1,800 lbs. Secondary matte (2) _1,800 lbs.
Hearth-lead & litharge 1,200 ,,
Lead ore... 5é 300 ,, Silver-copper-lead
and 4 Rich hard cakes (A ;) 500 ,, ‘ alloy (liquation
Liquated cakes ‘ 200 ,, cakes) (A 2) I,200 ,,
Slags (B)
Concentrates from Slags (B 2)
accretions
Secondary matte (2) 1,800 lbs. Tertiary matte (3) 1,300 lbs.
Hearth-lead & litharge 1,200 _,, Silver-copper-lead
Lead ore... in g00'!*,, alloy (liquation
grd_ {Rich hardcakes(A4) 500 ,, \ cakes) (A 3) I,I00 ,,
Slags (B 2) Slags (B 3)
Concentrates from
accretions y
Tertiary matte (3) .. 11 cartloads Quaternary hard cakes
Poor hard cakes (A5) 3 ” matte (4) .. .. 2,000 lbs.
4th 4Slags (B 3) . Rich hard cakes of
- [Concentrates from matte (A 4) 1,500 ,,
accretions )
Roasted quartz Poor hard cakes of
5th Matte (4) (three times matte (A 5) 1,500 lbs.
roasted) .. .. I cartloads Final cakes of matte (5)
6th Final matte three times roasted is smelted to blister copper.

The following would be a rough approximation of the value of the various products :—
(z.) Primary matte .. = 158 ounces troy per short ton.

(2.) Secondary matte . OS as ” »

(3.) Tertiary matte ae OO iin » ”

(4.) ey matte = Indeterminate

A. pper-silver alloy = 388 ounces Troy per short ton.
Az Copper-silver-lead alloy =_ 145 ,, ” ”

A3 ” 2” ” = I0g ” ” ”

Ag Rich hard cakes = 97 > ” ”

As Poor hard cakes = Indeterminate.

Final blister copper 12 ozs. Troy per short ton.

408 BOOK IX.

Pyrites, when they contain not only copper, but also silver, are smelted
in the manner I described when I treated of ores of silver. But if they are
poor in silver, and if the copper which is melted out of them cannot easily be
treated, they are smelted according to the method which I last explained.

Finally, the copper schists containing bitumen or sulphur are roasted,
and then smelted with stones which easily fuse in a fire of the second order,
and are made into cakes, on the top of which the slags float. From
these cakes, usually roasted seven times and re-melted, are melted out
slags and two kinds of cakes; one kind is of copper and occupies the
bottom of the crucible, and these are sold to the proprietors of the works in
which silver is parted from copper; the other kind of cakes are usually
re-melted with primary cakes. If the schist contains but a small amount of
copper, it is burned, crushed under the stamps, washed and sieved, and
the concentrates obtained from it are melted down; from this are made
cakes from which, when roasted, copper is made. If either chrysocolla or azure,
or yellow or black earth containing copper and silver, adheres to the schist,
it is not washed, but is crushed and smelted with stones which easily
fuse in fire of the second order.

Lead ore, whether it be molybdaena*’, pyrites, (galena ?) or stone from
which it is melted, is often smelted in a special furnace, of which I have
spoken above, but no less often in the third furnace of which the tap-hole
is always open. The hearth and forehearth are made from powder containing
a small portion of iron hammer-scales ; iron slag forms the principal flux
for such ores; both of these the expert smelters consider useful and to
the owner’s advantage, because it is the nature of iron to attract lead. If
it is molybdaena or the stone from which lead is smelted, then the lead runs
down from the furnace into the forehearth, and when the slags have been
skimmed off, the lead is poured out with a ladle. If pyrites are smelted,
the first to flow from the furnace into the forehearth, as may be seen at
Goslar, is a white molten substance, injurious and noxious to silver, for it
consumes it. For this reason the slags which float on the top having been
skimmed off, this substance is poured out; or if it hardens, then it is taken
out with a hooked bar ; and the walls of the furnace exude the same substance*®.

4’This expression is usually used for hearth-lead, but in this case the author is apparently
confining himself to lead ore, and apparently refers to lead carbonates. The German Trans-
lation gives pleyschweiss. The pyrites mentioned in this paragraph may mean galena, as
pyrites was to Agricola a sort of genera.

“8(Excoquitur) . . . “st verd pyrites, primd é fornace, ut Goselariae videre licet, in
“catinum defluit liquor quidam candidus, argento inimicus et nocivus; id enim comburit :
“quo circa recrementis, quae supernatant, detractis effunditur: vel induratus conto uncinato
“ extrahitur : eundem liquorem parietes fornacis exudant.’”’ In the Glossary the following
statement appears: ‘‘ Liquor candidus primo é fornace defluens cum Goselariae excoquitur
“ pyrites,—kobelt ; quem parietes fornacis exudant,—conterfei.” In this latter statement
Agricola apparently recognised that there were two different substances, 7.e., that the sub-
stance found in the furnace walls—conterfei—was not the same substance as that which
first flowed from the furnace—kobelt. We are at no difficulty in recognizing conterfei as
metallic zinc ; it was long known by that term, and this accidental occurrence is repeatedly
mentioned by other authors after Agricola. The substance which first flowed into the fore-
hearth presents greater difficulties ; it certainly was not zinc. In De Natura Fossilium (p.
347), Agricola says that at Goslar the lead has a certain white slag floating upon it, the
“colour derived from the pyrites (pyriten argenteum) from which it was produced.” Pyriten
argentewm was either marcasite or mispickel, neither of which offers much suggestion ; nor are
we able to hazard an explanation of value.

HisToRICAL NOTE ON Zinc. The history of zinc metallurgy falls into two distinct

:
Pg
AG
a
5
*

BOOK IX. 409

Then the stannum runs out of the furnace into the forehearth ; this is an alloy
of lead and silver. From the silver-lead alloy they first skim off the slags,
not rarely white, as some pyrites*® are, and afterward they skim off the
cakes of pyrites, if there are any. In these cakes there is usually some copper ;
but since there is usually but a very small quantity, and as the forest

lines—first, that of the metal, and second, that of zinc ore, for the latter was known and used to
make brass by cementation with copper and to yield oxides by sublimation for medicinal
purposes, nearly 2,000 years before the metal became generally known and used in Europe.

There is some reason to believe that metallic zinc was known to the Ancients, for
bracelets made of it, found in the ruins of Cameros (prior to 500 B.c.), may have been of that
age (Raoul Jagnaux, Tratté de Chimie Générale, 1887, 1, 385); and further, a passage in
Strabo (63 B.c.—24 A.D.) is of much interest. He states: (xm, 1,56) “‘ There is found at
“‘ Andeira a stone which when burnt becomes iron. It is then put into a furnace, together
“with some kind of earth, when it distils a mock silver (pseudargyrum), or with the addition
“of copper it becomes the compound called orichalcum. There is found a mock silver near
“Tismolu also.” (Hamilton’s Trans., u, p. 381). About the Christian era the terms
orichalcum or aurichalcum undoubtedly refer to brass, but whether these terms as used by
earlier Greek writers do not refer to bronze only, is a matter of considerable doubt. Beyond
these slight references we are without information until the 16th Century. If the metal was
known to the Ancients it must have been locally, for by its greater adaptability to brass-
making it would probably have supplanted the crude melting of copper with zinc minerals.

It appears that the metal may have been known in the Far East prior to such knowledge
in Europe ; metallic zinc was imported in considerable quantities from the East as early as
the 16th and r7th centuries under such terms as ¢uteneque, tuttanego, calaém, and spiauter—the
latter, of course, being the progenitor of our term spelter. The localities of Eastern
production have never been adequately investigated. W. Hommel (Engineering and Mining
Journal, June 15, 1912) gives a very satisfactory review of the Eastern literature upon the
subject, and considers that the origin of manufacture was in India, although the most of the
16th and 17th Century product came from China. The earliest certain description seems to
be some recipes for manufacture quoted by Praphulla Chandra Ray (A History of Hindu
Chemistry, London, 1902, p. 39) dating from the rrth to the 14th Centuries. There does
not appear to be any satisfactory description of the Chinese method until that of Sir
George Staunton (Journal Asiatique Paris, 1835, p. 141.) We may add that spelter
was produced in India by crude distillation of calamine in clay pots in the early part of the
= ge Century (Brooke, Jour. Asiatic Soc. of Bengal, vol. xrx, 1850, p. 212), and the remains
of such smelting in Rajputana are supposed to be very ancient.

The discovery of zinc in Europe seems to have been quite independent of the East,
but precisely where and when is clouded with much uncertainty. The marchasita
aurea of Albertus Magnus has been called upon to serve as metallic zinc, but such belief
requires a hypothesis based upon a great deal of assumption. Further, the statement is
frequently made that zinc is mentioned in Basil Valentine’s Triumphant Chariot of Antimony
(the only one of the works attributed to this author which may date prior to the 17th Century),
but we have been unable to find any such reference. The first certain mention of metallic zinc
is generally accredited to Paracelsus (1493-1541), who states (Liber Mineralium 11.): ‘‘ More-
“over there is another metal generally unknown called zinken. It is of peculiar nature and
“ origin ; many other metals adulterate it. It can be melted, for it is generated from three
“fluid principles ; it is not malleable. Its colour is different from other metals and does not
“resemble others in its growth. Its ultimate matter (ultima materia) is not to me yet fully
“known. It admits of no mixture and does not permit of the fabricationes of other metals.
“It stands alone entirely to itself.” We do not believe that this book was;published until

ati _

“a black or brown or grey body which the Alchemists call cadmia sublimata. This
““ possesses corrosive properties to the highest degree. Cognate with this cadmia and pyrites
“is a compound which the Noricans and Rhetians call zincum.’’ We leave it to readers to
decide how near this comes to metallic zinc; in any event, he apparently did not

aoe... non raro, ut nonnulli pyritae sunt, candida ... .” This is
apparently the unknown substance mentioned above.

410 BOOK IX.

charcoal is not abundant, no copper is made from them. From the silver-
lead poured into iron moulds they likewise make cakes ; when these cakes
have been melted in the cupellation furnace, the silver is parted from the
lead, because part of the lead is transformed into litharge and part into
hearth-lead, from which in the blast furnace on re-melting they make

recognise his conterfei from the furnaces as the same substance as the zincum from Silesia.
The first correlation of these substances was apparently by Lohneys, in 1617, who says
(Vom Bergwerk, p. 83-4): “‘ When the people in the smelting works are smelting, there is
‘“‘ made under the furnace and in the cracks in the walls among the badly plastered stones, a
“metal which is called zinc or counterfeht, and when the wall is scraped it falls into a vessel
‘‘ placed to receive it. This metal greatly resembles tin, but it is harder and less malleable.
«. , . The Alchemists have a great desire for this zinc or bismuth.” That this metal
originated from blende or calamine was not recognised until long after, and Libavis
(Alchymia, Frankfort, 1606), in describing specimens which came from the East,
did not so identify it, this office being performed by Glauber, who says (De Prosperitate
Germanias, Amsterdam, 1656): ‘“‘ Zink is a volatile mineral or half-ripe metal when it is
“ extracted from its ore. It is more brilliant than tin and not so fusible or malleable . . .
“‘it turns (copper) into brass, as does lapis calaminaris, for indeed this stone is nothing but
“infusible zinc, and this zinc might be called a fusible Japis calaminaris, inasmuch as both
“of them partake of the same nature. . . . It sublimates itself up into the cracks of the
“furnace, whereupon the smelters frequently break it out.” The systematic distillation
of zinc from calamine was not discovered in Europe until the 18th Century. Henkel is
generally accredited with the first statement to that effect. In a contribution published as
an Appendix to his other works, of which we have had access only to a French translation
(Pyritologie, Paris, 1760, p. 494), he concludes that zinc is a half-metal of which the best ore
is calamine, but believes it is always associated with lead, and mentions that an Englishman
lately arrived from Bristol had seen it being obtained from calamine in his own country. He
further mentions that it can be obtained by heating calamine and lead ore mixed with coal
in a thick earthen vessel. The Bristol works were apparently those of John Champion,
established about 1740. The art of distillation was probably learned in the East. j
Definite information as to the zinc minerals goes back to but a little before the
Christian Era, unless we accept nebular references to aurichalcum by the poets, or what is
possibly zinc ore in the ‘‘earth”’ mentioned by Aristotle (De Mirabilibus, 62): “‘ Men say
“that the copper of the Mossynoeci is very brilliant and white, no tin being mixed with it ;
“but there is a kind of earth there which is melted with it.” This might quite well be an
arsenical mineral. But whether we can accept the poets or Aristotle or the remark of
Strabo given above, as sufficient evidence or not, there is no difficulty with the descrip-
tion of cadmia and pompholyx and spodos of Dioscorides (1st Century), parts of which
we reproduce in note 26, p. 394. His cadmia is described as rising from the copper furnaces
and clinging to the iron bars, but he continues: ‘‘ Cadmia is also prepared by burning the
“stone called pyrites, which is found near Mt. Soloi in Cyprus. . . . Some say that
“‘cadmia may also be found in stone quarries, but they are deceived by stones having a
“resemblance to cadmia.’’ Pompholyx and spodos are evidently furnace calamine. From
reading the quotation given on p. 394, there can be no doubt that these materials, natural or
artificial, were used to make brass, for he states (v, 46): “‘ White pompholyx is made every
“time that the artificer in the working and perfecting of the copper sprinkles powdered
“‘ cadmia upon it to make it more perfect, the soot arising from this . . . . is pompholyx.”
Pliny is confused between the mineral cadmia and furnace calamine, and none of his statements
are very direct on the subject of brass making. His most pointed statement is (XXXIV, 2) :
Mean Next to Livian (copper) this kind best absorbs cadmia, and is almost as good
as aurichalcum for making sesterces and double asses.” As stated above, there can be little
doubt that the aurichalcum of the Christian Era was brass, and further, we do know of brass
sesterces of this period. Other Roman writers of this and later periods refer to earth used
with copper for making brass. Apart from these evidences, however, there is the evidence of
analyses of coins and objects, the earliest of which appears to be a large brass of the Cassia
family of 20 B.c., analyzed by Phillips, who found 17.3% zinc (Records of Mining and
Metallurgy, London, 1857, p. 13). Numerous analyses of coins and other objects datin,
during the following century corroborate the general use of brass. Professor Gowlan:
(Presidential Address, Inst. of Metals, 1912) rightly considers the Romans were the first to
make brass, and at about the above period, for there appears to be no certainty of any earlier
production. The first adequate technical description of brass making is in about 1200 A.D.,
being that of Theophilus, who describes (Hendrie’s Trans., p. 307) calcining calamina and
mixing it with finely divided copper in glowing crucibles. The process was repeated by
adding more calamine and copper until the pots were full of molten metal. This method
is repeatedly described with minor variations by Biringuccio, Agricola (De Nat. Fos.), and
others, down to the 18th Century. For discussion of the zinc minerals see note on p. I12.

eee ee

BOOK IX. 411

de-silverized lead, for in this lead each centumpondium contains only a
drachma of silver, when before the silver was parted from it each centumpon-
dium contained more or less than three unciae of silver®°.

The little black stones®! and others from which tin is made, are smelted
in their own kind of furnace, which should be narrower than the other
furnaces, that there may be only the small fire which is necessary for this
ore. These furnaces are higher, that the height may compensate for the
narrowness and make them of almost the same capacity as the other furnaces.
At the top, in front, they are closed and on the other side they are open, where
there are steps, because they cannot have the steps in front on account of the
forehearth ; the smelters ascend by these steps to put the tin-stone into the
furnace. The hearth of the furnace is not made of powdered earth and char-
coal, but on the floor of the works are placed sandstones which are not too
hard ; these are set on a slight slope, and are two and three-quarters feet
long, the same number of feet wide, and two feet thick, for the thicker they are
the longer they last in the fire. Around them is constructed a rectangular
furnace eight or nine feet high, of broad sandstones, or of those common
substances which by nature are composed of diverse materials®®. On the
inside the furnace is everywhere evenly covered with lute. The upper part
of the interior is two feet long and one foot wide, but below it is not so long
and wide. Above it are two hood-walls, between which the fumes ascend
from the furnace into the dust chamber, and through this they escape by a
narrow opening in the roof. The sandstones are sloped at the bed of the
furnace, so that the tin melted from the tin-stone may flow through the tap-
hole of the furnace into the forehearth.®*

5°One drachma is about 3 ounces Troy per short ton. Three umciae are about 72
ounces 6 dwts. Troy per short ton.

51In this section, which treats of the metallurgy of plumbum candidum, “tin,” the
word candidum is very often omitted in the Latin, leaving only plumbum, which is confusing
at times with lead. The black tin-stone, /apilli nigri has been treated in a similar manner,
lapilli (small stones) constantly occurring alone in the Latin. This has been rendered as
“tin-stone ” throughout, and the material prior to extraction of the lapilli nigri has been
rendered “ tin-stuff,” after the Cornish.

Sac |. ex saxis vilibus, quae natura de diversa materia composuit.” The
Glossary gives grindstein. Granite (?).

5SHISTORICAL NOTES ON TIN METALLURGY. The first appearance of tin lies in the
ancient bronzes. And while much is written upon the “ Bronze Age” by archeologists,
we seriously doubt whether or not a large part of so-called bronze is not copper. In any
event, this period varied with each race, and for instance, in Britain may have been much
later than Egyptian historic times. The bronze articles of the IV Dynasty (from 3800 to
4700 B.c. depending on the authority) place us on certain ground of antiquity. Professor
Gowland (Presidential Address, Inst. of Metals, London, 1912) maintains that the early
bronzes were the result of direct smelting of stanniferous copper ores, and while this may be
partially true for Western Europe, the distribution and nature of the copper deposits do not
warrant this assumption for the earlier scenes of human activity—Asia Minor, Egypt, and
India. Further, the lumps of rough tin and also of copper found by Borlase (Tin Mining
in Spain, Past and Present, London, 1897, p. 25) in Cornwall, mixed with bronze celts under
conditions certainly indicating the Bronze Age, is in itself of considerable evidence of inde-
pendent melting. To our mind the vast majority of ancient bronzes must have been made
from copper and tin mined and smelted independently. As to the source of supply of ancient
tin, we are on clear ground only with the advent of the Phcenicians, 1500-1000 B.c., who,
as is well known, distributed to the ancient world a supply from Spain and Britain. What the
source may have been prior to this time has been subject to much discussion, and while some

412 BOOK IX.

As there is no need for the smelters to have a fierce fire, it is not necessary
to place the nozzles of the bellows in bronze or iron pipes, but only through a
hole in the furnace wall. They place the bellows higher at the back so that
the blast from the nozzles may blow straight toward the tap-hole of the
furnace. That it may not be too fierce, the nozzles are wide, for if the fire
were fiercer, tin could not be melted out from the tin-stone, as it would be
consumed and turned into ashes. Near the steps is a hollowed stone,
in which is placed the tin-stone to be smelted; as often as the smelter
throws into the furnace an iron shovel-ful of this tin-stone, he puts on char-
coal that was first put into a vat and washed with water to be cleansed from the
grit and small stones which adhere to it, lest they melt at the same time as the
tin-stone and obstruct the tap-hole and impede the flow of tin from the
furnace. The tap-hole of the furnace is always open ; in front of it is a fore-
hearth a little more than half a foot deep, three-quarters of two feet long and
one foot wide ; this is lined with lute, and the tin from the tap-hole flows into it.
On one side of the forehearth is a low wall, three-quarters of a foot wider
and one foot longer than the forehearth, on which lies charcoal powder.
On the other side the floor of the building slopes, so that the slags may con-
veniently run down and be carried away. As soon as the tin begins to run
from the tap-hole of the furnace into the forehearth, the smelter scrapes

slender threads indicate the East, we believe that a more local supply to Egypt, etc., is not
impossible. The discovery of large tin fields in Central Africa and the native-made tin
ornaments in circulation among the negroes, made possible the entrance of the metal into
Egypt along the trade routes. Further, we see no reason why alluvial tin may not have
existed within easy reach and have become exhausted. How quickly such a source of metal
supply can be forgotten and no evidence remain, is indicated by the seldom remembered
alluvial gold supply from Ireland. However, be these conjectures as they may, the East
has long been the scene of tin production and of transportation activity. Among the slender
evidences that point in this direction is that the Sanskrit term for tin is kastiva, a term also
employed by the Chaldeans, and represented in Arabic by kasdir, and it may have been the
progenitor of the Greek cassiteros. There can be no doubt that the Phcenicians also traded
with Malacca, etc, but beyond these threads there is little to prove the pre-western source.
The strained argument of Beckmann (Hist. of Inventions, vol. 11., p. 207) that the cassiteros
of Homer and the bedil of the Hebrews was possibly not tin, and that tin was unknown at this
time, falls to the ground in the face of the vast amount of tin which must have been in circula-
tion to account for the bronze used over a period 2,000 years prior to those peoples. Tin is
early mentioned in the Scriptures (Numbers xxxI, 22), being enumerated among the spoil
of the Midianites (1200 B.c. ?), also Ezekiel (600 B.c., xxvul, 12) speaks of tin from Tarshish
(the Phoenician settlement on the coast of Spain). According to Homer tin played con-
siderable part in Vulcan’s metallurgical stores. Even approximately at what period the
Pheenicians began their distribution from Spain and Britain cannot be determined. They

apparently established their settlements at Gades (Cadiz) in Tarshish, beyond Gibraltar,

about 1100 B.c. The remains of tin mining in the Spanish peninsula prior to the Christian
Era indicate most extensive production by the Phcenicians, but there is little evidence as
to either mining or smelting methods. Generally as to the technical methods of mining and
smelting tin, we are practically without any satisfactory statement down to Agricola.
However, such scraps of information as are available are those in Homer (see note on p. 402),
Diodorus, and Pliny.

- Diodorus says (v, 2) regarding tin in Spain: ‘ They dig it up, and melt it down in the
“same way as they do gold and silver ;”’ and again, speaking of the tin in Britain, he says:
“These people make tin, which they dig up with a great deal of care and labour ; being
“rocky, the metal is mixed with earth, out of which they melt the metal, and then refine
“it.” Pliny (xxxiv, 47), in the well-known and much-disputed passage: “Next to be
“considered are the characteristics of lead, which is of two kinds, black and white. The
“‘ most valuable is the white ; the Greeks called it cassiteros, and there is a fabulous story of its
“being searched for and carried from the islands of Atlantis in barks covered with hides.
“Certainly it is obtained in Lusitania and Gallaecia on the surface of the earth from black-
“coloured sand. It is discovered by its great weight, and it is mixed with small pebbles in

sos

eK ee

BOOK IX. 413

down some of the powdered charcoal into it from the wall, so that the slags
may be separated from the hot metal, and so that it may be covered, lest
any part of it, being very hot, should fly away with the fumes. If after
the slag has been skimmed off, the powder does not cover up the whole of the
tin, the smelter draws a little more charcoal off the wall with a scraper. After
he has opened the tap-hole of the forehearth with a tapping-bar, in order
that the tin can flow into the tapping-pot, likewise smeared with lute, he
again closes the tap-hole with pure lute or lute mixed with powdered charcoal.
The smelter, if he be diligent and experienced, has brooms at hand with which
he sweeps down the walls above the furnace; to these walls and to the
dust chamber minute tin-stones sometimes adhere with part of the fumes.
If he be not sufficiently experienced in these matters and has melted at the
same time all of the tin-stone,—which is commonly of three sizes, large,
medium, and very small,—not a little waste of the proprietor’s tin results ;
because, before the large or the medium sizes have melted, the small have either
been burnt up in the furnace, or else, flying up from it, they not only adhere to
the walls but also fall in the dust chamber. The owner of the works has
the sweepings by right from the owner of the ore. For the above reasons
the most experienced smelter melts them down separately; indeed, he
melts the very small size in a wider furnace, the medium in a medium-sized
furnace, and the largest size in the narrowest furnace. When he melts down
the small size he uses a gentle blast from the bellows, with the medium-sized
a moderate one, with the large size a violent blast ; and when he smelts
the first size he needs a slow fire, for the second a medium one, and for the
third a fierce one; yet he uses a much less fierce fire than when he smelts
the ores of gold, silver, or copper. When the workmen have spent three
consecutive days and nights in this work, as is usual, they have finished
their labours ; in this time they are able to melt out a large weight of small

“the dried beds of torrents. The miners wash these sands, and that which settles they heat
“in the furnace. It is also found in gold mines, which are called alutiae. A stream of water
“passing through detaches small black pebbles variegated with white spots, the weight of
“which is the same as gold. Hence it is that they remain in the baskets of the gold collectors
4) ey the gold ; afterward, they are separated in a camillum and when melted become white
“e ea v

There is practically no reference to the methods of Cornish tin-working over the whole
period of 2,000 years that mining operations were carried on there prior to the Norman
occupation. From then until Agricola’s time, a period of some four centuries, there are
occasional references in Stannary Court proceedings, Charters, and such-like official documents
which give little metallurgical insight. From a letter of William de Wrotham, Lord Warden
of the Stannaries, in 1198, setting out the regulations for the impost on tin, it is evident that
the black tin was smelted once at the mines and that a second smelting or refining was carried
out in specified towns under the observation of the Crown Officials. In many other official
documents there are repeated references to the right to dig turfs and cut wood for smelting
the tin. Under note 8, p. 282, we give some further information on tin concentration, and
the relation of Cornish and German tin miners. Biringuccio (1540) gives very little informa-
tion on tin metallurgy, and we are brought to De Re Metallica for the first clear exposition.

As to the description on these pages it must be remembered that the tin-stone has been
already roasted, thus removing some volatile impurities and oxidizing others, as described
on page 348. The furnaces and the methods of working the tin, here described, are almost
identical with those in use in Saxony to-day. In general, since Agricola’s time tin has not seen
the mechanical and metallurgical development of the other metals. The comparatively
small quantities to be dealt with ; the necessity of maintaining a strong reducing atmosphere,
and consequently a mild cold blast; and the comparatively low temperature demanded,
gave little impetus to other than crude appliances until very modern times.

29

414 BOOK IX.

sized tin-stone which melts quickly, but less of the large ones which melt
slowly, and a moderate quantity of the medium-sized which holds the middle
course. Those who do not smelt the tin-stone in furnaces made sometimes
wide, sometimes medium, or sometimes narrow, in order that great loss
should not be occasioned, throw in first the smallest size, then the medium,
then the large size, and finally those which are not quite pure; and the blast
of the bellows is altered as required. In order that the tin-stone thrown
into the furnace should not roll off from the large charcoal into the forehearth
before the tin is melted out of it, the smelter uses small charcoal ; first some
of this moistened with water is placed in the furnace, and then he frequently
repeats this succession of charcoal and tin-stone.

The tin-stone, collected from material which during the summer was
washed in a ditch through which a stream was diverted, and during the winter
was screened on a perforated iron plate, is smelted in a furnace a palm wider
than that in which the fine tin-stone dug out of the earth is smelted. For
the smelting of these, a more vigorous blast of the bellows and a fiercer fire
is needed than for the smelting of the large tin-stone. Whichever kind of
tin-stone is being smelted, if the tin first flows from the furnace, much of it is
made, and if slags first flow from the furnace, then only a little. It happens
that the tin-stone is mixed with the slags when it is either less pure or
ferruginous—that is, not enough roasted—and is imperfect when put into
the furnace, or when it has been put in in a larger quantity than was neces-
sary ; then, although it may be pure and melt easily, the ore either runs
out of the furnace at the same time, mixed with the slags, or else it settles
so firmly at the bottom of the furnace that the operation of smelting being
necessarily interrupted, the furnace freezes up.

The tap-hole of the forehearth is opened and the tin is diverted into the
dipping-pot, and as often as the slags flow down the sloping floor of the build-
ing they are skimmed off with a rabble ; as soon as the tin has run out of
the forehearth, the tap-hole is again closed up with lute mixed with powdered
charcoal. Glowing coals are put in the dipping-pot so that the tin, after it
has run out, should not get chilled. If the metal is so impure that nothing
can be made from it, the material which has run out is made into cakes to be
re-smelted in the hearth, of which I shall have something to say later ; if the
metal is pure, it is poured immediately upon thick copper plates, at first in
straight lines and then transversely over these to make a lattice. Each of
these lattice bars is impressed with an iron die; if the tin was melted out
of ore excavated from mines, then one stamp only, namely, that of the
Magistrate, is usually imprinted, but if it is made from tin-stone collected on
the ground after washing, then it is impressed with two seals, one the
Magistrate’s and the other a fork which the washers use. Generally, three
of this kind of lattice bars are beaten and amalgamated into one mass with a
wooden mallet.

The slags that are skimmed off are afterward thrown with an iron shovel
into a small trough hollowed from a tree, and are cleansed from charcoal

oe

BOOK IX. 415

= Se ——— ORBITER
—— —————
——————__ ‘ aS » ne =
S3 ——_—_ ae
—"
=/ i |i} 3
i
{— Y) /
—
2
é
@
’ y
—_
S
| H Y
fe =
Se o_o “=
ps am ——— =
we tae
~_ aa
= eats pens Ss ==>.
_— — — ———
~ 2 ~ —
_— ~ —
| , (i - eee a ~— SS
° q Soca tarwas ea ee a ————]
—_——— a —<
——— OD
— =
< SS race ~—_
—_——_ ——nae
———_.. —
—— ee {
=
y ———~ ae W
SS — y —— ~~
a a ——, =
2% 7S i —*—~— — =
= = | ie — —
. Ss — — sma ¥ =
: = ——- —— { —— ie
= re
¥ 1

. Be S
SS >
° IS o S
Soe ~
Ee E

yo

oll F

y

CH,

ND

y
|

Z N (

B—Its TAP-HOLE. C—FOREHEARTH.
H—WALLS OF THE CHIMNEY.

M—IRON SEAL OR DIE.

D—ItTs TAP-HOLE. E—SLAGS.
I—Broom,

A—FURNACE.
N—HAMMER.

F—ScRAPER. G—DIPPING-POT.
K—CopprER PLATE. L—LATTICEWORK BARS.

416 BOOK IX.

by agitation ; when taken out they are broken up with a square iron mallet,
and then they are re-melted with the fine tin-stone next smelted. There
are some who crush the slags three times under wet stamps and re-melt them
three times; if a large quantity of this be smelted while still wet, little
tin is melted from it, because the slag, soon melted again, flows from the
furnace into the forehearth. Under the wet stamps are also crushed the
lute and broken rock with which such furnaces are lined, and also the
accretions, which often contain fine tin-stone, either not melted or half-
melted, and also prills of tin. The tin-stone not yet melted runs out
through the screen into a trough, and is washed in the same way as tin-
stone, while the partly melted and the prills of tin are taken from the mortar-
box and washed in the sieve on which not very minute particles remain, and
thence to the canvas strake. The soot which adheres to that part of the
chimney which emits the smoke, also often contains very fine tin-stone which
flies from the furnace with the fumes, and this is washed in the strake which
I have just mentioned, and in other sluices. The prills of tin and the partly
melted tin-stone that are contained in the lute and broken rock with which
the furnace is lined, and in the remnants of the tin from the forehearth and
the dipping-pot, are smelted together with the tin-stone.

When tin-stone has been smelted for three days and as many nights in a
furnace prepared as I have said above, some little particles of the rock from
which the furnace is constructed become loosened by the fire and fall down ;
and then the bellows being taken away, the furnace is broken through at the
back, and the accretions are first chipped off with hammers, and afterward
the whole of the interior of the furnace is re-fitted with the prepared sand-
stone, and again evenly lined with lute. The sandstone placed on the bed
of the furnace, if it has become faulty, is taken out, and another is laid down
in its place ; those rocks which are too large the smelter chips off and fits
with a sharp pick.

Some build two furnaces against the wall just like those I have described,
and above them build a vaulted ceiling supported by the wall and by four
pillars. Through holes in the vaulted ceiling the fumes from the furnaces
ascend into a dust chamber, similar to the one described before, except that
there is a window on each side and there is no door. The smelters, when
they have to clear away the flue-dust, mount by the steps at the side of the
furnaces, and climb by ladders into the dust chamber through the apertures
in the vaulted ceilings over the furnaces. They then remove the flue-dust
from everywhere and collect it in baskets, which are passed from one to the
other and emptied. This dust chamber differs from the other described, in
the fact that the chimneys, of which it has two, are not dissimilar to those
of ahouse ; they receive the fumes which, being unable to escape through the
upper part of the chamber, are turned back and re-ascend and release the
tin ; thus the tin set free by the fire and turned to ash, and the little tin-
stones which fly up with the fumes, remain in the dust chamber or else adhere
to copper plates in the chimney.

BOOK IX. 417

by » FF
) f ; .

RR "| jr

Ry > “

=~. \ fe.
NY S

P 4 \FRSS=5. SS 2 2:

RNY

“

eae eo
: ney a

———

A—FUuRNACES. B—FOREHEARTHS. C—THEIR TAP-HOLES. D—Dr1ppinc-pots. E—PILLARs.
F—DvustT-cHAMBER. G—Winpow. H—Cuimneys. I—TusB IN WHICH THE COALS ARE
WASHED.

418 BOOK IX.

If the tin is so impure that it cracks when struck with the hammer, it
is not immediately made into lattice-like bars, but into the cakes which I have
spoken of before, and these are refined by melting again on a hearth. This
hearth consists of sandstones, which slope toward the centre and a little
toward a dipping-pot; at their joints they are covered with lute. Dry
logs are arranged on each side, alternately upright and lengthwise, and more
closely in the middle ; on this wood are placed five or six cakes of tin which
all together weigh about six centumpondia; the wood having been kindled,

——— Sy <—

A—HEartus. B—Dzippinc-pots. C—Woop. D—CaxEs. E—Lapie. F—CoppEr
PLATE. G—LATTICE-SHAPED BARS. H—IRON DIES. I—WooDEN MALLET. K—MAss
OF TIN BARS. L—SHOVEL.

the tin drips down and flows continuously into the dipping-pot which
is on the floor. The impure tin sinks to the bottom of this dipping-pot
and the pure tin floats on the top; then both are ladled out by the master,
who first takes out the pure tin, and by pouring it over thick plates of copper
makes lattice-like bars. Afterward he takes out the impure tin from which
he makes cakes ; he discriminates between them, when he ladles and pours,
by the ease or difficulty of the flow. One centwmpondium of the lattice-like
bare sells for more than a centumpondium of cakes, for the price of the former

BOOK IX. 419

exceeds the price of the latter by a gold coin®4. These lattice-like bars are
lighter than the others, and when five of them are pounded and amalgamated
with a wooden mallet, a mass is made which is stamped with an iron die.
There are some who do not make a dipping-pot on the floor for the tin to run
into, but in the hearth itself; out of this the master, having removed the
charcoal, ladles the tin and pours it over the copper-plate. The dross which
adheres to the wood and the charcoal, having been collected, is re-smelted
in the furnace.

A—FURNACE. B— BELLows. C—Iron Disc. D—NOZZLE. E—WoobDeEN Disc.
F—BLow-HoLE. G—HanpLt—E. H—Harr. I—Hoors. K—MAssEs oF TIN.

Some of the Lusitanians melt tin from tin-stone in small furnaces. They
use round bellows made of leather, of which the fore end is a round iron disc
and the rear end a disc of wood; in a hole in the former is fixed the nozzle,
in the middle of the latter the blow-hole. Above this is the handle or haft,
which draws open the round bellows and lets in the air, or compresses it and
drives the air out. Between the discs are several iron hoops to which the
leather is fastened, making such folds as are to be seen in paper lanterns that

4A ureo nummo. German Translation gives reinschen giilden, which was the equivalent
of about $1.66, or 6.9 shillings. The purchasing power of money was, however, several times
as great as at present.

420 BOOK IX.

are folded together. Since this kind of bellows does not give a vigorous blast,
because they are drawn apart and compressed slowly, the smelter is not
able during a whole day to smelt much more than half a centumpondium of

tin.

Very good iron ore is smelted®® in a furnace almost like the cupellation
furnace. The hearth is three and a half feet high, and five feet long and
wide ; in the centre of it is a crucible a foot deep and one and a half feet
wide, but it may be deeper or shallower, wider or narrower, according to whether
more or less ore is to be made into iron. A certain quantity of iron ore is
given to the master, out of which he may smelt either much or little iron.
He being about to expend his skill and labour on this matter, first throws
charcoal into the crucible, and sprinkles over it an iron shovel-ful of crushed
iron ore mixed with unslaked lime. Then he repeatedly throws on charcoal
and sprinkles it with ore, and continues this until he has slowly built up a
heap ; it melts when the charcoal has been kindled and the fire violently
stimulated by the blast of the bellows, which are skilfully fixed in a pipe.

55In the following descriptions of iron-smelting, we have three processes described ;
the first being the direct reduction of malleable iron from ore, the second the transition stage
then in progress from the direct to indirect method by way of cast-iron; and the third a
method of making steel by cementation. The first method is that of primitive iron-workers
of all times and all races, and requires little comment. A pasty mass was produced, which
was subsequently hammered to make it exude the slag, the hammered mass being the
ancient “‘ bloom.’’ The second process is of considerable interest, for it marks one of the
earliest descriptions of working iron in ‘‘ a furnace similar to a blast furnace, but much wider
“and higher.” This original German Stiickofen or high bloomery furnace was used for making
“masses ”’ of wrought-iron under essentially the same conditions as its progenitor the forge—
only upon a larger scale. With high temperatures, however, such a furnace would, if desired,
yield molten metal, and thus the step to cast-iron as a preliminary to wrought-iron became
very easy and natural, in fact Agricola mentions above that if the iron is left to settle in the
furnace it becomes hard. The making of malleable iron by subsequent treatment of the cast-
iron—the indirect method—originated in about Agricola’s time, and marks the beginning of
one of those subtle economic currents destined to have the widest bearing upon civilization.
It is to us uncertain whether he really understood the double treatment or not. In the above
paragraph he says from ore “ once or twice smelted they make iron,” etc., and in De Natura
Fossilium (p. 339) some reference is made to pouring melted iron, all of which would appear
to be cast-iron. He does not, however, describe the 16th Century method of converting cast
into wrought iron by way of in effect roasting the pig iron to eliminate carbon by oxidation,
with subsequent melting into a “‘ ball”’ or “‘ mass.’’ It must be borne in mind that puddling
for this purpose did not come into use until the end of the 18th Century. A great deal of
discussion has arisen as to where and at what time cast-iron was made systematically, but
without satisfactory answer; in any event, it seems to have been in about the end of the
14th Century, as cast cannon began to appeai about that time. It is our impression that
the whole of this discussion on iron in De Re Metallica is an abstract from Biringuccio,
who wrote 15 years earlier, as it is in so nearly identical terms. Those interested will find a
translation of Biringuccio’s statement with regard to steel in Percy’s Metallurgy of Iron and
Steel, London, 1864, p. 807.

HistortcaL Note on Iron SmeELtinG. The archeologists’ division of the history
of racial development into the Stone, Bronze, and fron Ages, based upon objects found in
tumuli, burial places, etc., would on the face of it indicate the prior discovery of copper
metallurgy over iron, and it is generally so maintained by those scientists. The metallurgists
have not hesitated to protest that while this distinction of “Ages’’ may serve the
archeologists, and no doubt represents the sequence in which the metal objects are found,
yet it by no means follows that this was the order of their discovery or use, but that iron
by its rapidity of oxidation has simply not been preserved. The arguments which may
be advanced from our side are in the main these. Iron ore is of more frequent occur-
rence than copper ores, and the necessary reduction of copper oxides (as most surface
ores must have been) to fluid metal requires a temperature very much higher than does the
reduction of iron oxides to wrought-iron blooms, which do not necessitate fusion. The com-
paratively greater simplicity of iron metallurgy under primitive conditions is well exempli-

fied by the hill tribes of Northern Nigeria, where in village forges the negroes reduce iron

> >

BOOK IX. 421

He is able to complete this work sometimes in eight hours, sometimes in ten,
and again sometimes in twelve. In order that the heat of the fire should not
burn his face, he covers it entirely with a cap, in which, however, there are
holes through which he may see and breathe. At the side of the hearth is a
bar which he raises as often as is necessary, when the bellows blow too violent
a blast, or when he adds more ore and charcoal. He also uses the bar
to draw off the slags, or to open or close the gates of the sluice, through
which the waters flow down on to the wheel which turns the axle that com-
presses the bellows. In this sensible way, iron is melted out and a mass
weighing two or three centumpondia may be made, providing the iron ore
was rich. When this is done the master opens the slag-vent with the tapping-
bar, and when all has run out he allows the iron mass to cool. Afterward
he and his assistant stir the iron with the bar, and then in order to chip off
the slags which had until then adhered to it, and to condense and flatten it,
they take it down from the furnace to the floor, and beat it with large wooden
mallets having slender handles five feet long. Thereupon it is immediately

sufficient for their needs, from hematite. Copper alone would not be a very serviceable metal
to primitive man, and he early made the advance to bronze ; this latter metal requires three
metallurgical operations, and presents immeasurably greater difficulties than iron. It is,
as Professor Gowland has demonstrated (Presidential Address, Inst. of Metals, London, 1912)
quite possible to make bronze from melting stanniferous copper ores, yet such combined
occurrence at the surface is rare, and, so far as known, the copper sources from which Asia Minor
and Egypt obtained their supply do not contain tin. It seems to us, therefore, that in most
cases the separate fusions of different ores and their subsequent re-melting were required to
make bronze. The arguments advanced by the archeologists bear mostly upon the fact
that, had iron been known, its superiority would have caused the primitive races to adopt it,
and we should not find such an abundance of bronze tools. As to this, it may be said that
bronze weapons and tools are plentiful enough in Egyptian, Mycenzan, and early Greek
remains, long after iron was demonstrably well known. There has been a good deal
pronounced by etymologists on the history of iron and copper, for instance, by Max Miiller,
(Lectures on the Science of Language, Vol. 1, p. 255, London, 1864), and many others, but
the amazing lack of metallurgical knowledge nullifies practically all their conclusions. The
oldest Egyptian texts extant, dating 3500 B.c., refer to iron, and there is in the British
Museum a Feat of iron found in the Pyramid of Kephron (3700 B.c.) under conditions indicating
its co-incident origin. There is exhibited also a fragment of oxidized iron lately found by
Professor Petrie and placed as of the VI Dynasty (B.c. 3200). Despite this evidence of an
early knowledge of iron, there is almost a total absence of Egyptian iron objects for a long
period subsequent to that time, which in a measure confirms the view of its disappearance
rather than that of ignorance of it. Many writers have assumed that the Ancients must have
had some superior art of hardening copper or bronze, because the cutting of the gigantic stone-
work of the time could not have been done with that alloy as we know it ; no such hardening
appears among the bronze tools found, and it seems to us that the argument is stronger
that the oldest Egyptian stoneworkers employed mostly iron tools, and that these have
oxidized out of existence. The reasons for preferring copper alloys to iron for decorative
objects were equally strong in ancient times as in the present day, and accounts sufficiently
for these articles, and, therefore, iron would be devoted to more humble objects less likely to
be preserved. Further, the Egyptians at a later date had some prejudices against iron for
sacred purposes, and the media of preservation of most metal objects were not open to iron.
We know practically nothing of very early Egyptian metallurgy, but in the time of Thotmes
III. (1500 B.c.) bellows were used upon the forge.
Of literary evidences the earliest is in the Shoo King among the Tribute of Yii (2500

B.c. ?). Iron is frequently mentioned in the Bible, but it is doubtful if any of the early
references apply to steel. There is scarcely a Greek or Latin author who does not mention
iron in some connection, and of the earliest, none are so suggestive from a metallurgical point
of view as Homer, by whom “laboured ” mass (wrought-iron ?) is often referred to. As, for
instance, in the Odyssey (1., 234) Pallas in the guise of Mentes, says according to Pope :

“‘Freighted with iron from my native land

“I steer my voyage to the Brutian strand,

“To gain by commerce for the laboured mass

“ A just proportion of refulgent brass.” 4

=~:

Liuiiifissdsdisicrr ppppyyslity j E Y ¥
(tidal >, ZA EY
= yy, LLL i

hp

Zs betcha
yyy 5

BOOK IX.

422

v

\

N
:
N
N :
3 —
N
ae
N ty
N y
Sy
5 iS
8 i ¥
: vs
> 4 A
SUE SS
: R
; R
: NY
—,:
S; N
H Nh
? sy
: Ny
. NZ

YP vee", YAW
iy!
/

asia

PiBtte.

<3 YY YI Me
‘ Vy \
\y

Y

J

|

),

SZ

r
\

i]
!

i

A—HEaArTH. B—HEap.

E—WOooDEN MALLETS.

G—ANVIL.

C—SLAG-VENT. D—IRON MASS.
F—HAMMER.

BOOK IX. 423

placed on the anvil, and repeatedly beaten by the large iron hammer that is
raised by the cams of an axle turned by a water-wheel. Not long afterward
it is taken up with tongs and placed under the same hammer, and cut up with
a sharp iron into four, five, or six pieces, according to whether it is large or
small. These pieces, after they have been re-heated in the blacksmith’s forge
and again placed on the anvil, are shaped by the smith into square bars or into
ploughshares or tyres, but mainly into bars. Four, six, or eight of these bars
weigh one-fifth of a centumpondium, and from these they make various imple-
ments. During the blows from the hammer by which it is shaped by the smith,
a youth pours water with a ladle on to the glowing iron, and this is why the
blows make such a loud sound that they may be heard a long distance from
the works. The masses, if they remain and settle in the crucible of the
furnace in which the iron is smelted, become hard iron which can only be
hammered with difficulty, and from these they make the iron-shod heads for
the stamps, and such-like very hard articles.

But to iron ore which is cupriferous, or which when heated®® melts
with difficulty, it is necessary for us to give a fiercer fire and more labour ;
because not only must we separate the parts of it in which there is metal from
those in which there is no metal, and break it up by dry stamps, but we must
also roast it, so that the other metals and noxious juices may be exhaled ;
and we must wash it, so that the lighter parts may be separated from it.
Such ores are smelted in a furnace similar to the blast furnace, but much
wider and higher, so that it may hold a great quantity of ore and much
charcoal ; mounting the stairs at the side of the furnace, the smelters fill
it partly with fragments of ore not larger than nuts, and partly with
charcoal ; and from this kind of ore once or twice smelted they make iron
which is suitable for re-heating in the blacksmith’s forge, after it is flattened
out with the large iron hammer and cut into pieces with the sharp iron.

By skill with fire and fluxes is made that kind of iron from which steel
is made, which the Greeks call oréuwua. Iron should be selected which
is easy to melt, is hard and malleable. Now although iron may be
smelted from ore which contains other metals, yet it is then either soft
or brittle ; such (iron) must be broken up into small pieces when it is

(Brass is modern poetic licence for copper or bronze). Also, in the Odyssey (1x, 465) when
Homer describes how Ulysses plunged the stake into Cyclop’s eye,.we have the first positive
evidence of steel, although hard iron mentioned in the Tribute of Yii, above referred to, is
sometimes given as steel :

“ And as when armourers temper in the ford

“ The keen-edg’d pole-axe, or the shining sword,

“The red-hot metal hisses in the lake.”

No doubt early wrought-iron was made in the same manner as Agricola describes. We
are, however, not so clear as to the methods of making steel. Under primitive methods of
making wrought-iron it is quite ible to carburize the iron sufficiently to make steel direct
from ore. The primitive method of India and Japan was to enclose lumps of wrought-iron in
sealed crucibles with charcoal and sawdust, and heat them overa long period. Neither Pliny
nor any of the other authors of the period previous to the Christian Era give us much help
on steel metallurgy, although certain obscure expressions of Aristotle have been called upon
(for instance, St. John V. Day, Prehistoric Use of Iron and Steel, London, 1877, p. 134) to
prove its manufacture by immersing wrought-iron in molten cast-iron.

: '8Quae vel aerosa est, vel cocta. It is by no means certain that cocta, “cooked” is
rightly translated, for the author has not hitherto used this expression for heated. This may
be residues from roasting and leaching pyrites for vitriol, etc.

424 BOOK IX.

: R Se
S ht As 5
é\ c):

|

nen) .
| pn)

A—FurRNAcE. B—Stairs. C—-ORE.

Se

425

BOOK IX.

<R

y

ZZ 2 ’ Wr aaa 4
ul M | aun

VEEL
A ee

OI

Wy

NT

y
4 M14 / le Ve 2 ; leinnaaslantortfaedti ila
VILL LL) al WL m= : eT

LB wv ZAEZ: EMU

ANY

INS

2 PZ wnt}

NY
BAT

pick
CEPI
g

\
SS
SS

B

SSS

Z| : \y.

ZB! Y,

ZUM ile SIVA
A : G

Sj

SS
SSS
SS

SSSsqs

EOS

ST

NA UMM le YE
MMW ’»oapnpEeEmWii.bbwWwW :

SSS
SS

SSS

UT
SSS

Hitt
SS
SSS

SS
SS

et
LLL LL hdl, MULLER. TT.

i

ZZ,

NS

Z/

mn
Ki

E—COLD STREAM.

B—BELLows. C-—-Toncs. D—HAMMER.

A—FORGE.

426 BOOK IX.

hot, and then mixed with crushed stone which melts. Then a crucible
is made in the hearth of the smith’s furnace, from the same moistened
powder from which are made the forehearths in front of the furnaces in
which ores of gold or silver are smelted; the width of this crucible is
about one and a half feet and the depth one foot. The bellows are so
placed that the blast may be blown through the nozzle into the middle
of the crucible. Then the whole of the crucible is filled with the best
charcoal, and it is surrounded by fragments of rock to hold in place the pieces
of iron and the superimposed charcoal. As soon as all the charcoal
is kindled and the crucible is glowing, a blast is blown from the bellows
and the master pours in gradually as much of the mixture of iron and flux
as he wishes. Into the middle of this, when it is melted, he puts four iron
masses each weighing thirty pounds, and heats them for five or six hours in a
fierce fire; he frequently stirs the melted iron with a bar, so that the small
pores in each mass absorb the minute particles, and these particles by their
own strength consume and expand the thick particles of the masses, which they
render soft and similar to dough. Afterward the master, aided by his
assistant, takes out a mass with the tongs and places it on the anvil, where
it is pounded by the hammer which is alternately raised and dropped by
means of the water-wheel; then, without delay, while it is still hot, he
throws it into water and tempers it ; when it is tempered, he places it again
on the anvil, and breaks it with a blow from the same hammer. Then at
once examining the fragments, he decides whether the iron in some part or
other, or as a whole, appears to be dense and changed into steel ; if so, he seizes
one mass after another with the tongs, and taking them out he breaks them
into pieces. Afterward he heats the mixture up again, and adds a portion
afresh to take the place of that which has been absorbed by the masses. This
restores the energy of that which is left, and the pieces of the masses are again
put back into the crucible and made purer. Each of these, after having
been heated, is seized with the tongs, put under the hammer and shaped
into a bar. While they are still glowing, he at once throws them into the very
coldest nearby running water, and in this manner, being suddenly condensed,
they are changed into pure steel, which is much harder and whiter than iron.

The ores of the other metals are not smelted in furnaces. Quicksilver
ores and also antimony are melted in pots, and bismuth in troughs.

I will first speak of quicksilver. This is collected when found in pools
formed from the outpourings of the veins and stringers ; it is cleansed with
vinegar and salt, and then it is poured into canvas or soft leather, through
which, when squeezed and compressed, the quicksilver runs out into a pot or
pan. The ore of quicksilver is reduced in double or single pots. If in double
pots, then the upper one is of a shape not very dissimilar to the glass ampullas
used by doctors, but they taper downward toward the bottom, and the
lower ones are little pots similar to those in which men and women make
cheese, but both are larger than these; it is necessary to sink the lower
pots up to the rims in earth, sand, or ashes. The ore, broken up into small
pieces is put into the upper pots; these having been entirely closed up

BOOK IX. 427

with moss, are placed upside down in the openings of the lower pots, where they
are joined with lute, lest the quicksilver which takes refuge in them should
be exhaled. There are some who, after the pots have been buried, do not fear
to leave them uncemented, and who boast that they are able to produce no
less weight of quicksilver than those who do cement them, but nevertheless
cementing with lute is the greatest protection against exhalation. In this
manner seven hundred pairs of pots are set together in the ground or on a
hearth. They must be surrounded on all sides with a mixture consisting of
crushed earth and charcoal, in such a way that the upper pots protrude to a
height of a palm above it. On both sides of the hearth rocks are first laid,
and upon them poles, across which the workmen place other poles transversely ;
these poles do not touch the pots, nevertheless the fire heats the quick-
silver, which fleeing from the heat is forced to run down through the moss
into the lower pots. If the ore is being reduced in the upper pots, it flees
from them, wherever there is an exit, into the lower pots, but if the ore on
the contrary is put in the lower pots the quicksilver rises into the upper pot
or into the operculum, which, together with the gourd-shaped vessels, are
cemented to the upper pots.

AS Nr \
s( > A

Ni
Ae
NWR

st
mae

walt Ba! SSG <
ewe A

A—HEArRTH. B—PoLEs. C—HEARTH WITHOUT FIRE IN WHICH THE POTS ARE PLACED.
D—Rocxs. E—Rows or pots. F—Upper pots. G—LOWER Pots.

428 BOOK IX.

The pots, lest they should become defective, are moulded from the best
potters’ clay, for if there are defects the quicksilver flies out in the fumes.
If the fumes give out a very sweet odour it indicates that the quicksilver is
being lost, and since this loosens the teeth, the smelters and others standing by,
warned of the evil, turn their backs to the wind, which drives the fumes in
the opposite direction ; for this reason, the building should be open around
the front and the sides, and exposed to the wind. If these pots are made
of cast copper they last a long time in the fire. This process for reducing the
ores of quicksilver is used by most people.

In a similar manner the antimony ore,5’ if free from other metals, is reduced
in upper pots which are twice as large as the lower ones. Their size, however,
depends on the cakes, which have not the same weight everywhere ; for in
some places they are made to weigh six /ibrae, in other places ten, and else-
where twenty. When the smelter has concluded his operation, he extin-
guishes the fire with water, removes the lids from the pots, throws earth mixed
with ash around and over them, and when they have cooled, takes out the
cakes from the pots.

57Acricola draws no sharp line of distinction between antimony the metal, and its
sulphide. He uses the Roman term stibi or stibium (Interpretatio,—Spiesglas) throughout
this book, and evidently in most cases means the sulphide, but in others, particularly in
parting gold and silver, metallic antimony would be reduced out. We have been in much
doubt as to the term to introduce into the text, as the English “‘ stibnite ’”’ carries too much
precision of meaning. Originally the ‘‘ antimony” of trade was the sulphide. Later, with
the application of that term to the metal, the sulphide was termed ‘‘ grey antimony,” and
we have either used stibium for lack of better alternative, or adopted “ grey antimony.”
The method described by Agricola for treating antimony sulphide is still used in the Harz, in
Bohemia, and elsewhere. The stibnite is liquated out at a low heat and drips from the upper
to the lower pot. The resulting purified antimony sulphide is the modern commercial
“crude antimony” or “ grey antimony.”

HisTorRIicAL NOTE ON THE METALLURGY OF ANTIMONY. The Egyptologists have
adopted the term ‘‘ antimony ”’ for certain cosmetics found in Egyptian tombs from a very
early period. We have, however, failed to find any reliable analyses which warrant this
assumption, and we believe that it is based on the knowledge that antimony was used as a
base for eye ointments in Greek and Roman times, and not upon proper chemical investiga-
tion. It may be that the ideograph which is interpreted as antimony may really mean that
substance, but we only protest that the chemist should have been called in long since. In
St. Jerome’s translation of the Bible, the cosmetic used by Jezebel (11. Kings 1x, 30) and
by the lady mentioned by Ezekiel (xx, 40), ‘‘ who didst wash thyself and paintedst thine
eyes ” is specifically given as sfibio. Our modern translation carries no hint of the composition
of the cosmetic, and whether some of the Greek or Hebrew MSS. do furnish a basis for such
translation we cannot say. The Hebrew term for this mineral was kohl, which subsequently
passed into “alcool” and “alkohol” in other languages, and appears in the Spanish Bible
in the above passage in Ezekiel as alcoholaste. The term antimonium seems to have been
first used in Latin editions of Geber published in the latter part of the r5th Century. In
any event, the metal is clearly mentioned by Dioscorides (1st Century), who calls it stimma,
and Pliny, who termed it stibiwm, and they leave no doubt that it was used as a cosmetic for
painting the eyebrows and dilating the eyes. Dioscorides (v, 59) says: “ The best stemma
“is very brilliant and radiant. When broken it divides into layers with no part earthy or
“dirty; itis brittle. Some call it stimmi, others platyophthalmon (wide eyed); others
‘‘larbason, others gynaekeion (feminine). . . . It is roasted in a ball of dough with
“charcoal until it becomes acinder. . . . Itis also roasted by putting it on live charcoal
“and blowing it. If it is roasted too much it becomes lead.” Pliny states (xxxmI, 33 and
34): ‘‘ In the same mines in which silver is found, properly speaking there is a stone froth.
‘It is white and shining, not transparent ; is called stimmi, or stibi, or alabastrum, and larbasis.
“ There are two kinds of it, the male and the female. The most approved is the female, the
‘male being more uneven, rougher, less heavy, not so radiant, and more gritty. The female
“kind is bright and friable, laminar and not globular. It is astringent and refrigerative,
“and its principal use is for the eyes. . . . It is burned in manure in a furnace, is
“ quenched with milk, ground with rain water in a mortar, and while thus turbid it is poured
“into a copper vessel and purified with nitrum . . . . above all in roasting it care

BOOK IX. 429

Other methods for reducing quicksilver are given below. Big-bellied
pots, having been placed in the upper rectangular open part of a furnace,
are filled with the crushed ore. Each of these pots is covered with a lid
with a long nozzle—commonly called a campana—in the shape of a bell, and
they are cemented. Each of the small earthenware vessels shaped like a
gourd receives two of these nozzles, and these are likewise cemented. Dried

x.

—<—T
.
\¥
£\
‘
N

CATT ry

A—Pots. B—Oprercura. C—Nozztes. D—GourD-sHAPED EARTHENWARE VESSELS.

wood having been placed in the lower part of the furnace and kindled, the
ore is heated until all the quicksilver has risen into the operculum which is
over the pot ; it then flows from the nozzle and is caught in the earthenware
gourd-shaped vessel.

“should be taken that it does not turn to lead.” There can be little doubt from Dioscorides’
statement of its turning to lead that he had seen the metal antimony, although he thought it
a species of lead. Of further interest in connection with the ancient knowledge of the metal is
the Chaldean vase made of antimony described by Berthelot (Comptes Rendus, 1887, crv,
265). It is possible that Agricola knew the metal, although he gives no details as to de-
sulphurizing it or for recovering the metal itself. In De Natura Fossilium (p. 181) he makes
a statement which would indicate the metal, ‘‘ Stibiwm when melted in the crucible and
“refined has as much right to be regarded as a metal as is accorded to lead by most writers.
“If when smelted a certain portion be added to tin, a printer’s alloy is made from which
“type is cast that is used by those who print books.” Basil Valentine, in his “ Triumphal
“Chariot of Antimony,” gives a great deal that is new with regard to this metal, even if we
can accredit the work with no earlier origin than its publication—about 1600; it seems

30

430 BOOK IX.

Others build a hollow vaulted chamber, of which the paved floor is made
concave toward the centre. Inside the thick walls of the chamber are the
furnaces. The doors through which the wood is put are in the outer part of the
same wall. They place the pots in the furnaces and fill them with crushed
ore, then they cement the pots and the furnaces on all sides with lute, so that
none of the vapour may escape from them, and there is no entrance to the

AWARE RWWA!
\\ NN TAN

wantin

Ml Yip Uti 4
i

SBOE OTT rn

aaa

ey RO
ZS) \

‘i
NP cain

*

LANs
i WaNeant
TSN Rea

ipa

nee

a ‘
\ ) ~ ) ;
\\ \ SN

——
wnt

mo

A—ENCLOSED CHAMBER. B—Door. C—LITTLE wiInDOws. D-—MoOUTHS THROUGH THE
WALLS. E—FURNACE IN THE ENCLOSED CHAMBER. F—PotTs,

furnaces except through their mouths. Between the dome and the paved
floor they arrange green trees, then they close the door and the little windows,
and cover them on all sides with moss and lute, so that none of the quick-
silver can exhale from the chamber. After the wood has been kindled the

possible however, that it was written late in the 15th Century (see Appendix B). He describes
the preparation of the metal from the crude ore, both by roasting and reduction from the oxide
with argol and saltpetre, and also by fusing with metallic iron. While the first descrip-
tion of these methods is usually attributed to Valentine, it may be pointed out that in
the Probierbiichlein (1500) as well as in Agricola the separation of silver from iron by
antimony sulphide implies the same reaction, and the separation of silver and gold with
antimony sulphide, often attributed to Valentine, is repeatedly set out in the Probier-
biichlein and in De Re Metallica. Biringuccio (1540) has nothing of importance to say as to
the treatment of antimonial ores, but mentions it as an alloy for bell-metal, which would
imply the metal.

BOOK IX. 431

ore is heated, and exudes the quicksilver ; whereupon, impatient with the
heat, and liking the cold, it escapes to the leaves of the trees, which
have a cooling power. When the operation is completed the smelter
extinguishes the fire, and when all gets cool he opens the door and the
windows, and collects the quicksilver, most of which, being heavy, falls of
its own accord from the trees, and flows into the concave part of the floor ;
if all should not have fallen from the trees, they are shaken to make it fall.

The following is the fourth method of reducing ores of quicksilver. A
larger pot standing on a tripod is filled with crushed ore, and over the ore is
put sand or ashes to a thickness of two digits, and tamped; then in
the mouth of this pot is inserted the mouth of another smaller pot and
cemented with lute, lest the vapours are emitted. The ore heated by the fire
exhales the quicksilver, which, penetrating through the sand or the ashes,
takes refuge in the upper pot, where condensing into drops it falls back into
the sand or the ashes, from which the quicksilver is washed and collected.

f)

‘I.

K

A—LARGER Pot. B—SMALLER. C—Tripop. D—TusB IN WHICH THE SAND IS WASHED.

The fifth method is not very unlike the fourth. In the place of these
pots are set other pots, likewise of earthenware, having a narrow bottom
and a wide mouth. These are nearly filled with crushed ore, which is likewise
covered with ashes to a depth of two digits and tamped in. The pots are

432 BOOK IX.

covered with lids a digit thick, and they are smeared over on the inside with
liquid litharge, and on the lid are placed heavy stones. The pots are set on
the furnace, and the ore is heated and similarly exhales quicksilver, which
fleeing from the heat takes refuge in the lid; on congealing there, it falls
back into the ashes, from which, when washed, the quicksilver is collected.

1) <=

ch
— >

S

BISS

SASS Se
SS SSSSS D5 +

SSSA
SSS

MISE

ep
wat CTSAAOPIORITD 7A
LCL

BKAA AZ Z

A—Ports. B—Lips. C—Stones. D—FUuRNACE. y

By these five methods quicksilver may be made, and of these not one is
to be despised or repudiated ; nevertheless, if the mine supplies a great
abundance of ore, the first is the most expeditious and practical, because a
large quantity of ore can be reduced at the same time without great expense.°®

58HISTORICAL NOTE ON THE METALLURGY OF QUICKSILVER. The earliest mention of
quicksilver appears to have been by Aristotle (Meteorologica IV, 8, 11), who speaks of it
as fluid silver (argyros chytos). Theophrastus (105) states: “Such is the production of
“ quicksilver, which has its uses. This is obtained from cinnabar rubbed with vinegar in a
“brass mortar with a brass pestle.’ (Hill’s Trans., p. 139). Theophrastus also (103)
mentions cinnabar from Spain and elsewhere. Dioscorides (Vv, 70) appears to be the first to
describe the recovery of quicksilver by distillation: ‘ Quicksilver (hydrargyros, 1.e., liquid
silver) is made from ammion, which is called cinnabari. An iron bowl containing cinnabari
“is put into an earthen vessel and covered over with a cup-shaped lid smeared with clay.
“ Then it is set on a fire of coals and the soot which sticks to the cover when wiped off and
“cooled is quicksilver. Quicksilver is also found in drops falling from the walls of the silver
“mines. Some say there are quicksilver mines. It can be kept only in vessels of glass, lead,
“tin (?), or silver, for if put in vessels of any other substances it consumes them and flows

BOOK IX. 433

Bismuth®® ore, free from every kind of silver, is smelted by various
methods. First a small pit is dug in the dry ground ; into this pulverised
charcoal is thrown and tamped in, and then it is dried with burning charcoal.
Afterward, thick dry pieces of beech wood are placed over the pit, and the
bismuth ore is thrown on it. As soon as the kindled wood burns, the heated
ore drips with bismuth, which runs down into the pit, from which when cooled
the cakes are removed. Because pieces of burnt wood, or often charcoal
and occasionally slag, drop into the bismuth which collects in the pit, and
make it impure, it is put back into another kind of crucible to be melted,
so that pure cakes may be made. There are some who, bearing these things
in mind, dig a pit on a sloping place and below it put a forehearth, into
which the bismuth continually flows, and thus remains clean; then they
take it out with ladles and pour it into iron pans lined inside with lute, and
make cakes of it. They cover such pits with flat stones, whose joints are
besmeared with a lute of mixed dust and crushed charcoal, lest the joints
should absorb the molten bismuth. Another method is to put the ore in
troughs made of fir-wood and placed on sloping ground; they place small
firewood over it, kindling it when a gentle wind blows, and thus the ore is
heated. In this manner the bismuth melts and runs down from the troughs
into a pit below, while there remains slag, or stones, which are of a yellow
colour, as is also the wood laid across the pit. These are also sold.

“through.” Pliny (xxxut, 41): ‘“‘ There has been discovered a way of extracting hydrargyros
“from the inferior minium as a substitute for quicksilver, as mentioned. There are two
“methods: either by pounding miniwm and vinegar in a brass mortar with a brass pestle,
“ or else by putting minium into a flat earthen dish covered with a lid, well luted with potter’s
“clay. This is set in an iron pan and a fire is then lighted under the pan, and continually
“blown by a bellows. The perspiration collects on the lid and is wiped off and is like silver
“in colour and as liquid as water.” Pliny is somewhat confused over the minium—or the
text is corrupt, for this should be the. genuine miniwm of Roman times. The methods of
condensation on the leaves of branches placed in a chamber, of condensing in ashes placed
over the mouth of the lower pot, and of distilling in a retort, are referred to by Biringuccio
(A.D. 1540), but with no detail.

59Most of these methods depend upon simple liquation of native bismuth. The
sulphides, oxides, etc., could not be obtained without fusing in a furnace with appropriate
de-sulphurizing or reducing agents, to which Agricola dimly refers. In Bermannus (p. 439),
he says: ‘‘ Bermannus.—I will show you another kind of mineral which is numbered
“amongst metals, but appears to me to have been unknown to the Ancients; we call it
“ bisemutum. Naevius.—Then in your opinion there are more kinds of metals than the
“‘seven commonly believed ? Bermannus.—More, I consider; for this which just now I
“said we called bisemutum, cannot correctly be called plumbum candidum (tin) nor nigrum
“ (lead), but is different from both, and is a third one. Plumbum candidum is whiter and
“ blumbum nigrum is darker, as you see. Naevius.—We see that this is of the colour of
“ galena. Ancon.—How then can bisemutum, as you call it, be distinguished from galena ?
“ Bermannus.—Easily ; when you take it in your hands it stains them with black unless it
“is quite hard. The hard kind is not friable like galena, but can be cut. It is blacker than
“the kind of crude silver which we say is almost the colour of lead, and thus is different
“from both. Indeed, it not rarely contains some silver. It generally shows that there is
“silver beneath the place where it is found, and because of this our miners are accustomed
“to call it the ‘roof of silver.’ They are wont to roast this mineral, and from the better
“part they make metal; from the poorer part they make a pigment of a kind not to be
“despised.” This pigment was cobalt blue (see note on p. 112), indicating a considerable
confusion of these minerals. This quotation is the first description of bismuth, and the above
text the first description of bismuth treatment. There is, however, bare mention of the
mineral earlier, in the following single line from the Probierbiichlein (p. 1): “‘ Jupiter (con-
“‘trols) the ores of tin and wismundt.” And itis noted in the Niéliche Bergbiichlein in
association with silver (see Appendix B).

434 BOOK IX.

RRerang
yyy

i —
be ee

A—PIT ACROSS WHICH WOOD IS PLACED, B—FOREHEARTH. C—LADLE. D—IRon

MOULD. E—CAKES. F—EmMpty POT LINED WITH STONES IN LAYERS. G—TROUGHS.

H—PITs DUG AT THE FOOT OF THE TROUGHS. I—SMALL WOOD LAID OVER THE TROUGHS.
K—WIND.

a

BOOK IX. 435

Others reduce the ore in iron pans as next described. They lay small
pieces of dry wood alternately straight and transversely upon bricks, one and
a half feet apart, and set fire to it. Near it they put small iron pans lined
on the inside with lute, and full of broken ore; then when the wind
blows the flame of the fierce fire over the pans, the bismuth drips out of the
ore ; wherefore, in order that it may run, the ore is stirred with the tongs ; but
when they decide that all the bismuth is exuded, they seize the pans with
the tongs and remove them, and pour out the bismuth into empty pans, and
by turning many into one they make cakes. Others reduce the ore, when it is
not mixed with cadmta,®® in a furnace similar to the iron furnace. In this
case they make a pit and a crucible of crushed earth mixed with pulverised

Sum

\\ i ws
L
W
= S ae WL
a,
ies 8 vr
/ =m 5 En
4, 2 : S .
= =
So eR EE RE RT SE
i ais eva —
= igec se
— Bibi =
=
a ™%,
>
= Sane a ;
F pen ” S
) x pa
G Ls ° a
y
a ° ——
= S—
=<; Eee
- 8
: Ss , fire
A—Woop. B—Bricks. C—PAans. D—FUuURNACE. E—CRvucIBLE. F—PIPE.

G—DIPPING-POT.

charcoal, and into it they put the broken ore, or the concentrates from
washing, from which they make more bismuth. If they put in ore,
they reduce it with charcoal and small dried wood mixed, and if concentrates,
they use charcoal only ; they blow both materials with a gentle blast from

6°This cadmia is given in the German translation as kobelt. It is probably the cobalt-
arsenic-bismuth minerals common in Saxony. A large portion of the world’s supply of
bismuth to-day comes from the cobalt treatment works near Schneeberg. For further
discussion of cadmia see note on p. I12.

436 BOOK IX.

a bellows. From the crucible is a small pipe through which the molten
bismuth runs down into a dipping-pot, and from this cakes are made.

On a dump thrown up from the mines, other people construct a hearth
exposed to the wind, a foot high, three feet wide, and four and a half feet
long. It is held together by four boards, and the whole is thickly coated at
the top with lute. On this hearth they first put small dried sticks of fir wood,
then over them they throw broken ore; then they lay more wood over it,
and when the wind blows they kindle it. In this manner the bismuth drips
out of the ore, and afterward the ashes of the wood consumed by the fire and
the charcoals are swept away. The drops of bismuth which fall down into
the hearth are congealed by the cold, and they are taken away with the
tongs and thrown into a basket. From the melted bismuth they make
cakes in iron pans. :

i

ly 4
i

TP

i rn )

A—HEARTH IN WHICH ORE IS MELTED. B—HEARTH ON WHICH LIE DROPS OF BISMUTH.
C—Toncs. D—BaAsKET. E—WIND.

Others again make a box eight feet long, four feet wide, and two feet high,
which they fill almost full of sand and cover with bricks, thus making
the hearth. The box has in the centre a wooden pivot, which turns in a hole
in two beams laid transversely one upon the other ; these beams are hard and
thick, are sunk into the ground, both ends are perforated, and through

BOOK IX. 437

these holes wedge-shaped pegs are driven, in order that the beams may remain
fixed, and that the box may turn round, and may be turned toward the wind
from whichever quarter of the sky it may blow. In such a hearth they put

A—Box. B—Pivot. C—TRANSVERSE wooD BEAMS. D—GRrRaATE. E—lITs FEET.
F—BurRNING woop. G—StTick. H—PANS IN WHICH THE BISMUTH IS MELTED.
I—Pans FOR MOULDS. K—CaxkrEs. L—Forx. M—BRruvusH.

an iron grate, as long and wide as the box and threequarters of a foot high ;
it has six feet, and there are so many transverse bars that they almost touch
one another. On the grate they lay pine-wood and over it broken ore, and over
this they again lay pine-wood. When it has been kindled the ore melts, out
of which the bismuth drips down ; since very little wood is burned, this is the
most profitable method of smelting the bismuth. The bismuth drips through
the grate on to the hearth, while the other things remain upon the grate with
the charcoal. When the work is finished, the workman takes a stick from the
hearth and overturns the grate, and the things which have accumulated on
it ; with a brush he sweeps up the bismuth and collects it in a basket, and
then he melts it in an iron pan and makes cakes. As soon as possible after
it is cool, he turns the pans over, so that the cakes may fall out, using for
this purpose a two-pronged fork of which one prong is again forked. And
immediately afterward he returns to his labours.

END OF BOOK IX.

x
us
OY
Wee

BOOK X.

UESTIONS as to the methods of smelting ores and
Ay|| of obtaining metals I discussed in Book IX.
~}| Following this, I should explain in what manner the
precious metals are parted from the base metals, or
on the other hand the base metals from the precious’.
} Frequently two metals, occasionally more than
i two, are melted out of one ore, because in
| nature generally there is some amount of gold in

=} silver and in copper, and some silver in gold, copper,
lead, and iron; likewise some copper in gold, silver, lead, and iron, and
some lead in silver; and lastly, some iron in copper®. But I will begin with
gold.

Gold is parted from silver, or likewise the latter from the former, whether
it be mixed by nature or by art, by means of agua valens*, and by powders
which consist of almost the same things as this agua. In order to preserve the
sequence, I will first speak of the ingredients of which this aqua is made, then
of the method of making it, then of the manner in which gold is parted from
silver or silver from gold. Almost all these ingredients contain vitriol or
alum, which, by themselves, but much more when joined with saltpetre, are
powerful to part silver from gold. As to the other things that are added to
them, they cannot individually by their own strength and nature separate
those metals, but joined they are very powerful. Since there are many
combinations, I will set out a few. In the first, the use of which is common
and general, there is one Jébra of vitriol and as much salt, added to a third of a
libra of spring water. The second contains two Hbrae of vitriol, one of salt-
petre, and as much spring or river water by weight as will pass away whilst
the vitriol is being reduced to powder by the fire. The third consists of four
librae of vitriol, two and a half lébrae of saltpetre, half a libra of alum, and one
and a half lébvae of spring water. The fourth consists of two Hbrae of vitriol,
as many Hbrae of saltpetre, one quarter of a libra of alum, and three-quarters
of a libra of spring water. The fifth is composed of one bra of saltpetre,

1Vile a precioso.

®The reagents mentioned in this Book are much the same as those of Book VII,
where (p. 220) a table is given showing the Latin and Old German terms. Footnotes in explana-
tion of our views as to these substances may be most easily consulted through the index.

3Aqua valens, literally strong, potent, or powerful water. It will appear later, from
the method of manufacture, that hydrochloric, nitric, and sulphuric acids and agua regia were
more or less all produced and all included in this term. We have, therefore, used either the
term agua valens or simply aqua as it occurs in the text. The terms aqua fortis and aqua
regia had come into use prior to Agricola, but he does not use them; the Alchemists used
various terms, often aqua dissolvia. It is apparent from the uses to which this reagent was
put in separating gold and silver, from the method of clarifying it with silver and from the
red fumes, that Agricola could have had practical contact only with nitric acid. It is probable
that he has copied part of the recipes for the compounds to be distilled from the Alchemists
and from such works as the Probierbiichlein. In any event he could not have had experience
with them all, for in some cases the necessary ingredients for making nitric acid are not all
present, and therefore could be of no use for gold and silver separation. The essential in-
gredients for the production of this acid by distillation, were saltpetre, water, and either
vitriol or alum. The other substances mentioned were unnecessary, and any speculation
as to the combinations which would result, forms a useful exercise in chemistry, but of little
purpose here. The first recipe would no doubt produce hydrochloric acid.

440 BOOK X.

three librae of alum, half a libra of brick dust, and three-quarters of a Hbra
of spring water. The sixth consists of four librae of vitriol, three librae of
saltpetre, one of alum, one /ibra likewise of stones which when thrown into a
fierce furnace are easily liquefied by fire of the third order, and one and a
half ibrae of spring water. The seventh is made of two librae of vitriol, one
and a half librae of saltpetre, half a Abra of alum, and one Kobra of stones
which when thrown into a glowing furnace are easily liquefied by fire of the
third order, and five-sixths of a bra of spring water. The eighth is made of
two librae of vitriol, the same number of librae of saltpetre, one and a
half Hbrae of alum, one bra of the lees of the agua which parts gold from
silver; and to each separate libra a sixth of urine is poured over it. The
ninth contains two Uibrae of powder of baked bricks, one libra of vitriol,
likewise one bra of saltpetre, a handful of salt, and three-quarters of a libra
of spring water. Only the tenth lacks vitriol and alum, but it contains three
librae of saltpetre, two librae of stones which when thrown into a hot furnace
are easily liquefied by fire of the third order, half a libva each of verdigris‘,
of stibium, of iron scales and filings, and of asbestos®, and one and one-sixth
librae of spring water.

All the vitriol from which the aqua is usually made is first reduced to
powder in the following way. It is thrown into an earthen crucible lined on
the inside with litharge, and heated until it melts; then it is stirred with a
copper wire, and after it has cooled it is pounded to powder. In the same
manner saltpetre melted by the fire is pounded to powder when it has cooled.
Some indeed place alum upon an iron plate, roast it, and make it into powder.

Although all these aguae cleanse gold concentrates or dust from
impurities, yet there are certain compositions which possess singular power.

4Aericola, in the Interpretatio, gives the German equivalent for the Latin aerugo as
Spanschgriin—‘ because it was first brought to Germany from Spain ; foreigners call it
“viride aeris (copper green).” The English ‘‘ verdigris’”’ is a corruption of vert de
grice. Both verdigris and white lead were very ancient products, and they naturally find
mention together among the ancient authors. The earliest description of the method of
making is from the 3rd Century B.c., by Theophrastus, who says (101-2): ‘‘ But these are
“ works of art, as is also Ceruse (psimythion) to make which, lead is placed in earthen vessels
“over sharp vinegar, and after it has acquired some thickness of a kind of rust, which it
“commonly does in about ten days, they open the vessels and scrape off, as it were, a kind
“of foulness; they then place the lead over the vinegar again, repeating over and over
‘again the same method of scraping it till it is wholly dissolved ; what has been scraped off
“they then beat to powder and boil for a long time ; and what at last subsides to the bottom of
“the vessel is the white lead. . . . Alsoin a manner somewhat resembling this, verdigris
‘‘ (ios) is made, for copper is placed over lees of wine (grape refuse ?), and the rust which it
“acquires by this means is taken off for use. And it is by this means that the rust which
‘ appears is produced.”” (Based on Hill’s translation.) Vitruvius (vi, 12), Dioscorides (Vv, 51),
and Pliny (xxxiv, 26 and 54), all describe the method of making somewhat more elaborately.

5Amiantus (Interpretatio gives federwis, pliant, salamanderhar). From Agricola’s
elaborate description in De Natura Fossiliwm (p. 252) there can be no doubt that he means
asbestos. This mineral was well-known to the Ancients, and is probably earliest referred to
(3rd Century B.c.) by Theophrastus in the following passage (29): “‘ There is also found in
“the mines of Scaptesylae a stone, in its external appearance somewhat resembling wood,
“ on which, if oil be poured, it burns; but when the oil is burnt away, the burning of the
“stone ceases, as if it were in itself not liable to such accidents.” There can be no doubt
that Strabo (x, 1) describes the mineral: ‘‘ At Carystus there is found in the earth a stone,
‘‘ which is combed like wool, and woven, so that napkins are made of this substance, which,
“when soiled, are thrown into the fire and cleaned, as in the washing of linen.” It is also
described by Dioscorides (v, 113) and Pliny (xix, 4). Asbestos cloth has been found in
Pre-Augustinian Roman tombs.

BOOK X. 44x

The first of these consists of one libra of verdigris and three-quarters of
a Ubra of vitriol. For each bra there is poured over it one-sixth of a libra
of spring or river water, as to which, since this pertains to all these com-
pounds, it is sufficient to have mentioned once for all. The second com-
position is made from one /ibra of each of the following, artificial orpiment,
vitriol, lime, alum, ash which the dyers of wool use, one quarter of a libra
of verdigris, and one and a half unciae of stibium. The third consists of three
librae of vitriol, one of saltpetre, half a bra of asbestos, and half a libra of
baked bricks. The fourth consists of one libra of saltpetre, one bra of alum,
and half a libra of sal-ammoniac.®

The furnace in which aqua valens is made’ is built of bricks, rectangular,
two feet long and wide, and as many feet high and a half besides. It is
covered with iron plates supported with iron rods ; these plates are smeared
on the top with lute, and they have in the centre a round hole, large enough to
hold the earthen vessel in which the glass ampulla is placed, and on each side of
the centre hole are two small round air-holes. The lower part of the furnace,
in order to hold the burning charcoal, has iron plates at the height of a palm,
likewise supported by iron rods. In the middle of the front there is the
mouth, made for the purpose of putting the fire into the furnace ; this mouth
is half a foot high and wide, and rounded at the top, and under it is the
draught opening. Into the earthen vessel set over the hole is placed clean
sand a digit deep, and in it the glass ampulla is set as deeply as it is smeared
with lute. The lower quarter is smeared eight or ten times with nearly liquid
lute, each time to the thickness of a blade, and each time it is dried again,
until it has become as thick as the thumb ; this kind of lute is well beaten
with an iron rod, and is thoroughly mixed with hair or cotton thread, or with
wool and salt, that it should not crackle. The many things of which the
compounds are made must not fill the ampulla completely, lest when boiling
they rise into the operculum. The operculum is likewise made of glass,
and is closely joined to the ampulla with linen, cemented with wheat flour
and white of egg moistened with water, and then lute free from salt is spread
over that part of it. In a similar way the spout of the operculum is joined
by linen covered with lute to another glass ampulla which receives the distilled
aqua. A kind of thin iron nail or small wooden peg, a little thicker than a
needle, is fixed in this joint, in order that when air seems necessary to the
artificer distilling by this process he can pull it out; this is necessary when
too much of the vapour has been driven into the upper part. The four air-
holes which, as I have said, are on the top of the furnace beside the large
hole on which the ampulla is placed, are likewise covered with lute.

___. *This list of four recipes is even more obscure than the previous list. If they were
distilled, the first and second mixtures would not produce nitric acid, although possibly some
sulphuric would result. The third might yield nitric, and the fourth agua regia. In view
of the water, they were certainly not used as cements, and the first and second are deficient
in the vital ingredients.

"Distillation, at least in crude form, is very old. Aristotle (Meteorologica, Iv.) states
that sweet water can be made by evaporating salt-water and condensing the steam.
Dioscorides and Pliny both describe the production of mercury by distillation (note 58, p.
432). The Alchemists of the Alexandrian School, from the 1st to the 6th Centuries, men-
tion forms of imperfect apparatus—an ample discussion of which may be found in Kopp,
Bettrage zur Geschichte der Chemie, Braunschweig, 1869, p. 217).

442 BOOK X.

YY
“Ny Y
Mm)
2

Ill

i=
=
=
a=

ypinats

D SS ————— MG

. WSs =~ K oy) p
SS < saree!
H,

A—FuRNACE. B—ITS ROUND HOLE. C—AIR-HOLES. D—MOUTH OF THE FURNACE,

E—DRAUGHT OPENING UNDER IT. F—EARTHENWARE CRUCIBLE. G—AMPULLA.

H—OpercuLum. I—ItsspouTt. K—OTHER AMPULLA. L—BASKET IN WHICH THIS IS
USUALLY PLACED LEST IT SHOULD BE BROKEN.

All this preparation having been accomplished in order, and the
ingredients placed in the ampulla, they are gradually heated over burning
charcoal until they begin to exhale vapour and the ampulla is seen to trickle
with moisture. But when this, on account of the rising of the vapour, turns
red, and the aqua distils through the spout of the operculum, then one must
work with the utmost care, lest the drops should fall at a quicker rate than
one for every five movements of the clock or the striking of its bell, and
not slower than one for every ten; for if it falls faster the glasses will be
broken, and if it drops more slowly the work begun cannot be completed
within the definite time, that is within the space of twenty-four hours. To
prevent the first accident, part of the coals are extracted by means of an iron
implement similar to pincers ; and in order to prevent the second happening,
small dry pieces of oak are placed upon the coals, and the substances in the
ampulla are heated with a sharper fire, and the air-holes on the furnace
are re-opened if need arise. As soon as the drops are being distilled,
the glass ampulla which receives them is covered with a piece of linen

BOOK X. 443

moistened with water, in order that the powerful vapour which arises may be
repelled. When the ingredients have been heated and the ampulla in which
they were placed is whitened with moisture, it is heated by a fiercer fire until
all the drops have been distilled®. After the furnace has cooled, the aqua is
filtered and poured into a small glass ampulla, and into the same is put half
a drachma of silver®, which when dissolved makes the turbid aqua clear.
This is poured into the ampulla containing all the rest of the agua, and as
soon as the lees have sunk to the bottom the aqua is poured off, removed, and
reserved for use.

Gold is parted from silver by the following method?®. The alloy, with lead
added to it, is first heated in a cupel until all the lead is exhaled, and eight

8It is desirable to note the contents of the residues in the retort, for it is our belief
that these are the materials to which the author refers as “ lees of the water which separates
gold from silver,” in many places in Book VII. They would be strange mixtures of sodium,
potassium, aluminium sulphates, with silica, brickdust, asbestos, and various proportions of
undigested vitriol, salt, saltpetre, alum, iron oxides, etc. Their effect must have been un-
certain. Many old German metallurgies also refer to the Todenkopf der Schetdwasser, among
them the Probierbiichlein before Agricola, and after him Lazarus Ercker (Beschreibung
Allerfiirnemsten, etc., Prague, 1574). See also note 16, p. 234. y

*This use of silver could apply to one purpose oh that is, the elimination of minor
amounts of hydrochloric from the nitric acid, the former originating no doubt from the use of
salt among the ingredients. The silver was thus converted into a chloride and precipitated.
This use of a small amount of silver to purify the nitric acid was made by metallurgists down
to fairly recent times. Biringuccio (Iv, 2) and Lazarus Ercker (p. 71) both recommend
that the silver be dissolved first in a small amount of acid, and the solution poured into the
newly-manufactured supply. They both recommend preserving this precipitate and its
cupellation after melting with lead—which Agricola apparently overlooked.

1%n this description of parting by nitric acid, the author digresses from his main
theme on pages 444 and 445, to explaifi a method apparently for small quantities where
the silver was precipitated by copper, and to describe another cryptic method of precipita-
tion. These subjects are referred to in notes 11 and 12 below. The method of parting
set out here falls into six stages : a—cupellation, b-granulation, c-solution in acid, d-treatment
of the gold residues, e-evaporation of the solution, f-reduction of the silver nitrate. For
nitric acid parting, bullion must be free from impurities, which cupellation would ensure ; if
copper were left in, it would have the effect he mentions if we understand “ the silver
“separated from the gold soon unites with it again,” to mean that the silver unites with the
copper, for the copper would go into solution and come down with the silver on evaporation.
Agricola does not specifically mention the necessity of an excess of silver in this description,
although he does so elsewhere, and states that the ratio must be at least three parts silver to
one part gold. The first description of the solution of the silver is clear enough, but that on
Pp. 445 is somewhat difficult to follow, for the author states that the bullion is placed in a retort
with the acid, and that distillation is carried on between each additional charge of acid. So
far as the arrangement of a receiver might relate to the saving of any acid that came over
accidentally in the boiling, it can be understood, but to distill off much acid would soon
result in the crystallization of the silver nitrate, which would greatly impede the action of
subsequent acid additions, and finally the gold could not be separated from such nitrate in
the way described. The explanation may be (apart from incidental evaporation when
heating) that the acids used were very weak, and that by the evaporation of a certain amount
of water, not only was the acid concentrated, but room was provided for the further charges.
The acid in the gold wash-water, mentioned in the following paragraph, was apparently thus
concentrated. e “ glass ” mentioned as being melted with litharge, argols, nitre, etc., was
no doubt the silver nitrate. The precipitation of the silver from the solution as a chloride, by
the use of salt, so generally used during the 18th and roth Centuries, was known in Agricola’s
time, although he does not mention it. It is mentioned in Geber and the Probierbiichlein.
The clarity of the latter on the subject is of some interest (p. 34a): “‘ How to pulverise silver
Ds and again make it into silver. Take the silver and dissolve it in water with the starcken-
Wi wpssccpnink Best Sage fort, and when that is done, take the silver water and pour it into warm salty
_, Water, and immediately the silver settles to the bottom and becomes powder. Let it stand
vi awhile until it has well settled, then pour away the water from it and dry the settlings,

which will become a powder like ashes. Afterward one can again make it into silver.
‘‘ Take the powder and put it on a #est, and add thereto the powder from the settlings from
which the agua forte has been made, and add lead. Then if there is a great deal, blow on

444 BOOK X.

ounces of the alloy contain only five drachmae of copper or at most six, for
if there is more copper in it, the silver separated from the gold soon unites
with it again. Such molten silver containing gold is formed into granules,
being stirred by means of a rod split at the lower end, or else is poured into an
iron mould, and when cooled is made into thin leaves. As the process of
making granules from argentiferous gold demands greater care and diligence than
making them from any other metals, I will now explain the method briefly. The
alloy is first placed in a crucible, which is then covered with a lid and placed
in another earthen crucible containing a few ashes. Then they are placed
in the furnace, and after they are surrounded by charcoal, the fire is blown
by the blast of a bellows, and lest the charcoal fall away it is surrounded
by stones or bricks. Soon afterward charcoal is thrown over the upper
crucible and covered with live coals ; these again are covered with charcoal,
so that the crucible is surrounded and covered on all sides with it. It
is necessary to heat the crucibles with charcoal for the space of half an hour or
a little longer, and to provide that there is no deficiency of charcoal, lest the
alloy become chilled ; after this the air is blown in through the nozzle of the
bellows, that the gold may begin to melt. Soon afterward it is turned
round, and a test is quickly taken to see whether it be melted, and if it is
melted, fluxes are thrown into it ; it is advisable to cover up the crucible
again closely that the contents may not be exhaled. The contents are heated
together for as long as it would take to walk fifteen paces, and then the
crucible is seized with tongs and the gold is emptied into an oblong vessel
containing very cold water, by pouring it slowly from a height so that the
granules will not be too big; in proportion as they are lighter, more fine
and more irregular, the better they are, therefore the water is frequently
stirred with a rod split into four parts from the lower end to the middle.

The leaves are cut into small pieces, and they or the silver granules are
put into a glass ampulla, and the aqua is poured over them to a height of a
digit above the silver. The ampulla is covered with a bladder or with waxed
linen, lest the contents exhale. Then it is heated until the silver is dissolved,
the indication of which is the bubbling of the aqua. The gold remains in the
bottom, of a blackish colour, and the silver mixed with the aqua floats above.
Some pour the latter into a copper bowl and pour into it cold water, which
immediately congeals the silver ; this they take out and dry, having poured
off the agua“. They heat the dried silver in an earthenware crucible until
it melts, and when it is melted they pour it into an iron mould.

The gold which remains in the ampulla they wash with warm water,
filter, dry, and heat in a crucible with a little chrysocolla which is called
borax, and when it is melted they likewise pour it into an iron mould.

“it until the lead has incorporated itself . . . blow it until it plickt (blickens), Then
“you will have as much silver as before.”

“The silver is apparently precipitated by the copper of the bowl. It would seem
that this method was in considerable use for small amounts of silver nitrate in the 16th
Century. Lazarus Ercker gives elaborate directions for this method (Beschreibung Aller-
fiirnemsten, etc., Prague, 1574, p. 77).

b.
4
}

BOOK X. 445

Some workers, into an ampulla which contains gold and silver and the
aqua which separates them, pour two or three times as much of this aqua
valens warmed, and into the same ampulla or into a dish into which all is
poured, throw fine leaves of black lead and copper ; by this means the gold
adheres to the lead and the silver to the copper, and separately the lead
from the gold, and separately the copper from the silver, are parted in a
cupel. But no method is approved by us which loses the agua used to part
gold from silver, for it might be used again?*.

A glass ampulla, which bulges up inside at the bottom like a cone, is
covered on the lower part of the outside with lute in the way explained above,
and into it is put silver bullion weighing three and a half Roman Hbrae. The
aqua which parts the one from the other is poured into it, and the ampulla is
placed in sand contained in an earthen vessel, or in a box, that it may be
warmed with a gentle fire. Lest the aqua should be exhaled, the top of the
ampulla is plastered on all sides with lute, and it is covered with a glass
operculum, under whose spout is placed another ampulla which receives the
distilled drops ; this receiver is likewise arranged in a box containing sand.
When the contents are heated it reddens, but when the redness no
longer appears to increase, it is taken out of the vessel or box and shaken ;
by this motion the aqua becomes heated again and grows red; if this is
done two or three times before other aqua is added to it, the operation is sooner
concluded, and much less aqua is consumed. When the first charge has all
been distilled, as much silver as at first is again put into the ampulla, for if
too much were put in at once, the gold would be parted from it with difficulty.
Then the second aqua is poured in, but it is warmed in order that it and the
ampulla may be of equal temperature, so that the latter may not be cracked
by the cold ; also if a cold wind blows on it, it is apt to crack. Then the third
aqua is poured in, and also if circumstances require it, the fourth, that is to
say more aqua and again more is poured in until the gold assumes the colour
of burned brick. The artificer keeps in hand two aguae, one of which is
stronger than the other; the stronger is used at first, then the less strong,
then at the last again the stronger. When the gold becomes of a reddish
yellow colour, spring water is poured in and heated until it boils. The gold is
washed four times and then heated in the crucible until it melts. The water
with which it was washed is put back, for there is a little silver in it; for
this reason it is poured into an ampulla and heated, and the drops first distilled
are received by one ampulla, while those which come later, that is to say
when the operculum begins to get red, fall into another. This latter aqua is
useful for testing the gold, the former for washing it ; the former may also
be poured over the ingredients from which the agua valens is made.

The aqua that was first distilled, which contains the silver, is poured into
an ampulla wide at the base, the top of which is also smeared with lute and
covered by an operculum, and. is then boiled as before in order that it may be
separated from the silver. If there be so much agua that (when boiled) it

We confess to a lack of understanding of this operation with leaves of lead and
copper.

31

<i = = :
or
eS Soper SE, r nM
<I =] § ry x
oS J... "2 -p 3 — B——— ———
————— —— = — ( > : —————
EY ————— wun ——_ ow
4 SSS “Al —" 2
=a me — = E AA —
= w # Z Z| 6
Win} 2 z
— » 3 S/
= \N
| a N
= 7) iy IN
e~ ig i K)
A F a’ :
\ -
. ory = =
stony) oe =
X D a
a) G = =
= = EA B
= = > = SI — Cc Fs
: =
\ zl 3 =)
7 \. é rn oh
aes _ = x x
: an xn 5
= SAN : = Zw
EB ce

A—AMPULLAE ARRANGED IN THE VESSELS. B—AN AMPULLA STANDING UPRIGHT BETWEEN
IRON RODS. C—AMPULLAE PLACED IN THE SAND WHICH IS CONTAINED IN A BOX, THE
SPOUTS OF WHICH REACH FROM THE OPERCULA INTO AMPULLAE PLACED UNDER THEM.
D—AMPULLAE LIKEWISE PLACED IN SAND WHICH IS CONTAINED IN A BOX, OF WHICH THE
SPOUT FROM THE OPERCULA EXTENDS CROSSWISE INTO AMPULLAE PLACED UNDER THEM.
E—OTHER AMPULLAE RECEIVING THE DISTILLED agua AND LIKEWISE ARRANGED IN SAND
CONTAINED IN THE LOWER BOXES. F-——IRON TRIPOD, IN WHICH THE AMPULLA IS USUALLY
PLACED WHEN THERE ARE NOT MANY PARTICLES OF GOLD TO BE PARTED FROM THE SILVER.
G—VESSEL.

rises into the operculum, there is put into the ampulla one lozenge or two ;
these are made of soap, cut into small pieces and mixed together with
powdered argol, and then heated in a pot over a gentle fire; or else the
contents are stirred with a hazel twig split at the bottom, and in both cases
the agua effervesces, and soon after again settles. When the powerful vapour
appears, the aqua gives off a kind of oil, and the operculum becomes red. But,
lest the vapours should escape from the ampulla and the operculum in that
part where their mouths communicate, they are entirely sealed all round.
The aqua is boiled continually over a fiercer fire, and enough charcoal must be
put into the furnace so that the live coals touch the vessel. The ampulla is

taken out as soon as all the aqua has been distilled, and the silver, which is dried

by the heat of the fire, alone remains in it ; the silver is shaken out and put

in an earthenware crucible, and heated until it melts. The molten glass is
extracted with an iron rod curved at the lower end, and the silver is made

4
\

BOOK X. 447

into cakes. The glass extracted from the crucible is ground to powder, and
to this are added litharge, argol, glass-galls, and saltpetre, and they are
melted in an earthen crucible. The button that settles is transferred to the
cupel and re-melted.

If the silver was not sufficiently dried by the heat of the fire, that which
is contained in the upper part of the ampulla will appear black ; this when
melted will be consumed. When the lute, which was smeared round the
lower part of the ampulla, has been removed, it is placed in the crucible and
is re-melted, until at last there is no more appearance of black™.

If to the first agua the other which contains silver is to be added, it
must be poured in before the powerful vapours appear, and the aqua gives off
the oily substance, and the operculum becomes red ; for he who pours in the
aqua after the vapour appears causes a loss, because the aqua generally spurts
out and the glass breaks. Ifthe ampulla breaks when the gold is being parted
from the silver or the silver from the aqua, the aqua will be absorbed by the
sand or the lute or the bricks, whereupon, without any delay, the red hot coals
should be taken out of the furnace and the fire extinguished. The sand and
bricks after being crushed should be thrown into a copper vessel, warm water
should be poured over them, and they should be put aside for the space of
twelve hours ; afterward the water should be strained through a canvas, and
the canvas, since it contains silver, should be dried by the heat of the sun or
the fire, and then placed in an earthen crucible and heated until the silver
melts, this being poured out into an iron mould. The strained water should
be poured into an ampulla and separated from the silver, of which it contains
a minute portion; the sand should be mixed with litharge, glass-galls,
argol, saltpetre, and salt, and heated in an earthen crucible. The button
which settles at the bottom should be transferred to a cupel, and should
be re-melted, in order that the lead may be separated from the silver. The
lute, with lead added, should be heated in an earthen crucible, then
re-melted in a cupel.

We also separate silver from gold by the same method when we assay
them. For this purpose the alloy is first rubbed against a touchstone, in
order to learn what proportion of silver there is in it; then as much silver
as is necessary is added to the argentiferous gold, in a bes of which there
must be less than a semi-uncia or a semi-uncia and a sicilicus'4 of copper.
After lead has been added, it is melted in a cupel until the lead and the
copper have exhaled, then the alloy of gold with silver is flattened out, and
little tubes are made of the leaves; these are put into a glass ampulla,
and strong aqua is poured over them two or three times. The tubes after
this are absolutely pure, with the exception of only a quarter of a siliqua,
which is silver ; for only this much silver remains in eight wnciae of gold}.

: *8We do not understand this ‘‘ appearance of black.” If the nitrate came into contact
with organic matter it would, of course, turn black by reduction of the silver, and sunlight
would have the same effect. ¥

‘This would be equal to from 62 to 94 parts of copper in 1,000.
As 144 siliquae are I uncia, then } siligua in 8 unciae would equal one part silver in
4,608 parts gold, or about 999.8 fine.

448 BOOK X.

As great expense is incurred in parting the metals by the methods that
I have explained, as night vigils are necessary when agua valens is made,
and as generally much labour and great pains have to be expended on this
matter, other methods for parting have been invented by clever men, which
are less costly, less laborious, and in which there is less loss if through care-
lessness an error is made. There are three methods, the first performed with
sulphur, the second with antimony, the third by means of some compound
which consists of these or other ingredients.

In the first method,?® the silver containing some gold is melted in a
crucible and made into granules. For every libra of granules, there is taken
a sixth of a bra and a sictlicus of sulphur (not exposed to the fire) ; this,
when crushed, is sprinkled over the moistened granules, and then they are put
into a new earthen pot of the capacity of four sextarii, or into several of them
if there is an abundance of granules. The pot, having been filled, is covered
with an earthen lid and smeared over, and placed within a circle of fire set one
and a half feet distant from the pot on all sides, in order that the sulphur
added to the silver should not be distilled when melted. The pot is opened,

16The object of this treatment with sulphur and copper is to separate a considerable
portion of silver from low-grade bullion (f.e., silver containing some gold), in preparation
for final treatment of the richer gold-silver alloy with nitric acid. Silver sulphide is created
by adding sulphur, and is drawn off in a silver-copper regulus. After the first sentence, the
author uses silver alone where he obviously means silver ‘‘ containing some gold,’’ and further
he speaks of the “ gold lump ” (massula) where he likewise means a button containing a great
deal of silver. For clarity we introduced the term “‘ regulus’’ for the Latin mistura. The
operation falls into six stages: a, granulation; 6, sulphurization of the granulated bullion ;
c, melting to form a combination of the silver sulphide with copper into a regulus, an alloy
of gold and silver settling out ; d, repetition of the treatment to abstract further silver from
the ‘‘lump;”’ ¢, refining the “lump” with nitric acid; 7, recovery of the silver from the
regulus by addition of lead, liquation and cupellation. |

The use of a “circle of fire” secures a low temperature that would neither volatilize
the sulphur nor melt the bullion, The amount of sulphur given is equal to a ratio of 48 parts
bullion and g parts sulphur. We are not certain about the translation of the paragraph in
relation to the proportion of copper added to the granulated bullion; because in giving
definite quantities of copper to be added in the contingencies of various original copper
contents in the bullion, it would be expected that they were intended to produce some
positive ratio of copper and silver. However, the ratio as we understand the text in various
cases works out to irregular amounts, #.e., 48 parts of silver to 16, 12.6, 24, 20.5, 20.8, 17.8, or
18 parts of copper. In order to obtain complete separation there should be sufficient sulphur
to have formed a sulphide of the copper as well as of the silver, or else some of the copper
end silver would come down metallic with the “lump”. The above ratio of copper added to
the sulphurized silver, in the first instance would give about 18 parts of copper and g parts
of sulphur to 48 parts of silver. The copper would require 4.5 parts of sulphur to convert
it into sulphide, and the silver about 7 parts, or a total of 11.5 parts required against 9 parts
furnished. It is plain, therefore, that insufficient sulphur is given. Further, the litharge
would probably take up some sulphur and throw down metallic lead into the “lump”.
However, it is necessary that there should be some free metallics to collect the gold, and,
therefore, the separation could not be complete in one operation. In any event, on the above
ratios the ‘‘ gold lump” from the first operation was pretty coppery, and contained some
lead and probably a good deal of silver, because the copper would tend to desulphurize the
latter. The ‘“ powder ”’ of glass-galls, salt, and litharge would render the mass more liquid
and assist the “ gold lump” to separate out.

The Roman silver sesterce, worth about 2} pence or 4.2 American cents, was no doubt
used by Agricola merely to indicate an infinitesimal quantity. The test to be applied to the
regulus by way of cupellation and parting of a sample with nitric acid, requires no explanation.
The truth of the description as to determining whether the gold had settled out, by using a
chalked iron rod, can only be tested by actual experiment. It is probable, however, that the
sulphur in the regulus would attack the iron and make it black. The re-melting of the regulus,
if some gold remains in it, with copper and ‘‘ powder ” without more sulphur, would provide
again free metallics to gather the remaining gold, and by desulphurizing some silver this
button would probably not be very pure.

BOOK X. 449

:
Y +ee =a Qe ‘y WS
FSS

S
S
N
Ss
S
SN
s
N

A—Pot. B—CrrcuLar FIRE. C—Crucisres. D—THErR Lips. E—LID OF THE POT.
F—FuRNACE. G—IRON ROD.

the black-coloured granules are taken out, and afterward thirty-three ibrae
of these granules are placed in an earthen crucible, if it has such capacity.
For every Hbra of silver granules, weighed before they were sprinkled with

From the necessity for some free metallics besides the gold in the first treatment, it will
be seen that a repetition of the sulphur addition and re-melting is essential gradually to enrich
the “lump”. Why more copper is added is not clear. In the second melting, the ratio is
48 parts of the “ gold lump”, 12 parts of sulphur and 12 parts copper. In this case the added
copper would require about 3 parts sulphur, and if we consider the deficiency of sulphur
in the first operations pertained entirely to the copper, then about 2.5 parts would be required
to make good the shortage, or in other words the second addition of sulphur is sufficient.
In the final parting of the “lump” it will be noticed that the author states that the silver ratio
must be arranged as three of silver to one of gold. As to the recovery of the silver from the
regulus, he states that 66 librae of silver give 132 librae of regulus. To this, 500 librae of
lead are added, and it is melted in the ‘‘second” furnace, and the litharge and hearth-
lead made are re-melted in the “ first” furnace, the cakes made being again treated in the
“third ” furnace to separate the copper and lead. The “first” is usually the blast furnace,
the “second” furnace is the cupellation furnace, and the “ third” the liquation furnace.
It is difficult to understand this procedure. The charge sent to the cupellation furnace
would contain between 3% and 5% copper, and between 3% and 5% sulphur. However,
possibly the sulphur and copper could be largely abstracted in the skimmings from the
cupellation furnace, these being subsequently liquated in the ‘“‘ third” furnace. It may be
noted that two whole lines from this paragraph are omitted in the editions of De Re Metallica
after 1600. For historical note on sulphur separation see page 461.

450 BOOK X.

sulphur, there is weighed out also a sixth of a libra and a sicilicus of
copper, if each libra consists either of three-quarters of a libra of silver and
a quarter of a libra of copper, or of three-quarters of a libra and a
semi-uncia of silver and a sixth of a bra and a semi-uncia of copper. If,
however, the silver contains five-sixths of a libra of silver and a sixth of a
libra of copper, or five-sixths of a libra and a semt-uncia of silver and an uncia
and a half of copper, then there are weighed out a quarter of a bra of copper
granules. Ifa bra contains eleven-twelfths of a libra of silver and one uncla
of copper, or eleven-twelfths and a semt-uncta of silver and a semi-uncia of
copper, then are weighed out a quarter of a bra and a semi-uncia and a
stcilicus of copper granules. Lastly, if there is only pure silver, then as much
as a third of a libra and a semi-uncia of copper granules are added. Half
of these copper granules are added soon afterward to the black-coloured
silver granules. The crucible should be tightly covered and smeared over
with lute, and placed in a furnace, into which the air is drawn through the
draught-holes. As soon as the silver is melted, the crucible is opened, and
there is placed in it a heaped ladleful more of granulated copper, and also
a heaped ladleful of a powder which consists of equal parts of litharge, of
granulated lead, of salt, and of glass-galls ; then the crucible is again covered
with the lid. When the copper granules are melted, more are put in, together
with the powder, until all have been put in.

A little of the regulus is taken from the crucible, but not from the gold
lump which has settled at the bottom, and a dvachma of it is put into each of
the cupels, which contain an uncta of molten lead ; there should be many
of these cupels. In this way half a dvachma of silver is made. As soon as
the lead and copper have been separated from the silver, a third of it is
thrown into a glass ampulla, and agua valens is poured over it. By this
method is shown whether the sulphur has parted all the gold from the silver,
or not. If one wishes to know the size of the gold lump which has settled
at the bottom of the crucible, an iron rod moistened with water is covered
with chalk, and when the rod is dry it is pushed down straight into the
crucible, and the rod remains bright to the height of the gold lump; the
remaining part of the rod is coloured black by the regulus, which adheres to
the rod if it is not quickly removed.

If when the rod has been extracted the gold is observed to be
satisfactorily parted from the silver, the regulus is poured out, the gold
button is taken out of the crucible, and in some clean place the regulus is
chipped off from it, although it usually flies apart. The lump itself is reduced
to granules, and for every libra of this gold they weigh out a quarter of a libra
each of crushed sulphur and of granular copper, and all are placed together
in an earthen crucible, not into a pot. When they are melted, in order that
the gold may more quickly settle at the bottom, the powder which I have
mentioned is added.

Although minute particles of gold appear to scintillate in the regulus
of copper and silver, yet if all that are in a Ubva do not weigh as much as a
single sesterce, then the sulphur has satisfactorily parted the gold from the

BOOK X. 451

silver; but if it should weigh a sesterce or more, then the regulus is thrown
back again into the earthen crucible, and it is not advantageous to add sulphur,
but only a little copper and powder, by which method a gold lump is again
made to settle at the bottom ; and this one is added to the other button which

is not rich in gold.

When gold is parted from sixty-six Ubrae of silver, the silver, copper,
and sulphur regulus weighs one hundred and thirty-two Hbrae. To separate
the copper from the silver we require five hundred Mbrae of lead, more or
less, with which the regulus is melted in the second furnace. In this
manner litharge and hearth-lead are made, which are re-smelted in the first
furnace. The cakes that are made from these are placed in the third furnace,
so that the lead may be separated from the copper and used again, for it
contains very little silver. The crucibles and their covers are crushed, washed,
and the sediment is melted together with litharge and hearth-lead.

Those who wish to separate all the silver from the gold by this method
leave one part of gold to three of silver, and then reduce the alloy to
granules. Then they place it in an ampulla, and by pouring aqua valens over
it, part the gold from the silver, which process I explained in Book VII.

If sulphur from the lye with which sal artificiosus is made, is strong
enough to float an egg thrown into it, and is boiled until it no longer emits
fumes, and melts when placed upon glowing coals, then, if such sulphur is
thrown into the melted silver, it parts the gold from it.

Silver is also parted from gold by means of stibtum1’. If in a bes of
gold there are seven, or six, or five double sextulae of silver, then three parts
of stibium are added to one part of gold ; but in order that the stibiwm should
not consume the gold, it is melted with copper in a red hot earthern crucible.
If the gold contains some portion of copper, then to eight unciae of stibium

17There can be no doubt that in most instances Agricola’s stibium is antimony sulphide,
but it does not follow that it was the mineral s#ibnite, nor have we considered it desirable to
introduce the precision of either of these modern terms, and have therefore retained the
Latin term where the sulphide is apparently intended. The use of antimony sulphide to
part silver from gold is based upon the greater affinity of silver than antimony for sulphur.
Thus the silver, as in the last process, is converted into a sulphide, and is absorbed in the
regulus, while the metallic antimony alloys with the gold and settles to the bottom of the pot.
This process has several advantages over the sulphurization with crude sulphur ; antimony
is a more convenient vehicle of sulphur, for it saves the preliminary sulphurization with its
attendant difficulties of volatilization of the sulphur ; it also saves the granulation necessary
in the former method ; and the treatment of the subsequent products is simpler. However,
it is possible that the sulphur-copper process was better adapted to bullion where the pro-
portion of gold was low, because the fineness of the bullion mentioned in connection with the
antimonial process was apparently much higher than the previous process. For instance,
a bes of gold, containing 5, 6, or 7 double sextulae of silver would be .792, .750. or .708 fine.
The antimonial method would have an advantage over nitric acid separation, in that high-
grade bullion could be treated direct without artificial decrease of fineness required by
inquartation to about .250 fine, with the consequent incidental losses of silver involved.

The process in this description falls into six operations: a, sulphurization of the silver
by melting with antimony sulphide ; 5, separation of the gold “ lump” (massula) by jogging ;
c, re-melting the regulus (mistura) three or four times for recovery of further ‘‘lumps”’ ; d,
re-melting of the “lump ” four times, with further additions of antimony sulphide ; ¢, cupel-
lation of the regulus to recover the silver ; /, cupellation of the antimony from the “lump ”’ to
recover the gold. Percy seems to think it difficult to understand the insistence upon the
addition of copper. Biringuccio (Iv, 6) states, among other things, that copper makes the
ingredients more liquid. The later metallurgists, however, such as Ercker, Lohneys,
and Schliiter, do not mention this addition; they do mention the “swelling and

452 BOOK X.

a sictlicus of copper is added ; and if it contains no copper, then half an
uncta, because copper must be added to stibiwm in order to part gold from
silver. The gold is first placed in a red hot earthen crucible, and when
melted it swells, and a little stibiwm is added to it lest it run over; in a
short space of time, when this has melted, it likewise again swells, and
when this occurs it is advisable to put in all the remainder of the stibium,
and to cover the crucible with a lid, and then to heat the mixture for the
time required to walk thirty-five paces. Then it is at once poured out into
an iron pot, wide at the top and narrow at the bottom, which was first
heated and smeared over with tallow or wax, and set on an iron or wooden
block. It is shaken violently, and by this agitation the gold lump settles
to the bottom, and when the pot has cooled it is tapped loose, and is again
melted four times in the same way. But each time a less weight of stibium
is added to the gold, until finally only twice as much stibium is added as
there is gold, or a little more ; then the gold lump is melted in a cupel. The
stibium is melted again three or four times in an earthen crucible, and each
time a gold lump settles, so that there are three or four gold lumps, and
these are all melted together in a cupel.

To two Hbrae and a half of such stibiwm are added two librae of argol
and one Hbra of glass-galls, and they are melted in an earthen crucible,
where a lump likewise settles at the bottom; this lump is melted in the
cupel. Finally, the stibiwm with a little lead added, is melted in the cupel,
in which, after all the rest has been consumed by the fire, the silver alone
remains. If the stb¢wm is not first melted in an earthen crucible with argol
and glass-galls, before it is melted in the cupel, part of the silver is consumed,
and is absorbed by the ash and powder of which the cupel is made.

The crucible in which the gold and silver alloy are melted with stibtum,
and also the cupel, are placed in a furnace, which is usually of the kind

frothing,” and recommend that the crucible should be only partly filled. As to the copper,
we suggest that it would desulphurize part of the antimony and thus free some of that metal
to collect the gold. If we assume bullion of the medium fineness mentioned and containing
no copper, then the proportions in the first charge would be about 36 parts gold, 12 parts
silver, 41 parts sulphur, 103 parts antimony, and g parts copper. The silver and copper
would take up 4.25 parts of sulphur, and thus free about 10.6 parts of antimony as metallics.
It would thus appear that the amount of metallics provided to assist the collection of the
gold was little enough, and that the copper in freeing 5.6 parts of the antimony was useful.
It appears to have been necessary to have a large excess of antimony sulphide; for even
with the great surplus in the first charge, the reaction was only partial, as is indicated by the
necessity for repeated melting with further antimony.

The later metallurgists all describe the separation of the metallic antimony from
the gold as being carried out by oxidation of the antimony, induced by a jet of air into the
crucible, this being continued until the mass appears limpid and no cloud forms in the surface
in cooling. Agricola describes the separation of the silver from the regulus by preliminary
melting with argols, glass-gall, and some lead, and subsequent cupellation of the lead-silver
alloy. The statement that unless this preliminary melting is done, the cupel will absorb
silver, might be consonant with an attempt at cupellation of sulphides, and it is difficult to see
that much desulphurizing could take place with the above fluxes. In fact, in the later
descriptions of the process, iron is used in this melting, and we are under the impression
that Agricola had omitted this item for a desulphurizing reagent. At the Dresden Mint,
in the methods described by Percy (Metallurgy Silver and Gold, p. 373) the gold lumps were
tested for fineness, and from this the amount of gold retained in the regulus was computed,
It is not clear from Agricola’s account whether the test with nitric acid was applied to the
regulus or to the “lumps”. For historical notes see p. 461.

A—FURNACE IN WHICH THE AIR IS DRAWN IN THROUGH HOLES. B—GOLDSMITH’S FORGE.
C—EARTHEN CRUCIBLES. D—IrRon pots. E—BLOCK.

in which the air is drawn in through holes; or else they are placed in a gold-
smith’s forge.

Just as agua valens poured over silver, from which the sulphur has
parted the gold, shows us whether all has been separated or whether
particles of gold remain in the silver ; so do certain ingredients, if placed in
the pot or crucible ‘alternately’ with the gold, from which the silver has
been parted by sétbtum, and heated, show us whether all have been
separated or not.

We use cements!* when, without sttbtum, we part silver or copper or both
so ingeniously and admirably from gold. There are various cements. Some

‘ 18As will be shown in the historical note, this process of separating gold and silver
is of great antiquity—in all probability the only process known prior to the Middle Ages, and
in any event, the first one used. In general the process was performed by “ cementing ”’
the disintegrated bullion with a paste and subjecting the mass to long-continued heat at a
temperature under the melting point of the bullion. The cement (compositio) is of two
different species ; in the first species saltpetre and vitriol and some aluminous or silicious
medium are the essential ingredients, and through them the silver is converted into nitrate
and absorbed by the mass ; in the second species, common salt and the same sort of medium
are the essentials, and in this case the silver is converted into a chloride. Agricola does not
poe ka Stem between these two species, for, as shown by the text, his ingredients are badly
mixe

454 BOOK X.

consist of half a /ébra of brick dust, a quarter of a libra of salt, an uncia of salt-
petre, half an wncia of sal-ammoniac, and half an uncia of rock salt. The bricks
or tiles from which the dust is made must be composed of fatty clays, free from
sand, grit, and small stones, and must be moderately burnt and very old.

Another cement is made of a bes of brick dust, a third of rock salt, an
uncia of saltpetre, and half an uncia of refined salt. Another cement*is made
of a bes of brick dust, a quarter of refined salt, one and a half wnciae of
saltpetre, an uncta of sal-ammoniac, and half an wncia of rock salt. Another
has one bra of brick dust, and half a libra of rock salt, to which some add a
sixth of a libra and a sicilicus of vitriol. Another is made of half a libra of
brick dust, a third of a libra of rock salt, an uncta and a half of vitriol, and
one uncta of saltpetre. Another consists of a bes of brick dust, a third of
refined salt, a sixth of white vitriol!®, half an wncia of verdigris, and likewise
half an uncia of saltpetre. Another is made of one and a third Ubrae of brick
dust, a bes of rock salt, a sixth of a bra and half an uncta of sal-ammoniac,
a sixth and half an wncta of vitriol, and a sixth of saltpetre. Another contains
a Ubra of brick dust, a third of refined salt, and one and a half unciae of vitriol.

The process as here described falls into five operations : a, granulation of the bullion
or preparation of leaves; 0, heating alternate layers of cement and bullion in pots; c,
washing the gold to free it of cement; d, melting the gold with borax or soda; e,
treatment of the cement by way of melting with lead and cupellation to recover the silver.
Investigation by Boussingalt (Ann. De Chimie, 1833, p. 253-6), D’Elhuyar (Bergbaukunde,
Leipzig, 1790, Vol. 11, p. 200), and Percy (Metallurgy of Silver and Gold, p. 395), of the
action of common salt upon silver under cementation conditions, fairly well demonstrated
the reactions involved in the use of this species of cement. Certain factors are essential
besides salt: a, the admission of air, which is possible through the porous pots used; )}, the
presence of some moisture to furnish hydrogen ; c, the addition of alumina or silica. The
first would be provided by Agricola in the use of new pots, the second possibly by use of wood
fuel in a closed furnace, the third by the inclusion of brickdust. The alumina or silica at
high temperatures decomposes the salt, setting free hydrochloric acid and probably also free
chlorine. The result of the addition of vitriol in Agricola’s ingredients is not discussed by
those investigators, but inasmuch as vitriol decomposes into sulphuric acid under high
temperatures, this acid would react upon the salt to free hydrochloric acid, and thus assist
to overcome deficiencies in the other factors. It is possible also that sulphuric acid under
such conditions would react directly upon the silver to form silver sulphates, which would
be absorbed into the cement. As nitric acid is formed by vitriol and saltpetre at high tem-
peratures, the use of these two substances as a cementing compound would produce nitric
acid, which would at once attack the silver to form silver nitrate, which would be absorbed into
the melted cement. In this case the brickdust probably acted merely as a vehicle for the
absorption, and to lower the melting point of the mass and prevent fusion of the metal.
While nitric acid will only part gold and silver when the latter is in great excess, yet when
applied as fumes under cementation conditions it appears to react upon a minor ratio of
silver. While the reactions of the two above species of compounds can be accounted for in a
general way, the problem furnished by Agricola’s statements is by no means simple, for
only two of his compounds are simply salt cements, the others being salt and nitre mixtures.
An inspection of these compounds produces at once a sense of confusion. Salt is present in
every compound, saltpetre in all but two, vitriol in all but three. Lewis (Tvaité Singulier de
Métallique, Paris, 1743, 11, pp. 48-60), in discussing these processes, states that salt and salt-
petre must never be used together, as he asserts that in this case agua regia would be formed
and the gold dissolved. Agricola, however, apparently found no such difficulty. As to
the other ingredients, apart from nitre, salt, vitriol, and brickdust, they can have been of no
use. Agricola himself points out that ingredients of “‘ metallic origin’’ corrupt the gold and that
brickdust and common salt are sufficient. In a description of this process in the Probierbiichlein
(p. 58), no nitre is mentioned. This booklet does mention the recovery of the silver from
the cement by amalgamation with mercury—the earliest mention of silver amalgamation.

19While a substance which we now know to be natural zinc sulphate was known to
Agricola (see note II, p. 572), it is hardly possible that it is referred to here. If green vitriol
be dehydrated and powdered, it is white.

BOOK X. 455

Those ingredients above are peculiar to each cement, but what follows
is common to all. Each of the ingredients is first separately crushed to
powder ; the bricks are placed on a hard rock or marble, and crushed with an
iron implement ; the other things are crushed in a mortar with a pestle ;
each is separately passed through a sieve. Then they are all mixed together,
and are moistened with vinegar in which a little sal-ammoniac has been
dissolved, if the cement does not contain any. But some workers, however,
prefer to moisten the gold granules or gold-leaf instead.

The cement should be placed, alternately with the gold, in new and clean
pots in which no water has ever been poured. In the bottom the cement is
levelled with an iron implement, and afterward the gold granules or leaves
are placed one against the other, so that they may touch it on all sides; then,
again, a handful of the cement, or more if the pots are large, is thrown in and
levelled with an iron implement ; the granules and leaves are laid over this
in the same manner, and this is repeated until the pot is filled. Then it is
covered with a lid, and the place where they join is smeared over with
artificial lute, and when this is dry the pots are placed in the furnace.

The furnace has three chambers, the lowest of which is a foot high ; into
this lowest chamber the air penetrates through an opening, and into it the

|Z

ya
> a

=
= Li
=

A—FurnaceE. B—Pot. C—Lip. D—ArIR-HOLES.

456 BOOK X.

ashes fall from the burnt wood, which is supported by iron rods, arranged to
form a grating. The middle chamber is two feet high, and the wood is pushed
in through its mouth. The wood ought to be oak, holmoak, or turkey-oak,
for from these the slow and lasting fire is made which is necessary for this
operation. The upper chamber is open at the top so that the pots, for which
it has the depth, may be put into it ; the floor of this chamber consists of iron
rods, so strong that they may bear the weight of the pots and the heat of the
fire ; they are sufficiently far apart that the fire may penetrate well and may
heat the pots. The pots are narrow at the bottom, so that the fire entering
into the space between them may heat them ; at the top the pots are wide,
so that they may touch and hold back the heat of the fire. The upper part
of the furnace is closed in with bricks not very thick, or with tiles and lute,
and two or three air-holes are left, through which the fumes and flames may
escape.

The gold granules or leaves and the cement, alternately placed in the pots,
are heated by a gentle fire, gradually increasing for twenty-four hours, if the
furnace was heated for two hours before the full pots were stood in it, and if
this was not done, then for twenty-six hours. The fire should be increased
in such a manner that the pieces of gold and the cement, in which is the
potency to separate the silver and copper from the gold, may not melt, for in
this case the labour and cost will be spent in vain; therefore, it is ample to
have the fire hot enough that the pots always remain red. After so many
hours all the burning wood should be drawn out of the furnace. Then the
refractory bricks or tiles are removed from the top of the furnace, and the
glowing pots are taken out with the tongs. The lids are removed, and
if there is time it is well to allow the gold to cool by itself, for then there is
less loss ; but if time cannot be spared for that operation, the pieces of gold
are immediately placed separately into a wooden or bronze vessel of water
and gradually quenched, lest the cement which absorbs the silver should
exhale it. The pieces of gold, and the cement adhering to them, when cooled
or quenched, are rolled with a little mallet so as to crush the lumps and free
the gold from the cement. Then they are sifted by a fine sieve, which is
placed over a bronze vessel; in this manner the cement containing the
silver or the copper or both, falls from the sieve into the bronze vessel, and the
gold granules or leaves remain on it. The gold is placed in a vessel and
again rolled with the little mallet, so that it may be cleansed from the cement
which absorbs silver and copper.

The particles of cement, which have dropped through the holes of the
sieve into the bronze vessel, are washed in a bowl, over a wooden tub, being
shaken about with the hands, so that the minute particles of gold which have
fallen through the sieve may be separated. These are again washed in a
little vessel, with warm water, and scrubbed with a piece of wood or a twig
broom, that the moistened cement may be detached. Afterward all the gold
is again washed with warm water, and collected with a bristle brush, and should
be washed in a copper full of holes, under which is placed a little vessel.
Then it is necessary to put the gold on an iron plate, under which is a vessel,

BOOK X. 457

and to wash it with warm water. Finally, it is placed in a bowl, and, when
dry, the granules or leaves are rubbed against a touchstone at the same time
as a touch-needle, and considered carefully as to whether they be pure or
alloyed. If they are not pure enough, the granules or the leaves, together
with the cement which attracts silver and copper, are arranged alternately
in layers in the same manner, and again heated ; this is done as often as is
necessary, but the last time it is heated as many hours as are required to
cleanse the gold.

Some people add another cement to the granules or leaves. This cement
lacks the ingredients of metalliferous origin, such as verdigris and vitriol, for
if these are in the cement, the gold usually takes up a little of the base metal ;
or if it does not do this, it is stained by them. For this reason some very
rightly never make use of cements containing these things, because brick
dust and salt alone, especially rock salt, are able to extract all the silver and
copper from the gold and to attract it to themselves.

It is not necessary for coiners to make absolutely pure gold, but to heat
it only until such a fineness is obtained as is needed for the gold money which
they are coining.

The gold is heated, and when it shows the necessary golden yellow colour
and is wholly pure, it is melted and made into bars, in which case they are
either prepared by the coiners with chrysocolla, which is called by the Moors
borax, or are prepared with salt of lye made from the ashes of ivy or of
other salty herbs.

The cement which has absorbed silver or copper, after water has been
poured over it, is dried and crushed, and when mixed with hearth-lead and
de-silverized lead, is smelted in the blast furnace. The alloy of silver and
lead, or of silver and copper and lead, which flows out, is again melted in the
cupellation furnace, in order that the lead and copper may be separated from
the silver. The silver is finally thoroughly purified in the refining furnace,
and in this practical manner there is no silver lost, or only a minute quantity.

There are besides this, certain other cements?® which part gold from
silver, composed of sulphur, stibéwm and other ingredients. One of these
compounds consists of half an wncia of vitriol dried by the heat of the fire
and reduced to powder, a sixth of refined salt, a third of stibtum, half a libra

oe

20The processes involved by these “ other” compounds are difficult to understand,
because of the lack of information given as to the method of operation. It might be thought
that these were five additional recipes for cementing pastes, but an inspection of their
internal composition soon dissipates any such assumption, because, apart from the lack of
brickdust or some other similar necessary ingredient, they all contain more or less sulphur.
After describing a preliminary treatment of the bullion by cupellation, the author says:
“Then the silver is sprinkled with two wnciae of that powdered compound and is
“stirred. Afterward it is poured into another crucible . . .. and violently shaken.
“The rest is performed according to the process I have already explained.’”’ As he has
already explained four or five parting processes, it is not very clear to which one this refers.
In fact, the whole of this discussion reads as if he were reporting hearsay, for it lacks in every
respect the infinite detail of his usual descriptions. In any event, if the powder was intro-
duced into the molten bullion, the effect would be to form some silver sulphides in a regulus
of different composition depending upon the varied ingredients of different compounds.
The enriched bullion was settled out in a “lump” and treated “as I have explained,”
which is not clear.

458 BOOK X.

of prepared sulphur (not exposed to the fire), one sécilicus of glass, likewise
one sécilicus of saltpetre, and a drachma of sal-ammoniac.” The sulphur
is prepared as follows: it is first crushed to powder, then it is heated
for six hours in sharp vinegar, and finally poured into a vessel and washed
with warm water; then that which settles at the bottom of the vessel is
dried. To refine the salt it is placed in river water and boiled, and again
evaporated. The second compound contains one libra of sulphur (not exposed
to fire) and two librae of refined salt. The third compound is made from one

21HISTORICAL NOTE ON PARTING GOLD AND SILVER. Although the earlier Classics
contain innumerable references to refining gold and silver, there is little that is tangible in
them, upon which to hinge the metallurgy of parting the precious metals. It appears to us,
however, that some ability to part the metals is implied in the use of the touchstone, for we fail
to see what use a knowledge of the ratio of gold and silver in bullion could have been without
the power to separate them. The touchstone was known to the Greeks at least as early as the
5th Century B.c. (see note 37, p. 252), and a part of Theophrastus’ statement (LxxvulII.) on
this subject bears repetition in this connection: ‘‘ The nature of the stone which tries gold
‘is also very wonderful, as it seems to have the same power as fire; which is also a test of
“that metal. . . . The trial by fire is by the colour and the quantity lost by it, but
“that of the stone is made only by rubbing,” etc. This trial by fire certainly implies a
parting of the metals. It has been argued from the common use of electrum—a gold-silver
alloy—by the Ancients, that they did not know how to part the two metals or they would
not have wasted gold in such a manner, but it seems to us that the very fact that electrum
was a positive alloy (20% gold, 80% silver), and that it was deliberately made (Pliny
XXXII, 23) and held of value for its supposed superior brilliancy to silver and the belief that
goblets made of it detected poison, is sufficient answer to this.

To arrive by a process of elimination, we may say that in the Middle Ages, between
Ir0o and 1500 A.D., there were known four methods of parting these metals: a,
parting by solution in nitric acid; 0, sulphurization of the silver in finely-divided bullion
by heating it with sulphur, and the subsequent removal of the silver sulphide in a regulus by
melting with copper, iron, or lead ; c, melting with an excess of antimony sulphide, and the
direct conversion of the silver to sulphide and its removal in a regulus ; d, cementation of the
finely-divided bullion with salt, and certain necessary collateral re-agents, and the separation
of the silver by absorption into the cement as silver chloride. Inasmuch as it can be clearl
established that mineral acids were unknown to the Ancients, we can eliminate that method.
Further, we may say at once that there is not, so far as has yet been found, even a remote
statement that could be applied to the sulphide processes. As to cementation with salt,
however, we have some data at about the beginning of the Christian Era.

Before entering into a more detailed discussion of the history of various processes,
it may be useful, in a word, to fix in the mind of the reader our view of the first
authority on various processes, and his period.

(1) Separation by cementation with salt, Strabo (?) 63 B.c.-24 A.D.; Pliny 23-79 A.D.

(2) Separation by sulphur, Theophilus, 1150-1200 A.D.

(3) Separation by nitric acid, Geber, prior to 14th Century.

(4) Separation by antimony sulphide, Basil Valentine, end 14th Century, or Probterbiuchlein,
beginning 15th Century.

(5) Separation by antimony sulphide and copper, or sulphur and copper, Probierbichlein,
beginning 15th Century.

(6) Separation by cementation with saltpetre, Agricola, 1556.

(7) Separation by sulphur and iron, Schliiter, 1738.

(8) Separation by sulphuric acid, D’Arcet, 1802.

(9) Separation by chloride gas, Thompson, 1833.

(x0) Separation electrolytically, latter part 19th Century.

PARTING BY CEMENTATION. The following passage from Strabo is of prime interest
as the first definite statement on parting of any kind (m1, 2, 8) : ‘‘ That when they have
“melted the gold and purified it by means of a kind of aluminous earth, the residue left is
“electrum. This, which contains a mixture of silver and gold, being again subjected to the
“ fire, the silver is separated and the gold left (pure) ; for this metal is easily dissipated and
“fat, and on this account gold is most easily molten by straw, the flame of which is soft, and
“ bearing a similarity (to the gold) causes it easily to dissolve, whereas coal, besides wasting a
“great deal, melts it too much, by reason of its vehemence, and carries it off (in vapour).”
This statement has provoked the liveliest discussion, not only on account of the metallurgical

BOOK X. 459

Kibra of sulphur (not exposed to the fire), half a bra of refined salt, a quarter of
a libra of sal-ammoniac, and one uncia of red-lead. The fourth compound
consists of one bra each of refined salt, sulphur (not exposed to the fire) and
argol, and half a libra of chrysocolla which the Moors call borax. The fifth
compound has equal proportions of sulphur (not exposed to the fire), sal-
ammoniac, saltpetre, and verdigris.

The silver which contains some portion of gold is first melted with
lead in an earthen crucible, and they are heated together until the silver
exhales the lead. If there was a /tbra of silver, there must be six drachmae of
lead. Then the silver is sprinkled with two wnctae of that powdered com-

interest and obscurity, but also because of differences of view as to its translation ; we have
given that of Mr. H. C. Hamilton (London, 1903). A review of this discussion will be found
in Percy’s Metallurgy of Gold and Silver, p. 399. That it refers to cementation at all hangs
by a slender thread, but it seems more nearly this than anything else.

Pliny (xxxul, 25) is a little more ample : ‘(The gold) is heated with double its
“ weight of salt and thrice its weight of misy, and again with two portions of salt and one of a
“stone which they call schistos. The virus is drawn out when these things are burnt together
“in an earthen crucible, itself remaining pure and incorrupt, the remaining ash being
“ preserved in an earthen pot and mixed with water as a lotion for /ichen (ring-worm) on the
“face.” Percy, (Metallurgy Silver and Gold, p. 398) rightly considers that this undoubtedly
refers to the parting of silver and gold by cementation with common salt. Especially as
Pliny further on states that with regard tojmisy, ‘‘In purifying gold they mix it with this
“substance.” There can be no doubt from the explanations of Pliny and Dioscorides that
misy was an oxidized pyrite, mostly iron sulphate. Assuming the latter case, then all of the
necessary elements of cementation, #.¢., vitriol, salt, and an aluminous or silicious element, are
present.
The first entirely satisfactory evidence on parting is to be found in Theophilus (12th
Century), and we quote the following from Hendrie’s translation (p. 245) : “ Of Heating the
“Gold. Take gold, of whatsoever sort it may be, and beat it until thin leaves are made in
“breadth three fingers, and as long as you can. Then cut out pieces that are equally long
“and wide and join them together equally, and perforate through all with a fine cutting
“iron. Afterwards take two earthen pots proved in the fire, of such size that the gold can
“lie flat in them, and break a tile very small, or clay of the furnace burned and red, weigh
“it, powdered, into two equal parts, and add to it a third part salt for the same weight ;
“which things being slightly sprinkled with urine, are mixed together so that they may not
“adhere together, but are scarcely wetted, and put a little of it upon a pot about the
“breadth of the gold, then a piece of the gold itself, and again the composition, and
“again the gold, which in the digestion is thus always covered, that gold may not be in
“contact with gold; and thus fill the pot to the top and cover it above with another pot,
“which you carefully lute round with clay, mixed and beaten, and you place it over the fire,
“that it may be dried. In the meantime compose a furnace from stones and clay, two feet
“in height, and a foot and a half in breadth, wide at the bottom, but narrow at the top,
“where there is an opening in the middle, in which project three long and hard stones, which
“may be able to sustain the flame for a long time, upon which you place the pots with the
“gold, and cover them with other tiles in abundance. Then supply fire and wood, and take
“care that a copious fire is not wanting for the space of a day and night. In the morning
“taking out the gold, again melt, beat and place it in the furnace as before. Again also,
“after a day and night, take it away and mixing a little copper with it, melt it as before, and
“replace it upon the furnace. And when you have taken it away a third time, wash and dry
“it carefully, and so weighing it, see how much is wanting, then fold it up and keep it.”

The next mention is by Geber, of whose date and authenticity there is great
doubt, but, in any event, the work bearing his name is generally considered
to be prior to the 14th, although he has been placed as early as the 8th
Century. We quote from Russell’s translation, pp. 17 and 224, which we have
checked with the Latin edition of 1542: ‘Sol, or gold, is beaten into thin plates
“and with them and common salt very well prepared lay upon lay in a vessel of
“calcination which set into the furnace and calcine well for three days until the whole is
“subtily calcined. Then take it out, grind well and wash it with vinegar, and dry it in the
“sun. Afterwards grind it well with half its weight of cleansed sal-armoniac ; then set it
“to be dissolved until the whole be dissolved into most clear water.” Further on: “ Now
“ we will declare the way of cementing. Seeing it is known to us that cement is very necessary
“in the examen of perfection, we say it is compounded of inflammable things. Of this

460 BOOK X.

pound and is stirred; afterward it is poured into another crucible, first
warmed and lined with tallow, and then violently shaken. The rest is per-
formed according to the process I have already explained.

Gold may be parted without injury from silver goblets and from other
gilt vessels and articles**, by means of a,powder, which consists of one part of
sal-ammoniac and half a part of sulphur. The gilt goblet or other article
is smeared with oil, and the powder is dusted on ; the article is seized in the
hand, or with tongs, and is carried to the fire and sharply tapped, and by this
means the gold falls into water in vessels placed underneath, while the
goblet remains uninjured.

‘‘ kind are, all blackening, flying, penetrating, and burned things; as is vitriol, sal-armoniac,
“ flos aeris (copper oxide scales) and the ancient fictile stone (earthen pots), and a very small
“‘ quantity, or nothing, of sulphur, and urine with like acute and penetrating things. All
“these are impasted with urine and spread upon thin plates of that body which you intend
“shall be examined by this way of probation. Then the said plates must be laid upon a
“ grate of iron included in an earthen vessel, yet so as one touch not the other that the virtue
“of the fire may have free and equal access to them. Thus the whole must be kept in fire
“in a strong earthen vessel for the space of three days. But here great caution is required
“ that the plates may be kept but not melt.”

Albertus Magnus (1205-1280) De Mineralibus et Rebus Metallicis, Lib. IV, describes
the process as follows :—‘‘ But when gold is to be purified an earthen vessel is made like a
“cucurbit or dish, and upon it is placed a similar vessel ; and they are luted together with
“the tenacious lute called by alchemists the lute of wisdom. In the upper vessel there are}
“numerous holes by which vapour and smoke may escape ; afterwards the gold in the form
“of short thin leaves is arranged in the vessel, the leaves being covered consecutively with a
“ mixture obtained by mixing together soot, salt, and brick dust ; and the whole is strongly}
“heated until the gold becomes perfectly pure and the base substances with which it was
“mixed are consumed.” It will be noted that salt is the basis of all these cement com-
pounds. We may also add that those of Biringuccio and all other writers prior to Agricola
were of the same kind, our author being the first to mention those with nitre.

PARTING WITH Nitric Acip. The first mention of nitric acid is in connection with
this purpose, and, therefore, the early history of this reagent becomes the history of the
process. Mineral acids of any kind were unknown to the Greeks or Romans. The works
of the Alchemists and others from the rath to the 15th Centuries, have been well searched
by chemical historians for indications of knowledge of the mineral acids, and many of such
suspected indications are of very doubtful order. In any event, study of the Alchemists
for the roots of chemistry is fraught with the greatest difficulty, for not only is there the
large ratio of fraud which characterised their operations, but there is even the much larger
field of fraud which characterised the authorship and dates of writing attributed to various
members of the cult. The mention of saltpetre by Roger Bacon (1214—94), and Albertus
Magnus (1205-80), have caused some strain to read a knowledge of mineral acids into their
works, but with doubtful result. Further, the Monk Theophilus (1150-1200) is supposed
to have mentioned products which would be mineral acids, but by the most careful scrutiny
of that work we have found nothing to justify such an assertion, and it is of importance to
note that as Theophilus was a most accomplished gold and silver worker, his failure to men-
tion it is at least evidence that the process was not generally known. The transcribed manu-
scripts and later editions of such authors are often altered to bring them “‘ up-to-date.”
The first mention is in the work attributed to Geber, as stated above, of date prior to the
14th Century. The following passage from his De Inventione Veritatis (Nuremberg edition,
1545, p. 182) is of interest :—‘‘ First take one libra of vitriol of Cyprus and one-half libra
“of saltpetre and one-quarter of alum of Jameni, extract the agua with the redness of the
“‘ alembic—for it is very solvative—and use as in the foregoing chapters. This can be made
“acute if in it you dissolve a quarter of sal-ammoniac, which dissolves gold, sulphur, and
“silver.” Distilling vitriol, saltpetre and alum would produce nitric acid. The addition of
sal-ammoniac would make aqua regia; Geber used this solvent water—probably without
being made “‘ more acute ’’—to dissolve silver, and he crystallized out silver nitrate. It

There were three methods of gilding practised in the Middle Ages—the first by
hammering on gold leaf; the second by laying a thin plate of gold on a thicker plate of silver,
expanding both together, and fabricating the articles out of the sheets thus prepared; and
the third by coating over the article with gold amalgam, and subsequently driving off the
mercury by heat. Copper and iron objects were silver-plated by immersing them in molten
silver after coating with sal-ammoniac or borax. Tinning was done in the same way.

ee,

ee Oe.

OE ae ee ey a ee

BOOK X 461

Gold is also parted from silver on gilt articles by means of quicksilver.
This is poured into an earthen crucible, and so warmed by the fire that the
finger can bear the heat when dipped into it; the silver-gilt objects are
placed in it, and when the quicksilver adheres to them they are taken out
and placed on a dish, into which, when cooled, the gold falls, together with the
quicksilver. Again and frequently the same silver-gilt object is placed in
heated quicksilver, and the same process is continued until at last no
more gold is visible on the object ; then the object is placed in the fire, and
the quicksilver which adheres to it is exhaled. Then the artificer takes a hare’s
foot, and brushes up into a dish the quicksilver and the gold which have

would not be surprising to find all the Alchemists subsequent to Geber mentioning
acids. It will thus be seen that even the approximate time at which the mineral
acids were first made cannot be determined, but it was sometime previous to the 15th
Century, probably not earlier than the 12th Century. Beckmann (Hist. of Inventions
II, p. 508) states that it appears to have been an old tradition that acid for separating
the precious metals was first used at Venice by some Germans ; that they chiefly separated the
gold from Spanish silver and by this means acquired great riches. Beckmann considers
that the first specific description of the process seems to be in the work of William Budaeus
(De Asse, 1516, 111, p. Ior), who speaks of it as new at this time. He describes the operation
of one, Le Conte, at Paris, who also acquired a fortune through the method. Beckmann
and others have, however, entirely overlooked the early Probierbiichlein. If our conclusions
are correct that the first of these began to appear at about 1510, then they give the first
description of inquartation. This book (see appendix) is made up of recipes, like a cook-book,
and four or five different recipes are given for this purpose ; of these we give one, which suffi-
ciently indicates a knowledge of the art (p. 39): “‘ If you would part them do it this way :
“ Beat the silver which you suppose to contain gold, as thin as possible; cut it in small
“pieces and place it in ‘strong’ water (starkwasser). Put it on a mild fire till it becomes
‘‘ warm and throws up blisters or bubbles. Then take it and pour off the water into a copper-
“bowl; let it stand and cool. Then the silver settles itself round the copper bowl ; let the
“silver dry in the copper bowl, then pour the water off and melt the silver in a crucible.
“Then take the gold also out of the glass kolken and melt it together.” Biringuccio (1540,
Book VI.) describes the method, but with much less detail than Agricola. He made his
acid from alum and saltpetre and calls it lacgue forti.

PARTING WITH SULPHUR. This process first appears in Theophilus (1150-1200), and
in form is somewhat different from that mentioned by Agricola. We quote from Hendrie’s
Translation, p. 317, ‘“‘ How gold is separated from silver. When you have scraped the gold
“from silver, place this scraping in a small cup in which gold or silver is accustomed to be
“melted, and press a small linen cloth upon it, that nothing may by chance be abstracted
“from it by the wind of the bellows, and placing it before the furnace, melt it; and directly
“lay fragments of sulphur in it, according to the quantity of the scraping, and carefully
“stir it with a thin piece of charcoal until its fumes cease ; and immediately pour it into
‘“an iron mould. Then gently beat it upon the anvil lest by chance some of that black may
“fly from it which the sulphur has burnt, because it is itself silver. For the sulphur con-
“sumes nothing of the gold, but the silver only, which it thus separates from the gold, and
“which you will carefully keep. Again melt this gold in the same small cup as before, and
“‘add sulphur. This being stirred and poured out, break what has become black and keep
“it, and do thus until the gold appear pure. Then gather together all that black, which you
* have carefully kept, upon the cup made from the bone and ash, and add lead, and so burnit
“that you may recover the silver. But if you wish to keep it for the service of niello, before
“you burn it add to it copper and lead, according to the measure mentioned above, and
“mix with sulphur.” This process appears in the Probierbiichlein in many forms, different
recipes containing other ingredients besides sulphur, such as salt, saltpetre, sal-ammoniac,
and other things more or less effective. In fact, a series of hybrid methods between absolute
melting with sulphur and cementation with salt, were in use, much like those mentioned
by Agricola on p. 458.

PARTING WITH ANTIMONY SULPHIDE. The first mention of this process lies either in
Basil Valentine’s “ Triumphant Chariot of Antimony ” or in the first Probierbiichlein. The
date to be assigned to the iormer is a matter of great doubt. It was probably written about
the end of the 15th Century, but apparently published considerably later. The date of the
Probierbiichlein we have referred to above. The statement in the ‘‘ Triumphal Chariot”
is as follows (Waite’s Translation, p. 117-118): “ The elixir prepared in this way has the
“same power of ! gonnwenes and pervading the body with its purifying properties that
“antimony has of penetrating and purifying gold. . . . This much, however, I have
“proved beyond a possibility of doubt, that antimony not only purifies gold and frees it

32

462 BOOK X.

fallen together from the silver article, and puts them into a cloth made of woven
cotton or into a soft leather ; the quicksilver is squeezed through one or the
other into another dish.2* The gold remains in the cloth or the leather, and
when collected is placed in a piece of charcoal hollowed out, and is heated
until it melts, and a little button is made from it. This button is heated with
a little stibiwm in an earthen crucible and poured out into another little
vessel, by which method the gold settles at the bottom, and the stibiwm is
seen to be on the top; then the work is completed. Finally, the gold
button is put in a hollowed-out brick and placed in the fire, and by this
method the gold is made pure. By means of the above methods gold is parted
from silver and also silver from gold.

Now I will explain the methods used to separate copper from gold?4.

“ from foreign matter, but it also ameliorates all other metals, but it does the same for animal
“bodies.” There are most specific descriptions of this process in the other works attributed
to Valentine, but their authenticity is so very doubtful that we do not quote. The
Probierbiichlein gives several recipes for this process, all to the same metallurgical effect, of
which we quote two: ‘‘ How to separate silver from gold. Take 1 part of golden silver, 1
“part of spiesglass, I part copper, I part lead; melt them together in a crucible.

‘When melted pour into the crucible pounded sulphur and directly you have poured it in

“cover it up with soft lime so that the fumes cannot escape, and let it get cold and you will
‘find your gold in a button. Put that same in a pot and blow onit.” ‘‘ How to part gold
“and silver by melting or fire. Take as much gold-silver.as you please and granulate it ;
“take 1 mark of these grains, 1 mark of powder ; put them together in a crucible. Cover it
‘‘ with a small cover, put it in the fire, and let it slowly heat ; blow on it gently until it melts ;
“ stir it all well together with a stick, pour it out into a mould, strike the mould gently with
‘a knife so that the button may settle better, let it cool, then turn the mould over, strike off
“the button and twice as much sfiesglas as the button weighs, put them in a
“ crucible, blow on it till it melts, then pour it again into a mould and break away the button
“as at first. If you want the gold to be good always add to the button twice as much
“ spiesglass. It is usually good gold in three meltings. Afterward take the button, place
‘it on a cupel, blow on it tillit melts. And if it should happen that the gold is covered
“with a membrane, then add a very little lead, then it shines (flickt) and becomes
“clearer.” Biringuccio (1540) also gives a fairly clear exposition of this method. All the
old refiners varied the process by using mixtures of salt, antimony sulphide, and sulphur, in
different proportions, with and without lead or copper; the net effect was the same.
Later than Agricola these methods of parting bullion by converting the silver into a sulphide
and carrying it off in a regulus took other forms. For instance, Schliiter (Hiitte-Werken,
Braunschweig, 1738) describes a method by which, after the granulated bullion had been
sulphurized by cementation with sulphur in pots, it was melted with metallic iron.
Lampadius (Grundriss Einer Allgemeinen Hiittenkunde, Gottingen, 1827) describes a treat-
ment of the bullion, sulphurized as above, with litharge, thus creating a lead-silver regulus
and a lead-silver-gold bullion which had to be repeatedly put through the same cycle. The
principal object of these processes was to reduce silver bullion running low in gold to a ratio
acceptable for nitric acid treatment.

Before closing the note on the separation of gold and silver, we may add that with
regard to the three processes largely used to-day, the separation by solution of the silver
from the bullion by concentrated sulphuric acid where silver sulphate is formed, was first
described by D’Arcet, Paris, in 1802; the separation by introducing chlorine gas into the
molten bullion and thus forming silver chlorides was first described by Lewis Thompson in
a communication to the Society of Arts, 1833, and was first applied on a large scale by F. B.
Miller at the Sydney Mint in 1867-70; we do not propose to enter into the discussion as to
who is the inventor of electrolytic separation.

23See note 12, p. 297, for complete discussion of amalgamation.

24These nine methods of separating gold from copper are based fundamentally upon
the sulphur introduced in each case, whereby the copper is converted into sulphides and
separated off as a matte. The various methods are much befogged by the introduction of
extraneous ingredients, some of which serve as fluxes, while others would provide metallics in
the shape of lead or antimony for collection of the gold, but others would be of no effect,
except to increase the matte or slag. Inspection will show that the amount of sulphur
introduced in many instances is in so large ratio that unless a good deal of volatilization
took place there would be insufficient metallics to collect the gold, if it happened to be in
small quantities. In a general way the auriferous button is gradually impoverished in copper

BOOK X. 463

The salt which we call sal-artifictosus,2° is made from a Hbra each of vitriol,
alum, saltpetre, and sulphur not exposed to the fire, and half a bra of sal-
ammoniac; these ingredients when crushed are heated with one part of lye made
from the ashes used by wool dyers, one part of unslaked lime, and four
parts of beech ashes. The ingredients are boiled in the lye until the whole
has been dissolved. Then it is immediately dried and kept in a hot place,
lest it turn into oil; and afterward when crushed, a /ébva of lead-ash is mixed
with it. With each bra of this powdered compound one and a half unctae
of the copper is gradually sprinkled into a hot crucible, and it is stirred
rapidly and frequently with an iron rod. When the crucible has cooled and
been broken up, the button of gold is found.

The second method for parting is the following. Two Kbrae of sulphur
not exposed to the fire, and four /ibrae of refined salt are crushed and mixed ;
a sixth of a bra and half an wncia of this powder is added to a bes of granules
made of lead, and twice as much copper containing gold; they are heated
together in an earthen crucible until they melt. When cooled, the button is
taken out and purged of slag. From this button they again make granules,
to a third of a Libra of which is added half a bra of that powder of which I
have spoken, and they are placed in alternate layers in the crucible; it is
well to cover the crucible and to seal it up, and afterward it is heated over a
gentle fire until the granules melt. Soon afterward, the crucible is taken off
the fire, and when it is cool the button is extracted. From this, when purified
and again melted down, the third granules are made, to which, if they weigh
a sixth of a libra, is added one half an wncia and a sicilicus of the powder,
and they are heated in the same manner, and the button of gold settles at the
bottom of the crucible.

The third method is as follows. From time to time small pieces of
sulphur, enveloped in or mixed with wax, are dropped into six Kibrae of the
molten copper, and consumed; the sulphur weighs half an uwncia and a
sicilicus. Then one and a half sicilicit of powdered saltpetre are dropped
into the same copper and likewise consumed ; then again half an wncia and a
sicilicus of sulphur enveloped in wax ; afterward one and a half sicélict of
lead-ash enveloped in wax, or of minium made from red-lead. Then imme-
diately the copper is taken out, and to the gold button, which is now mixed
with only a little copper, they add stibiwm to double the amount of the button ;
these are heated together until the stibiwm is driven off ; then the button,
together with lead of half the weight of the button, are heated in a cupel.

until it is fit for cupellation with lead, except in one case where the final stage is accomplished
by amalgamation. The lore of the old refiners was much after the order of that of modern
cooks—they treasured and handed down various efficacious recipes, and of those given here
most can be found in identical terms in the Probierbiichlein, some editions of which, as men-
tioned before, were possibly fifty years before De Re Metallica. This knowledge, no doubt,
accumulated over long experience; but, so far as we are aware, there is no description of
sulphurizing copper for this purpose prior to the publication mentioned.

_ *8Sal artificiosus. The compound given under this name is of quite different in-
gredients from the stock fluxes given in Book VII under the same term. The method of
preparation, no doubt, dehydrated this one; it would, however, be quite effective for its
purpose of sulphurizing the copper. There is a compound given in the Probierbiichlein identical
with this, and it was probably Agricola’s source of information.

464 BOOK X.

Finally, the gold is taken out of this and quenched, and if there is a
blackish colour settled in it, it is melted with a little of the chrysocolla
which the Moors call borax; if too pale, it is melted with st#ibium, and
acquires its own golden-yellow colour. There are some who take out the
molten copper with an iron ladle and pour it into another crucible, whose
aperture is sealed up with lute, and they place it over glowing charcoal,
and when they have thrown in the powders of which I have spoken, they
stir the whole mass rapidly with an iron rod, and thus separate the gold
from the copper; the former settles at the bottom of the crucible, the latter
floats on the top. Then the aperture of the crucible is opened with the
red-hot tongs, and the copper runs out. The gold which remains is re-heated
with stibiwm, and when this is exhaled the gold is heated for the third time
in a cupel with a fourth part of lead, and then quenched.

The fourth method is to melt one and a third Hbrae of the copper
with a sixth of a libra of lead, and to pour it into another crucible smeared on
the inside with tallow or gypsum; and to this is added a powder consisting of
half an wncia each of prepared sulphur, verdigris, and saltpetre, and an uncia
and a half of sal coctus. The fifth method consists of placing in a crucible
one libra of the copper and two librae of granulated lead, with one and a half
unciae of sal-artificiosus ; they are at first heated over a gentle fire and then
over a fiercer one. The sixth method consists in heating together a bes of
the copper and one-sixth of a /ibra each of sulphur, salt, and stibium. The
seventh method consists of heating together a bes of the copper and one-sixth
each of iron scales and filings, salt, stzbiwm, and glass-galls. The eighth
method consists of heating together one libra of the copper, one and a half
librae of sulphur, half a libra of verdigris, and a libra of refined salt. The
ninth method consists of placing in one bra of the molten copper as
much pounded sulphur, not exposed to the fire, and of stirring it rapidly
with an iron rod; the lump is ground to powder, into which quicksilver
is poured, and this attracts to itself the gold.

Gilded copper articles are moistened with water and placed on the fire,
and when they are glowing they are quenched with cold water, and the gold
is scraped off with a brass rod. By these practical methods gold is separated
from copper.

Either copper or lead is separated from silver by the methods which I
will now explain.26 This is carried on in a building near by the works, or
in the works in which the gold or silver ores or alloys are smelted. The
middle wall of such a building is twenty-one feet long and fifteen feet high, and
from this a front wall is distant fifteen feet toward the river; the rear wall

26Throughout the book the cupellation furnace is styled the secuwnda fornax (Glossary,
Treibeherd). Except in one or two cases, where there is some doubt as to whether the author
may not refer to the second variety of blast furnace, we have used “ cupellation furnace.”
Agricola’s description of the actual operation of the old German cupellation is less detailed
than that of such authors as Schliiter (Hiitte-Werken, Braunschweig, 1738) or Winkler (Besch-
reibung der Freyberger Schmelz Huttenprozesse, Freyberg, 1837). The operation falls into four
periods. In the first period, or a short time after melting, the first scum—the abzug—arises.
This material contains most of the copper, iron, zinc, or sulphur impurities in the lead.
In the second period, at a higher temperature, and with the blast turned on, a second scum

BOOK X. 465

is nineteen feet distant, and both these walls are thirty-six feet long and
fourteen feet high ; a transverse wall extends from the end of the front wall to
the end of the rear wall; then fifteen feet back a second transverse wall
is built out from the front wall to the end of the middle wall. In that space
which is between those two transverse walls are set up the stamps, by means
of which the ores and the necessary ingredients for smelting are broken up.
From the further end of the front wall, a third transverse wall leads to the
other end of the middle wall, and from the same to the end of the rear wall.
The space between the second and third transverse walls, and between the
rear and middle long walls, contains the cupellation furnace, in which lead

arises—the abstrich. This material contains most of the antimony and arsenical impurities.
In the third stage the litharge comes over. At the end of this stage the silver brightens—
“ blicken ’’—due to insufficient litharge to cover the entire surface. Winkler gives the follow-
ing average proportion of the various products from a charge of 100 centners :—

Abzug .. i .. 2 centners, containing 64% lead

Abstrich os ‘ie 54 ” ” 73% ”

Herdtplei ‘ ‘Pave: Maeeee és 60% »

Impure litharge ney pe 9 85% »

Litharge ae “eit 0o ” ” 89% »
Total .. .. II3 centners

He estimates the lead loss at from 8% to 15%, and gives the average silver contents of
blicksilber as about 90%. Many analyses of the various products may be found in Percy
(Metallurgy of Lead, pp. 198-201), Schnabel and Lewis (Metallurgy, Vol. 1, p. 58r); but as
they must vary with every charge, a repetition of them here is of little purpose.

HistoricAL NOTE ON CUPELLATION. The cupellation process is of great antiquity,
and the separation of silver from lead in this manner very probably antedates the separation of
gold and silver. We can be certain that the process has been used continuously for at least
2,300 years, and was only supplanted in part by Pattinson’s crystallization process in 1833,
and further invaded by Parks’ zinc method in 1850, and during the last fifteen years further
supplanted in some works by electrolytic methods. However, it yet survives as an important
process. It seems to us that there is no explanation possible of the recovery of the large
amounts of silver possessed from the earliest times, without assuming reduction of that metal
with lead, and this necessitates cupellation. If this be the case, then cupellation was practised
in 2500 B.c. The subject has been further discussed on p. 389. The first direct evidence of the
process, however, is from the remains at Mt. Laurion (note 6, p. 27), where the period of
greatest activity was at 500 B.c., and it was probably in use long before that time. Of
literary evidences, there are the many metaphorical references to “ fining silver”? and “ sepa-
rating dross” in the Bible, such as Job (xxvii, 1), Psalms (x11, 6, Lxvi, 10), Proverbs (xvi, 3).
The most certain, however, is Jeremiah (vi, 28-30): ‘‘ They are all brass [stc] and iron; they
“are corrupters. The bellows are burned, the lead is consumed in the fire, the founder
“melteth in vain; for the wicked are not plucked away. Reprobate silver shall men call
“them.” Jeremiah lived about 600 B.c. His contemporary Ezekiel (xxu, 18) also
makes remark: ‘‘ All they are brass and tin and iron and lead in the midst of the furnace ;
“‘ they are even the dross of the silver.””’ Among Greek authors Theognis (6th century B.c.)
and Hippocrates (5th century B.C.) are often cited as mentioning the refining of gold with lead,
but we do not believe their statements will stand this construction without strain. Aristotle
(Problems xxtv, 9) makes the following remark, which has been construed not only as
cupellation, but also as the refining of silver in ‘‘ tests.” ‘‘ What is the reason that boiling
“water does not leap out of the vessel . . . . silver also does this when it is purified.
“Hence those whose office it is in the silversmiths’ shops to purify silver, derive gain by
at sant “Sr ite to themselves of the sweepings of silver which leap out of the melting-pot.”

he quotation of Diodorus Siculus from Agatharcides (2nd century B.c.) on gold
refining with lead and salt in Egypt we give in note 8, p.279. The methods quoted by Strabo
(63 B.c.-24 A.D.) from Polybius (204-125 B.c.) for treating silver, which appear to involve
cupellation, are given in note 8, p. 281. Itis not, however, until the beginning of the Christian
era that we get definite literary information, especially with regard to litharge, in Dioscorides and
Pliny. The former describes many substances under the terms scoria, molybdaena, scoria argyros
and lithargyros, which are all varieties of litharge. Under the latter term he says (Vv, 62):
“ One kind is produced from a lead sand (concentrates ?), which has been heated in the furnaces
“until completely fused; another (is made) out of silver; another from lead. The best is

466 BOOK X.

is separated from gold or silver. The vertical wall of its chimney is
erected upon the middle wall, and the sloping chimney-wall rests on the
beams which extend from the second transverse wall to the third ; these are
so located that they are at a distance of thirteen feet from the middle long
wall and four from the rear wall, and they are two feet wide and thick.
From the ground up to the roof-beams is twelve feet, and lest the sloping
chimney-wall should fall down, it is partly supported by means of many
iron rods, and partly by means of a few tie-beams covered with lute, which
extend from the small beams of the sloping chimney-wall to the beams of the
vertical chimney-wall. The rear roof is arranged in the same way as the roof

“from Attica, the second (best) from Spain ; after that the kinds made in Puteoli, in Campania,
“and at Baia in Sicily, for in these places it is mostly produced by burning lead plates. The
“best of all is that which is a bright golden colour, called chrysitis, that from Sicily (is called)
“ argyritis, that made from silver is called lauritis.” Pliny refers in several passages to
litharge (spuma argenti) and to what is evidently cupellation, (xxx1u, 31): ‘‘ And this the
“same agency of fire separates part into lead, which floats on the silver like oil on water ”’
(xxXxIV, 47). ‘‘ The metal which flows liquid at the first melting is called stannum, the second
“‘ melting is silver ; that which remains in the furnace is galena, which is added to a third part
“of the ore. This being again melted, produced lead with a deduction of two-ninths.”’
Assuming stannum to be silver-lead alloy, and galena to be molybdaena, and therefore
litharge, this becomes a fairly clear statement of cupellation (see note 23, p. 392). He further
states (XXXIII, 35): “‘ There is made in the same mines what is called spuma argenti (litharge).
“‘ There are three varieties of it ; the best, known as chrysitis ; the second best, which is called
“ argyritis; and a third kind, which is called molybditis. And generally all these colours
‘are to be found in the same tubes (see p. 480). The most approved kind is that of Attica ;
‘the next, that which comes from Spain. Chrysitis is the product from the ore itself ;
“ argyritis is made from the silver, and molybditis is the result of smelting of lead, which is
“done at Puteoli, and from this has its name. All three are made as the material when
‘smelted flows from an upper crucible into a lower one. From this last it is raised with an
“iron bar, and is then twirled round in the flames in order to make it less heavy (made in
“‘tubes). Thus, as may be easily perceived from the name, it is in reality the spuma of a
“boiling substance—of the future metal, in fact. It differs from slag in the same way that
“the scum of a liquid differs from the lees, the one being purged from the material while
‘‘ purifying itself, the other an excretion of the metal when purified.”

The works of either Theophilus (1150-1200 A.D.) or Geber (prior to the 14th century)
are the first where adequate description of the cupel itself can be found. The uncertainty of
dates renders it difficult to say which is earliest. Theophilus (Hendrie’s Trans., p. 317)
says: “ How gold is separated from copper: But if at any time you have broken co
“ or silver-gilt vessels, or any other work, you can in this manner separate the gold. Take
‘the bones of whatever animal you please, which (bones) you may have found in the street,
“and burn them, being cold, grind them finely, and mix with them a third part of beech-
“wood ashes, and make cups as we have mentioned above in the purification of silver; you
“‘ will dry these at the fire or in the sun. Then you carefully scrape the gold from the copper,
“and you will fold this scraping in lead beaten thin, and one of these cups being placed in
“ the embers before the furnace, and now become warm, you place in this fold of lead with the
“scraping, and coals being heaped upon it you will blow it. And when it has become
“melted, in the same manner as silver is accustomed to be purified, sometimes by removing
‘the embers and by adding lead, sometimes by re-cooking and warily blowing, you burn it
“until, the copper being entirely absorbed, the gold may appear pure.”

We quote Geber from the Nuremberg edition of 1545, p. 152: ‘‘ Now we describe the
‘method of this. Take sifted ashes or calx, or the powder of the burned bones of animals,
“ or all of them mixed, or some of them ; moisten with water, and press it with your hand to
“make the mixture firm and solid, and in the middle of this bed make a round solid crucible
‘and sprinkle a quantity of crushed glass. Then permit it to dry. When it is dry, place
‘into the crucible that which we have mentioned which you intend to test. On it kindle
‘a strong fire, and blow upon the surface of the body that is being tested until it melts, which,
‘when melted, piece after piece of lead is thrown upon it, and blow over it a strong flame.
“‘ When you see it agitated and moved with strong shaking motion it is not pure. Then wait
“until all of the lead is exhaled. If it vanishes and does not cease its motion it is not purified.
‘‘ Then again throw lead and blow again until the lead separates. If it does not become quiet
— throw in lead and blow on it until it is quiet and you see it bright and clear on the
“ surface.”

Cupellation is mentioned by most of the alchemists, but as a metallurgical operation
on a large scale the first description is by Biringuccio in 1540.

BOOK X. 467

of the works in which ore is smelted. In the space between the middle and
the front long walls and between the second?’ and the third transverse walls are
the bellows, the machinery for depressing and the instrument for raising them.
A drum on the axle of a water-wheel has rundles which turn the toothed
drum of an axle, whose long cams depress the levers of the bellows, and also
another toothed drum on an axle, whose cams raise the tappets of the stamps,
but in the opposite direction. So that if the cams which depress the levers
of the bellows turn from north to south, the cams of the stamps turn from
south to north.

Lead is separated from gold or silver in a cupellation furnace, of
which the structure consists of rectangular stones, of two interior walls of which
the one intersects the other transversely, of a round sole, and of a dome. Its
crucible is made from powder of earth and ash; but I will first speak of the
structure and also of the rectangular stones. A circular wall is built four
feet and three palms high, and one foot thick ; from the height of two feet
and three palms from the bottom, the upper part of the interior is cut away
to the width of one palm, so that the stone sole may rest upon it. There are
usually as many as fourteen stones; on the outside they are a foot and a
palm wide, and on the inside narrower, because the inner circle is much
smaller than the outer; if the stones are wider, fewer are required, if
narrower more ;_ they are sunk into the earth to a depth of a foot and a palm.
At the top each one is joined to the next by an iron staple, the points of
which are embedded in holes, and into each hole is poured molten lead. This
stone structure has six air-holes near the ground, at a height of a foot above
the ground; they are two feet and a palm from the bottom of the stones ;
each of these air-holes is in two stones, and is two palms high, and a palm and
three digits wide. One of them is on the right side, between the wall which
protects the main wall from the fire, and the channel through which the
litharge flows out of the furnace crucible; the other five air-holes are
distributed all round at equal distances apart ; through these escapes the
moisture which the earth exhales when heated, and if it were not for these
openings the crucible would absorb the moisture and be damaged. In such a
case a lump would be raised, like that which a mole throws up from the earth,
and the ash would float on the top, and the crucible would absorb the silver-lead
alloy ; there are some who, because of this, make the rear part of the structure
entirely open. The two inner walls, of which one intersects the other, are
built of bricks, and are a brick in thickness. There are four air-holes in
these, one in each part, which are about one digit’s breadth higher and wider
than the others. Into the four compartments is thrown a wheelbarrowful
of slag, and over this is placed a large wicker basket full of charcoal dust.
These walls extend a cubit above the ground, and on these, and on the ledge
cut in the rectangular stones, is placed the stone sole ; this sole is a palm and
three digits thick, and on all sides touches the rectangular stones ; if there
are any cracks in it they are filled up with fragments of stone or brick. The
front part of the sole is sloped so that a channel can be made, through which

*7In Agricolas’ text this is “‘ first,”—obviously an error.

468 BOOK X.

the litharge flows out. Copper plates are placed on this part of the sole-stone
so that the silver-lead or other alloy may be more rapidly heated.

A dome which has the shape of half a sphere covers the crucible. It con-
sists of iron bands and of barsand ofa lid. There are three bands, each about
a palm wide and a digit thick ; the lowest is at a distance of one foot from the
middle one, and the middle one a distance of two feet from the upper one.
Under them are eighteen iron bars fixed by iron rivets; these bars are of
the same width and thickness as the bands, and they are of such a length, that
curving, they reach from the lower band to the upper, that is two feet and
three palms long, while the dome is only one foot and three palms high. All
the bars and bands of the dome have iron plates fastened on the underside
with iron wire. In addition, the dome has four apertures; the rear one,
which is situated opposite the channel through which the litharge flows out,
is two feet wide at the bottom ; toward the top, since it slopes gently, it is
narrower, being a foot, three palms, and a digit wide; there is no bar at
this place, for the aperture extends from the upper band to the middle one,
but not to the lower one. The second aperture is situated above the

nt it}

AI NS
RR

i

my? WI

A—RECTANGULAR STONES. B—SoLE-stoNE. C—ArIR-HOLES. D—INTERNAL WALLS.
E—Dome. F—Crucisre. G—Banps. H—Bars. I—APERTURES IN THE DOME.
K-~-LID OF THE DOME. L—Rincs. M—Pipzs. N—VALvEs. O—CHAINs.

BOOK X. 469

channel, is two and a half feet wide at the bottom, and two feet and a palm
at the top; and there is likewise no bar at this point ; indeed, not only does
the bar not extend to the lower band, but the lower band itself does not
extend over this part, in order that the master can draw the litharge out
of the crucible. There are besides, in the wall which protects the principal
wall against the heat, near where the nozzles of the bellows are situated,
two apertures, three palms wide and about a foot high, in the middle
of which two rods descend, fastened on the inside with plates.
Near these apertures are placed the nozzles of the bellows, and through
the apertures extend the pipes in which the nozzles of the bellows are
set. These pipes are made of iron plates rolled up; they are two
palms three digits long, and their inside diameter is three and a half
digits ; into these two pipes the nozzles of the bellows penetrate a distance of
three digits from their valves. The lid of the dome consists of an iron band
at the bottom, two digits wide, and of three curved iron bars, which extend
from one point on the band to the point opposite ; they cross each other at
the top, where they are fixed by means of iron rivets. On the under side of
the bars there are likewise plates fastened by rivets; each of the plates has
small holes the size of a finger, so that the lute will adhere when the interior
is lined. The dome has three iron rings engaged in wide holes in the heads of
iron claves, which fasten the bars to the middle band at these points. Into
these rings are fastened the hooks of the chains with which the dome is
raised, when the master is preparing the crucible.

On the sole and the copper plates and the rock of the furnace, lute mixed
with straw is placed to a depth of three digits, and it is pounded with a wooden
rammer until it is compressed to a depth of one digit only. The rammer-head
is round and three palms high, two palms wide at the bottom, and tapering
upward ; its handle is three feet long, and where it is set into the rammer-
head it is bound around with an iron band. The top of the stonework in
which the dome rests is also covered with lute, likewise mixed with straw,
to the thickness of a palm. All this, as soon as it becomes loosened, must
be repaired.

The artificer who undertakes the work of parting the metals, distributes
the operation into two shifts of two days. On the one morning he sprinkles
a little ash into the lute, and when he has poured some water over it he brushes
it over with a broom. Then he throws in sifted ashes and dampens them
with water, so that they could be moulded into balls like snow. The ashes
are those from which lye has been made by letting water percolate
through them, for other ashes which are fatty would have to be burnt
again in order to make them less fat. When he has made the ashes
smooth by pressing them with his hands, he makes the crucible slope down
toward the middle ; then he tamps it, as I have described, with a rammer.
He afterward, with two small wooden rammers, one held in each hand,
forms the channel through which the litharge flows out. The heads of these
small rammers are each a palm wide, two digits thick, and one foot high ;
the handle of each is somewhat rounded, is a digit and a half less in

AWW
Ce
Ne

A—AN ARTIFICER TAMPING THE CRUCIBLE WITH A RAMMER. B—LARGE RAMMER.
C—Broom. D—Two sMALLER RAMMERS. E—CURVED IRON PLATES. F—PART OF
A WOODEN STRIP. G—SIEVE. H—ASHES. I—IRON SHOVEL. K—IRON PLATE.
L—BLock oF woop. M—Rock. N—BASKET MADE OF WOVEN TwIGs. O—HooKED
BAR. P—SECOND HOOKED BAR. Q—OLD LINEN RAG. R—Bucket. S—DoksKIN.
T—BUNDLES OF STRAW. V—Woop. X—CAKES OF LEAD ALLOY. Y—Fork.
Z—ANOTHER WORKMAN COVERS THE OUTSIDE OF THE FURNACE WITH LUTE WHERE THE
DOME FITS ON IT. AA—BASKET FULL OF ASHES. BB—Lip oF THE DoME. CC—THE
ASSISTANT STANDING ON THE STEPS POURS CHARCOAL INTO THE CRUCIBLE THROUGH THE
HOLE AT THE TOP OF THE DOME. DD—IRON IMPLEMENT WITH WHICH THE LUTE IS
BEATEN. EE—Lute. FF—LApDLE WITH WHICH THE WORKMAN OR MASTER TAKES A
SAMPLE. GG—RABBLE WITH WHICH THE SCUM OF IMPURE LEAD IS DRAWN OFF. HH—

5 POS SOAS epee ay I eee FE YL RE Ss Ter Ae eye Ut Page

BOOK X. 471

diameter than the rammer-head, and is three feet in length; the rammer-
head as well as the handle is made of one piece of wood. Then with shoes on,
he descends into the crucible and stamps it in every direction with his feet,
in which manner it is packed and made sloping. Then he again tamps it
with a large rammer, and removing his shoe from his right foot he draws a circle
around the crucible with it, and cuts out the circle thus drawn with an iron
plate. This plate is curved at both ends, is three palms long, as many digits
wide, and has wooden handles a palm and two digits long, and two digits
thick ; the iron plate is curved back at the top and ends, which penetrate
into handles. There are some who use in the place of the plate a strip of
wood, like the rim of a sieve ; this is three digits wide, and is cut out at both
ends that it may be held in the hands. Afterward he tamps the channel
through which the litharge discharges. Lest the ashes should fall out, he
blocks up the aperture with a stone shaped to fit it, against which he places
a board, and lest this fall, he props it with a stick. Then he pours in
a basketful of ashes and tamps them with the large rammer; then again and
again he pours in ashes and tamps them with the rammer. When the
channel has been made, he throws dry ashes all over the crucible with a sieve,
and smooths and rubs it with his hands. Then he throws three basketsful
of damp ashes on the margin all round the edge of the crucible, and lets down
the dome. Soon after, climbing upon the crucible, he builds up ashes all
around it, lest the molten alloy should flow out. Then, having raised the lid of
the dome, he throws a basketful of charcoal into the crucible, together with
an iron shovelful of glowing coals, and he also throws some of the latter
through the apertures in the sides of the dome, and he spreads them with the
same shovel. This work and labour is finished in the space of two hours.

An iron plate is set in the ground under the channel, and upon this is
placed a wooden block, three feet and a palm long, a foot and two palms and
as many digits wide at the back, and two palms and as many digits wide in
front ; on the block of wood is placed a stone, and over it an iron plate similar
to the bottom one, and upon this he puts a basketful of charcoal, and also
an iron shovelful of burning charcoals. The crucible is heated in an
hour, and then, with the hooked bar with which the litharge is drawn off, he
stirs the remainder of the charcoal about. This hook is a palm long and three
digits wide, has the form of a double triangle, and has an iron handle four
feet long, into which is set a wooden one six feet long. There are some who
use instead a simple hooked bar. After about an hour’s time, he stirs the
charcoal again with the bar, and with the shovel throws into the crucible
the burning charcoals lying in the channel; then again, after the space of an
hour, he stirs the burning charcoals with the same bar. If he did not thus
stir them about, some blackness would remain in the crucible and that part
would be damaged, because it would not be sufficiently dried. Therefore
the assistant stirs and turns the burning charcoal that it may be entirely
burnt up, and so that the crucible may be well heated, which takes three
hours ; then the crucible is left quiet for the remaining two hours.

472 BOOK X.

When the hour of eleven has struck, he sweeps up the charcoal ashes with
a broom and throws them out of the crucible. Then he climbs on to the
dome, and passing his hand in through its opening, and dipping an old linen
rag in a bucket of water mixed with ashes, he moistens the whole of the
crucible and sweeps it. In this way he uses two bucketsful of the mixture,
each holding five Roman sextarii,2® and he does this lest the crucible,
when the metals are being parted, should break open ; after this he rubs the
crucible with a doe skin, and fills in the cracks. Then he places at the left side
of the channel, two fragments of hearth-lead, laid one on the top of the other,
so that when partly melted they remain fixed and form an obstacle, that the
litharge will not be blown about by the wind from the bellows, but remain in
its place. It is expedient, however, to use a brick in the place of the hearth-
lead, for as this gets much hotter, therefore it causes the litharge to form
more rapidly. The crucible in its middle part is made two palms and as
many digits deeper.®®

There are some who having thus prepared the crucible, smear it over
with incense*®, ground to powder and dissolved in white of egg, soaking
it up in a sponge and then squeezing it out again; there are others who
smear over it a liquid consisting of white of egg and double the amount of
bullock’s blood or marrow. Some throw lime into the crucible through a
sieve.

Afterward the master of the works weighs the lead with which the gold
or silver or both are mixed, and he sometimes puts a hundred centumpondia**
into the crucible, but frequently only sixty, or fifty, or much less. After it
has been weighed, he strews about in the crucible three small bundles of
straw, lest the lead by its weight should break the surface. Then he places
in the channel several cakes of lead alloy, and through the aperture at the rear
of the dome he places some along the sides ; then, ascending to the opening at
the top of the dome, he arranges in the crucible round about the dome the
cakes which his assistant hands to him, and after ascending again and passing
his hands through the same aperture, he likewise places other cakes inside the
crucible. On the secord day those which remain he, with an iron fork,
places on the wood through the rear aperture of the dome.

When the cakes have been thus arranged through the hole at the top of
the dome, he throws in charcoal with a basket woven of wooden twigs. Then
he places the lid over the dome, and the assistant covers over the joints with
lute. The master himself throws half a basketful of charcoal into the crucible
through the aperture next to the nozzle pipe, and prepares the bellows, in
order to be able to begin the second operation on the morning of the following
day. It takes the space of one hour to carry out such a piece of work, and

28The Roman sextarius was about a pint.

29This sentence continues, [psa vero media pars praeterea digito, to which we are unable
to attribute any meaning.

3°Thus, or tus—“ incense.”

310ne centumpondium, Roman, equals about 70.6lbs. avoirdupois; one centner, old
German, equals about 114.2 lbs. avoirdupois. Therefore, if German weights are meant, the
maximum charge would be about 5.7 short tons; if Roman weights, about 3.5 short tons.

BOOK X. 473

at twelve all is prepared. These hours all reckoned up make a sum of eight
hours.

Now it is time that we should come to the second operation. In the
morning the workman takes up two shovelsful of live charcoals and throws
them into the crucible through the aperture next to the pipes of the nozzles ;
then through the same hole he lays upon them small pieces of fir-wood or of
pitch pine, such as are generally used to cook fish. After this the water-gates
are opened, in order that the machine may be turned which depresses the levers
of the bellows. In the space of one hour the lead alloy is melted ; and when this
has been done, he places four sticks of wood, twelve feet long, through the
hole in the back of the dome, and as many through the channel; these
sticks, lest they should damage the crucible, are both weighted on the ends
and supported by trestles; these trestles are made of a beam, three feet
long, two palms and as many digits wide, two palms thick, and have two
spreading legs at each end. Against the trestle, in front of the channel, there
is placed an iron plate, lest the litharge, when it is extracted from the furnace,
should splash the smelter’s shoes and injure his feet and legs. With an iron
shovel or a fork he places the remainder of the cakes through the aperture at
the back of the dome on to the sticks of wood already mentioned.

The native silver, or silver glance, or grey silver, or ruby silver, or any
other sort, when it has been flattened out®*, and cut up, and heated in an
iron crucible, is poured into the molten lead mixed with silver, in order that
impurities may be separated. As I have often said, this molten lead mixed
with silver is called stannum*,

When the long sticks of wood are burned up at the fore end, the
master, with a hammer, drives into them pointed iron bars, four feet long and
two digits wide at the front end, and beyond that one and a half digits wide

%2See description, p. 269.

83Stannum, as a term for lead-silver alloys, isa term which Agricola (De Natura Fossilium,
Pp. 341-3) adopted from his views of Pliny. In the Interpretatio and the Glossary he gives
the German equivalent as werk, which would sufficiently identify his meaning were it
not obvious from the context. There can be little doubt that Pliny uses the term for lead
alloys, but it had come into general use for tin before Agricola’s time. The Roman term was
plumbum candidum, and as a result of Agricola’s insistence on using it and stannum in what
he conceived was their original sense, he managed to give considerable confusion to mineralogic
literature for a century or two. The passages from Pliny, upon which he bases his use, are
(XXXIV, 47): “ The metal which flows liquid at the first melting in the furnace is called stannum,
“the second melting is silver,’ etc. (xxxiv, 48): ‘‘ When copper vessels are coated with
“stannum they produce a less disagreeable flavour, and it prevents verdigris. It is also
“remarkable that the weight is not increased. . . . At the present day a counterfeit
“ stannum is made by adding one-third of white copper to tin. It is also made in another way,
“by mixing by eee equal parts of tin and lead; this last is called by some argentarium.
“, . . .. There is also a composition called ¢ertiarium, a mixture of two parts of lead and
“one of tin. Its price is twenty denarit per pound, and it is used for soldering pipes. Persons
“still more dishonest mix together equal parts of éertiarium and tin, and calling the compound
“argentarium, when it is melted coat articles with it.” Although this last passage probably
indicates that stannum was a tin compound, yet it is not inconsistent with the view that the
genuine stannum was silver-lead, and that the counterfeits were made as stated by Pliny.
At what period the term stannum was adopted for tin is uncertain. As shown by Beckmann
(Hist. of Inventions 1, p. 225), it is used as early as the 6th century in occasions where tin
was undoubtedly meant. We may point out that this term appears continuously in the official
nae ges relating to Cornish tin mining, beginning with the report of William de Wrotham in
1198.

474 BOOK X.

and thick; with these he pushes the sticks of wood forward and the bars
then rest on the trestles. There are others who, when they separate metals,
put two such sticks of wood into the crucible through the aperture which is
between the bellows, as many through the holes at the back, and one through
the channel; but in this case a larger number of long sticks of wood is
necessary, that is, sixty ; in the former case, forty long sticks of wood suffice
to carry out the operation. When the lead has been heated for two hours,
it is stirred with a hooked bar, that the heat may be increased.

If it be difficult to separate the lead from the silver, he throws copper
and charcoal dust into the molten silver-lead alloy. If the alloy of argen-
tiferous gold and lead, or the silver-lead alloy, contains impurities from the
ore, then he throws in either equal portions of argol and Venetian glass or of
sal-ammoniac, or of Venetian glass and of Venetian soap; or else unequal
portions, that is, two of argol and one of iron rust; there are some who
mix a little saltpetre with each compound. To one centumpondium of the
alloy is added a bes or a libva and a third of the powder, according
to whether it is more or less impure. The powder certainly separates the
impurities from the alloy. Then, with a kind of rabble he draws out through

ui nK<—
SILI LIELILILTUN NN Oe

WEMEERE

en ES —“¢ = ox =)
A—FurRNACE. B—SticKs oF woop. C—LITHARGE. D—PLATE. E—THE FOREMAN

WHEN HUNGRY EATS BUTTER, THAT THE POISON WHICH THE CRUCIBLE EXHALES MAY NOT
HARM HIM, FOR THIS IS A SPECIAL REMEDY AGAINST THAT POISON,

BOOK xX. 475

the channel, mixed with charcoal, the scum, as one might say, of the lead;
the lead makes this scum when it becomes hot, but that less of it may be
made it must be stirred frequently with the bar.

Within the space of a quarter of an hour the crucible absorbs the lead ;
at the time when it penetrates into the crucible it leaps and bubbles. Then
the master takes out a little lead with an iron ladle, which he assays, in order
to find what proportion of silver there is in the whole of the alloy; the
ladle is five digits wide, the iron part of its handle is three feet long and the
wooden part the same. Afterward, when they are heated, he extracts with
a bar the litharge which comes from the lead and the copper, if there be any
of it in the alloy. Wherefore, it might more rightly be called spwma of lead
than of silver*4. There is no injury to the silver, when the lead and copper
are separated from it. In truth the lead becomes much purer in the crucible
of the other furnace, in which silver is refined. In ancient times, as the
author Pliny®® relates, there was under the channel of the crucible another
crucible, and the litharge flowed down from the upper one into the lower
one, out of which it was lifted up and rolled round with a stick in order that
it might be of moderate weight. For which reason, they formerly made it
into small tubes or pipes, but now, since it is not rolled round a stick, they
make it into bars.

If there be any danger that the alloy might flow out with the litharge, the
foreman keeps on hand a piece of lute, shaped like a cylinder and pointed at
both ends ; fastening this to a hooked bar he opposes it to the alloy so that
it will not flow out.

Now when the colour begins to show in the silver, bright spots appear,
some of them being almost white, and a moment afterward it becomes
absolutely white. Then the assistant lets down the water-gates, so that, the
race being closed, the water-wheel ceases to turn and the bellows are still.
Then the master pours several buckets of water on to the silver to cool it ;
others pour beer over it to make it whiter, but this is of no importance since
the silver has yet to be refined. Afterward, the cake of silver is raised with
the pointed iron bar, which is three feet long and two digits wide, and has a
wooden handle four feet long fixed in its socket. When the cake of silver has
been taken from the crucible, it is laid upon a stone, and from part of it the
hearth-lead, and from the other part the litharge, is chipped away with a
hammer ; then it is cleansed with a bundle of brass wire dipped in water.
When the lead is separated from the silver, more silver is frequently found
than when it was assayed; for instance, if before there were three unciae and
as many drachmae in a centumpondium, they now sometimes find three unciae
and a half*. Often the hearth-lead remaining in the crucible is a palm
deep ; it is taken out with the rest of the ashes and is sifted, and that which
remains in the sieve, since it is hearth-lead, is added to the hearth-lead3’.

4The Latin term for litharge is spuma argenti, spume of silver.
: **Pliny, XXXII, 35. This quotation is given in full in the footnote p. 466. Agricola
illustrates these ‘‘tubes”’ of litharge on p. 48r.

’*Assuming Roman weights, three unciae and three drachmae per centumpondium
would be about 82 ozs., and the second case would equal about 85 ozs. per short ton.

®7Agricola uses throughout De Re Metallica the term molybdaena for this substance.

—Yy
ZZ
Gs
GY
Go
4G;
Uy
Gi
OG

A—CaKkE. B—StToneE. C—HAMMER. D—BrAss WIRE. E—BUCKET CONTAINING WATER.
F—FuRNACE FROM WHICH THE CAKE HAS BEEN TAKEN, WHICH IS STILL SMOKING,
G—LABOURER CARRYING A CAKE OUT OF THE WORKS.

The ashes which pass through the sieve are of the same use as they were
at first, for, indeed, from these and pulverised bones they make the cupels.
Finally, when much of it has accumulated, the yellow pompholyx adhering to
the walls of the furnace, and likewise to those rings of the dome near the

apertures, is cleared away.
I must also describe the crane with which the dome is raised. When

it is made, there is first set up a rectangular upright post twelve feet
long, each side of which measures a foot in width. Its lower pinion turns
in a bronze socket set in an oak sill; there are two sills placed crosswise so

It is obvious from the context that he means saturated furnace bottoms—the herdpiley of the old
German metallurgists—and, in fact, he himself gives this equivalent in the Interpretatio, and
describes it in great detail in De Natura Fossilium (p. 353). The derivatives coined one time
and another from the Greek molybdos for lead, and their applications, have resulted in a
stream of wasted ink, to which we also must contribute. Agricola chose the word molybdaena
in the sense here used from his interpretation of Pliny. The statements in Pliny are a hopeless
confusion of molybdaena and galena. He says (XXXII, 35): “ There are three varieties of
ee “it (litharge)—the best-known is chrysitis; the second best is called argyritis; and
‘a third kind is called molybditis. . . . . Molybditis is the result of the smelting of
“ead. . + . Some people make two kinds of litharge, which they call sciverytis and
ewmene ; and a third variety being molybdaena, will be mentioned with lead.” (xxxiv,
53): “‘ Molybdaena, which in another place I have called galena, is an ore of mixed silver

BOOK X. 477

that the one fits in a mortise in the middle of the other, and the other likewise
fits in the mortise of the first, thus making a kind of a cross; these sills are
three feet long and one foot wide and thick. The crane-post is round at its
upper end and is cut down to a depth of three palms, and turns in a band
fastened at each end to a roof-beam, from which springs the inclined chimney
wall. To the crane-post is affixed a frame, which is made in this way : first, at a
height of a cubit from the bottom, is mortised into the crane-post a small
cross-beam, a cubit and three digits long, except its tenons, and two palms in
width and thickness. Then again, at a height of five feet aboveit, is another
small cross-beam of equal length, width, and thickness, mortised into the
crane-post. The other ends of these two small cross-beams are mortised
into an upright timber, six feet three palms long, and three-quarters wide
and thick ; the mortise is transfixed by wooden pegs. Above, at a height of
three palms from the lower small cross-beam, are two bars, one foot one palm
long, not including the tenons, a palm three digits wide, and a palm thick,
which are mortised in the other sides of the crane-post. In the same manner,
under the upper small cross-beam are two bars of the same size. Also in the
upright timber there are mortised the same number of bars, of the same length
as the preceding, but three digits thick, a palm two digits wide, the two
lower ones being above the lower small cross-beam. From the upright
timber near the upper small cross-beam, which at its other end is mortised
into the crane-post, are two mortised bars. On the outside of this frame,
boards are fixed to the small cross-beams, but the front and back parts of the
frame have doors, whose hinges are fastened to the boards which are fixed
to the bars that are mortised to the sides of the crane-post.

Then boards are laid upon the lower small cross-beam, and at a height
of two palms above these there is a small square iron axle, the sides of which
are two digits wide; both ends of it are round and turn in bronze or iron
bearings, one of these bearings being fastened in the crane-post, the other in
the upright timber. About each end of the small axle is a wooden disc, of three
' palms and a digit radius and one palm thick, covered on the rim with an iron
band ; these two discs are distant two palms and as many digits from each

“and lead. It is considered better in quality the nearer it approaches to a golden colour
“and the less lead there is in it ; it is also friable and moderately heavy. When it is boiled
‘‘ with oil it becomes liver-coloured, adheres to the gold and silver furnaces, and in this state
“it is called metallica.” From these two passages it would seem that molybdaena, a variety
of litharge, might quite well be hearth-lead. Further (in xxxrv, 47), he says: ‘‘ The metal
“which flows liquid at the first melting in the furnace is called stannum, at the second melt-
ing is silver, that which remains in the furnace is galena.” If we still maintain that molybdaena
is hearth-lead, and galena is its equivalent, then this passage becomes clear enough, the
second melting being cupellation. The difficulty with Pliny, however, arises from the
passage (XXXIII, 31), where, speaking of silver ore, he says: ‘It is impossible to melt it
except with lead ore, called galena, which is generally found next to silver veins.”
Agricola (Bermannus, p. 427, &c.), devotes a great deal of inconclusive discussion to an
attempt to reconcile this conflict of Pliny, and also that of Dioscorides. The probable
explanation of this conflict arises in the resemblance of cupellation furnace bottoms to lead
carbonates, and the native molybdaena of Dioscorides ; and some of those referred to by Pliny
may be this sort of lead ores. In fact, in one or two places in Book IX, Agricola appears
to use the term in this sense himself. After Agricola’s time the term molybdaenum was applied
to substances resemblinglead, such as graphite, and what we now know as molybdenite (Mo S2).
Some time in the latter part of the 18th century, an element being separated from the latter, it
was dubbed molybdenum, and confusion was five times confounded.

33

478 BOOK X.

other, and are joined with five rundles; these rundles are two and a half
digits thick and are placed three digits apart. Thus a drum is made, which
is a palm and a digit distant from the upright timber, but further from the
crane-post, namely, a palm and three digits. At a height of a foot and a
palm above this little axle is a second small square iron axle, the thickness of
which is three digits; this one, like the first one, turns in bronze or iron
bearings. Around it is a toothed wheel, composed of two discs a foot three
palms in diameter, a palm and two digits thick ; on the rim of this there
are twenty-three teeth, a palm wide and two digits thick; they protrude
a palm from the wheel and are three digits apart. And around this same
axle, at a distance of two palms and as many digits toward the upright
timber, is another disc of the same diameter as the wheel and a palm thick ;
this turns in a hollowed-out place in the upright timber. Between this disc
and the disc of the toothed wheel another drum is made, having likewise five
rundles. There is, in addition to this second axle, at a height of a cubit
above it, a small wooden axle, the journals of which are of iron; the ends
are bound round with iron rings so that the journals may remain firmly fixed,
and the journals, like the little iron axles, turn in bronze or iron bearings.
This third axle is at a distance of about a cubit from the upper small cross-
beam ; it has, near the upright timber, a toothed wheel two and a half feet
in diameter, on the rim of which are twenty-seven teeth ; the other part of
this axle, near the crane-post, is covered with iron plates, lest it should be worn
away by the chain which winds around it. The end link of the chain is fixed
in an iron pin driven into the little axle; this chain passes out of the frame
and turns over a little pulley set between the beams of the crane-arm.

Above the frame, at a height of a foot and a palm, is the crane-arm. This
consists of two beams fifteen feet long, three palms wide, and two thick,
mortised into the crane-post, and they protrude a cubit from the back of the
crane-post and are fastened together. Moreover, they are fastened by means
of a wooden pin which penetrates through them and the crane-post ; this
pin has at the one end a broad head, and at the other a hole, through which
is driven an iron bolt, so that the beams may be tightly bound into the crane-
post. The beams of the crane-arm are supported and stayed by means of
two oblique beams, six feet and two palms long, and likewise two palms wide
and thick ; these are mortised into the crane-post at their lower ends, and
their upper ends are mortised into the beams of the crane-arm at a point
about four feet from the crane-post, and they are fastened with iron nails.
At the back of the upper end of these oblique beams, toward the crane-post,
is an iron staple, fastened into the lower sides of the beams of the crane-arm, in
order that it may hold them fast and bind them. The outer end of each
beam of the crane-arm is set in a rectangular iron plate, and between these
are three rectangular iron plates, fixed in such a manner that the beams of the

crane-arm can neither move away from, nor toward, each other. The upper ~

sides of these crane-arm beams are covered with iron plates for a length of
six feet, so that a trolley can move on it.

BOOK X. 479

Va
(fa

ee
eecanncaurat

ed

ree

f in ; s 3
|) = —
\ y
¥ | ) —— —_ =

y \ \. Mm y

;

Nie f.
. \ Ss

eR NS

Va

N\
\

<A

Va SESE NNII NY,

aa #. SS

SS

bial MMAR SEGA AANAN AAT

= \Y ty
‘

EZ
ai

= SSS SSS SSE SS

ENNNQWY

ZZ

Li

SSS
—

“Ss N
Ss “
SS =~ MIEN IN ULL TELLLLDHT,
) ‘

SS Ni i

S

tz
Liz

SELLE
KL
=

Zz

422

Mh

ND Y

a

hb

rat

SAT OWL
N

L/
ALLL of

OSS
r. 72
Lz

Pa

(2

Arar a ts

i

ai

i) :| Sa
AN,
ps | S- |

A OL

CASZ

i nero:
Nady)
8

<2
U7
er Z

FEZ,
ey
nithy. ty 24
8,
LS
.

]
yY

Ltt:

z

See
ix

gpa zzz

ze
A

iS

gpg
PAL a:

“

QUA

YE
ary

zg SS | \ | c \
ZeEZ

A—CRANE-Post. B—Socket. C—Oaxk cross-sitts. D—Banp. E—Roor-BEAM.
F—FrAmME. G—LowER sMALL CROSS-BEAM. H—UpRIGHT TIMBER. I—BARS WHICH
COME FROM THE SIDES OF THE CRANE-POST. K-—BARS WHICH COME FROM THE SIDES OF
THE UPRIGHT TIMBER. L—RUNDLE DRUMS. M—TooTHED WHEELS. N—CHAIN.
O—PuLLEY. P—BEAMs OF THE CRANE-ARM. Q—OBLIQUE BEAMS SUPPORTING THE BEAMS
OF THE CRANE-ARM. R—RECTANGULAR IRON PLATES. S—TROLLEY. T—DOME OF THE
FURNACE. V—RING. X—THREE CHAINS. Y—CRANK. Z—THE CRANE-POST OF THE
OTHER CONTRIVANCE. AA—CRANE-ARM. BB—OBLIQUE BEAM. CC—RING OF THE
CRANE-ARM. DD—THE SECOND RING. EE—LEVER-BAR. FF—THIRD RING.
GG—Hoox. HH—Cuarn ofr THR poME. II—CHAIN OF THE LEVER-BAR

480 BOOK X.

The body of the trolley is made of wood from the Ostrya or any other
hard tree, and is a cubit long, a foot wide, and three palms thick; on both
edges of it the lower side is cut out to a height and width of a palm, so that
the remainder may move backward and forward between the two beams of
the crane-arm ; at the front, in the middle part, it is cut out to a width of
two palms and as many digits, that a bronze pulley, around a small iron
axle, may turn in it. Near the corners of the trolley are four holes, in which
as many small wheels travel on the beams of the crane-arm. Since this
trolley, when it travels backward and forward, gives out a sound somewhat
similar to the barking of a dog, we have given it this name®*. It is propelled
forward by means of a crank, and is drawn back by means of a chain. There
is an iron hook whose ring turns round an iron pin fastened to the right side
of the trolley, which hook is held by a sort of clavis, which is fixed in the
right beam of the crane-arm.

At the end of the crane-post is a bronze pulley, the iron axle of which is
fastened in the beams of the crane-arm, and over which the chain passes
as it comes from the frame, and then, penetrating through the hollow in the
top of the trolley, it reaches to the little bronze pulley of the trolley,and passing
over this it hangs down. A hook on its end engages a ring, in which are
fixed the top links of three chains, each six feet long, which pass through
the three iron rings fastened in the holes of the claves which are fixed into
the middle iron band of the dome, of which I have spoken.

Therefore when the master wishes to lift the dome by means of the
crane, the assistant fits over the lower small iron axle an iron crank, which
projects from the upright beam a palm and two digits ; the end of the little
axle is rectangular, and one and a half digits wide and one digit thick ; it is
set into a similar rectangular hole in the crank, which is two digits long and a
little more than a digit wide. The crank is semi-circular, and one foot three
palms and two digits long, as many digits wide, and one digit thick. Its
handle is straight and round, and three palms long, and one and a half digits
thick. There is a hole in the end of the little axle, through which an iron
pin is driven so that the crank may not come off. The crane having four
drums, two of which are rundle-drums and two toothed-wheels, is more easily
moved than another having two drums, one of which has rundles and the
other teeth.

Many, however, use only a simple contrivance, the pivots of whose
crane-post turn in the same manner, the one in an iron socket, the other in a
ring. There is a crane-arm on the crane-post, which is supported by an
oblique beam; to the head of the crane-arm a strong iron ring is fixed,
which engages a second iron ring. In this iron ring a strong wooden lever-bar
is fastened firmly, the head of which is bound by a third iron ring, from which
hangs an iron hook, which engages the rings at the ends of the chains from
the dome. At the other end of the lever-bar is another chain, which, when
it is pulled down, raises the opposite end of the bar and thus the dome; and
when it is relaxed the dome is lowered.

38Aericola here refers to the German word used in this connection, 1.¢., hundt, a dog.

Ctis7 culpa

— - rie
Ry

BC CUCCTECTE AC CCUCECC CUTE CL CTCL TUE CECE CC ce

A—CHAMBER OF THE FURNACE. B—ItTs BED. C—PASSAGES. D—RAMMER.

E—MALLET. F—ARTIFICER MAKING TUBES FROM LITHARGE ACCORDING TO THE ROMAN

METHOD. G—CHANNEL. H—LitHarcr. I—LoweEr CRUCIBLE OR HEARTH. K-—STICK.
L—TvuBEs.

482 BOOK X.

In certain places, as at Freiberg in Meissen, the upper part of the
cupellation furnace is vaulted almost like an oven. This chamber is four
feet high and has either two or three apertures, of which the first, in
front, is one and a half feet high and a foot wide, and out of this flows
the litharge ; the second aperture and likewise the third, if there be three,
are at the sides, and are a foot and a half high and two and a half feet wide,
in order that he who prepares the crucible may be able to creep into the
furnace. Its circular bed is made of cement, it has two passages two feet high
and one foot wide, for letting out the vapour, and these lead directly through
from one side to the other, so that the one passage crosses the other at right
angles, and thus four openings are to be seen ; these are covered at the top
by rocks, wide, but only a palm thick. On these and on the other parts
of the interior of the bed made of cement, is placed lute mixed with straw,
to a depth of three digits, as it was placed over the sole and the plates of
copper and the rocks of that other furnace. This, together with the ashes which
are thrown in, the master or the assistant, who, upon his knees, prepares
the crucible, tamps down with short wooden rammers and with mallets
likewise made of wood.

SHKAEAANHEMMRAS
— aiid

i,
ose tip

MLE Gros
LLLP

Chir Vins.

as ee goal poe | pant
oe

“4 <

SS

A—FURNACE SIMILAR TO AN OVEN. B—PASSAGE. Cae | BARS. D—HOLE THROUGH
WHICH THE LITHARGE IS DRAWN OUT. E—CRUCIBLE WHICH LACKS A DOME, F—THICK
sTICKks. G—BELLOWS

BOOK X. 483

The cupellation furnace in Poland and Hungary is likewise vaulted at the
top, and is almost similar to an oven, but in the lower part the bed is solid,
and there is no opening for the vapours, while on one side of the crucible is a
wall, between which and the bed of the crucible is a passage in place of the
opening for vapours ; this passage is covered by iron bars or rods extending
from the wall to the crucible, and placed a distance of two digits from each
other. In the crucible, when it is prepared, they first scatter straw, and then
they lay in it cakes of silver-lead alloy, and on the iron bars they lay wood,
which when kindled heats the crucible. They melt cakes to the weight of some-
times eighty centumpondia and sometimes a hundred centumpondia*®. They
stimulate a mild fire by means of a blast from the bellows, and throw on to the
bars as much wood as is required to make a flame which will reach into the
crucible, and separate the lead from the silver. The litharge is drawn out
on the other side through an aperture that is just wide enough for the master
to creep through into the crucible. The Moravians and Carni, who very
rarely make more than a bes or five-sixths of a bra of silver, separate
the lead from it, neither in a furnace resembling an oven, nor in the crucible
covered by a dome, but on a crucible which is without a cover and exposed to
the wind ; on this crucible they lay cakes of silver-lead alloy, and over them
they place dry wood, and over these again thick green wood. The wood
having been kindled, they stimulate the fire by means of a bellows.

I have explained the method of separating lead from gold or silver. Now
I will speak of the method of refining silver, for I have already explained
the process for refining gold. Silver is refined in a refining furnace,
over whose hearth is an arched chamber built of bricks; this chamber
in the front part is three feet high. The hearth itself is five feet long
and four wide. The walls are unbroken along the sides and back, but
in front one chamber is placed over the other, and above these and the
wall is the upright chimney. The hearth has a round pit, a cubit wide and two
palms deep, into which are thrown sifted ashes, and in this is placed a prepared
earthenware “test,’’ in such a manner that it is surrounded on all sides
by ashes to a height equal to its own. The earthenware test is filled
with a powder consisting of equal portions of bones ground to powder, and of
ashes taken from the crucible in which lead is separated from gold or silver ;
others mix crushed brick with the ashes, for by this method the powder
attracts no silver to itself. When the powder has been made up and
moisténed with water, a little is thrown into the earthenware test and tamped
with a wooden pestle. This pestle is round, a foot long, and a palm and a
digit wide, out of which extend six teeth, each a digit thick, and a digit and a
third long and wide, and almost a digit apart ; these six teeth form a circle,
and in the centre of them is the seventh tooth, which is round and of the
same length as the others, but a digit and a half thick; this pestle tapers a
little from the bottom up, that the upper part of the handle may be round
and three digits thick. Some use a round pestle without teeth. Then a

S°If Agricola means the German centner, this charge would be from about 4.6 to 5.7 short
tons. If he is using Roman weights, it would be from about 3 to 3.7 short tons.

484 BOOK X.

SH
SS Poros NOTE pags rm on
ers
Gy
= is
‘ ~
8
= SS :
S
c
S =“ oe
= es
= Z ZZ

4

tlw
x

oo}
|
f

A—PESTLE WITH TEETH. B—PESTLE WITHOUT TEETH. C—DISH OR TRAY FULL OF ASHES.
D—PREPARED TESTS PLACED ON BOARDS OR SHELVES. E—Empty TESTS. F—Woop.
G—Saw.

little powder is again moistened, and thrown into the test, and tamped ; this
work is repeated until the test is entirely full of the powder, which the
master then cuts out with a knife, sharp on both sides, and turned upward at
both ends so that the central part is a palm and a digit long ; therefore it is
partly straight and partly curved. The blade is one and a half digits wide,
and at each end it turns upward two palms, which ends to the depth of a
palm are either not sharpened or they are enclosed in wooden handles. The
master holds the knife with one hand and cuts out the powder from the test,
so that it is left three digits thick all round; then he sifts the powder of dried
bones over it through a sieve, the bottom of which is made of closely-woven
bristles. Afterward a ball made of very hard wood, six digits in diameter,
is placed in the test and rolled about with both hands, in order to make the
inside even and smooth ; for that matter he may move the ball about with only
one hand. The tests are of various capacities, for some of them when prepared

*0The refining of silver in ‘‘ tests”’ (Latin testa) is merely a second cupellation, with
greater care and under stronger blast. Stirring the mass with an iron rod serves to raise the
impurities which either volatilize as litharge or, floating to the edges, are absorbed into the
“test.” The capacity of the tests, from 15 librae to 50 librae, would be from about 155 to
515 ozs. Troy.

\ \\ \\ M4 = NO _ AN MK —— Ss

\*
Yes

A—STRAIGHT KNIFE HAVING WOODEN HANDLES. B—CURVED KNIFE LIKEWISE HAVING
WOODEN HANDLES. C—CURVED KNIFE WITHOUT WOODEN HANDLES. D—SIEVE.
E—Batts. F—IRON DOOR WHICH THE MASTER LETS DOWN WHEN HE REFINES SILVER, LEST
THE HEAT OF THE FIRE SHOULD INJURE HIS EYES. G—IRON IMPLEMENT ON WHICH THE
WOOD IS PLACED WHEN THE LIQUID SILVER IS TO BE REFINED. H—lITS OTHER PART
PASSING THROUGH THE RING OF ANOTHER IRON IMPLEMENT ENCLOSED IN THE WALL OF THE
FURNACE. I—TESTS IN WHICH BURNING CHARCOAL HAS BEEN THROWN.

hold much less than fifteen Hbrae of silver, others twenty, some thirty, others
forty, and others fifty. All these tests thus prepared are dried in the sun, or
set in a warm and covered place ; the more dry and old they are the better.
All of them, when used for refining silver, are heated by means of burning
charcoal placed in them. Others use instead of these tests an iron ring; but
the test is more useful, for if the powder deteriorates the silver remains in
it, while there being no bottom to the ring, it falls out ; besides, it is easier to
place in the hearth the test than the iron ring, and furthermore it requires
much less powder. In order that the test should not break and damage the
silver, some bind it round with an iron band.

In order that they may be more easily broken, the silver cakes are placed
upon an iron grate by the refiner, and are heated by burning charcoal
placed under them. He has a brass block two palms and two digits long and
wide, with a channel in the middle, which he places upon a block of hard
wood. Then with a double-headed hammer, he beats the hot cakes of silver

486 BOOK X.

placed on the brass block, and breaks them in pieces. The head of this
hammer is a foot and two digits long, and a palm wide. Others use for this
purpose merely a block of wood channelled in the top. While the fragments
of the cake are still hot, he seizes them with the tongs and throws them into
a bowl with holes in the bottom, and pours water over them. When the
fragments are cooled, he puts them nicely into the test by placing them so
that they stand upright and project from the test to a height of two palms, and
lest one should fall against the other, he places little pieces of charcoal between
them ; then he places live charcoal in the test, and soon two twig basketsful
of charcoal. Then he blows in air with the bellows. This bellows is double,
and four feet two palms long, and two feet and as many palms wide at the
back ; the other parts are similar to those described in Book VII. The
nozzle of the bellows is placed in a bronze pipe a foot long, the aperture in
this pipe being a digit in diameter in front and quite round, and at the back
two palms wide. The master, because he needs for the operation of refining

wt .

wi
‘NN:

A—GRATE. B—Brass Block. C—BLock oF woop. D—CAKEsS OF SILVER. E—HAmMMER.

F—BLOCK OF WOOD CHANNELLED IN THE MIDDLE. G—BOWL FULL OF HOLES.

H—BLOCK OF WOOD FASTENED TO AN IRON IMPLEMENT. I—FIR-woop. K-—IRON BAR.

L—IMPLEMENT WITH A HOLLOW END. THE IMPLEMENT WHICH HAS A CIRCULAR END IS

SHOWN IN THE NEXT PICTURE. M—IMPLEMENT, THE EXTREMITY OF WHICH IS BENT
UPWARDS. N—IMPLEMENT IN THE SHAPE OF TONGS.

em he

BOOK X. 487

silver a fierce fire, and requires on that account a vigorous blast, places the
bellows very much inclined, in order that, when the silver has melted, it
may blow into the centre of the test. When the silver bubbles, he presses the
nozzle down by means of a small block of wood moistened with water and
fastened to an iron rod, the outer end of which bends upward. The silver
melts when it has been heated in the test for about an hour; when it is
melted, he removes the live coals from the test and places over it two billets
of fir-wood, a foot and three palms long, a palm two digits wide, one palm
thick at the upper part, and three digits at the lower. He joins them
together at the lower edges, and into the billets he again throws the coals,
for a fierce fire is always necessary in refining silver. It is refined in two or
three hours, according to whether it was pure or impure, and if it is impure it
is made purer by dropping granulated copper or lead into the test at the
same time. In order that the refiner may sustain the great heat from the fire
while the silver is being refined, he lets down an iron door, which is three feet
long and a foot and three palms high ; this door is held on both ends in iron
plates, and when the operation is concluded, he raises it again with an iron
shovel, so that its edge holds against the iron hook in the arch, and thus the
door is held open. When the silver is nearly refined, which may be judged
by the space of time, he dips into it an iron bar, three and a half feet
long and a digit thick, having a round steel point. The small drops of silver
that adhere to the bar he places on the brass block and flattens with
a hammer, and from their colour he decides whether the silver is sufficiently
refined or not. If it is thoroughly purified it is very white, and in a bes there
is only a drachma of impurities. Some ladle up the silver with a hollow iron
implement. Of each bes of silver one sicilicus is consumed, or occasionally
when very impure, three drachmae or half an uncia*!.

The refiner governs the fire and stirs the molten silver with an iron
implement, nine feet long, a digit thick, and at the end first curved toward
the right, then curved back in order to form a circle, the interior of which is a
palm in diameter ; others use an iron implement, the end of which is bent
directly upward. Another iron implement has the shape of tongs, with
which, by compressing it with his hands, he seizes the coals and puts them on
or takes them off; this is two feet long, one and a half digits wide, and the
third of a digit thick.

When the silver is seen to be thoroughly refined, the artificer removes
the coals from the test with a shovel. Soon afterward he draws water in
a copper ladle, which has a wooden handle four feet long; it has a small
hole at a point half-way between the middle of the bowl and the edge, through
which a hemp seed just passes. He fills this ladle three times with water,
and three times it all flows out through the hole on to the silver, and slowly
quenches it ; if he suddenly poured much water on it, it would burst asunder
and injure those standing near. The artificer has a pointed iron bar, three

“‘A drachma of impurities in a bes, would be one part in 64, or 984.4 fine. A loss of a
sicilicus of silver to the bes, would be one part in 32, or about 3.1%; three drachmae would
equal 4.7%, and half an uncia 6.2%, or would indicate that the original bullion had a fineness
in the various cases of about 950, 933, and giz.

DENA

SSSA
= §= he

oss

YF EL

Wi

I)

UY)

Lf

SS
i
4
t=

G

=

—
———

A—IMPLEMENT WITH ARING. B—LApLE. C—ITs HOLE. D—PoINTED BAR. E—Forks.

F—CAKE OF SILVER LAID UPON THE IMPLEMENT SHAPED LIKE TONGS. G—TUB OF WATER.

H—BLock OF WOOD, WITH A CAKE LAID UPON IT. I—HAMMER. K—SILVER AGAIN

PLACED UPON THE IMPLEMENT RESEMBLING TONGS. L—ANOTHER TUB FULL OF WATER.

M—Brass WIRES. N—Tripop, O—ANOTHER BLOCK. P—CuISEL. Q—CRUCIBLE OF
THE FURNACE. R—TEST STILL SMOKING.

feet long, which has a wooden handle as many feet long, and he puts the end of
this bar into the test in order to stir it. He also stirs it with a hooked iron
bar, of which the hook is two digits wide and a palm deep, and the iron part
of its handle is three feet long and the wooden part the same. Then he
removes the test from the hearth with a shovel or a fork, and turns it over,
and by this means the silver falls to the ground in the shape of half a sphere ;
then lifting the cake with a shovel he throws it into a tub of water, where
it gives out a great sound. Or else, having lifted the cake of silver with a
fork, he lays it upon the iron implement similar to tongs, which are placed
across a tub full of water; afterward, when cooled, he takes it from the
tub again and lays it on the block made of hard wood and beats it with a
hammer, in order to break off any of the powder from the test which
adheres to it. The cake is then placed on the implement similar to
tongs, laid over the tub full of water, and cleaned with a bundle of brass wire

BOOK X. 489

dipped into the water; this operation of beating and cleansing is repeated
until it is all clean. Afterward he places it on an iron grate or tripod; the
tripod is a palm and two digits high, one and a half digits wide, and its span
is two palms wide ; then he puts burning charcoal under the tripod or grate,
in order again to dry the silver that was moistened by the water. Finally,
the Royal Inspector* in the employment of the King or Prince, or the owner,
lays the silver on a block of wood, and with an engraver’s chisel he cuts out two

A—MUFFLE. B—ITS LITTLE WINDOWS. C—ITS LITTLE BRIDGE. D—Bricxs. E—Iron

poor. F—ITs LITTLE winpow. G—BELLOows. H—HAMMER-CHISEL. I—IRON RING

WHICH SOME USE INSTEAD OF THE TEST. K—PESTLE WITH WHICH THE ASHES PLACED IN
THE RING ARE POUNDED.

small pieces, one from the under and the other from the upper side. These
are tested by fire, in order to ascertain whether the silver is thoroughly refined
or not, and at what price it should be sold to the merchants. Finally he
impresses upon it the seal of the King or the Prince or the owner, and, near
the same, the amount of the weight.

There are some who refine silver in tests placed under iron or earthen-
ware muffles. They use a furnace, on the hearth of which they place the test
containing the fragments of silver, and they place the muffle over it; the

*“Praefectus Regis.

490 BOOK X.

muffle has small windows at the sides, and in front a little bridge. In order
to melt the silver, at the sides of the muffle are laid bricks, upon which the
charcoal is placed, and burning firebrands are put on the bridge. The
furnace has an iron door, which is covered on the side next to the fire with lute
in order that it may not be injured. When the door is closed it retains the
heat of the fire, but it has a small window,so that the artificers may look
into the test and may at times stimulate the fire with the bellows. Although
by this method silver is refined more slowly than by the other, nevertheless it is
more useful, because less loss is caused, for a gentle fire consumes fewer particles
than a fierce fire continually excited by the blast of the bellows. If, on
account of its great size, the cake of silver can be carried only with difficulty
when it is taken out of the muffle, they cut it up into two or three
pieces while it is still hot, with a wedge or a hammer-chisel ; for if they cut
it up after it has cooled, little pieces of it frequently fly off and are lost.

END OF BOOK xX.

BOOK XI.

tte) LFFERENT methods of parting gold from silver,
and, on the other hand, silver from gold, were dis-
cussed in the last book; also the separation of copper
from the latter, and further, of lead from gold as
well as from silver; and, lastly, the methods for
refining the two precious metals. Now I will speak
of the methods by which silver must be separated
from copper, and likewise from iron.?

The officina, or the building necessary for the
purposes and use of those who separate silver from copper, is constructed
in this manner. First, four long walls are built, of which the first, which
is parallel with the bank of a stream, and the second, are both two hundred and
sixty-four feet long. The second, however, stops at one hundred and fifty-one
feet, and after, as it were, a break for a length of twenty-four feet, it continues
again until it is of a length equal to the first wall. The third wall is one
hundred and twenty feet long, starting at a point opposite the sixty-seventh
foot of the other walls, and reaching to their one hundred and eighty-sixth foot.

1The whole of this Book is devoted to the subject of the separation of silver from
copper by liquation, except pages 530-9 on copper refining, and page 544 on the separation
of silver fromiron. We believe a brief outline of the liquation process here will refresh the mind
of the reader, and enable him to peruse the Book with more satisfaction. The fundamental
principle of the process is that if a copper-lead alloy, containing a large excess of lead, be
heated in a reducing atmosphere, above the melting point of lead but below that of copper,
the lead will liquate out and carry with it a large proportion of the silver. As the results are
imperfect, the process cannot be carried through in one operation, and a large amount of
bye-products is created which must be worked up subsequently. The process, as here
described, falls into six stages. 1st, Melting the copper and lead in a blast furnace to form
“ liquation cakes ””—that is, the “leading.” If the copper contain too little silver to warrant
liquation directly, then the copper is previously enriched by melting and drawing off from
a settling pot the less argentiferous ‘‘ tops” from the metal, liquation cakes being made
from the enriched ‘“‘ bottoms.” znd, Liquation of the argentiferous lead from the copper.
This work was carried out in a special furnace, to which the admission of air was prevented as
much as possible in order to prevent oxidation. 3rd, “‘ Drying” the residual copper, which
retained some lead, in a furnace with a free admission of air. The temperature was raised
to a higher degree than in the liquation furnace, and the expelled lead was oxidized. 4th,
Cupellation of the argentiferous lead. 5th, Refining of the residual copper from the
“drying” furnace by oxidation of impurities and poling in a “refining furnace.” 6th,
Re-alloy and re-liquation of the bye-products. These consist of: a, “slags” from
“leading”; 6, “slags”? from “‘ drying”; c, “slags” from refining of the copper. All of
these “slags”? were mainly lead oxides, containing some cuprous oxides and silica from
the furnace linings ; d, “‘ thorns ” from liquation ; e, ‘‘ thorns’ from “ drying ”’ ; f, “thorns ”
from skimmings during cupellation; these were again largely lead oxides, but contained
rather more copper and less silica than the “slags”; g, ‘‘ash-coloured copper,” being
scales from the “dried” copper, were cuprous oxides, containing considerable lead
oxides; f, concentrates from furnace accretions, crushed bricks, &c.

The discussion of detailed features of the process has been reserved to notes attached
to the actual text, to which the reader is referred. As to the general result of liquation,
Karsten (see below) estimates the losses in the liquation of the equivalent of 100 lbs. of argenti-
ferous copper to amount to 32-35 lbs. of lead and 5 to 6lbs. of copper. Percy (see below)
quotes results at Lautenthal in the Upper Harz for the years 1857-60, showing losses of 25% of
the silver, 9.1% of the copper, and 36.37 lbs. of lead to the 100 lbs. of copper, or say, 16%
of the lead; and a cost of ret 6s. per ton of copper. The theoretical considerations involved in
liquation have not been satisfactorily determined. Those who may wish to pursue the subject
will find repeated descriptions and much discussion in the following works, which have been
freely consulted in the notes which follow upon particular features of the process. It may be
mentioned that Agricola’s treatment of the subject is more able than any down to the 18th
century. Ercker (Beschreibung Allerfiirnemsten Mineralischen, etc., Prague, 1574).
Lohneys (Bericht vom Bergwercken, etc., Zellerfeldt, 1617). Schliiter (Griindlicher Unterricht

492 BOOK XI.

The fourth wall is one hundred and fifty-one feet long. The height of each of
these walls, and likewise of the other two and of the transverse walls, of
which I will speak later on, is ten feet, and the thickness two feet and as
many palms. The second long wall only is built fifteen feet high, because
of the furnaces which must be built against it. The first long wall is distant
fifteen feet from the second, and the third is distant the same number of feet
from the fourth, but the second is distant thirty-nine feet from the third.
Then transverse walls are built, the first of which leads from the beginning
of the first long wall to the beginning of the second long wall ; and the second
transverse wall from the beginning of the second long wall to the beginning of
the fourth long wall, for the third long wall does not reach so far. Then from
the beginning of the third long wall are built two walls—the one to the
sixty-seventh foot of the second long wall, the other to the same point in
the fourth long wall. The fifth transverse wall is built at a distance of ten
feet from the fourth transverse wall toward the second transverse wall ;

von Hiitte-Werken, Braunschweig, 1738). Karsten (System der Metallurgie V. and Archiv fiir
Bergbau und Hiittenwesen, ist series, 1825). Berthier (Annales des Mines, 1825, II.). Percy
(Metallurgy of Silver and Gold, London, 1880).

NOMENCLATURE.—This process held a very prominent position in German metallurgy
for over four centuries, and came to have a well-defined nomenclature of its own, which has
never found complete equivalents in English, our metallurgical writers to the present
day adopting more or less of the German terms. Agricola apparently found no little difficulty
in adapting Latin words to his purpose, but stubbornly adhered to his practice of using no
German at the expense of long explanatory clauses. The following table, prepared for con-
venience in translation, is reproduced. The German terms are spelled after the manner
used in most English metallurgies, some of them appear in Agricola’s Glossary to De Re
Metallica.

English. Latin. German.
Blast furnace Prima fornax Schmeltzofen
Liquation furnace Fornax in qua argentum et plumbum ab Saigernofen
aere secernuntur
Drying furnace Fornax in qua aeret panes fathiscentes Darrofen
torrentur
Refining hearth Fornax in qua panes aerei torrefacti Gaarherd
coquuntur
Cupellation furnace Secunda fornax, or fornax in qua plum- Tretbherd
bum ab argento separatur
Leading Mistura Frischen
Liquating Stillare, or distillare Saigern
“ Drying ”’ Torrere Darren
Refining Aes ex panibus torrefactis conficere Gaarmachen
Liquation cakes Panes ex aere ac plumbo misti Saigerstock
Exhausted liquation Panes fathiscentes Kiehnstock, or
cakes Kinstocke
“Dried’”’ cakes Panes torrefacts Darrlinge
Slags :
from leading Recrementa (with explanatory phrases) Frischschlacke
» drying os Mi ns Darrost
» refining kes be ¥ Gaarschlacke
Liquation thorns Spinae (with explanatory phrases) Saigerdérner, or
Réstdorner
Thorns from “ drying’ rs it Darrsohle
» » cupellation Re A Abstrich

Silver-lead or liquated
silver-lead

Ash-coloured copper

Furnace accretions or
“accretions ”

”
Stannum
Aes cinereum

Cadmiae

Saigerwerk or saiger-
blet
Pickschiefer or schifer

Offenbriiche

Se 5

BOOK XI. 493

EN Oe in Sg

<2 8

Lie

“E

SIX LONG WALLS: A—THE First. B—THE FIRST PART OF THE SECOND. C—THE

FURTHER PART OF THE SECOND. D—THE THIRD. E—THE FOURTH. F—THE FIFTH.

G—THE SIXTH. FOURTEEN TRANSVERSE WALLS: H—THE First. I—THE_ SECOND.

K—TueE THIRD. L—TuHeE FourTH. M—TueEFrirtH. N—TuHESIxXTH. O—THE SEVENTH.

P—THE EIGHTH. Q—THE NINTH. R—THE TENTH. S—THE ELEVENTH. T—THE
TWELFTH. V—THE THIRTEENTH. X—THE FOURTEENTH.

34

494 : BOOK XI.

it is twenty feet long, and starts from the fourth long wall. The sixth
transverse wall is built also from the fourth long wall, at a point distant
thirty feet from the fourth transverse wall, and it extends as far as the back
of the third long wall. The seventh transverse wall is constructed from
the second long wall, where this first leaves off, to the third long wall; and
from the back of the third long wall the eighth transverse wall is built,
extending to the end of the fourth long wall. Then the fifth long wall is built
from the seventh transverse wall, starting at a point nineteen feet from the
second long wall; it is one hundred and nine feet in length; and at a point
twenty-four feet along it, the ninth transverse wall is carried to the third end
of the second long wall, where that begins again. The tenth transverse wall is
built from the end of the fifth long wall, and leads to the further end of the
second long wall; and from there the eleventh transverse wall leads to the
further end of the first long wall. Behind the fifth long wall, and five feet
toward the third long wall, the sixth long wall is built, leading from the
seventh transverse wall; its length is thirty-five feet, and from its further
end the twelfth transverse wall is built to the third long wall, and from it the
thirteenth transverse wall is built to the fifth long wall. The fourteenth
transverse wall divides into equal parts the space which lies between the
seventh transverse wall and the twelfth.

The length, height, breadth, and position of the walls are as above.
Their archways, doors, and openings are made at the same time that the walls
are built. The size of these and the way they are made will be much better
understood hereafter. I will now speak of the furnace hoods and of the roofs.
The first side? of the hood stands on the second long wall, and is similar in
every respect to those whose structure I explained in Book IX, when I
described the works in whose furnaces are smelted the ores of gold, silver,
and copper. From this side of the hood a roof, which consists of burnt tiles,
extends to the first long wall; and this part of the building contains the
bellows, the machinery for compressing them, and the instruments for
inflating them. In the middle space, which is situated between the second
and third transverse walls, an upright post eight feet high and two feet thick

HistoricAL NoTE.—So far as we are aware, this is the first complete discussion
of this process, although it is briefly mentioned by one writer before Agricola—that is, by
Biringuccio (11, 5, 8), who wrote ten years before this work was sent to the printer. His
account is very incomplete, for he describes only the bare liquation, and states that the copper
is re-melted with lead and re-liquated until the silver is sufficiently abstracted. He neither
mentions ‘“ drying” nor any of the bye-products. In his directions the silver-lead alloy was
cupelled and the copper ultimately refined, obviously by oxidation and poling, although he
omits the pole. In A.p. 1150 Theophilus (p. 305, Hendrie’s Trans.) describes melting lead
out of copper ore, which would be a form of liquation so far as separation of these two metals
is concerned, but obviously not a process for separating silver from copper. This passage is
quoted in the note on copper smelting (Note on p. 405). A process of such well-developed and
complicated a character must have come from a period long before Agricola ; but further than
such a surmise, there appears little to be recorded. Liquation has been during the last fifty
years displaced by other methods, because it was not only tedious and expensive, but the
losses of metal were considerable.

2Paries,—“ Partition” or “wall.” The author uses this term throughout in
distinction to murus, usually applying the latter to the walls of the building and the former to
furnace walls, chimney walls, etc. In order to gain clarity, we have introduced the term
“hood” in distinction to ‘‘ chimney,” and so far as possible refer to the paries of these con-
structions and furnaces as “ side of the furnace,” ‘side of the hood,” etc.

ioe ae A

BOOK XI. 495

and wide, is erected on a rock foundation, and is distant thirteen feet from
the second long wall. On that upright post, and in the second transverse
wall, which has at that point a square hole two feet high and wide, is placed
a beam thirty-four feet and a palm long. Another beam, of the same length,
width, and thickness, is fixed on the same upright post and in the third
transverse wall. The heads of those two beams, where they meet, are joined
together with iron staples. In a similar manner another post is erected, at a
distance of ten feet from the first upright post in the direction of the fourth
wall, and two beams are laid upon it and into the same walls in a similar
way to those I have just now described. On these two beams and on the
fourth long wall are fixed seventeen cross-beams, forty-three feet and three
palms long, a foot wide, and three palms thick ; the first of these is laid upon
the second transverse wall, the last lies along the third and fourth transverse
walls ; the rest are set in the space between them. These cross-beams are
three feet apart one from the other.

In the ends of these cross-beams, facing the second long wall, are mortised
the ends of the same number of rafters reaching to those timbers which
stand upright on the second long wall, and in this manner is made the inclined
side of the hood in a similar way to the one described in Book IX. To prevent
this from falling toward the vertical wall of the hood, there are iron rods
securing it, but only a few, because the four brick chimneys which have
to be built in that space partly support it. Twelve feet back are likewise
mortised into the cross-beams, which lie upon the two longitudinal beams
and the fourth long wall, the lower ends of as many rafters, whose upper ends
are mortised into the upper ends of an equal number of similar rafters, whose
lower ends are mortised to the ends of the beams at the fourth long wall.
From the first set of rafters* to the second set of rafters is a distance of twelve
feet, in order that a gutter may be well placed in the middle space. Between
these two are again erected two sets of rafters, the lower ends of which are like-
wise mortised into the beams, which lie on the two longitudinal beams and the
fourth long wall, and are interdistant a cubit. The upper ends of the ones
fifteen feet long rest on the backs of the rafters of the first set ; the ends of the
others, which are eighteen feet long, rest on the backs of the rafters of the
second set, which are longer ; in this manner, in the middle of the rafters, is
a sub-structure. Upon each alternate cross-beam which is placed upon the
two longitudinal beams and the fourth long wall is erected an upright post,
and that it may be sufficiently firm it is strengthened by means of a slanting
timber. Upon these posts is laid a long beam, upon which rests one set of
middle rafters. In a similar manner the other set of middle rafters rests on a
long beam which is placed upon other posts. Besides this, two feet above
every cross-beam, which is placed on the two longitudinal beams and the

“From this point on, the construction of the roofs, in the absence of illustration, is
hopeless of intelligent translation. The constant repetition of ‘‘tignum,” “‘ tigilum,”
“ trabs,” for at least fifteen different construction members becomes most hopelessly involved,
especially as the author attempts to distinguish between them in a sort of ‘‘ House-that-Jack-
built ” arrangement of explanatory clauses,

496 BOOK XI.

fourth long wall, is placed a tie-beam which reaches from the first set of
middle rafters to the second set of middle rafters; upon the tie-beams is
placed a gutter hollowed out from a tree. Then from the back of each of
the first set of middle rafters a beam six feet long reaches almost to the gutter ;
to the lower end of this beam is attached a piece of wood two feet long ;
this is repeated with each rafter of the first set of middle rafters. Similarly
from the back of each rafter of the second set of middle rafters a little beam,
seven feet long, reaches almost to the gutter; to the lower end of it
is likewise attached a short piece of wood; this is repeated on each rafter
of the second set of middle rafters. Then in the upper part, to the first and
second sets of principal rafters are fastened long boards, upon which are
fixed the burnt tiles ; and in the same manner, in the middle part, they are
fastened to the first and second sets of middle rafters, and at the lower part to
the little beams which reach from each rafter of the first and second set of
middle rafters almost to the gutter; and, finally, to the little boards fastened
to the short pieces of wood are fixed shingles of pinewood extending into the
gutter, so that the violent rain or melted snow may not penetrate into the
building. The substructures in the interior which support the second set of
rafters, and those on the opposite side which support the third, being not
unusual, I need not explain.

In that part of the building against the second long wall are the
furnaces, in which exhausted liquation cakes which have already been
“dried” are smelted, that they may recover once again the appearance
and colour of copper, inasmuch as they really are copper. The remainder
of the room is occupied by the passage which leads from the door to the
furnaces, together with two other furnaces, in one of which the whole cakes
of copper are heated, and in the other the exhausted liquation cakes are
' “ dried” by the heat of the fire.

Likewise, in the room between the third and seventh® transverse walls,
two posts are erected on rock foundation ; both of them are eight feet high
and two feet wide and thick. The one is at a distance of thirteen feet from
the second long wall ; the other at the same distance from the third long wall ;
there is a distance of thirteen feet between them. Upon these two posts and
upon the third transverse wall are laid two longitudinal beams, forty-one feet
and one palm long, and two feet wide and thick. Two other beams of the
same length, width, and thickness are laid upon the upright posts and upon
the seventh transverse wall, and the heads of the two long beams, where they
meet, are joined with iron staples. On these longitudinal beams are again
placed twenty-one transverse beams, thirteen feet long, a foot wide, and three
palms thick, of which the first is set on the third transverse wall, and the last
on the seventh transverse wall; the rest are laid in the space between these
two, and they are distant from one another three feet. Into the ends of
the transverse beams which face the second long wall, are mortised the
ends of the same number of rafters erected toward the upright posts
which are placed upon the second long wall, and in this manner is made

5In the original text this is given as the “ fifth,” a manifest impossibility.

SS ee eS

BOOK XI. 497

the second inclined side wall of the hood. Into the ends of the transverse
beams facing the third long wall, are mortised the ends of the same
number of rafters rising toward the rafters of the first inclined side of
the second hood, and in this manner is made the other inclined side of
the second hood. But to prevent this from falling in upon the opposite
inclined side of the hood, and that again upon the opposite vertical one,
there are many iron rods reaching from some of the rafters to those
opposite them ; and this is also prevented in part by means of a few tie-beams,
extending from the back of the rafters to the back of those which are behind
them. These tie-beams are two palms thick and wide, and have holes made
through them at each end; each of the rafters is bound round with iron
bands three digits wide and half a digit thick, which hold together the ends
of the tie-beams of which I have spoken ; and so that the joints may be firm,
an iron nail, passing through the plate on both sides, is driven through the
holes in the ends of the beams. Since one weight counter-balances another, the
rafters on the opposite hoods cannot fall. The tie-beams and middle posts
which have to support the gutters and the roof, are made in every particular
as I stated above, except only that the second set of middle rafters are not
longer than the first set of middle rafters, and that the little beams which
reach from the back of each rafter of the second set of middle rafters nearly
to the gutter are not longer than the little beams which reach from the back
of each rafter of the first set of middle rafters almost to the gutter. In this
part of the building, against the second long wall, are the furnaces in which
copper is alloyed with lead, and in which “slags’’ are re-smelted. Against
the third long wall are the furnaces in which silver and lead are liquated from
copper. The interior is also occupied by two cranes, of which one deposits
on the ground the cakes of copper lifted out of the moulding pans; the other
lifts them from the ground into the second furnace.

On the third and the fourth long walls are set twenty-one beams eighteen
feet and three palms long. In mortises in them, two feet behind the third long
wall, are set the ends of the same number of rafters erected opposite to the
rafters of the other inclined wall of the second furnace hood, and in this
manner is made the third inclined wall, exactly similar to the others. The
ends of as many rafters are mortised into these beams where they are fixed in
the fourth long wall ; these rafters are erected obliquely, and rest against the
backs of the preceding ones and support the roof, which consists entirely of
burnt tiles and has the usual substructures. In this part of the building
there are two rooms, in the first of which the cakes of copper, and in the other
the cakes of lead, are stored.

In the space enclosed between the ninth and tenth transverse walls and
the second and fifth long walls, a post twelve feet high and two feet wide and
thick is erected on a rock foundation ; it is distant thirteen feet from the
second long wall, and six from the fifth long wall. Upon this post and upon
the ninth transverse wall is laid a beam thirty-three feet and three palms
long, and two palms wide and thick. Another beam, also of the same length,
width and thickness, is laid upon the same post and upon the tenth transverse

408 BOOK XI.

wall, and the ends of these two beams where they meet are joined by means
of iron staples. On these beams and on the fifth long wall are placed ten
cross-beams, eight feet and three palms long, the first of which is placed on
the ninth transverse wall, the last on the tenth, the remainder in the space
between them; they are distant from one another three feet. Into the
ends of the cross-beams facing the second long wall, are mortised the ends of
the same number of rafters inclined toward the posts which stand vertically
upon the second long wall. This, again, is the manner in which the inclined
side of the furnace hood is made, just as with the others; at the top
where the fumes are emitted it is two feet distant from the vertical side.
The ends of the same number of rafters are mortised into the cross-beams,
where they are set in the fifth long wall; each of them is set up obliquely and
rests against the back of one of the preceding set; they support the roof,
made of burnt tiles. In this part of the building, against the second long
wall, are four furnaces in which lead is separated from silver, together with
the cranes by means of which the domes are lifted from the crucibles.

In that part of the building which lies between the first long wall and
the break in the second long wall, is the stamp with which the copper cakes
are crushed, and the four stamps with which the accretions that are chipped
off the walls of the furnace are broken up and crushed to powder, and likewise
the bricks on which the exhausted liquation cakes of copper are stood to
be ‘‘ dried.’”’ This room has the usual roof, as also has the space between
the seventh transverse wall and the twelfth and thirteenth transverse walls.

At the sides of these rooms are the fifth, the sixth, and the third long
walls. This part of the building is divided into two parts, in the first of
which stand the little furnaces in which the artificer assays metals; and the
bone ash, together with the other powders, are kept here. In the other room
is prepared the powder from which the hearths and the crucibles of the fur-
naces are made. Outside the building, at the back of the fourth long wall,
near the door to the left as you enter, is a hearth in which smaller
masses of lead are melted from large ones, that they may be the more easily
weighed ; because the masses of lead, just as much as the cakes of copper,
ought to be first prepared so that they can be weighed, and a definite weight
can be melted and alloyed in the furnaces. To begin with, the hearth in
which the masses of lead are liquefied is six feet long and five wide; it is
protected on both sides by rocks partly sunk into the earth, but a palm higher
than the hearth, and it is lined in the inside with lute. It slopes toward the
middle and toward the front, in order that the molten lead may run down
and flow out into the dipping-pot. There is a wall at the back of the hearth
which protects the fourth long wall from damage by the heat; this wall,
which is made of bricks and lute, is four feet high, three palms thick, and five
feet long at the bottom, and at the top three feet and two palms long ;_ there-
fore it narrows gradually, and in the upper part are laid seven bricks, the
middle ones of which are set upright, and the end ones inclined ; they are all
thickly coated with lute. In front of the hearth is a dipping-pot, whose pit is
a foot deep, and a foot and three palms wide at the top, and gradually narrows.

3 i ee

BOOK XI. 499

———— > y “
. —<—<_ ———— oni he
Mee. x A
=> r S SS
SS DSS SS z
Raver S
s S
—— ee H
— a a
—_ =< ~~ —_ o>- .__ oe —
” = —
—— y —_— __
= Sj 4 —————
SS j an ee ee
——— JAS F ‘
— D> Z aw
= p.
= o
= ret a> fe
= o 7
: % oo Ze ea
2 bh : ZA
o ae] o~
$ i
bed = os : jp % eis
a \ s
SD) My
& D i
a
- parece»
x \ =~ 34 Q
Ys Q
ss coe
iS &
WS [zs S \
~y
AS se 5
NS, = f. “y 2 4
mR th 3 5 ‘"y
he H 3 6 i
80 q 4 Z “ \ wy
caw E ' a OOO me
Ax, ry, so K f we he,
Exe mi fe
reat a “ == Y = 7 %
E = Eg Z a NU Wh,
FZ 3 ¢ @& Oe
— 6 .\ ed,
, = ~ ‘)
E eae F a— Gay 4 SS

A—HEARTH. B—ROCKS SUNK INTO THE GROUND. C—WALLS WHICH PROTECT THE
FOURTH LONG WALL FROM DAMAGE BY FIRE. D—DrIppING-poT. IEE—MASSES OF LEAD.
K—Woop. L—MovuLps,

F—TRoLLtEyY. G—ITs wHEets. H—Crane. I—Towncs.
M—Lap1ie. N—Picx. O—CAKEs.

Zp

nf

500 BOOK XI.

When the masses of lead are to be melted, the workman first places the wood
in the hearth so that one end of each billet faces the wall, and the other end
the dipping-pot. Then, assisted by other workmen, he pushes the mass
of lead forward with crowbars on to a low trolley, and draws it to the
crane. The trolley consists of planks fastened together, is two and one-half
feet wide and five feet long, and has two small iron axles, around which at
each end revolve small iron wheels, two palms in diameter and as many digits
wide. The trolley has a tongue, and attached to this is a rope, by which it is
drawn to the crane. The crane is exactly similar to those in the second part
of the works, except that the crane-arm is not so long. The tongs in whose
jaws® the masses of lead are seized, are two feet a palm and two digits long ;
both of the jaws, when struck with a hammer, impinge upon the mass and are
driven into it. The upper part of both handles of the tongs are curved back,
the one to the right, the other to the left, and each handle is engaged in one
of the lowest links of two short chains, which are three links long. The upper
links are engaged in a large round ring, in which is fixed the hook of a chain
let down from the pulley of the crane-arm. When the crank of the crane
is turned, the mass is lifted and is carried by the crane-arm to the hearth and
placed on the wood. The workmen wheel up one mass after another and
place them in a similar manner on the wood of the hearth; masses which
weigh a total of about a hundred and sixty centumpondia’ are usually placed
upon the wood and melted at one time. Then a workman throws charcoal
on the masses, and all are made ready in the evening. If he fears that it may
rain, he covers it up with a cover, which may be moved here and there; at the
back this cover has two legs, so that the rain which it collects may flow down
the slope on to the open ground. Early in the morning of the following day,
he throws live coals on the charcoal with a shovel, and by this method the
masses of lead melt, and from time to time charcoal is added. The lead, as
soon as it begins to run into the dipping-pot, is ladled out with an iron ladle
into copper moulds such as the refiners generally use. If it does not cool
immediately he pours water over it, and then sticks the pointed pick into
it and pulls it out. The pointed end of the pick is three palms long and
the round end is two digits long. It is necessary to smear the moulds with a
wash of lute, in order that, when they have been turned upside down and
struck with the broad round end of the pick, the cakes of lead may fall out
easily. If the moulds are not washed over with the lute, there is a risk that
they may be melted by the lead and let it through. Others take hold of a
billet of wood with their left hand, and with the heavy lower end of it they
pound the mould, and with the right hand they stick the point of the pick
into the cake of lead, and thus pull it out. Then immediately the workman
pours other lead into the empty moulds, and this he does until the work of
melting the lead is finished. When the lead is melted, something similar to
litharge is produced ; but it is no wonder that it should be possible to make

®Chelae,—‘“‘ claws.”
7If Roman weights, this would be 5.6 short tons, and 7.5 tons if German ceniner is
meant.

a eal

BOOK XI. 501

it in this case, when it used formerly to be produced at Puteoli from lead
alone when melted by a fierce fire in the cupellation furnace.®

Afterward
these cakes of lead are carried into the lead store-room.

The cakes of copper, put into wheelbarrows, are carried into the third
part of the building, where each is laid upon a saddle, and is broken up by
the impact of successive blows from the iron-shod stamp. This machine
is made by placing upon the ground a block of oak, five feet long and three feet

Yl fly fli,
Cf ofa

co ° o o .
| owe | | ce) : 4
| 3
eS AVI
‘A \ i
= a i
= ==
ee = |
as i |
= i
x REN y
oy YS ~~ \ AS
x
SL if Rx a \
Mat Q a eis wa “de
~ Ss SS Qs =
os
Re WK NS,

~
A—BLOocK OF WOOD.

B—UPRIGHT POSTS. C—TRANSVERSE BEAMS. D—HEAD OF THE
STAMP.

E—ItTs TootH. F—THE HOLE IN THE STAMP-STEM. G—IRON BAR. H—MAssEs
OF LEAD. I—THE BRONZE SADDLE. K—AX LE. L—ITs ARMs.

M—LITTLE IRON AXLE.
N—BRONZE PIPE.

wide and thick ; it is cut out in the middle for a length of two feet and two
palms, a width of two feet, and a depth of three palms and two digits, and is
open in front; the higher part of it is at the back, and the wide part lies flat
in the block. In the middle of it is placed a bronze saddle. Its base
is a palm and two digits wide, and is planted between two masses of
lead, and extends under them to a depth of a palm on both sides.
The whole saddle is three palms and two digits wide, a foot long, and

*This is, no doubt, a reference to Pliny’s statement (xxx1II, 35) regarding litharge
at Puteoli. This passage from Pliny is given in the footnote on p. 466. Puteoli was situated on
the Bay of Naples.

502 BOOK XI.

two palms thick. Upon each end of the block stands a post, a cubit wide
and thick, the upper end of which is somewhat cut away and is mortised into
the beams of the building. At a height of four feet and two digits above the
block there are joined to the posts two transverse beams, each of which is
three palms wide and thick ; their ends are mortised into the upright posts,
and holes are bored through them; in the holes are driven iron claves,
horned in front and so driven into the post that one of the horns of each
points upward and the other downward; the other end of each clavis is
perforated, and a wide iron wedge is inserted and driven into the holes, and
thus holds the transverse beams in place. These transverse beams have in the
middle a square opening three palms and half a digit wide in each
direction, through which the iron-shod stamp passes. At a height of three
feet and two palms above these transverse beams there are again two beams
of the same kind, having also a square opening and holding the same stamp.
This stamp is square, eleven feet long, three palms wide and thick ; its iron
shoe is a foot and a palm long ; its head is two palms long and wide, a palm
two digits thick at the top, and at the bottom the same number of digits, for
it gradually narrows. But the tail is three palms long; where the head
begins is two palms wide and thick, and the further it departs from the same
the narrower it becomes. The upper part is enclosed in the stamp-stem, and
it is perforated so that an iron bolt may be driven into it ; it is bound by three
rectangular iron bands, the lowest of which, a palm wide, is between the iron
shoe and the head of the stamp; the middle band, three digits wide, follows
next and binds round the head of the stamp, and two digits above is the
upper one, which is the same number of digits wide. At a distance of two
feet and as many digits above the lowest part of the iron shoe, is a rectangular
tooth, projecting from the stamp for a distance of a foot and a palm; it is
two palms thick, and when it has extended to a distance of six digits from the
stamp it is made two digits narrower. At a height of three palms upward
from the tooth there is a round hole in the middle of the stamp-stem, into
which can be thrust a round iron bar two feet long and a digit and a half in
diameter ; in its hollow end is fixed a wooden handle two palms and the same
number of digits long. The bar rests on the lower transverse beam, and holds
up the stamp when it is not in use. The axle which raises the stamp
has on each side two arms, which are two palms and three digits distant
from each other, and which project from the axle a foot, a palm and two
digits ; penetrating through them are bolts, driven in firmly; the arms are
each a palm and two digits wide and thick, and their round heads, for a foot
downward on either side, are covered with iron plates of the same width as
the arms and fastened by iron nails. The head of each arm has a round
hole, into which is inserted an iron pin, passing through a bronze pipe; this
little axle has at the one end a wide head, and at the other end a perforation
through which is driven an iron nail, lest this little axle should fall out of the
arms. The bronze pipe is two palms long and one in diameter; the little
iron axle penetrates through its round interior, which is two digits in diameter.
The bronze pipe not only revolves round the little iron axle, but it also

—s a er

BOOK XI. 503

rotates with it; therefore, when the axle revolves, the little axle and
the bronze tube in their turn raise the tooth and the stamp. When the
little iron axle and the bronze pipe have been taken out of the arms, the tooth
of the stamps is not raised, and other stamps may be raised without this one.
Further on, a drum with spindles fixed around the axle of a water-wheel
moves the axle of a toothed drum, which depresses the sweeps of the bellows
in the adjacent fourth part of the building; but it turns in the contrary
direction ; for the axis of the drum which raises the stamps turns toward
the north, while that one which depresses the sweeps of the bellows turns
toward the south.

Those cakes which are too thick to be rapidly broken by blows from
the iron-shod stamp, such as are generally those which have settled in the
bottom of the crucible,® are carried into the first part of the building. They
are there heated in a furnace, which is twenty-eight feet distant from the
second long wall and twelve feet from the second transverse wall. The three
sides of this furnace are built of rectangular rocks, upon which bricks are laid ;
the back furnace wall is three feet and a palm high, and the rear of the side
walls is the same ; the side walls are sloping, and where the furnace is open in
front they are only two feet and three palms high ; all the walls are a foot and
a palm thick. Upon these walls stand upright posts not less thick, in order
that they may bear the heavy weight placed upon them, and they are covered
with lute ; these posts support the sloping chimney and penetrate through
the roof. Moreover, not only the ribs of the chimney, but also the rafters,
are covered thickly with lute. The hearth of the furnace is six feet
long on each side, is sloping, and is paved with bricks. The cakes of copper
are placed in the furnace and heated in the following way. They are first of
all placed in the furnace in rows, with as many small stones the size of an egg
between, so that the heat of the fire can penetrate through the spaces between
them ; indeed, those cakes which are placed at the bottom of the crucible are
each raised upon half a brick for the same reason. But lest the last row,
which lies against the mouth of the furnace, should fall out, against the mouth
are placed iron plates, or the copper cakes which are the first taken from the
crucible when copper is made, and against them are laid exhausted liquation
cakes or rocks. Then charcoal is thrown on the cakes, and then live coals;
at first the cakes are heated by a gentle fire, and afterward more charcoal is
added to them until it is at times three-quarters of a foot deep. A fiercer fire
is certainly required to heat the hard cakes of copper than the fragile ones.
When the cakes have been sufficiently heated, which usually occurs within
the space of about two hours, the exhausted liquation cakes or the rocks
and the iron plate are removed from the mouth of the furnace. Then the
hot cakes are taken out row after row with a two-pronged rabble, such as the
one which is used by those who “dry” the exhausted liquation cakes.
Then the first cake is laid upon the exhausted liquation cakes, and beaten by
two workmen with hammers until it breaks; the hotter the cakes are, the

*By this expression is apparently meant the ‘“‘ bottoms ” produced in enriching copper,
as described on p. 510.

504 BOOK XI.

sooner they are broken up; the less hot, the longer it takes, for now and
then they bend into the shape of copper basins. When the first cake has
been broken, the second is put on to the other fragments and beaten until it
breaks into pieces, and the rest of the cakes are broken up in the same manner
in due order. The head of the hammer is three palms long and one wide,
and sharpened at both ends, and its handle is of wood three feet long.
When they have been broken by the stamp, if cold, or with hammers if hot,
the fragments of copper or the cakes are carried into the store-room for
copper.

> < ps ; ~
7
}
» \*
; \ \y
“yy ) ) =
= Z ye
= Ws, S' tose = aS
@ =
= a) =
y N=
2 =:
(4 =
i, oa
oY Ss
=. WS =
S re S
7 : = 3 és Di
= Z “Ye eG % et Yi) .. ov,
Ce os ° )
= 1 Zo fe ; YE F GIO, we ; aaa
A= (RGR SS A yw Se Y
—_ S ad J f
m 1 a —— Hie 2
== —- = =o F SS a | ae I? Zp
o_o — = ere Meme ani ZF
S 3 => a ®
/ / AS ' “a =
a “Yn I
= 4
WS fe. |
= Saas
4 S ids ~
= “ZZ = = ET o\? =
ge = 4°\ \o
v2) — = = 2\°
—— 2 -
eae —
A—BACK WALL. B—WALLS AT THE SIDES. C—UPRIGHT POSTS. D—CHIMNEY.

E—THE CAKES ARRANGED. F—IRON PLATES. G—Rocks. H—RABBLE WITH TWO
PRONGS. I—HAMMERs.

The foreman of the works, according to the different proportions of
silver in each centumpondium of copper, alloys it with lead, without which
he could not separate the silver from the copper.1° If there be a moderate

‘

1°The details of the preparation of liquation cakes—‘“ leading ’—were matters of great
concern to the old metallurgists. The size of the cakes, the proportion of silver in the original
copper and in the liquated lead, the proportion of lead and silver left in the residual cakes, all
had to be reached by a series of compromises among militant forces. The cakes were generally
two and one-half to three and one-half inches thick and about two feet in diameter, and

BOOK XI. 505

amount of silver in the copper, he alloys it fourfold ; for instance, if in three-
quarters of a centumpondium of copper there is less than the following pro-
portions, f.e.: half a bra of silver, or half a Libra and a stctlicus, or half a libra
and a semt-uncta, or half a libra and semt-uncta and a stctlicus, then rich
lead—that is, that from which the silver has not yet been separated—is
added, to the amount of half a centwmpondtum or a whole centumpondtum, or
a whole and a half, in such a way that there may be in the copper-lead alloy
some one of the proportions of silver which I have just mentioned, which is
the first alloy. To this “first” alloy is added such a weight of de-silverized
lead or litharge as is required to make out of all of these a single liquation cake
that will contain approximately two centumpondia of lead; but as usually
from one hundred and thirty Ubrae of litharge only one hundred Hbrae of lead
are made, a greater proportion of litharge than of de-silverized lead is added
as a supplement. Since four cakes of this kind are placed at the same time
into the furnace in which the silver and lead is liquated from copper, there
will be in all the cakes three centumpondta of copper and eight centumpondta
of lead. When the lead has been liquated from the copper, it weighs six
centumpondta, in each centumpondium of which there is a quarter of a bra
and almost a sfcélicus of silver. Only seven wnctae of the silver remain in the
exhausted liquation cakes and in that copper-lead alloy which we call
“liquation thorns”; they are not called by this name so much because they
have sharp points as because they are base. If in three-quarters of a centum-
pondium of copper there are less than seven uncta and a semt-uncta or a bes
of silver, then so much rich lead must be added as to make in the copper and
lead alloy one of the proportions of silver which I have already mentioned.
This is the “second” alloy. To this is again to be added as great a weight

weighed 225 to 375lbs. This size was wonderfully persistent from Agricola down to modern
times ; and was, no doubt, based on sound experience. If the cakes were too small, they
required proportionately more fuel and labour ; whilst if too large, the copper began to melt
before the maximum lead was liquated. The ratio of the copper and lead was regulated by
the necessity of enough copper to leave a substantial sponge mass the shape of the original
cake, and not so large a proportion as to imprison the lead. That is, if the copper be in too
small proportion the cakes break down ; and if in too large, then insufficient lead liquates
out, and the extraction of silver decreases. Ercker (p. 106-9) insists on the equivalent of about
3 copper to 9.5 lead; Lohneys (p. 99), 3 copper to 9 or ro lead. Schliiter (p. 479, etc.)
insists on a ration of 3 copper to about 11 ad. Kerl (Handbuch Der Metallurgischen Hiitten
kunde, 1855; Vol. III., p. 116) gives 3 copper to 6 to 7 parts lead. Agricola gives variable
amounts of 3 parts copper to from 8 to 12 parts lead. As to the ratio of silver in the copper,
or to the cakes, there does not, except the limit of payability, seem to have been any difficulty
on the minimum side. On the other hand, Ercker, Lohneys, Schliiter, and Karsten all
contend that if the silver ran above a certain proportion, the copper would retain considerable
silver. These authors give the outside ratio of silver permissible for good results in one
liquation at what would be equivalent to 45 to 65 ozs. per ton of cakes, or about 190 to 250 ozs.
per ton on the original copper. It will be seen, however, that Agricola’s cakes greatly exceed
these values. A difficulty did arise when the copper ran low in silver, in that the liquated
lead was too poor to cupel, and in such case the lead was used over again, until it became rich
enough for this purpose. According to Karsten, copper containing less than an equivalent
of 80 to 90 ozs. per ton could not be liquated profitably, although the Upper Harz copper,
according to Kerl, containing the equivalent of about 50 ozs. per ton, was liquated at a profit.
In such a case the cakes would run only 12 to 14 ozs. per ton. It will be noticed that in the
eight cases given by Agricola the copper ran from 97 to over 580 ozs. per ton, and in the de-
scription of enrichment of copper “ bottoms ” the original copper runs 85 ozs., and “it cannot
be separated easily ” ; as a result, it is raised to 110 ozs. per ton before treatment. In addition
to the following tabulation of the proportions here given by Agricola, the reader should refer to
footnotes 15 and 17, where four more combinations are tabulated. It will be observed from

506 BOOK XI.

of de-silverized lead, or of litharge, as will make it possible to obtain from that
alloy a liquation cake containing two and a quarter centumpondia of lead,
in which manner in four of these cakes there will be three centumpondta of
copper and nine centumpondia of lead. The lead which liquates from these
cakes weighs seven centumpondia, in each centumpondium of which there is
a quarter of a bra of silver and a little more than a sictlicus. About seven
unctae of silver remain in the exhausted liquation cakes and in the liquation
thorns, if we may be allowed to make common the old name (sp¢nae=thorns)
and bestow it upon a new substance. If in three-quarters of a centumpondium
of copper there is less than three-quarters of a Hbra of silver, or three-quarters
and a semt-uncia, then as much rich lead must be added as will produce one
of the proportions of silver in the copper-lead alloy above mentioned ; this
is the “ third” alloy. To this is added such an amount of de-silverized lead
or of litharge, that a liquation cake made from it contains in all two and
three-quarters centumpondta of lead. In this manner four such cakes will
contain three centwmpondia of copper and eleven centumpondia of lead.
The lead which these cakes liquate, when they are melted in the furnace,
weighs about nine centumpondia, in each centumpondium of which there is
a quarter of a bya and more than a sfctlicus of silver ; and seven unctae of
silver remain in the exhausted liquation cakes and in the liquation thorns.
If, however, in three-quarters of a centumpondium of copper there is less than
ten-twelfths of a bra or ten-twelfths of a Hbva and a semt-uncta of silver,
then such a proportion of rich lead is added as will produce in the copper-lead
alloy one of the proportions of silver which I mentioned above ; this is the
“fourth ”’ alloy. To this is added such a weight of de-silverized lead or of
litharge, that a liquation cake made from it contains three centumpondia of

this table that with the increasing richness of copper an increased proportion of lead was
added, so that the products were of similar value. It has been assumed (see footnote 13
p. 509), that Roman weights are intended. It is not to be expected that metallurgical
results of this period will ‘‘ tie up”’ with the exactness of the modern operator’s, and it has
not been considered necessary to calculate beyond the nearest pennyweight. Where two
or more values are given by the author the average has been taken.

IsT CHARGE. 2ND CHARGE. 3RD CHARGE. 4TH CHARGE.
Amount of argenti-
ferous copper .. 211.8 lbs. 211.8 lbs. 211.8 Ibs. 211.8 Ibs.
Amount of lead .. 5648 ,, 635-4 5, 776.6 ,, 847.8) 's)
Weight of each cake.. 193.5 ,, tt.§')4) GATE: 5; 264.75 ,,
Average value of
charge er .. 560zs. 3dwts. 620zs. 4dwts. 640zs. 4dwts. 66 0zs. 7dwts.

Per cent. of copper.. 27.2% 25% 21.4% 20%
Average value of ori-

ginal copper per ton 207 ozs. 4dwts. 251 ozs. 3dwts. 299 ozs. 15dwts. 332 ozs. 3dwts.
Weight of argenti-

ferous lead liquated

out ma .. 423.6 Ibs. 494.2 lbs. 635.4 lbs. 706 lbs.
Average value of liqu-

ated lead per ton.. 79 ozs. 79 OZS. 79 OZs. 85 ozs.
Weight of residues (re-

sidual copper and

thorns) -» 353 lbs. 353 lbs. 353 lbs. 353 Ibs. vs
Average value of re-

sidues per ton .. 34 02s. 34 OZs. 34 ozs. 34 02s. to 38 ozs.

Extraction of silver
into the argenti-

ferous lead vel 70.5 Yo 73.4% 79% 85.3%

BOOK XI. 507

lead, and in four cakes of this kind there are three centumpondia of copper and
twelve centumpondta of lead. The lead which is liquated therefrom weighs
about ten centumpondta, in each centwmpondium of which there is a quarter
of a libra and more than a semt-uncta of silver, or seven unclae ; a bes, or
seven unctae and a semt-uncta, of silver remain in the exhausted liquation
cakes and in the liquation thorns.

Against the second long wall in the second part of the building, whose
area is eighty feet long by thirty-nine feet wide, are four furnaces in which
the copper is alloyed with lead, and six furnaces in which “slags” are re-
smelted. The interior of the first kind of furnace is a foot and three palms wide,
two feet three digits long ; and of the second is a foot and a palm wide and a foot
three palms and a digit long. The side walls of these furnaces are the same
height as the furnaces in which gold or silver ores are smelted. As the whole
room is divided into two parts by upright posts, the front part must have,
first, two furnaces in which “slags” are re-melted ; second, two furnaces in
which copper is alloyed with lead ; and third, one furnace in which “ slags ”’ are
re-melted. The back part of the room has first, one furnace in which “ slags ”
are re-melted ; next, two furnaces in which copper is alloyed with lead ; and
third, two furnaces in which “slags”’ are re-melted. Each of these is six feet
distant from the next ; on the right side of the first is a space of three feet
and two palms, and on the left side of the last one of seven feet. Each pair of
furnaces has a common door, six feet high and a cubit wide, but the first and
the tenth furnace each has one ofitsown. Each of the furnaces is set in an arch
of its own in the back wall, and in front has a forehearth pit ; this is filled with
a powder compound rammed down and compressed in order to make a crucible.
Under each furnace is a hidden receptacle for the moisture,“ from which a
vent is made through the back wall toward the right, which allows the
vapour to escape. Finally, to the right, in front, is the copper mould into
which the copper-lead alloy is poured from the forehearth, in order that
liquation cakes of equal weight may be made. This copper mould is a digit
thick, its interior is two feet in diameter and six digits deep. Behind the
second long wall are ten pairs of bellows, two machines for compressing them,
and twenty instruments for inflating them. The way in which these should
be made may be understood from Book IX.

The smelter, when he alloys copper with lead, with his hand throws into
the heated furnace, first the large fragments of copper, then a basketful of
charcoal, then the smaller fragments of copper. When the copper is melted
and begins to run out of the tap-hole into the forehearth, he throws litharge
into the furnace, and, lest part of it should fly away, he first throws
charcoal over it, and lastly lead. As soon as he has thrown into the furnace
the copper and the lead, from which alloy the first liquation cake is made, he
again throws in a basket of charcoal, and then fragments of copper are thrown
over them, from which the second cake may be made. Afterward with a
rabble he skims the “slag’’ from the copper and lead as they flow into the
forehearth. Such a rabble is a board into which an iron bar is fixed; the

See p. 356.

508 BOOK XI.

board is made of elder-wood or willow, and is ten digits long, six wide, and one
and a half digits thick; the iron bar is three feet long, and the wooden
handle inserted into it is two and ahalf feet long. While he purges the
alloy and pours it out with a ladle into the copper mould, the fragments of
copper from which he is to make the second cake are melting. As soon as
this begins to run down he again throws in litharge, and when he has put on
more charcoal he adds the lead. This operation he repeats until thirty
liquation cakes have been made, on which work he expends nine hours, or at
most ten; if more than thirty cakes must be made, then he is paid for
another shift when he has made an extra thirty.

At the same time that he pours the copper-lead alloy into the copper
mould, he also pours water slowly into the top of the mould. Then, with a
cleft stick, he takes a hook and puts its straight stem into the molten cake.
The hook itself is a digit and a half thick; its straight stem is two palms
long and two digits wide and thick. Afterward he pours more water over the
cakes. When they are cold he places an iron ring in the hook of the chain

POTOSI <
INR

A—FURNACE IN WHICH “ SLAGS’’ ARE RE-SMELTED. B—FURNACE IN WHICH COPPER IS

ALLOYED WITH LEAD. C—Door. D-—FoRE-HEARTHS ON THE GROUND. E—COPPER

MOULDS. F—RABBLE. G—Hoox. H—CLEFT STICK. I—ARM OF THE CRANE.
K—THE HOOK OF ITS CHAIN,

re Ee ee ee

BOOK XI. 509

let down from the pulley of the crane arm; the inside diameter of this ring
is six digits, and it is about a digit and a half thick ; the ring is then engaged
in the hook whose straight stem is in the cake, and thus the cake is raised from
the mould and put into its place.

The copper and lead, when thus melted, yield a small amount of “ slag ’’!2
and much litharge. The litharge does not cohere, but falls to pieces like the
residues from malt from which beer is made. Pompholyx adheres to the walls
in white ashes, and to the sides of the furnace adheres sfodos.

In this practical manner lead is alloyed with copper in which there is but
a moderate portion of silver. If, however, there is much silver in it, as, for
instance, two Hbrae, or two lbrae and a bes, to the centumpondium,—which
weighs one hundred and thirty-three and a third Ubrae, or one hundred and
forty-six Ubrae and a bes,48—then the foreman of the works adds to a centwm-
pondtum of such copper three centumpondia of lead, in each centumpondium
of which there is a third of a bra of silver, or a third of a Ubra and a semi-
uncta. In this manner three liquation cakes are made, which contain
altogether three centumpondta of copper and nine centumpondta oflead.1* The
lead, when it has been liquated from the copper, weighs seven centumpondta ;
and in each centumpondium—if the centumpondium of copper contain two
Ubrae of silver, and the lead contain a third of a Hbya—there will be a libra
and a sixth and more than a semé-uncta of silver; while in the exhausted
liquation cakes, and in the liquation thorns, there remains a third of a bra.

12An analysis of this “slag” by Karsten (Archiv. 1st Series IX, p. 24) showed 63.2%
lead oxide, 5.1% cuprous oxide, 20.1% silica (from the fuel and furnace linings), together
with ae iron alumina, etc. The pompholyx and spodos were largely zinc oxide (see note,
P: 394).

8This description of a centumpondium which weighed either 1334 librae, or 1463 librae,
adds confusion to an already much mixed subject (see Appendix C.). Assuming the
German pfundt to weigh 7,219 troy grains, and the Roman libra 4,946 grains, then a centner
would weigh 145.95 librae, which checks up fairly well with the second case ; but under what
circumstances a centner can weigh 133} librae we are unable to record. At first sight it might
appear from this statement that where Agricola uses the word centumpondium he means the
German centner. On the other hand, in the previous five or six pages the expressions one-third,
five-sixths, ten-twelfths of a libra are used, which are even divisions of the Roman 12 unciae
to one libra, and are used where they manifestly mean divisions of 12 units. If Agricola
had in mind the German scale, and were using the libra for a pfundt of 16 untzen, these divisions
would amount to fractions, and would not total the sicilicus and drachma quantities given,
nor would they total any of the possibly synonymous divisions of the German wnizen (see
also page 254).

14Tf we assume Roman weights, the charge in the first case can be tabulated as follows,
and for convenience will be called the fifth charge :—

5TH CHARGE (3 cakes).

Amount of copper es tgs ar « ee -- 211.8 Ibs.

Amount of lea nA ee rie tok nt v4 De -- 635.4 lbs.

Weight of each cake ae a he af ard ue .. 282.4 Ibs.

Average value of charge .. is He - ua ne .. 218 ozs. 18 dwts.

Per cent. of copper a ie ie e °E af PAPE yf

Average value of original copper per ton bi oe me: .. 583 ozs. 6 dwts. 16 grs.
Weight of argentiferous lead liquated out i Mie es -» 4094.2 lbs.

Average value of liquated lead per ton.. ae ie mat .. 352 0zs. 8 dwts.
Weight of residues. . Bs ts ae ie ae es -- 353 lbs.
Average value of residues per ton Ene Se a" ri .. 20 0zs. (about).
Extraction of silver into the argentiferous lead sts a -» 94%

The results given in the second case where the copper contains 2 librae and a bes per
centumpondium do not tie together at all, for each liquation cake should contain 3 lbrae
94 wncrae, instead of 14 Librae and 4 uncia of silver.

35

510 BOOK XI.

If a centumpondium of copper contains two librae and a bes of silver, and
the lead a third of a libra and a semi-uncia, there will be in each liquation
cake one and a half librae and a semd-uncia, and a little more than a sicilicus
of silver. In the exhausted liquation cakes there remain a third of a libra
and a semt-uncia of silver.

If there be in the copper only a minute proportion of silver, it cannot be
separated easily until it has been re-melted in other furnaces, so that in
the ‘‘ bottoms ”’ there remains more silver and in the ‘ tops” less.15 This

SSS’

(ten
>
+]

ti
LQ
Y
\"

es
aw

A—FuRNACE. B—FOREHEARTH. C—Drppinc-Pot. D—CaAkEs.

furnace, vaulted with unbaked bricks, is similar to an oven, and also to the
cupellation furnace, in which the lead is separated from silver, which I described
in the last book. The crucible is made of ashes, in the same manner as

18In this enrichment of copper by the “settling ”’ of the silver in the molten mass the
original copper ran, in the two cases given, 60 ozs. 15 dwts and 85 ozs. 1 dwt. per ton. The
whole charge weighed 2,685 lbs., and contained in the second case 114 ozs. Troy, omitting
fractions. On melting, 1,060 lbs. were drawn off as “ tops,”’ containing 24 ozs. of silver, or
running 45 ozs. per ton, and there remained 1,625 lbs. of “bottoms,” containing go ozs. of
silver, or averaging II0 ozs. per ton. It will be noticed later on in the description of making
liquation cakes from these copper bottoms, that the author alters the value from one-third
hibrae, a semi-uncia and a drachma per centumpondium to one-third of a libra, i.e., from 110 ozs.
to 97 ozs. 4 dwts. per ton. In the Glossary this furnace is described as a sPletsofen, t.¢., a
refining hearth.

i
sf

:
}
j
:
!

a

BOOK XI. 511

in the latter, and in the front of the furnace, three feet above the floor of
the building, is the mouth out of which the re-melted copper flows into a
forehearth and a dipping-pot. On the left side of the mouth is an aperture,
through which beech-wood may be put into the furnace to feed the fire. If
in a centumpondium of copper there were a sixth of a bra and a semt-uncta of
silver, or a quarter of a /ibra, or a quarter of a libra and a semt-uncia—there is
re-melted at the same time thirty-eight centwmpondia of it in this furnace, until
there remain in each centumpondium of the copper “ bottoms ”’ a third of a
libra and a semi-uncia of silver. For example, if in each centumpondium of
copper not yet re-melted, there is a quarter of a libra and a semt-uncia of silver,
then the thirty-eight centumpondia that are smelted together must contain a
total of eleven Hbrae and an uncia of silver. Since from fifteen centumpondia
of re-melted copper there was a total of four anda third ibrae and a semt-uncia
of silver, there remain only two and a third librae. Thus there is left in the
“bottoms,” weighing twenty-three centumpondia, a total of eight and three-
quarter Hbrae of silver. Therefore, each centumpondium of this contains a
third of a Ubra and a semi-uncia, a drachma, and the twenty-third part of a
drachma of silver; from such copper it is profitable to separate the silver.
In order that the master may be more certain of the number of centumpondia
of copper in the “ bottoms,” he weighs the ‘‘ tops”’ that have been drawn
off from it; the ‘“‘tops’”’ were first drawn off into the dipping-pot, and cakes
were made from them. Fourteen hours are expended on the work of thus
dividing the copper. The “ bottoms,” when a certain weight of lead has
been added to them, of which alloy I shall soon speak, are melted in
the blast furnace; liquation cakes are then made, and the silver is afterward
separated from the copper. The “tops” are subsequently melted
in the blast furnace, and re-melted in the refining furnace, in order that
red copper shall be made!*; and the ‘“‘ tops”’ from this are again smelted in
the blast furnace, and then again in the refining furnace, that therefrom

1The latter part of this paragraph presents great difficulties. The term ‘refining
furnace ”’ is given in the Latin as the ‘‘ second furnace,” an expression usually applied to the
cupellation furnace. The whole question of refining is exhaustively discussed on pages
530 to 539. Exactly what material is meant by the term red (rubrum), yellow (fuluum)
and caldarium copper is somewhat uncertain, They ; are given in the German text simply as
rot, geel, and lebeter kupfer, and apparently all were ‘‘ coarse’ copper of different characters
destined for the refinery. The author states in De Natura Fossilium (p. 334): “‘ Copper has a
“red colour peculiar to itself; this colour in smelted copper is considered the most excellent.
“It, however, varies. In some it is red, as in the copper smelted at Neusohl.
“ Other copper is prepared in the smelters where silver is separated from copper, which is
“called yellow copper (/utewm), and is regulare. In the same place a dark yellow copper is
“made which is called caldarium, taking its name among the Germans from a caldron.
_ . . Regulare differs from caldarium in that the former is not only fusible, but
Sy also malleable ; ; while the latter is, indeed, fusible, but is not ductile, for it breaks when
“struck with the hammer.” Later on in De Re Metallica (p. 542) he describes yellow
copper as made from “‘ baser”’ liquation thorns and from exhausted liquation cakes made
from thorns. These products were necessarily impure, as they contained, among other
things, the concentrates from furnace accretions. Therefore, there was ample source for
zinc, arsenic or other metallics which would lighten the colour. Caldarium copper is described
by Pliny (see note, p. 404), and was, no doubt, ‘“‘ coarse” copper, and apparently Agricola
adopted this term eae that source, as we have found it used nowhere else. On page 542 the
author describes making caldarium copper from a mixture of yellow copper and a peculiar
cadmia, which he describes as the ‘‘slags”” from refining copper. These “ slags,” which are
the result of oxidation and poling, would contain almost any of the metallic impurities of
the original ore, antimony, lead, arsenic, zinc, cobalt, etc. Coming from these two sources
the caldarium must have been, indeed, impure.

512 BOOK XI.

shall be made caldarium copper. But when the copper, yellow or red or caldar-
dum is re-smelted in the refining furnace, forty centumpondta are placed in
it, and from it they make at least twenty, and at most thirty-five, centum-
pondia. About twenty-two centumpondta of exhausted liquation cakes and
ten of yellow copper and eight of red, are simultaneously placed in this latter
furnace and smelted, in order that they may be made into refined copper.
The copper “ bottoms ”’ are alloyed in three different ways with lead.’
First, five-eighths of a centumpondtum of copper and two and three-
quarters centumpondia of lead are taken ; and since one liquation cake is made
from this, therefore two and a half centumpondia of copper and eleven cen-
tumpondia of lead make four liquation cakes. Inasmuch as in each centumpon-
dium of copper there is a third of a libra of silver, there would be in the whole
of the copper ten-twelfths of a libra of silver ; to these are added four centum-
pondta of lead re-melted from “ slags,’”’ each centumpondium of which contains
a stctlicus and a drachma of silver, which weights‘make up a total of an uncta
and a half of silver. There is also added seven centumpondta of de-silverized
lead, in each centumpondium of which there is a drachma of silver ; therefore
in the four cakes of copper-lead alloy there is a total of a libra, a sicilicus and
a drachma of silver. In each single centwmpondium of lead, after it has been
liquated from the copper, there is an wncta and a drachma of silver, which alloy
we call ‘‘ poor” argentiferous lead, because it contains but little silver. But
as five cakes of that kind are placed together in the furnace, they liquate
from them usually as much as nine and three-quarters centumpondia of poor

1’The liquation of these low-grade copper ‘‘ bottoms ” required that the liquated lead
should be re-used again to make up fresh liquation cakes, in order that it might eventually
become rich enough to warrant cupellation. In the following table the ‘ poor”? silver-lead
is designated (A) the ‘‘ medium” (B) and the “‘rich”’ (C). The three charges here given
are designated sixth, seventh, and eighth for purposes of reference. It will be seen that the
data is insufficient to complete the ninth and tenth. Moreover, while the author gives direc-
tions for making four cakes, he says the charge consists of five, and it has, therefore, been
necessary to reduce the volume of products given to this basis.

6TH CHARGE. 7TH CHARGE. 8TH CHARGE.

Amount of copper bottoms 176.5 lbs. 176.5 lbs. 176.5 lbs.
Amount of lead .. .. 282.4 lbs. (slags) 564.8 Ibs. or (A) 635.4 lbs. of (B)
Amount of de-silverized

lead wy ey 494.2 Ibs. 211.8 lbs. 141.2 lbs. (A)
Weight of each cake .. 238.3 Ibs. 238.3 lbs. 238.3 lbs
Average value of charg

per ton ie .. 22 02s. 5dwts. 35 ozs. 15dwts. 50 ozs. 5dwts.
Per cent. of coppe -- 18.5% 18.5% 18.5%
Average value per ton

original copper 97 ozs. 4dwts. 97 ozs. 4dwts. 97 ozs. 4dwts.

Average value per ton of..
Average value per ton of..
Weight of liquated lead..
Average value of the liqu-
ated lead per ton en
Weight of exhausted liqu-
ation cakes i
Average value of the ex-
hausted liquation cakes
perton .. “e 4
Weight of liquation thorns
Average value of the liqu-
ation thorns per ton ..
Extraction of silver into
the liquated lead

go ozs. 2dwts. (slags)

3 ozs. 1dwt. (lead)
550.6 lbs.

28 ozs. 5dwts. (A)
225.9 lbs.

I2 ozs. 3dwts.
169.4 Ibs:

18 ozs. 4dwts.

71%

28 ozs. 5dwts. (A)
3 ozs. Idwt. (lead)

42 ozs. todwts. (B)

28 ozs. 5dwts. (A)
42 ozs. todwts (B)

63 ozs. r6dwts. (C)

BOOK XI. 513

argentiferous lead, in each centumpondtum of which there is an wncta and a
drachma of silver, or a total of ten wnctae less four drachmae. Of the liquation
thorns there remain three centumpondta, in each centumpondium of which
there are three séctlict of silver; and there remain four centumpondia of
exhausted liquation cakes, each centumpondtum of which contains a semf-
uncta or four and a half drachmae. Inasmuch as in a centumpondtum of copper
“ bottoms ”’ there is a third of a bra and a semt-uncta of silver, in five of those
cakes there must be more than one and a half wnctae and half a drachma of
silver.

Then, again, from another two and a half centwmpondia of copper
“bottoms,” together with eleven centumpondta of lead, four liquation cakes
are made. If in each centumpondium of copper there was a third of a libra of
silver, there would be in the whole of the centumpondia of base metal five-
sixths of a bra of the precious metal. To this copper is added eight centum-
pondta of poor argentiferous lead, each centumpondium of which contains an
uncta and a drachma of silver, or a total of three-quarters of a /ébra of silver.
There is also added three centumpondia of de-silverized lead, in each centum-
pondium of which there is a drachma of silver. Therefore, four liquation
cakes contain a total of a Hbra, seven unctae, a stctlicus and a drachma of silver ;
thus each centumpondium of lead, when it has been liquated from the copper,
contains an wnctfa and a half and a sécélicus of silver, which alloy we call
“medium ”’ silver-lead.

Then, again, from another two and a half centumpondta of copper
“bottoms,” together with eleven centumpondia of lead, they make four
liquation cakes. If in each centumpondtum of copper there were likewise a
third of a bra of silver, there will be in all the weight of the base metal five-.
sixths of a libra of the precious metal. To this is added nine centumpondta
of medium silver-lead, each centumpondium of which contains an uncia and
a half and a sfcélicus of silver ; or a total of a ébra and a quarter and a semt#-
uncta and a sécilicus of silver. And likewise they add two centumpondta of
poor silver-lead, in each of which there is an uncéa and a drachma of silver.
Therefore the four liquation cakes contain two and a third Ubrae of silver.
Each centumpondtum of lead, when it has been liquated from the cepper,
contains a sixth of a dibra and a semt-uncta and a drachma of silver. This
alloy we call ‘‘rich”’ silver-lead; it is carried to the cupellation furnace,
in which lead is separated from silver. I have now mentioned in how many
ways copper containing various proportions of silver is alloyed with lead,
and how they are melted together in the furnace and run into the casting pan.

Now I will speak of the method by which lead is liquated from copper
simultaneously with the silver. The liquation cakes are raised from the
ground with the crane, and placed on the copper plates of the furnaces. The
hook of the chain let down from the arm of the crane, is inserted in a
ring of the tongs, one jaw of which has a tooth; a ring is engaged in each
of the handles of the tongs, and these two rings are engaged in a third, in
which the hook of the chain is inserted. The tooth on the one jaw of the
tongs is struck by a hammer, and driven into the hole in the cake, at the point

514 BOOK XI.

where the straight end of the hook was driven into it when it was lifted out
of the copper mould; the other jaw of the tongs, which has no tooth,
squeezes the cake, lest the tooth should fall out of it; the tongs are one and
a half feet long, each ring is a digit and a half thick, and the inside is a palm
and two digits in diameter. Those cranes by which the cakes are lifted out
of the copper pans and placed on the ground, and lifted up again from there
and placed in the furnaces, are two in number—one in the middle space
between the third transverse wall and the two upright posts, and the other in

itcitte

\ SAA

\

£ 5 TR.

ow e= —
A—CRANE. B—DRUM CONSISTING OF RUNDLES. C—TooTHED DRUM. D—TROLLEY

AND ITS WHEELS. E—TRIANGULAR BOARD. F—Cakrs. G—CHAIN OF THE CRANE.
H—Its noox. I—Rinc. K—TuHE Toncs.

the middle space between the same posts and the seventh transverse wall.
The rectangular crane-post of both of these is two feet wide and thick, and
is eighteen feet from the third long wall, and nineteen from the second long
wall. There are two drums in the framework of each—one drum consisting
of rundles, the other being toothed. The crane-arm of each extends seventeen
feet, three palms and as many digits from the post. The trolley of each
crane is two feet and as many palms long, a foot and two digits wide, and a
palm and two digits thick; but where it runs between the beams of the
crane-arm it is three digits wide and a palm thick; it has five notches, in

a ee ee

BOOK XI. 515

which turn five brass wheels, four of which are small, and the fifth much
larger than the rest. The notches in which the small wheels turn are two
palms long and as much as a palm wide ; those wheels are a palm wide and
a palm and two digits in diameter; four of the notches are near the four
corners of the trolley; the fifth notch is between the two front ones, and
it is two palms back from the front. Its pulley is larger than the rest, and
turns in its own notch; it is three palms in diameter and one palm wide,
and grooved on the circumference, so that the iron chain may run in the
groove. The trolley has two small axles, to the one in front are fastened
three, and to the one at the back, the two wheels; two wheels run on the
one beam of the crane-arm, and two on the other ; the fifth wheel, which is
larger than the others, runs between those two beams. Those people who
shave no cranes place the cakes on a triangular board, to which iron cleats
are affixed, so that it will last longer; the board has three iron chains,
which are fixed in an iron ring at the top; two workmen pass a pole through
the ring and carry it on their shoulders, and thus take the cake to the furnace
in which silver is separated from copper.

From the vicinity of the furnaces in which copper is mixed with lead and
the ‘‘slags’’ are re-melted, to the third long wall, are likewise ten furnaces,
in which silver mixed with lead is separated from copper. If this space is
eighty feet and two palms long, and the third long wall has in the centre a
door three feet and two palms wide, then the spaces remaining at either side
of the door will be thirty-eight feet and two palms ; and if each of the furnaces
occupies four feet and a palm, then the interval between each furnace and
the next one must be a foot and three palms; thus the width of the five
furnaces and four interspaces will be twenty-eight feet and a palm. There-
fore, there remain ten feet and a palm, which measurement is so divided
that there are five feet and two digits between the first furnace and
the transverse wall, and as many feet and digits between the fifth furnace
and the door ; similarly in the other part of the space from the door to the
sixth furnace, there must be five feet and two digits, and from the tenth
furnace to the seventh transverse wall, likewise, five feet and two digits.
The door is six feet and two palms high ; through it the foreman of the officina
and the workmen enter the store-room in which the silver-lead alloy is kept.

Each furnace has a bed, a hearth, a rear wall, two sides and a front,
and a receiving-pit. The bed consists of two sole-stones, four rectangular
stones, and two copper plates; the sole-stones are five feet and a palm
long, a cubit wide, a foot and a palm thick, and they are sunk into the ground,
so that they emerge a palm and two digits; they are distant from each other
about three palms, yet the distance is narrower at the back than the front.
Each of the rectangular stones is two feet and as many palms long, a cubit
wide, and a cubit thick at the outer edge, and a foot and a palm thick on the
inner edge which faces the hearth, thus they form an incline, so that there isa
slope to the copper plates which are laid upon them. Two of these rectang-
ular stones are placed on one sole-stone; a hole is cut in the upper edge of
each, and into the holes are placed iron clamps, and lead is poured in; they

516 BOOK XI.

are so placed on the sole-stones that they project a palm at the sides, and at the
front the sole-stones project to the same extent; if rectangular stones are
not available, bricks are laid in their place. The copper plates are four feet
two palms and as many digits long, a cubit wide, and a palm thick; each
edge has a protuberance, one at the front end, the other at the back; these
are a palm and three digits long, and a palm wide and thick. The plates are
so laid upon the rectangular stones that their rear ends are three digits from
the third long wall; the stones project beyond the plate the same number
of digits in front, and a palm and three digits at the sides. When the plates
have been joined, the groove which is between the protuberances is a palm
and three digits wide, and four feet long, and through it flows the silver-lead
which liquates from the cakes. When the plates are corroded either by the
fire or by the silver-lead, which often adheres to them in the form of stalac-
tites, and is chipped off, they are exchanged, the right one being placed to the
left, and the left one, on the contrary, to the right ; but the left side of the
plates, which, when the fusion of the copper took place, came into contact
with the copper, must lie flat; so that when the exchange of the plates has
been carried out, the protuberances, which are thus on the underside, raise
the plate from the stones, and they have to be partially chipped off, lest they
should prove an impediment to the work; and in each of their places is
laid a piece of iron, three palms long, a digit thick at both ends, and a palm
thick in the centre for the length of a palm and three digits. :
The passage under the plates between the rectangular stones is a foot
wide at the back, and a foot and a palm wide at the front, for it gradually
widens out. The hearth, which is between the sole-stones, is covered with a
bed of hearth-lead, taken from the crucible in which lead is separated from
silver. The rear end is the highest, and should be so high that it reaches to
within six digits of the plates, from which point it slopes down evenly to the
front end, so that the argentiferous lead alloy which liquates from the cakes
can flow into the receiving-pit. The wall built against the third long wall
in order to protect it from injury by fire, is constructed of bricks joined
together with lute, and stands on the copper plates; this wall is two feet, a
palm and two digits high, two palms thick, and three feet, a palm and three
digits wide at the bottom, for it reaches across both of them ; at the top it is
three feet wide, for it rises up obliquely on each side. At each side of this wall,
at a height of a palm and two digits above the top of it, there is inserted in a
hole in the third long wall a hooked iron rod, fastened in with molten lead ;
the rod projects two palms from the wall, and is two digits wide and one
digit thick ; it has two hooks, the one at the side, the other at the end.
Both of these hooks open toward the wall, and both are a digit thick, and
both are inserted in the last, or the adjacent, links of a short iron chain. This
chain consists of four links, each of which is a palm and a digit long and half
a digit thick; the first link is engaged in the first hole in a long iron rod, and
one or other of the remaining three links engages the hook of the hooked rod.
The two long rods are three feet and as many palms and digits long, two
digits wide, and one digit thick; both ends of both of these rods have holes,

BOOK Xi. "

| 4, Y —IWBRREN ,
a Y WY ir WS S

1

) i

A—SOLE-sTONES. B—RECTANGULAR STONES. C—COPPER PLATES. D—FRONT PANEL.

E—SIDE PANELS. F—Bar. G—FRONT END OF THE LONG IRON RODS. H—SHORT CHAIN.

I—HookeD rop. K—WALL WHICH PROTECTS THE THIRD LONG WALL FROM INJURY BY

FIRE, L—THIRD LONG WALL. M—FEET OF THE PANELS. N—IRON BLOCKS. O—CAKES.
P—HEARTH. Q—RECEIVING-PIT.

518 BOOK XI.

the back one of which is round and a digit in diameter, and in this is engaged
the first link of the chain as I have stated ; the hole at the front end is two
digits and a half long and a digit and a half wide. This end of each rod
is made three digits wide, while for the rest of its length it is only two digits,
and at the back it is two and a half digits. Into the front hole of each rod is
driven an iron bar, which is three feet and two palms long, two digits wide
and one thick ; in the end of this bar are five small square holes, two-thirds
of a digit square ; each hole is distant from the other half a digit, the first
being at a distance of about a digit from the end. Into one of these holes the
refiner drives an iron pin ; if he should desire to make the furnace narrower,
then he drives it into the last hole; if he should desire to widen it, then into
the first hole; if he should desire to contract it moderately, then into one
of the middle holes. For the same reason, therefore, the hook is sometimes
inserted into the last link of the chain, and sometimes into the third or the
second. The furnace is widened when many cakes are put into it, and con-
tracted when there are but few, but to put in more than five is neither usual
nor possible ; indeed, it is because of thin cakes that the walls are contracted.
The bar has a hump, which projects a digit on each side at the back, of the
same width and thickness as itself. These humps project, lest the bar should
slip through the hole of the right-hand rod, in which it remains fixed when
it, together with the rods, is not pressing upon the furnace walls.

There are three panels to the furnace—two at the sides, one in front,
and another at the back. Those which are at the sides are three feet
and as many palms and two digits long, and two feet high ; the front one is
two feet and a palm and three digits long, and, like the side ones, two feet
high. Each consists of iron bars, of feet, and of iron plates. Those which are
at the side have seven bars, the lower and upper of which are of the same
length as the panels; the former holds up the upright bars; the latter is
placed upon them ; the uprights are five in number, and have the same height
as the panels ; the middle ones are inserted into holes in the upper and lower
bars; the outer ones are made of one and the same bar as the lower and
upper ones. They are two digits wide and one thick. The front panel has
five bars; the lower one holds similar uprights, but there are three of them
only ; the upper bar is placed on them. Each of these panels has two feet
fixed at each end of the lower bar, and these are two palms long, one wide,
and a digit thick. The iron plates are fastened to the inner side of the bars
with iron wire, and they are covered with lute, so that they may last longer
and may be uninjured by the fire. There are, besides, iron blocks three palms
long, one wide, and a digit and a half thick; the upper surface of these is
somewhat hollowed out, so that the cakes may stand in them; these iron
blocks are dipped into a vessel in which there is clay mixed with water, and
they are used only for placing under the cakes of copper and lead alloy made
in the furnaces. There is more silver in these than in those which are
made of liquation thorns, or furnace accretions, or re-melted “slags.” Two
iron blocks are placed under each cake, in order that, by raising it up, the fire
may bring more force to bear upon it ; the one is put on the right bed-plate,

BOOK XI. 519

=
A — FURNACE IN WHICH THE OPERATION OF LIQUATION IS BEING PERFORMED.
B—FuRNACE IN WHICH IT IS NOT BEING PERFORMED. C—RECEIVING-PIT. D—Movu.ps.
E—Caxkes. F—LIQuaTION THORNS.

520 BOOK XI.

the other on the left. Finally, outside the hearth is the receiving-pit, which
is a foot wide and three palms deep; when this is worn away it is restored
with lute alone, which easily retains the lead alloy.

If four liquation cakes are placed on the plates of each furnace, then the
iron blocks are laid under them; but if the cakes are made from copper
“bottoms,” or from liquation thorns, or from the accretions or “ slags,” of
which I have partly written above and will further describe a little later,
there are five of them, and because they are not so large and heavy, no blocks
are placed under them. Pieces of charcoal six digits long are laid between the
cakes, lest they should fall one against the other, or lest the last one should
fall against the wall which protects the third long wall from injury by fire. In
the middle empty spaces, long and large pieces of charcoal are likewise laid.
Then when the panels have been set up, and the bar has been closed, the
furnace is filled with small charcoal, and a wicker basket full of charcoal is
thrown into the receiving-pit, and over that are thrown live coals; soon
afterward the burning coal, lifted up in a shovel, is spread over all parts of
the furnace, so that the charcoal in it may be kindled; any charcoal which
remains in the receiving-pit is thrown into the passage, so that it may likewise
be heated. If this has not been done, the silver-lead alloy liquated from the
cakes is frozen by the coldness of the passage, and does not run down into the
receiving-pit.

After a quarter of an hour the cakes begin to drip silver-lead alloy,?®
which runs down through the openings between the copper plates into the
passage. When the long pieces of charcoal have burned up, if the cakes
lean toward the wall, they are placed upright again with a hooked bar, but
if they lean toward the front bar they are propped up by charcoal; more-
over, if some cakes shrink more than the rest, charcoal is added to the former
and not to the others. The silver drips together with the lead, for both melt
more rapidly than copper. The liquation thorns do not flow away, but remain
in the passage, and should be turned over frequently with a hooked bar, in
order that the silver-lead may liquate away from them and flow down into
the receiving pit; that which remains is again melted in the blast furnace,
while that which flows into the receiving pit is at once carried with the remain-

18For the liquation it was necessary to maintain a reducing atmosphere, otherwise the
lead would oxidize ; this was secured by keeping the cakes well covered with charcoal and
by preventing the entrance of air as much as possible. Moreover, it was necessary to preserve
a fairly even temperature. The proportions of copper and lead in the three liquation products
vary considerably, depending upon the method of conducting the process and the original
proportions. From the authors consulted (see note p. 492) an average would be about as
follows :—The residual copper—exhausted liquation cakes—ran from 25 to 33% lead; the
liquated lead from 2 to 3 % copper; and the liquation thorns, which were largely oxidized,
contained about 15% copper oxides, 80% lead oxides, together with impurities, such as
antimony, arsenic, etc. The proportions of the various products would obviously depend upon
the care in conducting the operation ; too high temperature and the admission of air would
increase the copper melted and oxidize more lead, and thus increase the liquation thorns.
There are insufficient data in Agricola to adduce conclusions as to the actual ratios produced.
The results given for the 6th charge (note 17, p. 512) would indicate about 30% lead in the
residual copper, and would indicate that the original charge was divided into about 24% of
residual copper, 18% of liquation thorns, and 57% of liquated lead. This, however, was
a unusually large proportion of liquation thorns, some of the authors giving instances of as
ow as 5%.

' BOOK XI. 521

ing products to the cupellation furnace, where the lead is separated from the
silver. The hooked bar has an iron handle two feet long, in which is set a
wooden one four feet long. The silver-lead which runs out into the receiving-
pit is poured out by the refiner with a bronze ladle into eight copper moulds,
which are two palms and three digits in diameter; these are first smeared
with a lute wash so that the cakes of silver-lead may more easily fall out
when they are turned over. If the supply of moulds fails because the silver-
lead flows down too rapidly into the receiving-pit, then water is poured on them,
in order that the cakes may cool and be taken out of them more rapidly ;
thus the same moulds may be used again immediately ; if no such necessity
urges the refiner, he washes over the empty moulds with a lute wash. The
ladle is exactly similar to that which is used in pouring out the metals that
are melted in the blast furnace. When all the silver-lead has run down from
the passage into the receiving-pit, and has been poured out into copper
moulds, the thorns are drawn out of the passage into the receiving-pit
with a rabble ; afterward they are raked on to the ground from the receiving-
pit, thrown with a shovel into a wheelbarrow, and, having been conveyed
away to a heap, are melted once again. The blade of the rabble is two palms
and as many digits long, two palms and a digit wide, and joined to its
back is an iron handle three feet long; into the iron handle is inserted a
wooden one as many feet in length.

The residue cakes, after the silver-lead has been liquated from the
copper, are called “‘ exhausted liquation cakes” (fathtscentes), because when
thus smelted they appear to be dried up. By placing a crowbar under the
cakes they are raised up, seized with tongs, and placed in the wheelbarrow ;
they are then conveyed away to the furnace in which they are “ dried.”
The crowbar is somewhat similar to those generally used to chip off the
accretions that adhere to the walls of the blast furnace. The tongs are two
and a half feet long. With the same crowbar the stalactites are chipped off
from the copper plates from which they hang, and with the same instrument
the iron blocks are struck off the exhausted liquation cakes to which they
adhere. The refiner has performed his day’s task when he has liquated the
silver-lead from sixteen of the large cakes and twenty of the smaller ones ;
if he liquates more than this, he is paid separately for it at the price for
extraordinary work.

Silver, or lead mixed with silver, which we call stannum, is separated by
the above method from copper. This silver-lead is carried to the cupellation
furnace, in which lead is separated from silver; of these methods I will
mention only one, because in the previous book I have explained them in
detail. Amongst us some years ago only forty-four centumpondia of silver-
lead and one of copper were melted together in the cupellation furnaces,
but now they melt forty-six centwmpondia of silver-lead and one and a half
centumpondia of copper; in other places, usually a hundred and twenty
centumpondia of silver-lead alloy and six of copper are melted, in which
manner they make about one hundred and ten centumpondia more or less of
litharge and thirty of hearth-lead. But in all these methods the silver which

522, BOOK XI.

is in the copper is mixed with the remainder of silver; the copper itself,
equally with the lead, will be changed partly into litharge and partly into
hearth-lead.t® The silver-lead alloy which does not melt is taken from the
margin of the crucible with a hooked bar.

The work of ‘“drying’”’ is distributed into four operations, which are
performed in four days. On the first—as likewise on the other three days—the
master begins at the fourth hour of the morning, and with his assistant chips

u}

Nh

}}\
YY,

Wy)

SN:

i

NS

Wi

yd

}

N
\\
\)
\
\
S

Lizzie

A;

=a

Aj ior my
‘alli

A—CakeEs. B—HAMMER.

off the stalactites from the exhausted liquation cakes. They then carry the
cakes to the furnace, and put the stalactites upon the heap of liquation
thorns. The head of the chipping hammer is three palms and as many digits

18The first instance given, of 44 centumpondia (3,109 lbs.) lead and one centumpondium
(70.6 lbs.) copper, would indicate that the liquated lead contained 2.2% copper. The second,
of 46 centumpondia (3,250 lbs.) lead and 14 centumpondia copper (106 lbs.), would indicate 3%
copper ; andin the third, 120 centumpondia (8,478 \bs.) lead and six copper (424 1bs.) would show
4.76% copper. This charge of 120 centumpondia in the cupellation furnace would normally
make more than 110 centumpondia of litharge and 30 of hearth-lead, 1.c., saturated furnace
bottoms. The copper would be largely found in the silver-lead “‘ which does not melt,” at the
margin of the crucible. These skimmings are afterward referred to as ‘‘ thorns.” It is difficult
to understand what is meant by the expression that the silver which is in the copper is mixed
with the remaining (reliquo) silver. The coppery skimmings from the cupellation furnace are
referred to again in Note 28, p. 539.

BOOK XI. 523

long ; its sharp edge is a palm wide ; the round end is three digits thick ; the
wooden handle is four feet long.

The master throws pulverised earth into a small vessel, sprinkles water
over it, and mixes it; this he pours over the whole hearth, and sprinkles
charcoal dust over it to the thickness of a digit. If he should neglect this,
the copper, settling in the passages, would adhere to the copper bed-plates,
from which it can be chipped off only with difficulty ; or else it would adhere
to the bricks, if the hearth was covered with them, and when the copper is
chipped off these they are easily broken. On the second day, at the same
time, the master arranges bricks in ten rows; in this manner twelve
passages are made. The first two rows of bricks are between the first and
the second openings on the right of the furnace; the next three rows are
between the second and third openings, the following three rows are
between the third and the fourth openings, and the last two rows between
the fourth and fifth openings. These bricks are a foot and a palm long, two
palms and a digit wide, and a palm and two digits thick; there are seven of
these thick bricks in a row, so there are seventy all together. Then on the
first three rows of bricks they lay exhausted liquation cakes and a layer five
digits thick of large charcoal; then in a similar way more exhausted
liquation cakes are laid upon the other bricks, and charcoal is thrown upon
them ; in this manner seventy centumpondia of cakes are put on the
hearth of the furnace. But if half of this weight, or a little more, is to be
“dried,” then four rows of bricks will suffice. Those who dry exhausted
liquation cakes?® made from copper “‘ bottoms’’ place ninety or a hundred
centumpondia*™ into the furnace at the same time. A place is left in the front
part of the furnace for the topmost cakes removed from the forehearth in
which copper is made, these being more suitable for supporting the exhausted
liquation cakes than are iron plates; indeed, if the former cakes drip copper
from the heat, this can be taken back with the liquation thorns to the first
furnace, but melted iron is of no use to us in these matters. When the cakes
of this kind have been placed in front of the exhausted liquation cakes, the
workman inserts the iron bar into the holes on the inside of the wall, which
are at a height of three palms and two digits above the hearth; the hole to
the left penetrates through into the wall, so that the bar may be pushed back

*°A further amount of lead could be obtained in the first liquation, but a higher tem-
_sapeni is necessary, which was more economical to secure in the “drying” furnace.
erefore, the “ drying” was really an extension of liquation ; but as air was admitted the
lead and copper melted out were oxidized. The products were the final residual copper,
called by Agricola the ‘dried’ copper, together with lead and copper oxides, called by him
the “slags,” and the scale of copper and lead oxides termed by him the “‘ ash-coloured
copper.” The German metallurgists distinguished two kinds of slag: the first and principal
one, the darrost, and the second the darrséhle, this latter differing only in that it contained
more impurities from the floor of the furnace, and remained behind until the furnace cooled.
Agricola possibly refers to these as ‘‘ more liquation thorns,” because in describing the
treatment of the bye-products he refers to thorns from the process, whereas in the description
of “drying’’ he usually refers to “slags.” A number of analyses of these products, given
by Karsten, show the “dried” copper to contain from 82.7 to 90.6% copper, and from 9.4
to 17.3% lead; the “‘slag’’ to contain 76.5 to 85.1% lead oxide, and from 4.1 to 7.8%
cuprous oxide, with 9 to 13% silica from the furnace bottoms, together with some other

*1If Roman weights, this would equal from 6,360 lbs. to 7,066 Ibs.

524 BOOK XI.

and forth. This bar is round, eight feet long and two digits in diameter ;
on the right side it has a haft made of iron, which is about a foot from the
right end; the aperture in this haft is a palm wide, two digits high, and a
digit thick. The bar holds the exhausted liquation cakes opposite, lest they
should fall down. When the operation of ‘ drying” is completed, a work-
man draws out this bar with a crook which he inserts into the haft, as I will
explain hereafter.

In order that one should understand those things of which I have spoken,
and concerning which I am about to speak, it is necessary for me to give some
information beforehand about the furnace and howit isto be made. It stands
nine feet from the fourth long wall, and as far from the wall which is between
the second and fourth transverse walls. It consists of walls, an arch, a chimney,
an interior wall, and a hearth; the two walls are at the sides; and they are
eleven feet three palms and two digits long, and where they support the
chimney they are eight feet and a palm high. At the front of the arch they
are only seven feet high; they are two feet three palms and two digits
thick, and are made either of rock or of bricks; the distance between them
is eight feet, a palm and two digits. There are two of the arches, for the
space at the rear between the walls is also arched from the ground, in order
that it may be able to support the chimney; the foundations of these
arches are the walls of the furnace; the span of the arch has the same
length as the space between the walls ; the top of the arch is five feet, a palm
and two digits high. In the rear arch there is a wall made of bricks joined
with lime ; this wall at a height of a foot and three palms from the ground
has five vent-holes, which are two palms and a digit high, a palm and a digit
wide, of which the first is near the right interior wall, and the last near the
left interior wall, the remaining three in the intervening space; these vent-
holes penetrate through the interior of the wall which is in the arch.
Half-bricks can be placed over the vent-holes, lest too much air should be
drawn into the furnace, and they can be taken out at times, in order that he
who is “ drying” the exhausted liquation cakes may inspect the passages,
as they are called, to see whether the cakes are being properly “ dried.”
The front arch is three feet two palms distant from the rear one; this arch
is the same thickness as that of the rear arch, but the span is six feet wide ;

impurities ; the ‘“ ash-coloured copper” to contain about 60% cuprous oxide and 30% lead
oxide, with some metallic copper and minor impurities. An average of proportions given by
various authors shows, roughly, that out of 100 centners of “exhausted” liquation cakes,
containing about 70% copper and 30% lead, there were about 63 centners of ‘‘ dried’”’ copper,
38 centners of “slag,” and 64 centners of ‘ ash-coloured copper.” According to Karsten, the
process fell into stages ; first, at low temperature some metallic lead appeared; second, during
an increasing temperature for over 14 to 15 hours the slags ran out; third, there was a period of
four hours of lower temperature to allow time for the lead to diffuse from the interior of the
cakes ; and fourth, during a period of eight hours the temperature was again increased. In fact,
the latter portion of the process ended with the economic limit between leaving some lead in
the copper and driving too much copper into the “slags.” Agricola gives the silver
contents of the “ dried” copper as 3 drachmae to 1 centumpondium, or equal to about 9 ozs.
per ton; and assuming that the copper finally recovered from the bye-products ran no higher,
then the first four charges (see note on p. 506) would show a reduction in the silver values
of from 95 to 97%; the 7th and 8th charges (note on p. 512) of about 90%.

BOOK XI.

“wt wi
Ke 2= = -
| = S
: ‘ S = qt!
otieilac nN 2 A
VAA :
=, ;
A @&
ZZ Ne
7 } Ait Mi
: gor i,
© . :
Wr all | r SS)
es é YE =
; j fe
S A 2
== S bi ke al :
= 5
Ta: fare oe i 2
5 Ridoe ee eee. : :
z SR re : : : :
z ES a he ‘H ate . j : .]
==) = es : E Ne
= a e . e " iM : :
= e . e rt . + . > al + = D ~ (e) oul
f vf fi
te u 1, DS 3 PTD
a <x. és

ee
aa

DOUROPELD

525

enn

QOUQPUOOD

Onggg0g 000
lDgggogo gan

WAOIOOOOe

ss

———

—— =>] wee

==—
nee ee FA
—~~-

> ——)

A—SIDE WALLS.

E—INNER WALL. F—VENT HOLES. G—CuHIMNEY. H—Heartu. I—Tanx. K—PIPE.
L—Piuc. M—TIron poor. N—TRANSVERSE BARS. O-—UpRIGHT BARS. P—PLATES.
Q—RINGS OF THE BARS. R—Cuarins. S—Rows oF Bricks. T—Bar. V—ITs HAFT.

X—COPPER BED-PLATES.

36

B—FronT arco. C—REAR ARCH. D—WALL IN THE REAR ARCH.

526 BOOK XI.

the interior of the aich itself is of the same height as the walls. A chimney
is built upon the arches and the walls, and is made of bricks joined
together with lime; it is thirty-six feet high and penetrates through the
roof. The interior wall is built against the rear arch and both the side
walls, from which it juts out a foot; it is three feet and the same number
of palms high, three palms thick, and is made of bricks joined together
with lute and smeared thickly with lute, sloping up to the height of
a foot above it. This wall is a kind of shield, for it protects the exterior
walls from the heat of the fire, which is apt to injure them; the latter can-
not be easily re-made, while the former can be repaired with little work.
The hearth is made of lute, and is covered either with copper plates,
such as those of the furnaces in which silver is liquated from copper, although
they have no protuberances, or it may be covered with bricks, if the owners
are unwilling to incur the expense of copper plates. The wider part of the
hearth is made sloping in such a manner that the rear end reaches as high as
the five vent-holes, and the front end of the hearth is so low that the back
of the front arch is four feet, three palms and as many digits above it,
and the front five feet, three palms and as many digits. The hearth beyond
the furnaces is paved with bricks for a distance of six feet. Near the
furnace, against the fourth long wall, is a tank thirteen feet and a palm
long, four feet wide, and a foot and three palms deep. It is lined on all sides
with planks, lest the earth should fall into it; on one side the water flows
in through pipes, and on the other, if the plug be pulled out, it soaks into the
earth; into this tank of water are thrown the cakes of copper from which
the silver and lead have been separated. The fore part of the front furnace
arch should be partly closed with an iron door; the bottom of this door is
six feet and two digits wide; the upper part is somewhat rounded, and at
the highest point, which is in the middle, it is three feet and two palms high.
It is made of iron bars, with plates fastened to them with iron wire, there
being seven bars—three transverse and four upright—each of which is two
digits wide and half a digit thick. The lowest transverse bar is six feet and
two palms long; the middle one has the same length; the upper one is
curved and higher at the centre, and thus longer than the other two. The
upright bars are two feet distant from one another ; both the outer ones are
two feet and as many palms high ; but the centre ones are three feet and two
palms. They project from the upper curved transverse bar and have holes,
in which are inserted the hooks of small chains two feet long; the topmost
links of these chains are engaged in the ring of a third chain, which, when
extended, reaches to one end of a beam which is somewhat cut out. The chain
then turns around the beam, and again hanging down, the hook in the other end
is fastened in one of the links. This beam is eleven feet long, a palm and two
digits wide, a palm thick, and turns on an iron axle fixed in a near-by timber ;
the rear end of the beam has an iron pin, which is three palms and a digit long,
and which penetrates through it where it lies under a timber, and projects
from it a palm and two digits on one side, and three digits on the other side.
At this point the pin is perforated, in order that a ring may be fixed in it

—

BOOK XI. 527

and hold it, lest it should fall out of the beam; that end is hardly a digit
thick, while the other round end is thicker than a digit. When the door is
to be shut, this pin lies under the timber and holds the door so that it cannot
fall; the pin likewise prevents the rectangular iron band which encircles the
end of the beam, and into which is inserted the ring of a long hook, from
falling from the end. The lowest link of an iron chain, which is six feet long,
is inserted in the ring of a staple driven into the right wall of the furnace,
and fixed firmly by filling in with molten lead. The hook suspended at the
top from the ring should be inserted in one of these lower links, when the
door is to be raised ; when the door is to be let down, the hook is taken out
of that link and put into one of the upper links.

On the third day the master sets about the principal operation. First
he throws a basketful of charcoals on to the ground in front of the hearth,
and kindles them by adding live coals, and having thrown live coals on to the
cakes placed within, he spreads them equally all over with an iron shovel.
The blade of the shovel is three palms and a digit long, and three palms wide ;
its iron handle is two palms long, and the wooden one ten feet long, so that
it can reach to the rear wall of the furnace. The exhausted liquation cakes
become incandescent in an hour and a half, if the copper was good and hard,

gee eee

ttt

E—Toncs.

528 BOOK XI.

or after two hours, if it was soft and fragile. The workman adds charcoal to
them where he sees it is needed, throwing it into the furnace through the
openings on both sides between the side walls and the closed door. This open-
ing is a foot and a palm wide. He lets down the door, and when the “ slags ”
begin to flow he opens the passages with a bar ; this should take place after
five hours ; the door is let down over the upper open part of the arch for
two feet and as many digits, so that the master can bear the violence of the
heat. When the cakes shrink, charcoal should not be added to them lest
they should melt. If the cakes made from poor and fragile copper are
“ dried’ with cakes made from good hard copper, very often the copper
so settles into the passages that a bar thrust into them cannot penetrate
them. This bar is of iron, six feet and two palms long, into which a wooden
handle five feet long is inserted. The refiner draws off the “slags ’’ with a
rabble from the right side of the hearth. The blade of the rabble is made
of an iron plate a foot and a palm wide, gradually narrowing toward the
handle; the blade is two palms high, its iron handle is two feet long, and
the wooden handle set into it is ten feet long.

When the exhausted liquation cakes have been “ dried,’’ the master

.
SSN
\j

Fame

Comte heakoews )
Ww

A—THE DOOR RAISED. B—HooKED BAR. C—TWwo0-PRONGED RAKE. D—Toncs.
E—TANK.

BOOK XI. 529

raises the door in the manner I have described, and with a long iron hook
inserted into the haft of the bar he draws it through the hole in the left wall
from the hole in the right wall; afterward he pushes it back and replaces it.
The master then takes out the exhausted liquation cakes nearest to him with
the iron hook ; then he pulls out the cakes from the bricks, This hook is
two palms high, as many digits wide, and one thick; its iron handle is two
feet long, and the wooden handle eleven feet long. There is also a two-
pronged rake with which the ‘“ dried”’ cakes are drawn over to the left side so
that they may be seized with tongs; the prongs of the rake are pointed,
and are two palms long, as many digits wide, and one digit thick; the iron
part of the handle is a foot long, the wooden part nine feet long. The
“ dried” cakes, taken out of the hearth by the master and his assistants,
are seized with other tongs and thrown into the rectangular tank, which is
almost filled with water. These tongs are two feet and three palms long,
both the handles are round and more than a digit thick, and the ends are
bent for a palm and two digits; both the jaws are a digit and a half wide
in front and sharpened ; at the back they are a digit thick, and then gradually
taper, and when closed, the interior is two palms and as many digits wide.

The “ dried ’’ cakes which are dripping copper are not immediately dipped
into the tank, because, if so, they burst in fragments and give out a sound
like thunder. The cakes are afterward taken out of the tank with the
tongs, and laid upon the two transverse planks on which the workmen stand ;
the sooner they are taken out the easier it is to chip off the copper that
has become ash-coloured. Finally, the master, with a spade, raises up the
bricks a little from the hearth, while they are still warm. The blade of the
spade is a palm and two digits long, the lower edge is sharp, and is a palm
and a digit wide, the upper end a palm wide; its handle is round, the iron
part being two feet long, and the wooden part seven and a half feet long.

On the fourth day the master draws out the liquation thorns which
have settled in the passages; they are much richer in silver than those
that are made when the silver-lead is liquated from copper in the liquation
furnace. The “dried” cakes drip but little copper, but nearly all their
remaining silver-lead and the thorns consist of it, for, indeed, in one
centumpondium of ‘dried’ copper there should remain only half an wncta
of silver, and there sometimes remain only three drachmae.”* Some smelters
chip off the metal adhering to the bricks with a hammer, in order that it
may be melted again; others, however, crush the bricks under the stamps
and wash them, and the copper and lead thus collected is melted again. The
master, when he has taken these things away and put them in their places,
has finished his day’s work.

The assistants take the “dried” cakes out of the tank on the
next day, place them on an oak block, and first pound them with rounded
hammers in order that the ash-coloured copper may fall away from them,

One half uncia or three drachmae of silver would equal either 12 ozs. or 9 ozs. per
ton. If we assume the values given for residual copper in the first four charges (note p. 506) of
34 ozs., this would mean an extraction of, roughly, 65% of the silver from the exhausted
liquation cakes.

530 BOOK XI.

and then they dig out with pointed picks the holes in the cakes, which contain
the same kind of copper. The head of the round hammer is three palms and
a digit long; one end of the head is round and two digits long and thick ;
the other end is chisel-shaped, and is two digits and a half long. The sharp
pointed hammer is the same length as the round hammer, but one end is
pointed, the other end is square, and gradually tapers to a point.

Va

\t

Sy

a

O
=

Zw

A—Tanxk. B—Boarp. C—Tones. D—‘‘ DrigpD”’ CAKES TAKEN OUT OF THE TANKS.
E—B.iocx. F—ROuUNDED HAMMER. G—POINTED HAMMER.

The nature of copper is such that when it is “dried” it becomes ash
coloured, and since this copper contains silver, it is smelted again in the
blast furnaces.”8

I have described sufficiently the method by which exhausted liquation
cakes are “ dried’’ ; now I will speak of the method by which they are made
into copper after they have been “dried.” These cakes, in order that
they may recover the appearance of copper which they have to some extent
lost, are melted in four furnaces, which are placed against the second long
wall in the part of the building between the second and third transverse
walls. This space is sixty-three feet and two palms long, and since each of

23See note 29, p. 540.

BOOK XI. 531

these furnaces occupies thirteen feet, the space which is on the right
side of the first furnace, and on the left of the fourth, are each three feet and
three palms wide, and the distance between the second and third furnace is
six feet. In the middle of each of these three spaces is a door, a foot and
a half wide and six feet high, and the middle one is common to the master
of each of the furnaces. Each furnace has its own chimney, which rises
between the two long walls mentioned above, and is supported by two arches
and a partition wall. The partition wall is between the two furnaces, and
“is five feet long, ten feet high, and two feet thick; in front of it is a pillar
belonging in common to the front arches of the furnace on either side, which
is two feet and as many palms thick, three feet and a half wide. The front
arch reaches from this common pillar to another pillar that is common to the
side arch of the same furnace ; this arch on the right spans from the second
long wall to the same pillar, which is two feet and as many palms wide and
thick at the bottom. The interior of the front arch is nine feet and a palm
wide, and eight feet high at its highest point ; the interior of the arch which
is on the right side, is five feet and a palm wide, and of equal height to the
other, and both the arches are built of the same height as the partition wall.
Imposed upon these arches and the partition wall are the walls of the chimney ;
these slope upward, and thus contract, so that at the upper part, where the
_ fumes are emitted, the opening is eight feet in length, one foot and three
palms in width. The fourth wall of the chimney is built vertically upon the
second long wall. As the partition wall is common to the two furnaces, so its
superstructure is common to the two chimneys. In this sensible manner
the chimney is built. At the front each furnace is six feet two palms long,
and three feet two palms wide, and a cubit high; the back of each furnace
is against the second long wall, the front being open. The first furnace is open
and sloping at the right side, so that the slags may be drawn out; the left
side is against the partition wall, and has a little wall built of bricks cemented
together with lute ; this little wall protects the partition wall from injury by
the fire. On the contrary, the second furnace has the left side open and
the right side is against the partition wall, where also it has its own little wall
which protects the partition wall from the fire. The front of each furnace is
built of rectangular rocks ; the interior of it is filled up with earth. Then in
each of the furnaces at the rear, against the second long wall, is an aperture
through an arch at the back, and in these are fixed the copper pipes. Each
furnace has a round pit, two feet and as many palms wide, built three feet
away from the partition wall. Finally, under the pit of the furnace, at a
depth of a cubit, is the hidden receptacle for moisture, similar to the others,
whose vent penetrates through the second long wall and slopes upward to
the right from the first furnace, and to the left from the second. If copper
is to be made the next day, then the master cuts out the crucible with a
spatula, the blade of which is three digits wide and as many palms long, the
iron handle being two feet long and one and a half digits in diameter ; the
wooden handle inserted into it is round, five feet long and two digits
in diameter. Then, with another cutting spatula, he makes the crucible

532 BOOK XI.

smooth ; the blade of this spatula is a palm wide and two palms long; its
handle, partly of iron, partly of wood, is similar in every respect to the first
one. Afterward he throws pulverised clay and charcoal into the crucible, pours
water over it, and sweeps it over with a broom into which a stick is fixed.
Then immediately he throws into the crucible a powder, made of two
wheelbarrowsful of sifted charcoal dust, as many wheelbarrowsful of

MOMMA

Z

YA,
gy
Z

Z
7,
Z

(f

\

A—HEARTH OF THE FURNACE. B—CuHIMNEY. C—COMMON PILLAR. D—OTHER PILLARS.
THE PARTITION WALL IS BEHIND THE COMMON PILLAR AND NOT TO BE SEEN. E—ARCHES.
F—LITTLE WALLS WHICH PROTECT THE PARTITION WALL FROM INJURY BY THE FIRE.
G—CruciBLEs. H—SECOND LONG WALL. I—Door. K—Spatura. L—THE OTHER
SPATULA. M—THE BROOM IN WHICH IS INSERTED A STICK. N—PEsTLES. O—WoOODEN
MALLET. P-——PLATE. Q—STONES. R—TIRON ROD.
pulverised clay likewise sifted, and six basketsful of river sand which has
passed through a very fine sieve. This powder, like that used by smelters,
is sprinkled with water and moistened before it is put into the crucible, so
that it may be fashioned by the hands into shapes similar to snowballs.
When it has been put in, the master first kneads it and makes it smooth with
his hands, and then pounds it with two wooden pestles, each of which is a
cubit long ; each pestle has a round head at each end, but one of these is
a palm in diameter, the other three digits ; both are thinner in the middle,

so that they may be held in the hand. Then he again throws moistened

BOOK XI. 533

powder into the crucible, and again makes it smooth with his hands, and
kneads it with his fists and with the pestles; then, pushing upward and
pressing with his fingers, he makes the edge of the crucible smooth. After the
crucible has been made smooth, he sprinkles in dry charcoal dust, and again
pounds it with the same pestles, at first with the narrow heads, and afterward
with the wider ones. Then he pounds the crucible with a wooden mallet
two feet long, both heads of which are round and three digits in diameter ;
its wooden handle is two palms long, and one and a half digits in diameter.
Finally, he throws into the crucible as much pure sifted ashes as both hands
can hold, and pours water into it, and, taking an old linen rag, he smears
the crucible over with the wet ashes. The crucible is round and sloping. If
copper is to be made from the best quality of ‘“‘ dried’ cakes, it is made two
feet wide and one deep, but if from other cakes, it is made a cubit wide and
two palms deep. The master also has an iron band curved at both ends,
two palms long and as many digits wide, and with this he cuts off the edges
of the crucible if they are higher than is necessary. The copper pipe is
inclined, and projects three digits from the wall, and has its upper end and
both sides smeared thick with lute, that it may not be burned ; but the under-
side of the pipe is smeared thinly with lute, for this side reaches almost to the
edge of the crucible, and when the crucible is full the molten copper touches
it. The wall above the pipe is smeared over with lute, lest that should be
damaged. He does the same to the other side of an iron plate, which is a
foot and three palms long and a foot high; this stands on stones near the
crucible at the side where the hearth slopes, in order that the slag may run
out under it. Others do not place the plates upon stones, but cut out
of the plate underneath a small piece, three digits long and three digits
wide ; lest the plate should fall, it is supported by an iron rod fixed in the
wall at a height of two palms and the same number of digits, and it projects
from the wall three palms.

Then with an iron shovel, whose wooden handle is six feet long, he
throws live charcoal into the crucible; or else charcoal, kindled by means
of a few live coals, is added to them. Over the live charcoal he lays “‘ dried ”’
cakes, which, if they were of copper of the first quality, weigh all together
three centumpondia, or three and a half centwmpondia; but if they were
of copper of the second quality, then two and a half centumpondia ; if they
were of the third quality, then two centwmpondia only ; but if they were
of copper of very superior quality, then they place upon it six centumpondia,
and in this case they make the crucible wider and deeper.24 The lowest
“ dried ”’ cake is placed at a distance of two palms from the pipe, the rest at
a greater distance, and when the lower ones are melted the upper ones fall
down and get nearer to the pipe; if they do not fall down they must
be pushed with a shovel. The blade of the shovel is a foot long, three palms
and two digits wide, the iron part of the handle is two palms long, the

*4Assuming Roman weights: 2 centumpondia = 141.3 lbs.
24 Me Se L705
3 5 an)! QIT.9...,3
34 sn = 248.2 ,,
6 ” = 423-9 »

534 | BOOK XI.

wooden part nine feet. Round about the “dried’’ cakes are placed large
long pieces of charcoal, and in the pipe are placed medium-sized pieces.
When all these things have been arranged in this manner, the fire must be
more violently excited by the blast from the bellows. When the copper is
melting and the coals blaze, the master pushes an iron bar into the middle
of them in order that they may receive the air, and that the flame can force
its way out. This pointed bar is two and a half feet long, and its wooden
handle four feet long. When the cakes are partly melted, the master, passing
out through the door, inspects the crucible through the bronze pipe, and if he
should find that too much of the “slag” is adhering to the mouth of the pipe,
and thus impeding the blast of the bellows, he inserts the hooked iron bar
into the pipe through the nozzle of the bellows, and, turning this about the
mouth of the pipe, he removes the “slags’’ from it. The hook on this bar
is two digits high ; the iron part of the handle is three feet long ; the wooden
part is the same number of palms long. Now it is time to insert the bar
under the iron plate, in order that the “slags’’ may flow out. When the
cakes, being all melted, have run into the crucible, he takes out a sample of
copper with the third round bar, which is made wholly of iron, and is three feet
long, a digit thick, and has asteel point lest its pores should absorb the copper. ~

WW Z NSD S

The

4,

if

SSS

YY

Li

YUU

SSS

Ui

S
N

Ya

Li

rg

A—PoINTED BAR. B—THIN COPPER LAYER. C—Anvit. D—Hammer.

BOOK XI. 535

When he has compressed the bellows, he introduces this bar as quickly as
possible into the crucible through the pipe between the two nozzles, and
takes out samples two, three, or four times, until he finds that the copper is

perfectly refined. If the copper is good it adheres easily to the bar, and

two samples suffice; if it is not good, then many are required. It is
necessary to smelt it in the crucible until the copper adhering to the bar is
seen to be of a brassy colour, and if the upper as well as the lower part of
the thin layer of copper may be easily broken, it signifies that the copper
is perfectly melted; he places the point of the bar on a small iron anvil,
and chips off the thin layer of copper from it with a hammer.*®

If the copper is not good, the master draws off the “slags” twice, or
three times if necessary—the first time when some of the cakes have been
melted, the second when all have melted, the third time when the copper has
been heated for some time. If the copper was of good quality, the ‘‘slags”’
are not drawn off before the operation is finished, but at the time they are to be
drawn off, he depresses the bar over both bellows, and places over both a
stick, a cubit long and a palm wide, half cut away at the upper part, so that it
may pass under the iron pin fixed at the back in the perforated wood. This
he does likewise when the copper has been completely melted. Then the
assistant removes the iron plate with the tongs; these tongs are four feet
three palms long, their jaws are about a foot in length, and their straight part
measures two palms and three digits, and the curved a palm and a digit.
The same assistant, with the iron shovel, throws and heaps up the larger
pieces of charcoal into that part of the hearth which is against the little wall
which protects the other wall from injury by fire, and partly extinguishes
them by pouring water over them. The master, with a hazel stick inserted

*6This description of refining copper in an open hearth by oxidation with a blast and

“ poling ’’—the gaarmachen of the Germans—is so accurate, and the process is so little changed
in some parts of Saxony, that it might have been written in the 2oth century instead of
the 16th. The best account of the old practice in Saxony after Agricola is to be found in
Schliiter’s Hiitte Werken (Braunschweig, 1738, Chap. cxvii.). The process has largely been
displaced by electrolytic methods, but is still in use in most refineries as a step in electrolytic
work. It may he unnecessary to repeat that the process is one of subjecting the molten mass
of impure metal to a strong and continuous blast, and as a result, not only are the impurities
to a considerable extent directly oxidized and taken off as a slag, but also a consider-
_ able amount of copper is turned into cuprous oxide. This cuprous oxide mostly melts and
diffuses through the metallic copper, and readily parting with its oxygen to the impurities
further facilitates their complete oxidation. The blast is continued until the impurities are
practically eliminated, and at this stage the molten metal contains a great deal of dissolved
cuprous oxide, which must be reduced. This is done by introducing a billet of green wood
(“‘ poling ’’), the dry distillation of which generates large quantities of gases, which reduce the
oxide. The state of the metal is even to-day in some localities tested by dipping into it the
point of an iron rod; if it be at the proper state the adhering copper has a net-like appearance,
should be easily loosened from the rod by dipping in water, is of a reddish-copper colour
and should be quite pliable ; if the metal is not yet refined, the sample is thick, smooth, and
detachable with difficulty ; if over-refined, it is thick and brittle. By allowing water to run
on to the surface of the molten metal, thin cakes are successively formed and taken off. These
cakes were the article known to commerce over several centuries as “rosetta copper.” The
first few cakes are discarded as containing impurities or slag, and if the metal be of good
quality the cakes are thin and of ared colour. Their colour and thinness, therefore, become a
criterion of purity. The cover of charcoal or charcoal dust maintained upon the surface of
the metal tended to retard oxidation, but prevented volatilization and helped to secure the
impurities as a slag instead. Karsten (Archiv., 1st series, p. 46) gives several analyses of the

536 BOOK XI.

into the crucible, stirs it twice. Afterward he draws off the slags with a
rabble, which consists of an iron blade, wide and sharp, and of alder-wood ;
the blade is a digit and a half in width and three feet long ; the wooden handle
inserted in its hollow part is the same number of feet long, and the alder-wood
in which the blade is fixed must have the figure of a rhombus; it must be
three palms and a digit long, a palm and two digits wide, and a palm thick.
Subsequently he takes a broom and sweeps the charcoal dust and small coal
over the whole of the crucible, lest the copper should cool before it flows
together ; then, with a third rabble, he cuts off the slags which may adhere
to the edge of the crucible. The blade of this rabble is two palms long and
a palm and one digit wide, the iron part of the handle is a foot and three palms
long, the wooden part six feet. Afterward he again draws off the slags
from the crucible, which the assistant does not quench by pouring water
upon them, as the other slags are usually quenched, but he sprinkles over
them a little water and allows them to cool. If the copper should bubble, ©
he presses down the bubbles with the rabble. Then he pours water on the wall
and the pipes, that it may flow down warm into the crucible, for, the
copper, if cold water were to be poured over it while still hot, would spatter
about. If astone, or a piece of lute or wood, or a damp coal should then fall
into it, the crucible would vomit out all the copper with a loud noise like
thunder, and whatever it touches it injures and sets on fire. Subsequently he |
lays a curved board with a notch in it over the front part of the crucible ; it
is two feet long, a palm and two digits wide, and a digit thick. Then
the copper in the crucible should be divided into cakes with an iron wedge-
shaped bar ; this is three feet long, two digits wide, and steeled on the end
for the distance of two digits, and its wooden handle is three feet long. He
places this bar on the notched board, and, driving it into the copper, moves

slag from refining “dried” copper, showing it to contain from 51.7 to 67.4% lead oxide, 6.2
to 19.2% cuprous oxide, and 21.4 to 23.9 silica (from the furnace bottoms), with minor quantities
of iron, antimony, etc. The “bubbles” referred to by Agricola were apparently the
shower of copper globules which takes place upon the evolution of sulphur dioxide, due to the
reaction of the cuprous oxide upon any remaining sulphide of copper when the mass begins to
cool.

HistoricaL Note.—It is impossible to say how the Ancients refined copper, beyond
the fact that they often re-smelted it. | Such notes as we can find are set out in the note on —
copper smelting (note 42, p. 402). The first authentic reference to poling is in Theophilus
(1150 to 1200 A.D., Hendrie’s translation, p. 313), which shows a very good understanding
of this method of refining copper :—‘‘ Of the Purification of Copper. Take an iron dish of
“the size you wish, and line it inside and out with clay strongly beaten and mixed, and it is
“carefully dried. Then place it before a forge upon the coals, so that when the bellows act
‘upon it the wind may issue partly within and partly above it, and not belowit. And very
‘‘ small coals being placed round it, place the copper in it equally, and add over it a heap of
“coals. When by blowing a long time this has become melted, uncover it and cast immedi-
“ately fine ashes of coals over it, and stir it with a thin and dry piece of wood as if mixing it,
‘and you will directly see the burnt lead adhere to these ashes like a glue, which being cast
“out again superpose coals, and blowing for a long time, as at first, again uncover it, and
“then do as you did before. You do this until at length by cooking it you can withdraw the
“lead entirely. Then pour it over the mould which you have prepared for this, and you will
“thus prove if it be pure. Hold it with the pincers, glowing as it is, before it has become
“cold, and strike it with a large hammer strongly over the anvil, and if it be broken or split
“you must liquefy it anew as before. If, however, it should remain sound, you will cool it in
“water, and you cook other (copper) in the same manner.” _Biringuccio (11, 8) in 1540
describes the process briefly, but omits the poling, an essential in the production of malleable
copper.

BOOK XI. 537

Palin’

ait TIN,

wy sagan = es Fy ar
‘lll = lt

- SIT : “oa I
Pm El gn tt

> oa tO

hie.

Gubitrsaraagrereee

TUTTLE

ANIA)

1) ie) Daa PDDD eer seed DD

Lh

y wy fey

A—CruciB_tE. B—Boarp. C—WEDGE-SHAPED BAR. D—CAKES OF COPPER MADE BY
SEPARATING THEM WITH THE WEDGE-SHAPED BAR. E—Toncs. F—Tup.

538 BOOK XI.

it forward and back, and by this means the water flows into the vacant
space in the copper, and he separates the cake from the rest of the mass.
If the copper is not perfectly smelted the cakes will be too thick, and can-
not be taken out of the crucible easily. Each cake is afterward seized by
the assistant with the tongs and plunged into the water in the tub; the first
one is placed aside so that the master may re-melt it again immediately, for,
since some “slags ”’ adhere to it, it is not as perfect as the subsequent ones ;
indeed, if the copper is not of good quality, he places the first two cakes aside.
Then, again pouring water over the wall and the pipes, he separates out the
second cake, which the assistant likewise immerses in water and places on
the ground together with the others separated out in the same way, which
he piles upon them. These, if the copper was of good quality, should be
thirteen or more in number ; if it was not of good quality, then fewer. If the
copper was of good quality, this part of the operation, which indeed is dis-
tributed into four parts, is accomplished by the master in two hours; if of
mediocre quality, in two and a half hours ; if of bad quality, in three. The
“dried’’ cakes are re-melted, first in the first crucible and then in the
second. The assistant must, as quickly as possible, quench all the cakes
with water, after they have been cut out of the second crucible. Afterward
with the tongs he replaces in its proper place the iron plate which was in front
of the furnace, and throws the charcoal back into the crucible with a shovel.
Meanwhile the master, continuing his work, removes the wooden stick from
the bars of the bellows, so that in re-melting the other cakes he may accom-
plish the third part of his process ; this must be carefully done, for if a particle
from any iron implement should by chance fall into the crucible, or should
be thrown in by any malevolent person, the copper could not be made until
the iron had been consumed, and therefore double labour would have to be
expended upon it. Finally, the assistant extinguishes all the glowing coals,
and chips off the dry lute from the mouth of the copper pipe with a hammer ;
one end of this hammer is pointed, the other round, and it has a wooden handle
five feet long. Because there is danger that the copper would be scattered if
the pompholyx and spodos, which adhere to the walls and the hood erected
upon them, should fall into the crucible, he cleans them off in the meantime.
Every week he takes the copper flowers out of the tub, after having poured off
the water, for these fall into it from the cakes when they are quenched.?®

26Pompholyx and spodos were impure zinc oxides (see note 26, p. 394).

The copper flowers were no doubt cupric oxide. They were used by the Ancients for
medicinal purposes. Dioscorides (Vv, 48) says: “‘ Of flowers of copper, which some call the
“scrapings of old nails, the best is friable ; it is gold-coloured when rubbed, is like millet in
“shape and size, is moderately bright, and somewhat astringent. It should not be mixed
‘‘ with copper filings, with which it is often adulterated. But this deception is easily detected,
“for when bitten in the teeth the filings are malleable. It (the flowers) is made when the
“copper fused in a furnace has run into the receptacle through the spout pertaining to it,
“‘ for then the workmen engaged in this trade cleanse it from dirt and pour clear water over it
“in order to cool it; from this sudden condensation the copper spits and throws out the
“aforesaid flowers.” Pliny (xxxiv, 24) says: “The flower, too, of copper (@ris flos) is
“used in medicine. This is made by fusing copper, and then removing it to another furnace,
“where the repeated blast makes the metal separate into small scales like millet, known as
“flowers. These scales also fall off when the cakes of metal are cooled in water ; they become
“red, too, like the scales of copper known as ‘ lepis,’ by use of which the flowers of copper are
“adulterated, it being also sold for it. These are made when hammering the nails that are

BOOK XI. | 539

The bellows which this master uses differ in size from the others, for the
boards are seven and a half feet long; the back part is three feet wide ;
the front, where the head is joined on is a foot, two palms and as many digits.
The head is a cubit and a digit long ; the back part of it is a cubit and a
palm wide, and then becomes gradually narrower. The nozzles of the bellows
are bound together by means of an iron chain, controlled by a thick
bar, one end of which penetrates into the ground against the back of the long
wall, and the other end passes under the beam which is laid upon the
foremost perforated beams. These nozzles are so placed in a copper pipe
that they are at a distance of a palm from the mouth ; the mouth should be
made three digits in diameter, that the air may be violently expelled through
this narrow aperture.

There now remain the liquation thorns, the ash-coloured copper, the
“slags,” and the cadmia.?” Liquation cakes are made from thorns in the
following manner.*® There are taken three-quarters of a centumpondium of
thorns, which have their origin from the cakes of copper-lead alloy when
lead-silver is liquated, and as many parts of a centumpondium of the thorns
derived from cakes made from once re-melted thorns by the same method,
and to them are added a centumpondium of de-silverized lead and half a
centumpondtum of hearth-lead. If there is in the works plenty of litharge, it
is substituted for the de-silverized lead. One and a half centumpondia of
litharge and hearth-lead is added to the same weight of primary thorns,
and half a centumpondium of thorns which have their origin from liquation
cakes composed of thorns twice re-melted by the same method (tertiary
thorns), and a fourth part of a centumpondium of thorns which are pro-

“made from the cakes of copper. All these methods are carried on in the works of Cyprus ;
“the difference between these substances is that the sguamae (copper scales) are detached from
““ hammering the cakes, while the flower falls off spontaneously.” Agricola (De Nat. Fos.,
Pp. 352) notes that “flowers of copper (flos @ris) have the same properties as ‘roasted
** copper.’ ”’

27It seems scarcely necessary to discuss in detail the complicated “‘ flow scheme”’ of the
various minor bye-products. They are all re-introduced into the liquation circuit, and thereby
are created other bye-products of the same kind ad infinitum. Further notes are given on:—

Liquation thorns .. -» Note 28.
Slags .. An s ig as ote
Ash-coloured copper my 5. 20:
Concentrates vy ae ret
Cadmia ae 32

There are no data given, either by Agricola or the later authors, which allow satis-
factory calculation of the relative quantities of these products. A rough estimate from the
data given in previous notes would indicate that in one liquation only about 70% of the
original copper came out as refined copper, and that about 70% of the original lead would go
to the cupellation furnace, 7.e., about 30% of the original metal sent to the blast furnace
would go into the “thorns,” “slags,’’ and ‘“‘ash-coloured copper.’’ The ultimate losses
were very great, as given before (p. 491), they probably amounted to 25% of the silver, 9%
copper, and 16% of the lead.

*8There were the following classes of thorns :—

Ist. From liquation.
and. From drying.
3rd. From cupellation.

_In a general way, according to the later authors, they were largely lead oxide, and
contained from 5% to 20% cuprous oxide. If a calculation be made backward from the
products given as the result of the charge described, it would appear that in this case they must
have contained at least one-fifth copper. The silver in these liquation cakes would run about
24 ozs. per ton, in the liquated lead about 36 ozs. per ton, and in the liquation thorns 24 ozs.
per ton. The extraction into the liquated lead would be about 80% of the silver.

540 BOOK XI.

duced when the exhausted liquation cakes are ‘“‘ dried.”” By both methods
one single liquation cake is made from three centumpondia. In this manner
the smelter makes every day fifteen liquation cakes, more or less ; he takes
great care that the metallic substances, from which the first liquation cake is
made, flow down properly and in due order into the fore-hearth, before the
material of which the subsequent cake is to be made. Five of these liquation
cakes are put simultaneously into the furnace in which silver-lead is liquated
from copper, they weigh almost fourteen centumpondia, and the “slags”
made therefrom usually weigh quite a centumpondium. In all the liquation
cakes together there is usually one bra and nearly two unciae of silver, and —
in the silver-lead which drips from those cakes, and weighs seven and a half
centumpondia, there is in each an uncia and a half of silver. In each of the
three centumpondia of liquation thorns there is almost an wncia of silver, and
in the two centumpondia and a quarter of exhausted liquation cakes there
is altogether one and a half wnciae ; yet this varies greatly for each variety of
thorns, for in the thorns produced from primary liquation cakes made of
copper and lead when silver-lead is liquated from the copper, and those
produced in “ drying”’ the exhausted liquation cakes, there are almost two
unctae of silver; in the others not quite an wncia. There are other thorns
besides, of which I will speak a little further on.

Those in the Carpathian Mountains who make liquation cakes from the
copper “bottoms” which remain after the upper part of the copper is
divided from the lower, in the furnace similar to an oven, produce thorns when
the poor or mediocre silver-lead is liquated from the copper. These, together
with those made of cakes of re-melted thorns, or made with re-melted litharge,
are placed in a heap by themselves; but those that are made from cakes
melted from hearth-lead are placed in a heap separate from the first, and
likewise those produced from “ drying ”’ the exhausted liquation cakes are
placed separately ; from these thorns liquation cakes are made. From the
first heap they take the fourth part of a centwmpondium, from the second
the same amount, from the third a centwmpondium,—to which thorns are
added one and a half centumpondia of litharge and half a centumpondium of
hearth-lead, and from these, melted in the blast furnace, a liquation cake is
made ; each workman makes twenty such cakes every day. But of theirs
enough has been said for the present ; I will return to ours.

The ash-coloured copper 2® which is chipped off, as I have stated, from
the “ dried” cakes, used some years ago to be mixed with the thorns produced
from liquation of the copper-lead alloy, and contained in themselves, equally
with the first, two unciae of silver ; but now it is mixed with the concentrates
washed from the accretions and the other material. The inhabitants of the
Carpathian Mountains melt this kind of copper in furnaces in which are re-
melted the “slags” which flow out when the copper is refined; but as this
soon melts and flows down out of the furnace, two workmen are required for

*°The “‘ash-coloured copper” is a cuprous oxide, containing some 3% lead oxide;
and if Agricola means they contained two unciae of silver to the centumpondium, then they
ran about 48 ozs. per ton, and would contain much more silver than the mass.

BOOK XI. 541

the work of smelting, one of whom smelts, while the other takes out the
thick cakes from the forehearth. These cakes are only “dried,” and from
the “ dried” cakes copper is again made.

The “slags 8° are melted continually day and night, whether they have
been drawn off from the alloyed metals with a rabble, or whether they adhered
to the forehearth to the thickness of a digit and made it smaller and
were taken off with spatulas. In this manner two or three liquation cakes
are made, and afterward much or little of the “slag,” skimmed from the
molten alloy of copper and lead, is re-melted. Such liquation cakes should
weigh up to three centwmpondia, in each of which there is half an uncia of
silver. Five cakes are placed at the same time in the furnace in which
argentiferous lead is liquated from copper, and from these are made lead
which contains half an wncia of silver to the centumpondium. The exhausted
liquation cakes are laid upon the other baser exhausted liquation cakes, from
both of which yellow copper is made. The base thorns thus obtained are
re-melted with a few baser “slags,” after having been sprinkled with con-
centrates from furnace accretions and other material, and in this manner six
or seven liquation cakes are made, each of which weighs some two centum-
pondia. Five of these are placed at the same time in the furnace in which
silver-lead is liquated from copper; these drip three centumpondia of
lead, each of which contains half an wncia of silver. The basest thorns
thus produced should be re-melted with only a little “slag.” The copper
alloyed with lead, which flows down from the furnace into the fore-
hearth, is poured out with a ladle into oblong copper moulds; these cakes
are “‘dried’’ with base exhausted liquation cakes. The thorns they produce
are added to the base thorns, and they are made into cakes according to the
method I have described. From the ‘ dried” cakes they make copper, of
which some add a small portion to the best ‘‘ dried’”’ cakes when copper is
made from them, in order that by mixing the base copper with the good it
may be sold without loss. The “slags,” if they are utilisable, are re-melted
a second and a third time, the cakes made from them are “ dried,” and from
the “ dried ”’ cakes is made copper, which is mixed with the good copper. The
“slags,” drawn off by the master who makes copper out of “dried” cakes,
are sifted, and those which fall through the sieve into a vessel placed under-
neath are washed ; those which remain in it are emptied into a wheelbarrow
and wheeled away to the blast furnaces, and they are re-melted together
with other “slags,” over which are sprinkled the concentrates from washing
the slags or furnace accretions made at this time. The copper which flows out

*°There are three ig 8 **slags”’ mentioned—
Ist. Slag from “leading.”
and. Slag from “ drying.”
3rd. Slag from refining the copper.
From the analyses quoted by various authors these ran from 52% to 85% lead oxide,
5% to 20% cuprous oxide, and considerable silica from the furnace bottoms. They were
reduced in the main into liquation cakes, although Agricola mentions instances of the
metal reduced from “ slags” being taken directly to the “drying” furnace. Such liquation
cakes would Tun very low in silver, and at the values given only averaged 12 ozs. per ton;
therefore the liquated lead running the same value as the cakes, or less than half that of the
poor ” lead mentioned in Note 17, p. 512, could not have been cupelled directly.

37

542 BOOK XI.

of the furnace into the forehearth, is likewise dipped out with a ladle into
oblong copper moulds; in this way nine or ten cakes are made, which are
“ dried,’ together with bad exhausted liquation cakes, and from these
“dried ’”’ cakes yellow*! copper is made.

The cadmia,® as it is called by us, is made from the “ slags” which the
master, who makes copper from “ dried” cakes, draws off together with other
re-melted base ‘“‘slags’’; for, indeed, if the copper cakes made from such
“slags” are broken, the fragments are called cadmia ; from this and yellow
copper is made caldartum copper in two ways. For either two parts of cadmia
are mixed with one of yellow copper in the blast furnaces, and melted ; or, on
the contrary, two parts of yellow copper with one of cadmia, so that the
cadmia and yellow copper may be well mixed ; and the copper which flows down
from the furnace into the forehearth is poured out with a ladle into oblong
copper moulds heated beforehand. These moulds are sprinkled over with char-
coal dust before the caldarium copper is to be poured into them, and the same
dust is sprinkled over the copper when it is poured in, lest the cadmia and
yellow copper should freeze before they have become well mixed. With a
piece of wood the assistant cleanses each cake from the dust, when it is
turned out of the mould. Then he throws it into the tub containing hot water,
for the caldarium copper is finer if quenched in hot water. But as I have
so often made mention of the oblong copper moulds, I must now speak of
them a little ; they are a foot and a palm long, the inside is three palms anda
digit wide at the top, and they are rounded at the bottom.

The concentrates are of two kinds—precious and base.** The first are
obtained from the accretions of the blast furnace, when liquation cakes are
made from copper and lead, or from precious liquation thorns, or from the
better quality “slags,’’ or from the best grade of concentrates, or from the
sweepings and bricks of the furnaces in which exhausted liquation cakes are
“dried ”’; all of these things are crushed and washed, as I explained in Book
VIII. The base concentrates are made from accretions formed when cakes
are cast from base thorns or from the worst quality of slags. The smelter
who makes liquation cakes from the precious concentrates, adds to them
three wheelbarrowsful of litharge and four barrowsful of hearth-lead and
one of ash-coloured copper, from all of which nine or ten liquation cakes
are melted out, of which five at a time are placed in the furnace in which
silver-lead is liquated from copper ; a centwmpondium of the lead which drips
from these cakes contains one uncia of silver. The liquation thorns are

%1See Note 16, p. 511, for discussion of yellow and caldarium copper.

®°This cadmia is given in the Glossary and the German translation as kobelt. A dis-
cussion of this substance is given in the note on p. 112 ; and it is sufficient to state here that in
Agricola’s time the metal cobalt was unknown, and the substances designated cadmia and:
cobaltum were arsenical-cobalt-zinc minerals. A metal made from “slag” from refining,
together with “ base”’ thorns, would be very impure ; for the latter, according to the paragraph
on concentrates a little later on, would contain the furnace accretions, and would thus be
undoubtedly zincky. It is just possible that the term kobelt was used by the German smelters
at this time in the sense of an epithet—“ black devil” (see Note 21, p. 214).

83T¢ is somewhat difficult to see exactly the meaning of base (vile) and precious
(prectosum) in this connection. While ‘‘ base’ could mean impure, ‘ precious” could hardly
mean pure, and while ‘ precious’”’ could mean high value in silver, the reverse does not seem
entirely apropos. It is possible that ‘‘ bad”’ and “‘ good’ would be more appropriate terms.

Ay

es

SS
XS
S

Mor

)

“ON EY

A—FuRNACE. B—FOREHEARTH. C—OBLONG MOULDS.

placed apart by themselves, of which one basketful is mixed with the precious
thorns to be re-melted. The exhausted liquation cakes are “ dried’’ at the
same time as other good exhausted liquation cakes.

The thorns which are drawn off from the lead, when it is separated from
silver in the cupellation furnace**, and the hearth-lead which remains in the
crucible in the middle part of the furnaces, together with the hearth material
which has become defective and has absorbed silver-lead, are all melted
together with a little slag in the blast furnaces. The lead, or rather the
silver-lead, which flows from the furnace into the fore-hearth, is poured out
into copper moulds such as are used by the -refiners; a centumpondium of
such lead contains four unciae of silver, or, if the hearth was defective, it
contains more. A small portion of this material is added to the copper and
lead when liquation cakes are made from them, if more were to be added
the alloy would be much richer than it should be, for which reason the wise

: **The skimmings from the molten lead in the early stages of cupellation have been
discussed in Note 28, p. 539. They are probably called thorns here because of the large amount
of copper in them. The lead from liquation would contain 2% to 3% of copper, and this
would be largely recovered in these skimmings, although there would be some copper in the
furnace bottoms—hearth-lead—and the litharge. These “thorns” are apparently fairly
rich, four unciae to the centumpondium being equivalent to about 97 ozs. per ton, and they
are only added to low-grade liquation material.

544 BOOK XI.

foreman of the works mixes these thorns with other precious thorns. The
hearth-lead which remains in the middle of the crucible, and the hearth
material which absorbs silver-lead, is mixed with other hearth-lead which
remains in the cupellation furnace crucible; and yet some cakes, made rich
in this manner, may be placed again in the cupellation furnaces, together
with the rest of the silver-lead cakes which the refiner has made.

The inhabitants of the Carpathian Mountains, if they have an abundance
of finely crushed copper*® or lead either made from “slags,’”’ or collected
from the furnace in which the exhausted liquation cakes are dried, or
litharge, alloy them in various ways. The “‘first’’ alloy consists of two
centumpondia of lead melted out of thorns, litharge, and thorns made
from hearth-lead, and of half a centuwmpondium each of lead collected in
the furnace in which exhausted liquation cakes are “ dried,” and of copper
minutum, and from these are made liquation cakes; the task of the smelter is
finished when he has made forty liquation cakes of this kind. The —
“second ”’ alloy consists of two centumpondia of litharge, of one and a
quarter centumpondia of de-silverized lead or lead from “ slags,’’ and of half
a centumpondium of lead made from thorns, and of as much copper minutum.
The ‘“‘third”’ alloy consists of three centuwmpondia of litharge and of half a
centumpondium each of de-silverized lead, of lead made from thorns, and of
copper minutum contusum. Liquation cakes are made from all these alloys ; the
task of the smelters is finished when they have made thirty cakes.

The process by which cakes are made among the Tyrolese, from which
they separate the silver-lead, I have explained in Book IX.

Silver is separated from iron in the following manner. Equal portions of
iron scales and filings and of stibiwm are thrown into an earthenware crucible
which, when covered with a lid and sealed, is placed in a furnace, into
which air is blown. When this has melted and again cooled, the crucible
is broken ; the button that settles in the bottom of it, when taken out,
is pounded to powder, and the same weight of lead being added, is mixed
and melted in a second crucible; at last this button is placed in a cupel’
and the lead is separated from the silver.**

There are a great variety of methods by which one metal is separated
from other metals, and the manner in which the same are alloyed I have
explained partly in the eighth book of De Natura Fossilium, and partly I will
explain elsewhere. Now I will proceed to the remainder of my subject.

35Particulis aeris tust. Unless this be the fine concentrates from crushing the material
mentioned, we are unable to explain the expression.

86This operation would bring down a button of antimony under an iron matte, by
de-sulphurizing the antimony. It would seem scarcely necessary to add lead before cupel-
lation. This process is given in an assay method, in the Probierbiichlein (folio 31) 50 years
before We Re Metallica : ‘“‘ How to separate silver from iron: Take that silver which is
“in iron plechen (plachmal), pulverize it finely, take the same iron or Plec one part, spiesglasz
“(antimony sulphide) one part, leave them to melt in a crucible placed in a closed windtofen.
“When it is melted, let it cool, break the crucible, chip off the button that is in the bottom,
“and melt it in a crucible with as much lead. Then break the crucible, and seek from the
“button in the cupel, and you will find what silver it contains.”

END OF BOOK XI.

BOOK XII.

= REVIOUSLY I have dealt with the methods of
i) separating silver from copper. There now remains
the portion which treats of solidified juices ; and
whereas they might be considered as alien to things
metallic, nevertheless, the reasons why they should
not be separated from it I have explained in the
second book.

Solidified juices are either prepared from waters
in which nature or art has infused them, or they are
produced from the liquid juices themselves, or from stony minerals. Sagacious
people, at first observing the waters of some lakes to be naturally full of juices
which thickened on being dried up by the heat of the sun and thus became
solidified juices, drew such waters into other places, or diverted them
into low-lying places adjoining hills, so that the heat of the sun should
likewise cause them to condense. Subsequently, because they observed that
in this wise the solidified juices could be made only in summer, and then
not in all countries, but only in hot and temperate regions in which it seldom
rains in summer, they boiled them in vessels over a fire until they began to
thicken. In this manner, at all times of the year, in all regions, even the
coldest, solidified juices could be obtained from solutions of such juices,
whether made by nature or by art. Afterward, when they saw juices
drip from some roasted stones, they cooked these in pots in order to obtain
solidified juices in this wise also. It is worth the trouble to learn the pro-
portions and the methods by which these are made.

I will therefore begin with salt, which is made from water either salty
by nature, or by the labour of man, or else from a solution of salt, or
from lye, likewise salty. Water which is salty by nature, is condensed and
converted into salt in salt-pits by the heat of the sun, or else by the heat
of a fire in pans or pots or trenches. That which is made salty by
art, is also condensed by fire and changed into salt. There should be as
many salt-pits dug as the circumstance of the place permits, but there should
not be more made than can be used, although we ought to make as much
salt as we can sell. The depth of salt-pits should be moderate, and the
bottom should be level, so that all the water is evaporated from the salt by
the heat of the sun. The salt-pits should first be encrusted with salt, so
that they may not suck up the water. The method of pouring or leading
sea-water into salt-pits is very old, and is still in use in many places. The
method is not less old, but less common, to pour well-water into salt-pits, as
was done in Babylon, for which Pliny is the authority, and in Cappadocia,
where they used not only well-water, but also spring-water. In all hot
countries salt-water and lake-water are conducted, poured or carried into
salt-pits, and, being dried by the heat of the sun, are converted into

546 BOOK XII.

salt.1 While the salt-water contained in the salt-pits is being heated by the sun,
if they be flooded with great and frequent showers of rain the evaporation is
hindered. If this happens rarely, the salt acquires a disagreeable? flavour, and
in this case the salt-pits have to be filled with other sweet water.

Salt from sea-water is made in the following manner. Near that part
of the seashore where there is a quiet pool, and there are wide, level plains
which the inundations of the sea do not overflow, three, four, five, or six
trenches are dug six feet wide, twelve feet deep, and six hundred feet long,
or longer if the level place extends for a longer distance ; they are two hundred
feet distant from one another ; between these are three transverse trenches.
Then are dug the principal pits, so that when the water has been raised from ©
the pool it can flow into the trenches, and from thence into the salt-pits,
of which there are numbers on the level ground between the trenches. The
salt-pits are basins dug to a moderate depth; these are banked round with
the earth which was dug in sinking them or in cleansing them, so that between
the basins, earth walls are made a foot high, which retain the water let into
them. The trenches have openings, through which the first basins receive
the water ; these basins also have openings, through which the water flows
again from one into the other. There should be a slight fall, so that the
water may flow from one basin into the other, and can thus be replenished.
All these things having been done rightly and in order, the gate is raised that
opens the mouth of the pool which contains sea-water mixed with rain-water
or river-water ; and thus all of the trenches are filled. Then the gates of the
first basins are opened, and thus the remaining basins are filled with the
water from the first; when this salt-water condenses, all these basins are
incrusted, and thus made clean from earthy matter. Then again the first
basins are filled up from the nearest trench with the same kind of water,
and left until much of the thin liquid is converted into vapour by the heat
of the sun and dissipated, and the remainder is considerably thickened. Then —
their gates being opened, the water passes into the second basins; and
when it has remained there for a certain space of time the gates are opened,
so that it flows into the third basins, where it is all condensed into salt.
After the salt has been taken out, the basins are filled again and again with
sea-water. The salt is raked up with wooden’ rakes and thrown out with
shovels.

Salt-water is also boiled in pans, placed in sheds near the wells from
which it is drawn. Each shed is usually named from some animal or other
thing which is pictured on a tablet nailed to it. The walls of these sheds
are made either from baked earth or from wicker work covered with thick

1The history of salt-making in salt-pans, from sea-water or salt springs, goes further
back than human records. From an historical point of view the real interest attached to
salt lies in the bearing which localities rich in either natural salt or salt springs, have had
upon the movements of the human race. Many ancient trade routes have been due to
them, and innumerable battles have been fought for their possession. Salt has at times
served for currency, and during many centuries in nearly every country has served as a
basis of taxation. These subjects do not, however, come within the scope of this text.
For the quotation from Pliny referred to, see Note 14 below, on bitumen.

*The first edition gives graviorem, the latter editions gratiorem, which latter would
have quite the reverse meaning from the above.

4
te
WY
Ny
eis
feo
ue.
Mh
et
*
he

at
or {J
Misi ah y

\

NN

\

iff
wh
AN

Ty

G—SHOVEL.

BOOK XII.

\ >
aw

S
=
> SS
f Yf
j : |
y's MY, ? :
Uh, "BY, » WBS if. :
i) 2X 28 :
o ss cannnntlen Se
S mT) Vos
> 4 a2 Af
pm Qa ay CH lb ~ N
EAMES EY s :
oR \ :
“\

548 BOOK XII.

mud, although some may be made of stones or bricks. When of brick they
are often sixteen feet high, and if the roof rises twenty-four feet high, then
the walls which are at the ends must be made forty feet high, as likewise
the interior partition walls. The roof consists of large shingles four feet long,
one foot wide, and two digits thick; these are fixed on long narrow planks
placed on the rafters, which are joined at the upper end and slope in opposite
directions. The whole of the under side is plastered one digit thick with
straw mixed with lute; likewise the roof on the outside is plastered one
and a half feet thick with straw mixed with lute, in order that the shed
should not run any risk of fire, and that it should be proof against rain, and
be able to retain the heat necessary for drying the lumps of salt. Each shed
is divided into three parts, in the first of which the firewood and straw are
placed ; in the middle room, separated from the first room by a partition, is
the fireplace on which is placed the caldron. To the right of the caldron is
a tub, into which is emptied the brine brought into the shed by the porters ;
to the left is a bench, on which there is room to lay thirty pieces of salt.
In the third room, which is in the back part of the house, there is made a pile
of clay or ashes eight feet higher than the floor, being the same height as the
bench. The master and his assistants, when they carry away the lumps of
salt from the caldrons, go from the former to the latter. They ascend from
the right side of the caldron, not by steps, but by a slope of earth. At the
top of the end wall are two small windows, and a third is in the roof, through
which the smoke escapes. This smoke, emitted from both the back and the
front of the furnace, finds outlet through a hood through which it makes
its way up to the windows; this hood consists of boards projecting one
beyond the other, which are supported by two small beams of the roof.
Opposite the fireplace the middle partition has an open door eight feet high
and four feet wide, through which there is a gentle draught which drives the
smoke into the last room; the front wall also has a door of the same height
and width. Both of these doors are large enough to permit the firewood or
straw or the brine to be carried in, and the lumps of salt to be carried out ;
these’ doors must be closed when the wind blows, so that the boiling will
not be hindered. Indeed, glass panes which exclude the wind but transmit the
light, should be inserted in the windows in the walls.

They construct the greater part of the fireplace of rock-salt and of clay
mixed with salt and moistened with brine, for such walls are greatly
hardened by the fire. These fireplaces are made eight and a half feet long;
seven and three quarters feet wide, and, if wood is burned in them, nearly
four feet high ; but if straw is burned in them, they are six feet high. An
iron rod, about four feet long, is engaged in a hole in an iron foot, which
stands on the base of the middle of the furnace mouth. This mouth is three
feet in width, and has a door which opens inward; through it they throw
in the straw.

The caldrons are rectangular, eight feet long, seven feet wide, and half a
foot high, and are made of sheets of iron or lead, three feet long and of the
same width, all but two digits. These plates are not very thick, so that the

es eee: cit

BOOK XII. 549

art wna oe Ne hu bee
ee Ml Vo
a
RTT TESS
SETI f i, =
SG UE VON
eS =

=

o * 22 Z r
> aS a a 7 “iy, =
‘i eet EE EF FS
1% - J, 2 : Q

Zale

zs

eee

eed

SLELTS

\
iN
N

N
iy:
x:
WW
\
Ni

Mz

ae tT
Ys, ter

tes

CI

le

mt

WPA

WE: |
Sy,

\ iil

ES

A—SHED. B—PAINTED sicNs. C—First room. D—Mipp1re room. E—Tuirp
ROOM. F—Two LITTLE WINDOWS IN THE END WALL. G—THIRD LITTLE WINDOW IN THE
ROOF. H—WELL. I—WELL oF ANOTHER KIND. K—Casxk. L—Potr. M—ForKEpD
STICKS IN WHICH THE PORTERS REST THE POLE WHEN THEY ARE TIRED.

550 BOOK XII.

water is heated more quickly by the fire, and is boiled away rapidly. The
more salty the water is, the sooner it is condensed into salt. To prevent
the brine from leaking out at the points where the metal plates are fastened
with rivets, the caldrons are smeared over with a cement made of ox-liver
and ox-blood mixed with ashes. On each side of the middle of the furnace
two rectangular posts, three feet long, and half a foot thick and wide are
set into the ground, so that they are distant from each other only one and
a half feet. Each of them rises one and a half feet above the caldron. After
the caldron has been placed on the walls of the furnace, two beams of the
same width and thickness as the posts, but four feet long, are laid on these
posts, and are mortised in so that they shall not fall. There rest trans-
versely upon these beams three bars, three feet long, three digits wide, and
two digits thick, distant from one another one foot. On each of these hang
three iron hooks, two beyond the beams and one in the middle ; these are a
foot long, and are hooked at both ends, one hook turning to the right, the other
to the left. The bottom hook catches in the eye of a staple, whose ends are
fixed in the bottom of the caldron, and the eye projects from it. There are
besides, two longer bars six feet long, one palm wide, and three digits thick,
which pass under the front beam and rest upon the rear beam. At the rear end
of each of the bars there is an iron hook two feet and three digits long, the
lower end of which is bent so as to support the caldron. The rear end of the
caldron does not rest on the two rear corners of the fireplace, but is distant
from the fireplace two thirds of a foot, so that the flame and smoke can escape ;
this rear end of the fireplace is half a foot thick and half a foot higher than
the caldron. This is also the thickness and height of the wall between the
caldron and the third room of the shed, to which it is adjacent. This back
wall is made of clay and ashes, unlike the others which are made of rock-salt.
The caldron rests on the two front corners and sides of the fireplace, and is
cemented with ashes, so that the flames shall not escape. Ifa dipperful
of brine poured into the caldron should flow into all the corners, the caldron
is rightly set upon the fireplace.

The wooden dipper holds ten Roman sextarii, and the cask holds eight
dippers full*. The brine drawn up from the well is poured into such casks
and carried by porters, as I have said before, into the shed and poured into a
tub, and in those places where the brine is very strong it is at once trans-
ferred with the dippers into the caldron. That brine which is less strong is
thrown into a small tub with a deep ladle, the spoon and handle of which
are hewn out of one piece of wood. In this tub rock-salt is placed in order

’The following are approximately the English equivalents :—

Pints. Quarts. Gallons.
1 Cyathus et ae es Mr sOB SF aie ts
3 Cyath = I Quartarius nigh 24
4 Quartari = I Sextarius.. oy LOG.
6 Sextarii = I Congius .. “y BOA ire BOT. ss
16 Sextarit = I Modius .. oa 4) AOS bk ae vf \s RS 2
8 Congit = I Amphora.. 3 PEAT Ie ei me aeO ie) Se

The dipper mentioned would thus hold about one and one quarter gallons, and the cask
ten gallons.

BOOK XII. 551

= = S = = 2 = SS
Fi BiB : <a
F: 5 = 7 2
S a = J ‘\ —— S
ae Sie yr
S = — = "
S 3 # are
2 : os inapennalisataiay z
: fine ss
: Es: @ or.
= — “ Se
soa
Ss A
ao 77 ABN :
J % ——
c/o 2 f) =
HLH ty =
es 2 ‘>
s¢
cy 9 . —
B
1 c F
— F
I G G
: I Cee
F K
bs G

A
-

A—FIREPLACE. B—MovutTH oF FIREPLACE. C—CALDRON. D—PosTs SUNK INTO THE
GROUND. E—Cross-BEAMS. F—SHorTER BARS. G—IRON HOOKS. H—STAPLEs.
I—LONGER BARS. K—IRON ROD BENT TO SUPPORT THE CALDRON.

552 BOOK XII.

that the water should be made more salty, and it is then run off through a
launder which leads into the caldron. From thirty-seven dippersful of brine
the master or his deputy, at Halle in Saxony, makes two cone-shaped pieces
of salt. Each master has a helper, or in the place of a helper his wife assists
him in his work, and, in addition, a youth who throws wood or straw under
the caldron. He, on account of the great heat of the workshop, wears
a straw cap on his head and a breech cloth, being otherwise quite naked.
As soon as the master has poured the first dipperful of brine into the caldron
the youth sets fire to the wood and straw laid under it. If the firewood is
bundles of faggots or brushwood, the salt will be white, but if straw is burned,
then it is not infrequently blackish, for the sparks, which are drawn up with
the smoke into the hood, fall down again into the water and colour it black.

In order to accelerate the condensation of the brine, when the master
has poured in two casks and as many dippersful of brine, he adds about a
Roman cyathus and a half of bullock’s blood, or of calf’s blood, or buck’s
blood, or else he mixes it into the nineteenth dipperful of brine, in order that
it may be dissolved and distributed into all the corners of the caldron ; in other
places the blood is dissolved in beer. When the boiling water seems to be
mixed with scum, he skims it with a ladle ; this scum, if he be working with
rock-salt, he throws into the opening in the furnace through which the smoke
escapes, and it is dried into rock-salt ; if it be not from rock-salt, he pours
it on to the floor of the workshop. From the beginning to the boiling and
skimming is the work of half-an-hour ; after this it boils down for another
quarter-of-an-hour, after which time it begins to condense into salt. When
it begins to thicken with the heat, he and his helper stir it assiduously with a
wooden spatula, and then he allows it to boil for an hour. After this he pours
in a cyathus and a half of beer. In order that the wind should not blow
into the caldron, the helper covers the front with a board seven and a half
feet long and one foot high, and covers each of the sides with boards three and
three quarters feet long. In order that the front board may hold more
firmly, it is fitted into the caldron itself, and the sideboards are fixed on the
front board and upon the transverse beam. Afterward, when the boards
have been lifted off, the helper places two baskets, two feet high and as many
wide at the top, and a palm wide at the bottom, on the transverse beams,
and into them the master throws the salt with a shovel, taking half-an-hour
to fill them. Then, replacing the boards on the caldron, he allows the brine
to boil for three quarters of an hour. Afterward the salt has again to be
removed with a shovel, and when the baskets are full, they pile up the salt in
heaps.

In different localities the salt is moulded into different shapes. In the
baskets the salt assumes the form of a cone ; it is not moulded in baskets
alone, but also in moulds into which they throw the salt, which are made in

*The salt industry, founded upon salt springs, is still of importance to this city. It
was a salt centre of importance to the Germanic tribes before Charles, the son of Charlemagne,
erected a fortress here in 806. Mention of the salt works is made in the charter by Otto I.,
conveying the place to the Diocese of Magdeburg, in 968.

<p)

BOOK XII.

Spa ia ee rage ye = aa Tee beet As Se

= AN

=a “en

Wea

my hh

ANY

ay
wai

\

F—WIFE.
M—STRAW.

E—YoutTa.
P—TANKARD WHICH CONTAINS BEER.

L—RAKE.

D—MaASTER.
K—HokE.

C—Tus.
I—BASKETs.

B—Cask.
H—Boarbs.
O—BUCKET CONTAINING THE BLOOD.

G—WOODEN SPADE.

A—WOODEN DIPPER.
N—Bowt.

554 BOOK XII.

the likeness of many objects, as for instance tablets. These tablets and
cones are kept in the higher part of the third room of the house, or else on
the flat bench of the same height, in order that they may dry better in the
warm air. In the manner I have described, a master and his helper continue
one after the other, alternately boiling the brine and moulding the salt,
day and night, with the exception only of the annual feast days. No caldron
is able to stand the fire for more than half a year. The master pours in water
and washes it out every week ; when it is washed out he puts straw under
it and pounds it ; new caldrons he washes three times in the first two
weeks, and afterward twice. In this manner the incrustations fall from
the bottom; if they are not cleared off, the salt would have to be made
more slowly over a fiercer fire, which requires more brine and burns the
plates of the caldron. If any cracks make their appearance in the caldron
they are filled up with cement. The salt made during the first two weeks is
not so good, being usually stained by the rust at the bottom where incrusta-
tions have not yet adhered.

Although salt made in this manner is prepared only from the brine of

A—Poot. B—Pots. C—Lapie. D—Pans. E—Toncs.

Pee

BOOK XII. 555

springs and wells, yet it is also possible to use this method in the case of
river-, lake-, and sea-water, and also of those waters which are artificially
salted. For in places where rock-salt is dug, the impure and the broken pieces
are thrown into fresh water, which, when boiled, condenses into salt. Some,
indeed, boil sea-salt in fresh water again, and mould the salt into the little
cones and other shapes.

Some people make salt by another method, from salt water which
flows from hot springs that issue boiling from the earth. They set earthen-
ware pots in a pool of the spring-water, and into them they pour water scooped
up with ladles from the hot spring until they are half full. The perpetual
heat of the waters of the pool evaporates the salt water just as the heat of
the fire does in the caldrons. As soon as it begins to thicken, which happens
when it has been reduced by boiling to a third or more, they seize the pots
with tongs and pour the contents into small rectangular iron pans, which have
also been placed in the pool. The interior of these pans is usually three feet
long, two feet wide, and three digits deep, and they stand on four heavy legs,
so that the water flows freely all round, but not into them. Since the water
flows continuously from the pool through the little canals, and the spring

a

A—Pots. B—Trirpop. C—DEEP LADLE.

556 BOOK XII.

always provides a new and copious supply, always boiling hot, it condenses
the thickened water poured into the pans into salt; this is at once taken
out with shovels, and then the work begins all over again. If the salty water
contains other juices, as is usually the case with hot springs, no salt should
be made from them.

Others boil salt water, and especially sea-water, in large iron pots;
this salt is blackish, for in most cases they burn straw under them. Some
people boil in these pots the brine in which fish is pickled. The salt which
they make tastes and smells of fish.

Sry,
ae,

A—TRENCH. B—VAT INTO WHICH THE SALT WATER FLOWS. C—LADLE. D—SMALL
BUCKET WITH POLE FASTENED INTO IT.

Those who make salt by pouring brine over firewood, lay the wood in
trenches which are twelve feet long, seven feet wide, and two and one half
feet deep, so that the water poured in should not flow out. These trenches
are constructed of rock-salt wherever it is to be had, in order that they should
not soak up the water, and so that the earth should not fall in on the front,
back and sides. As the charcoal is turned into salt at the same time as the

BOOK XII.

A—LarcGE vat. B—Piuc. C—SMALL TUB. D—DEEP LADLE. E—SMALL VAT.
F—CALDRON.

38

558 BOOK XII.

salt liquor, the Spaniards think, as Pliny writes®, that the wood itself turns —

into salt. Oak is the best wood, as its pure ash yields salt ; elsewhere hazel-
wood is lauded. But with whatever wood it be made, this salt is not
greatly appreciated, being black and not quite pure ; on that account this
method of salt-making is disdained by the Germans and Spaniards.
The solutions from which salt is made are prepared from salty earth or
from earth rich in salt and saltpetre. Lye is made from the ashes of reeds
and rushes. The solution obtained from salty earth by boiling, makes salt
only ; from the other, of which I will speak more a little later, salt and salt-
petre are made; and from ashes is derived lye, from which its own salt is
obtained. The ashes, as well as the earth, should first be put into a large
vat ; then fresh water should be poured over the ashes or earth, and it should
be stirred for about twelve hours with a stick, so that it may dissolve the
salt. Then the plug is pulled out of the large vat ; the solution of salt or the
lye is drained into a small tub and emptied with ladles into small vats ;
finally, such a solution is transferred into iron or lead caldrons and boiled,
until the water having evaporated, the juices are condensed into salt. The
above are the various methods for making salt. (Illustration p. 557.)

Nitrum’ is usually made from nitrous waters, or from solutions or from.

lye. In the same manner as sea-water or salt-water is poured into salt-pits
and evaporated by the heat of the sun and changed into salt, so the nitrous
Nile is led into uétvum pits and evaporated by the heat of the sun and con-

5Pliny XxXxI., 39-40. ‘‘In the Gallic provinces in Germany they pour salt water
“upon burning wood. The Spaniards in a certain place draw the brine from wells, which
“they call Muria. They indeed think that the wood turns to salt, and that the oak is the
“best, being the kind which is itself salty. Elsewhere the hazel is praised. Thus the char-
“coal even is turned into salt when it is steeped in brine. Whenever salt is made with wood it
** is black.”

®We have elsewhere in this book used the word “soda” for the Latin term nitrum,
because we believe as used by Agricola it was always soda, and because some confusion
of this term with its modern adaptation for saltpetre (nitre) might arise in the mind of the
reader. Fortunately, Agricola usually carefully mentions other alkalis, such as the product
from lixiviation of ashes, separately from his mitrum. In these paragraphs, however, he has
soda and potash hopelessly mixed, wherefore we have here introduced the Latin term.
The actual difference between potash and soda—the mitrum of the Ancients, and the alkali
of Geber (and the glossary of Agricola), was not understood for two hundred years after
Agricola, when Duhamel made his well-known determinations; and the isolation of sodium
and potassium was, of course, still later by fifty years. If the reeds and rushes described
in this paragraph grew near the sea, the salt from lixiviation would be soda, and likewise
the Egyptian product was soda, but the lixiviation of wood-ash produces only potash; as
seen above, all are termed nitrwm except the first.

HistoricaAL Notes.—The word nitrum, nitron, nitri, neter, nether, or similar
forms, occurs in innumerable ancient writings. Among such references are Jeremiah (I1., 22)
Proverbs (xxXv., 20), Herodotus (11., 86, 87), Aristotle (Prob. 1., 39, De Mirab. 54), Theo-
phrastus (De Igne 435 ed. Heinsii, Hist. Plants 11., 9), Dioscorides (v., 89), Pliny (xrv., 26,
and xxxI., 46). A review of disputations on what salts this term comprised among the
Ancients would itself fill a volume, but from the properties named it was no doubt mostly
soda, more rarely potash, and sometimes both mixed with common salt. There is every
reason to believe from the properties and uses mentioned, that it did not generally com-
prise nitre (saltpetre)—into which superficial error the nomenclature has led many translators.
The preparation by way of burning, and the use of mitrwm for purposes for which we now
use soap, for making glass, for medicines, cosmetics, salves, painting, in baking powder,
for preserving food, embalming, etc., and the descriptions of its taste in ‘‘ nitrous ’? waters,—
all answer for soda and potash, but not for saltpetre. It is possible that the common occur-
rence of saltpetre as an efflorescence on walls might naturally lead to its use, but in any
event its distinguishing characteristics are nowhere mentioned. As sal-ammoniac occurred

5 ee le a ee

ee

TS
a
WO

SQ aren

A—NILE. B—NITRUM-PITS, SUCH AS I CONJECTURE THEM TO BE.?

verted into nitvum. Just as the sea, in flowing of its own will over the soil
of this same Egypt, is changed into salt, so also the Nile, when it overflows
in the dog days, is converted into nitrwm when it flows into the nitrum pits.
The solution from which nitrwm is produced is obtained from fresh water
percolating through nitrous earth, in the same manner as lye is made from
fresh water percolating through ashes of oak or hard oak. Both solutions
are taken out of vats and poured into rectangular copper caldrons, and are
boiled until at last they condense into nitrum.

in the volcanoes in Italy, it also may have been included in the nitrum mentioned. Nitrum
was in the main exported from Egypt, but Theophrastus mentions its production from
wood-ash, and Pliny very rightly states that burned lees of wine (argol) had the nature
of nitrum. Many of the ancient writers understood that it was rendered more caustic by
burning, and still more so by treatment with lime. According to Beckmann (Hist. of Inven-
tions I1., p. 488), the form of the word matron was first introduced into Europe by two
travellers in Egypt, Peter Ballon and Prosper Alpinus, about 1550. The word was intro-
duced into mineralogy by Linnaeus in 1736. In the first instance matron was applied to

_ This wondrous illustration of soda-making from Nile water is no doubt founded upon
Pliny (XxXx1., 46). ‘It is made in almost the same manner as salt, except that sea-water
“is put into salt pans, whereas in the nitrous pans it is water of the Nile ; these, with the
“subsidence of the Nile during the forty days, are impregnated with nitrum.”

560 BOOK XII.

Native as well as manufactured nitrum is mixed in vats with urine
and boiled in the same caldrons ; the decoction is poured into vats in which
are copper wires, and, adhering to them, it hardens and becomes chrysocolla,
which the Moors call borax. Formerly nitrum was compounded with
Cyprian verdigris, and ground with Cyprian copper in Cyprian mortars, as
Pliny writes. Some chrysocolla is made of rock-alum and sal-ammoniac.§

soda and potash in distinction to mtire for saltpetre, and later natron was applied solely to soda.

It is desirable to mention here two other forms of soda and potash which are frequently
mentioned by Agricola. ‘“‘Ashes which wool dyers use’’ (cineres quo infectores lanarum utuntur).—
There is no indication in any of Agricola’s works as to whether this was some special wood-
ash or whether it was the calcined residues from wool washing. The “‘ yolk” or “‘ suint ”’ of
wool, originating from the perspiration of the animal, has long been a source of crude potash.
The water, after washing the wool, is evaporated, and the residue calcined. It contains
about 85% K2zCOs, the remainder being sodium and potassium sulphates. Another reason
for assuming that it was not a wood-ash product, is that these products are separately
mentioned. In either event, whether obtained from wool residues or from lixiviation of
wood-ash, it would be an impure potash. In some methods of wool dyeing, a wash of soda
was first given, so that it is barely possible that this substance was sodium carbonate.

“Salt made from the ashes of musk ivy’’ (sal ex anthyllidis cinere factus,—Glossary.
salalkali). This would be largely potash.

8This paragraph displays hopeless ignorance. Borax was known to Agricola and
greatly used in his time ; it certainly was not made from these compounds, but was imported
from Central Asia. Sal-ammoniac was also known in his time, and was used like borax as
a soldering agent. The reaction given by Agricola would yield free ammonia. The follow-
ing historical notes on borax and sal-ammoniac may be of service.

Borax.—The uncertainties of the ancient distinctions in salts involve borax deeply.
The word Baurach occurs in Geber and the other early Alchemistic writings, but there is
nothing to prove that it was modern borax. There cannot be the slightest doubt, however,
that the material referred to by Agricola as borax was our borax, because of the characteristic
qualities incidentally mentioned in Book VII. That he believed it was an artificial product
from nitrum is evident enough from his usual expression ‘‘chrysocolla made from nitrum,
which the Moors call borax.” Agricola, in De Natura Fossilium (p. 206-7), makes the
following statements, which could leave no doubt on the subject :—‘‘ Native nitrum is found
‘‘in the earth or on the surface. . . . It is from this variety that the Venetians make
“‘ chrysocolla, which I call borax. . . . The second variety of artificial nitrwm is made
“at the present day from the native nitrum, called by the Arabs ¢incar, but I call it usually
“‘ by the Greek name chrysocolla ; it is really the Arabic borax. . . . This nitrum does not
“‘ decrepitate nor fly out of the fire ; however, the native variety swells up from within.” The
application of the word chrysocolla (chrysos, gold ; colla, solder) to soldering materials, and
at the same time to the copper mineral, is of Greek origin. If any further proof were needed
as to the substance meant by Agricola, it lies in the word tincar. For a long time the borax
of Europe was imported from Central Asia, through Constantinople and Venice, under the
name of tincal or timcar. When this trade began, we do not know; evidently before
Agricola’s time. The statement here of making borax from alum and sal-ammoniac is
identical with the assertion of Biringuccio (II., 9).

SAL-AMMONIAC.—The early history of this—ammonium chloride—is also under a
cloud. Pliny (xxxi., 39) speaks of a sal-hammoniacum, and Dioscorides (v., 85) uses much
the same word. Pliny describes it as from near the temple of Ammon in Egypt. None
of the distinctive characteristics of sal-ammoniac are mentioned, and there is every
reason to believe it was either common salt or soda. Herodotus, Strabo, and others mention
common salt sent from about the same locality. The first authentic mention is in Geber,
who calls it sal-ammoniacum, and describes a method of making, and several characteristic
reactions. It was known in the Middle Ages under various names, among them sal-aremonicum.
Agricola (De Nat. Fos., u1., p. 206) notes its characteristic quality of volatilization. “ Sal-
“ammoniac . . in the fire neither crackles nor flies out, but is totally consumed.” He
also says (p. 208): ‘‘ Borax is used by goldsmiths to solder gold, likewise silver. The
“ artificers who make iron needles (tacks ?) similarly use sal-ammoniac when they cover the
“heads with tin.” The statement from Pliny mentioned in this paragraph is from XXxXIIL.,
29, where he describes the chrysocolla used as gold solder as made from verdigris, nitrum,
and urine in the way quoted. It is quite possible that this solder was sal-ammoniac,
though not made in quite this manner. Pliny refers in several places (xxxm1I., 26, 27, 28,
and 29, Xxxv., 28, etc.) to chrysocolla, about which he is greatly confused as between gold-
solder, the copper mineral, and a green pigment, the latter being of either mineral origin.

1
y H)
“at

oe ee Ps hens

Sy 2 Female

a

‘

BOOK XII. 561

po
to
<P Se
VA BB
G, ae) js
S 2 =
— eee he
. —
2 5
= -
3 @
.
a) (G
))
>
7 ~)
-
~ 3
> >!
= ° S
> og 0
4 bem
v
4
—s FY
= ?
A
a
z
— =
” =
Pe =

A—VAT IN WHICH THE SODA IS MIXED. B—CaLpron. C—TvuB IN WHICH chrysocolla 1s
CONDENSED. D—CoppreR wirES. E—Mortar.

Saltpetre® is made from a dry, slightly fatty earth, which, if it be re-
tained for a while in the mouth, has an acrid and salty taste. This earth,
together with a powder, are alternately put into a vat in layers a palm deep.
The powder consists of two parts of unslaked lime and three parts of ashes of
oak, or holmoak, or Italian oak, or Turkey oak, or of some similar kind. Each
vat is filled with alternate layers of these to within three-quarters of a foot
of the top, and then water is poured in until it is full. As the water percolates
through the material it dissolves the saltpetre ; then, the plug being pulled
out from the vat, the solution is drained into a tub and ladled out into small

*Saltpetre was secured in the Middle Ages in two ways, but mostly from the treatment
of calcium nitrate efflorescence on cellar and similar walls, and from so-called saltpetre
plantations. In this description of the latter, one of the most essential factors is omitted
until the last sentence, i.¢., that the nitrous earth was the result of the decay of organic or
animal matter over a long period. Such decomposition, in the presence of potassium and
calcium carbonates—the lye and lime—form potassium and calcium nitrates, together with
some magnesium and sodium nitrates. After lixiviation, the addition of lye converts the
calcium and magnesium nitrates into saltpetre, i.e., Ca (NO%)? + K2CO? = Ca CO? + 2KNO8.
The carbonates precipitate out, leaving the saltpetre in solution, from which it was evaporated
pp Fab baa d out. The addition of alum as mentioned would scarcely improve the
situation.

_ . The purification by repeated re-solution and addition of lye, and filtration, would
eliminate the remaining other salts. The purification with sulphur, however, is more difficult

562 BOOK XII.

vats. If when tested it tastes very salty, and at the same time acrid, it is
good ; but, if not, then it is condemned, and it must be made to percolate
again through the same material or through a fresh lot. Even two or three
waters may be made to percolate through the same earth and become full
of saltpetre, but the solutions thus obtained must not be mixed together
unless all have the same taste, which rarely or never happens. The first of
these solutions is poured into the first vat, the next into the second, the third
into the third vat; the second and third solutions are used instead of plain
water to percolate through fresh material; the first solution is made in
this manner from both the second and third. As soon as there is an abun-
dance of this solution it is poured into the rectangular copper caldron and
evaporated to one half by boiling; then it is transferred into a vat covered
with a lid, in which the earthy matter settles to the bottom. When the
solution is clear it is poured back into the same pan, or into another, and
re-boiled. When it bubbles and forms a scum, in order that it should
not run over and that it may be greatly purified, there is poured into it three
or four pounds of lye, made from three parts of oak or similar ash and one of
unslaked lime. But in the water, prior to its being poured in, is dissolved rock-
alum, in the proportion of one hundred and twenty brae of the former to five

to understand. In this case the saltpetre is melted and the sulphur added and set alight.
Such an addition to saltpetre would no doubt burn brilliantly. The potassium sulphate
formed would possibly settle to the bottom, and if the “ greasy matter’? were simply
organic impurities, they might be burned off. This method of refining appears to have
been copied from Biringuccio (x., 1), who states it in almost identical terms.

HistoricaAL Note.—As mentioned in Note 6 above, it is quite possible that
the Ancients did include efflorescence of walls under nitrum; but, so far as we are aware,
no specific mention of such an occurrence of nitrum is given, and, as stated before, there -
is every reason to believe that all the substances under that term were soda and potash.
Especially the frequent mention of the preparation of nitrwm by way of burning, argues
strongly against saltpetre being included, as they would hardly have failed to notice the
decrepitation. Argument has been put forward that Greek fire contained saltpetre, but it
amounts to nothing more than argument, for in those receipts preserved, no salt of any kind
is mentioned. It is most likely that the leprosy of house-walls of the Mosaic code (Leviticus
XIV., 34 to 53) was saltpetre efflorescence. The drastic treatment by way of destruction of
such “ unclean ”’ walls and houses, however, is sufficient evidence that this salt was not used.
The first certain mention of saltpetre (sal petrae) is in Geber. As stated before, the date
of this work is uncertain ; in any event it was probably as early as the 13th Century. He
describes the making of “solvative water’”’ with alum and saltpetre, so there can be no
doubt as to the substance (see Note on p. 460, on nitric acid). There is also a work by a
nebulous Marcus Graecus, where the word sal petrosum is used. And it appears that Roger
Bacon (died 1294) and Albertus Magnus (died 1280) both had access to that work. Bacon
uses the term sal petrae frequently enough, and was the first to describe gunpowder (De
Mirabili Potestate Artis et Naturae 1242). He gives no mention of the method of making his
sal petrae. Agricola uses throughout the Latin text the term halinitrum, a word he appears
to have coined himself. However, he gives its German equivalent in the Interpretatio as
salpeter. The only previous description of the method of making saltpetre, of which we are
aware, is that of Biringuccio (1540), who mentions the boiling of the excrescences from walls,
and also says a good deal about boiling solutions from “‘ nitrous’ earth, which may or may not
be of “ plantation”’ origin. He also gives this same method of refining with sulphur. In
any event, this statement by Agricola is the first clear and complete description of the salt-
petre ‘‘ plantations.” Saltpetre was in great demand in the Middle Ages for the manufacture
of gunpowder, and the first record of that substance and of explosive weapons necessarily
involves the knowledge of saltpetre. However, authentic mention of such weapons only
begins early in the 14th Century. Among the earliest is an authority to the Council of Twelve
at Florence to appoint persons to make cannon, etc., (1326), references to cannon in the
stores of the Tower of London, 1388, &c.

BOOK XII. 563

librae of the latter. Shortly afterward the solution will be found to be clear
and blue. It is boiled until the waters, which are easily volatile (subétiles), are
evaporated, and then the greater part of the salt, after it has settled at the
bottom of the pan, is taken out with iron ladles. Then the concentrated
solution is transferred to the vat in which rods are placed horizontally and
vertically, to which it adheres when cold, and if there be much, it is condensed
in three or four days into saltpetre. Then the solution which has not con-
gealed, is poured out and put on one side or re-boiled. The saltpetre being
cut out and washed with its own solution, is thrown on to boards that it may
drain and dry. The yield of saltpetre will be much or little in proportion
to whether the solution has absorbed much or little; when the saltpetre
has been obtained from lye, which purifies itself, it is somewhat clear and
pure.

The purest and most transparent, because free from salt, is made if it is
drawn off at the thickening stage, according to the following method. There

—.
; ij
oe
F <
>
i
> =,
/ ¥ 4q
B So
°
o*...
Wi -
i) : * Lae
=
~ <= - ° row
S e
a
4%
oy Y
Shug 42

SSSA see

A—CaLpRON. B—LAarGE VAT INTO WHICH SAND IS THROWN. C—Piruc. D—Tus.
E—VAT CONTAINING THE RODS.

564 BOOK XII.

are poured into the caldron the same number of amphorae of the solution as of
congit of the lye of which I have already spoken, and into the same caldron
is thrown as much of the already made saltpetre as the solution and lye will
dissolve. As soon as the mixture effervesces and forms scum, it is trans-
ferred to a vat, into which on a cloth has been thrown washed sand obtained
from a river. Soon afterward the plug is drawn out of the hole at the
bottom, and the mixture, having percolated through the sand, escapes into
atub. It is then reduced by boiling in one or another of the caldrons, until
the greater part of the solution has evaporated; but as soon as it is well
boiled and forms scum, a little lye is poured into it. Then it is transferred to
another vat in which there are small rods, to which it adheres and congeals in
two days if there is but little of it, or if there is much in three days, or
at the most in four days ; if it does not condense, it is poured back into the
caldron and re-boiled down to half; then it is transferred to the vat to cool.
The process must be repeated as often as is necessary.

Others refine saltpetre by another method, for with it they fill a pot
made of copper, and, covering it with a copper lid, set it over live coals, where
it is heated until it melts. They do not cement down the lid, but it has
a handle, and can be lifted for them to see whether or not the melting has taken
place. When it has melted, powdered sulphur is sprinkled in, and if the pot
set on the fire does not light it, the sulphur kindles, whereby the thick, greasy
matter floating on the saltpetre burns up, and when it is consumed the salt-
petreis pure. Soon afterward the pot is removed from the fire, and later, when
cold, the purest saltpetre is taken out, which has the appearance of white
marble, the earthy residue then remains at the bottom. The earths from
which the solution was made, together with branches of oak or similar trees,
are exposed under the open sky and sprinkled with water containing saltpetre.
After remaining thus for five or six years, they are again ready to be made
into a solution.

Pure saltpetre which has rested many years in the earth, and that which
exudes from the stone walls of wine cellars and dark places, is mixed with the
first solution and evaporated by boiling.

Thus far I have described the methods of making uétrwm, which are not
less varied or multifarious than those for making salt. Now I propose to
describe the methods of making alum,!° which are likewise neither all alike,
nor simple, because it is made from boiling aluminous water until it con-
denses to alum, or else from boiling a solution of alum which is obtained
from a kind of earth, or from rocks, or from pyrites, or other minerals.

10There are three methods of manufacturing alum described by Agricola, the first
and third apparently from shales, and the second from alum rock or “ alunite.” The reasons
for assuming that the first process was from shales, are the reference to the ‘‘ aluminous
earth ’”’ as ore (venae) coming from “ veins,’’ and also the mixture of vitriol. In this process
the free sulphuric acid formed by the oxidation of pyrites reacts upon the argillaceous material
to form aluminium sulphate. The decomposed ore is then placed in tanks and lixiviated.
The solution would contain aluminium sulphate, vitriol, and other impurities. By the
addition of urine, the aluminium sulphate would be converted into ammonia alum. Agricola
is, of course, mistaken as to the effect of the addition, being under the belief that it separated
the vitriol from the alum; in fact, this belief was general until the latter part of the 18th
Century, when Lavoisier determined that alum must have an alkali base. Nor is it clear

BOOK XII. 565

This kind of earth having first been dug up in such quantity as would
make three hundred wheelbarrow loads, is thrown into two tanks ; then the
water is turned into them, and if it (the earth) contains vitriol it must be
diluted with urine. The workmen must many times a day stir the
ore with long, thick sticks in order that the water and urine may be
mixed with it; then the plugs having been taken out of both tanks, the
solution is drawn off into a trough, which is carved out of one or two trees.
If the locality is supplied with an abundance of such ore, it should not
immediately be thrown into the tanks, but first conveyed into open spaces
and heaped up, for the longer it is exposed to the air and the rain, the better it
is; after some months, during which the ore has been heaped up in open
spaces into mounds, there are generated veinlets of far better quality than
the ore. Then it is conveyed into six or more tanks, nine feet in length
and breadth and five in depth, and afterward water is drawn into them
of similar solution. After this, when the water has absorbed the alum, the
plugs are pulled out, and the solution escapes into a round reservoir forty
feet wide and three feet deep. Then the ore is thrown out of the tanks
into other tanks, and water again being run into the latter and the urine
added and stirred by means of poles, the plugs are withdrawn and
the solution is run off into the same reservoir. A few days afterward,
the reservoirs containing the solution are emptied through a small launder,
and run into rectangular lead caldrons; it is boiled in them until the

from this description exactly how they were separated. In a condensed solution allowed to
cool, the alum would precipitate out as ‘‘alum meal,’ and the vitriol would “ float on top ’—
in solution. The reference to ‘meal’? may represent this phenomenon, and the re-boiling
referred to would be the normal method of purification by crystallization. The ‘‘ asbestos ”
and gypsum deposited in the caldrons were no doubt feathery and mealy calcium sulphate.
The alum produced would, in any event, be mostly ammonia alum.

The second process is certainly the manufacture from “alum rock” or “ alunite”
(the hydros sulphate of aluminium and potassium), such as that mined at La Tolfa in the
Papal States, where the process has been for centuries identical with that here described. The
alum there produced is the double basic potassium alum, and crystallizes into cubes instead of
octrahedra, 7.e., the Roman alum of commerce. The presence of much ferric oxide gives the
rose colour referred to by Agricola. This account is almost identical with that of Biringuccio
(II., 4), and it appears from similarity of details that Agricola, as stated in his preface, must
have ‘‘refreshed his mind”’ from this description ; it would also appear from the preface that
he had himself visited the locality.

The third process is essentially the same as the first, except that the decomposition
of the pyrites was hastened by roasting. The following obscure statement of some interest
occurs in Agricola’s De Natura Fossilium, p. 209:—‘‘. . . . alum is made from vitriol,
“‘for when oil is made from the latter, alum is distilled out (expirat). This absorbs the clay
“which is used in cementing glass, and when the operation is complete the clay is macerated
“with pure water, and the alum is soon afterward deposited in the shape of small cubes.”
Assuming the oil of vitriol to be sulphuric acid and the clay ‘“‘ used in cementing glass’ to
be kaolin, we have here the first suggestion of a method for producing alum which came into
use long after.

“ Burnt alum” (alumen coctum).—Agricola frequently uses this expression, and on p.
568, describes the operation, and the substance is apparently the same as modern dehydrated
alum, often referred to as ‘‘ burnt alum.”

HistoricaL Notes.—Whether the Ancients knew of alum in the modern sense is a
most vexed question. The Greeks refer to a certain substance as stypteria, and the Romans
refer to this same substance as alwmen. There can be no question as to their knowledge and
common use of vitriol, nor that substances which they believed were entirely different from
vitriol were comprised under the above names. Beckmann (Hist. of Inventions, Vol. 1.,
p- 181) seems to have been the founder of the doctrine that the ancient alumen was vitriol,
and scores of authorities seem to have adopted his arguments without inquiry, until that belief

566 BOOK XII.

greater part of the water has evaporated. The earthy sediment deposited
at the bottom of the caldron is composed of fatty and aluminous matter, which
usually consists of small incrustations, in which there is not infrequently found
a very white and very light powder of asbestos or gypsum. The solution now
seems to be full of meal. Some people instead pour the partly evaporated
solution into a vat, so that it may become pure and clear; then pouring it
back into the caldron, they boil it again until it becomes mealy. By which-
ever process it has been condensed, it is then poured into a wooden tub
sunk into the earth in order to cool it. When it becomes cold it is poured
into vats, in which are arranged horizontal and vertical twigs, to which the
alum clings when it condenses ; and thus are made the small white trans-
parent cubes, which are laid to dry in hot rooms.

If vitriol forms part of the aluminous ore, the material is dissolved in
water without being mixed with urine, but it is necessary to pour that into
the clear and pure solution when it is to be re-boiled. This separates the
vitriol from the alum, for by this method the latter sinks to the bottom of the
caldron, while the former floats on the top ; both must be poured separately
into smaller vessels, and from these into vats to condense. If, however, when
the solution was re-boiled they did not separate, then they must be poured
from the smaller vessels into larger vessels and covered over ; then the vitriol
separating from the alum, it condenses. Both are cut out and put to dry in
the hot room, and are ready to be sold ; the solution which did not congeal in

is now general. One of the strongest reasons put forward was that alum does not occur
native in appreciable quantities. Apart from the fact that the weight of this argument has
been lost by the discovery that alum does occur in nature to some extent as an aftermath of
volcanic action, and as an efflorescence from argillaceous rocks, we see no reason why the
Ancients may not have prepared it artificially. One of the earliest mentions of such a sub-
stance is by Herodotus (11., 180) of a thousand talents of stypteria, sent by Amasis from
Egypt as a contribution to the rebuilding of the temple of Delphi. Diodorus (v., 1) mentions
the abundance which was secured from the Lipari Islands (Stromboli, etc.), and a small
quantity from the Isle of Melos. Dioscorides (v., 82) mentions Egypt, Lipari Islands, Melos,
Sardinia, Armenia, etc., ‘and generally in any other places where one finds red ochre
(rubrica).” Pliny (XxXv., 52) gives these same localities, and is more explicit as to how it
originates—“ from an earthy water which exudes from the earth.” Of these localities,
the Lipari Islands (Stromboli, etc.), and Melos are volcanic enough, and both Lipari and
Melos are now known to produce natural alum (Dana. Syst. Min., p. 95; and Tournefort,
“ Relation d'un voyage du Levant,’ London, 1717, Lettre tv., Vol. 1.). Further, the hair-
like alum of Dioscorides, repeated by Pliny below, was quite conceivably fibrous kalinite,
native potash alum, which occurs commonly as an efflorescence. Be the question of native
alum as it may—and vitriol is not much more common—our own view that the ancient
alumen was alum, is equally based upon the artificial product. Before entering upon the
subject, we consider it desirable to set out the properties of the ancient substance, a complete
teview of which is given by Pliny (xXxxv., 52), he obviously quoting also from Dioscorides,
which, therefore, we do not need to reproduce. Pliny says :—

“Not less important, or indeed dissimilar, are the uses made of alumen ; by which
‘name is understood a sort of salty earth. Of this, there are several kinds. In Cyprus there
“is a white alumen, and a darker kind. There is not a great difference in their colour,
“though the uses made of them are very dissimilar,—the white alwmen being employed in a
“liquid state for dyeing wool bright colours, and the dark-coloured alwmen, on the other
“hand, for giving wool a sombre tint. Gold is purified with black alumen. Every kind of
“ alumen is from a limus water which exudes from the earth. The collection of it commences
‘“‘in winter, and it is dried by the summer sun. That portion of it which first matures is the
“whitest. It is obtained in Spain, Egypt, Armenia, Macedonia, Pontus, Africa, and the
‘islands of Sardinia, Melos, Lipari, and Strongyle ; the most esteemed, however, is that of
“Egypt, the next best from Melos. Of this last there are two kinds, the liquid alumen, and
‘the solid. Liquid alwmen, to be good, should be of a limpid and milky appearance ; when

ed

BOOK XII. 567

NS

hai
sg
SS
Ss
SN
Bt
IN’

cry

ey

a

SS

NY Si A Zi y A = :
=f > g <= == >}

or om ‘2 F~ YEeNS

Ct : 2 — FOI NS
A—Tanxs. B—Stirrinc pores. C—Piuc. D—Troucu. E—REsErvorr. F—LAUNDER.

G—LEAD CALDRON. H—WooDEN TUBS SUNK INTO THE EARTH. I—VATs IN WHICH
TWIGS ARE FIXED.

568 BOOK XII.

the vessels and vats is again poured back into the caldron to be re-boiled.
The earth which settled at the bottom of the caldron is carried back to the
tanks, and, together with the ore, is again dissolved with water and urine.
The earth which remains in the tanks after the solution has been drawn off
is emptied in a heap, and daily becomes more and more aluminous in the
same way as the earth from which saltpetre was made, but fuller of its juices,
wherefore it is again thrown into the tanks and percolated by water.
Aluminous rock is first roasted in a furnace similar to a lime kiln. At
the bottom of the kiln a vaulted fireplace is made of the same kind of rock ;
the remainder of the empty part of the kiln is then entirely filled with the
same aluminous rocks. Then they are heated with fire until they are red
hot and have exhaled their sulphurous fumes, which occurs, according to their
divers nature, within the space of ten, eleven, twelve, or more hours. One
thing the master must guard against most of all is not to roast the rock
either too much or too little, for on the one hand they would not soften when
sprinkled with water, and on the other they either would be too hard or
would crumble into ashes; from neither would much alum be obtained, for
the strength which they have would be decreased. When the rocks are cooled
they are drawn out and conveyed into an open space, where they are piled one
upon the other in heaps fifty feet long, eight feet wide, and four feet high,
which are sprinkled for forty days with water carried in deep ladles. In
spring the sprinkling is done both morning and evening, and in summer at

“rubbed, it should be without roughness, and should give a little heat. This is called
“ phorimon. The mode of detecting whether it has been adulterated is by pomegranate
“juice, for, if genuine, the mixture turns black. The other, or solid, is pale and rough
“and turns dark with nut-galls ; for which reason it is called paraphoron. Liquid alwmen is
“naturally astringent, indurative, and corrosive ; used in combination with honey, it heals
“ulcerations. . . . There is one kind of solid alwmen, called by the Greeks schistos,
‘‘which splits into filaments of a whitish colour ; for which reason some prefer calling it
“ trichitts (hair like). Alwmen is produced from the stone chalcitis, from which copper is also
‘‘made, being a sort of coagulated scum from that stone. This kind of alumen is less
“astringent than the others, and is less useful as a check upon bad humours of the body. .
‘‘The mode of preparing it is to cook it ina pan until it has ceased being a liquid. There
‘“‘is another variety of alumen also, of a less active nature, called strongyle. It is of two kinds.
‘‘The fungous, which easily dissolves, is utterly condemned. The better kind is the pumice-
“like kind, full of small holes like a sponge, and is in round pieces, more nearly white in colour,
“somewhat greasy, free from grit, friable, and does not stain black. This last kind is cooked
“‘ by itself upon charcoal until it is reduced to pure ashes. The best kind of all is that called
“melinum, from the Isle of Melos, as I have said, none being more effectual as an astringent,
“for staining black, and for indurating, and none becomes more dry. . . . Above all other
‘‘ properties of alumen is its remarkable astringency, whence its Greek name. . . . It is
“injected for dysentry and employed as a gargle.” The lines omitted refer entirely to
medical matters which have no bearing here. The following paragraph (often overlooked)
from Pliny (xxxv., 42) also has an important bearing upon the subject :—‘‘In Egypt they
‘‘employ a wonderful method of dyeing. The white cloth, after it is pressed, is stained
‘“‘in various places, not with dye stuffs, but with substances which absorb colours. These
“applications are not apparent on the cloth, but when it is immersed in a caldron of hot
“dye it is removed the next moment brightly coloured. The remarkable circumstance
“is that although there be only one dye in the caldron yet different colours appear in the
“ cloth.”

It is obvious from Pliny’s description above, and also from the making of vitriol (see
Note 11, p. 572), that this substance was obtained from liquor resulting from natural or
artificial lixiviation of rocks—in the case of vitriols undoubtedly the result of decomposition
of pyritiferous rocks (such as chalcitis). Such liquors are bound to contain aluminum
sulphate if there is any earth or clay about, and whether they contained alum would be a
question of an. alkali being present. If no alkali were present in this liquor, vitriol would

b

ae

BOOK XII. 569

noon besides. After being moistened for this length of time the rocks begin
to fall to pieces like slaked lime, and there originates a certain new material
of the future alum, which is soft and similar to the liquidae medullae found
in the rocks. It is white if the stone was white before it was roasted, and
rose-coloured if red was mixed with the white; from the former, white
alum is obtained, and from the latter, rose-coloured. A round furnace is
made, the lower part of which, in order to be able to endure the force of
the heat, is made of rock that neither melts nor crumbles to powder by the
fire. It is constructed in the form of a basket, the walls of which are two
feet high, made of the same rock. On these walls rests a large round caldron
made of copper plates, which is concave at the bottom, where it is eight feet
in diameter. In the empty space under the bottom they place the wood to be
kindled with fire. Around the edge of the bottom of the caldron, rock
is built in cone-shaped, and the diameter of the bottom of the rock structure
is seven feet, and of the top ten feet ; it is eight feet deep. The inside,
after being rubbed over with oil, is covered with cement, so that it may be
able to hold boiling water; the cement is composed of fresh lime, of
which the lumps are slaked with wine, of iron-scales, and of sea-snails,
ground and mixed with the white of eggs and oil. The edges of the caldron
are surmounted with a circle of wood a foot thick and half a foot high,
on which the workmen rest the wooden shovels with which they cleanse
the water of earth and of the undissolved lumps of rock that remain at

crystallize out first, and subsequent condensation would yield aluminum sulphate. If
alkali were present, the alum would crystallize out either before or with the vitriol. Pliny’s
remark, “that portion of it which first matures is whitest”, agrees well enough with this
hypothesis. No one will doubt that some of the properties mentioned above belong peculiarly
to vitriol, but equally convincing are properties and uses that belong to alum alone. The
strongly astringent taste, white colour, and injection fordysentry, are more peculiar to alum than
tovitriol. But above all other properties is that displayed in dyeing, for certainly if we read
this last quotation from Pliny in conjunction with the statement that white alwmen produces
bright colours and the dark kind, sombre colours, we have the exact reactions of alum and
vitriol when used as mordants. Therefore, our view is that the ancient salt of this character
was a more or less impure mixture ranging from alum to vitriol—‘ the whiter the better.”
Further, considering the ancient knowledge of soda (nitrum), and the habit of mixing it
into almost everything, it does not require much flight of imagination to conceive its admix-
ture to the “ water,” and the absolute production of alum.

Whatever may have been the confusion between alum and vitriol among the Ancients,
it appears that by the time of the works attributed to Geber (12th or 13th Century), the
difference was well known. His work (Investigationes perfectiones, tv.) refers to alumen
glaciale and alumen jameni as distinguished from vitriol, and gives characteristic reactions
which can leave no doubt as to the distinction. We may remark here that the repeated state-
ment apparently arising from Meyer (History of Chemistry, p. 51) that Geber used the term
alum de rocca is untrue, this term not appearing in the early Latin translations. During
the 15th Century alum did come to be known in Europe as alum de rocca. Various attempts have
been made to explain the origin of this term, ranging from the Italian root, a “rock, ”’ to the
town of Rocca in Syria, where alum was supposed to have been produced. In any event,
the supply for a long period prior to the middle of the 15th Century came from Turkey, and
the origin of the methods of manufacture described by Agricola, and used down to the
present day, must have come from the Orient.

In the early part of the 15th Century, a large trade in alum was done between Italy
and Asia Minor, and eventually various Italians established themselves near Constantinople
and Smyrna for its manufacture (Dudae, Historia Byzantina Venetia, 1729, p. 71).
The alum was secured by burning the rock, and lixiviation. With the capture of Constan-
tinople by the Turks (1453), great feeling grew up in Italy over the necessity of buying this
requisite for their dyeing establishments from the infidel, and considerable exertion was
made to find other sources of supply. Some minor works were attempted, but nothing much

570 BOOK XII.

the bottom of the caldron. The caldron, being thus prepared, is entirely
filled through a launder with water, and this is boiled with a fierce fire
until it bubbles. Then little by little eight wheelbarrow loads of the
material, composed of roasted rock moistened with water, are gradually
emptied into the caldron by four workmen, who, with their shovels which
reach to the bottom, keep the material stirred and mixed with water, and
by the same means they lift the lumps of undissolved rock out of the
caldron. In this manner the material is thrown in, in three or four lots, at
intervals of two or three hours more or less; during these intervals, the
water, which has been cooled by the rock and material, again begins to boil.
The water, when sufficiently purified and ready to congeal, is ladled out and
run off with launders into thirty troughs. These troughs are made of oak,
holm oak, or Turkey oak; their interior is six feet long, five feet deep, and
four feet wide. In these the water congeals and condenses into alum, in the
spring in the space of four days, and in summer in six days. Afterward the
holes at the bottom of the oak troughs being opened, the water which has
not congealed is drawn off into buckets and poured back into the caldron ;
or it may be preserved in empty troughs, so that the master of the workmen,
having seen it, may order his helpers to pour it into the caldron, for the water
which is not altogether wanting in alum, is considered better than that which
has none at all. Then the alum is hewn out with a knife or a chisel. It is
thick and excellent according to the strength of the rock, either white or
pink according to the colour of the rock. The earthy powder, which remains
three to four digits thick as the residue of the alum at the bottom of the
trough is again thrown into the caldron and boiled with fresh aluminous
material. Lastly, the alum cut out is washed, and dried, and sold.

Alum is also made from crude pyrites and other aluminous mixtures.
It is first roasted in an enclosed area; then, after being exposed for some

eventuated until the appearance of one John de Castro. From the Commentaries of
Pope Pius wu. (1614, p. 185), it appears that this Italian had been engaged in
dyeing cloth in Constantinople, and thus became aware of the methods of maki

alum. Driven out of that city through its capture by the Turks, he returned to Italy an

obtained an office under the Apostolic Chamber. While in this occupation he discovered a ©

rock at Tolfa which appeared to him identical with that used at Constantinople in alam
manufacture. After experimental work, he sought the aid of the Pope, which he obtained
after much vicissitude. Experts were sent, who after examination ‘shed tears of joy, they
kneeling down three times, worshipped God and praised His kindness in conferring such a gift
on their age.’’? Castro was rewarded, and the great papal monopoly was gradually built upon
this discovery. The industry firmly established at Tolfa exists to the present day, and is the
source of the Roman alum of commerce. The Pope maintained this monopoly strenuously,
by fair means and by excommunication, gradually advancing the price until the consumers had
greater complaint than against the Turks. The history of the disputes arising over the
papal alum monopoly would alone fill a volume.

By the middle of the 15th Century alum was being made in Spain, Holland, and
Germany, and later in England. In her efforts to encourage home industries and escape the
tribute to the Pope, Elizabeth (see Note on p. 283) invited over ‘‘ certain foreign chymistes and
mineral masters’? and gave them special grants to induce them to ‘‘settle in these
realmes.”” Among them was Cornelius Devoz, to whom was granted the privilege of ‘‘ mining
and digging in our Realm of England for allom and copperas.” What Devoz accomplished
is not recorded, but the first alum manufacture on a considerable scale seems to have been in
Yorkshire, by one Thomas Chaloner (about 1608), who was supposed to have seduced
workmen from the Pope’s alum works at Tolfa, for which he was duly cursed with all the
weight of the Pope and Church. (Pennant, Tour of Scotland, 1786).

ee

57%

BOOK XII.

Ay

x
Ne

77,

—DEEP LADLE.

D

G—TROUGHS.

C—ALUMINOUS ROCK.

B—ENCLOSED SPACE.
E—CALpDRON. F—LAUNDER.

A—FURNACE.

572 BOOK XII.

months to the air in order to soften it, it is thrown into vats and dissolved.
After this the solution is poured into the leaden rectangular pans and boiled
until it condenses into alum. The pyrites and other stones which are not
mixed with alum alone, but which also contain vitriol, as is most usually the
case, are both treated in the manner which I have already described. Finally,
if metal is contained in the pyrites and other rock, this material must be dried,
and from it either gold, silver, or copper is made in a furnace.

Vitriol#4 can be made by four different methods ; by two of these methods

uThe term for vitriol used by the Roman authors, followed by Agricola, is
atramentum sutortum, literally shoemaker’s blacking, the term no doubt arising from its
ancient (and modern) use for blackening leather. The Greek term was chalcanthon. The
term “ vitriol ’’ seems first to appear in Albertus Magnus (De Mineralibus, Liber v.), who
died in 1280, where he uses the expression ‘‘ atramentum viride a quibusdam vitreolum vocatur.”
Agricola (De Nat. Foss., p. 213) states, ‘‘In recent years the name vitriolum has been given to it.”
The first adequate description of vitriol is by Dioscorides (v., 76), as follows :—‘ Vitriol
‘‘ (chalcanthon) is of one genus, and is a solidified liquid, but it has three different species.
“One is formed from the liquids which trickle down drop by drop and congeal in certain
“mines ; therefore those who work in the Cyprian mines call it stalactis. Petesius calls
“this kind pinarion. The second kind is that which collects in certain caverns ; afterward
“it is poured into trenches, where it congeals, whence it derives its name pécfos. The
“third kind is called hephthon and is mostly made in Spain ; it has a beautiful colour but is
‘‘weak. The manner of preparing it is as follows: dissolving it in water, they boil it, and
‘then they transfer it to cisterns and leave it to settle. After a certain number of days it
“congeals and separates into many small pieces, having the form of dice, which stick
‘together like grapes. The most valued is blue, heavy, dense, and translucent.” Pliny
(XXXIV., 32) says :—‘‘ By the name which they have given to it, the Greeks indicate
‘the similar nature of copper and atramentum sutorium, for they call it chalcanthon. There
‘‘is no substance of an equally miraculous nature. It is made in Spain from wells of this kind
‘‘of water. This water is boiled with an equal quantity of pure water, and is then poured
“into wooden tanks (fish ponds). Across these tanks there are fixed beams, to which hang
“cords stretched by little stones. Upon these cords adheres the limus (Agricola’s ‘juice’) in
‘drops of a vitreous appearance, somewhat resembling a bunch of grapes. After removal, it
‘is dried for thirty days. It is of a blue colour, and of a brilliant lustre, and is very like
‘glass. Its solution is the blacking used for colouring leather. Chalcanthon is made in
‘‘many other ways: its kind of earth is sometimes dug from ditches, from the sides of which
“exude drops, which solidify by the winter frosts into icicles, called stalagmia, and there is
‘‘none more pure. When its colour is nearly white, with a slight tinge of violet, it is called
‘“‘leukoion. It is also made in rock basins, the rain water collecting the limus into them,
“‘ where it becomes hardened. It is also made in the same way as salt by the intense heat of
“the sun. Hence it is that some distinguish two kinds, the mineral and the artificial ; the
“latter being paler than the former and as much inferior to it in quality as it is in colour.”

While Pliny gives prominence to blue vitriol, his solution for colouring leather must
have been the iron sulphate. There can be no doubt from the above, however, that both
iron and copper sulphates were known to the Ancients. From the methods for making vitriol
given here in De Re Metallica, it is evident that only the iron sulphate would be produced,
for the introduction of iron strips into the vats would effectually precipitate any copper.
It is our belief that generally throughout this work, the iron sulphate is meant by the term
atramentum sutortum. In De Natura Fossiliwm (p. 213-15) Agricola gives three varieties of
atramentum sutorium,—viride, caeruleum, and candidum, 1.e., green, blue, and white. Thus
the first mention of white vitriol (zinc sulphate) appears to be due to him, and he
states further (p. 213): ‘‘A white sort is found, especially at Goslar, in the shape
‘of icicles, transparent like crystals.’ And on p. 215: “Since I have explained
“the nature of vitriol and its relatives, which are obtained from cupriferous pyrites,
“T will next speak of an acrid solidified juice which commonly comes from cadmia. It is found
‘‘at Annaberg in the tunnel driven to the Saint Otto mine; it is hard and white, and so
“acrid that it kills mice, crickets, and every kind of animal. However, that feathery sub-
“tance which oozes out from the mountain rocks and the thick substance found hanging
“in tunnels and caves from which saltpetre is made, while frequently acrid, does not come
“from cadmta.”’ Dana (Syst. of Min., p. 939) identifies this as Goslarite—native zinc sulphate.
It does not appear, however, that artificial zinc vitriol was made in Agricola’s time.
Schliiter (Huette-Werken, Braunschweig 1738, p. 597) states it to have been made for the first
time at Rammelsberg about 1570.

CWS ae) OTR AT Pe eT

BES Tae
ieee =

BOOK XII. 573

from water containing vitriol; by one method from a solution of melanterta,
sory and chalcitis ; and by another method from earth or stones mixed with
vitriol. _

The vitriol water is collected into pools, and if it cannot be drained into
them, it must be drawn up and carried to them in buckets by a workman.

It is desirable here to enquire into the nature of the substances given by all of the
old mineralogists under the Latinized Greek terms chalcitis, misy, sory, and melanteria. The
first mention of these minerals is in Dioscorides, who (v., 75-77) says: ‘‘ The best chalcitis
‘is like copper. It is friable, not stony, and is intersected by long brilliant veins. . . .
“* Misy is obtained from Cyprus ; it should have the appearance of gold, be hard, and when
“ pulverised it should have the colour of gold and sparkle like stars. It has the same
“ properties as chalcitis. . . . The best is from pt. . . . One kind of melanteria
“congeals like salt in the entries to copper mines. The other kind is earthy and appears
“on the surface of the aforesaid mines. It is found in the mines of Cilicia and other regions.
“The best has the colour of sulphur, is smooth, pure, homogenous, and upon contact with
“water immediately becomes black. : Those who consider sory to be the same
“as melanteria, err greatly. Sory is a species of its own, though it is not dissimilar. The
“smell of sory is oppressive and provokes nausea. It is found in t and in other regions,
“as Libya, Spain, and Cyprus. The best is from Egypt, and when broken is black, porous,
‘greasy, and astringent.” Pliny (xxxIv., 29-31) says:—‘‘ That is called chalcitis from
“which, as well as itself copper (?) is extracted by heat. It differs from cadmia in that this
‘is obtained from rocks near the surface, while that is taken from rocks below the surface.
*‘ Also chalcitis is immediately friable, being naturally so soft as to appear like compressed
‘wool. There is also this other distinction; chalcitis contains three other substances,
“ copper, misy, and sory. Of each of these we shall speak in their appropriate places.
“Tt contains elongated copper veins. The most approved kind is of the colour of honey ;
“it is streaked with fine sinuous veins and is friable and not stony. It is considered most
‘valuable when fresh. . . . The soryof Egypt is the most esteemed, being much superior
“ to that of Cyprus, Spain, and Africa ; although sorhe prefer the sory from Cyprus for affec-
“tions of the eyes. But from whatever nation it comes, the best is that which has the
“strongest odour, and which, when ground up, becomes greasy, black, and spongy. It is
“‘a substance so unpleasant to the stomach that some persons are nauseated by its smell.
“Some say that misy is made by the burning of stones in trenches, its fine yellow
“powder being iota with the ashes of pine-wood. The truth is, as I said above, that
“though obtained from the stone, it is already made and in solid masses, which require force
‘to detach them. The best comes from the works of Cyprus, its characteristics being that
“when broken it sparkles like gold, and when ground it presents a sandy appearance, but on
“the contrary, if heated, it is similar to chalcitis. Misy is used in refining gold. . . .”

Agricola’s views on the subject appear in De Natura Fossilium. He says (p. 212) :—
“ The cupriferous pyrites (pyrites aerosus) called chalcitis is the mother and cause of sory
‘‘_which is likewise known as mine vitriol (atramentum metallicum)—and melanteria.
“‘ These in turn yield vitriol and such related things. This may be seen especially at Goslar,
“‘where the nodular lumps of dark grey colour are called vitriol stone (lapis atramenti).
“In the centre of them is found greyish pyrites, almost dissolved, the size of a walnut. It
‘tis enclosed on all sides, sometimes by sory, sometimes by melanteria. From them start
‘little veinlets of greenish vitriol which spread all over it, presenting somewhat the appear-
**ance of hairs extending in all directions and cohering together. . . . There are five
‘* species of this solidified juice, melanteria, sory, chalcitis, misy, and vitriol. Sometimes many
‘‘are found in one place, sometimes all of them, for one originates from the other. From
‘“‘pyrites, which is, as one might say, the root of all these juices, originates the above-
“mentioned sory and melanteria. From sory, chalcitis, and melanteria originate the various
“kinds of vitriol. . . . Sory, melanteria, chalcitis, and misy are always native ; vitriol
‘‘alone is either native or artificial. From them vitriol effloresces white, and sometimes
“green or blue. Misy effloresces not only from sory, melanteria, and chalcitis, but also from
“all the vitriols, artificial as well as natural. . . . Sory and melanteria differ somewhat
*‘ from the others, but they are of the same colours, grey and black ; but chalcitis is red and
st ee: misy is yellow or gold-coloured. All these native varieties have the
“ odour of lightning (brimstone), but sory is the most powerful. The feathery vitriol is soft
“and fine and hair-like, and melanteria has the appearance of wool and it has a similarity to
“‘salt; all these are rare and light ; sory, chalcitis, and misy have the following relations.
“* Sory because of its density has the hardness of stone, although its texture is very coarse.
“‘ Misy has a very fine texture. Chalcitis is between the two ; because of its roughness and
“strong odour it differs from melanteria, although they do not differ in colour. The vitriols,
‘‘ whether natural or artificial, are hard and dense . . . as regarding shape, sory, chalcitis,
“‘misy, and melanteria are nodular, but sory is occasionally porous, which is peculiar to it.

39

574 BOOK XII.

~s

AY
.

Co

ig: 4) j , SY
g Mh Sirtes
*

L

@
7) Z
7 _—
4 ~<S
Z AW
Z \

Wy )
} "yi
y

, s

Kia <i 7.

LM
irae)
LIT ree <a

it 6— ea
fe yf =
= === FAN S97) TM
ey,
SS = —
> —S —s
Spa

A—TunNEL. B—BvucKEeT. C—PIr.

In hot regions or in summer, it is poured into out-of-door pits which have
been dug to a certain depth, or else it is extracted from shafts by pumps
and poured into launders, through which it flows into the pits, where it is
condensed by the heat of the sun. In cold regions and in winter these vitriol
waters are boiled down with equal parts of fresh water in rectangular leaden
caldrons; then, when cold, the mixture is poured into vats or into tanks,
which Pliny calls wooden fish-tanks. In these tanks light cross-beams are
fixed to the upper part, so that they may be stationary, and from them hang
ropes stretched with little stones; to these the contents of the thickened
solutions congeal and adhere in transparent cubes or seeds of vitriol, like
bunches of grapes.

“‘ Misy when it effloresces in no great quantity from the others is like a kind of pollen, other-
‘‘wise it is nodular. Melanteria sometimes resembles wool, sometimes salt.”’

The sum and substance, therefore, appears to be that misy is a yellowish material,
possibly ochre, and sory a blackish stone, both impregnated with vitriol. Chalcitis is a
partially decomposed pyrites; and melanteria is no doubt native vitriol. From this last
term comes the modern melanterite, native hydrous ferrous sulphate. Dana (System of
Mineralogy, p. 964) considers misy to be in part copiapite—basic ferric sulphate—but
any such part would not come under Agricola’s objection to it as a source of vitriol. The
disabilities of this and chalcitis may, however, be due to their copper content.

a ee

BOOK XII. 575

A!

SQ SeVew
~~ SWOe7;

SS
eae ~
EEN WG
Wo Sal
Se weath\va: \,

ww

RQay

A—CaLpron. B—Tanx. C—Cross-Bpars. D—Roprs. E—LITTLE STONES.

By the third method vitriol is made out of melanteria and sory. If
the mines give an abundant supply of melanteria and sory, it is better to
reject the chalcitis, and especially the misy, for from these the vitriol is impure,
particularly from the misy. These materials having been dug and thrown
into the tanks, they are first dissolved with water; then, in order to recover
the pyrites from which copper is not rarely smelted and which forms a sedi-
ment at the bottom of the tanks, the solution is transferred to other vats,
which are nine feet wide and three feet deep. Twigs and wood which float
on the surface are lifted out with a broom made of twigs, and afterward all the
sediment settles at the bottom of this vat. The solution is poured into a
rectangular leaden caldron eight feet long, three feet wide, and the same in
depth. In this caldron it is boiled until it becomes thick and viscous, when
it is poured into a launder, through which it runs into another leaden caldron
of the same size as the one described before. When cold, the solution is
drawn off through twelve little launders, out of which it flows into as many
wooden tubs four and a half feet deep and three feet wide. Upon these tubs
are placed perforated crossbars distant from each other from four to six
digits, and from the holes hang thin laths, which reach to the bottom, with

576 BOOK XII.

pegs or wedges driven into them. The vitriol adheres to these laths, and
within the space of a few days congeals into cubes, which are taken away
and put into a chamber having a sloping board floor, so that the moisture
which drips from the vitriol may flow into a tub beneath. This solution is
re-boiled, as is also that solution which was left in the twelve tubs, for, by
reason of its having become too thin and liquid, it did not congeal, and was
thus not converted into vitriol.

7)

{U

:

~

=

— aN ith,

=A

A—WooDEN TUB. B—Cross-BARS. C—Latus. D—SLOPING FLOOR OF THE CHAMBER.
E—TUvuB PLACED UNDER IT.

The fourth method of making vitriol is from vitriolous earth or stones.
Such ore is at first carried and heaped up, and is then left for five or six months
exposed to the rain of spring and autumn, to the heat of summer, and to the
rime and frost of winter. It must be turned over several times with shovels,
so that the part at the bottom may be brought to the top, and it is thus
ventilated and cooled ; by this means the earth crumbles up and loosens,
and the stone changes from hard to soft. Then the ore is covered with a roof,
or else it is taken away and placed under a roof, and remains in that place
six, seven, or eight months. Afterward as large a portion as is required is
thrown into a vat, which is half-filled with water ; this vat is one hundred

a ee

ee ee Ne ee ee

ee ee ee

ea

BOOK XII. 577

feet long, twenty-four feet wide, eight feet deep. It has an opening at the
bottom, so that when it is opened the dregs of the ore from which the vitriol
comes may be drawn off, and it has, at the height of one foot from the bottom,
three or four little holes, so that, when closed, the water may be retained,
and when opened the solution flows out. Thus the ore is mixed with water,
stirred with poles and left in the tank until the earthy portions sink to the
bottom and the water absorbs the juices. Then the little holes are opened,
the solution flows out of the vat, and is caught in a vat below it ; this vat is
of the same length as the other, but twelve feet wide and four feet deep. If
the solution is not sufficiently vitriolous it is mixed with fresh ore ; but if it
contains enough vitriol, and yet has not exhausted all of the ore rich in vitriol,
it is well to dissolve the ore again with fresh water. As soon as the solution
becomes clear, it is poured into the rectangular leaden caldron through
launders, and is boiled until the water is evaporated. Afterward as many thin
strips of iron as the nature of the solution requires, are thrown in, and then
it is boiled again until it is thick enough, when cold, to congeal into vitriol.
Then it is poured into tanks or vats, or any other receptacle, in which all of it
that is apt to congeal does so within two or three days. The solution which
does not congeal is either poured back into the caldron to be boiled again, or

A—CaLpron. B—Movurtps. C—CAakEs

578 BOOK XII.

it is put aside for dissolving the new ore, for it is far preferable to fresh water.
The solidified vitriol is hewn out, and having once more been thrown into the
caldron, is re-heated until it liquefies; when liquid, it is poured into
moulds that it may be made into cakes. If the solution first poured out is
not satisfactorily thickened, it is condensed two or three times, and each
time liquefied in the caldron and re-poured into the moulds, in which
manner pure cakes, beautiful to look at, are made from it.

The vitriolous pyrites, which are to be numbered among the mixtures
(mistura), are roasted as in the case of alum, and dissolved with water, and
the solution is boiled in leaden caldrons until it condenses into vitriol. Both
alum and vitriol are often made out of these, and it is no wonder, for these
juices are cognate, and only differ in the one point,—that the former is less, the
latter more, earthy. That pyrites which contains metal must be smelted in the
furnace. In the same manner, from other mixtures of vitriolic and metallifer-
ous material are made vitriol and metal. Indeed, if ores of vitriolous pyrites
abound, the miners split small logs down the centre and cut them off in lengths
as long as the drifts and tunnels are wide, in which they lay them down trans-
versely ; but, that they may be stable, they are laid on the ground with the wide
side down and the round side up, and they touch each other at the bottom,
but not at the top. The intermediate space is filled with pyrites, and the same
crushed are scattered over the wood, so that, coming in or going out, the
road is flat and even. Since the drifts or tunnels drip with water, these
pyrites are soaked, and from them are freed the vitriol and cognate things. If
the water ceases to drip, these dry and harden, and then they are raised
from the shafts, together with the pyrites not yet dissolved in the water, or
they are carried out from the tunnels ; then they are thrown into vats or
tanks, and boiling water having been poured over them, the vitriol is freed
and the pyrites are dissolved. This green solution is transferred to other vats
or tanks, that it may be made clear and pure; it is then boiled in the lead
caldrons until it thickens ; afterward it is poured into wooden tubs, where
it condenses on rods, or reeds, or twigs, into green vitriol.

Sulphur is made from sulphurous waters, from sulphurous ores, and
from sulphurous mixtures. These waters are poured into the leaden caldrons
and boiled until they condense into sulphur. From this latter, heated
together with iron-scales, and transferred into pots, which are afterward
covered with lute and refined sulphur, another sulphur is made, which we
call caballinum.™

The ores*® which consist mostly of sulphur and of earth, and rarely of
other minerals, are melted in big-bellied earthenware pots. The furnaces,

12Agricola (De Nat. Fos., 221) says :—‘‘ There is a species of artificial sulphur made
“from sulphur and iron hammer-scales, melted together and poured into moulds. This,
because it heals scabs of horses, is generally called caballinum.” It is difficult
to believe such a combination was other than iron sulphide, but it is equally difficult
to understand how it was serviceable for this purpose.

13[nasmuch as pyrites is discussed in the next paragraph, the material of the first
distillation appears to be native sulphur. Until the receiving pots became heated above the
melting point of the sulphur, the product would be “ flowers of sulphur,” and not the wax-

Pen

ei ta aa

ae ee

BOOK XII. 579

3 -
ES ==
BS ae I= A= \
i 4 _ =
Az = . Z
= a z
Py : =i
ja — = 2S ee 3 es
= > = -
SS
S
SS
c \\ S
.)
XS
3
>
fd ~

4

W-
A—PoTs HAVING spouts. B—PotTs wITHOUT spouts. C—LuiDs.

which hold two of these pots, are divided into three parts ; the lowest part is a
foot high, and has an opening at the front for the draught ; the top of this is
covered with iron plates, which are perforated near the edges, and these
support iron rods, upon which the firewood is placed. The middle part of the
furnace is one and a half feet high, and has a mouth in front, so that the wood
may be inserted ; the top of this has rods, upon which the bottom of the pots
stand. The upper part is about two feet high, and the pots are also two feet
high and one digit thick ; these have below their mouths a long, slender spout.
In order that the mouth of the pot may be covered, an earthenware lid is
made which fits into it. For every two of these pots there must be one pot

like product. The equipment described for pyrites in the next paragraph would be obviously
useful only for coarse material.

But little can be said on the history of sulphur ; it is mentioned often enough in the Bible
and also by Homer (Od. xxu., 481). The Greeks apparently knew how to refine it, although
neither Dioscorides nor Pliny specifically describes such an operation. Agricola says (De
Nat. Fos., 220): ‘‘ Sulphur is of two kinds ; the mineral, which the Latins call vivwm, and
the Greeks apyron, which means ‘not exposed to the fire’ (ignem non expertum) as
rightly interpreted by Celsius ; and the artificial, called by the Greeks pepyromenon, that
is,‘ exposed to the fire.” In Book X., the expression sulfur ignem non expertum frequently
appears, no doubt in Agricola’s mind for native sulphur, although it is quite possible that
the Greek distinction was between ‘‘ flowers ” of sulphur and the “ wax-like ” variety.

580 BOOK XII.

of the same size and shape, and without a spout, but having three holes, two of
which are below the mouth and receive the spouts of the two first pots ; the
third hole is on the opposite side at the bottom, and through it the sulphur
flows out. In each furnace are placed two pots with spouts, and the furnace
must be covered by plates of iron smeared over with lute two digits thick ; it is
thus entirely closed in, but for two or three ventholes through which the mouths
of the pots project. Outside of the furnace, against one side, is placed the pot
without a spout, into the two holes of which the two spouts of the other pots
penetrate, and this pot should be built in at both sides to keep it steady. When
the sulphur ore has been placed in the pots, and these placed in the furnace,
they are closely covered, and it is desirable to smear the joint over with lute,
so that the sulphur will not exhale, and for the same reason the pot below is
covered with a lid, which is also smeared with lute. The wood having been
kindled, the ores are heated until the sulphur is exhaled, and the vapour,
arising through the spout, penetrates into the lower pot and thickens into
sulphur, which falls to the bottom like melted wax. It then flows out
through the hole, which, as I said, is at the bottom of this pot ; and the work-
man makes it into cakes, or thin sticks or thin pieces of wood are dipped in it.
Then he takes the burning wood and glowing charcoal from the furnace, and
when it has cooled, he opens the two pots, empties the residues, which, if the
ores were composed of sulphur and earth, resemble naturally extinguished
ashes ; but if the ores consisted of sulphur and earth and stone, or sulphur
and stone only, they resemble earth completely dried or stones well roasted.
Afterward the pots are re-filled with ore, and the whole work is repeated.

The sulphurous mixture, whether it consists of stone and sulphur only,
or of stone and sulphur and metal, may be heated in similar pots, but with
perforated bottoms. Before the furnace is constructed, against the ‘‘ second ”’
wall of the works two lateral partitions are built seven feet high, three feet
long, one and a half feet thick, and these are distant from each other twenty-
seven feet. Between them are seven low brick walls, that measure but
two feet and the same number of digits in height, and, like the other walls,
are three feet long and one foot thick; these little walls are at equal
distances from one another, consequently they will be two and one half feet
apart. At the top, iron bars are fixed into them, which sustain iron plates
three feet long and wide and one digit thick, so that they can bear not only
the weight of the pots, but also the fierceness of the fire. These plates have
in the middle a round hole one and a half digits wide ; there must not be
more than eight of these, and upon them as many pots are placed. These
pots are perforated at the bottom, and the same number of whole pots are
placed underneath them ; the former contain the mixture, and are covered
with lids; the latter contain water, and their mouths are under the holes
in the plates. After wood has been arranged round the upper pots and
ignited, the mixture being heated, red, yellow, or green sulphur drips
from it and flows down through the hole, and is caught by the pots placed
underneath the plates, and is at once cooled by the water. If the mixture
contains metal, it is reserved for smelting, and, if not, it is thrown away.

Ss

BOOK XII. 581

A—LonG wALLt. B—HicH watts. C—Low watts. D—PLaTes. E—UppER pots.
F—LowWER POTS.

The sulphur from such a mixture can best be extracted if the upper pots are
placed in a vaulted furnace, like those which I described among other
metallurgical subjects in Book VIII., which has no floor, but a grate inside ;
under this the lower pots are placed in the same manner, but the plates
must have larger holes.

Others bury a pot in the ground, and place over it another pot with a
hole at the bottom, in which pyrites or cadmia, or other sulphurous stones
are so enclosed that the sulphur cannot exhale. AA fierce fire heats the
sulphur, and it drips away and flows down into the lower pot, which contains
water. (Illustration p. 582).

Bitumen!* is made from bituminous waters, from liquid bitumen, and
from mixtures of bituminous substances. The water, bituminous as well as

M4The substances referred to under the names bitumen, asphalt, maltha, naphtha,
petroleum, rock-oil, etc., have been known and used from most ancient times, and much of our
modern nomenclature is of actual Greek and Roman ancestry. These peoples distinguished
three related substances,—the Greek asphalios and Roman bitumen for the hard material,—
Greek pissasphalios and Roman maltha for the viscous, pitchy variety—and occasionally the
Greek naphtha and Roman naphtha for petroleum proper, although it is often enough referred
to as liquid bitwmen or liquid asphalios. The term petroleum apparently first appears in
Agricola’s De Natura Fossilium (p. 222), where he says the “ oil of bitumen . . . now

582 BOOK XII.

a a
Mas

«
>
S

—

ISS

>

A—LowER pot. B—Upper pot. C—LID.

salty, at Babylon, as Pliny writes, was taken from the wells to the salt works
and heated by the great heat of the sun, and condensed partly into liquid
bitumen and partly into salt. The bitumen being lighter, floats on the top,
while the salt being heavier, sinks to the bottom. Liquid bitumen, if there
is much floating on springs, streams and rivers, is drawn up in buckets or
other vessels; but, if there is little, it is collected with goose wings, pieces

called petroleum.”’ Bitumen was used by the Egyptians for embalming from prehistoric times,
i.¢., prior to 5000 B.c., the term ‘‘ mummy” arising from the Persian word for bitumen, mumiat.
It is mentioned in the tribute from Babylonia to Thotmes 111., who lived about 1500 B.c.
(Wilkinson, Ancient Egyptians 1., p. 397). The Egyptians, however, did not need to go
further afield than the Sinai Peninsula for abundant supplies. Bitumen is often cited as the
real meaning of the “slime ’’ mentioned in Genesis (XI., 3 ; XIV., 10), and used in building
the Tower of Babel. There is no particular reason for this assumption, except the general
association of Babel, Babylon, and Bitumen. However, the Hebrew word sift for pitch or
bitumen does occur as the cement used for Moses’s bulrush cradle (Exodus 11., 3), and Moses
is generally accounted about 1300 B.c. Other attempts to connect Biblical reference to
petroleum and bitumen revolve around Job xxix., 6, Deut. xxxtl., 13, Maccabees IL,
1, 18, Matthew v., 13, but all require an unnecessary strain on the imagination.

The plentiful occurrence of bitumen throughout Asia Minor, and particularly in the
Valley of the Euphrates and in Persia, is the subject of innumerable references by writers
from Herodotus (484-424 B.c.) down to the author of the company prospectus of recent
months. Herodotus (1., 179) and Diodorus Siculus (1) state that the walls of Babylon were
mortared with bitumen—a fact partially corroborated by modern investigation. The follow-

BOOK XII. 583

A—BITUMINOUS SPRING. B—BucKET. C—Pot. D—LIp.

of linen, valla, shreds of reeds, and other things to which it easily adheres,
and it is boiled in large brass or iron pots by fire and condensed. As this
bitumen is put to divers uses, some mix pitch with the liquid, others old
cart-grease, in order to temper its viscosity; these, however long they are

ing statement by Herodotus (vI., 119) is probably the source from which Pliny drew the
information which Agricola quotes above. In referring to a well at Ardericca, a place
about 40 miles from ancient Susa, in Persia, Herodotus says :—‘ For from the well they
“get bitumen, salt, and oil, procuring it in the way that I will now describe: they draw
“‘with a swipe, and instead of a bucket they make use of the half of a wine-skin; with
‘this the man dips and, after drawing, pours the liquid into a reservoir, wherefrom it
‘passes into another, and there takes three different shapes. The salt and bitumen forth-
“‘ with collect and harden, while the oil is drawn off into casks. It is called by the Persians
“‘ rhadinace, is black, and has an unpleasant smell.’”’ (Rawlinsons, Trans. l1.,p. 409). The
statement from Pliny (xXxxI., 39) here referred to by Agricola, reads:—‘‘It (salt) is
“made from water of wells poured into salt-pans. At Babylon the first condensed is a
‘‘ bituminous liquid like oil which is burned in lamps. When this is taken off, salt is found
“beneath. In Cappadocia also the water from both wells and springs is poured into salt-
‘“‘pans.’’ When petroleum began to be used as an illuminant it is impossible to say. A
passage in Aristotle’s De Mirabilibus (127) is often quoted, but in reality it refers only to
a burning spring, a phenomenon noted by many writers, but from which to its practical use
is not a great step. The first really definite statement as to the use of petroleum as an

584 BOOK XII.

boiled in the pots, cannot be made hard. The mixtures containing bitumen
are also treated in the same manner as those containing sulphur, in pots
having a hole in the bottom, and it is rare that such bitumen is not highly
esteemed.

Since all solidified juices and earths, if abundantly and copiously mixed
with the water, are deposited in the beds of springs, streams or rivers, and the
stones therein are coated by them, they do not require the heat of the sun or
fire to harden them. This having been pondered over by wise men, they dis-
covered methods by which the remainder of these solidified juices and unusual
earths can be collected. Such waters, whether flowing from springs or
tunnels, are collected in many wooden tubs or tanks arranged in consecutive
order, and deposit in them such juices or earths; these being scraped off
every year, are collected, as chrysocolla‘® in the Carpathians and as ochre in
the Harz.

There remains glass, the preparation of which belongs here, for the
reason that it is obtained by the power of fire and subtle art from certain
solidified juices and from coarse or fine sand. It is transparent, as are certain
solidified juices, gems, and stones ; and can be melted like fusible stones and
metals. First I must speak of the materials from which glass is made;
then of the furnaces in which it is melted; then of the methods by which it
is produced.

It is made from fusible stones and from solidified juices, or from other
juicy substances which are connected by a natural relationship. Stones
which are fusible, if they are white and translucent, are more excellent than

illuminant is Strabo’s quotation (xvI., 1, 15) from Posidonius: ‘‘ Asphaltus is found in
“great abundance in Babylonia. Eratosthenes describes it as follows :—The liquid asphaltus,
“which is called naphtha, is found in Susa; the dry kind, which can be made solid, in
“Babylonia. There is a spring of it near the Euphrates. . . . Others say that the liquid
‘kind is also found in Babylonia. . . . The liquid kind, called naphtha, is of a singular
“nature. When it is brought near the fire, the fire catches it. . . . Posidonius says
“that there are springs of naphtha in Babylonia, some of which produce white, others black
“naphtha; the first of these, I mean white naphtha, which attracts flame, is liquid sulphur ;
“the second or black naphtha is liquid asphalius, and is burnt in lamps instead of oil.”
(Hamilton’s Translation, Vol. 111., p. 151). | Eratosthenes lived about 200 B.c., and Posidonius
about 100 years later. Dioscorides (1., 83), after discussing the usual sources of bitumen
says: “ It is found in a liquid state in Agrigentum in Sicily, flowing on streams ; they use it
«for lights in lanterns in place of oil. Those who call the Sicilian kind oil are under a delusion,
“for it is agreed that it is a kind of liquid bitumen.”’ Pliny adds nothing much new to the
above quotations, except in regard to these same springs (XxXv., 51) that ‘‘ The inhabitants
“collect it on the panicles of reeds, to which it quickly adheres and they use it for burning
‘in lamps instead of oil.” Agricola (De Natura Fossitlium, Book tv.) classifies petroleum,
coal, jet, and obsidian, camphor, and amber as varieties of bitumen, and devotes much space
to the refutation of the claims that the last two are of vegetable origin.

1Aericola (De Natura Fossiliwm, p. 215) in discussing substances which originate from
copper, gives among them green chrysocolla (as distinguished from borax, etc., see Note 8
above), and says: “ Native chrysocolla originates in veins and veinlets, and is found mostly
“by itself like sand, or adhering to metallic substances, and when scraped off from this
“‘ appears similar to its own sand. Occasionally it is so thin that very little can be scraped
“off. Or else it occurs in waters which, as I have said, wash these minerals, and afterward
“it settles as a powder. At Neusohl in the Carpathians, green water flowing from an
“ancient tunnel wears away this chrysocolla with it. The water is collected in thirty large
‘reservoirs, where it deposits the chrysocolla as a sediment, which they collect every
“year and sell,”—as a pigment. This description of its occurrence would apply equally
well to modern chrysocolla or to malachite. The solution from copper ores would deposit
some sort of green incrustation, of carbonates mostly.

BOOK XII. 585

~
>

f
py
nt

= q
= (
Hin PPL

z
Z
g
Z
g
Z
Z
Z
Z
4
A
Z
g
A
Z
Z
g
Zz
Z
Z
2

Wig

—.

i

Lh

A—MOUTH OF THE TUNNEL. B—TroucH. C—Tanxks. D—LITTLE TROUGH.

the others, for which reason crystals take the first place. From these, when
pounded, the most excellent transparent glass was made in India, with which
no other could be compared, as Pliny relates. The second place is accorded
to stones which, although not so hard as crystal, are yet just as white and
transparent. The third is given to white stones, which are not transparent.
It is necessary, however, first of all to heat all these, and afterward they are
subjected to the pestle in order to break and crush them into coarse sand,
and then they are passed through a sieve. If this kind of coarse or fine sand
is found by the glass-makers near the mouth of a river, it saves them much
labour in burning and crushing. As regards the solidified juices, the first
place is given to soda ; the second to white and translucent rock-salt ; the third
to salts which are made from lye, from the ashes of the musk ivy, or from
other salty herbs. Yet there are some who give to this latter, and not to the
former, the second place. One part of coarse or fine sand made from fusible
stones should be mixed with two parts of soda or of rock-salt or of herb
salts, to which are added minute particles of magnes.1® It is true that in our

_ *The statement in Pliny (xxxvi., 66) to which Agricola refers is as follows: ‘‘ Then -
“as ingenuity was not content with the mixing of mitrum, they began the addition of lapis

586 BOOK XII.

day, as much as in ancient times, there exists the belief in the singular
power of the latter to attract to itself the vitreous liquid just as it does iron,
and by attracting it to purify and transform green or yellow into white; and
afterward fire consumes the magnes. When the said juices are not to be had,
two parts of the ashes of oak or holmoak, or of hard oak or Turkey oak,
or if these be not available, of beech or pine, are mixed with one part
of coarse or fine sand, and a small quantity of salt is added, made from salt
water or sea-water, and a small particle of magnes ; but these make a less
white and translucent glass. The ashes should be made from old trees, of
which the trunk at a height of six feet is hollowed out and fire is put in, and
thus the whole tree is consumed and converted into ashes. This is done in
winter when the snow lies long, or in summer when it does not rain, for the
showers at other times of the year, by mixing the ashes with earth, render
them impure; for this reason, at such times, these same trees are cut up
into many pieces and burned under cover, and are thus converted into ashes.
Some glass-makers use three furnaces, others two, others only one.
Those who use three, melt the material in the first, re-melt it in the second,

“‘ magnes, because of the belief that it attracts liquefied glass as well as iron. In a similar
‘‘manner many kinds of brilliant stones began to be added to the melting, and then shells
‘‘and fossil sand. Authors tell us that the glass of India is made of broken crystal, and
“In consequence nothing can compare with it. Light and dry wood is used for fusing,
“‘cyprium (copper ?) and nitrum being added, particularly nitrum from Ophir etc.”

A great deal of discussion has arisen over this passage, in connection with what this
lapis magnes really was. Pliny (xxxvt., 25) describes the lodestone under this term, but
also says: ‘ There (in Ethiopia) also is haematites magnes, a stone of blood colour, which
‘shows a red colour if crushed, or of saffron. The haematites has not the same property of
“attracting iron as magnes.”’ Relying upon this sentence for an exception to the ordinary
sort of magnes, and upon the impossible chemical reaction involved, most commentators
have endeavoured to show that lodestone was not the substance meant by Pliny, but
manganese, and thus they find here the first knowledge of this mineral. There can be
little doubt that Pliny assumed it to be the lodestone, and Agricola also. Whether the
latter had any independent knowledge on this point in glass-making or was merely quoting
Pliny—which seems probable—we do not know. In any event, Biringuccio, whose work
preceded De Re Metallica by fifteen years, does definitely mention manganese in this
connection. He dismisses this statement of Pliny with the remark (p. 37-38): ‘‘ The
“Ancients wrote about lodestones, as Pliny states, and they mixed it together with nitrum
‘‘in their first efforts to make glass.’’ The following passage from this author (p. 36-37),
however, is not only of interest in this connection, but also as possibly being the first specific
mention of manganese under its own name. Moreover, it has been generally overlooked
in the many discussions of the subject. “Of a similar nature (to zaffir) is also another
“mineral called manganese, which is found, besides in Germany, at the mountain of
“Viterbo in Tuscany . . . it is the colour of ferrigno scuro (iron slag ?). In melting it
“one cannot obtain any metal . . . but it gives a very fine colour to glass, so that the
‘glass workers use it in their pigments to secure an azure colour. . . . Italso has such
“‘a property that when put into melted glass it cleanses it and makes it white, even if it were
“green or yellow. In a hot fire it goes off in a vapour like lead, and turns into ashes.”

To enter competently into the discussion of the early history of glass-making would
employ more space than can be given, and would lead but to a sterile end. It is certain
that the art was pre-Grecian, and that the Egyptians were possessed of some knowledge of
making and blowing it in the XI Dynasty (according to Petrie 3,500 B.c.), the wall
painting at Beni Hassen, which represents glass-blowing, being attributed to that period.
The remains of a glass factory at Tel el Amarna are believed to be of the XVIII
Dynasty. (Petrie, 1,500 B.c.). The art reached a very high state of development among
the Greeks and Romans. No discussion of this subject omits Pliny’s well-known story
(XXXvI. 65), which we also add: “ The tradition is that a merchant ship laden with
“‘ nitrum being moored at this place, the merchants were preparing their meal on the beach,
“and not having stones to prop up their pots, they used lumps of mitrum from the ship,
‘which fused and mixed with the sands of the shore, and there flowed streams of a new
‘‘ translucent liquid, and thus was the origin of glass.”

BOOK XII. 587

NEEM EBERERRB@EBREREREREBBREEEBBEEBE
Fle tee below Lo eer rs Ure Her her Nee eos ar re th Uaee Uherathee Hee tes Dorerteertestie b 0.1 1.1.

A—LOWER CHAMBER OF THE FIRST FURNACE. B—UPPER CHAMBER. C—VITREOUS MASS.

and in the third they cool the glowing glass vessels and other articles. Of
these the first furnace must be vaulted and similar to an oven. In the upper
chamber, which is six feet long, four feet wide, and two feet high, the
mixed materials are heated by a fierce fire of dry wood until they melt
and are converted into a vitreous mass. And if they are not satisfactorily
purified from dross, they are taken out and cooled and broken into pieces ;
and the vitreous pieces are heated in pots in the same furnace.

The second furnace is round, ten feet in diameter and eight feet high,
and on the outside, so that it may be stronger, it is encompassed by five
arches, one and one half feet thick; it consists in like manner of two
chambers, of which the lower one is vaulted and is one and one half feet thick.
In front this chamber has a narrow mouth, through which the wood
can be put into the hearth, which is on the ground. At the top and in the
middle of its vault, there is a large round hole which opens to the upper
chamber, so that the flames can penetrate into it. Between the arches in
the walls of the upper chamber are eight windows, so large that the big-
bellied pots may be placed through them on to the floor of the chamber,
around the large hole. The thickness of these pots is about two digits, their
height the same number of feet, and the diameter of the belly one and a half

588 BOOK XII.

feet, and of the mouth and bottom one foot. In the back part of the furnace
is a rectangular hole, measuring in height and width a palm, through which
the heat penetrates into a third furnace which adjoins it.

This third furnace is rectangular, eight feet long and six feet wide; it
also consists of two chambers, of which the lower has a mouth in front, so that
firewood may be placed on the hearth which is on the ground. On each side of
this opening in the wall of the lower chamber is a recess for oblong earthen-
ware receptacles, which are about four feet long, two feet high, and one and
a half feet wide. The upper chamber has two holes, one on the right side,

the other on the left, of such height and width that earthenware receptacles
may be conveniently placed in them.

These latter receptacles are three
feet long, one and a half feet high, the lower part one foot wide, and the

upper part rounded. In these receptacles the glass articles, which have been
blown, are placed so that they may cool in a milder temperature ; if they were
not cooled slowly they would burst asunder. When the vessels are taken

from the upper chamber, they are immediately placed in the receptacles
to cool.

ws
y

yy
{ aww

Vile

Sy AN

Ctr |

ny

*()
)

et tay)

A—ARCHES OF THE SECOND FURNACE.

C—WINDOWS OF THE UPPER CHAMBER.
THIRD FURNACE,

B—MovutH OF THE LOWER CHAMBER,

D—BIG-BELLIED POTS.
F—RECESSES FOR THE RECEPTACLES.
CHAMBER.

E—MOovurtrH OF THE

G—OPENINGS IN THE UPPER
H—OBLONG RECEPTACLES.

589

BOOK XII.

GO POC LVL LL cl VION AM 6 AAA aa tOA ME La AN, Shad Delpy a: OT i Ronee os DN AE GLANS Nii

r SAMY ‘Y) Hy, yy pre
; Saraanm nen {/ ; ! A
Ss SSS — y { Hin 9% y “f \

Hh
Hi};

Hi
4

ig YS) \\\ NNATNH ANNAN

> ee =
TIE ASS Sy
YZ SS
UWZAas
‘
MMM AAW ’

Wi Winter.
i hhhnn SS EEE

J

WAN

Opens SS
Wars AWAAMA

B:
AWM:

=
—
Cell
=
>i"
Dit;
=

\)
OWL i adi diliba

ma Ih |
<i

Q

7
“y

7”

i}

ESS
i

WX | CONG | Loe =e MM WN

C—UPPER ONE.

F—RECTANGULAR OPENING.

D—Its opENING. E—RouND OPENING:

A—LOWER CHAMBER OF THE OTHER SECOND FURNACE. B—MIDDLE ONE.
40

590 BOOK XII.

Some who use two furnaces partly melt the mixture in the first, and
not only re-melt it in the second, but also replace the glass articles there.
Others partly melt and re-melt the material in different chambers of the
second furnace. Thus the former lack the third furnace, and the latter,
the first. But this kind of second furnace differs from the other second
furnace, for it is, indeed, round, but the interior is eight feet in diameter
and twelve feet high, and it consists of three chambers, of which the lowest is
not unlike the lowest of the other second furnace. In the middle chamber
wall there are six arched openings, in which are placed the pots to be heated,
and the remainder of the small windows are blocked up with lute. In the

middle top of the middle chamber is a square opening a palm in length”

and width. Through this the heat penetrates into the upper chamber,
of which the rear part has an opening to receive the oblong earthenware
receptacles, in which are placed the glass articles to be slowly cooled. On
this side, the ground of the workshop is higher, or else a bench is placed there,
so that the glass-makers may stand upon it to stow away their products
more conveniently.

Those who lack the first furnace in the evening, when they have accom-
plished their day’s work, place the material in the pots, so that the heat during
the night may melt it and turn it into glass. Two boys alternately, during
night and day, keep up the fire by throwing dry wood on to the hearth. Those
who have but one furnace use the second sort, made with three chambers.
Then in the evening they pour the material into the pots, and in the morning,
having extracted the fused material, they make the glass objects, which they
place in the upper chamber, as do the others.

The second furnace consists either of two or three chambers, the first of
which is made of unburnt bricks dried in the sun. These bricks are made of a
kind of clay that cannot be easily melted by fire nor resolved into powder ;
this clay is cleaned of small stones and beaten with rods. The bricks are
laid with the same kind of clay instead of lime. From the same clay the
potters also make their vessels and pots, which they dry in the shade. These
two parts having been completed, there remains the third.

The vitreous mass having been made in the first furnace in the manner
I described, is broken up, and the assistant heats the second furnace, in order
that the fragments may be re-melted. In the meantime, while they are doing
this, the pots are first warmed by a slow fire in the first furnace, so that the
vapours may evaporate, and then by a fiercer fire, so that they become red
in drying. Afterward the glass-makers open the mouth of the furnace, and,
seizing the pots with tongs, if they have not cracked and fallen to pieces,
quickly place them in the second furnace, and they fill them up with the
fragments of the heated vitreous mass or with glass. Afterward they close
up all the windows with lute and bricks, with the exception that in each

there are two little windows left free ; through one of these they inspect the.

glass contained in the pot, and take it up by means of a blow-pipe; in the
other they rest another blow-pipe, so that it may get warm. Whether it
is made of brass, bronze, or iron, the blow-pipe must be three feet long.

:
¢
h.
3
#
i
‘
a
yi
:
Fe
.

59

\

BOOK XII.

\ \N WS AK
s\ \ \
‘ ALR SANNA NAA \ e ots
\\\ \
\ .\ .\ .\ .\

nl

U4 EE ARTE

mh

Z

£Z

iy
GOLMAAL ZLA AOA YIP
A iii eo HY

g

\\\\
\

\

|

“a

AVAU8EOESEBUALLAATPRONRA RANAWNNERNUERTANNERT AN BAD ORD NOLL

Coll

MCMV
N.LCVUSOUANENNL HA ITER AAS URATLO NE

Wicsdiaddabiadaa

MTN Wy Oo®™{

VEUELINURUBARAUR RES:

Y DAM
£7,
Y
VALUING NIE
WA
VA
Va
A

VMA
Wh Mla Ab Hd ttt y
Myre Lerrerertoory,

attdaadddussimdbddddtsdéiéiidicé

2 ill U, 4
mI

ESSN

D

DUN eOUEREM UR MELESADERUL TINUE NN RANG

E—MOouLDs By

B—LittLeE winpow. C—MarsLeE. D—Forceps.

A—BLow-PIPE.

MEANS OF WHICH THE SHAPES ARE PRODUCED.

592 BOOK XII.

In front of the window is inserted a lip of marble, on which rests the
heaped-up clay and the iron shield. The clay holds the blow-pipe when it
is put into the furnace, whereas the shield preserves the eyes of the glass-maker
from the fire. All this having been carried out in order, the glass-makers
bring the work to completion. The broken pieces they re-melt with dry wood,
which emits no smoke, but only a flame. The longer they re-melt it, the purer
and more transparent it becomes, the fewer spots and blisters there are, and
therefore the glass-makers can carry out their work more easily. For this
reason those who only melt the material from which glass is made for one
night, and then immediately make it up into glass articles, make them less
pure and transparent than those who first produce a vitreous mass and then
re-melt the broken pieces again fora day andanight. And, again, these make
a less pure and transparent glass than do those who melt it again for two days
and two nights, for the excellence of the glass does not consist solely in the
material from which it is made, but also in the melting. The glass-makers
often test the glass by drawing it up with the blowpipes; as soon as they
observe that the fragments have been re-melted and purified satisfactorily,
each of them with another blow-pipe which is in the pot, slowly stirs and takes
up the glass which sticks to it in the shape of a ball like a glutinous, coagulated
gum. He takes up just as much as he needs to complete the article he wishes
to make ; then he presses it against the lip of marble and kneads it round and
round until it consolidates. When he blows through the pipe he blows as
he would if inflating a bubble ; he blows into the blow-pipe as often as it is
necessary, removing it from his mouth to re-fill his cheeks, so that his breath
does not draw the flames into his mouth. Then, twisting the lifted blow-pipe
round his head in a circle, he makes a long glass, or moulds the same in a
hollow copper mould, turning it round and round, then warming it again,
blowing it and pressing it, he widens it into the shape of a cup or vessel, or of
any other object he has in mind. Then he again presses this against the
marble to flatten the bottom, which he moulds in the interior with his other
blow-pipe. Afterward he cuts out the lip with shears, and, if necessary, adds
feet and handles. _If it so please him, he gilds it and paints it with various
colours. Finally, he lays it in the oblong earthenware receptacle, which is
placed in the third furnace, or in the upper chamber of the second furnace,
that it may cool. When this receptacle is full of other slowly-cooled articles,
he passes a wide iron bar under it, and, carrying it on the left arm, places it
in another recess.

The glass-makers make divers things, such as goblets, cups, ewers, flasks,
dishes, plates, panes of glass, animals, trees, and ships, all of which excellent and
wonderful works I have seen when I spent two whole years in Venice some
time ago. Especially at the time of the Feast of the Ascension they were on
sale at Morano, where are located the most celebrated glass-works. These I
saw on other occasions, and when, for a certain reason, I visited Andrea
Naugerio in his house which he had there, and conversed with him and
Francisco Asulano,

END OF BOOK XII,

ES a ae ee

APPENDIX A.

AGRICOLA’S WORKS.

works on Mining and allied subjects, usually asso-
ciated with his name, but he also interested himself
to some extent in political and religious subjects.
For convenience in discussion we may, therefore,
divide his writings on the broad lines of (1) works on
mining, geology, mineralogy, and allied subjects ; (2)
works on other subjects, medical, religious, critical,
political, and historical. In respect especially to the
first division, and partially with regard to the others, we find three principal
cases: (a) Works which can be authenticated in European libraries to-day ;
(6) references to editions of these in bibliographies, catalogues, etc., which we
have been unable to authenticate ; and (c) references to works either un-
published or lost. The following are the short titles of all of the published
works which we have been able to find on the subjects allied to mining,
arranged according to their present importance :—De Re Metallica, first
edition, 1556; De Natura Fossilium, first edition, 1546; De Ortu et Causts
Subterraneorum, first edition, 1546; Bermannus, first edition, 1530; Rerum
Metallicarum Interpretatio, first edition, 1546; De Mensuris et Ponderibus,
first edition, 1533 ; De Precio Metallorum et Monetts, first edition, 1550 ; De
Veteribus et Novis Metallis, first edition, 1546 ; De Natura eorum quae Effiuunt
ex Terra, first edition, 1546; De Animantibus Subterraneis, first edition, 1549.

Of the “lost ’’ or unpublished works, on which there is some evidence,
the following are the most important :—De Metallicis et Machinis, De Ortu
Metallorum Defensio ad Jacobum Scheckium, De Jure et Legibus Metallicis,
De Varia Temperte sive Constitutione Aeris, De Terrae Motu, and Commen-
tariorum, Libri VI.

The known published works upon other subjects are as follows :—Latin
Grammar, first edition, 1520; Two Religious Tracts, first edition, 1522;
Galen (Joint Revision of Greek Text), first edition, 1525; De Bello adversus
Turcam, first edition, 1528; De Peste, first edition, 1554.

The lost or partially completed works on subjects unrelated to mining,
of which some trace has been found, are :—De Medicatis Fontibus, De Putre-
dine solidas partes, etc., Castigationes in Hippocratem, Typographia Mysnae
et Toringiae, De Traditionibus Apostolicis, Oratio de rebus gestis Ernesti et
Alberti, Ducum Saxoniae.

VS ih
=
ap

Z
eS
\Y7)

REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL WORKS.

Before proceeding with the bibliographical detail, we consider it desirable
to review briefly the most important of the author’s works on subjects related
to mining.

594 APPENDIX A.

- De Natura Fosstlium. This is the most important work of Agricola,
excepting De Re Metallica. It has always been printed in combination with
other works, and first appeared at Basel, 1546. This edition was considerably
revised by the author, the amended edition being that of 1558, which we have
used in giving references. The work comprises ten ‘‘ books” of a total of
217 folio pages. It is the first attempt at systematic mineralogy, the minerals?
being classified into (1) “ earths ’’ (clay, ochre, etc.), (2) ‘‘ stones properly so-
called’ (gems, semi-precious and unusual stones, as distinguished from rocks),
(3) ‘‘ solidified juices” (salt, vitriol, alum, etc.), (4) metals, and (5) “ com-
pounds’ (homogeneous ‘“ mixtures” of simple substances, thus forming
such minerals as galena, pyrite, etc.). In this classification Agricola en-
deavoured to find some fundamental basis, and therefore adopted solubility,
fusibility, odour, taste, etc., but any true classification without the atomic
theory was, of course, impossible. However, he makes a very creditable
performance out of their properties and obvious characteristics. All of the
external characteristics which we use to-day in discrimination, such as colour,
hardness, lustre, etc., are enumerated, the origin of these being attributed to
the proportions of the Peripatetic elements and their binary properties.
Dana, in his great work”, among some fourscore minerals which he identifies
as having been described by Agricola and his predecessors, accredits a score to
Agricola himself. It is our belief, however, that although in a few cases
Agricola has been wrongly credited, there are still more of which priority in
description might be assigned to him. While a greater number than four-
score of so-called species are given by Agricola and his predecessors, many
of these are, in our modern system, but varieties; for instance, some eight
or ten of the ancient species consist of one form or another of silica.

Book I. is devoted to mineral characteristics—colour, brilliance, taste,
shape, hardness, etc., and to the classification of minerals ; Book I1.,
“earths ’’—clay, Lemnian earth, chalk, ochre, etc.; Book III., “ solidified
juices ’’—salt, nitrwm (soda and potash), saltpetre, alum, vitriol, chrysocolla,
caerulewm (part azurite), orpiment, realgar, and sulphur ; Book IV., camphor,
bitumen, coal, bituminous shales, amber; Book V., lodestone, bloodstone,
gypsum, talc, asbestos, mica, calamine, various fossils, geodes, emery, touch-
stones, pumice, fluorspar, and quartz; Book VI., gems and precious stones ;
Book VII., ‘‘ rocks ’”—marble, serpentine, onyx, alabaster, limestone, etc. ;
Book VIII., metals—gold, silver, quicksilver, copper, lead, tin, antimony,
bismuth, iron, and alloys, such as electrum, brass, etc.; Book IX., various
furnace operations, such as making brass, gilding, tinning, and products such
as slags, furnace accretions, pompholyx (zinc oxide), copper flowers, litharge,
hearth-lead, verdigris, white-lead, red-lead, etc.; Book X., “ compounds,”
embracing the description of a number of recognisable silver, copper, lead,
quicksilver, iron, tin, antimony, and zinc minerals, many of which we set
out more fully in Note 8, page 108.

De Ortu et Causis Subterraneorum. This work also has always been
published in company with others. The first edition was printed at Basel,

1See footnote 4, page I. *System of Mineralogy.

APPENDIX A. 595

1546 ; the second at Basel, 1558, which, being the edition revised and added to
by the author, has been used by us for reference. There are five ‘‘ books,” and
in the main they contain Agricola’s philosophical views on geologic phenomena.
The largest portion of the actual text is occupied with refutations of the
ancient philosophers, the alchemists, and the astrologers ; and these portions,
while they exhibit his ability in observation and in dialectics, make but dull
reading. Those sections of the book which contain his own views, however,
are of the utmost importance in the history of science, and we reproduce
extensively the material relating to ore deposits in the footnotes on pages 43
to 52. Briefly, Book I. is devoted to discussion of the origin and distribution
of ground waters and juices. The latter part of this book and a portion of
Book II. are devoted to the origin of subterranean heat, which he assumes
is in the main due to burning bitumen—a genus which with him embraced
coal—and also, in a minor degree, to friction of internal winds and to
burning sulphur. The remainder of Book II. is mainly devoted to the dis-
cussion of subterranean “‘air”’, “‘ vapour”’, and “ exhalations’’, and he con-
ceives that volcanic eruptions and earthquakes are due to their agency, and
in these hypotheses he comes fairly close to the modern theory of eruptions
from explosions of steam. ‘‘ Vapour arises when the internal heat of the
“earth or some hidden fire burns earth which is moistened with vapour.
“When heat or subterranean fire meets with a great force of vapour which
“cold has contracted and encompassed in every direction, then the vapour,
“finding no outlet, tries to break through whatever is nearest to it, in order
“to give place to the insistent and urgent cold. Heat and cold cannot abide
“ together in one place, but expel and drive each other out of it by turns’.
As he was, we believe, the first to recognise the fundamental agencies
of mountain sculpture, we consider it is of sufficient interest to warrant a
reproduction of his views on this subject: ‘ Hills and mountains are pro-
“duced by two forces, one of which is the power of water, and the other the
“strength of the wind. There are three forces which loosen and demolish
“the mountains, for in this case, to the power of the water and the strength
“‘ of the wind we must add the fire in the interior of the earth. Now we can
“ plainly see that a great abundance of water produces mountains, for the
“torrents first of all wash out the soft earth, next carry away the harder
“earth, and then roll down the rocks, and thus in a few years they excavate
“the plains or slopes to a considerable depth ; this may be noticed in moun-
“tainous regions even by unskilled observers. By such excavation to a
“ great depth through many ages, there rises an immense eminence on each
“side. When an eminence has thus arisen, the earth rolls down, loosened by
“constant rain and split away by frost, and the rocks, unless they are exceed-
“ingly firm, since their seams are similarly softened by the damp, roll down
“into the excavations below. This continues until the steep eminence is
“ changed into a slope. Each side of the excavation is said to be a mountain,
“just as the bottom is called a valley. Moreover, streams, and to a far greater
“ extent rivers, effect the same results by their rushing and washing ; for this
“reason they are frequently seen flowing either between very high mountains

596 APPENDIX A.

‘“‘ which they have created, or close by the shore which borders them. . . .
“Nor did the hollow places which now contain the seas all formerly exist,
“nor yet the mountains which check and break their advance, but in many
‘“‘ parts there was a level plain, until the force of winds let loose upon it a
“tumultuous sea and a scathing tide. By a similar process the impact ot
“water entirely overthrows and flattens out hills and mountains. But
“these changes of local conditions, numerous and important as they are, are
“not noticed by the common people to be taking place at the very moment
‘“‘ when they are happening, because, through their antiquity, the time, place,
“and manner in which they began is far prior to human memory. The wind
“ produces hills and mountains in two ways: either when set loose and free
“from bonds, it violently moves and agitates the sand; or else when, after
“having been driven into the hidden recesses of the earth by cold, as into a
“« prison, it struggles with a great effort to burst out. For hills and mountains
“are created in hot countries, whether they are situated by the sea coasts or
‘‘in districts remote from the sea, by the force of winds ; these no longer held
‘‘in check by the valleys, but set free, heap up the sand and dust, which they
‘‘ gather from all sides, to one spot, and a mass arises and grows together. If
“time and space allow, it grows together and hardens, but if it be not allowed
‘(and in truth this is more often the case), the same force again scatters the
“sand far and wide. . . . Then, on the other hand, an earthquake
‘either rends and tears away part of a mountain, or engulfs and devours the
‘“whole mountain in some fearful chasm. In this way it is recorded the
‘““Cybotus was destroyed, and it is believed that within the memory of man
“an island under the rule of Denmark disappeared. Historians tell us that
‘“ Taygetus suffered a loss in this way, and that Therasia was swallowed up

‘“‘with the island of Thera. Thus it is clear that water and the powerful
g3 oo produce mountains, and also scatter and destroy them. Fire only

‘consumes them, and does not produce at all, for part of the mountains—
‘ usually the inner part—takes fire.”’

The major portion of Book III. is devoted to the origin of ore channels,
which we reproduce at some length on page 47. In the latter part of Book
III., and in Books [V. and V., he discusses the principal divisions of the mineral
kingdom given in De Natura Fossilium, and the origin of their characteristics.
It involves a large amount of what now appears fruitless tilting at the Peripa-
tetics and the alchemists; but nevertheless, embracing, as Agricola did, the
fundamental Aristotelian elements, he must needs find in these same ele-
ments and their subordinate binary combinations cause for every variation in
external character.

Bermannus. This, Agricola’s first work in relation to mining, was appa-
rently first published at Basel, 1530. The work is in the form of a dialogue
between “‘ Bermannus,”’ who is described as a miner, mineralogist, and “a
student of mathematics and poetry,” and ‘‘ Nicolaus Ancon’”’ and “‘ Johannes
Neavius,”’ both scholars and physicians. Ancon is supposed to be of philoso-
phical turn of mind and a student of Moorish literature, Naevius to be par-
ticularly learned in the writings of Dioscorides, Pliny, Galen, etc. ‘‘ Berman-

Sl i la SS EES

APPENDIX A. 597

nus”’ was probably an adaptation by Agricola of the name of his friend Lorenz
Berman, a prominent miner. The book is in the main devoted to a correla-
tion of the minerals mentioned by the Ancients with those found in the Saxon
mines. This phase is interesting as indicating the natural trend of Agricola’s
scholastic mind when he first comes into contact with the sciences to which
he devoted himself. The book opens with a letter of commendation from
Erasmus, of Rotterdam, and with the usual dedication and preface by the
author. The three conversationalists are supposed to take walks among the
mines and to discuss, incidentally, matters which come to their attention ;
therefore the book has no systematic or logical arrangement. There are
occasional statements bearing on the history, management, titles, and methods
used in the mines, and on mining lore generally. The mineralogical part, while
of importance from the point of view of giving the first description of several
minerals, is immensely improved upon in De Natura Fosstlium, published
15 years later. It is of interest to find here the first appearance of the names
of many minerals which we have since adopted from the German into our own
nomenclature. Of importance is the first description of bismuth, although,
as pointed out on page 433, the metal had been mentioned before. In the
revised collection of collateral works published in 1558, the author makes
many important changes and adds some new material, but some of the later
editions were made from the unrevised older texts.

Rerum Metallicarum Interpretatio. This list of German equivalents
for Latin mineralogical terms was prepared by Agricola himself, and first
appears in the 1546 collection of De Ortu et Causis, De Natura Fossilium, etc.,
being repeated in all subsequent publications of these works. It consists of
some 500 Latin mineralogical and metallurgical terms, many of which are of
Agricola’s own coinage. It is of great help in translation and of great value
in the study of mineralogic nomenclature.

De Mensuris et Ponderibus. This work is devoted to a discussion of the
Greek and Roman weights and measures, with some correlation to those used
in Saxony. It is a careful work still much referred to by students of these
subjects. The first edition was published at Paris in 1533, and in the 1550
edition at Basel appears, for the first time, De Precto Metallorum et Monetis.

De Veteribus et Novis Metallis. This short work comprises 31 folio
pages, and first appears in the 1546 collection of collateral works. It consists
mainly of historical and geographical references to the occurrence of metals
and mines, culled from the Greek and Latin classics, together with some
information as to the history of the mines in Central Europe. The latter
is the only original material, and unfortunately is not very extensive. We
have incorporated some of this information in the footnotes.

De Animantibus Subterraneis. This short work was first printed in
Basel, 1549, and consists of one chapter of 23 folio pages. Practically the whole
is devoted to the discussion of various animals who at least a portion of their
time live underground, such as hibernating, cave-dwelling, and burrowing
animals, together with cave-dwelling birds, lizards, crocodiles, serpents,
etc. There are only a few lines of remote geological interest as to migration

598 APPENDIX A.

of animals imposed by geologic phenomena, such as earthquakes, floods, etc.
This book also discloses an occasional vein of credulity not to be expected from
the author’s other works, in that he apparently believes Aristotle’s story of
the flies which were born and lived only in the smelting furnace ; and further,
the last paragraph in the book is devoted to underground gnomes. This we
reproduce in the footnote on page 217.

De Natura eorum quae Effiuunt ex Terra. This work of four books,
comprising 83 folio pages, first appears in the 1546 collection. As the title
indicates, the discussion is upon the substances which flow from the earth,
such as water, bitumen, gases, etc. Altogether it is of microscopic value and
wholly uninteresting. The major part refers to colour, taste, temperature,
medicinal uses of water, descriptions of rivers, lakes, swamps, and aqueducts.

XS

oe

APPENDIX A. 599

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTES.

For the following we have mainly to thank Miss Kathleen Schlesinger, who has been
employed many months in following up every clue, and although the results display
very considerable literary activity on the part of the author, they do not by any means
indicate Miss Schlesinger’s labours. by aba works were many of them published at
various times in combination, and therefore to set out the title and the publication of each
work separately would involve much repetition of titles, and we consequently give the titles
of the various volumes arranged according to dates. For instance, De Natura Fossilium, De
Ortu et Causis, De Veteribus et Novis Metallis, De Natura eorum quae Effluunt ex Terra, and
Interpretatio have always been published together, and the Latin and Italian editions of
these works always include Bermannus as well. Moreover, the Latin De Re Metallica of
1657 includes all of these works.

We mark with an asterisk the titles to editions which we have been able to authen-
ticate by various means from actual books. Those unmarked are editions which we are
satisfied do exist, but the titles of which are possibly incomplete, as they are taken from
library catalogues, etc. Other editions to which we find reference and of which we are not
certain are noted separately in the discussion later on.*

*1530 (8vo).

Georgit Agricolae Medici, Bermannus sive de re Metallica.

(Froben’s mark).

Basileae in aedibus Frobenianis Anno. MDXXX.

Bound with this edition is (p. 131-135), at least occasionally, Rerum metallicarum
appellationes juxta vernaculam Germanorum linguam, autori Plateano.

Basileae in officina Frobeniana, Anno. MDXXxX.

*1533 (8vo):

Georgit Agricolae Medict libri qui de Mensuris et Ponderibus: in quibus plaeraque
a Budaeo et Portio parum animadversa diligenter excutiuntur. Opus nunc primum in lucem
aeditum.

(Wechelus’s Mark).

Paristis. Excudebat Christianus Wechelus, in vico Iacobaeo, sub scuto Basileiensi, Anno
MDXXXIII.

261 pages and index of 5 pages.

8The following are the titles of the works referred to in this discussion :—

Petrus Albinus: Meissnische Land und Berg Chronica In welcher ein wollnstendige
description des Landes, etc., Dresden, 1590 (contains part 1, Commentatorium de Mysnia).
Newe Chronica und Beschreibung des Landes zu Meissen, pp. 1 to 449, besides preface and
index, a Part Il. Meissnische Bergk Chronica, Dresden, 1590, pp. I to 205, besides preface
and index.

Adam Daniel Richter: Unstandliche . . . . Chronica der . . . . Stadt
Chemnitz nebst beygefiigten Urkunden, 2 pts. 4to, Zittau & Leipzig, 1767.

Ben. G. Weinart: Versuch einer Fitieratur d, Sachsischen Geschichte und Staats kunde,
Leipzig, 1885.

Friedrich August Schmid: Georg Agrikola’s Bermannus: Einleitung in die
metallurgischen Schriften desselben, Freyberg, Craz & Gerlach, 1806, pp. vi1l., 1-260.

Franz Ambros Reuss: Mineralogische Geographie von Béhmen. 2 vols. 4to, Dresden,
1793-97. (Agricola Vol. 1, p. 2).

Jacob Leupold: Prodromus Bibliothecae Metallicae, corrected, continued, and
augmented by F. E. Briickmann. Wolfenbiittel, 1732, s.v. Agricola.

Christian Gottlieb Gécher: Allgemeines Gelehrten-Lexicon, with continuation and
supplements by Adelung, Leipzig, 1750, s.v. Agricola.

John Anton Van der Linden: De Scriptis medicis, Libri duo, Amsterdam, 1662, s.v.
Georgius Agricola.

Nicolas Frangois Joseph Eloy: Dictionnaire Historique de la Médecine, Liége &
Francfort (chez J. F. Bassompierre), 1755, 8vo (Agricola p. 28, vol. 1).

Georg Abraham Mercklinus: Lindenius Renovatus de scriptis medicis continuati

. . amplificatt, etc., Amsterdam, 1686, s.v. Georgius Agricola.

John Ferguson: Bibliotheca Chemica: A catalogue of the Alchemical, Chemical,
and Pharmaceutical books in the collection of the late James Young of Kelly & Durris, Esq.,
LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.E. Glasgow, 1906, 4to, 2 vols., s.v. Agricola.

Christoph Wilhelm Gatterer: Allgemeines Repertorium der mineralogischen, berg-
werks und Salz werkswissenschaftlichen Literatur, Gottingen, 1798, vol. r.

Dr. Reinhold Hofmann: Dr. Georg Agricola, Ein Gelehrtenleben aus dem Zeitalter der
Reformation, 8vo, Gotha, 1905.

_ Georg Heinrich Jacobi: Der Mineralog Georgius Agricola und sein Verhdlinis zur
wissenschaft seiner Zeit, etc., 8vo. Zwickau (1889), (Dissertation—Leipzig).

Georg Draud: Bibliotheca Classica, Frankfurt-am-Main, 1611.

B. G. Struve: Bibliotheca Saxonica, 8vo, Halle, 1736.

600 APPENDIX A.

*1533 (4to) :

Georgit Agricolae Medici Libri quingue. De Mensuris et Ponderibus: In quibus
pleraque & Budaeo et Portio parum animadversa diligenter excutiuntur.

(Froben’s Mark).

Basileae ex Officina Frobeniana Anno MDXXXIII. Cum gratia et privilegio Caesareo
ad sex annos.

: 1534 (4to):

Georgit Agricolae. Epistola ad Plateanum, cut sunt adiecta aliquot loca castigata in
libris de mensuris et ponderibus nuper editis.

Froben, Basel, 1534.

*1535 (8vo) :

Georgit Agricolae Medici libri V. de Mensuris et Ponderibus: in quibus pleraque a
Budaeo et Portio parum animadversa diligenter excutiuntur.

(Printer’s Mark).

At the end of Index: Venttiis per Joan Anto. de Nicolinis de Sabio, sumptu vero et
requisitione Diit Melchionis Sessae. Anno. Dii MDxxxv. Mense Julii. 116 folios.

On back of title page is given: Liber primus de mensuris Romanis, Secundus de men-
suris Graecis, Tertius de rerum quas metimur pondere, Quartus de ponderibus Romanis,
Quintus de ponderibus Graecis.

*1541 (8vo):
Georgit Agricolae Medici Bermannus sive de re metallica.
Parisiis. Apud Hieronymum Gormontit. In Vico Jacobeo sub signotrium coronarum.

154I.
*1546 (8vo):

Georgtt Agricolae medict Bermannus, sive de metallica ab accurata autoris recognitione
et emendatione nunc primum editus cum nomenclaiura rerum metallicarum.

Eorum Lipsiae In officina Valentini Papae Anno. MDXLVI.

*1546 (folio) :

Georgit Agricolae De ortu et causis subterraneorum Lib. V. De natura eorum quae
effiuunt ex terra Lib. IIII. De natura fossilium Lib. X. De veteribus et novis metallis, Lib. IT.
Bermannus sive De re Metallica dialogus. Interpretatio Germanica vocum rei metallicae addito
Indice faecundissimo.

Apud Hieron Frobenium et Nicolaum Episcopium Basileae, MDXLVI. Cum privilegio
Imp. Maiestatis ad quinquennium.

*1549 (8vo) :

Georgit Agricolae de animantibus subterraneis Liber.

Froben, Basel, MDXLIXx.

*1550 (8vo):

Di Georgio Agricola De la generatione de le cose, che sottola terra sono, e de le cause de’
loro effetti e natura, Lib. V. De La Natura di quelle cose, che de la terra scorrono Lib. IIII. De
La Natura de le cose Fossili, e che sotto la terra si Cavano Lib. X. De Le Minere antiche e
moderne Lib. II. Il Bermanno, 6 de le cose Metallice Dialogo, Recato tutto hora dal Latino
in Buona Lingua volgare.

(Vignette of Sybilla surrounded by the words)—Qv Al Piv Fermo E Il Mio Foglio En
Mio Presaggio.

Col Privilegio del Sommo Pontefice Papa Giulio III. Et del Illustriss. Senato Veneto per ~
anni. XX.

(Colophon). In Vinegia per Michele Tramezzino, MDL.

*1550 (folio) : ‘

Georgii Agricolae. De Mensuris et ponderibus Rom. atque Graec. ib. V. De externis
mensuris et ponderibus Lib. II. Ad ea quae Andreas Alciatus denuo disputavit De Men-
suris et Ponderibus brevis defensio Lib. I. De Mensuris quibus intervalla metimur Lib. I.
De restituendis ponderibus atque mensuris. Lib. I. De precio metallorum et monetis. Lib.
III.

Basileae. Froben. MDL. Cum privilegio Imp. Maitestatis ad quinquennium.*

*1556 (folio) :

Georgit Agricolae De Re Metallica Libri XII. quibus Officia, Instrumenta, Machinae, ac
omnia denique ad Metallicam spectantia, non modo luculentissime describuntur, sed et per effigies,
suis locis insertas, adjunctis Latinis, Germanicisque appellationibus ita ob oculos ponuntur,
ut clarius tradi non possint Eiusdem De Animantibus Subterraneis Liber, ab Autore recognitus :
cum Indicibus diversis, quicquid in opere tractatum est, pulthre demonstrantibus.

(Froben’s Mark).

Basileae MDLVI. Cum Privilegio Imperatoris in annos V. et Galliarum Regis ad
Sexennium.

Folio 538 pages and preface, glossary and index amounting to 86 pages. This is the
first edition of De Re Metallica. We reproduce this title-page on page xIx.

4Albinus states (p. 354): Ommes simul editi Anno. 1549, tterum 1550, Basileae, as
though two separate editions.

APPENDIX A. 601

*1557 (folio) :

Vom Bergkwerck xti Biicher darinn on Empter, Instrument, Gezeu e, unnd Alles zu disem
Handel gehérig, mitt schinen figuren vorbildet, und Klarlich beschriben seindt erstlich in
Lateinischer Sprach durch den Hochgelerten und weittberiimpten Herrn Georgium Agricolam,
Doctorn und. Biirgermeistern der Churfiirstlichen statt Kempnitz, jezundt aber vertetischt durch
den Achtparen. unnd Hochgelerten Herrn Philippum Bechium, Philosophen, Artzer und in der
Loblichen Universitet zu Basel Professorn. ,

Gedruckt zu Basel durch Jeronymus Froben Und Niclausen Bischoff im 1557 Jar mitt
Keiserlicher Freyheit.

*1558 (folio) :

Georgii Agricolae De ortu et causis subterraneorum Lib. V. De natura eorum quae
effluunt ex terra Lib. IV. De natura fossilium Lib. X. De veteribus et novis meiallis Lib. II.
ermannus, sive De Re Metallica Dialogus Liber. Interpretatio Germanica vocum ret metallicae,
addito duplici Indice, altero rerum, altero locorum Omnia ab ipso authore, cum haud poenitenda
accessione, recens recognita. : :
Froben, et Episcop. Basileae MpLvi11. Cum Imp. Maiestatis renovato privilegio ad quin-
mennium.
! 270 pages and index. As the title states, this is a revised edition by the author, and
as the changes are very considerable it should be the one used. The Italian translation
and the 1612 Wittenberg edition, mentioned below, are taken from the 1546 edition, and are,
therefore, very imperfect.
*1561 (folio) :

Second edition of De Re Metallica including De Animantibus Subterraneis, with same
title as the first edition except the addition, after the body of the title, of the words A¢que
omnibus nunc iterum ad archetypum diligenter restitutis et castigatis and the year MDLXI: 502
pages and 72 pages of glossary and index.

*1563 (folio) :

Opera di Giorgio Agricola de L’ arte de Metalli Partita in XII. libri, ne quali si descrivano
tutte le sorti, e qualita de gli uffizit, de gli strumenti, delle macchine, e di tutte l'altre cose attenenti
a cotal arte, non pure con parole chiare ma eziandio si mettano a luoghi loro le figure di dette
cose, ritratte al naturale, con l'aggiunta de nomi di quelle, cotanto chiari, e spediti, che meglio non
st puo desiderare, o havere.

Aggiugness il libro del medesimo autore, che tratta de gl’ Animali di sottoterra da lui stesso
corretto et riveduto. Tradotti in lingua Toscana da M. Michelangelo Florio Fiorentino.

Con l’ Indice di tuite le cose piu notabili alla fine (Froben’s mark) in Basilea per Hieronimo
Frobenio et Nicolao Episcopio, MDLXIII.

542 pages with 6 pages of index.

*1580 (folio) :

Bergwerck Buch: Darinn nicht Allain alle Empte Instrument Gezeug und alles so zu
diesem Handel gehérig mit figuren vorgebildet und klarlich beschriben, etc. Durch den Hoch-
gelehrien . . . . Herrn Georgium Agricolam der Artzney Doctorn und Burgermeister
der Churfiirstlichen Statt Kemnitz erstlich mit grossem fleyss mithe und arbeit in Latein beschriben
und in zwolff Biicher abgetheilt: Nachmals aber durch den Achtbarn und auch Hochgelehrten
Philippum Bechium Philosophen Artzt und in der Loblichen Universitet zu Basel Professorn
mit sonderm fleyss Teutscher Nation zu gut verteutscht und an Tag geben. Allen Berckherrn
Gewercken Berckmeistern Geschwornen Schichtmeistern Steigern Berckheuwern Waschern
und Schmeltzern nicht allein niitzlich und dienstlich sondern auch zu wissem hochnotwendig.

Mit Rémischer Keys. May Freyhett nicht nachzutrucken.

Getruckt in der Keyserlichen Reichsstatt, Franckfort am Mayn, etc. Im Jahr MDLXxx.

*1612 (12mo):

Georgit Agricolae De ortu et causis subterraneorum Lib. V. De natura eorum quae
Foie ex terra, Lib. IV. De natura fossilium Lib. X. De veteribus et novis metallis Lib. II.

ermannus, sive de re metallica Dialogus. Interpretatio Germanica vocum rei metallicae.

Addito Indice faecundissimo, Plurimos jam annos @ Germants, et externarum quoque
nationum doctissimis viris, valde desiderati et expetiti.

Nunc vero in rei metallicae studiosorum gratiam recensiti, in certa capita distributi,
capitum argumentis, et nonnullis scholits marginalibus illustrati @ Johanne Sigfrido Philos: et
Medicinae Doctore et in illustri Julia Professore ordinario.

Accesserunt De metallicis rebus et nominibus observationes variae et eruditae, ex schedis
Georgii Fabricit, guibus ea potissimum explicantur, quae Georgius Agricola praeteriit.

Wittebergae Sumptibus Zachariae Schiireri Bibliopolae Typis Andreae Riidingeri, 1612.

There are 970 pages in the work of Agricola proper, the notes of Fabricius comprising
a further 44 pages, and the index rrz2 pages.

*1614 (8vo): :

Georgii Agricolae De Animantibus Subterraneis Liber Hactenus a multis desideratus,
nunc vero tn gratiam studiosorum seorsim editus, in certa capita divisus, capitum argumentis et
nonnullis marginalibus exornatus a Johanne Sigfrido, Phil. & Med. Doctore, etc.

Wittebergae, Typis Meisnerianis: Impensis Zachariae. Schureri Bibliop. Anno.
MDCXIV.

602 APPENDIX A.

*1621 (folio):

Georgit Agricolae Kempnicensis Medici ac Philosopht Clariss. De Re Metallica Libri XII
Quibus Officia, Instrumenta, Machinae, ac omnia denique ad metallicam spectantia, non modo
Luculentissimé describuntur ; sed et per effigies, suis locis insertas adjunctis Latinis, German-
tcisque; appellationibus, ita ob oculos ponuntur, ut clarius tradi non possint.

Ejusdem De Animantibus Subterranets Liber, ab Autore recognitus cum Indicibus diversis
quicquid in Opere tractatum est, pulchré demonstrantibus.

(Vignette of man at assay furnace).

Bastleae Helvet. Sumptibus itemque typis chalcographicis Ludovict Regis Anno MDCXXI.

502 pages and 58 pages glossary and indices.

*1621 (folio) :

Bergwerck Buch Darinnen nicht allein alle Empter Instrument Gezeug und alles so zu
disem Handel gehérig mit Figuren vorgebildet und klarlich beschriecben: . . . . Durch
den Hochgelehrien und weitberithmten Herrn Georgium Agricolam, der Artzney Doctorn und
Burgermeister der Churfiirstlichen Statt Kemnitz Erstlich mit grossem fleiss mithe und arbett in
Latein beschrieben und in zwolff Biicher abgetheilt: Nachmals aber durch den Achtbarn und
auch Hochgelehrten Philippum Bechium. Philosophen, Artzt, und in der loblichen Universitet zu
Basel Professorn mit sonderm fleiss Teutscher Nation zu gut verteutscht und an Tag geben und
nun zum andern mal getruckt.

Allen Bergherrn Gewercken Bergmeistern Geschwornen Schichimeistern Steigern
Berghawern Waschern unnd Schmeltzern nicht allein nutzlich und dienstlich sondern a au
wissen hochnohtwendig.

(Vignette of man at assay furnace).

Getruckt zu Basel inverlegung Ludwig Kénigs Im Jahr, MDCXXI.

491 pages 5 pages glossary—no index.

*1657 (folio) :

Georgit Agricolae Kempnicensis Medici ac Philosophi Clariss. De Re Metallica Libri
XIT. Quibus Officia, instrumenta, machinae, ac omnia denique ad metallicam spectantia, non
modo luculentissimé describuntur: sed et per effigies, suis locis insertas, adjunctis Latinis,
Germanicisque appellationibus, tta ob oculos ponuntur, ut clarius tradi non possint. Quibus
accesserunt hac ultima editione, Tractatus ejusdem argumenti, ab eodem conscripti, sequentes.

De Animantibus Subterraneis Lib. I., De Ortu et Causis Subterraneorum Lib. V., De
Natura eorum quae effluunt ex Terra Lib. IV., De Natura Fossilium Lib. X., De Veteribus et
Novis Metallis Lib. II., Bermannus sive de Re Metallica, Dialogus Ltb. I.

Cum Indicibus diversis, quicquid in Opere tractatum est, pulchré demonstrantibus.

(Vignette of assayer pe | furnace).

Basileae Sumptibus et Typis Emanuelis Konig. Anno MDCLVII.

Folio, 708 pages and go pages of glossary and indices. This is a very serviceable
edition of all of Agricola’s important works, and so far as we have noticed there are but few
typographical errors.

*1778 (8vo):

Gespraich vom Bergwesen, wegen seiner Fiirtrefflich keit aus dem Lateinischen in das
Deutsche tibersetzet, mit niitzl. Anmerkungen erldutert. u. mit einem ganz neuen Zusatze von
Zliiglicher Anstellung des Bergbaues u. von der Zugutemachung der Erze auf den Hiittenwerken
versehen von Johann Gottlieb Stor.

Rotenburg a. d. Fulda, Hermstédt 1778. 180 pages.

*1806 (8vo):

Georg Agricola’s Bermannus eine Einleitung in die metallurgischen Schriften desselben,
iibersetzt und mit Exkursionen herausgegeben von Friedrich August Schmid. Haushalts-und
Befahrungs-Protokollist im Chur}. vereinigten Bergamte zu St. Annaberg.

Freyberg 1806. Bey Craz und Gerlach.

*1807-12 (8vo).

Georg Agrikola’s Mineralogische Schriften iibersetzt und mit erlauternden Anmerkungen.
Begleitet von Evnst Lehmann Bergamts-Assessor, Berg- Gegen- und Receszschreiber in Dem
Konigl. Sachs. Bergamte Voigtsberg der jenaischen Societat fiir die gesammte Mineralogie
Ehrenmitgliede.

Freyberg, 1807-12. Bey Craz und Gerlach.

This German translation consists of four parts: the first being De Ortu et Causis,
the second De Natura eorum quae effluunt ex terra, and the third in two volumes De Natura
Fosstlium, the fourth De Vetertbus et Novis Metallis; with glossary and index to the four
parts.

We give the following notes on other possible prints, as a great many references to the
above works occur in various quarters, of date other than the above. Unless otherwise
convinced it is our belief that most of these refer to the prints given above, and are due to
error in giving titles or dates. It is always possible that such prints do exist and have escaped
our search.

APPENDIX A. 603

De Re Metallica. Leupold, Richter, Schmid, van der Linden, Mercklinus and Eloy

ive an 8vo edition of De Re Metallica without illustrations, Schweinfurt, 1607. We have
ound no trace of this print. Leupold, van der Linden, Richter, Schmid and Eloy mention
an 8vo edition, Wittenberg, 1614. It is our belief that this refers to the 1612 Wittenberg
edition of the selected works, which contains a somewhat similar title referring in reality
to Bermannus, which was and is still continually confused with De Re Metallica. Ferguson
mentions a German edition, Schweinfurt, 8vo, 1687. We can find no trace of this; it may
refer to the 1607 Schweinfurt edition mentioned above.

De Natura Fossilium. Leupold and Gatter refer to a folio edition of 1550. This was
probably an error for either the 1546 or the 1558 editions. Watt refers to an edition of 1561
combined with De Medicatis Fontibus. We find no trace of such edition, nor even that the
latter work was ever actually printed. He also refers to an edition of 1614 and one of 1621,
this probably being an error for the 1612 edition of the subsidiary works and the De Re
Metallica of 1621. Leupold also refers to an edition of 1622, this probably being an error for
1612.

De Ortu et Causis. Albinus, Hofmann, Jacobi, Schmid, Richter, and Reuss mention
an edition of 1544. This we believe to be an error in giving the date of the dedication instead
of that of the publication (1546). Albinus and Ferguson give an edition of 1555, which date
is, we believe, an error for 1558. Ferguson gives an edition of the Italian translation as
1559; we believe this should be 1550. Draud gives an edition of 1621 ; probably this
should be 1612.

Bermannus. Albinus, Schmid, Reuss, Richter, and Weinart give the first edition as
1528. We have been unable to learn of any actual copy of that date, and it is our belief that
the date is taken from the dedication instead of from the publication, and should be 1530.
aie Sey Schmid, and Reuss give an edition by Froben in 1549; we have been unable to
confirm this. Leupold also gives an edition of 1550 (folio), and Jécher gives an edition of
Geneva 1561 (folio); we have also been unable to find this, and believe the latter to be a
confusion with the De Re Metallica of 1561, as it is unlikely that Bermannus would be pub-
lished by itself in folio. The catalogue of the library at Siena (Vol. III., p. 78) gives II
Bermanno, Vinegia, 1550, 8vo. We have found no trace of this edition elsewhere.

De Mensuris et Ponderibus. Albinus and Schmid mention an edition of 1539, and one
of 1550. The Biographie Universelle, Paris, gives one of 1553, and Leupold one of 1714, all
of which we have been unable to find. An epitome of this work was published at various
times, sometimes in connection with editions of Vitruvius; so far as we are aware on the
following dates, 1552, 1585, 1586, 1829. There also appear extracts in relation to liquid
measures in works entitled Vocabula rei numariae ponderum et mensurarum, etc. Paul Eber
and Caspar Peucer, Lifsiae, 1549, and in same Wittenberg, 1552.

e Veteribus et Novis Metallis. Watt gives an edition, Basel, 1530, and Paris, 1541 ;
we believe this is incorrect and refers to Bermannus. Reuss mentions a folio print of Basel,
1550. We consider this very unlikely.

De Natura eorum quae Effiuunt ex Terra. Albinus, Hofmann, Schmid, Jacobi,
Richter, Reuss, and Weinart give an edition of 1545. We believe this is again the dedication
instead of the publication date (1546).

De Animantibus Subterraneis. Van der Linden gives an edition at Schweinfurt,
8vo, 1607. Although we have been unable to find a copy, this slightly confirms the
possibility of an octavo edition of De Re Metallica of this date, as they were usually published
together. Leupold gives assurance that he handled an octavo edition of Wittenberg, 1612,
cum notis Johann Sigfridi. We think he confused this with Bermannus sive de re metallica
of that date and place. Schmid, Richter, and Draud all refer to an edition similarly annotated,
Leipzig, 1613, 8vo. We have no trace of it otherwise.

UNPUBLISHED WORKS ON SUBJECTS RELATED TO MINING.

Agricola apparently projected a complete series of works covering the whole range of
subjects relating to minerals: geology, mineralogy, mining, metallurgy, history of metals,
their uses, laws, etc. In a letter® from Fabricius to Meurer (March, 1553), the former states
that Agricola intended writing about 30 books (chapters) in addition to those already pub-
lished, and to the twelve books De Re Metallica which he was about to publish. Apparently
a number of these works were either unfinished or unpublished at Agricola’s death, for his
friend George Fabricius seems to have made some effort to secure their publication, but did
not succeed, through lack of sympathy on the part of Agricola’s family. Hofmann® states on
this matter : ‘‘ His intentions were frustrated mainly through the lack of support with which
“he was met by the heirs of the Mineralogist. These, as he complains to a Councillor of the
“Electorate, Christopher von Carlovitz, in 1556, and to Paul Eber in another letter, adopted
“8 grudging and ungracious tone with regard to his proposal to collect all Agricola’s works
“left behind, and they only consented to communicate to him as much as they were obliged

_ _ 5G. Fabricti epistolae ad W. Meurerum et alios aequales, by Baumgarten-Crusius,
Leipzig, 1845, p. 83. _
°Dr. Georg Agricola, Gotha, 1905, pp. 60-61.

604 APPENDIX A.

“by express command of the Prince. At the Prince’s command they showed him a little,
“but he supposed that there was much more that they had suppressed or not preserved.
“The attempt to purchase some of the works—the Elector had given Fabricius money for
“the purpose (30 nummos unciales)—proved unavailing, owing to the disagreeableness of
“ Agricola’s heirs. It is no doubt due to these regrettable circumstances that all the works
“of the industrious scholar did not come down to us.”’ The “‘ disagreeableness” was pro-
bably due to the refusal of the Protestant townsfolk to allow the burial of Agricola in the
Cathedral at Chemnitz. So far as we know the following are the unpublished or lost works.

De Jure et Legibus Metallicis. This work on mining law is mentioned at the end of
Book IV. of De Re Metallica, and it is referred to by others apparently from that source. We
have been unable to find any evidence that it was ever published.

De Varia temperie sive Constitutione Aerts. In a letter? to Johann Naevius, Agricola
refers to having a work in hand of this title.

De Metallis et Machinis. Hofmann® states that a work of this title by Agricola, dated
Basel 1543, was sold to someone in America by a Frankfort-on-Main bookseller in 1896.
This is apparently the only reference to it that we know of, and it is possibly a confusion of
titles or a “‘separate”’ of some chapters from De Re Metallica.

De Ortu Metallorum Defensio ad Jacobum Scheckium. Referred to by Fabricius in a

letter® to Meurer. If published was probably only a tract.

De Terrae Motu. Ina letter!® from Agricola to Meurer (Jan. 1, 1544) is some reference
which might indicate that he was formulating a work on earthquakes under this title, or
perhaps may be only incidental to the portions of De Ortu et Causis dealing with this subject.

Commentariorum in quibus utriusque linguae scriptorum locos difficiles de rebus
subterraneis explicat, Libri VI. Agricola apparently partially completed a work under some
such title as this, which was to embrace chapters entitled De Methodis and De Demonstratione.
The main object seems to have been a commentary on the terms and passages in the classics
relating to mining, mineralogy, etc. It is mentioned in the Preface of De Veteribus et Novis
Metallis, and in a letter! from one of Froben’s firm to Agricola in 1548, where it is suggested
that Agricola should defer sending his new commentaries until the following spring. The
work is mentioned by Albinus?*, and in a letter from Georg Fabricius to Meurer on the 2nd
Jan. 1548,1% in another from G. Fabricius, to his brother Andreas on Oct. 28, 1555,!4 and in
a third from Fabricius to Melanchthon on December 8th, 15555, in which regret is expressed
that the work was not completed by Agricola.

7Albinus, Landchronik, pp. 354-5.
8Dr. Georg Agricola, p. 63.
*Baumgarten-Crusius, p. II5.
1°Vivorum Clarorum Saec. xvi. et xvi. — Epistolae Selectae by Ernst Weber, Leipzig,
1894, p. 2.
UNicholas Episcopius to Georg Agricola, Sept. 17, 1548, published in Schmid’s
Bermannus p. 38. e also Hofmann, op. cit. pp. 62 and 140.
12M eissnische Landchronik, Dresden, 1589, p. 354.
18Printed in Baumgarten-Crusius, pp. 48-49, letter XLVIII.
14Printed in Hermann Peter’s Meissner Jahresbericht der Fiirstenschule, 1891, p. 24.
15Baumgarten-Crusius. Georgii Fabricii Chemnicensis Epistolae, Leipzig, 1845,
P. 139.

es

SNS
RK
be SRR Non)
eerie
OXY

i a

[ee

ou Ae

APPENDIX A. 605

WRITINGS NOT RELATED TO MINING, INCLUDING LOST OR UNPUBLISHED

WORKS.
Latin Grammar. This was probably the first of Agricola’s publications, the full title
to which is Georgit Agri Glaucti Libellus de prima ac simplict institutione grammatica.

Excusum Lipsiae in ina Melchioris Lottheri. Anno MDxx. (4to), 24 folios.1* There is
some reason to believe that Agricola also published a Greek grammar, for there is a letter!”
from Agricola dated March 18th, 1522, in which Henicus Camitianus is requested to send a
copy to 9 8 Roth. , .

Theological Tracts. There are preserved in the Zwickau Rathsschul Library’® copies
by Stephan Roth of two tracts, the one entitled, Deum non esse auctorem Peccati, the
other, Religioso patri Petri Fontano, sacre theologie Doctori eximio Georgius Agricola salutem
dicit in Christo. The former was written from Leipzig in 1522, and the latter, although
not dated, is assigned to the same period. Both are printed in Zwei theologische Abhandlungen
des Georg Agricola, an article by Otto Clemen, Neuen Archiv fiir Sdchsische Geschichte, etc.,
Dresden, 1900. There is some reason (from a letter of Fabricius to Melanchthon, Dec. 8th,
1555) to believe that Agricola had completed a work on the unwritten traditions concerning
the Church. There is no further trace of it.

Galen. Agricola appears to have been joint author with Andreas Asulanus and J. B.
Opizo of a revision of this well-known Greek work. It was published at Venice in 1525,
under the title of Galeni Librorwm, etc., etc. Agricola’s name is mentioned in a prefatory

letter to Opizo by Asulanus.
De Bello adversus Turcam. This political tract, directed against the Turks, was written in
Latin and first printed by Froben, Basel, 1528. It was translated into German apparently
by Agricola’s friend Laurenz Berman, and published under the title Oration Anrede Und

ormanunge . . . . widder den Tiircken by Frederich Peypus, Nuremberg, in 1531
(8vo), and either in 1530 or 1531 by Wolfgang Stéckel, Dresden, 4to. It was again printed
in Latin by Froben, Basel, 1538, 4to; by H. Grosius, Leipzig, 1594, 8vo; it was included
among other works published on the same subject by Nicholas Reusnerus, Leipzig, 1595 ;
7 Michael Lantzenberger, Frankfurt-am-Main, 1597, 4to. Further, there is reference by

att to an edition at Eisleben, 1603, of which we have no confirmation. There is another
work on the subject, or a revision by the author mentioned by Albinus!® as having been,
after Agricola’s death, sent to Froben by George Fabricius to be printed; nothing further
appears in this matter however.

De Peste. This work on the Plague appears to have been first printed by Froben,
Basel, 1554, 8vo. The work was i tamer at Schweinfurt, 1607, and at Augsburg in
1614, under various editors. It would appear from Albinus?® that the work was revised by
Agricola and in Froben’s hands for publication after the author’s death.

De Medicatis Fontibus. This work is referred to by Agricola himself in De Natura
Eorum,™ in the prefatory letter in De Veteribus et Novis Metallis; and Albinus*® quotes a
letter of Agricola to Sebastian Munster on the subject. Albinus states (Bergchrontk, p. 193)
that to his knowledge it had not yet been published. Conrad Gesner, in his work By
torum et observationum de Thermis, which is reprinted in De Balnets, Venice, 1553, after
Agricola’s De Natura Eorum, states ® concerning Agricola in libris quos de medicatis fontibus
instituerit coptosus se dicturum pollicetur. Watts mentions it as having been published in 1549,
1561, 1614, and 1621. He, however, apparently confuses it with De Natura Eorum. We
are unable to state whether it was ever printed or not. A note of inquiry to the principal
libraries in Germany gave a negative result.

De Putredine solidas partes humani corporis corrumpente. This work, according to
Albinus was received by Fabricius a year after Agricola’s death, but whether it was published
or not is uncertain.?4

Castigationes in Hippocratem et Galenum. This work is referred to by Agricola in the
preface of Bermannus, and Albinus®’ mentions several letters referring to the preparation
of the work. There is no evidence of publication.

Typographia Mysnae et Toringiae. It seems from Agricola’s letter?* to Munster that
Agricola prepared some sort of a work on the history of Saxony and of the Royal Family

16There is a copy of this work in the Rathsschul Library at Zwickau.

1In the Rathsschul Library at Zwickau.

48Contained in Vols. xxxvul. and xL. of Stephan Roth’s Kollectanenbinde Volumes
of Transcripts.

198Landchronik, p- 354.

Page 20Q1.

aoe o>. sc rps p. 114, letter from Georg Fabricius,
p. cit., p. 354.

**Albinus, Op. cit., p. 355.

41

606 APPENDIX A.

thereof at the command of the Elector and sent it to him when finished, but it was never
published as written by Agricola. Albinus, Hofmann, and Struve give some details of letters
in reference to it. Fabricius in a letter?? dated Nov. 11, 1536 asks Meurer to send Agricola
some material for it; in a letter from Fabricius to Meurer dated Oct. 30, 1554, it appears
that the Elector had granted Agricola 200 thalers to assist in the work. After Agricola’s
death the material seems to have been handed over to Fabricius, who made use of it (as he
states in the preface) in preparing the work he was commissioned by the Elector to write,
the title of which was, Oviginum tllustrissimae stirpis Saxonicae Libri, and was published in
Leipzig, 1597. It includes on page 880 a fragment of a work entitled Oratio de rebus Gestis
Ernesti et Alberti Ducum Saxoniae, by Agricola.

WORKS WRONGLY ATTRIBUTED TO GEORGIUS AGRICOLA.

The following works have been at one time or another wrongly attributed to Georgius

Agricola :—
oa Galerazeya sive Revelator Secretorum De Lapide Philosophorum, Cologne, 1531 and

1534, by one Daniel Agricola, which is merely a controversial book with a catch-title, used
by Catholics for converting heretics.

Rechier Gebrauch der Alchimey, a book of miscellaneous receipts which treats very
slightly of transmutation.?®

Chrontk der Stadt Freiberg by a Georg Agricola (died 1630), a preacher at Freiberg.

Dominatores Saxonict, by the same author. ;

Breviarum de Asse by Guillaume Bude.

De Inventione Dialectica by Rudolph Agricola.

27Baumgarten-Crusius, p. 2.
28See Ferguson, Bibliotheca Chemica, sv. Daniel Agricola.

|

$
Ys

x
&

Or
(x)

:
fi
a
j

ee a eT ee

APPENDIX B.

ANCIENT AUTHORS.

We give the following brief notes on early works containing some reference to miner-
alogy, mining, or metallurgy, to indicate the literature available to Agricola and for historical
notes bearing upon the subject. References to these works in the footnotes may be most
easily consulted through the personal index.

GREEK AUTHORS.—Only a very limited Greek literature upon subjects allied to
mining or natural science survives. The whole of the material of technical interest could be
re uced on less than twenty of these pages. Those of most importance are: Aristotle
( apm B.C.), Theophrastus (371-288 B.c.), Diodorus Siculus (1st Century B.c.), Strabo
(64 B.c.—25 A.D.), and Dioscorides (1st Century A.D.).

Aristotle, apart from occasional mineralogical or metallurgical references in De Mira-
bilibus, is mostly of interest as the author of the Peripatetic theory of the elements and the
relation of these to the origin of stones and metals. Agricola was, to a considerable measure,
a follower of this school, and their views colour much of his writings. We, however, discuss
elsewhere! at what point he pr sen from them. Especially in De Ortu et Causis does he
quote largely from Aristotle’s Meteorologica, Physica, and De Coelo on these subjects. There
is a spurious work on stones attributed to Aristotle of some interest to mineralogists. It was
probably the work of some Arab early in the Middle Ages.

eophrastus, the principal disciple of Aristotle, appears to have written at least two
works relating to our subject—one ‘‘ On Stones’’, and the other on metals, mining or metal-
lurgy, but the latter is not extant. The work “On Stones” was first printed in Venice in
1498, and the Greek text, together with a fair English translation by Sir John Hill, was
ublished in London in 1746 under the title “‘ Theophrastus on Stones’’; the translation is,
owever, somewhat coloured with Hill’s views on mineralogy. The work comprises 120
short paragraphs, and would, if reproduced, cover but about four of these pages. In the
first phs are the Peripatetic view of the origin of stones and minerals, and upon the
foundation of Aristotle he makes some modifications. The principal interest in Theophrastus’
work is the description of minerals ; the information given is, however, such as might be pos-
sessed by any ordinary workman, and betrays no particular abilities for natural philosophy.
He enumerates various exterior characteristics, such as colour, tenacity, hardness, na
ness, density, fusibility, lustre, and transparence, and their quality of reproduction, and then
ds to describe various substances, but usually omits his enumerated characteristics.
part from the then known metals and certain “earths ” (ochre, marls, clay, etc.), it is possible
to identify from his descriptions the following rocks and minerals :—marble, pumice, onyx,
gypsum, pyrites, coal, bitumen, amber, azurite, chrysocolla, realgar, orpiment, cinnabar,
quartz in various forms, lapis lazuli, emerald, sapphire, diamond, and ruby. Altogether there
are some sixteen distinct mineral species. He also describes the touchstone and its uses, the
making of white-lead and verdigris, and of quicksilver from cinnabar.

Disdorts Siculus was a Greek native of Sicily. His ‘‘ historical library ” consisted of
some 40 books, of which parts of 15 are extant. The first print was in Latin, 1472, and in
Greek in 1539; the first translation into English was by Thomas Stocker, London, 1568, and
later by G. Booth, 1700. We have relied upon Booth’s translation, but with some amend-
ments by friends, to gain more literal statement. Diodorus, so far as relates to our subject,
gives merely the occasional note of a traveller. The most interesting paragraphs are his
quotation from Agatharchides on Egyptian mining and upon British tin.

Strabo was also a geographer. His work consists of 17 books, and practically all
survive. We have relied upon the most excellent translation of Hamilton and Falconer,
London, 1903, the only one in English. Mines and minerals did not escape such an acute
geographer, and the matters of greatest interest are those with relation to Spanish mines.

ioscorides was a Greek physician who wrote entirely from the standpoint of materia
medica, most of his work being devoted to herbs; but Book V. is devoted to minerals and
rocks, and their preparation for medicinal purposes. The work has never been translated
into English, and we have relied upon the Latin translation of Matthioli, Venice, 1565, and notes
upon the Greek text prepared for us by Mr. C. Katopodes. In addition to most of the sub-
stances known before, he, so far as can be identified, adds schist, cadmia (blende or calamine),
chalcitis (copper sulphide), misy, melanteria, sory (copper or iron sulphide oxidation minerals).
‘He describes the making of certain artificial products, such as copper oxides, vitriol, litharge,
pompholyx, and spodos (zinc and / or arsenical oxides). His principal interest for us, however,
lies in the processes set out for making his medicines. a Rap ean
_ Occasional scraps of information relating to the metals or mines in some connection
are to be found in many other Greek writers, and in quotations by them from others which are
not now extant, such.as)Polybius, Posidonius, etc. The poets occasionally throw a gleam

pels

‘See pages 44 and 46.

608 APPENDIX B.

of light on ancient metallurgy, as for instance in Homer’s description of Vulcan’s foundry ;
while the historians, philosophers, statesmen, and physicians, among them Herodotus,
Xenophon, Demosthenes, Galen, and many others, have left some incidental references to the
metals and mining, helpful to gleaners from a field, which has been almost exhausted by time.
Even Archimedes made pumps, and Hero surveying instruments for mines.

ROMAN AUTHORS.—Pre-eminent among all ancient writers on these subjects is, of
course, Pliny, and in fact, except some few lines by Vitruvius, there is practically little else
in extant Roman literature of technical interest, for the metallurgical metaphors of the poets
and orators were threadbare by this time, and do not excite so much interest as upon their
first appearance among the Greeks and Hebrews.

Pliny (Caius Plinius Secundus) was born 23 A.D., and was killed by eruption of Vesuvius
79 A.D. His Natural History should be more properly called an encyclopedia, the whole
comprising 37 books ; but only portions of the last four books relate to our subject, and over
one-half of the material there is upon precious stones. To give some rough idea of the small
quantity of even this, the most voluminous of ancient works upon our subject, we have made
an estimate that the portions of metallurgical character would cover, say, three pages of
this text, on mining two pages, on building and precious stones about ten pages. Pliny
and Dioscorides were contemporaries, and while Pliny nowhere refers to the Greek, internal
evidence is most convincing, either that they drew from the same source, or that Pliny drew
from Dioscorides. We have, therefore, throughout the text given precedence in time to the
Greek author in matters of historical interest. The works of Pliny were first printed at Venice
in 1469. They have passed dozens of editions in various languages, and have been twice
translated into English. The first translation by Philemon Holland, London, 1601, is quite
impossible. The second translation, by Bostock and Riley, London, 1855, was a great
advance, and the notes are most valuable, but in general the work has suffered from a freedom
justifiable in the translation of poetry, but not in science. We have relied upon the Latin
edition of Janus, Leipzig, 1870. The frequent quotations in our footnotes are sufficient
indication of the character of Pliny’s work. In general it should be remembered that he was
himself but a compiler of information from others, and, so far as our subjects are concerned,
of no other experience than most travellers. When one considers the reliability of such
authors to-day on technical subjects, respect for Pliny is much enhanced. Further, the text
is no doubt much corrupted through the generations of transcription before it was set in type.
So far as can be identified with any assurance, Pliny adds but few distinct minerals to hess
enumerated by Theophrastus and Dioscorides. For his metallurgical and mining information
we refer to the footnotes, and in general it may be said that while those skilled in metallurgy
can dimly see in his statements many metallurgical operations, there is little that does not
require much deduction to arrive at a conclusion. On geology he offers no new philosophical
deductions of consequence ; the remote connection of building stones is practically all that
can be enumerated, lest one build some assumption of a knowledge of ore-deposits on the
use of the word “vein”. One point of great interest to this work is that in his search for Latin
terms for technical purposes Agricola relied almost wholly upon Pliny, and by some devotion
to the latter we have been able to disentangle some very puzzling matters of nomenclature
in De Re Metallica, of which the term molybdaena may be cited as a case in point.

Vitruvius was a Roman architect of note of the rst Century B.c. His work of ten
books contains some very minor references to pumps and machinery, building stones, and the
preparation of pigments, the latter involving operations from which metallurgical deductions
can occasionally be safely made. His works were apparently first printed in Rome in 1496.
There are many editions in various languages, the first English translation being from the
French in 1692. We have relied upon the translation of Joseph Gwilt, London, 1875, with
such alterations as we have considered necessary.

MEDIZVAL AUTHORS. For convenience we group under this heading the writers
of interest from Roman times to the awakening of learning in the early 16th Century.
Apart from Theophilus, they are mostly alchemists ; but, nevertheless, some are of great
importance in the history of metallurgy and chemistry. Omitting a horde of lesser lights
upon whom we have given some data under the author’s preface, the works principally con-
cerned are those ascribed to Avicenna, Theophilus, Geber, Albertus Magnus, Roger Bacon,
and Basil Valentine. Judging from the Preface to De Re Metallica, and from quotations in his
subsidiary works, Agricola must have been not only familiar with a wide range of alchemistic
material, but also with a good deal of the Arabic literature, which had been translated into
Latin. The Arabs were, of course, the only race which kept the light of science burning
during the Dark Ages, and their works were in considerable vogue at Agricola’s time.

Avicenna (980-1037) was an Arabian physician of great note, a translator of the Greek
classics into Arabic, and a follower of Aristotle to the extent of attempting to reconcile the
Peripatetic elements with those of the alchemists. He is chiefly known to the world through
the works which he compiled on medicine, mostly from the Greek and Latin authors. These
works for centuries dominated the medical world, and were used in certain European Univer-
sities until the r7th century. A great many works are attributed to him, and he is copiously

quoted by Agricola, principally in his De Ortu ef Causis, apparently for the purpose of
exposure.

Tray Re Ae Lae, OT eae, OSE

wick Bailes RS ea RS ON ae

ae te Gere “3 ~~

APPENDIX B. 609

Theophilus was a Monk and the author of a most illuminating work, largely upon
working metal and its decoration for ecclesiastical pu . An excellent translation, with
the Latin text, was published by Robert Hendrie, London, 1847, under the title “ An Essay
upon various Arts, in three books, by Theophilus, called also Rugerus, Priest and Monk.”
Hendrie, for many sufficient reasons, places the period of Theophilus as the latter half of the
11th century. The work is mainly devoted to preparing pigments, making glass, and working
metals, and their conversion into ecclesiastical paraphernalia, such as mural decoration,
pictures, windows, chalices, censers, bells, organs, etc. However, he incidentally describes
the making of metallurgical furnaces, cupellation, parting gold and silver by cementation
with salt, and by melting with sulphur, the smelting of copper, liquating lead from it, and the
refining of copper under a blast with poling.

Geber was until recent years considered to be an Arab alchemist of a period somewhere
between the 7th and 12th centuries. A mere bibliography of the very considerable literature
which exists in discussion of who, where, and at what time the author was, would fill es.
Those who are interested may obtain a start upon such references from Hermann Kopp’s Bet-
irage zur Geschichte der Chemie, Braunschweig, 1875, and in John Ferguson’s Bibliotheca Chemica,
Glasgow, 1906. Berthelot, in his Chimie au Moyen Age, Paris, 1893, considers the works under
the name of Geber were not in the main of Arabic origin, but composed by some Latin scholar
in the 13th century. In any event, certain works were, under this name, printed in Latin as
early as 1470-80, and have passed innumerable editions since They were first translated into
English by Richard Russell, London, 1678, and we have relied upon this and the Nuremberg
edition in Latin of 1541. This work, even assuming Berthelot’s view, is one of the most
important in the history of chemistry and metallurgy, and is characterised by a directness
of statement unique among alchemists, The making of the mineral acids—certainly nitric and
aqua regia, and perhaps hydrochloric and sulphuric—are here first described. The author
was familiar with saltpetre, sal-ammoniac, and alkali, and with the acids he prepared many
salts for the first time. He was familiar with amalgamation, cupellation, the separation of
gold and silver by cementation with salt and by nitric acid.’ His views on the primary com-
position of bodies dominated the alchemistic world for centuries. He contended that all
metals were composed of “‘ spiritual ’”’ sulphur (or arsenic, which he seems to consider a special
form of sulphur) and quicksilver, varying proportions and qualities yielding different metals.
_ The more the quicksilver, the more “ perfect ’’ the metal.

Albertus Magnus (Albert von Bollstadt) was a Dominican Monk, afterwards Bishop,
born about 1205, and died about 1280. He was rated the most learned man of his time, and
evidence of his literary activities lies in the gn ‘as edition of his works issued by Pierre
Jammy, Lyons, 1651, which comprises 21 folio volumes. However, there is little doubt that
a great number of works attributed to him, especially upon alchemy, are spurious. He
covered a wide range of theology, logic, alchemy, and natural science, and of the latter the
following works which concern: our subject are considered genuine :—De Rebus Metallicis et
Mineralibus, De Generatione et Corruptione, and De Meteoris. They are little more than
compilations and expositions of the classics muddled with the writings of the Arabs, and in
general an attempt to conciliate the Peripatetic and Alchemistic schools. His position in the
history of science has been greatly over-estimated. However, his mineralogy is, except for
books on gems, the only writing of any consequence at all on the subject between Pliny and
Agricola, and while there are but two or three minerals mentioned which are not to be found
in the ancient authors, this work, nevertheless, deserves some place in the history of science,
especially as some attempt at classification is made. Agricola devotes some thousands of
words to the refutation of his “ errors.’’

Roger Bacon (1214-1294) was a Franciscan Friar, a lecturer at Oxford, and a man of
considerable scientific attainments for his time. He was the author of a large number of
mathematical, philosophical, and alchemistic treatises. The latter are of some importance
in the history of chemistry, but have only minute bearing upon metallurgy, and this chiefly
as being one of the earliest to mention saltpetre.

Basil Valentine is the reputed author of a number of alchemistic works, of which none
ape in print until early in the 17th century. Internal evidence seems to indicate that

“ Triumphant Chariot of Antimony” is the only one which may possibly be authentic,
and could not have been written prior to the end of the 15th or early 16th century, although
it has been variously placed as early as 1350. To this work has been accredited the first
mention of sulphuric and hydrochloric acid, the separation of gold and silver by the use of
antimony (sulphide), the reduction of the antimony sulphide to the metal, the extraction of —
copper by the precipitation of the sulphate with iron, and the discovery of various antimonial
salts. At the time of the publication of works ascribed to Valentine practically all these
things were well known, and had been previously described. We are, therefore, in much doubt
as to whether this author really deserves any notice in the history of metallurgy.

EARLY 16ta CENTURY WORKS. During the 16th century, and prior to De Re
Metallica, there are only three works of importance from the point of view of mining tech-
nology—the Niitzlich Bergbiichlin, the Probierbiichlein, and Biringuccio’s De La Pirotechnia.
There are also some minor works by the alchemists of some interest for isolated statements,
particularly those of Paracelsus. e three works mentioned, however, represent such a

610 APPENDIX B.

stride of advance over anything previous, that they merit careful consideration.

Eyn Niitzlich Bergbiichlin. Under this title we frequently refer to a little booklet on
veins and ores, published at the beginning of the 16th century. The title page of our copy is
as below :—

Citi mislich Berg

bticblin yon allen ARetal:

len/als Gole/Silber/3con/Bupfer
ery /Lifen fkein/Dleyers/wnd
bmn Ouecfilber”

vom

This book is small 8vo, comprises 24 folios without pagination, and has no typographical
indications upon the title page, but the last line in the book reads: Gedruckt zu Erffurd durch
Johan Loersfelt, 1527. Another edition in our possession, that of ‘‘ Frankfurt am Meyn’’,
1533, by Christian Egenolph, is entitled Bergwerk und Probierbiichlin, etc., and contains,
besides the above, an extract and plates from the Probierbiichlein (referred to later on),and a few
recipes for assay tests. All of these booklets, of which we find mention, comprise instructions
from Daniel, a skilled miner, to Knappius, “ his mining boy’. Although the little books of
this title are all anonymous, we are convinced, largely from the statement in the Preface of
De Re Metallica, that one Calbus of Freiberg was the original author of this work. Agricola
says: ‘‘ Two books have been written in our tongue: the one on the assaying of mineral sub-
“stances and metals, somewhat confused, whose author is unknown; the other ‘ On Veins’,
“of which Pandulfus Anglus is also said to have written, although the German book was written
“by Calbus of Freiberg, a well-known doctor ; but neither of them accomplished the task he had
“ begun.” He again refers to Calbus at the end of Book III.2 of De Re Metallica, and gives
an almost verbatim quotation from the WNiitzlich Bergbiichlin. Jacobi® says: ‘‘ Calbus
“ Fribergius, so called by Agricola himself, is certainly no other than the Freiberg doctor,
“ Riihlein von C(K)albe.”’ There are also certain internal evidences that support Agricola’s
statement, for the work was evidently written in Meissen, and the statement of Agricola that
the book was unfinished is borne out by a short dialogue at the end of the earlier editions,
designed to introduce further discussion. Calbus (or Dr. Ulrich Riihlein von Kalbe) was a very
active citizen of Freiberg, having been a town councillor in 1509, burgomaster in 1514, a
mathematician, mining surveyor, founder of a school of liberal arts, and in general a physician.
He died in 1523.4 The book possesses great literary interest, as it is, so far as we are aware,

*Page 75.
Der Mineralog Georgius Agricola, Zwickau, 1889, p. 46.
“Andreas Moller, Theatrum Freibergense Chronicum, etc., Freiberg, 1653.

APPENDIX B, 611

undoubtedly the first work on mining geology, and in consequence we have spent some effort
in endeavour to find the date of its first appearance. Through the courtesy of M. Polain,
who has carefully examined for us the Niitzlich Bergbiichlein described in Marie Pellechet’s
Catalogue Général. des Incunables des Bibliothéques Publiques de France,® we have ascertained
that it is similar as regards text and woodcuts to the Erfurt edition, 1527. This copy in the
Biblioth¢que Nationale is without typographical indications, and M. Polain considers it
very possible that it is the come edition printed at the end of the fifteenth or begininng of
the sixteenth centuries. Mr. Bennett Brough,* quoting Hans von Dechen,’ states that the
first edition was printed at Augsburg in 1505, no copy of which seems to be extant. The
Librarian at the School of Mines at Freiberg has kindly furnished us with the following notes
as to the titles of the copies in that Institution :—(1) Eyn Wolgeordent und Niitzlich Bergbiich-
lein, etc., Worms, 1512° and 1518® (the place and date are written in) ; (2) the same as ours
(1527) ; (3) the same, Heinrich Steyner, Augsburg, 1534 ; (4) the same, 1539. On comparing
these various editions (to which may be added one probably published in Niirnberg by Fried-
rich Peypus in 15321°) we find that they fall into two very distinct groups, characterised by
their contents and by two entirely different sets of woodcuts.
Group I.
(a) Eyn Niitzlich Bergbiichlein (in Bibl. Nat., Paris) before 1500 (?).
(0) Ditto, Erfurt, 1527.
Group II.

(c) Wolgeordent Niitzlich Bergbiichlein, Worms, Peter Schéfern, 1512.

(d) Wolgeordent Niitzlich Bergbiichlein, Worms, Peter Schéfern, 1518.

(e) Bergbiichlin von Erkaninus der Berckwerck, Niirnberg, undated, 1532 (?).

(f) Bergwerckbuch & Probirbuch, Christian i i Frankfurt-am-Meyn, 1533.

(g) Wolgeordent Niitzlich Bergbiichlein, Augsburg, Heinrich Steyner, 1534.

(h) Wolgeordent Niitzlich Bergbiichlein, Augsburg, Heinrich Steyner, 1539.

There are also others of later date toward the end of the sixteenth century.

The Biichlein of Group I. terminate after the short dialogue between Daniel and Knappius
with the words: Mitt welchen das kleinspeissig ertz geschmelizt soll werden ; whereas in those of
Group II. these words are followed by a short explanation of the signs used in the woodcuts,
and by directions for colouring the woodcuts, and in some cases by several pages containing
definitions of some 92 mining terms. In the editions of Group I. the woodcut on the title page
Te ts a miner hewing ore in a vein and two others working a windlass. In those of
Group II. the woodcut on the title page represents one miner hewing on the surface, another to
the right carting away ore in a handcart, and two others carrying between them a heavy
timber. In our opinion eg: I. represents the older and original work of Calbus ; but as we
have not seen the bed Pes the Bibliothéque Nationale, and the Augsburg edition of 1505 has only
so far been traced to Veith’s catalogue," the question of the first edition cannot be considered
settled at present. In any event, it appears that the material grafted on in the second group
was later, and by various authors.

The earliest books comprise ten chapters, in which Daniel delivers about 6,000 words
of instruction. The first four chapters are devoted to the description of veins and the origin
of the metals, of the remaining six chapters one each to silver, gold, tin, copper, iron,
lead, and quicksilver. Among the mining terms are explained the meaning of country rock
(zechstein), hanging and footwalls (hangends and liegends), the strike (streichen), dip (fallen),
and outcrop (ausgehen). Of the latter two varieties are given, one of the “ whole vein,”
the other of the gesteins, which may be the ore-shoot. Various veins are illustrated, and also
for the first time a mining compass. The account of the origin of the metals isa muddle
of the Peripatetics, the alchemists, and the astrologers, for which acknowledgment to Albertus
Magnus is given. They are represented to originate from quicksilver and sulphur through
heat, cold, dampness, and dryness, and are drawn out as exhalations through the veins, each
metal owing its origin to the special influence of some planet ; the Moon for silver, Saturn for
lead, etc. | Two types of veins are mentioned, ‘‘ standing” (stehendergang) and flat (flach-
gang). Stringers are given the same characteristics as veins, but divided into hanging, foot-

, and other varieties. Prominence is also given to the geschick (selvage seams or joints ?).

5Paris, 1897, Vol. I. p. 501.

®Cantor Lectures, London, April 1892.

"Hans von Dechen, Das dlteste deutsche Bergwerksbuch, reprint from Zts. fiir Bergrecht
Bd. xxvi., Bonn, 1885.

®Panzer’s Annalen, Niirnberg, 1782, p. 422, gives an edition Worms bei Peter Schéfern,
1512.

*The Royal Library at Dresden and the State Library at Munich have each a copy,
dated 1518, Worms.

1°Hans von Decken of. cit., p. 48-49.

Annales ee augustanae ab ejus origine, MCCCLXVI. usque ad. an, M.D.XXX.
Accedtt dom Franc, Ant. Veith. Diatribe de origine . . . artis typographicae in urbe augusta
vindelica edidit . . . Georgius G. Zapf., Augsburg, 1778, x. p. 23.

612 APPENDIX 1B.

The importance of the bearing of the junctions of veins and stringers on enrichment is elabor-
ated upon, and veins of east-west strike lying upon a south slope are considered the best.
From the following notes it will be seen that two or three other types of deposits besides veins
are referred to.

In describing silver veins, of peculiar interest is the mention of the association of bismuth
(wismuth), this being, we believe, the first mention of that metal, galena (glantz), quartz (queriz),
spar (spar), hornstone (hornstein), ironstone and pyrites (kies), are mentioned as gangue
materials, ‘‘ according to the mingling of the various vapours.’ The term glasertz is used,
but it is difficult to say if silver glance is meant ; if so, it is the first mention of this mineral.
So far as we know, this is the first use of any of the terms in print. Gold alluvial is described,
part of the gold being assumed as generated in the gravel. The best alluvial is in streams
running east and west. The association of gold with pyrites is mentioned, and the pyrites is
found ‘‘in some places as a complete stratum carried through horizontally, and is called a
schwebender gang.’ This sort of occurrence is not considered very good ‘‘ because the work
of the heavens can be but little completed on account of the unsuitability of the position.”
Gold pyrites that comes in veins is better. Tin is mentioned as found in alluvial, and also in
veins, the latter being better or worse, according to the amount of pyrites, although the latter
can be burned off. Tin-stone is found in masses, copper ore in schist and in veins sometimes
with pyrites. The ore from veins is better than schist. Iron ore is found in masses, and
sometimes in veins ; the latter is the best. ‘‘ The iron veins with good hanging- and foot-
“walls are not to be despised, especially if their strike be from east to west, their dip to the
“south, the foot-wall and outcrop to the north, then if the ironstone is followed down, the
“vein usually reveals gold or other valuable ore’. Lead ore is found in schwebenden gang
and stehenden gang. Quicksilver, like other ore, is sometimes found in brown earth, and
sometimes, again, in caves where it has run out like water. The classification of veins is the
same as in De Re Metallica.* The book generally, however, seems to have raised Agricola’s
opposition, for the quotations are given in order to be demolished.

Probierbiichlein. Agricola refers in the Preface of De Re Metallica to a work in German
on assaying and refining metals, and it is our belief that it was to some one of the little assay
books published early in the 16th century. There are several of them, seemingly revised
editions of each other; in the early ones no author’s name appears, although among the
later editions various names appear on the title page. An examination of these little books
discloses the fact that their main contents are identical, for they are really collections of
recipes after the order of cookery books, and intended rather to refresh the memory of those

robier bith -

lein/auff Golo; Silber/Eupffery

vd BSley/Audy allerlay Metall

wie mandiesh nung arbayten vit
Probierenfoll.

AEM Gngmayltern/WOardeyn/BGole

soerePern/DercFleticen/ vit Eauff leticé

der Metall sé nuy mit groffens fleyfise
famsen gebrache.

12See p. 44

APPENDIX B. 613

already skilled than to instruct the novice. The books appear to have grown by accretions
from many sources, for a large number of methods are given over and over again in the same
book with slight variations. We reproduce the title page of our earliest copy.

The following is a list of these booklets so far as we have been able to discover actual
copies :—

Date. Place. Publisher. Title (Short). Author.
Un- Unknown Unknown Probierbiichlein Anon.
known
(Undated ; but catalogue of British Museum suggests Augsburg, 1510.)
1524 Magdeburg Probirbiichleyn tzu Gotteslob Anon.
1531 Augsburg Unknown Probierbuch aller Sachsischer Anon.
Ertze
1533 Frankfurt a. Bergwerck und Probterbiich- Anon.
Meyn lein
1534 Augsburg Heinrich Stey- Probirbiichlein Anon.
ner, 8vo.
1546 Augsburg Ditto, ditto Probirbiichlein Anon.
1549 Augsburg Ditto, ditto Probirbiichlein Anon.
1564 Augsburg Math, Francke, Probirbiichlein Zach, Lochner
4to
1573 Augsburg 8vo. Probirbuch Sam. Zimmermann
1574 Franckfurt a. Probierbiichlein Anon.
Meyn
1578 Ditto Probierbiichlein Fremde und = Cyriacus
subtile Kunst Schreittmann
1580 Ditto Probierbiichlein Anon.
1595 Ditto Probierbiichlein darinn griind- Modestin Fachs
licher Bericht
1607 Dresden 4to Metallische Probier Kunst

Bericht vom Ursprung und C. C. Schindler
Erkenntniss der Metallis-

chen erze
1669 Amsterdam Probierbiichlein darinn griind- Modestin Fachs
licher Bericht
1678 _— Leipzig Probierbiichlein darinn griind- Modestin Fachs
licher Bericht
1689 Leipzig Probierbiichlein darinn griind- Modestin Fachs
licher Bericht
1695 + Niirnberg I2mo. Deutliche Vorstellung der Pro- Anon.
bier Kunst
1744 ~~ Liibeck 8vo. Neu-erdffnete Probier Buch Anon.
1755 Frankfurt and 8vo. Scheid-Kiinstler . . . alle Ertz Anon.
Leipzig und Metalle . . . probiren
1782 Rotenburg an 8vo. Probierbuch aus Erfahrung K. A. Scheidt
der Fulde aufgesetat

As mentioned under the Niitzlich Bergbiichlein, our copy of that work, printed in 1533,
contains only a pig: of the Probierbiichlein. Ferguson** mentions an edition of 1608, and the
Freiberg School of Mines Catalogue gives also Frankfort, 1608, and Niirnberg, 1706. The
British Museum copy of earliest date, like the title page reproduced, contains no date. The
title page woodcut, however, in the Museum copy is referred from that above, possibly indi-
cating an earlier date of the Museum copy.

The booklets enumerated above vary a great deal in contents, the successive prints
representing a sort of growth by accretion. The first portion of our earliest edition is devoted
to weights, in which the system of “ lesser weights” (the principle of the “ assay ton ”’) is
explained. Following this are exhaustive lists of touch-needles of various composition.
Directions are given with regard to assay furnaces, cupels, muffles, scorifiers, and crucibles,
gsvamasar and leaf metals, for washing, roasting, and the preparation of assay charges.

arious reagents, including glass-gall, litharge, salt, iron filings, lead, ‘‘ alkali”, talc, argol,
saltpetre, sal-ammoniac, alum, vitriol, lime, sulphur, antimony, agua fortis, or scheid-
wasser, etc., are made use of. Various assays are described and directions given for crucible,
scorification, and cupellation tests. The latter part of the book is devoted to the refining
and parting of precious metals. Instructions are given for the separation of silver from iron,
from lead, and from antimony ; of gold from silver with antimony (sulphide) and sulphur, or
with sulphur alone, with “ scheidwasser,” and by cementation with salt ; of gold from copper
with sulphur and with lead. The amalgamation of gold and silver is mentioned.

1Bibliotheca Chemica.

614 APPENDIX B.

The book is diffuse and confused, and without arrangement or system, yet a little
consideration enables one of experience to understand most statements. There are over 120
recipes, with, as said before, much repetition ; for instance, the parting of gold and silver
by use of sulphur is given eight times in different places. The final line of the book is: “‘ Take
this in good part, dear reader, after it, please God, there will be a better.’’ In truth, however,
there are books on assaying four centuries younger that are worse. This is, without doubt,
the first written word on assaying, and it displays that art already full grown, so far as con-
cerns gold and silver, and to some extent copper and lead; for if we eliminate the words
dependent on the atomic theory from modern works on dry assaying, there has been but very
minor progress. The art could not, however, have reached this advanced stage but by slow
accretion, and no doubt this collection of recipes had been handed from father to son long
before the 16th century. It is of wider interest that these booklets represent the first milestone
on the road to quantitative analysis, and in this light they have been largely ignored by the
historians of chemistry. Internal evidence in Book VII. of De Re Metallica, together with
the reference in the Preface, leave little doubt that Agricola was familiar with these book-
lets. His work, however, is arranged more systematically, each operation stated more clearly,
with more detail and fresh items ; and further, he gives methods of determining copper and
lead which are but minutely touched upon in the Probierbiichlein, while the directions as to tin,
bismuth, quicksilver, and iron are entirely new.

Biringuccio (Vanuccio). We practically know nothing about this author. From the
preface to the first edition of his work it appears he was. styled a mathematician, but in the
text’ he certainly states that he was most of his time engaged in metallurgical operations,
and that in pursuit of such knowledge he had visited Germany. The work was in Italian,
published at Venice in 1540, the title page of the first edition as below :—

——y

SON
nS
@

te fitratra non folo di ogni forte & di, 7.)

= Uerfita di Miniere, ma anchora quan \y Sr

5, to fi ricerca intornoa Ja prattica di} 4 St ml

—

“quelle cofe di quel che fiappartiene| \imb/ =
aVarte dela fufione ouer gittodeme|[~m £
callicome dogni alera cofa fimile a
—{quefta. Compofti per il. S.Vanoce
=| cio Biringuccio Sennefe.

a

Re|Con Priuilegio Apoftolico & dela Y S
|||”) Cefarea Maefta & del Illuftrifs.Sena|ajA 22S
_\toVeneto, MDXL. fh he

|
V

& > — "
Pm

14Book I., Chap. 2.

APPENDIX B. 615

It comprises ten chapters in 168 folios demi-octavo. Other Italian editions of which
we find some record are the second at Venice, 1552; third, Venice, 1558; fourth, Venice,
1559; fifth, Bologna, 1678. A French translation, by Jacques Vincent, was published in
Paris, 1556, and this translation was again published at Rouen in 1627. Of the ten chapters the
last six are almost wholly devoted to metal working and founding, and it is more largely for
this description of the methods of making artillery, munitions of war and bells that the book
is celebrated. In any event, with the exception of a quotation which we give on page 297 on
silver amalgamation, there is little of interest on our subject in the latter chapters. The
first four chapters are undoubtedly of importance in the history of metallurgical literature,
and represent the first work on smelting. The descriptions are, however, very diffuse, difficult
to follow, and lack arrangement and detail. But like the Probierbiichlein, the fact that it was
written prior to De Re Metallica demands attention for it which it would not otherwise receive.
The ores of gold, silver, copper, lead, tin, and iron are described, but much interrupted with
denunciations of the alchemists. There is little of geological or mineralogical interest, he too
holding to a muddle of the classic elements astrology and alchemy. He has nothing of con-
sequence to say on mining, and dismisses concentration with a few words. Upon assayi
his work is not so useful as the Probierbiichlein. On ore smelting he describes the reduction
of iron and lead ores and cupriferous silver or gold ores with lead. He gives the barest
description of a blast furnace, but adds an interesting account of a reverbero furnace. He
describes liquation as we aba Bes one operation ; the subsequent treatment of the copper
by refining with an oxidising blast, but does not mention poling; the cupellation of argen-
tiferous lead and the reduction of the litharge; the manufacture of nitric acid and that
method of parting gold and silver. He also gives the method of parting with antimony and
sulphur, and by cementation with common salt. Among the side issues, he describes the
method of making brass with calamine ; of making steel ; of distilling quicksilver ; of melting
out sulphur ; of making vitriol and alum. He states that arvsenico and orpimento and etrisa-
gallio (realgar) are the same substance, and are used to colour copper white.

In general, Biringuccio should be accredited with the first description (as far as we
are aware) of silver amalgamation, of a reverberatory furnace, and of liquation, although the
description is not complete. Also he is, so far as we are aware, the first to mention cobalt
blue (Zaffre) and manganese, although he classed them as “‘ half” metals. His descriptions
are far inferior to Agricola’s; they do not compass anything like the same range of metal-
lurgy, and betray the lack of a logical mind.

Other works. There are several works devoted to mineralogy, dating from the fifteenth
and ag sixteenth centuries, which were, no doubt, available to Agricola in the compilation of
his De Natura Fossilium. They are, however, practically all compiled from the jeweller’s point
of view rather than from that of the miner. Among them we may mention the poem on
precious stones by Marbodaeus, an author who lived from 1035 to 1123, but which was first

rinted at Vienna in 1511; Speculum Lapidum, a work on precious stones, by Camilli Leonardi,
t printed in Venice in 1502. A work of wider interest to mineralogists is that by Christoph
Entzelt (or Enzelius, Encelio, Encelius, as it is variously given), entitled De Re Metallica,
and first printed in 1551. The work is five years later than De Natura Fossilium, but contains
much new material and was available to Agricola prior to his revised editions.

2 —
Oe)

APPENDIX C. —

WEIGHTS AND MEASURES.

As stated in the preface, the nomenclature to be adopted for weights and measures
has presented great difficulty. Agricola uses, throughout, the Roman and the Romanized
Greek scales, but in many cases he uses these terms merely as lingual equivalents for the
German quantities of his day. Moreover the classic language sometimes failed him, where-
upon he coined new Latin terms adapted from the Roman scale, and thus added further
confusion. We can, perhaps, make the matter clearer by an illustration of a case in weights.
The Roman centumpondium, composed of 100 librae, the old German ceniner of 100 pfundt,
and the English hundredweight of 112 pounds can be called lingual equivalents. The first
weighs about 494,600 Troy grains, the second 721,900, and the third 784,000. While the
divisions of the centumpondium and the centner are the same, the libra is divided into 12 unciae
and the pfundt into 16 untzen, and in most places a summation of the units given proves that
the author had in mind the Roman ratios. However, on p. 509 he makes the direct statement
that the centumpondium weighs 146 librae, which would be about the correct weight if the
centumpondium referred to was a centner. If we take an example such as “each centum-
pondium of lead contains one uncia of silver”, and reduce it according to purely lingual equiva-
lents, we should find that it runs 24.3 Troy ounces per short ton, on the basis of Roman
values, and 18°25 ounces per short ton, on the basis of old German. If we were to trans-
late these into English lingual equivalents of one ounce per hundredweight, then the value
would be 17.9 ounces per short ton.

Several possibilities were open in translation: first, to calculate the values accur-
ately in the English units; second, to adopt the nearest English lingual equivalent ; third,
to introduce the German scale of the period; or, fourth, to leave the original Latin in the
text. The first would lead to an indefinite number of decimals and to constant doubt as to
whether the values, upon which calculations were to be based, were Roman or German. The
second, that is the substitution of lingual equivalents, is objectionable, not only because
it would indicate values not meant by the author, but also because we should have, like
Agricola, to coin new terms to accommodate the lapses in the scales, or again to use decimals.
In the third case, that is in the use of the old German scale, while it would be easier to adapt
than the English, it would be more unfamiliar to most readers than the Latin, and not so
expressive in print, and further, in some cases would present the same difficulties of cal-
culation as in using the English scale. Nor does the contemporary German translation of De
Re Metallica prove of help, for its translator adopted only lingual equivalents, and in conse-
quence the summation of his weights often gives incorrect results. From all these possibilities
we have chosen the fourth, that is simply to reproduce the Latin terms for both weights and
measures. We have introduced into the footnotes such reductions to the English scale as we
considered would interest readers. We have, however, digressed from the rule in two cases,
in the adoption of “foot” for the Latin pes, and “‘ fathom” for passus. Apart from the fact
that these were not cases where accuracy is involved, Agricola himself explains om”
that he means the German values for these particular terms, which, fortunately, fairly closely
approximate to the English. Further, we have adopted the Anglicized words “ digit”,
“‘palm’’, and “‘cubit”’, instead of their Latin forms.

For purposes of reference, we reproduce the principal Roman and old German scales,
in so far as they are used by Agricola in this work, with their values in English. All students
of weights and measures will realize that these values are but approximate, and that this is
not an occasion to enter upon a discussion of the variations in different periods or by different
authorities. Agricola himself is the author of one of the standard works on Ancient Weights
and Measures (see Appendix A), and further gives fairly complete information on contem-
porary scales of weight and fineness for precious metals in Book vit. p. 262 etc., to which

we refer readers.
ROMAN SCALES OF WEIGHTS.

Troy Grains.
I Siliqua = a we 2.87
6 Siliquae = 1 Scripulum a 17.2
4 Scripula = 1 Sextula a 68.7
6 Sextulae = 1 Uncia ey 412.2
12 Unciae = I Libra ne 4946.4
roo Librae = I Centumpondium.. 494640.0
Also
I Scripulum = + ny 17.2
3 Scripula = 1 Drachma ae 51.5
2 Drachmae = 1 Sicilicus re 103.0
4 Sicilict = I Uncia se 412.2
8 Unciae wt Bae, 's ay 3297.6

APPENDIX C. 617

SCALE OF FINENESS
(AGRICOLA’S ADAPTATION).

4 Siliquae = 1 Unit of Siliquae
3 Units of Siliquae = 1 Semi-sextula

4 Semi-sextulae = 1 Duella
24 = I Bes

OLD GERMAN SCALE OF WEIGHTS.
Troy Grains.

1 Pfennig = e e 0
4 Pfennige = I Quintlein de 50.4
4 or eae = 1 Loth bia 225.6
2 Loth = 1 Unizen ae 451.2
8 Unizen = I Mark ae 3609.6
2 Mark = I Pfundi ro 7219.2
100 Pfundt = I Centner +. 721920.0

SCALE OF FINENESS.
3 Grenlin = 1 Gran

4 Gran = 1 Krat
24 Krat = I Mark

ROMAN LONG MEASURE.

Inches.
1 Digitus = a “f 726
4 Digits = 1 Palmus 7 2.90
4 Palms = I Pes wees 22.0%
1} Pedes = 1 Cubitus Se: AY
5 Pedes = I Passus re ee): S
Also
t Roman Uncta = ae -97
12 Unciae =: Pes So. EROF

GREEK LONG MEASURE.

x1 Dactylos = i ae -758
4 Dactyloi = I Palaiste ne 3.03
4 Palaistat = I Pous oe. 12.135
14 Pous = I Pechus «= SOa0
6 Pous = I Oryguia et FOOT
OLD GERMAN LONG MEASURE.
Inches.
I Querjfinger = Ses nee 703
16 Querfinger = 1 Werckschuh .. 11.247
2 Werckschuh = 1 Elle mo RRROS
3 Elle = 1 Lachter -. 67.518
Also :
rt Zoll - 4% 85
12 Zoll = 1 Werkschuh
ROMAN LIQUID MEASURE.
Cubic inches. Pints.
I Quartarius = ae er -247
4 Quartarit = I Sextarius’ .. i age aa! -99QI
6 Sextarit = I Congius pes ROOM 5 ces 5-947
16 Sextarit = I Modius Pie SOM So LOOT
8 Congit = I Amphora .. 16500 .. 47.577

(Agricola nowhere uses the Saxon liquid measures, nor do they fall into units comparable
with the Roman).

RX

KOK
XK
ee

GENERAL INDEX.

Nore.—The numbers in heavy type refer to the Text;
those in plain type to the Footnotes, Appendices, etc.

PAGE

ABANDONMENT OF MINES .. ........004- 217
ABERTHAM.

pS TE ape ncpereprumnangermper erin (ML i iiy ¢ |
ABOLITE ......... i Sepionk keatucain enetne 113
Abstvich . ... 0.0.6 sivhigeas GOR t: 408
ABYDOs.

Gold mines of

zug.
Achates ‘(see AGATE).
ACCIDENTS TO MINERS .

Accounts (Mining) . . voovn.een vag oak
APDIP 5. s55i5 afaik 101

Aeris flos (see Copper Flowers’
Aeris squama (see serve es).

Aes peaches aa isakee pipe reure tee 109
Aes luteum . aa Dae vad ahely Ailes 109
Aes nigrum .. 109
Aes purum fossile (see Native Copper).
Aes rude plumbei coloris (see Copper
Glance).
Aes ustum gee ae Prisha iM
Aetites ....... des 2
‘ 420
412
114
AGRICULTURE.
Mining compared with . 5
AILMENTS OF MINERs (see Maladies of
Miners).
Arr CuRRENTS IN MINEs . ++ 121; 200
ALABASTER .....5...05 114
ALCHEMISTS...... “XXVII_-Xxx; 44; 608
Agricola’s opinion of............ XIL; XXVI.
WINE 02 ce8sis : - 248; 219
Discovery of acids 439; 460
Distillation ....<..ccsccsceseeee 441
ALJUSTREL TABLET ............ 83—84
ALLoys, "ASSAYING OF .. 247—252
ALLUVIAL MINING...... 3 330—332
Aston Moor. -
PETENBERG 6s bsksss credvsivaviseceses XXXI; VI
Collapse of mine.. vues 216
Miners poisoned .. Seipksdanwlbe 214
Tin eee. appliances. Das tne 290; 304; 318
FLOM: seca, reer 564—570
A solidified juice . bidcareuhes ab 1
Elizabethan Charter . wine son seeete yn 283
In roasted Manos Sasi cin 350
In Sal arti Lessin ieaesdeae 463
Latin and Gara terms .. sine 220; 231]
Papal monopoly . esiinesta 570
Use in making nitric acid... 439; 460
AMALGAM.
Parting the gold sR PaPaveuceseanes 298; 297
AMALGAMATION ....... He 297
Of gilt objects 461
ee! Bsa vnqadunienn nek coneen Westies 295—299
AMBER .. Jess . ‘ 3 35
AMETHYST 114
Amiantus (see Asbestos).
AMPULLA... - 445— 447; 220
ne Pecwivese 5 XI; : Prag 75; a
ree NIENEIMOUS ccd ccavccseacsvevecdacvess 216
NTIMONY.......cescereseceeeseese 220; 428; 354
Smelting of .. Solid iva vbdaaneee 3; 428
Use as metal ... bis 2; 429

ANTIMONY SULPHIDE.. Aven “990; 428; 451
Parting gold and silver with et 451; 461

PAGE
ANTWERP, SCALE OF enn 263
Apex Law... siento boanxeatess "81; 83—86
Aqua regia . "439 ; 441; 354

Aqua valens (see “also Nitric Acid)...
cone 439-443; 439 ; 220
Clarification ‘with silver .
Cleansing gold-dust with .
Parting precious metals with .
Arbores dissectae (Lagging) .
ARCHIMEDES, SCREW OF o...eeeeeseeeee

ARCHITECTURE.

Knowledge for miners
Area fodinarum (see Meer).
ARGENTIFEROUS COPPER —

SMELTING OF ... Sésaenashces
ARGENTITE . 109
Argentum purum in ‘venis (seo Native

Silver).

Argentum rude plumbei coloris (see

Silver Glance).

Argentum rude rubrum translucidum

(see eer. erat)

ARGOL . avidin 234; 220
As a flux.. PA ai 238; 243
Use in melting ‘silver nitrate..
Use in smelting gold dust ..

ARGONAUTS . “

ARITHMETICAL. Science.
Knowledge necessary for miners... 4

ARMENIA, STONE OF ....00cseeeeeeceeees

Arsenic (see also Orpiment and

: gar
AYSENICUM . 02.0005
ARSENOPYRITE . ESSE Rae
ASH-cOLOURED ‘Copper . He eee

susan peas 539—540; 540; “623524; 492

From liquation . 529530
Asues watch Woot DYERS USE (see

also Potash)............... 233; 559; 220

Use in assaying vee 236—238

AsH oF Leap.. silk "237238 ; 237; 220
Asx oF Musk Ivy (see a vps Potash

and Nitrum)... +. 236—238; 220
ASPHALT . shvashouskee 581
Asphaltites (see ‘Dead Sea).
Assay BaLances (see Balances).
Assay FLuXxEs a ssa

ASSAY hey npaaea «. 224—228; 220
Muffle . 224228; 239

ASSAYING NG (see also Probierbiichlein)
Sete et 219; 220; on

Siiver and co ps ee ae 249—250

Tin Pet one - ii deebaksee 246

Tin and silver ‘alloys . RE 251
Assay MuFFLES oe Mutfles).
Assay Ton .. secsdusse S003 342
ASSYRIAN COPPER . Lisauedal cineca sie 402
PSMA acs iLi veddentvedds ditnin saa yendus ces 214
ASTRONOMY.

Knowledge necessary for miners... 4
ATARNEA.

ESTIOG INET ICG, Sc cc ace vow sks vucsoeceatee 26; 27
ATHENS.

Mining law : 83

620 GENERAL INDEX.

PAGE

ATHENS.

Silver mines (see Mt. Laurion,

Mines of).

Atramentum Sutorium (see also Vitriol) 572; 110

Atvamenium Sutoritum candidum ...... 113

Atramentum Sutorium rubrum ......... 274; 274

Aurichalcum . > 409; 404

Auripigmentum (see ‘Orpiment).

AZURE . - L; 109; 220
An indication of copper « sueae 116
An indication of gold. mekeweas 117
GID UE AE THAT Nev cnscauescdnoceboricacs 235

VARURITE ac pdudadccceandessnesssevns< SOO 5 BRU SAO

BABEL, TOWER OF 6) cssinwasssncesansitspae 582

BaBYLONIA.

PRAIA AEE vcs sceisys KUacanteg cxabeshan ses 582

Lise: OF 1000 ican cis sca lscignouriawesansae 391
BaBYTACE.

Gold oe wi rae net 3 Seesaw cas 9; 15
BaEBELO. wes ou entisns 42; 42
BACAMCER . s.cséy iineananencies "924; 264—265
BARITE *. ...... eeabenees 115
BARMASTER, OF ‘Hic "PEAK . sohes 17

Bars, FOR FURNACE WORK a deccsexss 382
BASKETS, FOR HOISTING .. 153
TSATBA 560 <conndavesepaacaen oes des 156
BRBR 2.6 sisu5 siispeaewe cease 230; 220
BELL, TO CALL ‘WoRKMEN. diginat sinless 100
BELLOWS .. cccsccccsceecse SO2—3735 419

Ancient use of... sesscssenss 304; 305; 362

AMsoay TOINBCS «oi. ciseccscccesces scenes SENG See

Mine ventilation with cseceseseeseeee 207—210
Beni HasseEn, INSCRIPTIONS AT ...... 586
Berg-geel .....0000+00 lll
BERGMEISTER ... "33; “81; H “95; ‘T; 77; 78

Deals with forfeited shares canheniew 92-93

JUTOTS 2.0 sccnsecvccnsccnasessecseressesese 96
BERGMEISTER’S CLERK ..e-ceecsseeeeeees 3; 78
Bergzinober (see Quicksilver).

_Bermius (BeRMium), Mr. (see Mt.
ah -evange
BISMUTH . sosssacabieees. 4835 354; 220
Assaying ores ‘of . say is'sve Nemeae 247
Indication ae silver . be 116

Minerals . e sou nee 2; 111

Smelting Oc: Sepathewosceckas reese 400

The “ roof of AYO s ciccceccsessvas 117; 433

ZANE « 00 teewtinne ree cencessecceecenvesese 112
BITUMEN.

Ancient knowledge of 220; 581—582; 354
Colour OF BOMiO8 |... sc spcuesccecscess 235
TRAN ooo ss si vdcskespeponanndesnae

From springs .........
Harmful to metals . 5a baer
Roasting from ore .........+++ H

Solidified Jule: 0.025550 censasaamntanates
Bituminosa cadmia (see Cadmia '
bituminosa). ‘
Bast, REGULATION OF ..........-.---- 380; 386
EASTING. 5. :ickdeape srs censdv sins sad eentionces 119
DREREDE | ics dds vncnesices cavers nvedepetsaacesp 113
BLEYBERG ..... 239
BLOODSTONE .... lll; 2
BLoom . 420

Blutstein ‘(see Ironstone).
BoueEMIA.
Antimony sulphide scVisp oes
Pestilential Me cigars SR atk Kos bas San aes
Sifting OTe in .......ccccceresererececens

Borax . rake
Method ‘of manufacture
Use in gold oe :
Use in assaying ..

BornitE ......

BouNnDARY STONES .

BounDARIES .

Brass . sanys
Ancient methods of making 404—405; 112

PAGE

REARING (ORE | i60,0 oposscacerse sue 117—119
Brick Dust.

Used in cementation ................ 454; 454

Used in making nitric acid ......... 440
BrinE (see also Salt).

Evaporation of ..... 547—548
BRITAIN.

Lead-silver smelting .. Bieatevan 392

Miners mentioned ba Pliny Se elbspoe

83
AEE AEAUO: s. Sie cas cabsecannneanicetecceas: Sk keane
BritTIsH Museum.

Egyptian gold-mining .............. z 399

Egyptian lead. ..c.csccccisss sas cancapine 390

Fryptian steel. vs. 2ss ss lesviesesgen 402
EIROWU BITE 625 isincciwascacebanansaiee pe 109
BRONZE.

Historical notes ............... 411; 402; 354
Bronze AGE. . Lic eueheadaheee oes 3; 411
BRYLE (Outcrop) . mate arieenie: 101
BUCKETS, FOR Hotst1nG ORE 153—154; 157
BOR DiS) 05 sss useaseeniansdvestvon RODS Oe same

Divided .. Nps en sponte 302303
Simple .. ve . 300—302; 312—315
BULLION, POURING INTO Bars See ts 382
BURNING ORE .......ssseceeeenes 2813 2733 267

Burnt ALv™ .....

Cadmia (see also Zinc, Pompholyx,

eee eee ewe eweee

and Cobalt)...... Mosaic! 542; 112—113
Ancient ore of brass .. Shep hee say 410
From dust chambers . ineistecs 394

From liquation .........ssssseereeeeees
From roasting matte . shavevces
Poisonous to Miners ..........s.e008

Roasting ..

Smelting for gold and ‘silver .. dee 410
Cadmia bituminosa.. fae 8 976; 273; 113
Cadmia fornacis (see Furnace A Accre-

tions).
Cadmia fossilis (see Calamine and
Blende).
Cadmia metallica (see also Cobalt)...... 403; 113

Caeruleum (see Azure).
CaKEs oF MELTED PyRiTEs ............ 379; 222

A flux ...... 234

Roasting of 349—351

Use in smelting .. ipresvessehe 379
CaLAim om on Zine)... nels 409
CALAMINE .. vias “112; “18; 409; 410
GOL CIER os Sisicis shu ersensceneesthconaas vont 114
CALCSPAR.. Ae vind 114
Caldavium COPPER.......« "512; "542; 3 611.

CALDRONS, FOR EVAPORATING "SaLts
Calmei (see Calamine).
CAMEROS.

Zing FOR Ab ais ses cess orcpiocecsoanes 409
CAMPHOR 1... saisecccsvsdescacssevecs SOO) 208 FUME
CAM-SHAFT .. rrr See
Canales (Ore Channels) ..

Ore shoots in . BEB pT sen:

CANNON ...... aires tpn Fag GbE SANE 11

CARDINAL PoINnTs . Fides acs abeess hed ; 58

CARNELIAN ...... Sas ete eindanade 114

Carneol (see Carnelian).

Carni .. wanes Geka veuneveshunst 390
Cupellation see 483
Smelting of lead ores .... 390

CARPATHIAN MouNTAINS.

Liquation are in. screens ; 544
Sieves ......... jeveedVnuadetbes 289
Stamp-milling .. stoapesenvansriaae 319

CARTHAGE,

Mines in Spain .........seeeseesecseoes 27

Castuto (Cazlona) .... 42

CEMENTATION (see also Parting ‘Gold
from Silver) .........4583—457; 453; 458

Centumpondium .... nigh 242; 509
Scale of weights .......... 260—261

CERAGURITE .. BEST OE Te 109

Cerussa (see White-lead),

CRRUSSITE .isci5 5056005 cows Gok eave 110

CHAIN PUMPS ....ccsesssecesescscssssvecse 171—176

CHALCANTHITE .., cighs 110

Chalcanthum (see ‘also Vitriol) .. «os 109; 572

GENERAL INDEX. 621

PAGE
CHALCEDONY .seesseseeseee wpbebetaacibente 114
CHANGE icscciaseheiessus tenctawiendssecsen: 010} 108
Indication of copper. eaves Ae te 116
CHALCOCITE .......++ Lie secatecteseasia 100s “40m
CHALCOPYRITE LUE ss Ouch une Wane Eh oon beet 109
CHALDEAN ANTIMONY | aes aoneevapasese 429
bog <r eae
QFIQIN: 20... ces nesenscoseoeesenes XXVIII; 220
CHEMNITZ,

Agricola nted city physician Vil.
Agricola spin burgomaster. a at a

Quarrel over Agricola’s burial..

CuHiIna, GRAND CANAL OF .....sseeseee 129
CHINESE.
Early copper smelting . 402
Early iron .. ; 421
Early silver metallurgy. «se 391
Early zinc also Bova 409
Chrysocolla (see also Fax) 110; 221; 584; 1
Collection in vats.. are) 584
Colour of fumes .. da 235
Indication of ore sadisdlcemcencacn 116
2 gg of a BPRS RNS 117
Mineral... 109
Smeltin; Vibasbravens 401
CuHuRCH, Soha IN MINES ..s.scs0-0- 91
CIMOLITE .. 31
CINNABAR (see Quicksilver and Minium).
Crarim, IN AMERICAN TITLE ........4+. 717
210
MONG Ty cases Ai5'90505% 54s 500 354; ‘B42; 112—113
Cobalt-blue ... caked eunWnee deetnOdap. eae et Game
From lead smelting . se 408
King Hiram’s experience with ..... 214
Poisonous to miners . Ratpeaseses 214
Relation to cadmia .. nee ES 112
Relation to bismuth . Gis haRease above ove 435
Smelting ores Of . ..........c0eseeeeees 401
CoBaLt-ARSENIC MINERALS (see
Arsenic).
COBALTITE ...... pasban 113
Cobaltum cinevaceum (see "Smallite).
Cobaltum fervi colore (see Cobaltite).
Cobaltum et eid ‘aera
COINERS ....... gale van OS ae
GORING iedecacoekcvondsacaieascuedvssy ”'951—253; 457
CotcuIs.
Alluvial gold washing ..... 330
CoLoGNE.
Scale of weights. ...5...020:c0ccsscees 263
CoMPANIES, MINING ............00.-55 89—93; 90
Fraudulent ene So da Reteubiesd 22
Investment in . sued 29
ComPass... Wai 142; 5; 56; 129
Divisions ‘of the .. Md Hise 56; 57
Swiss .. RRaL Tiss aasnscunceiehsésce” SDR ROT
CoNcENTRATES.
From sheng ocean sehen: 542
Sintering of . re 401
Smelting of . "3945. "396—399; 401
CONCENTRATION s-ss+--- 267—348; 279; 354
CONPUES 50 SN ereti sins dhace hanag:/ ORs, 4195 O17
CONSTANTINOPLE, ALUM TRADE ...... 569
CoNSUMPTION.
Miners liable to ..........csesessecee ses 214
Conterfei (see Zinc).
Contracts, METHOD OF aloe ri 96
CopraPITE .. NE PSRNRA lll

CopPER (see ‘also Liquation)... 109; 402; 511

Assay Of 4......068 3 249
Granulation of ........... 250
Indications of ....... . 116
gold from silver 448—451; 448
Ratio in liquation cakes ............ 505; 506
Residues from eo 521
CoppER-FILINGS .. mabe 233; 233; 221
Copper FLOWERS... Saas ces
Pliny’s description ..

Copper GLANCE .......

42

PAGE
Copper Matte.
Smelting .. 404— 407
Orla ORE (see also Copper Smelting,
etc.) soit 109
Coprer PYRITES .. peedvackban ses eos' BE2 2 10D
CoPpPER REFINING .. phases vieses see
aeaeee 580598 354 ; mF: 535—536
501—503
eran diy of silver r by settling 510
Roman method . 404
Rosette pec aiabag oi 535
CoppER SCALES.. “110; 221; ; 233; 539
Use in assaying . 245
Coprer ScuHIsts (see also 2 Mansfeld
per Slates)... ; 127
Me of smelting . isa anual 408

CopPpER SMELTING 388-390; “40; 404; 4102

Invention of appliances .. 353—354
CorNWALL.
Ancient tin mining ............0.sse00 413
Early German miners .........+.+++ 282
Early mining law ...........00sceseseee 85
Early ore dressing .......0.ssssesess ees 282
Influence on German mining ...... 283
Rept FE iiss) negesd cus dcaeanjaieee 217
Mining terms............ 17: 101; 267; 282
Royal Geol. Soc. Transactions ..... 84
Coticula (see Touchstone).
Counterfeht (see Zinc).
CRANE.
For cupellation ee 476—4717
For lead cakes .. = cond 500
For liquation OEE Th mea 514
CREMNITZ.
PRO OL TORIES: cio sis sigses oxsnsoassaearse 5
MAGE OF ‘VORRS oobi cnccaepacvease oe 52
CRINGE SBME: siiecs sows cinch vicdevnrsees 115
ROW PENGE: ac canescens didasderieeneontves OREO St
CRORECIEG |< vicasn sandivevdoupcodyss Vindhs one 106
GRO WRARB 5. sicovs eos ccceceverupeuervadees 152
CRUCIBLE.
ASSAY «2.000 sce see mend erste ” i 245; 221
Of blast furnaces ., 376; 377
Crudaria . 65
Crusuinc Mitts ‘(see Stamp-mill and
args
CRUSHING ORE ........000 samt ee eens ; 279
CrysTa (Crystallum) .. nee 114
CUMBERLAND.
Early —— OM: OFS Of... sc ses0 ove 267
Roman lead furnaces .,...........06+ 392
Cup-BEARER.
Right to @ MOET. .. 0.0.0.0: sccssceseces
CUPELLATION........+ 464—483; 465—466
Buildings and furnaces ..... 3 epee 492
Brightening of the silver . -- 241; 475
Fei GEOR YIN 5A. clisad sip chevscaeskatenge 240

Cyanus (see also ‘Azurite) .. diawutcamensone 110
Cyprus.

Ancient copper smelting ........ eae 402
URGE: svc haknd sedvetsnt nee tvbbubhe ychbeshen 127
Dactylos: ...c2000 sega Ga 617; 78
DANGERS TO Miners . sscescesesesee 294—218
SPT HNEY ie vaccciccs costes ppaidiawk etoosens 492
RV ONUNE os ask ps co ny ncndemacn Sracetoneent 492
Darrséhle .. peplosdavebicevew evan 492
DAWLING, OF ry Ven SapuaneaGeek ane sey 101
DeEap: SEA.

SARPONOT AGT cai ds vedathdcp ces kedevs oactce 33
DECEMVIRAL COLLEGE ... Riswee 96

Decumanus (see Tithe Gatherer).
Demensum (see Measure).
Demons (see also Gnomes) .......s000 2175; 217

622 GENERAL INDEX,

PAGE

DERBYSHIRE (see also es Sas
Early ore washing .. pie 281
Introduction jigging sieve .......-. 283
DENI TOW 52 wan ond cev'caeaes ves "7; 84—85

DESCENT INTO MDA an ak cacchoes 212

DEVON.

DILLEUGHER .... 267

DIOPTRA ...... ho

Die Gu eine Lol sninas cohepa ter skeesee Paar 65—75

RIES sooo oun secacs.cocevacauices ned castuness 101

IR 0 os Vi sccdias obi neaessenckeayh anne 157

Discretores (see Sorters).

DISTILLATION . Sin cacuas Tau 441
For making nitric ‘acid .. tego 441
Of quicksilver... :

Distributor .......+.

DivininG Roop ...... oe

DIVISIONS OF THE COMPASS .. 56; 57

DRAINAGE OF MINEs . “at; ; 171198
With buckets . Siesvacenes 171
With chain pumps . Ga rsuaedeuekas hha set 172
With rag and chain pumps «. abwoncest 188
With suction srecgecl wpeknarane 172
With water bags .. Ucaulawacasents 198

DRAWING.

Knowledge wren oaeds for miners.. 4

DrirTs . syicerte 104; 105; 101
Timbering of . sk vagasteqekenap ent 125

Drusy VEINS ......... Sheaep hens APE SOE

““ DRYING ” LIQUuaTION RESIDUES (see
also Liquation)... 527—529; 491; 492
Furnaces for .. shavaunasstes 521: 526; 492
Silver extracted by psesey'sce yee pense 29
SURG SOME ands segece sscses
Dumps, WORKING OP icc
Dust CHAMBERS.. oekes
DutTINs (Timbers) .. sgaseenveventtees
POY MAMITE is Seesscccsvesees visas sesesiors 119

“* Eartus.”

Agricola’s view Of ...............-. 1; 46; 48

Roactraordittary es: jes vances ses oss cossaness 115

Peripatetic view Of .............+.00
EGYPTIANS.

Alluvial —— Pepe abedespiaimavecnnes

Antimony . ‘

Bronze ..
Copper smelting . ee ves
Crushing and concentration .
Furnaces . aes ieee
Glass making ..
Gold oe:
TRON: ves cesess
Mining law os...
Silver and lead metallurgy.
‘iG s 50s

EGYPTIAN Screw ‘(see "Archimedes,

Screw of).

EIFEL.
Spalling ore ........ gs io taeaeaenel 272

Ejisenertz (see Ironstone). _

Eisenglantz (see Ironstone).

EISLEBEN,
Heap roasting ..

Electrum .....++.

seo 2795 274
458; 2; 35

ELEMENTS, PERIPATETIC “THEORY OF 44
MMAR isin va Vaednd dha s egaen den yes andeaveaths 115
ERBISDORFF.

Tin strakes . sbaabiaresunats 304
Excoctores (see Smelters).
EXHALATIONS.

From veins . ff 38; 44

EXHAUSTED LIQUATION. ‘Cakes (see
Liquation Cakes, Exhausted).

FANS, VENTILATION ......csceceeceeee+e+ 208—207

FATHOM ...... ws 616; Tis 78
Federwis (see also 2 Asbestos) setuaeds> 114; 274
FELDSPAR ......- Seeuguhass 114

PAGE
Ferrugo (see Iron-rust).
Ferrum purum (see Native Iron).
Fibre (see Stringers).
FINENESS, SCALES OF .... coos 253; 617
FIRE-SETTING .......000+ "418120; 118—119
Frrstum MInEs (see Fiirst).
FIssURE VEIN (see Vena profunda).
FLaME.
Determination of metal by ......... 235
Determination of ~~ flux wc! 235
Fiint, As A Flux. ee, 380

FLOAT, FROM VEINS | : senesauosiece

FLUuE-pust . stsececseseeeees 994—896

Fluores (see Fluorspar).

FLUORSPAR .. “ie 115; 380; 381
Indication ‘of ‘ore. Pein éevecsuns tag 116

Fliisse (see Fluorspar).
Fiuxes (see also Argol, Saltpetre,

Limestone, Stones which Sapte
melt, etc.) ..
aS 232-2395 232; 5 287; 380; 221
Basic .. aes sf 237
De-sulphurizing .. Tak etyavanenaeauenie ens 236; 237
For smelting .. he bei 380; 386; 390
Reducing ad witsstecrasve | ROO eae
Stock fluxes for r assaying .. he 236
Sulphurizing ... svkcd buleNasae Vanes: SOS mE
FOOTWALL ......... 68; 117
FOREHEARTH ...... "356; "375378; 386: 355

For tin furnaces .............:.:000-55 4415 413
ForEMAN (see Mining Foreman).
FOREST-FIRBS.\., 63s cscs ccsea shy eshsicagneneee) eee eee
Forest OF DEAN . 84

ForEST OF MENDIP . Lica be pees es Fen 84
Formae .... AR ore 101
Fossa latens ‘(see ‘also Drifts)... tiepasesabhe 101
Fossa latens transversa (see also

CrOmacis te) 5s scan vues vorsan yas scunes 101

Fossores (see Miners).

FouNDERS’ HOARDS. .........2ssss0s0002. 355; 402
FRACTIONAL MEERS ......sceceeeeeeceeee

FRANCE.

Medieval mining law .............+5+ 84
FREE MINING CITIES .........ceseeeeeees 84
FREIBERG .. Soleus oi vebao asa aoe XXXI.

Age of the mines . Sida veibonbontes 5

Division of shares .

First discovery of veins .

Flooding of mines .........

Method of cupellation ..............5
Foriwna’: EAaRTe 5h .ss0s sancigeorseusens
Fumes.

From heated ore ........ssesceseeeeeee 235
Poisonous .. «+ 215—216
Fundamentum ‘(see ‘also Footwall) . 101
Fundgrube (see also Meet)........+.++++. 77

Furnaces 374—378; 386; 388; 355; 492
Assaying (see Assay Furnaces).

Bismuth smelting .. siccocssese 433—487
Burning tin concentrates 349
Cementation .. Ro Si
Copper smelting .. ve

Cupellation . sas "467—468 ; 42483
8 g” liquated page viene 522—526
Enriching copper bottoms.. et 510
Gold and silver ores . seseeeeee 982—8384
Heating copper cakes... Seobe

Tron smelting .. ate
Latin and German terms
Lead ores..
Liquation of silver . shucdvene tte
Melting lead cakes .........c:seseeeees
Nitric acid making ..
Parting precious metals with anti-

mony .. .. 452—453
Quicksilver distillation . seseee 426—432
Refining copper . sececceceseccee 581—533
Refining silver ..........cc.c:cseeeeeeee 4835 489

Refining tin..... 4 418
Roasting ..... ss
Smelting liquation slags ..

Hei 507
Tin smelting ... ““ali—413; 419

Pp

epee Sete

GENERAL INDEX. 623

PAGE
FURNACE ACCRETIONS......:.... 113; 221; 492

FUNC VAN 685s nccaavciveesectussanteres 376
FURNACE, FHOODG ccs cscerasevanesscdescos 494
Furst.

; 24

Gaarherd (see Refining-hearth),

petal ne eat ee

GAD! aici on inie sees aes 150
GALENA .. aes "Bl; 109; 110; 221

Bismuth distinguished £ inant eadaba las 3

Smelting of .. wHk seseceesseee 400—401
GANGUE MINERALS. ddtb oie cep singer teeta 48
GarLic.

Magnet weakened wie 39
GarRNETS .« 334
GASES (see also Fumes)

From fire-setting ...... 120
Gedigen eisen, silher, etc. (see Native

Iron, Silver, etc.).
Gel atrament “ Kee
GEMS ....... seks chadedstonse.).\2 WIERD
GEOLOGY.

Agricola’s VieWS .......sss00eseceeeeeees 595
GERMANS.

English mining influenced Eaglaad 4

Mining men imported into

Ore-dressing methods .........++++++++ 281—282
eer ksi wee Sai Lemmy; sbisanbas 77
GEYER .. ne gpehaee.in (Pereaens gc VI.

Tin-strakes .

304
Removal “from. objects .. seveeee 460; 464
Grips (see Gypsum).
GITTELDE.

Smelting of lead ore .........ssceee0er 391
Glantz (see Galena).
Glasertz (see Silver Glance).
Glaskipfe (see Ironstone).
GLass +

Pret terre tres retro r irs

i a flux .. seid . a
se in parting from copper ....
Use in smelting gold concentrates. - 897; 398

Glimmer (see Mica)
GNoMES.
In mines .... 217; 112; 214; 217

Gostins (see » Gnomes).
Gop’s Girt Mine (see Gottsgaab
Mine).

GoLp sy also Gold Ores, Parting,
melting, Stamp-Mill, go
Alluvial mining ............ +» 321—336; 330
Alluvial streams ...........00sssesseees 75
Historical notes ...-.+.-.+.« ave evens 399; 354
Indications of... 108; 116
Lust for, not the fault of the metal 16
Minerals . Fag 108
Minerals associated with . 108—109
Smelting of ores ........
Sinece 381—382 ; 388; 988; 390; 396
Wickedness caused by .. 9$—10
GoLp CONCENTRATES ........4.. "396399; 398
GOLDEN FLEECE........ essetecsen MOS SOU
RPE I BB 6c. Sis cs fuk cad bo p's0c se ntuwedien 107—108
Assay amalgamation 243—
Flux used in assaying ............... 235
Flux used in smelting < 398
Smelting in blast furnace - 898—400
Smelting OTeS .....0:4... 404—407
Smelting in lead bath ............... 399
Smelting tiferous ore ............ 398—401
Stamp-milling ............c0cceceeseeeee 321

Goldstein (see Touchstone).

PAGE

GOSLAR .. Geseiens ays teatevecotedens| EC MSCS?
Native zine vitriol Slaasvoans sdcensask 572
son Na pda PRESET eee OC 7
palling hard ore deetba

GOGLARITB acsaisvadssnoe ees oe 572

GoTTsGaaB MINE

GOUNCE . TAMARA CUNTS Vanbie a4 k6deo 000 267
GRAND CANAL or CHINA. can 129
GRANULATION METHODS FOR BULLION 444
GRANULATION OF COPPER . pee ates 250
GREEKS.
ete steel Tea asa to =
etallurgy from uncer “
Mining law ....... 83
Ore dressing ...... 281
Silver-lead smelting | sup Uelonacbisweine’ 391
Smelting appliances ...... pee 355

Grey Antimony (see also asi i: aia dan
5 331

GriFFINs ..
GRooM OF THE ‘CHAMBER.

Right to a meer .... peaap teeeae 81
Groove (see also Shafts) .. Hien 101
GROUND SLUICES ...escsecceceseeseeeeess 836—337
GROUND WATERS ...... 46—48
Pe - Verdigris).

92; 419
Gomeanes”

First use for ae © in mines...... 119

ane of. x spnere 562
GYPsUM . Silsipesihes ebmevh bak baa higices nie 114
HADE ...... eh ansa kaw see 101
Haematites (see ‘Tronstone).

Halinitrum (see Sal
HaAtve, SaLt InpustTRY .. 552
HAMMERS.. ETT E a 151

With water power .. gaapasevedaes 423
HANGINGWALL Sodas ide abanes +» 68; 117
Harz MINERS.

Agricola consulted .........0.0s0e+++++ VII.

Antimony sulphide ...........++.+++++- 428

First mining charter ............+++++ 84

First stamp-mill ...........sseceeeee eee 282
HAULING APPLIANCES (see also Whims

and Windlasses) ......... 160—168; 149
HEAP ROASTING ....... ssseees 274—276
ar tere bass also ‘Molybdaenc).

we» 475; 476; 110; 221

Asa ‘flux . 33 Apes

Use in smelting .. 379; ; 398; 400
HEARTHS,

For bismuth smelting ................ 433—437

For melting lead . 390; 498
HEAVENLY Host Mine | (see ‘Himmelisch

Héz Mine).

PEAT: SPAM: \onistdesacasesdksnsachas nesses 115
HEBREWS.

Knowledge of antimony ............ 428

Silver-lead rue eaansvarn snd neseuy 391

Term for tin . Ska ch aiiglts's Senta 412
HEMATITE.. Maca bad <a lll
HEMICYCLE (Hemicyclium) .. 137—138

Heraciton (see Lodestone).
Herd plei (see saplenhs ets
Hrero, KING .......

see 2475 247
HicH Peak (Derbyshire).

Mining law ......... Lapheai saison 84
Nomenclature in mines . 77
Saxon customs, connection ‘with... 77; 85
Himmelisch Héz MINE ........+0++++ 74; 92; 75
Hoe. sa dadciscve eed.sei 152
Houtpavs oF “Miners Gvedannecnkcans sue ee
Horn SILVER .. Ahibs shy ssneaabodicbeske 109

Horns oF DEER....

HORNSTONE ......secsseseseee - 116; 114
Huncary.

ReMi os: os cs saa bsnmsa voter vce 483

624 GENERAL INDEX.

PAGE
Hiittenrauch (see Pompholyx).
IGLAU, CHARTER OF ...... 84
INCENSE IN CUPELLATION FURNACES 472

INDICATIONS OF ORE..
Ingestores (see Shovellers).
INDIA,

Steel ......
Intervenium vneuek
Ser IN MINES .

TRon.. Ae Lisacn vey

Censure of. ies vie

Indications of . oe aeaOeaban sesaet

‘Smelting ...... saohatateapesnenes

Sulphur harmful to sie cde veka nae aey
Iron AGE ......

106; 107; 116

Tron FILinGs (see also Iron- n-Scales) 22]
Use in assaying . 234; 238; 246
Iron ORE.
ASSO YIRE OE (Kiayrcntsik cee ctaucrcuabetes 247
Smelting Of ...........2ccccceceeeeeeeeeee 420—426
TRON-RUST 06 cecs50s ccdace sas Lane 474; 1: 1ll
TRON-SCALES 2.0. .ceeceseesees aeaene 221
Flux .. ea camtoas vies 234
Use in ‘smelting ‘gold .. iakquapyeas 398
Use in smelting SHIVEr sos cecseseeeees 400
Use in making nitric acid . eat 440
Use in parting wee from b Copper. 464
IRON-SLAG. ....... 221

ASM UR aasane conetcaicdicairaddacestdaes
TRONSTONE vices de svasssxciarsersinascuckd OOO Bee
ITALIANS.

Alluvial mining in Germany ........ 334
ITALY.

Mining formerly forbidden ......... 8
JADE.... 114
JAPAN.

Steel .. 423
JASPER eee ase lll; 2
FGIS car sevasacianicnanarriassaeeceeeed 114
JT: Sevdisncsctccanstccedsaveussedsneoinstvese 34
Jiceinc Ea RES is CERIN 810; 267 ; pn
JOACHIMSTHAL 2... .scscsessceessescecssens

First stamp-mill .. Pune vaveds 281

Mining shares and profits . lesaveceeid | age Wee

Jiidenstein i “sete dearest

JuIcEs .. oaeve 1; 47
Agricola’ 5 ‘theory . ad deabhe'yen 46; 52
From rl and streams. ........- 33
Stone juice . piveudesscbesbonaiieouniee 46; 49
SE MUE OF sie won'ns one ass <ccstobunecasgnaus 34

JuIcEs, SOLIDIFIED.

Agricola’s view of . eadahease 1; 49
Extraction of metals from. ......... 350
Preparation of . das soasnupedenaeee 545

JuLian ALPs.

Stamp-milling in ....... 319

Junctions (see Veins, Intersections of).

Jurati (see ‘sional

Jurors... ss seshave RSs O24 06% 79
In English mining “custom a ouacenas 85
Relations to Bergmeister ............ 955 77

Justinian CODE.

Kalchstein (see Limestone).

Kammschale .. eens 127
KAOLINITE (see Porcelain Clay).

Katzensilber (see Mica).

KING.
Deputy... Wavdpdcas cynasavesexuean toe 94
Right to a meer piistes see 81
Kinstock (see Liquation | Cakes,
Exhausted).

Kis (see Pyrites).
Knockers(see Gnomes).
Kobelt (see Cobalt).

KGLERGANG VEIN .....cccccceccecseseeses 42
K6NIGSBERG.
Fire-setting .. oa 119

Kupferglas ertz (see ‘Copper "Glance).

PAGE
Kupferschiefer (see Copper Schists).
KUTTENBERG.
Depths of shafts.....0.0. 06605. ccestn cic 102
LABOUR CONDITION IN MINING TITLE.
«+ 925; 83—85
LACEDAEMONIANS (see "Spartans),
Lachter (see Fathom).
LADDERWAYs IN SHAFTS 124; 212
LADLE FOR BULLION ...... 382
Lapis aerarius (see Copper Ore).
Lapis alabandicus ...... His 380
Lapis Judaicus ........ cossee 9965 115
Lapis specularis we Gypsum). "
Latus (Lagging) .. Be 101
La Torra.
Alum manufacture...............ceeeee 565
Discovery of . 570

LAURION (LauRium), ‘Mr. ‘(see “Mr.

LauRIoN, MINES pel
LAUTENTAL, LIQuaTIon AT. ted one 491
Law (see Mining Law).
LAW-SUITS OVER SHARES IN MINEs... 94
EBA D Miah eay classestenghal ueiaaes Biel 390; 110

Censure of. es-tphdussakdapateunek 11
Cupellation ..... tee seseseeee 464—483
Melting prior to liquation .. 500
In liquation cakes . _ 505-506 ; 3; 505; 506
Refining silver ..... re 483 —490
Smelting of ores . 388-392; 400
Use in assaying
Heyes 232; 239; aa; “244; 3 249; 251
Washing in sluices ..cs.sssse-- 347
DLRAD-ASH pica th acne alegbeieet 28; 237; 221
As a flux .. 234
Use in parting gold fi from. n copper. 463
LEAD Batu ...... se 381
LEAD-GLASS .

Leap GRANULES.
LEADING (in liquation)...
casa 304; 507; 5135 491; 492; 504
Components of the charge... 505—509
LBAD: OCHRE hii Jeseasuivtiasistias "932 ; 110; 221
Leap ORE.

Assay methods .........ssceeeceeeeeeee 245—246

Roasting .. aia onanaan

Smelting in “blast ‘furnace | sesesesecee 8905 408
LEASE, IN AUSTRALIAN TITLE ......... 77
LEAves. PREPARATION OF BULLION INTO 444
LEBERTHAL ...e.0...000 24

LEEs OF aqua WHICH SEPARATES Goup
FROM SILVER ............ 234; 443; 221

As a: fx ictus ss. 2345 238
Lees oF VINEGAR (see also ‘Argol) 221

ASE BOX ccs ae + 236; 243; 234
Lees or WINE (see Argo).
LEMNOS, ISLAND OF cicccseccsesseesecese 31
LEMNIAN Earth . 31
Leprosy or House. Watts (see ‘Salt-

petre).

LEVEL (see also Drift) ... 101
‘LEVEL, PLUMMET me Plummet Level)
LIMESTONE .......+4+- din vdiesaversas a Gee baal

BS & BOK roi steeds veiszetieaesss0ses neds Oe eee
LUMONITE (50s cdibdeiseveddckesen eid ibensetee lll
LEMP ical ashes beashaseattaheeeiseeeeibirene 267
LINaRFs.

Hannibal’s mines near ............... 42
Lipari ISLANDS.

Alum from .... 566

LIQuaTED SitveR-LEAD (see Stannum
and ipaicathonsted
LIQUATION...

aunty bie peti 491; 519
Ash-coloured copper from .. 529
Buildings for: \.iisisiseasseecsses 491
Furnace ..... ois ae - 515—518; 492
Historical note ‘on . ies 494
LOOSOG' ingupsasckencdegmesareccvsiecs vosues 2m Stan
Nomenclature ..........sccseccsssseseces 492

LiguaTION CAKES 505— mee 492; 505; 506
Enrichment of the lead.. vette Mtl (ae
Extraction of silver from .. sa 512
From bye-products of liquation... neers 539-—540
From copper bottoms §.............. 512; 512

GENERAL INDEX. 625

Liguation CaKEs, PAGE
Proportion of lead in rich les

COPPET wrceceseecessererecercerereces 509
LiguaTION CAKES, EXHAUSTED . rate

sessssseee 521—526; 406; 492; 520
Liguation Stacs . dud bob aieaee Wud Sti 492; 541

UPNACOR- L082 essa s scdassoeponasiedessso 507
Treatment of . 541
LiguaTIon THORNS $22; "539; 402; 539; 540
- cu lation . indy | 843; 543
rying”’ copper residues... 529

FY aga (see also Cupellation)...
475; 232—238; 466; 476; 110; 222

Use in reducing silver nitrate .....- 447
Use in smelting .. 379; 398; 400
Lithargyrum ve Litharge).
PA RRTOWI 6 Soc sc (so dune ihe 11l; 115; 2
Compass .. 57
Los Pozos de “Anibal . 42
Lotores (see Washers).
LUSITANIA.
Gold alluvial ........ anntn sacar’ 347
Sluices for ae washing Se ate dh aks 325
Tin smelting .. nee Wel dordks sat

LuTE ..
Preparation ‘of for furnace linings 375-376
Lypia.
DME TEE 5k) pcbnicestaciccsembadeeatna 83
The King’s mines .. decpeacaendan 27
LyE iis. 8585 221; 233
Use in ‘making pO aR A aT 236

Use in parting . deasceacaensicss 463

Magister Metallicorum (see Bergmeister).

Magister Monetariorum (see Master of
the Mint).

Magnes (see also wait shpat and Man-

ganese) .. 584; 111; 115; 584
pA 5 of daepe pies fete ane oe eye een 247
CATES pede cee pierifssoiwsiae aes 39
Magnetis (see Mica).
MAGNETITE .. buns ghed ig dcaseehis Reson lll

MALADIES OF MINERS . issisbcradscctaven? MAOeae
MALTHA . advance 581
MANAGER (see Mine Manager).
MANGANESE... svevorecee 086; 354
MANNSFELD CopPER “SLATES . ayaadeaeee

aeate en ogile 279) 127; 273
Map-MAKING uecasa ha peaess 129
RM TEIB Ss csich cava sebints lee eveocyansa’’ “415; 2 ; 114
MARCASITE . bbe oshshecabeueben REM a aes Oe.
Marga (see Marl).

seeee MXXIEG Me

MARIENBERG
Marv.. as
MARMELSTEIN (see Marble).
Marmor (see Marble).

Marmor alabastrites (see eet :
Mayrmor glavea .. 1l4
Massicor (see also Lead Ochre) “110; 221; 232
MASTER OF THE HORSE..........c0e0e 00+ 81
MASTER OF THE MINT ...... 95; 78
Marte (see Cakes of Melted Pyrites).

MATTE SMELTING .

MEASURE a 2! mining ar area) .. 78; 78

MEASURES.,......c0 cc. eeees 616—617 ; 78; 550

MEDICINE.

Knowledge n for miners . 3

Medulla saxorum (see Season Clay).

MEER ....... La 77—89
Boundary stones .. 87
On vena cumulata .......ccccecerceneee 87
On vend dilatate 0.5.05 ckisseeca sti ons 86

MEISSEN.

Dumps from mines . ahd 312

Melanteria ....... ate “AT; 112; 573
Indication of copper .. 116

LIA TERETE oe 5 cick Gon sid cou apis on 111

MELos, ISLAND OF SuuOE Ate enavesad sdmwes 566

Mennir (see Red-lead).

le see Marl).

METALS ...... Bedsspeaese; ap ae BR

Advantages and uses. bay keh be 19; 20
Necessity to man: .........6¢.00 XV; 12-13
Not responsible for evil passions... 15

PAGE
Metreta ....... 153
MExIcO
Patio eyerens ass 297
Mica . . 114
MippLE ‘AGEs, Mininc Law oF ...... 84
MILLs FOR GRINDING Ethers 294299; 280
Mimes(see also ner ape eaneee 217
MINE CAPTAIN .....00e0c000e005 26; 77

MINE MANAGER . iene OT; “98; 17; 718
MINERAL KINGDboM, AGRICOLA’S

DIVIGIONG OF «050.000 ccvsee cts secene 1
MINERALS......-.:ce0e0ee-00-. 6594; 108; 48; 51

tR aemevail vas see 1-65 25; 78
Duties and punishments vesavesoctesi i BOOS 28
Law (see Mining Law).

Litigation Lapa pics exoes hater enseen 21
Slaves as . : 23
MINEs.
Abandonment Of ........s.cseeeeeeeees 217
Conditions desirable ...... Baty 30—33
Frivastenente Fi 6: .5555)s0s vaveseacosronns 26—29
Management of . pis Voaseadady welt 0 ana
Names of . spieneegh
MINES Royal, CoMPANY oF... a 283
MINING (see also Sett, Lease, Claim,
Meer, etc.).
Criticisms of . cinsagin 4—12
Harmless and honourable ...... 14; 20; 23
Methods of Eontaay OTE .secseeeeeee 197—118
Stopi ee 1

ait 2 25
MINING CLERK «.s-sss0sess+-s “93; 95; 96; 78
MINING COMPANIES ‘(see Companies,

MINING FOREMAN...
Frauds by .....
MINING tan Méswe

Boundary stones | 87
Drainage requirements 92—93
England ....... 84—86
Forfeiture of title . Senaki andes 92—93
Greek and ‘Roman . ahd <bsmepaae 83
Middle Ages . 84—85
Right of Overlord, "Landowner,
State and Miner ..........0..00005 82
Tunnels .. eayek oadeeeas wi 88—89
Mintnc PREFECT .. "26; 94; 78

Minune Ror (see Mining ‘Law i
eer)
Mininc Terms, OLD ENGLISH.. rOremly if Sa)

MINING TOOLS .........csseceeseseceseseee 149-—153
Buckets for Ore ...........ssssscseeeeee 153—154
Buckets for water . si haecmeaiae 157
Trucks .. incinenasenieeantaeair 156
Wheelbarrows . inact aed Gansta dade 155

Minium . bes biawardasebhnes 1ll
Quicksilver from .. Sides eae 433

Red-lead . 232

Minium secundarium (see Red- lead).

MISPICKEL La A sete lll

Misy (the mineral)... weir "873; lll; 403
An indication of copper . va 116
Use in parting gold and silver .. 459

Mitlere und obere offenbriiche (see

Furnace Sm oneamiee
DUOREHS iychvoheisaevicnscaccsabaveske teseaseee TORE, 2400
Moct!7z.

Tin working 318
RST aay epee 150
Molybdaena......... “710; “991; 476 ; 400; 408

Term for lead carbonates ........... 400; 408
Molybdenite ... alee Fikksvoeeses 477

Monetarius (see Coiners).

Money, ASSAYING OF . 251—252
Morano Giass FACTORIES Wok den Aube de 592
Moravia.
Cupellation .... 483
Stamp-milling 321
Washing gold ore 324
PRTARIN RE evtccs sy lov sen st oad anes sonnets 569
MorTAR-BOX...... 279—280; 312; 319; 267

626 GENERAL INDEX.

MounrtTAINS, PAGE
HOPMAN FOE ei ia sca suns tas sone sae 595
Mr. BERMIUS.
Gold Mines of . veges ak 26; 27
Mr. Laurion, MINES OF ... "87; 27—29 ; 391
Crushing and concentration of ores 281
Cupellation .. bis dak tanenrcaecthsys 465
Mining law . eabmacgas Suvaneane 83
Smelting appliances: Peionceks ves stinks 355
Xenophon on . cv aah ghar vaka nesta 6
Mr. SINAl.

Ancient copper Ss Sivkegoceses 7} SODin aE
MUFFLE Segetomecls sesecesescesee Saa—a205 239
PERSE RS oii dccassceeese duvnss cay RED ORO eee

Refining silver .. 489—490

MUHLBERG, BATTLE OF. idstemesubeuee es
Murrhina (see Chalcedony).

MUSKETs .. ‘aavspieeeias 11
MyYcENAE.

Silver-lead smelting 391
NAMES OF MINES ..........cececscecvsece 42
INAPHTHA. 5). ictecsecsanvcsnscats cinavenecais 581
Native COPpPpie 3.0 si. s5sccsesvenavesssees 109
NATIVE IRON sete isoesi het. adie enseass lll
NATIVE MINERALS ..........ceeecceeceeses 107

NATIVE ‘SHAVER ccosshecctesccscesusncrvyva OOe a kOe
NATRON (see Nitrum).

NEOLITHIC FURNACES . vee 355
NEUSOHL, METHOD OF SCREENING ORE 290
NEWBOTTLE PBB iccccatetscerviesube 35
Nitocris, BRIDGE OF . 391

Nirric AcID (see also Aqua valens) ..
; 460 ; 439; 354

Assay ‘parting "gold and silver ...... 248

Testing silver regulus with ......... 449

Use in cleaning gold dust ............ 396
Nitrum (see also ene Sacstoodess
NOMENCLATURE .. ste

Mining law ...........

Mining officials ...........
NOVECS occ eve sus
Conveyance ‘of ore.

NORMANS.

enon Law in R eer Sine beseachpe 85
NoTarY . Shewemareeen 94; 78
NuBIA.

Early gold-mining .. Mates 399
NUREMBERG, SCALE oF WEIGHTS . 264
OCMC: RAMOA a vyovin cas bainssackciv sas shose lll
OCHRE WRLOW so cuss ave cdctecucausvssnens lll

Offenbriiche (see Furnace Accretions).
OLYNTHUS.

Betrayal to ee of Macedon...... 9
Operculum .....00++ ceeveeee A415 222
VOLE satin coknses Porras |) paw? yf
ORE (see various ; metals, Assaying,

Mining, efc.).
ORE CHANNELS (see Canales),
ORE -eatatocadeg THEORY OF ... XIII ; 43—53
ORE DRESSING ......0.eececeeeeesecereesese 267—351

Burning .. sh ehesneeepescesankabne 273
Hand spalling .. Sovead Sos bab eye ctor RAE
Sorting .. cond culdaccboalenewunkionslctuc tee: aaa

Orguia ...... «+ 78; 78; 617

Orichalcum (see Aurichalcwm) —

ORPIMENT .. oa MER ts BE
Colour of fumes .. deena saceppabeene 235
Harmful to metals . cepeusunsetbetssbars 273
Indication of gold, etc. ...........+.+ 116
Roasted from Ore ............0sssse0e: 273
Use in assaying .. She hsaincoeemus 237

OUTCROPS ...... qisenkauan 68; 43

Ox-BLOOD IN SALT “MaKING pedutbien vs 552

PactoLus, GOLD SANDS OF .
Park’sS PROCESS .......
PARTING GOLD FROM Correr. use
PartiInG GOLD FROM SILVER
seetecceevescrscesseeees 443—460; 458—463
Antimony sulphide ..........-0.+6++
sisseccsecesese 4B4—452; 451—452; 461

PartTInG GOLD FROM SILVER.
Cementation... 453—457; 453—454; 458

COIGEING Bas ssa vceveeeas ansenepteees 458; 462
Electrolysis ......... sevsase 458; 462
Nitric acid ...... 443—447 ; "443 ; 447; 460
Nitric acid (in assaying) .... 247—249

Sulphur and rita vee 448-451 j 5 448; 461
Sulphuric acid .. vee 458; 462
PARTITIONS ..

Passau, PEACE ‘OF . EV dakecuapubopeoesenleys IX.
Passus . wes ouakbsloespuceedane cena seobae) a MiG tiumee
Patio Process. sab sch spebenebNeve Ceneuedee' tee e eee
PATTINSON’S PROCESS ....c.cecceeeseees 465
Peak, THE (see ritice Peak).
Pentremites ....... die N eons ae 115
PERGAMUM.
Bra Re OK OL i scale hepacsesehto sen 11
Mines near ......... os 26; 27
PERIPATETICS .. XII
Theory of ore deposits nba aos 47; 44
View of wealth . ses dealabeeeccs 18
PERSIANS.
Ancient mining law ..............006 83

BIOS. Fs colcch vata accadueiuce dev aun tuvaeavaceieces Aye ae

PETROLEUM ........ seeeeeee 581—582

PHALARIS. BRAZEN BULL OF . Side 11
PHILOSOPHY.

Knowledge necessary for miners... 3
Pir rae 92027

Ta has DRONE sisi cuuivisavictes 402

BR sagas ps Nate 24

se ogdscsmebose'ceoulvopueie’ os akon

ieee” chase 152—153

Pickscheifer (see Ash-coloured Copper).
PLACER MINING . RY 321—348

Pleigeel (see Lead Ochre).
Pleiweis (see White-lead).
PLEYGANG VEIN io osc cedbaceuscesesueses 42

Plumbago ....... os 110
Plumbum candidum Weeae cee cera 110; 3; 473
Plumbum cinereum.. Je eutrws lll; 3
Plumbum nigrum lutei coloris .. aha 110; 3
PLUMMET LEVEL.
Standing .. bad duwiedd ph Sebscdyenssel >) SMe Ta
Suspended. evade Siagcnvsweanuch "145; 146; 137
PockETS IN ALLUVIAL STUICES ...... 322—330
Potsonous Fumes (see Fumes).
POLAND.
Cupellation .. sale N LD US Oat ead 483
Lead ore washing . gohan epaae 347
Lead smelting .. appear te Bee 392

Poletae, TABLETS oF THE.
PoLine COPPER .
PoMPEIOPOLIS.
Arsenic mine at ............... lll
Pompholiy 4... cieceeceecerees 394; “13114; 403
From copper refinings ......... 538
From cupellation .........
From dust-chambers .. ‘
From roasting OTe .........ssceseee es

83
"531 538; 3 535—536

POUGOHGUS sy seiies cheeses TG see ass ee
Used for brass mek Ba 410
PORCELAIN CLAY .. ‘

POTASH ......... 558-559
In Sal artificiosus vd wah daaels anes tanh
POTTERY, EGYPTIAN | cs cciceselscseysstes
PorTos! .. Ys ‘
P0OZzOs DE /ANIBAL, ‘Los .
POMS sides scianb ess aiant on
Praefectus cuniculh .. ig
Praefectus fodinae (see Mine Manager).
Praefectus metallorum (see Mining

Prefect).
Praeses cuniculi .....+ 78
Praeses fodinae (see Mining Foreman).
PRECIOUS AND BASE METALS ......... 439
PRIMGAP. .0.sc0sseees edie dedea) ten 80
Procuvatoy metallorum . pac uiruoyeer 83
PROSPECTING ......ese0e ind 35
PROWBRIT Ee Saeed teiaan tan oe oat 109
PUMPS cic ccesesccccsseccssssscvenses O0I—2005 140
Chain... a oncaetbstonasanaceesh ta aon ee
Rag and chain... sscssesscsesesess 188—200

ine ae ele Set Set

RS nr em eee

GENERAL INDEX. 627

Pumps. PAGE
Suction.. 175—188

Purgator argenti (see S ‘Silver + Refiner).

PURRER Gisssuedss iss x5 17

BOLE oie 150 Laponynch bens snvaguneshcepe vis 501

PYRARGYRITE .. Cstevuicncenaieawade eaaeeses 109

Pyriten argenium 408
PyritEs (see also Cakes of. "Melted

tes) .. 61; 111; 112; 1
As a flux. ; Weashade 234
Assay for gold .. pedede tpn actinvebaddebne 243
In tin concentrates .. Kaaeg Mobs 348
Latin and svearaaee terms ... gat 222
Roasting .. sexs 273-—274
Roasting cakes of . 349—351

Smelting for gold and. silver .. . 899; 401
Used in making vitriol .. “Ke 5678
Pyrites aerosus (see Copper 'Pyrites).
Pyrites aurei coloris (see Copper
Pyrites).

Quartz (see also Then ee havent

melt)...... 114

As a flux....... 380

An indication of ore 116

Material of glass 380

Silver ore 113

Smelting of 401
Quarzum (see Quartz).

RAO MTIGRE Cay bce chp cds sdunentes oe 380
(QQUICKSILVER... dapeacay "432; "2; 354; a
Amalgamation ‘ot gilt objects ...... 46

Amalgamation of gold dust ......... 396
Amalgamation of ape ae EGR rics any vos 297; 297
Assaying methods .. shaherseab 247
Ore . ssscsecereee 426-—432
Use in ‘assaying ‘gold OM as hc ocd
RaG AND CHAIN PUMPS.........4000066 188—200
OAM W MARS cet canton an dse ohn vecshesadven 101
RAMMELSBERG.
Collapse of mines . 216
y Mi i 4a saat tosuse 57
Reacoun Wav ditsesopecabobeteness OR GAN} OOo
Colour of fumes .. Wienadiiveies dak Weeks 235
Harmful to metals . ERIE ae Pe 273
Indication Of Ore \......6665scccaacesess 116
Rederstein (see Trochitis).
RED-LEAD ...... see 232; 110; 222
Use in parting ‘gold from copper .. 463

459
REFINED SALT .......ccc00s00000-. 454; 463; 233
REFINERY FOR SILVER AND CoPpPER
REFINING GOLD FROM COPPER
REFINING GOLD FROM SILVER ..
REFINING-HEARTH «0.0.0... cecees ces eeeees
REFINING SILVER......... “"483—490; 465; 484
REFINING SILVER FROM LEAD ........

REFORMATION, THE .......:....e00ee0e. W3 VIII.
RE-OPENING OF OLD MINEs . rs 217
REvIvaL OF LEARNING.

Agricola’s position in . Mahe XIII.
REWARD LEASE, IN AUSTRALIAN Law 17
RHAETIAN “ALPs.

Stamp milling) in .. ...........cc.ccceee 319
RING-FIRE . sok setmRercubpevibedasvevs 448
Rio Tinto Mines.

Roman methods of cps 405

Roman water-wheels ................. 149
Risks oF MINING ..... 28—29

"933; 233; 222

ROASTING .......... 273—279 ; 267
Heap roasting sees 274—275
In furnaces .... 276
Mattes .........5 4 349—351
Prior to assaying ......

ROCKH SS divsiuanl eases chen ssoce SUD E32

ROCK-SALT ........ stebeveeccssescses O405 222
Use in cementation . Rss abeihese 454

RROMEN AL UIE ois. docicustauseascivesenes 565

Romans.
Amalgamation ............
Antimony .....+..++
Brass making .........-00+eee00e
Companies .........

Cop smelting ...

Mining law wscecess

Miniusa Company
icksilver ...

Silver-lead smelting ..

Washing of ore ....
Rosette CoPpPER .
Rosgeel (see Realgar).

Rusy Copper . sasudysbadddne see ral Moe Gi wOe
Ruy SILVER .. Lided Viniectdomevareseew Cher eee
ASGAYING Of ....:0000 000 ree csvcee seveeeses 244
Cupella tions: is iss o.scesans cosine saseveces 473
Rudis Ores . Jensdacedadiapeciey 108

Rust (see Iron-rust).

SABINES ...... 9
Saigerdérner (see ‘Liquation Thorns).

Saigerwerk (see Stannum).

Salamander har rie onmergue

Salamis, Battle of . te eeceoeens 27
Sal-ammoniac . "560; 560; 222
In cements for ‘parting ‘gold and
silver .. 454—457
In making a a valens . epic 441
Uses in cupellation aa tae 474
Uses in making aqua ‘vegia babisedee 460
Uses in arabe i from eg Sy 463

Sal artifictosus .. 236 ; 463; 236

‘ 454;
Use in parting gold from. n copper «. 483; 464
i

Use in ne ores . 400
Wells .. Ky 546—547
SALT MADE FROM ‘Asugs or Musk Ivy 560 ; 233
Sal torvefactus........0cce000 242; 222; 233
Sal tostus......... seed § 233; 222
SALTPETRE......... 561—564; 561; 562; 222
As a flux ...... 233; 236—238; 245; 247
In smelting gold concentrates ..... 398
Uses in cementation . aee Se 3; 454
Uses in making nitric WOME Gis tccake
. 439; 440; 447; 454
Uses in melting silver nitrate ...... 447
SAMPLING COPPER BULLION ........+++ 249
SAND .. besncty 117
Sandavaca ‘(see Realgar). |
SANDIVER (see Glass-galls).
Sarda (see Carnelian).
Saxony.
h Peak customs from .. 77; 85

Political state in Agricola’s t time. VIII; IX.
Reformation ...... ¥: IX.
Saxum calcis (see Limestone).
SCALES OF FINENESS ...........s000022+6 253; 617
ScaptEe-HyYLe, MINEs oF . . 23

ScCHEMNITZ.
Age of mines ....... alas taints 5
ns et a for r blasting... bansdegeveuses 119

Sense :. AE NEE Ba 222

Schistos (see ‘Tronstone).

SCHLACKENWALD.

SCHMALKALDEN ‘Leacur eanmidndniask aes IX.

SCHMALKALDEN War .. Spee? Soy.

SCHNEEBERG 1.0 1....ceccceccssseccseeee MANES VI
Cobalt . ak ae sg Sa 435
Depth of shafts . Setdshalawtaeas 102
Ore nee * SEMIS IES Bree Set 281
St. George min 92; 74; 75

Pts alaveny (see “Melanteria ‘and
Sory).

628 GENERAL INDEX,

PAGE

reer hein AGMA navaveqars esc svkevs 239
SCORINIER sets euccacacisnaveanccks at 230; 222

Assays in kee oases 2885 239
SCREENING ORE (see ‘Sifting Ore).
SCREENS (see also Screening)............ 267

In stamp-mill . 315
Scriba fodinarum ‘(see Mining Clerk).
Scriba magisiri metallicorum (see

Bergmeister’s Clerk).

Scriba partium (see Share Clerk).
Scum oF LEAD FROM CUPELLATION ... 475
SCYTHIANS.

Wealth condemned .........0.ssse00+ 9; 15
SEAMS IN THE ROCKS. ........s00e008. 725 43; 47

Indications Of OFe .......ssseeeeeseeeee 675 107
SEA-WATER, SALT FROM .........0205. 545—546

pe TO” SiMe ne BARRA Y SEPP, Wey 4 DST Bre Py 448
Serr .. ee ieee ; 77
SETTLING Pits .. 316; 267
SHAFT-HOUSES .cis0\ bi bon issenevnessacavine
SHAFTS) 20055053 bsor@bhttg eae
Surveys Ob .2.03. c,h ceva 29—135
Venae cumulatae siseeaiavecesctaammencd 128
SHAKES .. Pee ER eet 101
SHARE CLERK.. “97; 93; 78
SHARE IN MINES ‘(see Companies,
Mining).
SHEARS FOR CUTTING NATIVE SILVER 269
SHIFT ..... pbuikan wapicasouawinaoealiged 99; 92
SHOES (stamp) .. '285—286 ; 5 267
SHOVELLERS .... 153; 169; 78
Sideritis (see Lodestone).
Siegelstein (see Lodestone).
SIEVES.
Por Chaves i... cs csseoness vere 375
For crushed ore . "'987—293 ; 341
SIFTING ORE ..... pea bhe 287293

Signator publicus (see Notary).
Silberweis (see Mica).
Silex .. ae i iivenkuug eae CES
SILVER (see also ‘Assaying, Liquation,
Parting, ——- ‘cua 390; 354; 109

care 297; 300
Assaying .. Sassen 248—251
Cupellation pepusacde 464—483; 241
“ Drying” copper “residues from

liquation .. ons 529
Enrichment in copper bottoms ... 510; 510
Exhausted liquation cakes ......... 524
Indicated by bismuth, etc. ....... 116
Liquation......... 505—507; 506 ; 509; 512

Parting from gold (see Parting Gold
and Silver),
Parting from iron ........ ss» 544; 544
Precipitation from solution in
copper bowl . caiess cde 444
RROGMING oss ve'sce scence senney -AB3—400 j 465; 484
Smelting of ores.
381—382 ; 386; "388; (3905 400; 402
Use in clarification of nitric acid... 443; 443
SILvER, Rusy (see ae nisi an

SILVER GLANCE eeesesses nite 109
Assaying .. a earaddaeaeilinntessscveeh 244
Cupellation .. son 005 sgulghenieusmay seed ey eee 473
Dressing . 269

SILVER- LEAD "ALLOY (see Stannum, “ete. ne

SILVER ORES cies is citdstvesos 109; 109
Assaying .. sige 242244
Assaying cupriferous pes 245
Fluxes required in assaying ........ 235
Smelting cupriferous ores ... 404—407

SILVER-PLATING ....e cesses sees 460

SILVER REFINER . 95; 78

SILVER REFINING (see Refining).

SILVER VEINS .......0+05 pene 117

SINGING BY MINERS .......00sescecseeere 118

SINTERING CONCENTRATES . eed 401

Svacs (see also Liquation Slag). ieveas 222
From blast furnace ...... see 3795 381

From liquation ..........+.++
SLaves as MINERS...
In Greek mines ...
SLOUGH (tunnel) .......eeeeseeeeee
SULOLORG | siesicds savcdpusccreieancssen

1
"319; 322—348

PAGE
SMAUT SH sos igs cewascer corssnssavavareoncicinee 112
SMOPR GU secare comers cuesnnbavnnyaiesevine see 404
SMELTERS .. daveaeaceease 78

SMELTING (see also various ‘metals) .. annah
eh mpared richiehiPree:t H age
ssaying ‘com
Building for .. sesseseeeee 855—861
Objects of . istsoene 353
Smirgel (see Emery).
Smiris (see Emery).

SMYRNA,

DECOR ORE 553s dei ceasdaserecactiaaer 27
SNAKE-BITES ...... 31
Sopa (see also Nitrum).. 588; 559; 233; 222

AWG GUN. fc cceccnes 3 234

Historical notes . sabe bavielesdisds OU SL OOM

Solidified juice ... Uabbvshaeedenveve 1
SOLE csnas~. aie 101
SOLIDIFIED ‘Jurces: ‘(see “Juices, |

Solidified).
SOU PURE hs ccsivi bine coalesce aii phhacdedh sees eNO games
SORTER (03s ciiccsass aeeees Seb konsevaeeess
SORTING Or web NuewessUbbbague kaa veeber@hy 2) aaa
Sory .. Sun sae'pna oseestesniesbions: (7 LS aS
Sows .. eer sesccseee 8765 3865 376

SPAIN (see ‘also Lusitania).

Ancient silver-lead mines ...... 149; 392

Ancient silver mines of f Carthage 27

Ancient tin mines . ar
SPALLING ORE .. Srtnde semhnn bandon
Spangen (see Trochitis)

Spanschgriin (see Ve igris).
SPARTANS.

Gold and silver forbidden ...........

Interference with Athenian mines
Spat (see ae, Sia
SPELTER ...... Swanaedaapeateen 409
SPEALBAITH iekascrcdcloesieshnnveuakeaes 113
Spiauter ...

Spiesglas (see ‘Stibium).

SPINES OF FISHES FOR CUPELS.. 230
Spodos .. Aiea aS "394; 113; 114
Spuma argenti_ (see ‘Litharge).

STAFFORDSHIRE.

First pumping ere
STALAGMITES .......
STALL ROASTING ..
STAMP .......

For breaking copper “cakes cess. 501—503
For crushing crucible lining .. 373—375
STAMPING REFINED SILVER ........++.. 489
STAMP-MILL .......+. 279—287; 281—282; 267
Wet ore -.. 812—314; 319—321

STANDING PLumMET LEVEL (see
Plummet Level).

STANNARIBG (30 iccisesvaicionse 85
EAU Ss chav vasccngawatnnses’ “473; “8; 384; 492
SEREG ics isescnisves 423—426 ; 422423 : 354.
Steiger ....... 17
Steinmack (see Porcelain Clay).

STEMPLE winged creas 101
STEPHANITE.. A vewtnevesddasii an bacuees 109
STERNEN MINE ....... Rela tay, | | a

STEWARD (of High Peak mines) . canes
St. GEorGE Mine (Schneeberg) ... 92; 74; 5
Stibium (see also nt and Anti-
mony Sul nl 110; 428; 2; 221
Flux to be added to. 235

In ASSAYING ...c0osevocceessesscnsesccceee 2OI——aOe
In cementation .......ccecsssess 458—460
Indication of silver .. 116

In making nitric acid . “ 440
In parting gold and silver.. “451—452; ; 459
In parting gold from copper bvaeees 464
In treatment of ined “eaaaepe ets 396; 397
STIBNITE . Fee seseee 428; 451
St. LORENTZ Mine .

pat 74; 92
STOCKWERKE (see Vena “cumulata).
SroIcs.
Views on wealth......sccsseseesseeesers 18
StOMOMA: ssncas sor sntosssruassacewasasabenees 423
STONE. JUICE. .ciscvprennccuseas 46; 49

ce os =
Sra ae

GENERAL

STONES, pee) . PAGE
Agricola’s view o: inp ond date tea ees ; 46; 49
Various orders of fusibility shee 380

“STONES WHICH EasiILy MELT”? (see

GSO QUAFtZ) ..rerescoreverccesere., 880; 2292
AS & AUX ceeseeseeseesseseeseeees 2335 236; 233

In smelting ............++0-s++5 3793 380; 390
SrooL (of a drift) « Sas Senin 101
STOPE © oie escas SRVhe gabssnuansddesaves

126 ;
¥ us 303—310; 267; 282
Canvas ......0. ‘307—310; lene 316; 267

+ 306—

Washing - tin concentrates. ‘paseaah eee 341—343
TRAE NE vi ccaccs ae sbphencacuche 126
SSMMMEIING 6 bn cscs ace van Conny ode satecs ben SF
SEC MIMIES i Cauecsucneuessobe ves

Indication of. ore. nehaae "106

Mining method. ..........ccscceceser eee 128
SUBTERRANEAN ‘Heat nbs apakactuaves sive 46; 595
Suction Pumps ..... . 175—188
SULPHIDES .....
SULPHUR .......

Colour of fumes gue

Harmful to metals . xhenieeadoun 273

In assaying .. ssceveee 235—238

: parting gold from ‘copper .. tes ; 462

In parting gold from silver .........

Bran dittond
In smelting gold ‘dust . Biss ohs 396
Roasted from Ores .........scsseseseee ; 276
Solidified juice .. és ap 1
SULPHUR “ NOT EXPOSED To THE Fire. s

SURVEYoR’S. FIELD. chithesaee

SURVEYING .. ....
ecpmesi for miners .
Rod . tas

SUSPENDED. ‘PLUMMET “Lever (see

Plummet te:

Swiss Compass ....... esbdccnacecen:, WADE 187

SWISS SURVEYORS .......ccsseccecessseess 145

SPVOMAEOUIIE Ss) wae’ oe ste \UsssGusd caedesv 91

RAPSROER sine. cis siviee sesso ssvsacsncicrsss, SIR n SOO
TAPPETS oii iscicecccessargesvsenese SOR 5 S193 267
RPAPPIMGHBEDR Sa cdecicics deceives oho wotes 381
TARSHISH, TIN TRADE. saghduanolpceea ne 412
TARTAR (Cream of) .. Scecbsasdas eee aes Boe
Tectum (Hangingwall) . iiss Ss 101
Terra sigillata (see Lemnian Earth).

x ages ue c adanvineaie SILVER IN ......

Thaler . i
THAsos, “Mines ‘OF
Theamedes . pinay wane
Twxoposran ‘Cops.

TuomNs (see inion Thorns).
THURINGIA.
Roasting pyri Susasedtes 276
Sluices of dire washing... dives 327
TiGcNa (Wall plate) . Reateessceeh 101
TIMBERING.
Of ladderways and shafts... 122; 123; 124
Of sto 126

INDEX. 629

PAGE

TIN.
Washing .... ---298; 302; 304
Tincar or Tincal (see Borax).
TirHe GATHERER.. iin vol gh ; Deets 98; 78

TITHE ON METALS ooescsccescses beings 81; 82
TOME TCODE i ianrcet evi setesioss ans ovvesesee 235
Tofstein (see Tot us).

Toira, La (see 2 ali),

TOOLS 2a .0s5 Saueaseacseve cos 140—163
5 eves (see Tophus).

233; 114; 222
233; 237; 390

USER SUUGTONS is 5 oc cci covey mend peacsan evs 11

Without metals . bvalppiakisas 17
TOUCH-NEEDLES .....,0:::000 00000 253—260; 253
ie ote S seratGix a 252; 354; 458; 222

Mineral.. pe 114

Uses .. Liss becleandeieclaith "243; 248; 447
TRADE-ROUTES.

Salt-deposits resist OB Merce sccves 546
TRANSPORT OF ORE . sescsseseseees 168—169
TRENT, BIsHOP OF.

Charter (1185) .. ue
TRIANGLES IN SURVEYING ..
RARE ilsde cnvdes 604 vkstbuncee? ren
Trochitis . apron S| ier 3) |
PUOUURG. sav siescce “480; 500; 514
Troy.

NOE SOWIE TU ois osc icesins sh cdessuseesnns 391
TROY WEIGHTS .........s000000-5 616; 617; er

84
129—137
115

Surveys a. beobseseesoosesssscivace SOG>—940
TurRIN piseae. 5 Aubleqabinekbbiedsveckiee cLLRO Er eee
RRR: (WIR) 6 sans rusdusdbekece snap 101
EWAGRIGO 5, Sicvns cavate secesncad dai sonvie'say 409
Turry . bys subjuuda bicvcusth
TWITcHEs OF THE “VEIN é
TWYER ...
Tyz 3
TYPE.

SHDstt0e USO LOK oo0'.0..sesccvsesececsses 2; 429
TYRANTS.

Inimical to miners ................05+ 32
TYROLESE.

ULcERs .. phauleladyvisevelyssstehse) MDB EA
Uncia (length) . son psawegeuctse “MOG CLO S18
Uncia (weight) ...... «+s.» 616; 242
UNDERCURRENTS (see Sluices).
UNITED STATES.

BCR RW i isinces see ccs svcndusnevecesones 82

Vectiarit oe? Windlass Men).

WRENS or sesiken sun Rati: Bassinet 106—107; 47
Barren . aca’ ions aes SOe
Direction of. he keviavseaclectbacban 54—58
Drusy eicagananente (dae Cae AOR
Wacdesce variable .. Bashiveasedebee 117
Indications ... a4 35—38
Intersections of...... 65; “66; 67 ; 106; 107

Use of term............ ay 405 AT
seckdtedenes 485 49; tei 43; 47
Mining method ....... 128
Mining rights .. ened 87
Vena dilatata 41; ‘45; 53; ‘60—61; 43; 47
Junctions with vena re iiavk 67;
Mining method ....... ss

Coase de <a 65
Pcie 655 68; 67; 68

VENETIAN LASS Mashoebes abe tabVebanguns 222

Tn assaying so. esvesseesssessesse 2385 245;

630 GENERAL INDEX.

PAGE

VENETIAN GLAss,

En cupellataon ieee csdsatieresdcas costes 474

VENICE.

Glass-factories... Meapaaites 592
Parting with nitric acid.. Fa hx 461
Scale of weights .. Peugaue 264

WENTOGATION (ciutspancscsccnie es “’200—212; 121
With eNlOws oii. Siok cease boseneaee 207210
WEEE SAE ise isléas cis csteas'sveibs 203—207
With linen cloths ......c0.cs0sse0eese- 210
With windsails . «+. 200—203

VERDIGRIS ........... 3) DpeddO ss aes
In cementation | Du aens preven «+. 454; 457
Indication of ore. uvewaieccee enbage 116
In making nitric IA eh scaly 440
In parting gold from copper | seks 464

VERMILION.

Adulteration with red-lead ......... 232
Poisonous .......+0+ Wiabs Nek te 215
VILLACENSE LEAD .. Sha hesteps wneceehes 5 239
VINEGAR.
Use in breaking rocks ...........66
Use in cleansing quicksilver......... 426
Use in roasting matte ............... 349
Use in softening ore ........ be 231

Virgula divina (see Divining Rod).

VITRIOL.. cieuniss eee 7 Ale, 403; 222; 1
In assaying ievstes'edes taestamiicee ee
In: comment ta tian soe <ccisns intend cos ase vas
Indication Of COPper .......sesee eee eee 116
In making nitric acid .. wake
In roasted ores ........ eee
Tn’ Sl CP PEPCLOSUS | 4556 sii ssciagenaceasons
NATE VO id cn ieantancaehuywsecotaus una ireeae lld
Nativ®: Dine aiviiiscesivnccscgesetervaes 109
Native: White (irs 5.ccéssccccssnesicsaveived 113
Red . seaiehainne schoesive aublaphnten ta 274
White. ea eeomen veontacol cient vis 454

VoLcanic ERUPTIONS. coins pweydiaandanete 595

WASHERS ........ 78
WASHING ORE (see ‘also Concentration,
300—310

Screening gee gene anaes
WATER-BAGS. ....2.ccecscseees “157159; 198

PAGE

WatTER-BUCKETS .......... seceee 157—158
WaTER-WHEELS “487; "983 ; 286; 319
WATER-TANK, UNDER BLAST Fur-
WRAE AR a5 ste cos seu niteacpioues onbowesanees 7—20
WEDGES ...... 150
WEIGHTS ... 260—2645 616-817; 242; 253
Weisser Kts .......0005 1ll
Werckschuh .. ti 617; 78
WESTPHALIA.

Smelting lead ore .............406

Spalling ore .......

WHEERLBARROWS «65 ciscec css viesvckdesvancs

WHITE-LEAD............... 440; 354; 110; 232
WHITE SCHIST ............ 284; 390; 234; 222
WINDING APPLIANCES (see Hauling
Appliances).

WINDUASSES 1s ses. euksveckvasxes sc 171; 149
WINDLASS MEN ...c.ccccsescesceeseeeseeee 91603 78
WINDs.

Greek and Roman names ........... 58

Sailors’ WOmMessiisascivecsgucoevscvassess
IWENDS (WHEE) i aad peccskensbevasthoveatare 101
WAN DSAILS 555 callnnecscasanac cua dicesinas'say
WINZEs .. pba wee 102
WITTENBERG, CAPITULATION OF Sine IX.
WIZaARDs.
WORKMEN, 3505 cabises'suvaavoesuve tanaotieoeseesy OG a: kame
WOUGKB? isk ccecnsae pccousedss banwilearwat ess 101

Zaffre .. oheed sbuved caseWeabnbleahededs <b> 112
ZEITZ .. XI.
ZINC (see also Cadmia, “and. Cobalt).
Historical notes . ssseeeeee 408—410; 354
Minerals .... Aes 112—113
ZincK (see Zinc).
ZINc OXIDES ......... 113; 354
Zinc SULPHATE (see Vitriol).
Zincum (see nee
WOW Late cscewnrrceveuse 617; 78
ZAGAT Jip cisich's tab kspeboeca tavehioe ten eans VI.
A NUEE is vineian's ualetvasvans tkaaapas vusnaunvae 110

INDEX TO PERSONS AND
AUTHORITIES.

Norr.—The numbers in heavy type refer to the Text;
those in plain type to the Footnotes, Appendices, etc.

PAGE
ACOSTA, JOSEPH DE .........scssee cee eee 298
AESCHYLUS.

AESCULAPIUS.

Love of gold ... Hapadandaepintonk 9
AFRICANUS (alchemist) beds “XXVI; XXVIII
AGATHARCHIDES.

Cupellation ..........s.seeesereecresseeee 465

Egyptian gold mining ...... 279; 391; 399

Bire-Getting 6.0.6... csesce cos scecsecceses 118
AGATHOCLES

Mone 21
AGATHODAEMON (aichemist) ”

suederes ceseee | MXVEEZ XXVIII
AGRICOLA, DANIEL . 606
AGRICOLA, GEORG @ ‘Preacher “at

Freiberg) .. wana hae 606
AGRICOLA, Gxoraius.

Assaying .. winiersnnk seunaeaseeseel 220

Biography ...... ssasgipartiboke tees OV oae ve

Founder of Science . NAS ab eetes XIV

Geologist .. a aod te 46; 53

Interest in Gottsgaab mine .......+. Vili; 74

Mineralogist .. XII; 108; 594

Paracelsus compared w WI Gi ceine XIV

Works . aapaweesideve . Appendix 4

See also:
Bermannus.
De Animantibus.
De Natura eorum, etc,
De Natura Fossilium.
De Ortu et Causis.
De Peste.
De Precio Metallorum,
De Re Metallica.
De Veieribus Metallis.
Ete.
AGRICOLA, RUDOLPH . .... 606

ALBERT THE BRAVE, DUKE oF “MeIssen Vill
ALBERTUS MaGnus (Albert von

ALBINUS, PETRUS soa hedede a. exbisw chee? WS Ow
Cuntz von Gliick . Pihvacdawauaeeke 24
ALPINUS, PROSPER < ..c05.ccsesscessde os 559
ALYATTES, KING oF Lypta..
Mines owned DY akan ceniéoh staeveaedacs 3 27

AMERICAN INSTITUTE “OF MINING
ENGINRBRG ois sok ions des esvecs 38; 53
ANACHARSIS.
Invention of bellows .................. 362
ANACREON OF TEOS.
Money despised by ............4+000 9; 15
ANAXAGORAS.

Money despised by.. eee 15
ANNA, DAUGHTER OF ‘AGRICOLA seaes Vil
ANNA, WIFE OF AGRICOLA _...........- VII
ANTIPHANES,

On wealth. Peiivoueaeba ine den unk ces 19

APOLLODORUS Aa

APULEJUS (alchemist) Sere XXVII; XXIX
ARCHIMEDES.

King Hiero’s crown .................. 247

Machines .. WOSEPARTAs inueaseed vou 149
ARDAILLON, Epovanp.

Mt, Laurion . SFaAsen deb taney OG Bek COL

ARISTIPPUS.
ARISTODEMUS,

PERDOOY : dativicven ssvachert teeseutahaecusuens 8
A RIBROTER iicsaicun dss vnndes sue adene cessed. 7aRae ie OOe
Athenian mines . dis dd eagavaave sav 27; 83
Burning springs «. wen dvuaepehinensié 583
Cupellation .. saisés selsdooae eqnute 465
Distillation .. an 441
Lodestone. . 115
Nitrum ..... 558
EOE OE CORON sks asi ga cadancoisiasdccacked 410
Quicksilver ...... ehowsne nea say cob 432
Silver from forest ‘fires taaighaceauiee 36
Theory of ore d EP ens cvessvncinses 44
Wealth of . _ aabdiav ss vie 15
ARNOLD DE Vita Nova.
(See Villa Nova, Arnold de).
ATHENAEUS.
Silver from forest fires . 36
AUGURELLUS, JOHANNES AURELIUS.

(alchemist) .. esdatis XXVIl; XXX
AuGUsTINUS PANTHEUS (alchemist). XXVIII
AuGustus, ELECTOR OF SAXONY ... IX

Dedication of De ust aerese s3 XXV
Letter to sees OO Balksei/ecteee XV
AVICENNA. edusedhysvbs sasevespn XXX; 608

BRA GON, TRCOMR cea dds pve vic ove seeoes
Saltpetre .. ate
BabDoarivs, FRANcIScUS.
Barsoa, V. N. DE .
Baton, PETER . daedabignie'sea
BarBa, ALONSO.
BARBARUS, HERMOLAUS .
Barrett, W. F.
BOCHUM RS TS Fin va5 bavces se :
BEcutvs, Pump .. euaewevate
BECKMANN, JOHANN.

Amalgamation . . 297
Nitrum ..... 559
Parting with nitric acid . oe ‘ 461
Stamp-mills Sas de cnet 281
Stannum ..... 473
Tin. 412
Bergbiichlein (see ‘Niitelich Bergh jilin).
Bergwerks Lexicon ...... 37; 80; 81
BERMAN, LORENZ ......scescseceeeseesese WI 597
Bermannus . Saas "596; 599; VI
Arsenical minerals. oeksovesubes lll
Bismuth . P 3: 433
Cadmia.. 113
u0: Ni asbe dosed < 1
Mobjblaewa . 477
Schist 3.660055 a 234
Shafts .. i wae 102
PRG isos tcveacancsuesdccdsanteiusn eocaee 409
BErTHELOT, M. ’p. Bes «.. 429; 609
BERTHIER . Date Obuennisepad ropewescec en 492
Bras oF PRIENE.
Wealth . = 8; 14
BrrINGuccto, “VANNuccIO.. 614
Agricola indebted to . ............ XXVIII
Peer amngaprie of silver ores. ...... 297
Assaying .. Spee SAU eS On ease ob 220
Assay ton . Spa set anv ise seb coe 242
Brass making .. 410

Clarifying pigeiie WOM Sssccuslcs Have 443

632 INDEX TO PERSONS AND AUTHORITIES.

PAGE Curtus, Marcus. PAGE
Brrincuccio, VANNUCCIO. Gold-Of Samnites 00. .66645 sian. ses ces 9; 15
COPper | RSRRUNE ces beck eines see onc oes 536
Copper smelting . .......0...cseeseetes 405 DANA, Jo0Dy ise ders ose cees
Cupellation o 466 Alum .......
Liguation... 494 Copiapite .
Manganese ..... Seshbunsces 586 Emery .. Abyss Seu catles oadees
Parting precious ‘metals... 451; 461; 462 Lemnian earth . Rub'veaeviaas aes 31
Roasting .. tindevsussdsets 267 Minerals of Agricola. ecahiare 594
Steel making . c canoebeacaunueaunes 420 Zinc vitriol . eptispeeas Gthies eects 572
Zaffre.. bas'so San dub Wem bobeetaee 112 DANAE.
Borcku, REE -icsac. cuctieedaseieons 28 OWS: RI i caccssiesc'scaccawigverstieoncuerre 10
BorRHAAVE, HERMANN 2. eee ceecee cee eee XXIX D’ARCET, sig
BortaseE, W. C. Parting with sulphuric acid . ...... 462
Bronze celts . ..........sesseeseccesnenes 411 Day, St. JoHN V.
BorvasE, WILLIAM. Ancient steel making .
Cornish miners in Germany . ...... 283 De Animantibus Subterraneis..
Born, IGNAZ EDLER VON . ......-.0008 300 EXditiONS 0. +s0<pseseeeve
BOusSINGAULT, J. B.......scccssvveceeeee 454 Gnomes. ........
BoyLe, ROBERT, De Bello adversus Turcam .
Divinting £06 © 255 sy siscsvacecicstaneesse 38 De Inventione Dialectica . evenuseah
BROUGH, BENNETT . «0. .seecseee ese ceeeee 129 De Jure et Legibus Metallicis ......... 100; 604
Bruce, . eae reper 892 De Medicatis Fontibus ..........c00c08 605
BRUNSWICK, DUKE “Henry OF. De Mensuris et Ponderibus ............ 597
(See Henry, Duke of Brunswick). Editions . Seeneb sans nye
Bupagus, WILtiaM (Guillaume Bude) 461; 606 Weights and measures .
De Metallis et Machinis . sayaeactes 6
CapMus. 27 Democritus (alchemist)... XXVH ; XXVIII
CaLBuS (see also Nt ‘italich Bergbichlin), DEMOSTHENES.
610; XXVI; XXVII Mt. Laurion mines ...... 27; 83
Alluvial Gold:=.s.<dsseccsvesctecsvgosonee 75 De Natura eorum pe Efiuunt 6 ex
CALIGULA. Terra . ssc crveee 598; 32
Gold from auripigmentum , ......++. lll Dedication <i 5i es. teUanasnwecaasacahes VIII
CaLLipEs (alchemist)...... XXVIII; | XXVIII ESHLONS 5, ws secu secersbissacavacuaneeess 600
CALLIMACHUS. De Natura Fossilium.. 594; 600; III; XII
Orr Wealthy oisec inc cseniecin cop vqnunsaven Alum ....... ie avensy seks
CAMERARIUS. .. Amber .
CANIDES (alchemist) Antimony .
CaREW, RICHARD. Argol . ben Sep sepaurinesy vasc'oah
Cornish mining law. .......:0-0+eeeee 85 Arsenical minerals .......00..ss0ss00000 lll
Cornish ore-dressing .......sc2eeeeeee+ 282 AsDOSEOG soy sik onusesk bn Sodas saceeny conens 440
CarLyLeE, W. A. RSI sts ver cnctacestehuaavoncesiesuace 110
Ancient Rio Tinto smelting......... 405 BUCOGR coves azeeteaenssaouanpaneew ices 581
CARNE, JOSEPH. BOCK oi s:dee ake Sen saineveep abate ue vank ges 660
Cornish cardinal points . Devons 57 Brass making .. Peer rer iri Lee eery:
CasIBROTIUS, LEONARDUS . ......+.5+45 vi CadmMia.......0. sees ‘
Castigationes in Hippocratem ra Caldavium copper .
Galenum ....... oe #0 ves 605 Cam phon cance sca ccsnoesaspvanseaeanees
CaSTRO, “JOHN DOR sacsccedivinciesstacent 570 eet a eat sen dnvtox sha vena eretiennont ey
CHABAS, Be Feo wetedserpmesak cases cuvcets 129 Coal . Sandan (one koikae OvmAN eae KantaNl 35
CHALONER, THOMAS ........ 570 Cobalt . bub ikeden's po WLk sequeatewies 112
CuaNnzEs (alchemist)......... XVI; ; XXVIII Copper Mowe | siveccsniewucass 539; 233
CHARLES V, OF SPAIN ......... IX Copper Scales) .itssssavascosesacvandscs 233
Agricola sent on mission to . ...... x Crinoid stems wien cAveisracecisests 115
CHEVREUL, M. E. ..... eeeeuat 38 MEMBER chic ivis des cicsncabndas onc uvetpenne 115
Chronik der Stadt Freiberg . . Masis 606 Fluorspar . ... 5
CICERO. Goslar ores ..... ‘
Divining 00 : ois ccsevsscsccten tasters 38 Goslar rong + psaiabaaea phetianers 408
Wealth of . sop'suulava sunken ueat 15 Iron ores . eCesects ced visser iid lll
Cincinnatus L. Quintius Pe ery 23 lron smelting .. ad pHRSaE pheedaakoedc oat 420
CIRCE, Jet. base tetaroasbaauannse 34
Magic 100 s..oi5 cisosacscasapecwanecnssu den 40 Lapis ‘judaicus . pclaveb ve ps axps Sureee ey? 115
CLEOPATRA. Lead minerals i. 06x) cccrscsssvessesaes 110
As an alchemist ......... XXVIL; XXIX Mannsfeld Ores .........sscscoeeseneeee 273
etaIng Aes isc cersirstawacaanes 119 Mealanterta si. Suivedevdeises wessneedeas 573
COLUMBUS, CHRISTOPHER .......se00000 Vv Mineral rypncreme ‘ ‘
CoLuMELLA, MODERATUS ...... XXV; XXVI Mis dawns
ComMERIUs . ears XXVI; XXIX Molysdasna £ WOSSER pas on his CRoaRE RIE OR
Commentariorum...Libri VI. jae 604 Native metals . ..............s0cseene 108 °
Conrap (Graf Cuntz von Gliick) . 5 24 Potrolewin jvisisscncanacsscssasgieqapescets 581
CorpuBA, Don Juan DE. ............ 300 Pompholyx . ote seenedipph beens’ xd ue diiesieh 27 RIMaCS ee
CorTEs, SPR R MEMO 65555 pes xcs soconiae v Pyrites pv cifou sis Ean eanielensWeuapeabe 112
CRAMBR, JORN 6 ioc iescceccvsenctccerncesee 236 Quicksilver wuaabb Ren bas beaa eahageverntan 110
Crassus, Marcus. Reedds WANTS Ss 6 ii dce sdacey sancceens 108
EWG DOIG i scesivcuvecedensyvenkves 9 Sal-ammMomniac a....esesseeseeseesee see 560
CRATES, THE THEBAN. Silver glance: saccac cieeisiveckyoarancsss 109
Money despised by . ......sseseeeeenee 15 Sory:iscicéyentacs : 573
Crogsus, K1nc or Lypta. Spoken ox i
Mines owned by . ....cscsessecsveesere 26; 27 Stannum ... coup ceveey
CTESIAS. Stones which h easily MARE cs sadicias 380
DEWaONEE LOM cai slecsiceacsscesnvhaceee 38 Sulphur . wee sedesucuaes’ 578
CTESIBIUS. TOPWUSG 5. ccicanvoy duns giaheavan peered ane 233
MACHINGS ‘x: ice'cdcnvaoverivsscasy pecers ais 149 TOUCHStONG | 5.45 scekcendcsdpheene stvaceiee 253
Curio, CLAuDIUs, White schist ::' is. c.vcssvseutewenoau carvan 234
Love Of Gold) cs scosccsccaccvtevescscoss 9 ZING" .<s:2isvisoce oss ten kiwisepereselaaneaee 409

INDEX TO PERSONS AND AUTHORITIES. 633

PAGE
De Ortu et Causis Subterraneorum ...
. 594; 600; IIL; VII; XII; ee

Earths .. 4
Gangue minerals . 48
ASOUG ME GULGVIG] vss: cdccomscaoarnciucs 76
CRETE WROTE: 25 oslo dss taeves eakdcnves 48
etals ..... bik 51
Solidified juices ... ‘ 49
SIOUOR Ss civeniie venice 49
Touchstone . Peatee’ P 253
Veins . 47
De Ortu Metaliorum Defensio a ‘ad. aj.
Scheckium . ae 604
8 3D TRONS ats 005; Vill
De Precio Metallorum et “Monetis . 597; 600
Mention by Agricola .. coeveee 2525 264
De Putredine solidas partes, etc. ... 605
De Re Metallica ...... ht XI; “XIV—XVI
tis gual oe sagt teeta OG 5" KEV.
Title jae XIX
De Soro, pet avnn” Vv
De Tervae Motu . 604
De Varia t temperie sive Constitutions aa
De Veteribus “ok “Novis “Metallis... Rint ae
sestyn cbucisive O90; OOO> VIL 3 AAWES. ©
Agricola’s training fakes vi
nm Pwcieite seine 24
Discovery of mines ‘ . cane 5; 37
Gottsgaab mine. ....... SeKeee 74
Devoz (pE Voz), CORNELIUS ...... «- 570; 283
Dioporus SIcu.us . ee Aa SR er 607
PEON i viive see ese ae 582
Cupellation .. 465
Drainage of Spanish mines 149
Egyptian gold sapemdle 279
Fire-setting .. Stic 118
Lead . 391
Silver ‘from. forest fires . wewdehsda 4
i » 41

DI0GENES LAERTIUS ....0sssscsecccc 73.9; 10
PROG ROMIORS © sis cis ss ciaecs ostaeveuncacsen, OUT 2) BOD

Dominatores Saxonics aac bniey 606
Dravp, G. pee dle 599
Dupar.

Alum trade so4 Ata s ca 569

PAGE
ELIZABETH, QUEEN oF ENGLAND.
Charters to alum makers . 283; 570
Dedication of Italian De Re Metal-
lica to ... ane XV
Importation of German ‘miners +o 288; 670
Exoy, N. F. J... Tes 599
ENTzELT (Enzelius, Encelio) 615
ERASMUS .. i VI; ‘VIn; XIV
ERCKER, Lazarus.
Amalgamation . Pivevdids seh oso nos 300
Liquation... deibevaveescnne 601; 606
Nitric acid reparation ones bay oasione 443
Parting eat Silver . .......:... 444; 4651
ERIPHYLE.
Love of gold ........ Peastea
Ernest, ELEcToR oF SAXONY. seadexeee Vill
Evripives.
Amber mentioned acing <gabguse 35
Plutus ... misc akeseuceeachatenan Oo: 7
Ezekiel, PROPHET.
Antimony . be Gkieeeesesbuuesnevssass 428
Cupellation .. sd fenced nad osu ban vevehe sip tnd 465

Fapricius, GEORGE.

Agricola’s death . a x

Friendship with Agricola. this - Vill

Laudatory poem on Agricola ...... XXlI

Letters. ........ IX; X; XIV; XV

Posthumous editor of Agricola. +. 603; 606
Farrciouch, H. R. ...... mee Iil
FAaRINATOR, ‘MATHIAS . dune andes XXVI
FERDINAND, KING OF AUSTRIA.

Agricola sent on mission to ....... x

Badoarius sent on mission to ...... XXVIII
Fercuson, JoHN.

Editions of De Re Metallica...... XVI; 599
FEYRABENDT, SIGMUNDI ............005 XV
DAQUIRM. Boe ove cad cok ven ces ein deaaa esos 38
Fracu, Jacguss.

Aljustrel tablet. ...........2.00000e0 83
Fiorio, MICHELANGELO XV
FOrsTER, JOHANNES ...... VI
Francis, Cor. GRANT ... ticarnae , 900 5. 288
Francis. I., Kine or FRANCE . Getssieub IX

FREDERICK, ELecToR OF Saxony... VIII; IX
FROBEN, publisher of De Re Metallica XIV; XV

FRONTINUS, SEXTUS JULIUS............ 87
gre re

A ’s revision of..

Lemnian earth .

Mention by Agricola . ane
Galerazeya sive Revelator Secretorum,¢ ete. 606

Gama, VASCO DA. Vv
GANSE ea Joacmta 7 . 267; 283
GATTERER, C.

ve 599
ROMO cscsc i vious whusaeendass XVI; ; XXX; 609

Alum . Spat F

Assaying . 219

Cementation 459

Cupels ....... . 466

Nitric acid . sii 460

Origin of metals oe Cobe 44

Precipitation of silver nitrate ...... 443
Genesis, Book of . ba epee XII; 43
GrorGE, DuKE oF "SAXONY .. TX; 3310; 310
GrsNER, CONRAD ......... 52
GIBBON, Epwarp. 119
GLavsER, J. R. 410
Gutck, Cuntz VON. (06 Conrad).
GMELIN, Fecdtece ee Saints 84
GécuHER, C. G.. Kahbaeeesans 599
Gopo.Putn, Sir FRANCIS senaniieeb eae 282
GOwWLaAND, boven ng

Ancient. bronze... eseuse- MIO A>" 49)

Early smelting. . gpeyiwevee iv tes 402
GrRaEcus, Marcus. |
GROMMESTETTER, Paut a tadereed cue tay aah 281
GRYMALDO, LEODIGARIS ..........000 ‘ XVI

Gycers, Kinc or Lypia.
Mines owned by . .........2cc000cceeee rik

634 INDEX TO PERSONS AND AUTHORITIES.

HANNIBAL, PAGE
Alps broken by oe : 119
Spanish mines.. 42; 42

Harpy, WILLIAM abe 85

HEATH, THoMAs.

On Hero na 5; Sc nbasesdeniess 129
HELIODORUS (alchemist... eas XVI; 3; XXIX
HENCKEL, J. F ie --53 ; 2; 410
HENDRIE, 1: Sa wintdn sid Smaevesstnmeee 609
HENNEBERT, E.. eeasece 119
HEnry, DUKE OF BRUNSWICK . AS Vil

Henry, DUKE OF MEISSEN .
HERMES (alchemist)...
HERMES ee nee

IX
“XXVI; ; XXVIII

HERo.

Underground surveying . Seats 129
cache

Alum . Sippel Sav buy caeceh ene teutecd 566

Bitumen . Bu ass daca shirts slasip cl 582

Lead ....... 391

Mines of Thrace 23

Nitrum .. abihen Des 558
HERTEL, VALENTINE Sc ieapbatinloeesen XIV
HIErRo, KING OF SYRACUSE.

FULL, JOR 6 i aadaet ee 607

Auripigmentum nee gh TEN Fe 111
HIMILCE, WIFE OF HANNIBAL . Drssn eck 42
HIPPocratEs,

Cupellation .. ccarccccseceeveress SOL; 465

Lodestone . vaveand ss vaaens 115
Hiram, Kine oF Tyre.

Mines, raion Sense Nsbuaaaeerndccctls 214
HoFMANN, Dr. Ro

Biography of Agricola... WV; XI; 599; 603
HoMER

Divining Tod 26 see) taal: 40; 40

Smelting .. Ho seu sae sueaboeuweeeepete 402

Steel . doeiinculbeesecaeacarsnn 33 421

Sulphur. . 579

ALS bas eed ae kaos 412
HomMEL, W.

Early zinc smelting .................. 409
HORACE.

Motel c5. .ccs5s ssc dedescees eects ents 11

Wealth . sesescenseee 9055 17
HorDEBORCH, "JOHANNES ... sivebssas VII
Houcustetrer, DAMIR i, iiezdscenuns 283
Hovucuton, THOMAS .. shan ky avenue 85
HumMpnrey, WILLIAM.

Jigattig seve ci, he oscdscsceonuks 283
Hunt, Roserr.

Roman lead smelting . .........c0500. 392
INAMA-STERNEGG, K. T. VON ......4.. 84
Interpretatio Rerum Metallicarum.

(See Rerum Metall. Interpretatio).

IRENE, DAUGHTER OF AGRICOLA . ... vil
Jacosi, G. H.

oe ad of — trseeseeeeseese V3 599

Calb becies XXVII; 610
jacnavx, Raout.

Ancient SAIS 3 << ésieh ssn xd veeestea ie 409
Jason.

Golden ‘fleece 6.5.55 vice sevice ssa stacd 330
JEREMIAH,

POISE s sauise ssn ues cregibacehdncs ek 362

Cupellation .. Dapieetbes anvines sevies 465

Lead smelting. oF Py 391

SV EMPIUO oC fas uv nae Coicae tnceubetoa: 558
JEZEBEL.

Use of antimony . deavalscnxaigase 428
Jos.

Refining silver . cheer 465
JOHANNES (alchemist)... Siaeke XVI; ; XXVIII
Joun, Erector or Saxony . ees Ix
Joun, Kinc or ENGLanp.

Mining claims ........ 85
Joun FREDERICK, ELEcToR. oF SAxony IX
JosEPHus.

Dead Sea bitumen , .......cc.c0cce000 33

PAGE

Jove.

Danae nha evan studs sasworuen 10
sli aw daebhs eben aneeient 36

UVENAL,

pole, Tc ine ro RRS NERY PATEL! 10
Karsten, K. J. B.

Liquation... 491; 492; 505; 509; 523; 535
KeErt, BRUNO.

Liquation... Vasapl sped haesbioechsbual 505
K6nic, EMANUEL cho seo'ede bap buseyened uke XV
RONG: MUD wie thoi a waren, XV

. Kopp, Dr. HERMANN . 00. eee cee see sees 609; 441

Lampaptus, G. A. . a babisvsiwiathe\eay 462
LASTHENES.

Love of gold ......... seiitalant 9
Latin Grammar (Agricola... ots tnd 605
LEONARDI, CAMILLE .....ceceseecee ccc sce 615

LEUPOLD, ‘JACOB. Mii XV ; 599
Leviticus.

Leprosy of walls 562
Lewis, G. R. . 84
Lewis . sag pnaaen ses curacbeuh 454
Limavis, ‘ANDREW ihnabeudeseedeue 410
LIEBLEIN, Je Tappanestw seas 129
Linnagvs, CHARLES . dan dgeleen AS IEA 559
Livy.

Hannibal’s march over the Alps... 119
Louneys, G. E.

Liquation...

Parting with. antimony . eibas

ZINC e555 - 409; 410
LucrETIA, DAUGHTER ‘OF “Aricota.. VII
LucrETIUvs.

Forest fires rt veins . 36
Lutiy, RayMonp .. i “Xxvir; > XXX
Luscinus, FABRICIUS.

Gold .. Os Veaherceen 9; 15

LUTHER, Marri. ne VI; NIIP Is
Lycurcus (Athenian. orator).

Prosecution of Diphilos . soseee 273 88
Lycurcus (Spartan legislator).

Wealth prohibited by. . 9; 15
MAGELLAN, FOB Soci astivocgecns v
MALtTITz, SIGISMUND .. find 312
MANLOVE, Epwarb ........ 70; 85

MARBODAEUS Leexwaaas hdtv eases 615
MARCELLINUS, AMMIANUS.

On. Thucydides: jicois ces sccsnsceiteas
MARCELLUS, NONIUS . .....ccceceescecee XXXI
MARIA THE JEWESs .. XXVIII; XXVIII

MATHESIUS, JOHANN.
Cobalt . beers 214
Conrad mentioned by. a 24
’ De Re Metallica .. XIV
King Hiram’s mines . 214
MATTHEW Paris.
Cornish miners in Germany . ...... 283
Maurice, ELEcTOR oF Sieent.

ner ee IX; X
MaweE, J.. Dasdslovenvenvenions 70
MAxrMILIAn, ‘EMPEROR Mitdote 23; 24
MEISSEN, Duxes OF (see under personal
names: Albert, Henry, etc.).

MELANCHTHON.

Relations with Agricola .......... VIII; X
MENANDER.

Riches . Roba senickasew crevices ugdent 8
MERCcKLINUS, 6. A. Sebaneseaidsveccuccabe 599

MERCURY (see ree eng
MERLIN (magician)...
MEvRER, Worrcanc.

XXVIII; XXX

Letters ©, suid edn gsddneeuesrereesnahdicay ce LS ate
MEYER, Ernst von pene: + 248; 569
MEYNER, MATTHIAS o.c.cccecceeses sv eve VII
Mipas, KING oF ere

Mines owned Bh 3 Reeehuare chigs 26; 27
MILLER, F. B.. ULapenbinnen-gevines 462
Minerva,

Magic’ rod «)....::éscssvemaadeein sy 40
Morris, W.:0'C. 5 .5./3)) aa 119

INDEX TO PERSONS AND AUTHORITIES. 635

MOSELLANUS, PETRUS. .....cecceeeeee eee vi
MosgEs.
PGI css svkens cvagaate stacks cekebwine 582

5
Rema akdhyn beeaeaNos ad easjoke soaues 20

NEcKAM, ALEXANDER
NEWCOMEN, THOMAS . .........c00e0000 149
NICANDER.

NIcIAs.
Sosias and slaves of . 25;
Niitalich ee “610; VE; Siva
Alluvial wad sdanut 15
Bismuth ... Oye skis erence EL amet

sesssssse 433 46; 73

Otymproporus (alchemist)... XXVIII; XXX
OPPEL, VAN (see VAN Opret).
Orus CHRYSORICHITES nonrs Ee
i; XXVIII
OsTHANES (alchemist) . seaweed Tas rca XXIX
OTHO THE ial sainteiavdstPedteevenes 6
Orno, PRINCE.. oh Gs Ertan kana 6
Ovip.

Mining censured by ..sss-s.sssesseees 7
PANDULFUS ANGLUS ........cceceeeeeeee XXVI
PANTAENETUS.,

’ oration against ......

Age XIV; XXX

+ 112; 409
Paris, MatrHew (See MattHew PARIs).
Pesicuivs (alchemist)...... romceieske ; XXVIII
PELAGIUS enrerpegulan Heavpuyes tennwamees XXVII
PENNENT, THOMAS... dadeganabnsen 570
Percy, Joun.

Parting with antimony . "eed 451; 452
PEREGRINUS, PETRUS.

pass .
PETASIUS (alchemist)...
Petrie, W. M. F.

i tian iron .

copper . ..
PErtUvs, Sir oe ne
PRAENIPPUs,

Demosthenes’ shiepa “inane oucane 27; 83
PHAETON’S SISTERS . ovesee 35
PHILEMON.

Riches . eee deckinia sabe ine cee 7
PHILIP OF MACEDONIA . Lawian bok neiedes ss 27
Pup, PETER . dehsnkg oahesue apewe> 282
Puts, J. A. By rN) eee 410
Puito.

Lost work on min seRnanies XXVI
Pxocion. nae

Bons of Alexander . veiuaveeg 9; 15
OCYLIDES.
Pxotius ttette eee eeeeeees
Pirnpar.
Wealth. on... ccc ccccuicseesdéssecess, 905° 252
Pius II, Pope.
Alum maker. ..

PIZARRO, FF cccccessesecseseeccececcse ceases
PLATEANUS, PETRUS .. di vanesacackbae XIV
PLAUTUS.
Gold .....+- a 10
PLINY (Caius Plinius Secundus) . XXVI; 60
WiasbaeesaUnabeenkccese SOL? BOS

Chrysocolla .. Leponieehens 560
Copper flowers and scales............
Copper smelting . sav eapaceespens
Cupellation ......... djentneere 466
Drainage of Spanish mines ......... 149
Electrum ... 000+. pevaeannons 458
sae geht sau ban pecans sieenbon’ 118
Glass.. pRassiees sch she) Mee nee
Hannibal’ s silver mine . evelvenaonesasei’ Sian aries

Turfs in sluices .
Vena ...... pee
Ventilation with. wet cloths

Ore washing. . bts ton spa ceded 281

Silver-lead smelting. Aa +» 392; 465
PotyMNEsTOR, KING OF THRACE.

SISOS: OE BORE 52 iieccrece sec vec dae usaleed 9; 16
PORTNER, LANG i isickccsccececcvetaasee 281
PosIponivs.

Asphalt and naphtha . Reese 584

Drainage of Spanish mines .........

Silver from forest fires ...... ae 36
Priam, Kino or Troy.

Gold SINGH Oa aie Gadccansdvectocens ce “Het is
Probierbtichleim......ccseseseceve cee ces 612; XXVI

Amalgamation . ............sseseeese ees 297

PPA SS Saat sav aichshancboseea satusesss 242

DMNWEI Acc ddneueabl sve yah ore sn dense 433

636 INDEX TO PERSONS

Probierbiichlein.
Ceanien tation oii cise iceisce sce ose sescee 454
INGEFIG ACAD 2 oieceredeepdnccusnseges ats one 439
PAR ele vicsssicasseicasssvais 461; 462; 463
Precipitation of silver nitrate ...... 443
Residues from distillation of nitric
rT. UA . 235; 443

. 235; 236
PEMIIOUISUOTUE pcos Cases seaeadaagan cine
PROPERTIUS.
PrYcE, “WituraM.
Adam’ s fall... Usatdhe we nupnaaneee ese 353

Stamp-mill ...

Stein BOTs oo. ia ccc csasinsensenv
PsALms.

Silver. refining: 5! .ccvsiccnesadienecseasie 465
POLSIFER, | Wits: Hise scckccesintveyecacenes 391
PYGMALION.

Love: Of gold se. sssincensercesstvconese 9;-16

Racuatp1Bus (alchemist) ...............
RameEseEs I.

Map Of Mines .....cc0cesastesesescseess 129
Ramesés III.

Leaden objects -Sieaind from . 391
Rasps, R. E. Abeanaes 300
RAWLINSON, GEORGE . chai neebnucenes 583
Ray, P. CHANDRA.

Indian zinc .

RayMOND, RossItER ‘W..

Rechter Gebrauch der Alchimey...

Rerum eens m Inter pretatio
Sonos tlewacdeaieas 5075

VII; 600

Reuss, FE ve
RICHTER, A. D. Go. ae
RopIANUS (alchemist) Shenee XVI; H XXVIII
Résster, B.. re 53
Roya GEOLOGICAL “Socrety “OF

CoRNWALL ...... 84
RUHLEIN VON KALBE (see ‘CALBUS).

SALMONEUS.

Lightning... 11
SANDWICH, EARL oF, ‘trans. ‘Barba’s.
SAPPHO.

Wealth . ie savaseaueecdvecseneenaa 19
SAVERY, THOMAS cinerea 149
SAXONY, DUKES AND ELECTORS OF.

(See under personal names : Albert,

Ernest, etc.).
SOCHETMMAION, FE sic boise secces cansiasacten 391
ScuHitter, C.A.

Artificial zinc vitriol ...............+.. 572

Copper reli puncadhuteaetaenatans vee 535

Cupellation .. aos Sse heapinieecneue 464

Liquation... cobehaeas pecenesss, GO Rec ae

Parting with SUP nesses one 462
Scumip, F. A.. concanadayeks ML eee
SCHNABEL AND ‘Lewis ah debsuuvneceutiie 465
Scott, Str WALTER.

f Antiquary '” \. .,ccsvssvcsnsenccoensus 300
SENECA.

WORIER Of | iii iwere coaswedsddccarebuoess 15
SENEFERU.

Serr I.

Map Of MING * 0.0. .cccvesessaenconseece 129
SHAW, ETE icc cccsecsopnsrice ciaacsevense | 2 ama bee
Suoo KInec.

, Copper and lead _..............40..4... 391; 402

ISOM sisxctone Sabhwhubheboaney sat 421
SHUTZ, CHRISTOPHER . vpeheepeess cigale eck 283
SIGFRIDO, JOANNE.

Ed. Agricola’s WOEMB 6 sbass ceded cc XV
SOCRATES.

Riches . pr yer eericn it tek y tee | aoe | |
So.tnus, C. Jourvs.

Solifuga . . - 216; 216

AND AUTHORITIES.

Sotomon, KInc.
Cobalt tn Mines: 00405 cesieessscexasone 214
Soon.
Scarcity of silver under. ............ 27
Sostas, THE THRACIAN,
Slaves employed by ..
Sraut, G. E. i
STAUNTON, Sir GrorcE .
STEPHANUS (alchemist)........
STEPHENSON, GEORGE .....-csecseseeeee
STRABO.. i
Arsenical minerals .. -
PRIOBEOS vs case sionenapaane es dann
Asphalt .
ows .
Cementation . wade
- Cupellation .. Lvaetees
Drainage of Spanish mines :

Forest fires melting veins .

Silver-lead smelting» seashwaeeeueetenta 391

Spanish peontieomantte ds 9 beicesente 281

Zinc (?)... et SU cia Crone 409
STRATO.

Lost work on mines XXVI; XXVII; XII
SURV ES. 8. Os cae canays tosaseresabepaueen 599
Synestus (alchemist)......... XXVIII; XXIX

TANTALUS. sa pats
TAPHNUTIA (alchemist... davbee
TAPPING, THOMAS . petabes
THALES OF Mitetvs.
THEMISTOCLES.

Athenian mine royalties ............ 27
THEODOR, SON OF AGRICOLA ......00+ VII
THEOGNIS.

fp mg vu sha wivoudvephuytpaant bed Oe 465

oaeas 27
XVI; XXVIII

PUG sis. cessicccans coctustoviensvescoeges 8
Refining gold .. Loe panes 399
Theological Tracts ‘(Agricola). theses 605
THEOPHILUS (alchemist)...... XXVI; XXVIII
THEOPHILUS THE MONK ....-.eceeeeeee 609
Brass Making ........csseseseessevseeees 410
Calamine ........ ideas
coer %
Copper refining ......... Pp
Copper senses tos peeatueieres 405
Cupels ..... upbanasceceeeusneeee 466

Liquation... asynowede 494
Metallurgical appliances .. wivaweava 355
Parting with sin cinieet veauvensd 461
Roasting .. av teadekapvuo uss 267
THEOPHRASTUS . oe OT
Amber . ves ve
Arsenical minerals ..
Asbestos ...... ELV Vins sue sageecnns
Assaying .. Gistuiwossua'c kes oeeian pees 219

Copper minerals .
COpPOE OTE escsiccesccsusnesseravessensee 403
Bape ye vsiacs can chases tncenseesahavenyaves 115
Lodestone . nWidnwe deaeurces wate” 115
Lost works ...... . XXXVI; 403
Origin of minerals ......... “ 44
Parting pues eos aesaetees 458
Quicksilver ... Geipedes conons ay en
Touchstone .. Je . 252
Vermilion io. iccccecsssisscedescossaeses cee 232
White-lead .........csccsesssesscssereeee SOL 5 440
THOMPSON, LEWIS ....ssesecseeeceeseeeee 462

THOTH.

Hermes Trismegistos . .. XXIX
Tuormes III.

LORE | iccbisvcedavardinceredncvssactdeees GOL > CORE
THUCYDIDES.
23; 23; 95

Mining prefect.......ccsecceeseeeee
Wealth condemned by ......++.s+0++ 16

TIBULLUs.

Cate

wh

#).
*)
5 |

INDEX TO PERSONS AND AUTHORITIES.

TIMOCLES.
TrmocrEON OF RHODEs.

Plutus ....... Weuhcuses 7
TouRNEFORT, Josep Pp. ‘DE audaudned 566
Tusat Cain.

Instructor in ree neta 363
POMBE 55 acaicos sais Ni santuvery 24
Twain, Mark.

Typographia Mysnae et Toringiae . ... 605
Utoa, Don ANTONIO DE. ..........45 298

ULyssEs.

VALENTINE, BASIL...... +2... 00000

Antimony . 429
Divining rod 38
Parting with antimony « 461

VALERIUS, SON OF AGRICOLA. dailawaacd VIL
VAN DER nana J. Ais datoes hoceceusa

Van OPPEL... aavnie’

Varro, Marcus . ia

Vasco pa Gama (see Gama, Vasco Pa).

WRIGK, EESTACIA DE» .05.00 ccc cc cs0cecns 83
Verasco, Dom PEDRO De. 298
VERADIANUS (alchemist) . “XXVI; ; XXVIII
Vita rosin Se — E (alchemist

is; XXX

Vircit.
Avarice condemned by . ............
RERIURGE © sic ssantecapecaspcae 7
tion .
Hiero’s Crown..

16
608
297
248

VLADISLAUS IIL, KiNG OF POLAND. 24
Von OppeEr (see Van OpPeEL).
Voz, CoRNELIUS DE (see DEvoz,

CorNELIUS).
WALL ERIS, Ju Go sis ccs cvecenunesiobicgs (OES | RIS
PE FAMBD i655 cc cbcveseercarsieoon stewed 149
Wart, RosBerr .. sanbtineenieen XXVII
WEFRING, BASILIUS ......... 000000 eseeee XIV.
WEINDLE, CASPAR ... 119

Wernart, B. G. . 599
Wetter, J.G. . < v
WERNER, A. G. RUN Shree 40s ey
WILKINSON, J. Gaxpwen,

gold-washing . ............ 279

WUSEELAMG: HOMME 6 ice dsaiciacssnesecccea ses 53
MVEWIGIT, Sis Ps V sacdskcac see ke 464
WrotHamM, WILLIAM DE..... 85; 413; 473
XENOPHON.

Athenian mines .

bieree boxe Seed 27; 29

Fruitfulness of mines . A
~ 9 hae ggarnsin <a 25; 28
Quoted by Agricola. Swen fe
ZIMMERMAN, C.F. . ....ceceeeeee

Zostmus (alchemist) ... XXVIII; XXIX

INDEX TO ILLUSTRATIONS.

PAGE

ALUM MAKING... ry 571
pe aoe anaes Mine . ; 299
ARGONAUTS . anana Pre 330
ASSAY BALANCES. (see Balances).
Assay CRUCIBLE ......... its 229
Assay FURNACES.

CIE ace sa aevagadeoasaancdcnumoier a

Muffle . 223; 224
BALANCES .. - 265
BALING WATER Pe geauaksaute 199
Bars, FOR FURNACE WoRK .-- 377; 389
PARMA, Se dcpdebced dvendalnva'den eae nee besiscdany 157

BELLows.

For blast furnaces 359; 365; 368; 370; 372
For mine ventilation......... 208; 209; 211
aE TENE SUBD: ove ssn tonens cévnbadieises 419
BIsMUTH SMELTING...... amet 435; 436; 437
BiTuMEN MAKING . Fas papadneebonk 582
BiruMEN SPRING ........ 583
Bowlts FOR ALLUVIAL WASHING (see
also Batea) .. Bor Ry any ee 336
BucKETs.
For hoisting Ore ..........cseccseeseees 154
For hoisting water . 158
BURIEIE EES savivtninexanveasy aiseies ‘301; "302; 314; 315
BuILpInG PLAN FOR REFINERY aavees 493
BuILDING PLAN FOR SMELTER......... 361
Cuain Pumps . i tiwaes id 174; 175
Chrysocolla MAKING ...... eee 585
CIRCULAR FIRE (see Ring-Fire).
CLay WASHING ......... se. 8743 375
ComMPASs.. ‘87; 59; 142: 147
CopPER Moutp FOR “Assavinc .. 250
COPPER REFINING .........eeesseseeeeeeee ; 537
CopreR REFINING FURNACE . gasehvanndy 5632
CRANE.
For cupellation furnace .............. 479
For liquation cakes .............+0000 514
CROWRANE = suc cachastaveisecdesssancsavecves 152
Mould . Le Sry wae AL 231
CUPELLATION FURNACE......... 468; 470; 474
At Freiberg .. Radda Ghee bonsda das aas 481
ATE SOURAICE x snicdak Govdubean kos cabeclcees coe 482
CurtinGc METAL ........ 269
DESCENT INTO MINEs... 213
Dippinc-pots 385; 387; ‘389; 903; 415; 417
Dist1L_ation (see Nitric ‘Acid
Quicksilver).
BAPVINING RROD ici sai ves sense sckphssseicy 40
Docs PACKING ORE ..........020006 168
DrirTs ...... 105
DRYING FURNACE. FOR “Liguation ..
ssaeh koa eves oa 525; ; 528
Dust CHAMBERS... .c-cssssesesssesesvseeee ; 417
Fans, VENTILATION...... 204; 205; 206; 207
FYIRE-BUCKERTES i.55qhss .sqastiasven vases oon 377
Era e PUMP 0a ope sncacceunyencncsacetes 377
Fire-SETTING ... meee 120
FoREHEARTH ......
357; 358; 383; "3853 "387; 390; 417

FRAMES (OR SLUICES) FOR WASHING
ORE oR ALLUVIAL ..
322—324 ; 326—329; 331—333

FURNACES.

ASSAYING (see Assay Furnaces).

Blast...... 357; 358; 373; 377; 383; 385;
susaae 387; 390; 395; 419; H 424; ; 508

Copper refining’ . 537

Cupellation .. . 468; 470; 474; 481; 482

Distilling sulphur snseaws ane 277

Enriching mk 4 8 bottoms 510

Glass-making .. - 587; 588; 589; 591

Iron smelting .. . 422; 424

639

PAGE
FURNACES.
Lead smelting van also ann
blast) ....... 393
Liquation......... . 17; 519; "528; 527; 528
Nitric acid 442
Nitric acid parting. 446
Parting precious metals with anti-
mony .. i 453
Ditto cementation . sactngecdelets 455
Quicksilver distillation . «sees 427—432
Refining silver . vawine "485; 486; 489
Roasting .. a 276
Steel making . 425
Tin burning... 349
Tin smelting .. 415
Gap. 150
Gass MAKING | veuen seh 591
Furnaces .. 587; 588; 589
GrounD SLUICING "337; "340; 343; 346; 347
HAMMERS... i
With water-power ... 422
FXRAP ROASTING 2.0.0... ceccseces cee tssoee
HEARTHS.

For bismuth smelting ...............

For heating copper cakes ... aie
For melting | Win buemesee sie
For melting lead cakes .. wis wkh oad pun
For refining tin . kedagusyiines
For met a guddon ose conces
yma ae @s ofa von bob epadna ens eens
Hoe. ¢ sees
Intervenium .

Iron Fork For Mera... jrentankinan
Iron Hook For ASSAYING aiieaue veunhey
IRON SMELTING ...........
Iron Toots......

JxGGING SHEE .....5.ccncccsecvevcesy 311
LADDERS .. 213
LADLE FOR “METAL . hive aan e¥uce 383
LEAD MOULD FoR ASSAYING jak actives 240
LiguaTion CAKEs.
LiguaTion CakEs, EXHAUSTED ...... 522
LiguaTIon eee sei phanananadermns
ee 5195 525; 527; 528

LYE MAKING ....... sohnings seu dénecs 557
MatTTeE ROASTING ...... iehaticeraabeiiess 350; 351
MEERS, SHAPE OF ......... 79; 80; 86; 87; 89
MILLs For GRINDING ORE sseeee 2945 296
MUFFLE FURNACES.........0cesseeeeeeees 2233 489
DRUID MEIR | siicags cc bnctadaennssdvecovends bane 228
NITRIC ACID MAKING ........ 00. 0see0000s 442
Nataite: PETG 6.55 scscesedpick ac 559
PARTING Precious METALS.

With antimony 453

By cementation ....... 455

With nitric acid ....... 446

With sulphur ........ 449
Picks Atinanadioeeage 152
PLUMMET LeveL.

Standing 143

Suspended 146

MPS.

RDSUS icc cesnnece eave sksussandecss DAG t. BEME VEO

Duplex suction . 180; 185; 189

Rag and chain ; 193; 194; 195

Suction... 177; 178; 179: 182; 188; 137

640 INDEX TO ILLUSTRATIONS.

PAGE
QUICKSILVER DISTILLATION.
ub - 427; 429; 430; 431; 432

RaG AND CHAIN PuMPs..

- 191; 193; "194; 195; 197

’
RAMMERS FOR FIRE-CLAY .....esesseeee 377; 383
RING-FIRE, FOR PARTING WITH
MOMMA BS Too Sovddu lca pas nvcccedastaedeanty 449
RoastinG (see also Beer and Stall

Roasting) .

MYER 278; "350; 3; 274; 275; 276
RosEtTE CoPpPER MAKING .. 537
SALT.

Boiling .. opener erie ioe | ae
Caldron ........ veccsseeeee G6N5 553
es on m faggots . soon 556
Pans °...<.. edbahtanvene ane 547
Wells .. Wo dcaucandaneescauaeserndaans 549
SALTPETRE MAKING. ivenivciaaethgeder ans 563
Saxon LEAD FURNACE ........002.00005 393
SCORIFIER .. siash pene oaien 229
SEAMS IN THE ROCKS... . Bas 55; 56; 60; 72
SHAFTS.
Inclined .........0sceceeceeseeceeseecesees 104
Vertical .. pee 103; 105
SHEARS FOR “Currin Mera avasaeee 269
SHIELD FOR MUFFLE FURNACE.. 241
SIFTING ORE ......... 287; 288 ; "989; 291;

beacuse 292; 293; 311; 342
SILVER,

Cakes, ee of.. 476; 488

HSPs see sens 4845 “485; ; 489
SLEIGH FOR OrE F ve 168
Stuicine TIN ............ 337; "338; ; 343
SMELTER, PLAN OF BuILpInc PANES eer 361
Sopa Maxteel 5.55 lise cco 561
SORTEWG: OOH isis wad ein eenrcseceuatue sad ; 270

SPALLING: ORB: 5.41, dc0chcrsenessag MAO e RTRs
STALL ROASTING.

STAMP-MILL . 284; 7288; af "2995

For breaking a ca cakes ee... 501
STAMPS .5 5. kiana Sr Naioay 285
STEEL FURNACE ....... 425
STRAKE . : 302; “303; “308 ; 306 5 ‘

Canvas... "308; 309 j bit 321; : 329
STREAMING FOR Tin wapcee ak 318
STRINGERS.

PSROCISTOE > io secicaveecns <osuguuaceseses 71

Fibra dilatata ... 71

Fibra incumbens .. 71

OBR GG 5 sk npe dosac0 gee cavneconsnsdeuae 71

TEMRSVOESS | Scish i vic cedanesduafieneravens 71
SURVEYING.

PAGE

SURVEYING.
Shafts and Tunnels .......... 131
sane isdtad eM csestcneivuess 133; “134; 135 ;

-» 136; 137; 139; 140
Suction PuMPs ee Pamps)._

SULPHUR MAKING ......... cosceceee G795 681
TAP-HOLES IN FURNACES . 389
TAPPING-BAR ...... «+» 383; 385
“Tgsts” FOR REFINING SILVER... 384; 485
TIMBERING.
DIOR oil nc Second cos dan cassanennageccoade 125
Tin.
DAEs aos cas 415
Burning . 349
Refining .. 18
Smelting .. 415; 419
TOUCH-NEEDLES . Me cee ae Oy
TRAYS FOR WASHING ALLUVIAL . Reakat e 334
TREAD WHIM . Win greledea weer AS NOEs 163
TROUGH ..... eieeben cedees 159
For washing al alluvial ......... eur ; 348
Trucks ... ae at 156
TUNNELS .. 2 1085 104; 105; 120
Timbering a 125
VEINS

Beginning Of: 6. iysisseissioscs esvoscebe

Strike of . asschepvenes
Vena cumulata ..
Vena dilatata 45; "BO; “Ba; "60; “61; 68;
Vena profunda :.
pees | te 50; ‘53; "61; 62; 63; 64;
VENTILATING WITH DAMP CLOTH (see
also Bellows, Soba and Wind-
sails) ..... 212
VITRIOL MAKING | "567; “S74; ‘575; 576; 577

Wacons, For HAULING ORE............
WaSHING ORE (see Sifting Ore).
WATER TANKS, UNDER rihiomaanede
WEDGES .......

WEIGHTS, FOR Assay ‘BALANCES. <eecge
WESTPHALIAN LEAD SMELTING ......
WREELBARRBOWS (3 icc cisdsasniacnctecceare
WuIms.,

BIOFRG 292k das ccotaha bhacchinasaseinp oeees

STMREL css inc isdideatneloncavvnectcrreaes 1
WINDLASSES .... Bs we aid 162; 171
Winps, DIRECTION OF ...... 59

WINDSAILS FOR VENTILATION — “201; 202; 203

mM
o
a
GN

AEP

3
is ‘a cot 1p
Dat ital
eri idea

rere
rte orb ont as py aig
Md Wedel Lik t psec pitt ot: tBrh a eat i
steer cor aati
Sie : " [ et oe Ne aeatetpuslstabt aries dates fe?
athsahe ett erebiiesaeny fy
41 nm |

socbetshwrer ress
esos sae Hy zy 5
, ; me * ieee
:: See ienste Saeed aaa ae nae

oa ore
sere ishtoe
tea

path
(a
rh he ly
eit 66h 0 wie ngen 2 Ae nied
viecaee +
NR
Braet Meester
Ane Pi ae shh

eptetes ate
epee eeh ae ore
FN.

oy stestedt

aace
Siren AS
ERD naly ete cekd

1 ss
#eraientl facet

tr
aan 7 ; eo ert sian : tor
Ses SMa Geri
reese ese oh
Moke ek :
Ce Nie ae Palatal My i * mhstote Nah ghod:
ae Lan a Mtr bat Aena ts Wnt
‘ bee at

ae .
Sets Stet t
oo
Syamotfause etal toh ns ra.
%- ren 4 Sart elena terta teen tik berets
Seta ean eta
Spain asaesrea SN eile
4 *. ‘
SSS ;
~
mite
Steg

eas

ee
Veahy,
yes ars

si
“
OCH pad be
Resid
ee this) 4 €
te ier byiesr} j Hy ' i)
2 Oy 4) :
ee Sa Ba si i bits athe Weisel
a cepeegtr EL ab ; tite k
Aitken) CSU a ht Nt ae
. y i etinine) Lehi
UCHR RGB at tah

sys tehraaralea tit
es . i , : H
MeN he Wai arise!

at VAAN
CNS BE iy
ilid et Mehr ON AEA Ne
x iy wii POUND bt
i

ity
aaa ‘i
iN

i hah
5 HSEX
: $e lehpey

¢
sant
A